The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary
A-Aṇ
At
Ad
An
Ap
Ab
Am-Av
As-Ah
Ā
I
Ī
U-Un
Up
Ub-Uh
Ū
E
O ŋ
K-Kā
Ki-Kv
Kh
G
Gh Ṅ
C
Ch
J
Jh
Ñ
Ṭ
Ṭh
Ḍ Ḍh Ṇ
T-Tā
Ti-Tv
Th
D
Dh
N-Ni
Nī-Nh
P-Pā
Pi-Po
Ph
B
Bh
M
Y
R
L
Ḷ Ḷh
V-Vā
Vi
Vī-Vy
S-Sā
Si-Sū
Se-Sv
H
____ _ _ _____ _ ____ _ _ _
| _ \ __ _| (_) |_ _|____ _| |_ / ___| ___ ___(_) ___| |_ _ _( )___
| |_) / _` | | | | |/ _ \ \/ / __| \___ \ / _ \ / __| |/ _ \ __| | | |// __|
| __/ (_| | | | | | __/> <| |_ ___) | (_) | (__| | __/ |_| |_| | \__ \
|_| \__,_|_|_| |_|\___/_/\_\\__| |____/ \___/ \___|_|\___|\__|\__, | |___/
|___/
___ ___ ____ ___ __
/ _ \___ _/ (_)___/ __/__ ___ _/ (_)__ / /
/ ___/ _ `/ / /___/ _// _ \/ _ `/ / (_-</ _ \
/_/ \_,_/_/_/ /___/_//_/\_, /_/_/___/_//_/
/___/
___ __ _
___/ (_)___/ /_(_)__ ___ ___ _______ __
/ _ / / __/ __/ / _ \/ _ \/ _ `/ __/ // /
\_,_/_/\__/\__/_/\___/_//_/\_,_/_/ \_, /
/___/
This digitial edition of the PALI TEXT SOCIETY's PALI-ENGLISH DICTIONARY by RHYS DAVIDS was created by extracting the data from the University of Chicago's on-line version of the PALI-ENGLISH DICTIONARY and converting it to this format. Every effort has been made to have this digital edition match the printed version as closely as possible.
You can search for a head word using your browser's Find function (usually Edit > Find). You should not type the diacriticals if you enclose the word in comma-period both before and after. For example, you can search for Āsava by finding ,.asava,. However there might be multiple words that differ only in their diacriticals. Try searching for ,.asa,. and after each find, do Find Again.
If you are looking for a specific page, search for: " -- " followed by the page number (e.g. " -- 500" takes you to page 500). Notice the find-string is space-dash-dash-space-pagenumber. Similarly " -- " followed by a letter will take you to the first word for that letter. Or you can just use the jump tables in the next -- Quick Jump Links -- section.
Romanized Pali Alphabet:
-- A -- Ā -- I -- Ī -- U -- Ū -- E -- O
-- ŋ (also represented as ṃ)
-- K -- Kh -- G -- Gh -- Ṅ
-- C -- Ch -- J -- Jh -- Ñ
-- Ṭ -- Ṭh -- Ḍ -- Ḍh -- Ṇ
-- T -- Th -- D -- Dh -- N
-- P -- Ph -- B -- Bh -- M
-- Y -- R -- L -- Ḷ -- Ḷh
-- V -- S -- H
Page Numbers:
-- 1 -- 2 -- 3 -- 4 -- 5 -- 6 -- 7 -- 8 -- 9 -- 10
-- 11 -- 12 -- 13 -- 14 -- 15 -- 16 -- 17 -- 18 -- 19 -- 20
-- 21 -- 22 -- 23 -- 24 -- 25 -- 26 -- 27 -- 28 -- 29 -- 30
-- 31 -- 32 -- 33 -- 34 -- 35 -- 36 -- 37 -- 38 -- 39 -- 40
-- 41 -- 42 -- 43 -- 44 -- 45 -- 46 -- 47 -- 48 -- 49 -- 50
-- 51 -- 52 -- 53 -- 54 -- 55 -- 56 -- 57 -- 58 -- 59 -- 60
-- 61 -- 62 -- 63 -- 64 -- 65 -- 66 -- 67 -- 68 -- 69 -- 70
-- 71 -- 72 -- 73 -- 74 -- 75 -- 76 -- 77 -- 78 -- 79 -- 80
-- 81 -- 82 -- 83 -- 84 -- 85 -- 86 -- 87 -- 88 -- 89 -- 90
-- 91 -- 92 -- 93 -- 94 -- 95 -- 96 -- 97 -- 98 -- 99 -- 100
-- 101 -- 102 -- 103 -- 104 -- 105 -- 106 -- 107 -- 108 -- 109 -- 110
-- 111 -- 112 -- 113 -- 114 -- 115 -- 116 -- 117 -- 118 -- 119 -- 120
-- 121 -- 122 -- 123 -- 124 -- 125 -- 126 -- 127 -- 128 -- 129 -- 130
-- 131 -- 132 -- 133 -- 134 -- 135 -- 136 -- 137 -- 138 -- 139 -- 140
-- 141 -- 142 -- 143 -- 144 -- 145 -- 146 -- 147 -- 148 -- 149 -- 150
-- 151 -- 152 -- 153 -- 154 -- 155 -- 156 -- 157 -- 158 -- 159 -- 160
-- 161 -- 162 -- 163 -- 164 -- 165 -- 166 -- 167 -- 168 -- 169 -- 170
-- 171 -- 172 -- 173 -- 174 -- 175 -- 176 -- 177 -- 178 -- 179 -- 180
-- 181 -- 182 -- 183 -- 184 -- 185 -- 186 -- 187 -- 188 -- 189 -- 190
-- 191 -- 192 -- 193 -- 194 -- 195 -- 196 -- 197 -- 198 -- 199 -- 200
-- 201 -- 202 -- 203 -- 204 -- 205 -- 206 -- 207 -- 208 -- 209 -- 210
-- 211 -- 212 -- 213 -- 214 -- 215 -- 216 -- 217 -- 218 -- 219 -- 220
-- 221 -- 222 -- 223 -- 224 -- 225 -- 226 -- 227 -- 228 -- 229 -- 230
-- 231 -- 232 -- 233 -- 234 -- 235 -- 236 -- 237 -- 238 -- 239 -- 240
-- 241 -- 242 -- 243 -- 244 -- 245 -- 246 -- 247 -- 248 -- 249 -- 250
-- 251 -- 252 -- 253 -- 254 -- 255 -- 256 -- 257 -- 258 -- 259 -- 260
-- 261 -- 262 -- 263 -- 264 -- 265 -- 266 -- 267 -- 268 -- 269 -- 270
-- 271 -- 272 -- 273 -- 274 -- 275 -- 276 -- 277 -- 278 -- 279 -- 280
-- 281 -- 282 -- 283 -- 284 -- 285 -- 286 -- 287 -- 288 -- 289 -- 290
-- 291 -- 292 -- 293 -- 294 -- 295 -- 296 -- 297 -- 298 -- 299 -- 300
-- 301 -- 302 -- 303 -- 304 -- 305 -- 306 -- 307 -- 308 -- 309 -- 310
-- 311 -- 312 -- 313 -- 314 -- 315 -- 316 -- 317 -- 318 -- 319 -- 320
-- 321 -- 322 -- 323 -- 324 -- 325 -- 326 -- 327 -- 328 -- 329 -- 330
-- 331 -- 332 -- 333 -- 334 -- 335 -- 336 -- 337 -- 338 -- 339 -- 340
-- 341 -- 342 -- 343 -- 344 -- 345 -- 346 -- 347 -- 348 -- 349 -- 350
-- 351 -- 352 -- 353 -- 354 -- 355 -- 356 -- 357 -- 358 -- 359 -- 360
-- 361 -- 362 -- 363 -- 364 -- 365 -- 366 -- 367 -- 368 -- 369 -- 370
-- 371 -- 372 -- 373 -- 374 -- 375 -- 376 -- 377 -- 378 -- 379 -- 380
-- 381 -- 382 -- 383 -- 384 -- 385 -- 386 -- 387 -- 388 -- 389 -- 390
-- 391 -- 392 -- 393 -- 394 -- 395 -- 396 -- 397 -- 398 -- 399 -- 400
-- 401 -- 402 -- 403 -- 404 -- 405 -- 406 -- 407 -- 408 -- 409 -- 410
-- 411 -- 412 -- 413 -- 414 -- 415 -- 416 -- 417 -- 418 -- 419 -- 420
-- 421 -- 422 -- 423 -- 424 -- 425 -- 426 -- 427 -- 428 -- 429 -- 430
-- 431 -- 432 -- 433 -- 434 -- 435 -- 436 -- 437 -- 438 -- 439 -- 440
-- 441 -- 442 -- 443 -- 444 -- 445 -- 446 -- 447 -- 448 -- 449 -- 450
-- 451 -- 452 -- 453 -- 454 -- 455 -- 456 -- 457 -- 458 -- 459 -- 460
-- 461 -- 462 -- 463 -- 464 -- 465 -- 466 -- 467 -- 468 -- 469 -- 470
-- 471 -- 472 -- 473 -- 474 -- 475 -- 476 -- 477 -- 478 -- 479 -- 480
-- 481 -- 482 -- 483 -- 484 -- 485 -- 486 -- 487 -- 488 -- 489 -- 490
-- 491 -- 492 -- 493 -- 494 -- 495 -- 496 -- 497 -- 498 -- 499 -- 500
-- 501 -- 502 -- 503 -- 504 -- 505 -- 506 -- 507 -- 508 -- 509 -- 510
-- 511 -- 512 -- 513 -- 514 -- 515 -- 516 -- 517 -- 518 -- 519 -- 520
-- 521 -- 522 -- 523 -- 524 -- 525 -- 526 -- 527 -- 528 -- 529 -- 530
-- 531 -- 532 -- 533 -- 534 -- 535 -- 536 -- 537 -- 538 -- 539 -- 540
-- 541 -- 542 -- 543 -- 544 -- 545 -- 546 -- 547 -- 548 -- 549 -- 550
-- 551 -- 552 -- 553 -- 554 -- 555 -- 556 -- 557 -- 558 -- 559 -- 560
-- 561 -- 562 -- 563 -- 564 -- 565 -- 566 -- 567 -- 568 -- 569 -- 570
-- 571 -- 572 -- 573 -- 574 -- 575 -- 576 -- 577 -- 578 -- 579 -- 580
-- 581 -- 582 -- 583 -- 584 -- 585 -- 586 -- 587 -- 588 -- 589 -- 590
-- 591 -- 592 -- 593 -- 594 -- 595 -- 596 -- 597 -- 598 -- 599 -- 600
-- 601 -- 602 -- 603 -- 604 -- 605 -- 606 -- 607 -- 608 -- 609 -- 610
-- 611 -- 612 -- 613 -- 614 -- 615 -- 616 -- 617 -- 618 -- 619 -- 620
-- 621 -- 622 -- 623 -- 624 -- 625 -- 626 -- 627 -- 628 -- 629 -- 630
-- 631 -- 632 -- 633 -- 634 -- 635 -- 636 -- 637 -- 638 -- 639 -- 640
-- 641 -- 642 -- 643 -- 644 -- 645 -- 646 -- 647 -- 648 -- 649 -- 650
-- 651 -- 652 -- 653 -- 654 -- 655 -- 656 -- 657 -- 658 -- 659 -- 660
-- 661 -- 662 -- 663 -- 664 -- 665 -- 666 -- 667 -- 668 -- 669 -- 670
-- 671 -- 672 -- 673 -- 674 -- 675 -- 676 -- 677 -- 678 -- 679 -- 680
-- 681 -- 682 -- 683 -- 684 -- 685 -- 686 -- 687 -- 688 -- 689 -- 690
-- 691 -- 692 -- 693 -- 694 -- 695 -- 696 -- 697 -- 698 -- 699 -- 700
-- 701 -- 702 -- 703 -- 704 -- 705 -- 706 -- 707 -- 708 -- 709 -- 710
-- 711 -- 712 -- 713 -- 714 -- 715 -- 716 -- 717 -- 718 -- 719 -- 720
-- 721 -- 722 -- 723 -- 724 -- 725 -- 726 -- 727 -- 728 -- 729 -- 730
-- 731 -- 732 -- 733
FOREWORD
It is somewhat hard to realize, seeing how important and valuable the work has been, that when ROBERT CAESAR CHILDERS published, in 1872, the first volume of his Pali Dictionary, he only had at his command a few pages of the canonical Pali books. Since then, owing mainly to the persistent labours of the Pali Text Society, practically the whole of these books, amounting to between ten and twelve thousand pages, have been made available to scholars. These books had no authors. They are anthologies which gradually grew up in the community. Their composition, as to the Vinaya and the four Nikyas (with the possible exception of the supplements) was complete within about a century of the Buddha's death; and the rest belong to the following century. When scholars have leisure to collect and study the data to be found in this preSanskrit literature, it will necessarily throw as much light on the history of ideas and language as the study of such names and places as are mentioned in it (quite incidentally) has already thrown upon the political divisions, social customs, and economic conditions of ancient India. Some of these latter facts I have endeavoured to collect in my Buddhist India; and perhaps the most salient discovery is the quite unexpected conclusion that, for about two centuries (both before the Buddha's birth and after his death), the paramount power in India was Kosala -- a kingdom stretching from Nepal on the North to the Ganges on the South, and from the Ganges on the West to the territories of the Vajjian confederacy on the East. In this, the most powerful kingdom in India; there had naturally arisen a standard vernacular differing from the local forms of speech just as standard English differs from the local (usually county) dialects. The Pali of the canonical books is based on that standard Kosala vernacular as spoken in the 6th and 7th centuries B. C. It cannot be called the literary form of that vernacular, for it was not written at all till long afterwards. That vernacular was the mother tongue of the Buddha. He was born in what is now Nepal, but was then a district under the suzerainty of Kosala and in one of the earliest Pali documents he is represented as calling himself a Kosalan. When, about a thousand years afterwards, some pandits in Ceylon began to write in Pali, they wrote in a style strikingly different from that of the old texts. Part of that difference is no doubt due simply to a greater power of fluent expression unhampered by the necessity of constantly considering that the words composed had to be learnt by heart. When the Sinhalese used Pali, they were so familiar with the method of writing on palmleaves that the question of memorizing simply did not arise. It came up again later. But none of the works belonging to this period were intended to be learnt. They were intended to be read.
-- Page VI --
On the other hand they were for the most part reproductions of older material that had, till then, been preserved in Sinhalese. Though the Sinhalese pandits were writing in Pali, to them, of course, a dead language, they probably did their thinking in their own mother tongue. Now they had had then, for many generations, so close and intimate an intercourse with their Dravidian neighbours that Dravidian habits of speech had crept into Sinhalese. It was inevitable that some of the peculiarities of their own tongue, and especially these Dravidanisms, should have influenced their style when they wrote in Pali. It will be for future scholars to ascertain exactly how far this influence can be traced in the idioms and in the order of the arrangement of the matter of these Ceylon Pali books of the fifth and sixth centuries A. D. There is no evidence that the Sinhalese at that time knew Sanskrit. Some centuries afterwards a few of them learnt the elements of classical Sanskrit and very proud they were of it. They introduced the Sanskrit forms of Sinhalese words when writing high Sinhalese. And the authors of such works as the Dhvasa, the Saddhammopyana, and the Mahbodhivasa, make use of Pali words derived from Sanskrit <-> that is, they turned into Pali form certain Sanskrit words they found either in the Amara--koa, or in the course of their very limited reading, and used them as Pali. It would be very desirable to have a list of such Pali words thus derived from Sanskrit. It would not be a long one. Here we come once more to the question of memory. From the 11th cent. onwards it became a sort of fashion to write manuals in verse, or in prose and verse, on such subjects as it was deemed expedient for novices to know. Just as the first book written in Pali in Ceylon was a chain of memoriter verses strung together by very indifferent Pali verses, so at the end we have these scarcely intelligible memoriter verses meant to be learned by heart by the pupils. According to the traditions handed down among the Sinhalese, Pali, that is, the language used in the texts, could also be called Mgadh. What exactly did they mean by that? They could not be referring to the Mgadh of the Prakrit grammarians, for the latter wrote some centuries afterwards. Could they have meant the dialect spoken in Magadha at the date when they used the phrase, say, the sixth century A. D.? That could only be if they had any exact knowledge of the different vernaculars of North India at the time. For that there is no evidence, and it is in itself very improbable. What they did mean is probably simply the language used by Asoka, the king of Magadha. For their traditions also stated that the texts had been brought to them officially by Asoka's son Mahinda; and not in writing, but in the memory of Mahinda and his companions. Now we know something of the language of Asoka. We have his edicts engraved in different parts of India, differing slightly in compliance with local varieties of speech. Disregarding these local differences, what is left may be considered the language of head--quarters where these edicts were certainly drafted. This Mgadh contains none of the peculiar characteristics we associate with the Mgadh dialect. It is in fact a younger form of that standard Kosalan lingua franca mentioned above. Now it is very suggestive that we hear nothing of how the king of Magadha became also king of Kosala. Had this happened quietly, by succession, the event would have scarcely altered the relation of the languages of the two kingdoms. That of the older and larger would still have retained its supremacy. So when the Scottish dynasty succeeded to the English throne, the two languages remained distinct, but English became more and more the standard.
-- Page VII --
However this may be, it has become of essential importance to have a Dictionary of a language the history of whose literature is bound up with so many delicate and interesting problems. The Pali Text Society, after long continued exertion and many cruel rebuffs and disappointments is now at last in a position to offer to scholars the first installment of such a dictionary. The merits and demerits of the work will be sufficiently plain even from the first fasciculus. But one or two remarks are necessary to make the position of my colleague and myself clear. We have given throughout the Sanskrit roots corresponding to the Pali roots, and have omitted the latter. It may be objected that this is a strange method to use in a Pali dictionary, especially as the vernacular on which Pali is based had never passed through the stage of Sanskrit. That may be so; and it may not be possible, historically, that any Pali word in the canon could have been actually derived from the corresponding Sanskrit word. Nevertheless the Sanskrit form, though arisen quite independently, may throw light upon the Pali form; and as Pali roots have not yet been adequately studied in Europe, the plan adopted will probably, at least for the present, be more useful. This work is essentially preliminary. There is a large number of words of which we do not know the derivation. There is a still larger number of which the derivation does not give the meaning, but rather the reverse. It is so in every living language. Who could guess, from the derivation, the complicated meaning of such words as conscience, emotion, disposition? The derivation would be as likely to mislead as to guide. We have made much progress. No one needs now to use the one English word desire as a translation of sixteen distinct Pali words, no one of which means precisely desire. Yet this was done in Vol. X of the Sacred Books of the East by MAX MüLLER and FAUSBöLL -- See Mrs. RHYS DAVIDS in J R A S., 1898, p. 58.. The same argument applies to as many concrete words as abstract ones. Here again we claim to have made much advance. But in either case, to wait for perfection would postpone the much needed dictionary to the Greek kalends. It has therefore been decided to proceed as rapidly as possible with the completion of this first edition, and to reserve the proceeds of the sale for the eventual issue of a second edition which shall come nearer to our ideals of what a Pali Dictionary should be. We have to thank Mrs. STEDE for valuable help in copying out material noted in my interleaved copy of Childers, and in collating indexes published by the Society; Mrs. RHYS DAVIDS for revising certain articles on the technical terms of psychology and philosophy; and the following scholars for kindly placing at our disposal the material they had collected for the now abandoned scheme of an international Pali Dictionary: Prof. STEN KONOW. Words beginning with S or H. (Published in J P T S. 1909 and 1907, revised by Prof. Dr. D. ANDERSEN). Dr. MABEL H. BODE. B, Bh and M. Prof. DUROISELLE. K. Dr. W. H. D. ROUSE. C--Ñ. In this connection I should wish to refer to the work of Dr. EDMOND HARDY. When he died he left a great deal of material; some of which has reached us in time to be made available. He was giving his whole time, and all his enthusiasm to the work, and had he lived the dictionary would probably have been finished before the war. His loss was really the beginning of the end of the international undertaking. Anybody familiar with this sort of work will know what care and patience, what scholarly knowledge and judgment are involved in the collection of such material, in the sorting, the sifting and final arrangement of it, in the adding of cross references, in the consideration of etymological puzzles, in the comparison and correction of various or faulty readings, and in the verification of references given by others, or found in the indexes. For all this work the users of the Dictionary will have to thank my colleague, Dr. WILLIAM STEDE. It may be interesting to notice here that the total number of references to appear in this first edition of the new dictionary is estimated to be between one hundred and fifty and one hundred and sixty thousand. The Bavarian Academy has awarded to Dr. STEDE a personal grant of 3100 marks for his work on this Dictionary.
Chipstead, Surrey. July, 1921.
T. W. RHYS DAVIDS.
A. List of the Chiefs Books consulted for Vocabulary
(with Abbreviations).
1. PALI BOOKS.
1a Canonical.
Anguttara--Nikāya 5 vols. P T S. 1885<-> 1900 (A).
Buddha--Vaŋsa P T S. 1882 (Bu).
Cariyā--Piṭaka P T S. 1882 (Cp.).
Dhammapada P T S. 1914 (Dh).
Dhamma--Sangaṇi P T S. 1885 (Dhs).
Dīgha--Nikāya 3 vols. P T S. (D).
Iti--vuttaka P T S. 1890 (It.).
Kathā--Vatthu 2 vols. P T S. 1894, 95 (Kvu).
Khuddaka--Pāṭha P T S. 1915 (Kh).
Majjhima--Nikāya 3 vols. P T S. 1887<-> 1902 (M).
Niddesa I Mahā° 2 vols. P T S. 1916, 17 (Nd1).
Niddesa II Culla° P T S. 1918 (Nd2).
Paṭisambhidāmagga 2 vols. P T S. 1905, 1907 (Ps).
Peta--Vatthu P T S. 1889 (Pv).
Puggala--Pannatti P T S. 1883 (Pug).
Saŋyutta--Nikāya 5 vols. P T S. 1884<-> 1898 (S).
Sutta--Nipāta P T S. 1913 (Sn).
Thera--therīgāthā P T S. 1883 (Th 1) & (Th 2).
Udāna P T S. 1885 (Ud).
Vibhanga P T S. 1904 (Vbh).
Vimāna--Vatthu P T S. 1886 (Vv).
Vinaya--Piṭaka 5 vols. London 1879<-> 83 (Vin).
Apadāna P.T.S. 1925 (Ap).
Dukapaṭṭhāna, P.T.S. 1906 (Dukp).
Tikapaṭṭhāna, 3 vols. P.T.S. 1921--23 (Tikp).
1b Post--Canonical.
Atthasālinī, P T S. 1897 (DhsA).
Buddhadatta's Manuals, P T S. 1915 (Bdhd).
Dāṭhāvaŋsa, J P T S. 1884 (Dāvs).
Dhammapada Commentary, 4 vols. P T S. 1906--14 (DhA).
Dīpavaŋsa, London 1879 (Dpvs).
Jātaka, 6 vols. London 1877--96 (J).
Khuddaka--Pāṭha Commentary, P T S. 1915 (KhA).
Khuddhasikkhā, J.T.P.S. 1883 (Khus).
Mahāvaŋsa, P T S. 1908 (Mhvs).
Mahā--Bodhi--Vaŋsa, P T S. 1891 (Mhbv).
Milindapanha, London 1880 (Miln).
Mūlasikkhā, J.P.T.S. 1883 (Mūls).
Netti--Pakaraṇa, P T S. 1902 (Nett).
Panca--gati--dīpana, J P T S. 1884 (Pgdp).
Peta--Vatthu Commentary, P T S. 1894 (PvA).
Puggala--Pannatti Commentary, J P T S. 1914 (Pug A).
Saddhammopāyana, J P T S. 1887 (Sdhp).
Sumangala--Vilāsinī, vol. I, P T S. 1886 (DA I).
Manoratha--pūraṇī P.T.S. 1924 (AA); Samanta--pāsādikā P.T.S. 1924 (Sam. Pās. or Vin A).
Papanca Sūdanī, pt. I, P.T.S. 1922 (MA).
Sammoha--Vinodanī, P.T.S. 1923 (VbhA).
-- Page X --
Sutta--Nipāta Commentary, 2 vols. P T S. 1916--17 (SnA).
Therīgāthā Commentary, P T S. 1891 (ThA).
Vimāna--Vatthu Commentary, P T S. 1901 (VvA).
Visuddhi--Magga, 2 vols. P T S. 1920<-> 21 (Vism).
Yogāvacara's Manual, P.T.S. 1896 (Yog).
Note. The system adopted in quotations of passages from Pali text is that proposed in J P T S. 1909, pp. 385--87, with this
modification that Peta--vatthu (Pv) is quoted by canto and verse, and Culla--Niddesa (Nd2) by number of word in
"Explanatory Matter".
2. BUDDHIST SANSKRIT.
Avadāna--śataka, ed. J. S. Speyer (Bibl. Buddhica III), 2 vols., St. Pétersbourg 1906. (Av. Ś.).
Divyâvadāna, ed. Cowell & Neil, Cambridge 1886. (Divy).
Jātaka--mālā, ed. H. Kern (Harvard Or. Ser. I), Boston 1891. (Jtm).
Lalita--vistara, ed. S. Lefmann, I. Halle 1902. (Lal. V.).
Mahā--vastu, ed. É. Senart, 3 vols., Paris 1882--1897. (Mvst).
Śikṣā--samuccaya. Ed. C. Bendall, St. Petersburg, 1902 (Śikṣ).
The ed. of Lalitavistara which I have used, and from which I quote, is the Calcutta ed. (1877), by Rājendralāla Mitra (Bibl. Indica), and not Lefmann's.
3. TRANSLATIONS.
Buddh. Manual of Psychological Ethics (trsl. of the Dhamma--sangaṇi) by Mrs. Rhys Davids (R. As. Soc. Trsl. Fund XII), London 1900. (Dhs trsl.).
Compendium of Philosophy (trsl. of the Abhidhamm'attha--sangaha) by S. Z. Aung and Mrs. Rhys Davids, P T S. Trsl. 1910. (Cpd.).
Dialogues of the Buddha, trsl. by T. W. and C. A. F. Rhys Davids, London I. 1899; II. 1910; III. 1921. (Dial.).
Expositor (trsl. of the Attha--sālinī), by Maung Tin, P T S. Trsl. 1920, 21.
Kathāvatthu trsl. ("Points of Controversy), by Aung and Mrs. Rhys Davids, P T S. Trsl. 1915. (Kvu trsl.).
Kindred Sayings (Saŋyutta Nikāya I), by Mrs. Rhys Davids, P T S. Trsl. 1917. (K S.).
Mahāvaŋsa trsl. by W. Geiger, P T S. Trsl. 1912.
Manual of a Mystic (Yogâvacara), trs. by F. L. Woodward, P T S. Trsl. 1916. (Mystic).
Neumann, K. E., Lieder der Mönche und Nonnen, Berlin 1899.
Psalms of the Brethren (trsl. Mrs. Rhys Davids), P T S. Trsl. 1913.
Psalms of the Sisters (trsl. Mrs. Rhys Davids), P T S. Trsl. 1909.
Questions of Milinda (trsl. T. W. Rhys Davids), S B E. vols. 35, 36. (Miln).
Vinaya Texts (trsl. Rhys Davids & Oldenberg), S B E. vols. 13, 17, 20. (Vin T.).
Neumann, Die Reden Gotamo Buddha's (Mittlere Sammlung), Vols. I to III2 1921.
Human Types, P.T.S. trsl. 1924 (Pug trsl.) and insert accordingly on p. xi under B 1.
Path of Purity, P.T.S. trsl. 1923, 1st pt. (Vism. Trsl.).
4. GRAMMATICAL & OTHER LITERATURE; PERIODICALS, ETC.
Abhidhānappadīpikā, ed. W. Subhūti, Colombo1 1883. (Abhp.).
Andersen, D., A Pāli Reader, 2 pts; Copenhagen 1901, 1907.
Aufrecht, Th., Halāyudha's Abhidhāna--ratna--māḷā, London 1861.
Brugmann, K., Kurze vergleichende Grammatik der indogerm. Sprachen, Strassburg 1902.
Childers, R. C., A Dictionary of the Pāli Language, London 1874.
Brāhmaṇa (Br.).
Dhātupāṭha & Dhātumanjūsā, ed. Andersen & Smith, Copenhagen 1921 (Dhtp, Dhtm).
Śatapatha--Brāhmaṇa (trsl. J. Eggeling) (Śat. Br.) SBE vols.
-- Page XI --
Geiger, W., Pāli Literatur und Sprache, Strassburg 1916. (Geiger, P. Gr.).
Grassmann, W., Wörterbuch zum Rig Veda, Leipzig 1873.
Journal of the American Oriental Society (J A O S.).
Journal Asiatique, Paris (J. As.)
Journal of the Pāli Text Society (J P T S.).
Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society, London (J R A S.).
Kaccāyana--ppakaraṇa, ed. & trsl. Senart (J. As. 1871) (Kacc).
Kern, H., Toevoegselen op 't Woordenboek van Childers; 2 pts (Verhandelingen Kon. Ak. van Wetenschappen te Amsterdam N. R. XVI, 5), Amsterdam 1916. (Toev.).
Kuhn's Zeitschrift für vergleichende Sprachforschung (K Z.).
Mahāvyutpatti, ed. Mironow (Bibl. Buddhica XIII) St. Pétersbourg 1910, 11. (Mvyut).
Müller, Ed., Simplified Grammar of the Pali Language, London 1884.
Trenckner, V., Notes on the Milindapanho, in J P T S. 1908, 102 sq.
Uhlenbeck, H., Kurzgefasstes Etym. Wörterbuch d. Altindischen Sprache, Amsterdam 1898.
Walde, A., Lateinisches Etymologisches Wörterbuch, Heidelberg2 1910.
Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenländischen Gesellschaft, Leipzig 1847 sq. (Z D M S.).
Kirfel, W. Kosmographie der Inder, Bonn & Leipzig 1920.
B. LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
1. Titles of Books (the no refers to section of A).
A Anguttara 1a
Mhbv Mahabodhi--vansa1 b
Abhp Abhidhanappadipika 4
Mhvs Mahavansa 1b
Ap Apadana 1a
Miln Milinda--panha 1b
AvS. Avadana--Sataka 2
M Vastu Maha--vastu 2
Bdhd Buddhadatta 1
Mvyut Mahavyutpatti 4
Brethren: see Psalms 3
Mystic: see Manual 3
BR. Boehtlingk and Roth.
Nd1 Mahaniddesa 1a
Dukp Dukapatthana 1a.
Nd2 Cullaniddesa 1a
Bu Buddha--vansa 1a
Nett Netti--pakarana1 b
Cp Cariya--pitaka 1a
Patth Patthana: see Duka & 1a.
Cpd Compendium 3 Tika
D Digha1a Pgdp Pancagati--dipana 1b
Davs Datha--vansa 1b Ps Patisambhida--magga 1a
Dh Dhammapada 1a Pug Puggala--pannatti 1a
Dhs Dhammasangani 1a Pv Petavatthu 1a
Dhs trsl. Atthasalini 3 S Sanyutta1 a
Divy Divyavadana 2 S B E Sacred Books of the 3
East
Dpvs Dipavansa 1b
Sdhp Saddhammopayana 1b
Dhtm Dhatumanjusa 4.
Siks Siksasamuccaya 2
Dhtp Dhatupatha 4.
Sisters: see Psalms 3
Halayudha: see Aufrecht 4
Sn Sutta--nipata 1a
It Itivuttaka 1a
Th 1 Theragatha1 a
J Jataka 1b
Th 2 Therigatha 1a
J A O S. Journal AmerOrSoc 4
Tikp Tikapatthana 1a.
J As. Journal Asiatique4
Toev. Toevoegselen 4
J P T S. Journal Pali Text Soc 4
Ud Udana 1a
J R A S. Journal Royal Asiatic 4
Soc Vbh Vibhanga 1a
Jtm Jatakamala 2 VbhA Sammoha--Vinodani 1b.
Kacc Kaccayana 4 Vin Vinaya 1a
Kh Khuddakapatha 1a VismTrsl. Path of Purity 3
K S Kindred Sayings3 Vism Visuddhi--magga 1b
Kvu Kathavatthu 1a Vv Vimanavatthu 1a
K Z Kuhn's Zeitschrift 4 Zeitschrift der
Z D M G. Deutschen 4
LalV. Lalita Vistara2 Morgenlandischen
Gesell-schaft
M Majjhima 1a
2. General & grammatical terms.
in comb. with
a orig. original
A Title-letter (ly)
(e.g. DhA)=
Commentary P. Pali
(on Dh).
part. particle
abl. ablative form. formation
pass. passive
abs. absolute(ly) fr. from
perf. perfect
abstr. abstract freq. frequently,
frequentative pers. personal
acc. accusative
fut. future pl. plural
act. active
Gall. Gallic pop. popular
add. addition
gen. genitive poss. possessive
adj. adjective
ger. gerund pot. potential
adv. adverb
Ger. German pp. past
Ags. Anglo--Saxon participle
Goth. Gothic
aor. aorist ppr. present
Gr. Greek participle
appl. applied
gram. grammaratical prec. preceding
art. article
grd. gerundive pred. predicative
attr. attribute
ibid. at the same pref. prefix
Av. Avesta passage
prep. preposition
BB Burmese MSS id. the same
pres. present
bef. before id. p. identical passage
pret. preterite
BSk. Buddhist i. e. that is
Sanskrit Prk. Prakrit
i. g. in general
Commentary prob. probably
C (& (when cited imper. imperative
Cy) in expln of a pron. pronoun
Text impers. impersonal
passage). pt. part
impf. imperfect
caus. causative P T S. Pali Text
Ind. Index Society
cert. certain
ind. indicative q. v. quod vide
coll. collective (which see)
indecl. indeclinable
comb combined, ref. reference,
combination indef. indefinite referred
comparative, inf. infinitive refl. reflexive
comp. comparison,
composition instr. instrumental rel. relation,
relative
cond. conditional interr. interrogative
sep. separate
cons. consonant intrs. intransitive (ly)
corr. correct(ed) iter. iterative sg. singular
correl. correlation, Lat. Latin Sk. Sanskrit
correlative
l. c. loco citato sq. and
cp. compare following
lit. literal(ly),
cpd. compound literary SS. Singhalese
MSS.
dat. dative Lit. Lithuanian
ster. stereotype
den. denominative loc. locative
suff. suffix
der. derived, m. masculine
derivation sup. superlative
med. medium (middle)
des. desiderative sub voce
N. Name s. v. (under the
dial. dialect(ical) word
n. noun, note mentioned)
diff. different
nom. nominative syn. synonym
dist. distinct, (ous)
distinguished Np. Name of person
T. Text
E. English Npl. Name of place
trans. transitive
e. g. for instance nt. neuter
trsl. translated,
encl. enclitic num. numeral translation
ep. epithet Obulg. Old--bulgarian t. t. technical
term
esp. especially Ohg. Old--high--german
t. t. technical
etym. etymology Oicel. Old--icelandic g. term in
grammar
exc. except Oir. Old--irish
v. verse
excl. exclamation, onom. onomatopoetic
exclusive var. variant,
opp. opposed, opposite various
expl. explanation,
explained ord. ordinal, ordinary var. various
lect. reading
f. feminine
voc. vocative
fig. figurative
(ly) Wtb. Worterbuch
foll. following
3. Typographical
*(s)qṷel indicates a (reconstructed or conjectured) Indogermanic root.
*Sk means, that the Sanskrit word is constructed after the Pali word; or as Sk. form is only found in lexicographical lists.
â: the cap over a vowel indicates that the ā is the result of a syncope a + a (e. g. khuddânukhudda), whereas ā represents the proper a, either pure or contracted with a preceding a (khīṇāsava = khīṇa + āsava).
° represents the head--word either as first (°--) or second (--°) part of a compound; sometimes also an easily supplemented part of a word.
> indicates an etymological relation or line of development between the words mentioned.
~ and ˜ means "at similar" or "at identical, parallel passages".
The meaning of all other abbreviations may easily be inferred from the context.
A -- 1 the prep. ā shortened before double cons., as akko- sati (ā + kruś), akkhāti (ā + khyā), abbahati (ā + bṛh). -- Best to be classed here is the a -- we call expletive. It represents a reduction of ā -- (mostly before liquids and nasals and with single consonant instead of double). Thus anantaka (for ā -- nantaka = nantaka) Vv.807; amajjapa (for ā -- majjapa = majjapa) J vi.328; amāpaya (for āmāpaya = māpaya) J vi.518; apassato (= passantassa) J vi.552.
A -- 2 (an -- before vowels) [Vedic a -- , an -- ; Idg. *n̊, gradation form to *ne (see na2); Gr. a), a)n -- ; Lat. *en -- , in -- ; Goth., Ohg. & Ags. un -- ; Oir. an -- , in -- ] neg. part. prefixed to (1) nouns and adjectives; (2) verbal forms, used like (1), whether part., ger., grd. or inf.; (3) finite verbal forms. In compn. with words having originally two initial cons. the latter reappear in their assimilated form (e. g. appaṭicchavin). In meaning it equals na -- , nir -- and vi -- . Often we find it opp. to sa -- . Verbal negatives which occur in specific verb. function will be enumd. separately, while examples of neg. form. of (1) & (2) are given under their positive form unless the neg. involves a distinctly new concept, or if its form is likely to lead to confusion or misunderstanding. -- Concerning the combining & contrasting (orig. neg.) -- a -- (â) in redupl. formations like bhavâ -- bhava see ā4.
A -- 3 [Vedic a -- ; Idg. *e (loc. of pron. stem, cp. ayaŋ orig. a deictic adv. with specific reference to the past, cp. Sk sma); Gr. e) -- ; also in Gr. e)kei_, Lat. equidem, enim] the augment (sign of action in the past), prefixed to the root in pret., aor. & cond. tenses; often omitted in ordinary prose. See forms under each verb; cp. also ajja. Identical with this a -- is the a -- which functions as base of some pron. forms like ato, attha, asu etc. (q. v.).
A -- 4 the sound a (a -- kāra) J vi.328, 552; VvA 279, 307, 311.
Aŋsa1 [Vedic aŋsa; cp. Gr. w)_mos, Lat. umerus, Goth ams, Arm. us] (a) the shoulder A v. 110; Sn 609. aŋse karoti to put on the shoulder, to shoulder J i.9. (b.) a part (lit. side) (cp. ˚āsa in koṭṭhāsa and expln of aŋsa as koṭṭhāsa at DA i.312, also v. l. mettāsa for mettaŋsa at It 22). -- atīt'aŋse in former times, formerly D ii.224; Th 2, 314. mettaŋsa sharing friendship (with) A iv.151 = It 22 = J iv.71 (in which connection Miln 402 reads ahiŋsā). -- Disjunctive ekena aŋsena . . . ekena aŋsena on the one hand (side) . . . on the other, partly . . . partly A i.61. From this: ekaŋsa (adj.) on the one hand (only), i. e. incomplete (opp. ubhayaŋsa) or (as not admitting of a counterpart) definite, certain, without doubt (opp. dvidhā): see ekaŋsa. -- paccaŋsena according to each one's share A iii.38. puṭaŋsena with a knapsack for provisions D i.117; A ii 183; cp. DA i.288, with v. l. puṭosena at both passages.
-- kūṭa "shoulder prominence", the shoulder Vin iii.127; DhA iii.214; iv.136; VvA 121. -- vaṭṭaka a shoulder strap (mostly combd with kāyabandhana; vv. ll. ˚vaddhaka, ˚bandhaka) Vin i.204 (T. ˚bandhaka); ii.114 (ddh); iv.170 (ddh); Vv 3340 (T. ˚bandhana, C. v. l. ˚vaṭṭaka); DhA iii.452.
Aŋsa2 [see next] point, corner, edge; freg. in combn with numerals, e. g. catur˚ four -- cornered, chaḷ˚, aṭṭh˚, soḷas˚ etc. (q. v.) all at Dhs 617 (cp. DhsA 317). In connection with a Vimāna: āyat˚ with wide or protruding capitals (of its pillars) Vv 8415; as part of a carriage-pole Vv 642 (= kubbara -- phale patiṭṭhitā heṭṭhima -- aŋsā VvA 265).
Aŋsi (f.) [cp. Vedic aśri, aśra, aśani; Gr. a)/kros pointed, a)/kris, also o)cu /s sharp: Lat. ācer sharp. Further connections in Walde Lat. Wtb. under ācer] a corner, edge (= aŋsa2) Vv 782 (= aŋsa -- bhāga VvA 303).
Aŋsu [cp. Sk. aŋśu (Halāyudha) a ray of light] a thread Vin iii.224. -- mālin, sun Sāsv 1.
Akaṭa (adj.) [a + kaṭa] not made, not artificial, natural; ˚yūsa natural juice Vin i.206.
Akampiyatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. akampiya, grd. of a + kampati] the condition of not being shaken, stableness Miln 354.
Akalu (cp. agalu) an ointment J iv.440 (akaluñ candanañ ca, v. l. BB aggaluŋ C. expls as kālâkaluñ ca rattacandanañ ca, thus implying a blacking or dark ointment); vi.144 (˚candana -- vilitta; v. l. BB aggalu˚); Miln 338 (˚tagara -- tālīsaka -- lohita -- candana).
Akāca (adj.) [a + kāca] pure, flawless, clear D ii.244; Sn 476; J v.203.
Akācin (adj.) = akāca Vv 601. Kern (Toevoegselen s. v.) proposes reading akkācin (= Sk. arka -- arcin shining as the sun), but VvA 253 expls by niddosa, and there is no v. l. to warrant a misreading.
Akāsiya (adj. -- n.) [a + kāsika?] "not from the Kāsī -- country" (?); official name of certain tax -- gatherers in the king's service J vi.212 (akāsiya -- sankhātā rāja -- purisā C.).
Akiccakāra (adj.) [a + kicca + kāra] 1. not doing one's duty, doing what ought not to be done A ii.67; Dh 292; Miln 66; DA i.296. -- 2. ineffective (of medicine) Miln 151.
Akiriya (adj.) [a + kiriya] not practical, unwise, foolish J iii.530 (˚rūpa = akattabba -- rūpa C.); Miln 250.
Akilāsu (adj.) [a + kilāsu] not lazy, diligent, active, untiring S i.47; v.162; J i.109; Miln 382.
Akissava at S i.149 is probably faulty reading for akiñcana.
Akutobhaya (adj.) see ku˚.
Akuppa (adj.) [a + kuppa, grd. of kup, cp. BSk. akopya M Vastu iii.200] not to be shaken, immovable; sure, steadfast, safe Vin i.11 (akuppā me ceto -- vimutti) = S ii.239; Vin ii.69; iv.214; D iii.273; M i.205, 298; S ii.171; A iii.119, 198; Miln 361.
Akuppatā (f.) [abstr. fr. last] "state of not being shaken", surety, safety; Ep. of Nibbāna Th 1, 364.
Akka [cp. Sk. arka] N. of a plant: Calotropis Gigantea, swallow -- wort M i.429 (˚assa jiyā bowstrings made from that plant).
-- nāla a kind of dress material Vin i.306 (vv. ll. agga˚ & akkha˚). -- vāṭa a kind of gate to a plantation, a movable fence made of the akka plant Vin ii.154 (cp. akkha -- vāṭa).
Akkanta [pp. of akkamati] stepped upon, mounted on A i.8; J i.71; Miln 152; DhA i.200.
Akkandati [ā + kandati, krand] to lament, wail, cry S iv.206.
Akkamana (nt.) [cp. BSk. ākramaṇa Jtm 3158] going near, approaching, stepping upon, walking to J i.62.
Akkamati [ā + kamati, kram] to tread upon, to approach, attack J i.7, 279; ThA 9; -- to rise Vin iii. 38. -- ger. akkamma Cp. iii.72. -- pp. akkanta (q. v.).
Akkuṭṭha (adj. n.) [pp. of akkosati] 1. (adj.) being reviled, scolded, railed at Sn 366 (= dasahi akkosavatthūhi abhisatto SnA 364); J vi.187. -- 2. (nt.) reviling, scolding, swearing at; in combn akkuṭṭha -- vandita Sn 702 (= akkosa -- vandana SnA 492) Th 2, 388 (expln ThA 256 as above).
Akkula (adj.) [= ākula] confused, perplexed, agitated, frightened Ud 5 (akkulopakkula and akkulapakkulika). See ākula.
Akkosa [ā + kruś = kruñc, see kuñca & koñca2; to sound, root kr̥, see note on gala] shouting at, abuse, insult, reproach, reviling Sn 623; Miln 8 (+ paribhāsa); SnA 492; ThA 256; PvA 243; DhA ii.61.
-- vatthu always as dasa a˚ -- vatthūni 10 bases of abuse, 10 expressions of cursing J i.191; SnA 364, 467; DhA i.212; iv.2.
Akkosaka (adj.) [from last] one who abuses, scolds or reviles, + paribhāsaka A ii.58; iii.252; iv.156; v.317; PvA 251.
Akkosati [to krus see akkosa] to scold, swear at, abuse, revile J i.191; ii.416; iii.27; DhA i.211; ii.44. Often combd with paribhāsati, e. g. Vin ii.296; DhA iv.2; PvA 10. -- aor. akkocchi Dh 3; J iii.212 (= akkosi DhA i.43. Der. wrongly fr. krudh by Kacc. vi.417; cp. Franke, Einh. Pāli -- gramm. 37, and Geiger, P. Gr. § 164). -- pp. akkuṭṭha (q. v.).
Akkha1 [Vedic akṣa; Av. aša; Gr. a)/cwn a(/maca ohariot with one axle); Lat. axis; Ohg. etc. ahsa, E. axle, to root of Lat. ago, Sk. aj] the axle of a wheel D ii.96; S v.6; A i.112; J i.109, 192; v.155 (akkhassa phalakaŋ yathā; C.: suvaṇṇaphalakaŋ viya, i. e. shiny, like the polished surface of an axle); Miln 27 (+ īsā + cakka), 277 (atibhārena sakaṭassa akkho bhijjati: the axle of the cart breaks when the load is too heavy); PvA 277. -- akkhaŋ abbhañjati to lubricate the axle S iv.177; Miln 367.
-- chinna one whose axle is broken; with broken axle S i.57; Miln 67. -- bhagga with a broken axle J v.433. -- bhañjana the breaking of the axle DhA i.375; PvA 277.
Akkha2 [Vedic akṣa, prob. to akṣi & Lat. oculus, "that which has eyes" i. e. a die; cp. also Lat. ālea game at dice (fr.* asclea?)] a die D i.6 (but expld at DA i.86 as ball -- game: guḷakīḷa); S i.149 = A v.171 = Sn 659 (appamatto ayaŋ kali yo akkhesu dhanaparājayo); J i.379 (kūṭ˚ a false player, sharper, cheat) anakkha one who is not a gambler J v.116 (C.: ajūtakara). Cp. also accha3.
-- dassa (cp. Sk. akṣadarśaka) one who looks at (i. e. examines) the dice, an umpire, a judge Vin iii.47; Miln 114, 327, 343 (dhamma -- nagare). -- dhutta one who has the vice of gambling D ii.348; iii.183; M iii.170; Sn 106 (+ itthidhutta & surādhutta). -- vāṭa fence round an arena for wrestling J iv.81. (? read akka -- ).
Akkha3 (adj.) ( -- ˚) [to akkhi] having eyes, with eyes PvA 39 (BB. rattakkha with eyes red from weeping, gloss on assumukha). Prob. akkhaṇa is connected with akkha.
Akkhaka [akkha1 + ka] the collar -- bone Vin iv.213 (adhak- khakaŋ); y.216.
Akkhaṇa [a + khaṇa, BSk. akṣaṇa AvŚ i.291 = 332] wrong time, bad luck, misadventure, misfortune. There are 9 enumd at D iii.263; the usual set consists of 8; thus D iii.287; VvA 193; Sdhp 4 sq. See also khaṇa.
-- vedhin (adj. n.) a skilled archer, one who shoots on the moment, i. e. without losing time, expld as one who shoots without missing (the target) or as quickly as lightning (akkhaṇa = vijju). In var. combns.; mostly as durepātin a. A i.284 (+ mahato kāyassa padāletā); ii.170 sq. (id.), 202; iv.423, 425; J ii.91 (expld as either "avirādhita<11> -- vedhī" or "akkhaṇaŋ vuccati vijju": one who takes and shoots his arrows as fast as lightning), iii.322; iv.494 (C. explns aviraddha -- vedhin vijju -- ālokena vijjhana<11> -- samattha p. 497). In other combn at J i.58 (akkhaṇavedhin + vālavedhin); v.129 (the 4 kinds of archers: a., vālavedhin, saddavedhin & saravedhin).
In BSk. we find akṣuṇṇavedha (a Sanskritised Pāli form, cp. Mathurā kṣuṇa = Sk. kṣaṇa) at Divy 58, 100, 442 (always with dūrevedha), where MSS. however read akṣuṇa˚; also at Lal. Vist. 178. See Divy Index, where trsln is given as "an act of throwing the spear so as to graze the mark" (Schiefner gives "Streifschuss"). -
Note. The explanations are not satisfactory. We should expect either an etym. bearing on the meaning "hitting the centre of the target" (i. e. its "eye") (cp. E. bull's eye), in which case a direct relation to akkha = akkhi eye would not seem improbable (cp. formation ikkhana) or an etym. like "hitting without mishap", in which case the expression would be derived directly from ak khaṇa (see prec.) with the omission of the neg. an -- ; akkhaṇa in the meaning of "lightning" (J ii.91 C.) is not supported by literary evidence.
Akkhata (adj.) [pp. of a + kṣan, cp. parikkhata1] unhurt, without fault Mhvs 19, 56 (C. niddosa). -- acc. akkhataŋ (adv.) in safety, unhurt. Only in one phrase Vv 8452 (paccāgamuŋ Pāṭaliputtaŋ akkhataŋ) & Pv iv.111 (nessāmi taŋ Pāṭaliputtaŋ akkhataŋ); see VvA 351 & PvA 272.
Akkhaya (adj.) [a + khaya, kṣi] not decaying, in akkhaya- paṭibhāna, of unfailing skill in exposition Miln 3, 21.
Akkhara (adj.) [Vedic akṣara] constant, durable, lasting D iii.86. As tt. for one of 4 branches of Vedic learning (D i.88) it is Phonetics which probably included Grammar, and is expld by sikkhā (DA i.247 = SnA 477) <-> pl. nt. akkharāni sounds, tones, words. citt'akkhara of a discourse (suttanta) having variety & beauty of words or sounds (opposed to beauty of thought) A i.72 = iii.107 = S ii.267. Akkharāni are the sauce, flavour (vyañjana) of poetry S i.38. To know the context of the a˚ the words of the texts, is characteristic of an Arahant Dh 352 (C. is ambiguous DhA iv.70). Later: akkharaŋ a syllable or sound PvA 280 (called sadda in next line); akkharāni an inscription J ii.90; iv.7 (likhitāni written), 489; vi.390, 407. In Grammar: a letter Kacc. 1.
-- cintaka a grammarian or versifier KhA 17; SnA 16, 23, 321. cp. 466; PvA 120. -- pabheda in phrase sakkharappabheda phonology & etymology D i.88 (akkharappabhedo ti sikkhā ca nirutti ca SnA 447 = DA i.247) = A iii.223 = Sn p. 105. -- piṇḍa "word -- ball", i. e. sequence of words or sounds DhA iv.70 (= akkharānaŋ sannipāto Dh 352).
Akkharikā (f.) a game (recognising syllables written in the air or on one's back). D i.7; Vin ii.10; iii.180. So expld at DA i.86. It may be translated "letter game"; but all Indian letters of that date were syllables.
Akkhāta (adj.) [pp. of akkhāti] announced, proclaimed, told, shown A i.34 (dur˚ ); ii.195; iv.285, 322; v.265, 283; Sn 172, 276, 595, 718.
Akkhātar one who relates, a speaker, preacher, story -- teller S i.11, 191; iii.66; Sn 167.
Akkhāti [ā + khyā, Idg. *sequ; cp. Sk. ākhyāti, Lat. inquam, Gr. e)nne/pw, Goth. saihvan, Ger. sehen etc. See also akkhi & cakkhu] to declare, announce, tell Sn 87, 172; imper. akkhāhi Sn 988, 1085; aor. akkhāsi Sn 251, 504, 1131 (= ācikkhi etc. Nd2 465); fut. akkhissati Pv iv.163; cond. akkhissaŋ Sn 997; J vi.523. -- Pass. akkhāyati to be proclaimed, in phrase aggaŋ a. to be deemed chief or superior, to be first, to excel Miln 118, 182 (also in BSk. agram ākhyāyate M Vastu iii.390); ger. akkheyya to be pronounced S i.11; It 53. -- pp. akkhāta (q. v.). -- Intensive or Frequentative is ācikkhati.
Akkhāna (nt.) [Sk. ākhyāna] telling stories, recitation; tale, legend D i.6 (= DA i.84: Bhārata -- Rāmāyanādi); iii.183; M i.503; iii.167; Sdhp. 237. -- preaching, teaching Nd1 91 (dhamm˚). The 5th Veda J v.450. (vedam akkhānapañcamaŋ C: itihāsapañcamaŋ vedacatukkaŋ). -- The spelling ākhyāna also occurs (q. v.).
Akkhāyika (adj.) relating, narrating J iii.535; lokakkhāyikā kathā talk about nature -- lore D i.8; Miln 316.
Akkhāyin (adj.) telling, relating, announcing S ii.35; iii.7; J iii.105.
Akkhi (nt.) [to *oks, an enlarged form of *oqu, cp. Sk. īkṣate, kṣaṇa, pratīka, anīka; Gr. o)/sse, w)/y (*ku/klwy), o)fqalmo/s, pro/swpon; Lat. oculus, Ags. ēowan (= E eye & wind -- ow); Goth. augō. See also cakkhu & cp. akkha2 & ikkhaṇika] the eye M i.383 (ubbhatehi akkhīhi); Sn 197, 608; J i.223, 279; v.77; vi.336; Pv ii.926 (akkhīni paggharanti: shed tears, cp. PvA 123); VvA 65 (˚īni bhamanti, my eyes swim) cp. akkhīni me dhūmāyanti DhA i.475; DhA ii.26; iii.196 (˚īni ummīletvā opening the eyes); Sdhp 103, 380. -- In combn with sa -- as sacchi & sakkhi (q. v.). As adj. ( -- ˚) akkha3 (q.v.).
-- añjana eye ointment, collyrium DhA iii.354. -- kūpa the socket of the eye J iv.407. -- gaṇḍa eye -- protuberance, i. e. eye -- brow (?) J vi.504 (for pamukha T.). -- gūtha secretion from the eye PvA 198. -- gūthaka id. Sn 197 (= dvīhi akkhicchiddehi apanīta -- ttaca -- maŋsasadiso a˚ -- gūthako SnA 248). -- chidda the eye -- hole SnA 248. -- dala the eye -- lid DA i.194; ThA 259; DhsA 378. -- pāta "fall of the eye", i. e. a look, in mand˚ of soft looks (adj.) PvA 57. -- pūra an eye -- full, in akkhipūraŋ assuŋ (assu?) an eye full of tears J vi.191. -- mala dirt from the eye Pv iii.53 (= ˚gūtha C.). -- roga eye disease DhA i.9.
Akkhika1 ( -- ˚) (adj.) having eyes, with eyes Th 1,960 (añjan˚ with eyes anointed); DhA iv.98 (aḍḍh˚ with half an eye, i. e. stealthily); Sdhp 286 ( tamb˚ red -- eyed). -- an˚ having no eyes DhA i.11.
Akkhika2 (nt.) [cp. Sk. akṣa] the mesh of a net J i.208. -- hāraka one who takes up a mesh (?) M i.383 (corresp. with aṇḍahāraka).
Akkhitta1 see khitta.
Akkhitta2 (adj.) [BSk ākṣipta Divy 363, pp. of ā + kṣip] hit, struck, thrown J iii.255 (= ākaḍḍhita C.).
Akkhin (adj.) = akkhika J iii.190 (mand˚ softeyed); Vv 323 (tamb˚ red -- eyed); DhA i.11.
Akkhobbha (adj.) [a + kṣubh, see khobha] not to be shaken, imperturbable Miln 21.
Akkhobhana (adj) = akkhobbha J v.322 (= khobhetun na sakkhā C.).
Akkhohiṇī (f.) [= akkhobhiṇī] one of the highest numerals (1 followed by 42 ciphers, Childers) J v.319; vi.395.
Akhaṇḍaphulla see khaṇḍa.
Akhāta (adj.) not dug: see khāta.
Akhetta barren -- soil: see khetta. -- In cpd. ˚ññu the neg. belongs to the whole: not knowing a good field (for alms) J iv.371.
Agati see gati. -- ˚gamana practising a wrong course of life, evil practice, wrong doing D iii.228 (4: chanda˚, dosa˚ moha˚ bhaya˚); A ii.18 sq., J iv.402; v.98, 510; PvA 161.
Agada [Vedic agada; a + gada] medicine, drug, counter- poison J i.80 (˚harīṭaka ); Miln 121, 302, 319, 334; DA i.67; DhA i.215; PvA 198 (= osadhaŋ).
Agaru (adj.) [cp. Sk. aguru, a + garu] (a) not heavy, not troublesome, only in phrase: sace te agaru "if it does not inconvenience you, if you don't mind" (cp. BSk. yadi te aguru. Av. S i.94, 229; ii.90) Vin. i.25; iv.17, D i.51; DhA i.39. -- (b) disrespectful, irreverent (against = gen.) D i.89; Sn p. 51.
Agalu [cp. Sk. aguru, which is believed to appear in Hebr. ahālīm (aloe), also in Gr. a)lo/h & a)ga/lloxon] fragrant aloe wood, Agallochum Vv 537 (aggalu = VvA 237 agalugandha); VvA 158 (+ candana). Cp. also Av. Ś i.24, and akalu.
Agāra (nt.) [cp. Sk. agāra, probably with the a -- of communion; Gr. a)gei(rw to collect, a)gora/ market. Cp. in meaning & etym. gaha1]. -- 1. house or hut, usually implying the comforts of living at home as opp. to anagāra homelessness or the state of a homeless wanderer (mendicant). See anagāriyā. -- Thus freq. in two phrases contrasting the state of a householder (or layman, cp. gihin), with that of a religious wanderer (pabbajita), viz. (a.) kesamassuŋ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaŋ pabbajati "to shave off hair & beard, put on the yellow robes, and wander forth out of the home into the homeless state" D i.60 etc.; cp. Nd2 172ii. See also S i.185 (agārasmā anagāriyaŋ nikkhanta); M ii.55 (agāraŋ ajjhāvasatā); Sn 274, 805 (˚ŋ āvasati), and with pabbajita D i.89, 115, 202, 230; Pv ii.1317. -- (b.) of a "rājā cakkavattin" compared with a "sambuddha": sace agāraŋ āvasati vijeyya paṭhaviŋ imaŋ adaṇḍena asatthena . . . sace ca so pabbajati agārā anagāriyaŋ vivaṭacchado sambuddho arahā bhavissati "he will become the greatest king when he stays at home, but the greatest saint when he takes up the homeless life", the prophesy made for the infant Gotama D ii.16; Sn 1002, 1003. -- Further passages for agāra e. g. Vin i.15; D i.102 (BB. has v. l. agyâgāra, but DA i.270 expl. as dānâgāra); A i.156, 281; ii.52 sq.; Dh 14, 140; J i.51, 56; iii.392; Dpvs. i.36. -- 2. anagāra (adj.) houseless, homeless; a mendicant (opp. gahaṭṭha) Sn 628 = Dh 404; Sn 639, 640 (+ paribbaje); Pv ii.25 (= anāvāsa PvA 80). -- (nt.) the homeless state (= anagāriyā) Sn 376. See also agga2. -- 3. ˚āgāra: Owing to freq. occurrence of agāra at the end of cpds. of which the first word ends in a, we have a dozen quite familiar words ending apparently in āgāra. This form has been considered therefore as a proper doublet of agāra. This however is wrong. The long ā is simply a contraction of the short a at the end of the first part of the cpd. with the short a at the beginning of agāra. Of the cpds. the most common are: -- āgantuk˚ reception hall for strangers or guests S iv.219; v.21. -- itth˚ lady's bower S i.58, 89. -- kūṭ˚ a house with a peaked roof, or with gables S ii.103. 263; iii.156; iv.186; v.43; A i.230; iii.10, 364; iv.231; v.21. -- koṭṭh˚ storehouse, granary D i.134 (cp. DA i.295); S i.89. -- tiṇ˚ a house covered with grass S iv.185; A i.101. -- bhus˚ threshing shed, barn A i.241. -- santh˚ a council hall D i.91; ii.147; S iv.182; v.453; A ii.207; iv.179 sq. -- suññ˚ an uninhabited shed; solitude S v.89, 157, 310 sq., 329 sq.; A i.241 (v. l. for bhusâgāra); iii.353; iv.139, 392, 437; v.88, 109, 323 sq.
Agāraka (nt.) [fr. agāra] a small house, a cottage M i.450; J vi.81.
Agārika (adj.) 1. having a house, in eka˚, dva˚ etc. D i.166 = A i.295 = ii.206. -- 2. a householder, layman Vin i.17. f. agārikā a housewife Vin i.272. See also āgārika.
Agārin (adj.) [fr. agāra] one who has or inhabits a house, a householder Sn 376, Th i,1009; J iii.234. -- f. agārinī a housewife Vv 527 (= gehassāmmī VvA 225); Pv iii.43 (id. PvA 194).
Agāriya = agārika, a layman M i.504 (˚bhūta). -- Usually in neg. anagāriyā (f.) the homeless state (= anagāraŋ) as opp. to agāra (q. v.) in formula agārasmā anagāriyaŋ pabbajita (gone out from the house into the homeless state) Vin i.15; M i.16; ii.55, 75; A i.49; D iii.30 sq., 145 sq.; Sn 274, 1003; Pv ii.1316; DA i.112.
Agga1 (adj. n.) [Vedic agra; cp. Av. agrō first; Lith. agrs early] 1. (adj;) (a.) of time: the first, foremost Dpvs iv.13 (sangahaŋ first collection). See cpds. -- (b.) of space: the highest, topmost, J i.52 (˚sākhā). -- (c.) of quality: illustricus, excellent, the best, highest, chief Vin iv.232 (agga -- m -- agga) most excellent, D ii.4: S I.29 (a. sattassa Sambuddha); A ii.17 = Pv iv.347 (lokassa Buddho aggo [A: aggaŋ] pavuccati); It 88, 89; Sn 875 (suddhi); PvA 5. Often combd. with seṭṭha (best), e. g. D ii.15; S iii.83, 264. -- 2. (nt.) top, point. (a.) lit.: the top or tip (nearly always -- ˚); as ār˚ point of an awl Sn 625, 631; Dh 401; kus˚ tip of a blade of grass Dh 70; Sdhp 349; tiṇ˚ id PvA 241; dum˚ top of a tree J ii.155; dhaj˚ of a banner S i.219; pabbat˚ of a mountain Sdhp 352; sākh˚ of a branch PvA 157; etc. -- (b.) fig. the best part, the ideal, excellence, prominence, first place, often to be trsl. as adj. the highest, best of all etc. S ii.29 (aggena aggassa patti hoti: only the best attain to the highest); Mhvs 7, 26. Usually as -- ˚; e. g. dum˚ the best of trees, an excellent tree Vv 3541 (cp. VvA 161); dhan˚ plenty D iii.164; madhur˚ S i.41, 161, 237; bhav˚ the best existence S iii.83; rūp˚ extraordinary beauty J i.291; lābh˚ highest gain J iii.127; sambodhi -- y -- agga highest wisdom Sn 693 (= sabbaññuta -- ñāṇan SnA 489; the best part or quality of anything, in enumn of the five "excellencies" of first -- fruits ( panca aggāni, after which the N. Pañcaggadāyaka), viz. khettaggan rās˚ koṭṭh˚ kumbhi˚ bhojan˚ SnA 270. sukh˚ perfect bliss Sdhp 243. Thus freq. in phrase aggaŋ akkhāyati to deserve or receive the highest praise, to be the most excellent D i.124; S iii.156, 264; A ii.17 (Tathāgato); It 87 (id.); Nd2 517 D (appamādo); Miln 183. -- 3. Cases as adv.: aggena (instr.) in the beginning, beginning from, from (as prep.), by (id.) Vin ii.167. (aggena gaṇhāti to take from, to subtract, to find the difference; Kern Toev. s. v. unnecessarily changes aggena into agghena), 257 (yadaggena at the moment when or from, foll. by tad eva "then"; cp. agge), 294 (bhikkh˚ from alms); Vbh 423 (vass˚ by the number of years). aggato (abl.) in the beginning Sn 217 (+ majjhato, sesato). aggato kata taken by its worth, valued, esteemed Th 2, 386, 394. agge (loc) 1. at the top A ii.201 (opp. mūle at the root); J iv.156 (id.); Sn 233 (phusit˚ with flowers at the top: supupphitaggasākhā KhA 192); J ii.153 (ukkh˚); iii.126 (kūp˚). -- 2 (as prep.) from. After, since, usually in phrases yad˚ (foll. by tad˚) from what time, since what date D i.152; ii.206; & ajja -- t -- agge from this day, after today D i.85; M i.528; A v.300; Sn p. 25 (cp. BSk. adyāgrena Av. Ś ii.13); at the end: bhattagge after a meal Vin ii.212.
-- angulī the main finger, i. e. index finger J vi.404. -- āsana main seat DA i.267. -- upaṭṭhāka chief personal attendant D ii.6. -- kārikā first taste, sample Vin iii.80. -- kulika of an esteemed clan Pv iii.55 (= seṭṭh˚ PvA 199). -- ñña recognized as primitive primeval, D iii.225 (porāṇa +), A ii.27 sq.; iv.246, Kvu 341. -- danta one who is most excellently self -- restrained (of the Buddha) Th i.354. -- dāna a splendid gift Vin iii.39. -- dvāra main door J i.114. -- nakha tip of the nail Vin iv.221. -- nagara the first or most splendid of cities Vin i.229. -- nikkhitta highly praised or famed Miln 343. -- nikkhittaka an original depository of the Faith Dpvs iv.5. -- pakatimant of the highest character J v.351 (= aggasabhāva). -- patta having attained perfection D iii.48 sq. -- pasāda the highest grace A ii.34; It 87. -- piṇḍa the best oblation or alms i.141; M i. 28; ii.204. -- piṇḍika receiving the best oblations J vi.140. -- puggala the best of men (of the Buddha) Sn 684; DhA ii.39; Sdhp. 92, 558. -- purohita chief or prime minister J vi.391. -- phala the highest or supreme fruit (i. e. Arahantship) J i.148; Pv iv.188; PvA 230. -- bīja having eggs from above (opp. mūla˚), i. e. propagated by slips or cuttings D i.5; DA i.81. -- magga (adj.) having reached the top of the path, i. e. Arahantship ThA 20. -- mahesi the king's chief wife, queen -- consort J i.262; iii.187, 393; v.88; DhA i.199; PvA 76. -- rājā the chief king J vi.391; Miln 27. -- vara most meritorious, best Dpvs vi.68. -- vāda the original doctrine (= theravāda) Dpvs iv.13. -- vādin one who proclaims the highest good (of the Buddha) Th 1, 1142.
Agga2 (nt.) (only -- ˚) [a contracted form of agāra] a (small) house, housing, accomodation; shelter, hut; hall. dān˚ a house of donation, i. e. a public or private house where alms are given J iii.470; iv.379, 403; vi.487; PvA 121; Miln 2. salāk˚ a hut where food is distributed to the bhikkhus by tickets, a food office J i.123, VvA 75.
Aggatā (f.) [abstr. of agga] pre -- eminence, prominence, superiority Kvu 556 (˚ŋ gata); Dpvs iv.1 (guṇaggataŋ gatā). -- (adj.) mahaggata of great value or superiority D i.80; iii.224.
Aggatta (nt.) [abstr. of agga = Sk. agratvan] the state or condition of being the first, pre -- eminence PvA 9, 89.
Aggavant (adj.) occupying the first place, of great eminence A i.70, 243.
Aggalu see agalu.
Aggaḷa & Aggaḷā (f.) (also occasionally with l.) [cp. Sk. argala & argalā to *areg to protect, ward off, secure etc., as in Ags. reced house; *aleg in Sk. rakṣati to protect, Gr. a)le/cw id., Ags. ealh temple. Cp. also *areq in Gr. a) rke/w = Lat. arceo, Orcus, Ohg rigil bolt.] a contrivance to fasten anything for security or obstruction: 1. a bolt or cross -- bar Vin i.290; D i.89 (˚ŋ ākoteṭi to knock upon the cross -- bar; a. = kavāṭa DA i.252); A iv.359 (id.); S. iv.290; A i.101 = 137 = iv.231. (phusit˚ with fastened bolts, securely shut Th 1,385 (id.); Vin iv.47; J. v.293 (˚ŋ uppīḷeti to lift up the cross -- bar. -- 2. a strip of cloth for strengthening a dress etc., a gusset Vin i.290 (+ tunna), 392 (Bdhgh on MV viii.21, 1); J i.8 (+ tunna) vi.71 (˚ŋ datvā); Vin iv.121.
-- dāna putting in a gusset J i.8. -- phalaka the post or board, in which the cross -- bar is fixed (cp. ˚vaṭṭi) M iii.95. -- vaṭṭi = ˚phalaka Vin ii.120, 148. -- sūci bolting pin M i.126.
Aggi [Vedic agni = Lat. ignis. Besides the contracted form aggi we find the diaeretic forms gini (q. v.) and aggini (see below)] fire. -- 1. fire, flames, sparks; conflagration, Vin ii.120 (fire in bathroom); M i.487 (anāhāro nibbuto f. gone out for lack of fuel); S iv.185, 399 (sa -- upādāno jalati provided with fuel blazes); Sn 62; Dh 70 (= asaniaggi DhA iii.71); J i.216 (sparks), 294 (pyre); ii.102; iii.55; iv.139; VvA 20 (aggimhi tāpanaŋ + udake temanaŋ). -- The var. phases of lighting and extinguishing the fire are given at A iv.45: aggiŋ ujjāleti (kindle, make burn), ajjhupekkhati (look after, keep up), nibbāpeti (extinguish, put out), nikkhipati (put down, lay). Other phrases are e. g. aggiŋ jāleti (kindle) J ii.44; gaṇhāti (make or take) J i.494 (cp. below b); deti (set light to) J i.294; nibbāpeti (put out) It 93; Sdhp 552. aggi nibbāyati the f. goes out S ii.85; M i.487; J i.212 (udake through water); Miln 304. aggi nibbuto the f. is extinguished (cp. ˚nibbāna) J i.61; Miln 304. agginā dahati to burn by means of fire, to set fire to A i.136, 199; PvA 20. udar˚ the fire supposed to regulate digestion PvA 33; cp. Dial. ii.208, note 2; kapp˚uṭṭhān˚ the universal conflagration J iii.185; dāv˚ a wood or jungle fire J i.212; naḷ˚ the burning of a reed J vi.100; padīp˚ fire of a lamp Miln 47. 2. the sacrificial fire: In one or two of the passages in the older texts this use of Aggi is ambiguous. It may possibly be intended to denote the personal Agni, the fire -- god. But the commentators do not think so, and the Jātaka commentary, when it means Agni, has the phrase Aggi Bhagavā the Lord Agni, e. g. at J i.285, 494; ii.44. The ancient ceremony of kindling a holy fire on the day the child is born and keeping it up throughout his life, is also referred to by that commentary e. g. J i.285; ii.43. Aggiŋ paricarati (cp. ˚paricāriyā) to serve the sacred fire Vin i.31 (jaṭilā aggī paricaritukāmā); A v.263, 266; Th 2, 143 (= aggihuttaŋ paric˚ ThA 136); Dh 107; J i.494; DhA ii.232. aggiŋ juhati (cp. ˚homa, ˚hutta) to sacrifice (in)to the fire A ii.207; often combd. with aggihuttaŋ paricarati, e. g. S i.166; Sn p. 79. aggiŋ namati & santappeti to worship the fire A v.235. aggissa (gen.) paricāriko J yi.207 (cp. below ˚paricārika); aggissa ādhānaŋ A iv.41. -- 3. (ethical, always -- ˚) the fire of burning, consuming, feverish sensations. Freq. in standard set of 3 fires, viz. rāg˚, dos˚, moh˚, or the fires of lust, anger and bewilderment. The number three may possibly have been chosen with reference to the three sacrificial fires of Vedic ritual. At S iv.19; A iv.41 sq. there are 7 fires, the 4 last of which are āhuneyy˚, gahapat˚, dakkhiṇeyy˚, kaṭṭh˚. But this trinity of cardinal sins lies at the basis of Buddhist ethics, & the fire simile was more probably suggested by the number. D iii.217; It 92, Vbh 368. In late books are found others: ind˚ the fire of the senses PvA 56; dukkh˚ the glow of suffering ib. 60; bhavadukkh˚ of the misery of becomings Sdhp. 552; vippaṭisār˚ burning remorse PvA 60; sok˚ burning grief ib. 41.
Note. The form aggini occurs only at Sn 668 & 670 in the meaning of "pyre", and in combn. with sama "like", viz. aggini -- samaŋ jalitaŋ 668 (= samantato jali taŋ aggiŋ Sn A 480); aggini -- samāsu 670 (= aggisamāsu Sn A 481). The form agginī in phrase niccagginī can either be referred to gini (q. v.) or has to be taken as nom. of aggini (in adj. function with ī metri causa;
otherwise as adj. agginiŋ), meaning looking constantly after the fire, i. e. careful, observant, alert. -- agāra (agyâgāra) a heated room or hut with a fire Vin i.24; iv.109; D i.101, 102 (as v. l. BB for agāra); M i.501; A v.234, 250. -- khandha a great mass of fire, a huge fire, fire -- brand S ii.85; A iv. 128; Th 2, 351 (˚samākāmā); J iv.139; vi.330; Ps i.125; Dpvs vi.37; Miln 304. -- gata having become (like) fire Miln 302. -- ja fire -- born J v.404 (C; text aggijāta). -- ṭṭha fire -- place J v.155. -- ṭṭhāna fire -- place Vin ii.120 (jantāghare, in bathroom). -- daḍḍha consumed by fire Dh 136; Pv i.74. -- dāha (mahā˚) a holocaust A i.178. -- nikāsin like fire J iii.320 (suriya). -- nibbāna the extinction of fire J i.212. -- pajjota fire -- light A ii.140 (one of the 4 lights, viz. canda˚, suriya˚, a˚, paññā˚). -- paricaraṇa ( -- ṭṭhāna) the place where the (sacrificial) fire is attended to DhA i.199. -- paricariyā fire -- worship DhA ii.232; Sn A 291 (pāri˚) 456. -- paricārika one who worship the fire a v.263 (brāhmaṇa). -- sālā a heated hall or refectory Vin i.25, 49 = ii.210; i.139; ii.154. -- sikhā the crest of the fire, the flame, in simile ˚ûpama, like a flaming fire Sn 703; Dh 308 = It 43, 90 (ayoguḷa). -- hutta (nt.) the sacrificial fire (see above 2), Vin i.33, 36 = J i.83; Vin i.246 = Sn 568 (˚mukha -- yañña); S i.166; Dh 392; Sn 249, p. 79; J iv.211; vi.525; ThA 136 (= aggi); DhA iv.151 (˚ŋ brāhmaṇo namati). -- huttaka (nt.) fire -- offering J vi.522 (= aggi -- jūhana C.). -- hotta = ˚hutta SnA 456 (v. l. BB ˚hutta). -- homa fire -- oblation (or perhaps sacrificing to Agni) D i.9 (= aggi -- jūhana DA i.93).
Aggika (adj.) [aggi + ka] one who worships the fire Vin i.71 (jaṭilaka); D ii.339 sq. (jaṭila); S i.166 (brāhmaṇa).
Aggha [see agghati] 1. price, value, worth, Miln 244; Mhvs 26, 22; 30, 76; VvA 77. -- mahaggha (adj.) of great value J iv.138; v.414; vi.209; Pv ii.118. See also mahâraha. appaggha (adj.) of little value J. iv.139; v.414. -- anaggha (nt.) pricelessness, J v.484; cattari anagghāni the four priceless things, viz. setacchatta, nisīdanapallanka, ādhāraka, pādapīṭhikā DhA iii.120, 186. (adj.) priceless, invaluable J v.414; Mhvs 26, 25; DhA iv.216. -- agghena (instr.) for the price of Vin ii.52, cp. Bdhgh on p. 311, 312. -- 2. an oblation made to a guest D ii.240; J iv.396 = 476.
-- kāraka a valuator J i.124. -- pada valuableness J v.473 (˚lakkhaṇaŋ nāma mantaŋ).
Agghaka (adj.) = aggha; worth, having the value of ( -- ˚) Mhvs 30, 77. an˚ priceless Mhvs 30, 72.
Agghati (intr.) [Sk. arghati, argh = arh (see arhati), cp. Gr. a)lfh/ reward, a)lfa/nw to deserve] to be worth, to have the value of (acc.), to deserve J i.112 (satasahassaŋ aḍḍhamāsakaŋ); vi.174, 367 (padarajaŋ); DhA iii.35 (maṇin nâgghāma); Mhvs 32, 28. Freq. in stock phrase kalaŋ nâgghati (nâgghanti) soḷasiŋ not to be worth the 16th part of (cp. kalā) Vin ii.156; S i.233; Dh 70; Vv 207 (= nânubhoti VvA 104), 437; J v.284. -- Caus. agghāpeti to value, to appraise, to have a price put on (acc.) J i.124; iv.137, 278; Miln 192; Mhvs 27, 23. Cp. agghāpanaka & agghāpaniya.
Agghanaka (adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. *agghana, abstr. to agghati] having the value of, equal to, worth Vin iv.226; J i.61 (satasahass˚), 112; DA i.80 (kahāpaṇ˚); DhA iii.120 (cuddasakoṭi˚); Mhvs 26, 22; 34, 87. -- f. ˚ikā J i.178 (satasahass˚).
Agghaniya (adj.) [in function & form grd. of agghati] pri- celess, invaluable, beyond the reach of money Miln 192.
Agghāpanaka [fr. agghāpana to agghāpeti, Caus. of agghati] a valuator, appraiser J i.124, 125; v.276 (˚ika).
Agghāpaniya (adj.) [grd. of agghāpeti, see agghati] that which is to be valued, in ˚kamma the business of a valuator J iv.137.
Agghika (nt.) ( -- ˚) [= agghiya] an oblation, decoration or salutation in the form of garlands, flowers etc., therefore meaning "string, garland" (cp. Sinhalese ägä "festoon work") Mhvs 19, 38 (pupph˚) 34, 73 (ratan˚) 34, 76 ( dhaj˚); Dāvs i.39 (pupphamay˚); v.51 (kusum˚).
Agghiya (adj. -- n.) [grd. form from agghati] 1. (adj.) valu- able, precious, worth J vi.265 (maṇi); DhA ii.41 (ratan˚ of jewel's worth); Mhvs 30, 92. -- 2. (nt.) a respectful oblation J v.324 = vi.516; Dpvs vi.65; vii.4.
Agha1 (nt.) [cp. Sk. agha, of uncertain etym.] evil, grief, pain, suffering, misfortune S i 22; M i.500 (roga gaṇḍa salla agha); A ii.128 (id.); J v.100; Th 2, 491; Sdhp 51. -- adj. painful, bringing pain J vi.507 (agha -- m -- miga = aghakara m. C.). -- bhūta a source of pain S iii.189 (+ agha & salla).
Agha2 (m. nt.) [the etym. suggested by Morris J.P.T.S. 1889, 200 (with ref. to M i.500, which belongs under agha1) is untenable (to Sk. kha, as a -- kha = agha, cp. Jain Prk. khaha). Neither does the pop. etym. of Bdhgh. offer any clue (= a + gha from ghan that which does not strike or aghaṭṭaniya is not strikeable DhsA 326, cp. Dhs. trsl. 194 & J iv.154 aghe ṭhitā = appaṭighe ākāse ṭhitā the air which does not offer any resistance). On the other hand the primary meaning is darkness, as seen from the phrase lokantarikā aghā asaŋvutā andhakārā D ii.12; S v.454, and BSk. aghasaŋvṛta M Vastu i.240, adj. dark M Vastu i.41; ii.162; Lal Vist 552] the sky, orig. the dark sky, dark space, the abyss of space D ii.12; S v.45; Vv 161 (aghasi gama, loc. = vehāsaŋ gama VvA 78); J iv.154; Dhs 638 (+ aghagata); Vbh 84 (id.).
-- gata going through or being in the sky or atmosphere Dhs 638, 722; Vbh 84. -- gāmin moving through the atmosphere or space i. e. a planet S i.67 = Miln 242 (ādicco seṭṭho aghagāminaŋ).
Aghata at Th 1, 321 may be read as agha -- gata or (prefer- ably) with v. l. as aggha -- gataŋ, or (with Neumann) as agghaŋ agghatānaŋ. See also Mrs. Rh. D, Psalms of the Brethren, p. 191.
Aghammiga [to agha1?] a sort of wild animal J vi.247 (= aghāvaha miga) 507 (= aghakara). Cp. BSk. agharika Divy 475.
Aghavin (adj.) [to agha1] suffering pain, being in misery Sn 694 (= dukkhita SnA 489).
Anka1 = anga, sign, mark, brand Miln 79; ˚karana branding J iv.366, 375. See also anketi.
Anka2 [Vedic anka hook, bent etc., anc, cp. ankura & ankusa. Gr. a)gkw/n elbow, a)/gkura = anchor; Lat. uncus nail; Ohg. angul = E. angle] (a.) a hook J v.322 = vi.218 (v. l. BB anga). -- (b.) the lap (i. e. the bent position) or the hollow above the hips where infants are carried by Hindoo mothers or nurses ( ankena vahati) Vin ii.114; D ii.19 (anke pariharati to hold on one's lap or carry on one's hips), 20 (nisīdāpeti seat on one's lap); M ii.97 (ankena vahitvā); Th 1, 299; J i.262 (anke nisinna); ii.127, 236; vi.513; DhA i.170 ( ankena vahitvā) PvA 17 (nisīdāpeti).
Ankita [pp. of anketi] marked, branded J i.231 (cakkan- kitā Satthu padā); ii.185 (˚kaṇṇaka with perforated ears).
Ankura [cp. Sk. ankura, to anka a bend = a tendril etc.] a shoot, a sprout (lit. or fig.) J ii.105; vi.331 (Buddh ˚a nascent Buddha), 486; Dhs 617 (˚vaṇṇa); Miln 50, 251 269; Sdhp 273; Mhvs 15, 43.
Ankusa [Vedic ankuśa; to anc, see anka2] a hook, a pole with a hook, used (1) for plucking fruit off trees, a crook J i.9 (˚pacchi hook & basket); v.89 = vi.520 (pacchikhanitti˚), 529 (= phalānaŋ gaṇhanatthaŋ ankusaŋ). <-> (2) to drive an elephant, a goad (cp patoda & tutta) Vin ii.196 (+ kasā); J vi.489; ThA 173 (ovādaŋ ankusaŋ katvā, fig. guide); Sdhp 147 (daṇḍ˚). -- (3) N. of a certain method of inference in Logic (naya), consisting in inferring certain mental states of a general character from respective traits where they are to be found Nett 2, 4, 127; Nett A 208; -- acc˚ beyond the reach of the goad D ii.266 (nāga). See also ankusaka.
-- gayha (the art) how to grasp and handle an eleph.<-> driver's hook M ii.94 (sippa). -- gaha an eleph. -- driver Dh 326.
Ankusaka [see anka2, cp. ankusa] 1. a crook for plucking fruit J iii.22. -- 2. an eleph. -- driver's hook J iii.431.
-- yattha a crooked stick, alpenstock, staff (of an ascetic) J ii.68 (+ pacchi).
Anketi [Denom. fr. anka1] to mark out, brand J i.451 lakkhaṇena); ii.399. -- pp. ankita, q. v.
Ankola [dial. for ankura] a species of tree Alangium Hexapetalum J vi.535. Cp. next.
Ankolaka = ankola J iv.440; v.420.
Anga (nt.) [Vedic anga, anc cp. Lat. angulus = angle, corner etc., ungulus finger -- ring = Sk. angulīya. See also anka, anguṭṭha & angula] (1) (lit.) a constituent part of the body, a limb, member; also of objects: part, member (see cpd. ˚sambhāra); uttam˚anga the reproductive organ J v.197; also as "head" at ThA 209. Usually in cpds. (see below, esp. ˚paccanga), as sabbanga -- kalyāṇī perfect in all limbs Pv iii.35 (= sobhaṇa -- sabbanga -- paccangī PvA 189) and in redupln. anga -- m -- angāni limb by limb, with all limbs (see also below anga + paccanga) Vin iii.119; Vv 382 (˚ehi naccamāna); Pv ii.1210, 13, 18 (sunakho te khādati). -- (2) (fig.) a constituent part of a whole or system or collection, e. g. uposath˚ the vows of the fast J i.50; bhavanga the constituents or the condition of becoming (see bhava & cp. Cpd. 265 sq.); bojjhanga (q. v.). Esp. with numerals: cattāri angāni 4 constituents A ii.79 (viz. sīla, samādhi, paññā. vimutti and rūpa, vedanā, saññā, bhava), aṭṭhangika (q. v.) magga the Path with its eight constituents or the eightfold Path (KhA 85: aṭṭhɔ angāni assā ti) navanga Buddha -- sāsana see nava. -- (3) a constituent part as characteristic, prominent or distinguishing, a mark, attribute, sign, quality D i.113 sq., 117 (iminā p˚ angena by this quality, or: in this respect, cp. below 4; DA i.281 expls tena kāra<-> ṇena). In a special sense striking (abnormal) sign or mark on the body D i.9, from which a prophesy is made (: hattha -- pādādisu yena kenaci evarūpena angena samannāgato dīghāyu . . hotī ti . . angasatthan = chiromantics DA i.92). Thus in combn. with samannāgata & sampanna always meaning endowed with "good", superior, remarkable "qualities", e. g. J i.3 (sabbanga -- sampanna nagaraŋ a city possessing all marks of perfection); ii.207. <-> In enumn. with var. numerals: tīhi angehi s. A i.115; cattāri sotapannassa a -- D iii.227 = A iv.405 sq.; pañcanga -- vippahīno (i. e. giving up the 5 hindrances, see nīvaraṇa) and pañcanga -- samannāgato (i. e. endowed with the 5 good qualities, viz. the sīla -- kkhandha, see kkhandha ii.A d) S i.99 = A i.161; v.15, 29. Similarly the 5 attributes of a brahmin (viz. sujāta of pure birth, ajjhāyaka a student of the Vedas, abhirūpa handsome, sīlava of good conduct, paṇḍita clever) D i.119, 120. Eight qualities of a king D i.137. Ten qualities of an Arahant (cp. dasa1 B 2) S iii.83; Kh iv.10 = KhA 88; cp. M i.446 (dasahɔ angehi samannāgato rañño assājāniyo). -- (4) (modally) part, share, interest, concern; ajjhattikaŋ angaŋ my own part or interest (opp. bāhiraŋ the interest in the outside world). A i.16 sq. = S v.101 sq.; It 9. rañño angaŋ an asset or profit for the king M i.446. Thus adv. tadanga (see also ta˚ i.a) as a matter of fact, in this respect, for sure, certainly and tadangena by these means, through this, therefore M i.492; A iv.411; Sdhp 455, 456; iminā p˚ angena for that reason M ii.168. -- In compn. with verbs angi˚ (angī˚): angigata having limbs or ports, divided DA i.313; cp. samangi ( -- bhūta).
-- jāta "the distinguishing member", i. e. sign of male or female (see above 3); membrum virile and muliebre Vin i.191 (of cows); iii.20, 37, 205; J ii.359; Miln 124. -- paccanga one limb or the other, limbs great and small M i.81; J vi -- 20, used (a) collectively: the condition of perfect limbs, or adj. with perfect limbs, having all limbs Pv ii.1212 (= paripuṇṇa -- sabbanga -- paccangavatī PvA 158); SnA 383; DhA i.390; ThA 288; Sdhp 83 fig. rathassa angapaccangan M i.395; sabbanga -- paccangāni all limbs Miln 148. -- (b) distributively (cp. similar redupl. formations like chiddâvachidda, seṭṭhânu -- seṭṭhi, khaṇḍākhaṇḍa, cuṇṇavicuṇṇa) limb after limb, one limb after the other (like angamangāni above 1), piecemeal M i.133 (˚e daseyya), 366; J i.20; iv.324 (chinditvā). -- paccangatā the condition or state of perfect limbs, i. e. a perfect body VvA 134 (suvisuddh˚). -- paccangin having all limbs (perfect) D i.34 (sabbanga -- peccangī); PvA 189. -- rāga painting or rouging the body Vin ii.107 (+ mukha˚). -- laṭṭhi sprout, offshoot ThA 226. -- vāta gout Vin i.205. -- vijjā the art of prognosticating from marks on the body, chiromantics, palmistry etc. (cp. above 3) D i.9 (see expl. at DA i.93); J i.290 (˚āya cheka clever in fortune -- telling); ˚ânubhāva the power of knowing the art of signs on the body J ii.200; v.284; ˚pāṭhaka one who in versed in palmistry etc. J ii.21, 250; v.458. -- vekalla bodily deformity DhA ii.26. -- sattha the science of prognosticating from certain bodily marks DA i.92. -- sambhāra the combination of parts Miln 28 = S i.135; Miln 41. -- hetuka a species of wild birds, living in forests J vi.538.
Angaṇa1 (nt.) [cp. Sk. angaṇa & ˚na; to anga?] an open space, a clearing, Vin ii.218; J i.109 (= manussānan sañcaraṇa -- ṭṭhāne anāvaṭe bhūmibhāge C.); ii.243, 290, 357; Dāvs i.27. -- cetiy˚ an open space before a Chaitya Miln 366, DA i.191, 197; VvA 254. rāj˚ the empty space before the king's palace, the royal square J i.124, 152; ii.2; DhA ii.45.
-- ṭṭhāna a clearing (in a wood or park) J i.249, 421. -- pariyanta the end or border of a clearing J ii.200.
Angaṇa2 [prob. to anj, thus a variant of añjana, q. v.]; a speck or freckle (on the face) A v.92, 94 sq. (+ raja). Usually in neg. anangana (adj.) free from fleck or blemish, clear, (of the mind) (opp. sângana Sn 279); D i.76; M i.24 sq.; 100 (+ raja); A ii.211; Sn 517 (+ vigata<-> raja = angaṇānan abhāvā malānañ ca vigamā . . . SnA 427), 622 = Dh 125 (= nikkilesa DhA iii.34); Dh 236, 351; Pug 60; Nett 87.
Angada [cp. Sk. angada; prob. anga + da that which is given to the limbs] a bracelet J v.9, 410 (citt˚, adj. with manifold bracelets).
Angadin (adj.) [to angada] wearing a bracelet J v.9.
Angāra (m. nt.) [Vedic angāra] charcoal, burning coal, embers A iii.97, 380, 407; J i.73; iii.54, 55; v.488; Sn 668; Sdhp 32. kul˚ the charcoal of the family, a squanderer S iv.324 (see under kula).
-- kaṭāha a pot for holding burning coal, a charcoal pan DA i.261. -- kapalla an earthenware pan for ashes DhA i.260; Dhs A 333; VvA 142. -- kammakara a charcoal burner J vi.209. -- kāsu a charcoal pit M i.74, 365; Th 2, 491; J i.233; Sn 396; ThA 288; DhA i.442; Sdhp 208. -- pacchi a basket for ashes DhA iv.191. -- pabbata the mountain of live embers, the glowing mount (in Niraya) A i.141; Miln 303; PvA 221 (˚āropaṇa); Sdhp 208. -- maŋsa roast meat Mhvs 10, 16. -- masi ashes DhA iii.309. -- rāsi a heap of burning coal J iii.55.
Angāraka (adj.) [cp. Sk. angāraka] like charcoal, of red colour, N. of the planet Mars DA i.95; cp. J i.73.
Angārika a charcoal -- burner J vi.206 (= angāra -- kamma- kara p. 209).
Angārin (adj.) [to angāra] (burning) like coal, of bright- red colour, crimson Th 1, 527 = J i.87 (dumā trees in full bloom).
Angika ( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. anga] consisting of parts, -- fold; only in compn. with num. like aṭṭh˚, duv˚ (see dve), catur˚, pañc˚ etc., q. v.
Angin (adj.) limbed, having limbs or parts, -- fold, see catur˚ & pacc˚ (under anga -- paccangin). -- f. anginī having sprouts or shoots (of a tree) Th 2, 297 (= ThA 226).
Anguṭṭha [cp. Sk. anguṣṭha, see etym. under anga] 1. the thumb Vin iii.34; Miln 123; PvA 198. -- 2. the great toe J ii.92; Mhvs 35, 43.
-- pada thumb -- mark A iv.127 = S iii.154. -- sineha love drawn from the thumb, i. e. extraordinary love Pv iii.52, cp. PvA 198.
Anguṭṭhaka = anguṭṭha J iv.378; v.281; pād˚ the great toe S v.270.
Angula [Vedic angula, lit. "limblet" see anga for etym.] 1. a finger or toe M i.395 (vankɔ angulaṇ karoti to bend the fingers, v. l. anguliṇ); A iii.6 (id.); J v 70 (goṇ˚ adj. with ox toes, expld. by C. as with toes like an ox's tail; vv. ll. ˚anguṭṭha and ˚angulī). -- 2. a finger as measure, i. e. a finger -- breadth, an inch Vin ii.294, 306 (dvangula 2 inches wide); Mhvs 19, 11 (aṭṭh˚); DhA iii.127 (ek˚).
-- aṭṭhi (? cp. anga -- laṭṭhi) fingers (or toes) and bones DA i.93. -- anguli fingers and toes DhA iii.214. -- antarikā the interstices between the fingers Vin iii.39; Miln 180; DhA iii.214.
Angulika (nt.) [= angulī] a finger J iii.13 (pañc˚); v.204 (vaṭṭ˚ = pavāḷ˚ ankurasadisā vaṭṭangulī p. 207). See also pañcangulika.
Angulī & Anguli (thus always in cpds.) (f.) [Vedic angulī & ˚i; see anga] a finger A iv.127; Sn 610; J iii.416; iv.474; v.215 (vaṭṭ˚ with rounded fingers); Miln 395; DhA ii.59; iv.210; SnA 229.
-- patodaka nudging with the fingers Vin iii.84 = iv.110; D i.91 = A iv.343. -- pada finger -- mark A iv.127 = S iii.154. -- poṭha snapping or cracking the fingers J v.67. -- muddikā a signet ring Vin ii.106; J iv.498; v.439, 467. -- sanghaṭṭana˚ = poṭha DA i.256.
Anguleyyaka (nt.) [cp. Sk. angulīyaka that which belongs to the finger, Mhg. vingerlîn = ring; E. bracelet, Fr. bras; thimble thumb etc.] an ornament for the finger, a finger -- ring J ii.444 (= nikkha).
Acankama (avj.) [a + cankama] not fit for walking, not level or even Th 1, 1174 (magga).
Acittaka (adj.) [a + citta2 + ka] 1. without thought or intention, unconscious, unintentional DhA ii.42. -- 2. without heart or feeling, instr. acittakena (adv.) heartlessly J iv.58 (C. for acetasā).
Acittikata (adj.) [a + citta2 + kata; cp. cittikāra] not well thought of Miln 229.
Acira see cira & cp. nacira.
Acela (adj. -- n.) [a + cela] one who is not clothed, esp. t. t. for an anti -- Buddhist naked ascetic D i.161, 165; iii.6, 12, 17 sq.; S i.78; J v.75.
Acelaka = acela D i.166; iii.40; A i.295; ii.206; iii.384 (˚sāvaka); J iii.246; vi.229; Pug 55; DhA iii.489.
Acc -- 1. a + c˚, e. g. accuta = a + cuta. -- 2. Assimilation group of (a) ati + vowel; (b) c + cons. e. g. acci = arci.
Accagā [ati + agā] 3rd sg. pret. of ati -- gacchati (q. v. for similar forms) he overcame, should or could overcome Sn 1040 (expld. wrongly as pp. = atikkanta at Nd2 10 and as atīta at DhA iv.494); Dh 414.
Accankusa (adj.) [ati + ankusa] beyond the reach of the goad D ii.266 (nāga).
Accatari see atitarati.
Accati [Vedic arcati, ṛc, orig. meaning to be clear & to sing i. e. to sound clear, cp. arci] to praise, honour, celebrate Dāvs v.66 (accayittha, pret.) -- pp accita, q. v.
Accanta (adj. -- & adv. ˚ -- ) [ati + anta, lit. "up to the end"] 1. uninterrupted, continuous, perpetual J i.223; Miln 413; VvA 71; PvA 73, 125, 266; Sdhp 288. <-> 2. final, absolute, complete; adv. thoroughly S i.130 (˚ŋ hataputtāɔ mhi); iii.13 = A i.291 sq.; v.326 sq. (˚niṭṭha, ˚yogakkhemin); Kvu 586 (˚niyāmatā final assurance; cp. Kvu trsl. 340). -- 3. (˚ -- ) exceedingly, extremely, very much A i.145 (˚sukhumāla, extremely delicate), Miln 26 (id.); Sn 794 (˚suddhi = param ttha -- accantasuddhi SnA 528); Th 1, 692 (˚ruci); Dh 162 (˚dussīlya = ekanta˚ DhA iii.153).
Accaya [from acceti, ati + i, going on or beyond; cp. Sk. atyaya] (1) (temporal) lapse, passing; passing away, end, death. Usually as instr. accayena after the lapse of, at the end or death of, after Vin i.25; D ii.127 (rattiyā a.), 154 (mam˚ when I shall be dead); M i.438 (temās˚ after 3 months); S i.69; Snp. 102 (catunnaŋ māsānaŋ), p. 110 (rattiyā); J i.253 (ekāha -- dvīh˚), 291 (katipāh˚ after a few days); PvA 47 (katipāh˚), 82 (dasamās˚), 145 (vassasatānaŋ). -- (2) (modal) passing or getting over, overcoming, conquering, only in phrase dur -- accaya difficult to overcome, of kāmapanka Sn 945 (= dur -- atikkamanīya SnA 568), of sanga Sn 948: taṇhā Dh 336; sota It 95. -- (3) (fig.) going beyond (the norm), transgression, offence Vin i.133 (thull˚ a grave offence), 167 (id.); ii.110, 170; esp. in foll. phrases: accayo maŋ accagamā a fault has overcome me, i. e. has been committed by me (in confession formula) D i.85 (= abhibhavitvā pavatto has overwhelmed me DA i.236); A i.54; M i.438 (id.); accayaŋ accayato passati to recognise a breach of the regulation as such Vin i.315; A i.103; ii.146 sq.; ˚ŋ deseti to confess the transgression S i.239; ˚ŋ accayato paṭigaṇhāti to accept (the confession of) the fault, i. e. to pardon the transgression, in confessionformula at D i.85 = (Vin ii.192; M i.438 etc.). In the same sense accaya -- paṭiggahaṇa pardon, absolution J v.380; accayena desanaŋ paṭigaṇhāti J i.379; accayaŋ khamati to forgive Miln 420.
Accasara (adj.) [a form. fr. aor. accasari (ati + sṛ), influ- enced in meaning by analogy of ati + a + sara (smṛ). Not with Morris (J.P.T.S. 1889, 200) a corruption of accaya + sara (smṛ), thus meaning "mindful of a fault"] 1. going beyond the limits (of proper behaviour), too self -- sure, overbearing, arrogant, proud S i.239 (v. l. accayasara caused by prolepsis of foll. accaya); J iv.6 (+ atisara); DhA iv.230 (= expecting too much). -- 2. going beyond the limits (of understanding), beyond grasp, transcendental (of pañha a question) M i.304; S v.218 (v. l. SS for BB reading ajjhapara). Cp. accasārin.
Accasarā (f.) [abstr. to accasara] overbearing, pride, self- surity Vbh 358 (+ māyā). Note. In id. p. at Pug 23 we read acchādanā instead of accasarā.
Accasari [fr. ati + sṛ] aor 3. sg. of atisarati to go beyond the limit, to go astray J v.70.
Accasārin (adj.) = accasara 1., aspiring too high Sn 8 sq. (yo nâccasārī, opp. to na paccasārī; expld. at SnA 21 by yo nâtidhāvi, opp. na ohiyyi).
Accahasi [fr. ati + hṛ] aor 3 sg. of atiharati to bring over, to bring, to take J iii.484 (= ativiya āhari C.).
Accâbhikkhaṇa (˚ -- ) [ati + abhikkhaṇa] too often J v.233 (˚saŋsagga; C. expls. ativiya abhiṇha).
Accāraddha (adj. adv.) [ati + āraddha] exerting oneself very or too much, with great exertion Vin i.182; Th 1, 638; SnA 21.
Accāyata (adj.) [ati + āyata] too long A iii.375.
Accāyika (adj.) [fr. accaya] out of time, viz. 1. irregular, extraordinary J vi.549, 553. -- 2. urgent, pressing M i.149 (karaṇiyan business) ii.112; J i.338; v.17 ˚ŋ (nt.) hurry DhA i.18. See also acceka.
Accāvadati [ati + āvadati; or is it = ajjhāvadati = adhi + āvadati?] to speak more or better, to surpass in talk or speech; to talk somebody down, to persuade, entice Vin iv.224, 263; S ii.204 sq.; J v.433 (v. l. BB ajjhārati), 434 (v. l. BB aghācarati for ajjhācarati = ajjhāvadati?).
Accāsanna (adj.) [ati + asanna] very near, too near PvA 42 (na a. n'âtidūra neither too near nor too far, at an easy distance).
Accâhita (adj.) [ati + ahita] very cruel, very unfriendly, terrible J iv.46 = v.146 (= ati ahita C.) = vi.306 (id.).
Acci & (in verse) accī (f.) [Vedic arci m. & arcis nt. & f. to ṛc, cp. accati] a ray of light, a beam, flame S iv.290 (spelt acchi), 399; A iv.103; v.9; Sn 1074 (vuccati jālasikhā Nd2 11); J v.213; Miln 40; ThA 154 (dīpɔ); Sdhp 250.
Accikā (f.) [fr. acci] a flame M i.74; S ii.99.
Accita [pp. of accati] honoured, praised, esteemed J vi.180.
Accimant (adj.) [fr. acci, cp. Vedic arcimant & arciṣmant] flaming, glowing, fiery; brilliant Th 1, 527; J v.266; vi.248; Vv 388.
Acci -- bandha (adj.) [= accibaddha?] at Vin i.287 is expld. by Bdhgh as caturassa -- kedāra -- baddha ("divided into short pieces" Vin Texts ii.207), i. e. with squares of irrigated fields. The vv. ll. are acca˚ and acchi˚, and we should prefer the conjecture acchi -- baddha "in the shape of cubes or dice", i. e. with square fields.
Accuggacchati [ati + uggacchati] to rise out (of), ger. accuggamma D ii.38; A v.152 (in simile of lotus).
Accuggata (adj.) [ati + uggata] 1. very high or lofty Miln 346 (giri); VvA 197; DhA ii.65. -- 2. too high, i. e. too shrill or loud J vi.133 (sadda), 516 (fig. = atikuddha very angry C.).
Accuṇha (adj.) [ati + uṇha] very hot, too hot Sn 966; Nd1 487; DhA ii.85, 87 (v. l. for abbhuṇha). See also ati -- uṇha.
Accuta (adj.) [a + cuta] immoveable; everlasting, eternal; nt. ˚ŋ Ep. of Nibbāna (see also cuta) A iv.295, 327; Sn 204, 1086 (= nicca etc. Nd2 12); Dh 225 (= sassata DhA iii.321); Sdhp 47.
Accupaṭṭhapeti at J v.124 is to be read with v.l. as apaccu- paṭṭhapeti (does not indulge in or care for).
Accupati at J iv.250 read accuppati, aor. 3rd sg. of accuppatati to fall in between (lit. on to), to interfere (with two people quarelling). C. expls. atigantvā uppati. There is no need for Kern's corr. acchupati (Toev. s. v.).
Accussanna (adj.) [ati + ussanna] too full, too thick Vin ii.151.
Acceka = accāyika, special; ˚cīvara a spccial robe Vin iii.261; cp. Vin Texts i.293.
Acceti [ati + eti fr. i] 1. to pass (of time), to go by, to elapse Th 1, 145 (accayanti ahorattā). -- 2. to overcome, to get over Miln 36 (dukkhaŋ). -- Caus. acceti to make go on (loc.), to put on J vi.17 (sūlasmiŋ C. āvuṇeti), but at this passage prob. to be read appeti (q. v.).
Accogāḷha (adj.) [ati + ogāḷha] too abundant, too plentiful (of riches), lit. plunged into A iv.282, 287, 323 sq.
Accodaka (nt.) [ati + udaka] too much water (opp. ano- daka no water) DhA i.52.
Accodara (nt.) [ati + udara] too much eating, greediness, lit. too much of a belly J iv.279 (C. ati -- udara).
Accha1 (adj.) [cp. Sk. accha, dial., to ṛc (see accati), thus "shining"; cp. Sk. ṛkṣa bald, bare and Vedic ṛkvan bright. Monier -- Williams however takes it as a + cha fr. chad, thus "not covered, not shaded"] clear, transparent Vin i.206 (˚kañjika); D i.76 (maṇi = tanucchavi DA i.221), 80 (udakapatta), 84 (udaka -- rahada); M i.100; S ii.281 (˚patta); iii.105 (id.); A i.9; J ii.100 (udaka); Vv 7910 (vāri); DA i.113 (yāgu).
-- odaka having clear water, with clear water (of lotus ponds) Vv 4411; 815; f. ˚odikā Vv 412 = 602.
Accha2 [Vedic ṛkṣa = Gr. a)/rktos, Lat. ursus, Cymr. arth] a bear Vin i.200; A iii.101; J v.197, 406, 416; Miln 23, 149. At J vi.507 accha figures as N. of an animal, but is in expln. taken in the sense of accha4 (acchā nāma aghammigā C.). Note. Another peculiar form of accha is P. ikka (q. v.).
Accha3 = akkha2 (a die) see acci -- bandha.
Accha4 (adj.) [Ved. ṛkṣa] hurtful, painful, bad DhA iv.163 (˚ruja).
Acchaka = accha2, a bear J v.71.
Acchati [Vedic āsyati & āste, ās; cp. Gr. h_(stai] 1. to sit, to sit still Vin i.289; A ii.15; It 120 (in set carati tiṭṭhati a. sayati, where otherwise nisinna stands for acchati); Vv 741 (= nisīdati VvA 298); PvA 4. -- 2. to stay, remain, to leave alone Th 1, 936; J iv.306. -- 3. to be, behave, live Vin ii.195; D i.102; S i.212; Vv 112; Pv iii.31 (= nisīdati vasati PvA 188); Miln 88; DhA i.424. In this sense often pleonastic for finite verb, thus aggiŋ karitvā a. (= aggiŋ karoti) D i.102; aggiŋ paricaranto a. (= aggiŋ paricarati) DA i.270; tantaŋ pasārento a. (= tantaŋ pasāreti) DhA i.424. -- Pot. acche It 110; aor. acchi Vin iv.308; DhA i.424.
Acchanna (adj.) [pp. of acchādeti] covered with, clothed in, fig. steeped in (c. loe.) J jii.323 (lohite a. = nimugga C.). At D i.91 nacchanna is for na channa (see channa2) = not fair, not suitable or proper (paṭirūpa).
Acchambhin (adj.) [a + chambhin] not frightened, undis- mayed, fearless Sn 42 (reading achambhin; Nd2 13 expls. abhīru anutrāsi etc.); J vi.322 (= nikkampa C.). See chambhin.
Accharā1 (f.) [etym. uncertain, but certainly dialectical; Trenckner connects it with ācchurita (Notes 76); Childers compares Sk. akṣara (see akkhara); there may be a connection with akkhaṇa in akkhaṇa -- vedhin (cp. BSk. acchaṭā Divy 555), or possibly a relation to ā + tsar, thus meaning "stealthily", although the primary meaning is "snapping, a quick sound"] the snapping of the fingers, the bringing together of the finger -- tips: 1. (lit.) accharaŋ paharati to snap the fingers J ii.447; iii.191; iv.124, 126; v.314; vi.366; DhA i.38, 424. -- As measure: as much as one may hold with the finger -- tips, a pinch J v.385; DhA ii.273 (˚gahaṇamattaŋ); cp. ekacchara -- matta DhA ii.274. -- 2. (fig.) a finger's snap, i. e. a short moment, in ek˚acchara -- kkhaṇe in one moment Miln 102, and in def. of acchariya (q. v.) at DA i.43; VvA 329.
-- sanghāta the snapping of the fingers as signifying a short duration of time, a moment, ˚matta momentary, only for one moment (cp. BSk. acchaṭāsanghāta Divy 142) A i.10, 34, 38; iv.396; Th 1, 405; 2, 67 (expld. at ThA 76 as ghaṭikāmattam pi khaṇaŋ angulipoṭhanamattam pi kālaŋ). -- sadda the sound of the snapping of a finger J iii.127.
Accharā2 (f.) [Vedic apsaras = āpa, water + sarati, orig; water nymph] a celestial nymph M i.253 (pl. accharāyo) ii.64; Th 2, 374 (= devaccharā ThA 252); J v.152 sq. (Alambusā a.) Vv 55 (= devakaññā VvA 37); Vv 172; 1811 etc.; DhA iii.8, 19; PvA 46 (dev˚); Miln 169; Sdhp 298.
Accharika (nt. or f.?) [fr. accharā2] in ˚ŋ vādeti to make heavenly music (lit. the sounds of an accharā or heavenly nymph) A iv.265.
Acchariya (adj. -- nt.) [cp. Sk. āścarya since Upanishads of uncertain etym. -- The conventional etym. of Pāli grammarians connects it with accharā1 (which is prob. correct & thus reduces Sk. āścarya to a Sanskritisation of acchariya) viz. Dhammapāla: anabhiṇha -- ppavattitāya accharāpaharaṇa -- yoggaŋ that which happens without a moment's notice, at the snap of a finger; i. e. causally unconnected (cp. Goth. silda -- leiks in similar meaning) VvA 329; and Buddhaghosa: accharā -- yoggan ti acchariyaŋ accharaŋ paharituŋ yuttan ti attho DA i.43] wonderful, surprising, strange, marvellous D ii.155; M i.79; iii.118, 125, 144 (an˚); S iv.371; A i.181; Miln 28, 253; DhA iii.171; PvA 121; VvA 71 (an˚). As nt. often in exclamations: how wonderful! what a marvel! J i.223, 279; iv.138; vi.94 (a. vata bho); DhA iv.51 (aho a.); VvA 103 (aho ti acchariyatthena nipāto). Thus freq. combd. with abbhutaŋ = how wonderful & strange, marvellous, beyond comprehension, e. g. D i.2, 60, 206, 210; ii.8; and in phrase acchariyā abbhutā dhammā strange & wonderful things, i. e. wonderful signs, portents marvels, M iii.118, 125; A iv.198; Miln 8; also as adj. in phrase acchariyaabbhuta -- (citta -- )jātā with their hearts full of wonder and surprise DhA iv.52; PvA 6, 50. -- See also acchera & accheraka.
Acchādana (nt.) [fr. acchādeti] covering, clothing Th 1, 698; Miln 279. -- fig. protection, sheltering J i.307.
Acchādanā (f.) [= prec.] covering, hiding, concealment Pug 19, 23. -- Note. In id. p. at Vbh 358 we read accasarā for acchādanā. Is the latter merely a gloss?
Acchādeti [ā + chādeti1, Caus. of chad, cp. BSk. ācchā- dayati jīvitena to keep alive Av. Ś, i.300; Divy 136, 137] to cover, to clothe, to put on D i.63 = It 75; J i.254; iii.189; iv.318; Pug 57; Pv i.105 (ger. acchādayitvāna); DA i.181 (= paridahitvā); PvA 49, 50. -- fig. to envelop, to fill J vi.581 (abbhaŋ rajo acchādesi dust filled the air). -- pp. acchanna (q. v.).
Acchi at S iv.290 is faulty spelling for acci (q. v.).
Acchijja (v. l. accheja) destroying (?) S i.127. Is the reading warranted? Cp. acchecchi.
Acchidda see chidda.
Acchindati [ā + chindati, lit. to break for oneself] to remove forcibly, to take away, rob, plunder Vin iv.247 (sayaŋ a. to appropriate); J ii.422; iii.179; iv.343; Miln 20; Sdhp 122. -- ger. acchinditvā J ii.422; DhA i.349; PvA 241 (sayaŋ); & acchetvā M i.434. Caus. ii. acchindāpeti to induce a person to theft Vin iv.224, 247.
Acchinna (adj.) [ā + chinna, pp. of acchindati] removed, taken away, stolen, robbed Vin iv.278, 303; J ii.78; iv.45; v.212.
Acchiva [*Sk. akṣiba and akṣība] a certain species of tree (Hypanthera Moringa) J vi.535.
Acchupeti [ā + chupeti, Caus. of chupati] to procure or provide a hold, to insert, to put on or in Vin i.290 (aggaḷaŋ) ii.112.
Acchecchi [Sk. acchaitsīt] 3rd sg. aor. of chindati "he has cut out or broken, has destroyed" (see also chindati 3), in combn. with taṇhaŋ M i.122; S i.12, 23, 127 (so read for acchejja); iv.105, 207. It 47; A iii.246, 445; DhA iv.70 (gloss acchindi, for acchidda pret. of Dh 351). The v. l. at all passages is acchejji, which is to be accounted for on graphological grounds, ch & j being substituted in MSS. Kern (Toevoegselen s. v.) mistakes the form & tries to explain acchejji as adj. = ati -- ejin (ejā), acchecchi = ati -- icchin (icchā). The syntactical construction however clearly points to an aor.
Acchejja = a + chejja not to be destroyed, indestructible, see chindati.
Acchedana (nt.) [abstr. to acchindati] robbing, plundering J vi.544.
Acchera (adj.) = acchariya wonderful, marvellous S i.181; Vv 8413 (comp. accheratara); Pv iii.51 (˚rūpa = acchariyasabhāva PvA 197); Sdhp 244, 398.
Accheraka (adj.) = acchera (acchariya) J i.279; Bu i.9 (pāṭihīraŋ).
Aja [Vedic aja fr. aj (Lat. ago to drive), cp. ajina] a he- goat, a ram D i.6, 127; A ii.207; J i.241; iii.278 sq.; v.241; Pug 56; PvA 80.
-- eḷaka [Sk. ajaiḍaka] goats & sheep D i.5, 141; A ii.42 sq., 209; J i.166; vi.110; Pug 58. As pl. ˚ā S i.76; It 36; J iv.363. -- pada goat -- footed M i.134. -- pāla goatherd, in ˚nigrodharukkha (Npl.) "goatherds' Nigrodha -- tree" Vin i.2 sq. Dpvs i.29 (cp. M Vastu iii.302). -- pālikā a woman goatherd Vin iii.38. -- lakkhaṇa "goat -- sign", i. e. prophesying from signs on a goat etc. D i.9 (expld. DA i.94 as "evarūpānaŋ ajānaŋ mansaŋ khāditabbaŋ evarūpānaŋ na khāditabban ti"). -- laṇḍikā (pl.) goats' dung, in phrase nāḷimattā a. a cup full of goats' dung (which is put down a bad minister's throat as punishment) J i.419; DhA ii.70; PvA 282. -- vata "goats' habit", a practice of certain ascetics (to live after the fashion of goats) J iv.318.
aja -- pada refers to a stick cloven like a goat's hoof; so also at Vism 161.
Ajaka a goat, pl. goats Vin ii.154. -- f. ajikā J iii.278 & ajiyā J v.241.
Ajagara [aja + gara = gala fr. *gel to devour, thus "goat- eater"] a large snake (rock -- snake?), Boa Constrictor J vi.507; Miln 23, 303, 364, 406; DhA iii.60. Also as ajakara at J iii.484 (cp. Trenckner, Notes p. 64).
Ajacca (adj.) [a + jacca] of low birth J iii.19; vi.100.
Ajajjara see jajjara.
Ajaddhuka & Ajaddhumāra see jaddhu.
Ajamoja [Sk. ajamoda, cp. Sk. ajājī] cummin -- seed VvA 186.
Ajā (f.) a she -- goat J iii.125; iv.251.
Ajānana (˚ -- ) (nt.) [a + jānana] not knowing, ignorance (of) J v.199 (˚bhāva); vi.177 (˚kāla).
Ajina (nt.) [Vedic ajina, to aja, orig. goats' skin] the hide of the black antelope, worn as a garment by ascetics D i.167; Sn 1027; J i.12, 53; iv.387; v.407. kharājina a rough skin (as garment) M i.343; S iv.118; A ii.207; Sn 249 (= kharāni a˚ -- cammāni SnA 291). dantājina? ivory (q. v.).
-- khipa a cloak made of a network of strips of a black antelope's hide D i.167; S i.117; A i.240, 295; ii.206; Vin i.306; iii.34; J vi.569. -- paveṇi a cloth of the size of a couch made from pieces of ant. skin sewn together Vin i.192; D i.7 (= ajina -- cammehi mañcappamāṇena sibbitvā katā paveṇi DA i.87); A i.181. -- sāṭī a garment of skins (= ajina -- camma -- sāṭī DhA iv.156) Dh 394 = J i.481 = iii.85.
Ajini aor 3rd sg. jayati, q. v.
Ajiya = ajikā (see ajaka).
Ajira (nt.). [Vedic ajira to aj, cp. Gr. a)gro/s, Lat. ager, Goth. akrs = Ger. Acker, = E. acre] a court, a yard Mhvs 35, 3.
Ajīraka (nt.) [a + jīraka] indigestion J i.404; ii.181, 291; iii.213, 225.
Ajeyya1 & Ajjeyya (adj.) [a + jeyya, grd. of jayati, q. v.] - (a) not to be taken by force Kh viii.8 (cp. KhA 223). <-> (b) not to be overpowered, invincible Sn 288; J v.509.
Ajeyya2 (adj.) [a + jeyya, grd. of jīyati, q. v.] not decaying, not growing old, permanent J vi.323.
Ajja & Ajjā (adv.) [Vedic adya & adyā, a + dyā, a˚ being base of demonstr. pron. (see a3) and dyā an old loc. of dyaus (see diva), thus "on this day"] to -- day, now Sn 75, 153, 158, 970, 998; Dh 326; J i.279; iii.425 (read bahutaŋ ajjā; not with Kern, Toev. s. v. as "food"); Pv i.117 (= idāni PvA 59); PvA 6, 23; Mhvs 15, 64. <-> Freq. in phrase ajjatagge (= ajjato + agge(?) or ajja -- tagge, see agga3) from this day onward, henceforth Vin i.18; D i.85; DA i.235.
-- kālaŋ (adv.) this morning J vi.180; -- divasa the present day Mhvs 32, 23.
Ajjatana (adj.) [cp. Sk. adyatana] referring to the day, to- day's, present, modern (opp. porāṇa) Th 1, 552; Dh 227; J ii.409. -- dat. ajjatanāya for today Vin i.17; PvA 171 & passim.
Ajjatā (f.) [abstr. fr. ajja] the present time, in ajjatañ ca this very day S i.83 (v. l. ajjeva).
Ajjati [Vedic arjati, ṛj, a variant of arh, see arahati] to get, procure, obtain J iii.263 (?). pp. ajjita (q. v.).
Ajjava (adj. -- n.) [cp. Sk. ārjava, to ṛju, see uju] straight, upright (usually combd. with maddava gentle, soft) D iii.213; A i.94; ii.113; iii.248; Sn 250 (+ maddava), 292 (id.); J iii.274; Dhs 1339; Vbh 359 (an˚); SnA 292 (= ujubhāva), 317 (id.).
Ajjavatā (f.) [fr. prec.] straight forwardness, rectitude, up- rightness Dhs 1339. (+ ajimhatā & avankatā).
Ajjita [pp. of ajjati] obtained Sdhp 98.
Ajjuka [*Sk. arjaka] N. of a plant, Ocimum Gratissimum Vin iv.35; DA i.81 (all MSS. have ajjaka).
Ajjukaṇṇa [*Sk. arjakarṇa] N. of a tree Pentaptera To- mentosa J vi.535 (nn).
Ajjuṇho (adv.) [haplology fr. ajja -- juṇho; see juṇhā] this moonlight night Vin i.25; iv.80.
Ajjuna [Vedic arjuna, to raj; cp. Gr. a)rgo/s white, a)/rguros silver, Lat. argentum] the tree Pentaptera Arjuna J vi.535; DhA i.105 (˚rukkha).
Ajjh -- Assimilation group of adhi + vowel.
Ajjhagā [adhi + agā 3rd sg. pret. of adhigacchati (q. v. for similar forms) he came to, got to, found, obtained, experienced S i.12 (vimānaŋ); Sn 225 (expld. at KhA 180 by vindi paṭilabhi), 956 (ratiŋ expld. at Nd1 457 by adhigacchi); It 69 (jātimaraṇaŋ); Dh 154 (taṇhānaŋ khayaŋ); Vv 327 (visesaŋ attained distinction; expld. at VvA 135 by adhigata); 5021 (amataŋ santiŋ expld. VvA 215 by v. l. SS adhigañchi, T. adhigacchati).
Ajjhatta (adj. -- n.) [cp. Sk. adhyātma, cp. attā], that which is personal, subjective, arises from within (in contrast to anything outside, objective or impersonal); as adv. & ˚interior, personal, inwardly (opp. bahiddhā bāhira etc. outward, outwardly); Cp. ajjhattika & see Dhs. trsl. 272. <-> D i.37 (subjective, inward, of the peace of the 2nd jhāna), 70 = A ii.210; v.206 (inward happiness. a. sukkhaŋ = niyakajjhattaŋ attano santāne ti attho DA i.183 cp. DhsA 169, 338, 361); S i.70, 169; ii..27 (kathaŋ kathī hoti is in inward doubt), 40 (sukhaŋ dukkhaŋ); iii.180 (id.); iv.1 sg. (āyatanāni), 139, 196; v.74 (ṭhitaŋ cittaŋ ajjhattaŋ susaṇṭhitaŋ suvimuttaŋ a mind firm, inwardly well planted, quite set free), 110, 143, 263, 297, 390; A i.40 (rūpasaññī), 272 (kāmacchanda etc.); ii.158. (sukhadukkhaŋ), 211; iii.86 (cetosamatha), 92 (vūpasantacitta); iv.32 (sankhittaŋ), 57 (itthindriyaŋ), 299 (cittaŋ), 305 (rūpasaññī), 360 (cetosamatha), 437 (vūpasantacitta); v 79 sq., 335 sq. (sati); It 39 (cetosamatha inward peace), 80, 82, 94; J i.045 (chātajjhatta with hungry insides); v.338 (id.); Ps i.76 (cakkhu etc.); Dhs 161 (= attano jātaŋ DhsA 169), 204, 1044; Pug 59; Vbh 1 sq. (khandhā), 228 (sati), 327 (paññā), 342 (arūˊpasaññī). -- adv. ˚ŋ inwardly, personally (in contrast -- pair ajjhattaŋ vā bahiddhā vā; see also cpd. ˚bahiddhā) A i.284; ii.171; iv.305; v.61; Sn 917 (= upajjhayassa vā ā ācariyassa vā te guṇā assū ti Nd1 350).
-- ārammaṇa a subjective object of thought Dhs 1047. -- cintin thought occupied with internal things Sn 174, 388. -- bahiddhā inside & outside, personal -- external, mutual, interacting S ii.252 sq.; iii.47; iv.382; Nd2 15; Dhs 1049 etc. (see also bahiddhā). -- rata with inward joy D ii.107 = S v.263 = Dh 362 = Ud 64 (+ samāhita); Th 1, 981; A iv.312; DhA iv.90 (= gocarɔ ajjhatta -- sankhātāya kammaṭṭhāna -- bhāvanāya rata). -- rūpa one's own or inner form Vin iii.113 (opp. bahiddhā -- rūpa & ajjh˚ -- bah˚ r.). -- saññojana an inner fetter, inward bond A i.63 sq.; Pug 22; Vbh 361. -- santi inner peace Sn 837 (= ajjhattānaŋ rāgādīnaŋ santibhāva SnA 545; cp. Nd1 185). -- samuṭṭhāna originating from within J i.207 (of hiri; opp. bahiddhā˚).
Ajjhattika (adj.) [ajjhatta + ika], personal, inward (cp. Dhs trsl. 207 & Nd1 346: ajjhattikaŋ vuccati cittaŋ); opp. bāhira outward (q. v.). See also āyatana. -- M i.62; S i.73 (˚ā rakkhā na bāhirā); iv.7 sq. (āyatanāni); v.101 (anga); A i.16 (anga); ii.164 (dhātuyo); iii.400 (āyatanāni); v.52 (id.); It 114 (id.), 9 (anga); Kh iv. (= KhA 82); J iv.402 (bāhira -- vatthuŋ ayācitvā ajjhattikassa nāmaŋ gaṇhati); Dhs 673, 751; Vbh 13, 67, 82 sq., 119, 131, 392 sq.
Ajjhapara S v.218: substitute v. l. accasara (q. v.).
Ajjhappatta (& Ajjhapatta) [adhi + ā + *prāpta] 1. having reached, approached, coming near to J ii.450; vi.566 (p; C. attano santikaŋ patta). -- 2. having fallen upon, attacked J ii.59; v.198 (p; C. sampatta) -- 3. attained, found, got Sn 1134 (= adhigacchi Nd2); J iii.296 (p. C. sampatta); v.158 (ajjhāpatta; C. sampatta).
Ajjhabhavi 3rd sg. aor. of adhibhavati to conquer, over- power, overcome S i.240 (prohib. mā vo kodho ajjhabhavi); J ii.336. Cp. ajjhabhu & ajjhobhavati.
Ajjhabhāsi 3rd sg. aor. of adhibhāseti to address S iv.117 (gāthāhi); Kh v. = Sn p. 46 (gāthāya); PvA 56, 90.
Ajjhabhu (3rd sg. aor. of adhibhavati (q. v.) to overcome, conquer It 76 (dujjayaŋ a. he conquered him who is hard to conquer; v. l. ajjhabhi for ajjhabhavi). Cp. ajjhabhavi.
Ajjhayana (nt.) [adhi + i] study (learning by heart) of the Vedas Miln 225. See also ajjhena.
Ajjhavodahi 3rd sg. aor. of ajjhodahati [Sk. adhyavadhāti] to put down J v.365 (= odahi, ṭhapesi C.). Kern, Toev. s. v. proposes reading ajjhavādahi (= Sk. avādhāt).
Ajjhāgāre (adv.) [adhi + agāre, loc. of agāra] at home, in one's own house A i.132 = It 109; A ii.70.
Ajjhācarati [adhi (or ati?) + ā + car] 1. to conduct one- self according to Vin ii.301; M i.523; Miln 266. -- 2. to flirt with (perhaps to embrace) J iv.231 (aññam -- aññaŋ). pp. ajjhāciṇṇa. See also accāvadati & aticarati.
Ajjhācāra [to adhi (ati?) + ā + car] 1. minor conduct (conduct of a bhikkhu as to those minor rules not included in the Pārājika's or Saŋghādisesa's) Vin i.63 (see note in Vin. Texts, i.184. -- 2. flirtation Vin iii.128 (in the Old Cy as expln of avabhāsati). -- 3. sexual intercourse J i.396; v.327 (˚cara v. l. for ajjhāvara); Miln 127 (an˚).
Ajjhāciṇṇa [pp. of ajjhācarati] habitually done Vin ii.80 sq., 301.
Ajjhājīva [adhi (ati?) + ā + jīv] too rigorous or strenuous a livelihood M ii.245 (+ adhipāṭimokkha).
Ajjhāpajjati [adhi + ā + pad] to commit an offence, to incur, to become guilty of (acc.) Vin iv.237. pp. ajjhāpanna (q. v.).
Ajjhāpatti (f.) [abstr. to ajjhāpajjati] incurring guilt Dhs 299 (an˚).
Ajjhāpana1 (nt.) [fr. Caus. ii. of ajjheti] teaching of the sacred writ, instruction Miln 225.
Ajjhāpana2 (nt.) [ā + jhāpana fr. kṣā] burning, conflag- ration J vi.311.
Ajjhāpanna [pp. of adhi + āpajjati] become guilty of offence D i.245; iii.43; S ii.270; A iv.277, 280; v.178, 181. an˚ guiltless, innocent Vin i.103; D iii.46; S ii.194, 269; A v.181; Miln 401. For all passages except A iv.277, 280, cp. ajjhopanna.
Ajjhāpīḷita [adhi + ā + pīḷita] harassed, overpowered, tor- mented PvA 180 (khuppipāsāya by hunger & thirst).
Ajjhābhava [cp. Sk. adhyābhava] excessive power, predo- minance J ii.357.
Ajjhābhavati [adhi + ā + bhū, in meaning of abhi + bhu] to predominate J ii.357.
Ajjhāyaka [cp. Sk. adhyāyaka, cp. ajjhayana] (a brahmin) engaged in learning the Veda (mantajjhāyaka J vi.209; SnA 192), a scholar of the brahmanic texts, a studious, learned person D i.88, 120; iii.94; A i.163; iii.223; Sn 140 (˚kula: thus for ajjhāyakula Fsb.); Th 1, 1171; J i.3; vi.201, 498; DA i.247.
Ajjhāruha (& ˚rūha) (adj.) [to adhi + ā + ruh] growing up over, overwhelming A iii.63 sq. = S v.96; J iii.399.
Ajjhārūḷha (adj.) [pp. of adhi + ā + ruh] grown up or high over J iii.399.
Ajjhārūhati [adhi + ārohati cp. atyārohati] to rise into the air, to climb over, spread over S i.221 = Nett 173 (= ajjhottharati SA; cp. Mrs. Rh. D. Kindred Sayings i.285).
Ajjhāvadati see accāvadati.
Ajjhāvara [fr. adhi + ā + var] surrounding; waiting on, service, retinue J v.322, 324, 326, 327 (expld at all passages by parisā). Should we read ajjhācara? Cp. ajjhācāra.
Ajjhāvasatar [n. ag. to ajjhāvasati] one who inhabits D i.63 (agāraŋ).
Ajjhāvasati [adhi + ā + vas] to inhabit (agāraŋ a house; i. e. to be settled or live the settled life of a householder) D ii.16; M i.353; Vin iv.224; J i.50; Pug 57; Miln 348. -- pp. ajjhāvuttha (q. v.).
Ajjhāvuttha [cp. Sk. adhyuṣita; pp. of ajjhāvasati] inhabited, occupied (of a house) Vin ii.210; J i.145; ii.333; PvA 24 (˚ghara); fig. (not) occupied by SnA 566 (= anosita).
Ajjhāsaya [fr. adhi + ā + śri, orig. hanging on, leaning on, BSk. however adhyāśaya Divy 586] intention, desire, wish, disposition, bent D ii.224 (adj.: intent on, practising); J i.88, 90; ii.352; v.382; DhsA 314, 334; PvA 88, 116, 133 (adj. dān˚ intent on giving alms), 168; Sdhp 219, 518. Freq. in phrase ajjhāsayânurūpa according to his wish, as he wanted PvA 61, 106, 128.
Ajjhāsayatā (f.) [abstr. to ajjhāsaya] desire, longing PvA 127 (uḷār˚ great desire for c. loc.).
Ajjhāsita [pp. of adhi + ā + śri] intent on, bent on Miln 361 (jhān˚). Cp. ajjhosita & nissita.
Ajjhiṭṭha [pp. of ajjhesati] requested, asked, invited Vin i.113 (an˚ unbidden); D ii.289 (Buddhaghosa and text read ajjhitta); Sn p. 218 (= ajjhesita Nd2 16); J vi.292 (= āṇatta C.); DhA iv.100 (v. l. abhijjhiṭṭha). See also an˚.
Ajjhupagacchati [adhi + upa + gam] to come to, to reach, obtain; to consent to, agree, submit Th 2, 474 (= sampaṭicchati ThA 285); J ii.403; Miln 300; pp. ajjhupagata (q. v.).
Ajjhupagata [pp. of ajjhupagacchati] come to, obtained, reached A v.87, cp. 210; v.187 sq.
Ajjhupagamana (nt.) [adhi + upa + gam] consent, agree- ment, justification Vin ii.97, 104.
Ajjhupaharati [adhi + upa + hṛ; cp. upaharati] to take (food) to oneself J ii.293 (aor. ajjhupāhari = ajjhohari C.).
Ajjhupekkhati [adhi + upa + ikṣ; cp. BSk. adhyupek- ṣati] 1. to look on A i.257; Miln 275. -- 2. to look on intently or with care, to oversee, to take care of A iv.45 (kaṭṭhɔaggi, has to be looked after); PvA 149 (sisaŋ colaŋ vā). -- 3. to look on indifferently to be indifferent, to neglect Vin ii.78 = iii.162, cp. J i.147; M i.155; ii.223; A iii.194, 435; J v.229; DhA iv.125.
Ajjhupekkhana (nt.) & ˚ā (f.) [abstr. from ajjhupekkhati] care, diligence, attention Ps i.16; ii.119; Vbh 230 sq.; DhA iv.3.
Ajjhupekkhitar [n. ag. to ajjhupekkhati] one who looks on (carefully), one who takes care or controls, an overseer, caretaker S v.69 (sādhukaŋ), 324 (id.), 331 sq.; Vbh 227.
Ajjhupeti [cp. Sk. abhyupeti; adhi + upa + i] to go to meet, to receive J iv.440.
Ajjheti [Sk. ādhyāyati, Denom. fr. adhyāya] to be anxious about, to fret, worry Sn 948 (socati +); expld at Nd1 433 by nijjhāyati, at SnA 568 by abhijjhati (gloss BB gijjhati).
Ajjhena (nt.) [Sk. adhyayana, see also ajjhayana] study (esp. of the Vedas) M iii.1; J ii.327 (as v. l. to be preferred to ajjhesanā); iii.114 (= japa); v.10 (pl. = vede); vi.201 = 207; Vbh 353; SnA 314 (mantɔ).
-- kujja (˚kūta v. l.?) a hypocrite, a pharisee Sn 242; cp. SnA 286.
Ajjhesati (adhi + iṣ; cp. BSk. adhyeṣate Divy 160] to request, ask, bid DhA iv.18; aor. ajjhesi Vin ii.200; pp. ajjhiṭṭha & ajjhesita (q. v.), with which cp. pariyiṭṭha & ˚esita.
Ajjhesanā (f.) [see ajjhesati] request, entreaty Vin i.6 = D ii.38 = S i.138; J ii.327 (better v. l. ajjhena).
Ajjhesita [pp. of ajjhesati; cp. ajjhiṭṭha] requested, asked, bidden Nd2 16 (= ajjhiṭṭha).
Ajjhokāsa [adhi + okāsa] the open air, only in loc. ajjho- kāse in the open Vin i.15; S i.212; DhA iv.100.
Ajjhogāḷha [pp. of ajjhogāhati] plunged into, immersed; having entered M i.457; S i.201; Miln 348.
Ajjhogāhati (& ˚gāheti) [Sk. *abhyavagāhate; adhi (= abhi) + ava + gāh] to plunge into, to enter, to go into D i.101 (vanaŋ), 222 (samuddaŋ); M i.359, 536; A iii.75, 368; iv.356; v.133; Vin iii.18; J i.7; Nd1 152 (ogāhati +); Miln 87 (samuddaŋ); 300 (vanaŋ). -- pp. ajjhogāḷha (q. v.). Cp. pariyogāhati.
Ajjhoṭhapeti [adhi + ava + ṭhapeti, Caus. of sthā] to bring to PvA 148 (gāmaŋ), where we should read ˚ṭṭhapeti.
Ajjhotthata [pp. of ajjhottharati] spread over; covered, filled; overcome, crushed, overpowered J i.363 (ajjhottaṭa), 410; v.91 (= adhipanna); DhA i.278; PvA 55; Dāvs v.5.
Ajjhottharati [adhi + ava + stṛ] to cover over, spread out, spread over, cover; to submerge, flood Vin i.111; J i.61, 72, 73; Miln 296, 336; Dh i.264; Pass. ˚tthariyati to be overrun with (instr.), to be smothered, to be flooded A iii.92 = Pug 67; aor. ajjhotthari VvA 48 (gāmapadeso: was flooded). pp. ajjhotthata (q. v.).
Ajjhopanna (?) only found in one stock phrase, viz. gathita (q. v.) mucchita ajjhopanna with ref. to selfishness, greed, bonds of craving. The reading ajjhopanna is the lectio difficilior, but the accredited reading ajjhosāna seems to be clearer and to harmonize better with the cognate ajjhosita & ajjhosāna (n.) in the same context. The confusion between the two is old -- standing and hard to be accounted for. Trenckner under v. l. to M i.162 on p. 543 gives ajjhopanna as BB (= adhi -- opanna). The MSS. of Nd2 clearly show ajjhopanna as inferior reading, which may well be attributable to the very frequent SS substitution of p for s (see Nd2 Introd. xix.). Besides this mixture of vv. ll. with s and p there is another confusion between the vv. ll. ajjhāpanna and ajjhopanna which adds to the complication of the case. However since the evidence of a better reading between these two preponderates for ajjhopanna we may consider the o as established, and, with a little more clearness to be desired, may in the end decide for ajjhosāna (q. v.), which in this case would have been liable to change through analogy with ajjhāpanna, from which it took the ā and p. Cp. also ajjhosita. The foll. is a synopsis of readings as preferred or confused by the Ed. of the var. texts. -- 1. ajjhopanna as T. reading: M i.162, 173, 369; A i.74; ii.28; iii.68, 242; Md 75, 76; DA i.59; as v. l.: D i.245. <-> 2. ajjhosāna as v. l.: A i.74 (C. expls. ajjhosāya gilitvā ṭhita); Nd2 under nissita & passim; Ud 75, 76 (ajjhosanna); DA i.59 (id.). -- 3. ajjhāpanna as T. reading: D i.245; iii.43, 46; S. ii.194, 270: iv.332 (ajjhapaṇṇa); A v.178, 181; Nd2 under nissita; Miln 401; as v. l.: M i.162; A iii.242; Ud 75, 76.
Ajjhobhavati [adhi + ava + bhu, Sk. abhi˚] to overcome, overpower, destroy J ii.80 (aor. ajjhobhavi = adhibhavi C.).
Ajjhomaddati [adhi + ava + mṛd] to crush down A iv.191, 193.
Ajjhomucchita [pp. adhi + ava + mūrch, cp. adhimuccita] stiffened out (in a swoon), lying in a faint (?) A iii.57 sq. (v. l. ajjhomuñcïta or ˚muccita better: sarīre attached to her body, clinging to her b.).
Ajjholambati [adhi + ava + lamb] to hang or hold on to (acc.), to cling to S iii 137; M iii.164 = Nett 179, cp. Sdhp 284 & 296.
Ajjhosa = ajjhosāya, in verse only as ajjhosa tiṭṭhati to cleave or cling to S iv.73; Th 1, 98, 794.
Ajjhosati [adhi + ava + sayati, sā, to bind, pp. sita: see ajjhosita] to be bound to, to be attached, bent on; to desire, cleave to, indulge in. Fut. ajjhosissati (does it belong here?) M i.328 (c. acc. paṭhaviŋ, better as ajjhesati). grd. ajjhositabha M i.109 (+ abhinanditabba, v. l. ˚etabba); DhsA 5 (id.); ger. ajjhosāya (q. v.) pp. ajjhosita (q. v.).
Ajjhosāna (nt.) cleaving to (earthly joys), attachment, D ii.58 sq.; iii.289; M i.498 (+ abhinandana); S iii.187; A i.66; ii.11 (diṭṭhi˚, kāma˚ + taṇhā). In combn. with (icchā) and mucchā at Nd2 under chanda & nissita and taṇhā (see also ajjhopanna), and at Dhs 1059 of lābha, (the expln. at DhsA 363, 370, from as to eat, is popular etym.) Nett 23 sq. (of taṇhā).
Ajjhosāya [ger. of ajjhosati, cp. BSk. adhyavasāya tiṣṭhati Divy 37, 534] being tied to, hanging on, attached to, only in phrase a. tiṭṭhati (+ abhinandati, same in Divy) M i.266; S. iv.36 sq.; 60, 71 sq.; Miln 69. See also ajjhosa.
Ajjhosita [cp. Sk. adhyavasita, from adhi + ava + sā; but sita is liable to confusion with sita = Sk. śrita, also through likeness of meaning with esita; see ajjhāsita & ajjhesita] hanging on, cleaving to, being bent on, (c. loc.) S ii.94 (+ mamāyita); A ii.25 (diṭṭha suta muta +); Nd1 75, 106, 163 = Nd2 under nissita; Th 2, 470 (asāre = taṇhāvasena abhiniviṭṭha ThA 284); Pv iv.84 (mayhaŋ ghare = taṇhābhinivisena abhiniviṭṭha PvA 267; v. l. BB ajjhesita, SS ajjhāsita). -- an˚ S iv.213; v.319; Nd1 411; Miln 74 (pabbajita).
Ajjhohata [pp. of ajjhoharati] having swallowed Sdhp 610 (balisaŋ maccho viya: like a fish the fishhook).
Ajjhoharaṇa (nt.) = ajjhohāra 1. A v.324; J vi.213.
Ajjhoharaṇiya (adj.) [grd. of ajjhoharati] something fit to eat, eatable, for eating J vi.258; DhA i.284.
Ajjhoharati [Sk. abhyavaharati; adhi (= abhi) + ava + hṛ] to swallow, eat, take as food M i.245; J i.460; ii.293; vi.205, 213; Miln 366; PvA 283 (aor.) -- pp. ajjhohaṭa (q.v.).
Ajjhohāra [Sk. abhyavahāra] 1. taking food, swallowing, eating & drinking Vin iv.233; Miln 176, 366. -- 2. N. of a fabulous fish (swallower"; cp. timingala) J v.462.
Añcati J i.417, read añchati (see next).
Añchati [in meaning = ākaḍḍhati, which latter is also the Sk. gloss (ākārṣayati) to the Jain Prk. aŋchāvei = añchati: see Morris, J. P. T. S. 1893, 60] to pull, drag, pull along, to turn on a lathe D ii.291 (bhamakāro dīghaŋ a., where K has note: añjanto ti pi acchanto ti pi pātho) = M i.56 (vv. ll. p. 532 acch˚ & añj˚); Th 1, 750 (añcāmi T., v.l. aññāmi). Añchati should also be read at J i 417 for udakaŋ añcanti (in expln. of udañcanī pulling the water up from a well, q. v.), where it corresponds to udakaŋ ākkaḍḍhati in the same sentence.
Añja (adv.) [orig. imper. of añjati1; cp. Sk. anjasā (instr.) quickly, Goth. anaks suddenly, lit. with a pull or jerk] pull on! go on! gee up! J i.192.
Añjati1 [= Sk. ṛñjati, ṛjyati to stretch, pull along, draw out, erect; cp. Sk. ṛju straight, caus. irajyati; Gr. o)re/gw; Lat. rego, rectus = erect. See also P. uju, añchati, ajjita, ānañja -- ānejja]. See añja, añjaya, añjali, añjasa.
Añjati2 & Añjeti [= Sk. añjayati, Caus. of anakti to smear etc.; cp. Sk. añji ointment, ājya butter; Lat. unguo to anoint, unguentum ointment; Ohg. ancho = Ger. Anke butter] to smear, anoint, paint S ii.281; J iv.219 (akkhīni añjetvā, v. l. BB añcitvā). Caus. ii. añjāpeti DhA i.21. <-> pp. añjita (q. v.).
Añjana (nt.) [from añjati2] ointment, esp. a collyrium for the eyes, made of antimony, adj. anointed, smeary; glossy, black (cp. kaṇha ii. and kāla1 note). -- 1. Vin i.203 (five kinds viz. kāḷ˚, ras˚, sot˚, geruka, kapalla); D i.7, 12; DA i.98 (khār˚); 284; DhA iii.354 (akkhi˚ eye -- salve). -- 2. glossy, jet -- black J i.194; ii.369; v.416. The reading añjana at A iv.468 is wrong, it should be corrected into thanamajjanamattaŋ. See also pacc˚. In meaning collyrium box at Th 2, 413 (= añjana -- nāḷi ThA 267); DhA ii.25.
-- akkhiha with anointed eyes Th 1, 960. -- upapisana perfume to mix with ointment Vin i.203; ii.112. -- cuṇṇa aromatic powder DhsA 13. -- nāḷi an ointment tube, collyrium box ThA 267. -- rukkha N. of a tree ("black" tree) J i.331. -- vaṇṇa of the colour of collyrium, i. e. shiny, glossy, dark, black D ii.18 (lomāni); J i.138 (kesā), 194; ii.369; PvA 258 (vana).
Añjanī (f.) [fr. añjana] a box for ointment, a collyrium pot Vin i.203, 204; ii.135; iv.168; M ii.65 = Th 1, 773.
Añjanisalākā (f.) a stick to put the ointment on with Vin i.203; ii.135; J iii.419.
Añjaya (adj.) [from añjati1] straight J iii.12 (vv. ll. ajjava & and ājjava better?) expld by C. as ujuka, akuṭila. See also ajjava. Should we assume misreading for añjasa?
Añjali [cp. Sk. añjali, fr. añjati1] extending, stretching forth, gesture of lifting up the hands as a token of reverence (cp. E. to "tender" one's respect), putting the ten fingers together and raising them to the head (VvA 7: dasanakha -- samodhāna -- samujjalaŋ añjaliŋ paggayha). Only in stock phrases (a.) añjaliŋ paṇāmeti to bend forth the outstretched hands Vin ii.188; D i.118; Sn 352; Sn p. 79. (b.) ˚ŋ paggaṇhāti to perform the a. salutation J i.54; DhA iv.212; VvA 7, 312 (sirasmiŋ on one's head); PvA 93. (c.) ˚ŋ karoti id. PvA 178; cp. katañjali (adj.) with raised hands Sn 1023; J i.17; PvA 50, and añjalikata id. Pv ii.1220. Cp. pañjali
-- kamma respectful salutation, as above A i.123; ii.180; iv.130; Vv 788, 8316; DhA i.32. -- karaṇīya (adj.) that is worthy of being thus honoured D iii.5; A ii.34; iii.36; iv.13 sq.; It 88.
Añjalikā (f.) [= añjali] the raising of the hands as a sign of respectful salutation Vv 15 (expld at VvA 24 as dasanakha -- samodhāna samujjalaŋ añjaliŋ sirasi paggaṇhantī guṇa -- visiṭṭhānaŋ apacayānaŋ akāsiŋ).
Añjasa [Sk. āñjasa (?). Cp. ārjava = P. ajjava, see añjati1 & añjaya] straight, straightforward (of a road) D i.235; J i.5; Th 2, 99; Vv 5020 (cp. VvA 215); VvA 84 (= akuṭila); Mhvs 25, 5; Miln 217; Sdhp 328, 595. Cp. pañjasa.
Añjita [Sk. ankta & añjayita, pp. of añjeti] smeared, anointed J i.77 (su -- añjitāni akkhīni); iv.421 (añjitɔakkha).
Añña (pron.) [Vedic anya, with compar. suff. ya; Goth. anpar; Ohg. andar; formation with n analagous to those with l in Gr. a)/llos (a)/ljos), Lat. alius (cp. alter), Goth. aljis Ags. elles = E. else. From demonstr. base *eno, see na1 and cp. a3] another etc. -- A. By itself: 1. other, not the same, different, another, somebody else (opp. oneself) Vin iii.144 (aññena, scil. maggena, gacchati to take a different route); Sn 459, 789, 904; Dh 158 (opp. attānaŋ), 165; J i.151 (opp. attano); ii.333 (aññaŋ vyākaroti give a diff. answer). -- 2. another one, a second; nt. else, further Sn 1052 (= uttariŋ nt. Nd2 17); else J i.294. aññaŋ kiñci (indef.) anything else J i.151. yo añño every other, whoever else J i.256. -- 3. aññe (pl.) (the) others, the rest Sn 189, 663, 911; Dh 43, 252, 355; J i.254. -- B. del. in correlation: 1. copulative. añña . . añña the one . . the other (. . the third etc.); this, that & the other; some . . some Vin i.15; Miln 40; etc. <-> 2. reciprocative añño aññaŋ, aññamaññaŋ, aññoññaŋ one another, each other, mutually, reciprocally (in ordinary construction & declension of a noun or adj. in sg.; cp. Gr. a)llh/lwn, allh/lous in pl.). (a.) añño aññaŋ Dh 165. (b.) aññamañña (cp. BSk. añyamañya M Vastu ii.436), as pron.: n'ālaŋ aññamaññassa sukhāya vā dukkhāya vā D i.56 = S iii 211. n'aññamaññassa dukkhaŋ iccheyya do not wish evil to each other Sn 148. daṇḍehi aññamaññaŋ upakkamanti (approach each other) M i.86 = Nd2 199. ˚ŋ agāravo viharati A iii.247. dve janā ˚ŋ ghātayiŋsu (slew each other) J i.254. aññamaññaŋ hasanti J v.111; ˚ŋ musale hantvā J v.267. ˚ŋ daṇḍâbhigāṭena PvA 58; or adj.: aññamaññaŋ veraŋ bandhiŋsu (established mutual enmity) J ii.353; ˚ŋ piyasaŋvāsaŋ vasiŋsu J ii.153; aññamaññaŋ accayaŋ desetvā (their mutual mistake) DhA i.57; or adv. dve pi aññamaññaŋ paṭibaddha citta ahesuŋ (in love with each other) J iii.188; or ˚ -- : aññamañña -- paccaya mutually dependent, interrelated Ps ii.49, 58. <-> (c.) aññoñña (˚ -- ) J v.251 (˚nissita); Dāvs v.45 (˚bhinna). -- 3. disjunctive añña . . añña one . . the other, this one . . . that one, different, different from aññaŋ jīvaŋ . . aññaŋ sarīraŋ one is the soul . . the other is the body, i. e. the soul is different from the body D i.157; M i.430; A v.193; aññā va saññā bhavissati añño attā D i.187. Thus also in phrase aññena aññaŋ opposite, the contrary, differently, contradictory (lit. other from that which is other) Vin ii.85 (paṭicarati make counter -- charges); D i.57 (vyākāsi gave the opposite or contradictory reply); Miln 171 (aññaŋ kayiramānaŋ aññena sambharati). <-> anañña (1) not another, i. e. the same, self -- same, identical M i.256 (= ayaŋ). -- (2) not anotber, i. e. alone, by oneself, oneself only Sn 65 (˚posin; opp. paraŋ) = Nd 4, cp. Nd2 36. -- (3) not another, i. e. no more, only, alone Sn p. 106 (dve va gatiyo bhavanti anaññā: and no other or no more, only two). See also under cpds.
-- ādisa different J vi.212, ˚tā difference PvA 243. -- khantika acquiescing in diff. views, following another faith (see khantika) D i.187; M i.487. -- titthiya an adherent of another sect, a non -- Buddhist.; D iii.115; M i.494, 512; P ii.21, 32 sq., 119; iii.116 sq.; iv.51, 228; v.6, 27 sq.; A i.65, 240; ii.176; iv.35 sq.; Vin i.60; J i.93; ii.415. -- diṭṭhika having diff. views (combd. with añña -- khantika) D i.187; M i.487. -- neyya (an˚) not to be guided by somebody else, i. e. independent in one's views, having attained the right knowledge by oneself (opp. para˚) Sn 55, 213, 364. -- mano (an˚) (adj.) not setting one's heart upon others Vv 115 (see VvA 58). -- vāda holding other views, an˚ (adj.) Dpvs iv.24. -- vādaka one who gives a diff. account of things, one who distorts a matter, a prevaricator Vin iv.36. -- vihita being occupied with something else, distracted, absent -- minded Vin iv.269; DhA iii.352, 381; ˚tā distraction, absentmindedness DhA i.181. -- saraṇa (an˚) not betaking oneself to others for refuge, i. e. of independent, sure knowledge S iii.42 = v.154. -- sita dependent or relying on others Sn 825.
Aññatama (pron. adj.) [añña + superl. suff. tama; see also aññatara] one out of many, the one or the other of, a certain, any Mhvs 38, 14.
Aññatara (pron. adj.) [Sk. anyatara, añña + compar. suff. tara, cp. Lat. alter, Goth. anpar etc.] one of a certain number, a certain, somebody, some; often used (like eka) as indef. article "a". Very frequent, e. g. Sn 35, 210; It 103; Dh 137, 157; J i.221, 253; ii.132 etc. devaññatara a certain god, i. e. any kind of god S iv.180 = A iv.461.
Aññattha (adv.) [from añña = aññatra, adv. of place, cp. kattha, ettha] somewhere or anywhere else, elsewhere (either place where or whereto) J i.291; ii.154; DhsA 163; DhA i.212; iii.351; PvA 45; Mhvs 4, 37; 22, 14.
Aññatra (adv.) [anya + tra, see also aññattha] elsewhere, somewhere else J v.252; Pv iv.162. In compn. also = añña˚, e. g. aññatra -- yoga (adj.) following another discipline D i.187; M i.487. -- As prep. c. abl. (and instr.) but, besides, except, e. g. a. iminā tapo -- pakkamena D i.168; kiŋ karaṇīyaŋ a. dhammacariyāya S i.101; ko nu aññatram -- ariyehi who else but the Nobles Sn 886 (= ṭhapetvā saññā -- mattena SnA 555). -- kiŋ aññatra what but, i. e. what else is the cause but, or: this is due to; but for D i.90 (vusitavā -- mānī k. a. avusitattā); S i.29 (k. k. a. adassanā except from blindness); Sn 206 (id.).
Aññathatta (nt.) [aññathā + tta] 1. change, alteration S iii.37; iv.40; A i.153; iii.66; Kvu 227 (= jarā C, cp. Kvu trsl. 55 n. 2); Miln 209. -- 2. difference J i.147; It 11. -- 3. erroneous supposition, mistake Vin ii.2; S iii.91; iv.329. -- 4. fickleness, change of mind, doubt, wavering, M i.448, 457 (+ domanassa); J i.33 (cittaŋ); PvA 195 (cittassa).
Aññathā (adv.) [añña + thā] in a different manner, other- wise, differently S i.24; Sn 588, 757; DhsA 163; PvA 125, 133. anaññathā without mistake Vv 4418; anaññatha (nt.) certainty, truth Ps ii.104 (= tatha).
-- bhāva (1) a different existence A ii.10; It 9 = 94; Sn 729, 740, 752; (2) a state of difference; i. e. change, alteration, unstableness D i.36; S ii.274; iii.8, 16, 42; Vbh 379. -- bhāvin based on difference S iii.225 sq.; iv.23 sq., 66 sq.; an˚ free from difference Vin i.36.
Aññadatthu (adv.) [lit. aññad atthu let there be anything else, i. e. be it what it will, there is nothing else, all, everything, surely] part. of affirmation = surely, all -- round, absolutely (ekaŋsa -- vacane nipāto DA i.111) only, at any rate D i.91; ii.284; Sn 828 (na hɔ aññadatthɔ atthi pasaŋsa -- lābhā, expld. SnA 541 as na hi ettha pasaŋsa -- lābhato añño attho atthi, cp. also Nd1 168); Miln 133; VvA 58; PvA 97, 114.
-- dasa sure -- seeing, seeing everything, all pervading D i.18; iii.135, 185; A ii.24; iii.202; iv.89, 105; It 15.
Aññadā (adv.) [añña + dā, cp. kadā, tadā, yadā] at another time, else, once S iv.285; J v.12; DhA iv.125.
Aññā (f.) [Sk. ājñā, = ā + jñā, cp. ājānāti] knowledge, recognition, perfect knowledge, philosophic insight, knowledge par excellence, viz. Arahantship, saving knowledge, gnosis (cp. on term Compend. 176 n. 3 and Psalms of Brethren introd. xxxiii.) M i.445; S i.4 (sammad˚), 24 (aññāya nibbuta); ii.221; v.69, 129 (diṭṭhɔeva dhamme), 133, 237; A iii.82, 143, 192; v.108; It 39 sq., 53, 104; Dh 75, 96; Kh vii.11; Miln 334. -- aññaŋ vyākaroti to manifest ones Arahantship (by a discourse or by mere exclamation) Vin i.183; S ii.51 sq., 120; iv.139; v.222; J i.140; ii.333. See also arahatta.
-- atthika desirous of higher knowledge Pv iv.114. -- ārādhana the attainment of full insight M i.479. -- indriya the faculty of perfect knowledge or of knowledge made perfect D iii.219; S v.204; It 53; Pug 2; Dhs 362, 505, 552; Nett 15, 54, 60. -- citta the thought of gnosis, the intention of gaining Arahantship S ii.267; A iii.437. -- paṭivedha comprehension of insight Vin ii.238. -- vimokkha deliverance by the highest insight Sn 1105, 1107 (Nd2 19: vuccati arahatta -- vimokkho).
Aññāṇa (nt.) [a + ñāṇa] ignorance; see ñāṇa 3 e.
Aññāṇaka (nt.) [Demin. of aññāṇa] ignorance Vin iv.144.
Aññāṇin (adj.) [a + ñāṇin] ignorant, not knowing DhA iii.106.
Aññāta1 [pp. of ājānāti, q. v.] known, recognised Sn 699. an˚ what is not known, in phrase anaññāta -- ññassāmīɔ tɔ indriya the faculty of him (who believes): "I shall know what is not known (yet)" D iii.219; S v.204; It 53; Pug 2; Dhs 296 (cp. Dhs trsl. 86); Nett 15, 54, 60, 191.
-- mānin one who prides himself in having perfect knowledge, one who imagines to be in possession of right insight A iii.175 sq.; Th 1, 953.
Aññāta2 [a + ñāta] unknown, see ñāta.
Aññātaka1 [a + ñātaka, cp. Sk. ajñāti] he who is not a kinsman DhA i.222.
Aññātaka2 (adj.) [Demin. of aññāta2] unknown, unrecog- nisable, only in phrase ˚vesena in unknown form, in disguise J i.14; iii.116; v.102.
Aññātar [n. ag. to ājānāti] one who knows, a knower of D ii.286; M i.169; S i.106 (dhammassa); Kvu 561.
Aññātāvin (adj. -- n.) [from ājānāti] one who has complete insight DhsA 291.
-- indriya (˚tāvɔ indr.) the faculty of one whose knowledge is made perfect Dhs 555 (cp. Dhs trsl. 150) and same loci as under aññindriya (see aññā).
Aññātukāma (adj.) [ā + jñātuŋ + kāma] desirous of gaining right knowledge A iii.192. See ājānāti.
Aññāya [ger. of ājānāti, q. v. for detail] reeognising, knowing, in the conviction of S i.24; A iii.41; Dh 275, 411.
Aññoñña see añña B 2 c.
Añhamāna [Sk. aśnāna, ppr. med. of aśnāti, aś to eat] eating, taking food; enjoying: only SS at Sn 240; all MSS at 239 have asamāna. SnA 284 expls. by āhārayamāna.
Aṭaṭa [BSk. aṭaṭa (e. g. Divy 67), prob. to aṭ roam about. On this notion cp. description of roaming about in Niraya at Nd1 405 bottom] N. of a certain purgatory or Niraya A v.173 = Sn p. 126.
Aṭaṇaka (adj.) [cp. Sk. aṭana, to aṭ] roaming about, wild J v.105 (˚gāvī).
Aṭanī (f.) a support a stand inserted under the leg of a bedstead Vin iv.168; Sām. Pās. on Pāc. 14 (quoted Min. Pāt. 86 and Vin iv.357); DhA i.234; J ii.387, 425, 484 supports of a seat. Morris J. P. T. S. 1884, 69 compares Marāthi aḍaṇī a three -- legged stand. See also Vin Texts ii.53.
Aṭala (adj.) [cp. Sk. aṭṭa & aṭṭālaka stronghold] solid, firm, strong, only in phrase aṭaliyo upāhanā strong sandals M ii.155 (vv. ll. paṭaliye & agaliyo) = S i.226 (vv. ll. āṭaliyo & āṭaliko). At the latter passage Bdhgh. expls. gaṇangaṇ -- ûpāhanā, Mrs. Rh. D. (Kindred Sayings i.291) trsls. "buskined shoes".
Aṭavī (f.) [Sk. aṭavī: Non -- Aryan, prob. Dravidian] 1. forest, woods J i.306; ii.117; iii.220; DhA i.13; PvA 277. <-> 2. inhabitant of the forest, man of the woods, wild tribe J vi.55 (= aṭavicorā C.).
-- rakkhika guardian of the forest J ii.335. -- sankhepa at A i.178 = iii.66 is prob. faulty reading for v. l. ˚sankopa "inroad of savage tribes".
Aṭṭa1 [cp. see aṭṭaka] a platform to be used as a watch- tower Vin i.140; DA i.209.
Aṭṭa2 [cp. Sk. artha, see also attha 5 b] lawsuit, case, cause Vin iv.224; J ii.2, 75; iv.129 (˚ŋ vinicchināti to judge a cause), 150 (˚ŋ tīreti to see a suit through); vi.336.
Aṭṭa3 [Sk. ārta, pp. of ardati, ṛd to dissolve, afflict etc.; cp. Sk. ārdra (= P. adda and alla); Gr. a)/rdw to moisten, a)/rda dirt. See also aṭṭīyati & aṭṭita] distressed, tormented, afflicted; molested, plagued, hurt Sn 694 (+ vyasanagata; SnA 489 ātura); Th 2, 439 (= aṭṭita ThA 270), 441 (= pīḷita ThA 271); J iv.293 (= ātura C.); Vv 809 (= attita upadduta VvA 311). Often -- ˚: iṇaṭṭa oppressed by debt M i.463; Miln 32; chāt˚ tormented by hunger VvA 76; vedan˚ afflicted by pain Vin ii.61; iii.100; J i.293; sūcik˚ (read for sūcikaṭṭha) pained by stitch Pv iii.23.
-- ssara cry of distress Vin iii.105; S ii.255; J i.265; ii.117; Miln 357; PvA 285.
Aṭṭaka [Demin. of aṭṭa1] a platform to be used as a watch- house on piles, or in a tree Vin i.173; ii.416; iii.322, 372; DA i.209.
Aṭṭāna at Vin ii.106 is obscure, should it not rather be read with Bdhgh as aṭṭhāna? (cp. Bdhgh on p. 315).
Aṭṭāla [from aṭṭa] a watch -- tower, a room at the top of a house, or above a gate (koṭṭhaka) Th 1, 863; J iii.160; v.373; Miln 1, 330; DhA iii.488.
Aṭṭālaka [Sk. aṭṭālaka] = aṭṭāla; J ii.94, 220, 224; vi.390, 433; Miln 66, 81.
Aṭṭita (& occasionally addita, e. g. Pv ii.62; Th 2, 77, 89; Th 1, 406) [Sk. ardita, pp. of ardayati, Caus. of ardati, see aṭṭa3] pained, distressed, grieved, terrified Th 1, 157; J ii.436; iv.85 (v. l. addhita); v.84; VvA 311; ThA 270; Mhvs 1, 25; 6, 21; Dpvs i.66; ii.23; xiii.9; Sdhp 205. <-> See remarks of Morris J. P. T. S. 1886, 104, & 1887. 47.
Aṭṭiyati & Aṭṭiyati [Denom. fr. aṭṭa3, q. v.] to be in trouble or anxiety, to be worried, to be incommodated, usually combd. with harāyati, e. g. D i.213 (+ jigucchati); S i.131; M i.423; Pv i.102 (= aṭṭā dukkhitā PvA 48), freq. in ppr. aṭṭiyamāna harayāmāna (+ jigucchamāna) Vin ii.292; J i.66, 292; It 43; Nd2 566; Ps i.159. <-> Spelling sometimes addiyāmi, e. g. Th 2, 140. -- pp. aṭṭita & addita.
Aṭṭiyana (nt.) [cp. Sk. ardana, to aṭṭiyati] fright, terror, amazement DhA ii.179.
Aṭṭha1 [Vedic aṣṭau, old dual, Idg. *octou, pointing to a system of counting by tetrads (see also nava); Av. ašta, Gr. o)ktw/, Lat. octo, Goth. ahtau = Ohg. ahto, Ger. acht, E. eight] num. card, eight, decl. like pl. of adj. in -- a. A. The number in objective significance, based on natural phenomena: see cpds. ˚angula, ˚nakha, ˚pada, ˚pāda. B. The number in subjective significance. -- (1) As mark of respectability and honour, based on the idea of the double square: (a) in meaning "a couple" aṭṭha matakukkuṭe aṭṭha jīva -- k. gahetvā (with 8 dead & 8 live cocks; eight instead of 2 because gift intended for a king) DhA i.213. sanghassa a salākabhattaŋ dāpesi VvA 75 = DhA iii.104. a. piṇḍapātāni adadaŋ Vv 348. a. vattha -- yugāni (a double pair as offering) PvA 232, a therā PvA 32. -- The highest respectability is expressed by 8 X 8 = 64, and in this sense is freq. applied to gifts, where the giver gives a higher potency of a pair (23). Thus a "royal" gift goes under the name of sabb -- aṭṭhakaŋ dānaŋ (8 elephants, 8 horses, 8 slaves etc.) where each of 8 constituents is presented in 8 exemplars DhA ii.45, 46, 71. In the same sense aṭṭhɔ aṭṭha kahāpaṇā (as gift) DhA ii.41; aṭṭh -- aṭṭhakā dibbākaññā Vv 673 (= catusaṭṭhi VvA 290); aṭṭhaṭṭhaka Dpvs vi.56. Quite conspicuous is the meaning of a "couple" in the phrase satt -- aṭṭha 7 or 8 = a couple, e. g. sattaṭṭha divasā, a weck or so J i.86; J ii.101; VvA 264 (saŋvaccharā years). -- (b.) used as definite measure of quantity & distance, where it also implies the respectability of the gift, 8 being the lowest unit of items that may be given decently. Thus freq. as aṭṭha kahāpaṇā J i.483; iv.138; VvA 76; Miln 291. -- In distances: a. karīsā DhA ii.80; iv.217; PvA 258; a. usabhā J iv.142. <-> (c.) in combn. with 100 and 1000 it assumes the meaning of "a great many", hundreds, thousands. Thus aṭṭha sataŋ 800, Sn 227. As denotation of wealt (cp. below under 18 and 80): a -- ˚sata -- sahassa -- vibhava DhA iv.7. But aṭṭhasata at S iv.232 means 108 (3 X 36), probably also at J v.377. -- aṭṭha sahassaŋ 8000 J v.39 (nāgā). The same meaning applies to 80 as well as to its use as unit in combn. with any other decimal (18, 28, 38 etc.): (a) 80 (asīti) a great many. Here belong the 80 smaller signs of a Mahāpurisa (see anuvyañjana), besides the 32 main signs (see dvattiŋsa) VvA 213 etc. Freq. as measure of riches, e. g. 80 waggon loads Pv ii.75; asīti -- koṭivibhava DhA iii.129; PvA 196; asīti hatthɔ ubbedho rāsi (of gold) VvA 66, etc. See further references under asīti. -- (b) The foll. are examples of 8 with other decimals: 18 aṭṭhādasa (only M iii.239: manopavicārā) & aṭṭhārasa (this the later form) VvA 213 (avenika -- buddhadhammā: Bhagavant's qualities); as measure J vi.432 (18 hands high, of a fence); of a great mass or multitue: aṭṭhārasa koṭiyo or ˚koṭi, 18 koṭis J i.92 (of gold), 227; iv.378 (˚dhana, riches); DhA ii.43 (of people); Miln 20 (id.); a. akkhohini -- sankhāsenā J vi.395. a. vatthū Vin ii.204. -- 28 aṭṭhavīsati nakkhattāni Nd1 382; paṭisallāṇaguṇā Miln 140. -- 38 aṭṭhatiŋsā Miln 359 (rājaparisā). -- 48 aṭṭhacattārīsaŋ vassāni Sn 289. -- 68 aṭṭhasaṭṭhi Th 1, 1217 ˚sitā savitakkā, where id. p. at S i.187 however reads atha saṭṭhi -- tasitā vitakkā); J i.64 (turiya -- satasahassāni) <-> 98 aṭṭhanavuti (cp. 98 the age of Eli, 1 Sam. iv.15) Sn 311 (rogā, a higher set than the original 3 diseases, cp. navuti). -- (2) As number of symmetry or of an intrinsic, harmonious, symmetrical set, aṭṭha denotes, like dasa (q. v.) a comprehensive unity. See esp. the cpds. for this application. ˚aŋsa and ˚angika. Closely related to nos. 2 and 4 aṭṭha is in the geometrical progression of 2. 4. 8. 16. 32. where each subsequent number shows a higher symmetry or involves a greater importance (cp. 8 X 8 under 1 a) -- J v.409 (a. mangalena samannāgata, of Indra's chariot: with the 8 lucky signs); VvA 193 (aṭṭhahi akkhaṇehi vajjitaŋ manussabhāvaŋ: the 8 unlucky signs). In progression: J iv.3 (aṭṭha petiyo, following after 4, then foll. by 8, 16, 32); PvA 75 (a. kapparukkhā at each point of the compass, 32 in all). Further: 8 expressions of bad language DhA iv.3.
-- aŋsa with eight edges, octagonal, octahedral, implying perfect or divine symmetry (see above B. 2), of a diamond D i.76 = M iii.121 (maṇi veḷuriyo a.); Miln 282 (maṇiratanaŋ subhaŋ jātimantaŋ a.) of the pillars of a heavenly palace (Vimāna) J vi.127 = 173 = Vv 782 (a. sukatā thambhā); Vv 8415 (āyataŋsa = āyatā hutvā aṭṭha -- soḷasadvattiŋsādi -- aŋsavanto VvA 339). Of a ball of string Pv iv.328 (gulaparimaṇḍala, cp. PvA 254). Of geometrical figures in general Dhs 617. -- anga (of) eight parts, eightfold, consisting of eight ingredients or constituents (see also next and above B 2 on significance of aṭṭha in this connection), in compn. with ˚upeta characterised by the eight parts (i. e. the observance of the first eight of the commandments or vows, see sīla & cp. anga 2), of uposatha, the fast -- day A i.215; Sn 402 (Sn A 378 expls. ekam pi divasaŋ apariccajanto aṭṭhangupetaŋ uposathaŋ upavassa); cp. aṭṭhanguposathin (adj.) Mhvs 36, 84. In BSk. always in phrase aṣṭānga -- samanvāgata upavāsa, e. g. Divy 398; Sp. Av. Ś i.338, 399; also vrata Av. Ś i.170. In the same sense aṭṭhangupeta pāṭihāriyapakkha (q. v.) Sn 402, where Vv 156 has ˚susamāgata (expld. at VvA 72 by pānāṭipātā veramaṇī -- ādīhi aṭṭhahɔ angehi samannāgata). ˚samannāgata endowed with the eight qualities (see anga 3), of rājā, a king D i.137 sq., of brahmassara, the supreme or most excellent voice (of the Buddha) D ii.211; J i.95; VvA 217. Also in Buddh. Sk. aṣṭāngopeta svara of the voice of the Buddha, e. g. Sp. Av. Ś i.149. -- angika having eight constituents, being made up of eight (intrinsic) parts, embracing eight items (see above B 2); of the uposatha (as in prec. aṭṭhangɔ uposatha) Sn 401; of the "Eightfold Noble Path" (ariyo a. maggo). (Also in BSk. as aṣṭāngika mārga, e. g. Lal. Vist. 540, cp. aṣṭāngamārgadeśika of the Buddha, Divy 124, 265); D i.156, 157, 165; M i.118; It 18; Sn 1130 (magga uttama); Dh 191, 273; Th 2, 158, 171; Kh iv.; Vin i.10; Nd2 485; DA i.313; DhA iii.402. -- angula eight finger -- breadths thick, eight inches thick, i. e. very thick, of double thickness J ii.91 (in contrast to caturangula); Mhvs 29, 11 (with sattangula). -- aḍḍha (v. l. aḍḍhaṭṭha) half of eight, i. e. four (˚pāda) J vi.354, see also aḍḍha1. -- nakha having eight nails or claws J vi.354 (: ekekasmiŋ pāde dvinnaŋ dvinnaŋ khurānaŋ vasena C.). -- nava eight or nine DhA iii.179. -- pada 1. a chequered board for gambling or playing drafts etc., lit. having eight squares, i. e. on each side (DA i.85: ekekāya pantiyā aṭṭha aṭṭha padāni assā ti), cp. dasapada D i.6. -- 2. eightfold, folded or plaited in eight, cross -- plaited (of hair) Th 1, 772 (aṭṭhāpada -- katā kesā); J ii.5 (˚ṭṭhapana = cross -- plaiting). -- padaka a small square (1/8), i. e. a patch Vin i.297; ii.150. -- pāda an octopod, a kind of (fabulous) spider (or deer?) J v.377; vi.538; cp. Sk. aṣṭapāda = śarabha a fabulous eight -- legged animal. -- mangala having eight anspicious signs J v.409 (expld. here to mean a horse with white hair on the face, tail, mane, and breast, and above each of the four hoofs). -- vanka with eight facets, lit. eight -- crooked, i. e. polished on eight sides, of a jewel J vi.388. -- vidha eightfold Dhs 219.
Aṭṭha2 see Attha.
Aṭṭhaka (adj.) [Sk. aṣṭaka] -- 1. eightfold Vin i.196 = Ud 59 (˚vaggikāni); VvA 75 = DhA iii.104 (˚bhatta). -- 2. ˚ā (f.) the eight day of the lunar month (cp. aṭṭhamī), in phrase rattīsu antarɔaṭṭhakāsu in the nights between the eighths, i. e. the 8th day before and after the full moon Vin i.31, 288 (see Vin Texst i.130n); M i.79; A i.136; Miln 396; J i.390. -- 3. ˚ŋ (nt.) an octad Vv 672 (aṭṭh˚ eight octads = 64); VvA 289, 290. On sabbaṭṭhaka see aṭṭha B 1 a. See also antara.
Aṭṭhama (num. ord.) [Sk. aṣṭama, see aṭṭha1] the eighth Sn 107, 230 (cp. KhA 187), 437. -- f. ˚ī the eighth day of the lunar half month (cp. aṭṭhakā) A i.144; Sn 402; Vv 166 (in all three pass. as pakkhassa cātuddasī pañcadasī ca aṭṭhamī); A i.142; Sn 570 (ito atthami, scil. divase, loc.).
Aṭṭhamaka = aṭṭhama the eighth. -- 1. lit. Miln 291 (att˚ self -- eighth). -- 2. as tt. the eighth of eight persons who strive after the highest perfection, reckoned from the first or Arahant. Hence the eighth is he who stands on the lowest step of the Path and is called a sotāpanna (q. v.) Kvu 243 -- 251 (cp. Kvu trsl. 146 sq.); Nett 19, 49, 50; Ps ii.193 (+ sotāpanna).
Aṭṭhāna (nt.) [ā + ṭṭhāna] stand, post; name of the rub- bing -- post which, well cut & with incised rows of squares, was let into the ground of a bathing -- place, serving as a rubber to people bathing Vin ii.105, 106 (read aṭṭhāne with BB; cp. Vin ii.315).
Aṭṭhi˚1 [= attha (aṭṭha) in compn. with kar & bhū, as freq. in Sk. and P. with i for a, like citti -- kata (for citta˚), angi -- bhūta (for anga˚); cp. the freq. combn. (with similar meaning) manasi -- kata (besides manasā -- k.), also upadhikaroti and others. This combn. is restricted to the pp and der. (˚kata & ˚katvā). Other explns. by Morris J. P. T. S. 1886, 107; Windisch, M. & B. 100], in combn. with katvā: to make something one's attha, i. e. object, to find out the essence or profitableness or value of anything, to recognise the nature of, to realise, understand, know. Nearly always in stock phrase aṭṭhikatvā manasikatvā D ii.204; M i.325, 445; S i.112 sq. = 189, 220; v.76; A ii.116; iii.163; J i.189; v.151 (: attano atthikabhāvaŋ katvā atthiko hutvā sakkaccaŋ suṇeyya C.); Ud 80 (: adhikicca, ayaŋ no attho adhigantabbo evaŋ sallakkhetvā tāya desanāya atthikā hutvā C.); Sdhp 220 (˚katvāna).
Aṭṭhi2 (nt.) [Sk. asthi = Av. asti, Gr. o)/steon, o)/strakon, a)s- tra/galos; Lat. os (*oss); also Gr. o)/zos branch Goth. asts] <-> 1. a bone A i.50; iv.129; Sn 194 (˚nahāru bones & tendons); Dh 149, 150; J i.70; iii.26, 184; vi.448 (˚vedhin); DhA iii.109 (300 bones of the human body, as also at Suśruta iii.5); KhA 49; PvA 68 (˚camma -- nahāru), 215 (gosīs˚); Sdhp 46, 103. -- 2. the stone of a fruit J ii.104.
-- kankala [Sk. ˚kankāla] a skeleton M i.364; cp. ˚sankhalika. -- kadali a special kind of the plantain tree (Musa Sapientum) J v.406. -- kalyāṇa beauty of bones DhA i.387. -- camma bones and skin J ii.339; DhA iii.43; PvA 68 -- taca id. J ii.295. -- maya made of bone Vin ii.115. -- miñjā marrow A iv.129; DhA i.181; iii.361; KhA 52. -- yaka (T. aṭṭhīyaka) bones & liver S i.206. -- sankhalikā [B. Sk. ˚śakalā Sp. Av. Ś i.274 sq., see also aṭṭhika˚] a chain of bones, i. e. a skeleton DhA iii.479; PvA 152. -- sanghāṭa conjunction of bones, i. e. skeleton Vism 21; DhA ii.28; PvA 206. -- sañcaya a heap of bones It 17 = Bdhd 87. -- saññā the idea of bones (cp. aṭṭhika˚) Th 1, 18. -- saṇṭhāna a skeleton Sdhp 101.
Aṭṭhika1 (nt.) [fr. aṭṭhi] 1. = aṭṭhi 1 a bone M iii.92; J i.265, 428; vi.404; PvA 41. -- 2 = aṭṭhi 2 kernel, stone DhA ii.53 (tāl˚); Mhvs 15, 42.
-- sankhalikā a chain of bones, a skeleton A iii.324 see also under kaṭaṭṭhika. -- saññā the idea of a skeleton S v.129 sq.; A ii.17; Dhs 264.
Aṭṭhika2 at PvA 180 (sūcik˚) to be read aṭṭita (q. v.) for aṭṭika.
Aṭṭhita1 see ṭhita.
Aṭṭhita2 [ā + ṭhita] undertaken, arrived at, looked after, considered J ii.247 (= adhiṭṭhita C.).
Aṭṭhita3 see atthika.
Aṭṭhilla at Vin ii.266 is expld. by Bdhgh on p. 327 by gojanghaṭṭika, perhaps more likely = Sk. aṣṭhīlā a round pebble or stone.
Aḍḍha1 (& addha) [etym. uncertain, Sk. ardha] one half, half; usually in compn. (see below), like diyaḍḍha 1 1/2 (˚sata 150) PvA 155 (see as to meaning Stede, Peta Vatthu p. 107). Note. aḍḍha is never used by itself, for "half" in absolute position upaḍḍha (q. v.) is always used.
-- akkhika with furtive glance ("half an eye") DhA iv.98. -- aṭṭha half of eight, i. e. four (cp. aṭṭhaḍḍha) S ii.222 (˚ratana); J vi.354 (˚pāda quadruped; v. l. for aṭṭhaḍḍha). -- aḷhaka 1/2 an aḷhaka (measure) DhA iii.367. -- uḍḍha [cp. Mahārāṣṭrī form cauṭṭha = Sk. caturtha] three and a half J i.82; iv.180; v.417, 420; DhA i.87; Mhvs 12, 53. -- ocitaka half plucked off J i.120. -- karīsa ( -- matta) half a k. in extent VvA 64 (cp. aṭṭha -- karīsa). -- kahāpaṇa 1/2 kahāpaṇa A v.83. -- kāsika (or ˚ya) worth half a thousand kāsiyas (i. e. of Benares monetary standard) Vin i.281 (kambala, a woollen garment of that value; cp. Vin Texts ii.195); ii.150 (bimbohanāni, pillows; so read for aḍḍhakāyikāni in T.); J v.447 (a˚ -- kāsigaṇikā for a -- ˚kāsiya˚ a courtezan who charges that price, in phrase a˚ -- k˚ -- gaṇikā viya na bahunnaŋ piyā manāpā). -- kumbha a half ( -- filled) pitcher Sn 721. -- kusi (tt. of tailoring) a short intermediate cross -- seam Vin i.287. -- kosa half a room, a small room J vi.81 (= a˚ kosantara C.). -- gāvuta half a league J vi 55. -- cūḷa (˚vāhā vīhi) 1/2 a measure (of rice) Miln 102, perhaps misread for aḍḍhāḷha (āḷha = āḷhaka, cp. A iii.52), a half āḷha of rice. -- tiya the third (unit) less half, i. e. two and a half VvA 66 (māsā); J i.49, 206, 255 (˚sata 250). Cp. next. -- teyya = ˚tiya 2 1/2 Vin iv.117; J ii.129 (˚sata); DA i.173 (v. l. BB for ˚tiya); DhA i.95 (˚sata), 279; PvA 20 (˚sahassa). -- telasa [cp. BSk. ardhatrayodaśa] twelve and a half Vin i 243, 247; D ii.6 (˚bhikkhusatāni, cp. tayo B 1 b); DhA iii.369. -- daṇḍaka a short stick M i.87 = A i.47; ii.122 = Nd2 604 = Miln 197. -- duka see ˚ruka. -- nāḷika ( -- matta) half a nāḷi -- measure full J vi.366. -- pallanka half a divan Vin ii.280. -- bhāga half a share, one half Vv 136 (= upaḍḍhabhāga VvA 61); Pv i.115. -- maṇḍala semi -- circle, semi circular sewing Vin i.287. -- māna half a māna measure J i.468 (m. = aṭṭhannaŋ nāḷinaŋ nāmaŋ C.). -- māsa half a month, a half month, a fortnight Vin iii.254 (ūnak˚); A v.85; J iii.218; VvA 66. Freq. in acc. as adv. for a fortnight, e. g. Vin iv.117; VvA 67; PvA 55. -- māsaka half a bean (as weight or measure of value, see māsaka) J i.111. -- māsika halfmonthly Pug 55. -- muṇḍaka shaven over half the head (sign of loss of freedom) Mhvs 6, 42. -- yoga a certain kind of house (usually with pāsāda) Vin i.58 = 96, 107, 139, 239, 284; ii.146. Acc. to Vin T. i.174 "a gold coloured Bengal house" (Bdhgh), an interpretation which is not correct: we have to read supaṇṇa vankageha "like a Garuḷa bird's crooked wing", i. e. where the roof is bent on one side. -- yojana half a yojana (in distance) J v.410; DA i.35 (in expln. of addhāna -- magga); DhA i.147; ii.74. -- rattā midnight A iii.407 (˚aŋ adv. at m.); Vv 8116 (˚rattāyaŋ adv. = aḍḍharattiyaŋ VvA 315); J i.264 (samaye); iv.159 (id.). -- ratti = ˚rattā VvA 255, 315 (= majjhimayāma -- samaya); PvA 155. -- ruka (v. l. ˚duka) a certain fashion of wearing the hair Vin ii.134; Bdhgh expln. on p. 319: aḍhadukan ti udare lomarāji -- ṭhapanaŋ "leaving a stripe of hair on the stomach". -- vivata (dvāra) half open J v.293.
Aḍḍha2 (adj.) [Sk. āḍhya fr. ṛddha pp. of ṛdh, ṛdhnote & ṛdhyate (see ijjhati) to thrive cp. Gr. a)/lqomai thrive, Lat. alo to nourish. Cp. also Vedic iḍā refreshment & P. iddhi power. See also āḷhiya] rich, opulent, wealthy, well -- to -- do; usually in combn. with mahaddhana & mahābhoga of great wealth & resources (foll. by pahūta -- jātarūparajata pahūta vittūpakaraṇa etc.). Thus at D i.115, 134, 137; iii.163; Pug 52; DhA i.3; VvA 322; PvA 3, 78 etc. In other combn. Vv 314 (˚kula); Nd2 615 (Sakka = aḍḍho mahaddhano dhanavā); DA i.281 (= issara); DhA ii.37 (˚kula); Sdhp 270 (satasākh˚), 312 (guṇ˚), 540 sq. (id.), 561.
Aḍḍhaka (adj.) wealthy, rich, influential J iv.495; Pv ii.82 (= mahāvibhava PvA 107).
Aḍḍhatā (f.) [abstr. to aḍḍha] riches, wealth, opulence Sdhp 316.
Aṇa [Sk. ṛṇa; see etym. under iṇa, of which aṇa is a doublet. See also āṇaṇya] debt, only in neg. anaṇa (adj.) free from debt Vin i.6 = S i.137, 234 = D ii.39; Th 2, 364 (i. e. without a new birth); A ii.69; J v.481; ThA 245.
Aṇu (adj.) [Sk. aṇu; as to etym. see Walde Lat. Wtb. under ulna. See also āṇi] small, minute, atomic, subtle (opp. thūla, q. v.) D i.223; S i.136; v.96 (˚bīja); Sn 299 (anuto aṇuŋ gradually); J iii.12 (= appamattaka); iv.203; Dhs 230, 617 (= kisa); ThA 173; Miln 361. Note aṇu is freq. spelt anu, thus usually in cpd. ˚matta.
-- thūla (aṇuŋthūla) fine and coarse, small & large Dh 31 (= mahantañ ca khuddakañ ca DhA i.282), 409 = Sn 633; J iv.192; DhA iv.184. -- matta of small size, atomic, least Sn 431; Vbh 244, 247 (cp. M iii.134; A ii.22); Dpvs iv.20. The spelling is anumatta at D i.63 = It 118; Dh 284; DA i.181; Sdhp 347. -- sahagata accompanied by a minimum of, i. e. residuum Kvu 81, cp. Kvu trsl. 66 n. 3.
Aṇuka (adj.) = aṇu Sn 146, KhA 246.
Aṇḍa (nt.) [Etym. unknown. Cp. Sk. aṇḍa] 1. an egg Vin iii.3; S ii.258; M i.104; A iv.125 sq. -- 2. (pl.) the testicles Vin iii.106. -- 3. (in camm˚) a water -- bag J i.249 (see Morris J. P. T. S. 1884, 69).
-- kosa shell of eggs Vin iii.3 = M i.104; A iv.126, 176. -- cheda(ka) one who castrates, a gelder J iv.364, 366. -- ja 1. born from eggs S iii.241 (of snakes); M i.73; J ii.53 = v.85; Miln 267. -- 2. a bird J. v.189. -- bhārin bearing his testicles S ii.258 = Vin iii.100. -- sambhava the product of an egg, i. e. a bird Th 1, 599. -- hāraka one who takes or exstirpates the testicles M i.383.
Aṇḍaka1 (nt.) = aṇḍa, egg DhA i.60; iii.137 (sakuṇ˚).
Aṇḍaka2 (adj.) [Sk.? prob. an inorganic form; the diaeresis of caṇḍaka into c˚ aṇḍaka seems very plausible. As to meaning cp. DhsA 396 and see Dhs trsl. 349, also Morris J. P. T. S. 1893, 6, who, not satisfactorily, tries to establish a relation to ard, as in aṭṭa3] only used of vācā, speech: harsh, rough, insolent M i.286; A v.265, 283, 293 (gloss kaṇṭakā); J iii.260; Dhs 1343, cp. DhsA 396.
Aṇṇa (food, cereal). See passages under aparaṇṇa & pubbaṇṇa.
Aṇṇava (nt.) [Sk. arṇa & arṇava to ṛ, ṛṇoti to move, Idg. *er to be in quick motion, cp. Gr. o)/rnumi; Lat. orior; Goth. rinnan = E. run; Ohg. runs, river, flow.] 1. a great flood (= ogha), the sea or ocean (often as mah˚, cp. BSk. mahārṇava, e. g. Jtm 3175) M i.134; S i.214; iv.157 (mahā udak˚); Sn 173 (fig. for saŋsāra see SnA 214), 183, 184; J i.119 (˚kucchi), 227 (id.); v.159 (mah˚); Mhvs 5, 60; 19, 16 (mah˚). -- 2. a stream, river J iii. 521; v.255.
Aṇha [Sk. ahna, day, see ahan] day, only as -- ˚ in apar˚, pubb˚, majjh˚, sāy˚, q. v.
Atakkaka (adj.) [a + takka2] not mixed with buttermilk J yi.21.
Ataccha (nt.) [a + taccha2] falsehood, untruth D i.3; J vi.207.
Ati (indecl.) [sk. ati = Gr. e)/ti moreover, yet, and; Lat. et and, Goth. ip; also connected with Gr. ata/r but, Lat. at but (= over, outside) Goth. appan] adv. and prep. of direction (forward motion), in primary meaning "on, and further", then "up to and beyond". I. in abstr. position adverbially (only as ttg.): in excess, extremely, very (cp. ii.3) J vi.133 (ati uggata C. = accuggata T.), 307 (ati ahitaŋ C. = accāhitaŋ T.).
II. as prefix, meaning. -- 1. on to, up to, towards, until); as far as: accanta up to the end; aticchati to go further, pass on; atipāta "falling on to"; attack slaying; atimāpeti to put damage on to, i. e. to destroy. -- 2. over, beyond, past, by, trans -- ; with verbs: (a.) trs. atikkamati to pass beyond, surpass; atimaññati to put one's "manas" over, to despise; atirocati to surpass in splendour. (b.) intr. atikkanta passed by; atikkama traversing; aticca transgressing; atīta past, gone beyond. -- Also with verbal derivations: accaya lapse, also sin, transgression ("going over"); atireka remainder, left over; atisaya overflow, abundance; atisāra stepping over, sin. -- 3. exceedingly, in a high or excessive degree either very (much) or too (much); in nominal compn. (a), rarely also in verbal compn. see (b). -- (a) with nouns & adj.: ˚āsanna too near; ˚uttama the very highest; ˚udaka too much water; ˚khippa too soon; ˚dāna excessive alms giving; ˚dāruṇa very cruel; ˚dīgha extremely long; ˚dūra too near; deva a super -- god ˚pago too early; ˚bālha too much; ˚bhāra a too heavy load; ˚manāpa very lovely; ˚manohara very charming; ˚mahant too great; ˚vikāla very inconvenient; ˚vela a very long time; ˚sambādha too tight, etc. etc. <-> (b.) with verb: atibhuñjati to eat excessively.
III. A peculiar use of ati is its' function in reduplication -- compounds, expressing "and, adding further, and so on, even more, etc." like that of the other comparing or contrasting prefixes a (ā), anu, ava, paṭi, vi (e. g. khaṇḍâkhaṇḍa, seṭṭhânuseṭṭhi, chiddâvacchidda, angapaccanga, cuṇṇavicuṇṇa). In this function it is however restricted to comparatively few expressions and has not by far the wide range of ā (q. v.), the only phrases being the foll. viz. cakkâticakkaŋ mañcâtimañcaŋ bandhati to heap carts upon carts, couches upon couches (in order to see a procession) Vin iv.360 (Bdhgh); J ii.331; iv.81; DhA iv.61. -- devâtideva god upon god, god and more than a god (see atideva); mānâtimāna all kinds of conceit; vankâtivanka crooked all over J i.160. -- IV. Semantically ati is closely related to abhi, so that in consequence of dialectical variation we frequently find ati in Pāli, where the corresp. expression in later Sk. shows abhi. See e. g. the foll. cases for comparison: accuṇha ati -- jāta, ˚pīḷita ˚brūheti, ˚vassati, ˚vāyati, ˚veṭheti.
Note The contracted (assimilation -- ) form of ati before vowels is acc -- (q. v.). See also for adv. use atiriva, ativiya, atīva.
Ati -- ambila (adj.) [ati + ambila] too sour DhA ii.85.
Ati -- arahant [ati + arahant] a super -- Arahant, one who sur- passes even other Arahants Miln 277.
Ati -- issara (adj.) very powerful(?) J v.441 (˚bhesajja, medicin).
Ati -- uṇha (adj.) too hot PvA 37 (˚ātapa glow). See also accuṇha (which is the usual form).
Ati -- uttama (adj.) by far the best or highest VvA 80.
Ati -- udaka too much water, excess of water DhA i.52.
Ati -- ussura (adj.) only in loc. ˚e (adv.) too soon after sun- rise, too early VvA 65 (laddhabhattatā eating too early).
Ati -- eti [ati + i] to go past or beyond, see ger. aticca and pp. atīta.
Atikata (pp.) more than done to, i. e. retaliated; paid back in an excessive degree A i.62.
Atikaddhati [ati + kaḍḍhati] to pull too hard, to labour, trouble, drudge Vin iii.17.
Atikaṇha (adj.) [ati + kaṇha] too black Vin iv.7.
Atikaruṇa (adj.) [ati + karuṇa] very pitiful, extremely mis- erable J i.202; iv.142; vi.53.
Atikassa (ger.) [fr. atikassati ati + kṛṣ; Sk. atikṛṣya] pul- ling (right) through J v.173 (rajjuŋ, a rope, through the nostrils; v. l. BB. anti˚).
Atikāla [ati + kāla] in instr. atikālena adv. in very good time very early Vin i.70 (+ atidivā).
Atikkanta [pp. of atikamati] passed beyond, passed by, gone by, elapsed; passed over, passing beyond, surpassing J ii.128 (tīṇi saŋvaccharāni); DhA iii.133 (tayo vaye passed beyond the 3 ages of life); PvA 55 (māse ˚e after the lapse of a month), 74 (kati divasā ˚ā how many days have passed).
-- mānusaka superhuman It 100; Pug 60; cp. BSk. atikrānta -- mānuṣyaka M Vastu iii.321.
Atikkantikā (f.) [Der. abstr. fr. prec.] transgressing, over- stepping the bounds (of good behaviour), lawlessness Miln 122.
Atikkama [Sk. atikrama] going over or further, passing beyond, traversing; fig. overcoming of, overstepping, failing against, transgression Dh 191; Dhs 299; PvA 154 (katipayayojan˚), 159 (˚caraṇa sinful mode of life); Miln 158 (dur˚ hard to overcome); Sdhp 64.
Atikkamaṇaka (adj.) [atikkamaṇa + ka] exceeding J i.153.
Atikkamati [ati + kamati] (1) to go beyond, to pass over, to cross, to pass by. (2) to overcome, to conquer, to surpass, to be superior to. -- J iv.141; Dh 221 (Pot. ˚eyya, overcome); PvA 67 (maggena: passes by). grd. atikkamanīya to be overcome D ii.13 (an˚); SnA 568 (dur˚). ger. atikkamma D ii.12 (surpassing); It 51 (māradheyyaŋ, passing over), cp. vv. ll. under adhigayha; and atikkamitva going beyond, overcoming, transcending (J iv.139 (samuddaŋ); Pug 17; J i.162 (raṭṭhaŋ having left). Often to be trsl. as adv. "beyond", e. g. pare beyond others PvA 15; Vasabhagāmaŋ beyond the village of V. PvA 168. -- pp. atikkanta (q. v.).
Atikkameti [Caus. of atikkamati] to make pass, to cause to pass over J i.151.
Atikkhippaŋ (adv.) [ati + khippa] too soon Vin ii.284.
Atikhaṇa (nt.) [ati + khaṇa(na)] too much digging J ii.296.
Atikhāta (nt.) = prec. J ii.296.
Atikhiṇa (adj.) [ati + khīṇa] in cāpâtikhīṇa broken bow (?) Dh 156 (expld. at DhA iii.132 as cāpāto atikhīṇā cāpā vinimmuttā).
Atiga ( -- ˚) (adj.) [ati + ga] going over, overcoming, sur- mounting, getting over Sn 250 (sanga˚); Dh 370 (id.); Sn 795 (sīma˚, cp. Nd1 99), 1096 (ogha˚); Nd1 100 (= atikkanta); Nd2 180 (id.).
Atigacchati [ati + gacchati] to go over, i. e. to overcome, surmount, conquer, get the better of, only in pret. (aor.) 3rd sg. accagā (q. v. and see gacchati 3) Sn 1040; Dh 414 and accagamā (see gacchati 2) Vin ii.192; D i.85; S ii.205; DA i.236 (= abhibhavitvā pavatta). Also 3rd pl. accaguŋ It 93, 95.
Atigāḷeti [ati + gāḷeti, Caus. of galati, cp. Sk. vi -- gālayati] to destroy, make perish, waste away J vi.211 (= atigālayati vināseti C. p. 215). Perhaps reading should be atigāḷheti (see atigāḷhita.
Atigāḷha (adj.) [ati + gāḷha 1] very tight or close, inten- sive J i.62. Cp. atigāḷhita.
Atigāḷhita [pp. of atigāḷheti, Denom. fr. atigāḷha; cp. Sk. atigāhate to overcome] oppressed, harmed, overcome, defeated, destroyed J v.401 (= atipīḷita C.).
Atighora (adj.) [ati + ghora] very terrible or fierce Sdhp 285.
Aticaraṇa (nt.) [fr. aticarati] transgression PvA 159.
Aticarati [ati + carati] 1. to go about, to roam about Pv ii.1215; PvA 57. -- 2. to transgress, to commit adultery J i.496. Cp. next.
Aticaritar [n. ag. of. aticarati] one who transgresses, esp. a woman who commits adultery A ii.61 (all MSS. read aticaritvā); iv.66 (T. aticarittā).
Aticariyā (f.) [ati + cariyā] transgression, sin, adultery D iii.190.
Aticāra [from aticarati] transgression Vv 158 (= aticca cāra VvA 72).
Aticārin (adj. n.) [from aticarati] transgressing, sinning, esp. as f. aticārinī an adulteress S ii.259; iv.242; D iii.190; A iii.261; Pv ii.1214; PvA 151 (v. l. BB), 152; VvA 110.
Aticitra (adj.) [ati + citra] very splendid, brilliant, quite exceptional Miln 28.
Aticca (grd.) [ger. of ati + eti, ati + i] 1. passing beyond, traversing, overcoming, surmounting Sn 519, 529, 531. Used adverbially = beyond, in access, more than usual, exceedingly Sn 373, 804 (= vassasataŋ atikkamitvā Nd1 120). -- 2. failing, transgressing, sinning, esp. committing adultery J v,424; VvA 72,
Aticchati [*Sk. ati -- ṛcchati, ati + ṛ, cp. aṇṇava] to go on, only occurring in imper. aticchatha (bhante) "please go on, Sir", asking a bhikkhu to seek alms elsewhere, thus refusing a gift in a civil way. [The interpretation given by Trenckner, as quoted by Childers, is from ati + 'iṣ "go and beg further on". (Tr. Notes 65) but this would entail a meaning like "desire in excess", since iṣ does not convey the notion of movement] J iii.462; DhA iv.98 (T. aticcha, vv. ll. ˚atha); VvA 101; Miln 8. -- Caus. aticchāpeti to make go on, to ask to go further J iii.462. <-> Cp. icchatā.
Aticchatta [ati + chatta] a "super" -- sunshade, a sunshade of extraordinary size & colours DhsA 2.
Atitāta (adj.) [ati + jāta, perhaps ati in sense of abhi, cp. abhijāta] well -- born, well behaved, gentlemanly It 14 (opp. avajāta).
Atitarati [ati + tarati] to pass over, cross, go beyond aor. accatari S iv.157 = It 57 (˚āri).
Atituccha (adj.) [ati + tuccha] very, or quite empty Sdhp 430.
Atituṭṭhi (f.) [ati + tuṭṭhi] extreme joy J i.207.
Atitula (adj.) [ati + tula] beyond compare, incomparable Th 1, 831 = Sn 561 (= tulaŋ atīto nirupamo ti attho SnA 455).
Atitta (adj.) [a + titta] dissatisfied, unsatisfied J i.440; Dh 48.
Atittha (nt.) [a + tittha] "that which is not a fording- place". i. e. not the right way, manner or time; as ˚wrongly in the wrong way J i.343; iv.379; vi.241; DhA iii.347; DA i.38.
Atithi [Sk. atithi of at = at, see aṭati; orig. the wanderer, cp. Vedic atithin wandering] a guest, stranger, newcomer D i.117 (= āgantuka -- navaka pāhuṇaka DA i.288); A ii.68; iii.45, 260; J iv.31, 274; v.388; Kh viii.7 (= nɔ atthi assa ṭhiti yamhi vā tamhi vā divase āgacchatī ti atithi KhA 222); VvA 24 (= āgantuka).
Atidāna (nt.) [ati + dāna] too generous giving, an exces- sive gift of alms Miln 277; PvA 129, 130.
Atidāruṇa (adj.) [Sk. atidāruṇa, ati + dāruṇa] very cruel, extremely fierce Pv iii.73.
Atiditthi (f.) [ati + diṭṭhi] higher doctrine, super know- ledge (?) Vin i.63 = ii.4 (+ adhisīla; should we read adhi -- diṭṭhi?)
Atidivā (adv.) [ati + divā] late in the day, in the afternoon Vin i.70 (+ atikālena); S i.200; A iii.117.
Atidisati [ati + disati] to give further explanation, to explain in detail Miln 304.
Atidīgha (adj.) [ati + dīgha] too long, extremely long J iv. 165; Pv ii.102; VvA 103 (opp. atirassa).
Atidukkha [ati + dukkha] great evil, exceedingly painful excessive suffering PvA 65; Sdhp 95. In atidukkhavāca PvA 15 ati belongs to the whole cpd., i. e. of very hurtful speech.
Atidūra (adj.) [ati + dūra] very or too far Vin i.46; J ii.154; Pv ii.965 = DhA iii.220 (vv. ll. suvidūre); PvA 42 (opp. accāsanna).
Atideva [ati + deva] a super god, god above gods, usually Ep. of the Buddha S i.141; Th 1, 489; Nd2 307 (cp. adhi˚); Miln 277. atidevadeva id. Miln 203, 209. devâtideva god over the gods (of the Buddha) Nd2 307 a.
Atidhamati [ati + dhamati] to beat a drum too hard J i.283; pp. atidhanta ibid.
Atidhātatā [ati + dhāta + ta] oversatiation J ii.193.
Atidhāvati [ati + dhāvati 1] to run past, to outstrip or get ahead of S iii.103; iv.230; M iii.19; It 43; Miln 136; SnA 21.
Atidhonacārin [ati + dhonacārin] indulging too much in the use of the "dhonas", i. e. the four requisites of the bhikkhu, or transgressing the proper use or normal application of the requisites (expln. at DhA iii.344, cp. dhona) Dh 240 = Nett 129.
Atināmeti [BSk. atināmayati, e. g. Divy 82, 443; ati + nāmeti] to pass time A i.206; Miln 345.
Atiniggaṇhāti [ati + niggaṇhāti] to rebuke too much J vi.417.
Atinicaka (adj.) [ati + nīcaka] too low, only in phrase cakkavāḷaŋ atisambādhaŋ Brahmaloko atinīcako the World is too narrow and Heaven too low (to comprehend the merit of a person, as sign of exceeding merit) DhA i.310; iii.310 = VvA 68.
Atineti [ati + neti] to bring up to, to fetch, to provide with Vin ii.180 (udakaŋ).
Atipaṇḍita (adj. [ati + paṇḍita] too clever DhA iv.38.
Atipaṇḍitatā (f.) [abstr. of atipaṇḍita] too much clever- ness DhA ii.29.
Atipadāna (nt.) [ati + pa + dāna] too much alms -- giving Pv ii.943 (= atidāna PvA 130).
Atipapañca [ati + p.] too great a delay, excessive tarrying J i.64; ii.93.
Atipariccāga [ati + pariccāga] excess in liberality DhA iii.11.
Atipassati [ati + passati; cp. Sk. anupaśyati] to look for, catch sight of, discover M iii.132 (nāgaŋ).
Atipāta [ati + pat] attack, only in phrase pāṇâtipāta destruction of life, slaying, killing, murder D i.4 (pāṇātipātā veramaṇī, refraining from killing, the first of the dasasīla or decalogue); DA i.69 (= pāṇavadha, pāṇaghāta); Sn 242; Kh ii. cp. KhA 26; PvA 28, 33 etc.
Atipātin (adj. -- n.) one who attacks or destroys Sn 248; J vi.449 (in war nāgakkhandh˚ = hatthikkhande khaggena chinditvā C.); PvA 27 (pāṇ˚).
Atipāteti [Denom. fr. atipāta] to destroy S v.453; Dh 246 (v. l. for atimāpeti, q. v.). Cp. paripāteti.
Atipīṇita (adj.) [ati + pīṇita] too much beloved, too dear, too lovely DhA v.70.
Atipīḷita [ati + pīḷita, cp. Sk. abhipīḍita] pressed against, oppressed, harassed, vexed J v.401 (= atigāḷhita).
Atippago (adv.) [cp. Sk. atiprage] too early, usually ellip- tical = it is too early (with inf. carituŋ etc.) D i.178; M i.84; A iv.35.
Atibaddha [pp. of atibandhati; cp. Sk. anubaddha] tied to, coupled J i.192 = Vin iv.5.
Atibandhati [ati + bandhati; cp. Sk. anubandhati] to tie close to, to harness on, to couple J i.191 sq. -- pp. atibaddha q. v.
Atibahala (adj.) [ati + bahala] very thick J vi.365.
Atibāḷha (adj.) [ati + bāḷha] very great or strong PvA 178; nt. adv. ˚ŋ too much D i.93, 95; M i.253.
Atibāheti [ati + bāheti, Caus. to bṛh1; cp. Sk. ābṛhati] to drive away, to pull out J iv.366 (= abbāheti).
Atibrahmā [ati + brahmā] a greater Brahma, a super -- god Miln 277; DhA ii.60 (Brahmuṇā a. greater than B.).
Atibrūheti [ati + brūheti, bṛh2, but by C. taken incorrectly to brū; cp. Sk. abhi -- bṛṇhayati] to shout out, roar, cry J v.361 (= mahāsaddaŋ nicchāreti).
Atibhagini -- putta [ati + bh. -- p.] a very dear nephew J i.223.
Atibhāra [ati + bhāra] too heavy a load Miln 277 (˚ena sakaṭassa akkho bhijjati).
Atibhārita (adj.) [ati + bhārita] too heavily weighed, over- loaded Vtn iv.47.
Atibhāriya (adj.) too serious DhA i.70.
Atibhuñjati [ati + bhuñjati] to eat too much, to overeat Miln 153.
Atibhutta (nt.) [ati + bhutta] overeating Miln 135.
Atibhoti [ati + bhavati, cp. Sk. atibhavati & abhibhavati] to excel, overcome, to get the better of, to deceive J i.163 (= ajjhottharati vañceti C.).
Atimaññati [Sk. atimanyate; ati + man] to despise, slighten, neglect Sn 148 (= KhA 247 atikkamitvā maññati); Dh 365, 366; J ii.347; Pv i.76 (˚issaŋ, v. l. ˚asiŋ = atikkamitvā avamaññiŋ PvA 37); PvA 36; Sdhp 609.
Atimaññanā (f.) [abstr. to prec., cp. atimāna] arrogance, contempt, neglect Miln 122.
Atimanāpa (adj.) [ati + manāpa] very lovely PvA 77 (+ abhirūpa).
Atimanorama (adj.) [ati + manorama] very charming J i.60.
Atimanohara (adj.) [ati + manohara] very charming PvA 46.
Atimanda(ka) (adj.) [ati + manda] too slow, too weak Sdhp 204, 273, 488.
Atimamāyati [ati + mamāyati, cp. Sk. atīmamāyate in diff. meaning = envy] to favour too much, to spoil or fondle J ii.316.
Atimahant (adj.) [ati + mahant] very or too great J i.221; PvA 75.
Atimāna [Sk. atimāna, ati + māna] high opinion (of one- self), pride, arrogance, conceit, M i.363; Sn 853 (see expln. at Nd1 233), 942, 968; J vi.235; Nd1 490; Miln 289. Cp. atimaññanā.
Atimānin (adj.) [fr. atimāna] D ii.45 (thaddha +); Sn 143 (an˚) 244; KhA 236.
Atimāpeti [ati + māpeti, Caus. of mī, mināte, orig. meaning "to do damage to"] to injure, destroy, kill; only in the stock phrase pāṇaŋ atimāpeti (with v. l. atipāteti) to destroy life, to kill D i.52 (v. l. ˚pāteti) = DA i.159 (: pāṇaŋ hanati pi parehi hanāpeti either to kill or incite others to murder); M i.404, 516; S iv.343; A iii.205 (correct T. reading atimāteti; v. l. pāteti); Dh 246 (v. l. ˚pāteti) = DhA iii.356 (: parassa jīvitindriyaŋ upacchindati).
Atimukhara (adj.) [ati + mukhara] very talkative, a chat- terbox J i.418; DhA ii.70. atimukharatā (f. abstr.) ibid.
Atimuttaka [Sk. atimuktaka] N. of a plant, Gaertnera Racemosa Vin ii.256 = M i.32; Miln 338.
Atimuduka (adj.) [ati + muduka] very soft, mild or feeble J i.262.
Atiyakkha (ati + yakkha] a sorcerer, wizard, fortuneteller J vi.502 (C.: bhūtavijjā ikkhaṇīka).
Atiyācaka (adj.) [ati + yācaka] one who asks too much Vin iii.147.
Atiyācanā (f.) [ati + yācanā] asking or begging too much Vin iii.147.
Atirattiŋ (adv.) [ati + ratti; cp. atidivā] late in the night, at midnight J i.436 (opp. atipabhāte).
Atirassa (adj.) [ati + rassa] too short (opp. atidīgha) Vin iv.7; J vi.457; VvA 103.
Atirājā [ati + rājā] a higher king, the greatest king, more than a king DhA ii.60; Miln 277.
Atiriccati [ati + riccati, see ritta] to be left over, to remain Sdhp 23, 126.
Atiritta (adj.) [pp. of ati + rlc, see ritta] left over, only as neg. an˚ applied to food, i. e. food which is not the leavings of a meal, fresh food Vin i.213 sq, 238; ii.301; iv.82 sq., 85.
Atiriva (ati -- r -- iva) see ativiya.
Atireka (adj.) [Sk. atireka, ati + ric, rinakti; see ritta] surplus, too much; exceeding, excessive, in a high degree; extra Vin i.255; J i.72 (˚padasata), 109; 441 (in higher positions); Miln 216; DhsA 2; DhA ii.98.
-- cīvara an extra robe Vin i.289. -- pāda exceeding the worth of a pāda, more than a pāda, Vin iii.47.
Atirekatā (f.) [abstr. to prec.] excessiveness, surplus, excess Kvu 607.
Atirocati [ati + ruc] to shine magnificently (trs.) to out- shine, to surpass in splendour D ii.208; Dh 59; Pv ii.958; Miln 336 (+ virocati); DhA i.446 (= atikkamitvā virocati); iii.219; PvA 139 (= ativiya virocati).
Ativankin (adj.) [ati + vankin] very crooked J i.160 (van- kâtivankin crooked all over; cp. ati iii.).
Ativaṇṇati [ati + vaṇṇati] to surpass, excel D ii.267.
Ativatta [pp. of ativattati: Sk. ativṛtta] passed beyond, surpassed, overcome (act. & pass.), conquered Sn 1133 (bhava˚); Nd2 21 (= atikkanta, vītivatta); J v.84 (bhaya˚); Miln 146, 154.
Ativattati [ati + vṛt, Sk. ativartate] to pass, pass over, go beyond; to overcome, get over; conquer Vin ii.237 (samuddo velaŋ nɔ); S ii.92 (saŋsāraŋ); iv.158 (id.) It 9 (saŋsāraŋ) = A ii.10 = Nd2 172a; Th 1, 412; J i.58, 280; iv.134; vi.113, 114; PvA 276. -- pp. ativatta (q. v.).
Ativattar1 [Sk. *ativaktṛ, n. ag. to ati -- vacati; cp. ativākya] one who insults or offends J v.266 (isīnaŋ ativattāro = dharusavācāhi atikkamitvā vattāro C.).
Ativattar2 [Sk. *ativartṛ, n. ag. to ati -- vattati] one who over- comes or is to be overcome Sn 785 (svātivattā = durativattā duttarā duppatarā Nd1 76).
Ativasa (adj.) [ati + vasa fr. vas] being under somebody's rule, dependent upon (c. gen.) Dh 74 (= vase vattati DhA ii.79).
Ativassati [ati + vassati, cp. Sk. abhivarṣati] to rain down on, upon or into Th 1, 447 = Vin ii.240.
Ativākya (nt.) [ati + vac, cp. Sk. ativāda, fr. ati + vad] abuse, blame, reproach Dh 320, 321 (= aṭṭha -- anariyavohāra -- vasena pavattaŋ vītikkama -- vacanaŋ DhA iv.3); J vi.508.
Ativāta [ati + vāta] too much wind, a wind which is too strong, a gale, storm Miln 277.
Ativāyati [ati + vāyati] to fill (excessively) with an odour or perfume, to satiate, permeate, pervade Miln 333 (+ vāyati; cp. abhivāyati ibid 385).
Ativāha [fr. ati + vah, cp. Sk. ativahati & abhivāha] car- rying, carrying over; a conveyance; one who conveys, i. e. a conductor, guide Th 1, 616 (said of sīla, good character); J v.433. -- Cp. ativāhika.
Ativāhika [fr. ativāha] one who belongs to a conveyance, one who conveys or guides, a conductor (of a caravan) J v.471, 472 (˚purisa).
Ativikāla (adj.) [ati + vikāla] at a very inconvenient time, much too late D i 108 (= suṭṭhu vikāla DA i.277).
Ativijjhati [Sk. atividhyati, ati + vyadh] to pierce, to enter into (fig.), to see through, only in phrase paññāya ativijjha (ger.) passati to recognise in all details M i.480; S v.226; A ii.178.
Ativiya (adv.) [Sk. atīva] = ati + iva, orig. "much -- like" like an excess = excessive -- ly. There are three forms of this expression, viz. (1) ati + iva in contraction atīva (q. v.); -- (2) ati + iva with epenthetic r: atiriva D ii.264 (v. l. SS. atīva); Sn 679, 680, 683; SnA 486; <-> (3) ati + viya (the doublet of iva) = ativiya J i.61, 263; DhA ii.71 (a. upakāra of great service); PvA 22, 56, 139.
Ativisā (f.) [Sk. ativiṣā] N. of a plant Vin i.201; iv.35.
Ativissaṭṭha (adj.) [ati + vissaṭṭha] too abundant, in ˚vākya one who talks too much, a chatterbox J v.204.
Ativissāsika (adj.) [ati + vissāsika] very, or too confiden- tial J i.86.
Ativissuta (adj.) [ati + vissuta] very famous, renowned Sdhp 473.
Ativeṭheti [ati + veṣṭ, cp. Sk. abhiveṣṭate] to wrap over, to cover, to enclose; to press, oppress, stifle Vin ii.101; J v.452 ( -- ativiya veṭheti piḷeti C.).
Ativela (adj.) [ati + vela] excessive (of time); nt. adv. ˚ŋ a very long time; excessively D i.19 (= atikālaŋ aticiran ti attho DA i.113); M i.122; Sn 973 (see expln. at Nd1 504); J iii.103 = Nd1 504.
Atilīna (adj.) [ati + līna] too much attached to worldly matters S v.263.
Atilūkha (adj.) [ati + lūkha] too wretched, very miserable Sdhp 409.
Atiloma (adj.) [ati + loma] too hairy, having too much hair J vi.457 (opp. aloma).
Atisañcara (˚cāra?) [ati + sañcāra] wandering about too much Miln 277.
Atisaṇha (adj.) [ati + saṇha] too subtle DhA iii.326.
Atisanta (adj.) [ati + santa1] extremely peaceful Sdhp 496.
Atisambādha (adj.) [ati + sambādha] too tight, crowded or narrow DhA i.310; iii.310 = VvA 68; cp. atinīcaka. <-> f. abstr. atisambādhatā the state of being too narrow J i.7.
Atisaya [cp. Sk. atiśaya, fr. ati + śī] superiority, distinc- tion, excellence, abundance VvA 135 (= visesa); PvA 86; Dāvs ii.62.
Atisayati [ati + śī] to surpass, excel; ger. atisayitvā Miln 336 (+ atikkamitvā).
Atisara (adj.) [fr. atisarati; cp. accasara] transgressing, sinning J iv.6; cp. atisāra.
Atisarati [ati + sṛ] to go too far, to go beyond the limit, to overstep, transgress, aor. accasari (q. v.) Sn 8 sq. (opp. paccasari; C. atidhāvi); J v.70 and atisari J iv.6. <-> ger. atisitvā (for *atisaritvā) D i.222; S iv.94; A i.145; v.226, 256; Sn 908 (= Nd1 324 atikkamitvā etc.).
Atisāyaŋ (adv.) [ati + sāyaŋ] very late, late in the evening J v.94.
Atisāra [fr. ati + sṛ, see atisarati. Cp. Sk. atisāra in diff. meaning but BSk. atisāra (sâtisāra) in the same meaning) going too far, overstepping the limit, trespassing, false step, slip, danger Vin i.55 (sâtisāra), 326 (id.); S i.74; M iii.237; Sn 889 (atisāraŋ diṭṭhiyo = diṭṭhigatāni Nd1 297; going beyond the proper limits of the right faith), J v.221 (dhamm˚), 379; DhA i.182; DhsA 28. See also atisara.
Atisithila (adj.) [ati + sithila] very loose, shaky or weak A iii.375.
Atisīta (adj.) [ati + sīta] too cold DhA ii.85.
Atisītala (adj.) [ati + sītala] very cold J iii.55.
Atihaṭṭha (adj.) [ati + haṭṭha] very pleased Sdhp 323.
Atiharati [ati + hṛ] to carry over, to bring over, bring, draw over Vin ii.209; iv.264; S i.89; J i.292; v.347. <-> Caus. atiharāpeti to cause to bring over, bring in, reap, collect, harvest Vin ii.181; iii.18; Miln 66; DhA iv.77. <-> See also atihita.
Atihita [ati + hṛ, pp. of atiharati, hita unusual for hata, perhaps through analogy with Sk. abhi + dhā] brought over (from the field into the house), harvested, borne home Th 1, 381 (vīhi).
Atihīna (adj.) [ati + hīna] very poor or destitute A iv.282, 287; 323 (opp. accogāḷha).
Atihīḷeti [ati + hīḍ] to despise J iv.331 (= atimaññati C.).
Atīta (adj. -- n.) [Sk. atīta, ati + ita, pp. of i. Cp. accaya & ati eti] 1. (temporal) past, gone by (cp. accaya 1) (a) adj. atītaŋ addhānaŋ in the time which is past S iii.86; A iv.219; v.32. -- Pv ii.1212 (atītānaŋ, scil. attabhāvāuaŋ, pariyanto na dissati); khaṇâtīta with the right moment past Dh 315 = Sn 333; atītayobbana he who is past youth or whose youth is past Sn 110. -- (b) nt. the past: atīte (loc.) once upon a time J i.98 etc. atītaŋ āhari he told (a tale of) the past, i. e. a Jātaka J i.213, 218, 221 etc. -- S i.5 (atītaŋ nânusocati); A iii.400 (a. eko anto); Sn 851, 1112. In this sense very frequently combd. with or opposed to anāgata the future & paccuppanna the present, e. g. atītânāgate in past & future S ii.58; Sn 373; J vi.364. Or all three in ster. combn. atītɔ -- anāgata -- paccuppanna (this the usual order) D iii.100, 135; S ii.26, 110, 252; iii.19, 47, 187; iv.4 sq.; 151 sq.; A i.264 sq., 284; ii.171, 202; iii.151; v.33; It 53; Nd2 22; but also occasionally atīta paccuppanna anāgata, e. g. PvA 100. -- 2. (modal) passed out of, having overcome or surmounted, gone over, free from (cp. accaya 2) S i.97 (maraṇaŋ an˚ not free from death), 121 (sabbavera -- bhaya˚); A ii.21; iii.346 (sabbasaŋyojana˚); Sn 373 (kappa˚), 598 (khaya˚, of the moon = ūnabhāvaŋ atīta Sn A 463); Th 1, 413 (c. abl.) -- 3. (id.) overstepping, having transgressed or neglected (cp. accaya 3) Dh 176 (dhammaŋ).
-- aŋsa the past (= atīta koṭṭhāse, atikkantabhavesū ti attho ThA 233) D ii.222; iii.275; Th 2, 314. -- ārammaṇa state of mind arising out of the past Dhs 1041.
Atīradassin (adj. -- n.) [a + tīra + dassin] not seeing the shore J i.46; vi.440; also as atīradassanī (f.) J v.75 (nāvā). Cp. D i 222.
Atīva (indecl.) [ati + iva, see also ativiya] very much, exceedingly J ii.413; Mhvs 33, 2 etc.
Ato (adv.) [Sk. ataḥ] hence, now, therefore S i.15; M i.498; Miln 87; J v.398 (= tato C.).
Atoṇa [etym.?) a class of jugglers or acrobats(?) Miln 191.
Atta1 [ā + d + ta; that is, pp. of ādadāti with the base form reduced to d. Idg *d -- to; cp. Sk. ātta] that which has been taken up, assumed. atta -- daṇḍa, he who has taken a stick in hand, a violent person, S i.236; iv.117; Sn 630, 935; Dh 406. Attañjaha, rejecting what had been assumed, Sn 790. Attaŋ pahāya Sn 800. The opp. is niratta, that which has not been assumed, has been thrown off, rejected. The Arahant has neither atta nor niratta (Sn 787, 858, 919), neither assumption nor rejection, he keeps an open mind on all speculative theories. See Nd i.82, 90, 107, 352; ii.271; SnA 523; DhA iv.180 for the traditional exegesis. As legal t. t. attādānaŋ ādīyati is to take upon oneself the conduct, before the Chapter, of a legal point already raised. Vin ii.247 (quoted v.91).
Atta2 see attan.
Atta3 [Sk. akta, pp. of añjati] see upatta.
Attan (m.) & atta (the latter is the form used in compn.) [Vedic ātman, not to Gr. a)\nemos = Lat. animus, but to Gr. a)tmo/s steam, Ohg. ātum breath, Ags. aepm]. -- I. Inflection. (1) of attan -- (n. stem); the foll. cases are the most freq.: acc. attānaŋ D i.13, 185; S i.24; Sn 132, 451. -- gen. dat. attano Sn 334, 592 etc., also as abl. A iii.337 (attano ca parato ca as regards himself and others). -- instr. abl. attanā S i.24; Sn 132, 451; DhA ii.75; PvA 15, 214 etc. On use of attanā see below iii.1 C. -- loc. attani S v.177; A i.149 (attanī metri causa); ii.52 (anattani); iii.181; M i.138; Sn 666, 756, 784; Vbh 376 (an˚). -- (2) of atta -- (a -- stem) we find the foll. cases: acc. attaŋ Dh 379. -- instr. attena S iv.54. -- abl. attato S i.188; Ps i.143; ii.48; Vbh 336.
Meanings. 1. The soul as postulated in the animistic theories held in N India in the 6th and 7th cent. B. C. It is described in the Upanishads as a small creature, in shape like a man, dwelling in ordinary times in the heart. It escapes from the body in sleep or trance; when it returns to the body life and motion reappear. It escapes from the body at death, then continues to carry on an everlasting life of its own. For numerous other details see Rh. D. Theory of Soul in the Upanishads J R A S 1899. Bt. India 251 -- 255. Buddhism repudiated all such theories, thus differing from other religions. Sixteen such theories about the soul D i.31. Seven other theories D i.34. Three others D i.186/7. A ʻ soul ʼ according to general belief was some thing permanent, unchangeable, not affected by sorrow S iv.54 = Kvu 67; Vin i.14; M i.138. See also M i.233; iii.265, 271; S ii.17, 109; iii.135; A i.284; ii.164, 171; v.188; S iv.400. Cp. ātuman, tuma, puggala, jīva, satta, pāṇa and nāma -- rūpa.
2. Oneself, himself, yourself. Nom. attā, very rare. S i.71, 169; iii.120; A i.57, 149 (you yourself know whether that is true or false. Cp. Manu viii.84. Here attā comes very near to the European idea of conscience. But conscience as a unity or entity is not accepted by Buddhism) Sn 284; Dh 166, 380; Miln 54 (the image, outward appearance, of oneself). Acc. attānaŋ S i.44 (would not give for himself, as a slave) A i.89; Sn 709. Acc. attaŋ Dh 379. Abl. attato as oneself S i.188; Ps i.143; ii.48; Vbh 336. Loc. attani A i.149; iii.181; Sn 666, 784. Instr. attanā S i.57 = Dh 66; S i.75; ii.68; A i.53; iii.211; iv.405; Dh 165. On one's own account, spontaneously S iv.307; v.354; A i.297; ii.99, 218; iii.81; J i.156; PvA 15, 20. In composition with numerals attadutiya himself and one other D ii.147; ˚catuttha with himself as fourth M i.393; A iii.36; ˚pañcama Dpvs viii.2; ˚sattama J i.233; ˚aṭṭhama VvA 149 (as atta -- naṭṭhama Vv 3413), & ˚aṭṭhamaka Miln 291.
anattā (n. and predicative adj.) not a soul, without a soul. Most freq. in combn. with dukkha & anicca -- (1) as noun: S iii.141 (˚anupassin); iv.49; v.345 (˚saññin); A ii.52 = Ps ii.80 (anattani anattā; opp. to anattani attā, the opinion of the micchādiṭṭhigatā sattā); Dh 279; Ps ii.37, 45 sq. (˚anupassanā), 106 (yaŋ aniccañ ca dukkhañ ca taŋ anattā); DhA iii. 406 (˚lakkhaṇa). -- (2) as adj. (pred.): S iv.152 sq.; S iv.166; S iv.130 sq., 148 sq.; Vin i.13 = S iii.66 = Nd2 680 Q 1; S iii.20 sq.; 178 sq., 196 sq.; sabbe dhammā anattā Vin v.86; S iii.133; iv.28, 401.
-- attha one's own profit or interest Sn 75; Nd2 23; J iv.56, 96; otherwise as atta -- d -- attha, e. g. Sn 284. -- atthiya looking after one's own needs Th 1, 1097. -- âdhipaka master of oneself, self -- mastered A i.150. -- adhipateyya selfdependence, self -- reliance, independence A i.147. -- âdhīna independent D i.72. -- ânudiṭṭhi speculation about souls S iii.185; iv.148; A iii.447; Sn 1119; Ps i.143; Vbh 368; Miln 146. -- ânuyogin one who concentrates his attention on himself Dh 209; DhA iii.275. -- ânuvāda blaming oneself A ii.121; Vbh 376. -- uññā self -- humiliation Vbh 353 (+ att -- avaññā). -- uddesa relation to oneself Vin iii.149 (= attano atthāya), also ˚ika ibid. 144. -- kata self -- made S i.134 (opp. para˚). -- kāma love of self A ii.21; adj. a lover of "soul", one who cares for his own soul S i.75. -- kāra individual self, fixed individuality, oneself (cp. ahaŋkāra) D i.53 (opp. para˚); A iii 337 (id.) DA i.160; as nt. at J v.401 in the sense of service (self -- doing", slavery) (attakārāni karonti bhattusu). -- kilamatha self -- mortification D iii.113; S iv.330; v.421; M iii.230. -- garahin self -- censuring Sn 778. -- gutta selfguarded Dh 379. -- gutti watchfulness as regards one's self, self -- care A ii.72. -- ghañña self -- destruction Dh 164. -- ja proceeding from oneself Dh 161 (pāpa). -- ñū knowing oneself A iv.113, cp. D iii.252. -- (n) tapa self -- mortifying, self -- vexing D iii.232 = A ii.205 (opp. paran˚); M i.341, 411; ii.159; Pug 55, 56. -- daṇḍa see atta1. -- danta selfrestrained, self -- controlled Dh 104, 322. -- diṭṭhi speculation concerning the nature of the soul Nd1 107; SnA 523, 527. -- dīpa relying on oneself, independent, founded on oneself (+ attasaraṇa, opp. añña˚) D ii.100 = iii.42; S v.154; Sn 501 (= attano guṇe eva attano dīpaŋ katvā SnA 416). -- paccakkha only in instr. ˚ena by or with his own presence, i. e. himself J v.119. -- paccakkhika eye -- witness J v.119. -- paccatthika hostile to oneself Vin ii.94, 96. -- paṭilābha acquisition of a personality D i.195 (tayo: oḷārika, manomaya, arūpa). -- paritāpana self -- chastisement, mortification D iii.232 = A ii.205; M i.341; PvA 18, 30. -- parittā charm (protection) for oneself Vin ii.110. -- paribhava disrespect for one's own person Vbh 353. -- bhāva one's own nature (1) person, personality, individuality, living creature; form, appearance [cp. Dhs trsl. LXXI and BSk. ātmabhāva body Divy 70, 73 (˚pratilambha), 230; Sp. Av. Ś i.162 (pratilambha), 167, 171] Vin ii.238 (living beings, forms); S v.442 (bodily appearance); A i.279 (oḷārika a substantial creature); ii.17 (creature); DhA ii.64, 69 (appearance); SnA 132 (personality). -- (2) life, rebirth A i.134 sq.; iii.412; DhA ii.68; PvA 8, 15, 166 (atītā ˚ā former lives). ˚ŋ pavatteti to lead a life, to live PvA 29, 181. Thus in cpd. paṭilābha assumption of an existence, becoming reborn as an individual Vin ii.185; iii.105; D iii.231; M iii.46; S ii.255, 272, 283; iii.144; A ii.159, 188; iii.122 sq. -- (3) character, quality of heart Sn 388 (= citta SnA 374); J i.61. -- rūpa "of the form of self", self -- like only in instr. ˚ena as adv. by oneself, on one's own account, for the sake of oneself S iv.97; A ii.120. -- vadha self -- destruction S ii.241; A ii.73. -- vāda theory of (a persistent) soul D iii.230; M i.66; D ii.58; S ii.3, 245 sq.; iii.103, 165, 203; iv.1 sq., 43 sq., 153 sq.; Ps i.156 sq.; Vbh 136, 375. For var. points of an "attavādic" doctrine see Index to Saŋyutta Nikāya. -- vyābādha personal harm or distress self -- suffering, one's own disaster (opp. para˚) M i 369; S iv.339 = A i.157; A ii.179. -- vetana supporting oneself, earning one's own living Sn 24. -- sañcetanā self -- perception, self -- consciousness (opp. para˚) D iii.231; A ii.159. -- sambhava originating from one's self S i.70; A iv.312; Dh 161 (pāpa); Th 1, 260. -- sambhūta arisen from oneself Sn 272. -- sammāpaṇidhi thorough pursuit or development of one's personality A ii.32; Sn 260, cp. KhA 132. -- saraṇa see ˚dipa. -- sukha happiness of oneself, self -- success Dpvs i.66, cp. ii.11. -- hita personal welfare one's own good (opp. para˚) D iii.233; A ii.95 sq. -- hetu for one's own sake, out of self -- consideration Sn 122; Dh 328.
Attaniya (adj.) [from attā] belonging to the soul, having a soul, of the nature of soul, soul -- like; usually nt. anything of the nature of soul M i.138 = Kvu 67; M i.297; ii.263; S iii.78 (yaŋ kho anattaniyaŋ whatever has no soul), 127; iv.54 = Nd2 680 F; S iv.82 = iii.33 = Nd2 680 Q 3; S iv.168; v.6; Nd2 680 D. Cp. Dhs trsl. XXXV ff.
Attamana [atta1 + mano, having an up raised mind. Bdhgh's expln. is saka -- mano DA i.255 = attā + mano. He applies the same expln. to attamanatā (at Dhs 9, see Dhs trsl. 12) = attano manatā mentality of one's self] delighted, pleased, enraptured D i.3, 90 (an˚); ii.14; A iii.337, 343; iv.344; Sn 45 = Dh 328 (= upaṭṭhita -- satt DhA iv.29); Sn 995; Nd2 24 (= tuṭṭha -- mano haṭṭha -- mano etc.); Vv 14; Pug 33 (an˚); Miln 18; DA i.52; DhA i.89 (an˚ -- dhātuka displeased); PvA 23, 132; VvA 21 (where Dhpāla gives two explns, either tuṭṭhamano or sakamano).
Attamanatā (f.) [abstr. to prec.] satisfaction, joy, pleasure, transport of mind M i.114; A i.276; iv.62; Pug 18 (an˚); Dhs 9, 86, 418 (an˚); PvA 132; VvA 67 (an˚).
Attāṇa (adj.) [a + tāṇa] without shelter or protection J i.229; Miln 148, 325; ThA 285.
Attha1 (also aṭṭha, esp. in combns mentioned under 3) (m. & nt.) [Vedic artha from ṛ, arti & ṛṇoti to reach, attain or to proceed (to or from), thus originally result (or cause), profit, attainment. Cp. semantically Fr. chose, Lat. causa] 1. interest, advantage, gain; (moral) good, blessing, welfare; profit, prosperity, well -- being M i.111 (atthassa ninnetar, of the Buddha, bringer of good); S iv.94 (id.); S i.34 (attano a. one's own welfare), 55 (id.) 86, 102, 126 = A ii.46 (atthassa patti); S i.162 (attano ca parassa ca); ii.222 (id.); iv.347 (˚ŋ bhañjati destroy the good or welfare, always with musāvādena by lying, cp. attha -- bhañjanaka); A i.61 (˚ŋ anubhoti to fare well, to have a (good) result); iii.364 (samparāyika a. profit in the future life); A v.223 sq. (anattho ca attho ca detriment & profit); It 44 (v. l. attā better); Sn 37, 58 (= Nd2 26, where the six kinds of advantages are enumd. as att˚ par˚ ubhay˚, i. e. advantage, resulting for oneself, for others, for both; diṭṭhadhammik˚ samparāyik˚ param˚ gain for this life, for a future life, and highest gain of all, i. e. Arahantship); Sn 331 (ko attho supitena what good is it to sleep = na hi sakkā supantena koci attho papuṇituŋ SnA 338; cp. ko attho supinena te Pv ii.61); PvA 30 (atthaŋ sādheti does good, results in good, 69 (samparāyikena atthena). -- dat. atthāya for the good, for the benefit of (gen.); to advantage, often eombd. with hitāya sukhāya, e. g. D iii.211 sq.; It 79. -- Kh viii.1 (to my benefit); Pv i.43 (= upakārāya PvA 18), ii.129 (to great advantage). See also below 6.
Sometimes in a more concrete meaning = riches, wealth, e. g. J i.256 (= vaḍḍhiŋ C.); iii.394 (id.); Pv iv.14 (= dhanaŋ PvA 219). -- Often as -- ˚: att˚ , one's own wellfare, usually combd. with par˚ and ubhay˚ (see above) S ii.29; v.121; A i.158, 216; iii.63 sq.; iv.134; Sn 75 (att-aṭṭha, v. l. attha Nd2), 284 (atta -- d -- attha); uttam˚ the highest gain, the very best thing Dh 386 (= arahatta DhA iv.142); Sn 324 (= arahatta SnA 332); param˚ id. Nd2 26; sad˚ one's own weal D ii.141; M i.4; S ii.29; v.145; A i.144; sāttha (adj.) connected with advantage, beneficial, profitable (of the Dhamma; or should we take it as "with the meaning, in spirit"? see sāttha) D i.62; S v.352; A ii.147; iii.152; Nd2 316. -- 2. need, want (c. instr.), use (for = instr.) S i.37 (˚jāta when need has arisen, in need); J i.254; iii.126, 281; iv.1; DhA i.398 (nɔ atthi etehɔ attho I have no use for them); VvA 250; PvA 24 (yāvadattha, adj. as much as is needed, sufficient = anappaka). -- 3. sense, meaning, import (of a word), denotation, signification. In this application attha is always spelt aṭṭha in cpds. aṭṭh -- uppatti and aṭṭha -- kathā (see below). On term see also Cpd. 4. -- S iii.93 (atthaŋ vibhajati explain the sense); A i.23 (id.), 60 (nīt˚ primary meaning, literal meaning; neyy˚ secondary or inferred meaning); ii.189 (˚ŋ ācikkhati to interpret); Sn 126 (˚ŋ pucchita asked the (correct) sense, the lit. meaning), 251 (˚ŋ akkhāti); Th 1, 374; attho paramo the highest sense, the ultimate sense or intrinsic meaning It 98, cp. Cpd. 6, 81, 223; Miln 28 (paramatthato in the absolute sense); Miln 18 (atthato according to its meaning, opp. vyañjanato by letter, orthographically); DhA ii.82; iii.175; KhA 81 (pad˚ meaning of a word); SnA 91 (id.); PvA 15 (˚ŋ vadati to explain, interpret), 16, 19 (hitatthadhammatā "fitness of the best sense", i. e. practical application), 71. Very frequent in Commentary style at the conclusion of an explained passage as ti attho "this is the meaning", thus it is meant, this is the sense, e. g. DA i.65; DhA iv.140, 141; PvA 33, etc. -- 4.Contrasted with dhamma in the combn. attho ca dhammo ca it (attha) refers to the (primary, natural) meaning of the word, while dhamma relates to the (interpreted) meaning of the text, to its bearing on the norm and conduct; or one might say they represent the theoretical and practical side of the text (pāḷi) to be discussed, the "letter" and the "spirit". Thus at A i.69; v.222, 254; Sn 326 (= bhāsitatthañ ca pāḷidhammañ ca SnA 333); It 84 (duṭṭho atthaŋ na jānāti dhammaŋ na passati: he realises neither the meaning nor the importance); Dh 363 (= bhāsitatthañ cɔ eva desanādhammañ ca); J ii.353; vi.368; Nd2 386 (meaning & proper nature); Pv iii.96 (but expld. by PvA 211 as hita = benefit, good, thus referring it to above 1). For the same use see cpds. ˚dhamma, ˚paṭisambhidā, esp. in adv. use (see under 6) Sn 430 (yenɔ atthena for which purpose), 508 (kena atthena v. l. BB for T attanā), J i.411 (atthaŋ vā kāraṇaŋ vā reason and cause); DhA ii.95 (+ kāraṇa(; PvA 11 (ayaŋ hɔ ettha attho this is the reason why). -- 5. (in very wide application, covering the same ground as Lat. res & Fr. chose): (a) matter, affair, thing, often untranslatable and simply to be given as "this" or "that" S ii.36 (ekena -- padena sabbo attho vutto the whole matter is said with one word); J i.151 (taŋ atthaŋ the matter); ii.160 (imaŋ a. this); vi.289 (taŋ atthaŋ pakāsento); PvA 6 (taŋ atthaŋ pucchi asked it), 11 (visajjeti explains it), 29 (vuttaŋ atthaŋ what had been said), 82 (id.). -- (b) affair, cause, case (cp. aṭṭa2 and Lat. causa) Dh 256, 331; Miln 47 (kassa atthaŋ dhāresi whose cause do you support, with whom do you agree?). See also alamattha. -- 6. Adv. use of oblique cases in the sense of a prep.: (a) dat. atthāya for the sake of, in order to, for J i.254 dhanɔ atthāya for wealth, kim˚ what for, why?), 279; ii.133; iii.54; DhA ii.82; PvA 55, 75, 78. -- (b) acc. atthaŋ on account of, in order to, often instead of an infinitive or with another inf. substitute J i.279 (kim˚); iii.53 (id.); i.253; ii.128; Dpvs vi.79; DhA i.397; PvA 32 (dassan˚ in order to see), 78, 167, etc. -- (c) abl. atthā J iii.518 (pitu atthā = atthāya C.). -- (d) loc. atthe instead of, for VvA 10; PvA 33; etc.
anattha (m. & nt.) 1. unprofitable situation or condition, mischief, harm, misery, misfortune S i.103; ii.196 (anatthāya saŋvattati); A iv.96 (˚ŋ adhipajjati) It 84 (˚janano doso ill -- will brings discomfort); J i.63, 196; Pug 37; Dhs 1060, 1231; Sdhp 87; DA i.52 (anatthajanano kodho, cp. It 83 and Nd2 420 Q2); DhA ii.73; PvA 13, 61, 114, 199. -- 2. (= attha 3) incorrect sense, false meaning, as adj. senseless (and therefore unprofitable, no good, irrelevant) A v.222, 254 (adhammo ca); Dh 100 (= aniyyānad˚īpaka DhA ii.208); Sn 126 (expld. at SnA 180 as ahitaŋ).
-- akkhāyin showing what is profitable D iii.187. -- attha riches J vi.290 (= atthabhūtaŋ atthaŋ C.). -- antara difference between the (two) meanings Miln 158. At Th 1, 374, Oldenberg's reading, but the v. l. (also C. reading) atthandhara is much better = he who knows the (correct) meaning, esp. as it corresponds with dhamma -- dhara (q. v.). -- abhisamaya grasp of the proficient S i.87 (see abhisamaya). -- uddhāra synopsis or abstract of contents ("matter") of the Vinaya Dpvs v.37. -- upaparikkhā investigation of meaning, (+ dhamma -- savanna) M iii.175; A iii.381 sq.; iv.221; v.126. -- uppatti (aṭṭh˚) sense, meaning, explanation, interpretation J i.89; DA i.242; KhA 216; VvA 197, 203 (cp. pāḷito) PvA 2, 6, 78; etc. -- kāma (adj.) (a) well -- wishing, a well -- wisher, friend, one who is interested in the welfare of others (cp. Sk. arthakāma, e. g. Bhagavadgīta ii.5: gurūn arthakāman) S i.140, 197, 201 sq.; A iii.143; D iii.164 (bahuno janassa a., + hitakāmo); J i.241; Pv iv.351; Pv A 25; SnA 287 (an˚). <-> (b) one who is interested in his own gain or good, either in good or bad sense (= greedy) S i.44; PvA 112. <-> -- kathā (aṭṭha˚) exposition of the sense, explanation, commentary J v.38, 170; PvA 1, 71, etc. freq. in N. of Com. -- kara beneficial, useful Vin iii.149; Miln 321. -- karaṇa the business of trying a case, holding court, giving judgment (v. l. aṭṭa˚) D ii.20; S i.74 (judgment hall?). -- kavi a didactic poet (see kavi) A ii.230. -- kāmin = ˚kāma, well -- wishing Sn 986 (devatā atthakāminī). -- kāraṇā (abl.) for the sake of gain D iii.186. -- kusala clever in finding out what is good or profitable Sn 143 (= atthacheka KhA 236). -- cara doing good, busy in the interest of others, obliging S i.23 (narānaŋ = "working out man's salvation"). -- caraka (adj.) one who devotes himself to being useful to others, doing good, one who renders service to others, e. g. an attendant, messenger, agent etc. D i.107 (= hitakāraka DA i.276); J ii.87; iii.326; iv.230; vi.369. -- cariyā useful conduct or behaviour D iii.152, 190, 232; A ii.32, 248; iv.219, 364. -- ñu one who knows what is useful or who knows the (plain or correct) meaning of something (+ dhammaññū) D iii.252; A iii.148; iv.113 sq. -- dassin intent upon the (moral) good Sn 385 (= hitânupassin SnA 373). -- dassimant one who examines a cause (cp. Sk. arthadarśika) J vi.286 (but expld. by C. as "saṇha -- sukhuma -- pañña" of deep insight, one who has a fine and minute knowledge). -- desanā interpretation, exegesis Miln 21 (dhamm˚). -- dhamma "reason and morality", see above n0. 3. ˚anusāsaka one who advises regarding the meaning and application of the Law, a professor of moral philosophy J ii.105; DhA ii.71. -- pada a profitable saying, a word of good sense, text, motto A ii.189; iii.356; Dh 100. -- paṭisambhidā knowledge of the meaning (of words) combd. with dhamma˚ of the text or spirit (see above n0. 3) Ps i.132; ii.150; Vbh 293 sq. -- paṭisaŋvedin experiencing good D iii.241 (+ dhamma˚); A i.151; iii.21. -- baddha expecting some good from (c. loc.) Sn 382. -- bhañjanaka breaking the welfare of, hurting DhA iii.356 (paresaŋ of others, by means of telling lies, musāvādena). -- majjha of beautiful waist J v.170 (= sumajjhā C.; reading must be faulty, there is hardly any connection with attha; v. l. atta). -- rasa sweetness (or substance, essence) of meaning (+ dhamma˚, vimutti˚) Nd2 466; Ps ii.88, 89. -- vasa "dependence on the sense", reasonableness, reason, consequence, cause D ii.285; M i.464; ii.120; iii.150; S ii.202; iii.93; iv.303; v.224; A i.61, 77, 98; ii.240; iii.72, 169, 237; Dh 289 (= kāraṇa DhA iii.435); It 89; Sn 297; Ud 14. -- vasika sensible It 89; Miln 406. -- vasin bent on (one's) aim or purpose Th 1, 539. -- vādin one who speaks good, i. e. whose words are doing good or who speaks only useful speech, always in combn. with kāla˚ bhūta˚ dhamma˚ D i.4; iii.175; A i.204; ii.22, 209; Pug 58; DA i.76 (expld. as "one who speaks for the sake of reaping blessings here and hereafter"). -- saŋvaṇṇanā explanation, exegesis PvA 1. -- saŋhita connected with good, bringing good, profitable, useful, salutary D i.189; S ii.223; iv.330; v.417; A iii.196 sq., 244; Sn 722 (= hitena saŋhitaŋ SnA 500); Pug 58. -- sandassana determination of meaning, definition Ps i.105. -- siddhi profit, advantage, benefit J i.402; PvA 63.
Attha2 (nt.) [Vedic asta, of uncertain etym.] home, primarily as place of rest & shelter, but in P. phraseology abstracted from the "going home", i. e. setting of the sun, as disappearance, going out of existence, annihilation, extinction. Only in acc. and as ˚ -- in foll phrases: atthangacchati to disappear, to go out of existence, to vanish Dh 226 (= vināsaŋ natthibhāvaŋ gacchati DhA iii.324), 384 (= parikkhayaŋ gacchati); pp. atthangata gone home, gone to rest, gone, disappeared; of the sun (= set): J i.175 (atthangate suriye at sunset); PvA 55 (id.) 216 (anatthangate s. before sunset) fig. Sn 472 (atthagata). 475 (id.); 1075 (= niruddha ucchinṇa vinaṭṭha anupādi -- sesāya nibbāna -- dhātuyā nibbuta); It 58; Dhs 1038; Vbh 195. -- atthagatatta (nt. abstr.) disappearance SnA 409. -- atthangama (atthagama passim) annihilation, disappearance; opposed to samudaya (coming into existence) and synonymous with nirodha (destruction) D i.34, 37, 183; S iv.327; A iii.326; Ps ii.4, 6, 39; Pug 52; Dhs 165, 265, 501, 579; Vbh 105. -- atthagamana (nt.) setting (of the sun) J i.101 (suriyass' atthagamanā at sunset) DA i.95 (= ogamana). -- attha -- gāmin, in phrase udayɔ atthagāmin leading to birth and death (of paññā): see udaya. -- atthaŋ paleti = atthangacchati (fig.) Sn 1074 (= atthangameti nirujjhati Nd2 28). -- Also atthamita (pp. of i) set (of the sun) in phrase anatthamite suriye before sunset (with anatthangamite as v. l. at both pass.) DhA i.86; iii.127. -- Cp. also abbhattha.
Attha3 pres. 2nd pl. of atthi (q. v.).
Atthata [pp. of attharati] spread, covered, spread over with ( -- ˚) Vin i.265; iv.287; v.172 (also ˚an); A iii.50; PvA 141.
Atthatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. attha1] reason, cause; only in abl. atthattā according to the sense, by reason of, on account of PvA 189 ( -- ˚).
Atthara [fr. attharati] a rug (for horses, elephants etc.) D i.7.
Attharaka [= atthara] a covering J i.9; DA i.87. -- f. ˚ikā a layer J i.9; v.280.
Attharaṇa (nt.) [fr. attharati] a covering, carpet, cover, rug Vin ii.291; A ii.56; iii.53; Mhvs 3, 20; 15, 40; 25, 102; ThA 22.
Attharati [ā + stṛ] to spread, to cover, to spread out; stretch, lay out Vin i.254; v.172; J i.199; v.113; vi.428; Dh i.272. -- pp. atthata (q. v.). -- Caus. attharāpeti to caused to be spread J v.110; Mhvs 3, 20; 29, 7; 34, 69.
Atthavant (adj.) [cp. Sk. arthavant] full of benefit S i.30; Th 1, 740; Miln 172.
Atthāra [cp. Sk. āstāra, fr. attharati] spreading out Vin v.172 (see kaṭhina). atthāraka same ibid.; Vin ii.87 (covering).
Atthi [Sk. asti, 1st sg. asmi; Gr. ei)mi/ -- e)sti/; Lat. sum -- est; Goth. im -- ist; Ags. eom -- is E. am -- is] to be, to exist. <-> Pres. Ind. 1st sg. asmi Sn 1120, 1143; J i.151; iii.55, and amhi M i.429; Sn 694; J ii.153; Pv i.102; ii.82. <-> 2nd sg. asi Sn 420; J ii.160 (ɔsi); iii.278; Vv 324; PvA 4. -- 3rd sg. atthi Sn 377, 672, 884; J i.278. Often used for 3rd pl. (= santi), e. g. J i.280; ii.2; iii.55. -- 1st pl. asma [Sk. smaḥ] Sn 594, 595; asmase Sn 595, and amha Sn 570; J ii.128. 2nd pl. attha J ii.128; PvA 39, 74 (āgatɔ attha you have come). <-> 3rd pl. santi Sn 1077; Nd2 637 (= saŋvijjanti atthi upalabbhanti); J ii.353; PvA 7, 22 -- Imper. atthu Sn 340; J i.59; iii.26. -- Pot. 1st sg. siyā [Sk. syām] Pv ii.88, and assaŋ [Cond. used as Pot.] Sn 1120; Pv i.125 (= bhaveyyaŋ PvA 64). -- 2nd sg. siyā [Sk. syāḥ] Pv ii.87. -- 3rd sg. siyā [Sk. syāt] D ii.154; Sn 325, 1092; Nd2 105 (= jāneyya, nibbatteyya); J i.262; PvA 13, and assa D i.135, 196; ii.154; A v.194; Sn 49, 143; Dh 124, 260; Pv ii.324; 924. -- 1st pl. assu PvA 27. <-> 3rd pl. assu [cp. Sk. syuḥ] Sn 532; Dh 74; Pv iv.136 (= bhaveyyuŋ PvA 231). -- Aor. 1st sg. āsiŋ [Sk. āsaŋ] Sn 284; Pv i.21 (= ahosiŋ PvA 10); ii.34 (= ahosiŋ PvA 83). -- 3rd sg. āsi [Sk. āsīt] Sn 994. -- 3rd āsuŋ [cp. Sk. Perf. āsuḥ] Pv ii.321, 133 (ti pi pāṭho for su). <-> Ppr. *sat only in loc. sati (as loc. abs.) Dh 146; J i.150, 263, santa Sn 105; Nd2 635; J i.150 (loc. evaŋ sante in this case); iii.26, and samāna (q. v.) J i.266; iv.138.
-- bhāva state of being, existence, being J i.222, 290; ii.415; DhA ii.5; iv.217 (atthibhāva vā natthibhāva vā whether there is or not).
Atthika (adj.) [cp. Sk. arthika] 1. (to attha1) profitable, good, proper. In this meaning the MSS show a variance of spelling either atthika or aṭṭhika or aṭṭhita; in all cases atthika should be preferred D i.55 (˚vāda); M ii.212 (aṭṭhita); A iii.219 sq. (idaŋ atthikaŋ this is suitable, of good avail; T aṭṭhitaŋ, vv. ll. as above); Sn 1058 (aṭṭhita; Nd2 20 also aṭṭhita, which at this pass. shows a confusion between aṭṭha and a -- ṭhita); J v.151 (in def. of aṭṭhikatvā q. v.); Pug 69, 70 (T aṭṭhika, aṭṭhita SS; expld. by Pug A v.4 by kalyāṇāya). -- 2. (to attha1 2) desirous of ( -- ˚), wanting, seeking for, in need of (c. instr.) A ii.199 (uday˚ desirous of increase); Sn 333, 460, 487 (puññ˚), 987 (dhan˚ greedy for wealth); J i.263 (rajj˚ coveting a kingdom); v.19; Pv ii.228 (bhojan˚ in need of food); iv.11 (kāraṇ˚), 121 (khiḍḍ˚ for play), 163 (puññ˚); PvA 95 (sasena a. wanting a rabbit), 120; DA i.70 (atthikā those who like to). -- anatthika one who does not care for, or is not satisfied with (c. instr.) J v.460; PvA 20; of no good Th 1, 956 ("of little zeal" Mrs. Rh. D.).
-- bhāva (a) usefulness, profitableness Pug A v.4. (b) state of need, distress PvA 120.
Atthikavant (adj.) [atthika + vant] one who wants something, one who is on a certain errand D i.90 (atthikaŋ assa atthī ti DA i.255).
Atthitā (f.) [f. abstr. fr. atthi cp. atthibhāva] state of being, existence, being, reality M i.486; S ii.17 (˚añ c˚ eva natthitañ ca to be and not to be); iii.135; J v.110 (kassaci atthitaŋ vā natthitaŋ vā jānāhi see if there is anybody or not); DhsA 394. -- Often in abl. atthitāya by reason of, on account of, this being so DhA iii.344 (idamatthitāya under this condition) PvA 94, 97, 143.
Atthin (adj.) ( -- ˚) [Vedic arthin] desirous, wanting anything; see mant˚, vād˚.
Atthiya (adj.) ( -- ˚) [= atthika] having a purpose or end S iii.189 (kim˚ for what purpose?); A v.1 sq. (id.), 311 sq.; Th 1, 1097 (att˚ having one's purpose in oneself), 1274; Sn 354 (yad atthiyaŋ on account of what).
Atra (adv.) [Sk. atra] here; atra atra here & there J i.414 = iv.5 (in expln. of atriccha).
Atraja (adj.) [Sk. *ātma -- ja, corrupted form for attaja (see attā) through analogy with Sk. atra "here". This form occurs only in J and similar sources, i. e. popular lore] born from oneself, one's own, appl. to sons, of which there are 4 kinds enumd., viz. atraja khettaja, dinnaka, antevāsika p. Nd2 448. -- J i.135; iii.103 = Nd1 504; J iii.181; v.465; vi.20; Mhvs 4, 12; 13, 4; 36, 57.
Atriccha (adj.) [the popular etym. suggested at JA iv.4 is atra atra icchamāna desiring here & there; but see atricchā] very covetous, greedy, wanting too much J i.414 = iv.4; iii.206.
Atricchā (f.) [Sk. *atṛptyā, a + tṛpt + yā, influenced by Desid. titṛpsati, so that atricchā phonetically rather corresponds to a form *a. -- tṛpsyā (cch = psy, cp. P. chāta Sk. psāta). For the simple Sk. tṛpti see titti (from tappati2). According to Kern, but phonetically hardly justifiable it is Sk. atīccha = ati + icchā "too much desire", with r in dissolution of geminated tt, like atraja for attaja. See also atriccha adj. and cp. J.P.T.S. 1884, 69] great desire, greed, excessive longing, insatiability J iv.5, 327.
Atricchatā (f.) [see atricchā] excessive lust J. iii.222.
Atha (indecl.) [Sk. atha, cp. atho] copulative & adversative part. 1. after positive clauses, in enumerations, in the beginning & continuation of a story: and, and also, or; and then, now D ii.2; iii.152, 199 (athâparaŋ etad avoca); M i.435; Sn 1006, 1007, 1017; Sn p. 126 (athâparaŋ etad avoca: and further, something else); Dh 69, 119, 377; J ii.158; Pv ii.64; PvA 3, 8 (atha na and not), 70. -- 2. after negative clauses: but M i.430; Sn 990, 1047; Dh 85, 136, 387; PvA 68. Often combd. with other part., e. g. atha kho (pos. & neg.) now, and then; but, rather, moreover Vin i.1; D i.141, 167, 174; A v.195; PvA 79, 221, 251. na -- atha kho na neither -- nor PvA 28. atha kho pana and yet D i.139. atha ca pana on the other hand J i.279. atha vā or (after prec. ca), nor (after prec. na) Sn 134; Dh 140, 271; Pv i.41; ii.14. athā vā pi Sn 917, 921.
Athabbaṇa [Vedic atharvan; as regards etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under ater] (1) the Atharva Veda DA i.247 = SnA 447 (˚veda). -- (2) one who is familiar with the (magic formulas of the) Atharvaveda J vi.490 (sâthabbaṇa= sahatthivejja, with the elephant -- healer or doctor). See also āthabbaṇa.
Atho (indecl.) [Sk. atho, atha + u] copulative and adver- sative part.: and, also, and further, likewise, nay S i.106; Sn 43, 155, 647; Dh 151, 234, 423; J i.83; ii.185; iv.495; It 106; Kh viii.7; Pv iv.315; PvA 251 (atho ti nipātamattaŋ avadhāraṇ -- atthe vā). Also combd. with other part., like atho pi Sn 222, 537, 985; Pv ii.320; KhA 166.
Ada (adj.) ( -- ˚) [to ad, see adeti, cp. ˚ga, ˚ṭha, ˚da etc.] eating S iv.195 (kiṭṭhâda eating corn); J ii.439 (vantâda = vantakhādaka C.).
Adaka (adj.) = ada J v.91 (purisâdaka man -- eater).
Adana (nt.) [from adeti] eating, food J v.374 (v.l. modana).
Adasaka (adj.) see dasā.
Adāsa [prob. = adaŋsa, from ḍasati to bite, cp. dāṭhā tooth; lit meaning "toothless" or "not biting"] a kind of bird J iv.466.
Adiṭṭhā [a + diṭṭhā, ger. of *dassati] not seeing, without seeing J iv.192 (T. adaṭṭhā, v. l. BB na diṭṭhā, C. adisvā); v.219.
Adinna (pp.) [a + dinna] that which is not given, freq. in phrase adinn' ādāna (BSk. adattādāna Divy 302) seizing or grasping that whieh is not given to one, i. e. stealing, is the 2nd of the ten qualifications of bad character or sīla (dasa -- sīla see sīla ii.). Vin i.83 (˚ā veramaṇī); D i.4 (= parassa haraṇaŋ theyyaŋ corikā ti vuttaŋ hoti DA i.71); iii.68 sq., 82, 92, 181 sq.; M i.361; It 63; Kh ii., cp. KhA 26. -- adinnādāyin he who takes what is not given, a thief; stealing, thieving (cp. BSK. adattādāyika Divy 301, 418) Vin i.85; D i.138; Sdhp 78.
Adu (or ādu) (indecl.) [perhaps identical with aduŋ, nt. of pron. asu] part. of affirmation: even, yea, nay; always in emphatic exclamations Vv 622 (= udāhu VvA 258; v. l. SS. ādu) = Pv iv.317 (ādu) = DhA i.31 (T. ādu, v. l. adu); Vv 631 (v. l. ādu); J v.330 (T. ādu, C. adu; expld. on p. 331 fantastically as aduñ ca aduñ ca kammaŋ karohī ti). See also ādu.
Aduŋ nt. of pron. asu.
Adūsaka (adj.) [a + dūsaka] innocent J v.143 (= nirapa- rādha C.); vi.84, 552. f. adūsikā Sn 312.
Adūsiya = adūsaka J v.220 (= anaparādha C.).
Adeti [Sk. ādayati, Caus. of atti, ad to eat, 1st sg. admi = Gr. e)/dw, Lat. edo; Goth. itan = Ohg. ezzan = E. eat] to eat. Pres. ind. ademi etc. J v.31, 92, 197, 496; vi.106. pot. adeyya J v.107, 392, 493.
Adda1 [cp. Sk. ārdraka] ginger J i.244 (˚singivera).
Adda2 & Addā 3rd sg. aor. of *dassati; see *dassati 2. a.
Adda3 (adj.) [Sk. ārdra, from ṛdati or ardati to melt, cp. Gr. a)/rdw to moisten, a)\rda dirt; see also alla] wet, moist, slippery J iv.353; vi.309; Miln 346.
-- âvalepana "smeared with moisture", i. e. shiny, glittering S iv.187 (kūṭāgāra); M i.86=Nd2 1996 (upakāriyo). See also addha2.
The reading allâvalepana occurs at Nd2 40 (=S iv. 187), and is perhaps to be preferred. The meaning is better to be given as "newly plastered."
Addakkhi 3rd sg. aor. of *dassati; see *dassati 1 b.
Addasā 3rd sg. aor. of *dassati; see *dassati 2 a.
Addā & Addāyanā at Vbh 371 in def. of anādariya is either faulty writing, or dial. form or pop. etym. for ādā and ādāyana; see ādariya.
Addāyate [v. denom. fr. adda] to be or get wet, fig. to be attached to J iv.351. See also allīyati.
Addi [Sk. ardri] a mountain Dāvs ii.13.
Addita (pp.) [see aṭṭita which is the more correct spelling] afflicted, smarted, oppressed J i.21; ii.407; iii.261; iv.295; v.53, 268; Th 1, 406; Mhvs 1, 25; PvA 260; Sdhp 37, 281.
Addha1 (num.) [= aḍḍha, q. v.] one half, half (˚ -- ) D i.166 (˚māsika); A ii.160 (˚māsa); J i.59 (˚yojana); iii. 189 (˚māsa).
Addha2 (adj.) [= adda3, Sk. ārdra] soiled, wet; fig. attached to, intoxicated with (cp. sineha) M ii.223 (na anaddhabhūtaŋ attānaŋ dukkhena addhabhāveti he dirties the impure self with ill); S iii.1 (addhabhūto kāyo impure body); J vi.548 (˚nakha with dirty nails, C. pūtinakha).
Addhan (in cpds. addha˚) [Vedic adhvan, orig. meaning "stretch, length", both of space & time. -- Cases: nom. addhā, gen. dat. addhuno, instr. addhunā, acc. addhānaŋ, loc. addhani; pl. addhā. See also addhāna] 1. (of space) a path, road, also journey (see cpds. & derivations); only in one ster. phrase J iv.384 = v.137 (pathaddhuno paṇṇarase va cando, gen. for loc. ˚addhani, on his course, in his orbit; expld. at iv.384 by ākāsa -- patha -- sankhātassa addhuno majjhe ṭhito and at v.137 by pathaddhagato addha -- pathe gaganamajjhe ṭhito); Pv iii.31 (pathaddhani paṇṇarase va cando; loc. same meaning as prec., expld. at PvA 188 by attano pathabhūte addhani gaganatala -- magge). This phrase (pathaddhan) however is expld. by Kern (Toev. s. v. pathaddu) as "gone half -- way", i. e. on full -- moon -- day. He rejects the expln. of C. -- 2. (of time) a stretch of time, an interval of time, a period, also a lifetime (see cpds.); only in two standard applications viz. (a) as mode of time (past, present & future) in tayo addhā three divisions of time (atita, anāgata, paccuppanna) D iii.216; It 53, 70. (b) in phrase dīghaŋ addhānaŋ (acc.) a very long time A ii.1, 10 (dighaŋ addhānaŋ saŋsāraŋ); Sn 740 (dīghaŋ addhāna saŋsāra); Dh 207 (dīghaŋ addhāna socati); J i.137. gen. dīghassa addhuno PvA 148 (gatattā because a long time has elapsed), instr. dīghena addhunā S i.78; A ii.118; PvA 28.
-- āyu duration of life A ii.66 (dīghaŋ ˚ŋ a long lifetime. -- gata one who has gone the road or traversed the space or span of life, an old man [cp. BSk. adhvagata M Vastu ii.150], always combd. with vayo anuppatto, sometimes in ster. formula with jiṇṇa & mahallaka Vin ii.188; D i.48 (cp. DA i.143); M i.82; Sn pp. 50, 92; PvA 149. -- gū [Vedic adhvaga] a wayfarer, traveller, journeyman Th 255 = S i.212 (but the latter has panthagu, v. l. addhagū); J iii.95 (v. l. patthagu = panthagu); Dh 302.
Addhā (adv.) [Vedic addhā, cp. Av. azdā certainty] part. of affirmation and emphasis: certainly, for sure, really, truly D i.143; J i.19 (a. ahaŋ Buddho bhavissāmi) 66 (a. tvaŋ Buddho bhavissasi), 203, 279; iii.340; v.307, 410 (C. expln. differs) Sn 47, 1057; Nd2 30 = Ps ii.21 (ekaŋsa -- vacanaŋ nissaŋsaya -- vacanaŋ etc.) addhā hi J iv. 399; Pv iv.15 2.
Addhaneyya (adj.) = addhaniya 2, lasting J v.507 (an˚).
Addhaniya (adj.) [fr. addhan] 1. belonging to the road, fit for travelling (of the travelling season) Th 1, 529. <-> 2. belonging to a (long) time, lasting a long period, lasting, enduring D iii.211; J i.393 (an˚) vi.71. See also addhaneyya.
Addhariya [Vedic adhvaryu fr. adhvara sacrifice] a sacri- ficing priest, N. of a class of Brahmins D i.237 (brāhmaṇa).
Addhāna (nt.) [orig. the acc. of addhan, taken as nt. from phrase dīghaŋ addhānaŋ. It occurs only in acc. which may always be taken as acc. of addhan; thus the assumption of a special form addhāna would be superfluous, were it not for later forms like addhāne (loc.) Miln 126; PvA 75 v. l. BB, and for cpds.] same meaning as addhan, but as simplex only used with reference to time (i. e. a long time, cp. VvA 117 addhānaŋ = ciraŋ). Usually in phrase atītaŋ (anāgataŋ etc.) addhānaŋ in the past (future etc.), e. g. D i.200; S i.140; A v.32; Miln 126 (anāgatamaddhāne for ˚aŋ); PvA 75 (v. l. addhāne). dīghaŋ addhānaŋ Pv i.105. Also in phrase addhānaŋ āpādeti to make out the length of time or period, i. e. to live out one's lifetime S iv.110; J ii.293 (= jīvitaddhānaŋ āpādi āyuŋ vindi C).
-- daratha exhaustion from travelling DA i.287. -- magga a (proper) road for journeying, a long road between two towns, high road D i.1, 73, 79; M i.276 (kantār˚); DA i.35 (interpreted as "addhayojanaŋ gacchissāmī ti bhuñjitabban ti ādi vacanato addha -- yojanam pi addhāna maggo hoti", thus taken to addha "half", from counting by 1/2 miles); VvA 40, 292. Cp. also antarāmagga. -- parissama "fatigue of the road", i. e. fatigue from travelling VvA 305. -- vemattatā difference of time or period Miln 285 (+ āyuvemattatā).
Addhika [fr. addhan] a wanderer, wayfarer, traveller DA i.298 (= pathāvin), 270; PvA 78, 127 (˚jana people travelling). Often combd. with kapaṇa beggar, tramp, as kapaṇaddhikā (pl.) tramps and travellers (in which connection also as ˚iddhika, q. v.), e. g. J i.6 (v. l. ˚iddhika 262; DhA ii.26.
Addhita at Pv ii.62 is to be corrected to aṭṭita (sic v. l. BB).
Addhin (adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. addhan] belonging to the road or travelling, one who is on the road, a traveller, in gataddhin one who has performed his journey (= addhagata) Dh 90.
Addhuva see dhuva.
Adrūbhaka see dubbha.
Advejjhatā see dvejjhatā.
Adha˚ in cpds. like adhagga see under adho.
Adhamma see dhamma.
Adhama (adj.) [Vedic adhama = Lat. infimus, superl. of adho, q. v.] the lowest (lit. & fig.), the vilest, worst Sn 246 (narâdhama), 135 (vasalâdhama); Dh 78 (purisa˚); J iii.151 (miga˚); v.394 (uttamâdhama), 437 (id.), 397; Sdhp 387.
Adhara (adj.) [Vedic adhara, compar. of adho] the lower J iii.26 (adharoṭṭha the l. lip).
Adhi [Vedic adhi; base of demonstr. pron. a˚ + suffix -- dhi, corresponding in form to Gr. e)/n -- qa "on this" = here, cp. o(/qi where, in meaning equal to adv. of direction Gr. de/ (toward) = Ohg. zuo, E. to].
A. Prep. and pref. of direction & place: (a) as direction denoting a movement towards a definite end or goal = up to, over, toward, to, on (see C 1 a). -- (b) as place where (prep. c. loc. or abs.) = on top of, above, over, in; in addition to. Often simply deictic "here" (e. g.) ajjhatta = adhi + ātman "this self here" (see C 1 b).
B. adhi is freq. as modification pref., i. e. in loose compn. with n. or v. and as first part of a double prefixcpd. , like ajjhā˚ (adhi + ā), adhippa˚ (adhi + pra), but never occurs as a fixed base, i. e. as 2nd part of a pref.<-> cpd., like ā in paccā˚ (prati + ā), paryā˚ (pari + ā) or ava in paryava˚ (pari + ava) or ud in abhyud˚ (abhi + ud), samud˚ (sam + ud). As such (i. e. modification) it is usually intensifying, meaning "over above, in addition, quite, par excellence, super" -- (adhideva a super -- god, cp. ati -- deva), but very often has lost this power & become meaningless (like E. up in "shut up, fill up, join up etc), esp. in double pref. -- cpds. (ajjhāvasati "to dwell here -- in" = āvasati "to dwell in, to inhabit") (see C 2). -- In the explns of P. Commentators adhi is often (sometimes far -- fetchedly) interpreted by abhibhū "overpowering" see e. g. C. on adhiṭṭhāti & adhiṭṭhita; and by virtue of this intens. meaning we find a close relationship between the prefixes ati, adhi and abhi, all interchanging dialectically so that P. adhi often represents Sk. ati or abhi; thus adhi > ati in adhikusala, ˚kodhita, ˚jeguccha, ˚brahmā; adhi > abhi in adhippatthita, ˚pātcti, ˚ppāya, ˚ppeta, ˚bādheti, ˚bhū, ˚vāha. Cp. also ati iv.
C. The main applications of adhi are the foll.: 1. primary meaning (in verbs & verb derivations): either direction in which or place where, depending on the meaning of the verb determinate, either lit. or fig. -- (a) where to: adhiyita (adhi + ita) "gone on to or into" = studied; ajjhesita (adhi + esita) "wished for"; ˚kata "put to" i. e. commissioned; ˚kāra commission; ˚gacchati "to go on to & reach it" = obtain; ˚gama attainment; ˚gaṇhāti to overtake = surpass, ˚peta (adhi + pra + ita) "gone in to" = meant, understood; ˚pāya sense meaning, intention; ˚bhāsati to speak to = address; ˚mutta intent upon; ˚vacana "saying in addition" = attribute, metaphor, cp. Fr. sur -- nom; ˚vāsāna assent, ˚vāseti to dwell in, give in = consent. -- (b) where: ˚tiṭṭhati (˚ṭṭhāti) to stand by = look after, perform; ˚ṭṭhāna place where; ˚vasati to inhabit; ˚sayana "lying in", inhabiting. -- 2. secondary meaning (as emphatic modification): (a) with nouns or adjectives: adhi -- jeguccha very detestable; ˚matta "in an extreme measure", ˚pa supreme lord; ˚pacca lordship; ˚paññā higher, additional wisdom; ˚vara the very best; ˚sīla thorough character or morality. -- (b) with verbs (in double pref. -- cpds.); adhi + ava: ajjhogāheti plunge into; ajjhoṭhapeti to bring down to (its destination); ˚otthata covered completely; ˚oharati to swallow right down. adhi + ā: ajjhappatta having reached (the end); ajjhapīḷita quite overwhelmed; ˚āvuttha inhabited; ˚ārūhati grown up over; ˚āsaya desire, wish (cp. Ger. n. Anliegen & v. daranliegen). adhi + upa: ajjhupagacchati to reach, obtain; ˚upeti to receive; ˚upekkhati "to look all along over" = to superintend adhi + pra: adhippattheti to long for, to desire.
Note. The contracted (assimilation -- )form of adhi before vowels is ajjh -- (q. v.).
Adhika (adj.) [fr. adhi; cp. Sk. adhika] exceeding, extra- ordinary, superior, Pug 35; VvA 80 (= anadhivara, visiṭṭha); DA i.141, 222; Dpvs v.32 (an˚); DhA iii.238; KhA 193 (= anuttara); Sdhp 337, 447. -- compar. adhikatara DhA ii.7; iii.176; nt. ˚ŋ as adv. extraordinarily PvA 86 (= adhimattaŋ). In combn. with numerals adhika has the meaning of "in addition, with an additional, plus" (cp. ādi + ādika, with which it is evidently confounded, adhika being constructed in the same way as ādika, i. e. preceding the noun -- determination), e. g. catunahutâdhikāni dve yojana -- sahassāni 2000 + 94 (= 294 000) J i.25; sattamāsâdhikāni sattavassāni 7 years and 7 months J v.319; paññāsâdhikāni pañca vassa -- satani 500 + 50 (= 550) PvA 152. See also sâdhika.
Adhikata (adj.) [adhi + kata; cp. Sk. adhikṛta] 1. com- missioned with, an overseer, Pv ii.927 (dāne adhikata = ṭhapita PvA 124). -- 2. caused by Miln 67 (kamma˚). <-> 3. affected by something, i. e. confused, puzzled, in doubt Miln 144 (+ vimātijāta).
Adhikaraṇa (nt.) [adhi + karaṇa] 1. attendance, super- vision, management of affairs, administration PvA 209. <-> 2. relation, reference, reason, cause, consequence D ii.59 ( -- ˚: in consequence of); S ii.41; v.19. Esp. acc. ˚ŋ as adv. ( -- ˚) in consequence of, for the sake of, because of, from M i.410 (rūpâdhikaraṇaŋ); S iv.339 (rāga˚); Miln 281 (mudda˚ for the sake of the royal seal, orig. in attendance on the r. s.). Kimâdhikaraṇaŋ why, on account of what J iv.4 (= kiŋkāraṇaŋ) yatvâdhikaraṇaŋ (yato + adhi˚) by reason of what, since, because (used as conj.) D i.70 = A i.113 = ii.16 = D iii.225. -- 3. case, question, cause, subject of discussion, dispute. There are 4 sorts of a. enumd. at var. passages, viz. vivāda˚ anuvāda˚ āpatta˚ kicca˚ "questions of dispute, of censure, of misconduct, of duties" Vin ii.88; iii.164; iv.126, 238; M ii.247. <-> Often ref.: Vin ii.74; S iv.63 = v.346 (dhamma˚ a question of the Dh.); A i.53 (case), 79; ii.239 (vūpasanta); v.71, 72; Pug 20, 55; DhA iv.2 (˚ssa uppamassa vūpasama), adhikaraṇaŋ karoti to raise a dispute M i.122 ˚ŋ vūpasameti to settle a question or difficulty Vin ii.261.
-- kāraka one who causes dispute discussions or dissent Vin iv.230 (f. ˚ikā); A iii.252. -- samatha the settlings of questions that have arisen. There are seven rules for settling cases enumd. at D iii.254; M ii.247; A i.99; iv.144.
Adhikaraṇika [fr. adhikaraṇa] one who has to do with the settling of disputes or questions, a judge A v.164, 167.
Adhikaraṇī (f.) [to adhikaraṇa 1, orig. meaning "serving, that which serves, i. e. instrument"] a smith's anvil J iii.285; Dāvs iii.16 sq.; DhsA 263.
Adhikāra [cp. Sk. adhikāra] attendance, service, adminis- tration, supervision, management, help Vin i.55; J i.56; vi.251; Miln 60, 115, 165; PvA 124 (dāna˚; cp. Pv ii.927); DhA ii.41.
Adhikārika (adj.) ( -- ˚) [to adhikāra] serving as, referring to Vin iii.274 (Bdhgh).
Adhikuṭṭanā (f.) [adhi + koṭṭanā or koṭṭana] an executi- oner's block Th 2, 58; cp. ThA 65 (v. l. kuḍḍanā, should prob. be read koṭṭana); ThA 287.
Adhikusala (adj.) [adhi + kusala] in ˚ā dhammā "items of higher righteousness" D iii.145.
Adhikodhita (adj.) [adhi + kodhita] very angry J v.117.
Adhigacchati [adhi + gacchati] to get to, to come into possession of, to acquire, attain, find; fig. to understand D i.229 (vivesaŋ) M i.140 (anvesaŋ nɔ âdhigacchanti do not find); S i.22 (Nibbānaŋ); ii.278 (id.); A i.162 (id.); Dh 187, 365; It 82 (santiŋ); Th 2, 51; Pug 30, 31; Pv i.74 (nibbutiŋ = labhati PvA 37); iii.710 (amataŋ padaŋ). opt. adhigaccheyya D i.224 (kusalaŋ dhammaŋ); M i.114 (madhu -- piṇḍikaŋ); Dh 61 and adhigacche Dh 368. ger. ˚gantvā D i.224; J i.45 (ānisaŋse); and ˚gamma Pv i.119 (= vinditvā paṭilabhitvā PvA 60). grd. ˚gantabba It 104 (nibbāna). cond. ˚gacchissaŋ Sn 446. 1st aor. 3 sg. ajjhagā Sn 225 (= vindi paṭilabhi KhA 180); Dh 154; Vv 327; 3 pl. ajjhagū J i.256 (vyasanaŋ) & ajjhāgamuŋ S i.12. 2nd aor. 3 sg. adhigacchi Nd1 457. <-> pp. adhigata (q. v.).
Adhigaṇhāti [adhi + gaṇhāti] to surpass, excel S i.87 = DA i.32; D iii.146; S iv.275; A iii.33; It 19. Ger. adhigayha Pv ii.962 = DhA iii.219 (v. l. BB at both pass. atikkamma); & adhiggahetvā It 20. -- pp. adhiggahīta (q. v.).
Adhigata [pp. of adhigacchati] got into possession of, con- quered, attained, found J i.374; VvA 135.
Adhigatavant (adj. -- n.) [fr. adhigata] one who has found or obtained VvA 296 (Nibbānaŋ).
Adhigama [fr. adhigacchati] attainment, acquisition; also fig. knowledge, information, study (the latter mainly in Miln) D iii.255; S ii.139; A ii.148; iv.22, 332; v.194; J i.406; Nett 91; Miln 133, 215, 358, 362, 388; PvA 207.
Adhigameti [adhi + gameti, Caus. of gacchati] to make obtain, to procure PvA 30.
Adhiggahīta [pp. of adhigaṇhāti] excelled, surpassed; over- powered, taken by (instr.), possessed J iii.427 (= anuggahīta C.); v.102; vi.525 = 574; It 103; Miln 188, 189; Sdhp 98.
Adhiciṇṇa only at S iii.12, where v. l. is aviciṇṇa, which is to be preferred. See viciṇṇa.
Adhicitta (nt.) [adhi + citta] "higher thought", meditation, contemplation, nsually in combn. with adhisīla and adhipaññā Vin i.70; D iii.219; M i.451; A i.254, 256; Nd1 39 = Nd2 689 (˚sikkhā); Dh 185 (= aṭṭha -- samāpattisankhāta adhika -- citta DhA iii.238).
Adhiceto (adj.) [adhi + ceto] lofty -- minded, entranced Th 1, 68 = Ud 43 = Vin iv.54 = DhA iii.384.
Adhicca1 [ger. of adhi + eti, see adhīyati] learning, studying, learning by heart J iii.218, 327 = iv.301; iv.184 (vede = adhīyitvā C.), 477 (sajjhāyitvā C.); vi.213; Miln 164.
Adhicca2 (˚ -- ) [Sk. *adhṛtya, a + *dhicca, ger. of dhṛ, cp. dhāra, dhāraṇa 3, dhāreti 4] unsupported, uncaused, fortuitous, without cause or reason; in foll. phrases: ˚āpattika guilty without intention M i.443; ˚uppatti spontaneous origin DhsA 238; ˚laddha obtained without being asked for, unexpectedly Vv 8422 = J v.171 = vi.315 (expld. at J v.171 by ahetunā, at vi.316 by akāraṇena) ˚samuppanna arisen without a cause, spontaneous, unconditioned D i.28 = Ud 69; D iii.33, 138; S ii.22 -- 23 (sukhadukkhaŋ); A iii.440 (id.); Ps i.155; DA i.118 (= akāraṇa˚).
Adhicca3 (adj.) [= adhicca 2 in adj. function, influenced by, homonym abhabba] without a cause (for assumption), unreasonable, unlikely S v.457.
Adhijeguccha (nt.) [adhi + jeguccha] intense scrupulous regard (for others) D i.174, 176.
Adhiṭṭhaka (adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. adhiṭṭhāti] bent on, given to, addicted to J v.427 (surā˚).
Adhiṭṭhāti (adhiṭṭhahati) [Sk. adhitiṣṭhati, adhi + sthā] 1. to stand on J iii.278 (ger. ˚āya); DhA iv.183 (ger. ˚hitvā); fig. to insist on Th 1, 1131 (aor. ˚āhi). -- 2. to concentrate or fix one's attention on (c. acc.), to direct one's thoughts to, to make up one's mind, to wish Vin i.115 (inf. ˚ṭhātuŋ), 297 (id.), 125 (grd. ˚ṭhātabba) J i.80 (aor. ˚ahi); iii.278; iv.134 (v. l. ati˚ C. expls. abhibhavitvā tiṭṭhati); DhA i.34; iv.201 (ger. ˚hitvā); PvA 23 (aor. ˚ṭhāsi) 171 (id.), 75 (ger. ˚hitvā). On adhiṭṭheyya see Cpd. 209, n. 2; 219, n. 1. -- 3. to undertake, practice, perform, look after, to celebrate S ii.17; A i.115 sq.; J i.50; PvA 209 (ger. ˚ṭhāya). -- pp. adhiṭṭhita (q. v.).
Adhiṭṭhāna (nt.) [fr. adhi + sthā] 1. decision, resolution, self -- determination, will (cp. on this meaning Cpd. 62) D iii.229 (where 4 are enumd., viz. paññā˚, sacca˚ cāga˚ upasama˚); J i.23; v.174; Ps i.108; ii.171 sq., 207; DhsA 166 (cp. Dhs. trsl. 44). -- 2. mentioned in bad sense with abhinivesa and anusaya, obstinacy, prejudice and bias M i.136; iii.31, 240; S ii.17; iii.10, 135, 194. -- As adj. ( -- ˚) applying oneself to, bent on A iii.363. -- 3. looking after, management, direction, power Miln 309 (devānaŋ); PvA 141 (so read for adhitaṭṭhāna). [adiṭṭhāna as PvA 89, used as explanatory for āvāsa, should perhaps be read adhiṭṭhāna in the sense of fixed, permanent, abode].
Adhiṭṭhāyaka (adj.) ( -- ˚) superintending, watching, looking after, in kamma˚ Mhvs 5, 175; 30, 98; kammanta˚ DhA i.393.
Adhiṭṭhita (adj.) [pp. of adhiṭṭhāti] 1. standing on (c. loc.), esp. with the idea of standing above, towering over Vv 6330 (hemarathe a. = sakalaŋ ṭhānaŋ abhibhavitvā ṭhita VvA 269). -- (a) looked after, managed, undertaken, governed Vin i.57; S v.278 (svɔâdhiṭṭhita); PvA 141 (kammanta). -- (b) undertaking, bent on (c. acc.) Sn 820 (ekacariyaŋ).
Adhideva [adhi + deva] a superior or supreme god, above the gods M ii.132; A iv.304; Sn 1148; Nd2 307b, 422 a. Cp. atideva.
Adhipa [Sk. adhipa, abbrev. of adhipati] ruler, lord, master J ii.369; iii.324; v.393; Pv ii.86 (jan˚ king); Dāvs iii.52; VvA 314.
Adhipaka (adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. prec.] mastering, ruling or governed, influenced by (cp. adhipati) A i.150 (atta˚ loka˚ dhamma˚).
Adhipajjati [adhi + pajjati] to come to, reach, attain A iv.96 (anatthaŋ); pp. adhipanna.
Adhipaññā (f.) [adhi + paññā] higher wisdom or know- ledge, insight (cp. jhāna & paññā); usually in combn. with adhicitta & adhisīla Vin i.70; D i.174; iii.219 (˚sikkhā); A i.240; ii.92 sq., 239; iii.106 sq., 327; iv.360; Nd1 39 (id.); Ps i.20, 25 sq., 45 sq., 169; ii.11, 244; Pug 61.
Adhipatati [adhi + patati] to fly past, vanish J iv.111 (= ativiya patati sīghaŋ atikkamati C.). -- Caus. adhipāteti (q. v.) in diff. meaning. Cp. also adhipāta.
Adhipatana (nt.) [fr. adhipatati] attack, pressing ThA 271.
Adhipati (n. -- adj.) [adhi + pati, cp. adhipa] 1. ruler, master J iv.223; Vv 811; Miln 388; DhA i.36 (= seṭṭha). <-> 2. ruling over, governing, predominant; ruled or governed by Vbh 216 sq. (chandaŋ adhipatiŋ katvā making energy predominant); DhsA 125, 126 (atta˚ autonomous, loka˚ heteronomous, influenced by society). See alṣo Dhs. trsl. 20 & Cpd. 60.
Adhipateyya (nt.) A i.147; iii 33 = S iv.275 is probably misreading for ādhipateyya.
Adhipatthita [pp. adhi + pattheti, cp. Sk. abhi + arthayati] desired, wished, begged for D i.120.
Adhipanna [cp. Sk. abhipanna, adhi + pad] gone into, affected with, seized by ( -- ˚), a victim of (c. loc.) S i.72, Th 2, 345 (kāmesu); Sn 1123 (taṇhā˚ = taṇhânugata Nd2 32); Dh 288; J iii.38, 369; iv.396; v.91, 379 (= dosena ajjhotthaṭa); vi.27.
Adhipāṭimokkha (nt.) [adhi + pāṭimokkha] the higher, moral, code Vin v.1 (pāṭim˚ +); M ii.245 (+ ajjhājīva).
Adhipāta1 [adhipāteti] splitting, breaking, only in phrase muddhā˚ head -- splitting Sn 988 sq., 1004, 1025 (v. l. Nd2 ˚vipāta).
Adhipāta2 [from adhipatati = Sk. atipatati, to fly past, flit] a moth Sn 964. Expld. at Nd1 484 as "adhipātikā ti tā uppatitvā khādanti taŋkāraṇā a. vuccanti"; Ud 72 (expld. by C. as salabhā).
Adhipatikā (f.) [fr. adhipāta2] a moth, a mosquito Nd1 484 (see adhipāta2).
Adhipāteti [Caus. fr. adhipatati, cp. Sk. abhipātayati & P. atipāteti] to break, split J iv.337 (= chindati). At Ud 8 prob. to be read adhibādheti (v. l. avibādeti. T. adhipāteti).
Adhippagharati [adhi + ppa + gharati] to flow, to trickle ThA 284.
Adhippāgā 3 sg. aor. of adhippagacchati to go to J v.59.
Adhippāya [adhi + ppa + i; Sk. abhiprāya] 1. intention, wish desire S i.124; v.108; A ii.81; iii.363 (bhoga˚); v.65; J i.79, 83; Sdhp 62. As adj. ( -- ˚) desiring PvA 226 (hass˚ in play = khiḍḍatthika). -- 2. sense, meaning, conclusion, inference (cp. adhigama) Miln 148; PvA 8, 16, 48, 131 (the moral of a story). -- adhippāyena (instr.) in the way of, like PvA 215 (kīḷ for fun).
Adhippāyosa [adhi + pāyosa] distinction, difference, pe- culiarity, special meaning M i 46; S iii.66; iv.208; A i.267; iv.158; v.48 sq.
Adhippeta [Sk. abhipreta, adhi + ppa + i, lit. gone into, gone for; cp. adhippāya] 1. desired, approved of, agreeable D i.120; ii.236; VvA 312, 315. -- 2. meant, understood, intended as J iii.263; PvA 9, 80, 120, 164.
Adhippetatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. adhippeta] the fact of being meant or understood as, in abl. ˚ā with reference to, as is to be understood of VvA 13; PvA 52.
Adhibādheti [adhi + bādheti, cp. Sk. abhibādhayati] to vex, oppress, gore (to death) Ud 8 (T. adhipāteti, v. l. avibādeti).
Adhibrahmā [adhi + Brahmā, cp. atibrahmā] a superior Brahmā, higher than Brahmā M ii.132.
Adhibhavati [adhi + bhavati, cp. Sk. & P. abhibhavati] to overcome, overpower, surpass S iv.185 sq. (cp. adhibhū); A v.248, 282 (˚bhoti); J ii.336; V.30. -- aor. adhibhavi J ii.80. 3. pl. adhibhaŋsu S iv.185. See also ajjhabhavi & ajjhabhū pp. adhibhūta (q. v.).
Adhibhāsati [adhi + bhāsati] to address, to speak to; aor. ajjhabhāsi Vin ii.195; S i.103; iv.117; Sn p. 87; PvA 56, 90.
Adhibhū (adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. adhi + bhū, cp. adhibhavati & Sk. adhibhū] overpowering, having power over; master, conqueror, lord S iv.186 (anadhibhū not mastering. For adhibhūta the v. l. abhi˚ is to be preferred as more usual in this connection, see abhibhū); Sn 684 (miga˚; v. l. abhi˚).
Adhibhūta [cp. adhibhū & adhibhūta] overpowered S iv.186.
Adhimatta (adj.) [adhi + matta of mā] extreme, exceeding, extraordinary; nt. adv. ˚ŋ extremely M i.152, 243; S iv. 160; A ii.150; iv.241; J i.92; Pug 15; Miln 146, 189, 274, 290; Pv ii.36 (= adhikataraŋ PvA 86); DhA ii.85; cp. PvA 281.
Adhimattata (nt.) [abstr. fr. prec.] preponderance A ii.150; DhsA 334 (cp. Dhs. trsl. 200).
Adhimana (n. -- adj.) [adhi + mano] (n.) attention, direction of mind, concentration Sn 692 (adhimanasā bhavātha). <-> (adj.) directing one's mind upon, intent (on) J iv.433 (= pasannacitta); v.29 (an˚; v. l. ˚māna).
Adhimāna [adhi + māna] undue estimate of oneself M ii.252; A v.162 sq.
Adhimānika (adj.) [fr. adhimāna] having undue confidence in oneself, conceited A v.162, 169, 317; DhA iii.111.
Adhimuccati [Pass. of adhi + muc] 1. to be drawn to, feel attached to or inclined towards, to indulge in (c. loc.) S iii.225; iv.185; A iv.24, 145 sq., 460; v.17; Pug 63. <-> 2. to become settled, to make up one's mind as to (with loc.), to become clear about Vin i.209 (aor. ˚mucci); D i.106; S i.116 (pot. ˚mucceyya); It 43; DA i.275. <-> 3. to take courage, to have faith Sn 559; Miln 234; DA i.214, 316; J iv.272; v.103; DhA i.196; iii.258; iv.170. <-> 4. of a spirit, to possess, to enter into a body, with loc. of the body. A late idiom for the older anvāvisati. J iv.172; v.103, 429; DhA i.196; iii.258; iv.170. <-> pp. adhimuccita and adhimutta. -- Caus. adhimoceti to incline to (trs.); to direct upon (with loc.) S v.409 (cittaŋ devesu a.).
Adhimuccana (nt.) [fr. adhi + muc] making up one's mind, confidence DhsA 133, 190.
Adhimuccita & Adhimucchita (pp.) [either adhi + muc or mūrch; it would seem more probable to connect it with the former (cp. adhimuccati) and consider all vv. ll. ˚mucchita as spurious; but in view of the credit of several passages we have to assume a regular analogy -- form ˚mucchita, cp. mucchati and see also J.P.T.S. 1886, 109] drawn towards, attached to, infatuated, indulging in (with loc.) M ii.223 (an˚); S i.113; Th 1, 732 (v. l. ˚muccita), 923 (cch), 1175; J ii.437 (cch); iii.242; v.255 (kāmesu ˚mucchita, v. l. ˚muccita). Cp. ajjhomucchita.
Adhimuccitar [n. ag. of adhimuccati] one who determines for something, easily trusting, giving credence A iii.165 (v. l. ˚mucchitā).
Adhimutta (adj.) [pp. of adhimuccati, cp. BSk. adhimukta. Av. Ś i.8, 112; Divy 49, 302 etc.] intent upon ( -- ˚ or with loc. or acc.), applying oneself to, keen on, inclined to, given to Vin i.183; A v.34, 38; Dh 226; Sn 1071, 1149 (˚citta); Nd2 33; J i.370 (dān˚) Pug 26; PvA 134 (dān˚).
Adhimutti (f.) [adhi + mutti] resolve, intention, disposition D i.174; A v.36; Ps i.124; Miln 161, 169; Vbh 340, 341; DA i.44, 103; Sdhp 378.
Adhimuttika (adj.) [= adhimutta] inclined to, attached to, bent on S ii.154, 158; It 70; Vbh 339 sq. + tā (f.) inclination D i.2.
Adhimokkha [fr. adhi + muc] firm resolve, determination, decision M iii.25 sq.; Vbh 165 sq., 425; DhsA 145, 264. See Dhs. trsl. 5; Cpd. 17, 40, 95.
Adhiyita see adhīyati.
Adhiroha [fr. adhi + ruh] ascent, ascending; in dur˚ hard to ascend Miln 322.
Adhivacana (nt.) [adhi + vacana] designation, term, attrî- bute, metaphor, metaphorical expression D ii.62; M i.113, 144, 460; A ii.70, 124; iii.310; iv.89, 285, 340; It 15, 114; Sn p. 218; J i.117; Nd2 34 = Dhs 1306 (= nāma sankhā paññatti etc.); Vbh 6; PvA 63. See on term Dhs. trsl. 340.
-- patha "process of synonymous nomenclature" (Mrs. Rh. D.) D ii.68; S iii.71; Dhs 1306; DhsA 51.
Adhivattati [adhi + vattati] to come on, proceed, issue, result S i.101; A ii.32.
Adhivattha (adj.) [pp. of adhivasati] inhabiting, living in (c. loc.) Vin i.28; S i.197; J i.223; ii.385; iii.327; PvA 17. The form adhivuttha occurs at J vi.370.
Adhivara (adj.) [adhi + vara] superb, excellent, surpassing Vv 163 (an˚ unsurpassed, unrivalled; VvA 80 = adhika, visiṭṭha).
Adhivāsa [fr. adhi + vas] endurance, forbearance, holding out; only as adj. in dur˚ difficult to hold out Th 1, 111.
Adhivāsaka (& ˚ika) (adj.) [fr. adhivāsa] willing, agree- able, enduring, patient Vin iv.130; M i.10, 526; A ii.118; iii.163; v.132; J iii.369 (an˚); iv.11, 77.
Adhivāsana (nṭ.) [fr. adhi + vas] 1 assent A iii.31; DhA i.33. -- 2. forbearance, endurance M i.10; J ii.237; iii.263; iv.307; v.174.
Adhivāsanatā (f.) [abstr. fr. adhivāsana] patience, endurance, Dhs 1342; Vbh 360 (an˚).
Adhivāseti [Caus. of adhivasati, cp. BSk. adhivāsayati in meaning of 3] 1. to wait for (c. acc.) J i.254; ii.352; iii.277. -- 2. to have patience, bear, endure (c. acc.) D ii.128, 157; J i.46; iii.281 (pahāre); iv.279, 407; v.51, 200; VvA 336, 337. -- 3. to consent, agree, give in Vin i.17; D i.109 (cp. DA i.277); S iv.76; DhA i.33; PvA 17, 20, 75 and freq. passim. -- Caus. adhivāsāpeti to cause to wait J i.254.
Adhivāha [fr. adhi + vah; cp. Sk. abhivahati] a carrier, bearer, adj. bringing S iv.70 (dukkha˚); A i.6; Th 1, 494.
Adhivāhana (nt. -- adj.) [fr. adhi + vah] carrying, bringing, bearing Sn 79; f. ˚ī Th 1, 519.
Adhivimuttatta (nt.) = adhivimokkhatta & adhimutti, i. e. propensity, the fact of being inclined or given to J v.254 (T. kāmādhivimuttitā, v. l. ˚muttata).
Adhivimokkhatta (nt.) = adhimokkha; being inclined to DhsA 261.
Adhivutti (f.) [adhi + vutti, fr. adhi + vac, cp. Sk. abhi- vadati] expression, saying, opinion; only in tt. adhivuttipada (v. l. adhimutti -- p. at all passages) D i.13 (expld. by adhivacana -- pada DA i.103); M ii.228; A v.36.
Adhivuttha see adhivattha.
Adhisayana (nt. -- adj.) [fr. adhiseti] lying on or in, inhabiting PvA 80 (mañcaŋ).
Adhisayita [pp. of adhiseti] sat on, addled (of eggs) Vin iii.3; S iii.153.
Adhisīla (nt.) [adhi + sīla] higher morality, usually in threefold set of adhicitta -- sikkha, adhipaññā˚ adhisïla˚ Vin i.70; D i.174; iii.219; A iii.133; iv.25; DhA i.334; PvA 207. See also adhicitta, sikkhā & sīla.
Adhiseti [adhi + seti] to lie on, sit on, live in, to follow, pursue Dh 41; Sn 671 (= gacchati C.) -- pp. adhisayita.
Adhīna (adj.) ( -- ˚) [cp. Sk. adhīna] subject, dependent D i.72 (atta˚ & para˚ ); J iv.112; DA i.217; also written ādhīna J v.350. See also under para.
Adhīyati & adhiyati [Med. of adhi + i, 1st sg. adhīye taken as base in Pāli] to study, lit. to approach (cp. adhigacchati); to learn by heart (the Vedas & other Sacred Books) Vin i.270; S i.202 (dhammapadāni); J iv.184 (adhīyitvā), 496 (adhīyamāna); vi.458; DhA iii.446 (adhīyassu). -- ger. adhīyitvā J iv.75; adhiyānaŋ J v.450 (= sajjhāyitvā C.) & adhicca: see adhicca 2; pp. adhiyita D i.96.
Adhunā (adv.) [Vedic adhunā] just now, quite recently D ii.208; Vin ii.185 (kālakata); Miln 155; Dāvs ii.94.
-- āgata a new comer M i.457; J ii.105. -- âbhisitta newly or just anointed D ii.227. -- uppanna just arisen D ii.208, 221.
Adhura (nt.) [a + dhura, see dhura 2] irresponsibility, indifference to oblihations J iv.241.
Adho (adv.) [Vedic adhaḥ; compar. adharaḥ = Lat. inferus, Goth. undar, E. under, Ind. *n̊dher -- ; superl. adhamaḥ = Lat. infimus] below, usually combd. or contrasted with uddhaŋ "above" and tiriyaŋ "across", describing the 3 dimensions. -- uddhaŋ and adho above and below, marking zenith & nadir. Thus with uddhaŋ and the 4 bearings (disā) and intermediate points (anudisā) at S i.122; iii.124; A iv.167; with uddhaŋ & tiriyaŋ at Sn 150, 537, 1055, 1068. Expld. at KhA 248 by heṭṭhā and in detail (dogmatically & speculatively) at Nd2 155. For further ref. see uddhaŋ. The compn. form of adho before vowels is adh˚.
-- akkhaka beneath the collar -- bone Vin iv.213. -- agga with the points downward (of the upper row of teeth) J v.156 (+ uddh˚ expld. by uparima -- danta C.). -- kata turned down, or upside down J i.20; vi.298. -- gata gone by, past. Adv. ˚ŋ since (cp. uddhaŋ adv. later or after) J vi.187 (ito māsaŋ adhogataŋ since one month ago). -- gala (so read for T. udho˚) down the throat PvA 104. -- mukha head forward, face downward, bent over, upturned Vin ii.78; M i.132, 234: Vv 161 (= heṭṭhā mukha VvA 78). -- bhāga the lower part (of the body) M i.473; DhA i.148. -- virecana action of a purgative (opp. uddha˚ of an emetic) D i.12; DA i.98 (= adho dosānaŋ nīharaṇaŋ); DhsA 404. -- sākhaŋ (+ uddhamūlaŋ) branches down (& roots up, i. e. uprooted) DhA i.75. -- sira (adj.) head downward J iv.194. -- siraŋ (adv.) with bowed head (cp. avaŋsiraŋ) J vi.298 (= siraŋ adhokatvā heṭṭhāmukho C.). -- sīsa (adj.) head first, headlong J i.233; v.472 (˚ka).
An -- form of the neg. prefix a -- before vowels. For negatives beginning with an˚ see the positive.
Ana -- negative prefix, contained in anappameyya, (Th 1, 1089), anamatagga & anabhava. See Vinaya Texts ii.113.
Anajjhiṭṭha (adj.) [an + ajjhiṭṭha] uncalled, unbidden, un- asked Vin i.113; Pv i.123 (T. anabbhita, v. l. anijjhiṭṭha; J iii.165 has anavhāta; Th 2, 129 ayācita; PvA 64 expls. by anavhāta).
Anaṭi [An, Vedic aniti & anati] to breathe KhA i.124 (in def. of bāla); DA i.244 (read ananti for aṇanti). Cp. pāṇa.
Anabhāva [ana + bhāva] the utter cessation of becoming. In the oldest Pali only in adj. form anabhāvaŋ kata or gata. This again found only in a string of four adjectives together expressing the most utter destruction. They are used at Vin iii.3 of bad qualities, at S ii.63 of certain wrong opinions, at M i.487; S iv.62 = v.527 of the khandas, at M i.331 of the Mental Intoxications (Āsavas), at A iv.73 of certain tastes, of a bad kamma A i.135, of evil passions A i.137, 184, 218; ii.214 of pride A ii.41, of craving A ii.249, of the bonds A iv.8. In the supplement to the Dīgha (D iii.326) and in the Iti -- vuttaka (p. 115) a later idiom, anabhāvaŋ gameti, cause to perish, is used of evil thoughts. Bdhgh (quoted Vin iii.267) reports as v. l. anubhāva. Cp. Nd i.90; and Nd2 under pahīna.
Anabbhita (adj.) [an + abbhita] not restored, not to be restored Vin iv.242; Pv i.123 (where reading prob. faulty & due to a gloss; the id. p. at Th 2, 129 has ayācita & at J iii.165 anavhāta; PvA 64 expls. by anavhāta, v. l. anabbhita).
Anabhuṇṇatatā (f.) [an + abbhuṇṇata + tā] the state of not being erect, i. e. hanging down J v.156.
Anabhijjhā (f.) [an + abhijjhā] absence of covetousness or desire D iii.229, 269; Dhs 32, 35, 277.
Anabhijjhālū (adj.) [an + abhijjhālū] not greedy or covetous D iii.82; Pug 40.
Anabhijjhita (adj.) [an + abhijjhita] not desired Sn 40 (cp. Nd2 38); Vv 474 (= na abhikankhita VvA 201).
Anabhinandati etc. see abhi˚ etc.
Anabhirata (adj.) [an + abhirata] not taking delight in J i.61 (naccâdisu).
Anabhirati (f.) [an + abhirati] not delighting in, dissatis- faction, discontent D i.17 (+ paritassanā); iii.289; J iii. 395; DA i.111.
Anabhiraddha (adj.) [an + abhiraddha] in anger Vin iv.236.
Anabhiraddhi (f.) [an + abhiraddhi] anger, wrath D i.3 (= kopassɔetaŋ adhivacanaŋ DA i.52).
Anabhisambhuṇamāna (adj.) [ppr. med. of an + abhisam- bhuṇāti] not obtaining, unable to get or keep up D i.101 (= asampāpuṇanto avisahamāno vā DA i.268).
Anamatagga (adj.) [ana (= a neg.) + mata (fr. man) + aggā (pl.). So Dhammapāla (avidit -- agga ThA 289); Nāṇakitti in Ṭīkā on DhsA 11; Trenckner, Notes 64; Oldenberg, Vin. Texts ii.114. Childers takes it as an + amata + agga, and Jacobi (Erzähl. 33 and 89) and Pischel (Gram. § 251) as a + namat (fr. nam) + agga. It is Sanskritized at Divy 197 by anavarāgra, doubtless by some mistake. Weber, Ind. Str. iii.150 suggests an + āmrta, which does not suit the context at all]. Ep. of Saṃsāra "whose beginning and end are alike unthinkable", i. e., without beginning or end. Found in two passages of the Canon: S ii.178, 187 sq. = iii.149, 151 = v.226, 441 (quoted Kvu 29, called Anamatagga -- pariyāya at DhA ii.268) and Th 2, 495, 6. Later references are Nd2 664; PvA 166; DhA i.11; ii.13, 32; Sdhp 505. [Cp. anāmata and amatagga, and cp. the English idiom "world without end". The meaning can best be seen, not from the derivation (which is uncertain), but from the examples quoted above from the Saṃyutta. According to the Yoga, on the contrary (see e. g., Woods, Yoga -- system of Patañjali, 119), it is a possible, and indeed a necessary quality of the Yogī, to understand the beginning and end of Saṃsāra].
Anamha (adj.) [according to Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 70 = ana -- mha "unlaughing" with ana = an (cp. anabhāva & anamatagga) and mha from smi, cp. vimhayati = Sk. vismayati] being in consternation or distress, crying J iii. 223 (˚kāle = ārodana -- kāle C.).
Anaya [a + naya] misfortune, distress Miln 277, usually combd. with vyasana (as also in BSk, e. g. Jtm 215) Vin ii.199; S iv.159; A v.156; Miln 292; VvA 327; Sdhp 362.
Anariya (adj.) [an + ariya, see also anāriya] not Aiyan, ignoble, low Vin i.10; D iii.232 (˚vohāra, 3 sets of 4; the same at Vin v.125); Sn 664, 782 (˚dhamma); Pug 13. -- See ariya.
Anala (adj.) [an + ala] 1. not sufficient, not enough; unable, impossible, unmanageable M i.455; J ii.326 = iv. 471. -- 2. dissatisfied, insatiate J v.63 (= atitta C.). <-> 3. ˚ŋ kata dissatisfied, satiated, S i.15 (kāmesu).
Anavaya (adj.) [derivation doubtful. See Trenckner Pali Misc. 65] not lacking, complete in (loc.), fulfilling D i.88 (= anūna paripūra -- kārin DA i.248); A iii.152 (= samatta paripuṇṇa AA quoted by Tr. on Miln 10).
Anavosita (adj.) [an + avosita; or ana + avosita = avusita?] unfulfilled, undone Th 1, 101.
Anasana (nt.) [an + asana, cp. Sk. an -- aśana] not eating, fasting, hunger D iii.75 & in same context at Sn 311 (= khudā SnA 324).
Anasitvāna [ger. of an + aśati] without eating, fasting J iv.371.
Anasuyyaŋ [Sk. anasūyan, ppr. of an + asūyati] not grum- bling J iii.27 (v. l. for anusuyyaŋ T.).
Anasuropa [an + asuropa] absence of abruptness Dhs 1341.
Anasūyaka (adj.) [Sk. anasūyaka, cp. usūya] not grumbling, not envious J ii.192.
Anassaka (adj.) either an -- assaka or a -- nassaka (q. v.).
Anassana (nt.) [a + nassana, naś; cp. Sk. naśana] im- perishableness, freedom from waste J iv.168.
Anassāvin (adj.) [an + assāvin; cp. assāva + āsava] not intoxicated, not enjoying or finding pleasure in Sn 853 (sātiyesu a. = sātavatthusa kāmaguṇesu taṇhasanthavavirahita SnA 549).
Anassāsika (adj.) [an + assāsa + ika; cp. Sk. āśvāsana & BSk. anāśvāsika Divy 207] not consoling, discouraging, not comforting M i.514; S ii.191.
Anassuŋ 1st sq, pret. of anusūyati (= Sk. anvaśruvaŋ) I have heard M i.393.
Anāgata (adj.) [an + āgata] not come yet, i. e. future. On usual combn. with atīta: see this. D iii.100 sq., 134 sq., 220, 275; M iii.188 sq.; S i.5; ii.283; A iii.100 sq., 400; Sn 318, 373, 851; It 53; J iv.159; vi.364; Dhs 1039, 1416.
Anāgamana (nt.) [an + āgamana] not coming, not returning J i 203, 264.
Anāgāmitā (f.) [anāgāmin + tā] the state or condition of an Anāgāmin S v.129, 181, 285; A iii.82; v.108, 300 sq.; Sn p. 140 = A iii.143; It 1 sq., 39, 40.
Anāgāmin (adj. -- n.) [an + āgāmin] one who does not return, a Never -- Returner, as tt. designating one who has attained the 3rd stage out of four in the breaking of the bonds (Saŋyojanas) which keep a man back from Arahantship. So near is the Anāgāmin to the goal, that after death he will be reborn in one of the highest heaven and there obtain Arahantship, never returning to rebirth as a man. But in the oldest passages referring to these 4 stages, the description of the third does not use the word anāgāmin (D i.156; ii.92; iii.107; M ii.146) and anāgāmin does not mean the breaking of bonds, but the cultivation of certain specified good mental habits (S iii.168, the anatta doctrine; S v.200 -- 2, the five Indriyas; A i.64, 120, cultivation of good qualities, ii 160; v.86, 171 = S 149). We have only two cases in the canon of any living persons being called anāgāmin. Those are at S v.177 and 178. The word there means one who has broken the lower five of the ten bonds, & the individuals named are laymen. At D ii.92 nine others, of whom eight are laymen, are declared after their death to have reached the third stage (as above) during life, but they are not called anāgāmins. At It 96 there are only 3 stages, the worldling, the Anāgāmin, and the Arahant; and the Saŋyojanas are not referred to. It is probable that already in the Nikāya period the older, wider meaning was falling into disuse. The Abhidhamma books seem to refer only to the Saŋyojana explanation; the commentaries, so far as we know them, ignore any other. See Ps ii.194; Kv. Tr. 74; Dhs. Tr. 302 n; Cp. 69.
-- phala fruition of the state of an Anāgāmin; always in combn. sotāpatti˚ sakadāgāmi˚ anāgāmi˚ arahatta˚ Vin i.293; ii.240; iv.29; D i.229; ii.227, 255; S iii.168; v.411; A i.23, 44; iii.272 sq.; iv.204, 276, 372 sq. -- magga the path of one who does not return (in rebirths) Nd2 569b.
Anāgāra & Anāgāriyā see agāra & agāriyā.
Anāghāta [an + āghāta] freedom from anger or ill -- will Vin ii.249.
Anācāra [an + ācāra] misconduct, immorality J ii.133; iii. 276; adj. anācārin Pug 57.
Anājāniya (adj.) [an + ājāniya] of inferior race, not of good blood M i.367.
Anādara [an + ādara] (a) (m) disrespect PvA 257. -- (b.) (adj.) disrespectful Sn 247 (= ādaravirahita SnA 290).
Anādaratā (f.) [abstr. fr. anādara] want of consideration, in expln. of dovacassatā at Dhs 1325 = Vbh 359 = Pug 30 (where reading is anādariyatā).
Anādariya (nt.) [fr. anādara] disregard, disrespect Vin i.176; iv.113 (where expld. in extenso); Dhs 1325 = dug 20 = Vbh 359.
Anādā [ger. of an + ādiyati] without taking up or on to oneself Vin iv.120 (= anādiyitvā C.).
Anādāna (adj.) [an + ādāna] free from attachment (opp. sādāna) A ii.10 = It 9 = 109 = Nd2 172a; Sn 620, 741, 1094; Nd2 41 (where as nt. = taṇha); Dh 352 (= khandhādisu niggahaṇa DhA iv.70), 396, 406, 421.
Anāditvā [ger. of an + ādiyati] not taking up, not heeding J iv.352 (v. l. for T. anādiyitvā).
Anādiyitvā [ger. of an + ādiyati, Sk. anādāya] without assuming or taking up, not heeding Vin iv.120; J iv.352; DhA i.41. See also ādiyati.
Anānu -- represents the metrically lengthened from of ananu- (an + anu), as found e. g. in the foll. cpds.: ˚tappaŋ (ppr.) not regretting J v.492; ˚puṭṭha questioned Sn 782 (= apucchita SnA 521); ˚yāyin not following or not defiled by evil Sn 1071 (expld. at Nd2 42 by both avedhamāna (?) avigacchamāna & by arajjamāna adussamāna); ˚loma not fit or suitable D ii.273 (v. l. anu˚).
Anāpāthagata (adj.) [an + āpātha + gata] not fallen into the way of (the hunter), escaped him M i.174.
Anāpāda (adj.) [an + āpāda] unmarried (of a woman) J iv.178 (āpāda = apādāna C.; aññehi akata -- pariggahā).
Anāpucchā see āpucchati.
Anābādha (adj.) [an + ābādha] safe and sound VvA 351.
Anāmata (adj.) [an + amata the ā being due to metrical lengthening] not affected by death, immortal J ii.56 (= asusāna -- ṭṭhāna C.); DhA ii.99.
Anāmanta (˚ -- ) [an + āmanta] without asking or being asked; in ˚kata unasked, unpermitted, uninvited J vi.226; ˚cāra living uninvited Vin v.132; A iii.259.
Anāmaya (adj.) [an + āmaya] free from illness, not decaying, healthy Vv 1510 (= aroga VvA 74), 177.
Anāmasita (adj.) [an + āmasita, pp. of āmassati] not touched, virgin -- VvA 113 (˚khetta).
Anāmassa (adj.) [grd. of an + āmassati, Sk. āmaśya] not to be touched J ii 360 (C. anāmāsitabba).
Anāyatana (nt.) [an + āyatana] nonexertion, not exerting oneself, sluggishness, indolence J v.121 (˚sīla = dussīla C.).
Anāyasa (adj.) [an + āya + sa, or should we read anāyāsa?] void of means, unlucky, unfortunate Vv 845 (= natthi ettha āyo sukhan ti anāyasaŋ VvA 335).
Anāyāsa (adj.) [an + āyāsa] free from trouble or sorrow, peaceful Th 1, 1008.
Anārambha [an + ārambha] that which is without moil and toil Sn 745 (= nibbāna SnA 507).
Anārādhaka (adj.) [an + ārādhaka] one who fails, unsuc- cessful Vin i.70.
Anāriya (adj.) [doublet of anariya] not Aryan, ignoble, Sn 815 (v. l. SS. anariya).
Anālamba (adj.) [an + ālamba] without support (from above), unsuspended, not held Sn 173 (+ appatiṭṭha; expld. at SnA 214 by heṭṭhā patiṭṭhâbhāvena upari ālambhāvena ca gambhīra).
Anālaya [an + ālaya] aversion, doing away with Vin i.10 (taṇhāya).
Anāḷhiya & Anāḷhika (adj.) [an + ālhiya, Sk. āḍhya, see also addha2] not rich, poor, miserable, destitute, usually combd. with daḷidda M i.450; ii.178 (v. l. BB. anāḷiya); A iii.352 sq. (vv. ll. BB. anāḷhika), 384; J v.96.
Anāvaṭa (˚ -- ) [an + āvaṭa] not shut; in ˚dvāratā (f.) not closing the door against another, accessibility, openhand edness D iii.191.
Anāvattin (adj. -- n.) [an + āvattin] one who does not return, almost syn. with anāgāmin in phrase anāvatti -- dhamma, one who is not destined to shift or return from one birth to another, D i.156 (cp. DA i.313); iii.132; Pug 16 sq., 62.
Anāvasūraŋ (adv.) [an + ava + sūra = suriya, with ava lengthened to āva in verse] as long as the sun does not set, before sun -- down J v.56 (= anatthangata -- suriyaŋ C.) cp. Sk. utsūra.
Anāvāsa (adj. -- n.) [an + āvāsa] uninhabited, an uninhabited place Vin ii.22, 33; J ii.77.
Anāvikata etc. see āvikata.
Anāvila (adj.) [an + āvila] undisturbed, unstained, clean, pure D i.84 (= nikkaddama DA i.226); iii.269, 270; Sn 637 (= nikkilesa SnA 469 = DhA iv.192); Th 2, 369 (āvilacitta +); Dh 82, 413; ThA 251; Sdhp 479.
Anāvuttha (adj.) [an + āvuttha, pp. of āvasati] not dwelt in D .ii50.
Anāsaka (adj.) [an + āsaka] fasting, not taking food S iv.118. f. ˚ā [cp. Sk. anāśaka nt.] fasting, abstaining from food Dh 141 (= bhatta -- paṭikkhepa DhA iii.77).
Anāsakatta (nt.) [abstr. of anāsaka] fasting Sn 249 (= abhojana SnA 292).
Anāsava (adj.) [an + āsava] free from the 4 intoxications (see āsava) Vin ii.148 = 164; D iii.112; Sn 1105, 1133; Dh 94, 126, 386; Nd2 44; It 75; Pug 27, Dhs 1101, 1451; Vbh 426; Th 1, 100; Pv ii.615; VvA 9. See āsava and cp. nirāsava.
Anāsasāna (adj.) [an + āsasāna] not longing after anything Sn 369 (SnA 365 however reads anāsayāna & has anāsasāna as v. l. Cp. also vv. ll. to āsasāna. Expld by kañci rūpâdi -- dhammaŋ nâsiŋsati SnA 365.
Anāhāra (adj.) [an + āhāra] being without food M i.487; Sn 985.
Anikkaḍḍhanā (f.) [a + nikkaḍḍhanā] not throwing out or expelling J iii.22.
Anikkasāva (adj.) [a + nikkasāva, cp. nikasāva] not free from impurity, impure, stained Dh 9 = Th 1, 969 = J ii.198 = v.50; DhA i.82 (= rāgâdīhi kasāvehi sakasāva).
Anikhāta (adj.) [a + nikhāta, pp. of nikhanati] not dug into, not dug down, not deep J vi.109 (˚kūla; C. agambhīrā).
Anigha see nigha1 and īgha.
Anicchā (f.) [an + icchā] dispassion S v.6; adj. ˚a without desires, not desiring Sn 707.
Aniñjana (nt.) [an + iñjana] immobility, steadfastness Ps i.15.
Aniñjita (adj.) [an + iñjita] immoveable, undisturbed, un- shaken Th 1, 386.
Aniṭṭhangata see niṭṭhā2.
Aniṭṭhita see niṭṭhita.
Anitthi (f.) [an + itthi] a woman lacking the characteristics of womanhood, a woman ceasing to be a woman, "nonwoman" J ii.126 (compd with anadī a river without water; interpreted by ucchiṭṭh -- itthi).
Anindi -- [the compn. form of nindā] in ˚ḷocana (with) fault- less eyes J vi.265.
Anindita (adj.) [a + nindita] blameless, faultless J iv.106 (˚angin of blameless body or limbs).
Anibbisaŋ [ppr. of nibbisati, q. v.] not finding Th 1, 78 = Dh 153 (= taŋ ñāṇaŋ avindanto DhA iii.128).
Animisa (adj.) [Ved. animeṣa, cp. nimisati] not winking, waking, watchful Dāvs v.26 (nayana).
Aniyata (adj.) [a + niyata] not settled, uncertain, doubtful Vin i.112; ii.287; D iii.217.
Aniyamita (adj.) [pp. of a + niyameti] indefinite (as tt. g.) VvA 231.
Anila [from an, cp. Sk. aniti to breathe, cp. Gr. a)/nemos wind; Lat. animus breath, soul, mind] wind J iv.119 (˚patha air, sky); Miln 181; VvA 237; Sdhp 594.
Anirākata (adj.) [a + nirākata] see nirankaroti.
Anissara (adj.) [an + issara] without a personal ereator Th 1, 713.
Anissukin (adj.) [an + issukin, see also an -- ussukin] not hard, not greedy, generous D iii.47 (+ amaccharin; v. l. anussukin); SnA 569 (see under niṭṭhurin).
Anīka (nt.) [Ved. anīka face, front, army to Idg. *og&uarc; (see), cp. Gr. o)/ mma eye, Lat. oculus, see also Sk. pratīka and P. akkhi] army, array, troops (orig. "front", i. e. of the battle -- array) Vin iv.107 (where expld. in detail); Sn 623 (bala˚ strong in arms, with strong array i. e. of khanti, which precedes; cp. SnA 467).
-- agga a splendid army Sn 421 (= balakāya senāmukha SnA 384). -- ṭṭha a sentinel, royal guard D iii.64, 148; J v.100; vi.15 ("men on horseback", horseguard); Miln 234, 264. -- dassana troop -- inspection D i.6 (aṇīka˚ at DA i.85, q. v. interpretation); Vin iv.107 (senābyūha +).
Anīgha see nigha1 and cp. īgha.
Anīti (f.) [an + īti] safety, soundness, sound condition, health A iv.238; Miln 323 (abl. ˚ito).
Anītika (adj.) [fr. anīti] free from injury or harm, healthy, secure Vin ii.79 = 124 (+ anupaddava); iii.162; S iv.371; Sn 1137 (ītī vuccanti kilesā etc. Nd2 48); Miln 304.
Anītiha (adj.) [an + ītīha, the latter a cpd. der. fr. iti + ha = saying so and so, cp. itihāsa & itihītihaŋ] not such and such, not based on hearsay (itiha), not guesswork or (mere) talk A ii.26; Th 1, 331 (cp. M i.520); Sn 1053 (= Nd2 49, 151); J i.456; Nett 166 (cp. It 28).
Anu1 (indecl.) [Vedic anu, Av. anu; Gr. a)/nw to a)/na along, up; Av. ana, Goth. ana, Ohg. ana, Ags. on, Ger. an, Lat. an (in anhelare etc.)] prep. & pref. -- A. As prep. anu is only found occasionally, and here its old (vedic) function with acc. is superseded by the loc. <-> Traces of use w. acc. may be seen in expressions of time like anu pañcāhaŋ by 5 days, i. e. after (every) 5 days (cp. ved. anu dyūn day by day); a. vassaŋ for one year or yearly; a. saŋvaccharaŋ id. -- (b) More freq. w. loc. (= alongside, with, by) a. tīre by the bank S iv.177; pathe by the way J v.302; pariveṇiyaŋ in every cell Vin i.80; magge along the road J v.201; vāte with the wind J ii.382.
B. As pref.: (a) General character. anu is freq. as modifying (directional) element with well -- defined meaning ("along"), as such also as 1st component of pref. -- cpds., e. g. anu + ā (anvā˚), anu + pra (anuppa˚), + pari, + vi, + saŋ. -- As base, i. e. 2nd part of a pref. -- cpd. it is rare and only found in combn sam -- anu˚. The prefix saŋ is its nearest relation as modifying pref. The opp. of anu is paṭi and both are often found in one cpd. (cp. ˚loma, ˚vāta). (b) Meanings. I. With verbs of motion: "along towards". -- (a) the motion viewed from the front backward = after, behind; esp. with verbs denoting to go, follow etc. E. g. ˚aya going after, connexion; ˚āgacch˚ follow, ˚kkamati follow, ˚dhāvati run after, ˚patta received, ˚parivattati move about after, ˚bandhati run after, ˚bala rear -- guard, ˚bhāsati speak after, repeat, ˚vāda speaking after, blame, ˚vicarati roam about ˚viloketi look round after (survey), ˚saŋcarati proceed around etc. -- (b) the motion viewed from the back forward = for, towards an aim, on to, over to, forward. Esp. in double pref. -- cpds. (esp. with ˚ppa˚), e. g. anu -- ādisati design for, dedicate ˚kankhin longing for, ˚cintana care for, ˚tiṭṭhati look after, ˚padinna given over to, ˚pavecchati hand over, ˚paviṭṭha entered into, ˚pasaŋkamati go up to, ˚rodati cry for, ˚socati mourn for. -- II. Witb verbs denoting a state or condition: (a) literal: along, at, to, combined with. Often resembling E. be -- or Ger. be -- , also Lat. ad -- and con -- . Thus often transitiving or simply emphatic. E. g. ˚kampā com -- passion, ˚kiṇṇa be -- set, ˚gaṇhāti take pity on, ˚gāyati be -- singen, ˚jagghati laugh at, belaugh, ˚ddaya pity with, ˚masati touch at, ˚yuñjati order along, ˚yoga devotion to, ˚rakkhati be -- guard, ˚litta be -- smeared or an -- ointed, ˚vitakheti reflect over, ˚sara con -- sequential; etc. -- (b) applied: according to, in conformity with. E. g. ˚kūla being to will, ˚chavika befitting, ˚ñāta permitted, al -- lowed, ˚mati con- sent, a -- greement, ˚madati ap -- preciate, ˚rūpa = con -- form, ˚vattin acting according to, ˚ssavana by hearsay, ˚sāsati ad -- vise, com -- mand etc. -- III. (a) (fig.) following after = second to, secondary, supplementary, inferior, minor, after, smaller; e. g. ˚dhamma lesser morality, ˚pabbajā discipleship, ˚pavattaka ruling after, ˚bhāga after -- share, ˚majjha mediocre, ˚yāgin assisting in sacrifice, ˚vyañjana smaller marks, etc.; cp. paṭi in same sense. -- (b) distributive (cp. A. a.) each, every, one by one, (one after one): ˚disā in each direction, ˚pañcāhaŋ every 5 days, ˚pubba one after the other. -- IV. As one of the contrasting ( -- comparative) prefixes (see remarks on ati & cp. ā3) anu often occurs in reduplicative cpds. after the style of khuddânukhuddaka "small and still smaller", i. e. all sorts of small items or whatever is small or insignificant. More freq. combns. are the foll.: (q. v. under each heading) padânupadaŋ, pubbânupubbaka, ponkhânuponkhaŋ, buddhânubuddha, vādânuvāda, seṭṭhânuseṭṭhi. -- V. As regards dialectical differences in meanings of prefixes, anu is freq. found in Pāli where the Sk. variant presents apa (for ava), abhi or ava. For P. anu = Sk. (Ved.) apa see anuddhasta; = Sk. abhi see anu -- gijjhati, ˚brūheti, ˚sandahati; = Sk. ava see anu -- kantati, ˚kassati2, ˚kiṇṇa, ˚gāhati, ˚bujjhati ˚bodha, ˚lokin, ˚vajja.
Note (a) anu in compn. is always contracted to ˚ânu˚, never elided like adhi = ˚dhi or abhi = ˚bhi. The rigid character of this rule accounts for forms isolated out of this sort of epds. (like mahânubhāva), like ānupubbikathā (fr. *pubbānupubba˚), ānubhāva etc. We find ānu also in combn. with an -- under the influence of metre. -- (b) the assimilation (contracted) form of anu before vowels is anv˚.
Anu2 (adj.) subtile; freq. spelling for aṇu, e. g. D i.223 Sdhp 271, 346 (anuŋ thūlaŋ). See aṇu.
Anukankhin (adj.) [fr. anu + kānkṣ] striving after, longing for J v.499 (piya˚).
Anukantati [anu + kantati2] to cut Dh 311 (hatthaŋ = phāleti DhA iii.484).
Anukampaka & ˚ika (adj.) [fr. anukampati] kind of heart, merciful, compassionate, full of pity ( -- ˚ or c. loc.) D iii.187; S i.105 (loka˚), 197; v.157; A iv.265 sq.; It 66 (sabba -- bhūta˚); Pv i.33 (= kārunika PvA 16), 53 (= atthakāma, hitesin PvA 25), 88; ii.14 (= anuggaṇhataka PvA 69), 27; ThA 174; PvA 196 (satthā sattesu a.).
Anukampati [anu + kampati] to have pity on, to com- miserate, to pity, to sympathise with (c. acc.) S i.82, 206; v.189. Imper. anukampa Pv ii.16 (= anuddayaŋ karohi PvA 70) & anukampassu Pv iii.28 (= anuggaṇha PvA 181). Med. ppr. anukampamāna Sn 37 (= anupekkhamāna anugayhamāna Nd2 50); PvA 35 (taŋ), 62 (pitaraŋ), 104. -- pp. anukampita (q. v.).
Anukampana (nt.) [fr. last] compassion, pity PvA 16, 88.
Anukampā (f.) [abstr. fr. anukampati] compassion, pity, mercy D i.204; M i.161; ii.113; S i.206; ii.274 (loka˚); iv.323; v.259 sq.; A i.64, 92; ii.159; iii.49; iv.139; Pug 35. -- Often in abl. anukampāya out of pity, for the sake of D iii.211 (loka˚ out of compassion for all mankind, + atthaya hitāya); J iii.280; PvA 47, 147.
Anukampita (adj.) [pp. of anukampati] compassioned, gra- tified, remembered, having done a good deed (of mercy) Pv iii.230.
Anukampin (adj.) [cp. anukampaka] compassionate, anxious for, commiserating. Only in foll. phrases: hita˚ full of solicitude for the welfare of S v.86; Sn 693; Pv iii.76. sabbapāṇa -- bhūta -- hita˚ id. S iv.314; A ii.210; iii.92; iv.249; Pug 57, 68. sabba -- bhūta˚ S i.25, 110; A ii.9; It 102.
Anukaroti [anu + kṛ] to imitate, "to do after" A i.212; J i.491; ii.162; DhA iv.197. -- ppr. anukabbaŋ Vin ii.201 (mamâ˚). -- Med. anukubbati S i.19 = J iv.65. <-> See also anukubba. On anvakāsi see anukassati 2.
Anukassati [anu + kassati, kṛṣ] 1. [Sk. anukaṛṣati] to draw after, to repeat, recite, quote D ii.255 (silokaŋ). -- 2. [Sk. ava -- kaṛṣati] to draw or take of, to remove, throw down, Th 1, 869 (aor. anvakāsi = khipi, chaḍḍesi C.).
Anukāma (adj.) [anu + kāma] responding to love, loving in return J ii.157.
Anukāra [cp. anukaroti] imitation Dpvs v.39.
Anukārin (adj.) imitating Dāvs v.32.
Anukiṇṇa [pp. of anu + kirati] strewn with, beset with, dotted all over Pv iv.121 (bhamara -- gaṇa˚).
Anukubba (adj.) ( -- ˚) [= Sk. anukurvat, ppr. of anu- karoti] "doing correspondingly" giving back, retaliating J ii.205 (kicca˚).
Anukubbati see anukaroti.
Anukula freq. spelling for anukūla.
Anukulaka (adj.) = anukula Sdhp 242 (iccha˚ according to wish).
Anukūla (adj.) [anu + kūla, opp. paṭikūla] favourable, agreeable, suitable, pleasant VvA 280; spelt anukula at Sdhp 297, 312.
-- bhava complaisance, willingness Vva 71. -- yañña a propitiative sacrifice D i.144 (expld. at DA i.302 as anukula˚ = sacrifice for the propagation of the clan).
Anukkaṇṭhati [an + ukkaṇṭhati] not to be sorry or not to lack anything, in ppr. ˚anto J v.10; and pp. ˚ita without regret or in plenty PvA 13.
Anukkaṇṭhana (nt.) [an + ukkaṇṭhana] having no lack anything, being contented or happy J vi.4.
Anukkama [to anukkamati] 1. order, turn, succession, going along; only in instr. anukkamena gradually, in due course or succession J i.157, 262, 290; VvA 157; PvA 5, 14, 35 etc. -- 2. that which keeps an animal in (regular) step, i. e. a bridle M i.446; Sn 622 (sandānaŋ saha˚).
Anukkamati [anu + kram] 1. to follow, go along (a path = acc.) A v.195; It 80 (maggaŋ). -- 2. to advance (not with Morris J P T S. 1886, 111 as "abandon") S i.24, Th 1, 194.
Anukkhipati [anu + khipati] to throw out Cp. xi.6 (vaṭṭaŋ).
Anukkhepa [anu + khepa, see anukkhipati] compensation Vin i.285.
Anukhaṇati [anu + khaṇati] to dig after or further J v.233.
Anukhuddaka (adj.) [anu + khuddaka] in cpd. khudda˚ whatever there is of minor things, all less important items Vin ii.287 = D ii.154 = Miln 142; Miln 144.
Anuga ( -- ˚) (adj. -- suff.) [fr. anu + gam] following or fol- lowed by, going after, undergoing, being in or under, standing under the influence of Sn 332 ( vasa˚ in the power of), 791 (ejā˚ = abhibhūta Sn 527), 1095 (Māra<-> vasa˚ = abhibhuyya viharanti Nd2 507); It 91 (ejā˚); J iii.224 (vasa˚ = vasavattin C.); Mhvs 7, 3.
Anugacchati [anu + gacchati] to go after, to follow, to go or fall into (w. acc.) KhA 223; PvA 141 (˚gacchanto); aor. ˚gamāsi Vin i.16, & anvagā Mhvs 7, 10; 3rd pl. anvagū Sn 586 (vasaŋ = vasaŋ gata SnA 461). Pass. anugammati, ppr. anugammamāna accompanied or followed by, surrounded, adorned with J i.53; v.370. <-> pp. anugata (q. v.).
Anugata (adj.) [pp. of anugacchati] gone after, accompanied by, come to; following; fig. fallen or gone into, affected with ( -- ˚), being a victim of, suffering M i.16; D iii.85, 173 (parisā); A ii.185 (sota˚, v. l. anudhata); J ii.292 (samudda˚); v.369; Nd2 32 (taṇhā˚); PvA 102 (nāmaŋ mayhaŋ a. has been given to me), 133 (kammaphala˚).
Anugati (f.) ( -- ˚) [fr. anu + gam] following, being in the train of, falling under, adherence to, dependence on S i.104 (vas˚ being in the power). Usually in cpd. diṭṭhânugati a sign (lit. belonging to) of speculation Vin ii.108; S ii.203; Pug 33; DhA iv.39.
Anugama [fr. anu + gam] following after, only as adj. in dur˚ difficult to be followed J iv.65.
Anugāmika (adj.) going along with, following, accompa- nying; resulting from, consequential on Kh viii.8 (nidhi, a treasure acc. a man to the next world); J iv.280 (˚nidhi); Miln 159 (parisā); PvA 132, 253 (dānaŋ nāma ˚aŋ nidānan ti).
Anugāmin (adj.) [fr. anugacchati] following, attending on; an attendant, follower SnA 453 (= anuyutta).
Anugāyati [anu + gāyati] to sing after or to, recite (a magic formula or hymn) praise, celebrate D i.104, 238; Sn 1131 (anugāyissaŋ); Miln 120.
Anugāhati [anu + gāhati] to plunge into, to enter (acc.) Sdhp 611.
Anugijjhati [anu + gijjhati] to be greedy after, to covet Sn 769 (cp. Nd1 12); J iii.207; iv.4 (= giddhā gathitā hutvā allīyanti C.). pp. ˚giddhā (q. v.). Cp. abhigijjhati.
Anugiddha [pp. of anugijjhati] greedy after, hankering after, desiring, coveting Sn 86 (anânu˚), 144, 952; Th 1, 580.
Anuggaṇha (adj.) [cp. anuggaha] compassionate, ready to help PvA 42 ˚sīla.
Anuggaṇhataka (adj.) [= anugganha] compassionate, com- miserating, helping PvA 69 (= anukampaka).
Anuggaṇhana (nt.) anuggaha1 DhsA 403.
Anu(g)gaṇhāti [anu + gaṇhāti] to have pity on, to feel sorry for, to help, give protection D i.53 (vācaŋ cp. DA i.160: sārato agaṇhaṇto); J ii.74; Nd2 50 (ppr. med. ˚gayhamāna = anukampamāna); Pug 36; PvA 181 (imper. anuggaṇha = anukampassu). pp. anuggahīta (q. v.).
Anuggaha1 [anu + grah] "taking up", compassion, love for, kindness, assistance, help, favour, benefit S ii.11; iii.109; iv.104; v.162; A i.92, 114; ii.145; iv.167; v.70; It 12, 98; J i.151; v.150; Pug 25; PvA 145; ThA 104.
Anuggaha2 (adj.) [an + uggaha] not taking up Sn 912 (= na gaṇhāti Nd1 330).
Anuggahīta (& ˚ita) [pp. of anuggaṇhāti] commiserated, made happy, satisfied M i.457; S ii.274; iii.91; iv.263; A iii.172; J iii.428.
Anuggāhaka (adj.) [fr. anuggaha] helping, assisting S iii.5; v.162; Miln 354 (nt. = help).
Anugghāṭeti [an + ugghāṭeti] not to unfasten or open (a door) Miln 371 (kavāṭaŋ).
Anugghāta [an + ugghāta] not shaking, a steady walk J vi.253.
Anugghātin (adj.) [fr. last] not shaking, not jerking, J vi.252; Vv 53 (read ˚ī for i); VvA 36.
Anughāyati [anu + ghāyati1] to smell, snuff, sniff up Miln 343 (gandhaŋ).
Anucankamati [anu + cankamati] to follow (along) after, to go after D i.235; M i.227; Th 1, 481, 1044; Caus. ˚āpeti M i.253, cp. Lal. Vist. 147, 3; M Vastu i.350.
Anucankamana (nt.) [fr. anucankamati] sidewalk J i.7.
Anucarati [anu + cariti] to move along, to follow; to practice; pp. anuciṇṇa & anucarita (q. v.)
Anucarita ( -- ˚) [pp. of anucarati] connected with, ac- companied by, pervaded with D i.16, 21 (vīmaŋsa˚ = anuvicarita DA i.106); M i.68 (id.); Miln 226.
Anuciṇṇa (pp.) [pp. of anucarati] 1. pursuing, following out, practising, doing; having attained or practised Vin ii.203 = It 86 (pamādaŋ); J i 20 (v.126); Th 1, 236; 2, 206; Dpvs iv.9. -- 2. adorned with, accompanied by, connected with J iv.286.
Anucintana (nt.) [fr. anucinteti] thinking, upon, intention, care for PvA 164.
Anucinteti [anu + cinteti] to think upon, to meditate, consider S i.203 (v. l. for anuvicinteti).
Anuccangin see anujjangin.
Anucchavika (& ˚ya) (adj.) [anu + chavi + ka] "according to one's skin", befitting, suitable, proper, pleasing, fit for, J i.58, 62, 126, 218; ii.5; iv.137, 138; Miln 358; DhA i.203, 390; ii.55, 56; VvA 68, 78; PvA 13, 26 (= kappiya), 66, 81, 286. anucchaviya at Vin ii.7 (an˚); iii.120 (id. + ananulomika); Miln 13.
Anucchiṭṭha (adj.) [see ucchiṭṭha] (food) that is not thrown away or left over; untouched, clean (food) J iii.257; DhA ii.3 (vv. ll. anucciṭṭha).
Anujagghati [anu + jagghati] to laugh at, deride, mock D i.91; DA i.258 (cp. sañjagghati ibid 256).
Anujavati [anu + javati] to run after, to hasten after, to follow J vi.452 (= anubandhati).
Anujāta (adj.) [anu + jāta] "born after" i. e. after the image of, resembling, taking after; esp. said of a son (putta), resembling his father, a worthy son It 64 (atijāta +, opp. avajāta); Th 1, 827 (fig. following the example of), 1279; J vi.380; DhA i.129; Dāvs ii.66.
Anujānāti [anu + jānāti] 1. to give permission, grant, allow Vin iv.225; A ii.197; Pv iv.167; PvA 55, 79, 142. -- 2. to advise, prescribe Vin i.83; ii.301: Sn 982. <-> grd. anuññeyya that which is allowed A ii.197; pp. anuññāta (q. v.) Caus. anujānāpeti J i.156.
Anujīvati [anu + jīvati] to live after, i. e. like (acc.), to live for or on, subsist by J iv.271 (= upajīvati, tassânubhāvena jīvitaŋ laddhaŋ (C.). -- pp. anujīvata (q. v.).
Anujīvita (nt.) [pp. of anujīvati] living (after), living, livelihood, subsistence, life Sn 836 (= jīvitaŋ SnA 545).
Anujīvin (adj. -- n.) [fr. anujīvati] living upon, another, dependent; a follower, a dependant A i.152; iii.44; J iii.485; Dāvs v.43.
Anujju (adj.) [an + ujju] not straight, crooked, bent, in cpds. ˚angin (anujjangin) with (evenly) bent limbs, i. e. with perfect limbs, graceful f. ˚ī Ep. of a beautiful woman J v.40 (= kañcana -- sannibha -- sarīrā C.); vi.500 (T. anuccangī, C. aninditā agarahitangī); ˚gāmin going crooked i. e. snake J iv.330; ˚bhūta not upright (fig. of citta) J v.293.
Anujjuka = anujju J iii.318.
Anujjhāna (nt.) [anu + jhāna] meditation, reflection, intro- spection Miln 352 (˚bahula).
Anuññāta (adj.) [pp. of anujānāti] permitted, allowed; sanctioned, given leave, ordained D i.88; J i.92; ii.353, 416; Pv i.123 (na a. = ananuññāta at id. p. Th 2, 129; expld. at PvA 64 by ananumata); Pug 28; DA i.247, 248, 267; PvA 12, 81.
Anuññātatta (nt.) [abstr. to anuññāta] being permitted, permission J ii.353.
Anuṭṭhaka (adj.) [fr. an + uṭṭhahati] not rising, not rousing oneself, inactive, lazy Th 1, 1033.
Anuṭṭhahati [anu + ṭhahati = ˚thāti, see ˚tiṭṭhati] to carry out, look after, practise do J v.121. -- pp. anuṭṭhita (q. v.).
Anuṭṭhahāna (adj.) [ppr. of an + uṭṭhahati] one who does not rouse himself, not getting up, inactive Dh 280 (= anuṭṭhahanto avāyāmanto DhA iii.409).
Anuṭṭhātar [n. ag. to an + uṭṭhahati] one without energy or zeal Sn 96 (niddāsīlin sabhāsīlin +) SnA 169 (= viriya -- tejavirahita).
Anuṭṭhāna (nt.) [an + uṭṭhāna] "the not getting up", in- activity, want of energy Dh 241 (sarīra -- paṭijagganaŋ akaronto DhA iii.347).
Anuṭṭhita [pp. of anuṭṭhati = anutiṭṭhati] practising, effecting or effected, come to, experienced, done D ii.103; S iv. 200; A iii.290 sq.; iv.300; J ii.61; Miln 198; PvA 132 (cp. anugata).
Anuṭṭhubhati [formally Sk. anuṣṭobhati, but in meaning = *anuṣṭīvati; anu + ṭṭhubhati, the etym. of which see under niṭṭhubhati] to lick up with one's saliva DA i.138.
Anuṭṭhurin v. l. at SnA 569, see niṭṭhurin.
Anuḍasati [anu + ḍasati] to bite J vi.192.
Anuḍahati [anu + ḍahati] to burn over again, burn tho- roughly, fig. to destroy, consume J ii.330; vi.423. Pass. ˚ḍayhati J v.426. -- Also spelt ˚dahati, e. g. at S iv. 190 = v.53; Th 2, 488.
Anuḍahana (nt.) [fr. anuḍahati] conflagration, burning up, consumption J v.271; ThA 287 (d).
Anuṇṇata (adj.) [uṇṇata] not raised, not elated, not haughty, humble Sn 702 (care = uddhaccaŋ nâpajjeyya SnA 492).
Anutappati [anu + tappati1; Sk. anutapyate, Pass. of anutapati] to be sorry for, to regret, repent, feel remorse J i.113; iv.358; v.492 (ppr. an -- anutappaŋ); Dh 67, 314; Pv ii.942; DhA ii.40. grd. anutappa to be regretted A i.22, 77; iii.294, and anutāpiya A iii.46 (an˚).
Anutāpa [fr. anu + tāpa] anguish, remorse, conscience Vv 405 (= vippaṭisāra VvA 180); DhsA 384.
Anutāpin (adj.) [fr. anutāpa] repenting, regretting Th 2, 57, 190; Vv 21; VvA 115.
Anutāpiya grd. of anutappati, q. v.
Anutāḷeti [anu + taḷeti] to beat J ii.280.
Anutiṭṭhati [anu + tiṭṭhati see also anuṭṭhahati] to look after, to manage, carry on J v.113 (= anugacchati); PvA 78.
Anutīre (adv.) [anu + tīre, loc. of tīra] along side or near the bank (of a river) Sn 18 (= tīra -- samīpe SnA 28). Cp. anu A b.
Anuttara (adj.) [an + uttara] "nothing higher", without a superior, incomparable, second to none, unsurpassed, excellent, preeminent Sn 234 (= adhikassa kassaci abhāvato KhA 193), 1003; Dh 23, 55 (= asadisa appaṭibhāga DhA i.423); Pv iv.35 2 (dhamma); Dhs 1294; DA i.129; PvA 1, 5, 6, 18, etc.
Anuttariya (nt.) [abstr. fr. anuttara] preeminence, superi- ority, excellency; highest ideal, greatest good. They are mentioned as sets of 3 (viz. dassana˚, paṭipadā˚, vimutti˚) at D iii.219, or of 6 (viz. dassana˚, savana˚, lābha˚, sikkhā˚, pāricariyā˚, anussata˚) at D iii.250, 281; A i.22; iii.284, 325 sq., 452; Ps i.5. Cp. M i.235; A v.37. See also ānuttariya.
Anuttāna (adj.) [an + uttāna] not (lying) open, not exposed; fig. unexplained, unclear J vi.247.
Anutthunā (f.) [fr. anutthunāti] wailing, crying, lamenting Nd1 167 (= vācāpalāpa vippalāpa etc.).
Anutthunāti [anu + thunati (thunāti); anu + stan] to wail, moan, deplore, lament, bewail D iii.86; Sn 827 (cp. Nd1 167); Dh 156; J iii.115; v.346, 479; DhA iii.133; PvA 60 (wrongly applied for ghāyati, of the fire of conscience).
Anutrāsin (adj.) [an + utrāsin] not terrified, at ease Th 1, 864.
Anuthera [anu + thera] an inferior Thera, one who comes next to the elder Vin ii.212 (therânutherā Th. & next in age).
Anudadāti [anu + dadāti] to concede, grant, admit, fut. anudassati Miln 276, 375.
Anudayati (to sympathise with) see under anuddā.
Anudassita [pp. of anudasseti] manifested Miln 119.
Anudahati see anuḍahati.
Anudiṭṭha [pp. of anudisati] pointed out, appointed, dedi- cated, nt. consecration, dedication J v.393 (anudiṭṭha = asukassa nāma dassatī ti C.); Pv i.107 (= uddiṭṭha PvA 50).
Anudiṭṭhi (f.) [anu + diṭṭhi] an "after -- view", sceptical view, speculation, heresy D i.12; M ii.228; S iii.45 sq.; Th 1, 754; Miln 325; DA i.103. attânudiṭṭhi (q. v.) a soul -- speculation.
Anudisati [anu + disati] to point out, direct, bid, address PvA 99 (aor. anudesi + anvesi). -- pp. anudiṭṭha (q. v.).
Anudisā (f.) [anu + disā] an intermediate point of ihe compass, often collectively for the usual 4 intermediate points D i.222; S i.122; iii.124.
Anudīpeti [anu + dīpeti] to explain Miln 227 (dhammâ- dhammaŋ).
Anudūta [anu + dūta] a person sent with another, a travelling companion Vin ii.19, 295; DhA ii.76, 78.
Anudeva see anvadeva.
Anuddayatā (f.) [abstr. to anuddayā] sympathy with ( -- ˚) compassion, kindness, favour, usually as par˚ kindness to or sympathy with other people S ii.218; v.169 (T. anudayatā); A iii.184; It 72; Vbh 356.
Anuddayā (& anudayā) (f.) [anu + dayā] compassion, pity, mercy, care Vin ii.196; S i.204; ii.199; iv.323; A ii.176; iii.189; Pug 35 (anukampā); J i.147, 186, 214; PvA 70, 88, 181 (= anukampā). In compn anudaya˚ e. g. ˚sampanna full of mercy J i.151, 262; PvA 66.
Anuddā (f.) [contracted form of anuddayā] = anuddayā Dhs 1056, where also the other abstr. formations anuddāyanā & anuddāyitattaŋ "care, forbearance & consideration"; DhsA 362 (anudayatī ti anuḍdā).
Anuddhaŋseti [anu + dhaŋseti] to spoil, corrupt, degrade Vin iv.148 (expln. here in slightly diff. meaning = codeti vā codāpeti vā to reprove, scold, bring down); It 42. Usually in ster. phrase rāgo cittaŋ a. lust degrades the heart Vin iii.111; M i.26; S i.186; A i.266; ii.126; iii. 393 sq. -- pp. anuddhasta (q. v.).
Anuddhata (adj.) [an + uddhata] not puffed up, not proud, unconceited calm, subdued Sn 850 (= uddhacca -- virahita SnA 549, cp. anuṇṇata); It 30; Dh 363 (= nibbutacitta DhA iv.93); Vv 648; Pug 59.
Anuddharin (adj.) [an + uddharin] not proud Sn 952 (= anussukin SnA 569) see niṭṭhurin.
Anuddhasta (adj.) [anu + dhasta, pp. of anuddhaŋseti, cp. Sk. apadhvasta] spoilt, corrupt, degraded M i.462 (citta); A ii.126 (id.).
Anudhamma [anu + dhamma] 1. in compn. with dhamma as dhammânudhamma to be judged as a redupl. cpd. after the manner of cpds. mentioned under anu iv. & meaning "the Law in all its parts, the dhamma and what belongs to it, the Law in its fullness". For instances see dhamma C. iv. Freq. in phrase dh˚ -- ânudh˚ -- paṭipanna "one who masters the completeness of the Dh.", e. g. S ii.18; iii.163; It 81; Ps ii.189. -- 2. conformity or accordance with the Law, lawfulness, relation, essence, consistency, truth; in phrase dhammassa (c˚) anudhammaŋ vyākaroti to explain the truth of the Dh. Vin i.234; D i.161; M i.368, 482; S ii.33; iii.6; iv.51; v.7. See further M iii.30; Sn 963 (cp. Nd1 481 for exegesis). Also in cpd. ˚cārin living according to the Dhamma, living in truth S ii.81, 108; A ii.8; Dh 20 (cp. DhA i.158); Vv 317; Sn 69 (see Nd2 51).
Anudhammatā (f.) [abstr. to anudhamma) lawfulness, con- formity to the Dhamma A ii.46; Ps i.35, 36.
Anudhāreti [anu + dhāreti] to hold up DA i.61 (chattaŋ), cp. J 1.53, dhariyamāna.
Anudhāvati [anu + dhāvati] to run after, to chase, follow, persecute, pursue M i.474; S i.9; Dh 85; Th 1, 1174; Miln 253, 372.
Anudhāvin (adj. -- n.) [fr. anudhāvati] one who runs after S i.9, 117.
Anunadī( -- tire) along the bank of the river S iv.177 should be read anu nadītīre (= anu prep. c. loc.; see under anu A).
Anunamati [anu + namati] to incline, bend (intrs.), give way Miln 372 (of a bow).
Anunaya [fr. anuneti] "leading along", friendliness, courtesy, falling in with, fawning D iii.254 (˚saŋyojana); A iv.7 sq. (id.) M i.191; Dhs 1059; Vbh 145; Nett 79; combd. w. opp. paṭigha (repugnance) at Miln 44, 122, 322.
Anunayana (nt.) [fr. anuneti] fawning DhsA 362.
Anunāsika (adj.) [anu + nāsā + ika] nasal; as tt. g. the sound ŋ in ˚lopa apocope of the nasal ŋ VvA 114, 253, 275, 333.
Anunīta (adj.) [pp. of anuneti] led, induced S iv.71; Sn 781.
Anunetar [n. ag. fr. anuneti] one who reconciles or con- ciliates Ps ii.194 (netā vinetā anunetā).
Anuneti [anu + neti] to conciliate, appease, win over, flatter S i.232 (ppr. anunayamāna); pp. anunīta (q. v.).
Anupa see anūpa.
Anupakampati [anu + pakampati] to shake, move, to be unsteady Th 1, 191 = Ud 41.
Anupakkama [an + upakkama] not attacking, instr. ˚ena not by attack (from external enemies) Vin ii.195.
Anupakkuṭṭha (adj.) [an + upak˚] blameless, irreproachahle D i.113; Vin iv.160; Sn p. 115; DA i.281.
Anupakkhandati [anu + pa + khandati] to push oneself forward, to encroach on D i.122 (= anupavisati DA i.290); ger. anupakhajja pushing oneself in, intruding Vin ii.88 (= antopavisati), 213; iv.43 (= anupavisati); M i.151, 469; S iii.113; Vism 18.
Anupakhajjati [den. fr. anupakhajja, ger. of anupakkhan- dati] to encroach, intrude Vin v.163.
Anupagacchati [anu + pa + gacchati] to go or return into (c. acc.) D i.55 (anupeti +).
Anupaghāta [an + upaghāta] not hurting Dh 185 (anūpa˚ metri causa; expld. by anupahananañ cɔeva anupaghātanañ ca DhA iii.238).
Anupacita (adj.) [anu + pa + cita, pp. of anupacināti] heaped up, accumulated ThA 56.
Anupacināti [an + upacināti] not to observe or notice J v.339 (= anoloketi C.; v. l. anapaviṇāti).
Anupajagghati [anu + pa + jagghati] to laugh at, to deride, mock over A i.198 (v. l. anusaŋ˚).
Anupajjati [anu + pad] to follow, accompany J iv.304. - pp. anupanna (q. v.).
Anupañcāhaŋ (adv.) [anu + pañcā + ahaŋ] every five days PvA 139 (+ anudasāhaŋ).
Anupaññatti (f.) [anu + paññatti] a supplementary regula- tion or order Vin ii.286; v.2 sq.
Anupaṭipāti (f.) [anu + paṭipāti] succession; as adv. in order, successively DA i.277 (kathā = anupubbikathā); DhA iii.340 (anupaṭipāṭiyā = anupubbena); Vism 244.
Anupaṭṭhita (adj.) [anu + pa + ṭhita] setting out after, following, attacking J v.452.
Anupatati [anu + patati] 1. to follow, go after, J vi.555 anupatiyāsi Subj.). -- 2. to fall upon, to befall, attack Vin iii.106 = M i.364; S i.23 (read ˚patanti for ˚patatanti) = Dh 221 (dukkhā); Th 1, 41 = 1167 (of lightning). <-> pp. anupatita (q. v.). Cp. also anupāta & anupātin.
Anupatita [pp. of anupatati] "befallen", affected with, op- pressed by ( -- ˚) S ii.173 (dukkha˚); iii.69 (id.); Sn 334 (pamāda˚).
Anupatitatta (nt.) [abstr. of anupatita] the fact of being attacked by, being a victim of ( -- ˚) SnA 339.
Anupatta (anuppatta) [pp. of anupāpuṇāti; cp. Sk. anu- prāpta] (having) attained, received, got to (c. acc), reached D i.87 -- 111; ii 2; It 38; Sn 027, 635; Dh 386, 403; Pv iv.166; PvA 59 (dukkhaŋ), 242. In phrase addhagata vayo -- anuppatta having reached old age, e. g. Vin ii.188; D i.48; Sn pp. 50, 92; PvA 149.
Anupatti (anuppatti) (f.) [anu + patti] attainment, accom- plishment, wish, desire (fulfilled), ideal S i.46, 52.
Anupathe at J v.302 should be read as anu pathe by the way at the wayside; anu to be taken as prep. c. loc. (see anu A). C. explns. as janghamagga -- mahāmaggānaŋ antare.
Anupada [cp. Sk. anupadaŋ adv., anu + pada] 1. the "after- foot", i. e. second foot a verse, also a mode of reciting, where the second foot is recited without the first one Vin iv.15 (cp. 355); Miln 340 (anupadena anupadaŋ katheti). -- 2. (adj.) (following) on foot, at every, step, continuous, repeated, in ˚dhamma -- vipassanā uninterrupted contemplation M iii.25; ˚vaṇṇanā word -- by -- word explanation DhsA 168. As nt. adv. ˚ŋ close behind, immediately after (c. gen.) J ii.230 (tassânupadaŋ agamāsi); vi.422. Esp. freq. in combn. padânupadaŋ (adv.) foot after foot, i. e. in the footsteps, immediately behind J iii. 504; vi.555; DhA i.69; ii.38.
Anupadātar (anuppadātar) [n. ag. of anupadeti] one who gives, or one who sets forth, effects, designs D i.4 (cp. DA i.74); A ii.209.
Anupadāna (anuppadāna) (nt.) [anu + pa + dāna, cp. anu- padeti] giving, administering, furnishing, the giving of ( -- ˚) D i.12 (cp. DA i.98; both read anuppādāna); J iii.205; Miln 315.
Anupadinna (anuppadinna) [pp. of anupadeti] given, handed over, furnished, dedicated Pv i.512.
Anupadeti (anuppadeti) [anu + pa + dadāti] to give out, give as a present, hand over; to design, set forth, undertake S iii.131 (Pot. anuppadajjuŋ); M i.416 (Pot. anupadajjeyya. see dadāti i.3); Miln 210 (˚deti). fut. ˚dassati (see dadāti i.1); D iii.92; S iv.303 (v. l. SS for T. anusarissati); A iii.43; Sn 983. ger. ˚datvā SnA 35. inf. ˚dātuŋ A i.117. pp. ˚dinna (q. v.).
Anupaddava (adj.) [an + upaddava] free from danger, uninjured, safe Vin ii.79 = 124 (+ anītika); iii.162; Dh 338; DhA iv.48; PvA 250 (expln. for siva).
Anupadhāreti [an + upadhār˚] to disregard, to heed not, to neglect DhA iv.197; VvA 260.
Anupadhika (adj.) [an + upadhi + ka] free from attach- ment (see upadhi) Vin i 36 (anupadhīka); D. iii 112 (anupadhika opp. to sa -- upadhika); Sn 1057 (anūpadhīka T., but Nd2 anūpadhika. with ū for u metri causa).
Anupanna, [pp. of anupajjati] gone into, reached, attained Sn 764 (māradheyya˚).
Anupabandhati (anuppa˚) [anu + pa + bandhati] to follow immediately, to be incessant, to keep on (without stopping), to continue Miln 132. -- Caus. ˚āpeti ibid.
Anupabandhanatā (anuppa˚) (f.) [abstr. to prec.] non- stopping, not ceasing Miln 132.
Anupabandhanā (anuppa˚) (f.) [abstr. fr. anupabandhati] continuance, incessance, Pug 18 = Vbh 357 (in exegesis of upanāha).
Anupabbajjā (f.) [anu + pabbajjā, cp. BSk. anupravrajati Divy 61] giving up worldly life in imitation of another S v.67 = It 107.
Anupaya (adj.) [an + upaya] unattached, "aloof" S i.181 (akankha apiha +).
Anuparigacchati [anu + pari + gacchati] to walk round and round, to go round about (c. acc.) Vin iii.119; S i.75 (ger. ˚gamma); Sn 447 (aor. ˚pariyagā = parito parito agamāsi Sn A 393); J iv.267.
Anuparidhāvati [anu + pari + dhāvati] to run up & down or to move round & round (cp. anuparivattati) S. iii.150 (khīlan).
Anupariyāti [auu + pari + yāti] to go round about, to go about, to wander or travel all over (c. acc.) Vin ii.111; S i.102, 124; Th 1, 1235 (˚pariyeti), 1250 (id. to search); Pv iii.34 (= anuvicarati); Miln 38; PvA 92 (˚yāyitvā, ger.) 217.
Anupariyāya (adj) [adjectivised ger. of anupariyāti] going round, encircling, in ˚patha the path leading or going round the city D ii.83 = S iv 194 = A v.195; A iv.107.
Anuparivattati [anu + pari + vṛt] to go or move round, viz. 1. to deal with, be engaged in, perform, worship Vin iii.307 (ādiccaŋ); D i.240; PvA 97. -- 2. to meet Miln 204 (Devadatto ca Bodhisatto ca ekato anuparivattanti). -- 3. to move round & round, move on and on, keep on rolling (c. acc.), evolve S. iii.150 (anuparidhāvati +) Miln 253 (anudhāvati + kāyan).
Anuparivatti (f.) ( -- ˚) [anu + parivatti] dealing with, oc- cupation, connection with S iii.16.
Anuparivāreti [anu + pari + vāreti] to surround, stand by, attend on (c. acc.) Vin i.338; M i.153; DhA 1.55.
Anupariveṇiyaŋ [anu + pariveṇiyaŋ = loc. of pariveṇi] should be written anu pariveṇiyaŋ ("in every cell, cell by cell"), anu here functioning as prep. c. loc. (see anu A) Vin i.80, 106.
Anuparisakkati [anu + pari + sakkati] to move round, to be occupied with, take an interest in (c. acc.) S iv.312 (v.l. ˚vattati).
Anuparisakkana (nt.) [fr. anuparisakkati] dealing with, interest in S iv.312 (v.l. ˚vattana).
Anupariharati [anu + pari + harati] to surround, enfold, embrace M i.306.
Anupalitta (adj.) [an + upalitta] unsmeared, unstained, free from taint M i.319, 386 (in verse); as ˚ūpalitta in verse of Sn & Dh: Sn 211 (= lepānaŋ abhāvā SnA 261), 392, 468, 790, 845; Dh 353.
Anupavajja (adj.) [grd. of an + upavadati] blameless, without fault, Miln 391.
Anupavattaka (anuppa˚) (adj.) to anupavatteti] one who succeeds (another) King or Ruler in the ruling of an empire (cakkaŋ) Miln 342, 362; SnA 454. See also anuvattaka.
Anupavatteti (anuppa˚) [anu + pa + vatteti, fr. vṛt] to keep moving on after, to continue rolling, with cakkaŋ to wield supreme power after, i.e. in succession or imitation of a predecessor S i.191; Miln 362. See also anuvatteti.
Anupavāda [an + upavāda] not blaming or finding fault, abstaining from grumbling or abuse Dh 185 (anūpa˚ in metre; expld at DhA iii.238 as anupavādanañ c'eva anupavādāpanañ ca "not scolding as well as not inciting others to grumbling"); adj. ˚vādaka Pug 60, & ˚vādin M i.360.
Anupaviṭṭha (anuppa˚) [pp. of anupavisati] entered, gone or got into, fallen into (c. acc.) Miln 270, 318 sq., 409 (coming for shelter); PvA 97, 152 (Gangānadiŋ a. nadī: flowing into the G.).
Anupaviṭṭhatā (f.) [abstr. to anupaviṭṭha] the fact of having entered Miln 257.
Anupavisati [anu + pa + visati] to go into, to enter Dh i.290; VvA 42 (= ogāhati). -- pp. ˚paviṭṭha (q.v.) <-> Caus. ˚paveseti (q.v.).
Anupavecchati (anuppa˚) [see under pavecchati] to give, give over to, offer up, present, supply Vin i.221 (˚pavacchati); D i.74 (= pavesati DA i.218); ii.78; M i.446; iii.133; A ii.64; iii.26 (v.l. ˚vacch˚); J v.394; Sn 208 (v.l. ˚vacch˚); SnA 256 (= anupavesati); PvA 28.
Anupaveseti [anu + pa + vis, cp. BSk. anupraveśayati Divy 238] to make enter, to give over, to supply SnA 256 (= ˚pavecchati).
Anupasankamati1 [anu + pa + saŋkamati] to go along up to (c. acc.) PvA 179.
Anupasankamati2 [an + upasank˚] not to go to. not to approach DhA ii.30 (+ apayirupāsati).
Anupasaṇṭhapanā (f.) [an + upasaṇṭhapanā] not stopping, incessance, continuance Pug 18 (but id. p. at Vbh 357 has anusansandanā instead); cp. anupabandhanā.
Anupassaka (adj.) [fr. anupassati] observing, viewing, contemplating Th 1, 420.
Anupassati [anu + passati] to look at, contemplate, observe Sn 477; Ps i.57, 187; Sn A 505.
Anupassanā (f.) [abstr. of anupassati, cf. Sk. anudarśana] looking at, viewing, contemplating, consideration, realisation S v.178 sq., Sn p. 140; Ps i.10, 20, 96; ii.37, 41 sq., 67 sq.; Vbh 194. See anicca˚, anatta˚, dukkha˚.
Anupassin ( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. anupassati] viewing, observing, realising S ii.84 sq., v.294 sq., 311 sq., 345, Dh 7, 253; Sn 255, 728; Ps i.191 sq.; Vbh 193 sq., 236; Sdhp 411.
Anupahata1 [anu + pa + hata, pp. of anu + pa + han] thrown up, blown up Miln 274.
Anupahata2 (adj.) [an + upahata] not destroyed, not spoilt DhA ii.33 (˚jivhapasāda).
Anupāta [of anupatati] attack in speech, contest, reproach A i.161 (vāda˚).
Anupātin (adj.) [fr. anupāta] 1. following, indulging in J iii.523 (khaṇa˚). -- 2. attacking, hurting J v.399.
Anupādaŋ (adv.) [anu + pāda] at the foot Vism 182 (opp. anusīsaŋ at the head).
Anupādā [ger. of an + upādiyati = anupādāya] anupādā- niya, anupādāya, anupādiyāna, anupādiyiṭvā see upādiyati.
Anupādāna & Anupādi see upādāna & upādi.
Anupāpita [pp. of anupāpeti] having been lead to or made to reach, attained, found Miln 252.
Anupāpuṇāti (anuppā˚) [anu + pāpuṇāti] to reach, attain, get to, find S i.105; ger. anuppatvāna Pv ii.924 (= ˚pāpuṇitvā PvA 123). -- pp. anupatta (q. v.). -- Caus. anupāpeti (q. v.).
Anupāpeti [Caus. of anupāpuṇāti] to make reach or attain, to lead to, to give or make find J vi.88; Cp. xi. 4 (aor. anupāpayi); Miln 276. -- pp. anupāpita (q. v.).
Anupāya [an + upāya] wrong means J i.256; Sdhp 405.
Anupāyāsa see upāyāsa.
Anupālaka (adj.) [anu + pālaka] guarding, preserving Sdhp 474.
Anupālana (nt.) [fr. anupāleti] maintenance, guarding, keeping Dpvs iii.2.
Anupāleti [anu + pāleti] to safeguard, warrant, maintain Miln 160 (santatiŋ).
Anupāhana (adj.) [an + upāhana] without shoes J vi.552.
Anupiya (anuppiya) (adj) [anu + piya] flattering, plessant, nt. pleasantness, flattery, in ˚bhāṇin one who flatters I) iii.185; J ii.390; v.360; and ˚bhāṇitar id. Vbh 352.
Anupīḷaŋ at PvA 161 is to be read anuppīḷan (q. v.).
Anupucchati [anu + pucchati] to ask or inquire after (c. acc.) Sn 432, 1113. -- pp. anupuṭṭha (q. v.).
Anupuṭṭha [pp. of anupucchati] asked Sn 782 (= pucchita SnA 521).
Anupubba (adj.) [anu + pubba] following in one's turn, successive, gradual, by and by, regular Vin ii.237 (mahāsamuddo a˚ -- ninno etc.); D i.184; Sn 511; J v.155 (regularly formed, of ūrū). Cases adverbially: anupubbena (instr.) by and by, in course of time, later, gradually Vin i.83; Dh 239 (= anupaṭipāṭiyā DhA iii.340); Pug 41, 64; J ii.2, 105; iii.127; Miln 22; PvA 19. anupubbaso (abl. cp. Sk. anupūrvaśaḥ) in regular order Sn 1000. <-> In compn. both anupubba˚ & anupubbi˚ (q. v.).
-- kāraṇa gradual performance, graded practice M i.446. -- nirodha successive passing away, fading away in regular succession, i. e. in due course. The nine stages of this process are the same as those mentioned under ˚vihāra, & are enumd. as such at D iii.266, 290; A iv.409, 456; Ps i.35. -- vihāra a state of gradually ascending stages, by means of which the highest aim of meditation & trance is attained, viz. complete cessation of all consciousness. These are 9 stages, consisting of the 4 jhānas, the 4 āyatanāni & as the crowning phrase "saññā -- vedayitanirodha" (see jhāna1). Enumd. as such in var. places, esp. at the foll.: D ii.156; iii.265, 290; A iv.410; Nd2 under jhāna; Ps i.5; Miln 176. -- sikkhā regular instruction or study (dhammavinaye) M i.479; iii.1 (+ ˚kiriyā ˚paṭipadā).
Anupubbaka (adj.) = anupubba, in cpd. pubbânupubbaka all in succession or in turn, one by one (on nature of this kind of cpd. see anu B iv.) Vin i.20 (˚ānaŋ kulānaŋ puttā the sons of each clan, one by one).
Anupubbata (nt.) [fr. anupubba] acting in turn, gradation, succession Vv 6414 (= anukūla kiriyā i. e. as it pleases VvA 280) cp. ānupubbatā.
Anupubbi -- kathā (f.) [anupubba + kathā, formation like dhammi -- kathā] a gradual instruction, graduated sermon, regulated exposition of the ever higher values of four subjects (dāna -- kathā, sīla˚, sagga˚, magga˚) i. e. charity, righteousness, the heavens, and the Path. Bdhgh. explains the term as anupubbikathā nāma dānânantaraŋ sīlaŋ sīlânantaro saggo saggânantaro maggo ti etesaŋ dīpana -- kathā" (DA i.277). Vin i.15, 18; ii.156, 192; D i.110; ii.41; M i.379; J i.8; VvA 66, 197, 208; DA i.308; DhA i.6; Miln 228. -- The spelling is frequently ānupubbikathā (as to lengthening of anu see anu Note (a)), e. g. at D i.110; ii.41; M i.379; J i.8; Miln 228.
Anupekkhati [anu + pekkhati] 1. to concentrate oneself on, to look carefully A iii.23. -- 2. to consider, to show consideration for, Nd2 50 (ppr. ˚amāna = anukampamāna). -- Caus. anupekkheti to cause some one to consider carefully Vin ii.73.
Anupekkhanatā (f.) [abstr. fr. anupekkhana, see anupek- khatī] concentration (of thought) Dhs 8, 85, 284, 372.
Anupeti [anu + pa + i] to go into D i.55 (+ anupagacchati) S iii.207; DA i.165.
Anupeseti [anu + pa + iṣ] to send forth after Miln 36.
Anuposathikaŋ see anvaḍḍhamāsaŋ.
Anuposiya (adj.) [grd. of anu + puṣ] to be nourished or fostered Sdhp 318.
Anuppa˚ in all combns. of anu + ppa see under headings anupa˚.
Anuppadajjuŋ (S iii.131) see anupadeti.
Anuppanna (˚uppāda, ˚uppādeti) see uppanna etc.
Anuppīḷa (adj.) [an + uppīḷa] not molested, not oppressed (by robbers etc.) not ruined, free from harm J iii.443; v.378; VvA 351; PvA 161.
Anupharaṇa (nt.) [anu + pharaṇa] flashing through, per- vading Miln 148.
Anuphusīyati [anu + phusīyati, cp. Sk. pruṣāyati, Caus. of pruṣ] to sprinkle, moisten, make wet J v.242 (himaŋ C. pateyya).
Anubajjhati at PvA 56 is faulty reading for anubandh- ati (q. v.).
Anubaddha [pp. of anubandhati] following, standing be- hind (piṭṭhito) D i.1, 226.
Anubandha [anu + bandh] bondage M iii.170; It 91.
Anubandhati [anu + bandhati] to follow, run after, pursue J i.195; ii.230; vi.452 (= anujavati); PvA 56 (substitute for anubajjhanti!), 103, 155. aor. ˚bandhi J ii.154, 353; iii.504; PvA 260 (= anvāgacchi). ger. ˚bandhitvā J i.254. grd. ˚bandhitabba M i.106. -- pp. anubaddha (q. v.).
Anubandhana (nt.) [fr. anubandhati] that which connects or follows, connection, consequence J vi.526 (˚dukkha).
Anubala (nt.) [anu + bala] rear -- guard, retinue, suite, in ˚ŋ bhavati to accompany or follow somebody Miln 125.
Anubujjhati [anu + bujjhati, Med. of budh, cp. Sk. ava- budhyate] to remember, recollect J iii.387 (with avabujjhati in prec. verse).
Anubujjhana (nt.) [fr. anubujjhati] awakening, recognition Ps i.18 (bujjhana +).
Anubuddha [pp. of anu + bodhati] 1. awakened (act. & pass.), recognised, conceived, seen, known D ii.123 (˚ā ime dhammā); S i.137 (dhammo vimalenɔ ânubuddho) ii.203; iv.188; A ii.1; iii.14; iv.105; SnA 431. In phrase buddhânubuddha (as to nature of cpd. see anu B iv.) either "fully awakened (enlightened)" or "wakened by the wake" (Mrs. Rh. D.) Th 1, 679 = 1246. -- 2. a lesser Buddha, inferior than the Buddha DA i.40. Cp. buddhânubuddha.
Anubodha [anu + budh] awakening; perception, recogni- tion, understanding S i.126 (?) = A v.46 (anubodhiŋ as aor. of anubodhati?); Pug 21; Miln 233. Freq. in compn. ananubodha (adj.) not understanding, not knowing the truth S ii.92; iii.261; v.431; A ii.1; iv.105; Dhs 390, 1061; VvA 321 (= anavabodha) and duranubodha (adj.) hard to understand, difficult to know D i.12, 22; S i.136.
Anubodhati [anu + budh] to wake up, to realise, perceive, understand; aor. anubodhiŋ A v.46 (?) = S i.126 (anubodhaŋ). -- Caus. ˚bodheti to awaken, fig. to make see to instruct J vi.139 (˚ayamāna) -- pp. anubuddha (q. v.).
Anubodhana (nt.) [fr. anubodhati] awakening, understanding, recognition Ps i.18 (bodhana +).
Anubbajati [anu + vraj] to go along, wander, follow, tread (a path) J iv.399 (maggaŋ = pabbajati C.).
Anubbata (adj.) [Vedic anuvrata, anu + vata] subject to the will of another, obedient, faithful, devoted J iii.521; vi.557.
Anubbillāvitatta see ubbill˚.
Anubyañjana see anuvyañjana.
Anubrūhita [pp. of anubrūheti] strengthened with ( -- ˚), full of Ps i.167.
Anubrūheti [brūheti] to do very much or often, to practice, frequent, to be fond of (c. acc.), foster S i.178 (anubrūhaye); M iii.187 (id., so read for manu˚), Th 2, 163 (˚ehi); Cp. iii.12 (saŋvegaŋ anubrūhayiŋ aor.); J iii.191 (suññāgāraŋ). Often in phrase vivekaŋ anubrūheti to devote oneself to detachment or solitude, e.g. J i.9 (inf. ˚brūhetuŋ); iii.31 (˚brūhessāmi), Dh 75 (˚brūhaye = ˚brūheyya vaḍḍheyya DhA ii.103). -- pp. anubrūhita (q.v.) Cp. also brūhana.
Anubhaṇanā (f.) [anu + bhaṇana] talking to, admonition, scolding Vin ii.88 (anuvadanā +).
Anubhavati & Anubhoti [anu + bhavati] to come to or by, to undergo, suffer (feel), get, undertake, partake in, experience D i.129; ii.12 (˚bhonti); M ii.204; A i.61 (atthaŋ ˚bhoti to have a good result); J vi.97 (˚bhoma); Pv i.1011 (˚bhomi vipākaŋ); PvA 52 (˚issati = vedissati); Sdhf 290. Esp. freq. with dukkhaŋ to suffer pain, e.g. PvA i.1110 (˚bhonti); PvA 43, 68, 79 etc. (cp. anubhavana). -- ppr. med. ˚bhavamāna J i.50; aor. ˚bhavi PvA 75 (sampattiŋ); ger. ˚bhavitvā J iv.1; PvA 4 (sampattiŋ), 67 (dukkhaŋ), 73 (sampattiŋ); grd. ˚bhaviyāna (in order to receive) Pv ii.85 (= anubhavitvā PvA 109). <-> Pass. anubhūyati & ˚bhavīyati to be undergone or being experienced; ppr. ˚bhūyamāna PvA 8, 159 (mayā a. = anubhūta), 214 (attanā by him) & ˚bhavīyamāna PvA 33 (dukkhaŋ). -- pp. anubhūta (q.v.).
Anubhavana (nt.) [fr. anubhavati] experiencing, suffering; sensation or physical sensibility (cf. Cpd. 229, 2321) Nett 28 (iṭṭhâniṭṭh -- ânubhavana -- lakkhanā vedanā "feeling is characterised by the experiencing of what is pleasant and unpleasant"); Miln 60 (vedayita -- lakkhaṇā vedanā anubhavana -- lakkhaṇā ca); PvA 152 (kamma -- vipāka˚). Esp. in combn. with dukkha˚ suffering painful sensations, e.g. at J iv.3; Miln 181; DhA iv.75; PvA 52.
Anubhāga [anu + bhāga] a secondary or inferior part, (after -- )share, what is left over Vin ii.167.
Anubhāyati [anu + bhāyati] to be afraid of J vi.302 (kissa nvɔ ânubhāyissaŋ, so read for kissânu˚).
Anubhāva [fr. anubhavati] orig. meaning "experience, con- comitance" and found only in cpds. as -- ˚, in meaning "experiencing the sensation of or belonging to, experience of, accordance with", e.g. maha˚ sensation of greatness, rājâ˚ s. belonging to a king, what is in accordance with kingship, i. e. majesty. Through preponderance of expressions of distinction there arises the meaning of anubhāva as "power, majesty, greatness, splendour etc." & as such it was separated from the 1st component and taken as ānubhāva with ā instead of a, since the compositional character had obliterated the character of the a. As such (ānubhāva abs.) found only in later language. -- (1) anubhāva ( -- ˚): mahānubhāva (of) great majesty, eminence, power S i.146 sq.; ii.274; iv.323; Sn p. 93; Pv ii.112; PvA 76. deva˚ of divine power or majesty D ii.12; devatā˚ id. J i.168; dibba˚ id. PvA 71, 110. rājā˚ kingly splendour, pomp D i.49; J iv 247; PvA 279 etc. -- anubhāvena (instr. -- ˚) in accordance with, by means of J ii.200 (angavijjā˚); PvA 53 (iddh˚), 77 (kamma˚), 148 (id.), 162 (rāja˚), 184 (dāna˚), 186 (puñña˚). yathânubhāvaŋ (adv.) in accordance with (me), as much as (1 can); after ability, according to power S i.31; Vv 15 (= yathābalaŋ VvA 25). -- (2) ānubhāva majesty power, magnificence, glory, splendour J v.10, 456; Pv ii.811; VvA 14; PvA 43, 122, 272. See also ānu˚.
Anubhāvatā (f.) [= anubhāva + tā] majesty, power S i.156 (mahâ˚).
Anubhāsati [anu + bhāsati] to speak after, to repeat D i.104; Miln 345; DA i.273.
Anubhūta [pp. of anubhavati] (having or being) experienced, suffered, enjoyed PvA ii.1218. nt. suffering, experience J i.254; Miln 78, 80.
Anubhūyamānatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. ppr. Pass. of anubhavati] the fact of having to undergo, experiencing PvA 103.
Anuma ( -- dassika) see anoma˚.
Anumagge at J v.201 should be read anu magge along the road, by the way; anu here used as prep. c. loc. (see anu A b).
Anumajjati [anu + majjati] 1. to strike along, to stroke, to touch DA i.276 (= anumasati). -- 2. to beat, thresh, fig. to thresh ont J vi.548; Miln 90. -- Pass. anumajjīyati Miln 275 (cp. p. 428).
Anumajjana (nt.) [abstr. fr. anumajjati] threshing out, pounding up (Dhs. trsl. 11), always used with ref. to the term vicāra (q.v.) Miln 62; DhsA 114; DA i.63, 122.
Anumajjha (adj.) [anu + majjha] mediocre, without going to extremes J iv.192; v.387.
Anumaññati [anu + maññati] to assent, approve, give leave Th 1, 72. -- pp. anumata (q.v.).
Anumata [pp. of anumaññati] approved of, given consent to, finding approval, given leave D i.99 (= anuññāta DA i.267); J v.399 (= muta); Miln 185, 212, 231, 275; PvA 64 (= annuññāta).
Anumati (f.) [from anumaññati] consent, permission, agree- ment, assent, approval Vin ii.294, 301, 306; D. i.137, 143; Dpvs iv.47, Cf. v.18; DA i.297; VvA 17, PvA 114.
Anumatta see aṇu˚.
Anumasati [anu + masati] to touch D i.106 (= anumajjati DA i.276).
Anumāna [fr. anu + man] inference Miln 330 (naya +), 372, 413; Sdhp 74.
Anumitta [anu + mitta] a secondary friend, a follower. acquaintance J v.77.
Anumināti [cf. Sk. anumāti, anu + mināti from mi, Sk. minoti, with confusion of roots mā & mi] to observe, draw an inference M i.97; PvA 227 (˚anto + nayaŋ nento). See also anumīyati.
Anumīyati [Sk. anumīyate, Pass. of anu + mā, measure, in sense of Med.] to observe, conclude or infer from S iii.36. Cp. anumināti.
Anumodaka (adj.) [fr. anumodati] one who enjoys, one who is glad of or thankful for (c. acc.) Vin v.172; PvA 122; Sdhf 512.
Anumodati [anu + modati] to find satisfaction in (acc.), to rejoice in, be thankful for (c. acc.), appreciate, benefit from, to be pleased, to enjoy Vin ii.212 (bhattagge a. to say grace after a meal); S ii.54; A iii.50 (˚modanīya); iv.411; Dh 177 (ppr. ˚modamāna); It 78; Pv ii.919 (dānaŋ ˚modamāna = enjoying, gladly receiving); 1,54 (anumodare = are pleased; pitisomanassajātā honti PvA 27); J ii.112; PvA 19, 46, 81, 201) imper. modāhi); Sdhp. 501 sq. -- pp. anumodita (q.v.).
Anumodana (nt.) [fr. anumodati] "according to taste", i.e. satisfaction, thanks, esp. after a meal or after receiving gifts = to say grace or benediction, blessing, thanksgiving. In latter sense with dadāti (give thanks for = loc.), karoti (= Lat. gratias agere) or vacati (say or tell thanks): ˚ŋ datvā PvA 89; ˚ŋ katvā J i.91; DhA iii.170, 172; VvA 118; PvA 17, 47; ˚ŋ vatvā VvA 40 (pānīyadāne for the gift of water), 295, 306 etc. ˚ŋ karoti also "to do a favour" PvA 275. Cp. further DhA i.198 (˚gāthā verses expressing thanks, benediction); ii.97 (Satthāraŋ ˚ŋ yāciŋsu asked his blessing); PvA 23 (˚atthaŋ in order to thank), 26 (id.), 121, 141 (katabhatta˚), 142; Sdhp 213, 218, 516.
Anumodita [pp. of anumodati] enjoyed, rejoiced in PvA 77.
Anummatta (adj.) [an + ummatta] not out of mind, sane, of sound mind Miln 122; Sdhp 205.
Anuyanta at A v.22 is doubtful reading (v.l. anuyutta). The meaning is either "inferior to, dependent on, a subject of, a vassal" or "attending on". The explanation may compare Sk. anuyātaŋ attendance [anu + yā, cp. anuyāyin] or Sk. yantṛ ruler [yam], in which latter case anu -- yantṛ would be "an inferior ruler" and P. yanta would represent the n. a.g. yantā as a -- stem. The v. l. is perhaps preferable as long as other passages with anuyanta are not found (see anuyutta 2).
Anuyāgin (adj) [fr. anu + yaj] offering after the example of another D i.142.
Anuyāta [pp. of anuyāti] gone through or after, followed, pursued S ii.105 (magga); A v.236; It 29; Miln 217.
Anuyāti (& anuyāyati) [anu + yā] 1. to go after, to follow J vi.49 (fut. ˚yissati), 499 (yāyantaŋ anuyāyati = anugacchati C). -- 2. to go along by, to go over, to visit Miln 391 (˚yāyati). -- pp. anuyāta (q. v.). See also anusaŋyāyati.
Anuyāyin (adj.) [cp. Sk. anuyāyin, anu + yā] going after, following, subject to (gen.) Sn 1017 (anânuyāyin); J vi.309; Miln 284.
Anuyuñjanā (f.) (& ˚yuñjana nt.) [abstr. fr. anuyuñjati] application or devotion to ( -- ˚) Miln 178; VvA 346 (anuyujjanaŋ wrong spelling?)
Anuyuñjati [anu + yuñjati] 1. to practice, give oneself up to (acc.), attend, pursue S i.25, 122 (˚yuñjan "in loving self -- devotion" Mrs. Rh. D.); iii.154; iv.104, 175; Dh 26 (pamādaŋ = pavatteti DhA i.257), 247 (surāmeraya -- pānaŋ = sevati bahulīkaroti DhA iii.356); PvA 61 (kammaṭṭhānaŋ). -- 2. to ask a question, to call to account, take to task Vin ii.79; Vv 335; ppr. Pass. ˚yuñjiyamāna PvA 192. -- pp. anuyutta (q. v.). -- Caus. anuyojeti "to put to", to address, admonish, exhort DhA iv.20.
Anuyutta [pp. of anuyuñjati] 1. applying oneself to, dealing with, practising, given to, intent upon D i.166, 167; iii. 232 = A ii.205 (attaparitāpanɔ ânuyogaŋ a.); S iii.153; iv.104; Sn 663 (lobhaguṇe), 814 (methunaŋ = samāyutta SnA 536), 972 (jhān˚); Pug 55; PvA 163 (jāgariya˚), 206. -- 2. following, attending on; an attendant, inferior, vassal, in expression khattiya or rājā anuyutta a prince royal or a smaller king (see khattiya 3 b) A v.22 (v l. for T. anuyanta, q. v.); Sn 553 (= anugāmin, sevaka SnA 453).
Anuyoga [Sk. anuyoga, fr. anu + yuj] 1. application, devo- tion to ( -- ˚), execution, practice of ( -- ˚); often combd. with anuyutta in phrase ˚anuyogaŋ anuyutta = practising, e. g. Vin i.190 (maṇḍanɔ ânuyogaŋ anuyutta); D iii.113 (attakilamathɔ ânuyogaŋ a.); A ii.205 (attaparitāpanɔ ânuyogaŋ a.). -- As adj. ( -- ˚) doing, given to, practising (cp. anuyutta). D i.5; iii.107; M i.385; S i.182; iii.239; iv.330; v.320; A i.14; iii.249; iv.460 sq.; V. 17 sq., 205; J i.90 (padhānɔ ânuyogakiccaŋ); Vv 8438 (dhamma˚); Miln 348; DA i. 78, 104. -- 2. invitation, appeal, question (cp. anuyuñjati 2) Miln 10 (ācariyassa ˚ŋ datvā).
Anuyogavant (adj.) [anuyoga + vant] applying oneself to, full of application or zeal, devoted PvA 207.
Anuyogin (adj.) [fr. anuyoga] applying oneself to, devoted to ( -- ˚) Dh 209 (atta˚ given to oneself, self -- concentrated).
Anurakkhaka (adj.) [fr. anurakkhati, cp. ˚rakkhin] preserving, keeping up J iv.192 (vaŋsa˚); vi.1 (id.).
Anurakkhaṇa (nt.) & ˚ā (f.) [abstr. fr. anurakkhati] guarding, protection, preservation D iii.225 sq.; A ii.16 sq.; J i.133; Pug 12; Dpvs iv.24 (adj.); VvA 32 (citta˚); Sdhp 449.
Anurakkhati [anu + rakkhati] to guard, watch over (acc.), preserve, protect, shield Sn 149; Dh 327; J i.46; Pug 12. -- ppr. med.˚ rakkhamāna(ka) as adj. Sdhp 621.
Anurakkhā (f.) [= anurakkhaṇā] guarding, protection, preservation S iv.323 (anuddayā a. anukampā).
Anurakkhin (adj.) [fr. anurakkhati] guarding, preserving, keeping J v.24.
Anurakkhiya (adj.) [f. anurakkhati] in dur˚ difficult to guard Vin iii.149.
Anurañjita [pp. of anu + rañjeti, Caus. of rañj] illumined, brighterted, beautified Bu i.45 (byāmapabhā˚ by the shine of the halo); VvA 4 (sañjhātapa˚ for sañjhāpabhā˚).
Anuratta (adj.) pp. of anu + rañj] attached or devoted to, fond of, faithful Th 2, 446 (bhattāraŋ); J i.297; Miln 146.
Anuravati [anu + ravati] to resound, to sound after, linger (of sound) Miln 63.
Anuravanā (f.) [abstr. fr. anuravati] lingering of the sound, resounding Miln 63.
Anuraho (adv.) [anu + raho] in secret, face to face, private M i.27.
Anurujjhati [Sk. anurudhyate, Pass. of anu + rudh] to conform oneself to, have a regard for, approve, to be pleased A iv.158; Dhs A 362. -- pp. anuruddha (q. v.).
Anuruddha [pp. of anurujjhati] enggaged in, devoted to; compliant or complied with, pleased S iv.71, (anānuruddha).
Anurūpa (adj.) [anu + rūpa] suitable, adequate, seeming, fit, worthy; adapted to, corresponding, conform with ( -- ˚) J i.91; vi.366 (tad˚); PvA 61 (ajjhāsaya˚ according to his wish), 128 (id.) 78, 122, 130, 155; etc. Cp. also paṭirūpa in same meaning.
Anurodati [anu + rodati] to cry after, cry for J iii.166 = Pv i.127 (dārako candaŋ a.).
Anurodha [fr. anu + rudh] compliance, consideration satis- faction (opp. virodha) S i.111; iv.210; Sn 362; Dhs 1059; Vbh 145; DhsA 362.
Anulapanā (f.) [anu + lapanā, lap] scolding, blame, accusa- tion Vin ii.88 (spelt anullapanā; combd. with anuvadana & anubhaṇanā).
Anulitta (adj.) [cp. Sk. anulipta, pp. of anulimpati] anointed, besmeared J i.266; PvA 211.
Anulimpati [anu + limpati] to anoint, besmear, Miln 394 (˚limpitabba). Caus. ˚limpeti in same meaning Miln 169, and ˚lepeti Milm 169 (grd. ˚lepanīya to be treated with ointment). -- pp. anulitta (q. v.).
Anulimpana (nt.) [fr. anulimpati] anointing Miln 353, 394.
Anulepa [fr. anu + lip] anointing Miln 152.
Anulokin (adj.) [fr. anu + loketi, cp. Sk. & P. avalokin & anuviloketi] looking (up) at, seeing ( -- ˚) M i.147 (sīsa˚).
Anuloma (adj.) [Sk. anu + loma] "with the hair or grain", i. e. in natural order, suitable, fit, adapted to, adaptable, straight forward D ii.273 (anānuloma, q. v.) S iv.401; Ps ii.67, 70; DhA ii.208. -- nt. direct order, state of fitting in, adaptation Miln 148.
-- ñāṇa insight of adaptation (cp. Cpd. 66, 68) DhA ii.208. -- paṭiloma in regular order & reversed, forward & backward (Ep. of paṭiccasamuppāda, also in BSk.) Vin i.1; A iv.448.
Anulomika (& ˚ya) (adj.) [fr. anuloma] suitable, fit, agree- able; in proper order, adapted to ( -- ˚) Vin ii.7 (an˚); iii.120 (an˚ = ananucchaviya); iv.239; A i.106; iii.116 sq.; It 103 (sāmaññassa˚); Sn 385 (pabbajita˚); KhA 243 (ananulomiya); DhsA 25; Sdhp 65.
Anulometi [v. denom. fr. anuloma] to conform to, to be in accordance with Miln 372.
Anuḷāratta (nt.) [abstr. fr. an + uḷāra] smallness, littleness, insignificance VvA 24.
Anuvajja (adj.) [grd. of anu + vadati, cp. anuvāda & Sk. avavadya] to be blamed, censurable, worthy of reproach Sn p. 78 (an˚ = anuvādavimutta SnA 396).
Anuvattaka (adj.) [fr. anuvatteti] 1. = anupavattaka (q. v.) Th 1, 1014 (cakka˚). -- 2. following, siding with ( -- ˚) Vin iv.218 (ukkhittânuvattikā f.).
Anuvattati [Sk. anuvartati, anu + vattati] 1. to follow, imitate, follow one's example (c. acc.), to be obedient D ii.244; Vin ii.309 (Bdhgh.); iv.218; J i.125, 300; DA i.288; PvA 19. -- 2. to practice, execute Pv iv. 712. -- Caus. ˚vatteti (q. v.).
Anuvattana (nt.) [abstr. fr. anuvattati] complying with, conformity with ( -- ˚), compliance, observance, obedience J i.367 (dhamma˚); v.78.
Anuvattin (adj.) [fr. anuvattati] following, acting according to or in conformity with ( -- ˚), obedient J ii.348 (f. ˚inī); iii.319 (id.); Dh 86 (dhamma˚); Vv 155 (vasa˚ = anukūlabhāvena vattana sīla VvA 71); DhA ii.161.
Anuvatteti [anu + vatteti] = anupavatteti (q. v.) Th 1, 826 (dhammacakkaŋ: "after his example turn the wheel" Mrs. Rh. D.).
Anuvadati [Sk. ava˚; anu + vadati] to blame, censure, reproach Vin ii.80, 88. -- grd. anuvajja (q. v.).
Anuvadanā (f.) [fr. anuvadati] blaming, blame, censure Vin ii.88 (anuvāda +).
Anuvasati [anu + vasati] to live with somebody, to dwell, inhabit J ii.421. Caus. ˚vāseti to pass, spend (time) J vi.296. -- pp. ˚vuttha (q. v.).
Anuvassaŋ (adv.) [anu + vassa] for one rainy season; every rainy season or year, i. e. annually C. on Th 1, 24.
Anuvassika (adj.) [fr. anuvassaŋ] one who has (just) pas- sed one rainy season Th 1, 24 ("scarce have the rains gone by" Mrs. Rh. D.; see trsl. p. 29 n. 2).
Anuvāceti [anu + Caus. of vac] to say after, to repeat (words), to recite or make recite after or again D i.104 (= tehi aññesaŋ vācitaŋ anuvācenti DA i.273); Miln 345. Cp. anubhāseti.
Anuvāta1 [anu + vā to blow] a forward wind, the wind that blows from behind, a favourable wind; ˚ŋ adv. with the wind, in the direction of the wind (opp. paṭivātaŋ). A i.226 (˚paṭivātaŋ); Sdhp 425 (paṭivāta˚). In anuvāte (anu + vāte) at J ii.382 "with the wind, facing the w., in front of the wind" anu is to be taken as prep. c. loc. & to be separated from vāte (see anu A b.).
Anuvāta2 [anu + vā to weave (?) in analogy to vāta from vā to blow] only in connection with the making of the bhikkhus' garments (cīvara) "weaving on, supplementary weaving, or along the seam", i. e. hem, seam, binding Vin i.254, 297; ii.177; iv.121 (aggala +); PvA 73 (anuvāte appabhonte since the binding was insufficient).
Anuvāda [fr. anuvadatī, cp. Sk. anuvāda in meaning of "repetition"] 1. blaming, censure, admonition Vin ii.5, 32; A ii.121 (atta˚, para˚); Vbh 376. -- 2. in combn. vādânuvāda: talk and lesser or additional talk, i. e. "small talk" (see anu B iv.) D i.161; M i.368.
-- adhikaraṇa a question or case of censure Vin ii.88 sq.; iii.164 (one of the 4 adhikaraṇāni, q. v.).
Anuvāsana (nt.) [fr. anuvāseti] an oily enema, an injection Miln 353.
Anuvāseti [anu + vāseti, Caus. of vāsa3 odour, perfume] to treat with fragrant oil, i. e. to make an injection or give an enema of salubrious oil Miln 169; grd. ˚vāsanīya ibid.; pp. ˚vāsita Miln 214.
Anuvikkhitta (adj.) [anu + vi + khitta, pp. of anu + vikkhipati] dispersed over S v.277 sq. (+ anuvisaṭa).
Anuvigaṇeti [anu + vi + gaṇeti] to take care of, regard, heed, consider Th 1, 109.
Anuvicarati [anu + vi + carati] to wander about, stroll roam through, explore D i.235; J ii.128; iii.188; PvA 189 (= anupariyāti). -- Caus. ˚vicāreti to think over (lit. to make one's mind wander over), to meditate, ponder (cp. anuvicinteti); always combd. with anuvitakketi (q. v.) A i.264 (cetasā), iii.178 (dhammaŋ cetasā a.). -- pp. anuvicarita (q. v.).
Anuvicarita [pp. of anuvicāreti] reflected, pondered over, thought out S iii.203 (manasā); DA i.106 (= anucarita).
Anuvicāra [anu + vicāra, cf. anuvicāreti] meditation, reflexion, thought Dhs 85 (= vicāra).
Anuvicinaka [fr. anu + vicināti] one who examines, an examiner Miln 365.
Anuvicinteti [anu + vi + cinteti] to think or ponder over, to meditate D ii.203; S i 203 (yoniso ˚cintaya, imper. "marshall thy thoughts in ordered governance" Mrs. Rh. D.; v. l. anucintaya); Th 1, 747; Dh 364; It 82 (dhammaŋ ˚ayaŋ); J iii.396; iv.227; v.223 (dhammaŋ ˚cintayanto).
Anuvicca [ger. of anuvijjati, for the regular from anuvijja prob. through influence of anu + i (anu -- v -- icca for anvicca), cf. anveti & adhicca; & see anuvijjati] having known or found out, knowing well or thoroughly, testing, finding out M i.301, 361 (v. l. ˚vijja); A ii.3, 84; v.88; Dh 229 (= jānitvā DhA iii.329); Sn 530 (= anuviditvā SnA 431); J i.459 (= jānitvā C.); iii.426; Pug. 49.
-- kāra a thorough investigation, examination, test Vin i.236 (here spelt anuvijja) = M i.379 (= ˚viditvā C.) = A iv.185.
Anuvijjaka [fr. anuvijja, ger. of anuvijjati] one who finds out, an examiner Vin v.161.
Anuvijjati [anu + vid, with fusion of Vedic vetti to know, and Pass. of vindati to find (= vidyate)] to know thoroughly, to find out, to trace, to come to know; inf. ˚vijjitiŋ J iii.506; ger. ˚viditvā Sn A 431, also ˚vijja & vicca (see both under anuvicca); grd. ananuvejja not to be known, unfathomable, unknowable M i.140 (Tathāgato ananuvejjo). -- Caus. anuvijjāpeti to make some one find out J v.162. -- pp. anuvidita (q. v.).
Anuvijjhati [anu + vyadh] 1. to pierce or be pierced, to be struck or hurt with (instr.) J vi.439 -- 2. to be affected with, to fall into, to incur DhA iii.380 (aparādhaŋ). -- pp. anuviddha (q. v.).
Anuvitakketi [anu + vi + takketi] to reflect, think, ponder over, usually combd with anuvicāreti D i.119; iii.242; S v.67 = It 107 (anussarati +); A iii.383.
Anuvidita [pp. of anuvijjati] found out, recognised; one who has found out or knows well Sn 528, 530 (= anubuddha Sn A 431). Same in B.Sk., e.g. M Vastu iii.398.
Anuviddha (adj.) [pp. of anuvijjhati] pierced, intertwined or set with ( -- ˚) VvA 278.
Anuvidhīyati [cf. Sk. anuvidhīyate & adj. anuvidhāyin; Pass. of anu + vi + dhā, cf. vidahati] to act in conformity with, to follow (instruction) M ii.105 = Th 1, 875; S iv.199; J ii.98; iii.357.
Anuvidhīyanā (f.) [abstr. fr. anuvidhīyati] acting according to, conformity with M i.43.
Anuviloketi [anu + vi + loketi; B.Sk. anuvilokayati] to look round at, look over, survey, muster M i.339; Sn p. 140; J i.53; Miln 7 (lakaŋ), 21 (parisaŋ), 230.
Anuvivaṭṭa [anu + vivaṭṭa] an "after -- evolution", devolution; as part of a bhikkhuɔs dress: a sub -- vivaṭṭa (q. v.) Vin i.287 (vivaṭṭa +).
Anuvisaṭa (anu + visaṭa, pp. of anu + vi + sṛ] spread over S v.277 sq.; J iv.102.
Anuvuttha [pp. of anuvasati, cf. Sk. anūṣita] living with, staying, dwelling J ii.42 (cira˚); v.445 (id.).
Anuvejja (adj.) in an˚ see anuvijjati.
Anuvyañjana & anubyañjana (e. g. Vin iv.15; J i.12) (nt.) [anu + vyañjana] accompanying (i. e. secondary) attribute, minor or inferior characteristic, supplementary or additional sign or mark (cf. mahāpurisa -- lakkhaṇa) Vin i.65 (abl. anuvyañjanaso "in detail"); M iii.126; S iv.168; A iv.279 (abl.); v.73 sq.; Pug 24, 58; Miln 339; VvA 315; DhsA 400.
-- gāhin taking up or occupying oneself with details, taken up with lesser or inferior marks D i.70 (cf. MVastu iii.52); iii.225; S iv.104; A i.113; ii.16, 152 sq.; Dhs 1345 (cf. Dhs trsl. 351).
Anusaŋyāyati [anu + saŋ + yāyati] to traverse; to go up to, surround, visit (acc.) M i.209 (Bhagavantaŋ ˚itvā), J iv.214 (v.l. anuyāyitvā). See also anuyāti and anusaññāti.
Anusaŋvacchara (adj.) [anu + saŋv˚] yearly DhA i.388 (nakkhattaŋ). Usually nt. ˚ŋ as adv. yearly, every year J i.68; v.99. On use of anu in this combn. see anu A a.
Anusañcarati [anu + saŋ + carati] to walk along, to go round about, to visit M i.279; S v.53, 301; J i.202; iii.502; PvA 279 (nagaraŋ). -- pp. anusañcarita (q. v.).
Anusañcarita [pp. of anusañcarati] frequented, visited, resorted to Miln 387.
Anusañceteti [anu + saŋ + ceteti] to set ones mind on, concentrate, think over, meditate Pug 12.
Anusaññāti [either anu + saŋ + jñā (jānāti) or (preferably) = anusaŋyāti as short form of anusaŋyāyati, like anuyāti > anuyāyati of anu + saŋ + yā, cf. Sk. anusaŋyāti in same meaning] to go to, to visit, inspect, control; ppr. med. ˚saññāyamāna Vin iii.43 (kammante); inf. ˚saññātuŋ A i.68. (janapade).
Anusaṭa [Sk. anusṛta, pp. of anu + sṛ] sprinkled with ( -- ˚), bestrewn, scattered Vv 53 (paduma˚ magga = vippakiṇṇa VvA 36).
Anusatthar [n. ag. to anu + sās, cf. Sk. anuśāsitṛ & P. satthar] instructor, adviser J iv.178 (ācariya +). Cp. anusāsaka.
Anusatthi (f.) [Sk. anuśāsti, anu + śās, cp. anusāsana] admonition, rule, instruction J i.241; Miln 98, 172, 186 (dhamma˚), 225, 227, 347.
Anusandati [Vedic anusyandati, anu + syad] to stream along after, to follow, to be connected with. Thus to be read at Miln 63 for anusandahati (anuravati +; of sound), while at A iv.47 the reading is to be corrected to anusandahati.
Anusandahati [anu + saŋ + dhā, cf. Vedic abhi + saŋ + dhā] to direct upon, to apply to A iv.47 sq. (cittaŋ samāpattiyā; so to be read with v. l. for anusandati); Miln 63 (but here prob. to be read as anusandati, q.v.).
Anusandhanatā (f.) [= anusandhi] application, adjusting Dhs 8 (cittassa).
Anusandhi (f.) [fr. anu + saŋ + dhā] connection, (logical) conclusion, application DA i.122 (where 3 kinds are enumd., viz. pucchā˚, ajjhāsayā˚, yathā˚); Nett 14 (pucchato; Hard., in Index "complete cessation"?!). Esp. freq. in (Jātaka) phrase anusandhiŋ ghaṭeti "to form the connection", to draw the conclusion, to show the application of the story or point out its maxim J i.106; 308; DhA ii.40, 47; etc.
Anusampavankatā (f.) [anu + saŋ + pavankatā; is reading correct?] disputing, quarrelling(?) Vin ii.88 (under anuvādâdhikaraṇa).
Anusaya [anu + śī, seti Sk. anuśaya has a diff. meaning] (see Kvu trsl. 234 n. 2 and Cpd. 172 n. 2). Bent, bias, proclivity, the persistance of a dormant or latent disposition, predisposition, tendency. Always in bad sense. In the oldest texts the word usually occurs absolutely, without mention of the cause or direction of the bias. So Sn. 14 = 369, 545; M. iii.31; S. iii.130, iv.33, v.28 236; A. i.44; ii.157; iii.74, 246, 443. Or in the triplet obstinacy, prejudice and bias (adhiṭṭhānâbhinivesânusayā) S. ii.17; iii.10, 135, 161; A. v.iii. Occasionally a source of the bias is mentioned. Thus pride at S. i.188; ii.252 ff., 275; iii.80, 103, 169, 253; iv.41, 197; A i.132, iv.70 doubt at M. i.486 -- ignorance lust and hatred at S iv.205, M iii.285. At D iii.254, 282; S v.60; and A iv.9. we have a list of seven anusaya's, the above five and delusion and craving for rebirth. Hence -- forward these lists govern the connotation of the word; but it would be wrong to put that connotation back into the earlier passages. Later references are Ps i.26, 70 ff., 123, 130, 195; ii.36, 84, 94, 158; Pug 21; Vbh 340, 383, 356; Kvu 405 ff. Dpvs i.42.
Anusayita [pp. of anuseti, anu + śī] dormant, only in combn. dīgharatta˚ latent so long Th 1, 768; Sn 355, 649. Cp. anusaya & anusayin.
Anusayin (adj.) [fr. anusaya] D ii.283 (me dīgharatta˚), "for me, so long obsessed (with doubts)". The reading is uncertain.
Anusarati [anu + sṛ] to follow, conform oneself to S iv. 303 (phalaŋ anusarissati BB, but balaŋ anupadassati SS perhaps to be preferred). -- Caus. anusāreti to bring together with, to send up to or against Miln 36 (aññamaññaŋ a. anupeseti).
Anusavati at S ii.54 (āsavā na a.; v. l. anusayanti) & iv. 188 (akusalā dhammā na a.; v. l. anusenti) should preferably be read anusayati: see anuseti 2.
Anusahagata (adj.) having a residuum, accompanied by a minimum of . . S iii.130; Kvu 81, see aṇu˚.
Anusāyika (adj.) [fr. anusaya] attached to one, i. e. inherent, chronic (of disease) M ii.70 (ābādha, v. l. BB anussāyika); DhA i.431 (roga).
Anusāra [fr. anu + sṛ] "going along with", following, conformity. Only in obl. eases ( -- ˚) anusārena (instr.) in consequence of, in accordance with, according to J i.8; PvA 187 (tad), 227; and anusārato (abl.) id. Sdhp 91.
Anusārin ( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. anu + sarati] following, striving after, acting in accordance with, living up to or after. Freq. in formula dhammânusārin saddhânusārin living in conformity with the Norm & the Faith D iii.254; M i.142, 479; S iii.225; v.200 sq.; A i.74; iv.10; Pug 15. -- Cp. also S i.15 (bhavasota˚); iv.128 (id.); J vi.444 (paṇḍitassa˚ = veyyāvaccakara C.); Sdhp 528 (attha˚).
Anusāreti see anusarati.
Anusāsaka [fr. anusāsati] adviser, instructor, counsellor J ii.105; Miln 186, 217, 264. Cp. anusatthar.
Anusāsati [Vedic anuśāsati, anu + sās] 1. to advise, ad- monish, instruct in or give advice upon (c. acc.) to exhort to Vin i.83; D i.135; ii.154; Dh 77, 159 (aññaŋ); J vi.368; cp. i.103; Pv ii.68; PvA 148. -- grd. anusāsiya Vin i.59; and ˚sāsitabba DhA iii.99. -- Pass ˚sāsiyati Vin ii.200; Miln 186. -- 2. to rule, govern (acc.) ādminister to (dat.) S i.236 = Sn 1002 (paṭhaviŋ dhammenam -- anusāsati, of a Cakkavattin); J ii.2; vi.517 (rajjassa = rajjaŋ C., i. e. take care of) DA i.246 (read ˚sāsantena); PvA 161 (rajjaŋ). -- pp. anusiṭṭha (q. v.); cp. anusatthar, anusatthi & ovadati.
Anusāsana (nt.) [Vedic anuśāsana, fr. anu + śās] advice, instruction, admonition D iii.107; A i.292 (˚pāṭihāriya, cp. anusāsanī); Miln 359.
Anusāsanī (f.) [fr. anusāsati, cp. anusāsana] instruction, teaching, commandment, order S v.108; A ii.147; iii.87; v.24 sq., 49, 338; J v.113; Th 2, 172, 180; Pv iii.76; ThA 162; VvA 19, 80, 81.
-- pāṭihāriya (anusāsani˚) the miracle of teaching, the wonder worked by the commandments (of the Buddha) Vin ii.200; D i.212, 214; iii.220; A i.170; v.327; J iii.323; Ps ii.227 sq.
Anusikkhati [Vedic anuśikṣati; anu + Desid. of śak] to learn of somebody (gen.); to follow one's example, to imitate Vin ii.201 (ppr. med. ˚amāna); S i.235; A iv. 282, 286, 323; Sn 294 (vattaŋ, cp. RV iii.59, 2: vratena śikṣati), 934; J i.89; ii.98; iii.315; v.334; vi.62; Th 1, 963; Miln 61. -- Caus anusikkhāpeti to teach [= Sk. anuśikṣayati] Miln 352.
Anusikkhin (adj.) [fr. anusikhati] studying, learning M i. 100; Dh 226 (ahoratta˚ = divā ca rattiñ ca tisso sikkhā sikkhamāna DhA iii.324).
Anusiṭṭha (Vedic anuśiṣṭa, pp. of anusāsati] instructed, ad- monished, advised; ordered, commanded M ii.96; J i.226; Pv ii.811; Miln 284, 349.
Anusibbati [anu + sibbati, siv to sew] to interweave Vin iii.336 (introd. to Sam. Pās.).
Anusuṇāti [anu + śru] to hear; pret. anassuŋ [Sk. an- vaśruvaŋ] I heard M i.333.
Anusumbhati [anu + sumbhati (sobhati); śubh or (Vedic) śumbh] to adorn, embellish, prepare J vi.76.
Anusuyyaŋ [cp. Sk. anasūyaŋ] reading at J iii.27, see anasuyyaŋ.
Anusuyyaka (adj.) [an + usuyyaka] not envious, not jealous Sn 325 (= usuyyāvigamena a. SnA 332); J ii.192 (v. l. anussuyyaka); v.112.
Anuseṭṭhi [anu + seṭṭhi] 1. an under -- seṭṭhi (banker, mer- chant) J v.384 (see anu B iii. a.). -- 2. in redupl. cpd. seṭṭhânuseṭṭhi (see anu B iv) "bankers & lesser bankers", i. e. all kinds of well -- to -- do families J vi.331.
Anuseti [anu + seti. cp. Sk. anuśayate or˚ śete, from śī] to "lie down with", i. e. (1) trs. to dwell on, harp on (an idea) S ii.65; iii.36; iv.208. -- 2. (of the idea) to obsess, to fill the mind persistently, to lie dormant & be continually cropping up. M i.40, 108, 433; S ii.54 (so read with SS for anusavanti) iv.188; A i.283; iii.246; Pug 32, 48. -- pp. anusayita (q. v.).
Anusocati [anu + socati] to mourn for, to bewail Sn 851 (atītaŋ na a.; cp. Nd1 222); Pv i.127; ii.68; PvA 95.
Anusocana (nt.) [abstr. fr. anusocati] bewailing, mourning PvA 65.
Anusota˚ [anu + sota, in ˚ŋ as adv. or acc. to expln. under anu A a.] in anusotaŋ (adv.) along the stream or current, down -- stream A ii.12; J i.70 (opp. paṭisotaŋ against the stream); PvA 169 (Gangāya a. āgacchanto).
-- gāmin "one who follows the stream", i. e. giving way to ones inclinations, following ones will A ii.5, 6 (opp. paṭi˚); Sn. 319 (= sotaŋ anugacchanto Sn A 330); Pug 62.
Anussati (f.) [Sk. anusmṛti, fr. anu + smṛ, cp. sati] remembrance, recollection, thinking of, mindfulness. A late list of subjects to be kept in mind comprises six anussati -- ṭṭhānāni, viz. Buddha˚, Dhamma˚, Sangha˚, sīla˚, cāga˚, devatā˚, i. e. proper attention to the Buddha, the Doctrines, the Church, to morality, charity, the gods. Thus at D iii.250, 280 (cp. A i.211); A iii.284, 312 sq., 452; v.329 sq.; Ps i.28. Expanded to 10 subjects (the above plus ānāpāna -- sati, maraṇa -- sati, kāyagatā -- sati, upasamânussati) at A i.30, 42 (cp. Lal. Vist 34). For other references see D i.81; S v.67 = It 107 (anussaraṇa at latter pass.); A iii.284, 325, 452. Ps i.48, 95, 186; Pug 25, 60; Dhs 14, 23, 1350 (anussati here to be corr. to asati, see Dhs. trsl. 351); Sdhp. 225, 231, 482. See also anuttariya (anussat -- ânuttariya).
Anussada (adj.) [an + ussada without haughtiness Sn 624 (vv. ll. anusaddha & anussuda; Sn A 467 expln. by taṇhā ussadâbhāva) = Dh 400 (which pass. has anussuta; v.l. K.B. anussada; DhA iv.165 expls. with taṇhā -- ussāvâbhāva, vv. ll. ˚ussada˚); It 97 (vv. ll. anussata & anussara).
Anussaraṇa (nt.) [abstr. to anussarati] remembrance, me- mory, recollection It 107 (= anussati at id. p. S v.67); PvA 25, 29.
Anussarati [Vedic anusmarati, anu + smṛ] to remember, recollect, have memory of (acc.), bear in mind; be aware of D ii.8, 53, 54 (jātito etc.); S iii.86 sq. (pubbenivāsaŋ); v.67 (dhammaŋ a. anuvitakketi), 303 (kappasahassaŋ); A i.25, 164 (pubbenivāsaŋ), 207 (Tathāgataŋ, Dhammaŋ etc.); iii.285 (id.), 323 (nivāsaŋ), 418; v.34, 38, 132, 199, 336 (kalyāṇamitte); It 82 (dhammaŋ), 98 (pubbenivāsaŋ); J i.167; ii.111; Dh 364; Pv i.59; Pug 60; Sdhp 580, 587; DA i.257; KhA 213; DhA ii.84; iv.95; PvA 29, 53, 69, 79, 107. -- pp. anussarita (see anussaritar). -- Caus anussarāpeti to remind someone, to call to mind J ii.147.
Anussaritar [n. ag. to anussarita, pp. of anussarati] one who recollects or remembers S v.197, 225 (saritar +); A v.25, 28.
Anussava [anu + sava fr. śru, cp. Vedic śravas nt.] hear- say, report, tradition M i.520; ii.211; S ii.115; iv.138; A i.26; J i.158 (with ref. to part. kira = annussav'atthe nipāto; so also at VvA 322, cf. anussavana); ii.396, 430 (id.); iv.441; instr. ˚ena from hearsay, by report A ii.191 (cf. itihītihaŋ).
Anussavana (nt.) [anu + savana fr. śru] = anussava PvA 103 (kira -- saddo anussavane, from hearsay).
Anussavika (adj.) [fr. anussava] "belonging to hearsay", traditional; one who is familiar with tradition or who learns from hearsay M i.520; ii.211. Cp. anussutika.
Anussāvaka [fr. anussāveti] one who proclaims or announces, a speaker (of a kammavācā) Vin i.74.
Anussāvana (nt.) & ˚ā (f.) [fr. anussāveti] a proclamation Vin i.317, 340; v.170, 186, 202 sq.
Anussāvita [pp. of anussāveti] proclaimed, announced Vin i.103.
Anussāveti [anu + sāveti, Caus. of śru, cp. B.Sk. anuśrā- vayati "to proclaim aloud the guilt of a criminal" AvŚ. i.102; ii.182] to cause to be heard or sound; to proclaim, utter, speak out Vin i.103 (˚ssāviyamāna ppr. Pass.); ii.48 (saddaŋ a.). -- pp. anussāvita.
Anussuka (adj.) [an + ussuka] free from greed Dh 199; cf. anussukin v. l. D iii.47, also anissukin and apalāsin.
Anussukita [an + ussuk˚] VvA 74 & anussukin Pug 23 = anussuka.
Anussuta1 (adj.) [an + ussuta, ud + sṛ] free from lust Dh 400 (= ussāvâvena anussuta C.). See also anussada.
Anussuta2 [anu + suta, pp. of śru] heard of; only in cpd. ananussuta unheard of S ii.9; Pug 14.
Anussutika (adj.) [fr. anu + śru, cp. anussavika] according to tradition or report, one who goes by or learns from hearsay DA i.106, 107.
Anussuyyaka see anusuyyaka.
Anuhasati [anu + hasati] to laugh at, to ridicule DA i.256.
Anuhīrati [for ˚hariyati, anu + hṛ] to be held up over, ppr. anuhīramāna D ii.15 (vv. ll. v. l. anubhiram˚; glosses B. K. anudhāriyam˚, cp. Trenckner, Notes 79).
Anūna (adj.) [Vedic anūna, an + ūna] not lacking, entire, complete, without deficiency J vi 273; Dpvs v.52; Miln 226; DA i.248 (+ paripūra, expld by anavaya).
Anūnaka = anūna Dpvs iv.34.
Anūnatā (f.) [abstr. fr. anūna] completeness Cp. iii.611.
Anūpa (adj.) [Vedic anūpa, anu + ap: see āpa, orig. along- side of water] watery, moist; watery land, lowland J. iv.358 (anopa T; anupa C. p. 359), 381 (˚khetta); Miln 129 (˚khetta).
Anūpaghāta [metrically for anupa˚] not killing, not mur- dering. Dh 185 (= anupahananañ cɔeva anupaghātanañ ca DhA iii.238).
Anūpadhika for anu˚ in metre Sn 1057, see upadhi.
Anūpanāhin (adj.) [an + upanāhin, with ū metri causa] not bearing ill -- will, not angry with J iv.463.
Anūpama at It 122 is metric reading for anupama (see upama).
Anūpalitta (adj.) [an + upalitta, with ū in metre] free from taint, unstained, unsmeared Sn 211, 392, 468, 790, 845; Dh 353; cf. Nd1 90 and DhA iv.72.
Anūpavāda [an + upavāda, with metrically lengthened u] not grumbling, not finding fault Dh 185 (= anupavādanañ cɔ eva anupavadāpanañ ca DhA iii.238).
Anūhata (adj.) [pp. of an + ūhaññati, ud + han] not rooted out, not removed or destroyed Th 1, 223 = Nd2 974; Dh 338 (= asamucchinna DhA iv.48).
Aneka (adj.) (usually ˚ -- ) [an + eka] not one, i. e. many, various; countlcss, numberless It 99 (saŋvaṭṭakappā countless aeons); Sn 688 (˚sākhā); Dh 153 (˚jātisāra); J iv.2; vi.366.
-- pariyāyena (instr.) in many ways Vin i.16; Sn p. 15. -- rūpa various, manifold Sn 1049, 1079, 1082; Nd2 54 (= anekavidha). -- vidha manifold Nd2 54; DA i.103. -- vihita various, manifold D i.12, 13, 178; It 98; Pug 55; DA i.103 (= anekavidha).
Anekaŋsā (f.) [an + ekaŋsā] doubt Nd2 1.
Anekaŋsikatā (f.) [abstr. fr. anekaŋsa + kata] uncertainty, doubtfulness Miln 93.
Aneja (adj.) [an + ejā] free from desires or lust D ii.157; Sn 920, 1043, 1101, 1112; It 91 (opp. ejânuga Nd1 353 = Nd2 55; Dh 414 (= taṇhāya abhāvena DhA iv. 194), 422; Pv iv.135 (nittaṇha PvA 230).
Anedha (adj.) [an + edha] without fuel J iv.26 (=anindhana).
Aneḷa (adj.) [an + eḷa = ena, see neḷa & cp. BSk. eḍa (mūka); Vedic anena] faultless, pure; only in foll. cpds.: ˚gala free from the dripping or oozing of impurity (thus expld. at DA i.282, viz. elagalana -- virahita), but more likely in lit. meaning "having a pure or clear throat" or, of vācā speech: "clearly enunciated" (thus Mrs. Rh. D. at Kindred Sayings i.241) Vin i.197 = D i.114 = S i.189; A ii.51, 97; iii.114, 195. Cp. also M Vastu iii. 322. -- ˚mūga same as prec. "having a clear throat", i. e. not dumb, fig. clever, skilled D iii.265; Sn 70 (= alālāmukha SnA 124), cp. Nd2 259.
Aneḷaka (adj.) [cp. BSk. aneḍaka, e. g. Av. Ś. i.187, 243; M Vastu i.339; iii.322] = aneḷa, pure, clear M ii.5; J vi.529.
Anesanā (f.) [an + esanā] impropriety S ii.194; J ii.86; iv.381; Miln 343, 401; DA i.169; DhA iv.34; Sdhp 392, 427.
Ano -- is a frequent form of compn. an -- ava, see ava.
Anoka (nt.) [an + oka] houselessness, a houseless state, fig freedom from worldliness or attachment to life, singleness S v.24 = A v.232 = Dh 87 (okā anokaŋ āgamma). <-> adj. homeless, free from attachment S i.176; Dh 87 (= anālaya DhA ii.162); Sn 966 (adj.; expld at Nd1 487 by abhisankhāra -- sahagatassa viññāṇassa okāsaŋ na karoti, & at SnA 573 by abhisankhāra -- viññānɔ ādīnaŋ anokāsabhūta).
sārin living in a houseless state, fig. being free from worldly attachment S iii.10 = Nd1 197; Sn 628 (= anālaya -- cārin SnA 468); Ud 32; Dh 404 (v. l. anokka˚); DhA iv.174 (= anālaya -- cārin); Miln 386.
Anogha in anogha -- tiṇṇa see ogha.
Anojaka = anojā Vv 354 (= VvA 161, where classed with yodhikā bandhujīvakā).
Anojagghati at D i.91 is v. l. for anujagghati.
Anojā (f.) [*Sk. anujā] a kind of shrub or tree with red flowers J vi.536 (korandaka +); usually in cpd. anojapuppha the a. flower, used for wreaths etc. J i.9 (˚dāma, a garland of a flowers); vi.227 (id.); DhA ii.116 (˚cangoṭaka).
Anottappa (nt.) [an + ottappa] recklessness, hardness D iii.212; It 34 (ahirika +); Pug 20; Dhs 365. Cp. anottāpin.
Anottāpin & Anottappin (adj.) [fr. anottappa] not afraid of sin, bold, reckless, shameless D iii.252, 282 (pp; ahirika); Sn 133 (p; ahirika +); It 27, 115 (anatāpin anottappin, vv. ll. anottāpin); Pug 20, 24.
Anodaka (adj.) [an + udaka] without water, dry J i.307; DhA i.52; Sdhp 443.
Anodissaka (adj.) [an + odissa + ka] unrestricted, without exception, general, universal; only in cpd. ˚vasena universally, thoroughly (with ref. to mettā) J i.81; ii 146; VvA 97 (in general; opp. odissaka -- vasena). See also Mrs. Rh. D. Psalms of the Brethren p. 5 n. 1.
Anonamati [an + onamati] not to bend, to be inflexible, in foll. expressions: anonamaka (nt.) not stooping DhA ii.136; auonamanto (ppr.) not bending D ii.17 = iii. 143; anonami -- daṇḍa (for anonamiya˚) an inflexible stick Miln 238 (anoṇami˚ T, but anonami˚ vv. ll., see Miln 427).
Anopa see anūpa.
Anoma (adj.) (only ˚ -- ) [an + oma] not inferior, superior, perfect, supreme, in foll. cpds.
-- guṇa supreme virtue DA i.288. -- dassika of superior beauty Vv 207, VvA 103 (both as v. l.; T. anuma˚); Vv 437. -- dassin one who has supreme knowledge; of unexcelled wisdom (Name of a Buddha) J i.228. -- nāma of perfect name S i.33 ("by name the Peerless" Mrs. Rh. D.), 235; Sn 153, 177 (cp. SnA 200). -- nikkama of perfect energy Vv 6427 (= paripuṇṇa -- viriyatāya a. VvA 284). -- pañña of lofty or supreme wisdom (Ep. of the Buddha) Sn 343, 352 (= mahāpañña SnA 347); Th 2, 522 (= paripuṇṇa -- pañña ThA 296), DhA i.31. -- vaṇṇa of excellent colour Sn 686 J vi.202. -- viriya of supreme exertion or energy Sn 353.
Anomajjati [anu + ava + majjati, mṛj] to rub along over, to stroke, only in phrase gattāni pāṇinā a. to rub over one's limbs with the hand M i.80, 509; S v.216.
Anorapāra (adj.) [an + ora + pāra] having (a shore) neither on this side nor beyond Miln 319.
Anoramati [an + ava + ram] not to stop, to continue J iii.487; DhA iii.9 (ger. ˚itvā continually).
Anovassa (nt.) [an + ovassa; cp. Sk. anavavarṣana] absence of rain, drought J v.317 (v. l. BB for anvāvassa T.; q. v.).
Anovassaka (adj.) [an + ovassaka] sheltered from the rain, dry Vin ii.211; iv.272; J i.172; ii.50; iii.73; DhA ii. 263; ThA 188.
Anosita (adj.) [an + ava + sita, pp. of sā] not inhabited (by), not accessible (to) Sn 937 (= anajjhositaŋ Nd1 441; jarādīhi anajjhāvutthaŋ ṭhānaŋ SnA 566).
Anta1 [Vedic anta; Goth. andeis = Ohg. anti = E. end; cp. also Lat. antiae forehead (: E. antler), and the prep. anti opposite, antika near = Lat. ante; Gr. a)nti/ & a)/nta opposite; Goth., Ags. and; Ger. ant -- ; orig. the opposite (i. e. what stands against or faces the starting -- point)]. 1. end, finish, goal S iv.368 (of Nibbāna); Sn 467; J ii.159. antaŋ karoti to make an end (of) Sn 283, 512; Dh 275, cp. antakara, ˚kiriyā. -- loc. ante at the end of, immediately after J i.203 (vijay˚). -- 2. limit, border, edge Vin i.47; Dh 305 (van˚); J iii.188. -- 3. side: see ekamantaŋ (on one side, aside). -- 4. opposite side, opposite, counterpart; pl. parts, contrasts, extremes; thus also used as "constituent, principle" (in tayo & cattāro antā; or does it belong to anta2 2. in this meaning? Cp. ekantaŋ extremely, under anta2): dve antā (two extremes) Vin i.10; S ii.17; iii.135. ubho antā (both sides) Vin i.10; S ii.17; J i.8; Nd1 109. eko, dutiyo anto (contrasts) Nd1 52. As tayo antā or principles (?), viz. sakkāya, s. -- samudaya, s. -- nirodha D iii.216, cp. A iii. 401; as cattāro, viz. the 3 mentioned plus s. -- nirodhagāmini -- paṭipadā at S iii.157. Interpreted by Morris as "goal" (J P T S. 1894, 70). -- Often pleonastically, to be expld as a "pars pro toto" figure, like kammanta (q. v.) the end of the work, i. e. the whole work (cp. E. sea -- side, country -- side ); vananta the border of the wood = the woods Dh 305; Pv ii.310 (expld by vana PvA 86; same use in BSk., vanânta e. g. at Jtm vi.21; cp. also grāmânta Av. Ś. i.210); suttanta (q. v.), etc. Cp. ākāsanta J vi.89 & the pleonastic use of patha. -- ananta (n.) no end, infinitude; (adj.) endless, corresponds either to Sk. anta or antya, see anta2.
-- ânanta end & no end, or finite and endless, D i.22; DA i.115. -- ânantika (holding views of, or talking about) finiteness and infinitude D i.22 (see expln. at DA i.115); S iii.214, 258 sq.; Ps i.155. -- kara putting an end to, (n.) a deliverer, saviour; usually in phrase dukkhassɔa. (of the Buddha) M i.48, 531; A ii.2; iii.400 sq.; Th 1, 195; It 18; Sn 32, 337, 539; Pug 71. In other combn. A ii.163 (vijjāyɔ); Sn 1148 (pañhānɔ). -- -- kiriyā putting an end to, ending, relief, extirpation; always used with ref. to dukkha S iv.93; lt 89; Sn 454, 725; DhA iv.45. -- gata = antagū Nd2 436 (+ koṭigata). -- gāhikā (f.), viz. diṭṭhi, is an attribute of micchādiṭṭhi, i. e. heretical doctrine. The meaning of anta in this combn. is not quite clear: either "holding (wrong) principles (goals, Morris)", viz. the 3 as specified above 4 under tayo antā (thus Morris J P T S. 1884, 70), or "taking extreme sides, i. e. extremist", or "wrong, opposite (= antya, see anta2)" (thus Kern, Toev. s. v.) Vin i.172; D iii.45, 48 (an˚); S i.154; A i.154; ii.240; iii.130; Ps i.151 sq. -- gū one who has gone to the end, one who has gone through or overcome (dukkha) A iv.254, 258, 262; Sn 401 (= vaṭṭadukkhassa antagata); 539. -- ruddhi at J vi.8 is doubtful reading (antaruci?). -- vaṭṭi rimmed circumference J iii.159. -- saññin being conscious of an end (of the world) D i.22, cp. DA i 115.
Anta2 (adj.) [Vedic antya] 1. having an end, belonging to the end; only in neg. ananta endless, infinite, boundless (opp. antavant); which may be taken as equal to anta1 (corresp. with Sk. anta (adj.) or antya; also in doublet anañca, see ākāsɔânañca and viññāṇɔânañca); D i.23, 34 = D iii.224, 262 sq.; Sn 468 (˚pañña); Dh 179, 180 (˚gocara having an unlimited range of mental vision, cp. DhA iii.197); J i.178. -- 2. extreme, last, worst J ii.440 (C. hīna, lāmaka); see also anta1 4. -- acc. as adv. in ekantaŋ extremely, very much, "utterly" Dh 228 etc. See eka.
Anta3 (nt.) [Vedic āntra, contr. fr. antara inner = Lat. interus, Gr. e)/ntera intestines] the lower intestine, bowels, mesentery It 89; J i.66, 260 (˚vaddhi -- maŋsa etc.); Vism 258; DhA i.80.
-- gaṇṭhi twisting of the bowels, lit. "a knot in the intestines" Vin i.275 (˚ābādha). -- guṇa [see guṇa2 = gula1] the intestinal tract, the bowels S ii.270; A iv.132; Kh iii. = Miln 26; Vism 42; KhA 57. -- mukha the anus J iv.402. -- vaṭṭi = ˚guṇa Vism 258.
Antaka [Vedic antaka] being at the end, or making an end, Ep. of Death or Māra Vin i.21; S i.72; Th 2, 59 (expld by ThA 65 as lāmaka va Māra, thus taken = anta2); Dh 48 (= maraṇa -- sankhāto antako DhA ii.366), 288 (= maraṇa DhA iii.434).
Antamaso (adv.) [orig. abl. of antama, *Sk. antamaśah; cp. BSk. antaśah as same formation fr. anta, in same meaning ("even") Av. Ś. i.314; Divy 161] even Vin iii. 260; iv.123; D i.168; M iii.127; A v.195; J ii.129; DA i.170; SnA 35; VvA 155.
Antara (adj.) [Vedic antara, cp. Gr. e)/ntera = Sk. antra (see anta3), Lat. interus fr. prep. inter. See also ante & anto]. Primary meanings are "inside" and "in between"; as adj. "inner"; in prep. use & in cpds. "inside, in between". Further development of meaning is with a view of contrasting the (two) sides of the inside relation, i. e. having a space between, different from; thus nt. antaraŋ difference.
I. (Adj. -- n) 1. (a) inner, having or being inside It 83 (tayo antarā malā three inward stains); esp. as -- ˚ in cpds. āmis˚ with greed inside, greedy, selfish Vin i.303; dos˚ with anger inside, i. e. angry Vin ii.249; D iii.237; M i.123; PvA 78 (so read for des˚). Abl. antarato from within It 83. (b) in between, distant; dvādasa yojan˚ antaraŋ ṭhānaŋ PvA 139 139. -- 2. In noun -- function (nt.): (a). spatial: the inside (of) Vv 361 (pītantara a yellow cloak or inside garment = pītavaṇṇa uttariya VvA 116); Dāvs i.10 (dīpɔ antara -- vāsin living on the island); DhA i.358 (kaṇṇa -- chidd˚ the inside of the ear; VvA 50 (kacch˚ inner room or apartment). Therefore also "space in between", break J v.352 (= chidda C.), & obstacle, hindrance, i. g. what stands in between: see cpds. and antara -- dhāyati (for antaraŋ dhāyati). -- (b). temporal: an interval of time, hence time in general, & also a specified time, i. e. occasion. As interval in Buddhantaraŋ the time between the death of one Buddha and the appearance of another, PvA 10, 14, 21, 47, 191 etc. As time: It 121 (etasmiŋ antare in that time or at this occasion); Pv i.1011 (dīghaŋ antaraŋ = dīghaŋ kālaŋ PvA 52); PvA 5 (etasmiŋ antare at this time, just then). As occasion: J v.287; Pug 55 (eḷaka -- m -- antaraŋ occasion of getting rain). S i.20, quoted DA i.34, (mañ ca tañ ca kiŋ antaraŋ what is there between me and you?) C. expls. kiŋ kāraṇā. Mrs. Rh. D. in trsln. p. 256 "of me it is and thee (this talk) -- now why is this"; J vi.8 (assa antaraŋ na passiŋsu they did not see a diff. in him). -- 3. Phrases: antaraŋ karoti (a) to keep away from or at a distance (trs. and intrs.), to hold aloof, lit. "to make a space in between" M iii.14; J. iv.2 (˚katvā leaving behind); Pug A 231 (ummāraŋ a. katvā staying away from a threshold); also adverbially: dasa yojanāni a. katvā at a distance of 10 y. PvA 139. -- (b.) to remove, destroy J vi.56 (v. l. BB. antarāyaŋ karoti).
II. In prep. use (˚ -- ) with acc. (direction) or loc. (rest): inside (of), in the midst of, between, during (cp. III. use of cases). (a.) w. acc.: antaragharaŋ paviṭṭha gone into the house Miln 11. -- (b.) w. loc.: antaraghare nisīdanti (inside the house) Vin ii.213; ˚dīpake in the centre of the island J i.240; ˚dvāre in the door J v.231; ˚magge on the road (cp. antarāmagge) PvA 109; ˚bhatte in phrase ekasmiŋ yeva a. during one meal J i 19 = DhA i.249; ˚bhattasmiŋ id. DhA iv.12; ˚vīthiyan in the middle of the road PvA 96. ˚satthīsu between the thighs Vin ii.161 (has antarā satthīnaŋ) = J i.218.
III. Adverbial use of cases, instr. antarena in between D i.56; S iv.59, 73; J i.393; PvA 13 (kāl˚ in a little while, na kālantarena ib. 19). Often in combn. antarantarena (c. gen.) right in between (lit. in between the space of) DhA i.63, 358. -- loc. antare in, inside of, in between ( -- ˚ or c. gen. KhA 81 (sutt˚ in the Sutta); DhA iii.416 (mama a.); PvA 56, 63 (rukkh˚). Also as antarantare right inside, right in the middle of (c. gen.) KhA 57; DhA i.59 (vanasaṇḍassa a.). -- abl. antarā (see also sep. article of antarā) in combn. antarantarā from time to time, occasionally; successively time after time Sn p. 107; DhA ii.86; iv.191; PvA 272.
IV. anantara (adj.) having or leaving nothing in between i. e. immediately following, incessant, next, adjoining J iv.139; Miln 382 (solid; DhA i.397; PvA 63 (tadantaraŋ immediately hereafter), 92 (immed. preceding), 97 (next in caste). See also abbhantara.
-- atīta gone past in the meantime J ii.243. -- kappa an intermediary kappa (q. v.) D i 54. -- kāraṇa a cause of impediment, hindrance, obstacle Pug A 231 -- cakka "the intermediate round", i. e. in astrology all that belongs to the intermediate points of the compass Miln 178. -- cara one who goes in between or inside, i. e. a robber S iv.173. -- bāhira (adj.) inside & outside J i.125. -- bhogika one who has power (wealth, influence) inside the kings dominion or under the king, a subordinate chieftain (cp. antara -- raṭṭha) Vin iii.47 -- raṭṭha an intermediate kingdom, rulership of a subordinate prince J v.135. -- vāsa an interregnum Dpvs v.80. -- vāsaka "inner or intermediate garment", one of the 3 robes of a Buddhist bhikkhu (viz. the sanghāṭī, uttarāsanga & a.) Vin i.94, 289; ii.272. Cf. next. -- sāṭaka an inner or lower garment [cp. Sk. antarīya id.], under garment, i. e. the one between the outer one & the body VvA 166 (q. v.).
Antaraŋsa [B.Sk. antarâŋsa; antara + aŋsa] "in between the shoulders", i. e. the chest J v.173 = vi.171 (phrase lohitakkho vihatɔ antaraŋso).
Antaraṭṭhaka (adj.) [antara + aṭṭhaka] only in phrases rattisu antaraṭṭhakāsu and antaraṭṭhake hima -- pātasamaye (in which antara functions as prep. c. loc., according to antara II. b.) i. e. in the nights (& in the time of the falling of snow) between the eighths (i. e. the eighth day before & after the full moon: see aṭṭhaka2). First phrase at Vin i.31, 288; iii 31; second at M i.79 (cp. p. 536 where Trenckner divides anta -- raṭṭhaka); A i.136 (in nom.); J i.390; Miln 396.
Antaradhāna (nt.) [fr. antaradhāyati] disappearance A i.58 (saddhammassa); ii.147; iii.176 sq.; Miln 133; Dhs 645, 738, 871. Cp. ˚dhāyana.
Antaradhāyati [antara + dhāyati] to disappear Sn 449 (˚dhāyatha 3rd sg. med.); Vv 8128 (id.); J i.119 = DhA i.248; DhA iv.191 (ppr. ˚dhāyamāna & aor. dhāyi) PvA 152, 217, (˚dhāyi), 245; VvA 48. -- ppr. antarahita (q. v.). -- Caus. antaradhāpeti to cause to disappear, to destroy J i.147; ii.415; PvA 123.
Antaradhāyana (nt.) [fr. antaradhāyati] disappearance DhA iv.191. (v. l. ˚adhāna).
Antarayati [cp. denom. fr. antara] to go or step in be- tween, ger. antaritvā (= antarayitvā) J i.218.
Antarahita (adj.) [pp. of antaradhāyati] 1. disappeared, gone, left D i.222. M i.487. Miln 18. PvA 245. -- 2 in phrase anantarahitāya bhūmiyā (loc) on the bare soil (lit. on the ground with nothing put in between it & the person lying down, i. e. on an uncovered or unobstructed ground) Vin i.47; ii.209; M ii.57.
Antarā (adv.) [abl. or adv. formation fr. antara; Vedic antarā.] prep. (c. gen. acc. or loc.), pref. (˚ -- ) and adv. "in between" (of space & time), midway, inside; during, meanwhile, between. On interpretation of term see DA i.34 sq. -- (1). (prep.) c. acc. (of the two points compared as termini; cp. B.Sk. antarā ca Divy 94 etc.) D i.1 (antarā ca Rājagahaŋ antarā ca Nāḷandaŋ between R. and N.). -- c. gen. & loc. Vin ii.161 (satthīnaŋ between the thighs, where id. p. at J i.218 has antara -- satthīsu); A ii.245 (satthīnaŋ. but v. l. satthimhi). -- (2) (adv.) meanwhile Sn 291, 694; It 85; Dh 237. -- occasionally Miln 251. -- (3). (pref.) see cpds.
-- kathā "in between talk, talk for pastime, chance conversation, D ii.1, 8, 9; S i.79; iv.281; A iii.167; Sn p. 115; DA i.49 and freq. passim. -- gacchati to come in between, to prevent J vi.295. -- parinibbāyin an Anāgāmin who passes away in the middle of his term of life in some particular heaven D iii.237; A i.233; Pug 16. -- magge (loc.) on the road, on the way J i.253; Miln 16; DhA ii.21; iii.337; PvA 151, 258, 269, 273 (cp. antara˚). -- maraṇa premature death DhA i.409; PvA 136. -- muttaka one who is released in the meantime Vin ii.167.
Antarāpaṇa (nt.) [antarā + paṇa "in between the shopping or trading"] place where the trading goes on, bazaar J i.55; vi.52; Miln 1, 330; DhA i.181.
Antarāya1 [antara + aya from i, lit. "coming in between"] obstacle, hindrance, impediment to ( -- ˚); prevention, bar; danger, accident to ( -- ). There are 10 dangers (to or from) enumd. at Vin i.112, 169 etc., viz. rāja˚, cora˚, aggi˚, udaka˚, manussa˚, amanussa˚, vāḷa˚, siriŋsapa˚, jīvita˚, brahmacariya˚. In B.Sk. 7 at Divy 544, viz. rājā -- caura -- manuṣy -- amanuṣya -- vyāḍ -- agny -- udakaŋ. -- D i.3, 25, 26; A iii.243, 306; iv.320; Sn 691, 692; Dh 286 (= jīvit˚ DhA iii.431); J i.62, 128; KhA 181; DhA ii 52; VvA 1 = PvA 1 (hat˚ removing the obstacles) -- antarāyaŋ karoti to keep away from, hinder, hold back, prevent, destroy Vin i.15; J vi.171; Vism 120; PvA 20.
-- kara one who causes impediments or bars the way, an obstructor D i.227; S i.34; A i.161; Pv iv.322.
Antarāya2 (adv.) [dat. of antara or formation fr. antara + ger. of i?) in the meantime Sn 1120 (cp Nd2 58) = antarā Sn A 603.
Antarāyika (adj.) [fr. antarāya] causing an obstacle, forming an impediment Vin i.94 = ii.272; M i.130; S ii.226; ThA 288.
Antarāyikin (adj. -- n.) [cp. antarāyika] one who meets with an obstacle, finding difficulties Vin iv.280 (an˚ = asati antarāye).
Antarāḷa (nt.) [Sk antarāla] interior, interval Dāvs i.52; iii.53 (nabh˚).
Antarika (adj.) [fr. antara] "being in between", i. e. - 1. intermediate, next, following: see an˚. -- 2. distant, lying in between PvA 173 (aneka -- yojan˚ ṭhāna). See also f. antarikā. -- 3. inside: see antarikā. -- anantarika with no interval, succeeding, immediately following, next Vin ii.165, 212 (ān˚); iv.234.
Antarikā (f.) [abstr. fr. antarika] "what lies in between or near", i. e. -- 1. the inside of Vin iv.272 (bhājan˚). <-> 2. the neighbourhood, region of ( -- ˚), sphere, compass Vin iii.39 (ur˚, angul˚); J i.265 (yakkhassa sīm˚ inside the yṡ sphere of influence). -- 3. interval, interstice Vin ii.116 (sutt˚ in lace); A i.124 (vijj˚ the interval of lightning).
Antalikkha (nt.) [Vedic antarikṣa = antari -- kṣa (kṣi), lit. situated in between sky and earth] the atmosphere or air D ii.15; A iii.239; iv.199; Sn 222, 688; Dh 127 = Miln 150 = PvA 104; Pv i.31 (= vehāyasa -- saññita a. PvA 14); KhA 166.
-- ga going through the air A i.215. -- cara walking through the air Vin i.21; D i.17; S i.111; J v.267; DA i.110.
Antavant (ādj.) [anta1 + ˚vant] having an end, finite D i.22, 31, 187; Ps i.151 sq.; 157; Dhs 1099, 1117, 1175; Miln 145. -- anantavant endless, infinite A v.193 (loka). See also loka.
Anti (indecl.) [Vedic anti = Lat ante, Gr. a)nti/, Goth. and; Ags. and -- , Ger. ant -- , ent -- ] adv. & prep. c. gen.: opposite, near J v.399 (tavɔ antiŋ āgatā, read as tavɔ anti -- m -- āgatā; C. santikaŋ), 400, 404; vi.565 (sāmikassɔ anti = antike C.). -- Cp. antika.
Antika (adj. -- n.) -- 1. [der fr. anti] near KhA 217; nt. neighbourhood Kh viii.1. (odak˚); J vi.565 (antike loc. = anti near). -- 2. [der fr. anta = Sk. antya] being at the end, final, finished, over S i.130 (purisā etad -- antikā, v. l. SS antiyā: men are (to me) at the end for that, i. e. men do not exist any more for me, for the purpose of begetting sons.
Antima (adj.) [Cp. superl. of anta] last, final (used almost exclusively with ref. to the last & final reincarnation; thus in combn. with deha & sarīra, the last body) D ii.15; Dh 351; It 50 (antimaŋ dehaŋ dhāreti), 53 (id.); Vv 512; Sn 478 (sarīraŋ antimaŋ dhāreti) 502; Miln 122, 148; VvA 106 (sarīrɔ antima -- dhārin); Sdhp 278.
-- dehadhara one who wears his last body It 101 (dhāra T, ˚dhara v. l.); VvA 163. -- dhārin = prec. S i.14, 53 (+ khīṇāsava); ii.278; It 32, 40; Sn 471. -- vatthu "the last thing", i. e. the extreme, final or worst (sin) Vin i. 121, 135, 167, 320. -- sarīra the last body; (adj.) having ones last rebirth S i.210 (Buddho a˚ -- sarīro); A ii.37; Sn 624; Dh 352, 400; DhA iv.166 (= koṭiyaŋ ṭhito attabhāvo).
Ante˚ (pref.) [Sk. antaḥ, with change of -- aḥ to -- e, instead of the usual -- o, prob. through interpreting it as loc. of anta] near, inside, within; only in foll. cpds.: ˚pura (nt.) "inner town", the king's palace, esp. its inner apartments, i. e. harem [Sk. antaḥpura, cp. also P. antopura] Vin i.75, 269; A v.81; J ii.125; iv.472; Miln 1; PvA 23, 81, 280; ˚purikā harem woman DhsA 403; ˚vāsika one who lives in, i. e. lodges or lives with his master or teacher, a pupil Vin i.60; iii.25; S i.180; iv.136; J i. 166; ii.278; iii.83, 463; PvA 12; VvA 138; ˚vāsin = ˚vāsika Vin iii.66; D i.1, 45, 74, 78, 88, 108, 157; M iii.116; DA i.36.
Anto (indecl.) [Sk. antaḥ; Av antarə Lat. inter, Oir. etar between, Ohg. untar; Idg. *entar, compar. of *en (in) = inner, inside] prep. inside, either c. acc. denoting direction = into, or c. loc. denoting place where = in. As prefix (˚ -- ) in, within, inside, inner (see cpds.) (1.) prep. c. acc. anto nivesanaŋ gata gone into the house J i.158; anto jālaŋ pavisati go into the net DhA iii.175; anto gāmaŋ pavisati to go into the village DhA ii.273; anto nagaraŋ pavisati DhA ii.89; PvA 47. -- (2) c. loc. anto gabbhe J ii.182; gāme DhA ii.52; gehe DhA ii.84; nadiyaŋ J vi.278; nivesane J ii.323; vasse in the rainy season J iv.242; vimānasmiŋ Pv i.101; sattāhe inside of a week PvA 55.
-- koṭisanthāra "house of the Golden Pavement" J iv.113. -- gadha (˚gata? Kern Toev.) in phrase ˚hetu, by inner reason or by reason of its intensity PvA 10; VvA 12. -- jana "the inside people", i. e. people belonging to the house, the family (= Lat. familia) D iii.61 (opp. to servants); A i.152; J vi.301; DA i.300. -- jāla the inside of the net, the net DhA iv.41. -- jālikata "in -- netted", gone into the net D i.45; DA i.127. -- nijjhāna inner conflagration PvA 18. -- nimugga altogether immersed D i.75; A iii.26. -- parisoka inner grief Ps i.38. -- pura = antepura J i.262. -- mano "turning ones mind inside", thoughtful, melancholy Vin iii.19. -- bhavika being inside Miln 95. -- rukkhatā being among trees J i.7. -- vasati to inhabit, live within S iv.136. -- vaḷañjanaka (parijana) indoorpeople J v.118. -- vassa the rainy season (lit. the interval of the r. s.) VvA 66. -- vihāra the inside of the V. DhA i.50 (˚âbhimukhī turning towards etc.), -- samorodha barricading within Dhs 1157 (so read for anta˚, cp. Dhs. trsl. 311). -- soka inner grief Ps i.38.
Andu [cp. Sk. andu, andū & anduka] a chain, fetter Vin i.108 = iii.249 (tiṇ˚); D i.245; J i.21 (˚ghara prisonhouse); DhA iv.54 (˚bandhana).
Andha (adj.) [Vedic andha, Lat. andabata (see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.), other etym. doubtful] 1. (lit.) blind, blinded, blindfolded J i.216 (dhūm˚); Pv iv.148; PvA 3. -- dark, dull, blinding M iii.151 (˚andhaŋ adv. dulled); Sn 669 (Ep. of timisa, like Vedic andhaŋ tamaḥ); DhA ii.49 (˚vana dark forest). -- 2. (fig.) mentally blinded, dull of mind, foolish, not seeing D i.191 (+ acakkhuka), 239 (˚veṇi, reading & meaning uncertain); A i.128; Th 2, 394 (= bāla ThA 258). See cpds. ˚karaṇa, ˚kāra, ˚bāla, ˚bhūta.
-- ākula blinded, foolish Vv 849 (= paññācakkhuno abhāvena VvA 337). -- karaṇa blinding, making blind, causing bewilderment (fig.), confusing It 82 (+ acakkhukaraṇa); Miln 113 (pañha, + gambhīra). -- kāra blindness (lit. & fig), darkness, dullness, bewilderment Vin i.16; D ii.12; A i.56; ii.54; iii.233; J iii.188; Th 1, 1034; Dh 146; Sn 763; Vv 214 (= avijj˚ VvA 106); Pug 30; Dhs 617; DA i.228; VvA 51, 53, 116, 161; PvA 6; Sdhp 14, 280. -- tamo deep darkness (lit. & fig.) S v.443; It 84 (v. l.; T. andhaŋ tamaŋ); J vi.247. -- bāla blinded by folly, foolish, dull of mind, silly J i.246, 262; vi.337; DhA ii.43, 89; iii.179; VvA 67; PvA 4, 264. -- bhūta blinded (fig.), mentally blind, not knowing, ignorant S iv.21; A ii.72; J vi.139 (spelled ˚būta); Dh 59, 174 (= paññā -- cakkhuno abhāvena DhA iii.175). -- vesa "blind form", disguise J iii.418.
Andhaka [fr. andha] "blind fly", i. e. dark or yellow fly or gad -- fly Sn 20 (= kāṇa -- makkhikānaŋ adhivacanaŋ SnA 33).
Anna (nt.) [Vedic anna, orig. pp. of adati to eat] "eating", food, esp. boiled rice, but includes all that is eaten as food, viz. odana, kummāsa, sattu, maccha, maŋsa (rice, gruel, flour, fish, meat) Nd1 372 = 495. Anna is spelt aṇṇa in combns aparɔ aṇṇa and pubbɔ aṇṇa. Under dhañña (Nd2 314) are distinguished 2 kinds, viz. raw, natural cereals (pubbɔ aṇṇaŋ: sāli, vīhi, yava, godhūma, kangu, varaka, kudrūsaka) and boiled, prepared food (aparɔ aṇṇaŋ: sūpeyya curry). SnA 378 (on Sn 403) expls. anna by yāgubhattâdi. -- D i.7; A i.107, 132; ii.70, 85, 203; Sn 82, 240, 403, 924; J iii.190; Pug 51; Sdhp 106, 214.
-- āpa food & water Sdhp 100. -- da giving food Sn 297. -- pāna food & water, eating & drinking, to eat & to drink Sn 485, 487; Pv i.52, 82; KhA 207, 209; PvA 7, 8, 30, 31, 43.
Annaya in dur˚ see anvaya.
Anvakāsi 3rd sg. aor. of anukassati 2: drew out, removed, threw down Th 1, 869 (= khipi, chaḍḍesi C.).
Anvakkhara (adj.) [anu + akkhara] "according to the syl- table", syll. after syll., also a mode of reciting by syllables Vin iv.15, cp. 355. Cp. anupadaŋ.
Anvagā 3rd sg. aor. of anugacchati Mhvs 7, 10. Also in assim. form annagā J v.258.
Anvagū 3rd pl. aor. of anugacchati S i.39; Sn 586.
Anvaḍḍhamāsaŋ (adv.) [anu + aḍḍha + māsa] every fort- night, twice a month M ii.8; Vin iv.315 (= anuposathikaŋ); DhA i.162; ii.25.
Anvattha (adj.) [anu + attha] according to the sense, ans- wering to the matter, having scnse ThA 6 (˚saññābhāva).
Anvadeva (adv.) [anva -- d -- eva with euphonic d.; like samma- d -- eva corresponding to Sk. anvag -- eva] behind, after, later D i.172; M iii.172; S v.1 (spelt anudeva); A i.11; v. 214; It 34.
Anvaya (n. -- adj.) [Vedic anvaya in diff. meaning; fr. anu + i, see anveti & anvāya] 1. (n.) conformity, accordance D ii. 83 = iii.100; M i.69 (dhamm˚ logical conclusion of); S ii.58; D iii.226 (anvaye ñāṇaŋ); Pv ii.113 (tassa kammassa anvāya, v. l. BB anvaya & anvāya; accordingly, according to = paccayā PvA 147); PvA 228 (anvayato, adv. in accordance). -- 2. (adj.) following, having the same course, behaving according to, consequential, in conformity with ( -- ˚) D i.46 (tad˚); M i.238 (kāyo citt˚ acting in conformity to the mind, obeying the mind); Sn 254 (an˚ inconsistent); It 79 (tass˚). -- dur˚ spelt durannaya conforming with difficulty, hard to manage or to find out Dh 92 (gati = na sakkā paññāpetuŋ DhA ii.173); Sn 243, 251 (= duviññāpaya SnA 287 dunneyya ibid. 293).
Anvayatā (f.) [abstr. to anvaya] conformity, accordance M i.500 (kāy˚ giving in to the body).
Anvahaŋ (adv.) [anu + aha] every day, daily Dāvs iv.8.
Anvāgacchati [anu + ā + gacchati] 1. to go along after, to follow, run after, pursue; aor. anvāgacchi Pv. iv.56 (= anubandhi PvA 260). -- 2. to come back again J i.454 (ger. ˚gantvāna). -- pp. anvāgata (q. v.).
Anvāgata [pp. of anvāgacchati] having pursued, attained; endowed with Th 1, 63; J iv.385; v.4.
Anvādisati [anu + ā + disati] to advise, dedicate, assign; imper. ˚disāhi Pv ii.26 (= uddissa dehi PvA 80); iii.28 (= ādisa PvA 181).
Anvādhika (adj.) [derivation uncertain] a tailoring term. Only at Vin i.297. Rendered (Vinaya Texts ii.232) by ʻ half and half ʼ; that is a patchwork, half of new material, half of old. Bdhgh's note (see the text, p. 392) adds that the new material must be cut up.
Anvāmaddati [anu + ā + maddati] to squeeze, wring J iii. 481 (galakaŋ anvāmaddi wrung his neck; vv. ll. anvānumaṭṭi & anvāvamaddi; C. gīvaŋ maddi).
Anvāya [ger. of anveti; cp. anvaya] undergoing, experiencing, attaining; as prep. (c. acc.) in consequence of, through, after D i.13 (ātappaŋ by means of self -- sacrifice), 97 (saŋvāsaŋ as a result of their cohabitation); J i.56 (buddhiŋ), 127 (piyasaŋvāsaŋ), 148 (gabbhaparipākaŋ). Often in phrase vuddhiŋ anvāya growing up, e. g. J i.278; iii. 126; DhA ii.87.
Anvāyika (adj. -- n.) [fr. anvāya] following; one who follows, a companion D iii.169; Nd2 59; J iii.348.
Anvārohati [anu + ā + rohati] to go up to, visit, ascend J iv.465 (aor. anvāruhi).
Anvāvassa at J v.317 should be read with v. l. BB as anovassa absence of rain.
Anvāviṭṭha [pp. of anvāvisati] possessed (by evil spirits) S i.114.
Anvāvisati [anu + ā + visati] to go into, to take posses- sion of, to visit M i.326; S i.67; Miln 156. -- pp. anvāviṭṭha (q. v.). Cp. adhimuccati.
Anvāsatta [pp. of anu + ā + sañj, cp. anusatta = Sk. anusakta] clung on to, befallen by (instr.), attached to A iv.356 (v. l. anvāhata), cp. Ud 35 (anvāsanna q. v.). See also foll.
Anvāsattatā (f.) [abstr. fr. anvāsatta] being attacked by, falling a prey to (instr.), attachment to DhA i.287 (in same context as anvāsatta A iv.356 & anvāsanna Ud 35).
Anvāsanna [pp. of anu + ā + sad] endowed with, pos- sessed of, attacked by, Ud 35 (doubtfull; v. l. ajjhāpanna), = A iv.356 which has anvāsatta.
Anvāssavati [anu + ā + savati, sru] to stream into, to attack, befall D i.70; A iii.99; Pug 20, 58.
Anvāhata [pp. of anu + ā + han] struck, beaten; per- plexed Dh 39 (˚cetasa).
Anvāhiṇḍati [anu + ā + hiṇḍati] to wander to (acc.) A iv.374, 376 [BSk. same, e. g. Divy 68 etc.].
Anveti [cp. anu + eti, from i] to follow, approach, go with Sn 1103 (= anugacchati anvāyiko hoti Nd2 59); Dh 1 (= kāyikaŋ . . . dukkhaŋ anugacchati DhA i.24), 2, 71, 124; perhaps at Pv ii.620 (with v. l. BB at PvA 99) for anvesi (see anvesati; expld. by anudesi = was anxious for, helped, instructed).
Anvesa [from next] seeking, searching, investigation, M i.140 (˚ŋ nɔ âdhigacchanti do not find).
Anvesati [anu + esati] to look, for search, seek S i.112 (ppr. anvesaŋ = pariyesamāna C.); Cp iii.117 (ppr. anvesanto). -- aor. anvesi [Sk. anveṣi fr. icchati] Pv ii.620 (? perhaps better with v. l. PvA 99 as anventi of anveti).
Anvesin [anu -- esin] (adj.) striving after, seeking, wishing for Sn 965 (kusala˚).
Anha [Vedic ahan] see pubbanha, majjhanha, sāyanha. Cp. aha.
Apa˚ [Vedic apa; Idg. *apo = Gr. a)po/, Av. apa, Lat. ab from *ap (cp. aperio); Goth. af, Ger. ab, Ags. E. of. <-> A compar. form fr. apa is apara "further away"] Well-defined directional prefix, meaning "away from, off". Usually as base -- prefix (except with ā), & very seldom in compn. with other modifying prefixes (like sam, abhi etc.). <-> 1. apa = Vedic apa (Idg. *apo): apeti to go away = Gr. a)/peimi, Lat. abeo, Goth. afiddja; apeta gone away, rid; ˚kaḍḍhati to draw away, remove; ˚kamati walk away; ˚gacchati go away; ˚nidhāti put away (= a)potiqhmi, abdo); ˚nudati push away; ˚neti lead away; ˚vattati turn away (= āverto); ˚sakkati step aside; ˚harati take away. <-> 2. apa = Vedic ava (Idg. *aue; see ava for details). There exists a widespread confusion between the two preps. apa & ava, favoured both by semantic (apa = away, ava = down, cp. E. off) & phonetic affinity (p softened to b, esp. in BB Mss., & then to v, as b > v is frequent, e. g. bya˚ > vya˚ etc.). Thus we find in Pāli apa where Vedic and later literary Sk. have ava in the foll. instances: apakanti, ˚kassati, ˚kirati, ˚gata, ˚cāra, ˚jhāyati, ˚thaṭa, ˚dāna, ˚dhāreti, ˚nata, ˚nāmeti, ˚nīta, ˚lekhana, ˚loketi, ˚vadati.
Apakaḍḍhati [apa + kaḍḍhati, cp. Sk. apa -- karṣati] to draw away, take off, remove D i.180; iii.127; DhA ii.86. <-> Caus. apakaḍḍhāpeti J i.342; iv.415; Miln 34. -- Cp. apakassati; & see pakattheti.
Apakata [pp. of apakaroti] put off, done away, in ājīvik âpakata being without a living M i.463 (the usual phrase being ˚apagata); Miln 279 (id.). At It 89 the reading of same phrase is ājīvikā pakatā (v. l. ā˚ vakatā).
Apakataññu (adj.) [a + pa + kataññu] ungrateful Vin ii.199.
Apakantati [apa + kantati, Sk. ava + kṛntati] to cut off Th 2, 217 (gale = gīvaŋ chindati ThA 178; Kern, Toev. corrects to kabale a.).
Apakaroti [apa + karoti, cp. Sk. apakaroti & apakṛta in same meaning] to throw away, put off; hurt, offend, slight; possibly in reading T. apakiritūna at Th 2, 447 (q. v.). -- pp. apakata (q. v.). Cp. apakāra.
Apakassati [Sk. apa -- & ava -- kaṛṣati, cp. apakaḍḍhati] to throw away, remove Sn 281 (v.l. BB & SnA ava˚; expld. by niddhamati & nikkaḍḍhati SnA 311). -- ger. apakassa Sn ii.198 = Miln 389. See also apakāsati.
Apakāra & ˚ka [cf. Sk. apakāra & apakaroti] injury, mischief; one who injures or offends DhA iii.63; Sdhp 283.
Apakāsati at Vin ii.204 is to be read as apakassati and interpreted as "draw away, distract, bring about a split or dissension (of the Sangha)". The v. l. on p. 325 justifies the correction (apakassati) as well as Bdhgh's expln. "parisaŋ ākaḍḍhanti". -- Cp. A iii.145 & see avapakāsati. The reading at the id. p. at A v.74 is avakassati (combd. w. vavakassati, where Vin ii.204 has avapakāsati), which is much to be preferred (see vavakassati).
Apakiritūna at Th 2, 447 T (reading of C. is abhi˚) is explained ThA 271 to mean apakiritvā chaḍḍetvā throwing away, slighting, offending. The correct etym = Sk. avakirati (ava + kṛ2 to strew, cast out) in sense "to cast off, reject", to which also belongs kirāta in meaning "cast off" i. e. man of a so -- called low tribe. See also avakirati 2.
Apakkamati [cp. Sk. apakramati, apa + kram] to go away, depart, go to one side J iii.27; Sdhp 294. -- aor. apakkami Pv iv.75; ger. apakkamitvā PvA 43, 124, & apakkamma Pv ii.928.
Apagacchati [apa + gam] to go away, turn aside DhA i.401 (˚gantvā). -- pp. apagata (q. v.).
Apagata [pp. of apagacchati] 1. gone, gone away from (c. abl.), removed; deceased, departed It 112; PvA 39, 63 (= peta), 64 (= gata). -- 2. (˚ -- ) freq. as prefix, meaning without, lit. having lost, removed from; free from Vin ii.129 (˚gabbhā having lost her foetus, having a miscarriage); J i.61 (˚vattha without clothes); PvA 38 (˚soka free from grief), 47 (˚lajja not shy), 219 (˚viññāṇa without feeling). -- Cp. apakata.
Apagabbha (adj.) [a + pa + gabbha] not entering another womb, i. e. not destined to another rebirth Vin iii.3.
Apagama [Sk. apagama] going away, disappearance Sdhp 508.
Apanga (apānga) [Sk. apānga] the outer corner of the eye J iii.419 (asitâpangin black -- eyed); iv.219 (bahi˚). Spelt avanga at Vin ii.267, where the phrase avangaŋ karoti, i. e. expld. by Bdhgh. ibid p. 327 as "avangadese adhomukhaŋ lekhaŋ karonti". According to Kern, Toev. 20, Bdhgh's expln is not quite correct, since avanga stands here in the meaning of "a coloured mark upon the body" (cp. PW. apānga).
Apacaya [fr. apa + ci] falling off, diminution (opp. ācaya gathering, heaping up), unmaking, esp. loss (of wordliness), decrease (of possibility of rebirth Vin ii.2 = iii.21 = iv.213; cp. J iii.342; S ii.95 (kāyassa ācayo pi apacayo pi); A iv.280 = Vin ii.259 (opp. ācaya); J iii.342 (sekho ˚ena na tappati); Vbh 106, 319, 326, 330.
-- gāmin going towards decrease, "making for the undoing of rebirth" (Dhs trsl. 82) A v.243, 277; Dhs 277, 339, 505, 1014; Vbh 12, 16 sq.; Nett 87 (cp. Kvu 156).
Apacāyati [fr. apa -- ci, cp. cināti & cayati, with diff. meaning in Sk.; better expld. perhaps as denom. fr. *apacāya in meaning of apacāyana, cp. apacita] to honour, respect, pay reverence D i.91 (pūjeti +); J iii.82. <-> Pot. apace (for apaceyya, may be taken to apacināti 2) A iv.245; ThA 72 (here to apacināti 1). -- pp. apacita (q. v.).
Apacāyana (nt.) [abstr. fr. apa + cāy, which is itself a der. fr. ci, cināti] honouring, honour, worship, reverence J i.220; v.326; DA i.256 (˚kamma); VvA 24 (˚ŋ karoti = añjalikaŋ karoti); PvA 104 (˚kara, adj.), 128 (+ paricariya).
Apacāyika (adj.) [fr. *apacāya, cp. B.Sk. apacāyaka MVastu i.198; Divy 293] honouring, respecting J iv.94 (vaddha˚, cp. vaddhâpacāyin); Pv ii.7 8 (jeṭṭha˚); iv.324 (id.). In B.Sk. the corresp. phrase is jyeṣṭhâpacayaka.
Apacāyin (adj.) [fr. *apacāya; cp. apacāyika] honouring, paying homage, revering Sn 325 (vaddha˚ = vaddhānaŋ apaciti karaṇena SnA 332) = Dh 109; J i.47, 132, 201; ii.299; v.325; Miln 206; Sdhp 549.
Apacāra [fr. apa + car, cp. Sk. apa & abhi -- carati] falling off, fault, wrong doing J vi.375.
Apacita [pp. of apacayati or apacināti] honoured, wors- hipped, esteemed Th 1, 186; J ii.169; iv.75; Vv 510 (= pūjita VvA 39); 3511 (cp. VvA 164); Miln 21.
Apaciti (f.) [Vedic apaciti in diff. meaning, viz. expiation] honour, respect, esteem, reverence Th 1, 589; J i.220; ii.435; iii.82; iv.308; vi.88; Miln 180, 234 (˚ŋ karoti), 377 (pūjana +); SnA 332 (˚karaṇa). Cp. apacāyana.
Apacināti [apa + cināti] 1. [in meaning of Sk. apacīyate cp. P. upaciyyati Pass. of upacināti] to get rid of, do away with, (cp. apacaya), diminish, make less S iii.89 (opp. ācināti); Th 1, 807; J iv.172 (apacinethɔ eva kāmāni = viddhaŋseyyatha C.). Here belong prob. aor. 3rd pl. apaciyiŋsu (to be read for upacciŋsu) at J vi. 187 (akkhīni a. "the eyes gave out") and Pot. pres. apace ThA 72 (on v.40). -- 2. [= apacayati] to honour, esteem; observe, guard Vin i.264 (apacinayamāna cīvaraŋ (?) v. l apacitiyamāna; trsl. guarding his claim is, Vin Texts); M i.324 (see detail under apaviṇāti) Th 1, 186 (grd. apacineyya to be honoured); J v.339 (anapacinanto for T. anupacinanto, v. l. anapavinati). -- pp. apacita (q.v.).
Apacca [Vedic apatya nt.; der. fr. apa] offspring, child D i.90 (bandhupāda˚ cp. muṇḍaka), 103 (id.); S i.69 (an˚) Sn 991; DA i.254.
Apaccakkha (adj.) [a + paṭi + akkha] unseen; in instr. f. apaccakkhāya as adv. without being seen, not by direct evidence Miln 46 sq.
Apacchapurima (adj.) [a + paccha + purima] "neither after nor before", i. e. at the same time, simultaneous J iii.295.
Apajaha (adj.) [a + pajaha] not giving up, greedy, miserly A iii.76 (v. l. apānuta; C. expls. (a)vaḍḍhinissita mānatthaddha).
Apajita (nt.) [pp. of apa + ji] defeat Dh. 105.
Apajjhāyati [apa + jhāyati1; cp. Sk. abhi -- dhyāyati] to muse, meditate, ponder, consider M i.334 (nijjhāyati +); iii.14 (id.).
Apaññaka (adj.) = apañña, ignorant Dpvs vi.29.
Apaṭṭhapeti [Caus. fr. apa -- tiṭṭhati, cp. Sk. apa + sthā to stand aloof] to put aside, leave out, neglect J iv.308; v.236.
Apaṇṇaka (adj.) [a + paṇṇaka; see paṇṇaka; Weber Ind. Str. iii.150 & Kuhn, Beitr. p. 53 take it as *a -- praśna -- ka] certain, true, absolute M i.401, 411; A v.85, 294, 296; J i.104 (where expld as ekaŋsika aviruddha niyyānika).
Apanṇṇakatā (f.) [abstr. of apaṇṇaka] certainty, absolu- teness S iv.351 sq.
Apatacchika only in khārāpatācch˚ (q. v.) a kind of torture.
Apattha1 (adj.) [Sk. apāsta, pp. of apa + as2] thrown away Dh 149 (= chaḍḍita DhA iii.112).
Apattha2 2nd pl. pret. of pāpunāti (q. v.).
Apatthaṭa = avatthaṭa covered Th 1, 759.
Apatthita & Apatthiya see pattheti.
Apadāna (nt.) 1. [= Sk. apadāna] removing, breaking off, D iii.88. -- 2. [= Sk. avadāna cp. ovāda] advice, admonition, instruction, morals Vin ii.4 (an˚ not taking advice), 7 (id.) M i.96; A v.337 sq. (saddhā˚) Th 1, 47. -- 3. legend, life history. In the title Mahāpadāna suttanta it refers to the 7 Buddhas. In the title Apadānaŋ, that is ʻ the stories ʼ, it refers almost exclusively to Arahants. The other, (older), connotation seems to have afterwards died out. See Dialogues ii.3. -- Cp. also pariyāpadāna.
Apadisa [fr apa + diś] reference, testimony, witness DhA ii.39.
Apadisati [apa + disati] to call to witness, to refer to, to quote Vin iii.159; J i.215; iii.234; iv.203; Miln 270; DhA ii.39; Nett 93.
Apadesa [cp. Sk. apadeśa] 1. reason, cause, argument M i.287 (an˚). -- 2. statement, designation PvA 8. -- 3. pretext J iii.60; iv.13; PvA 154. Thus also apadesaka J vi.179.
Apadhāreti [Caus. of apa + dhṛ, cp. Sk. ava -- dhārayati, but also BSk. apadhārayati Divy 231] to observe, request, ask ThA 16.
Apanata [pp. of apanamati] "bent away", drawn aside, in ster. combn. abhinata + apanata ("strained forth & strained aside" Mrs Rh. D. Kindred S. p. 39) M i.386; S i.28.
Apanamati [semantically doubtful] to go away Sn 1102 (apanamissati, v. l. apalām˚ & apagam˚; expld at Nd2 60 by vajissati pakkhamissati etc. -- pp. apanata (q. v.) <-> Caus. apanāmeti.
Apanāmeti [Caus. fr. apanamati] 1. to take away, remove M i.96 = A i.198 (kathaŋ bahiddhā a. carry outside); Kh viii.4 (= aññaŋ ṭhānaŋ gameti KhA 220). -- 2. [= Sk. ava -- namati] to bend down, lower, put down Vin ii.208 (chattaŋ); S i.226 (id.); J ii.287 (id., v. l. apanetvā); D i.126 (hatthaŋ, for salute).
Apanidahati (& apanidheti) [apa + ni + dhā, cp. Vedic apadhā hiding -- place; Sk. apadadhāti = Gr. a)poti(qhmi = Lat. abdo "do away"] to hide, conceal Vin iv.123 (˚dheti, ˚dheyya, ˚dhessati); PvA 215 (˚dhāya ger.). -- pp. apanihita. -- Caus. apanidhāpeti to induce somebody to conceal Vin iv.123.
Apanihita [pp. of apanidahati] concealed, in abstr. ˚ttaŋ (nt.) hiding, concealing, theft PvA 216.
Apanīta [Sk. apanīta, pp. of apa + nī, see apaneti & cp. also onīta = apanīta] taken away or off. removed, dispelled PvA 39.
Apanudati & Apanudeti [apa + nud, cp. Vedic apanudati & Caus. Sk. apanodayati] to push or drive away, remove, dispel; pres. apanudeti Miln 38. aor. apānudi Pv i.86 (= apanesi PvA 41); ii.314 (= avahari aggahesi PvA 86); Dāvs i.8. ger. apanujja D ii.223. See also der. apanudana.
Apanudana & Apanūdana (nt.) [Sk. apanodana, fr. apa- nudati] taking or driving away, removal Vin ii.148 = J i.94 (dukkha˚); Sn 252 (id.); PvA 114 (id.).
Apanuditar [n. ag. fr. apanudati, Sk. apanoditṛ] remover, dispeller D iii.148.
Apaneti [apa + nī] to lead away, take or put away, remove J i.62, 138; ii.4, 155 (aor. apānayi) iii.26; Miln 188, 259, 413; PvA 41, 74, 198 (= harati) Sdhp 63. Pass. apanīyati S i.176. -- pp. apanīta (q. v.).
Apapibati [apa + pibati] to drink from something J ii.126 (aor. apāpāsi).
Apabbūhati & Apabyūhati [apa + vi + ūh] to push off, remove, scrape away A iii.187 (apaviyūhitvā, vv. ll. ˚bbūhitvā); J i.265 (paŋsuŋ). -- Caus. ˚byūhāpeti to make remove or brush J iv.349 (paŋsuŋ).
Apabyāma see apavyāma.
Apamāra [Sk. apasmāra] epilepsy Vin i.93. Cp. apasmāra.
Apamārika (adj.) [cp. Sk. apasmārin] epileptic Vin iv.8, 10, 11.
Apayāti [Sk. apayāti, apa + yā] to go away J vi.183 (apāyāti metri causa; expld. by C. as apagacchati palāyati). -- Caus. apayāpeti [Sk. apayāpayati] to make go, drive away, dismiss M iii.176; S ii.119.
Apayāna (nt.) [Sk. apayāna, fr. apayāti] going away, retreat D i.9 (opp. upa˚); DA i.95.
Apara (adj.) [Vedic apara, der. fr. apa with compar. suffix -- ra = Idg. *aporos "further away, second"; cp. Gr. a)pwte/rw farther, Lat. aprilis the second month (after March, i. e. April). Goth. afar = after] another, i. e. additional, following, next, second (with pron. inflexion, i. e. nom. pl. apare) D iii.190 (˚pajā another, i. e. future generation); Sn 791, 1089 (nɔ); J i.59 (aparaŋ divasaŋ on some day following); iii.51 (apare tayo sahāyā "other friends three", i. e. three friends, cp. similarly Fr. nous autres Franc˚ais); iv.3 (dīpa); PvA 81 (˚divase on another day), 226; with other part. like aparo pi D iii 128. -- nt. aparaŋ what follows i. e. future state, consequence; future Vin i.35 (nâparaŋ nothing more); Sn 1092 (much the same as punabbhava, cp. Nd2 61). Cases adverbially; aparaŋ (acc.) further, besides, also J i.256; iii.278; often with other part. like athâparaŋ & further, moreover Sn 974; and puna cɔ aparaŋ It 100; Miln 418 (so read for puna ca paraŋ) and passim; aparam pi Vism 9. -- aparena in future D iii.201. -- Repeated (reduplicative formation) aparâparaŋ (local) to & fro J i.265, 278; PvA 198; (temporal) again and again, off & on J ii.377; Miln 132 VvA 271; PvA 176 (= punappunaŋ).
-- anta (aparanta) = aparaŋ, with anta in same function as in cpds. vananta (see anta1 5): (a.) further away, westward J v.471; Miln 292 (janapada). (b.) future D i.30 (˚kappika, cp. DA i.118); M ii.228 (˚ânudiṭṭhi -- thought of the future); S iii.46 (id.). -- âpariya (fr. aparâpara) ever -- following, successive, continuous, everlasting; used with ref. to kamma J v.106; Miln 108. -- bhāga the future, lit. a later part of time, only in loc. aparabhāge at a future date, later on J i.34, 262; iv.1; VvA 66.
Aparajju (adv.) [Sk. apare -- dyus] on the foll. day Vin ii.167; S i.186; Miln 48.
Aparajjhati [Sk. aparādhyate, apa + rādh] to sin or offend against (c. loc.) Vin ii.78 = iii.161; J v.68; vi.367; Miln 189; PvA 263. -- pp. aparaddha & aparādhita (q. v.).
Aparaṇṇa (nt.) [apara + aṇṇa = anna] "the other kind of cereal", prepared or cooked cereals, pulse etc. Opp. to pubbaṇṇa the unprepared or raw corn (= āmakadhañña Vin iv.265; Vin iii.151 (pubb˚ +); iv.265, 267; A iv. 108, 112 (tila -- mugga -- māsā˚; opp. sāli -- yavaka etc.); Nd2 314 (aparaṇṇaŋ nāma sūpeyyaŋ); J v.406 (˚jā = hareṇukā, pea); Miln 106 (pubbaṇṇa˚). See also dhañña & harita.
Aparaddha [pp. of aparajjhati] missed (c. acc.), gone wrong, failed, sinned (against = loc.) D i.91, 103, 180; S i.103 (suddhimaggaŋ); Th 1, 78; Sn 891 (suddhiŋ = viraddha khalita Nd1 300); PvA 195.
Aparapaccaya (adj.) [a + para + paccaya] not dependent or relying on others Vin i.12 (vesārajja -- ppatta +); D i.110 (id.); M ii 41; M i.491; S iii.83; DA i.278 (= nâssa paro paccayo).
Aparājita (adj.) [Vedic aparājita; a + parājita] unconquered Sn 269; J i.71, 165.
Aparādha [fr. apa + rādh] sin, fault, offence, guilt J i.264 (nir˚); iii.394; iv.495; VvA 69; PvA 87, 116.
Aparādhika (adj.) [fr. aparādha, cp. Sk. aparādhin] guilty, offending, criminal J ii.117 (vāja˚); Miln 149 (issara˚), 189 (aparādhikatā).
Aparādhita [pp. of aparādheti, Caus. of apa + rādh; cp. aparaddha] transgressed, sinned, failing J v.26 (so read for aparadhɔ ito).
Aparāyin (adj.) [a + parāyin, cp. parāyana] having no sup- port J iii.386 (f. ˚ī; C. appatiṭṭhā appaṭisaraṇā).
Apalāpin see apalāsin [Sk. apalāpin "denying, concealing" different].
Apalāḷeti [apa + lāḷeti] to draw over to Vin i.85.
Apalāyin (adj.) [a + palāyin] not running away, steadfast, brave, fearless Nd2 13 (abhīru anutrāsin apalāyin as expln. of acchambhin and vīra); J iv.296; v.4 (where C. gives variant "apalāpinī ti pi pāṭho", which latter has v. l. apalāsinī & is expld. by C. as palāpa -- rahite anavajjasarīre p. 5). See also apalāsin.
Apalāsin (adj.) [apaḷāsin; but spelling altogether uncertain. There seems to exist a confusion between the forms apalāyin, apalāpin & apalāsin, owing to freq. miswriting of s, y, p in MSS. (cp. Nd2 introd. p. xix.). We should be inclined to give apalāsin, as the lectio difficilior, the preference. The expln. at Pug 22 as "yassa puggalassa ayaŋ paḷāso pahīno ayaŋ vuccati puggalo apaḷāsī" does not help us to clear up the etym. nor the vv. ll.] either "not neglectful, pure, clean" (= apalāpin fr. palāsa chaff, cp. apalāyin at J v.4), or "not selfish, not hard, generous" (as inferred from combn. with amakkhin & amaccharin), or "brave, fearless, energetic" (= apalāyin) D iii.47, cp. Pug 22. See palāsin.
Apalibuddha & Apalibodha [a + palibuddha, pp. of pari + bṛh, see palibujjhati] unobstructed, unhindered, free J iii. 381 (˚bodha); Miln 388; DhA iii.198.
Apalekhana (nt.) [apa + lekhana from likh in meaning of lih, corresponding to Sk. ava -- lehana] licking off, in cpd. hatthâpalekhana "hand -- licking" (i. e. licking one's hand after a meal, the practice of certain ascetics) M 177 (with v. l. hatthâvalekhana M i.535; Trenckner compares BSk. hastapralehaka Lal. Vist. 312 & hastâvalehaka ibid. 323), 412; Pug 55 (expld. at Pug A 231 as hatthe piṇḍamhe niṭṭhite jivhāya hatthaŋ apalekhati).
Apalekhati [apa + lekhati in meaning of Sk. avalihati] to lick off Pug A 231 (hatthaŋ).
Apalepa in "so ɔpalepa patito jarāgharo" at Th 2, 270 is to be read as "so palepa˚". Morris's interpret. J.P.T.S. 1886, 126 therefore superfluous.
Apalokana (nt.) [fr. apaloketi] permission, leave, in ˚kamma proposal of a resolution, obtaining leave (see kamma i.3) Vin ii.89; iv.152.
Apalokita [pp. of apaloketi; Sk. avalokita] 1. asked per- mission, consulted S iii.5. -- 2. (nt.) permission, consent, M i.337 (Nāgâpalokitaŋ apalokesi). -- 3. (nt.) an Ep. of Nibbāna S iv.370.
Apalokin (adj.) [Sk. avalokin] "looking before oneself", looking at, cautious Miln 398.
Apaloketi [BSk. ava -- lokayati] 1. to look ahead, to look before, to be cautious, to look after M i.557 (v. l. for apaciṇāti, where J v.339 C. has avaloketi); Miln 398. <-> 2. to look up to, to obtain permission from (acc.), to get leave, to give notice of Vin iii.10, 11; iv.226 (anapaloketvā = anāpucchā), 267 (+ āpucchitvā); M i.337; S iii.95 (bhikkhusanghaŋ anapaloketvā without informing the Sangha); J vi.298 (vājānaŋ); DhA i.67. -- pp. apalokita (q. v.). See also apalokana & ˚lokin.
Apavagga [Sk. apavarga] completion, end, final delivery, Nibbāna; in phrase saggâpavagga Dāvs ii.62; iii.75.
Apavattati [apa + vṛt, cp. Lat. āverto] to turn away or aside, to go away J iv.347 (v. l. apasakkati).
Apavadati [apa + vadati] to reproach, reprove, reject, despise D i.122 (= paṭikkhipati DA i.290); S v.118 (+ paṭikkosati).
Apavahati [apa + vahati] to carry or drive away; Caus. apavāheti to remove, give up Miln 324 (kaddamaŋ).
Apaviṭṭha at Pv iii 82 is to be read apaviddha (q. v.).
Apaviṇāti is probably misreading for apaciṇāti (see apac˚ 2). As v. l. at J v.339 (anapavinanto) for T. anupacinanto (expld. by avaloketi C.). Other vv. ll. are anuvi˚ & apavī˚; meaning "not paying attention". The positive form we find as apavīṇati "to take care of, to pay attention to" (c. acc.) at M i.324, where Trenckner unwarrantedly assumes a special root veṇ (see Notes p. 781), but the vv. ll. to this passage (see M. i.557) with apavīṇāti and apacinati confirm the reading apaciṇāti, as does the gloss apaloketi.
Apaviddha [pp. of apavijjhati, Vedic apa + vyadh] thrown away, rejected, discarded, removed S i.202; iii.143; Sn 200 (susānasmiŋ = chaḍḍita SnA 250); Th 1, 635 = Dh 292 (= chaḍḍita DhA iii.452); Pv iii.82 (susānasmiŋ so read for T. apaviṭṭha); J i.255; iii.426; yi.90 (= chaḍḍita C.). Sdhp 366.
Apaviyūhati see appabbūhati.
Apavīṇati see apaviṇāti (= apaciṇāti).
Apavyāma [apa + vyāma] disrespect, neglect, in phrase apayvāmato (apaby˚) karoti to treat disrespectfully, to insult, defile S i.226 (v. l. abyāmato; C. expls. apabyāmato karitvā abyāmato katvā); Kvu 472 (vv. ll. asabyākato, abyāto, apabyāto; Kvu trsl. 270 n. 1 remarks: "B. trsl.: abyāsakato. The Burmese scholar U. Pandi, suggests we should read apabyākato, by which he understands blasphemously"; it is here combd. with niṭṭhubhati, as at DhA ii.36); DhA ii.36 ("want of forbearance" Ed.; doubtful reading; vv. ll. appabyāyakamma & apasāma). For further detail see apasavya.
Apasakkati [apa + sakkati] to go away, to go aside J iv.347 (v. l. for apavattati); VvA 101; PvA 265 (aor. ˚sakki = apakkami).
Apasavya (adj.) [apa + savya] right (i. e. not left), con- trary Ud 50 (T. has niṭṭhubhitvā abyāmato karitvā; vv. ll. are apabhyāmāto, abhyāmato & C. apasabyāmato), where C. expls. apasabyāmato karitvā by apasabyaŋ katvā, "which latter corresponds in form but not in meaning to Sk. apasavyaŋ karoti to go on the right side" (Morris J P T S. 1886, 127). -- See apavyāma.
Apasāda [fr. apa + sad] putting down, blame, dispara- gement M iii.230.
Apasādita [pp. of apasādeti] blamed, reproached, disparaged S ii.219; SnA 541.
Apasādeti [Caus. of apa + sad] 1. to refuse, decline Vin iv.213, 263; J v.417 (= uyyojeti). -- 2. to depreciate, blame, disparage Vin iii.101; M iii.230 (opp. ussādeti); DA i.160. -- pp. apasādita (q. v.).
Apasmāra [Sk. apasmāra, lit. want of memory, apa + smṛ] epilepsy, convulsion, fit J iv.84. Cp. apamāra.
Apassanto etc. see passati.
Apassaya [cp. Sk. apāśraya, fr. apasseti] 1. support, rest ThA 258. -- 2. bed, bolster, mattress, in kaṇṭak˚ a mattress of thorns, a bolster filled with thorns (as cushion for asceties) M i.78; J i 493; iii.235. -- sâppassaya with a head rest J iv.299.
-- pīṭhaka a chair with a head -- rest J iii.235.
Apassayika (adj.) [fr. apassaya; cp. Sk. apāśrayin -- ˚] reclining on, in kaṇṭaka˚ one who lies on a bed of thorns (see kaṇṭaka) M i.78; J iv.299 (v. l, kaṇḍikesayika); Pug 55.
Apassita [pp. of apasseti] 1. leaning against J ii.69 (tāla- mūlaŋ = nissāya ṭhita C.). -- 2. depending on, trusting in (c. acc. or loc.) Vv 101 (parâgāraŋ = nissita VvA 101); J iv.25 (balamhi = balanissita). See also avassita.
Apasseti [Sk. apāśrayati, apa + ā + sri] to lean against, have a support in (acc.), to depend on. -- 1. (lit.) lean against Vin ii.175 (bhitti apassetabbo the wall to be used as a head -- rest). -- 2. (fig.) mostly in ger. apassāya dependent upon, depending on, trusting in (loc. or acc. or -- ˚) Vin iii.38; J i.214; PvA 189. -- pp. apassita (q. v.). -- See also avasseti.
Apassena (nt.) [fr. apasseti] a rest, support, dependence M iii.127 (˚ka); D iii.224 (cattāri apassenāni); as adj. caturâpassena one who has the fourfold support viz. sankhāyɔ ekaŋ paṭisevati, adhivāseti, parivajjeti, vinodeti A v.30.
-- phalaka (cp. Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 71) a bolsterslab, head -- rest Vin i.48; ii.175, 209.
Apahattar [n. ag. to apaharati] one who takes away or removes, destroyer M i 447 = Kvu 528.
Apahara [Sk. apahāra, fr. apaharati] taking away, stealing, robbing J ii.34.
Apaharaṇa (nt.) = apahara Miln 195.
Apaharati [apa + hṛ] to take away, remove, captivate, rob J iii.315 (aor. apahārayiŋ); Miln 413; DA i.38.
Apākaṭatā (f.) [a + pākaṭa + tā] unfitness Miln 232 (v. l. apākatatta perhaps better).
Apākatika (adj.) [a + pākata + ika] not in proper or natural shape, out of order, disturbed DhA ii.7. Cp. appakāra.
Apācīna (adj.) [Vedic apācīna; cp. apācaḥ & apāka, western; to Lat. opācus, orig. turned away (from the east or the sun) i. e. opposite, dark] westerly, backward, below S iii.84; It 120 (apācīnaŋ used as adv. and taking here the place of adho in combn. with uddhaŋ tiriyaŋ the reading is a conjecture of Windisch's, the vv. ll. are apācinaŋ apācini, apāci & apāminaŋ, C. expls. by heṭṭhā).
Apāṭuka (adj.) [a + pātu + ka (?), acc. to Morris J.P.T.S. 1893, 7 der. fr. apaṭu not sharp, blunt, uncouth. This is hardly correct. See pātur] not open, sly, insidious Th 1, 940 (as v. l. for T. avāṭuka, trsl. by Mrs. Rh. D. as "unscrupulous", by Neumann as "ohne Redlichkeit"). Context suggests a meaning similar to the preceding nekatika, i. e. fraudulent. See also next.
Apāṭubha (adj.) [a + pātu + bha (?), at the only passage changed by Morris J. P. T. S. 1893, 7 to apāṭuka but without reason] = apāṭuka, i. e. sly, fraudulent J iv.184 (in context with nekatika; C. expls. apāṭubhāva dhanuppāda -- virahita, in which latter virahita does not fit in; the pass. seems corrupt).
Apāda (?) [apa + ā + dā] giving away in marriage J iv. 179 (in expln. of anāpāda unmarried; reading should prob. be āpāda = pariggaha).
Apādaka (adj.) [a + pāda + ka] not having feet, footless, creeping, Ep. of snakes & fishes Vin ii.110 = J ii.146 (where see expln.). Spelt apada(ka) at It 87 (v. l. apāda).
Apāna (nt.) breathing out, respiration (so Ch.; no ref. in P. Cauon?) On Prāṇa & Apāna see G. W. Brown in J. Am. Or. Soc. 39, 1919 pp. 104 -- 112. See ānāpāna.
Apānakatta (nt.) [a + pānaka + ttaŋ] "waterless state", living without drinking water J v.243.
Apāpaka (adj.) [a + pāpaka] guiltless, innocent f. ˚ikā Vv 314; 326.
Apāpata (adj.) [apa + ā + pata] falling down into (c. acc.) J iv.234 (aggiŋ).
Apāpurana (nt.) [fr. apāpurati] a key (to a door) Vin i.80; iii.119; M iii.127. See also avāpuraṇa.
Apāpurati & Apāpuṇati [Sk. apāvṛṇoti, apa + ā + vṛ, but Vedic only apa -- vṛṇoti corresponding to Lat. aperio = *apa -- ṷerio. On form see Trenckner, Notes 63] to open (a door) Vin i.5 (apāpurɔ etaŋ Amatassa dvāraŋ: imper.; where id. p. S i.137 has avāpur˚, T., but v. l. apāpur˚); Vv 6427 (apāpuranto Amatassa dvāraŋ, expld. at VvA 284 by vivaranto); It 80 (apāvuṇanti A. dv. as T. conj., with v. l. apānuṃanti, apāpurenti & apāpuranti). -- pp. apāruta (q. v.). -- Pass. apāpurīyati [cp. BSk. apāvurīyati M Vastu ii.158] to be opened M iii.184 (v. l. avā˚); J i.63 (avā˚); Th 2, 494 (apāpuṇitvā). See also avāpurati.
Apābhata [pp. of apa + ā + bhṛ cp. Vedic apa -- bharati, but Lat. aufero to ava˚] taken away, stolen J iii.54.
Apāya [Sk. apāya, fr. apa + i, cp. apeti] "going away" viz. -- 1. separation, loss Dh 211 (piya˚ = viyoga DhA iii.276). -- 2. loss (of property) D iii.181, 182; A ii. 166; iv.283; J iii.387 (atth˚). -- 3. leakage, out flow (of water) D i.74; A ii.166; iv.287. -- 4. lapse, falling away (in conduct) D i.100. -- 5. a transient state of loss and woe after death. Four such states are specified purgatory (niraya), rebirth as an animal, or as a ghost, or as a Titan (Asura). Analogous expressions are vinipāta & duggati. All combined at D i.82; iii.111; A i.55; It 12, 73; Nd2 under kāya; & freq. elsewhere. -- apāyaduggativinipāta as attr. of saŋsāra S ii.92, 232; iv.158, 313; v.342; opp. to khīṇâpāya -- duggati -- vinipāta of an Arahant A iv.405; v.182 sq. -- See also foll. pass.: M iii.25 (anapāya); Sn 231; Th 2, 63; J iv.299; Pug 51; VvA 118 (opp. sugati); PvA 103; Sdhp 43, 75 & cp. niraya, duggati, vinipāta.
-- gāmin going to ruin or leading to a state of suffering DhA iii.175; cp. ˚gamanīya id. Ps. i.94, ˚gamanīyatā J iv.499. -- mukha "facing ruin", leading to destruction (= vināsa -- mukha DA i.268), usually as nt. "cause of ruin" D i.101 (cattāri apāya mukhāni); iii.181, 182 (cha bhogānaŋ a˚ -- mukhāni, i. e. causes of the loss of one's possessions); A ii.166; iv.283, 287. -- samudda the ocean of distress DhA iii 432. -- sahāya a spendthrift companion D iii.185.
Apāyika (adj.) [also as āpāyika (q. v.); fr. apāya] belonging to the apāyas or states of misery D i.103; iii.6, 9, 12; It 42; PvA 60 (dukkha).
Apāyin (adj.) [fr. apāya] going away J i.163 (aḍḍha- rattāvɔapāyin = aḍḍharatte apāyin C.). -- an˚ not going away, i. e. constantly following (chāyā anapāyinī, the shadow) Dh 2; Th 1, 1041; Miln 72.
Apāra (nt.) [a + pāra] 1. the near bank of a river J iii.230 (+ atiṇṇaŋ, C. paratīraŋ atiṇṇaŋ). -- 2. (fig.) not the further shore (of life), the world here, i.e. (opp. pāraŋ = Nibbāna) Sn 1129, 1130; Nd2 62; Dh 385 (expld. as bāhirāni cha āyatanāni DhA iv.141). See pāra & cp. avara.
Apāraṇeyya (adj.) [grd. of paraneti + a˚] that which cannot be achieved, unattainable J vi.36 (= apāpetabba).
Apāruta [Sk. apāvṛta, pp. of apāpurati] open (of a door) Vin i.7 = M i.169 (apārutā tesaŋ Amatassa dvārā); D i.136 (= vivaṭa -- dvāra DA i.297); J i.264 (˚dvāra).
Apālamba ["a Vedic term for the hinder part of a carriage" Morris J P T S. 1886, 128; the "Vedic" unidentified] a mechanism to stop a chariot, a safe guard "to prevent warriors from falling out" (C.) S i.33 (Mrs Rh. D. trsl. "leaning board"); J vi.252 (v. l. upā˚; Kern trsl. "remhout", i. e. brake).
Apāhata [pp. of apa + hṛ] driven off or back, refuted, refused Sn 826 (˚smiŋ = apasādite vade SnA 541).
Api (indecl.) [Sk. api & pi; Idg. *epi *pi *opi; cp. Gr. e)/pi on to, o)/pi (o) /piqen behind, o)pi/ssa back = close at one's heels); Lat. ob. in certain functions; Goth. iftuma. <-> The assimil. form before vowels is app˚ (= Sk. apy˚). See further details under pi.] both prep. & conj., orig. meaning "close by", then as prep. "towards, to, on to, on" and as adv. "later, and, moreover". -- 1 (prep. & pref.) (a) prep. c. loc.: api ratte later on in the night (q. v.) -- (b) pref.: apidhāna putting on to; apiḷahati bind on to, apihita (= Gr. e) piqeto/s, epithet) put on to, (q. v.). -- 2. (conj. & part.). (a) in affirmative sentences meaning primarily "moreover, further, and then, even": -- (a) (single) prothetic: api dibbesu kāmesu even in heavenly joys Dh 187; ko disvā na pasīdeyya api kaṇhâbhijātiko even an unfortunate -- born Sn 563 api yojanāni gacchāma, even for leagues we go Pv iv.107 (= anekāni yojanāni pi g. PvA 270. Epithetic (more freq. in the form pi): muhuttam api even a little while Dh 106, 107; aham api daṭṭhukāmo I also wish to see Sn 685. Out of prothetic use (= even = even if) develops the conditional meaning of "if", as in api sakkuṇemu (and then we may = if we may) J v.24 (c. = api nāma sakkuṇeyyāma; see further under b appɔeva nāma). -- api -- api in correlation corresponds to Lat. et -- et Sk ca -- ca, meaning both . . . and, and . . . as well as, & is esp. freq. in combn. app' ekacce . . . app' ekacce (and) some . . . and others, i. e. some . . . others [not with Kern Toev. s. v. to appa!], e. g. at D i.118; Th 2, 216; VvA 208, etc. -- app' ekadā "morever once" = sometimes Vin iv.178; S i.162; iv.111; J i.67; DhA iii.303, etc. -- (b) (in combn with other emphatic or executive particles) api ca further, and also, moreover D i.96; Miln 25, 47. -- api ca kho moreover, and yet, still, all the same It 89 (+ pana v. l.); Miln 20, 239. -- api ca kho pana all the same, never mind, nevertheless J i.253. -- api ssu so much so Vin ii.76. -- app' eva nāma (with pot.) (either) surely, indeed, yes, I reckon, (or) I presume, it is likely that, perhaps Vin i.16 (surely); ii.85 (id.); cp. pi D i.205 (sve pi upasaŋkameyyāma tomorrow I shall surely come along), 226 (siyā thus shall it be); M i.460 = It 89 (moreover, indeed); J i.168 (surely) Vin ii.262 (perhaps) J v.421 (id., piyavācaŋ labheyyāma). -- (b) in interrog. -- dubit. sentences as part. of interrog. (w. indic. or pot.) corresponding to Lat. nonne, i e. awaiting an affirmative answer ("not, not then"): api Yasaŋ kulaputtaŋ passeyya do you not see . . . Vin i.16; api samaṇa balivadde addasā have you not then seen . . . S i.115; api kiñci labhāmase shall we then not get anything? J iii.26; api me pitaraŋ passatha do you then not see my father? PvA 38. -- Also combd. with other interr. part. e. g. api nu J. ii.415.
Apitika (adj.) [a + pitika] fatherless J v.251.
Apithīyati [for apidhīyati; api + dhā] Pass. of apidahati to be obstructed, covered, barred, obscured J ii.158. See also pithīyati.
Apidahati [api + dhā, cp. Gr. e)piti(qhmi] to put on (see api 1 b), to cover up, obstruct, J v.60 (inf. apidhetuŋ). pp. apihita, Pass. apithīyati, Der. apidhāna (q. v.).
Apidhāna (nt.) [Vedic apidhāna in same meaning] cover, lid Vin i.203, 204; ii.122. See apidahati.
Apiratte [read api ratte, see api 1 a] later in the night J vi.560.
Apilāpana (nt.) [fr. api + lap] counting up, repetition [Kern, Toev, s.v. gives der. fr. a + plāvana] Nett 15, 28, 54; Miln 37.
Apilāpanatā (f.) in the pass. at Dhs 14 = Nd2 628 is evidently meant to be taken as a + pilāpana + tā (fr. pilavati, plu), but whether the der. & interpret. of Dhs A is correct, we are unable to say. On general principles it looks like popular etym. Mrs. Rh. D. translates (p. 16) "opposite of superficiality" (lit "not floating"); see her detailed note Dhs trsl. 16.
Apilāpeti [api + lap] "to talk close by", i. e. to count up, recite, or: talk idly, boast of Miln 37 (sāpatheyyaŋ).
Apiḷandha (adj.) at Vv 361 should be read as apiḷaddha (= Sk. apinaddha) pp. of apiḷandhati (apiḷandhati) "adorned with", or (with v. l. SS) as apiḷandhana; VvA 167 expls. by analankata, mistaking the a of api for a negation.
Apiḷandhana (nt.) [fr. apiḷandhati, also in shorter (& more usual) form piḷandhana, q. v.] that which is tied on, i.e. band, ornament, apparel, parure Vv 6410, 6418 (expld. inacurately at VvA 279 by; a -- kāro nipātamattaŋ, pilandhanaŋ = ābhāraṇaŋ); J vi.472 (c. pilandhituŋ pi ayuttaŋ?).
Apiḷahati & Apiḷandhati [Sk. apinahyati, on n: ḷ see note on gala, & cp. guṇa: guḷa, veṇu: veḷu etc. On ndh for yh see avanandhati] to tie on, fasten, bind together; to adorn oneself with (acc.) J v.400 (ger. apiḷayha = piḷandhitvā C.) -- Cp. apiḷandhana & pp apiladdha.
Apiha (adj.) [apihālu? a + piha, uncertain origin, see next. Morris J.P.I.S. 1886 takes it as a + spṛha] "unhankering" (Mrs Rh. D.) S i 181 (+ akankha; v. l. BB asita).
Apihālu (adj.) [a + pihālu, analysed by Fausböll Sn. Gloss. p. 229 as a -- spṛhayālu, but Bdhgh evidently different (see below)] not hankering, free from craving, not greedy S i.187 = Th 1, 1218 (akuhako nipako apihālu); Sn 852 (+ amaccharin, expld. at SnA 549 as apihana -- sīlo, patthanātanhāya rahito ti vuttaŋ hoti, thus perhaps taking it as a + pi (= api) + hana (fr. dhā, cp. pidahati & pihita); cp. also Nd2 227).
Apihita [pp. of apidahati] covered J iv.4.
Apuccaṇḍatā (f.) [a + pūti + aṇḍa + tā] "not being a rotten egg," i. e. normal state, healthy birth, soundness M i.357.
Apuccha (adj.) [a + pucchā] "not a question", i. e. not to be asked Miln 316.
Apekkha (adj.) [= apekkhā] waiting for, looking for S i.122 (otāra˚).
Apekkhati 1. [Sk. apīkṣate, apa + īkṣ] to desire, long for, look for, expect Sn 435 (kāme nɔâpekkhate cittaŋ), 773 (ppr. apekkhamāna); J iv.226 (id.); Dhs A 365. anapekkhamāna paying no attention to (acc.) Sn 59; J v.359. <-> 2. [Sk. avīkṣate, ava + īkṣ; see avekkḥati] to consider, refer to, look at, ger. apekkhitvā (cp. Sk. avīkṣya) with reference to VvA 13. -- pp. apekkhita (q. v.).
Apekkhavant (adj.) [fr. apekkhā] full of longing or desire, longing, craving Vin iv.214; S iii.16; Th 1, 558; J v.453 (= sataṇha); Sn A 76.
Apekkhā & Apekhā (f.) [Sk. apekṣā, fr. apa + īkṣ. The spelling is either kkh or kh, they are both used promiscuously, a tendency towards kh prevailing, as in upekhā, sekha] attention, regard, affection for (loc.); desire, longing for (c. loc.) S i.77; iii.132; v.409 (mātā -- pitusu); Vin iv.214; Sn 38 (= vuccati taṇhā etc. Nd2 65; = taṇhā sineha SnA 76); J i.9, 141; Th 1, 558; Dh 345 (puttesu dāresu ca = taṇhā DhA iv.56); Dhs 1059, 1136 (= ālayakaraṇa -- vasena apekkhatī ti apekkhā Dhs A 365, cp. Dhs trsl. 279). Freq. as adj. ( -- ˚or in combn. with sa˚ and an˚), viz. Vin iii.90 (visuddha˚); S i.122 (otara˚); sa˚ A iii.258, 433; iv.60 sq.; an˚ without consideration, regardless, indifferent S v.164; A iii.252, 347, 434; Sn 200 (anapekkhā honti ñātayo); J i.9. Cp. anapekkhin & apekkhavant; also B.Sk. avekṣatā.
Apekkhita [pp. of apekkhati] taken care of, looked after, considered J vi.142, 149 (= olokita C.).
Apekkhin (adj.) [Sk. apekṣin, but B.Sk. avekṣin, e.g. Jtm 215; fr. apa + īkṣ] considering, regarding, expecting, looking for; usually neg. an˚ indifferent (against) = loc.) S i.16, 77; ii.281; iii.19, 87; Sn 166 (kāmesu), 823 (id.), 857; Dh 346. Cp. apekkhavant.
Apeta (adj.) [pp. of apeti] gone away; (med.) freed of, rid of, deprived of (instr., abl. or ˚ -- ) Dh 9 (damasaccena); PvA 35 (dukkhato); usually ˚ -- in sense of "without, -- less", e. g. apeta -- kaddama free from mud, stainless Dh 95; ˚vattha without dress J v.16; ˚viññāṇa without feeling, senseless Dh 41; Th 2, 468; ˚viññāṇattaŋ senselessness, lack of feeling PvA 63.
Apetatta (nt.) [abstr. to apeta] absence (of) PvA 92.
Apeti [apa + i, cp. Gr. a)/peimi, Lat. abeo, Goth. af -- iddja] to go away, to disappear D i.180 (upeti pi apeti pi); J i.292; Sn 1143 (= nɔ apagacchanti na vijahanti Nd2 66). -- pp. apeta (q. v.).
Apetteyyatā (f.) [a + petteyyatā, abstr. fr. *paitṛya fatherly] in combn. with amatteyyatā irreverence against father and mother D iii.70 (cp. Dh 332 & DhA iv.34).
Apeyya (adj.) [a + peyya, grd. of pā] not to be drunk, not drinkable J vi.205 (sāgara).
Apesiya (nt.) [? of uncertain origin] a means of barring a door Vin ii.154 (Bdhgh. explns on p. 321: apesī ti dīghadārumhi khāṇuke pavesetvā kaṇḍaka -- sākhāhi vinandhitvā kataŋ dvāra -- tthakanakaŋ).
Apesiyamāna (adj.) [ppr. fr. a + peseti (q. v.)] not being in service Vin ii.177.
App' in appɔ ekacce etc. see api.
Appa (adj.) [Vedic alpa, cp. Gr. a)lapa/zw (lapa/zw) to empty (to make little), a)lapadno/s weak; Lith. alpnas weak, alpstù to faint] small, little, insignificant, often in the sense of "very little = (next to) nothing" (so in most cpds.); thus expld. at VvA 334 as equivalent to a negative part. (see appodaka) D i.61 (opp. mahant, DA i.170 = parittaka); Sn 713, 775, 805, 896 (= appaka, omaka, thoka, lamaka, jatukka, parittaka Nd1 306); Dh 174; J i.262; Pug 39. -- nt. appaŋ a little, a small portion, a trifle; pl. appāni small things, trifles A ii.26 = It 102; A ii.138; Dh 20 (= thokaŋ eka -- vagga -- dvi -- vagga -- mattam pi DhA i.158), 224 (˚smiŋ yācito asked for little), 259.
-- aggha of little value (opp. mahaggha priceless) J i.9; Pug 33; DhA iv.184. -- assāda [BSk. alpâsvāda, cp. Divy 224 = Dh 186; alpa + ā + svād] of little taste or enjoyment, affording little pleasure (always used of kāmā) Vin ii.25 = M i.130 = A iii.97 = Nd2 71; Sn 61; Dh 186 (= supina -- sadisatāya paritta -- sukha DhA iii 240); Th 2, 358 (= ThA 244); J ii.313; Vism 124. -- ātanka little (or no) illness, freedom from illness, good health (= appābādha with which often combd.) [BSk. alpātanka & alpātankatā] D i.204 (+ appābādha); iii.166; A iii.65, 103; Miln 14. -- ābādha same as appātanka (q. v.) D i.204; iii.166, 237; M ii.125; A i.25; ii.88; iii.30, 65 sq., 103, 153; Pv iv.144; ˚ābādhatā id. [cp. BSk. alpābādhatā good health] A i.38. -- āyuka short lived D i.18; PvA 103, also as ˚āyukin Vv 416. -- āhāra taking little or no food, fasting M ii.5; Sn 165 (= ekāsana -- bhojitāya ca parimita -- bhojitāya ca SnA 207), also as ˚āhāratā M i.245; ii.5. -- odaka having little or no water, dry Sn 777 (macche va appodake khīṇasote = parittodake Nd1 50); Vv 843 (+ appabhakkha; expld. at VvA 334 as "appa -- saddo hɔ ettha abhāvattho appiccho appanigghoso ti ādisu viya"); J i.70; DhA iv.12. -- kasira in instr. ˚kasirena with little or no difficulty D i.251; S v.51; Th 1, 16. -- kicca having few duties, free from obligations, free from care Sn 144 (= appaŋ kiccaŋ assā ti KhA 241). -- gandha not smelling or having a bad smell Miln 252 (opp. sugandha). -- ṭṭha "standing in little"; i. e. connected with little trouble D i.143; A i.169. -- thāmaka having little or no strength, weak S iv.206. -- dassa having little knowledge or wisdom Sn 1134 (see Nd2 69; expld. by paritta -- pañña SnA 605). -- nigghosa with little sound, quiet, still, soundless (cp. VvA 334, as quoted above under ˚odaka) A v.15 (+ appasadda); Sn 338; Nd1 377; Miln 371. -- pañña, of little wisdom J ii.166; iii.223, 263. -- puñña of little merit M ii.5. -- puññatā having little merit, unworthiness Pv iv.107. -- phalatā bringing little fruit PvA 139. -- bhakkha having little or nothing to eat Vv 843. -- bhoga having little wealth, i. e. poor, indigent Sn 114 (= sannicitānaŋ ca bhogānaŋ āyamukhassa ca abhāvato SnA 173). -- maññati to consider as small, to underrate: see separately. -- matta little, slight, mean, (usually as ˚ka; not to be confounded with appamatta2) A iii.275; J i.242; also meaning "contented with little" (of the bhikkhu) It 103 = A ii.27; f. ˚ā trifle, smallness, însignificance D i.91; DA i.55. -- mattaka small, insignificant, trifling, nt. a trifle (cp. ˚matta) Vin 1, 213; ii.177 (˚vissajjaka the distributor of little things, cp. A iii.275 & Vin iv.38, 155); D i.3 (= appamattā etassā ti appamattakaŋ DA i.55); J i.167; iii.12 (= aṇu); PvA 262. -- middha "little slothful", i. e. diligent, alert Miln 412. -- rajakkha having little or no obtuseness D ii.37; M i.169; Sdhp 519. -- ssaka having little of one's own, possessing little A i.261; ii.203. -- sattha having few or no companious, lonely, alone Dh 123. -- sadda free from noise, quiet M ii.2, 23, 30; A v.15; Sn 925 (= appanigghosa Nd1 377); Pug 35; Miln 371. -- siddhika bringing little success or welfare, dangerous J iv.4 (= mandasiddhi vināsabahula C.); vi.34 (samuddo a. bahu -- antarāyiko). -- ssuta possessing small knowledge, ignorant, uneducated D i.93 (opp. bahussuta); iii.252, 282; S iv.242; It 59; Dh 152; Pug 20, 62; Dhs 1327. -- harita having little or no grass S i.169; Sn p. 15 (= paritta -- harita -- tiṇa SnA 154).
Appaka (adj.) [appa + ka] little, small, trifling; pl. few. nt. ˚ŋ adv. a little D ii.4; A v.232 sq., 253 sq.; Sn 909 (opp. bahu); Dh 85 (appakā = thokā na bahū DhA ii. 160); Pv i.102 (= paritta PvA 48); ii.939; Pug 62; PvA 6, 60 (= paritta). f. appikā J i.228. -- instr. appakena by little, i. e. easily DA i.256. -- anappaka not little, i. e. much, considerable, great; pl. many S iv.46; Dh 144; Pv i.117 (= bahū PvA 58); PvA 24, 25 (read anappake pi for T. ˚appakeci; so also KhA 208).
Appakāra (adj.) [a + pakāra] not of natural form, of bad appearance, ugly, deformed J v.69 (= sarīrappakāra -- rahita dussaṇṭhāna C.). Cp. apākatika.
Appakiṇṇa [appa + kiṇṇa, although in formation also = a + pakiṇṇa] little or not crowded, not overheaped A v.15 (C. anākiṇṇa).
Appagabbha (adj.) [a + pagabbha] unobtrusive, free from boldness, modest S ii.198 = Miln 389, Sn 144, 852 (cp. Nd1 228 & KhA 232); Dh 245.
Appaccaya [a + paccaya] 1. (n.) discontent, dissatisfaction, dejection, sulkiness D i.3 (= appatītā honti tena atuṭṭhā asomanassitā ti appacayo; domanassɔ etaŋ adhivacanaŋ DA i.52); iii.159; M i.442; A i.79, 124, 187; ii.203; iii.181 sq.; iv.168, 193; J ii.277; Sn p. 92 (kapa + dosa + appacaya); Vv 8331 (= domanassaŋ VvA 343); SnA 423 (= appatītaŋ domanassaŋ). -- 2. (adj.) unconditioned Dhs 1084, 1437.
Appaṭi˚ [a + paṭi˚] see in general under paṭi˚.
Appaṭikārika (adj.) [a + paṭikārika] "not providing against", i. e. not making good, not making amends for, destructive J v.418 (spelling here & in C. appati˚).
Appaṭikopeti [a + paṭikopeti] not to disturb, shake or break (fig.) J v.173 (uposathaŋ).
Appaṭikkhippa (adj.) [a + paṭikkhippa, grd. of paṭikkhi- pati] not to be refused J ii.370.
Appaṭigandhika & ˚iya (adj.) [a + paṭi + gandha + ika] not smelling disagreeable, i. e. with beautiful smell, scented, odorous J v.405 (˚ika, but C. ˚iya; expld. by sugandhena udakena samannāgata); vi.518; Pv ii.120; iii.226.
Appaṭigha (adj.) [a + paṭigha] (a) not forming an obstacle, not injuring, unobstructive Sn 42 (see expld. at Nd2 239; SnA 88 expls. "katthaci satte vā sankhāre vā bhayena na paṭihaññatī ti a."). -- (b) psychol. t. t. appld. to rūpa: not reacting or impinging (opp. sappaṭigha) D iii.217; Dhs 660, 756, 1090, 1443.
Appaṭicchavi (adj.) at Pv ii.113 is faulty reading for sam- patitacchavi (v. l.).
Appaṭibhāga (adj) [a + paṭibhāga] not having a counterpart, unequalled, incomparable DhA i.423 (= anuttara).
Appaṭibhāṇa (adj.) [a + paṭibhāṇa] not answering back, bewildered, cowed down Vin iii.162; A iii.57; ˚ŋ karoti to intimidate, bewilder J v.238, 369.
Appaṭima (adj.) [a + paṭima fr. prep. paṭi but cp. Vedic apratimāna fr. prati + mā] matchless, incomparable, invaluable Th 1, 614; Miln 239.
Appaṭivattiya (adj.) [a + paṭi + vattiya = vṛtya, grd. or vṛt] (a) not to be rolled back Sn 554 (of dhammacakka, may however be taken in meaning of b.). -- (b) irresistable J ii.245 (sīhanada). Note. The spelling with ṭ is only found as v. l. at J ii.245; otherwise as t.
Appaṭivāṇa (nt.) [a + paṭivāṇa, for ˚vrāṇa, the guṇa -- form of vṛ, cp. Sk. prativāraṇa] non -- obstruction, not hindering, not opposing or contradicting A i.50; iii.41; v.93 sq.; adj. J i.326.
Appaṭivāṇitā (f.) [abstr. from (ap)paṭivāṇa] not being hindered, non -- obstruction, free effort; only in phrase "asantuṭṭhitā ca kusalesu dhammesu appaṭivāṇitā ca padhānasmiŋ" (discontent with good states and the not shrinking back in the struggle Dhs trsl. 358) A i.50, 95 = D iii.214 = Dhs 1367.
Appaṭivāṇī (f.) [almost identical w. appaṭivāṇitā, only used in diff. phrase] non -- hindrance, non -- restriction, free action, impulsive effort; only in stock phrase chando vāyāmo ussāho ussoḷhī appaṭivāṇī S ii.132; v.440; A ii.93, 195; iii.307 sq.; iv.320; Nd2 under chanda C. [cp. similarly Divy 654].
Appaṭivāṇīya (adj.) [grd. of a + paṭi + vṛ; cp. BSk. aprativāṇiḥ Divy 655; M Vastu iii.343] not to be obstructed, irresistible S i.212 (appld. to Nibbāna; Mrs. Rh. D. Kindred S. p. 274 trsls. "that source from whence there is no turning back"), Th 2, 55.
Appaṭividdha (adj.) [a + paṭi + viddha] "not shot through" i. e. unhurt J vi.446.
Appaṭivibhatta (˚bhogin) (adj.) [a + paṭi + vibhatta] (not eating) without sharing with others (with omission of another negative: see Trenckner, Miln p. 429, where also Bdhgh's expln.) A iii289; Miln 373; cp. Miln trsl. ii.292.
Appaṭivekkhiya [ger. of a + paṭi + avekkhati] not ob- serving or noticing J iv.4 (= apaccavekkhitvā anavekkhitvā C.).
Appaṭisankhā (f.) [a + paṭisankhā] want of judgment Pug 21 = Dhs 1346.
Appaṭisandhika (and ˚iya) (adj.) [a + paṭisandhi + ka (ya)] 1. what cannot be put together again, unmendable, irreparable (˚iya) Pv i.129 (= puna pākatiko na hoti PvA 66) = J iii.167 (= paṭipākatiko kātuŋ na sakkā C.). <-> 2. incapable of reunion, not subject to reunion, i. e. to rebirth J v.100 (˚bhāva).
Appaṭisama (adj.) [a + paṭi = sama; cp. BSk. apratisama M Vastu i.104] not having it's equal, incomparable J i.94 (Baddha -- sirī).
Appaṭissavatā (f.) [a + paṭissavatā] want of deference Pug 20 = Dhs 1325.
Appaṇihita (adj.) [a + paṇihita] aimless, not bent on anything, free from desire, usually as nt. aimlessness, combd. w. animittaŋ Vin iii.92, 93 = iv.25; Dhs 351, 508, 556. See on term Cpd. 67; Dhs trsl. 93, 143 & cp. paṇihita.
Appatiṭṭha (adj.) [a + patiṭṭha] 1. not standing still S i.1. -- 2. without a footing or ground to stand on, bottomless Sn 173.
Appatissa (& appaṭissa) (adj.) [a + paṭi + śru] not docile, rebellious, always in combn. with agārava A ii.20; iii.7 sq., 14 sq., 247, 439. Appatissa -- vāsa an unruly state, anarchy J ii.352. See also paṭissā.
Appatīta (adj.) [a + patīta, of prati + i, Sk. pratīta] dis- satisfied, displeased, disappointed (cp. appaccaya) J v.103 (at this passage preferably to be read with v. l. as appatika = without husband, C. expls. assāmika), 155 (cp. C. on p. 156); DA i.52; SnA 423.
Appaduṭṭha (adj.) [a + paduṭṭha] not corrupt, faultless, of good behaviour Sn 662 (= padosâbhāvena a. SnA 478); Dh 137 (= niraparādha DhA iii.70).
Appadhaŋsa (adj.) [= appadhaŋsiya, Sk. apradhvaŋsya] not to be destroyed J iv.344 (v. l. duppadhaŋsa).
Appadhaŋsika (& ˚iya) (adj.) [grd. of a + padhaŋseti] not to be violated or destroyed, inconquerable, indestructible D iii.175 (˚ika, v. l. ˚iya); J iii.159 (˚iya); VvA 208 (˚iya); PvA 117 (˚iya). Cp. appadhaŋsa.
Appadhaŋsita (adj.) [pp. of a + padhaŋseti] not violated, unhurt, not offended Vin iv.229.
Appanā (f.) [cp. Sk. arpaṇa, abstr. fr. appeti = arpayati from of ṛ, to fix, turn, direct one's mind; see appeti] application (of mind), ecstasy,fixing of thought on an object, conception (as psychol. t. t.) J ii.61 (˚patta); Miln 62 (of vitakka); Dhs 7, 21, 298; Vism 144 (˚samādhi); DhsA 55, 142 (def. by Bdhg. as "ekaggaŋ cittaŋ ārammaṇe appeti"), 214 (˚jhāna). See on term Cpd. pp. 56 sq., 68, 129, 215; Dhs trsl. xxviii, 10, 53, 82, 347.
Appabhoti (Appahoti) see pahoti.
Appamaññati [appa + maññati] to think little of, to under- rate, despise Dh 121 (= avajānāti DhA iii.16; v. l. avapamaññati).
Appamaññā (f.) [a + pamaññā, abstr. fr. pamāṇa = Sk. *pramānya] boundlessness, infinitude, as psych. t. t. appld. in later books to the four varieties of philanthropy, viz. mettā karuŋā muditā upekkhā i. e. love, pity, sympathy, desinterestedness, and as such enumd. at D iii.223 (q. v. for detailed ref. as to var. passages); Ps i.84; Vbh 272 sq.; DhsA 195. By itself at Sn 507 (= mettajjhānasankhātā a. SnA 417). See for further expln. Dhs trsl. p. 66 and mettā.
Appamatta1 (adj.) [appa + matta] see appa.
Appamatta2 (adj.) [a + pamatta, pp. of pamadati] not negligent, i. e. diligent, careful, heedful, vigilant, alert, zealous M i.391 -- 92; S i.4; Sn 223 (cp. KhA 169), 507, 779 (cp. Nd1 59); Dh 22 (cp. DhA i.229); Th 2, 338 = upaṭṭhitasati Th A 239).
Appamāda [a + pamāda] thoughtfulness, carefulness, con- scientiousness, watchfulness, vigilance, earnestness, zeal D i.13 (: a. vuccati satiyā avippavāso DA i.104); iii.30, 104 sq., 112, 244, 248, 272; M i.477 (˚phala); S i.25, 86, 158, 214; ii.29, 132; iv.78 (˚vihārin), 97, 125, 252 sq.; v.30 sq. (˚sampadā), 41 sq., 91, 135, 240, 250, 308, 350; A i.16, 50. (˚adhigata); iii.330, 364, 449; iv.28 (˚gāravatā) 120 (˚ŋ garu -- karoti); v.21, 126 (kusalesu dhammesu); Sn 184, 264, 334 (= sati -- avippavāsa -- sankhāta a. SnA 339); It 16 (˚ŋ pasaŋsanti puññakiriyāsu paṇḍitā), 74 (˚vihārin); Dh 57 (˚vihārin, cp. DhA i.434); 327 (˚rata = satiyā avippavāse abhirata DhA iv.26); Dāvs ii. 35; KhA 142.
Appamāṇa (freq. spelled appamāna) (adj.) [a + pamāṇa] 1. "without measure", immeasurable, endless, boundless, unlimited, unrestricted all -- permeating S iv.186 (˚cetaso); A ii.73; v.63; Sn 507 (mettaŋ cittaŋ bhāvayaŋ appāmāṇaŋ = anavasesa -- pharaṇena SnA 417; cp. appamaññā); It 21 (mettā), 78; J ii.61; Ps ii.126 sq.; Vbh 16, 24, 49, 62, 326 sq.; Dhs 182, 1021, 1024, 1405; DhsA 45, 196 (˚gocara, cp. anantagocara). See also on term Dhs trsl. 60. -- 2. "without difference", irrelevant, in general (in commentary style) J i.165; ii.323.
Appameyya (adj.) [a + pameyya = Sk. aprameya, grd. of a + pra + mā] immeasurable, infinite, boundless M i.386; S v.400; A i.266; Th 1, 1089 (an˚); Pug 35; Miln 331; Sdhp 338.
Appavattā (f.) [a + pavattā] the state of not going on, the stop (to all that), the non -- continuance (of all that) Th 1, 767; Miln 326.
Appasāda see pasāda.
Appassāda see appa.
Appahīna (adj.) [a + pahīna, pp. of pahāyati] not given up, not renounced M i.386; It 56, 57; Nd2 70 D1; Pug 12, 18.
Appāṇaka (adj.) [a + pāṇa + ka] breathless, i. e. (1) holding one's breath in a form of ecstatic meditation (jhāna) M i.243; J i.67 [cp. BSk. āsphānaka Lal. v.314, 324; M Vastu ii.124; should the Pāli form be taken as *a + prāṇaka?]. (2) not holding anything breathing, i. e. inanimate, lifeless, not containing life Sn p. 15 (of water).
Appikā (f.) of appaka.
Appiccha (adj.) [appa + iccha from iṣ, cp. icchā] desiring little or nothing, easily satisfied, unassuming, contented, unpretentious S i.63, 65; A iii.432; iv.2, 218 sq., 229; v.124 sq., 130, 154, 167; Sn 628, 707; Dh 404; Pv iv.73; Pug 70.
Appicchatā (f.) [abstr. fr. prec.] contentment, being satisfied with little, unostentatiousness Vin iii.21; D iii.115; M i.13; S ii 202, 208 sq.; A i.12, 16 sq.; iii.219 sq., 448; iv.218, 280 (opp. mahicchatā); Miln 242; SnA 494 (catubbidhā, viz. paccaya -- dhutanga -- pariyatti -- adhigama -- vasena); PvA 73. As one of the 5 dhutanga -- dhammā at Vism 81.
Appita (adj.) [pp. of appeti, cp. BSk. arpita, e. g. prītyar- pitaŋ cakṣuḥ Jtm 3169] 1. fixed, applied, concentrated (mind) Miln 415 (mānasa) Sdhp 233 (citta). -- 2. brought to, put to, fixed on J vi.78 (maraṇamukhe); visappita (an arrow to which) poison (is) applied, so read for visap(p)īta at J v.36 & Vism 303.
Appiya & Appiyatā see piya etc.
Appekadā (adv.) see api 2 ax.
Appeti [Vedic arpayati, Caus. of ṛ, ṛṇoti & ṛcchati (cp. icchati2), Idg. *ar (to insert or put together, cp. also *er under aṇṇava) to which belong Sk. ara spoke of a wheel; Gr. a)rari/skw to put together, a(/rma chariot, a)/rqron limb, a)reth/ virtue; Lat. arma = E. arms (i. e. weapon), artus fixed, tight, also limb, ars = art. For further connections see aṇṇava] 1. (*er) to move forward, rush on, run into (of river) Vin ii.238; Miln 70. -- 2. (*ar) to fit in, fix, apply, insert, put on to (lit. & fig.) Vin ii.136, 137; J iii.34 (nimba -- sūlasmiŋ to impale, C. āvuṇāti); vi.17 (T. sūlasmiŋ acceti, vv. ll. abbeti = appeti & upeti, C. āvuṇati); Miln 62 (dāruŋ sandhismiŋ); VvA 110 (saññāṇaŋ). Cp. Trenckner, Notes 64 n. 19, who defends reading abbeti at T. passages.
Appesakkha (adj.) [acc. to Childers = Sk. *alpa + īśa + ākhya, the latter fr. ā + khyā "being called lord of little"; Trenckner on Miln 65 (see p. 422) says: "appesakkha & mahesakkha are traditionally expld. appaparivāra & mahāparivāra, the former, I suppose, from appe & sakkha (Sk. sākhya), the latter an imitation of it". Thus the etym. would be "having little association or friendship" and resemble the term appasattha. The BSk. forms are alpeśākhya & maheśākhya, e. g. at Av. Ś ii. 153; Divy 243] of little power, weak, impotent S ii.229; Miln 65; Sdhp 89.
Appoti [the contracted form of āpnoti, usually pāpuṇāti, fr. āp] to attain, reach, get Vism 350 (in etym. of āpo).
Appodaka see appa.
Appossukka (adj.) [appa + ussuka, Sk. alpotsuka, e. g. Lal. V. 509; Divy 41, 57, 86, 159. It is not necessary to assume a hypothetic form of *autsukya as der. fr. ussuka] unconcerned, living at ease, careless, "not bothering", keeping still, inactive Vin ii.188; M iii.175, 176; S i 202 (in stock phrase appossukka tuṇhībhūta sankasāya "living at ease, given to silence, resigned" Mrs. Rh. D. Dhs trsl. 258, see also J.P.T.S. 1909, 22); ii. 177 (id.); iv.178 (id.); Th 2, 457 (= nirussukka ThA 282); Sn 43 (= abyāvaṭa anapekkha Nd2 72); Dh 330 (= nirālaya DhA iv.31); J i.197; iv.71; Miln 371 (a. tiṭṭhati to keep still); DA i.264.
Appossukkatā (f.) [abstr. fr. prec.] inaction, reluctance, carelessness, indifference Vin i.5; D ii.36; Miln 232; DhA ii.15.
Apphuta (& apphuṭa) [Sk. *ā -- sphṛta for a -- sphārita pp. of sphar, cp. phurati; phuṭa & also phusati] untouched, unpervaded, not penetrated. D i.74 = M i.276 (pītisukhena).
Apphoṭā (f.) [fr. appoṭeti to blossom] N. of a kind of Jasmine J vi.336.
Apphoṭita [pp. of apphoṭeti] having snapped one's fingers or clapped one's hands J ii.311 (˚kāle).
Apphoṭeti [ā + phoṭeti, sphuṭ] to snap the fingers or clap the hands (as sign of pleasure) Miln 13, 20. pp. apphoṭita.
Aphusa [Sk. *aspṛśya, a + grd. of phusati to touch] not to be touched Miln 157 (trsl. unchangeable by other circumstances; Tr. on p. 425 remarks "aphusāni kiriyāni seems wrong, at any rate it is unintelligible to me").
Aphegguka (adj.) [a + pheggu + ka] not weak, i. e strong J iii.318.
Abaddha [a + baddha] not tied, unbound, unfettered Sn 39 (v. l. and Nd2 abandha; expld -- by rajju -- bandhanɔ ādisu yena kenaci abaddha SnA 83).
Abandha (n. -- adj.) [a + bandha] not tied to, not a follower or victim of It 56 (mārassa; v. l. abaddha).
Abandhana (adj.) [a + bandhana] without fetters or bonds, unfettered, untrammelled Sn 948, cp. Nd1 433.
Ababa [of uncertain origin, prob. onomatopoetic]. N. of a cert. Purgatory, enumd. with many other similar names at A v.173 = Sn p. 126 (cp. aṭaṭa, abbuda & also Av. Ś i.4, 10 & see for further expln. of term SnA 476 sq.
Abala (adj.) [a + bala] not strong, weak, feeble Sn 1120 (= dubbala, appabala, appathāma Nd2 73); Dh 29 (˚assa a weak horse = dubbalassa DhA i.262; opp. sīghassa a quick horse).
Abbaje T. reading at A ii.39, evidently interpreted by ed. as ā + vraje, pot. of ā + vraj to go to, come to (cp. pabbajati), but is preferably with v. l. SS to be read aṇḍaje (corresponding with vihangama in prec. line).
Abbaṇa (adj.) [a + vaṇa, Sk. avraṇa] without wounds Dh 124.
Abbata (n. -- adj.) [a + vata, Sk. avrata] (a) (nt.) that which is not "vata" i. e. moral obligation, breaking of the moral obligation Sn 839 (asīlata +); Nd1 188 (v. l. SS abhabbata; expld. again as a -- vatta). SnA 545 (= dhutangavataŋ vinā. -- (b) (adj.) one who offends against the moral obligation, lawless Dh 264 (= sīlavatena ca dhutavatena ca virahita DhA iii.391; vv. ll. k. adhūta & abhūta; B. abbhuta, C. abbuta).
Abbaya in uday˚ at Miln 393 stands for avyaya.
Abbahati (& abbuhati) [the first more freq. for pres., the second often in aor. forms; Sk. ābṛhati, ā + bṛh1, pp. bṛḍha (see abbūḷha)] to draw off, pull out (a sting or dart); imper. pres. abbaha Th 1, 404; J ii.95 (v. l. BB appuha = abbuha; C. expls. by uddharatha). -- aor. abbahi J v.198 (v. l. BB abbuhi), abbahī (metri causa) J iii.390 (v. l. BB dhabbuḷi = abbuḷhi) = Pv i.86 (which reads T. abbūḷha, but PvA 41 expls. nīhari) = DhA i.30 (vv. ll. sabbahi, sabbamhi; gloss K. B abbūḷhaŋ) = Vv 839 (T. abbuḷhi; v. l. BB abbuḷhaŋ, SS avyahi; VvA 327 expls. as uddhari), & abbuhi A iii.55 (v. l. abbahi, C. abbahī ti nīhari), see also vv. ll. under abbahi. -- ger. abbuyha Sn 939 (= abbuhitvā uddharitvā Nd1 419; v.l. SS abbuyhitvā; SnA 567 reads avyuyha & expls. by uddharitvā); S i.121 (taṇhaŋ); iii.26 (id.; but spelt abbhuyha). -- pp. abbuḷha (q. v.). -- Caus. abbāheti [Sk. ābarhayati] to pull out, drag out J iv.364 (satthaŋ abbāhayanti; v. l. abbhā˚); DhA ii.249 (asiŋ). ger. abbāhitvā (= ˚hetvā) Vin ii 201 (bhisa -- muḷālaŋ) with v. l. BB aggahetvā, SS abbūhitvā, cp. Vin i.214 (vv. ll. aggahitvā & abbāhitvā). pp. abbūḷhita (q. v.).
Abbāhana (nt.) [abstr. fr. abbahati] pulling out (of a sting) DhA iii.404 (sic. T.; v. l. abbūhana; Fausböll aḍahana; glosses C. aṭṭhangata & aṭṭhangika, K. nibbāpana). See also abbuḷhana and abbhāhana.
Abbuda (nt.) [etym. unknown, orig. meaning "swelling", the Sk. form arbuda seems to be a trsl. of P. abbuda] 1. the foetus in the 1st & 2nd months after conception, the 2nd of the five prenatal stages of development, viz. kalala, abbuda, pesi, ghana, pasākha Nd1 120; Miln 40; Vism 236. -- 2. a tumour, canker, sore Vin iii.294, 307 (only in Samantapāsādikā; both times as sāsanassa a). -- 3. a very high numeral, appld. exclusively to the denotation of a vast period of suffering in Purgatory; in this sense used as adj. of Niraya (abbudo nirayo the "vast -- period" hell, cp. nirabbuda). S i.149 = A ii.3 (chattiŋsati pañca ca abbudāni); S i.152 = A v.173 = Sn p. 126 (cp. SnA 476: abbudo nāma koci pacceka -- nirayo nɔ atthi, Avīcimhi yeva abbuda -- gaṇanāya paccanokāso pana abbudo nirayo ti vutto; see also Kindred Sayings p. 190); J iii.360 (sataŋ ninnahuta -- sahassānaŋ ekaŋ abbudaŋ). -- 4. a term used for "hell" in the riddle S i.43 (kiŋsu lokasmiŋ abhudaŋ "who are they who make a hell on earth" Mrs. Rh. D. The answer is "thieves"; so we can scarcely take it in meaning of 2 or 3. The C. has vināsa -- karaṇaŋ.
Abbuḷhati (?) & Abbuhati see abbahati.
Abbuḷhana (nt.) [fr. abbahati = abbuhati (abbuḷhati)] the pulling out (of a sting), in phrase taṇhā -- sallassa abbuḷhanaŋ as one of the 12 achievements of a Mahesi Nd1 343 = Nd2 503 (eds. of Nd1 have abbūhana, v. l. SS abbussāna; ed. of Nd2 abbuḷhana, v. l. SS abbahana, BB abbuhana). Cp. abbāhana.
Abbūḷha (adj.) [Sk. ābṛḍha, pp. of a + bṛh1, see abbahati] drawn out, pulled (of a sting or dart), fig. removed, destroyed. Most freq. in combn. ˚salla with the sting removed, having the sting (of craving thirst, taṇhā) pulled out D ii.283 (v. l. SS asammūḷha); Sn 593, 779 (= abbūḷhita -- salla Nd1 59; rāgâdi -- sallānaŋ abbūḷhattā a. SnA 518); J iii.390 = Vv 8310 = Pv i.87 = DhA i.30. -- In other connection: M i.139 = A iii.84 (˚esika = taṇhā pahīnā; see esikā); Th 1, 321; KhA 153 (˚soka).
Abbūḷhatta (nt.) [abstr. of abbūḷha] pulling out, removal, destroying SnA 518.
Abbūḷhita (& abbūhitta at J iii.541) [pp. of abbāheti Caus. of abbāhati] pulled out, removed, destroyed Nd1 59 (abbūḷhita -- sallo + uddhaṭa˚ etc. for abbūḷha); J iii.541 (uncertain reading; v. l. BB appahita, SS abyūhita; C. expls. pupphakaŋ ṭhapitaŋ appaggharakaŋ kataŋ should we explain as ā + vi + ūh and read abyūhita?).
Abbeti [Trenckner, Notes 64 n. 19] at J iii.34 & vi.17 is probably a mistake in MSS for appeti.
Abbokiṇṇa [= abbhokiṇṇa, abhi + ava + kiṇṇa, cp. abhikiṇṇa] 1.filled M i.387 (paripuṇṇa +); DhA iv.182 (pañca jātisatāni a.). -- 2. [seems to be misunderstood for abbocchinna, a + vi + ava + chinna] uninterrupted, constant, as ˚ŋ adv. in combn. with satataŋ samitaŋ A iv.13 = 145; Kvu 401 (v. l. abbhokiṇṇa), cp. also Kvu trsl. 231 n. 1 (abbokiṇṇa undiluted?); Vbh 320. -- 3. doubtful spelling at Vin iii.271 (Bdhgh on Pārāj. iii.1, 3).
Abbocchinna see abbokiṇṇa 2 and abbhochinna.
Abbohārika (adj.) [a + vi + ava + hārika of voharati] not of legal or conventional status, i. e. -- (a) negligible, not to be decided Vin iii.91, 112 (see also Kvu trsl. 361 n. 4). -- (b) uncommon, extraordinary J iii.309 (v. l. BB abbho˚); v.271, 286 (Kern: ineffective).
Abbha (nt.) [Vedic abhra nt. & later Sk. abhra m. "dark cloud"; Idg. *m̊bhro, cp. Gr. a)fro\s scum, froth, Lat. imber rain; also Sk. ambha water, Gr. o)/ mbros rain, Oir ambu water]. A (dense & dark) cloud, a cloudy mass A ii.53 = Vin ii.295 = Miln 273 in list of to things that obscure moon -- & sunshine, viz. abbhaŋ mahikā (mahiyā A) dhūmarajo (megho Miln), Rāhu. This list is referred to at SnA 487 & VvA 134. S i.101 (˚sama pabbata a mountain like a thunder -- cloud); J vi.581 (abbhaŋ rajo acchādesi); Pv iv.39 (nīl˚ = nīla -- megha PvA 251). As f. abbhā at Dhs 617 & DhsA 317 (used in sense of adj. "dull"; DhsA expls. by valāhaka); perhaps also in abbhāmatta.
-- kūṭa the point or summit of a storm -- cloud Th 1, 1064; J vi.249, 250; Vv 11 (= valāhaka -- sikhara VvA 12). -- ghana a mass of clouds, a thick cloud It 64; Sn 348 (cp. SnA 348). -- paṭala a mass of clouds DhsA 239. -- mutta free from clouds Sn 687 (also as abbhāmutta Dh 382). -- saŋvilāpa thundering S iv.289.
Abbhakkhāti [abhi + ā + khyā, cp. Sk. ākhyāti] to speak against to accuse, slander D i.161 = A i.161 (an -- abbhakkhātu -- kāma); iv.182 (id.); J iv.377. Cp. Intens. abbhācikkhati.
Abbhakkhāna (nt.) [fr. abbhakkhāti] accusation, slander, calumny D iii.248, 250; M i.130; iii.207; A iii.290 sq.; Dh 139 (cp. DhA iii.70).
Abbhacchādita [pp. of abhi + ā + chādeti] covered (with) Th 1, 1068.
Abbhañjati [abhi + añj] to anoint; to oil, to lubricate M i.343 (sappi -- telena); S iv.177; Pug 56; DhA iii.311 = VvA 68 (sata -- pāka -- telena). Caus. abbhañjeti same J i.438 (telena ˚etvā); v.376 (sata -- pāka -- telena ˚ayiŋsu); Caus. ii. abbhanjāpeti to cause to anoint J iii.372.
Abbhañjana (nt.) [fr. abbhañjati] anointing, lubricating, oiling; unction, unguent Vin i.205; iii.79; Miln 367 (akkhassa a.); Vism 264; VvA 295.
Abbhatika (adj.) [ā + bhata + ika, bhṛ] brought (to), procured, got, J vi.291.
Abbhatikkanta [pp. of abhi + ati + kram, cp. atikkanta] one who has thoroughly, left behind J v.376.
Abbhatīta [pp. of abhi + ati + i, cp. atīta & atikkanta] emphatic of atīta in all meanings, viz. 1 passed, gone by S ii.183 (+ atikkanta); nt. ˚ŋ what is gone or over, the past J iii.169. -- 2. passed away, dead M i.465; S iv.398; Th 1, 242, 1035. -- 3. transgressed, overstepped, neglected J iii.541 (saŋyama).
Abbhattha (nt.) [abhi + attha2 in acc. abhi + atthaŋ, abhi in function of "towards" = homeward, as under abhi i.1 a; cp. Vedic abhi sadhasthaŋ to the seat R. V. ix. 21. 3] = attha2, only in phrase abbhatthaŋ gacchati "to go towards home", i. e. setting; fig. to disappear, vanish, M i.115, 119; iii.25; A iv.32; Miln 305; pp. abhhattangata "set", gone, disappeared Dhs 1038 (atthangata +); Kvu 576.
Abbhatthatā (f.) [abstr. fr. abbhatta] "going towards setting", disappearance, death J v.469.
Abbhanumodati [abhi + anu + modati] to be much pleased at to show great appreciation of Vin i.196; D i.143, 190; S iv.224; Miln 29, 210; DhA iv.102 (v. l. ˚ānu˚).
Abbhanumodana (nt.) (& ˚ā f.) [fr. abbhanumodati] being pleased, satisfaction, thanksgiving DA i.227; VvA 52 (˚ānu˚); Sdhp 218.
Abbhantara (adj.) [abhi + antara; abhi here in directive function = towards the inside, in there, with -- in, cp. abhi i.1 a] = antara, i. e. internal, inner, being within or between; nt. ˚ŋ the inner part, interior, interval (also as ˚ -- ) Vin i.111 (satt˚ with interval of seven); A iv.16 (opp. bāhira); Dh 394 (id.); Th 1, 757 (˚âpassaya lying inside); J iii.395 (˚amba the inside of the Mango); Miln 30 (˚e vāyo jivo), 262, 281 (bāhir -- abbhantara dhana); DhA ii.74 (adj. c. gen. being among; v. l. abbhantare). <-> Cases used adverbially: instr. abbhantarena in the meantime, in between DhA ii.59. loc. abbhantare in the midst of, inside of, within (c. gen. or -- ˚) J i.262 (rañño), 280 (tuyhaŋ); DhA ii.64 (v. l. antare), 92 (sattavass˚); PvA 48 (= anto).
Abbhantarika (adj. -- n.) [fr. abbhantara, cp. Sk. abhyantara in same meaning] intimate friend, confidant, "chum" J i.86 (+ ativissāsika), 337 ("insider", opp. bāhiraka).
Abbhantarima (adj.) [superl. formation fr. abbhantara in contrasting function] internal, inner (opp. bāhirima) Vin iii.149; J v.38.
Abbhākuṭika (adj.) [a + bhākuṭi + ka; Sk. bhrakuṭi frown] not frowning, genial Vin iii.181 (but here spelt bhākuṭikabhākuṭika); D i.116, cp. DA i.287; DhA iv.8 (as v. l.; T. has abbhokuṭika).
Abbhāgata [abhi + ā + gata] having arrived or come; (m.) a guest, stranger Vv 15 (= abhi -- āgata, āgantuka VvA 24).
Abbhāgamana (nt.) [abhi + ā + gamana; cp. Sk. abhyā- gama] coming arrival, approach Vin iv.221.
Abbhāghāta [abhi + āghāta] slaughtering -- place Vin iii.151 (+ āghāta).
Abbhācikkhati [Intens. of abbhākkhāti] to accuse, slander, calumniate D i.161; iii.248, 250; M i.130, 368, 482; iii.207; A i.161.
Abbhāna (nt.) [abhi + āyana of ā + yā (i)] coming back, rehabilitation of a bhikkhu who has undergone a penance for an expiable offence Vin i.49 (˚âraha), 53 (id.), 143, 327; ii.33, 40, 162; A i.99. -- Cp. abbheti.
Abbhāmatta (adj.) [abbhā + matta (?) according to the Pāli Com.; but more likely = Vedic abhva huge, enormous, monstrous, with ā metri causa. On abhva (a + bhū what is contradictory to anything that is) cp. abbhuta & abbhuŋ, and see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under dubius] monstrous, dreadful, enormous, "of the size of a large cloud" (thus C. on S i.205 & J iii.309) S i.205 = Th 1, 652 (v. l. abbha˚ & abbhāmutta) = J iii.309 (v. l. ˚mutta).
Abbhāhata [abhi + ā + hata, pp. of han] struck, attacked, afflicted S i.40 (maccunā); Th 1, 448; Sn 581; J vi.26, 440; Vism 31, 232; DA i.140, 147; DhA iv.25.
Abbhāhana (nt.) [either = abbāhana or āvāhana] in udaka˚ the pulling up or drawing up of water Vin ii.318 (Bdhgh. on Cullavagga v.16, 2, corresponding to udaka -- vāhana on p. 122).
Abbhita [pp. of abbheti] 1. come back, rehabilitated, rein- stated Vin iii.186 = iv.242 (an˚). -- 2. uncertain reading at Pv i.123 in sense of "called" (an˚ uncalled), where id. p. at J iii.165 reads anavhāta & at Th 2, 129 ayācita.
Abbhu [a + bhū most likely = Vedic abhva and P. abbhuŋ, see also abbhāmatta] unprofitableness, idleness, nonsense J v.295 (= abhūti avaḍḍhi C.).
Abbhuŋ (interj.) [Vedic abhvaŋ, nt. of abhva, see expld. under abbhamatta. Not quite correct Morris J P T S. 1889, 201: abbhuŋ = ā + bhuk; cp also abbhuta] alas! terrible, dreadful, awful (excl. of fright & shock) Vin ii. 115 (Bdhgh. expls. as "utrāsa -- vacanam -- etaŋ"); M i.448. <-> See also abbhu & abbhuta.
Abbhukkiraṇa (nt.) [abhi + ud + kṛ] drawing out, pulling, in daṇḍa -- sattha˚ drawing a stick or sword Nd2 5764 (cp. abbhokkiraṇa). Or is it abbhuttīraṇa (cp. uttiṇṇa outlet).
Abbhukkirati [abhi + ud + kirati] to sprinkle over, to rinse (with water) D ii.172 (cakkaratanaŋ neither with Morris J P T S. 1886, 131 "give up", nor with trsl. of J ii.311 "roll along"); J v.390; PvA 75. Cp. abbhokkirati.
Abbhuggacchati [abhi + ud + gacchati] to go forth, go out, rise into D i.112, 127; A iii.252 (kitti -- saddo a.); Pug 36. ger. ˚gantvā J i 88 (ākāsaŋ), 202; DhA iv.198. aor. ˚gañchi M i.126 (kittisaddo); J i.93. -- pp. abbhuggata.
Abbhuggata [pp. of abbhuggacchati] gone forth, gone out, risen D i.88 (kitti -- saddo a., cp. DhA i.146: sadevakaŋ lokaŋ ajjhottharitvā uggato), 107 (saddo); Sn p. 103 (kittisaddo).
Abbhuggamana (nt. -- adj.) [fr. abbhuggacchati] going out over, rising over (c. acc.) PvA 65 (candaŋ nabhaŋ abbhuggamanaŋ so read for T. abbhuggamānaŋ).
Abbhujjalana (nt.) [abhi + ud + jalana, from jval] breathing out fire, i. e. carrying fire in one's month (by means of a charm) D i.11 (= mantena mukhato aggi -- jala -- nīharaṇaŋ DA i.97).
Abbhuṭṭhāti (˚ṭṭhahati) [abhi + ud + sthā] to get up to, proceed to, D i.105 (cankamaŋ).
Abbhuṇṇata [pp. of abbhunnamati] standing up, held up, erect J v.156 (in abbhuṇṇatatā state of being erect. stiffness), 197 (˚unnata; v. l. abbhantara, is reading correct?).
Abbhuṇha (adj.) [ahhi + uṇha] (a) very hot DhA ii.87 (v. l. accuṇha). (b) quite hot, still warm (of milk) DhA ii.67.
Abbhuta1 (adj. nt.) [*Sk. adbhuta which appears to be constructed from the Pāli & offers like its companion *āścarya (acchariya abbhuta see below) serious difficulties as to etym. The most probable solution is that P. abbhuta is a secondary adj. -- formation from abbhuŋ which in itself is nt. of abbha = Vedic abhva (see etym. under abbhāmatta and cp. abbhu, abbhuŋ & J.P.T.S. 1889, 201). In meaning abbhuta is identical with Vedic abhva contrary to what usually happens, i. e. striking, abnormal, gruesome, horrible etc.; & that its significance as a + bhū ("unreal?") is felt in the background is also evident from the traditional etym. of the Pāli Commentators (see below). See also acchariya] terrifying, astonishing; strange, exceptional, puzzling, extraordinary, marvellous, supernormal. Described as a term of surprise & consternation (vimhayɔ āvahassɔ adhivacanaŋ DA i.43 & VvA 329) & expld. as "something that is not" or "has not been before", viz. abhūtaŋ ThA 233; abhūta -- pubbatāya abbhutaŋ VvA 191, 329; abhūta -- pubbaŋ DA i.43. -- 1. (adj.) wonderful, marvellous etc. Sn 681 (kiŋ ˚ŋ, combd. with lomahaŋsana); J iv.355 (id.); Th 2, 316 (abbhutaŋ vata vācaŋ bhāsasi = acchariyaŋ ThA 233); Vv 449 (˚dassaneyya); Sdhp 345, 496. -- 2. (nt.) the wonderful, a wonder, marvel S iv.371, also in ˚dhamma (see Cpd.). Very freq. in combn. with acchariyaŋ and a part. of exclamation, viz, acchariyaŋ bho abbhutaŋ bho wonderful indeed & beyond comprehension, strange & stupefying D i.206; acch. vata bho abbh. vata bho D i.60; acch. bhante abbh. A ii.50; aho acch. aho abbh. J i.88; acch. vata abbh. vata Vv 8316. -- Thus also in phrase acchariyā abbhutā dhammā wonderful & extraordinary signs or things M iii.118, 125; A ii.130; iv.198; Miln 8; and in acchariya -- abbhutacitta -- jāta dumbfounded & surprised J i.88; DhA iv.52; PvA 6, 50.
-- dhamma mysterious phenomenon, something wonderful, supernormal; designation of one of the nine angas or divisions of the Buddhist Scriptures (see nava B 2) Vin iii.8; M i.133; A ii.103; iii.86, 177; Pug 43; Miln 344; PvA 2, etc.
Abbhuta2 (nt.) [= abbhuta1 in the sense of invoking strange powers in gambling, thus being under direct spell of the "unknown"] a bet, a wager, only in phrase abbhutaŋ karoti (sahassena) to make a bet or to bet (a thousand, i. e. kahāpaṇa's or pieces of money) Vin iii.138; iv.5; J i.191; v.427; vi.192; PvA 151; & in phrase pañcahi sahassehi abbhutaŋ hotu J vi.193.
Abbhudāharati [abhi + ud + ā + harati] to bring towards, to fetch, to begin or introduce (a conversation) M ii.132.
Abbhudīreti [abhi + ud + īreti] to raise the voice, to utter Th 2, 402; DA i.61; Sdhp 514.
Abbhudeti [abhi + ud + eti] to go out over, to rise A ii.50, 51 (opp. atthaŋ eti, of the sun). -- ppr. abbhuddayaŋ Vv 6417 (= abhi -- uggacchanto VvA 280; abbhusayaŋ ti pi pāṭho).
Abbhuddhunāti [abhi + ud + dhunāti] to shake very much Vv 649 (= adhikaŋ uddhunāti VvA 278).
Abbhunnadita [pp. of abhi + ud + nadati] resounding, resonant Th 1, 1065).
Abbhunnamati [abhi, + ud + namati] to, spring up, burst forth D ii.164. -- pp. abbhuṇṇata (& ˚unnata), q. v. <-> Caus. abbhunnāmeti to stiffen, straighten out, hold up, erect D i.120 (kāyaŋ one's body); A ii.245 (id.); D i.126 (patodalaṭṭhiŋ opp. apanāmeti to bend down).
Abbhuyyāta [pp. of abbhuyyāti] marched against, attacked Vin i.342; M ii.124.
Abbhuyyāti [abhi + up + yāti of yā] to go against, to go against, to march (an army) against, to attack S i.82 (aor ˚uyyāsi). -- pp. abbhuyyāta (q. v.).
Abbhusūyaka (adj.) [abhi + usūyā + ka] zealous, showing zeal, endeavouring in ( -- ˚) Pgdp 101.
Abbhussakati & ˚usukkati [abhi + ud + ṣvaṣk, see sak- kati] to go out over, rise above (acc.), ascend, freq. in phrase ādicco nabhaŋ abbhussakkamāno M i.317 = S iii.156 = It 20. -- See also S i.65; v.44; A i.242 (same simile); v.22 (id.).
Abbhussahanatā (f.) [abstr. fr. abhi + *utsahana, cp. ussāha] instigation, incitement Vin ii.88.
Abbhusseti [abhi + ud + seti of śī] to rise; v. l. at Vv 6417 according to VvA 280: abbhuddayaŋ (see abbhudeti) abbhussayan ti pi pāṭho.
Abbheti [abhi + ā + i] to rehabilitate a bhikkhu who has been suspended for breach of rules Vin ii.7 (abbhento), 33 (abbheyya); iii.112 (abbheti), 186 = iv.242 (abbhetabba) -- pp. abbhita (q. v.). See also abbhāna.
Abbhokāsa [abhi + avakāsa] the open air, an open & un- sheltered space D i.63 (= alagganatthena a. viya DA i.180), 71 (=acchanna DA i.210), 89; M iii.132; A ii.210; iii.92; iv.437, v.65; Sn p. 139 (˚e nissinna sitting in the open) J i.29, 215; Pug 57.
Abbhokāsika (adj.) [fr. abbhokāsa] belonging to the open air, one who lives in the open, the practice of certain ascetics. D i.167; M i.282; A iii.220; Vin v.131, 193; J iv.8 (+ nesajjika); Pug 69; Miln 20, 342. (One of the 13 Dhutaŋgas). See also Nd1 188; Nd2 587.
-- anga the practice or system of the "campers -- out" Nd1 558 (so read for abbhokāsi -- kankhā, cp. Nd1 188).
Abbhokiṇṇa [pp. of abbhokirati] see abbokiṇṇa.
Abbhokirati [abhi + ava + kirati] to sprinkle over, to cover, bedeck Vv 59 (= abhi -- okirati abhippakirati), 3511 (v. l. abbhuk˚). Cp. abbhukkirati & abbhokkiraṇa <-> pp. abbhokiṇṇa see under abbokiṇṇa.
Abbhokuṭika spelling at DhA iv.8 for abbhākuṭika.
Abbhokkiraṇa (nt.) [fr. abbhokirati] in naṭānaŋ a. "turnings of dancers" DA i.84 in expln of sobha -- nagarakaŋ of D i.6.
Abbhocchinna (besides abbocch˚, q.v. under abbokiṇṇa2) [a + vi + ava + chinna] not cut off, uninterrupted, continuous J i.470 (v. l. abbo˚); vi.254, 373; Cp. i.63; Miln 72; Vism 362 (bb), 391 (bb).
Abbhohārika see abbo˚.
Aby˚ see avy˚.
Abhabba (adj.) [a + bhavya. The Sk. abhavya has a different meaning] impossible, not likely, unable D iii.13 sq., 19, 26 sq., 133; It 106, 117; Sn 231 (see KhA 189); Dh 32; J i 116; Pug 13.
-- ṭṭhāna a (moral) impossibility of which there are 9 enumd. among things that are not likely to be found in an Arahant's character: see D iii.133 & 235 (where the five first only are given as a set).
Abhabbatā (f.) [abstr. fr. abhabba] an impossibility, unli- kelihood Sn 232, cp. KhA 191.
Abhaya (adj.) [a + bhaya] free from fear or danger, fearless, safe Dh 258. -- nt. abhayaŋ confidence, safety Dh 317, cp. DhA iii.491. For further refs. see bhaya.
Abhi -- [prefix, Vedic abhi, which represents both Idg *m̊bhi, as in Gr. a)mfi/ around, Lat. ambi, amb round about, Oir. imb, Gall. ambi, Ohg. umbi, Ags. ymb, cp. also Vedic (Pāli) abhitaḥ on both sides; and Idg. *obhi, as in Lat. ob towards, against (cp. obsess, obstruct), Goth. bi, Ohg. Ags. bī = E. be -- .
I. Meaning. -- 1. The primary meaning of abhi is that of taking possession and mastering, as contained in E. coming by and over -- coming, thus literally having the function of (a) facing and aggressing = towards, against, on to, at (see II. 1, a); and (b) mastering = over, along over, out over, on top of (see II. 1, b). 2. Out of this is developed the fig. meaning of increasing, i. e., an intensifying of the action implied in the verb (see III. 1). Next to saŋ -- it is the most frequent modification preflx in the meaning of "very much, greatly" as the first part of a double -- prefix cpd. (see III. 2), and therefore often seemingly superfluous, i. e., weakened in meaning, where the second part already denotes intensity as in abhi -- vi -- ji (side by side with vi -- ji), abhi -- ā -- kkhā (side by side with ā -- kkhā), abhi -- anu -- mud (side by side with anu -- mud). In these latter cases abhi shows a purely deictic character corresponding to Ger. her -- bei -- kommen (for bei -- kommen), E. fill up (for fill); e. g., abbhatikkanta (= ati ˚ C.), abbhatīta ("vorbei gegangen"), abbhantara ("with -- in", b -- innen or "in here"), abbhudāharati, abhipūreti ("fill up"), etc. (see also II. 1, c).
II. Lit. Meaning. -- 1. As single pref.: (a) against, to, on to, at -- , viz., abbhatthangata gone towards home, abhighāta striking at, ˚jjhā think at, ˚mana thinking on, ˚mukha facing, turned towards, ˚yāti at -- tack, ˚rūhati ascend, ˚lāsa long for, ˚vadati ad -- dress, ˚sapati ac -- curse, ˚hata hit at. (b) out, over, all around: abbhudeti go out over, ˚kamati exceed, ˚jāti off -- spring, ˚jānāti know all over, ˚bhavati overcome, ˚vaḍḍhati increase, ˚vuṭṭha poured out or over, ˚sandeti make over -- flow, ˚siñcati sprinkle over. (c) abhi has the function of transitivising intrs. verbs after the manner of E. be -- (con -- ) and Ger. er -- , thus resembling in meaning a simple Caus. formation, like the foll.: abhigajjati thunder on, ˚jānāti "er -- kennen" ˚jāyati be -- get, ˚tthaneti = ˚gajjati, ˚nadati "er tönen", ˚nandati approve of (cp. anerkennen), ˚passati con -- template, ˚ramati indulge in, ˚ropeti honour, ˚vuḍḍha increased, ˚saddahati believe in. -- 2. As base in compn. (2nd part of cpd.) abhi occurs only in combn. sam -- abhi (which is, however, of late occurrence and a peeuliarity of later texts, and is still more freq. in BSk.: see under sam -- ).
III. Fig. Meaning (intensifying). -- 1. A single pref.: abhikiṇṇa strewn all over, ˚jalati shine forth, ˚jighacchati be very hungry, ˚tatta much exhausted, ˚tāpa very hot, ˚toseti pleuse greatly, ˚nava quite fresh, ˚nipuṇa very clever, ˚nīla of a deep black, ˚manāpa very pleasant, ˚mangaly very lucky, ˚yobbana full youth, ˚rati great liking, ˚ratta deep red, ˚ruci intense satisfaction, ˚rūpa very handsome (= adhika -- rūpa C.), ˚sambuddha wide and fully -- awake, cp. abbhuddhunāti to shake greatly (= adhikaŋuddh˚ C.). -- As 1st part of a prep. -- cpd. (as modification -- pref.) in foll. combinations: abhi -- ud (abbhud -- ) ˚ati, ˚anu, ˚ava, ˚ā, ˚ni, ˚ppa, ˚vi, ˚saŋ. See all these s. v. and note that the contraction (assimilation before vowel) form of abhi is abbh˚ . -- On its relation to pari, see pari˚, to ava see ava˚.
IV. Dialectical Variation. -- There are dial. variations in the use and meanings of abhi. Vedic abhi besides corresponding to abhi in P. is represented also by ati˚, adhi˚ and anu˚, since all are similar in meaning, and psychologically easily fused and confused (cp. meanings: abhi = on to, towards; ati = up to and beyond; adhi = up to, towards, over; anu = along towards). For all the foll. verbs we find in Pāli one or other of these three prefixes. So ati in ˚jāti, ˚pīḷita, ˚brūheti, ˚vassati, ˚vāyati, ˚veṭheti; also as vv. ll. with abhi -- kīrati, ˚pavassati, ˚roceti, cp. atikkanta -- abhi˚ (Sk. abhikrānta); adhi in ˚patthita, ˚pāteti, ˚ppāya, ˚ppeta, ˚bādheti, ˚bhū, ˚vāha (vice versa P. abhi -- ropeti compared with Sk. adhiropayati); anu in ˚gijjhati, ˚brūheti, ˚sandahati.
Abhikankhati [abhi + kankhati] to desire after, long for, wish for S i.140, 198 (Nibbānaŋ); J ii.428; iv.10, 241; VvA 38, 283; ThA 244. -- pp. abhikankhita. Cp. BSk. abhikānkṣati, e. g. Jtm. p. 221.
Abhikankhanatā (f.) [abhi + kankhana + tā] wishing, longing, desire DA i.242.
Abhikankhita [pp. of abhikankhati] desired, wished, longed for VvA 201 (= abhijjhita).
Abhikankhin (adj.) cp. wishing for, desirous (of -- ˚) Th 2, 360 (sītibhāva˚).
Abhikiṇṇa [pp. of abhikirati] 1. strewn over with ( -- ˚), adorned, covered filled Pv ii.112 (puppha˚). -- 2. overwhelmed, overcome, crushed by ( -- ˚) It 89 (dukkh˚; vv. ll. dukkhâtiṇṇa & otiṇṇa) = A i.147 (which reads dukkhotiṇṇa). See also avatiṇṇa.
Abhikirati -- 1. [Sk. abhikirati] to sprinkle or cover over: see abhikiṇṇa 1. -- 2. [Sk. avakirati, cp. apakiritūna] to overwhelm, destroy, put out, throw away, crush S i.54; Th 1, 598; 2, 447 (ger. ˚kiritūna, reading of C. for T. apa˚, expld. by chaḍḍetvā); Dh 25 (˚kīrati metri causa; dīpaŋ abhikīrati = viddhaŋseti vikirati DhA i.255; v. l. atikirati); J iv.121 (˚kīrati; dīpaŋ = viddhaŋseti C.); vi.541 (nandiyo m˚ abhikīrare = abhikiranti abhikkamanti C.); DhA i.255 (inf. ˚kirituŋ). -- pp. abhikiṇṇa see abhikiṇṇa 2.
Abhikīḷati [abhi + kìḷati] to play (a game), to sport Miln 359 (kīḷaŋ).
Abhikūjita [abhi + kūjita, pp. of kūj] resounding (with the song of birds) Pv ii.123 (cakkavāka˚; so read for kujita). Cp. abhinikūjita.
Abhikkanta (adj. -- n.) [pp. of abhikkamati, in sense of Sk. and also P. atikkanta] (a) (adj.) lit. gone forward, gone out, gone beyond. According to the traditional expln. preserved by Bdhgh. & Dhp (see e. g. DA i.227 = KhA 114 = VvA 52) it is used in 4 applications: abhikkantasaddo khaya (+ pabbaniya KhA) sundarɔ -- âbhirūpa -- abbhanumodanesu dissati. These are: 1. (lit.) gone away, passed, gone out, departed (+ nikkhanta, meaning khaya "wane"), in phrase abhikkantāya rattiyā at the waning of the night Vin i.26; D ii.220; M i.142. 2. excellent, supreme (= sundara) Sn 1118 (˚dassāvin having the most exellent knowledge = aggadassāvin etc. Nd2 76); usually in compar ˚tara (+ paṇītatara) D i.62, 74, 216; A ii.101; iii.350 sq.; v.140, 207 sq.; DA i.171 (= atimanāpatara). 3. pleasing, superb, extremely wonderful, as exclamation ˚ŋ repeated with bho (bhante), showing appreciation (= abbhânumodana) D i.85, 110, 234; Sn p. 15, 24, etc. freq. 4. surpassing, beautiful (always with ˚vaṇṇa = abhirūpa) Vin i.26; D ii.220; M i.142; Pv ii.110 = Vv 91 (= atimanāpa abhirūpa PvA 71); KhA 115 (= abhirūpachavin). -- (b) (nt.) abhikkantaŋ (combd. with and opp. to paṭikkantaŋ) going forward (and backward), approach (and receding) D i.70 (= gamaṇa + nivattana DA i.183); Vin iii.181; A ii.104, 106 sq.; VvA 6.
Abhikkama going forward, approach, going out Pv iv.12 (opp. paṭikkama going back); DhA iii.124 (˚paṭikkama).
Abhikkamati [Vedic abhikramati, abhi + kamati] to go forward, to proceed, approach D i.50 (=abhimukho kamati, gacchati, pavisati DA i.151); ii.147, 256 (abhikkā<-> muŋ aor.); DhA iii.124 (evaŋ ˚itabbaŋ evaŋ paṭikkamitabbaŋ thus to approach & thus to withdraw). -- pp. abhikkanta (q. v.).
Abhikkhaṇa1 (nt.) [fr. abhikkhanati] digging up of the ground M i.143.
Abhikkhaṇa2 (nt.) [abhi + *ikkhaṇa from īkṣ, cp. Sk. abhīkṣṇa of which the eontracted form is P. abhiṇha] only as acc. adv. ˚ŋ constantly, repeated, often Vv 2412 (= abhiṇhaŋ VvA 116); Pv ii.84 (= abhiṇhaŋ bahuso PvA 107); Pug 31; DhA ii.91.
Abhikkhaṇati [abhi + khaṇati] to dig up M i.142.
Abhikkhipati [abhi + khipati] to throw Dāvs iii.60; cp. abhinikkhipati ibid. 12.
Abhigajjati [abhi + gajjati from garj, sound -- root, cp. P. gaggara] (a) to roar, shout, thunder, to shout or roar at (c. acc.) Sn 831 (shouting or railing = gajjanto uggajjanto Nd1 172); ger. abhigajjiya thundering Cp. iii.108. <-> (b) hum, chatter, twitter (of birds); see abhigajjin.
Abhigajjin (adj.) [fr. abhigajjati] warbling, singing, chat- tering Th 1, 1108, 1136.
Abhigamanīya (adj.) [grd. of abhigacchati] to be approached, accessible PvA 9.
Abhigijjhati [abhi + gijjhati] 1. to be greedy for, to crave for, show delight in (c. loc.) Sn 1039 (kāmesu, cp. Nd2 77). -- 2. to envy (acc.) S i.15 (aññam -- aññaŋ).
Abhigīta [pp. of abhigāyati, cp. gīta] 1. sung for. Only in one phrase, gāthābhigītaŋ, that which is gained by singing or chanting verses (Ger. "ersungen") S i.173 = Sn 81 = Miln 228. See SnA 151. -- 2. resounding with, filled with song (of birds) J vi.272 (= abhiruda).
Abhighāta [Sk. abhighāta, abhi + ghāta] (a) striking, slaying, killing PvA 58 (daṇḍa˚), 283 (sakkhara˚). <-> (b) impact, contact DhsA 312 (rūpa˚ etc.).
Abhicetasika (adj.) [abhi + ceto + ika] dependent on the clearest consciousness. On the spelling see ābhic˚ (of jhāna) M i.33, 356; iii.11; S ii.278; A ii.23; v.132. (Spelt. ābhi˚ at M i.33; A iii.114; Vin v.136). See Dial. iii.108.
Abhiceteti [abhi + ceteti] to intend, devise, have in mind J iv.310 (manasā pāpaŋ).
Abhicchanna (adj.) [abhi + channa] covered with, bedecked or adorned with ( -- ˚) J ii.48 (hema -- jāla˚, v. l. abhisañchanna), 370 (id.); Sn 772 (= ucchanna āvuṭa etc. Nd1 24, cp. Nd2 365).
Abhicchita (adj.) [abhi + icchita, cp. Sk. abhīpsita] desired J vi.445 (so read for abhijjhita).
Abhijacca (adj.) [Sk. ābhijātya; abhi + jacca] of noble birth J v.120.
Abhijaneti occasional spelling for abhijāneti.
Abhijappati [abhi + jappati] to wish for, strive after, pray for S i.143 (read asmâbhijappanti & cp. Kindred Sayings p. 180) = J iii.359 (= namati pattheti piheti C.); Ṣn 923, 1046 (+ āsiŋsati thometi; Nd2 79 = jappati & same under icchati). Cp. in meaning abhigijjhati.
Abhijappana (nt.) [doubtful whether to jappati or to japati to mumble, to which belongs jappana in kaṇŋa˚ DA i.97] in hattha˚ casting a spell to make the victim throw up or wring his hands D i.11; DA i.97.
Abhijappā (f.) [abstr. fr. abhijappati, cp. jappā] praying for, wishing, desire, longing Dhs 1059 = Nd2 taṇhā ii.; Dhs 1136.
Abhijappin (adj.) [fr. abhijappati] praying for, desiring A III.353 (kāma -- lābha˚).
Abhijalati [abhi + jalati] to shine forth, ppr. ˚anto res- plendent PvA 189.
Abhijavati [abhi + javati] to be eager, active Sn 668.
Abhijāta (adj.) [abi + jāta] of noble birth, well -- born, S i.69; Vv 293; Miln 359 (˚kulakulīna belonging to a family of high or noble birth).
Abhijāti (f.) [abhi + jāti] 1. Species. Only as t. t. in use by certain non -- Buddhist teachers. They divided mankind into six species, each named after a colour D i.53, 54; A iii.383 ff. (quoted DA i.162) gives details of each species. Two of them, the black and the white, are interpreted in a Buddhist sense at D iii.250, M ii.222, and Netti 158. This interpretation (but not the theory of the six species) has been widely adopted by subsequent Hindu writers. -- 2. Rebirth, descent, Miln 226.
Abhijātika (adj.) [fr. abhijāti] belonging to ones birth or race, born of, being by birth; only in cpd. kaṇhâbhijātika of dark birth, that is, low in the social scale D iii.251 = A iii.348; Sn 563 = Th 1, 833; cp. J P T S. 1893, 11; in sense of "evil disposed or of bad character" at J v.87 (= kāḷaka -- sabhāva C.).
Abhijātitā (f.) [abstr. fr. abhijāti] the fact of being born, descendency VvA 216.
Abhijāna (nt. or m?) [Sk. abhijñāna] recognition, remem- brance, recollection Miln 78. See also abhiññā.
Abhijānāti [abhi + jñā, cp. jānāti & abhiññā] to know by experience, to know fully or thoroughly, to recognise, know of (c. acc.), to be conscious or aware of D i.143; S ii.58, 105, 219, 278; iii.59, 91; iv.50, 324, 399; v.52, 176, 282, 299; Sn 1117 (diṭṭhiŋ Gotamassa na a.); J iv.142; Pv ii.710 = ii.103 (nɔābhijānāmi bhuttaŋ vā pītaŋ); Sdhp 550; etc. -- Pot. abhijāneyya Nd2 78a, & abhijaññā Sn 917, 1059 (= jāneyyāsi SnA 592); aor. abhaññāsi Sn p. 16. -- ppr. abhijānaŋ S iv.19, 89; Sn 788 (= ˚jānanto C.), 1114 (= ˚jānanto Nd2 78b) abhijānitva DhA iv.233; abhiññāya S iv.16; v.392; Sn 534 (sabbadhammaŋ), 743 (jātikkhayaŋ), 1115, 1148; It 91 (dhammaŋ); Dh 166 (atta -- d -- atthaŋ); freq. in phrase sayaŋ abhiññāya from personal knowledge or self -- experience It 97 (v.l. abhiññā); Dh 353; and abhiññā [short form, like ādā for ādāya, cp. upādā] in phrase sayaŋ abhiññā D i.31 (+ sacchikatvā); S ii.217; It 97 (v.l. for ˚abhiññāya), in abhiññā -- vosita perfected by highest knowledge S i.167 = 175 = Dh 423 ("master of supernormal lore" Mrs Rh. D. in kindred S. p. 208; cp. also DhA iv.233); It 47 = 61 = 81, and perhaps also in phrase sabbaŋ abhiññapariññeyya S iv.29. -- grd. abhiññeyya S iv.29; Sn 558 (˚ŋ abhiññātaŋ known is the knowable); Nd2 s.v.; DhA iv.233. -- pp. abhiññāta (q. v.).
Abhijāyati [abhi + jāyati, Pass. of jan, but in sense of a Caus. = janeti] to beget, produce, effect, attain, in phrase akaṇhaŋ asukkaŋ Nibbānaŋ a. D iii.251; A iii.384 sq. At Sn 214 abhijāyati means "to behave, to be", cp. SnA 265 (abhijāyati = bhavati).
Abhijigiŋsati [abhi + jigiŋsati] to wish to overcome, to covet J vi.193 (= jinituŋ icchati C). Burmese scribes spell ˚jigīsati; Th 1, 743 ("cheat"? Mrs Rh. D.; "vernichten" Neumann). See also abhijeti, and nijigiŋsanatā.
Abhijighacchati [abhi + jighacchati] to be very hungry PvA 271.
Abhijīvanika (adj.) [abhi + jīvana + ika] belonging to one's livehood, forming one's living Vin i.187 (sippa).
Abhijīhanā (f.) [abhi + jīhanā of jeh to open ones mouth] strenuousness, exertion, strong endeavour J vi.373 (viriyakaraṇa C.).
Abhijeti [abhi + jayati] to win, acquire, conquer J vi.273 (ābhi˚ metri causā).
Abhijoteti [abhi + joteti] to make clear, explain, illuminate J v.339.
Abhijjanaka (adj.) [a + bhijjana + ka, from bhijja, grd. of bhid] not to be broken, not to be moved or changed, uninfluenced J ii.170; DhA iii.189.
Abhijjamāna (adj.) [ppr. passive of a + bhid, see bhindati] that which is not being broken up or divided. In the stock descrīption of the varieties of the lower Iddhi the phrase udake pi abhijjamāne gacchati is doubtful. The principal passages are D i.78, 212; iii.112, 281; M i.34, 494; ii.18; A i.170, 255; iii.17; v.199; S ii 121; v.264. In about half of these passages the reading is abhijjamāno. The various rcadings show that the MSS also are equally divided on this point. Bdgh. (Vism 396) reads ˚māne, and explains it, relying on Ps ii.208, as that sort of water in which a man does not sink. Pv iii.11 has the same idiom. Dhammapāla's note on that (PvA 169) is corrupt. At D i.78 the Colombo ed. 1904, reads abhejjamāne and tr. ʻ not dividing (the water) ʼ; at D i.212 it reads abhijjamāno and tr. ʻ not sinking (in the water) ʼ.
Abhijjhā (f.) [fr. abhi + dhyā (jhāyati1), cp. Sk. abhidhyāna], covetousness, in meaning almost identical with lobha (cp. Dhs. trsl. 22) D i.70, 71 (˚āya cittaŋ parisodheti he cleanses his heart from coveting; abhijjhāya = abl.; cp. DA i.211 = abhijjhāto); M i.347 (id.); D iii.49, 71 sq., 172, 230, 269; S iv.73, 104, 188, 322 (adj. vigatɔâbhijjha), 343 (˚āyavipāka); A i.280; iii.92; v.251 sq.; It 118; Nd1 98 (as one of the 4 kāya -- ganthā, q. v.); Nd2 taṇhā ii.1; Pug 20, 59; Dhs 1136 (˚kāyagantha); Vbh 195, 244 (vigatɔâbhijjha), 362, 364, 391; Nett 13; DhA i.23; PvA 103, 282; Sdhp 56, 69. -- Often combd with ˚domanassa covetousness & discontent, e. g. at D iii.58, 77, 141, 221, 276; M i.340; iii.2; A i.39, 296; ii.16, 152; iv.300 sq., 457 sq.; v.348, 351; Vbh 105, 193 sq. -- anabhijjhā absence of covetousness Dhs 35, 62. -- See also anupassin, gantha, domanassa, sīla.
Abhijjhātar see abhijjhitar.
Abhijjhāti [cp. abhidyāti, abhi + jhāyati1; see also abhij- jhāyati] to wish for (acc.), long for, covet S v.74 (so read for abhijjhati); ger. abhijjhāya J vi.174 (= patthetvā C.). -- pp. abhijjhita.
Abhijjhāyati [Sk. abhidhyāyati, abhi + jhāyati1; see also abhijjhāti] to wish for, covet (c. acc.). Sn 301 (aor. abhijjhāyiŋsu = abhipatthayamāna jhāyiŋsu Sn A 320).
Abhijjhālū (& ˚u) (adj.) [cp. jhāyin from jhāyati1; abhijj- hālu with ˚ālu for ˚āgu which in its turn is for āyin. The B.Sk. form is abhidyālu, e. g. Divy 301, a curious reconstruction] covetous D i.139; iii.82; Ṣ ii.168; iii.93; A i.298; ii.30, 59, 220 (an˚ + avyapannacitto sammādiṭṭhiko at conclusion of sīla); v.92 sq., 163, 286 sq.; It 90, 91; Pug 39, 40.
Abhijjhiṭṭa v. l. at DhA iv.101 for ajjhiṭṭha.
Abhijjhita [pp. of abhijjhāti] coveted, J. vi.445; usually neg. an˚ not coveted, Vin i.287; Sn 40 (= anabhipatthita Sn A 85; cp. Nd2 38); Vv 474 (= na abhikankhita VvA 201).
Abhijjhitar [n. ag. fr. abhijjhita in med. function] one who covets M i.287 (T. abhijjhātar, v. l. ˚itar) = A v.265 (T. ˚itar, v. l. ˚ātar).
Abhiñña (adj.) (usually -- ˚) [Sk. abhijña] knowing, pos- sessed of knowledge, esp. higher or supernormal knowledge (abhiññā), intelligent; thus in chalabhiñña one who possesses the 6 abhiññās Vin iii.88; dandh˚ of sluggish intellect D iii.106; A ii.149; v.63 (opp. khipp˚); mah˚ of great insight S ii.139. -- Compar. abhiññatara S v.159 (read bhiyyo ˚bhiññataro).
Abhiññatā (f.) [fr. abhiññā] in cpd. mahā˚ state or condition of great intelligence or supernormal knowledge S iv.263; V.175, 298 sq.
Abhiññā1 (f.) [fr. abhi + jñā, see jānāti]. Rare in the older texts. It appears in two contexts. Firstly, certain conditions are said to conduce (inter alia) to serenity, to special knowledge (abhiññā), to special wisdom, and to Nibbāna. These conditions precedent are the Path (S v.421 = Vin i.10 = S iv.331), the Path + best knowledge and full emancipation (A v.238), the Four Applications of Mindfulness (S v.179) and the Four Steps to Iddhi (S. v.255). The contrary is three times stated; wrong -- doing, priestly superstitions, and vain speculation do not conduce to abhiññā and the rest (D iii.131; A iii.325 sq. and v.216). Secondly, we find a list of what might now be called psychic powers. It gives us 1, Iddhi (cp. levitation); 2, the Heavenly Ear (cp. clairaudience); 3, knowing others' thoughts (cp. thought -- reading); 4, recollecting one's previous births; 5, knowing other people's rebirths; 6, certainty of emancipation already attained (cp. final assurance). This list occurs only at D iii.281 as a list of abhiññās. It stands there in a sort of index of principal subjects appended at the end of the Dīgha, and belongs therefore to the very close of the Nikāya period. But it is based on older material. Descriptions of each of the six, not called abhiññā's, and interspersed by expository sentences or paragraphs, are found at D i.89 sq. (trsl. Dial. i.89 sq.); M i.34 (see Buddh. Suttas, 210 sq.); A i.255, 258 = iii.17, 280 = iv.421. At S i.191; Vin ii.16; Pug 14, we have the adj. chaḷabhiññā ("endowed with the 6 Apperceptions"). At S ii.216 we have five, and at S v.282, 290 six abhiññā's mentioned in glosses to the text. And at S ii.217, 222 a bhikkhu claims the 6 powers. See also M ii.11; iii.96. It is from these passages that the list at D iii. has been made up, and called abhiññā's.
Afterwards the use of the word becomes stereotyped. In the Old Commentaries (in the Canon), in the later ones (of the 5th cent. a.d.), and in medieval and modern Pāli, abhiññā, nine times out ten, means just the powers given in this list. Here and there we find glimpses of the older, wider meaning of special, supernormal power of apperception and knowledge to be acquired by long training in life aud thought. See Nd1 108, 328 (expln. of ñāṇa); Nd2 s. v. and N0. 466; Ps i.35; ii.156, 189; Vbh 228, 334; Pug 14; Nett 19, 20; Miln 342; Vism 373; Mhvs xix.20; DA i.175; DhA ii.49; iv.30; Sdhp 228, 470, 482. See also the discussion in the Cpd. 60 sp., 224 sq. For the phrase sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā and abhiññā -- vosita see abhijānāti. The late phrase yathɔ abhiññaṃ means ʻ as you please, according to liking, as you like ʼ, J v.365 (= yathādhippāyaṃ yathāruciṃ C.). For abhiññā in the use of an adj. (˚abhiñña) see abhiñña.
Abhiññā2 ger. of abhijānāti.
Abhiññāta [pp. of abhijānāti] 1. known, recognised Sn 588 (abhiññeyyaŋ ˚ŋ). -- 2. (well) -- known, distinguished D i.89 (˚kolañña = pākaṭa -- kulaja DA i.252), 235; Sn p. 115.
Abhiññeyya grd. of abhijānāti.
Abhiṭhāna (nt.) [abhi + ṭhāna, cp. abhitiṭṭhati; lit. that which stands out above others] a great or deadly crime. Only at Sn 231 = Kh vi.10 (quoted Kvu 109). Six are there mentioned, & are explained (KhA 189) as "matricide, parricide, killing an Arahant, causing schisms, wounding a Buddha, following other teachers". For other relations & suggestions see Dhs trsl. 267. -- See also ānantarika.
Abhiṇhaŋ (adv.) [contracted form of abhikkhaṇaŋ] repeat- edly, continuous, often M i.442 (˚āpattika a habitual offender), 446 (˚kāraṇa continuous practice); Sn 335 (˚saŋvāsa continuous living together); J i.190; Pug 32; DhA ii.239; VvA 116 (= abhikkhaṇa), 207, 332; PvA 107 (= abhikkhaṇaŋ). Cp. abhiṇhaso.
Abhiṇhaso (adv.) [adv. case fr. abhiṇha; cp. bahuso = Sk. bahuśaḥ] always, ever S i.194; Th 1, 25; Sn 559, 560, 998.
Abhitakketi [abhi + takketi] to search for Dāvs v.4.
Abhitatta [pp. of abhi +tapati] scorched (by heat), dried up, exhausted, in phrases uṇha˚ Vin ii.220; Miln 97, and ghamma˚ S ii.110, 118; Sn 1014; J ii.223; VvA 40; PvA 114.
Abhitāpa [abhi + tāpa] extreme heat, glow; adj. very hot Vin iii.83 (sīsa˚ sunstroke); M i.507 (mahā˚ very hot); Miln 67 (mahābhitāpatara much hotter); Pv iv.18 (mahā˚, of niraya).
Abhitāḷita [abhi + tāḷita fr. tāḷeti] hammered to pieces, beaten, struck Vism 231 (muggara˚).
Abhitiṭṭhati [abhi + tiṭṭhati] to stand out supreme, to excel, surpass D ii.261; J vi.474 (abhiṭṭhāya = abhibhavitvā C.).
Abhitunna (tuṇṇa) [not as Morris, J.P.T.S. 1886, 135, suggested fr. abhi + tud, but acc. to Kern, Toev. p. 4 fr. abhi + tūrv. (Cp. turati & tarati2 and Ved. turvati). Thus the correct spelling is ˚tuṇṇa = Sk. abhitūrṇa. The latter occurs as v. l. under the disguise of (sok -- )âhituṇḍa for ˚abhituṇṇa at M. Vastu iii.2]. Overwhelmed, overcome, overpowered S ii.20; Ps i.129 (dukkha˚), 164; J i.407; 509 (˚tuṇṇa); ii.399, 401; iii.23 (soka˚); iv.330; v.268; Sdhp 281.
Abhito (indecl.) adv. case fr. prep. abhi etym.]. -- 1. round about, on both sides J vi.535 (= ubhayapassesu C.), 539. -- 2. near, in the presence of Vv 641 (= samīpe VvA 275).
Abhitoseti [abhi + toseti] to please thoroughly, to satisfy, gratify Sn 709 (= atīva toseti Sn A 496).
Abhitthaneti [abhi + thaneti] to roar, to thunder J i.330, 332 = Cp. iii.107.
Abhittharati [abhi + tarati2, evidently wrong for abhittarati] to make haste Dh 116 (= turitaturitaŋ sīghasīghaŋ karoti DhA iii.4).
Abhitthavati [abhi + thavati] to praise J i.89; iii.531; Dāvs iii.23; DhA i.77; PvA 22; cp. abhitthunati.
Abhitthavana (nt.) [fr. prec.] praise Th A 74.
Abhitthunati [abhi + thunati; cp. abhitthavati] to praise J i.17 (aor abhitthuniŋsu); cp. thunati 2. -- pp. ˚tthuta DhA i.88.
Abhida1 (adj.) as attr. of sun & moon at M ii.34, 35 is doubtful in reading & meaning; vv. ll. abhidosa & abhidesa, Neumann trsl. "unbeschränkt". The context seems to require a meaning like "full, powerful" or unbroken, unrestricted (abhijja or abhīta "fearless"?") or does abhida represent Vedic abhidyu heavenly?
Abhida2 Only in the difficult old verse D ii.107 (= S v.263 = A iv.312 = Nd 64 = Nett 60 = Divy 203). Aorist 3rd sg. fr. bhindati he broke.
Abhidassana (nt.) [abhi + dassana] sight, appearance, show J vi.193.
Abhideyya in sabba˚ at PvA 78 is with v. l. BB to be read sabbapātheyyaŋ.
Abhidosa (˚ -- ) the evening before, last night; ˚kālakata M i.170 = J i.81; ˚gata gone last night J vi.386 (= hiyyo paṭhama -- yāme C.).
Abhidosika belonging to last night (of gruel) Vin iii.15; Miln 291. See ābhi˚.
Abhiddavati [abhi + dru, cp. dava2] to rush on, to assail Mhvs 6, 5; Dāvs iii.47.
Abhidhamati [abhi + dhamati, cp. Sk. abhi˚ & api -- dhamati] blow on or at A i.257.
Abhidhamma [abhi + dhamma] the "special Dhamma," i. e., 1. theory of the doctrine, the doctrine classified, the doctrine pure and simple (without any admixture of literary grace or of personalities, or of anecdotes, or of arguments ad personam), Vin i.64, 68; iv.144; iv.344. Coupled with abhivinaya, D iii.267; M i.272. -- 2. (only in the Chronicles and Commentaries) name of the Third Piṭaka, the third group of the canonical books. Dpvs v.37; PvA 140. See the detailed discussion at DA i.15, 18 sq. [As the word abhidhamma standing alone is not found in Sn or S or A, and only once or twice in the Dialogues, it probably came into use only towards the end of the period in which the 4 great Nikāyas grew up.]
-- kathā discourse on philosophical or psychological matters, M i.214, 218; A iii.106, 392. See dhammakathā.
Abhidhammika see ābhidhammika.
Abhidhara (adj.) [abhi + dhara] firm, bold, in ˚māna firm- minded Dh p. 81 (acc. to Morris J.P.T.S. 1886, 135; not verified).
Abhidhāyin (adj.) [abhi + dhāyin fr. dhā]" putting on", designing, calling, meaning Pgdp 98.
Abhidhāreti [abhi + dhāreti] to hold aloft J i.34 = Bu iv.1.
Abhidhāvati [abhi + dhāvati] to run towards, to rush about, rush on, hasten Vin ii.195; S i.209; J ii.217; iii.83; DhA iv.23.
Abhidhāvin (adj.) fr. abhidhāvati] "pouring in", rushing on, running J vi.559.
Abhinata [pp. of abhi + namati] bent, (strained, fig. bent on pleasure M i.386 (+ apanata); S i.28 (id.; Mrs. Rh. D. "strained forth", cp. Kindred S i.39). See also apanata.
Abhinadati [abhi + nadati] to resound, to be full of noise J vi.531. Cp. abhinādita.
Abhinandati [abhi + nandati] to rejoice at, find pleasure in (acc.), approve of, be pleased or delighted with (acc.) D i.46 (bhāsitaŋ), 55 (id.), 158, 223; M i.109, 458; S i.32 (annaŋ), 57, 14, (cakkhuŋ, rūpe etc.); A iv.411; Th 1, 606; Dh 75, 219; Sn 1054, 1057, 1111; Nd2 82; Miln 25; DA i.160; DhA iii.194 (aor. abhinandi, opp. paṭikkosi) VvA 65 (vacanaŋ). -- pp. abhinandita (q. v.). <-> Often in combn. with abhivadati (q. v.).
Abhinandana (nt.) & ˚ā (f.) [fr. abhinandati, cp. nandanā], pleasure, delight, enjoyment D i.244; M i.498; J iv.397.
Abhinandita [pp. of abhinandati] only in an˚ not enjoyed, not (being) an object of pleasure S iv.213 = It 38; S v. 319.
Abhinandin (adj.) [fr. abhinandati, cp. nandin] rejoicing at, finding pleasure in (loc. or -- ˚), enjoying A ii.54 (piyarūpa); esp. freq. in phrase (taṇhā) tatratatrɔâbhinandinī finding its pleasure in this or that [cp. B.Sk. tṛṣṇā tatra -- tatrɔâbhinandinī M Vastu iii.332] Vin i.10; S v.421; Ps ii.147; Nett 72, etc.
Abhinamati [abhi + namati] to bend. -- pp. abhinata (q.v.).
Abhinaya [abhi + naya] a dramatic representation VvA 209 (sākhā˚).
Abhinava (adj.) [abhi + nava] quite young, new or fresh Vin iii.337; J ii.143 (devaputta), 435 (so read for accuṇha in expln of paccaggha; v.v. ll. abbhuṇha & abhiṇha); ThA 201 (˚yobbana = abhiyobbana); PvA 40 (˚saṇṭhāna), 87 (= paccaggha) 155.
Abhinādita [pp. of abhinādeti, Caus. of abhi + nad; see nadati] resounding with ( -- ˚), filled with the noise (or song) of (birds) J vi.530 (= abhinadanto C.); PvA 157 (= abhiruda).
Abhinikūjita (adj.) [abhi + nikūjita] resounding with, full of the noise of (birds) J v.232 (of the barking of a dog), 304 (of the cuckoo); so read for ˚kuñjita T.). Cp. abhikūjita.
Abhinikkhamati [abhi + nikkhamati] to go forth from (abl.), go out, issue Dhs A 91; esp. fig. to leave the household life, to retire from the world Sn 64 (= gehā abhinikkhamitvā kāsāya -- vattho hutvā Sn A 117).
Abhinikkhamana (nt.) [abhi + nikkhamana] departure, going away, esp. the going out into monastic life, retirement, renunciation. Usually as mahā˚ the great renunciation J i.61; PvA 19.
Abhinikkhipati [abhi + nikkhipati] to lay down, put down Davs iii.12, 60.
Abhiniggaṇhanā (f.) [abstr. fr. abhiniggaṇhāti] holding back Vin iii.121 (+ abhinippīḷanā).
Abhiniggaṇhāti [abhi + niggaṇhāti] to hold back, restrain, prevent, prohibit; always in combn. with abhinippīḷeti M i.120; A v.230. -- Cp. abhiniggaṇhanā.
Abhinindriya [vv. ll. at all passages for ahīnindriya] doubtful meaning. The other is expld by Bdhgh at DA i.120 as paripuṇṇ˚; and at 222 as avikal -- indriya not defective, perfect sense -- organ. He must have read ahīn˚. Abhi -- n -- indriya could only be expld as "with supersenseorgans", i. e. with organs of supernormal thought or perception, thus coming near in meaning to *abhiññindriya; We should read ahīn˚ throughout D i.34, 77, 186, 195. ii.13; M ii.18; iii.121; Nd2 under pucchā6 (only ahīn˚).
Abhininnāmeti [abhi + ninnāmeti cp. BSk. abhinirṇāmayati Lal. V. 439] to bend towards, to turn or direct to D i.76 (cittaŋ ñāṇa -- dassanāya); M i.234; S i.123; iv.178; Pug 60.
Abhinipajjati [abhi + nipajjati] to lie down on Vin iv.273 (+ abhinisīdati); A iv.188 (in = acc. + abhinisīdati); Pug 67 (id.).
Abhinipatati [abhi + nipatati] to rush on (to) J ii.8.
Abhinipāta ( -- matta) destroying, hurting (?) at Vbh 321 is expld. by āpātha -- matta [cp. Divy 125 śastrâbhinipāta splitting open or cutting with a knife].
Abhinipātana (nt.) [fr. abhi -- ni -- pāteti in daṇḍa -- sattha˚ attacking with stick or knife Nd2 5764.
Abhinipātin (adj.) [abhi + nipātin] falling on io ( -- ˚) J ii.7.
Abhinipuṇa (adj.) [abhi + nipuṇa] very thorough, very clever D iii.167.
Abhinippajjati [abhi + nippajjati] to be produced, accrue, get, come (to) M i.86 (bhogā abhinipphajjanti: sic) = Nd2 99 (has n'âbhinippajjanti). -- Cp. abhinipphādeti.
Abhinippata at J vi.36 is to be read abhinippanna (so v. l. BB.).
Abhinippatta at Dhs 1035, 1036 is to be read abhinibbatta.
Abhinippanna (& ˚nipphanna) [abhi + nippanna, pp. of ˚nippajjati] produced, effected, accomplished D ii.223 (siloka); J vi.36 (so read for abhinippata); Miln 8 (pph.).
Abhinippīḷanā (f.) [abstr. to abhinippīḷeti, cp. nippīḷana] pressing, squeezing, taking hold of Vin iii.121 (+ abhiniggaṇhanā).
Abhinippīḷeti [abhi + nippīḷeti] to squeeze, crush, subdue Vism 399; often in combn. with abhiniggaṇhāti M i. 120; A v.230.
Abhinipphatti (f.) [abhi + nipphatti] production, effecting D ii.283 (v. l. ˚nibbatti).
Abhinipphādeti [abhi + nipphādeti] to bring into existence, produce, effect, work, perform D i.78 (bhājana -- vikatiŋ); Vin ii.183 (iddhiŋ); S v.156, 255; Miln 39.
Abhinibbatta [abhi + nibbatta, pp. of abhinibbattati] repro- duced, reborn A iv.40, 401; Nd2 256 (nibbatta abhi˚ pātubhūta); Dhs 1035, 1036 (so read for˚ nippatta); VvA 9 (puññɔânubhāva˚ by the power of merit).
Abhinibbattati [abhi + nibbattati] to become, to be repro- duced, to result Pug 51. -- pp. abhinibbatta. -- Cp. B.Sk. wrongly abhinivartate].
Abhinibbatti (f.) [abhi + nibbatti] becoming, birth, rebirth, D i.229; ii.283 (v. l. for abhinipphatti) S ii.65 (punabbhava˚), 101 (id.); iv.14, 215; A v.121; PvA 35.
Abhinibbatteti [abhi + nibbatteti, caus. of ˚nibbattati] to produce, cause, cause to become S iii.152; A v.47; Nd2 under jāneti.
Abhinibbijjati [either Med. fr. nibbindati of vid for *nir- vidyate (see nibbindati B), or secondary formation fr. ger. nibbijja. Reading however not beyond all doubt] to be disgusted with, to avoid, shun, turn away from Sn 281 (T. abhinibbijjayātha, v. l. BB˚ nibbijjiyātha & ˚nibbajjiyātha, SnA expls. by vivajjeyyātha mā bhajeyyātha; v. l. BB. abhinippajjiyā) = A iv.172 (T. abhinibbajjayātha, vv. ll. ˚nibbajjeyyātha & ˚nibbijjayātha); ger. abhinibbijja Th 2, 84.
Abhinibbijjhati [abhi + nibbijjhati] to break quite through (of the chick coming through the shell of the egg) Vin iii.3; M i.104 = S iii.153 (read˚ nibbijjheyyun for nibbijjeyyun -- Cp. Buddh. Suttas 233, 234.
Abhinibbidā (f.) [abhi + nibbidā; confused with abhinibb- hidā] disgust with the world, taedium Nett 61 (taken as abhinibbhidā, according to expln. as "padālanā -- paññatti avijj˚aṇḍa -- kosānaŋ"), 98 (so MSS, but C. abhinibbidhā).
Abhinibbuta (adj.) [abhi + nibbuta] perfectly cooled, calmed, serene, esp. in two phrases, viz. diṭṭha dhamm' âbhinibbuta A i.142 = M iii.187; Sn 1087; Nd2 83, and abhinibbutatta of cooled mind Sn 343 (= apariḍayhamāna -- citta SnA 347), 456, 469, 783. Also at Sdhp. 35.
Abhinibbhidā (f.) [this the better, although not correct spelling; there exists a confusion with abhinibbidā, therefore spelling also abhinibbidhā (Vin iii.4, C. on Nett 98). To abhinibbijjhati, cp. B.Sk. abhinirbheda M Vastu i.272, which is wrongly referred to bhid instead of vyadh.] the successful breaking through (like the chick through the shell of the egg), coming into (proper) life Vin iii.4; M i.104; 357; Nett 98 (C. reading). See also abhinibbidā.
Abhinimantanatā (f.) [abstr. to abhinimanteti] speaking to, adressing, invitation M i.331.
Abhinimanteti [abhi + nimanteti] to invite to (c. instr.), to offer to D i.61 (āsanena).
Abhinimmadana (nt.) [abhi + nimmadana] crushing, sub- duing, levelling out M iii.132; A iv.189 sq.
Abhinimmita [abhi + nimmita, pp. of abhinimmināti] created (by magic) Vv 161 (pañca rathā satā; cp. VvA 79).
Abhinimmināti [abhi + nimmināti, cp. BSk. abhinirmāti Jtm 32; abhinirminoti Divy 251; abhinirmimīte Divy 166] to create (by magic), produce, shape, make S iii.152 (rūpaŋ); A i.279 (oḷārikaŋ attabhāvaŋ); Nd2 under pucchā6 (rūpaŋ manomayaŋ); VvA 16 (mahantaŋ hatthi -- rāja -- vaṇṇaŋ). -- pp. abhinimmita (q. v.).
Abhiniropana (nt.) & ā (f.) [fr. abhiniropeti] fixing one's mind upon, application of the mind Ps i.16, 21, 30, 69, 75, 90; Vbh 87; Dhs 7, 21, 298 (cp. Dhs trsl. ii.19). See also abhiropana.
Abhiniropeti [abhi + niropeti] to implant, fix into (one's mind), inculcate Nett 33.
Abhinivajjeti [abhi + nivajjeti] to avoid, get rid of D iii. 113; M i.119, 364, 402; S v.119, 295, 318; A iii.169 sq.; It 81.
Abhinivassati [abhi + ni + vassati fr. vṛṣ] lit. to pour out in abundance, fig. to produce in plenty. Cp i.103 (kalyāṇe good deeds).
Abhiniviṭṭha (adj.) [abhi + niviṭṭha, pp. of abhi -- nivisati] "settled in", attached to, clinging on Nd2 152 (gahita parāmaṭṭha a.); PvA 267 (= ajjhāsita Pv iv.84).
Abhinivisati [abhi + nivisati] to cling to, adhere to, be attached to Nd1 308, 309 (parāmasati +). -- pp. abhiniviṭṭha; cp. also abhinivesa.
Abhinivesa [abhi + nivesa, see nivesa2 & cp. nivesana] "settling in", i. e. wishing for, tendency towards ( -- ˚), inclination, adherence; as adj. liking, loving, being given or inclined to D iii.230; M i.136, 251; S ii.17; iii.10, 13, 135, 161, 186 (saŋyojana˚ iv.50; A iii.363 (paṭhavī˚, adj.); Nd2 227 (gāha parāmasa +); Pug 22; Vbh 145; Dhs 381, 1003, 1099; Nett 28; PvA 252 (micchā˚), 267 (taṇhā˚); Sdhp 71. -- Often combd. with adhiṭṭhāna e. g. S ii.17; Nd2 176, and in phrase idaŋ -- saccɔ âbhinivesa adherence to one's dogmas, as one of the 4 Ties: see kāyagantha and cp. Cpd. 171 n. 5.
Abhinisīdati [abhi + nisīdati] to sit down by or on (acc.), always combd. with abhinipajjati Vin iii.29; iv.273; A v.188; Pug 67.
Abhinissaṭa (pp.) [abhi + nissaṭa] escaped Th 1, 1089.
Abhinihata (pp.) [abhi + nihata] oppressed. crushed, slain J iv.4.
Abhinīta (pp.) [pp. of abhi -- neti] led to, brought to, obliged by ( -- ˚) M i.463 = Miln 32 (rājā & cora˚); M i.282; S iii.93; Th 1, 350 = 435 (vātaroga˚ "foredone with cramping pains" Mrs. Rk. D.); Pug 29; Miln 362.
Abhinīla (adj.) [abhi + nīla] very black, deep black, only with ref. to the eyes, in phrase ˚netta with deep -- black eyes D ii.18; iii.144, 167 sq. [cp. Sp. Av. Ś i.367 & 370 abhinīla -- padma -- netra]; Th 2, 257 (nettā ahesuŋ abbinīla -- m -- āyatā).
Abhinīhanati [abhi + nis + han, cp. Sk. nirhanti] to drive away, put away, destroy, remove, avoid M i.119 (in phrase āṇiŋ a. abhinīharati abhinivajjeti).
Abhinīharati [abhi + nīharati] 1. to take out, throw out M i.119 (see abhinīhanati). -- 2. to direct to, to apply to (orig. to isolate? Is reading correct?) in phrase ñāṇadassanāya cittaŋ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti D i.76 (= tanninnaŋ tappoṇaŋ karoti DA i.220, 224; v. l. abhini˚) Cp. the latter phrase also in BSk. as abhijñâbhinirhāra Av. Ś ii.3 (see ref. & note Index p. 221); and the pp. abhinirhṛta (ṛddhiḥ) in Divy 48, 49 to obtain? Ind.), 264 (take to burial), 542.
Abhinīhāra [abhi + nīhāra, to abhinīharati; cp. BSk. sarīrɔ âbhinirhāra taking (the body) out to burial, lit. meaning, see note on abhinīharati] being bent on ("downward force" Dhs trsl. 242), i. e. taking oneself out to, way of acting, (proper) behaviour, endeavour, resolve, aspiration S iii.267 sq. (˚kusala); A ii.189; iii.311; iv.34 (˚kusala); J i.14 (Buddhabhāvāya a. resolve to become a Buddha), 15 (Buddhattāya); Ps i.61 sq.; ii.121; Nett 26; Miln 216; DhA i.392; ii.82 (kata˚).
Abhipattika (adj.) [fr. abhipatti] one who has attained, attaining ( -- ˚), getting possession of S i.200 (devakañña˚).
Abhipatthita (pp.) [fr. abhipattheti] hoped, wished, longed for Miln 383; SnA 85.
Abhipattheti [abhi + pattheti] to hope for, long for, wish for Kh viii.10; SnA 320; DhA i.30. -- pp. abhipatthita (q. v.).
Abhipassati [abhi + passati] to have regard for, look for, strive after A i.147 (Nibbānaŋ); iii.75; Sn 896 (khema˚), 1070 (rattamahā˚) Nd1 308; Nd2 428; J vi.370.
Abhipāteti [abhi + pāteti] to make fall, to bring to fall, to throw J ii.91 (kaṇḍaŋ).
Abhipāruta (adj.) [abhi + pāruta, pp. of abhipārupati] dressed Miln 222.
Abhipāleti [abhi + pāleti] to protect Vv 8421, cp. VvA 341.
Abhipīḷita (pp.) [fr. abhipiḷeti] crushed, squeezed Sdhp 278, 279.
Abhipīḷeti [abhi + pīḷeti] to crush, squeeze Miln 166. - pp. abhipīḷita (q. v.).
Abhipucchati [abhi + pucchati] Sk. abhipṛcchati] to ask J iv.18.
Abhipūreti [abhi + pūreti] to fill (up) Miln 238; Dāvs iii. 60 (paŋsūhi).
Abhippakiṇṇa [pp. of abhippakirati] completely strewn (with) J i.62.
Abhippakirati [abhi + pakirati] to strew over, to cover (completely) D ii.137 (pupphāni Tathāgatassa sarīraŋ okiranti ajjhokiranti a.); VvA 38 (for abbhokirati Vv 59). <-> pp. abhippakiṇṇa (q. v.).
Abhippamodati [abhi + pamodati] to rejoice (intrs.); to please, satisfy (trs, c. acc.) M i.425; S v.312, 330; A v.112; J iii 530; Ps i.95, 176, 190.
Abhippalambati [abhi + palambati] to hang down M iii. 164 (olambati ajjholambati a.).
Abhippavassati [abhi + pavassati] to shed rain upon, to pour down; intrs. to rain, to pour, fall. Usually in phrase mahāmegho abhippavassati a great cloud bursts Miln 8, 13, 36, 304; PvA 132 (v. l. ati˚); intrs. Miln 18 (pupphāni ˚iŋsu poured down). -- pp. abhippavuṭṭha.
Abhippavuṭṭha (pp.) [fr. abhippavassati] having rained, poured, fallen; trs. S v.51 (bandhanāni meghena ˚āni) = A v.127; intrs. M ii.117 (mahāmegho ˚o there has been a cloudburst).
Abhippasanna (adj.) [pp. of abhippasīdati, cp. BSk. abhi- prasanna] finding one's peace in (c. loc.), trusting in, having faith in, believing in, devoted to (loc.) Vin iii.43; D i.211 (Bhagavati) S i.134; iv.319; v.225, 378; A iii. 237, 270, 326 sq.; Sn p. 104 (brāhmaṇesu); PvA 54 (sāsand), 142 (id.). Cp. vippasanna in same meaning.
Abhippasāda [abhi + pasāda, cp. BSk. abhiprasāda Av. Ś 12 (cittasyu˚) & vippasāda] faith, belief, reliance, trust Dhs 12 ("sense of assurance" trsl., + saddhā), 25, 96, 288; PvA 223.
Abhippasādeti [Caus. of abhippasīdati, cp. BSk. abhipra- sādayati Divy 68, 85, pp. abhiprasādita -- manāḥ Jtm 213, 220] to establish one's faith in (loc.), to be reconciled with, to propitiate Th 1, 1173 = Vv 212 (manaŋ arahantamhi = cittaŋ pasādeti VvA 105).
Abhippāsāreti [abhi + pasāreti, cp. BSk. abhiprasārayati Divy 389] to stretch out Vin i.179 (pāde).
Abhippasīdati [abhi + pasīdati] to have faith in D i.211 (fut. ˚issati). -- pp. abhippasanna; Caus. abhippasādeti.
Abhippaharaṇa (nt.) [abhi + paharaṇa] attacking, fighting, as adj. f. ˚aṇī fighting, Ep. of Mārassa senā, the army of M. Sn 439 (kaṇhassa˚ the fighting army of k. = samaṇabrāhmaṇānaŋ nippothanī antarāyakārī SnA 390).
Abhibyāpeti [abhi + vyāpeti, cp. Sk. vyāpnoti, vi + āp] to pervade Miln 251.
Abhibhakkhayati [abhi + bhakkhayati] to eat (of animals) Vin ii.201 (bhinko pankaŋ a.).
Abhibhava [fr. abhibhavati] defeat, humiliation SnA 436.
Abhibhavati [abhi + bhavati] to overcome, master, be lord over, vanquish, conquer S i.18, 32, 121 (maraṇaŋ); iv. 71 (rāgadose), 117 (kodhaŋ), 246, 249 (sāmikaŋ); J i.56, 280; PvA 94 (= balīyati, vaḍḍhati). -- fut. abhihessati see abhihāreti 4. -- ger. abhibhuyya Vin i.294; Dh 328; It 41 (māraŋ sasenaŋ); Sn 45, 72 (˚cārin), 1097, Nd2 85 (= abhibhavitvā ajjhottharitvā, pariyādiyitvā); and abhibhavitvā PvA 113 (= pasayha), 136. -- grd. abhibhavanīya to be overcome PvA 57. -- Pass. ppr. abhibhūyamāna being overcome (by) PvA 80, 103. -- pp. abhibhūta (q. v.).
Abhibhavana (nt.) [fr. abhibhavati] overcoming, vanquishing, mastering S ii.210 (v. l. BB abhipatthana).
Abhibhavanīyatā (f.) [abstr. fr. abhibhavanīya, grd. of abhi- bhavati] as an˚ invincibility PvA 117.
Abhibhāyatana (nt.) [abhibhū + āyatana] position of a master or lord, station of mastery. The traditional account of these gives 8 stations or stages of mastery over the senses (see Dial. ii.118; Exp. i.252), detailed identically at all the foll. passages, viz. D ii.110; iii.260 (& 287); M ii.13; A i.40; iv.305, 348; v.61. Mentioned only at S iv.77 (6 stations); Ps i.5; Nd2 466 (as an accomplishment of the Bhagavant); Dhs 247.
Abhibhāsana (nt.) [abhi + bhāsana fr. bhās] enlightenment or delight ("light & delight" trsl.) Th 1, 613 (= tosana C.).
Abhibhū (n. -- adj.) [Vedic abhibhū, fr. abhi + bhū, cp. abhi- bhavati] overcoming, conquering, vanquishing, having power over, a Lord or Master of ( -- ˚) D iii.29; S ii. 284; Sn 211 (sabba˚), 545 (Māra˚, cp. Mārasena -- pamaddana 561), 642. -- Often in phrase abhibhū anabhibhūta aññadatthudasa vasavattin, i. e. unvanquished Lord of all D i 18; iii.135 = Nd2 276; A ii.24; iv.94; It 122; cp. DA i.111 (= abhibhavitvā ṭhito jeṭṭhakoɔ ham asmīti).
Abhibhūta [pp. of abhibhavati] overpowered, overwhelmed, vanquished D i.121; S i.137 (jāti -- jarā˚); ii.228 (lābhasakkāra -- silokena); A i.202 (pāpakehi dhammehi); J i.189; PvA 14, 41 (= pareta), 60 (= upagata), 68, 77, 80 (= pareta). Often neg. an˚ unconquered, e. g. Sn 934; Nd1 400; & see phrase under abhibhū.
Abhimangala (adj.) [abhi + mangala] (very) fortunate, lucky, anspicious, in ˚sammatā (of Visākhā) "benedicted", blessed Vin iii.187 = DhA i.409. Opp. avamangala.
Abhimaṇḍita (pp. -- ˚) [abhi + maṇḍita] adorned, embel- lished, beautified Miln 361; Sdhp 17.
Abhimata (adj.) [BSk. abhimata, e. g. Jtm 211; pp. of abhimanyate] desired, wished for; agreeable, pleasant C. on Th 1, 91.
Abhimatthati (˚eti) & ˚mantheti [abhi + math or manth, cp. nimmatheti] 1. to cleave, cut; to crush, destroy M i.243 (sikharena muddhānaŋ ˚mantheti); S i.127; Dh 161 (v. l. ˚nth˚); J iv.457 (matthako sikharena ˚matthiyamāno); DhA iii.152 (= kantati viddhaŋseti). -- 2. to rub, to produce by friction (esp. fire, aggiŋ cp. Vedic agniŋ nirmanthati) M i.240.
Abhimaddati [Sk. abhimardati & ˚mṛdnāti; abhi + mṛd] to crush S i.102; A i.198; Sdhp 288.
Abhimana (adj.) [abhi + mano, BSk. abhimana, e. g. M Vastu iii.259] having one's mind turned on, thinking of or on (c. acc.) Th 1, 1122; J vi.451.
Abhimanāpa (adj.) [abhi + manāpa] very pleasing VvA 53 (where id. p. at PvA 71 has atimanāpa).
Abhimantheti see abhimatthati.
Abhimāra [cp. Sk. abhimara slaughter] a bandit, bravo, robber J ii.199; DA i.152.
Abhimukha (adj.) [abhi + mukha] facing, turned towards, approaching J ii.3 (˚ā ahesuŋ met each other). Usually -- ˚ turned to, going to, inclined towards D i.50 (purattha˚); J i.203 (devaloka˚), 223 (varaṇa -- rukkha˚); ii.3 (nagara˚), 416 (Jetavana˚); DhA i.170 (tad˚); ii.89 (nagara˚); PvA 3 (kāma˚, opp. vimukha), 74 (uyyāna˚). -- nt. ˚ŋ adv. to, towards J i.263 (matta -- vāraṇe); PvA 4 (āghātana˚, may here be taken as pred. adj.); DhA iii.310 (uttara˚).
Abhiyācati [abhi + yācati] to ask, beg, entreat Sn 1101, cp. Nd2 86.
Abhiyāti [Vedic abhiyāti in same meaning; abhi _ yā] to go against (in a hostile manner, to attack (c. acc.) S i.216 (aor. abhiyaŋsu, v. l. SS abhijiyiŋsu); DhA iii.310 (aor. abhiyāsi as v. l. for T. reading pāyāsi; the id. p. VvA 68 reads pāyāsi with v. l. upāyāsi).
Abhiyujjhati [abhi + yujjhati from yudh] to contend, quarrel with J i.342.
Abhiyuñjati [abhi + yuj] to accuse, charge; intrs. fall to one's share Vin iii.50; iv.304.
Abhiyoga [cp. abhiyuñjati] practice, observance Dāvs iv.7.
Abhiyogin (adj.) [fr. abhiyoga] applying oneself to, prac- tised, skilled (an augur, sooth sayer) D iii.168.
Abhiyobbana (nt.) [abhi + yobbana] much youthfulness, early or tender youth Th 2, 258 (= abhinavayobbanakāla ThA 211).
Abhirakkhati [abhi + rakkhati] to guard, protect J vi.589 (= pāleti C.). Cp. parirakkhati.
Abhirakkhā (f.) [fr. abhirakkhati] protection, guard J i.204 (= ārakkhā 203).
Abhirata (adj.) ( -- ˚) [pp. of abhiramati] found of, indulging in, finding delight in A iv.224 (nekkhamma˚); v.175 (id.), Sn 86 (nibbāna˚), 275 (vihesa˚), 276 (kalaha˚); J v.382 (dāna˚); PvA 54 (puññakamma˚), 61 (satibhavana˚), 105 (dānâdipuñña˚).
Abhiratatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. abhirata] the fact of being fond of, delighting in ( -- ˚) J v.254 (kāma˚).
Abhirati (f.) [fr. abhi + ram] delight or pleasure in (loc. or -- ˚) S i.185; iv.260; A v.122; Dh 88. -- an˚ displeasure, discontent, distaste Vin ii.110; D i.17 (+ paritassanā); S i.185; v.132; A iii.259; iv.50; v.72 sq., 122; J iii.395; DA i.111; PvA 187.
Abhiratta (adj.) [abhi + ratta] very red J v.156; fig. very much excited or affected with ( -- ˚) Sn 891 (sandiṭṭhirāgena a.).
Abhiraddha (adj.) [pp. of abhi + rādh] propitiated, satis- fied A iv.185 (+ attamana).
Abhiraddhi (f.) [fr. abhiraddha] only in neg. an˚ displeasure, dislike, discontent A i.79; DA i.52 (= kopassɔ etaŋ adhivacanaŋ).
Abhiramati [abhi + ram] to sport, enjoy oneself, find pleasure in or with (c. loc.), to indulge in love Sn 718, 1085; J i.192; iii.189, 393; DhA i.119; PvA 3, 61, 145. -- ppr. act. abhiranto only as nt. ˚ŋ in adv. phrase yathâbhirantaŋ after one's liking, as much as he pleases, after one's heart's content Vin i.34; M i.170; Sn 53. <-> ppr. med. abhiramamāna J iii.188, PvA 162. -- pp. abhirata (q. v.). -- 2nd Caus. abhiramāpeti (q. v.).
Abhiramana (nt.) [fr. abhiramati] sporting, dallying, amusing oneself PvA 16.
Abhiramāpana (nt.) [fr. abhiramāpeti, Caus2 of abhiramati] causing pleasure to (acc.), being a source of pleasure, making happy M iii.132 (gāmante).
Abhiramāpeti [Caus. II. fr. abhiramati] 1. to induce to sport, to cause one to take pleasure J iii.393. -- 2. to delight, amuse, divert J i.61. -- Cp. abhiramāpana.
Abhiravati [abhi + ravati] to shout ont Bu ii.90 = J i.18 (v.99)
Abhirādhita [pp. of abhirādheti] having succeeded in, fallen to one's share, attained Th 1, 259.
Abhirādhin (adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. abhirādheti] pleasing, giving plea- sure, satisfaction J iv.274 (mitta˚ = ārādhento tosento C.).
Abhirādheti [abhi + rādheti] to please, satisfy, make happy J i.421; DA i.52. -- aor. (pret.) abhirādhayi Vv 315 (= abhirādhesi VvA 130); Vv 6423 (gloss for abhirocayi VvA 282); J i.421; iii.386 (= paritosesi C.). -- pp. abhirādhita.
Abhiruci (f.) [Sk. abhiruci, fr. abhi + ruc] delight, longing, pleasure, satisfaction PvA 168 (= ajjhāsaya).
Abhirucita (adj.) [pp. fr. abhi + ruc] pleasing, agreeable, liked J i.402; DhA i.45.
Abhiruda (adj. -- ˚) [Sk. abhiruta] resounding with (the cries of animals, esp. the song of birds), full of the sound of (birds) Th 1, 1062 (kuñjara˚), 1113 (mayūra -- koñca˚); J iv.466 (adāsakunta˚); v.304 (mayūra -- koñca˚); vi.172 (id., = upagīta C.), 272 (sakunta˚; = abhigīta C.), 483 (mayūra -- koñca˚), 539; Pv ii.123 (haŋsa -- koñca˚; = abhinādita PvA 157). -- The form abhiruta occurs at Th 1, 49.
Abhirūpa (adj.) [abhi + rūpa] of perfect form, (very), handsome, beautiful, lovely Sn 410 (= dassaniyaɔ angapaccanga SnA 383); J i.207; Pug 52; DA i.281 (= aññehi manussehi adhikarūpa); VvA 53; PvA 61 (= abhikkanta). Occurs in the idiomatic phrase denoting the characteristics of true beauty abhirūpa dassanīya pāsādika (+ paramāya vaṇṇa -- pokkharatāya samannāgata), e. g. Vin i.268; D i.47, 114, 120; S ii.279; A ii.86, 203; Nd2 659; Pug 66; DhA i.281 (compar.); PvA 46.
Abhirūḷha [pp. of abhirūhati] mounted, gone up to, ascended J v.217; DhA i.103.
Abhirūhati (abhiruhati) [abhi + ruh] to ascend, mount, climb; to go on or in to (c. acc.) Dh 321; Th 1, 271; J i.259; ii.388; iii.220; iv.138 (navaŋ); vi.272 (peculiar aor. ˚rucchi with ābhi metri causa; = abhirūhi C.); DA i.253. -- ger. abhiruyha J iii.189; PvA 75, 152 (as v. l.; T. has ˚ruyhitva), 271 (nāvaŋ), & abhirūhitvā J i.50 (pabbataŋ) ii.128.
Abhirūhana (nt.) [BSk. ˚rūhana, e. g. M Vastu ii.289] climbing, ascending, climb Miln 356.
Abhiroceti [abhi + roceti, Caus. of ruc] 1. to like, to find delight in (acc.), to desire, long for J iii.192; v.222 (= roceti); Vv 6423 (vataŋ abhirocayi = abhirocesi ruccitvā pūresi ti attho; abhirādhayi ti pi pāṭho; sādhesi nipphādesī ti attho VvA 282). -- 2. to please, satisfy, entertain, gladden Vv 6424 (but VvA 292: abhibhavitvā vijjotati, thus to no. 3). -- 3. v. l. for atiroceti (to surpass in splendour) at Vv 8112, cp. also no. 2.
Abhiropana (nt.) [fr. abhiropeti] concentration of mind, attention (seems restricted to Ps ii. only) Ps ii.82 (v. l. abhiniropana), 84, 93, 115 (buddhi˚), 142 (˚virāga), 145 (˚vimutti), 216 (˚abhisamaya). See also abhiniropana.
Abhiropeti [abhi + ropeti, cp. Sk. adhiropayati, Caus. of ruh] to fix one's mind on, to pay attention, to show reverence, to honour Vv 377 (aor. ˚ropayi = ropesi VvA 169), 3710 (id.; = pūjaŋ kāresi VvA 172), 604 (= pūjesi VvA 253); Dāvs v.19.
Abhilakkhita (adj.) [Sk. abhilakṣita in diff. meaning; pp. of abhi + lakṣ] fixed, designed, inaugurated, marked by auspices J iv.1; DA i.18.
Abhilakkhitatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. abhilakkhita] having signs or marks, being characterised, characteristics DhsA 62.
Abhilanghati [abhi + langhati] to ascend, rise, travel or pass over (of the moon traversing the sky) J iii.364; vi.221.
Abhilambati [abhi + lambati] to hang down over (c. acc.) M iii.164 = Nett 179 (+ ajjholambati); J v.70 (papātaŋ), 269 (Vetaraṇiŋ). -- pp. abhilambita (q. v.).
Abhilambita (adj.) [pp. of abhilambati] hanging down J v.407 (nīladuma˚).
Abhilāpa [fr. abhi + lap] talk, phrasing, expression Sn 49 (vācâbhilāpa making phrases, talking, idle or objectionable speech = tiracchanakathā Nd2 561); It 89 (? reading abhilāpāyaŋ uncertain, vv. ll. abhipāyaŋ abhipāpāyaŋ, abhisāpāyaŋ, abhisapāyaŋ, atisappāyaŋ. The corresp. passage S iii.93 reads abhisapayaŋ: curse, and C. on It 89 expls. abhilāpo ti akkoso, see Brethren 376 n. 1); Dhs 1306 = Nd2 34 (as exegesis or paraphrase of adhivacana, combd. with vyañjana & trsl. by Mrs. Rh. D. as "a distinctive mark of discourse"); DA i.20, 23, 281; DhsA 51.
Abhilāsa [Sk. abhilāṣa, abhi + laṣ] desire, wish, longing PvA 154.
Abhilekheti [Caus. of abhi + likh] to cause to be inscribed Dāvs v.67 (cāritta -- lekhaŋ ˚lekhayi).
Abhilepana (nt.) [abhi + lepana] "smearing over", stain, pollution Sn 1032, 1033 = Nett 10, 11 (see Nd2 88 = laggana "sticking to", bandhana, upakkilesa).
Abhivagga [abhi + vagga] great mass (?), superior force (?), only in phrase ˚ena omaddati to crush with sup. force or overpower M i.87 = Nd2 1996.
Abhivañcana (nt.) [abhi + vañc] deceit, fraud Dāvs iii.64.
Abhivaṭṭa [pp. of abhivassati, see also abhivuṭṭha] rained upon Dh 335 (gloss ˚vuṭṭha; cp. DhA iv.45); Miln 176, 197, 286. -- Note. Andersen P. R. prefers reading abhivaḍḍha at Dh 335 "the abounding Bīraṇa grass").
Abhivaḍḍhati [Vedic abhivardhati, abhi + vṛdh] 1. to increase (intrs.) D i.113, 195 (opp. hāyati); M ii.225; A iii.46 (bhogā a.); Dh 24; Miln 374; PvA 8, 133; Sdhp 288, 523. -- 2. to grow over or beyond, to outg ow J iii.399 (vanaspatiŋ). -- pp. abhivuḍḍha & ˚vuddha (q.v.).
Abhivaḍḍhana (adj. -- nt.) [fr. abhivaḍḍhati] increasing (trs.), augmenting; f. ˚ī Sdhp 68.
Abhivaḍḍhi (f.) [cp. Sk. abhivṛddhi, fr. abhi + vṛdh] in- crease, growth Miln 94. -- See also abhivuddhi.
Abhivaṇṇita [pp. of abhivanneti] praised Dpvs i.4.
Abhivaṇṇeti [abhi + vanneti] to praise Sdhp 588 (˚ayi). - pp. abhivaṇṇita.
Abhivadati [abhi + vadati] 1. to speak out, declare, pro- mise J i.83 = Vin i.36; J vi.220. -- 2. to speak (kindly) to, to welcome, salute, greet. In this sense always combd. with abhinandati, e. g. at M i.109, 266, 458; S iii.14; iv.36 sq.; Miln 69. -- Caus. abhivādeti.
Abhivandati [abhi + vandati] to salute respectfully, to honour, greet; grd. ˚vandanīya Miln 227.
Abhivassaka (adj.) [fr. abhivassati] raining, fig. shedding, pouring ont, yielding VvA 38 (puppha˚).
Abhivassati [abhi + vassati from vṛṣ] to rain, shed rain, pour; fig. rain down, pour out, shed D iii.160 (ābhivassaŋ metri causa); A iii.34; Th 1, 985; J i.18 (v.100; pupphā a. stream down); cp. iii.106; Miln 132, 411. <-> pp. abhivaṭṭa & abhivuṭṭha (q. v.). -- Caus. II. abhivassāpeti to cause (the sky to) rain Miln 132.
Abhivassin (adj.) = abhivassaka It 64, 65 (sabbattha˚).
Abhivādana (nt.) [fr. abhivādeti] respectful greeting, salu- tation, giving welcome, showing respect or devotion A ii.180; iv.130, 276; J i.81, 82, 218; Dh 109 (˚sīlin of devout character, cp. DhA ii.239); VvA 24; Sdhp 549 (˚sīla).
Abhivādeti [Caus. of abhivadati] to salute, greet, welcome, honour Vin ii.208 sq.; D i.61; A iii.223; iv.173; Vv 15 (abhivādayiŋ aor. = abhivādanaŋ kāresiŋ vandiŋ VvA 24); Miln 162. Often in combn with padakkhiṇaŋ karoti in sense of to bid goodbye, to say adieu, farewell, e. g. D i.89, 125, 225; Sn 1010. -- Caus. II. abhivādāpeti to cause some one to salute, to make welcome Vin ii.208 (˚etabba).
Abhivāyati [abhi + vāyati; cp. Sk. abhivāti] to blow through, to pervade Miln 385.
Abhivāreti [abhi + vāreti, Caus. of vṛ] to hold back, refuse, deny J v.325 (= nivāreti C.).
Abhivāheti [abhi + vāheti, Caus. of vah] to remove, to put away Bu x.5.
Abhivijayati (& vijināti) [abhi + vijayati] to overpower, to conquer. Of ˚jayati the ger. ˚jiya at D i.89, 134; ii.16. Of ˚jināti the pres. 3rd pl. ˚jinanti at Miln 39; the ger. ˚jinitvā at M i.253; Pug 66.
Abhiviññāpeti [abhi + viññāpeti] to turn somebody's mind on (c. acc.), to induce somebody (dat.) to (acc.) Vin iii.18 (purāṇadutiyikāya methunaŋ dhammaŋ abhiviññāpesi).
Abhivitarati [abhi + vitarati] "to go down to", i. e. give in, to pay heed, observe Vin i.134 and in ster. expln. of sañcicca at Vin ii.91; iii.73, 112; iv.290.
Abhivinaya [abhi + vinaya] higher discipline, the refinements of discipline or Vinaya; combd. with abhidhamma, e. g. D iii.267; M i.472; also with vinaya Vin v.1 sg.
Abhivindati [abhi + vindati] to find, get, obtain Sn 460 (= labhati adhigacchati SnA 405).
Abhivisiṭṭha (adj.) [abhi + visiṭṭha] most excellent, very distinguished DA i.99, 313.
Abhivissajjati [abhi + vissajjati] to send out, send forth, deal out, give D iii.160.
Abhivissattha [abhi + vissattha, pp. of abhivissasati, Sk. abhiviśvasta] confided in, taken into confidence M ii.52 (v. l. ˚visaṭṭha).
Abhivuṭṭha [pp. of abhivassati, see also abhivaṭṭa] poured out or over, shed out (of water or rain) Th 1, 1065; Dh 335 (gloss); PvA 29.
Abhivuḍḍha [pp. of abhivaḍḍhati, see also ˚vuddha] in- creased, enriched PvA 150.
Abhivuddha [pp. of abhivaḍḍhati, see also ˚vuḍḍha] grown up Miln 361.
Abhivuddhi (f.) [Sk. abhivṛddhi, see also abhivaḍḍhi] in- crease, growth, prosperity Miln 34.
Abhiveṭheti: Kern's (Toev. s. v.) proposed reading at J v.452 for ati˚, which however does not agree with C. expln. on p. 454.
Abhivedeti [abhi + Caus. of vid] 1. to make known, to communicate Dāvs v.2, 11. -- 2. to know J vi.175 (= jānāti C.).
Abhivihacca [ger. of abhi + vihanati] having destroyed, removed or expelled; only in one simile of the sun driving darkness away at M i.317 = S iii.156; v.44 = It 20.
Abhivyāpeti see abhibyāpeti.
Abhisaŋvisati [abhi + saŋvisati]. Only in abhisaŋvisseyya- gattaŋ (or -- bhastaŋ or -- santuŋ) Th 2, 466 a compound of doubtful derivation and meaning. Mrs. Rh. D., following Dhammapāla (p. 283) ʻ a bag of skin with carrion filled ʼ.
Abhisaŋsati [Vedic abhiśaŋsati, abhi + śaŋs] to execrate, revile, lay a curse on J v.174 (˚saŋsittha 3rd sg. pret. med. = paribhāsi C.) -- aor. abhisasi J vi.187, 505, 522 (= akkosi C.), 563 (id.). -- pp. abhisattha. Cp. also abhisiŋsati.
Abhisaŋsanā (f.) [? abhisaŋsati] is doubtful reading at Vv 6410; meaning "neighing" (of horses) VvA 272, 279.
Abhisankhata (adj.) [abhi + sankhata, pp. of abhisan- kharoti] prepared, fixed, made up, arranged, done M i.350; A ii.43; v.343; J i.50; Nd1 186 (kappita +); PvA 7, 8.
Abhisankharoti (& ˚khāreti in Pot.) [abhi + sankharoti] to prepare, do, perform, work, get up Vin i.16 (iddhɔ âbhisankhāraŋ ˚khāreyya); D i.184 (id.); S ii.40; iii.87, 92; iv.132, 290; v.449; A i.201; Sn 984 (ger. ˚itvā: having got up this curse, cp. SnA 582); PvA 56 (iddhɔ âbhisaŋkhāraŋ), 172 (id.), 212 (id.). -- pp. abhisankhata (q. v.).
Abhisankhāra [abhi + sankhāra] 1. putting forth, perform- ance, doing, working, practice: only in two combns., viz. (a) gamiya˚ (or gamika˚) a heathenish practice Vin i.233; A iv.180, & (b) iddha˚ (= iddḥi˚) working of supernormal powers Vin i.16; D i.106; S iii.92; iv.289; v.270; Sn p. 107; PvA 56, 172, 212. -- 2. preparation, store, accumulation (of kamma, merit or demerit), substratum, state (see for detail sankhāra) S iii.58 (an˚); Nd1 334, 442; Nd2 s. v.; Vbh 135 (puñña˚ etc.), 340; DhsA 357 (˚viññāna "storing intellect" Dhs trsl. 262).
Abhisankhārika (adj.) [fr. abhisankhāra] what belongs to or is done by the sankhāras; accumulated by or accumulating merit, having special (meritorious) effect (or specially prepared?) Vin ii.77 = iii.160; Sdhp 309 (sa ˚paccaya).
Abhisankhipati [abhi + sankhipati] to throw together, heap together, concentrate Vbh 1 sq., 82 sq., 216 sq., 400; Miln 46.
Abhisanga [fr. abhi + sañj, cp. abhisajjati & Sk. abhisanga] I. sticking to, cleaving to, adherence to J v.6; Nett 110, 112; DhsA 129 (˚hetukaŋ dukkhaŋ) 249 (˚rasa).
Abhisangin (adj.) [fr. abhisanga] cleaving to ( -- ˚) Sdhp 566.
Abhisajjati [abhi + sañj; cp. abhisanga] to be in ill temper, to be angry, to curse, imprecate (in meaning of abhisanga 2) D i.91 (= kodha -- vasena laggati DA i.257); iii.159; J iii.120 (+ kuppati); iv.22 (abhisajji kuppi vyāpajji, cp. BSk. abhiṣajyate kupyati vyāpadyate. Av. Ś i.286); v.175 (= kopeti C.); Dh 408 (abhisaje Pot. = kujjhāpana -- vasena laggapeyya DhA iv.182); Pug 30, 36. <-> See also abhisajjana & abhisajjanā.
Abhisajjana (nt. -- adj.) [abstr. fr. abhisajjati in meaning of abhisanga 2] only as adv. f. ˚nī Ep. of vācā scolding, abusing, cursing A v.265 (para˚). Cp. next.
Abhisajjanā (f.) [abstr. fr. abhisajjati, cp. abhisajjana] at Sn 49 evidently means "scolding, cursing, being in bad temper" (cp. abhisajjati), as its combn. with vācɔ âbhilāpa indicates, but is expld. both by Nd2 & Bdhgh. as "sticking to, cleaving, craving, desire" (= taṇhā), after the meaning of abhisanga. See Nd2 89 & 107; SnA 98 (sineha -- vasena), cp. also the compromise -- expln by Bdhgh. of abhisajjati as kodha -- vasena laggati (DA i.257).
Abhisañcināti (& ˚cayati) [abhi + sañcināti] to accumulate, collect (merit) Vv 476 (Pot. ˚sañceyyaŋ = ˚sañcineyyaŋ VvA 202).
Abhisañcetayita [pp. of abhisañceteti] raised into consci- ousness, thought out, intended, planned M i.350; S ii. 65; iv.132; A v.343.
Abhisañceteti [abhi + sañceteti or ˚cinteti] to bring to consciousness, think out, devise, plan S ii.82. -- pp. abhisañcetayita (q. v.).
Abhisaññā (f.). Only in the compound abhi -- saññā -- nirodha D i.179, 184. The prefix abhi qualifies, not saññā, but the whole compound, which means ʻ trance ʼ. It is an expression used, not by Buddhists, but by certain wanderers. See saññā -- vedayita -- nirodha.
Abhisaññūhati [abhi + saññūhati, i. e. saŋ -- ni -- ūhati] to heap up, concentrate Vbh 1, 2, 82 sq.; 216 sq., 400; Miln 46. Cp. abhisankhipati.
Abhisaṭa [pp. of abhisarati, abhi + sṛ to flow] 1. (med.) streamed forth, come together J vi.56 (= sannipatita C.). <-> 2. (pass.) approached, visited Vin i.268.
Abhisatta [pp. of abhisapati, cp. Sk. abhiśapta, fr. abhi + śap] cursed, accursed, railed at, reviled J iii.460; v.71; SnA 364 (= akkuṭṭha); VvA 335.
Abhisattha [pp. of abhisaŋsati] cursed, accursed Th 1, 118 "old age falls on her as if it had been cursed upon her" (that is, laid upon her by a curse). Morris J P T S. 1886, 145 gives the commentator's equivalents, "commanded, worked by a charm". This is a curious idiom. Any European would say that the woman herself, not the old age, was accursed. But the whole verse is a riddle and Kern's translation (Toev. s. v.) ʻ hurried up ʼ seems to us impossible.
Abhisaddahati [abhi + saddahati, cp. Sk. abhiśraddadhāti, e. g. Divy 17, 337] to have faith in, believe in (c. acc.), believe S v.226; Th 1, 785; Pv iv.113, 125 (˚saddaheyya = paṭiñeyya PvA 226); Nett 11; Miln 258; PvA 26; Dāvs iii.58.
Abhisantāpeti [ahhi + santāpeti, Caus. of santapati] to burn out, scorch, destroy M i.121.
Abhisanda [abhi + sanda of syad, cp. BSk. abhisyanda, e. g. M Vastu ii.276] outflow, overflow, yield, issue, result; only in foll. phrases: cattāro puññɔ âbhisandā kusalɔ âbhisandā (yields in merit) S v.391 sq.; A ii.54 sq.; iii.51, 337; vi.245, & kammɔ âbhisanda result of kamma Miln 276. -- Cp. abhisandana.
Abhisandana (nt.) [= abhisanda] result, outcome, con- sequence Ps i.17 (sukhassa).
Abhisandahati [abhi + sandahati of saŋ + dhā] to put together, to make ready Th 1, 151; ger. abhisandhāya in sense of a prep. = on account of, because of J ii.386 (= paṭicca C.).
Abhisandeti [abhi + sandeti, Caus. of syad] to make over- flow, to make full, fill, pervade D i.73, 74.
Abhisanna (adj.) [pp. of abhisandati = abhi + syand, cp. Sk. abhisanna] overflowing, filled with ( -- ˚), full Vin i. 279 (˚kāya a body full of humours, cp. ii.119 & Miln 134); J i.17 (v.88; pītiyā); Miln 112 (duggandha˚).
Abhisapati [abhi + sapati, of śap] to execrate, curse, ac- curse Vin iv.276; J iv.389; v.87; DhA i.42. -- pp. abhisatta.
Abhisapana (nt.) [fr. abhisapati] cursing, curse PvA 144 (so read for abhisampanna).
Abhisamaya [abhi + samaya, from sam + i, cp. abhisameti & sameti; BSk. abhisamaya, e. g. Divy 200, 654] "coming by completely", insight into, comprehension, realization, clear understanding, grasp, penetration. See on term Kvu trsl. 381 sq. -- Esp. in full phrases: attha˚ grasp of what is proficient S i.87 = A iii.49 = It 17, cp. A ii.46; ariyasaccānaŋ a. full understanding of the 4 noble truths S v.415, 440, 441 [cp. Divy 654: anabhisamitānāŋ caturnāŋ āryasatyānāŋ a.]; Sn 758 (sacca˚ = saccɔ âvabodha SnA 509); Miln 214 (catusacc˚); Sdhp 467 (catusacc˚), 525 (saccānaŋ); dhammɔ âbhisamaya full grasp of the Dhamma, quasi conversion [cp. dharmɔ âbhisamaya Divy 200] S ii.134; Miln 20, 350; VvA 219; PvA 9 etc. frequent; sammā -- mānɔ âbhisamaya full understanding of false pride in ster. phrase" acchecchi (for acchejji) taṇhaŋ, vivattayi saññojanaŋ sammāmānâbhisamayā antam akāsi dukkhassa" at S iv.205, 207, 399; A iii.246, 444; It 47; cp. māna˚ S i.188 = Th 2, 20 (tato mānâbhisamayā upasanto carissasi, trsl. by Mrs. Rh. D. in K. S. 239 "hath the mind mastered vain imaginings, then mayst thou go thy ways calm and serene"); Sn 342 (expld. by mānassa abhisamayo khayo vayo pahānaŋ SnA 344). Also in foll. passages: S ii.5 (paññāya), 104 (id.), 133 sq. (Abhisamaya Saŋyutta); Sn 737 (phassa˚, expld. ad sensum but not at verbum by phassa -- nirodha SnA 509); Ps ii.215; Pug 41; Vv 1610 (= saccapaṭivedha VvA 85); DA i.32; DhA i.109; VvA 73 (bhāvana˚), 84 (sacchikiriya˚); Dpvs i.31. -- anabhisamaya not grasping correctly, insufficient understanding, taken up wrongly S iii.260; Pug 21; Dhs 390, 1061, 1162 (Mrs. Rh. D. trsls. "lack of coordination").
Abhisamāgacchati [abhi + sam + āgacchati, cp. in meaning adhigacchati] to come to (understand) completely, to grasp fully, to master KhA 236 (for abhisamecca Sn 143).
Abhisamācārika (adj.) [abhi + samācārika, to samācāra] belonging to the practice of the lesser ethics; to be practiced; belonging to or what is the least to be expected of good conduct, proper. Of sikkhā Vin v.181; A ii.243 sq.; of dhamma M i.469; A iii.14 sq.; 422.
Abhisamikkhati (& ˚ekkhati), [abhi + sam + īks, cp. sa- mikkhati] to behold, see, regard, notice J. iv.19 (2nd sg. med. ˚samekkhase = olokesi C.). -- ger. ˚samikkha & ˚samekkha [B.Sk. ˚samīkṣya, e.g. Jtm. p. 28, 30 etc.] J v.340 (˚samikkha, v. l. sañcikkha = passitvā C.); 393, 394 (= disvā C.).
Abhisameta [pp. of abhisameti, fr. abhi + sam + i, taken as caus. formation, against the regular form Sk.P. samita & B.Sk. abhisamita] completely grasped or realised, understood, mastered S v.128 (dhamma a.), 440 (anabhisametāni cattāri ariyasaccāni, cp. Divy 654 anabhisamitāni c.a.); A iv.384 (appattaŋ asacchikataŋ +).
Abhisametāvin (adj.) [possess. adj. -- formation, equalling a n. ag. form., pp. abhisameta] commanding full understanding or penetration, possessing complete insight (of the truth) Vin iii.189; S ii.133; v.458 sq.
Abhisameti [abhi + sameti, sam + i; in inflexion base is taken partly as ordinary & partly as causative, e. g. aor. ˚samiŋsu & ˚samesuŋ, pp. sameta: Sk. samita. Cp. B.Sk. abhisamayati, either caus. or denom. formation, Divy 617: caturāryasatyāni a.] to come by, to attain, to realise, grasp, understand (cp. adhigacchati) Miln 214 (catusaccâbhisamayaŋ abhisameti). Freg. in combn. abhisambujjhati, abhisameti; abhisambujjhitvā abhisametvā, e. g. S ii.25; iii.139; Kvu 321. -- fut. ˚samessati S v.441. -- aor. ˚samiŋsu Miln 350; ˚samesuŋ S v.415. -- ger. ˚samecca (for ˚icca under influence of ˚sametvā as caus. form.; Trenckner's expln. Notes 564 is unnecessary & hardly justifiable) S v.438 (an˚ by not thoroughly understanding); A v.50 (sammɔattha˚ through complete realisation of what is proficient); Sn 143 (= abhisamāgantvā KhA 236); and ˚sametvā S ii.25; iii.139. -- pp. abhisameta (q.v.).
Abhisampanna at PvA 144 is wrong reading for v. l. abhisapana (curse).
Abhisamparāya [abhi + samparāya] future lot, fate, state after death, future condition of rebirth; usually in foll. phrases: kā gati ko abhisamparāyo (as hendiadys) ʻ what fate in the world -- to -- come ʼ, D ii.91; Vin i.293; S iv.59, 63; v.346, 356, 369; DhA i.221. -- evaŋ -- gatika evanabhisamparāya (adj.) "leading to such & such a revirn, such & such a future state" D i.16, 24, 32, 33 etc. (= evaŋ -- vidhā paralokā ti DA i.108). -- abhisamparāyaŋ (acc. as adv.) in future, after death A i.48; ii.197; iii.347; iv.104; Pv iii.510 (= punabbhave PvA 200). -- diṭṭhe cɔeva dhamme abhisamparāyañ ca "in this world and in the world to come" A ii.61; Pug 38; Miln 162; PvA 195 etc. (see also diṭṭha). -- Used absolutely at PvA 122 (= fate).
Abhisambujjhati [abhi + sambujjhati] to become wide- awake, to awake to the highest knowledge, to gain the highest wisdom (sammāsambodhiŋ) D iii.135; It 121. aor. ˚sambujjhi S v.433; PvA 19. In combn. abhisambujjhati abhisameti, e. g. S. ii.25; iii.139. -- ppr. med. ˚sambudhāna; pp. ˚sambuddha -- Caus. ˚sambodheti to make awake, to awaken, to enlighten; pp. ˚bodhita.
Abhisambujjhana (nt.) = abhisambodhi J i.59.
Abhisambuddha [pp. of abhisambujjhati] (a) (pass.) rea- lised, perfectly understood D iii.273; S iv.331; It 121. an˚ not understood M i.71, 92, 114, 163, 240. -- (b) (med.) one who has come to the realisation of the highest wisdom, fully -- awakened, attained Buddhahood, realising, enlightened (in or as to = acc.) Vin i.1; D ii.4; M i.6 (sammāsambodhiŋ); S i.68, 138, 139 & passim PvA 94, 99.
Abhisambuddhatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. abhisambuddha] thorough realisation, perfect understanding S v.433.
Abhisambudhāna (adj.) [formation of a ppr. med. fr. pp. abhsam + budh instead of abhisam + bujjh˚] awaking, realising, knowing, understanding Dh 46 (= bujjhanto jānanto ti attho DhA i.337).
Abhisambodhi (f.) [abhi + sambodhi] the highest enlight- enment J i.14 (parama˚). Cp. abhisambujjhana and (sammā -- ) sambodhi.
Abhisambodhita (adj.) [pp. of abhisambodheti, Caus. of abhi + sambujjhati] awakened to the highest wisdom PvA 137 (Bhagavā).
Abhisambhava [fr. abhisambhavati] only in dur˚ hard to overcome or get over, hard to obtain or reach, troublesome S v.454; A v.202; Sn 429, 701; J v.269, vi.139, 439.
Abhisambhavati (˚bhoti) [abhi + sambhavati] "to come up to", i. e. to be able to (get or stand or overcome); to attain, reach, to bear A iv.241; Th 1, 436; Nd1 471, 485; J iii.140; v.150, 417; vi.292, 293, 507 (fut. med. ˚sambhossaŋ = sahissāmi adhivāsessāmi C.); Ps ii.193. <-> ger. ˚bhutvā Th 1, 1057 & ˚bhavitvā Sn 52 (cp. Nd2 85). -- aor. ˚bhosi D ii.232. -- grd. ˚bhavanīya D ii.210; Ps ii.193. -- See also abhisambhuṇāti.
Abhisambhuṇāti [considered to be a bastard form of abhi- sambhavati, but probably of diff. origin & etym.; also in Bh. Sk. freq.] to be able (to get or reach); only in neg. ppr. anabhisambhuṇanto unable D i.101 (= asampāpuṇanto avisahamāno vā DA i.268); Nd1 77, 312.
Abhisambhū (adj.) [fr. abhi + sam + bhū] getting, attaining (?) D ii.255 (lomahaŋsa˚).
Abhisambhūta [pp. of abhisambhavati] attained, got Sdhp 556.
Abhisammati [abhi + śam, Sk. abhiśamyati] to cease, stop; trs. (Caus.) to allay, pacify, still J vi.420 (pp. abhisammanto for ˚śammento? Reading uncertain).
Abhisara [fr. abhi + sarati, of sṛ to go] retinue J v.373.
Abhisallekhika (adj) [abhi + sallekha + ika] austere, stern, only in f. ˚ā (scil. kathā) A iii.117 sq.; iv.352, 357; v.67.
Abhisavati (better ˚ssavati?) [abhi + savati, of sru] to flow towards or into J vi.359 (najjo Gangaŋ a.).
Abhisasi aor. of abhisaŋsati (q. v.).
Abhisādheti [abhi + sādheti] to carry out, arrange; to get; procure, attain J vi.180; Miln 264.
Abhisāpa [abhisapati] a curse, anathema S iii.93 = It 89 (which latter reads abhilāpa and It A expls. by akkosa: see vv. ll. under abhilāpa & cp. Brethren 376 n. 1.); Th 1,1118.
Abhisāriyā (f.) [Sk. abhisārikā, fr. abhi + sṛ] a woman who goes to meet her lover J iii.139.
Abhisāreti [abhi + sāreti, Caus. of abhisarati] to approach, to persecute J vi.377.
Abhisiŋsati [= abhisaŋsati, abhi + śaŋs. As to Sk. śaŋs > P. siŋs cp. āsiŋsati, as to meaning cp. nature of prayer as a solemn rite to the "infernals", cp. im -- precare], to utter a solemn wish, Vv 8118 (aor. ˚sīsi. v. l. ˚sisi. VvA 316 expls. by icchi sampaṭicchi).
Abhisiñcati [abhi + siñncati fr. sic to sprinkle; see also āsiñcati & ava˚, Vedic only ā˚] to sprinkle over, fig. to anoint (King), to consecrate A i.107 (Khattiyɔ âbhisekena) J i.399 (fig. ˚itvā ger. ii.409 (id.); vi.161 (id.); Nd1 298; Miln 336 (amatena lokaŋ abhisiñci Bhagavā); PvA 144 (read abhisiñci cimillikañ ca . . .) -- Pass. abhisiñcati Miln 359. -- pp. abhisitta. -- Caus. abhiseceti.
Abhisitta [pp. of abhisiñcati, Sk. ˚sikta] 1. sprinkled over, anointed Sn 889 (manasā, cp. N1 298); Miln 336 (amatena loka a.). -- 2. consecrated (King), inaugurated (more freq. in this conn. is avasitta), Vin iii.44; A i.107 (Khattiyo Khattiyehi Khattiyɔ âbhisekena a.); ii.87 (v.l. for avasitta, also an˚).
Abhiseka [fr. abhi + sic, cp. Sk. abhiṣeka] anointing, consecration, inauguration (as king) A i.107 (cp. abhisitta); ii.87 read abhisekɔ -- anabhisitto; J ii.104, 352; DhA i.350; PvA 74. Cp. ābhisekika.
Abhisecana (nt.) = abhiseka, viz. (a) ablution, washing off Th 2, 239 & 245 (udaka˚). -- (b) consecration J ii.353.
Abhiseceti [caus. of abhisiñcati] to cause to be sprinkled or inaugurated J v.26. (imper. abhisecayassu).
Abhisevanā (f.) [abhi + sevana fr. sev] pursuit, indulgence in ( -- ˚) Sdhp 210 (pāpakamma˚).
Abhissara (adj.) [abhi + issara] only neg. an˚ in formula atāṇo loko anabhissaro "without a Lord or protector" M ii.68 (v.l. ˚abhisaro); Ps i.126 (v.l. id.).
Abhihaŋsati [abhi + haŋsati fr. hṛṣ] 1. (trs.) to gladden, please, satisfy S iv.190 (abhihaṭṭhuŋ); A v.350 (id.). <-> 2. (intr.) to find delight in (c. acc.), to enjoy S v.74 (rūpaŋ manāpaŋ); A iv.419 sq. (T. reads ˚hiŋsamāna jhānaŋ v.l. ˚hisamāna).
Abhihaṭa [pp. of abhiharati] brought, offered, presented, fetched D i.166 = Pug 55 (= puretaraŋ gahetvā āhaṭaŋ bhikkhaŋ Pug A 231); DhA ii.79.
Abhihaṭṭhuŋ [ger. of abhiharati]. Only in praise abhihaṭṭhuŋ pavāreti, to offer having fetched up. M. i.224; A v.350, 352; S iv.190, v.53, 300. See note in Vinaya Texts ii.440.
Abhihata [pp. of abhihanati] hit, struck PvA 55.
Abhihanati (& ˚hanti) [abhi + han] 1. to strike, hit PvA 258. -- 2. to overpower, kill, destroy J v.174 (inf. ˚hantu for T. hantuŋ). -- pp. abhihata (q. v.).
Abhiharati [abhi + harati, cp. Sk. abhyāharati & Vedic āharati & ābharati] -- 1. to bring (to), to offer, fetch D iii.170; J i.54, 157; iii.537; iv.421; DA i.272. -- 2. to curse, revile, abuse [cp. Sk. anuvyāharati & abhivyā˚] A i.198. -- Pass. abhihariyati VvA 172 (for abhiharati of Vv 3710; corresp. with ābhata VvA 172). -- pp. abhihaṭa (q.v.). -- Caus. abhihāreti 1. to cause to be brought, to gain, to acquire D ii.188 = 192 = 195 Th 1, 637; J iv.421 (abhihārayaŋ with gloss abhibhārayiŋ). -- 2. to betake oneself to, to visit, take to, go to Sn 414 (Paṇḍavaŋ ˚hāresi = āruhi Sn A 383), 708 (vanantaŋ abhihāraye = vanaŋ gaccheyya SnA 495); Th 2, 146 (aor. ˚hārayiŋ uyyānaŋ = upanesi ThA 138). -- 3. to put on (mail), only in fut. abhihessati J iv.92 (kavacaŋ C. expls. wrongly by ˚hanissati bhindissati so evidently taking it as abhibhavissati). -- 4. At J vi.27 kiŋ yobbanena ciṇṇena yaŋ jarā abhihessati the latter is fut. of abhibhavati (for ˚bhavissati) as indicated by gloss abhibhuyyati.
Abhihāra [fr. abhiharati] bringing, offering, gift S i.82; Sn 710; J i.81 (āsanâ).
Abhihiŋsati spurious reading at A iv.419 for ˚haŋsati (q.v.).
Abhihiŋsanā (& ˚ŋ) [for abhihesanā cp. P. hesā = Sk. hreṣā, & hesitaŋ] neighing Vv 6410 = VvA 279 (gloss abhihesana). See in detail under abhisaŋsanā.
Abhihīta S i.50. Read abhigīta with SS. So also for abhihita on p. 51. ʻ So enchanted was I by the Buddha's rune ʼ. The godlet ascribes a magic potency to the couplet.
Abhihesana see abhihiŋsanā.
Abhihessati see abhihāreti 3 & 4.
Abhīta (adj.) [a + bhīta] fearless J vi.193. See also abhida 1.
Abhīruka (adj.) [a + bhīru + ka] fearless DA i.250.
Abhumma (adj.) [a + bhumma] groundless, unfounded, un- substantial, J v.178; vi.495.
Abhūta (adj.) [a + bhūta] not real, false, not true, usually as nt. ˚ŋ falsehood, lie, deceit Sn 387; It 37; instr. abhūtena falsely D i.161.
-- vādin one who speaks falsely or tells lies Sn 661 = Dh 306 = It 42; expld. as "ariyɔ ûpavāda -- vasena alika -- vādin" SnA 478; as "tucchena paraŋ abhācikkhanto" DhA iii.477.
Abhejja (adj.) [grd. of a + bhid, cp. Sk. abhedya] not to be split or divided, not to be drawn away or caused to be dissented, inalienable Sn 255 (mitto abhejjo parehi); J i.263 (varasūra . . .) iii.318 (˚rūpa of strong character = abhijja -- hadaya); Pug 30 (= acchejja Pug A 212); Miln 160 (˚parisā); Sdhp 312 (+ appadusiya); Pgdp 97 (˚parivāra).
Amacca [Vedic amātya (only in meaning "companion"), adj. formation fr. amā an adverbial loc. -- gen. of pron. 1st person, Sk. ahaŋ = Idg. *emo (cp. Sk. m -- ama), meaning "(those) of me or with me", i. e. those who are in my house] 1. friend, companion, fellow -- worker, helper, esp. one who gives his advice, a bosom -- friend It 73; J vi. 512 (sahajātā amaccā); Pv ii.620 (a ˚ -- paricārikā well-advising friends as company or around him). Freq. in combn. with mitta as mittɔ âmaccā, friends & colleagues D iii.189 -- 90; S 190 = A ii.67; PvA 29; or with ñātī (ñāti -- sālohitā intimate friends & near -- relations), mittâmaccā ñātisālohitā Vin ii.126; Sn p. 104 (= mittā ca kammakarā ca SnA 447); mittā vā amaccā vā ñātī vā sālohitā vā A i.222; PvA 28; amaccā ñāti -- sanghā ca A i.152. <-> 2. Especially a king's intimate friend, king's favourite, confidant J i.262; PvA 73 (˚kula), 74 (amaccā ca purohito ca), 81 (sabba -- kammika amacca), 93; and his special adviser or privy councillor, as such distinguished from the official ministers (purohita, mahāmatta, pārisajja); usually combd. with pārisajjā (pl.) viz. D i.136 (= piya -- sahāyaka DA i.297, but cp. the foll. expln. of pārisajjā as "sesā āṇatti -- karā"); Vin i.348; D iii.64 (amaccā pārisajjā gaṇakamahāmattā); A i.142 (catunnaŋ mahārājānaŋ a. pārisajjā). See on the question of ministers in general Fick, Sociale Gliederung p. 93, 164 & Banerjea, Public Administration in Ancient India pp. 106 -- 120.
Amajja [etym.?] a bud J v.416 (= makula C.).
Amajjapāyaka [a + majja + pāyaka, cp. Sk. amadyapa] one who abstains from intoxicants, a teetotaler J ii.192.
Amata1 (nt.) [a + mata = mṛta pp. of mṛ, Vedic amṛta = Gr. a) -- m(b)rot -- o & a)mbrosi/a = Lat. im -- mort -- a(lis] 1. The drink of the gods, ambrosia, water of immortality, (cp. BSk. amṛta -- varṣa "rain of Ambrosia" Jtm 221). -- 2. A general conception of a state of durability & non -- change, a state of security i. e. where there is not any more rebirth or re -- death. So Bdhgh at KhA 180 (on Sn 225) "na jāyati na jīyati na mīyati ti amatan ti vuccati", or at DhA i.228 "ajātattā na jiyyati na miyyati tasmā amatan ti vuccati". -- Vin i.7 = M i.169 (apārutā tesaŋ amatassa dvārā); Vin i.39; D ii.39, 217, 241; S i.32 (= rāgadosamoha -- khayo), 193; iii.2 (˚ena abhisitta "sprinkled with A."); iv.94 (˚assa dātā), 370; v.402 (˚assa patti); A i.45 sq.; iii.451; iv.455; v.226 sq., 256 sq. (˚assa dātā); J i.4 (v.25); iv.378, 386; v.456 (˚mahā -- nibbāna); Sn 204, 225, 228 (= nibbāna KhA 185); Th 1, 310 (= agada antidote); It 46 = 62 (as dhātu), 80 (˚assa dvāra); Dh 114, 374 (= amata -- mahā -- nibbāna DhA iv.110); Miln 258 (˚dhura savanûpaga), 319 (agado amataŋ & nibbānaŋ amataŋ), 336 (amatena lokaŋ abhisiñci Bhagavā), 346 (dhammɔ âmataŋ); DA i.217 (˚nibbāna); DhA i.87 (˚ŋ pāyeti); Dāvs ii.34; v.31; Sdhp 1, 209, 530, 571.
-- ogadha diving into the ambrosia (of Nibbāna) S v. 41, 54, 181, 220, 232; A iii.79, 304; iv.46 sq., 317, 387; v.105 sq.; Sn 635; Th 1, 179, 748; Dh 411 (= amataŋ nibbānaŋ ogahetvā DhA iv.186); Vv 5020. -- osadha the medicine of Ambrosia, ambrosial medicine Miln 247. -- gāmin going or leading to the ambrosia (of Nibbāna) S i.123; iv.370; v.8; A iii.329; Th 2, 222. -- dasa one who sees Amata or Nibbāna Th 1, 336. -- dundubhi the drum of the Immortal (Nibbāna) M i.171 = Vin i.8 (has ˚dudrabhi). -- dvāra the door to Nibbāna M i.353; S i. 137 = Vin i.5; S ii.43, 45, 58, 80; A v.346. -- dhātu the element of Ambrosia or Nibbāna A iii.356. -- patta having attained to Ambrosia A iv.455. -- pada the region or place of Ambrosia S i.212 ("Bourne Ambrosial" trsln. p. 274); ii.280; Dh 21 (= amatassa adhigama -- vupāyo vuttaŋ hoti DhA i.228). -- phala ambrosial fruit S i.173 = Sn 80. -- magga the path to Ambrosia DhA i.94.
Amata2 (adj.) [see amata1] belonging to Amṛta = ambrosial Sn 452 = S i.189 (amatā vācā = amata -- sadisā sādubhāvena SnA 399: "ambrosial"), 960 (gacchato amataŋ disaŋ = nibbānaŋ, taŋ hi amatan ti tathā niddisitabbato disā cā ti SnA 572). Perhaps also at It 46 = 62 (amataŋ dhātuŋ = ambrosial state or Amṛta as dhātu).
Amatabbāka (?) at VvA 111, acc. to Hardy (Index) "a precious stone of dark blue colour".
Amattaññu (adj.) [a + matta + ˚ñu = Sk. amātrajña] not knowing any bounds (in the taking of food), intemperate, immoderate It 23 (bhojanamhi); Dh 7 (id.); Pug 21.
Amattaññutā (f.) [abstr. to prec.] immoderation (in food) D iii.213; It 23 (bhojane); Pug 21; Dhs 1346 (bhojane); DhsA 402.
Amatteyyatā (f.) [from matteyyatā] irreverence towards one's mother D iii.70, 71.
Amanussa [a + manussa] a being which is not human, a fairy demon, ghost, god, spirit, yakkha Vin i.277; D i. 116; S i.91, J i.99; Dhs 617; Miln 207; DhsA 319; DhA i.13 (˚pariggahīta haunted); PvA 216. -- Cp. amānusa.
Amanussika (adj.) [fr. amanussa] belonging to or caused by a spirit Vin i.202, 203 (˚âbādha being possessed by a demon).
Amama (adj.) [a + mama, gen. of ahaŋ, pron. 1st person, lit. "not (saying: this is) of me"] not egotistical, unselfish Sn 220 (+ subbata), 777; J iv.372 (+ nirāsaya); vi.259 (= mamāyana -- taṇhā -- rahita C.); Pv iv.134 (= mamaŋkāravirahita PvA 230); Mhvs 1, 66, combd. with nirāsa (free from longing), at Sn 469 = 494; Ud 32; J iv.303; vi.259.
Amara (adj.) [a + mara from mṛ] not mortal, not subject to death Th 1, 276; Sn 249 (= amara -- bhāva -- patthanatāya pavatta -- kāya -- kilesa SnA 291); J v.80 (= amaraṇa -- sabhāva), 218; Dāvs v.62.
Amaratta (nt.) [abstr. fr. amara] immortality J v.223 (= devatta C.).
Amarā (?) a kind of slippery fish, an eel (?) Only in expres- sion amarā -- vikkhepika eel -- wobbler, one who practices eel -- wriggling, fr. ˚vikkhepa "oscillation like the a. fish". In English idiom "a man who sits on the fence" D i.24; M i.521; Ps i.155. The expln. given by Bdhgh at DA i.115 is "amarā nāma maccha -- jāti, sā ummujjana -- nimmujjan -- ādi vasena . . gahetuŋ na sakkoti" etc. This meaning is not beyond doubt, but Kern's expln. Toev. 71 does not help to clear it up.
Amala (adj.) [a + mala] without stain or fault J v.4; Sdhp 246, 591, 596.
Amassuka (adj.) [a + massu + ka] beardless J ii.185.
Amājāta (adj.) [amā + jāta; amā adv. "at home", Vedic amā, see under amacca] born in the house, of a slave J i.226 (dāsa, so read for āmajāta, an old mistake, expld. by C. forcibly as "āma ahaŋ vo dāsī ti"!). See also āmāya.
Amātika (adj.) [a + mātika from mātā] without a mother, motherless J v.251.
Amānusa (adj.) [Vedic amānuṣa, usually of demons, but also of gods; a + mānusa, cp. amanussa] non -- or superhuman, unhuman, demonic, peculiar to a non -- human (Peta or Yakkha) Pv ii.1220 (kāma); iv.157 (as n.); iv.36 (gandha, of Petas). -- f. ˚ī Dh 373 (rati = dibbā rati DhA iv.110); Pv iii.79 (ratti, love).
Amāmaka (adj.) [a + mama + ka, cp. amama] "not of me" i. e. not belonging to my party, not siding with me DhA i.66.
Amāya (adj.) [a + māyā] not deceiving, open, honest Sn 941 (see Nd1 422: māyā vuccati vañcanikā cariyā). Cp. next.
Amāyāvin (adj.) [a + māyāvin, cp. amāya] without guile, not deceiving, honest D iii.47 (asaṭha +), 55 (id.), 237; DhA i.69 (asaṭhena a.).
Amitābha (adj.) [a + mita (pp. of mā) + ā + bhā] of boundless or immeasurable splendour Sdhp 255.
Amitta [Vedic amitra; a + mitta] one who is not friend, an enemy D iii.185; It 83; Sn 561 (= paccatthika SnA 455); Dh 66, 207; J vi.274 (˚tāpana harassing the enemies).
Amilātatā (f.) [a + milāta + tā] the condition of not being withered J v.156.
Amu˚ base of demonstr. pron. "that", see asu.
Amucchita (adj.) [a + mucchita] not infatuated (lit. not stupified or bewildered), not greedy; only in phrase agathita amucchita anajjhāpanna (or anajjhopanna) D iii.46; M i.369; S ii.194. See ajjhopanna.
Amutta (adj.) [a + mutta] not released, not free from (c. abl.) It 93 (mārabandhanā).
Amutra (adv.) [pron. base amu + tra] in that place, there; in another state of existence D i.4, 14, 184; It 99.
Amūḷha -- vinaya "acquittal on the ground of restored sanity" (Childers) Vin i.325 (ix.6, 2); ii.81 (iv.5), 99 (iv.14, 27); iv.207, 351; M ii.248.
Amoha (adj.) [a + moha, cp. Sk. amogha] not dull. As n. absence of stupidity or delusion D iii.214; Pug 25. <-> The form amogha occurs at J vi.26 in the meaning of "efficacious, auspicious" (said of ratyā nights).
Amba [Derivation unknown. Not found in pre -- Buddhist literature. The Sk. is āmra. Probably non -- Aryan], the Mango tree, Mangifera Indica D i.46, 53, 235; J ii.105, 160; Vv 7910; Pug 45; Miln 46; PvA 153, 187.
-- aṭṭhi the kernel or stone of the m. fruit DhA iii.207, 208. -- ārāma a garden of mangoes, mango grove Vv 795; VvA 305. -- kañjika mango gruel Vv 3337 (= ambilakañjika VvA 147). -- pakka a (ripe) mango fruit J ii.104, 394; DhA iii.207. -- panta a border of mango trees VvA 198. -- pānaka a drink made from mangoes DhA iii.207. -- piṇḍi a bunch of mangoes J iii.53; DhA iii.207. -- pesikā the peel, rind, of the m. fruit Vin ii.109. -- potaka a mango sprout DhA iii.206 sq. -- phala a m. fruit PvA 273, 274. -- rukkha a m. tree DhA iii.207; VvA 198. -- vana a m. grove or wood D ii.126; J i.139; VvA 305. -- siñcaka one who waters the mangoes, a tender or keeper of mangoes Vv 797.
Ambaka1 (adj.) [= ambakā?] "womanish" (?), inferior, silly, stupid, of narrow intellect. Occurs only with reference to a woman, in combn. with bālā A iii.349 (v. l. amma˚) = v.139 (where spelt ambhaka with v. l. appaka˚ and gloss andhaka); v.150 (spelt ambhaka perhaps in diff. meaning).
-- maddarī see next.
Ambaka2 [demin. of amba] a little mango, only in ˚mad- darī a kiṇd of bird [etym. uncertain] A i.188.
Ambakā (f.) [Sk. ambikā demin. of ambī mother, wife, see P. amma & cp. also Sk. ambālikā f.] mother, good wife, used as a general endearing term for a woman Vin i.232 = D ii.97 (here in play of words with Ambapālī expld. by Bdhgh at Vin i.385 as ambakā ti itthiyikā).
Ambara1 (nt.) [Vedic ambara circumference, horizon] the sky, Dāvs i.38; iv.51; v.32. -- Note. At J v.390 we have to read muraja -- ālambara, and not mura -- jāla -- ambara.
Ambara2 (m. -- nt.) [etym. = ambara1 (?) or more likely a distortion of kambala; for the latter speaks the combn. rattambara = ratta -- kambala. -- The word would thus be due to an erroneous syllable division rattak -- ambala (= ambara) instead of ratta -- kambala] some sort of cloth and an (upper) garment made of it (cp. kambala) Vv 537 (ratt˚ = uttariya VvA 236).
Ambala at J ii.246 (˚koṭṭhaka -- āsana -- sālā) for ambara1 (?) or for ambaka2 (?), or should we read kambala˚?.
Ambāṭaka the hog -- plum, Spondias Mangifera (a kind of mango) Vin ii.17 (˚vana); DA i.271 (˚rukkha).
Ambila (adj.) [Sk. amla = Lat. amarus] sour, acid; one of the 6 rasas or tastes, viz. a., lavaṇa, tittaka, kaṭuka, kasāya, madhura (see under rasa): thus at Miln 56. Another enumeration at Nd2 540 & Dhs 629. -- J i.242 (˚anambila), 505 (loṇ˚); ii.394 (loṇ˚); DA i.270 (˚yāgu sour gruel); DhA ii.85 (ati -- ambila, with accuṇha & atisīta).
Ambu (nt.) [Vedic ambu & ambhas = Gr. o)/mbros, Lat. imber rain; cp. also Sk. abhra rain -- cloud & Gr. a)fro/s scum: see P. abbha] water J v.6; Nd1 202 (a. vuccati udakaŋ); Dāvs ii.16. -- Cp. ambha.
-- cārin "living in the water", a fish Sn 62 (= maccha Nd2 91). -- sevāla a water -- plant Th 1, 113.
Ambuja (m. & nt.) [ambu + ja of jan] "water -- born", i. e. 1. (m.) a fish S i.52. -- 2. (nt.) a lotus Sn 845 (= paduma Nd1 202); Dāvs v.46; Sdhp 360.
Ambuda [ambu + da fr. dā] "water -- giver", a cloud Dāvs v.32; Sdhp 270, 275.
Ambha & Ambho (nt.) [see ambu] water, sea Dāvs iv.54.
Ambhaka see ambaka.
Ambho (indecl.) [fr. haŋ + bho, see bho, orig. "hallo you there"] part. of exclamation, employed: 1. to draw attention = look here, hey! hallo! Vin iii.73 (= ālapanɔ âdhivacana); J ii.3; PvA 62. -- 2. to mark reproach & anger = you silly, you rascal D i.194; It 114; J i.174 (v. l. amho), 254; Miln 48.
Amma (indecl.) [voc. of ammā] endearing term, used (1) by children in addressing their mother = mammy, mother dear D i.93; J ii.133; iv.1, 281 (amma tāta uṭṭhetha daddy, mammy, get up!); DhA ii.87; PvA 73, 74. <-> (2) in general when addressing a woman familiarly = good woman, my (good) lady, dear, thus to a woman J i.292; PvA 63; DhA ii.44; to a girl PvA 6; to a daughter DhA ii.48; iii.172. -- Cp. ambakā.
Ammaṇa (nt.) [of uncertain etym.; Sk. armaṇa is Sans- kritised Pāli. See on form & meaning Childers s. v. and Kern, Toev. p. 72] 1. a trough J v.297; vi.381 (bhatt˚). <-> 2. a certain measure of capacity J i.62; ii.436 (taṇḍul˚). <-> As ˚ka at J ii.117 (v. l. ampaṇaka); DA i.84.
Ammā (f.) [onomat. from child language; Sk. ambā, cp. Gr. a)mma/s mother, Oisl. amma "granny", Ohg. amma "mammy", nurse; also Lat. amita father's sister & amāre to love] mother J iii.392 (gen. ammāya). -- Voc. amma (see sep.).
Amha & Amhan (nt.) [Sk. aśman, see also asama2] a stone Sn 443 (instr. amhanā, but SnA 392 reads asmanā = pāsāṇena).
-- maya made of stone, hard Dh 161 (= pāsāṇa˚ DhA iii.151).
Amha, Amhi see atthi.
Amhā (f.) [etym. uncertain; Morris J.P.T.S. 1889, 201 too vague] a cow (?) A i.229. The C. says nothing.
Amhākaŋ, Amhe see ahaŋ.
Amho = ambho J i.174 (v. l.).
Aya1 see ayo.
Aya2 (fr. i, go) 1. income, in aya -- potthaka receipt book J i.2. -- 2. inlet (for water, aya -- mukha) D i.74; A ii. 166, iv.287.
Ayaŋ (pron.) [Sk. ayaŋ etc., pron. base Idg. *i (cp. Sk. iha), f. *ī. Cp. Gr. i)n, min; Lat. is (f. ea, nt. id); Goth is, nt. ita; Ohg. er (= he), nt. ez (= it); Lith. jìs (he), f. jì (she).] demonstr. pron. "this, he"; f. ayaŋ nt. idaŋ & imaŋ "this, it" etc. This pron. combines in its inflection two stems, viz. as˚ (ayaŋ in nom. m. & f.) & im˚ (id˚ in nom. nt.).
I. Forms. A. (sg.) nom. m. ayaŋ Sn 235; J i.168, 279; f. ayaŋ [Sk. iyaŋ] Kh vii.12; J ii.128, 133; nt. idaŋ Sn 224; J iii.53; & imaŋ Miln 46. acc. m. imaŋ J ii.160; f. imaŋ [Sk. īmāŋ] Sn 545, 1002; J i.280. gen. dat. m. imassa J i.222, 279 & assa Sn 234, 1100; Kh vii.12 (dat.); J ii.158; f. imissā J i.179 & assā [Sk. asyāḥ] J i.290; DhA iii.172. instr. m. nt. iminā J i.279; PvA 80 & (peculiarly or perhaps for amunā) aminā Sn 137; f. imāya [Sk. anayā] J i.267. The instr. anena [Sk. anena] is not proved in Pāli. abl. asmā Sn 185; Dh 220; & imasmā (not proved). loc. m. nt. imasmiŋ Kh iii.; J ii. 159 & asmiŋ Sn 634; Dh 242; f. imissā PvA 79 (or imissaŋ?) & imāyaŋ (no ref.). -- B. (pl.) nom. m. ime J i.221; Pv i.83; f. imā [Sk. imāḥ] Sn 897 & imāyo Sn 1122; nt. imāni [= Sk.] Vin i.84. acc. m. ime [Sk. imān] J i.266; ii.416; f. imā [Sk. imāḥ] Sn 429; J ii.160. gen. imesaŋ J ii.160 & esaŋ [Sk. eṣāŋ] M ii.86, & esānaŋ M ii.154; iii.259; f. also āsaŋ J i.302 (= etāsaŋ C.) & imāsaŋ. instr. m. nt imehi J vi.364; f. imāhi. loc. m. nt. imesu [Sk. eṣu] J i.307.
II. Meanings (1) ayaŋ refers to what is immediately in front of the speaker (the subject in question) or before his eyes or in his present time & situation, thus often to be trsld. by "before our eyes", "the present", "this here", "just this" (& not the other) (opp. para), viz. atthi imasmiŋ kāye "in this our visible body" Kh iii.; yathɔ âyaŋ padīpo "like this lamp here" Sn 235; ayaŋ dakkhiṇā dinnā "the gift which is just given before our eyes" Kh vii.12; ime pādā imaŋ sīsaŋ ayaŋ kāyo Pv i.83; asmiŋ loke paramhi ca "in this world & the other" Sn 634, asmā lokā paraŋ lokaŋ kathaŋ pecca na socati Sn 185; cp. also Dh 220, 410; J i.168; iii.53. -- (2) It refers to what immediately precedes the present of the speaker, or to what has just been mentioned in the sentence; viz. yaŋ kiñci vittaŋ . . . idam pi Buddhe ratanaŋ "whatever . . . that" Sn 224; ime divase these days (just gone) J ii.416; cp. also Vin i.84; Sn 429; J ii.128, 160. -- (3) It refers to what immediately follows either in time or in thought or in connection: dve ime antā "these are the two extremes, viz." Vin i.10; ayaŋ eva ariyo maggo "this then is the way" ibid.; cp. J i.280. <-> (4) With a touch of (often sarcastic) characterisation it establishes a closer personal relation between the speaker & the object in question & is to be trsld. by "like that, such (like), that there, yonder, yon", e. g. imassa vānarindassa "of that fellow, the monkey" J i.279; cp. J i. 222, 307; ii 160 (imesaŋ sattānaŋ "creatures like us"). So also repeated as ayañ ca ayañ ca "this and this", "so and so" J ii.3; idañ cɔ idañ ca "such & such a thing" J ii.5. -- (5) In combn with a pron. rel. it expresses either a generalisation (whoever, whatever) or a specialisation (= that is to say, what there is of, i. e. Ger. und zwar), e. g. yâyaŋ taṇhā Vin i.10; yo ca ayaŋ . . . yo ca ayaŋ "I mean this . . . and I mean" ibid.; ye kecɔ ime Sn 381; yadidaŋ "i. e." Miln 25; yatha -- y -- idaŋ "in order that" (w. pot.) Sn 1092. See also seyyathīdaŋ. -- (6) The gen. of all genders functions in general as a possessive pron. of the 3rd = his, her, its (lit. of him etc.) and thus resembles the use of tassa, e. g. āsavaɔ ssa na vijjanti "his are no intoxications" Sn 1100; sīlaŋ assā bhindāpessāmi "I shall cause her character to be defamed" J i.290; assa bhariyā "his wife" J ii.158 etc. freq.
Ayana (nt.) [Vedic ayana, fr. i] (a) "going", road. -- (b) going to, goal S v.167 (ekāyano maggo leading to one goal, a direct way), 185 (id.); DA i.313; Dāvs iv.40. <-> See also eka˚.
Ayasa (nt.) [a + yasa, cp. Sk. ayaśaḥ] ill repute, disgrace Miln 139, 272; Dāvs i.8.
Ayira (& Ayyira) (n. -- adj.) [Vedic ārya, Metathesis for ariya as diaeretic form of ārya, of which the contracted (assimilation) form is ayya. See also ariya] (n.) ariyan, nobleman, gentleman (opp. servant); (adj.) arīyan, well-born, belonging to the ruling race, noble, aristocratic, gentlemanly J v.257; Vv 396. -- f. ayirā lady, mistress (of a servant) J ii.349 (v. l. oyyakā); voc. ayire my lady J v.138 (= ayye C.).
Ayiraka = ayira; cp. ariyaka & ayyaka; D iii.190 (v. l. BB yy); J ii.313.
Ayo & Aya (nt.) [Sk. ayaḥ nt. iron & ore, Idg. *ajes -- , cp. Av. ayah, Lat. aes, Goth. aiz, Ohg. ēr (= Ger. Erz.), Ags. ār (= E. ore).] iron. The nom. ayo found only in set of 5 metals forming an alloy of gold (jātarūpa), viz. ayo, loha (copper), tipu (tin), sīsa (lead), sajjha (silver) A iii.16 = S v.92; of obl. cases only the instr. ayasā occurs Dh 240 (= ayato DhA iii.344); Pv i.1013 (paṭikujjita, of Niraya). -- Iron is the material used kat)e)coxh/n in the outfit & construction of Purgatory or Niraya (see niraya & Avīci & cp. Vism 56 sq.). -- In compn. both ayo˚ & aya˚ occur as bases.
I. ayo˚: -- kapāla an iron pot A iv.70 (v. l. ˚guhala); Nd2 304 iii. d 2 (of Niraya). -- kūṭa an iron hammer PvA 284. -- khīla an iron stake S v.444; M iii.183 = Nd2 304 iii. c; SnA 479. -- guḷa an iron ball S v.283; Dh 308; It 43 = 90; Th 2, 489; DA i.84. -- ghana an iron club Ud 93; VvA 20. -- ghara an iron house J iv.492. -- paṭala an iron roof or ceiling (of Niraya) PvA 52. -- pākāra an iron fence Pv i.1013 = Nd2 304 iii. d 1. -- maya made of iron Sn 669 (kūṭa); J iv.492 (nāvā); Pv i.1014 (bhūmi of N.); PvA 43, 52. -- muggara an iron club PvA 55. -- sanku an iron spike S iv.168; Sn 667.
II. aya˚: -- kapāla = ayo˚ DhA i.148 (v. l. ayo˚). -kāra a worker in iron Miln 331. -- kūṭa = ayo˚ J i.108; DhA ii.69 (v. l.). -- nangala an iron plough DhA i.223; iii.67. -- paṭṭaka an iron plate or sheet (cp. loha˚) J v.359. -- paṭhavi an iron floor (of Avīci) DhA i.148. -- sanghāṭaka an iron (door) post DhA iv.104. -- sūla an iron stake Sn 667; DhA i.148.
Ayojjha (adj.) [Sk. ayodhya] not to be conquered or sub- dued M ii.24.
Ayya (n. -- adj.) [contracted form for the diaeretic ariya (q. v. for etym.). See also ayira] (a) (n.) gentleman, sire, lord, master J iii.167 = PvA 65; DhA i.8 (ayyā pl. the worthy gentlemen, the worthies), 13 (amhākaŋ ayyo our worthy Sir); ii.95. -- (b) (adj.) worthy, gentlemanly, honourable Vin ii.191; DhA ii.94 sq. -- The voc. is used as a polite form of address (cp. Ger. "Sie" and E. address "Esq.") like E. Sir, milord or simply "you" with the implication of a pluralis majestatis; thus voc. proper ayya J i.221, 279, 308; pl. nom. as voc. ayyā in addressing several J ii.128, 415; nom. sg. as voc. (for all genders & numbers) ayyo Vin ii.215; J iii.126, 127. -- f. ayyā lady, mistress M ii.96 (= mother of a prince); DhA i.398; voc. ayye my lady J v.138.
-- putta lit. son of an Ariyan, i. e. an aristocratic (young) man gentleman (cp. in meaning kulaputta); thus (a) son of my master (lit.) said by a servant J iii.167; (b) lord, master, "governor" J i.62 (by a servant); DA i.257 (= sāmi, opp. dāsi -- putta); PvA 145 (by a wife to her husband); DhA ii.110; (c) prince (see W.Z.K.M. xii., 1898, 75 sq. & Epigraphia Indica iii.137 sq.) J vi.146.
Ayyaka [demin. of ayya] grandfather, (so also BSk., e. g. M Vastu ii.426; iii.264) J iii.155; iv.146; vi.196; Pv i.84; Miln 284. ayyaka -- payyakā grandfather & great grandfather, forefathers, ancestors J i.2; PvA 107 (= pitāmahā). -- f. ayyakā grandmother, granny Vin ii.169; S i.97; J ii.349 (here used for "lady", as v. l. BB); & ayyikā Th 2, 159; Vism 379.
Ara [Vedic ara fr. ṛ, ṛṇoti; see etym. under appeti & cp. more esp. Lat. artus limb, Gr. a(/rma chariot, also P. aṇṇava] the spoke of a wheel D ii.17 (sahassɔ âra adj. with thousand spokes), cp. Miln 285; J iv.209; vi.261; Miln 238; DhA ii.142; VvA 106 (in allegorical etym. of arahant = saŋsāra -- cakkassa arānaŋ hatattā "breaker of the spokes of the wheel of transmigration") = PvA 7 (has saŋsāra -- vaṭṭassa); VvA 277.
Arakkhiya (adj.) [a + rakkhiya, grd. of rakkhati] not to be guarded, viz. (1) impossible to watch (said of women folk) J ii.326 (a. nāma itthiyo); iii.90 (mātugāmo nāma a.). -- (2) unnecessary to be guarded Vin ii.194 (Tathāgatā).
Arakkheyya (adj.) [in form = arakkhiya] only in nt. "that which does not need to be guarded against", what one does not need to heed, superfluous to beware of A iv.82 (cattāri Tathāgatassa a˚ āni). -- 3 arakkheyyāni are enumd. at D iii.217 (but as ārakkh˚, which is also given by Childers).
Araghaṭṭa [Sk. araghaṭṭaka (so Halāyudha, see Aufrecht p. 138), dialect.] a wheel for raising water from a well Bdgh. on cakkavaṭṭaka at cv v.16, 2 (Vin ii.318). So read for T. arahatta -- ghaṭi -- yanta acc to Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885, 30; cp. also Vin. Texts iii.112. -- The 2rd part of the cpd. is doubtful; Morris & Aufrecht compare the modern Hindī form arhaṭ or rahaṭ "a well -- wheel".
Araja (adj.) [a + raja] free from dust or impurity S iv.218 (of the wind); Vv 536 (= apagata -- raja VvA 236).
Arañña (nt.) [Vedic araṇya; from araṇa, remote, + ya. In the Rig V. araṇya still means remoteness (opp. to amā, at home). In the Ath V. it has come to mean wilderness or forest. Connected with ārād and āre, remote, far from]. forest D i.71; M i.16; iii.104; S i.4, 7, 29, 181, 203 (mahā); A i.60 (˚vanapatthāni); ii.252; iii.135, 138; Sn 39, 53, 119; Dh 99, 329, 330; It 90; Vv 567; Ps i.176. [The commentators, give a wider meaning to the word. Thus the O. C. (Vin iii.46, quoted Vism 72 & SnA 83) says every place, except a village and the approach thereto, is arañña. See also Vin iii.51; DA i.209; PvA 73; VvA 249; J i.149, 215; ii.138; v.70].
-- āyatana a forest haunt Vin ii.201; S ii.269; J i.173; VvA 301; PvA 54, 78, 141. -- kuṭikā a hut in the forest, a forest lodge S i.61; iii.116; iv.116, 380; DhA iv.31 (as v. l.; T. has ˚kuṭi). -- gata gone into the forest (as loneliness) M i.323; A iii.353; v.109 sq., 207, 323 sq. -- ṭhāna a place in the forest J i.253. -- vāsa a dwelling in the forest, a hermitage J i.90. -- vihāra living in (the) loneliness (of the forest) A iii.343 sq.
Araññaka (& Āraññāka) (adj.) [arañña + ka] belonging to solitude or to the forest, living in the forest, fond of solitude, living as hermits (bhikkhū) M i.214 (ā˚), 469; iii.89; S ii.187, 202 (v. l. ā˚), 208 sq.; 281; A iii.343, 391; iv.291, 344, 435; v.10. See also āraññaka.
Araññakatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. araññaka] the habit of one who lives in the forest, indulgence in solitude & sequestration, a hermit's practice, seclusion S ii.202, 208 sq. See also āraññakatta.
Araṇa1 (adj. -- n.) [Vedic araṇa fr. *ara √ṛ, which as abl. ārā is used as adv. far from, cp. P. ārakā. Orig. meaning "removed from, remote, far". See also arañña]. (adj.) living in solitude, far from the madding crowd M iii.237 (˚vibhanga -- sutta); S i.44, 45; J i.340 (tittha˚?).
Araṇa2 (nt.) [a + raṇa] quietude, peace Nett 55 (+ tāṇa), 176 (or as adj. = peaceful) ThA 134 (+ saraṇa); Vbh 19 sq. (opp. saraṇa). See saraṇa2.
-- vihārin (or araṇā -- vihārin) [to be most likely taken as araṇā˚, abl. of araṇa in function of ārakā, i. e. adv. far from, away; the spelling araṇa would refer it to araṇa2. As regards meaning the P. Commentators expln. it as opp. of raṇa fight, battle, i. e. peacefullness, friendliness & see in it a syn. of metta. Thus Dhammapāla at PvA 230 expls. it as "mettā -- vihārin", & in this meaning it is found freq. in BSk. e. g. Divy 401; Av. Ś ii.131 (q. v. for further ref. under note 3); M Vastu i.165; ii.292. Cp. also the epithet of the Buddhas raṇañjaha] one who lives in seclusion, an anchoret, hermit; hence a harmless, peaceful person A i.24; Th 2, 358, 360; Pv iv.133 (= PvA 230); ThA 244. Cp. Dhs trsl. 336.
Araṇi & ˚ī (f.) [Vedic araṇī & araṇi fr. ṛ] wood for kind- ling fire by attrition, only in foll. cpds.: ˚potaka small firewood, all that is needed for producing fire, chiefly drill sticks Miln 53; ˚sahita (nt.) same Vin ii.217; J i. 212 (ī); v.46 (ī); DhA ii.246; ˚mathana rubbing of firewood J vi.209. --
Note. The reading at PvA 211 araṇiyehi devehi sadisa -- vaṇṇa is surely a misreading (v. l. BB ariyehi).
Arati (f.) [a + rati] dislike, discontent, aversion Sn 270, 436, 642, 938; Dh 418 (= ukkaṇṭhitattaŋ DhA iv.225); Th 2, 339 (= ukkaṇṭhi ThA 239); Sdhp 476.
Aravinda [ara + vinda (?) Halāyudha gives as Sk. aravinda nt.] a lotus, Nymphaea Nelumbo Dāvs v.62.
Araha (adj.) ( -- ˚) [Vedic arha of arh] 1. worthy of, de- serving, entitled to, worth Dh 195 (pūjā˚); Pv ii.86 (dakkhiṇā˚); VvA 23 (daṇḍa˚ deserving punishment). Freq. in cpd. mahâraha [Sk. mahârgha] worth much, of great value, costly, dear J i.50, 58; iii.83, etc. (see mahant). -- 2. fit for, apt for, suitable PvA 26 (paribhoga˚ fit for eating).
Arahati [Vedic arhati, etym. uncertain but cp. agghati] to be worthy of, to deserve, to merit (= Lat. debeo) Sn 431, 552 (rājā arahasi bhavituŋ); J i.262; Dh 9, 10, 230; Pv iii.66. -- ppr. arahant (q. v.). Cp. also adj. araha.
Arahatta1 (nt.) [abstr. formation fr. arahat˚, 2nd base of arahant in compn.: see arahant iv.2] the state or condition of an Arahant, i. e. perfection in the Buddhist sense = Nibbāna (S iv.151) final & absolute emancipation, Arahantship, the attainment of the last & highest stage of the Path (see magga & anāgāmin). This is not restricted by age or sex or calling. There is one instance in the Canon of a child having attained Arahantship at the age of 7. One or two others occur in the Comy ThA 64 (Selā); PvA 53 (Sankicca). Many women Arahants are mentioned by name in the oldest texts. About 400 men Arahants are known. Most of them were bhikkhus, but A iii.451 gives the names of more than a score lay Arahants (cp. D ii.93 = S v.360, and the references in Dial. iii.5 n4). <-> Arahattaŋ is defined at S iv.252 as rāga -- kkhaya, dosa˚, moha˚. Descriptions of this state are to be found in the formulae expressing the feelings of an Arahant (see arahant ii.). Vin ii.254; D iii.10, 11, 255; A iii.34, 421, 430; v.209; Pug 73; Nett 15, 82; DA i.180, 188, 191; DhA ii 95; iv.193; PvA 14. -- Phrases: arahattaŋ sacchikaroti to experience Arahantship Vin ii.74; D i.229; arahattaŋ pāpuṇāti to attain or reach Arahantship (usually in aor. pāpuṇi) J ii.229 ThA 64; DhA ii.49 (saha paṭisambhidāhi) 93 (id.); PvA 53, 54, 61, 233 & freq. elsewhere; cp. arahattāya paṭipanna D iii.255; A i.120; iv.292 sq., 372 sq.
-- gahaṇa attainment of Arahantship DhA i.8. -- patta (& patti) one who has attained Ar. S i.196; v.273; A ii.157; iii.376; iv.235. -- phala the fruit of Ar. Vin i.39, 41, 293; iii.93; D iii.227, 277; S iii.168; v.44; A i.23, 45; iii.272; iv.276; Dhs 1017; Vbh 326. -- magga the Path of Ar. S i.78; A iii.391; DA i.224. -- vimokkha the emancipation of Ar. Nd2 19.
Arahatta2 in ˚ghaṭi see araghaṭṭa.
Arahant (adj. -- n.) [Vedic arhant, ppr. of arhati (see arahati), meaning deserving, worthy]. Before Buddhism used as honorific title of high officials like the English ʻ His Worship ʼ; at the rise of Buddhism applied popularly to all ascetics (Dial. iii.3 -- 6). Adopted by the Buddhisṭs as t. t. for one who has attained the Summum Bonum of religious aspiration (Nibbāna).
I. Cases nom. sg. arahaŋ Vin i.9; D i.49; M i.245, 280; S i.169; see also formula C. under ii., & arahā Vin i.8, 25, 26; ii.110, 161; D iii.255; It 95; Kh iv.; gen. arahato S iv.175; Sn 590; instr. arahatā S iii.168; DA i.43; acc. arahantaŋ D iii.10; Dh 420; Sn 644; Loc. arahantamhi Vv 212. -- nom. pl. arahanto Vin i.19; iv.112; S i.78, 235; ii.220; iv.123; gen. arahataŋ Vin iii.1; S i.214; Sn 186; It 112; Pv i.1112. Other cases are of rare occurrence.
II. Formulae. Arahantship finds its expression in freq. occurring formulae, of which the standard ones are the foll.: A. khīṇā jāti vusitaŋ brahmacariyaŋ kataŋ karaṇīyaŋ nâparaŋ itthattāya "destroyed is (re -- ) birth, lived is a chaste life, (of a student) done is what had to be done, after this present life there is no beyond". Vin i.14, 35, 183; D i.84, 177, 203; M i.139; ii.39; S i. 140; ii.51, 82, 95, 120, 245; iii.21, 45, 55, 68, 71, 90, 94, 195, 223; iv.2, 20, 35, 45, 86, 107, 151, 383; v.72, 90, 144, 222; A i.165; ii.211; iii.93; iv.88, 179, 302; v.155, 162; Sn p. 16; Pug 61, etc. -- B. eko vūpakaṭṭho appamatto ātāpī pahitatto ʻ alone, secluded, earnest, zealous, master of himself ʼ D i.177; ii.153 & continued with A: S i.140, 161; ii.21; iii.36, 74; iv.64; v.144, 166; A i.282; ii.249; iii.70, 217, 301, 376; iv. 235. -- C. arahaŋ khīṇāsavo vusitavā katakaraṇīyo ohitabhāro anupatta -- sadattho parikkhīṇa -- bhava -- saññojano sammad -- aññā vimutto: D iii.83, 97; M i.4, 235; S i.71; iii.161, 193; iv.125; v.145, 205, 273, 302; A i.144; iii.359, 376; iv.362, 369, 371 sq., It 38. <-> D. ñāṇañ ca pana me dassanaŋ udapādi akuppā me ceto -- vimutti ayaŋ antimā jāti natthi dāni punabbhavo "there arose in me insight, the emancipation of my heart became unshake able, this is my last birth, there is now no rebirth for me: S ii.171; iii.28; iv.8; v.204; A i.259; iv.56, 305, 448.
III. Other passages (selected) Vin i.8 (arahā sītibhūto nibbuto), 9 (arahaŋ Tathāgato Sammāsambuddho), 19 (ekādasa loke arahanto), 20 (ekasaṭṭhi id.). 25 sq.; ii. 110, 161; iii.1; iv.112 (te arahanto udake kīḷanti); D i.49 (Bhagavā arahaŋ), 144; iii.10, 255: M i.245 (Gotamo na pi kālaŋ karoti: arahaŋ samaṇo Gotamo), 280; S i.9, 26, 50 (Tathāgato), 78, 140, 161, 169, 175, 178 (+ sītibhūta), 208, 214, 235 (khīnāsavā arahanto); iii. 160 (arahā tissa?), 168; iv.123, 175, 260, 393; v.159 sq., 164, 200 sq.; A i.22 (Sammāsambuddho), 27, 109, 266; iī.134; iii.376, 391, 439; iv.364, 394; v.120; Sn 186, 590, 644, 1003; It 95 (+ khīṇāsava), 112; Kh iv. (dasahi angehi samannāgato arahā ti vuccati: see KhA 88); Vv 212; i.217; Dh 164, 420 (khīṇāsava +); Ps ii.3, 19, 194, 203 sq.; Pug 37, 73; Vbh 324, 336, 422; Pv i.11 (khettûpamā arahanto), 1112; iv.132.
IV. In compn. & der. we find two bases, viz. (1) arahanta˚ in ˚ghāta the killing or murder of an Arahant (considered as one of the six deadly crimes): see abhiṭhāna; ˚ghātaka the murderer of the A.: Vin i.89, 136, 168, 320; ˚magga (arahatta˚?) the path of an A.: D ii 144. -- (2) arahat˚ in (arahad -- )dhaja the flag or banner of an A.: J i.65.
V. See further details & passages under anāgāmin, khīṇa, buddha. On the relationship of Buddha and Arahant see Dial. ii.1 -- 3; iii.6. For riddles or word -- play on the form arahant see M i.280; A iv.145; DA i.146 = VvA 105, 6 = PvA 7; DhA iv.228; DhsA 349.
Arāti [a + rāti, cp. Sk. arāti] an enemy Dāvs iv.1.
Ari [Ved. ari; fr. ṛ] an enemy. -- The word is used in exegesis & word expln, thus in etym. of arahant (see ref. under arahant v.); of bhūri Ps ii.197. -- Otherwise in late language only, e. g. Sdhp 493 (˚bhūta). See also arindama & aribhāseti.
Ariñcamāna [ppr. med. of P. riñcati for ricyati] not leaving behind, not giving up, i. e. pursuing earnestly Sn 69 (jhānaŋ = ajȧhamana SnA 123, cp. Nd2 94).
Ariṭṭha1 (adj.) [a + riṭṭha = Vedic ariṣṭa, pp of a + riṣ to hurt or be hurt] unhurt Sdhp 279.
Ariṭṭha2 [Sk. ariṣṭa, N. of a tree] a kind of spirituous liquor Vin iv.110.
Ariṭṭhaka (adj.) [fr. ariṭṭha] (a) unhurt; perfect DA 1,94 (˚ŋ ñāṇaŋ). -- (b) [fr. ariṭṭha in meaning of "soap -- berry plant"?] in phrase mahā ariṭṭhako maṇi S i.104 "a great mass of soap stone" (cp. Rh. D. in J. R. A. S. 1895, 893 sq.), "a shaped block of steatite" (Mrs. Rh. D. in K. S 130).
Aritta (nt.) [Vedic aritra, Idg. *ere to row (Sk. ṛ to move); cf. Gr. e)re/ssw to row, e)retmo/s rudder, Lat. remus, Ohg. ruodar = rudder; Ags. rōwan = E. row] a rudder. Usually in combn. with piya (phiya) oar, as piyârittaŋ (phiy˚) oar & rudder, thus at S i.103 (T. piya˚, v. l. phiya˚); A ii.201 (piya˚); J iv.164 (T. piya˚, v.l. phiya˚); Sn 321 (piya +; SnA 330 phiya = dabbi -- padara, aritta = veḷudaṇḍa). DhsA 149.
Arindama [Sk. arindama, ariŋ + dama of dam] a tamer of enemies, victor, conqueror Pv iv.315 (= arīnaŋ damanasīla PvA 251); Sdhp 276.
Aribhāseti [= ariŋ bhāseti] to denounce, lit. to call an enemy J iv.285. Correct to Pari˚ according to Fausböll (J v. corr.)
Ariya (adj. -- n.) [Vedic ārya, of uncertain etym. The other Pāli forms are ayira & ayya] 1. (racial) Aryan D ii.87. <-> 2. (social) noble, distinguished, of high birth. -- 3. (ethical) in accord with the customs and ideals of the Aryan clans, held in esteem by Aryans, generally approved. Hence: right, good, ideal. [The early Buddhists had no such ideas as we cover with the words Buddhist and Indian. Ariya does not exactly mean either. But it often comes very near to what they would have considered the best in each]. -- (adj.): D i.70 = (˚ena sīlakkhandhena samannāgata fitted out with our standard morality); iii.64 (cakkavatti -- vatta), 246 (diṭṭhi); M i.139 (pannaddhaja); ii.103 (ariyāya jātiyā jāto, become of the Aryan lineage); S ii.273 (tuṇhībhāva); iv.250 (vaddhi), 287 (dhamma); v.82 (bojjhangā), 166 (satipaṭṭhānā), 222 (vimutti), 228 (ñāṇa), 255 (iddhipādā), 421 (maggo), 435 (saccāni), 467 (paññā -- cakkhu); A i.71 (parisā); ii.36 (ñāya); iii.451 (ñāṇa); iv.153 (tuṇhībhāva); v.206 (sīlakkhandha); It 35 (paññā), 47 (bhikkhu sammaddaso); Sn 177 (patha = aṭṭhangiko maggo SnA 216); Dh 236 (bhūmi), 270; Ps ii.212 (iddhi). -- alamariya fully or thoroughly good D i.163 = iii.82 = A iv.363; nâlamariya not at all good, object, ignoble ibid. -- (m.) Vin i.197 (na ramati pāpe); D i.37 = (yaŋ taŋ ariyā ācikkhanti upekkhako satimā etc.: see 3rd. jhāna), 245; iii.111 (˚ānaŋ anupavādaka one who defames the noble); M i.17, 280 (sottiyo ariyo arahaŋ); S i.225 (˚ānaŋ upavādaka); ii.123 (id.); iv.53 (˚assa vinayo), 95 (id.); A i.256 (˚ānaŋ upavādaka); iii.19, 252 (id.); iv.145 (dele! see arīhatatta); v.68, 145 sq., 200, 317; It 21, 108; Dh 22, 164, 207; J iii.354 = Miln 230; M i.7, i35 (ariyānaŋ adassāvin: "not recognising the Noble Ones") PvA 26, 146; DhA ii.99; Sdhp 444 (˚ānaŋ vaŋsa). <-> anariya (adj. & n.) not Ariyan, ignoble, undignified, low, common, uncultured A i.81; Sn 664 (= asappurisa SnA 479; DhsA 353); J ii.281 (= dussīla pāpadhamma C.); v.48 (˚rūpa shameless), 87; DhA iv.3. -- See also ñāṇa, magga, sacca, sāvaka.
-- âvakāsa appearing noble J v.87. -- uposatha the ideal feast day (as one of 3) A i.205 sq., 212. -- kanta loved by the Best D iii.227. -- gaṇā (pl.) troops of worthies J vi.50 (= brāhmaṇa -- gaṇā, te kira tāda ariyâcārā ahesuŋ, tena te evam āha C.). -- garahin casting blame on the righteous Sn 660. -- citta a noble heart. -- traja a true descendant of the Noble ones Dpvs v.92. -- dasa having the ideal (or best) belief It 93 = 94. -- dhana sublime treasure; always as sattavidha˚ sevenfold, viz. saddhā˚, sīla˚, hiri˚, ottappa˚, suta˚, cāga˚, paññā˚ "faith, a moral life, modesty, fear of evil, learning, self -- denial, wisdom" ThA 240; VvA 113; DA ii.34. -- dhamma the national customs of the Aryans (= ariyānaŋ eso dhammo Nd1 71, 72) M i.1, 7, 135; A ii.69; v.145 sq., 241, 274; Sn 783; Dhs 1003. -- puggala an (ethically) model person, Ps i.167; Vin v.117; ThA 206. -- magga the Aryan Path. -- vaŋsa the (fourfold) noble family, i. e. of recluses content with the 4 requisites D iii.224 = A ii.27 = Ps i.84 = Nd2 141; cp. A iii.146. -- vattin leading a noble life, of good conduct J iii.443. -- vatā at Th 1, 334 should be read ˚vattā (nom. sg. of vattar, vac) "speaking noble words": -- vāsa the most excellent state of mind, habitual disposition, constant practice. Ten such at D iii.269, 291 = A v.29 (Passage recommended to all Buddhists by Asoka in the Bhabra Edict). -- vihāra the best practice S v.326. -- vohāra noble or honorable practice. There are four, abstinence from lying, from slander, from harsh language, from frivolous talk. They are otherwise known as the 4 vacī -- kammantā & represent sīla nos. 4 -- 7. See D iii.232; A ii.246; Vin v.125. -- sangha the communion of the Nobles ones PvA 1. -- sacca, a standard truth, an established fact, D i.189, ii.90, 304 sq.; iii 277; M i.62, 184; iii.248; S v.415 sq. = Vin i.10, 230. It 17; Sn 229, 230, 267; Dh 190; DhA iii.246; KhA 81, 151, 185, 187; ThA 178, 282, 291; VvA 73. -- sāvaka a disciple of the noble ones (= ariyānaŋ santike sutattā a. SnA 166). M i.8, 46, 91, 181, 323; ii.262; iii.134, 228, 272; It 75; Sn 90; Miln 339; DhA i.5, (opp. putthujjana). -- sīlin of unblemished conduct, practising virtue D i.115 (= sīlaŋ ariyaŋ uttamaŋ parisuddhaŋ DA i.286); M ii.167.
When the commentators, many centuries afterwards, began to write Pali in S. India & Ceylon, far from the ancient seat of the Aryan clans, the racial sense of the word ariya was scarcely, if at all, present to their minds. Dhammapāla especially was probably a non -- Aryan, and certainly lived in a Dravidian environment. The then current similar popular etmologies of ariya and arahant (cp. next article) also assisted the confusion in their minds. They sometimes therefore erroneously identify the two words and explain Aryans as meaning Arahants (DhA i.230; SnA 537; PvA 60). In other ways also they misrepresented the old texts by ignoring the racial force of the word. Thus at J v.48 the text, speaking of a hunter belonging to one of the aboriginal tribes, calls him anariya -- rūpa. The C. explains this as "shameless", but what the text has, is simply that he looked like a non -- Aryan. (cp ʻ frank ʼ in English).
Arīhatatta in phrase "arīhatta ariyo hoti" at A iv.145 is wrong reading for arīnaŋ hatattā. The whole phrase is inserted by mistake from a gloss explaining arahā in the foll. sentence "ārakattā kilesānaŋ arīnaŋ hatattā . . . arahā hoti", and is to be deleted (omitted also by SS).
Aru (nt.) [Vedic aruḥ, unknown etym.] a wound, a sore, only in cpds.: ˚kāya a heap of sores M ii.64 = Dh 147 = Th 1, 769 (= navannaŋ vaṇamukhānaŋ vasena arubhūta kāya DhA iii.109 = VvA 77); ˚gatta (adj.) with wounds in the body M i.506 (+ pakka -- gatta); Miln 357 (id); ˚pakka decaying with sores S iv.198 (˚āni gattāni); ˚bhūta consisting of wounds, a mass of wounds VvA 77 = DhA iii.109.
Aruka = aru; only in cpd. ˚ûpamacitto (adj.) having a heart like a sore (of a man in anger) A i.124 = Pug 30 (expld at Pug A 212 as purāṇa -- vaṇa -- sadisa -- citto "an old wound" i. e. continually breaking open).
Aruṇa [Vedic aruṇa (adj.) of the colour of fire, i. e. ruddy, nt. the dawn; of Idg. *ereu as in Sk. aruṣa reddish, Av. auruša white, also Sk ravi sun; an enlarged from of Idg. *reu as in Sk. rudhira, rohita red (bloody; see etym. under rohita), Gr. e)rudro/s, Lat. ruber.] the sun Vin ii.68; iv.245; J ii.154; v.403; vi.330; Dpvs i.56; DA i.30. <-> a. uggacchati the sun rises J i.108; VvA 75, & see cpds.
-- ugga sunrise Vin iv.272; S v.29, 78, 101, 442 (at all Saŋyutta pass. the v.l. SS is aruṇagga); Vism 49. -- uggamana sunrise (opp. oggamanna). Vin iii.196, 204, 264; iv.86, 166, 230, 244; DhA i.165; ii.6; PvA 109. -- utu the occasion of the sun ( -- rise) DhA i.165. -- vaṇṇa of the colour of the sun, reddish, yellowish, golden Vism 123; DhA i 1.3 = PvA 216. -- sadisa (vaṇṇa) like the sun (in colour) PvA 211 (gloss for suriyavaṇṇa).
Arubheda the Rigveda ThA 206.
Arūpa (adj.) [a + rūpa] without form or body, incorporeal, D i.195 sq.; iii.240; Sn 755; It 62; Sdhp 228, 463, 480. See details under rūpa.
-- âvacara the realm or world of Formlessness, Dhs 1281 -- 1285; Ps i.83 sq., 101. -- kāyika belonging to the group of formless beings Miln 317 (devā). -- ṭhāyin standing in or being founded on the Formless It 62. -- taṇhā "thirst" for the Formless D iii.216. -- dhātu the element or sphere of the Incoporeal (as one of the 3 dhātus rūpa˚, arūpa˚, nirodha˚; see dhātu) D iii.215, 275; It 45. -- bhava formless existence D iii.216. -- loka the world of the Formless, Sdhp 494. -- saññin not having the idea of form D ii.110; iii.260; Exp. i.252.
Arūpin (adj.) [a + rūpin] = arūpa; D i.31 (arūpī attā hoti: see DA i.119), 195; iii.111, 139; It 87 (rūpino va arūpino va sattā).
Are (indecl.) [onomat. Cp. Sk. lalallā, Gr. lale/w, Lat. lallo = E. lull, Ger. lallen & without redupl. Ags. holā, Ger. halloh, E. lo. An abbrev. form of are is re. Cf. also alālā] exclam. of astonishment & excitement: he! hallo! I say!, implying an imprecation: Away with you (with voc.) J i.225 (dāsiputta -- ceṭaka); iv.391 (duṭṭha -- caṇḍāla); DA i.265 (= re); VvA 68 (dubbinī), 217 ("how in the world").
Ala1 freq. spelling for aḷa.
Ala2 (adj.) [alaŋ adv. as adj.] enough, only in neg. anala insufficient, impossible M i.455; J ii.326 = iv.471.
Alaŋ (indecl.) [Vedic araŋ. In meaning 1. alaŋ is the ex- panded continuation of Vedic araŋ, an adv. acc. of ara (adj.) suitable; fitly, aptly rightly fr. ṛ Cp. aṇṇava, appeti, ara. In meaning 2. alaŋ is the same as are] emphatic particle 1. in affirmative sentences: part. of assurance & emphasis = for sure, very much (so), indeed, truly. Note. In connection with a dat. or an infin. the latter only apparently depend upon alaŋ, in reality they belong to the syntax of the whole sentence (as dat. or inf. absolute). It is customary however (since the practice of the Pāli grammarians) to regard them as interdependent and interpret the construction as "fit for, proper" (= yuttaŋ Pāli Com.), which meaning easily arises out of the connotation of alaŋ, e.g. alam eva kātuŋ to be sure, this is to be done = this is proper to be done. In this sense (c. dat.) it may also be compd. with Vedic araŋ c. dat. -- (a) (abs.) only in combn. with dat. or inf. (see c. & Note above). -- (b.) (˚ -- ) see cpds. -- (c.) with dat. or infin.: alaŋ antarāyāya for certain an obstacle M i.130 (opp. nâlaŋ not at all); alaŋ te vippaṭisārāya you ought to feel sorry for it Vin ii.250; alaŋ vacanāya one says rightly S ii.18; alaŋ hitāya untold happiness DhA ii.41. -- ito ce pi so bhavaŋ Gotamo yojana sate viharati alam eva . . . . . upasankamituŋ even if he were 100 miles from here, (surely) even so (i. e. it is fit or proper even then) one must go to him D i.117 (expld. at DA i.288 by yuttam eva = it is proper); alam eva kātuŋ kalyāṇaŋ indeed one must do good = it is appropriate to do good Pv ii.923 (= yuttaŋ PvA 122); alaŋ puññāni kātave "come, let us do meritorious works" Vv 4415 (= yuttaŋ VvA 191). <-> 2. in negative or prohibitive sentences: part. of disapprobation reproach & warning; enough! have done with! fie! stop! alas! (etc. see are). -- (a) (abs.) enough: nâlaŋ thutuŋ it is not enough to praise Sn 217; te pi na honti me alaŋ they are not enough for me Pv i.63. -- (b) with voc.: alaŋ Devadatta mā te rucci sanghabhedo "look out D. or take care D. that you do not split up the community" Vin ii.198; alaŋ Vakkali kin te iminā pūtikāyena diṭṭhena . . . S iii.120. -- (c) enough of (with instr.): alaŋ ettakena enough of this, so much of that Miln 18; alam me Buddhena enough for me of the Buddha = I am tired of the B. DhA ii.34.
-- attha (adj.) "quite the thing", truly good, very profitable, useful D ii.231; M ii.69 (so read for alamatta); A ii.180; Th 1, 252; J i.401 (so read for ˚atta). -- ariya truly genuine, right noble, honourable indeed, only in ˚ñāṇa -- dassana [cp. BSk. alamārya -- jñāna -- darśana Lal v.309, 509] Vin i.9; A iii.64, 430; v.88; J i.389 (cp. ariya). -- kammaniya (quite or thoroughly) suitable Vin iii.187. -- pateyya: see the latter. -- vacanīyā (f.) a woman who has to be addressed with "alaŋ" (i. e. "fie"), which means that she ceases to be the wife of a man & returus into her parental home Vin iii.144, cp. 274 (Bdhgh's. expln.). -- samakkhātar one who makes sufficiently clear It 107. -- sājīva one who is thoroughly fit to associate with his fellow A iii.81. -- sāṭaka "curse -- coat", one who curses his waist -- coat (alaŋ sāṭaka!) because of his having eaten too much it will not fit; an over -- eater; one of the 5 kinds of gluttons or improper eaters as enumd. at DhA iv.16 = DhsA 404.
Alakkhika (& īka) (adj.) [a + lakkhika] unfortunate un- happy, of bad luck Vin iii.23; J iii.259.
Alakkhī (f.) [a + lakkhi] bad luck, misfortune Th 1, 1123.
Alagadda [Der. unknown. In late Sk. alagarda is a water- snake] a kind of snake M i.133 = DA i.21; DhA iv. 132 (˚camma, so read for T. alla -- camma, vv. ll. alanda˚ & alandu˚).
Alagga (adj.) [pp. of laggati] not stuck or attached Nd2 107 (also alaggita); alaggamāna (ppr.) id. DhA iii.298.
Alaggana (nt.) [a + laggana] not hanging on anything, not being suspended DA i.180.
Alaŋkata [pp. of alankaroti] 1. "made too much", made much of, done up, adorned, fitted out Dh 142 (= vatthâbharaṇa -- paṭimaṇḍita DhA iii.83); Pv ii.36; Vv 11; J iii.392; iv.60. -- 2. "done enough" (see alaŋ, use with instr.), only neg. analankata in meaning "insatiate" S i.15 (kāmesu).
Alaŋkaraṇa (nt.) [alaŋ + karaṇa, fr. alankaroti] doing up, fitting out, ornamentation J i.60.
Alaŋkaraṇaka (adj.) [fr. alankaraṇa] adorning, embellishing, decorating DhA i.410.
Alaŋkaroti [alaŋ + karoti, Vedic araṅkaroti] to make much of i. e. to adorn, embellish, decorate J i.60; iii.189; vi. 368. ger. ˚karitvā DhA i.410; PvA 74. -- pp. alankata. -- Caus. alankārāpeti to cause to be adorned J i.52.
Alaŋkāra [fr. alankaroti, cp. Vedic araṅkṛti] "getting up" i. e. fitting out, ornament, decoration; esp. trinkets, ornaments D iii.190; A iii.239; 263 sq.; J vi.368; PvA 23, 46, 70 ( -- ˚ adj. adorned with), 74; Sdhp 249.
Alattaka [Sk. alaktaka] lac, a red animal dye J iv.114 (˚pāṭala); DhA ii.174; iv.197.
Alanda & Alandu see alagadda.
Alamba (adj.) [a + lamba] not hanging down, not drooping, short J v.302; vi.3 (˚tthaniyo not flabby: of a woman's breasts cp. alambɔ ordhva -- stanī Suśruta i.371).
Alasa (adj.) [a + lasa] idle, lazy, slack, slothful, languid S i.44, 217; Sn 96 (= jāti -- alaso SnA 170); J iv.30; Dh 280 (= mahā -- alaso DhA iii.410). Opp. analasa vigorous, energetic S i.44; D iii.190 (dakkha +); Vin iv.211; Nd2 141 (id.).
Alasatā (f.) [abstr. fr. alasa] sloth, laziness; only in neg. analasatā zeal, industry VvA 229.
Alassa (nt.) at S i.43 is spurious spelling for ālassa idleness, sloth; v. l. BB ālasya.
Alāta (nt.) [Sk. alāta, related to Lat. altāre altar, adoleo to burn] a firebrand A ii.95 (chava˚ a burning corpse, see chava); J i.68; Pug 36; DhA iii.442.
Alāpu (nt.) [= alābu, with p for b: so Trenckner Notes 6216] a gourd, pumpkin Dh 149 (= DhA iii.112; vv. ll. alābu & alābbu).
Alābu [Sk. alābū f.] a long white gourd, Cucurbita Lage- naris M i.80 (tittaka˚), 315 (id.); PvA 47 (id.); DhsA 405. -- See also alāpu.
Alābhaka [a + labhaka] not getting, loss, detriment Vin iii.77.
Alālā (indecl.) [a + lālā interjection fr. sound root *lal, see etym. under are] "not saying lā lā" i. e. not babbling, not dumb, in ˚mukha not (deaf &) dumb SnA 124 (= aneḷamūga of Sn 70).
Alika (adj.) [Sk. alīka] contrary, false, untrue S i.189; J iii.198; vi.361; Miln 26, 99. -- nt. ˚ŋ a lie, falsehood Dh 264.
-- vādin one who tells a lie, a liar Dh 223 = VvA 69 (has alīka˚); J ii.4; SnA 478 (for abhūta -- vādin Sn 661).
Alīnatā (f.) [abstr. of alīna] open mindedness, prudence, sincerity J i.366.
Aluḷita (adj.) [a + luḷita, pp. of lul] umoved, undisturbed Miln 383.
Aloṇika (adj.) [a + loṇika] not salted J iii.409; VvA 184.
Aloma (adj.) [a + loma] not hairy (upon the body) J vi.457.
Alola (adj.) [a + lola] undisturbed, not distracted (by desires), not wavering: of firm resolution, concentrated Sn 65 (= nillolupa Nd2 98; = rasavisesesu anākula SnA 118).
Alla (adj.) (only ˚ -- ) [Vedic ārdra, to Gr. a)/rdw moisten, a)/rda dirt] -- 1. moist, wet M iii.94 (˚mattikā -- puñja a heap of moist clay; may be taken in meaning 2). -- 2. fresh (opp. stale), new; freshly plucked, gathered or caught, viz.˚âvalepana see adda3; ˚kusamuṭṭhi freshly plucked grass A v.234 = 249; ˚gomaya fresh dung A v.234; DhA i.377; ˚camma living skin Vism 195; ˚tiṇa fresh grass DA i.77; PvA 40; ˚dārūni green sticks J i.318; ˚madhu fresh honey DhA ii.197; ˚maŋsa -- sarīra a body of living flesh DhA ii.51 = iv.166; ˚rasa fresh -- tasting DhA ii.155; ˚rohita -- maccha fresh fish J iii.333. <-> 3. wet = with connotation of clean (through being washed), freshly washed, ˚kesa with clean hair PvA 82 (sīsaŋ nahātvā allakesa); usually combd. with allavattha with clean clothes (in an ablution; often as a sign of mourning) Ud 14, 91; DhA iv.220; or with odāta vattha (id.) J iii.425. ˚pāṇi with clean hand Pv ii.99 (= dhotapāṇi PvA 116). [For analla -- gatta at S i.183 better read, with ibid 169, an -- allīna -- gatta. For allacamma at DhA iv.132 alagadda -- camma, with the v.l., is preferable].
Allāpa [Sk. ālāpa; ā + lāpa] conversation, talk; only in cpd. ˚sallāpa conversation (lit. talking to & fro or together) J i.189; Miln 15; VvA 96; PvA 86.
Allika (?) [either from alla = allikaŋ nt. in meaning defi- lement, getting soiled by ( -- ˚), or from allīyati = alliyakaŋ, a der. fr. ger. alliya clinging to, sticking to. The whole word is doubtful.] only in cpd. (kāma -- ) sukhɔ allikɔânuyoga given to the attachment to sensual joys Vin i.10; D iii.113, 130; S iv.330; v.421; Nett 110.
Allīna [pp. of allīyati; Sk. ālīna] (a) sticking to, adhering or adhered to, clinging M i.80; A v.187; Nd2 under nissita (in form asita allīna upagata). -- (b.) soiled by ( -- ˚), dirtied A ii.201. -- anallīna "to which nothing sticks", i. e. pure, undefiled, clean S i.169 (id. p. on p. 183 reads analla: see alla). Cp. ālaya.
Allīyati [ā + līyati, lī, līyate, layate] to cling to, stick to, adhere to (in both senses, good or bad); to covet. -- (a) lit. kesā sīsaŋ allīyiŋsu the hair stuck to the head J i.64; khaggo lomesu allīyi the sword stuck in the hair J i.273. -- (b) fig. to covet, desire etc.: in idiomatic phrase allīyati (S iii.190 v. l.; T. ālayati) kelāyati vanāyati (S iii.190 v.l.; T. manāyati; M i.260 T. dhanāyati, but v.l. p. 552 vanāyati) mamāyati "to caress dearly & be extremely jealous of" (c. acc.) at M i.260 & S iii.190. <-> J iv.5; v.154 (allīyituŋ, v.l. illīyituŋ); DhsA 364 (vanati bhajati a); pp. allīna -- Caus. alliyāpeti [cp. Sk. ālāpayati, but B.Sk. allīpeti M Vastu iii.144; pp. allīpita ibid. i.311; iii.408; pass. allīpīyate iii.127.] to make stick, to to bring near to (c. acc. or loc.) J ii.325 (hatthiŋ mahābhittiyan alliyāpetvā); iv.392 (sīsena sīsaŋ alliyāpetvā).
Aḷa [etym. unknown] 1. the claw of a crab M i.234; S i.123; J i.223, 505 (˚chinno kakkaṭako; T. spells ala˚); ii.342; iii.295; -- 2. the nails (of finger or toe) (?) in ˚chinna one whose nails are cut off Vin i.91.
Aḷāra (adj.) [Is it the same as uḷāra?] only used with ref. to the eyelashes, & usually expld. by visāla, i.e. extended, wide, but also by bahala, i.e. thick. The meaning & etym. is as yet uncertain. Kern, (Toev. s.v.) transls. by "bent, crooked, arched". ˚akkhin with wide eyes (eyelashes?) J i.306 (= visāla -- netta C.); ˚pamha with thick eye -- lashes Vv 357 (= bahala -- saŋyata -- pakhuma C.; v.l. ˚pamukha); ˚bhamuka having thick eyebrows or ˚lashes J vi.503 (so read for ˚pamukha; C. expls by visāl -- akkhigaṇḍa). Cp. āḷāra.
Aḷhaka in udakɔ aḷhaka VvA 155 read āḷhaka.
Ava˚ (prefix) I. Relation between ava & o. Phonetically the difference between ava & o is this, that ava is the older form, whereas o represents a later development. Historically the case is often reversed -- that is, the form in o was in use first & the form in ava was built up, sometimes quite independently, long afterwards. Okaḍḍhati, okappati, okappanā, okassati, okāra, okantati, okkamati, ogacchati, odāta and others may be used as examples. The difference in many cases has given rise to a differentiation of meaning, like E. ripe: rife, quash: squash; Ger. Knabe: Knappe etc. (see below B 2). -- A. The old Pāli form of the prefix is o. In same cases however a Vedic form in ava has been preserved by virtue of its archaic character. In words forming the 2nd part of a cpd. we have ava, while the absolute form of the same word has o. See e.g. avakāsa ( -- ˚) > okāsa (˚ -- ); avacara > ocaraka; avatata; avadāta; avabhāsa; avasāna. -- B. 1. the proportion in the words before us (early and later) is that o alone is found in 65% of all cases, ava alone in 24%, and ava as well as o in 11%. The proportion of forms in ava increases as the books or passages become later. Restricted to the older literature (the 4 Nikāyas) are the foll. forms with o: okiri, okkanti, okkamati, okkhipati, ogacchati, ossajati. -- (1) The Pāli form (o˚) shows a differentiation in meaning against the later Sanskrit forms (ava˚). See the foll.:
avakappanā harnessing: okappanā confidence;
avakkanti (not Sk.): okkanti appearance;
avakkhitta thrown down: okkhitta subdued;
avacara sphere of motion: ocaraka spy;
avatiṇṇa descended: otiṇṇa affected with love;
avaharati to move down, put off: oharati to steal. (2) In certain secondary verb -- formations, arisen on Pāli grounds, the form o˚ is used almost exclusively pointing thus to a clearly marked dialectical development of Pali. Among these formations are Deminutives in ˚ka usually; the Gerund & the Infinitive usually; the Causatives throughout.
II. Ava as prefix. [P. ava = Vedic ava & occasionally o; Av. ava; Lat. au -- (aufero = avabharati, aufugio etc.); Obg. u -- ; Oir. ō, ua. See further relations in Walde, Lat. Wtb. under au]. -- Meaning. (Rest:) lower, low (opp. ut˚, see e. g. uccâvaca high & low, and below iii. c), expld. as heṭṭhā (DhA iv.54 under avaŋ) or adho (ibid. 153; SnA 290). -- (Motion:) down, downward, away (down), off; e. g. avasūra sun -- down; adv. avaŋ (q. v., opp. uddhaŋ). -- (a) lit. away from, off: ava -- kantati to cut off; ˚gaṇa away from the crowd; ˚chindati cut off; ˚yīyati fall off; ˚bhāsati shine out, effulge; ˚muñcati take off; ˚siṭṭha left over. -- down, out, over: ˚kirati pour down or out over; ˚khitta thrown down; ˚gacchati go down; ˚gāheti dip down; ˚tarati descend; ˚patita fallen down; ˚sajjati emit; ˚siñcati pour out over; ˚sīdati sink down. -- (b) fig. down in connection with verbs of emotion (cp. Lat. de -- in despico to despise, lit. look down on), see ava -- jānāti, ˚bhūta, ˚mānita, ˚vajja, ˚hasati. away from, i. e. the opposite of, as equivalent to a negation and often taking the place of the neg. prefix a˚ (an˚), e. g. in avajaya (= ajaya), ˚jāta, ˚mangala (= a˚), ˚pakkhin, ˚patta.
Affinities of ava. -- (a) apa. There exists an exceedingly frequent interchange of forms with apa˚ and ava˚, the historical relation of which has not yet been thoroughly investigated. For a comparison of the two the BSk. forms are indispensable, and often afford a clue as to the nature of the word in question. See on this apa 2 and cp. the foll. words under ava: avakata, ˚karoti, ˚khalita, ˚anga, ottappa, avattha, ˚nīta, ˚dāna, ˚pivati, ˚rundhati, ˚lekhati, ˚vadati, ˚varaka, ˚sakkati, avassaya, avasseti, ˚hita, avāpurīyati, avekkhati. -- (b) abhi. The similarity between abhi & ava is seen from a comparison of meaning abhi ii. b and ava ii. a. The two prefixes are practically synonymous in the foll. words: ˚kankhati, ˚kamati, ˚kiṇṇa, ˚khipati, ˚maddati, ˚rata, ˚lambati, ˚lekheti, ˚lepana, ˚siñcati. -- (c) The contrary of ava is ut (cp. above ii.2). Among the freq. contrast -- pairs showing the two, like E. up & down, are the foll. ukkaŋsâvakaŋsa, uggaman -- oggamana, uccâvaca, ullangheti -- olangheti, ullittâvalitta; ogilituŋuggilituŋ, onaman -- unnamana. Two other combns. founded on the same principle (of intensifying contrast) are chiddâvacchidda and ava˚ in contrast with vi˚ in olambavilamba, olugga -- vilugga.
Avaŋ (adv.) [Vedic avāk & avāŋ] the prep. ava in adv. use, down, downward; in C. often expld. by adho. Rarely absolute, the only passage found so far being Sn 685 (avaŋ sari he went down, v. l. avasari, expld. by otari SnA 486). Opp. uddhaŋ (above, up high). Freq. in cpd. avaŋsira (adj.) head downward (+ uddhaŋpāda feet up), a position characteristic of beings in Niraya (Purgatory), e. g. S i.48; Sn 248 (patanti sattā nirayaŋ avaŋsirā = adhogata -- sīsā SnA 290); Vv 5225 (of Revatī, + uddhaŋpāda); Pv iv.146; J i.233 (+ uddhapāda); iv.103 (nirayaŋ vajanti yathā adhammo patito avaŋsiro); Nd1 404 (uddhaŋpāda +); DhA iv.153 (gloss adhosira). -- On avaŋ˚ cp. further avakkāra, avākaroti, avekkhipati.
Avakaŋsa [fr. ava -- karṣati; on ŋs: *rṣ cp. haŋsati: harṣati] dragging down, detraction, abasement, in cpd. ukkaŋsâvak˚ lifting up & pulling down, raising and lowering, rise & fall D i.54.
Avakankhati ( -- ˚) [ava + kankhati; cp. Sk. anu -- kānkṣati] to wish for, strive after S iv.57 (n'); J iv.371 (n'); V 340 (n'), 348 (n' = na pattheti C).
Avakaḍḍhati [ava + kaḍḍhati, cp. avakassati & apakassati] Nett 4 (avakaḍḍhayitvā). Pass. avakaḍḍhati J iv.415 (hadayaŋ me a. my hcart is weighed down = sokena avakaḍḍhīyati C; v.l. avakassati). -- pp. avakaḍḍhita.
Avakaḍḍhita [pp. of avakaḍḍhati] pulled down, dragged away DhA iii.195.
Avakata = apakata, v.l. at It 89.
Avakanta [for *avakatta, Sk. avakṛtta; pp. of avakantati, see kanta2] cut, cut open, cut off J iv.251 (galakɔ âvakantaŋ).
Avakantati & okantati (okk˚) [cp. Sk. avakṛntati, ava + kantati, cp. also apakantati] to cut off, cut out, cut away, carve -- (ava:) J iv.155. -- pp. avakanta & avakantita.
Avakantita [pp. of avakantati] cut out PvA 213.
Avakappanā & okappanā (f.) [ava + kappanā] prepara- tion, fixing up, esp. harnessing J vi.408.
Avakaroti [Sk. apakaroti, cp. P. apa˚] "to put down", to despise, throw away; only in der, avakāra & avakārin. <-> pp. avakata (q. v.). -- See also avākaroti & cp. avakirati 2.
Avakassati & okassati [cp. Sk. avakarṣati, ava + kṛṣ; see also apakassati & avakaḍḍhati] to drag down, to draw or pull away, distract, remove. -- A v.74 = Vin ii.204 (+ vavakassati).
Avakārakaŋ (adv.) [fr. avakāra] throwing away, scattering about Vin ii.214.
Avakārin (adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. avakāra] despising, degrading, neglecting Vbh 393 sq. (an˚).
Avakāsa & okāsa [ava + kāś to shine, cp. Sk. avakāśa] 1. "appearance": akkhuddâvakāso dassanāya not little (or inferior) to behold (of appearance) D i.114; ariyāvakāsa appearing noble or having the app. of an Aryan J v.87; katâvakāsa put into appearance Vv 229. -- 2. "opportunity": kata˚ given leave D i.276 Sn 1030; anavakāsakārin not giving occasion Miln 383. -- anavakāsa not having a chance or opportunity (to happen), impossible; always in ster. phrase aṭṭhānaŋ etaŋ anavakāso Vin ii.199; A i.26; v.169; Pug 11, 12; PvA 28.
Avakirati & okirati [ava + kirati] 1. to pour down on, to pour out over; aor. avakiri PvA 86; ger. ˚kiritvā J v.144. -- 2. to cast out, reject, throw out; aor. avākiri Vv 305 = 485 (v.l. ˚kari; VvA 126 expls by chaḍḍesi vināsesi). -- Pass. avakirīyati Pv iii.110 (= chaḍḍīyati PvA 174); grd. ˚kiriya (see sep.). See also apakiritūna. pp. okiṇṇa.
Avakiriya [grd of avakirati] to be cast out or thrown away; rejectable, low, contemptible J v.143 (taken by C. as ger. = avakiritvā).
Avakujja (adj.) [ava + kujja, cp. B.Sk. avakubja M Vastu i.29, avakubjaka ibid. 213; ii.412] face downward, head first, prone, bent over (opp. ukkujja & uttāna) J i.13 = Bu ii.52; J v.295; vi.40; Pv iv.108; PvA 178.
-- pañña (adj.) one whose reason is turned upside down (like an upturned pot, i.e. empty) A i.130; Pug 31 (= adhomukha -- pañña Pug A 214).
Avakkanta ( -- ˚) [pp. ofnext] entered by, beset with, over- whelmed by (instr.) S iii.69 (dukkha˚, sukha˚ and an˚).
Avakkanti (f.) [fr. avakkamati] entry, appearance, coming down into, opportunity for rebirth S ii.66 (nāmarūpassa); iii.46 (pañcannaŋ indriyānaŋ); Pug 13 (= okkanti nibbatti pātubhāvo PugA 184); Kvu 142 (nāmarūpassa); Miln 123 (gabbhassa).
Avakkama [fr. avakkamati] entering, appearance J v.330 (gabbhassa).
Avakkamati & okkamati [ava + kamati fr. kram] to ap- proach. to enter, go into or near to, to fall into, appear in, only in ger. (poetically) avakamma J iii.480 (v.l. apa˚).
Avakkāra [Sk. avaskara faeces, fr. avaŋ + karoti] throwing away, refuse, sweepings; only in cpd. ˚pātī a bowl for refuse, slop basin, ash -- bin Vin i.157, 352; ii.216; M i.207; DhA i.305.
Avakkhalita [pp. of avakkhaleti, Caus. of kṣal] washed off, taken away from, detracted DA i.66 (v.l. apa˚).
Avakkhitta & okkhitta [pp. of avakkhipati] 1. [= Sk. avakṣipta] thrown down, flung down, cast down, dropped; thrown out, rejected. (ava:) M i.296 (ujjhita +); DA i.281 (an˚), 289 (pinḍa); PvA 174 (piṇḍa). 2. [= Sk. utkṣipta?] thrown off, gained, produced, got (cp. uppādita), in phrase sedɔ âvakkhitta gained by sweat A ii.67; iii.45.
Avakkhipati & okkhipati [ava + khipati; cp. Sk. ava- kṣipati] to throw down or out, cast down, drop; fig. usually appld to the eyes = to cast down, hence transferred to the other senses and used in meaning of "to keep under, to restrain, to have control over" (cp. also avakkhāyati), aor. ˚khipi DA i.268 (bhusaŋ, v. l. avakkhasi).
Avakkhipana (nt.) [fr. avakkhipati] throwing down, putting down J i.163.
Avagacchati [ava + gacchati] to come to, approach, visit (cp. Vedic avagacchati) PvA 87.
Avagaṇḍa ( -- kāraka) (adj.) [ava + gaṇḍa˚] "making a swelling", i. e. puffing out the cheeks, stuffing the cheeks, full (when eating); only nt. ˚ŋ as adv. after the manner or in the way of stuffing etc. Vin ii.214; iv.196.
Avagata [pp. of avagacchati] at PvA 222 is uncertain reading; the meaning is "known, understood" (aññāta Pv iv.111); perhaps we should read āvikata or adhigata (so v.l. BB).
Avagāhati & ogāhati [ava + gāhati] to plunge or enter into, to be absorbed in (acc. & loc.) Vism 678 (vipassanāvīthiŋ); Sdhp 370, 383.
Avaguṇṭhana (adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. oguṇṭheti] covering Sdhp 314.
Avaggaha [Sk. avagraha] hindrance, impediment, used at DA i.95 as syn. for drought (dubuṭṭhikā).
Avanga see apanga.
Avaca (adj.) [der. fr. ava after the analogy of ucca > ut] low, only in combn. uccâvacā (pl.) high and low, see ucca. KvuA 38.
Avacana (nt.) [a + vacana] "non -- word", i. e. the wrong word or expression J i.410.
Avacara ( -- ˚) (n. -- adj.) [ava + car, also BSk. avacara in same sense, e.g. antaḥpurâvacarā the inmates of the harem Jtm 210] (a) (adj.) living in or with, moving in D i.206 (santika˚ one who stays near, a companion); fig. dealing or familiar with, at home in A ii.189 (atakka˚); iv.314 (parisā˚); J i.60 (tāḷa˚ one conversant with music, a musician, see tāḷa1); ii.95 (sangāma˚); Miln 44 (id. and yoga˚). -- (b) (n.) sphere (of moving or activity), realm, plane (of temporal existence); only as t.t in kāmâvacara rupâvacara arūpâvacara or the 3 realms of sense -- desires, form and non -- form: kāma˚ D i.34 (˚deva); Dhs 431 (as adj.); rūpa˚ Pug 37; arūpa˚ Pug 38; Ps i.83, 84, 101; Dhs A 387; PvA 138, 163; to be omitted in Dhs 1268, 1278.
Avacaraka & ocaraka (adj. -- n.) [fr. avacara] 1. only in cpd. kāmâvacarika as adj. to kāmâvacara, belonging to the sphere of sense experiences, Sdhp. 254. -- 2. Late form of ocaraka, spy, only in C. on Th 1, 315 ff. quoted in Brethren 189, n 3. Occurs in BSk (Divy 127).
Avacaraṇa (nt.) [fr. avacarati 1] being familiar with, dealing with, occupation J ii.95.
Avacuttha 2nd pret. of vac, in prohib form mā evaŋ ava- cuttha do not speak thus J vi.72; DhA iv.228.
Avacchidda ( -- ˚) (adj.) [ava + chidda] perforated, only in redupl. (intensive) cpd. chiddâvacchidda perforated all over, nothing but holes J iii.491; DhA i.122. 284, 319. Cp. chidda -- vicchidda.
Avacchedaka ( -- ˚) (adj) [ava + cheda + ka] cutting off, as nt. ˚ŋ adv. in phrase kabaḷâvacchedakaŋ after the manner of cutting off mouthfuls (of food) Vin ii.214; iv.196; cp. āsāvacchedika whose hope or longing has been cut off or destroyed Vin i. 259.
Avajaya [ava + jaya, cp. apajita] defeat DhA ii.228 (v.l. for T. ajaya).
Avajāta (adj.) [ava + jāta; cp. B.Sk. avajāta in meaning misborn, miscarriage] low -- born, of low or base birth, fig. of low character (opp. abhijāta) Sn 664 (= buddhassa avajātaputta SnA 479); It 63; Miln 359.
Avajānāti [ava + jñā] 1. to deny Vin ii.85; A iii.164 = Pug 65. -- 2. (later) to despise DhA iii.16; PvA 175 (grd. ˚jānitabba) -- Of short stem -- form ñā are found the foll: grd. avaññeyya PvA 175, and with o˚: grd. oñātabba PvA 195; pp. avañāta, besides avaññāta.
Avajīyati [ava + jīyati; Sk. avajiryate] to be diminished, to be lost, be undone J i.313 (jitaŋ a; v.l. avajījy˚); Dh 179 (jitaŋ a = dujjitaŋ hoti DhA iii.197).
Avajja (adj.) [Sk. avadya, seemigly a + vadya, but in reality a der. fr. ava. According to Childers = Sk. avarjya from vraj, thus meaning "not to be shunned, not forbidden". This interpretn is justified by context of Dh 318, 319. The P. commentator refers it to ava + vad (for *ava -- vadya) in sense of to blame, cp. apavadati] low, inferior, blamable, bad, deprecable Dh 318, 319; Dhs 1160. More fig. in neg. form anavajja blameless, faultless D i.70 (= anindita DA i.183); A ii.26 = It 102; Sn 47 (˚bhojin carrying on a blameless mode of livelihood, see Nd2 39), 263 (= anindita agarahita KhA 140): Ps ii.116, 170; Pug 30, 41, 58; Sdhp 436. Opp. sāvajja.
Avajjatā (f.) [abstr. to prec.), only neg. an˚ blamelessness, faultlessness Pug 25, 41; Dhs 1349.
Avajjha (adj.) [grd of a + vadhati, Sk. vadhya, vadh] not to be killed or destroyed, inviolable Sn 288; J v.69; vi.132.
Avañcana (adj.) [a + vañcana from vañc] not (even) tot- tering, i.e. unfit for any motion (esp. walking), said of crippled feet J i.214 = Cp iii.910.
Avañña (adj.) [to avaññā] despised, despicable Pv iii.113 (= avaññeyya avajānitabba PvA 175).
Avaññatti (f.) [ava + ñatti = Sk. *avajñapti, fr. ava + jñā] only as neg. an˚ the fact of not being despised, inferior or surpassed, egotism, pride, arrogance It 72; Vbh 350, 356; ˚kāma (adj.) wishing not to be surpassed, unvilling to be second, wanting to be praised A ii.240; iv.1 sq.
Avaññā (f.) [Sk. avajñā, fr. ava + jñā] contempt, disregard, disrespect J i.257 (˚ya).
Avaññāta (adj.) [pp. of avajānāti] despised, treated with contempt PvA 135 (an˚); Sdhp 88, 90.
Avaṭaŋsaka (= vaṭ˚) see Vin Texts ii.347.
Avaṭṭhāna (nt.) [Sk. avasthāna] position, standing place J i.508; PvA 286.
Avaṭṭhita (ad.) [Sk. avasthita, ava + thita] "standing down" = standing up, firm, fixed, settled, lasting Th 1, 1140. Usually neg. an˚ unsettled, unsteady; not lasting, changeable Dh 38 (˚citta; cp. DhA i.308 cittaŋ thāvaraŋ natthi); PvA 87 (= na sassata not lasting for ever).
Avaṭṭhitatā (f.) [abstr. fr. prec.] steadiness, only as neg. an˚ unsteadiness, fickleness ThA 259.
Avaṭṭhiti (f.) [Sk. avasthiti] (firm) position, posture, stead- fastness S v.228; Dhs 11, 570.
Avaḍḍhi (f.) [a + vaḍḍhi] "non -- growth", decay DhA iii.335; C on A iii.76 (cp. apajaha).
Avaṇṭa (adj.) [a + vaṇṭa] without a stalk J v.155.
Avaṇṇa [a + vaṇṇa] blame, reproach, fault D i.1 (= dosā nindā DA i.37); It 67; Pug 48, 59.
Avaṇṇanīya (adj.) [grd. of a + vaṇṇeti] indescribable J v.282.
Avataŋsa see vataŋsaka.
Avatata & otata [ava + tata, pp. of tan] stretched over, covered, spread over with Vv 643 ( -- ˚); VvA 276 (= chādita).
Avatiṭṭhati [ava + tiṭṭhati] to abide, linger, stand still. D i.251 = S iv.322 = A v.299 (tatra˚); S i.25 (v.l. otiṭṭhati); Th. 1, 21; J ii.62; iv.208 (aor. avaṭṭhāsi). <-> pp. avaṭṭhita (q. v.).
Avatiṇṇa & otiṇṇa [pp. of otarati] fallen into, affected with ( -- ˚), as ava˚ rare late or poetical form of o˚, e. g. J v.98 (issâ˚). See otiṇṇa.
Avattha1 [der. uncertain] aimless (of cārikā, a bhikkhu's wandering, going on tour) A iii.171 (C. avavatthika).
Avattha2 [Sk. apāsta, apa + āsta, pp. of as2] thrown away J v.302 (= chaḍḍita C.).
Avattharaṇa (nt.) [fr. avattharati] setting in array, deploying (of an army) J ii.104 (of a robber -- band), 336.
Avattharati [ava + tharati, stṛ] to strew, cover over or up J i.74 (˚amāna ppr.), 255 (˚itvā ger.); iv.84; Dāvs i.38. -- pp. otthaṭa Cp. pariy˚.
Avatthāraṇa (nt.) = avattharaṇa DA i.274.
Avatthu (&˚ ka) (adj.) [a + vatthu] groundless, unfounded (fig) Vin ii.241; J i.440 (˚kaŋ vacanaŋ). For lit meaning see vatthu.
Avadāta (= odāta) Dāvs iii.14 (metri causa).
Avadāna see apadāna.
Avadāniya (adj.) [fr. avadāna cutting off; ava + dā2 to cut] stingy, niggardly Sn 774 (= Nd1 36 which expls. as follows: avaŋ gacchanti ti pi avadāniyā; maccharino pi vuccanti avadāniyā; buddhānaŋ vacanaŋ nɔâdiyantī ti avadāniyā. Sn A 516 condenses this expln. into the foll.: avangamanatāya maccharitāya buddhâdīnaŋ vacanaŋ anādiyanatāya ca avadāniyā).
Avadāpana (cleansing): see vodāpana.
Avadāpeti (to deal out) only BSk pary˚ Divy 202.
Avadāyati [denom. fr. avadā in same meaning as anuddā, to dā1: see dayati2] to have pity on, to feel sorry for J iv.178 (bhūtānaŋ nâvadāyissaŋ, gloss nɔânukampiyaŋ).
Avadīyati [Sk. avadīryati, ava + ḍr1, ḍrṇāti, see etym. under darī] to burst, split open J vi.183 (= bhijjati C.) see also uddīyati,
Avadehaka ( -- ˚) (adj.) [ava + deha + ka but more likely direct fr. ava + dih] in the idiom udarāvadehakaŋ bhuñjati, to eat one's fill M i.102; Th 1, 935. Vism 33 has udarāvadehaka -- bhojana, a heavy meal.
Avadhāraṇa (nt.) [Cp. Sk. avadhāraṇa, fr. ava + dhṛ] calling attention to, affirmation, emphasis; as t.t. used by C's in explanation of evaŋ at DA i.27; and of kho at PvA 11, 18.
Avadhi 3 sg. aor. of vadhati. -- At DhA ii.73 avadhi = odhi.
Avanata see oṇata.
Avanati ( -- ˚) (f.) [fr. avanamati] stooping, bending, bowing down, humiliation Miln 387 (unnatɔâvanati).
Avani (f.) [Vedic avani] bed or course of a river; earth, ground Dāvs iv.5.
Avapakāsati [ava + pa + kāsati = kassati, fr. kṛṣ] is a doubtful compd. of kassati, the combd. ava + pa occurring only in this word. In all likelihood it is a distortion of vavakassati (vi + ava + kassati), supplementing the ordinary apakassati. See meaning & further discussion under apakāsati -- Vin ii.204 (apakāsati +; v.l. avapakassati; Bdhgh. in expln. on p. 325 has apapakāsati which seems, to imply (a)vavakassati); A iii.145 sq. (avapakāsituŋ).
Avapatta see opatta.
Avapāyin ( -- ˚) (adj.) [cp. avapivati] coming for a drink, drinking J i.163.
Avapivati [ava + pā, cp. apapibati] to drink from J i.163.
Avabujjhati ( -- ˚) [Cp. BSk. avabudhyate] to understand A iv.96 = It 83 (nɔavabujjhati); A iv.98 (id.) J i.378 = iii.387 (interchanging with anubujjhati at the latter pass.).
Avabodha [ava + bodha] perception, understanding, full knowledge Sn A 509 (sacca˚). -- Neg. an˚ not awakened to the truth Vv 826 (= ananubodha VvA 319).
Avabodhati ( -- ˚) [cp. Sk. avabodhati] to realise, perceive, pay attention to J iii.151 nâva˚).
Avabhāsa [later form of obhāsa] Only in cpd. gambhīrā- vabhāso D ii.55, looking deep. Same cpd. at A ii.105 = Pug 46 has obhāsa.
Avabhāsaka ( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. avabhāsa] shining, shedding light on, illuminating Sdhp 14.
Avabhāsita ( -- ˚) [late form of obhāsita] shining with, resplendent Sdhp 590.
Avabhuñjati [ava + bhuñjati] to eat, to eat up J iii.272 (inf. ˚bhottuŋ), 273.
Avabhūta (adj.) [ava + bhūta, pp. of ava + bhū] "come down", despised, low, unworthy M ii.210.
Avamangala (adj.) [ava + mangala, ava here in privative function] of bad omen, unlucky, infaustus (opp. abhimangala); nt. bad luck, ill omen J i.372, 402; ii.197; vi.10, 424; DhA iii.123; PvA 261. Cf. next.
Avamaññati [Sk. avamanyate] to slight, to disregard, despise DhA i.170; PvA 37, 175; Sdhp 271. -- pp. Caus. avamānita.
Avamangalla (adj.) [fr. avamangala] of bad omen, nt. any- thing importune, unlucky J i.446.
Avamāna & omāna [fr. ava + man, think] disregard, dis- respect, contempt J ii.386; iii.423; v.384. Cp. next.
Avamānana (nt.) [fr. avamāna] = avamāna J i.22.
Avamāneti [Caus. of avamaññati] to despise J v.246. - pp. avamānita PvA 36.
Avaya only in neg. anavaya.
Avayava [Dern uncertain. Cp. mediaeval Sk. avayava] limb, member, constituent, part VvA 53 (sarīra˚ = gattā). 168, 201, 276; PvA 211 (sarīra˚ = gattā), 251 (mūl˚ the fibres of the root). As t. t. g. at SnA 397. In the commentaries avayava is often used where aŋga would have been used in the older texts.
Avarajjhati ( -- ˚) [ava + rajjhati of rādh, cp. Sk. avarād- hyate] to neglect, fail, spurn Th 1, 167; J iv.428 (v.l. ˚rujjh˚).
Avaruddha [fr. avarundhati] 1. Doubtful reading at Vin iv.181, apparently meaning ʻ in revolt, out of hand ʼ (of slaves) -- 2. [late form of oruddha] restrained Sdhp. 592.
Avaruddhaka [avruddha + ka] subdued, expelled, banished J vi.575; Dpvs i.21 (Np).
Avaruddhati [Sk. aparundhati; ava + ruddhati of rudh] to expel, remove, banish J vi.505 (= nīharati C.), 515. See also avarundhati.
Avarundhati [ava + rundhati. Only referred to by Dhp. in his Cy (ThA 271) on oruddha] to put under restraint, to put into one's harem as subsidiary wife.
Avalambati [= olambati]. Only in late verse. To hang down. Pv ii.118; 102. Ger. avalamba (for ˚bya) Pv iii.35; cp. olubbha.
Avalitta ( -- ˚) [Sk. avalipta, pp. of ava -- limpati] besmeared; in cpd. ullittâvalitta "smeared up & down" i. e. plastered inside & outside A i.101.
Avalekhati [ava + lekhati, likh, Sk. avalikhati] to scrape off Vin ii.221 (v. l. apa˚).
Avalekhana1 (nt.) [fr. avalekhati] (a) scraping, scraping off Vin ii.141 (˚pidhara), 221 (˚kaṭṭha). (b) scratching in, writing down J iv.402, (˚sattha a chisel for engraving letters).
Avalekhana2 (nt.) v. l. for apalekhana.
Avalepana ( -- ˚) (nt.) [fr. ava + lip] smearing, daubing, plastering M i.385 (pīta˚); Sn 194 (kāyo taca -- maŋsɔ âvalepano the body plastered with skin & flesh).
Avasa (adj.) [a + vasa] powerless Sdhp 290.
Avasaṭa & Osaṭa [Sk. apasṛta, cp. also samavasṛta, pp. of ava + sṛ] withdrawn, gone away; one who has left a community & gone over to another sect, a renegade Vin iv.216, 217 (= titthāyatanaŋ saŋkata).
Avasarati [ava + sṛ] to go down, to go away (to) Sn 685 (v. l. BB. T. avaŋsari).
Avasāna ( -- ˚) [for osāna] (nt.) stopping ceasing; end, finish, conclusion J i.87 (bhattakicc -- âvasāne at the end of the meal); PvA 76 (id.).
Avasāya [fr. avaseti] stopping, end, finish Th 2, 12 (= avasānaŋ niṭṭhānaŋ ThA 19). But the id. p. at Dhp 218 has anakkhāte.
Avasiñcanaka ( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. osiñcati] pouring over (act. & med.), overflowing J i.400 (an˚).
Avasiṭṭha (sic & not osiṭṭha) [pp. of avasissati, Sk. avaśiṣṭa] left, remaining, over S ii.133; J i.138; v.339; VvA 66, pl. avasiṭṭhā all who are left, the others PvA 165 (janā).
Avasiṭṭhaka (adj.) [fr. avasiṭṭha] remaining, left J iii.311.
Avasitta ( -- ˚) [pp. of osiñcati] besprinkled, anointed, con- secrated, only in phrase rājā khattiyo muddhâvasitto of a properly consecrated king (see also khattiya) D i. 69; ii.227; iii.64; Pug 56; DA i.182 (T. muddhâvassita, v. l. ˚abhisitta); etc. -- See also abhisitta.
Avasin (adj. -- n.) [a + vasin fr. vaś] not having control over oneself, D ii.275.
Avasissati [Sk. avaśiṣyate; Pass. of ava + śis; but expld. by Kern, Toev. s. v. as fut of avasīdati] to be left over, to remain, in phrase yaŋ pamāṇa -- kataŋ kammaŋ na taŋ tatrâvasissati D i.251; A v.299 = S iv.322; J ii.61 (see expln. on p. 62). Also in the phrases taco ca nahārū ca aṭṭhi ca avasissatu sarīre upasussatu maŋsa -- lohitaŋ M i.481; A i.50; S ii.28, and sarīrāni avasissanti S ii. 83. With the latter phrases cp. avasussati.
Avasī metri causa for avasi, a + vasi, aor. of vas4 to stop, stay, rest J v.66 (mā avasī).
Avasussati [Sk. *ava -- suṣyati of śuṣ] to dry up, to wither; in later quotations of the old kāmaŋ taco ca nahāru ca aṭṭhi ca avasussatu (upasussatu sarīre maŋsalohitaŋ) J i.71, 110; Sdhp 46. It is a later spelling for the older avasissatu see Trenckner (M i.569). -- fut. avasucchati (= Sk. *˚śokṣyati, fut. of Intens.) J vi.550 (v. l. BB ˚sussati; C. avasucchissati).
Avasūra [ava + sūra; ava here in function of *avaŋs see ava ii] sundown, sunset, acc. ˚ŋ as adv. at or with sundown J v 56 (anāvasūraŋ metrically).
Avasesa1 [Sk. avaśeṣa, fr. ava + śiṣ, cp. avasissati] remainder, remaining part; only in cpds. an˚ (adj.) without any remainder, i. e. fully, completely M i.220 = A v.347 (˚dohin); A i.20 sq., 88; Sn 146; Pug 17; Dhs 363, 553; SnA 417 (˚pharaṇa); PvA 71 (˚ato, adv. altogether, not leaving anything out); & sâvasesa leaving something over, having something left A i.20 sq., 88; Pv iii.55 (jīvita˚ having still a little life left).
Avasesa2 (adj.) [see prec.] remaining, left Sn 694 (āyu avaseso); J iii.19; Vbh 107 (taṇhā ca avasesā ca kilesā); PvA 19 (avasesā ca ñātakā the rest of the relatives), 21 (avasesā parisā), 201 (aṭṭhi -- tacamattɔ âvasesa -- sarīra with a body on which nothing but skin & bones were left), 206 (aṭṭhi -- sanghātamattɔ âvasesa -- sarīra). -- nt. (as pred.) ˚ŋ what is left PvA 52 (appɔ avasesaŋ); KhA 245 (nɔ atthi tesaŋ avasesaŋ).
Avasesaka (adj.) [fr. avasesa2] being left, overflowing, ad- ditional, more J i.400 (an˚); Dpvs iv.45.
Avassa (adj.) [a + vaś] against one's will, inevitable J i. 19 (˚bhāvin); v.319 (˚gāmitā). Usually as nt. ˚ŋ adv. inevitably (cp. BSk. avaśyaŋ Divy 347; Av. Ś i.209 etc.) J iii.271; DA i.263; Sdhp 293.
Avassakaŋ (adv.) [see avassa] inevitably Dpvs ix.13.
Avassajati & ossajati [ava + sṛj, perhaps ud + sṛj = Sk. utsṛjati, although the usual Vedic form is avasṛjati. The form ossajati puzzled the BSk. writers in their sanskritisation apotsṛjati = apa + ut + sṛj Divy 203] to let loose, let go, send off, give up, dismiss, release (ava): J iv.425; v.487 (aor. avassaji read for avissaji).
Avassana (nt.) [a + vassana, Sk. vāsana of vāś to bleat] not bleating J iv.251.
Avassaya [Sk. *avāśraya for the usual apāśraya, see P. apassaya1] support, help, protection, refuge J i.211; ii. 197; iv.167; Miln 160; DhA ii.267; iv.198; PvA 5, 113.
Avassava [ava + sava, Sk. ˚srava fr. sru to flow] outflow, effect, only neg. anassava no further effect Vin ii.89; M i.93; ii.246; A iii.334 sp.
Avasseti [ava + ā + śri, for the usual *apāśrayati; see apasseti] to lean against, to depend on, find shelter in (loc.) J ii.80 (aor. avassayiŋ = vāsaŋ kappesiŋ C.). <-> pp. avassita.
Avassāvana (nt.) [fr. ava + Caus. of sru to flow] straining, filtering (?) J ii.288.
Avassita [for apassita, Sk. apaśrita] depending on, dealing with J v.375. See apassita.
Avassuta (adj.) [Sk. *avasruta, pp. of ava + sru, cp. avas- sava] 1. (lit.) flowing out or down, oozing, leaking J iv. 20. -- 2. (fig.) (cp. anvāssava & āsava) filled with desire, lustful (opp. anavassuta, q. v.) Vin ii.236; S iv.70, 184 (an˚); A i.261, 262 (an˚); ii.240; iv.128, 201; Sn 63 (an˚); Pug 27, 36; Dpvs ii.5 (T. reads avassita). <-> Neg. anavassuta: 1. not leaking, without a leak J iv.20 (nāvā = udaka -- pavesanɔ âbhāvena a. C.). -- 2. free from leakage, i. e. from lust or moral intoxication Dh 39 (˚citta); Sn 63 (see expld. in detail at Nd2 40); SnA 116 (= kilesa -- anvāssava -- virahita).
Avahaṭa [pp. of avaharati] taken away, stolen Miln 46.
Avaharaṇa ( -- ˚) [fr. avaharati in both meanings] taking away, removal; theft PvA 47 (sāṭaka˚), 92 (soka˚).
Avaharati & oharati [ava + hṛ] to steal J i.384; PvA 47 (avahari vatthaŋ), 86 (id., = apānudi). -- pp. avahaṭa (q. v.).
Avahasati [ava + has] to laugh at, deride, mock J v.111 (aññamaññaŋ); PvA 178. -- aor. avahasi J iv.413.
Avahāra [fr. avaharati] taking, acquiring, acquisition Vin v.129 (pañca avahārā, viz. theyya˚, pasayha˚, parikappa˚, paṭicchanna˚, kusa˚).
Avahīyati [for ohīyati] to be left behind, to stay behind J v.340.
Avāgata [ava + ā + gacchati] only in phrase dhammā avāgat -- amhā, we are fallen from righteousness, J v.82. (C. explains apāgata).
Avākaroti [either ava + ā + karoti or avaŋ + karoti, the latter more probable. It is not necessary to take it with Kern, Toev. s. v. as Sk. apākṛṇoti, apa + ā + kṛ] 1. to revoke, undo, rescind, not fulfill, spoil, destroy J iii.339 (avākayirā = avakareyya chindeyya C.); v.495, 500; vi. 280. -- 2. to give back, restore J vi.577 (= deti C.).
Avākirati wrong by Hardy VvA Index for avakirati (q. v.).
Avāṭuka see apāṭuka.
Avāpuraṇa (nt.) [same as apāpuraṇa] a key S iii.132; A iv.374.
Avāpurati [same as apāpurati] to open (a door) J i.63; vi.373.
Avāvaṭa (adj.) [a + vāvaṭa] unobstructed, unhindered, free. Of a woman, not married J v.213 (= apetâvaraṇā, which read for ˚bharaṇā, apariggahitā C.).
Avikampamāna (adj.) [a + vi + kampamāna, ppr. med. of kamp] not hesitating, not wavering, not doubting J iv.310 (= anosakkamāna C.; Kern takes it at this passage as a + vikalpamāna, see Toev. s.v., but unnecessarily); vi.176 (= nirāsanka C.); J vi.273.
Avikampin (adj.) [fr. a + vi + kamp] unmoved, not shaking, steady Vv 5022 (= acala VvA 215).
Avikopin (adj.) [a + vikopin; fr. vi + kup] not agitated, not moving, unshaken, undisturbed J vi.226 (acchejja +).
Avikkhepa [a + vikkhepa] calmness, balance, equanimity D iii.213; A i.83; Ps i.94; ii.228; Dhs 11, 15, 570.
Avicāreti [a + vicāreti] not to examine VvA 336.
Aviccaŋ at J v.434 read aviviccaŋ [a + viviccaŋ] i. e. not secretly, openly.
Avijānaŋ [a + vijānaŋ] not knowing, ignorant Ḍh 38, 60; It 103.
Avijjā (f.) [Sk. avidyā; fr. a + vid] ignorance; the main root of evil and of continual rebirth (see paṭicca -- samuppāda, cp. S ii.6, 9, 12; Sn p. 141 & many other passages). See on term Cpd. 83 n. 3, 187 sq, 262 sq. & for further detail vijjā. avijjā is termed an anusaya (D iii.254, 282; S iv.205, 208 sq., 212); it is one of the āsavā (Vin iii.4; D i.84; iii.216; It 49; Dhs 1100, 1109), of the oghā (D iii.230, 276; Dhs 390, 1061, 1162), of the nīvaraṇāni (S ii.23; A i.223; It 8; Dhs 1162, 1486), of the saŋyojanāni (D iii.254; Dhs 1131, 1460). See for various characterisatons the foll. passages: Vin i.1; iii.3; D iii.212, 230, 234, 274; M i.54, 67, 144; S ii.4, 26, 263; iii.47, 162; iv.256; v.52; A i.8, 285; ii.132, 158, 247; iii.84 sq., 414; iv.228; It 34 (yā kācɔ imā duggatiyo asmiŋ loke paramhi ca avijjāmūlakā sabbā icchā -- lobha -- sammussayā), 57, 81; Sn 199, 277, 729 (jāti -- maraṇa -- saŋsāraŋ ye vajanti punappunaŋ . . . avijjāyɔeva sā gati), 730, 1026, 1033 (avijjāya nivuto loko); Dh 243; Nd2 99; Pug 21; Dhs 390, 1061, 1162; DhA iii.350; iv.161 (˚paligha).
Aviññāṇaka (adj.) [a + viññāṇa + ka] senscless, without feeling or consciousness, unfeeling DhA i.6 (saviññāṇaka +).
Aviññū (adj.) = aviddasu.
Avitakka (adj.) [a + vitakka] free from thought D iii.219, 274; Th 2, 75 ("where reasonings cease" trsl.); Dhs 161 ("free from the working of conception" trsl.), 504 etc.
Avidūra (adj.) [a + vidūra] not far, near; usually in loc. ˚e as adv. near Sn. 147.
Aviddasu (adj.) [a + viddasu] ignorant, foolish Sn 762 (= bāla Sn A 509); Dh 268 = Nd2 514 (= aviññū DhA iii.395); PvA 18 (so read for avindasu).
Avināsaka (˚ika) (adj.) [a + vināsa + ka] not causing destruction A iii.38 (˚ika); J v.116 (= anāsaka C.).
Avināsana (adj.) [a + vināsana] imperishable Dpvs iv.16.
Avinicchayaññū (adj.) [a + vinicchaya + ñū] not knowing how to decide J v.367.
Avinibbhujaŋ (adj.) [ppr. of a + vinibbhujati] unable to distinguish or to know J v.121 (= atīrento C.).
Avinibbhoga (ad.) [a + vinibbhoga] not to be distinguished, indistinct J iii.428 (˚sadda).
Avipariṇāma [a + viparināma] absence of change, stead- fastness, endurance D i.18; iii.31, 33 (˚dhamma); DA i.113 (= jarā -- vasena vipariṇāmassa abhāvato).
Avippaṭisāra [a + vippaṭisāra] absence of regret or remorse A iii.46.
Avippavāsa (adj. -- n.) [a + vippavāsa] thoughtfulness, mind- fulness, attention; adj. not neglectful, mindful, attentive, eager Vin v.216; Sn 1142 (cp. Nd2 101: anussatiyā bhāvento); DA i.104 (appamādo vuccati satiyā avippavāso); DhA iv.26 (appamāda = satiyā avippavāsa).
Aviruddha (adj.) [a + viruddha] not contrary, unobstructed, free, without difficulties Dh 406; Sn 365, 704, 854.
Avirūḷhi (f.) [a + virūḷhi] absence or cesssation of growth Sn 235; DhA i.245 (˚dhamma).
Avirodha [a + virodha] absence of obstruction, gentleness M ii.105 = Th 1, 875.
Avirodhana (nt.) = avirodha J iii.320, 412; v.378.
Avivāda [a + vivāda] absence of contesting or disputing, agreement, harmony D iii.245; Sn 896 (˚bhūma SnA 557 or ˚bhumma Nd1 308, expld. as Nibbāna).
Avisaŋvādaka (adj.) [a + visaŋvada + ka] not deceiving, not lying D i.4; iii.170; Pug 57; DA i.73.
Avisaŋvādanatā (f.) [abstr. fr. a + visaŋvāda] honesty, faithfulness, uprightness D iii.190.
Avisaŋvādeti [a + visaŋ + Caus. of vad] to keep one's word, to be honest, to be true J v.124.
Avisaggatā (f.) [a + visaggatā, v.l. viy˚, thus as a + viy- agga, Sk. vyagra = ākula] state of being undisturbed, harmony, balance J vi.224 (C. avisaggata). Cp. avyagga.
Avisare at J v.117 according to Kern, Toev. s.v. corrupted from avisaye, i. e. towards a wrong or unworthy object [a + visaya, loc], C. differently: avisare = avisaritvā atikkamitva; v.l. adhisare.
Avisāhaṭa (adj.) [a + visāhaṭa] imperturbed Dhs 15, 24, 287, 570. (˚mānasata).
Avissaji at J vi.79 is with Kern, Toev. s. v. better to be read avassaji (see avassajati).
Avissajjiya (adj.) [grd. of a + vissajjati] not to be given away, inalienable (cp. avebhangiya) Vin i.305 (˚ika for ˚iya); ii.170 (five such objects in detail); v.216 (+ avebh˚); J vi.568.
Avissāsaniya (adj.) [a + visāsana + iya, ika] not to be trusted, untrustworthy J iii.474.
Aviha [of uncertain etym.] the world of the Aviha's, i.e. the 12th of the 16 Brahmā -- words, cp. Kindred Sayings 48 n. 3; Cpd. 139. -- S i.35, 60; A i.279; Pug 17.
Avihiŋsa (Avihesa) (f.) [a + vihiŋsā] absence of cruelty, mercy, humanity, friendliness, love D iii.213, 215, 240 (avihesā); Sn 292 (= sakaruṇabhāva SnA 318); It 82 (˚vitakka).
Aviheṭhaka (adj.) [a + viheṭhaka] not harassing, not hurting D iii.166 (but cp. SnA 318 avihesaka in same context); Miln 219.
Avī˚ in general see vī˚.
Avīci [B.Sk. avīci a + vīci (?) no intermission, or no plea- sure (?), unknown, but very likely popular etym.] 1. avīciniraya, one of the (great) hells (see niraya), described in vivid colours at many passages of the Pāli canon, e.g. at Vin ii.203 = It 86; Nd1 18, 347, 405 = Nd2 304 iiid; Ps i.83; Dhs 1281; J i.71, 96; iii.182; iv.159; DhA i.148; PvA 52; SnA 290; Sdhp 37, 194; Pgdp 5 sq.; etc etc. -- 2. disintegration, decay Vism 449 (a. jarā nāma).
Avekalla (˚ -- ) adj.) [a + vekalla] without deficiency, in ˚buddhi complete knowledge J vi.297.
Avekkhati [B.Sk. avīkṣate. The regular Pāli form however is apekkhati, to which the BSk. av˚ corresponds] to look at, to consider, to see It 33 (v.l. ap˚); Dh 28, 50, J iv.6; DhA i.259 (= passati).
Avekkhipati [avaŋ + khipati, avaŋ here in form ave cor- resp. to avaḥ, cp. pure for puraḥ etc.] to jump, hop, lit. to throw (a foot) down J iv.251 (= pacchimapāde khipati C.).
Avecca (adv.) [Usually taken as ava + ger. of i (*itya), cp. adhicca & abhisamecca, but by P. grammarians as a + vecca. The form is not sufficiently clear semantically; B.Sk. avetya, e.g. Jtm. 210, is a Sanskritisation of the P. form] certainly, definitely, absolutely, perfectly, expld. by Bdhgh. as acala (on D ii.217), or as paññāya ajjhogahetvā (on Sn 229); by Dhp. as apara -- paccaya -- bhāvena (on Pv iv.125). -- Usually in phrase Buddhe Dhamme Sanghe avecca -- pasādo perfect faith in the B., the Dhamma & the Sangha, e.g. at M i.47; S ii.69; iv.271 sq., 304; v.344, 405; A i.222; ii.56; iii.212, 332, 451; iv.406; v.183; further at Ps i.161 (˚pasanna); Sn 229 (yo ariyasaccāni avecca passati); Pv iv.125.
Avedha (adj.) [a + vedha, grd. of vidh (vyadh) to pierce, Sk. avedhya] not to be hurt or disturbed, inviolable, unshakable, imperturbable Sn 322 (˚dhamma = akampanasabhāva SnA 331).
Avebhangika (adj.) [fr. a + vi + bhanga] not to be divided or distributed Vin i.305. Cp. next.
Avebhangiya (nt.) [= avebhangika] that which is not to be divided, an inalienable possession; 5 such objects enumd. at Vin ii.171, which are the same as under avissajjiya (q. v.); v.129.
Avera (adj.) [a + vera] peaceable, mild, friendly Sn 150 (= veravirahita KhA 248); Sdhp 338. -- ˚ŋ (nt.) friendliness, kindness D i.247 (˚citta); Dh 5 (= khantimetta DhA i 51).
Averin (adj. -- n.) = avera Dh 197, 258.
Avosita [reading uncertain, cp. avyosita] only in neg. an˚ unfulfilled, undone Th 1, 101.
Avyagga (ad) [a + vyagga, Sc. vyagra] not bewildered, not confused S v.66. Cp. avisaggatā.
Avyattatā (f.) [abstr. fr. avyatta] state or condition of not being manifest or visible, concealment, hiding DhA ii.38.
Avyatha (adj.) [a + vyatha, cp. Sk. vyathā misfortune] not miserable, fortunate J iii.466 (= akilamāna C.).
Avyaya [a + vyaya | absence of loss or change, safety D. i.72 (instr. ˚ena safely); Miln 393 (as abbaya T.).
Avyāpajjha1 (abyābajjha) (nt.) [a + vyapajjha or bajjha, a confusion between the roots bādh or pad] (act.) kindness of heart; (pass.) freedom from suffering (Ep. of Nibbāna) Vin i.183 (avyāpajjh˚âdhimutta); It 31 (abyābajjhɔārāma).
Avyāpajjha2 (abyābajjha) adj.) [either a + *vyāpadya or more likely a + *vyābādhya] free from oppression or injury; not hurting, kind D ii.242 (avera +), 276; M i.90; It 16 = 52 (sukhaŋ); Miln 410 (avera +).
Avyāpanna (adj.) [a + vyāpanna] free from desire to injure, free from malice, friendly, benevolent D iii.82,83 (˚citta); A ii.220 (id.); Pug 68 (id.). -- Same in B.Sk. e.g. Divy 105, 302.
Avyāpāda [a + vyāpāda] absence of desire to injure, free- dom from malice D iii.215, 229, 240; It 82 (all MSS. have aby˚); Dhs 33, 36, 277, 313, 1056.
Avyāyata (adj.) [a + vyāyata of yam] at random, without discrimination, careless J i.496 (= avyatta C.).
Avyāyika (adj.) [fr. avyaya] not liable to loss or change, imperishable J v.508 (= avigacchanaka C.).
Avyāvaṭa (adj.) [a + vyāvaṭa = Sk vyāpṛta] not occupied, i. e. careless, neglectful, not worrying Vin iii.136; Nd2 72 (abyāvaṭa for appossukka Sn 43); J iii.65; vi.188. Miln 177 (abyā˚).
Avyāseka (adj.) [a + vy + āseka] untouched, unimpaired D i.182 (˚sukha = kilesa vyāseka -- virahitattā avyāseka DA i.183); Pug 59.
Avyāharati [a + vy + āharati] not to bring or procure J v.80.
Avyosita (adj.) [a + vyosita, Sk. vyavasita] not having reached perfection, imperfect Th 1, 784 (aby˚).
Avhaya [fr. avhayati; cp. Sk. āhvaya "betting"] calling, name; adj. ( -- ˚) called, having the name of Sn 684 (isi˚), 686 (Asit˚), 689 (kanhasiri˚), 1133 (Sace˚, cp. Nd2 624).
Avhayati & Avheti [Sk. āhvayati, ā + hū or hvā] -- 1. to call upon, invoke, appeal to D i.244 (avhayāma imper.); PvA 164. -- 2. to call, call up, summon M 1.17; J ii.10, 252 (= pakkosati); v.220 (avhayesi); vi.18, 192, 273 (avhettha pret.); Vv 331 (avheti). -- 3. to give a name, to call, to address SnA 487 (= āmanteti ālapati). -- pp. avhāta (q. v.).
Avhāta [pp. of avhayati] called, summoned J iii.165 = (an˚ = anāhuta ayāctia) = Pv i.123, cp. PvA 64. The id. p. at Th 2, 129 reads ayācita.
Avhāna (nt.) [fr. avhayati, Sk. āhvāna in diff. meaning] - 1. begging, calling, asking Sn 710; Vism 68 (˚ânabhinandanā). -- 2. addressing, naming SnA 605 (= nāma).
Avhāyana (nt.) [cp. Sk. āhvayana] calling to, asking, in- vocation, imploration D i.11 (Sir -- avhāyane, v. l. avhayana; expld. at DA i.97 with reading Sirivhāyana as "ehi Siri mayhaŋ sire patiṭṭhāhī ti evaŋ sire Siriyā avhayanaŋ"), 244, 245 (v. l. avhāna).
Avhāyika (adj.) [fr. avhaya] calling, giving a name; (m.) one who gives a name J i.401 = iii.234.
Asa (adj.) [for asaŋ = asanto, a + santo, ppr. of as in meaning "good"] bad J iv.435 = vi.235 (sataŋ vā asaŋ, acc. sg. with v. l. santaŋ . . ., expld -- by sappurisaŋ vā asappurisaŋ vā C.); v.448 (n. pl. f. asā expld. by asatiyo lāmikā C.; cp. p. 446 v.319).
Asaŋvata (adj.) [pp. of + saŋvuṇati, cp. saŋvuta] unres- tricted, open J vi.306.
Asaŋvara [a + saŋvāra] absence of closing or restraint, no control Dhs 1345.
Asaŋvāsa (adj.) [a + saŋvāsa] deprived of co -- residence, expelled from the community Vin iv.213, 214.
Asaŋvindaŋ [ppr. a + saŋvindati] not finding, not knowing Th 1, 717.
Asaŋvuta (adj.) [pp. of a + saŋvuṇāti, cp. saŋvata] not restrained Dhs 1345, 1347.
Asaŋsaṭṭha (adj.) [a + saŋsaṭṭha] not mixed or mixing, not associating, not given to society M i.ai4; S i.63; Sn 628 = Dh 404 (= dassana -- savana -- samullāpa paribhogakāya -- saŋsaggānaŋ abhāvena SnA 468 = DhA iv.173).
Asaŋhārima (adj.) = asaŋhāriya (?) Vin iv.272.
Asaŋhāriya (adj.) [grd. of a + saŋharati] not to be destroyed or shattered It 77; Th 1, 372; Nd2 110.
Asaŋhīra (adj.) [= asaŋhāriya of saŋ + hṛ] immovable, unconquerable, irrefutable Vin ii.96; S i.193; A iv.141; v.71; Sn 1149 (as Ep. of Nibbāna, cp. Nd2 110); J i. 62; iv.283 (˚citta unfaltering); Dpvs iv.12.
Asakka (adj.) [a + sakka; Sk. aśakya] impossible J v. 362 (˚rūpa).
Asakkuṇeyya (adj.) [grd. of a + sakkoti] impossible, un- able to J i.55; KhA 185 and passim.
Asakkhara (adj.) [a + sakkhara] not stony, free from gravel or stones, smooth J v.168; DhA iii.401 (opp. sasakkhara).
Asakyadhītā (f.) [a + sakyadhītā] not a true Buddhist nun Vin iv.214.
Asagguṇa [a + sagguṇa] bad quality, vice Sdhp 382 (˚bhā- vin, the a˚ belongs to the whole cpd.).
Asankita & ˚iya (adj.) [a + sankita, pp. of śank] not hesitating, not afraid, not anxious, firm, bold J i.334 (˚iya); v.241; Sdhp 435, 541.
Asankuppa (adj.) [a + sankuppa, grd. of kup] not to be shaken; immovable; steady, safe (Ep. of Nibbāna) Sn 1149 (cp. Nd2 106); Th 1, 649.
Asankusaka (adj.) [a + sankusaka, which is distorted from Sk. sankasuka splitting, crumbling, see Kern, Toev. p. 18] not contrary J vi.297 (˚vattin, C. appaṭilomavattin, cp. J trsln. vi.143).
Asankheyya (adj.) [a + sankheyya, grd. of saŋ -- khyā] in- calculable, innumerable, nt. an immense period A ii.142; Miln 232 (cattāri a.), 289 DhA i.5, 83, 104.
Asanga (adj.) [a + sanga] not sticking to anything, free from attachment, unattached Th 2, 396 (˚mānasa, = anāsattacitta ThA 259); Miln 343. Cp. next.
Asangita (adj.) [fr. asanga, a + sangita, or should we read asangika?] not sticking or stuck, unimpeded, free, quick J v.409.
Asacca (adj.) [a + sacca] not true, false J v.399.
Asajjamāna (adj.) [ppr. med. of a + sajjati, sañj] not clinging, not stuck, unattached Sn 38, 71 (cp. Nd2 107); Dh 221 (nāmarūpasmiŋ a. = alaggamana DhA iii.298).
Asajjittho 2nd sg. pret. med. of sajjati to stick or cling to, to hesitate J i.376. See sajjati.
Asajjhaya [a + sajjhāya] non -- repetition Dh 241 (cp. DhA iii.347).
Asañña (adj.) [a + saññā] unconscious, ˚sattā unconscious beings N. of a class of Devas D i.28 (cp. DA i.118 and BSk. asaŋjñika -- sattvāḥ Divy 505).
Asaññata (adj.) [a + saññata, pp. of saŋ + yam] unres- trained, intemperate, lacking self -- control It 43 = 90 = Sn 662 = Dh 307.
Asaññin (adj.) [a + saññin] unconscious D i.54 (˚gabbhā, cp. DA i.163); iii.111, 140, 263; It 87; Sn 874.
Asaṭha (adj.) [a + saṭha] without guile, not fraudulent, honest D iii.47, 55, 237; DhA i.69.
Asaŋṭhita (adj.) [a + saṇṭhita] not composed, unsettled, fickle It 62, 94.
Asat (Asanto) [a + sat, ppr. of asti] not being, not being good, i. e. bad, not genuine (cp. asa); freq., e. g. Sn 94, 131, 881, 950; Dh 73, 77, 367; It 69 (asanto nirayaŋ nenti). See also asaddhamma.
*Asati (& Asanāti q. v.) [Sk. aśnāti, aś to partake of, to eat or drink cp. aŋśa share, part] to eat; imper. asnātu J v 376; fut. asissāmi Th 1, 223; Sn 970. -- ppr. med. asamāna J v.59; Sn 239. ger. asitvā Miln 167; & asitvāna J iv.371 (an˚). pp. asita (q. v.). See also the spurious forms asmiye & añhati (añhamāna Sn 240), also āsita1.
Asatiyā (adv.) [instr. of a + sati] heedlessly, unintentionally J iii.486.
Asatta (adj.) [pp. of a + sajjati] not clinging or attached, free from attachment Sn 1059; Dh 419; Nd2 107, 108; DhA iv.228.
Asattha (n. adj.) [a + sattha] absence of a sword or knife, without a knife, usually combd. with adaṇḍa in var. phrases: see under daṇḍa. Also at Th 1, 757 (+ avaṇa).
Asadisa (adj.) [a + sadisa] incomparable, not having its like DhA ii.89; iii.120 (˚dāna).
Asaddha (adj.) [a + saddha] not believing, without faith D iii.252, 282.
Asaddhamma [a + sat + dhamma, cp. asat & BSk. asaddharma] evil condition, sin, esp. sexual intercourse; usually mentioned as a set of several sins, viz. as 3 at It 85; as 4 at A ii.47; as 7 at D iii.252, 282; as 8 at Vin ii.202.
Asana1 (nt.) [Vedic aśan(m)] stone, rock J ii.91; v.131.
Asana2 (nt.) [cp. Sk. aśana of aś, cp. asati] eating, food; adj. eating J i.472 (ghatâsana Ep. of the fire; v.64 (id.). Usually in neg. form anasana fasting, famine, hunger Sn 311 (= khudā SnA 324); DA i.139. See also nirasana.
Asana3 (nt.) [Sk. asana] the tree Pentaptera Tomentosa J i.40 (as Bodhi -- tree of Gotama); ii.91; v.420; vi.530.
Asana4 (nt.) [cp. Sk. asanā, to asyati to hurl, throw] an arrow M i.82 = S i.62. Cp. asani.
Asanāti [see asati] to eat, to consume (food) J i.472; v. 64; vi.14 (Esb. note: read asnāti; C. paribhuñjati).
Asani (f.) [Vedic aśani in same meaning; with Sk. aśri corner, caturaśra four cornered (see assa), to Lat. ācer pointed, sharp, Gr. a)/kros pointed, Ags. egl sting, Ohg. ekka corner, point. Connected with this is Sk. aśan (see asana1). Cp. also aŋsa & asama2] orig. a sharp stone as hurling -- weapon thence in mythol. Indra's thunderbolt, thunder -- clap, lightning J i.71, 167; ii.154; iii.323; Miln 277; VvA 83.
-- aggi the fire of thunder, i. e. lightning or fire caused by lightning DhA iii.71. -- pāta the falling of the thunderbolt, thunderclap, lightning DA i.280 (or should we read asannipāta?); PvA 45. -- vicakka same as ˚pāta (?) S ii. 229 (= lābha -- sakkāra -- silokassa adhivacana); D iii.44, 47.
Asantasaŋ & ˚anto (adj.) [ppr. of a + santasati] fearless, not afraid Sn 71, 74; J iv.101; vi.306; Nd2 109.
Asantāsin (adj.) [a + santāsin, cp. asantāsaŋ] fearless, not trembling, not afraid Sn 850; Dh 351; Nd2 109; DhA iv.70.
Asantuṭṭha [pp. of a + santussati] not contented with, greedy, insatiate, unhappy Sn 108. Cp. next.
Asantuṭṭhitā (f.) [abstr. fr. asantuṭṭhita = asantuṭṭha] dis- satisfaction, discontentment D iii.214 (so read for tutth˚) = A i.95.
Asanthava [a + santhava] dissociation, separation from society, seclusion Sn 207.
Asandhitā (f.) [a + sandhi + tā] absence of joints, discon- nected state J vi.16.
Asannata (adj.) [a + sannata] not bent or bending Sdhp 417.
Asapatta (adj. -- n.) [a + sapatta = Sk. sapatna] (act.) with- out enmity, friendly (med.) having no enemy or foe, secure, peaceful D ii.276; Sn 150 (= vigata -- paccatthika, mettavihārin KhA 249); Th 2, 512.
Asapattī (f.) [a + sapattī] without co -- wife or rival in mar- riage S iv.249.
Asappurisa [a + sappurisa, cp. asat] a low, bad or un- worthy man M iii.37; SnA 479 (= anariya Sn 664).
Asabala (adj.) [a + sabala] unspotted D ii.80 = iii.245.
Asabbha (adj.) [a + sabbha, i. e. *sabhya cp. sabhā & in meaning court: courteous, hof: hoflich etc.] not belonging to the assembly -- room, not consistent with good manners, impolite, vile, low, of base character J iii.527 (mātugāma); Dh 77 = J iii.367 = Th 1, 994; Miln 221; DhA i.256; ThA 246 (akkhi). Cp. next. -- Note. Both sabbha and sabbhin occur only in the negative form.
Asabbhin = asabbna J i.494, more freq. in cpds. as asabbhi˚, e.g.
-- kāraṇa a low or sinful act Miln 280. -- rūpa low, common J vi.386 (= asādhu -- jātika, lāmaka), 387 (= asabbhijātika), 414 (= apaṇḍita -- jātika). Cp. prec.
*Asabha [Sk. ṛṣabha] see usabha.
Asama1 (adj.) [a + sama] unequal, incomparable J i.40 (+ appaṭipuggala); Sdhp 578 (+ atula). Esp. freq. in cpd. ˚dhura lit. carrying more than an equal burden, of incomparable strength, very steadfast or resolute Sn 694 (= asama -- viriya SnA 489); J i.193; vi.259, 330.
Asama2 (nt.) [the diaeretic form of Sk. aśman hurling stone, of whieh the contracted form is amha (q. v.); connected with Lat. ocris "mons confragosus"; Gr. a)/kmwn anvil; Lith. akmů̃ stone, see also asana1 (Sk. aśan stone for throwing) and asani] stone, rock DA i.270, 271 (˚muṭṭhika having a hammer of stone; v. l. BB. ayamuṭṭhika); SnA 392 (instr. asmanā).
Asamaggiya (nt.) [abstr. fr. a + samagga] lack of concord, disharmony J vi.516 (so read for asāmaggiya).
Asamaṇa at Pug 27 is to be read assamaṇa (q. v.).
Asamapekkhana (nt.) & ˚ā (f.) [fr. a + sam + apekkhati] lack of consideration S iii.261; Dhs 390, 1061, 1162.
Asamāhita (adj.) [a + samāhita] not composed, uncontrolled, not firm It 113 (opp. susamāhita); Dh 110, 111; Pug 35.
Asamijjhanaka (adj.) [a + samijjhana + ka] unsuccessful, without result, fruitless; f. ˚ikā J iii.252.
Asamiddhi (f.) [a + samiddhi] misfortune, lack of success J vi.584.
Asamosaraṇa (nt.) [a + samosaraṇa] not coming together, not meeting, separation J v.233.
Asampakampiya (adj.) [grd. of a + sampakampeti] not to be shaken, not to be moved Sn 229 (= kampetuŋ vā cāletuŋ vā asakkuṇeyyo KhA 185).
Asampajañña (nt.) [a + sampajañña] lack of intelligence D iii.213; Dhs 390, 1061, 1162, 1351.
Asampāyanto [ppr. of a + sampāyati] unable to solve or explain Sn p. 92.
Asambādha (adj.) [a + sambādha] unobstructed Sn 150 (= sambādha -- virahita KhA 248); J i.80; ThA 293.
Asammodiya (nt.) [a + sammodiya] disagreement, dissension J vi.517 (= asamaggiya C.).
Asammosa [a + sammosa cp. B.Sk. asammoṣadharman Ep. of the Buddha; Divy 49 etc] absence of confusion D iii.221 = Dhs 1366.
Asayaŋvasin (adj.) [a + sayaŋ + vasiŋ] not under one's own control, i. e. dependent D ii.262; J i.337.
Asayha (adj.) [a + sayha, grd. of sah = Sk. asahya] im- possible, insuperable J vi.337. Usually in cpd. ˚sāhin conquering the unconquerable, doing the impossible, acchieving what has not been achieved before Th 1, 536, Pv ii.922 (Angīrasa); It 32.
Asahana (nt. -- adj.) [a + sahana] not enduring, non -- endurance, inability J iii.20; PvA 17.
Asahāya (adj.) [a + sahāya] one who is without friends; who is dependent on himself Miln 225.
Asā see āsa.
Asāta (adj.) [a + sāta, Sk. aśāta, Kern's interpretation & etymology of asāta at Toev. s.v. p. 90 is improbable] disagreeable Vin i.78 (asātā vedanā, cp. asātā vedanā M Vastu I 5); Sn 867; J i.288, 410; ii.105; Dhs 152, 1343.
Asādhāraṇa (adj.) [a + sādhāraṇa cp. asādhāraṇa Divy 561] not general, not shared, uncommon, unique Vin iii.35; Kh viii.9; J i.58, 78; Miln 285; DA i.71; Sdhp 589, 592.
Asāmapāka (adj.) [a + sāma + pāka] one who does not cook (a meal) for himself (a practice of ascetics) DA i.270.
Asāra (n. adj.) [a + sāra] that which is not substance, worthlessness; adj. worthless, vain, idle Sn 937 (= asāra nissāra sārâpagata Nd1 409); Dh 11, 12 (cp. DhA i.114 for interpretation).
Asāraka (adj.) [a + sāraka] unessential, worthless, sapless, rotten Th 1, 260; J ii.163 = DhA i.144.
Asāraddha (adj.) [a + sāraddha] not excited, cool A i.148 = It 119 (passaddho kāyo a.; v.l. assāraddha).
Asāhasa (nt.) [a + sāhasa] absence of violence, meekness, peaceableness D iii.147 (asāhase rata fond of peace); acc. as adv. asāhasaŋ without violence, not arbitrarily J iii.319; instr. asāhasena id. J vi.280; Dh 257 (= amusāvādena DhA iii.382).
Asi [Vedic asi, Av. aŋhū Lat. ensis] a sword, a large knife D i.77 (= DA i.222); M ii.99; A i.48 = (asinā sīsaŋ chindante); iv.97 (asinā hanti attānaŋ); J iv.118 (asi sunisito), 184; v.45 (here meaning "sickle"), 475 (asiñ ca me maññasi, probably faulty for either "āsiñ ca me" or "āsiñcam me"); Vism 201 (ñāṇâsi the sword of knowledge); PvA 253 (asinā pahaṭa).
-- camma sword & shield Vin ii.192; A iii.93; J vi.449. -- tharu the hilt of a sword DhA iv.66. -- nakha having nails like swords Pgdp 29. -- patta having sword -- like leaves, with swords (knives) for leaves (of the sword -- leaf -- wood in Niraya, a late feature in the descriptions of Purgatory in Indian speculative Theology, see e. g. Mārk -- aṇḍeyapurāṇa xii.24 sq.; Mhbhārata xii.321; Manu iv.90; xii. 75; Scherman, Visionsliteratur pp. 23 sq.) J vi.250 (˚niraya); PvA 221 (˚vana); Sdhp 194. -- pāsa having swords for snares (a class of deities) Miln 191. -- māla ( -- kamma) sword -- garland ( -- torture) J iii.178 (+sīsaŋ chindāpeti); Dāvs iii.35. Preferable to interpretation "sword -- dirt", see māla (mālā). -- lakkhana "swordsign", i.e. (fortune -- telling from) marks or a sword D i.9; J i.455. -- loma having swords for hair S ii.257, cp. Vin iii.106. -- sūna slaughter -- house (so also B.Sk. asisūnā Divy 10, 15; see further detail under "kāma" similes) Vin ii.26; M i.130, 143; A iii.97. -- sūla a swordblade Th 2, 488 (expld. at ThA 287 by adhikuṭṭanatthena, i.e. with reference to the executioner's block, cp. also sattisūla).
Asika (adj.) ( -- ˚) [asi + ka] having a sword, with a sword in phrase ukkhittɔasika with drawn sword, M i.377; J i.393.
Asita1 [Sk. aśita, pp. of *asati, Sk. aśnāti] having eaten, eating; (nt.) that which is eaten or enjoyed, food M i.57; A iii.30, 32 (˚pīta -- khāyita etc.); PvA 25 (id.); J vi.555 ˚(āsana having enjoyed one's food, satisfied). Cp. āsita1.
Asita2 (adj.) [a + sita pp. of *śri, Sk. aśrita] not clinging to, unattached, independent, free (from wrong desires) D ii.261 (˚âtiga); M i.386; Th 1, 38, 1242 (see Mrs Rh. D. in Brethren 404 note 2); J ii.247; It 97; Sn 251, 519, 593, 686 (Asitavhaya, called the Asita i.e. the Unattached; cp. SnA 487), 698 (id.), 717, 957, 1065 (cp. Nd2 111 & nissaya).
Asita3 (adj.) [Sk. asita; Idg. *ās, cp. Lat. āreo to be dry, i. e. burnt up; Gr. a)/zw to dry; orig. meaning burnt, hence of burnt, i. e. black colour (of ashes)] black -- blue, black M ii.180 (˚vyābhangī); A iii.5 (id.); Th 2, 480 (= indanīla ThA 286); J iii.419 (˚âpangin black -- eyed); v. 302; Dāvs i.45.
Asita4 (m. nt.) [fr. asi] a sickle J iii.129; v 46.
Asīti (num.) [Sk. aśīti] 80 (on symbolical meaning & freq. application see aṭṭha1 B 1 c, where also most of the ref's. In addition we mention the foll.:) J i.233 (˚hattha 80 hands, i. e. 80 cubits deep); iii.174 (˚sahassa -- vāraṇa -- parivuta); vi.20 (vassasahassāni); Miln 23 (asītiyā bhikkhusahassehi saddhiŋ); Vīsm 46 (satakoṭiyo) DhA i.14, 19 (mahātherā); ii.25 (˚koṭi -- vibhava). Cp. ạ̄sītika.
Asu (pron.) [Sk. asau (m.), adas (nt.); base amu˚ in oblique cases & derivation, e.g. adv. amutra (q.v.)] pron. dẹmonstr. "that", that one, usually combd. with yo (yaŋ), e. g. asu yo so puriso M i.366; yaŋ aduŋ khettaŋ S iv.315. <-> nom. sg. m. asu S iv.195; Miln 242; f. asu J v.396 (asū metri causâ); nt. aduŋ M i.364, 483; A i.250. Of oblique cases e. g. amunā (instr.) A i.250. Cp. also next.
Asuka (pron. -- adj.) [asn + ka] such a one, this or that, a certain Vin iii.87; J i.148; PvA 29, 30, 35, 109, 122 (˚ŋ gatiŋ gata).
Asuci (adj.) [a + suci] not clean, impure, unclean Sn 75 (˚manussā, see Nd2 112); Pug 27, 36; Sdhp 378, 603.
Asucīka (nt.) [abstr. fr. asuci] impurity, unclean living, defilement Sn 243 (˚missita = asucibhāva -- missita SnA 286.
Asubha (adj.) [a + subha] impure, unpleasant, bad, ugly, nasty; nt. ˚ŋ nastiness, impurity. Cp. on term and the Asubha -- meditation, as well as on the 10 asubhas or offensive objects Dhs. trsl. 70 and Cpd. 121 n. 6. -- S iv.111 (asubhato manasikaroti); v.320; Sn 341; Sdhp 368. -- subhâsubha pleasant unpleasant, good & bad Sn 633; J iii. 243; Miln 136.
-- ânupassin realising or intuiting the corruptness (of the body) It 80, 81; DhA i.76. -- kathā talk about impurity Vin iii.68. -- kammaṭṭhāna reflection on impurity DhA iii.425. -- nimitta sign of the unclean i. e. idea of impurity Vism 77. -- bhāvanā contemplation of the impurity (of the body) Vin iii.68. -- saññā idea of impurity D iii.253, 283, 289, 291. -- saññin having an idea of or realising the impurity (of the body) It 93.
Asura [Vedic asura in more comprehensive meaning; con- nected with Av. ahurō Lord, ahurō mazdā˚; perhaps to Av. anhuš & Lat. erus master] a fallen angel, a Titan; pl. asurā the Titans, a class of mythological beings. Dhpāla at PvA 272 & the C. on J v.186 define them as kāḷakañjaka -- bhedā asurā. The are classed with other similar inferior deities, e. g. with garuḷā, nāgā, yakkhā at Miln 117; with supaṇṇā, gandhabbā, yakkhā at DA i.51. <-> The fight between Gods & Titans is also reflected in the oldest books of the Pāli Canon and occurs in identical description at the foll. passages under the title of devâsura -- sangāma: D ii.285; S i.222 (cp. 216 sq.), iv.201 sq., v.447; M i.253; A iv.432. -- Rebirth as an Asura is considered as one of the four unhappy rebirths or evil fates after death (apāyā; viz. niraya, tiracchāna -- yoni, petā or pettivisaya, asurā), e. g. at It 93; J v.186; Pv iv.111, see also apāya. -- Other passages in general: S i.216 sq. (fight of Devas & Asuras); iv.203; A ii.91; iv.198 sq., 206; Sn 681; Nd1 89, 92, 448; DhA i.264 (˚kaññā); Sdhp 366, 436.
-- inda Chief or king of the Titans. Several Asuras are accredited with the rôle of leaders, most commonly Vepacitti (S i.222; iv.201 sq.) and Rāhu (A ii.17, 53; iii.243). Besides these we find Pahārāda (gloss Mahābhadda) at A iv.197. -- kāya the body or assembly of the asuras A i.143; J v.186; ThA 285. -- parivāra a retinue of Asuras A ii.91. -- rakkhasā Asuras and Rakkhasas (Rakṣasas) Sn 310 (defined by Bdhgh at SnA 323 as pabbata -- pāda -- nivāsino dānava -- yakkha -- saññitā).
Asuropa [probably a haplological contraction of asura -- ropa. On various suggestions as to etym. & meaning see Morris's discussion at J P T S. 1893, 8 sq. The word is found as āsulopa in the Asoka inscriptions] anger, malice, hatred; abruptness, want of forbearance Pug 18 = Vbh 357; Dhs 418, 1060, 1115, 1341 (an˚); DhsA 396.
Asussūsaŋ [ppr. of a + susūsati, Desid. of śru, cp. Sk. śuśrūṣati] not wishing to hear or listen, disobedient J v.121.
Asūyaka see anasūyaka.
Asūra (adj.) [a + sura1] -- 1. not brave, not valiant, co- wardly Sn 439. -- 2. uncouth, stupid J vi.292 (cp. Kern. Toev. p. 48).
Asekha (& Asekkha) (adj. n.) [a + sekha] not requiring to be trained, adept, perfect, m. one who is no longer a learner, an expert; very often meaning an Arahant (cp. B.Sk. aśaikṣa occurring only in phrase śaikṣâśaikṣāh those in training & the adepts, e.g. Divy 261, 337; Av. Ś i.269, 335; ii.144) Vin i.62 sq.; iii.24; S i.99; D iii.218, 219; It 51 (asekho sīlakkhandho; v. l. asekkha); Pug 14 (= arahant); Dhs 584, 1017, 1401; Kvu 303 sq.
-- muni the perfectly Wise DhA iii.321. -- bala the power of an Arahant, enumd. in a set of 10 at Ps ii.173, cp. 176.
Asecanaka (adj.) [a + secana + ka, fr. sic to sprinkle, cp. B.Sk. asecanaka -- darśana in same meaning e. g. Divy 23, 226, 334] unmixed, unadulterated, i. e. with full and unimpaired properties, delicious, sublime, lovely M i.114; S i.213 (a. ojava "that elixir that no infusion needs" Mrs Rh. D.) = Th 2, 55 (expld. as anāsittakaŋ pakatiyā ɔva mahārasaŋ at ThA 61) = Th 2, 196 (= anāsittakaŋ ojavantaŋ sabhāva -- madhuraŋ ThA 168); S v.321; A iii. 237 sq. Miln 405.
Asevanā (f.) [a + sevanā] not practising, abstinence from Sn 259 (= abhajanā apayirupāsanā KhA 124).
Asesa (adj.) [a + sesa] not leaving a remnant, without a remainder, all, entire, complete Sn 2 sq., 351, 355, 500, 1037 (= sabba Nd2 113). As ˚ -- (adv.) entirely, fully, completely Sn p. 141 (˚virāga -- nirodha); Miln 212 (˚vacana inclusive statement).
Asesita (adj.) [pp. of a + Caus. of śiṣ, see seseti & sissati] leaving nothing over, having nothing left, entire, whole, all J iii.153.
Asoka1 (adj.) [a + soka, cp. Sk. aśoka] free from sorrow Sn 268 (= nissoka abbūḷha -- soka -- salla KhA 153); Dh 412; Th 2, 512.
Asoka2 [Sk. aśoka] the Asoka tree, Jonesia Asoka J v.188; Vv 354, 359 (˚rukkha); Vism 625 (˚ankura); VvA 173 (˚rukkha).
Asoṇḍa (adj.) [a + soṇḍa] not being a drunkard, abstaining from drink J v.116. -- f. asoṇḍī A iii.38.
Asotatā (nt.) [abstr. a + sota + ta, having no ears, being earless J vi.16.
Asnāti [Sk. aśnāti to eat, to take food; the regular Pāli forms are asati (as base) and asanāti] to eat; imper. asnātu J v.376.
Asman (nt.) [Vedic aśman; the usual P. forms are amha and asama2] stone, rock; only in instr. asmanā SnA 362.
Asmasati [spurious form for the usual assasati = Sk. āśva- sati] to trust, to rely on J v.56 (Pot. asmase).
Asmi (I am) see atthi.
Asmimāna [asmi + māna] the pride that says "I am", pride of self, egotism (same in B.Sk. e.g. Divy 210, 314) Vin i.3; D iii.273; M i.139, 425; A iii.85; Ps i.26; Kvu 212; DhA i.237. Cp. ahaŋ asmi.
Asmiye 1 sg. ind. pres. med. of aś to eat, in sense of a fut. "I shall eat" J v.397, 405 (C. bhuñjissāmi). The form is to be expld. as denom. formn. fr. -- āśa food, = aŋsiyati and with metathesis asmiyati. See also añhati which would correspond either to *aŋśyati or aśnāti (see asati).
Assa1 [for aŋsa1, q. v. for etym.] shoulder; in cpd. assapuṭa shoulder -- bag, knapsack i. e. a bag containing provisions, instr. assupuṭena with provisions. Later exegesis has interpreted this as a bag full of ashes, and vv. ll. as well as Commentators take assa = bhasma ashes (thus also Morris J P T S. 1893, 10 without being able to give an etymology). The word was already misunderstood by Bdhgh. when he explained the Dīgha passage by bhasmapuṭena, sīse chārikaŋ okiritvā ti attho DA i.267. After all it is the same as puṭaŋsa (see under aŋsa1). -- D i.98, cp. A ii.242 (v. l. bhasma˚); DA i.267 (v.l. bhassa˚).
Assa2 [for aŋsa2 = Sk. aśra point, corner, cp. Sk. aśri, Gr. a)/kros & o)cu/s sharp, Lat. acer] corner, point; occurs only in cpd. caturassa four -- cornered, quadrangular, regular (of symmetrical form, Vin ii.316; J iv.46, 492; Pv ii.119. Perhaps also at Th 2, 229 (see under assa3). Occurs also in form caturaŋsa under catur).
Assa3 [Vedic aśva, cp. Av. aspō; Gr. i(/ppos, dial. i(/kkos; Lat. equus; Oir. ech; Gall. epo -- ; Cymr. ep, Goth. aíhva; Os. ehu; Ags. eoh] a horse; often mentioned alongside of and combd. with hatthi (elephant) Vin iii.6 (pañcamattehi assa -- satehi), 52 (enumd. under catuppadā, quadrupeds, with hatthi oṭṭha goṇa gadrabha & pasuka); A ii.207; v.271; Sn 769 (gavâssa). At Th ii.229 the commentary explains caturassa as ʻ four in hand ʼ; but the context shows that the more usual sense of caturassa (see assa2) was probably what the poet meant; Dh 94, 143, 144 (bhadra, a good horse), 380 (id.); Vv 203 (+ assatarī); VvA 78; DhA i.392 (hatthi -- assâdayo); Sdhp 367 (duṭṭh˚).
-- ājāniya [cp. BSk. aśvājāneya Divy 509, 511] a thoroughbred horse, a blood horse A i.77, 244; ii.113 sq., 250 sq.; iii.248, 282 sq.; iv.188, 397; v.166, 323; PvA 216. See also ājāniya. -- âroha one who climbs on a horse, a rider on horseback, N. of an occupation "cavalry" D i.51 (+ hatthâroha; expld. at DA i.156 by sabbe pi assācariyaassavejja -- assabhaṇḍādayo). -- kaṇṇa N. of a tree, Vatica Robusta, lit. "horse -- ear" (cp. similarly Goth. aíhva -- tundi the thornbush, lit. horse -- tooth) J ii.161; iv.209; vi.528. -- khalunka an inferior horse ("shaker"), opp. sadassa. A i.287 = iv.397. -- tthara a horse cover, a horse blanket Vin i.192; D i.7 -- damma a horse to be tamed, a fierce horse, a stallion A ii.112; ˚sārathi a horse trainer A ii. 112, 114; v.323 sq.; DhA iv.4. -- potaka the young of a horse, a foal or colt J ii.288. -- bandha a groom J ii. 98; v.449; DhA i.392. -- bhaṇḍa (for ˚bandha? or should we read ˚paṇḍaka?) a groom or horse -- trainer, a trader in horses Vin i.85 (see on form of word Kern, Toev. p. 35). -- bhaṇḍaka horse -- trappings J ii.113. -- maṇḍala circus Vism 308, cp. M i.446. -- maṇḍalika exercising -- ground Vin iii.6. -- medha N. of a sacrifice: the horse -- sacrifice [Vedic aśvamedha as Np.] S i.76 (v. l. sassa˚); It 21 (+ purisamedha); Sn 303. -- yuddha a horse -- fight D i.7. -- rūpaka a figure of a horse, a toy horse DhA ii.69 (+ hatthi -- rūpaka). -- lakkhaṇa (earning fees by judging) the marks on a horse D i.9. -- laṇḍa horse -- manure, horsedung DhA iv.156 (hatthi -- laṇḍa +). -- vāṇija a horsedealer Vin iii.6. -- sadassa a noble steed of the horse kind A i.289 = iv.397 (in comparison with purisa˚).
Assa4 is gen. dat. sg. of ayaŋ, this.
Assa5 3. sg. Pot. of asmi (see atthi).
Assaka1 ( -- ˚) [assa3 + ka] with a horse, having a horse; anɔ without a horse J vi.515 (+ arathaka).
Assaka2 (adj.) [a + saka; Sk. asvaka] not having one's own, poor, destitute M i.450; ii.68; A iii.352; Ps i.126 (v. l. asaka).
Assatara [Vedic aśvatara, aśva + compar. suffix tara in func- tion of "a kind of", thus lit. a kind of horse, cp. Lat. matertera a kind of mother. i. e. aunt] a mule Dh 322 = DhA i.213; DhA iv.4 (= vaḷavāya gadrabhena jāta); J iv.464 (kambojake assatare sudante; imported from Cambodia); vi.342. -- f. assatarī a she -- mule Vin ii.188; S i.154; ii.241; A ii.73; Miln 166. -- assatarī -- ratha a chariot drawn by she -- mules Vv 203, 208 (T. assatarī ratā) = 438; Pv i.111 (= assatariyutta ratha PvA 56); J vi.355.
Assattha1 [Vedic aśvattha, expld. in K Z i.467 as aśva -- ttha dial. for aśva -- stha "standing place for horses, which etym. is problematic; it is likely that the Sk. word is borrowed from a local dialect.] the holy fig -- tree, Ficus, Religiosa; the tree under which the Buddha attained enlightenment, i. e. the Bo tree Vin iv.35; D ii.4 (sammā -- sambuddho assatthassa mūle abhisambuddho); S v.96; J i.16 (v.75, in word -- play with assattha2 of v.79).
Assattha2 [pp. of assasati; cp. BSk. āsvasta Av. Ś i.210] encouraged, comforted A iv.184 (v. l. as gloss assāsaka); Ps i.131 (loka an˚; v. l. assaka); J i.16 (v.79 cp. assattha1); vi.309 (= laddhassasa C.), 566.
Assaddha (adj.) [a + saddhā] without faith, unbelieving, Sn 663; Pug 13, 20; Dhs 1327; DhA ii.187.
Assaddhiya (nt.) [a + saddhiya, in form, but not in meaning a grd. of saddahati, for which usually saddheyya; cp. Sk. aśradheyya incredible] disbelief S i.25; A iii.421; v.113 sq., 146, 148 sq., 158, 161; Vbh 371; DA i.235; Sdhp 80.
Assama [ā + śram] a hermitage (of a brahmin ascetic esp. a jaṭila) Vin i.24 = iv.108; i.26, 246; iii.147; Sn 979; Sn p. 104, 111; J i.315 (˚pada) v.75 (id.) 321. vi.76 (˚pada). The word is not found anywhere in the Canon in the technical sense of the later Sanskrit law books, where "the 4 āśramas" is used as a t. t. for the four stages in the life of a brahmin priest (not of a brahmin by birth). See Dial. i.211 -- 217.
Assamaṇa [a + samaṇa] not a true Samaṇa Vin i.96; Sn 282; Pug 27 (so read for asamaṇa); Pug A 207. -- f. assamaṇī Vìn iv.214.
Assaya [ā + sayati, śri] resting place, shelter, refuge, seat DA i.67 (puññ˚). Cp. BSk. rājāśraya Jtm 3156; aśraya also in meaning "body": see Av. Ś. i.175 & Index ii.223.
Assava (adj.) [ā + sunāti, śru] loyal D i.137; Sn 22, 23, 32; J iv.98; vi.49; Miln 254; an˚ inattentive, not docile DhA i.7.
Assavati [ā + sru] to flow J ii.276 (= paggharati C.). Cp. also āsavati.
Assavanatā (f.) [abstr. fr. assavana] not listening to, in- attention M i.168.
Assavanīya (adj.) [a + savanīya] not pleasant to hear Sdhp 82.
Assasati [ā + śvas, on semantical inversion of ā & pa see under ā1 3] 1. to breathe, to breathe out, to exhale, J i 163; vi.305 (gloss assāsento passāsento susu ti saddaŋ karonto); Vism 272. Usually in combn. with passasati to inhale, i. e. to breathe in & out, D ii.291 = M i.56, cp. M i.425; J ii.53, cp. v.36. -- 2. to breathe freely or quietly, to feel relieved, to be comforted, to have courage S iv.43; J iv.93 assasitvāna ger. = vissamitvā c.); vi.190 (assāsa imper., with mā soci); med. assase J iv.57 (C. for asmase T.; expld. by vissase), 111 (˚itvā). -- 3. to enter by the breath, to bewitch, enchant, take possession J iv.495 (= assāsa -- vātena upahanati āvisati C.). -- Caus. assāseti. -- pp. assattha2. See also assāsa -- passāsa.
Assāda [ā + sādiyati, svad] taste, sweetness, enjoyment, satisfaction D i.22 (vedanānaŋ samudaya atthangama assāda etc.); M i.85; S ii.84 sq. (˚ânupassin), 170 sq.; iii.27 sq. (ko rūpassa assādo), 62, 102; iv.8 sq., 220; v.193, 203 sq.; A i.50 (˚ânupassin), 258, 260; ii.10; iii.447 (˚diṭṭhi) J i.508; iv.113, Sn 448; Ps i.139 sq., (˚diṭṭhi), 157; cp. i.1017; Pv iv.62 (kām˚); Vbh 368 (˚diṭṭhi); Nett 27 sq.; Miln 388; Vism 76 (paviveka -- rasɔ); Sdhp 37, 51. See also appassāda under appa.
Assādanā (f.) [cp. assāda] sweetness, taste, enjoyment S i.124; Sn 447 (= sādubhāva SnA 393).
Assādeti [Denom. fr. assāda] to taste S ii.227 (lābha -- sakkāra- silokaŋ); Vism 73 (paviveka -- sukha -- rasaŋ); DhA i.318.
Assāraddha v. l. at It 111 for asāraddha.
Assāvin (adj.) [ā + sru] only in an˚ not enjoying or finding pleasure, not intoxicated Sn 853 (sātiyesu a. = sāta -- vatthusa kāmaguṇesu taṇhā -- santhava -- virahita SnA 549). See also āsava.
Assāsa [Sk. āśvāsa, ā + śvas] 1. (lit.) breathing, esp. breathing out (so Vism 272), exhalation, opp. to passāsa inhalation, with which often combd. or contrasted; thus as cpd. assāsa -- passāsa meaning breathing (in & out), sign of life, process of breathing, breath D ii.157 = S i.159 = Th 1, 905; D iii.266; M i.243; S i.106; iv.293; v.330, 336; A iv.409; v.135; J ii.146; vi.82; Miln 31, 85; Vism 116, 197. -- assāsa in contrast with passāsa at Ps i.95, 164 sq., 182 sq. -- 2. (fig.) breathing easily, freely or quietly, relief, comfort, consolation, confidence M i.64; S ii.50 (dhamma -- vinaye); iv.254 (param -- assāsa -- ppatta); A i.192; iii.297 sq. (dhamma -- vinaye); iv.185; J vi.309 (see assattha2); Miln 354; PvA 104 (˚matta only a little breathing space); Sdhp 299 (param˚), 313.
Assāsaka (adj. n.) [fr. assāsa] 1. (cp. assāsa 1) having breath, breathing, in an˚ not able to draw breath Vin iii.84; iv.111. -- 2. (cp. assāsa2) (m. & nt.) that which gives comfort & relief, confidence, expectancy J i.84; vi. 150. Cp. next.
Assāsika (adj.) [fr. assāsa in meaning of assāsa 2, cp. assāsaka 2] only in neg. an˚ not able to afford comfort, giving no comfort or security M i.514; iii.30; J ii.298 (= aññaŋ assāsetuŋ asamatthaṭāya na assāsika). Cp. BSk. anāśvāsika in ster. phrase anitya adhruva anāśvāsika vipariṇāmadharman Divy 207; Av. Ś. 139, 144; whereas the corresp. Pāli equivalent runs anicca addhuva asassata (= appāyuka) vipariṇāma -- dhamma thus inviting the conjecture that BSk. āśvāsika is somehow distorted out of P. asassata.
Assāsin (adj.) [Sk. āśvāsin] reviving, cheering up, consoled, happy S iv.43 (an˚).
Assāseti [Caus. of assasati] to console, soothe, calm, com- fort, satisfy J vi.190, 512; DhA i.13.
Assita (adj.) [Sk. aśrita, ā + pp. of śri] dependent on, relying, supported by (acc.); abiding, living in or on D ii.255 (tad˚); Vv 5016 (sīho va guhaŋ a.); Th 1, 149 (janaŋ evɔ assito jano); Sdhp 401.
Assirī (adj.) [a + sirī] without splendour, having lost its brightness, in assirī viya khāyati Nett 62 = Ud 79 (which latter has sassarɔ iva, cp. C. on passage l. c.).
Assu1 (nt.) [Vedic aśru, Av. asrū, Lith aszarà, with etym. not definitely clear: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under lacrima] a tear Vin i.87 (assūni pavatteti to shed tears); S ii.282 (id.); Dh 74; Th 2, 496 (cp. ThA 289); KhA 65; DhA i.12 (˚puṇṇa -- netta with eyes full of tears); ii.98; PvA 125.
-- dhārā a shower of tears DhA iv.15 (pavatteti to shed). -- mukha (adj.) with tearful face [cp. BSk. aśrumukha e. g. Jtm 3116] D i.115, 141; Dh 67; Pug 56; DA i.284; PvA 39. -- mocana shedding of tears PvA 18.
Assu2 is 3rd pl. pot. of atthi.
Assu3 (indecl.) [Sk. sma] expletive part. also used in emphatic sense of "surely, yes, indeed" Sn 231 (according to Fausböll, but preferably with P. T. S. ed. as tayas su for tayɔ assu, cp. KhA 188); Vv 324 (assa v. l. SS) = VvA 135 (assū ti nipāta -- mattaŋ). Perhaps we ought to take this assu3 together with the foll. assu4 as a modification of ssu (see su2). Cp. āsu.
Assu4 part. for Sk. svid (and sma?) see under su2. Ac- cording to this view Fausbölls reading kenɔ assu at Sn 1032 is to be emended to kena ssu.
Assuka (nt.) [assu1 + ka] a tear Vin ii.289; Sn 691; Pv iv.53.
Assutavant (adj.) [a + sutavant] one who has not heard, ignorant M i.1, 8, 135; Dhs 1003, 1217, cp. Dhs trsl. 258.
Aha1 (indecl.) [cp. Sk. aha & P. aho; Germ. aha; Lat. ehem etc.] exclamation of surprise, consternation, pain etc. "ch! alas! woe!". Perhaps to be seen in cpd. ˚kāmā miserable pleasures lit. "woe to these pleasures!") gloss at ThA 292 for T. kāmakāmā of Th 2, 506 (expld. by C. as "ahā ti lāmaka -- pariyāyo"). See also ahaha.
Aha2 ( -- ˚) & Aho (˚ -- ) (nt.) [Vedic ahan & ahas] a day. (1) ˚aha only in foll. cpds. & cases: instr. ekâhena in one day J vi. 366; loc. tadahe on that (same) day PvA 46; acc. katipâhaŋ (for) some or several days J i.152 etc. (kattpâha); sattāhaŋ seven days, a week Vin i.1; D ii. 14; J iv.2, and freq.; anvahaŋ daily Dāvs iv.8. -- The initial a of ahaŋ (acc.) is elided after i, which often appears lengthened: kati ɔhaŋ how many days? S i.7; ekâha -- dvī ɔhaŋ one or two days J i.292; dvīha -- tī ɔhan two or three days J ii.103; VvA 45; ekâha -- dvī ɔhɔ accayena after the lapse of one or two days J i.253. -- A doublet of aha is anha (through metathesis from ahan), which only occurs in phrases pubbanho & sāyanha (q. v.); an adj. der. fr. aha is ˚ahika: see pañcâhika (consisting of 5 days). -- (2) aho˚ in cpd. ahoratta (m. & nt.) [cp. BSk. ahorātraŋ Av. Ś. i.209] & ahoratti (f.) day & night, occurring mostly in oblique cases and adverbially in acc. ahorattaŋ: M i.417 (˚ânusikkhin); Dh 226 (id.; expld. by divā ca rattiñ ca tisso sikkhā sikkhamāna DhA iii. 324); Th 1, 145 (ahorattā accayanti); J iv.108 (˚ānaŋ accaye); Pv ii.131 (˚ŋ); Miln 82 (ena). -- ahorattiŋ Dh 387; J vi.313 (v. l. BB for T. aho va rattiŋ).
Ahaŋ (prom.) [Vedic ahaŋ = Av. azəm; Gr. e)gw/(n); Lat. ego; Goth. ik, Ags. ic, Ohg. ih etc.] pron. of 1st person "I". <-> nom. sg. ahaŋ S iii.235; A iv.53; Dh 222, 320; Sn 172, 192, 685, 989, 1054, 1143; J i.61; ii.159. -- In pregnant sense (my ego, myself, I as the one & only, i. e. egotistically) in foll. phrases: yaŋ vadanti mama . . na te ahaŋ S i.116, 123; ahaŋ asmi "I am" (cp. ahaŋkāra below) S i.129; iii.46, 128 sq.; iv.203; A ii.212, 215 sq.; Vism 13; ahaŋ pure ti "I am the first" Vv 8450 (= ahamahaŋkārā ti VvA 351). -- gen. dat. mayhaŋ Sn 431, 479; J i.279; ii.160, mama S i.115; Sn 22, 23, 341, 997; J ii.159, & mamaŋ S i.116; Sn 253 (= mama C.), 694, 982. -- instr. mayā Sn 135, 336, 557, 982; J i.222, 279. -- acc. maŋ Sn 356, 366, 425, 936; J ii. 159; iii.26, & mamaŋ J iii.55, 394. -- loc. mayi Sn 559; J iii 188. The enclitic form in the sg. is me, & functions in diff. cases, as gen. (Sn 983; J ii.159), acc. (Sn 982), instr. (J i.138, 222), & abl. -- Pl. nom. mayaŋ (we) Sn 31, 91, 167, 999; J ii.159; vi.365, amhe J ii. 129, & vayaŋ (q. v.). -- gen. amhākaŋ J i.221; ii.159 & asmākaŋ Sn p. 106. -- acc. amhe J i.222; ii.415 & asme J iii.359. -- instr. amhehi J i.150; ii.417 & asmābhi ThA 153 (Ap. 132). -- loc. amhesu J i.222. <-> The enclitic form for the pl. is no (for acc. dat & gen.): see under vayaŋ.
-- kāra selfishness, egotism, arrogance (see also mamaŋkāra) M iii.18, 32; S ii.253; iii.80, 136, 169 sq.; iv.41, 197, 202; A i.132 sq.; iii.444; Ud 70; Nett 127, and freq. passim.
Ahaha [onomat. after exclamation ahahā: see aha1] 1. ex- clamation of woe J iii.450 (ahahā in metre). -- 2. (nt.) N. of a certain division of Purgatory (Niraya), lit. oh woe! A v.173 = Sn p. 126.
Ahāsa [a + hāsa, cp. Sk. ahāsa & aharṣa] absence of exult- ancy, modesty J iii.466 (= an -- ubbillāvitattaŋ C.).
Ahāsi 3rd sg. aor. of harati (q. v.).
Ahi [Vedic ahi, with Av. aži perhaps to Lat. anguis etc., see Walde Lat. Wtb. s. v.] a snake Vin ii.109; D i.77; S iv.198; A iii.306 sq.; iv.320; v.289; Nd1 484; Vism 345 (+ kukkura etc.); VvA 100; PvA 144.
-- kuṇapa the carcase of a snake Vin iii.68 = M i.73 = A iv.377. -- gāha a snake catcher or trainer J vi.192. -- guṇṭhika (? reading uncertain, we find as vv. ll. ˚guṇḍika, ˚guṇṭika & ˚kuṇḍika; the BSk. paraphrase is ˚tuṇḍika Divy 497. In view of this uncertainty we are unable to pronounce a safe etymology; it is in all probability a dialectical; may be Non -- Aryan, word. See also under kuṇḍika & guṇṭhika & cp. Morris in J.P.T.S. 1886, 153) a snake charmer J i.370 (˚guṇḍ˚); ii.267; iii.348 (˚guṇḍ˚); iv.456 (T. ˚guṇṭ; v. l. BB ˚kuṇḍ˚) 308 (T. ˚kuṇḍ˚, v. l. SS ˚guṇṭh˚), 456 (T. ˚guṇṭ˚; v. l. BB ˚kuṇḍ); vi.171 (T. ˚guṇḍ˚; v. l. BB ˚kuṇḍ˚); Miln 23, 305. -- chattaka (nt.) "a snake's parasol", a mushroom D iii.87; J ii.95; Ud 81 (C. on viii.5, 1). -- tuṇḍika = ˚guṇṭhika Vism 304, 500. -- peta a Peta in form of a snake DhA ii.63. -- mekhalā "snake -- girdle", i. e. outfit or appearance of a snake DhA i.139. -- vātaka ( -- roga) N. of a certain disease ("snakewind -- sickness") Vin i.78; J ii.79; iv.200; DhA i.169, 187, 231; iii.437. -- vijjā "snake -- craft", i. e. fortune -- telling or sorcery by means of snakes D i.9 (= sappa -- daṭṭhatikicchana -- vijjā cɔ eva sappɔ avhāyana -- vijjā ea "the art of healing snake bites as well as the invocation of snakes (for magic purposes)" DA i.93).
Ahiŋsaka (adj.) [fr. ahiŋsā] not injuring others, harmless, humane, S i.165; Th 1, 879; Dh 225; J iv.447.
Ahiŋsā (f.) [a + hiŋsā] not hurting, humanity, kindness D iii.147; A i.151; Dh 261, 270; J iv.71; Miln 402.
Ahita (adj. -- n.) [a + hita] not good or friendly, harmful, bad; unkindliness D iii.246; Dh 163; Sn 665, 692; Miln 199 (˚kāma).
Ahirika & Ahirīka (adj.) [fr. a + hirī] shameless, unscru- pulous D iii.212, 252, 282; A ii.219; Dh 244; Sn 133 (˚īka); It 27 (˚īka); Pug 19 (also nt. unscrupulousness); Dhs 365; Nett 39, 126; DhA iii.352.
Ahīnindriya see discussed under abhinindriya.
Ahuvāsiŋ 1st sg. pret. of hotī (q. v.) I was Vv 826 (= ahosiŋ VvA 321).
Ahuhāliya (nt.) [onomat.] a hoarse & loud laugh J iii.223 (= danta -- vidaŋsaka -- mahā -- hasita C.).
Ahe (indecl.) [= aho, cp. aha1] exclamation of surprise or bewilderment: alas! woe etc., perhaps in cpd. ahevana a dense forest (lit. oh! this forest, alas! the forest (i. e. how big it is) J v.63 (uttamāhevanandaho, if reading is correct, which is not beyond doubt. C. on p. 64 expls. as "ahevanaŋ vuccati vanasaṇḍo").
Aho (indecl.) [Sk. aho, for etym. see aha1] exclamation of surprise, astonishment or consternation: yea, indeed, well; I say! for sure! VvA 103 (aho ti acchariyɔ atthena nipāto); J i.88 (aho acchariyaŋ aho abbhutaŋ), 140. Usually combd. with similar emphatic particles, e. g. aho vata DhA ii.85; PvA 131 (= sādhu vata); aho vata re D i. 107; Pv ii.94 5. Cp. ahe.
Ahosi -- kamma (nt.) an act or thought whose kamma has no longer any potential force: Cpd. 145. At p. 45 ahosikakamma is said to be a kamma inhibited by a more powerful one. See Buddhaghosa in Vism. Chap. xix.
Ā1 (indecl.) [Vedic ā, prep. with acc., loc., abl., meaning "to, towards", & also "from". Orig. an emphatic -- deictic part. (Idg. *ē) = Gr. h)_ surely, really; Ohg. -- ā etc., increment of a (Idg. *e), as in Sk. a -- sau; Gr. e\ kei_ (cp. a3), see Brugmann, Kurze Vergl. Gr. 464, 465] a frequent prefix, used as well -- defined simple base -- prefix (with rootderivations), but not as modification (i. e. first part of a double prefix cpd. like sam -- ā -- dhi) except in one case ā -- ni -- saŋsa (which is doubtful & of diff. origin, viz. from combn. āsaŋsa -- nisaŋsa, see below 3b). It denotes either touch (contact) or a personal (close) relation to the object (ā ti anussaraṇɔ atthe nipāto PvA 165), or the aim of the action expressed in the verb. -- (1.) As prep. c. abl. only in J in meaning "up to, until, about, near" J vi.192 (ā sahassehi = yāva s. C.), prob. a late development. As pref. in meaning "forth, out, to, towards, at, on" in foll. applications: -- (a) aim in general or touch in particular (lit.), e. g. ākaḍḍhati pull to, along or up; ˚kāsa shining forth; ˚koṭeti knock at; ˚gacchati go towards; ˚camati rinse over; ˚neti bring towards, ad -- duce; ˚bhā shining forth; ˚bhujati bend in; ˚masati touch at; ˚yata stretched out; ˚rabhati at -- tempt; ˚rohana a -- scending; ˚laya hanging on; ˚loketi look at; ˚vattati ad -- vert; ˚vahati bring to; ˚vāsa dwelling at; ˚sādeti touch; ˚sīdati sit by; ˚hanati strike at. -- (b) in reflexive function: close relation to subject or person actively concerned, e. g. ādāti take on or up (to oneself); ˚dāsa looking at, mirror; ˚dhāra support; ˚nandati rejoice; ˚nisaŋsa subjective gain; ˚bādha being affected; ˚modita pleased; ˚rakkha guarding; ˚rādhita satisfied; ˚rāma (personal) delight in; ˚lingati embrace (to oneself); ˚hāra taking to (oneself). -- (c) in transitive function: close relation to the object passively concerned, e. g. āghātana killing; ˚carati indulge in; ˚cikkhati point ont, explain; ˚jīva living on; ˚ṇāpeti give an order to somebody; ˚disati point out to some one; ˚bhindati cut; ˚manteti ad -- dress; ˚yācati pray to; ˚roceti speak to; siñcati besprinkle; ˚sevati indulge in. -- (d) out of meaning (a) develops that of an intensive -- frequentative prefix in sense of "all -- round, completely, very much", e. g. ākiṇṇa strewn all over, ˚kula mixed up; ˚dhuta moved about; ˚rāva shouting out or very much; ˚luḷati move about; ˚hiṇḍati roam about. -- 2. Affinities. Closely related in meaning and often interchanging are the foll. prep. (prefixes): anu (˚bhati), abhi (˚saŋsati), pa (˚tapati), paṭi (˚kankhati) in meaning 1 a -- c; and vi (˚kirati, ˚ghāta, ˚cameti, ˚lepa, ˚lopa), sam (˚tapati, ˚dassati) in meaning 1 d. See also 3b. -- 3. Combinations: (a) Intensifying combns. of other modifying prefixes with ā as base: anu + ā (anvā -- gacchati, ˚disati, ˚maddati, ˚rohati, ˚visati, ˚sanna, ˚hata), paṭi + ā (paccā -- janati, ˚ttharati, ˚dāti, ˚savati), pari + ā (pariyā -- ñāta, ˚dāti, ˚pajjati, ˚harati), sam + ā (samā -- disati, ˚dāna, ˚dhi, ˚pajjati, ˚rabhati). -- (b) Contrast -- combns. with other pref. in a double cpd. of noun, adj. or verb (cp. above 2) in meaning of "up & down, in & out, to & fro"; ā + ni: āvedhika -- nibbedhika, āsaŋsa -- nisaŋsa (contracted to ānisaŋsa), āsevita -- nisevita; ā + pa: assasatipassasati (where both terms are semantically alike; in exegesis however they have been differentiated in a way which looks like a distortion of the original meaning, viz. assasati is taken as "breathing out", passasati as "breathing in": see Vism 271), assāsa -- passāsa, āmoditapamodita, āhuna -- pāhuna, āhuneyya -- pāhuneyya; ā + paccā: ākoṭita -- paccākoṭita; ā + pari: ākaḍḍhana -- parikaḍḍhana, āsankita -- parisankita; ā + vi: ālokita -- vilokita, āvāha -- vivāha, āveṭhana -- viniveṭhana; a + sam: allāpa -- sallāpa: ā + samā: āciṇṇa -- samāciṇṇa. -- 4. Before double consonants ā is shortened to a and words containing ā in this form are to be found under a˚, e. g. akkamaṇa, akkhitta, acchādeti, aññāta, appoṭeti, allāpa, assāda.
Ā˚2 guṇa or increment of a˚ in connection with such suf- fixes as -- ya, -- iya, -- itta. So in āyasakya fr. ayasaka; āruppa from arūpa; ārogya fr. aroga; ālasiya fr. alasa; ādhipacca fr. adhipati; ābhidosika fr. abhidosa etc.
Ā˚3 of various other origins (guṇa e. g. of ṛ or lengthening of ordinary root a˚), rare, as ālinda (for alinda), āsabha (fr. usabha).
Ā˚4 infix in repetition -- cpds. denoting accumulation or variety (by contrast with the opposite, cp. ā1 3b), constitutes a guṇa -- or increment -- form of neg. pref. a (see a2), as in foll.: phalâphala all sorts of fruit (lit. what is fruit & not fruit) freq. in Jātakas, e. g. i.416; ii.160; iii.127; iv.220, 307, 449; v.313; vi.520; kāraṇâkāraṇāni all sorts of duties J vi.333; DhA i.385; khaṇḍâkhaṇḍa pêle -- mêle J i.114; iii.256; gaṇḍâgaṇḍa a mass of boils DhA iii.297; cirâciraŋ continually Vin iv.261; bhavâbhava all kinds of existences Sn 801, cp. Nd1 109; Nd2 664; Th 1, 784 (˚esu = mahant -- âmahantesu bh. C., see Brethren 305); rūpârūpa the whole aggregate ThA 285; etc.
Ākankhati [ā + kānkṣ, cp. kankhati] to wish for, think of, desire; intend, plan, design Vin ii.244 (˚amāna); D i.78, 176; S i.46; Sn 569 (˚amāna); Sn p. 102 (= icchati SnA 436); DhA i.29; SnA 229; VvA 149; PvA 229.
Ākankhā f. [fr. ā + kānkṣ] longing, wish; as adj. at Th 1, 1030.
Ākaḍḍhati [ā + kaḍḍhati] to pull along, pull to (oneself), drag or draw out, pull up Vin ii.325 (Bdhgh. for apakassati, see under apakāsati); iv.219; J i.172, 192, 417; Miln 102, 135; ThA 117 (˚eti); VvA 226; PvA 68. <-> Pass. ākaḍḍhiyati J ii.122 (˚amāna -- locana with eyes drawn away or attracted); Miln 102; Vism 163; VvA 207 (˚amāna -- hadaya with torn heart). -- pp. ākaḍḍhita.
Ākaḍḍhana (nt.) [fr. ākaḍḍhati] drawing away or to, pulling out, distraction VvA 212 (˚parikaḍḍhana pulling about); DhsA 363; Miln 154 (˚parikaḍḍhana), 352. -- As f. Vin iii.121.
Ākaḍḍhita [pp. of akaḍḍheti] pulled out, dragged along; upset, overthrown J iii.256 (= akkhitta2).
Ākantana (?) a possible reading, for the dürakantana of the text at Th 1, 1123, for which we might read durākantana.
Ākappa [cp. Sk. ākalpa ā + kappa] 1. attire, appearance, Vin i.44 (an˚) = ii.213; J i.505. -- 2. deportment Dhs 713 (ā˚ gamanādi -- ākāro DhsA 321).
-- sampanna, suitably attired, well dressed, A iii.78; J iv.542; an˚ sampanna, ill dressed, J i.420.
Ākampita [pp. of ākampeti, Caus. of ā + kamp] shaking, trembling Miln 154 (˚hadaya).
Ākara [cp. Sk. ākara] a mine, usually in cpd. ratan -- ākara a mine of jewels Th 1, 1049; J ii.414; vi. 459; Dpvs i.18. -- Cp. also Miln 356; VvA 13.
Ākassati [ā + kassati] to draw along, draw after, plough, cultivate Nd1 428.
Ākāra [a + karoti, kṛ] "the (way of) making", i. e. (1) state, condition J i.237 (avasan˚ condition of inhabitability); ii.154 (patan˚ state of falling, labile equilibrium), cp. paṇṇ˚. -- (2) property, quality, attribute D i.76 (anāvila sabb˚ -- sampanna endowed with all good qualities, of a jewel); ii.157 (˚varûpeta); J ii.352 (sabb˚ paripuṇṇa altogether perfect in qualities). -- (3) sign, appearance, form, D i.175; J i.266 (chātak˚ sign of hunger); Miln 24 (˚ena by the sign of . .); VvA 27 (therassa ā. form of the Th.); PvA 90, 283 (rañño ā. the king's person); Sdhp 363. -- (4) way, mode, manner, sa -- ākāra in all their modes D i.13 = 82 = iii.111; J i.266 (āgaman˚ the mode of his coming). Esp. in instr. sg. & pl. with num. or pron. (in this way, in two ways etc.): chahɔākārehi in a sixfold manner Nd2 680 (cp. kāraṇehi in same sense); Nett 73, 74 (dvādasahɔākārehi); Vism 613 (navahɔākārehi indriyāni tikkhāni bhavanti); PvA 64 (yenɔākārena āgato tenɔākārena gato as he came so he went), 99 (id.). <-> (5) reason, ground, account D i.138, 139; Nett 4, 8 sq., 38; DhA i.14; KhA 100 (in expln. of evaŋ). In this meaning freq. with dass (dasseti, dassana, nidassana etc.) in commentary style "what is meant by", the (statement of) reason why or of, notion, idea PvA 26 (dātabb˚dassana), 27 (thoman˚ -- dassana), 75 (kāruññ ˚ŋ dassesi), 121 (pucchan˚ -- nidassanaŋ what has been asked); SnA 135 (˚nidassana).
-- parivitakka study of conditions, careful consideration, examination of reasons S ii.115; iv.138; A ii.191 = Nd2 151.
Ākāraka (nt.) [ākāra + ka] appearance; reason, manner (cp. ākāra4) J i.269 (ākārakena = kāraṇena C.).
Ākāravant (adj.) [fr. ākāra] having a reason, reasonable, founded M i.401 (saddhā).
Ākāsa1 [Sk. ākāśa fr. ā + kāś, lit. shining forth, i. e. the illuminated space] air, sky, atmosphere; space. On the concept see Cpd. 5, 16, 226. On a fanciful etym. of ākāsa (fr. ā + kassati of kṛṣ) at DhsA 325 see Dhs trsl. 178. <-> D i.55 (˚ŋ indriyāni sankamanti the sense -- faculties pass into space); iii.224, 253, 262, 265; S iii.207; iv.218; v.49, 264; J i.253; ii.353; iii.52, 188; iv.154; vi.126; Sn 944, 1065; Nd1 428; Pv ii.118; SnA 110, 152; PvA 93; Sdhp 42, 464. -- ākāsena gacchati to go through the air PvA 75 (āgacch˚), 103, 105, 162; ˚ena carati id. J ii.103; ˚e gacchati id. PvA 65 (cando). -- Formula "ananto ākāso" freq.; e. g. at D i.183; A ii.184; iv. 40, 410 sq.; v.345.
-- anta "the end of the sky", the sky, the air (on ˚anta see anta1 4) J vi.89. -- ānañca (or ânañca) the infinity of space, in cpd. ˚āyatana the sphere or plane of the infinity of space, the "space -- infinity -- plane", the sphere of unbounded space. The consciousness of this sphere forms the first one of the 4 (or 6) higher attainments or recognitions of the mind, standing beyond the fourth jhāna, viz. (1) ākās˚, (2) viññāṇɔānañc -- āyatana (3) ākiñcaññ˚, (4) nɔeva saññānâsaññ˚, (5) nirodha, (6) phala. -- D i.34, 183; ii.70, 112, 156; iii.224, 262 sq.; M i.41, 159.; iii. 27, 44; S v.119; Ps i.36; Dhs 205, 501, 579, 1418; Nett 26, 39; Vism 326, 340, 453; DA i.120 (see Nd2 under ākāsa; Dhs 265 sq.; Dhs trsl. 71). As classed with jhāna see also Nd2 672 (sādhu -- vihārin). -- kasiṇa one of the kasiṇɔāyatanas (see under kasiṇa) D iii.268; A i.41. -- gangā N. of the celestial river J i.95; iii.344. -- gamana going through the air (as a trick of elephants) Miln 201. -- cārika walking through the air J ii.103. -- cārin = ˚cārika VvA 6. -- ṭṭha living in the sky (of devatā) Bu i.29; Miln 181, 285; KhA 120; SnA 476. -- tala upper story, terrace on the top of a palace SnA 87. -- dhātu the element of space D iii.247; M i.423; iii.31; A i.176; iii.34; Dhs 638.
Ākāsa2 (nt.?) a game, playing chess ʻ in the air ʼ (sans voir) Vin ii.10 = D i.6 (= aṭṭhapada -- dasapadesu viya ākāse yeva kiḷanaŋ DA i.85).
Ākāsaka (adj.) [ākāsa + ka] being in or belonging to the air or sky J vi.124.
Ākāsati [fr. ākāsa1] to shine J vi.89.
Ākiñcañña (nt.) [abstr. fr. akiñcana] state of having nothing, absence of (any) possessions; nothingness (the latter as philosophical t. t.; cp. below ˚āyatana & see Dhs trsl. 74). -- Sn 976, 1070, 1115 (˚sambhava, cp. Nd2 116); Th 2, 341 (= akiñcanabhāva ThA 240; trsl. "cherish no wordly wishes whatsoëer"); Nd2 115, see ākāsa; Miln 342.
-- āyatana realm or sphere of nothingness (cp. ākāsa˚) D i.35, 184; ii.156; iii.224, 253, 262 sq.; M i.41, 165; ii.254, 263; iii.28, 44, S iv.217; A i.268; iv.40, 401; Ps i.36; Nett 26, 39; Vism 333. See also jhāna & vimokkha.
Ākiṇṇa [pp. of ākirati] 1. strewn over, beset with, crowded, full of, dense, rich in (˚ -- ) Vin iii.130 (˚loma with dense hair); S i.204 (˚kammanta "in motley tasks engaged"); iv.37 (gāmanto ā. bhikkhūhi etc.); A iii.104 (˚vihāro); iv.4; v.15 (an˚ C. for appakiṇṇa); Sn 408 (˚varalakkhaṇa = vipula -- varalakkh˚ SnA 383); Pv ii.124 (nānā -- dijagaṇ˚ = āyutta PvA 157); Pug 31; PvA 32 (= parikiṇṇa); Sdhp 595. -- Freq. in idiomatic phrase describing a flourishing city "iddha phīta bahujana ākiṇṇa -- manussa", e. g. D i.211; ii.147 (˚yakkha for ˚manussa; full of yakkhas, i. e. under their protection); A iii.215; cp. Miln 2 (˚jana -- manussa). -- 2. (uncertain whether to be taken as above 1 or as equal to avakiṇṇa fr. avakirati 2) dejected, base, vile, ruthless S i.205 = J iii.309 = 539 = SnA 383. At K. S. 261, Mrs. Rh. D. translates "ruthless" & quotes C. as implying twofold exegesis of (a) impure, and (b) hard, ruthless. It is interesting to notice that Bdhgh. explains the same verse differently at SnA 383, viz. by vipula˚, as above under Sn 408, & takes ākiṇṇaludda as vipulaludda, i. e. beset with cruelty, very or intensely cruel, thus referring it to ākiṇṇa 1.
Ākirati [ā + kirati] to strew over, scatter, sprinkle, disperse, fill, heap Sn 665; Dh 313; Pv ii.49 (dānaŋ vipulaŋ ākiri = vippakirati PvA 92); Miln 175, 238, 323 (imper. ākirāhi); Sn 383. -- pp. ākiṇṇa.
Ākiritatta (nt.) [ākirita + tta; abstr. fr. ākirita, pp. of ākirati Caus.] the fact or state of being filled or heaped with Miln 173 (sakataŋ dhaññassa ā).
Ākilāyati v. l. at KhA 66 for āgilāyati.
Ākucca (or ˚ā?) [etym. unknown, prob. non -- Aryan] an iguana J vi.538 (C. godhā; gloss amattɔākuccā).
Ākurati [onomat. to sound -- root *kur = *kor as in Lat. cornix, corvus etc. See gala note 2 B and cp. kukkuṭa kokila, khaṭa etc., all words expressing a rasping noise in the throat. The attempts at etym. by Trenckner (Miln p. 425 as Denom. of ākula) & Morris (J.P.T.S. 1886, 154 as contr. Denom. of ankura "intumescence", thus meaning "to swell") are hardly correct] to be hoarse Miln 152 (kaṇṭho ākurati).
Ākula (adj.) [ā + *kul of which Sk. -- P. kula, to Idg *qṷel to turn round, cp. also cakka & carati; lit. meaning "revolving quickly", & so "confused"] entangled, confused, upset, twisted, bewildered J i.123 (salākaggaŋ ˚ŋ karoti to upset or disturb); Vv 849 (andha˚); PvA 287 (an˚ clear). Often reduplicated as ākulākula thoroughly confused Miln 117, 220; PvA 56; ākula -- pākula Ud 5 (so read for akkula -- pakkula); ākula -- samākula J vi.270. <-> On phrase tantākula -- jātā gulā -- guṇṭhika -- jātā see guḷā.
Ākulaka (adj.) [fr. ākula] entangled D ii.55 (tant˚ for the usual tantākula, as given under guḷā).
Ākulanīya (adj.) [grd. of ā + *kulāyati, Denom. of kula] in an˚ not to be confounded or upset PvA 118.
Ākulī ( -- puppha) at KhA 60 (milāta˚) read (according to Index p. 870) as milāta -- bakula -- puppha. Vism 260 (id. p.) however reads ākulī -- puppha "tangle -- flower" (?), cp. Ud 5, gāthā 7 bakkula, which is preferably to be read as pākula.
Ākoṭana1 (nt.) [fr. ākoṭeti] beating on, knocking M i.385; Miln 63, 306; DhsA 144.
Ākoṭana2 (adj.) [= ākoṭana1] beating, driving, inciting, urging J vi.253 (f. ākoṭanī of paññā, expld. by "nivāraṇapatoda -- laṭṭhi viya paññā koṭinī hoti" p. 254).
Ākoṭita [pp. of ākoṭeti] -- 1. beaten, touched, knocked against J i.303; Miln 62 (of a gong). -- 2. pressed, beaten down (tight), flattened, in phrase ākoṭita -- paccākoṭita flattened & pressed all round (of the cīvara) S ii. 281; DhA i.37.
Ākoṭeti [a + koṭṭeti, Sk. kuṭṭayati; BSk. ākoṭayati e. g. Divy 117 dvāraŋ trir ā˚, Cowell "break" (?); Av. Ś. Index p. 222 s. v.] -- 1. to beat down, pound, stamp J i.264. <-> 2. to beat, knock, thrash Vin ii.217; J ii.274; PvA 55 (aññamaññaŋ); Sdhp 159. -- 3. Esp. with ref. to knocking at the door, in phrases aggaḷaŋ ākoṭeti to beat on the bolt D i.89; A iv.359; v.65; DA i.252 (cp. aggaḷa); dvāraŋ ā. J v 217; DhA ii.145; or simply ākoṭeti Vv 8117 (ākoṭayitvāna = appoṭetvā VvA 316). -- 4. (intrs.) to knock against anything J i.239. -- pp. ākoṭita (q. v.). Caus. ii. ākoṭapeti J iii.361.
Ākhu [Vedic ākhu, fr. ā + khan, lit. the digger in, i. e. a mole; but given as rat or mouse by Halāyudha] a mouse or rat Pgdp 10.
Āgacchati [ā + gacchati, gam] to come to or towards, approach, go back, arive etc.
I. Forms (same arrangement as under gacchati): (1) √gacch: pres. āgacchati D i.161; J ii.153; Pv iv.151; fut. āgacchissati J iii.53; aor. āgacchi Pv ii.133; PvA 64. -- (2) √gam: aor. āgamāsi PvA 81, āgamā D i.108; J iii.128, and pl. āgamiŋsu J i.118; fut. āgamissati VvA 3; PvA 122; ger. āgamma (q. v.) & āgantvā J i.151; Miln 14; Caus. āgameti (q. v.). -- (3) √gā: aor. āgā Sn 841; Pv i.123 (= āgacchi PvA 64). -- pp. āgata (q. v.).
II. Mcanings: (1) to come to, approach, arrive D i.108; Pv i.113; ii.133; Miln 14; to return, to come back (cp. āgata) PvA 81, 122. -- (2) to come into, to result, deserve (cp. āgama2) D i.161 (gārayhaŋ ṭhānaŋ deserve blame, come to be blamed); Pv iv.151 (get to, be a profit to = upakappati PvA 241). -- (3) to come by, to come out to (be understood as), to refer or be referred to, to be meant or understood (cp. āgata 3 & āgama 3) J i.118 (tīṇi piṭakāni āgamiŋsu); SnA 321; VvA 3. See also āgamma.
Āgata [pp. of āgacchati] (1) come, arrived Miln 18 (˚kā- raṇa the reason of his coming); VvA 78 (˚ṭṭhāna); PvA 81 (kiŋ āgatɔattha why have you come here) come by, got attained (˚ -- ) A ii.110 = Pug 48 (˚visa); Mhvs xiv. 28 (˚phala = anāgānuphala) -- āgatɔāgatā (pl.) people coming & going, passers by, all comers PvA 39, 78, 129; VvA 190 (Ep. of sangha). -- svɔāgata "wel -- come", greeted, hailed; nt. welcome, hail Th 2, 337; Pv iv.315, opp. durāgata not liked, unwelcome, A ii.117, 143, 153; iii. 163; Th 2, 337. -- (2) come down, handed down (by memory, said of texts) D i.88; DhA ii.35; KhA 229; VvA 30; āgatāgamo, one to whom the āgama, or the āgamas, have been handed down, Vin i.127, 337; ii 8; iv.158; A ii.147; Miln 19, 21. -- (3) anāgata not come yet, i. e. future; usually in combn. with atīta (past) & paccuppanna (present): see atīta and anāgata.
Āgati (f.) [ā + gati] coming, coming back, return S iii.53; J ii.172. Usually opp. to gati going away. Used in special sense of rebirth and re -- death in the course of saŋsāra. Thus in āgati gati cuti upapatti D i.162; A iii.54 sq., 60 sq., 74; cp. also S ii.67; Pv ii.922 (gatiŋ āgatiŋ vā).
Āgada (m.) & Āgadana (nt.) [ā + gad to speak] a word; talk, speech DA i.66 (= vacana).
Āgantar [N. ag. fr. āgacchati] one who is coming or going to come A i.63; ii.159; It 4, 95 (nom. āgantā only one MS, all others āgantvā). an˚ A i.64; ii.160.
Āgantu (adj.) [Sk. āgantu] -- 1. occasional, incidental J vi.358. -- 2. an occasional arrival, a new comer, stranger J vi.529 (= āgantuka -- jana C.); ThA 16.
Āgantuka (adj. -- n.) [āgantu + ka; cp. BSk. āgantuka in same meaning as P. viz. āgantukā bhikṣavaḥ Av. Ś i.87, 286; Divy 50] -- 1. coming, arriving, new comer, guest, stranger, esp. a newly arrived bhikkhu; a visitor (opp. gamika one who goes away) Vin i.132, 167; ii.170; iii. 65, 181; iv.24, A i.10; iii.41, 366; J vi.333; Ud 25; DhA ii.54, 74; VvA 24; PvA 54. -- 2. adventitions, incidental (= āgantu1) Miln 304 (of megha & roga). <-> 3. accessory, superimposed, added Vism 195.
-- bhatta food given to a guest, meal for a visitor Vin i.292 (opp. gamika˚); ii.16.
Āgama [fr. ā + gam] -- 1. coming, approach, result, D i.53 (āgamanaŋ pavattatī ti DA i.160; cp. Sdhp 249 dukkh˚). -- 2. that which one goes by, resource, reference, source of reference, text, Scripture, Canon; thus a designation of (?) the Pātimokkha, Vin ii.95 = 249, or of the Four Nikāyas, DA i.1, 2 (dīgh˚). A def. at Vism 442 runs "antamaso opamma -- vagga -- mattassa pi buddhavacanassa pariyāpuṇaṇaŋ". See also āgata 2, for phrase āgatɔāgama, handed down in the Canon, Vin loc. cit. Svāgamo, versed in the doctrine, Pv iv.133 (sv˚ = suṭṭhu āgatɔāgamo, PvA 230); Miln 215. BSk. in same use and meaning, e. g. Divy 17, 333, āgamāni = the Four Nikāyas. -- 3. rule, practice, discipline, obedience, Sn 834 (āgamā parivitakkaŋ), cp. Davs v.22 (takk˚, discipline of right thought) Sdhp 224 (āgamato, in obedience to). <-> 4. meaning, understanding, KhA 107 (vaṇṇ˚). -- 5. repayment (of a debt) J. vi.245. -- 6. as gram. tt. "augment", a consonant or syllable added or inserted SnA 23 (sa -- kārɔāgama).
Āgamana (nt.) [fr. āgacchati, Sk. same] oncoming, ar- rival, approach A iii.172; DA i.160; PvA 4, 81; Sdhp 224, 356. an˚ not coming or returning J i.203, 264.
Āgameti [caus of agacchati] to cause somebody or some- thing to come to one, i. e. (1) to wait, to stay Vin ii. 166, 182, 212; D i.112, 113; S iv.291; PvA 4, 55. <-> (2) to wait for, to welcome Vin ii.128 (ppr. āgamayamāna); M i.161 (id.) J i.69 (id. + kālaŋ).
Āgamma (adv.) [orig. ger. of āgacchati, q. v. under i.2 for form & under ii.3 for meaning. BSk. āgamya in meaning after the Pāli form, e. g. Divy 95, 405 (with gen.); Av. Ś i.85, 210 etc.; M Vastu i.243, 313]. With reference to (c. acc.), owing to, relating to; by means of, thanks to. In meaning nearly synonymous with ārabbha, sandhāya & paṭicca (see K. S. 318 s. v.) D i.229; It 71; J i.50; vi.424; Kh viii.14 (= nissāya KhA 229); PvA 5, 21 etc.
Āgāmitā found only in neg. form anāgāmitā.
Āgāmin (adj. n.) [ā + gāmin] returning, one who returns, esp. one who returns to another form of life in saŋsāra (cp. āgati), one who is liable to rebirth A i.63; ii.159; It 95. See anāgāmin.
Āgāra ( -- ˚) see agāra.
Āgāraka & ˚ika (adj. -- n.) ( -- ˚) [cp. BSk. āgārika Divy 275, & agārika] belonging to the house, viz. (1) having control over the house, keeping, surveying, in cpds. koṭṭh˚ possessor or keeper of a storehouse Vin i.209; bandhan˚ prison -- keeper A ii.207; bhaṇḍ˚ keeper of wares, treasurer PvA 2 (see also bhaṇḍ˚). -- (2) being in the house, sharing (the house), companion S iii.190 (paŋsv˚ playmate).
Āgāḷha (adj.) (ā + gāḷha 1; cp. Sk. samāgāḍhaŋ] strong, hard, harsh, rough (of speech), usually in instr. as adv. āgāḷhena roughly, harshly a i.283, 295; Pug 32 (so to be read for agāḷhena, although Pug A 215 has a˚, but expls. by atigāḷhena vacanena); instr. f. āgāḷhāya Vin v. 122 (ceteyya; Bdhgh. on p. 230 reads āgaḷāya and expls. by daḷhabhāvāya). See also Nett 77 (āgāḷhā paṭipadā a rough path), 95 (id.; v. l. agāḷhā).
Āgilāyati [ā + gilāyati; Sk. glāyati, cp. gilāna] to be wearied, exhausted or tired, to ache, to become weak or faint Vin ii.200; D iii.209; M i.354; S iv.184; KhA 66 (hadavaŋ ā.). Cp. āyamati.
Āgu (nt.) [for Vedic āgas nt.] guilt, offence, S i.123; A iii.346; Sn 522 = Nd2 337 (in expln. of nāga as āguŋ na karotī ti nāgo); Nd1 201. Note. A reconstructed āgasa is found at Sdhp 294 in cpd. akatāgasa not having committed sin.
-- cārin one who does evil, D ii.339; M ii.88; iii.163; S ii.100, 128; A ii.240; Miln 110.
Āghāta [Sk. āghāta only in lit. meaning of striking, killing, but cp. BSk. āghāta in meaning "hurtfulness" at M Vastu i.79; Av. Ś ii.129; cp. ghāta & ghāteti] anger, ill -- will, hatred, malice D i.3, 31; iii.72 sq.; S i.179; J i.113; Dhs 1060, 1231; Vbh 167, 362, 389; Miln 136; Vism 306; DA i.52; VvA 67; PvA 178. -- anāghāta freedom from ill will Vin ii.249; A v.80.
-- paṭivinaya repression of ill -- will; the usual enumn. of ā -- ˚ paṭivinayā comprises nine, for which see D iii.262, 289; Vin v.137; A iv.408; besides this there are sets of five at A iii.185 sq.; SnA 10, 11, and one of ten at Vin v.138. -- vatthu occasion of ill -- will; closely connected with ˚paṭivinaya & like that enumd. in sets of nine (Vin v.137; A iv.408; Ps i.130; J iii.291, 404; v.149; Vbh 389; Nett 23; SnA 12), and of ten (Vin v.138; A v. 150; Ps i.130; Vbh 391).
Āghātana (nt.) [ā + ghāta(na), cp. āghata which has changed its meaning] -- 1. slaying, striking, destroying, killing Th 1, 418, 711; death D i.31 (= maraṇa DA i.119). <-> 2. shambles, slaughter -- house Vin i.182 (gav˚); A iv.138; J vi.113. -- 3. place of execution Vin iii.151; J i.326, 439; iii.59; Miln 110; DhA iv.52; PvA 4, 5.
Āghāteti [Denom. fr. āghāta, in form = ā + ghāteti, but diff. in meaning] only in phrase cittaŋ a. (with loc.) to incite one's heart to hatred against, to obdurate one's heart. Sdhp. 126 = S i.151 = A v.172.
Ācamati [ā + cam] to take in water, to resorb, to rinse J iii.297; Miln 152, 262 (+ dhamati). -- Caus. I. ācamcti (a) to purge, rinse one's mouth Vin ii.142; M ii. 112; A iii.337; Pv iv.153 (ācamayitvā = mukhaŋ vikkhāletvā PvA 241); Miln 152 (˚ayamāna). -- (b) to wash off, clean oneself after evacuation Vin ii.221. -- Caus. II. ācamāpeti to cause somebody to rinse himself J vi.8.
Ācamana (nt.) [ā + camana of cam] rinsing, washing with water, used (a) for the mouth D i.12 (= udakena mukhasiddhi -- karaṇa DA i.98); (b) after evacuation J iii 486.
-- kumbhī water -- pitcher used for rinsing Vin i.49, 52; ii.142, 210, 222. -- pādukā slippers worn when rinsing Vin i.190; ii.142, 222. -- sarāvaka a saucer for rinsing Vin ii.142, 221.
Ācamā (f.) [fr. ā + cam] absorption, resorption Nd1 429 (on Sn 945, which both in T. and in SnA reads ājava; expld. by taṇhā in Nidd.). Note. Index to SnA (Pj iii) has ācāma.
Ācaya [ā + caya] heaping up, accumulation, collection, mass (opp. apacaya). See on term Dhs trsl. 195 & Cpd. 251, 252. -- S ii.94 (kāyassa ācayo pi apacayo pi); A iv.280 = Vin ii.259 (opp. apacaya); Dhs 642, 685; Vbh 319, 326, 330; Vism 449; DhA ii.25.
-- gāmin making for piling up (of rebirth) A v.243, 276; Dhs 584, 1013, 1397; Kvu 357.
Ācarati [ā + aarati] -- 1. to practice, perform, indulge in Vin i.56; ii.118; Sn 327 (ācare dhamma -- sandosa -- vādaŋ), 401; Miln 171, 257 (pāpaŋ). Cp. pp. ācarita in BSk. e. g. Av. S i.124, 153, 213 in same meaning. -- pp. āciṇṇa. -- 2. to step upon, pass through J v.153.
Ācarin (adj. -- n.) [fr. ā + car] treaching, f. ācarinī a female teacher Vin iv.227 (in contrast to gaṇa & in same sense as ācariya m. at Vin iv.130), 317 (id.).
Ācariya [fr. ā + car] a teacher (almost syn. with upajjhāya) Vin i.60, 61, 119 (˚upajjhāya); ii.231; iv.130 (gaṇo vā ācariyo a meeting of the bhikkhus or a single teacher, cp. f. ācarinī); D i.103, 116 (gaṇ˚) 238 (sattamâcariyamahāyuga seventh age of great teachers); iii.189 sq.; M iii.115; S i.68 (gaṇ˚), 177; iv.176 (yogg˚); A i.132 (pubb˚); Sn 595; Nd1 350 (upajjhāya vā āc˚); J ii.100, 411; iv.91; v.501; Pv iv.323, 351 (= ācāra -- samācāra -- sikkhāpaka PvA 252); Miln 201, 262 (master goldsmith?); Vism 99 sq.; KhA 12, 155; SnA 422; VvA 138. <-> For contracted form of ācariya see ācera.
-- kula the clan of the teacher A ii.112. -- dhana a teacher's fee S i.177; A v.347. -- pācariya teacher upon teacher, lit. "teacher & teacher's teacher" (see ā1 3b) D i.94, 114, 115, 238; S iv.306, 308; DA i.286; SnA 452 (= ācariyo cɔeva ācariya -- ācariyo ca). -- bhariyā the teacher's fee J v.457; vi.178; DhA i.253. -- muṭṭhi "the teacher's fist" i. e. close -- fistedness in teaching, keeping things back, D ii.100; S v.153; J ii.221, 250; Miln 144; SnA 180, 368. -- vaŋsa the line of the teachers Miln 148. -- vatta serving the teacher, service to the t. DhA i.92. -- vāda traditional teaching; later as heterodox teaching, sectarian teaching (opp. theravāda orthodox doctrine) Miln 148; Dpvs v.30; Mhbv 96.
Ācariyaka [ācariya + ka, diff. from Sk. ācariyaka nt. art of teaching] a teacher Vin i.249; iii.25, 41; D i.88, 119, 187; ii.112; M i.514; ii.32; S v.261; A ii.170; iv. 310. See also sācariyaka.
Ācāma [Sk. ācāma] the scum or foam of boiling rice D i.166; M i.78; A i.295; J ii.289; Pug 55; VvA 99 sq.; DhA iii.325 (˚kuṇḍaka).
Ācāmeti [for ācameti? cp. Sk. ācāmayati, Caus. of ā + cam] at M ii.112 in imper. ācāmehi be pleased or be thanked(?); perhaps the reading is incorrect.
Ācāra [ā + car] way of behaving, conduct, practice, esp. right conduct, good manners; adj. ( -- ˚) practising, indulging in, or of such & such a conduct. -- Sn 280 (pāpa˚); J i.106 (vipassana˚); ii.280 (˚ariya); vi.52 (ariya˚); SnA 157; PvA 12 (sīla˚), 36, 67, 252; Sdhp 441. -- an˚ bad behaviour Vin ii.118 (˚ŋ ācarati indulge in bad habits); DhA ii.201 (˚kiriyā). Cp. sam˚.
-- kusala versed in good manners Dh 376 (cp. DhA iv.111). -- gocara pasturing in good conduct; i. e. practice of right behaviour D i.63 = It 118; M i.33; S v.187; A i.63 sq.; ii.14, 39; iii.113, 155, 262; iv.140, 172, 352; v.71 sq., 89, 133, 198; Vbh 244, 246 (cp. Miln 368, 370, quot. Vin iii.185); Vism i.8. -- vipatti failure of morality, a slip in good conduct Vin i.171.
Ācārin (adj. n.) [fr. ācāra] of good conduct, one who be- haves well A i.211 (anācārī viratā l. 4 fr. bottom is better read as ācārī virato, in accordance with v. l.).
Ācikkhaka (adj. n.) [ā + cikkha + ka of cikkhati] one who tells or shows DhA i.71.
Ācikkhati [Freq. of ā + khyā, i. e. akkhāti] to tell, relate, show, describe, explain D i.110; A ii 189 (atthaŋ ā to interpret); Pug 59; DhA i.14; SnA 155; PvA 121, 164 (describe). -- imper. pres. ācikkha Sn 1097 (= brūhi Nd2 119 & 455); Pv i.109; ii.81; and ācikkhāhi DhA ii.27. <-> aor. ācikkhi PvA 6, 58, 61, 83. -- ācikkhati often occurs in stock phrase ācikkhati deseti paññāpeti paṭṭhapeti vivarati etc., e. g. Nd1 271; Nd2 465; Vism 163. -- attānaŋ ā. to disclose one's identity PvA 89, 100. -- pp. ācikkhita (q. v.). -- Caus. II. ācikkhāpeti to cause some body to tell DhA ii.27.
Ācikkhana (adj. -- nt.) [ā + cikkhana of cikkhati] telling, announcing J iii.444; PvA 121.
Ācikkhita [pp. of acikkhati] shown, described, told PvA 154 (˚magga), 203 (an˚ = anakkhāta).
Ācikkhitar [n. ag. fr. ācikkhati] one who tells or shows DhA ii.107 (for pavattar).
Āciṇa [pp. of ācināti? or is it distorted from āciṇṇa?] ac- cumulated; practised, performed Dh 121 (pāpaŋ = pāpaŋ āciṇanto karonto DhA iii.16). It may also be spelt ācina.
Āciṇṇa [ā + ciṇṇa, pp. of ācarati] practiced, performed, (habitually) indulged in M i.372 (kamma, cp. Miln 226 and the expln. of āciṇṇaka kamma as "chronic karma" at Cpd. 144); S iv.419; A v.74 sq.; J i.81; DA i.91 (for aviciṇṇa at D i.8), 275; Vism 269; DhA i.37 (˚samāciṇṇa thoroughly fulfilled); VvA 108; PvA 54; Sdhp 90.
-- kappa ordinance or rule of right conduct or customary practice (?) Vin i.79; ii.301; Dpvs iv.47; cp. v.18.
Ācita [pp. of ācināti] accumulated, collected, covered, fur- nished or endowed with J vi.250 (= nicita); Vv 411; DhsA 310. See also āciṇa.
Ācināti [ā + cināti] to heap up, accumulate S iii.89 (v. l. ācinati); iv.73 (ppr. ācinato dukkhaŋ); DhsA 44. -- pp. ācita & āciṇa (ācina). -- Pass. ācīyati (q. v.).
Ācīyati (& Āceyyati) [Pass. of ācināti, cp. cīyati] to be heaped up, to increase, to grow; ppr. āceyyamāna J v.6 (= ācīyanto vaḍḍhanto C.).
Ācera is the contracted form of ācariya; only found in the Jātakas, e. g. J iv.248; vi.563.
Ācela in kañcanācela -- bhūsita "adorned with golden clothes" Pv ii.127 stands for cela˚.
Ājañña is the contracted form of ājāniya.
Ājava see ācamā.
Ājāna (adj.) [ā + jāna from jñā] understandable, only in cpd. durājāna hard to understand S iv.127; Sn 762; J i.295, 300.
Ājānana (nt.) [ā + jānana, cp. Sk. ajñāna] learning, knowing, understanding; knowledge J i.181 (˚sabhāva of the character of knowing, fit to learn); PvA 225.
Ājānāti [ā + jānāti] to understand, to know, to learn D i.189; Sn 1064 (˚amāna = vijānamāna Nd2 120). As aññāti at Vism 200. -- pp. aññāta. Cp. also āṇāpeti.
Ājāniya (ājānīya) (adj. n.) [cp. BSk. ājāneya & Sk. ājāti birth, good birth. Instead of its correct derivation from ā + jan (to be born, i. e. well -- born) it is by Bdhgh. connected with ā + jñā (to learn, i. e. to be trained). See for these popular etym. e. g. J i.181: sārathissa cittarucitaŋ kāraṇaŋ ājānana -- sabhāvo ājañño, and DhA iv.4: yaŋ assadamma -- sārathi kāraṇaŋ kāreti tassa khippaŋ jānana<-> samatthā ājāniyā. -- The contracted form of the word is ājañña] of good race or breed; almost exclusively used to denote a thoroughbred horse (cp. assājāniya under assa3). (a) ājāniya (the more common & younger Pāli form): Sn 462, 528, 532; J i.178, 194; Dpvs iv.26; DhA i.402; iii.49; iv.4; VvA 78; PvA 216. -- (b) ājānīya: M i.445; A v.323; Dh 322 = Nd2 475. -- (c) ǡjañña = (mostly in poetry): Sn 300 = 304; J i.181; Pv iv.154; purisājañña "a steed of man", i. e. a man of noble race) S iii.91 = Th 1, 1084 = Sn 544 = VvA 9; A v.325. -- anājāniya of inferior birth M i.367.
-- susu the young of a noble horse, a noble foal M i. 445 (˚ûpamo dhamma -- pariyāyo).
Ājānīyatā (f.) [abstr. fr. ājāniya] good breed PvA 214.
Ājira [= ajira with lengthened initial a] a courtyard Mhvs 35, 3.
Ājīva [ā + jīva; Sk. ājīva] livelihood, mode of living, living, subsistence, D i.54; A iii.124 (parisuddha˚); Sn 407 (˚ŋ = parisodhayi = micchājīvaŋ hitvā sammājīvaŋ eva pavattayī SnA 382), 617; Pug 51; Vbh 107, 235; Miln 229 (bhinna˚); Vism 306 (id.); DhsA 390; Sdhp 342, 375, 392. Esp. freq. in the contrast pair sammā -- ājīva & micchā -- ā˚ right mode & wrong mode of gaining a living, e. g. at S ii.168 sq.; iii.239; v.9; A i.271; ii 53, 240, 270; iv.82; Vbh 105, 246. See also magga (ariyaṭṭhangika).
-- pārisuddhi purity or propriety of livelihood Miln 336; Vism 22 sq., 44; DhA iv.111. -- vipatti failure in method of gaining a living A i.270. -- sampadā perfection of (right) livelihood A i.271; DA i.235.
Ājīvaka (& ˚ika) [ājīva + ka, orig. "one finding his living" (scil. in a peculiar way); cp. BSk. ājīvika Divy 393, 427] an ascetic, one of the numerous sects of non -- buddhist ascetics. On their austerities, practice & way of living see esp. DhA ii.55 sq. and on the whole question A. L. Basham, Hist. & Doctrines of the Ājīvikas, 1951. -- (a) ājīvaka: Vin i.291; ii.284; iv.74, 91; M i.31, 483: S i.217; A iii.276, 384; J i.81, 257, 390. -- (b) ājīvika: Vin i.8; Sn 381 (v. l. BB. ˚aka).
-- sāvaka a hearer or lay disciple of the ājīvaka ascetics Vin ii 130, 165; A i.217.
Ājīvika (nt.) (or ājīvikā f.?) [fr. ājīva] sustenance of life, livelihood, living Vbh 379 (˚bhaya) Miln 196 (id.); PvA 274, and in phrase ājīvikɔâpakata being deprived of a livelihood, without a living M i.463 = S iii.93 (T. reads jīvikā pakatā) = It 89 (reads ājīvikā pakatā) = Miln 279.
Ājīvin (adj. -- n.) [fr. ājīva] having one's livelihood, finding one's subsistence, living, leading a life of ( -- ˚) D iii.64; A v.190 (lūkha˚)
Āṭa [etym.? Cp. Sk. āṭi Turdus Ginginianus, see Aufrecht, Halāyudha p. 148] a kind of bird J vi.539 (= dabbimukha C.).
Āṭaviya is to be read for aṭaviyo (q. v.) at J vi.55 [= Sk. āṭavika].
Āṭhapanā (f.) at Pug 18 & v. l. at Vbh 357 is to be read aṭṭhapanā (so T. at Vbh 357).
Āṇañja see ānejja.
Āṇaṇya see ānaṇya.
Āṇatti (f.) [ā + ñatti (cp. āṇāpeti), Caus. of jñā] order, command, ordinance, injunction Vin i.62; KhA 29; PvA 260; Sdhp 59, 354.
Āṇattika (adj.) [āṇatti + ka] belonging to an ordinance or command, of the nature of an injunction KhA 29.
Āṇā (f.) [Sk. ājñā, ā + jñā] order, command, authority Miln 253; DA i.289; KhA 179, 180, 194; PvA 217; Sdhp 347, 576. rājɔāṇā the king's command or authority J i.433; iii.351; PvA 242. āṇaŋ deti to give an order J i.398; ˚ŋ pavatteti to issue an order Miln 189, cp. āṇāpavatti J iii.504; iv.145.
Āṇāpaka (adj. n.) [fr. āṇāpeti] 1. (adj.) giving an order Vism 303. -- 2. (n.) one who gives or calls out orders, a town -- crier, an announcer of the orders (of an authority) Miln 147.
Āṇāpana (nt.) [abstr. fr. āṇāpeti] ordering or being, ordered, command, order PvA 135.
Āṇāpeti [ā + ñāpeti, Caus. of ā + jānāti fr. jñā, cp. Sk. ājñāpayati] to give an order, to enjoin, command (with acc. of person) J iii.351; Miln 147; DhA ii.82; VvA 68 (dāsiyo), 69; PvA 4, 39, 81.
Āṇi (Vedic āṇi to aṇu fine, thin, flexible, in formation an n -- enlargement of Idg. *olenā, cp. Ohg. lun, Ger. lünse, Ags. lynes = E. linch, further related to Lat. ulna elbow, Gr. w)le/nh, Ohg. elina, Ags. eln = E. el -- bow. See Walde, Lāt. Wtb. under ulna & lacertus]. -- 1. the pin of a wheel -- axle, a linch -- pin M i.119; S ii.266, 267; A ii.32; Sn 654; J vi.253, 432; SnA 243; KhA 45, 50. -- 2. a peg, pin, bolt, stop (at a door) M i.119; S. ii 266 (drum stick); J iv.30; vi.432, 460; Th 1, 744; Dh i.39. <-> 3. (fig.) (˚ -- ) peg -- like (or secured by a peg, of a door), small, little in ˚colaka a small (piece of) rag Vin ii.271, cp. i.205 (vaṇabandhana -- colaka); ˚dvāra Th 1, 355; C. khuddaka -- dvāra, quoted at Brethren 200, trsl. by Mrs. Rh. D. as "the towngate's sallyport" by Neumann as "Gestöck" (fastening, enclosure) āṇi -- gaṇṭhikɔāhato ayopatto at Vism 108; DA i.199 is apparently a sort of brush made of four or five small pieces of flexible wood.
Ātanka [etym. uncertain; Sk. ātanka] illness, sickness, disease M i.437; S iii.1; Sn 966 (˚phassa, cp. Nd1 486). Freq. in cpd. appātanka freedom from illness, health (cp. appābādha) D i.204; iii.166; A iii.65, 103; Miln 14. -- f. abstr. appātankatā M i.124.
Ātankin (adj.) [fr. ātanka] sick, ill J v.84 (= gilāna C.).
Ātata [fr. ā + tan, pp. tata; lit. stretched, covered over] generic name for drums covered with leather on one side Dpvs xiv.14; VvA 37 (q. v. for enumn. of musical instruments), 96.
Ātatta [ā + tatta1, pp. of ā -- tapati] heated, burnt. scorched, dry J v.69 (˚rūpa = sukkha -- sarīra C.).
Ātapa [ā + tapa] -- 1. sun -- heat Sn 52; J i.336; Dhs 617; Dpvs i.57; VvA 54; PvA 58. -- 2. glow, heat (in general) Pv i.74; Sdhp 396. -- 3. (fig.) (cp. tapa2) ardour, zeal, exertion PvA 98 (viriyā -- tapa; perhaps better to be read ˚ātāpa q. v.). Cp. ātappa.
-- vāraṇa "warding off the sun -- heat", i. e. a parasol, sun -- shade Dāvs i.28; v.35.
Ātapatā (f.) [abstr. of ātapa] glowing or burning state, heat Sdhp 122.
Ātapati [ā + tap] to burn J iii.447.
Ātappa (nt.) [Sk. *ātāpya, fr. ātāpa] ardour, zeal, exertion D i.13; iii.30 sq., 104 sq., 238 sq.; M iii.210; S ii.132, 196 sq.; A i.153; iii.249; iv.460 sq.; v.17 sq.; Sn 1062 (= ussāha ussoḷhi thāma etc. Nd2 122); J iii.447; Nd1 378; Vbh 194 (= vāyāma); DA i.104.
Ātāpa [ā + tāpa fr. tap; cp. tāpeti] glow, heat; fig. ardour, keen endeavour, or perhaps better "torturing, mortification" Miln 313 (cittassa ātāpo paritāpo); PvA 98 (viriya˚). Cp. ātappa & ātāpana.
Ātāpana (nt.) [ā + tāpana] tormenting, torture, mortification M i.78; A i.296 (˚paritāpana); ii.207 (id.); Pug 55 (id.); Vism 3 (id.).
Ātāpin (adj.) [fr. ātāpa, cp. BSk. ātāpin Av. Ś i.233; ii. 194 = Divy 37; 618] ardént, zealous, strenuous, active D iii.58, 76 sq., 141 (+ sampajāna), 221, 276; M i.22, 56, 116, 207, 349; ii.11; iii.89, 128, 156; S 113, 117 sq., 140, 165; ii.21, 136 sq.; iii.73 sq.; iv.37, 48, 54, 218; v.165, 187, 213; A ii.13 sq.; iii 38, 100 sq.; iv. 29, 177 sq., 266 sq., 300, 457 sq.; v.343 sq.; Sn 926; Nd1 378; It 41, 42; Vbh 193 sq.; Miln 34, 366; Vism 3 (= viriyavā); DhA i.120; SnA 157, 503. -- Freq. in the formula of Arahantship "eko vūpakaṭṭho appamatto ātāpī pahitatto": see arahant II. B. See also satipaṭṭhāna. <-> Opp. anātāpin S ii.195 sq.; A ii.13; It 27 (+ anottappin).
Ātāpeti [ā + tāpeti] to burn, scorch; fig. to torment, in- flict pain, torture M i.341 (+ paritāpeti); S iv.337; Miln 314, 315.
Ātitheyya (nt.) [fr. ati + theyya] great theft (?) A i.93; iv. 63 sq. (v. l. ati˚ which is perhaps to be prcferred).
Ātu [dialectical] father M i.449 (cp. Trenckner's note on p. 567: the text no doubt purports to make the woman speak a sort of patois).
Ātuman [Vedic ātman, diaeretic form for the usual con- tracted attan; only found in poetry. Cp. also the shortened form tuman] self. nom. sg. ātumo Pv iv.52 (= sabhāvo PvA 259), ātumā Nd1 69 (ātumā vuccati attā), 296 (id.), & ātumāno Nd1 351; acc. ātumānaŋ Sn 782 (= attānaŋ SnA 521), 888, 918; loc. ātume Pv ii.1311 (= attani C.).
Ātura (adj.) [Sk. ātura, cp. BSk. ātura, e. g. Jtm 3170] ill, sick, diseased; miserable, affected S iii.1 (˚kāya); A i. 250; Sn 331; Vv 8314 (˚rūpa = abhitunna -- kāya VvA 328); J i.197 (˚anna "food of the miserable", i. e. last meal of one going to be killed; C. expls. as maraṇabhojana), 211 (˚citta); ii.420 (˚anna, as above); iii.201; v.90, 433; vi.248; Miln 139, 168; DhA i.31 (˚rūpa); PvA 160, 161; VvA 77; Sdhp 507. Used by Commentators as syn. of aṭṭo, e. g. at J iv.293; SnA 489. -- anātura healthy, well, in good condition S iii.1; Dh 198.
Āthabbaṇa (nt.) [= athabbaṇa, q. v.] the Atharva Veda as a code of magic working formulas, witchcraft, sorcery Sn 927 (v. l. ath˚, see interpreted at Nd1 381; expld. as āthabbaṇika -- manta -- ppayoga at SnA 564).
Āthabbaṇika (adj. n.) [fr. athabbana] one conversant with magic, wonder -- worker, medicine -- man Nd1 381; SnA 564.
Ādapeti [Caus. of ādāti] to cause one to take, to accept, agree to M ii.104; S i.132.
Ādara [Sk. ādara, prob. ā + dara, cp. semantically Ger. ehrfurcht awe] consideration of, esteem, regard, respect, reverence, honour J v.493; SnA 290; DA i.30; DhsA 61; VvA 36, 61, 101, 321; PvA 121, 123, 135, 278; Sdhp 2, 21, 207, 560. -- anādara lack of reverence, disregard, disrespect; (adj.) disrespectful S i.96; Vin iv.218; Sn 247 (= ādara -- virahita SnA 290; DA i.284; VvA 219; PvA 3, 5, 54, 67, 257.
Ādaratā (f.) [abstr. fr. ādara] = ādara, in neg. an˚ want of consideration J iv.229; Dhs 1325 = Vbh 359 (in expln. of dovacassatā).
Ādariya (nt.) [abstr. fr. ādara] showing respect of honour; neg. an˚ disregard, disrespect Vin ii.220; A v.146, 148; Pug 20; Vbh 371; miln 266.
Ādava [ā + dava2?] is gloss at VvA 216 for maddava Vv 5123; meaning: excitement, adj. exciting. The passage in VvA is somewhat corrupt, & therefore unclear.
Ādahati1 [ā + dahati1] to put down, put on, settle, fix Vism 289 (samaŋ ā.= samādahati). Cp. sam˚ and ādhiyati.
Ādahati2 [ā + dahati2] to set fire to, to burn J vi.201, 203.
Ādā [ger. of ādāti from reduced base *da of dadāti 1b] taking up, taking to oneself Vin iv.120 (= anādiyitvā C.; cp. the usual form ādāya).
Ādāti (Ādadāti) [ā + dadāti of dadāti base 1 dā] to take up, accept, appropriate, grasp, seize; grd. ādātabba Vin i.50; inf. ādātuŋ D iii.133 (adinnaŋ theyyasankhātaŋ ā.). <-> ger. ādā & ādāya (see sep.); grd. ādeyya, Caus. ādapeti (q. v.). -- See also ādiyati & ādeti.
Ādāna (nt.) [ād + āna, or directly from ā + dā, base 1 of dadāti] taking up, getting, grasping, seizing; fig. appropriating, clinging to the world, seizing on (worldly objects). (1) (lit.) taking (food), pasturing M iii.133; J v.371 (& ˚esana). -- (2) getting, acquiring, taking, seizing S ii.94; A iv.400 (daṇḍ˚); PvA 27 (phal˚); esp. freq. in adinn˚ seizing what is not given, i. e. theft: see under adinna. -- (3) (fig.) attachment, clinging A v.233, 253 (˚paṭinissagga); Dh 89 (id.; cp. DhA ii.163); Sn 1103 (˚taṇhā), 1104 (˚satta); Nd1 98 (˚gantha); Nd2 123, 124. -- an˚ free from attachment S i.236 (sādānesu anādāno "not laying hold mong them that grip" trsl.); A ii.10; It 109; J iv.354; Miln 342; DhA iv.70 (= khandhādisu niggahaṇo). Cp. upa˚, pari˚.
Ādāya [ger. of ādāti, either from base 1 of dadāti (dā) or base 2 (dāy). See also ādiya] having received or taken, taking up, seizing on, receiving; freq. used in the sense of a prep. "with" (c. acc.) Sn 120, 247, 452; J v.13; Vbh 245; DhA ii.74; SnA 139; PvA 10, 13, 38, 61 etc. -- At Vin i.70 the form ādāya is used as a noun f. ādāyā in meaning of "a casually taken up belief" (tassa ādāyassa vaṇṇe bhaṇati). Cp. upa˚, pari˚.
Ādāyīn (adj. -- n.) [fr. ā + dadāti base 2, cp. ādāya] taking up, grasping, receiving; one who takes, seīzes or appropriates D i.4 (dinn˚); A iii.80; v.137 (sār˚); DA i.72.
Ādāsa [Sk. ādarśa, ā + dṛś, P. dass, of dassati1 2] a mir- ror Vin ii.107; D i.7, 11 (˚pañha mirror -- questioning, cp. DA i.97: "ādāse devataŋ otaretvā pañha -- pucchanaŋ"), 80; ii.93 (dhamnaɔ -- ādāsaŋ nāma dhamma -- pariyāyaŋ desessāmi); S v.357 (id.); A v.92, 97 sq., 103; J i.504; Dhs 617 (˚maṇḍala); Vism 591 (in simile); KhA 50 (˚daṇḍa) 237; DhA i.226.
-- tala the surface of the mirror, in similes at Vism 450, 456, 489.
Ādāsaka = ādāsa Th 2, 411.
Ādi [Sk. ādi, etym. uncertain] -- 1. (m.) starting -- point, be- ginning Sn 358 (acc. ādiŋ = kāraṇaŋ SnA 351); Dh 375 (nom. ādi); Miln 10 (ādimhi); J vi.567 (abl. ādito from the beginning). For use as nt. see below 2 b. -- 2. (adj. & adv.) (a) (˚ -- ) beginning, initially, first, principal, chief: see cpds. -- (b) (˚ -- ) beginning with, being the first (of a series which either is supposed to be familiar in its constituents to the reader or hearer or is immediately intelligible from the context), i. e. and so on, so forth (cp. adhika); e. g. rukkha -- gumb -- ādayo (acc. pl.) trees, jungle etc. J i.150; amba -- panasɔ ādīhi rukkehi sampanno (and similar kinds of fruit) J i.278; amba -- labujɔādīnaŋ phalānaŋ anto J ii.159; asi -- satti -- dhami -- ādīni āvudhāni (weapous, such as sword, knife, bow & the like) J i.150; kasi -- gorakkhɔ ādīni karonte manusse J ii.128; . . . ti ādinā nayena in this and similar ways J i.81; PvA 30. Absolute as nt. pl. ādinī with ti (evaŋ) (ādīni), closing a quotation, meaning "this and such like", e. g. at J ii.128, 416 (ti ādīni viravitvā). -- In phrase ādiŋ katvā meaning "putting (him, her, it) first", i. e. heginning with, from . . . on, from . . . down (c. acc.) e. g. DhA i.393 (rājānaŋ ādiŋ K. from the king down); PvA 20 (vihāraŋ ādikatvā), 21 (pañcavaggiye ādiŋ K.).
-- kammika [cp. BSk. ādikarmaka Divy 544] a beginner Vin iii.146; iv.100; Miln 59; Vism 241; DhsA 187. -- kalyāṇa in phrase ādikalyāṇa majjhe -- kalyāṇa pariyosāna -- kalyāṇa of the Dhamma, "beautiful in the beginning, the middle & the end" see references under dhamma C. 3 and cp. DA i.175 (= ādimhi kalyāṇa etc.); SnA 444; abstr. ˚kalyāṇatā Vism 4. -- pubbangama original Dpvs iv.26. -- brahmacariyaka belonging to the principles or fundaments of moral life D i.189; iii.284; M i.431; ii.125, 211; iii. 192; S ii.75, 223; iv.91; v.417, 438; f. ˚ikā Vin i.64, 68; A i.231 sq. -- majjhapariyosāna beginning, middle & end Miln 10; cp. above ādikalyāṇa.
Ādika (adj.) [ādi + ka] from the beginning, initial (see adhika); instr. ādikena in the beginning, at once, at the same time M i.395, 479; ii.213; S ii.224; J vi.567. Cp. ādiya3.
Ādicca [Vedic āditya] the sun S i.15, 47; ii.284; iii.156; v.44, 101; A i.242; v.22, 263, 266 sq.; It 85; Sn 550, 569, 1097 ("ādicco vuccati suriyo" Nd2 125); DhA iv. 143; Sdhp 14, 17, 40.
-- upaṭṭhānā sun -- worship D i.11 (= jīvikatthāya ādiccaparicariyā DA i.97); J ii.72 (˚jātaka; ādiccaŋ upatiṭṭhati p. 73 = suriyaŋ namassamāno tiṭṭhati C.). -- patha the path of the sun, i. e. the sky, the heavens Dh 175 (= ākāsa DhA iii.177). -- bandhu "kinsman of the sun", Ep. of the Buddha Vin ii.296; S i.186, 192; A ii.54; Sn 54, 915, 1128; Nd1 341; Nd2 125b; Vv 425, 7810; VvA 116.
Ādiṇṇa [Sk. ādīrṇa, pp. of ā + dṛ, see ādiyati2] broken, split open S iv.193 (= sipātikā with burst pod); cp. M i.306.
Ādiṇṇata (nt.) [abstr. fr. ādiṇṇa] state of being broken or split Ps i.49.
Āditta [ā + ditta1, Sk. ādīpta, pp. of ā + dīp] set on fire, blazing, burning Vin i.34; Kv 209 (sabbaŋ ādittaŋ); S iii.71; iv.19, 108; A iv.320 (˚cela); Sn 591; J iv.391; Pv i.85 (= paditta jalita PvA 41); Kvu 209; DA i.264; PvA 149; Sdhp 599.
-- pariyāya the discourse or sermon on the fire (lit. being in fllames) S iv.168 sq.; Vin i.34; DhA i.88.
Ādina only at D i.115 (T. reading ādīna, but v. l. S id. ādina, B p. abhinna) in phrase ādina -- khattiya -- kula primordial. See note in Dial. i.148.
Ādiya1 (adj.) grd. of admi, ad, Sk. ādya] edible, eatable A iii.45 (bhojanāni).
Ādiya2 in ˚mukha is uncertain reading at A iii.164 sq. (vv. ll. ādeyya˚ & ādheyya), meaning perhaps "graspmouth", i. e. gossip; thus equal to ger. of ādiyati1. Perhaps to be taken to ādiyati2. The same phrase occurs at Pug 65 (T. ādheyya˚, C. has v. l. ādheyya˚) where Pug A 248 explns. "ādito dheyyamukho, paṭhama -- vacanasmiŋ yeva ṭhapita -- mukho ti attho" (sticking to one's word?). See ādheyya.
Ādiya3 = ādika, instr. ādiyena in the beginning J vi.567 (= ādikena C.).
Ādiya4 ger. of ādiyati.
Ādiyati1 [ā + diyati, med. pass. base of dadāti4, viz. di˚ & dī˚; see also ādāti & ādeti] to take up; take to oneself, seize on, grasp, appropriate, fig. take notice of, take to heart, heed. -- pres. ādiyati A iij.46; Sn 119, 156, 633, 785, Nd1 67; Nd2 123, 124; J iii.296: v.367. -- pot. ādiye Sn 400; imper. ādiya M iii.133 (so read for ādissa?). -- aor. ādiyi D iii.65; A iii.209, ādiyāsi Pv iv.148 (sayaŋ daṇḍaŋ ā. = acchinditvā gaṇhasi PvA 241), & ādapayi (Caus. formation fr. ādāti?) to take heed S i.132 (v. l. ādiyi, trsl. "put this into thy mind"). -- ger. ādiyitvā Vin iv.120 (= ādā); J ii.224 (C. for ādiya T.); iii.104; iv.352 (an˚ not heeding; v. l. anāditvā, cp. anādiyanto not attending J iii.196); DhA iii.32 (id.); PvA 13 (T. anādayitva not heeding), 212 (vacanaŋ anādiyitvā not paying attention to his word), ādiya S iii.26 (v. l. an˚ for anādīya); J ii.223 (= ādiyitvā C.); see also ādiya2, & ādīya S iii.26 (an˚). See also upādiyati & pariyādiyati.
Ādiyati2 [ā + diyati, Sk. ādīryate, Pass. of dṛ to split: see etym. under darī] to split, go asunder, break Ps i.49. <-> pp. ādiṇṇa. See also avadīyati. Cp. also upādiṇṇa.
Ādiyanatā (f.) [abstr. formation ādiyana (fr. ādiya ger. of ādiyati) + ta] in an˚ the fact of not taking up or heeding SnA 516.
Ādisati [ā + disati] (a) to announce, tell, point out, refer to. -- (b) to dedicate (a gift, dakkhiṇaŋ or dānaŋ). <-> pres. ind. ādisati D i.213 = A i.170 (tell or read one's character); Sn 1112 (atītaŋ); Nd1 382 (nakkhattaŋ set the horoscope); Miln 294 (dānaŋ); pot. ādiseyya Th 2, 307 (dakkhiṇaŋ); Pv iv.130 (id. = uddiseyya PvA 228), & ādise Vin i.229 = D ii.88 (dakkhiṇaŋ); imper. ādisa PvA 49. -- fut. ādissati Th 2, 308 (dakkhiṇaŋ) PvA 88 (id.). -- aor. ādisi Pv ii.28; PvA 46 (dakkhiṇaŋ); pl. ādisiŋsu ibid. 53 (id.) & ādisuŋ Pv i.106 (id.). -- ger. ādissa Vin iii.127; Sn 1018; Pv ii.16 (dānaŋ), & ādisitvāna Th 2, 311. -- grd. ādissa (adj.) to be told or shown M i.12.
Ādiso (adv.) [orig. abl. of ādi, formed with ˚saḥ] from the beginning, i. e. thoroughly, absolutely D i.180; M iii.208.
Ādissa at M iii.133 is an imper. pres. meaning "take", & should probably better be read ādiya (in corresponsion with ādāna). It is not grd. of ādisati, which its form might suggest.
Ādissa2 (adj.) blameworthy M i.12; MA =garāyha.
Ādīna at D i.115 & S v.74 (vv. ll. ādina, & abhinna) see ādina. See diṇṇa.
Ādīnava [ā + dīna + va (nt.), a substantivised adj., orig. meaning "full of wretchedness", cp. BSk. ādīnava M Vastu iii.297 (misery); Divy 329] disadvantage, danger (in or through = loc.) D i.38 (vedanānaŋ assādañ ca ādīnavañ ca etc.), 213 (iddhi -- pāṭihāriye M i.318; S i.9 (ettha bhīyo); ii.170 sq. (dhātūnaŋ); iii.27, 62, 102 (rūpassa etc.); iv.7, 168; A i.57 (akaraṇīye kayiramāne) 258 (ko loke assādo); iii.250 sq.; 267 sq. (duccarite), 270 (puggala -- ppasāde); iv.439 sq.; v.81; J i.146; iv.2; It 9 = A ii.10 = Nd2 172a; Sn 36, 50 (cp. Nd2 127), 69, 424, 732; Th 2, 17 (kāye ā. = dosa ThA 23), 485 (kāmesu ā. = dosa ThA 287); Pv iii.107 (= dosa PvA 214); iv.67 (= dosa PvA 263); Ps i.192 sq.; ii.9, 10; PvA 12, 208. -- There are several sets of sources of evil or danger, viz. five dussīlassa sīla -- vipattiyā ā. at D ii.85 = iii.235 = A iii.252; five akkhantiyā ā. at Vbh 378; six of six each at D iii.182 sq. -- In phrase kāmānaŋ ā. okāro sankileso D i.110, 148; M i.115; Nett 42; DhA 16.
-- ânupassin realising the danger or evil of S ii.85 (upā dāniyesu dhammesu) abstr. ˚ânupassanā Vism 647 sq., 695. -- dassāvin same as ˚ânupassin D i.245 (an˚); A v.178 (id.); D iii.46; S ii.194, 269; A iii.146; v.181 sq.; Nd2 141. -- pariyesanā search for danger in ( -- ˚) S ii.171; iii.29; iv.8 sq. -- saññā consciousness of danger D i.7); iii.253, 283; A iii.79.
Ādīpanīya (adj.) [grd. of ā + dīpeti] to be explained Miln 270.
Ādīpita [pp. of ādīpeti, ā + caus. of dīp, cp. dīpeti] ablaze, in flames S i.31 (loka; v. l. ādittaka) 108; J v.366; DhA iii.32 (v. l. āditta).
Ādu (indecl.) [see also adu] emphatic (adversative) part. (1) of affirmation & emphasis: but, indeed, rather J iii. 499 = vi.443; v.180; vi.552. -- (2) as 2nd component of a disjunctive question, mostly in corresponsion udāhu . . . ādu (= kiŋ . . . udāhu SnA 350), viz. is it so . . . or" Th 1, 1274 = Sn 354; Pv iv.317 = DhA i.31; J v.384; vi.382; without udāhu at J v.460 (adu). The close connection with udāhu suggests an expln. of ādu as a somehow distorted abbreviation of udāhu.
Ādeti [a + deti, base2 of dadāti (day˚ & de˚), cp. also ādiyati] to take, receive, get Sn 121 (= gaṇhāti SnA 179), 954 (= upādiyati gaṇhāti Nd1 444); cp. i.43; J iii. 103, 296; v.366 (= gaṇhāti C.; cp. ādiyati on p. 367); Miln 336.
Ādeyya (adj.) [grd. of ādāti (q. v.)] to be taken up, accept- able, pleasant, welcome, only in phrase ˚vacana welcome or acceptable speech, glad words Vin ii.158; J vi.243; Miln 110; ThA 42.
Ādeva, Ādevanā [ā + div. devati] lamenting, deploring, crying etc. in ster. phrase (explaining parideva or pariddava) ādevo paridevo ādevanā pari˚ ādevitattaŋ pari˚ Nd1 370 = Nd2 416 = Ps i.38.
Ādesa [fr. ādisati, cp. Sk. ādeśa] information, pointing out; as tt. g. characteristic, determination, substitute, e. g. kutonidānā is at SnA 303 said to equal kiŋ -- nidānā, the to of kuto (abl.) equalling or being substituted for the acc. case: paccatta -- vacanassa to -- ādeso veditabbo.
Ādesanā (f.) [ā + desanā] pointing out, guessing, prophesy; only in phrase ˚pāṭihāriya trick or marvellous ability of mind -- reading or guessing other peoples character Vin ii. 200; D i.212, 213; iii.220; A i.170, 292; v.327; Ps ii. 227. For pāṭihāriya is subsiituted ˚vidhā (lit. variety of, i. e. act or performance etc.) at D iii.103.
Ādhāna (nt.) [ā + dhāna] -- 1. putting up, putting down, placing, laying A iv.41 (aggissa ādhānaŋ, v. l. of 6 MSS ādānaŋ). -- 2. receptacle M i.414 (udak˚), cp. ādheyya. <-> 3. enclosure, hedge Miln 220 (kaṇṭak˚ thorny brake, see under kaṇṭaka).
-- gāhin holding one's own place, i. e. obstinate (?), reading uncertain & interchanging with ādāna, only in one ster. phrase, viz. sandiṭṭhi -- parāmāsin ādhāna -- gāhin duppaṭinissaggin Vin ii.89; M i.43, 96; A iii.335 (v. l. ādāna˚, C. expls by daḷhagāhin); D iii.247 (adhāna˚).
Ādhāra [ā + dhāra] -- 1. a container, receptacle, basin, lit. holder A iii.27; J vi.257. -- 2. "holding up", i. e. support, basis, prop. esp. a (round) stool or stand for the alms -- bowl (patta) Vin ii.113 (an˚ patto); M iii.95; S v.21; J v.202. -- fig. S v.20 (an˚ without a support, cittaŋ); Vism 8, 444. -- 3. (tt. g.) name for the loc. case ("resting on") Sn 211.
Ādhāraka (m. & nt.) [ā + dhāraka, or simply ādhāra + ka] -- 1. a stool or stand (as ādhāra2) (always m., except at J i.33 where ˚āni pl. nt.) J i.33; DhA iii.290 = VvA 220; DhA iii.120 = 186 (one of the four priceless things of a Tathāgata, viz.: setacchattaŋ, nisīdanapallanko, ādhārako pādapīṭhaŋ). -- 2. a reading desk, pulpit J iii.235; iv.299.
Ādhāraṇatā (f.) [ā + dhāraṇatā] concentration, attention, mindfulness SnA 290 (+ daḷhīkaraṇa), 398 (id.).
Ādhārita [pp. of ā + dhāreti, cp. dhāreti1] supported, held up Miln 68.
Ādhāvati [ā + dhavati1] to run towards a goal, to run after M i.265 (where id. p. S ii.26 has upadh˚); DA i. 39. Freq. in combn. ādhāvati paridhāvati to run about, e. g. J i.127, 134, 158; ii.68.
Ādhāvana (nt.) [fr. ādhāvati] onrush, violent motion Miln 135.
Ādhipacca (& Ādhipateyya) (nt.) [fr. adhi + pati + ya "being over -- lord"; see also adhipateyya] supreme rule, lordship, sovereignty, power S v.342 (issariy˚); A i.62 (id.), 147, 212; ii.205 (id.); iii.33, 76; iv.252 sg.; Pv ii.959 (one of the ṭhānas, cp. ṭhāna ii.2b; see also D iii. 146, where spelt ādhipateyya; expld. by issariya at PvA 137); J i.57; Dāvs v.17; VvA 126 (gehe ā = issariya). The three (att˚, lok˚, dhamm˚) at Vism 14.
Ādhuta [ā + dhuta1] shaken, moved (by the wind, i. e. fanned Vv 394 (v. l. adhuta which is perhaps to be preferred, i. e. not shaken, cp. vātadhutaŋ Dāvs v.49; VvA 178 expls. by saṇikaŋ vidhūpayamāna, i. e. gently fanned).
Ādheyya (adj.) [grd. of ā + dadhāti cp. ādhāna2] to be deposited (in one's head & heart Pug A), to be heeded, to be appropriated [in latter meaning easily mixed with ādheyya, cp. vv. ll. under ādiya2]; nt. depository (= ādhātabbatā ṭhapetabbatā Pug A 217) Pug 34 (˚ŋ gacchati is deposited); Miln 359 (sabbe tassɔ ādheyya2 honti they all become deposited in him, i. e. his deposits or his property).
-- mukha see ādiya2.
Ānaka [Sk. ānaka, cp. Morris J.P.T.S. 1893, 10] a kind of kettledrum, beaten only at one end S ii.266; J ii. 344; Dpvs xvi.14.
Ānañca see ākāsa˚ and viññāṇa˚.
Ānañja see ānejja.
Ānaṇya (nt.) [Sk. ānṛṇya, so also BSk. e. g. Jtm 3118; from a + ṛṇa, P. iṇa but also aṇa in composition, thus an -- aṇa as base of ānaṇya] freedom from debt D i.73; A iii.354 (Ep. of Nibbāna, cp. anaṇa); Nd1 160; Vism 44; DA i.3.
Ānadati [ā + nadati] to trumpet (of elephants) J iv.233.
Ānana (nt.) [Vedic āna, later Sk. ānana from an to breathe] the mouth; adj. ( -- ˚) having a mouth Sdhp 103; Pgdp 63 (vikaṭ˚).
Ānantarika (& ˚ya) [fr. an + antara + ika] without an interval, immediately following, successive Vin i.321; ii. 212; Pug 13; Dhs 1291.
-- kamma "conduct that finds retribution without delay" (Kvu trsl. 275 n. 2) Vin ii.193; J i.45; Kvu 480; Miln 25 (cp. Dhs trsl. 267); Vism 177 (as prohibiting practice of kammaṭṭhāna).
Ānanda [Vedic ānanda, fr. ā + nand, cp. BSk. ānandī joy Divy 37] joy, pleasure, bliss, delight D i.3; Sn 679, 687; J i.207 (˚maccha Leviathan); vi.589 (˚bheri festive drum); DA i 53 (= pītiyā etaŋ adhivacanaŋ).
Ānandati [ā + nandati] to be pleased or delighted J vi. 589 (aor. ānandi in T. reading ānandi vittā, expld. by C. as nandittha was pleased; we should however read ānandi -- cittā with gladdened heart). See also ānandiya.
Ānandin (adj.) [fr. ā + nand] joyful, friendly Th 1, 555; J iv.226.
Ānandiya (adj. -- .) [grd. of ānandati] enjoyable, nt. joy, feast J vi.589 (˚ŋ acarati to celebrate the feast = ānandachaṇa C.).
Ānandī (f.) [ā + nandī, cp. ānanda] joy, happiness in cpd. ānandi -- citta J vi.589 (so read probably for ānandi vitta: see ānandati).
Ānaya (adj.) [ā + naya] to be brought, in suvānaya easy to bring S i.124 = J i.80.
Ānayati see āneti.
Ānāpāna (nt.) [āna + apāna, cpds. of an to breathe] in haled & exhaled breath, inspiration & respiration S v.132, 311 sq.; J i.58; Ps i.162 (˚kathā); usually in cpd. ˚sati concentration by in -- breathing & out -- breathing (cp. Man. of Mystic 70) M i.425 (cp. D ii.291); iii.82; Vin iii.70; A i.30; It 80; Ps i.166, 172, 185 (˚samādhi); Nd2 466 B (id.); Miln 332; Vism 111, 197, 266 sq.; SnA 165. See detail under sati.
Ānāpeti see āneti.
Ānāmeti [ā + nāmeti, Caus. of namati, which is usually spelt nameti] to make bend, to bend, to bring toward or under J v.154 (doubtful reading fut ānāmayissasi, v. l. ānayissati, C. ānessasi = lead to).
Ānisaŋsa [ā + ni + saŋsa, BSk. distorted to anuśaŋsa] praise i. e. that which is commendable, profit, merit, advantage, good result, blessing in or from (c. loc.). <-> There are five ānisaŋsā sīlavato sīla -- sampadāya or blessings which accrue to the virtuous enumd. at D ii.86, viz. bhogakkhandha great wealth, kittisadda good report, visārada self -- confidence, asammūlho kālaŋ karoti an untroubled death, saggaŋ lokaŋ uppajjati a happy state after death. -- D i.110, 143; iii.132 (four), 236 (five); M i.204; S i.46, 52; iii.8, 93 (mahā˚); v.69 (seven), 73, 129, 133, 237 (seven), 267, 276; A i.58 (karaṇīye kariyamāne); ii.26, 185, 239, 243 (sikkhā˚); iii.41 (dāne), 248 (dhammasavane), 250 (yāguyā), 251 (upaṭṭhita -- satissa), 253 sq. (sīlavato sīlasampadāya etc., as above), 267 (sucarite), 441; iv.150 (mettāya ceto -- vimuttiyā), 361 (dhammasavane), 439 sq. (nekkhamme avitakke nippītike), 442, 443 sq. (ākāsɔānañcāyatane); v.i, 106 (mahā˚), 311; It 28, 29, 40 (sikkhā˚); Sn 256 (phala˚), 784, 952; J i.9, 94; v.491 (v. l. anu˚); Nd1 73, 104, 441; Kvu 400; Miln 198; VvA 6, 113; PvA 9 (dāna˚) 12, 64 (= phala), 208, 221 (= guṇa); Sdhp 263. -- Eleven ānisaŋsas of mettā (cp. Ps ii.130) are given in detail at Vism 311<-> 314; on another eight see pp. 644 sq.
Ānisada (nt.) [a + sad] "sit down", bottom, behind M i. 80 = 245; J iii.435 (gloss asata) Vism 251 = KhA 45 (˚ttaca), 252 (˚maŋsa).
Ānuttariya (nt.) [see also anuttariya which as -- ˚ probably represents ānutt˚] incomparableness, excellency, supreme ideal D iii.102 sq.; A v.37.
Ānīta [pp. of ānetī] fetched, brought (here), brought back adduced J i.291; iii.127; iv.1.
Ānupuṭṭha metri causa for anupuṭṭha (q. v.).
Ānupubba (nt.) [abstr. fr. anupubba] rule, regularity, order Th 1, 727 (cp. M Vastu ii.224 ānupubbā).
Ānupubbatā (f.) (or ˚ta nt.?) [fr. last] succession; only in tt. g. padânu -- pubbatā word sequence, in expln. of iti Nd1 140; Nd2 137 (v. l. ˚ka).
Ānupubbikathā [for anupubbi˚ representing its isolated composition form, cp. ānubhāva & see also anupubbi˚] regulated exposition, graduated sermon D i.110; ii.41 sq.; M i.379; J i.8; Miln 228; DA i.277, 308; DhA iv.199.
Ānubhāva [the dissociated composition form of anubhāva, q. v. for details. Only in later language] greatness, magnificence, majesty, splendour J i.69 (mahanto); ii.102 (of a jewel) v.491; DhA ii.58.
Ānejja and Ānañja [abstr. fr. an + *añja or *ejja = *ijja. The Sanskritised equivalent would be *iñjya or *iñgya of ing to stir, move, with a peculiar substitution of *ang in Pāli, referring it to a base with ṛ (probably Sk. ṛj, ṛñjati) in analogy to a form like Sk. ṛṇa = Pāli aṇa & iṇa, both a & i representing Sk. ṛ. The form añja would thus correspond to a Sk. *añjya (*añgya). The third P. form ān -- eñja is a direct (later, and probably re -- instituted) formation from Sk. iñjya, which in an interesting way became in BSk. re -- sanskritised to āñijya (which on the other hand may represent āñejja & thus give the latter the feature of a later, but more specifically Pāli form). The editions of P. Texts show a great variance of spelling, based on MSS. vacillation, in part also due to confusion of derivation] immovability, imperturbability, impassibility. The word is n. but occurs as adj. at Vin iii. 109 (ānañja samādhi, with which cp. BSk. ānijyā śāntiḥ at Av. Ś i.199. -- The term usually occurs in cpd. ānejja -- ppatta (adj.) immovable lit. having attained impassibility, expld. by Bdhgh. at Vin iii.267 (on Pār. i.1, 6) as acala, niccala, i. e. motionless. This cpd. is indicated below by (p.) after the reference. -- The various spellings of the word are as follows: -- 1. ānejja D i.76 (v. l. ānañja -- p.) A ii.184 (p.); iii.93 (p.), 100 (p.), 377 sq. (p.); Nd2 471 (v. l. aneja, ānañja) = Vbh 137 (āneñja); Nd2 569a (v. l. ānañja), 601 (v. l. anejja & aneñja); Pug 60 (p.); DA i.219 (v. l. BB āneñja). -- 2. ānañja Vin iii.4 (p.) (v. l. ānañca˚, anañja˚, ānañja˚; Bdhgh. ānejja˚ p. 267), 109; Ud 27 (samādhi, adj. v. l. ānañca); DhA iv.46. See also below cpd. ˚kāraṇa. -- A peculiarity of Trenckner a spelling is āṇañja at M ii.229 (v. l. aṇañja, aneñja, āneñja), 253, 254. -- 3. āneñja S ii.82. (v. l. āṇañje, or is it āṇeñja?); D iii.217 (˚âbhisankhāra of imperturbable character, remaining static, cp. Kvu trsl. 358); Nd1 90 (id.), 206, 442; Ps ii.206; Vbh 135, 340; Vism 377 (p.), 386 (sixteen˚ fold), 571; Nett 87, 99. <-> See also iñjati.
-- kāraṇa trick of immovability, i. e. pretending to be dead (done by an elephant, but see differently Morris J P T S. 1886, 154) J i.415; ii.325 (v. l. āṇañja, āneñca, ānañca); iv.308; v.273, 310.
Āneñjatā (f.) [fr. āneñja] steadfastness Vism 330, 386.
Āneti [ā + neti] to bring, to bring towards, to fetch, pro- cure, convey, bring back Sn 110; PvA 54, 92. pot. 1st pl. ānema (or imper. 2nd pl ānetha M i.371. fut. ānayissati S i.124; Pv ii.65; J iii.173; v.154 (v. l.), & ānessati J v.154. inf. ānayituŋ Pv ii 610, ger. ānetvā PvA 42, 74. aor. ānesi PvA 3, & ānayi Pv i.77 (sapatiŋ). -- pp. ānīta (q. v.). -- Med. pass. ānīyati & āniyyati D ii.245 (āniyyataŋ imper. shall be brought); M i. 371 (ppr. ānīyamāna). -- Caus. II. ānāpeti to cause to be fetched J iii.391; v.225.
Āpa & Āpo (nt.) [Vedic ap & āp, f. sg. apā, pl. āpaḥ, later Sk. also āpaḥ nt. -- Idg. *ap & *ab, primarily to Lith. ùpé water, Old Prussian ape river, Gr. *) lpi/a N. of the Peloponnesus; further (as *ab) to Lat. amnis river, Sk. abda cloud, & perhaps ambu water] water; philosophically t. t. for cohesion, representative of one of the 4 great elements (cp. mahābhūta), viz. paṭhavī, āpo, tejo, vāyo: see Cpd. 268 & Dhs trsl. 201, also below ˚dhātu. <-> D ii.259; M i.327; S ii.103; iii.54, 207; A iv.312, 375; Sn 307, 391 (˚ŋ), 392 (loc. āpe), 437 (id.); J iv.8 (paṭhavi -- āpa -- teja˚); Dhs 652; Miln 363 (gen. āpassa, with paṭhavī etc.); Sdhp 100.
-- kasiṇa the water -- device, i. e. meditation by (the element of) water (cp. Mystic 75 n.) D iii.268; J i.313; Dhs 203; Vism 170; DhA i 312; iii.214. -- dhātu the fluid element, the essential element in water, i. e element of cohesion (see Cpd. 155 n. 2; Mystic 9 n. 2; Dhs trsl. 201, 242) D iii.228, 247; M i.187, 422: Dhs 652; Nett 74. See also dhātu. -- rasa the taste of water A i.32; SnA 6. -- sama resembling water M i.423.
Āpakā (f.) [= āpagā] river J v.452; vi.518.
Āpagā (f.) [āpa + ga of gam] a river Th 1, 309; Sn 319; J v.454; Dāvs i.32; VvA 41.
Āpajjati [Sk. āpadyate, ā + pad] to get into, to meet with (acc.); to undergo; to make, produce, exhibit Vin ii.126 (saŋvaraŋ); D i.222 (pariyeṭṭhiŋ); It 113 (vuddhiŋ); J i.73; Pug 20, 33 (diṭṭhɔânugatiŋ); PvA 29 (ppr. āpajjanto); DhA ii.71 -- pot. āpajjeyya D i.119 (musāvādaŋ). -- aor. āpajji J v.349; PvA 124 (sankocaŋ) & āpādi S i.37; A ii.34; It 85; J ii.293; 3rd pl. āpādu D ii.273. -- ger. āpajjitva PvA 22 (saŋvegaŋ), 151. <-> pp. āpanna (q. v.). -- Caus. āpādeti (q. v.). -- Note. The reading āpajja in āpajja naŋ It 86 is uncertain (vv. ll. āsajja & ālajja). The id. p. at Vin ii.203 (CV. vii.4, 8) has āsajjanaŋ, for which Bdhgh, on p. 325 has āpajjanaŋ. Cp. pariyāpajjati.
Āpaṇa [Sk. āpaṇa, ā + paṇ] a bazaar, shop Vin i.140; J i.55; v.445; Pv ii.322; Miln 2, 341; SnA 440; DhA i. 317; ii.89; VvA 157; PvA 88, 333 (phal˚ fruit shop), 215.
Āpaṇika [fr. āpaṇa] a shopkeeper, tradesman J i.124; Miln 344; VvA 157; DhA ii.89.
Āpatacchika at J vi.17 is C. reading for apatacchika in khārâpat˚ (q. v.).
Āpatati [ā + patati] to fall on to, to rush on to J v.349 (= upadhāvati C.); vi.451 (= āgacchati C.); Miln 371.
Āpatti (f.) [Sk. āpatti, fr. ā + pad, cp. apajjati & BSk. āpatti, e. g, Divy 330] an ecclesiastical offence (cp. Kvu trsl. 362 n. 1), Vin i.103 (˚khandha), 164 (˚ŋ paṭikaroti), 322 (˚ŋ passati), 354 (avasesā & anavasesā); ii.2 sq. (˚ŋ ropeti), 59, 60 (˚pariyanta), 88 (˚adhikaraṇa), 259 (˚ŋ paṭikaroti); iv.344; D iii.212 (˚kusalatā); A i.84 (id.), 87; ii.240 (˚bhaya); Dhs 1330 sq. (cp. Dhs trsl. 346). <-> anāpatti Vin iii.35.
˚vuṭṭhānatā forgiveness of an offence Vin ii.250 (put before anāpatti).
Āpattika (adj.) [āpatti + ka, cp. BSk. āpattika Divy 303] guilty of an offence M i.443; Vin iv.224. an˚ Vin i.127.
Āpatha in micchāpatha, dvedhāpatha as classified in Vbh Ind. p. 441 should be grouped under patha as micchā˚, dvedhā˚.
Āpathaka in ˚jjhāyin Nd2 3422 is read āpādaka˚ at Nd1 226, and āpātaka˚ at Vism 26.
Āpadā (f.) [Sk. āpad, fr. ā + pad, cp. āpajjati & BSk. āpad, e. g. in āpadgata Jtm 3133] accident, misfortune, distress, D iii.190; A ii.68 (loc. pl. āpadāsu), 187; iii. 45; iv.31; Th 1, 371; J iv.163 (āpadatthā, a difficult form; vv. ll. T. aparattā, āpadatvā, C. aparatthā; expld. by āpadāya); v.340 (loc. āpade), 368; PvA 130 (quot.); Sdhp 312, 554. Note. For the contracted form in loc. pl. āpāsu (= *āpatsu) see *āpā.
Āpanna [pp. of āpajjati] -- 1. entered upon, fallen into, possessed of, having done Vin i.164 (āpattiŋ ā.); iii.90; D i.4 (dayāpanna merciful); Nd2 32 (taṇhāya). -- 2. unfortunate, miserable J i.19 (v.124). Cp. pari˚.
*Āpā (& *Āvā) (f.) [for āpadā, q. v.] misery, misfortune J ii.317 (loc. pl. āpāsu, v. l. avāsu, C. āpadāsu); iii.12 (BB āvāsu); v.82 (avāgata gone into misery, v. l. apagata, C. apagata parihīna), 445 (loc. āvāsu, v. l. avāsu, C. āpadāsu), 448 (āvāsu kiccesu; v. l. apassu, read āpāsu). Note. Since *āpā only occurs in loc. pl., the form āpāsu is to be regarded as a direct contraction of Sk. āpatsu.
Āpāṇa [ā + pāṇa] life, lit. breathing, only in cpd. ˚koṭi the end of life Miln 397; Dāvs iii.93; adj. -- koṭika M ii.120; Vism 10.
Āpātha [etym.? Trenckner, Miln p. 428 says: "I suspect ā. to be corrupted from āpāta (cp. āpatati), under an impression that it is allied to patha; but it is scarcely ever written so"] sphere, range, focus, field (of consciousness or perception; cp. Dhs trsl. 199), appearance A ii.67; J i.336; Vbh 321; Miln 298; Vism 21, 548; DA i.228; DhsA 308, 333; VvA 232 (˚kāla); DhA iv.85; Sdhp 356. Usually in phrase āpāthaŋ gacchati to come into focus, to become clear, to appear M i.190; S iv.160, or ˚ŋ āgacchati Vin i.184; A iii.377 sq.; iv.404; Vism 125. Cp. ˚gata below.
-- gata come into the sphere of, appearing, visible M i.174 = Nd2 jhāna (an˚ unapproached); PvA 23 (āpāthaŋ gata). -- gatatta abstr. fr. last: appcarance Vism 617.
Āpāthaka (adj.) [fr. āpātha] belonging to the (perceptual) sphere of, visible, in ˚nisādin lying down visible D iii.44, 47. Cp. āpathaka.
Āpādaka (adj. -- n.) [fr. ā + pad] -- 1. (adj.) producing, leading to ( -- ˚) VvA 4 (abhiññ˚ catuttha -- jjhāna). -- 2. (n.) one who takes care of a child, a protector, guardian A i.62 = 132 = It 110 (+ posaka). -- f. āpādikā a nurse, foster -- mother Vin ii.289 (+ posikā).
Āpādā (f.) [short for āpādikā] a nursing woman, in an˚ not nursing, unmarried J iv.178.
Āpādi aor. of āpajjati (q. v.).
Āpādeti [Caus. of āpajjati] to produce, make out, bring, bring into M i.78; iii.248; S iv.110 (addhānaŋ to live one's life, cp. addhānaŋ āpādi J ii.293 = jīvitɔaddhānaŋ āpādi āyuŋ vindi C.); SnA 466. -- Cp. pari˚
Āpāna (nt.) [fr. ā + pā] drinking; drinking party, banquet; banqueting -- hall, drinking -- hall J i.52 (˚maṇḍala); v.292 (˚bhūmi); Vism 399 (id.); DhA i.213 (id., rañño).
Āpānaka (adj.) [āpāna + ka] drinking, one who is in the habit of drinking D i.167.
Āpānīya (adj.) [fr. āpāna, ā + pā] drinkable, fit for drinking or drinking with, in ˚kaŋsa drinking -- bowl, goblet M i. 316; S ii.110.
Āpāyika (adj. -- n.) [fr. apāya] one suffering in an apāya or state of misery after death Vin ii.202 = It 85 (v. l. ap˚); Vin ii.205; D i.103; A i.265; It 42; Vism 16; PvA 60.
Āpiyati [fr. ṛ, cp. appāyati & appeti] to be in motion (in etym. of āpo) Vism 364.
Āpucchati [ā + pucchati] to enquire after, look for, ask, esp. to ask permission or leave; aor. āpucchi J i.140; PvA 110; grd. āpucchitabba DhA i.6; ger. āpucchitvā Vin iv.267 (apaloketvā +); Miln 29; PvA 111; āpucchitūna (cp. Geiger § 211) Th 2, 426; āpuccha Th 2, 416, & āpucchā [= āpṛcchya, cp. Vedic ācyā for ācya], only in neg. form an˚ without asking Vin ii.211, 219; iv.165, 226 (= anapaloketvā); DhA i.81. -- pp. āpucchita Vin iv.272.
Āpūrati [a + pūrati] to be filled, to become full, to increase J iii.154 (cando ā. = pūrati C.); iv.26, 99, 100.
Āpeti [Caus. of āp, see appoti & pāpuṇāti] to cause to reach or obtain J vi.46. Cp. vy˚.
Āphusati [ā + phusati] to feel, realise, attain to, reach; aor. āphusi Vv 169 (= adhigacchi VvA 84).
Ābaddha [pp. of ābandhati] tied, bound, bound up DA i. 127; fig. bound to, attached to, in love with DhA i.88; PvA 82 (Tissāya ˚sineha); Sdhp 372 (sineh, ˚hadaya).
Ābandhaka (adj.) [ā + bandh, cp. Sk. ābandha tie, bond] (being) tied to (loc.) PvA 169 (sīse).
Ābandhati (ā + bandhati, Sk. ābadhnāti, bandh] to bind to, tie, fasten on to, hold fast; fig. to tie to, to attach to, J iv.132, 289; v.319, 338, 359. -- pp. ābaddha.
Ābandhana (nt.) [fr. ā + bandh] -- 1. tie, bond DA i. 181 = Pug A 236 (˚atthena ñāti yeva ñāti -- parivaṭṭo). <-> 2. tying, binding Vism 351 (˚lakkhaṇa, of āpodhātu). <-> 3. reins (?) or harness (on a chariot) J v.319 (but cp. C. expln. "hatthi -- assa -- rathesu ābandhitabbāni bhaṇḍakāni", thus taking it as ā + bhaṇḍa + na, i. e. wares, loads etc.). With this cp. Sk. ābandha, according to Halāyudha 2, 420 a thong of leather which fastens the oxen to the yoke of a plough.
Ābādha [ā + bādh to oppress, Vedic ābādha oppression] affliction, illness, disease Vin iv.261; D i.72; ii.13; A i.121; iii.94, 143; iv.333, 415 sq., 440; Dh 138; Pug 28; Vism 41 (udara -- vāta˚) 95; VvA 351 (an˚ safe & sound); SnA 476; Sdhp 85. -- A list of ābādhas or illnesses, as classified on grounds of aetiology, runs as follows: pittasamuṭṭhānā, semha˚, vāta˚, sannipātikā, utu -- pariṇāmajā, visama -- parihārajā, opakkamikā, kammavipākajā (after Nd2 304i.c., recurring with slight variations at S iv.230; A ii.87; iii.131; v.110; Nd1 17, 47; Miln 112, cp. 135). <-> Another list of illnesses mentioned in tha Vinaya is given in Index to Vin ii., p. 351. -- Five ābādhas at Vin i. 71, viz. kuṭṭhaŋ gaṇḍo kilāso soso apamāro said to be raging in Magadha cp. p. 93. -- Three ābādhas at D iii.75, viz. icchā anasanaŋ jarā, cp. Sn 311. -- See also cpd. appābādha (health) under appa.
Ābādhika (adj. -- n.) [fr. ābādha] affected with illness, a sick person A iii.189, 238; Nd1 160; Miln 302; DA 212; DhA i.31; PvA 271. -- f. ābādhikinī a sick woman A ii.144.
Ābādhita [pp. of ābādheti, Caus. of ā + bādh] afflicted, oppressed, molested Th 1, 185.
Ābādheti [ā + Caus. of bādh, cp. ābādha] to oppress, vex, annoy, harass S iv.329.
Ābila (adj.) [Sk. āvila; see also P. āvila] turbid, disturbed, soiled J v.90.
Ābhata [pp. of ā + bharati from bhṛ] brought (there or here), carried, conveyed, taken D i.142; S. i.65; A ii.71, 83; It 12, 14 with phrase yathābhataŋ as he has been reared (cp. J v.330 evaŋ kicchā bhaṭo); Pv iii.5 (ratt˚ = rattiyaŋ ā. PvA 199); DhA ii.57, 81; iv.89; VvA 65. Cp. yathābhata.
Ābhataka (adj.) = ābhata; DA i.205 (v. l. ābhata).
Ābharaṇa (nt.) [Sk. ābharaṇa, ā + bhṛ] that which is taken up or put on, viz. ornament, decoration, trinkets D i. 104; Vv 802; J iii.11, 31; DhA iii.83; VvA 187.
Ābharati [ā + bhṛ] to bring, to carry; ger. ābhatvā J iv.351.
Ābhassara (adj. -- n.) [etym. uncertain; one suggested in Cpd. 138 n. 4 is ā + *bha + *sar, i. e. from whose bodies are emitted rays like lightning, more probably a combn. of ābhā + svar (to shine, be bright), i. e. shining in splendour] shining, brilliant, radiant, N. of a class of gods in the Brahma heavens "the radiant gods", usually referred to as the representatives of supreme love (pīti & mettā); thus at D i.17; Dh 200; It 15; DhA iii.258 (˚loka). In another context at Vism 414 sq.
Ābhā (f.) [Sk. ābhā, fr. ā + bhā, see ābhāti] shine, splendour, lustre, light D ii.12; M iii.147 (adj. -- ˚); S ii.150 (˚dhātu); A ii.130, 139; iii.34; Mhvs xi.11; VvA 234 (of a Vimāna, v. l. pabhā); DhA iv.191; Sdhp 286.
Ābhāti [ā + bhā] to shine, shine forth, radiate Dh 387 (= virocati DhA iv.144); J v.204. See also ābheti.
Ābhāveti [ā + bhāveti] to cultivate, pursue Pv ii.1319 (met- tacittaŋ gloss & v. l. abhāvetvā; expld. as vaḍḍhetvā brūhetvā PvA 168).
Ābhāsa [Sk. ābhāsa, fr. ā + bhās] splendour, light, appear- ance M iii.215.
Ābhicetasika (adj.) See abhicetasika. This spelling, with guṇa of the first syllable, is probably more correct; but the short a is the more frequent.
Ābhidosika (adj.) [abhidosa+ika] belonging to the evening before, of last night Vin iii.15 (of food; stale); M i.170 (˚kālakata died last night); Miln 291.
Ābhidhammika (adj.) [abhidhamma + ika] belonging to the specialised Dhamma, versed in or studying the Abhidhamma Miln 17, 341; Vism 93. As abhi˚ atKhA 151; J iv.219.
Ābhindati [ā + bhindati] to split, cut, strike (with an axe) S iv.160 (v. l. a˚).
Ābhisekika (adj.) [fr. abhiseka] belonging to the conse- cration (of a king) Vin v.129.
Ābhujati [ā + bhujati, bhuj1] to bend, bend towards or in, contract; usually in phrase pallankaŋ ā˚ "to bend in the round lap" or "bend in hookwise", to sit crosslegged (as a devotee with straightened back), e. g. at Vin i.24; D i.71; M i.56 (v. l. ābhuñjitvā), 219; A iii. 320; Pug 68; Ps i.176; J i.71, 213; Miln 289; DA i. 58, 210. In other connection J i.18 (v.101; of the ocean "to recede"); Miln 253 (kāyaŋ).
Ābhujana (nt.) [fr. ābhujati] crouching, bending, turning in, in phrase pallankɔābhujana sitting cross -- legged J i 17 (v.91); PvA 219.
Ābhujī (f.) [lit. the one that bends, prob. a poetic meta- phor] N. of a tree, the Bhūrja or Bhojpatr J v.195 (= bhūjapatta -- vana C.), 405 (= bhūjapatta C.).
Ābhūñjati [ā + bhuj2, Sk. bhunakti] to enjoy, partake of, take in, feel, experience J iv.456 (bhoge; Rh. D. "hold in its hood"?); DhsA 333.
Ābhuñjana (nt.) [fr. ābhuñjati] partaking of, enjoying, ex- periencing DhsA 333.
Ābheti [*ābhayati = ābhāti, q. v.] to shine Pv ii.126 (ppr. ˚entī); Vv 82 (˚antī, v. l. ˚entī; = obhāsentī VvA 50).
Ābhoga [fr. ābhuñjati, bhuj2 to enjoy etc. The translators of Kvu derive it from bhuj1 to bend etc. (Kvu trsl. 221 n. 4) which however is hardly correct, cp. the similar meaning of gocara "pasturing", fig. perception etc.] ideation, idea, thought D i.37 (= manasikāro samannāhāro DA i.122; cp. semantically āhāra = ābhoga, food); Vbh 320; Miln 97; Vism 164, 325, 354; Dāvs 62; KhA 42 (˚paccavekkhana), 43 (id.) 68.
Āma1 (indecl.) [a specific Pāli formation representing either amma (q. v.) or a gradation of pron. base amu˚ "that" (see asu), thus deictic -- emphatic exclamn. Cp. also BSk. āma e. g. Av. Ś i.36] affirmative part. "yes, indeed, certainly" D i.192 sq. (as v. l. BB.; T. has āmo); J i.115, 226 (in C. expln. of T. amā -- jāta which is to be read for āmajāta); ii.92; v.448; Miln 11, 19, 253; DhA i.10, 34; ii.39, 44; VvA 69; PvA 12, 22, 56, 61, 75, 93 etc.
Āma2 (adj.) [Vedic āma = Gr. w)mo/s, connected with Lat. amārus. The more common P. form is āmaka (q. v.)] raw, viz. (a) unbaked (of an earthen vessel), unfinished Sn 443; (b) uncooked (of flesh), nt. raw flesh, only in foll. cpds.: ˚gandha "smell of raw flesh", verminous odour, a smell attributed in particular to rotting corpses (cp. similarly BSk. āmagandha M Vastu iii.214) D ii.242 sq.; A i.280; Sn 241, 242 (= vissagandha kuṇapagandha SnA 286), 248, 251; Dhs 625; and ˚giddha greedy after flesh (used as bait) J vi.416 (= āmasankhāta āmisa C.).
Āmaka (adj.) [= āma2] raw, uncooked D i.5 = Pug 58 (˚maŋsa raw flesh); M i.80 (titta -- kalābu āmaka -- cchinno).
-- dhañña "raw" grain, corn in its natural, unprepared state D i.5 = Pug 58 (see DA i.78 for definition); Vin iv.264; v.135. -- sāka raw vegetables Vism 70. -- susāna "cemetery of raw flesh" charnelgrove (cp. āmagandha under ama2), i. e. fetid smelling cremation ground J i.264, 489; iv.45 sq.; vi.10; DhA i.176; VvA 76; PvA 196.
Āmaṭṭha [Sk. āmṛṣṭa, pp. of āmasati; cp. āmasita] touched, handled J i.98 (an˚); DA i.107 (= parāmaṭṭha); Sdhp 333.
Āmaṇḍaliya [ā + maṇḍala + iya] a formation resembling a circle, in phrase ˚ŋ karoti to form a ring (of people) or a circle, to stand closely together M i 225 (cp. Sk. āmaṇḍalikaroti).
Āmata in anāmata at J ii.56 is métric for amata.
Āmattikā (f.) [ā + mattikā] earthenware, crockery; in ˚āpaṇa a crockery shop, chandler's shop Vin iv.243.
Āmaddana (nt.) [ā + maddana of mṛd] crushing VvA 311.
Āmanta (adj. -- adv.) [either ger. of āmanteti (q. v.) or root der. fr. ā + mant, cp. āmantaṇā] asking or asked, invited, only as an˚ without being asked, unasked, uninvited Vin i.254 (˚cāra); A iii.259 (id.).
Āmantana (nt.) & ˚nā (f., also ˚ṇā) [from āmanteti] ad- dressing, calling; invitation, greeting Sn 40 (ep. Nd2 128); ˚vacana the address -- form of speech i. e. the vocative case (cp. Sk. āmantritaŋ id.) SnA 435; KhA 167.
Āmantanaka (adj. -- n.) [fr. āmantana] addressing, speaking to, conversing; f. ˚ikā interlocutor, companion, favourite queen Vv 188 (= allāpa -- sallāpa -- yoggā kīḷanakāle vā tena (i. e. Sakkena) āmantetabbā VvA 96).
Āmantaṇīya (adj.) [grd. of āmanteti] to be addressed J iv.371.
Āmantita [pp. of āmanteti] addressed, called, invited Pv ii.313 (= nimantita PvA 86).
Āmanteti [denom. of ā + *mantra] to call, address, speak to, invite, consult J vi.265; DA i.297; SnA 487 (= ālapati & avhayati); PvA 75, 80, 127. -- aor. āmantesi D ii.16; Sn p. 78 (= ālapi SnA 394) & in poetry āmantayi Sn 997; Pv ii.27; 37 (perhaps better with v. l. SS samantayi). -- ger. āmanta (= Sk. *āmantrya) J iii.209, 315 (= āmantayitvāˊ C.), 329; iv.111; v.233; vi.511. <-> pp. āmantita (q. v.). -- Caus. II. āmantāpeti to invite to come, to cause to be called, to send for D i.134 (v. l. āmanteti); Miln 149.
Āmaya [etym.? cp. Sk. āmaya] affliction, illness, misery; only as an˚ (adj.) not afflicted, not decaying, healthy, well (cp. BSk. nirāmaya Aśvaghoṣa ii.9) Vin i.294; Vv 1510 (= aroga VvA 74); 177; 368; J iii.260, 528; iv. 427; vi.23. Positive only very late, e. g. Sdhp 397.
Āmalaka [cp. Sk. āmalaka] emblic myrobalan, Phyllanthus Emblica Vin i.201, 278; ii.149 (˚vaṇṭika pīthu); S i.150; A v.170; Sn p. 125 (˚matti); J iv.363; v.380 (as v. l. for T. āmala); Miln 11; DhA i.319; VvA 7.
Āmalakī (f.) āmalaka Vin i.30; M i.456 (˚vana).
Āmasati [ā + masati fr. mṛś] to touch (upon), to handle, to lay hold on Vin ii.221; iii.48 (kumbhiŋ); J iii.319 (id.); A v.263, 266; J iv.67; Ps ii.209; Miln 306; SnA 400; DhsA 302; VvA 17. -- aor. āmasi J ii.360; ger. āmasitvā Vin iii.140 (udakapattaŋ) J ii.330; grd. āmassa J ii.360 (an˚) and āmasitabba id. (C.). -- pp. āmaṭṭha & āmasita (q. v.).
Āmasana (nt.) [fr. āmasati] touching, handling; touch Vin iv.214. Cp. iii.118; Miln 127, 306; DA i.78.
Āmasita [pp. of āmasati] touched, taken hold of, occupied VvA 113 (an˚ khetta virgin land).
Āmāya (adj.) [to be considered either a der. from amā (see amājāta in same meaning) or to be spelt amāya which metri causa may be written ā˚] "born in the house" (cp. semantically Gr. i)qagenh/s > indigenous), inborn, being by birth, in cpd. ˚dāsa (dāsī) a born slave, a slave by birth J vi.117 (= gehadāsiyā kucchismiŋ jātadasī C.), 285 (= dāsassa dāsiyā kucchimhi jātadāsā).
Āmāsaya [āma2 + āsaya, cp. Sk. āmāśaya & āmāśraya] receptacle of undigested food, i. e. the stomach Vism 260; KhA 59. Opp. pakkāsaya.
Āmilāka (nt.?) [etym.?] a woollen cover into which a floral pattern is woven DA i.87.
Āmisa (nt.) [der. fr. āma raw, q. v. for etym. -- Vedic āmis (m.); later Sk. āmiṣa (nt.), both in lit. & fig. meaning] <-> 1. originally raw meat; hence prevailing notion of "raw, unprepared, uncultivated"; thus ˚khāra raw lye Vin i. 206. -- 2. "fleshy, of the flesh" (as opposed to mind or spirit), hence material, physical; generally in opposition to dhamma (see dhamma B 1. a. and also next no.), thus at M i.12 (˚dāyāda); It 101 (id.); A i.91 = It 98 (˚dāna material gifts opp. to spiritual ones); Dhs 1344 (˚paṭisanthāra hospitality towards bodily needs, cp. Dhs trsl. 350). -- 3. food, esp. palatable food (cp. E. sweetmeat); food for enjoyment, dainties Vin ii.269 sq.; J ii.6; Miln 413 (lok˚); DA i.83 (˚sannidhi), -- 4. bait S i.67; iv.158; J iv.57, 219; vi.416; DA i.270. -- 5. gain, reward, money, douceur, gratuity, "tip" PvA 36, 46; esp. in phrase ˚kiñcikkha -- hetu for the sake of some (little) gain S ii.234; A i.128; v.265, 283 sq., 293 sq.; Pug 29; Pv ii.83 (= kiñci āmisaŋ patthento PvA 107); Miln 93; VvA 241 (= bhogahetu). -- 6. enjoyment Pv ii.82 (= kāmāmise -- laggacitto PvA 107). -- 7. greed, desire, lust Vin i.303 (˚antara out of greed, selfish, opp. mettacitto); A iii.144 (id.), 184 (id.); i.73 (˚garū parisā); J v.91 (˚cakkhu); Ps ii.238 (mār˚). See also cpds. with nir˚ and sa˚.
Āmuñcati [ā + mtic] to put on, take up; to be attached to, cling to DhsA 305. -- pp. āmutta (q. v.).
Āmutta [Sk. āmukta, pp. of ā + muc, cp. also BSk. āmukta jewel Divy 2, 3 etc., a meaning which might also be seen in the later Pāli passages, e. g. at PvA 134. Semantically cp. ābharaṇa] having put on, clothed in, dressed with, adorned with (always ˚ -- ) D i.104 (˚mālābharaṇa); Vin ii.156 = Vv 208 (˚maṇi -- kuṇḍala); S i.211; J iv.460; v. 155; vi.492; Vv 721 (= paṭimukka); 802 (˚hatthābharaṇa); Pv ii.951 (˚maṇikuṇḍala);J iv.183; VvA 182.
Āmeṇḍita (or Āmeḍita) [Sk. āmreḍita fram ā + mreḍ, dialectical] -- (nt.) sympathy in ˚ŋ karoti to show sympathy (? so Morris J.P.T.S. 1887, 106) DA i.228 = SnA 155 (v. l. at DA āmeḍita).
Āmo = āma D i.192, 3.
Āmoda [Sk. āmoda, fr. ā + mud] that which pleases; fragrance, perfume Dāvs v.51.
Āmodanā (f.) [fr. ā + mud] rejoicing Dhs 86, 285.
Āmodamāna (adj.) [ppr. med. of āmodeti] rejoicing, glad S i.100 (v. l. anu˚) = It 66; Vv 648 (= pamodamāna VvA 278); J v.45.
Āmodita [pp. fr. āmodeti] pleased, satisfied, glad J i.17 (v.80); v.45 (˚pamodita highly pleased); Miln 346.
Āmodeti [Sk. āmodayati, Caus. of ā + mud] to please, gladden, satisfy Th 1, 649 (cittaŋ); J v.34. -- pp. āmodita (q. v.).
Āya [Sk. āya; ā + i] 1. coming in, entrance M iii.93. - 2. tax J v.113. -- 3. income, earning, profit, gain (opp. vaya loss) A iv.282 = 323; Sn 978; J i.228; KhA 38 (in expln. of kāya), 82 (in etym. of āyatana); PvA 130. <-> 4. (āyā f.?) a lucky dice ("the incomer") J vi.281.
-- kammika a treasurer DhA i.184. -- kusala clever in earnings Nett 20. -- kosalla proficiency in money making D iii.220 (one of the three kosallas); Vbh 325. -- pariccāga expediture of one's income PvA 8. -- mukha (lit.) entrance, inflow, going in D i.74 (= āgamana -- magga DA 1.78); M ii.15; A ii.166; (fig.) revenue income, money SnA 173.
Āyata [Sk. āyata, pp. of ā + yam, cp. āyamati] -- 1. (adj.) outstretched, extended, long, in length (with numeral) D iii.73 (ñātikkhaya, prolonged or heavy?); M i.178 (dīghato ā˚; tiriyañ ca vitthata); J i.77, 273 (tettiŋsɔ -- angulɔāyato khaggo); iii.438; Vv 8415 (˚aŋsa; cp. expln. at VvA 339); SnA 447; DhsA 48; PvA 152 (dāṭhā fangs; lomā hair), 185 (˚vaṭṭa); Sdhp 257. -- 2. (n.) a bow J iii.438.
-- agga having its point (end) stretched forward, i. e. in the future (see āyati) It 15, 52. -- paṇhin having long eye -- lashes (one of the signs of a Mahāpurisa) D ii.17 = iii.143. -- pamha a long eye -- lash Th 2, 384 (= dīghapakhuma ThA 250).
Āyataka (adj.) [= āyata] -- 1. long. extended, prolonged, kept up, lasting Vin ii.108 (gītassara); A iii.251 (id.); J i.362. -- 2. sudden, abrupt, instr. ˚ena abruptly Vin ii.237.
Āyatana (nt.) [Sk. āyatana, not found in the Vedas; but freq. in BSk. From ā + yam, cp. āyata. The pl. is āyatanā at S iv.70. -- For full definition of term as seen by the Pāli Commentators see Bdhgh's expln at DA i. 124, 125, with which cp. the popular etym. at KhA 82: "āyassa vā tananato āyatassa vā saŋsāradukkhassa nayanato āyatanāni" and at Vism 527 "āye tanoti āyatañ ca nayatī ti ā."] -- 1. stretch, extent, reach, compass, region; sphere, locus, place, spot; position, occasion (corresponding to Bdhgh's definition at DA i.124 as "samosaraṇa") D iii.241, 279 (vimutti˚); S ii.41, 269; iv.217; v.119 sq., 318. sq.; A iii.141 (ariya˚); v.61 (abhibh˚, q. v.) Sn 406 (rajass˚ "haunt of passion" = rāgādi -- rajassa uppatti -- deso SnA 381); J i.80 (raj˚). Freq. in phrase araññ˚ a lonely spot, a spot in the forest J i.173; VvA 301; PvA 42, 54. -- 2. exertion, doing, working, practice, performance (comprising Bdhgh's definition at DA i.124 as paññatti), usually -- ˚, viz. kamm˚ Nd1 505; Vbh 324, 353; kasiṇ˚ A v.46 sq., 60; Ps i.28; titth˚ A i.173, 175; Vbh 145, 367; sipp˚ (art, craft) D i.51; Nd2 505; Vbh 324, 353; cp. an˚ non -- exertion, indolence, sluggishness J v.121. -- 3. sphere of perception or sense in general, object of thought, sense -- organ & object; relation, order. -- Cpd. p. 183 says rightly: "āyatana cannot be rendered by a single English word to cover both sense -- organs (the mind being regarded as 6th sense) and sense objects". -- These āyatanāni (relations, functions, reciprocalities) are thus divided into two groups, inner (ajjhattikāni) and outer (bāhirāni), and comprise the foll.: (a) ajjhatt˚: 1. cakkhu eye, 2. sota ear, 3. ghāna nose, 4. jivhā tongue, 5. kāya body, 6. mano mind; (b) bāh˚: 1. rūpa visible object, 2. sadda sound, 3. gandha odour, 4. rasa taste, 5. phoṭṭhabba tangible object, 6. dhamma cognizable object. -- For details as regards connotation & application see Dhs trsl. introduction li sq. Cpd. 90 n. 2; 254 sq. -- Approximately covering this meaning (3) is Bdhgh's definition of āyatana at DA i.124 as sañjāti and as kāraṇa (origin & cause, i. e. mutually occasioning & conditioning relations or adaptations). See also Nd2 under rūpa for further classifications. -- For the above mentioned 12 āyatanāni see the foll. passages: D ii.302 sq.; iii.102, 243; A iii.400; v.52; Sn 373 (cp. SnA 366); Ps i.7, 22, 101, 137; ii. 181, 225, 230; Dhs 1335; Vbh 401 sq.; Nett 57, 82; Vism 481; ThA 49, 285. Of these 6 are mentioned at S i.113, ii.3; iv.100, 174 sq.; It 114; Vbh 135 sq., 294; Nett 13, 28, 30; Vism 565 sq. Other sets of 10 at Nett 69; of 4 at D ii.112, 156; of 2 at D ii.69. -- Here also belongs ākāsɔ ānañcɔ āyatana, ākiñcaññ˚ etc. (see under ākāsa etc. and s. v.), e. g. at D i.34 sq., 183; A iv.451 sq.; Vbh 172, 189, 262 sq.; Vism 324 sq. -- Unclassified passages: M i.61; ii.233; iii.32, 216, 273; S i.196; ii.6, 8, 24, 72 sq.; iii.228; iv.98; v.426; A i.113, 163, 225; iii.17, 27, 82, 426; iv.146, 426; v.30, 321, 351, 359; Nd1 109, 133, 171, 340; J i.381 (paripuṇṇa˚); Vbh 412 sq. (id.).
-- uppāda birth of the āyatanas (see above 3) Vin i.185. -- kusala skilled in the ā. M iii.63. -- kusalatā skill in the spheres (of sense) D iii.212; Dhs 1335. -- ṭṭha founded in the sense -- organs Ps i.132; ii.121.
Āyatanika (adj.) [fr. āyatana] belonging to the sphere of (some special sense, see āyatana 3) S iv.126 (phass˚ niraya & sagga).
Āyati (f.) [fr. ā + yam, cp. Sk. āyati] "stretching forth", extension, length (of time), future. Only (?) in acc. āyatiŋ (adv.) in future Vin ii.89, 185; iii.3; Sn 49; It 115 (T. reads āyati but cp. p. 94 where T. āyatiŋ, v. l. āyati); J i.89; v.431; DA i 236.
Āyatika (adj.) [fr. last] future S i.142.
Āyatikā (f.) [of āyataka] a tube, waterpipe Vin ii.123.
Āyatta [Sk. āyatta, pp. of ā + yat]. -- 1. striving, active, ready, exerted J v.395 (˚mana = ussukkamana C.). <-> 2. striven after, pursued J i.341. -- 3. dependent on Vism 310 (assāsa -- passāsa˚); Nett 194; Sdhp 477, 605.
Āyanā (f.) [?] at DhsA 259 and Vism 26 is a grammarian's construction, abstracted from f. abstr. words ending in ˚āyanā, e. g. kankhā > kankhāyanā, of which the correct expln. is a derivation fr. caus. -- formation kankhāyati > kankhāy + a + nā. What the idea of Bdhgh. was in propounding his expln. is hard to say, perhaps he related it to i and understood it to be the same as āyāna.
Āyamati [ā + yam] to stretch, extend, stretch out, draw out Miln 176, usually in ster. phrase piṭṭhi me āgilāyati tam ahaŋ āyamissāmi "my back feels weak, I will stretch it" Vin ii.200; D iii.209; M i.354; S iv.184; J i.491. <-> Besides this in commentaries e. g. J iii.489 (mukhaŋ āyamituŋ).
Āyasa (adj.) [Sk. āyasa, of ayas iron] made of iron S ii. 182; A iii.58; Dh 345; J iv.416; v.81; Vv 845 (an˚? cp. the rather strange expln. at VvA 335).
Āyasakya (nt.) dishonour, disgrace, bad repute A iv.96; J v.17; VvA 110; usually in phrase ˚ŋ pāpuṇāti to fall into disgrace Th 1, 292; J ii.33 = 271; iii.514. [Bdhgh. on A iv.96 explains it as ayasaka + ya with guṇa of the initial, cp. ārogya].
Āyasmant (adj.) [Sk. āyuṣmant, the P. form showing as- similation of u to a] lit. old, i. e. venerable; used, either as adj. or absolute as a respectful appellation of a bhikkhu of some standing (cp. the semantically identical thera ). It occurs usually in nom. āyasmā and is expld. in Nd by typical formula "piya -- vacanaŋ garu˚, sagārava -- sappaṭissâdhivacanaŋ", e. g. Nd1 140, 445; Nd2 130 on var. Sn loci (e. g. 814, 1032, 1040, 1061, 1096). -- Freq. in all texts, of later passages see SnA 158; PvA 53, 54, 63, 78. -- See also āvuso.
Āyāga [ā + yāga of yaj] sacrificial fee, gift; (m.) recipient of a sacrifice or gift (deyyadhamma) Sn 486 (= deyyadhammānaŋ adhiṭṭhāna -- bhūta SnA 412); Th 1, 566; J vi. 205 (˚vatthu worthy objact of sacrificial fees).
Āyācaka (adj. -- n.) [fr. ā + yāc] one who begs or prays, petitioner Miln 129.
Āyācati [ā + yāc, cp. Buddh. Sk. āyācate Divy 1.] -- 1. to request, beg, implore, pray to (acc.) Vin iii.127; D i.240; PvA 160. -- 2. to make a vow, to vow, promise A i. 88; J i.169 = v.472; i.260; ii.117. -- pp. āyācita (q. v.).
Āyācana (nt.) [fr. āyācati] -- 1. asking, adhortation, ad- dressing (t. t. g. in expln. of imperative) SnA 43, 176, 412. -- 2. a vow, prayer A i.88; iii.47; J i.169 = v.472.
Āyācita [pp. of āyācati] vowed, promised J i.169 (˚bhatta- jātaka N.).
Āyāta [pp. of āyāt.; cp. BSk. āyāta in same meaning at Jtm 210] gone to, undertaken Sdhp 407.
Āyāti [ā + yāti of yā] to come on or here, to come near, approach, get into S i.240; Sn 669; Sn p. 116 (= gacchati SnA 463); J iv.410; pv ii.1212 (= āgacchati PvA 158); DhA i.93 (imper. āyāma let us go). -- pp. āyāta.
Āyāna (nt.) [fr. ā + yā to go] coming, arrival: see āyanā.
Āyāma [fr. ā + yam, see āyamati] -- 1. (lit.) stretching, stretching out, extension Vin i.349 = J iii.488 (mukh˚). <-> 2. (appl.) usually as linear measure: extension, length (often combd. with and contrasted to vitthāra breadth or width & ubbedha height), as n. (esp. in abl. āyāmato & instr. āyāmena in length) or as adj. ( -- ˚): J i.7, 49 (˚ato tīṇi yojanasatāni, vitthārato aḍḍhatiyāni); iii.389; Miln 17 (ratanaŋ soḷasahatthaŋ āyāmena aṭṭhahatthaŋ vitthārena), 282 (ratanaŋ catuhatthɔāyāmaŋ); Vism 205 (+ vitth˚); Khb 133 (+ vitthāra & parikkhepa); VvA 188 (soḷasayojan˚), 199 (˚vitthārehi), 221 (˚ato + vitth˚); PvA 77 (+ vitth˚), 113 (id. + ubbedha); DhA i.17 (saṭṭhi -- yojan˚).
Āyāsa [cp. Sk. āyāsa, etym.?] trouble, sorrow, only neg. an˚ (adj.) peaceful, free from trouble A iv.98; Th 1, 1008.
Āyu (nt.) [Vedic āyus; Av. āyu, gradation form of same root as Gr. ai)w/n "aeon", ai)e/n always; Lat. aevum, Goth. aiws. Ohg. ēwa, io always; Ger. ewig eternal; Ags. āē eternity, ā always (cp. ever and aye)] life, vitality, duration of life, longevity D iii.68, 69, 73, 77; S iii.143 (usmā ca); iv.294; A i.155; ii.63, 66 (addh˚); iii.47; iv.76, 139; Sn 694, 1019; It 89; J i.197 (dīgh˚); Vv 555 (cp. VvA 247 with its definition of divine life as comprising 30 600 000 years); Vism 229 (length of man's āyu = 100 years); Dhs 19, 82, 295, 644, 716; Sdhp 234, 239, 258. -- Long or divine life, dibbaŋ āyu is one of the 10 attributes of ādhipateyya or majesty (see ṭhāna), thus at Vin i.294; D iii.146; S iv.275 sq.; A i.115; iii. 33; iv.242, 396; Pv ii.959 (= jīvitaŋ PvA 136).
-- ūhā see āyūhā. -- kappa duration of life Miln 141; DhA i.250. -- khaya decay of life (cp. jīvita -- kkhaya) D i.17 (cp. DA i.110); iii.29. -- pamāṇa span or measure of life time D ii.3; A i.213, 267; ii.126 sq.; iv.138, 252 sq., 261; v.172; Pug 16; Vbh 422 sq.; SnA 476. -- pariyanta end of life It 99; Vism 422. -- sankhaya exhaustion of life or lifetime Dpvs v.102. -- sankhāra (usually pl. ˚ā) constituent of life, conditions or properties resulting in life, vital principle D ii.106; M i.295 sq.; S ii.266; A iv.311 sq.; Ud 64; J iv.215; Miln 285; Vism 292; DhA i.129; PvA 210. Cp. BSk. āyuḥ -- saŋskāra Divy 203.
Āyuka ( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. āyu] -- being of life; having a life or age A iv.396 (niyat˚); VvA 196 (yāvatāyukā dibbasampatti divine bliss lasting for a lifetime). Esp. freq. in combn. with dīgha (long) and appa (short) as dīghāyuka A iv.240; PvA 27; appāyuka A iv.247; PvA 103; both at Vism 422. In phrase vīsati -- vassasahassɔāyukesu manussesu at the time when men lived 20 000 years D ii.5 -- 12 (see Table at Dial. ii.6); DhA ii.9; PvA 135; dasa -- vassasahassɔāyukesu manussesu (10 000 years) PvA 73; cattāḷīsa˚ DhA i.103; catusaṭṭhi -- kappɔāyukā subhakiṇhā Vism 422.
Āyukin (adj.) [fr. āyu] = āyuka; in appāyukin short lived Vv 416.
Āyuta (adj.) [Sk. ayuta, pp. of ā + yu, yuvati] -- 1. con- nected with, endowed, furnished with Th 1, 753 (dve pannarasɔāyuta due to twice fifteen); Sn 301 (nārī -- varagaṇ˚ = ˚saŋyutta SnA 320); Pv ii.124 (nānā -- saragaṇ˚ = ˚yutta PvA 157). -- 2. seized, conquered, in dur˚ hard to conquer, invincible J vi.271 (= paccatthikehi durāsada C.).
Āyutta [Sk. āyukta; pp. of ā + yuj] -- 1. yoked, to con- nected with, full of Pv i.1014 (tejasɔāyuta T., but PvA 52 reads ˚āyutta and explns. as samāyutta); PvA 157 (= ākiṇṇa of Pv ii.124). -- 2. intent upon, devoted to S i.67.
Āyuttaka (adj. -- n.) [āyutta + ka] one who is devoted to or entrusted with, a trustee, agent, superintendent, overseer J i.230 (˚vesa); iv.492; DhA i.101, 103, 180.
Āyudha is the Vedic form of the common Pāli form āvudha weapon, and occurs only spuriously at D i.9 (v. l. āvudha).
Āyuvant (adj.) [fr. āyu] advanced in years, old, of age Th 1, 234.
Āyusmant (adj.) [Sk. āyuṣmant; see also the regular P. form āyasmant] having life or vitality PvA 63 (āyusmāviññāṇa feeling or sense of vitality; is reading correct?).
Āyussa (adj.) [Sk. *āyuṣya] connected with life, bringing (long) life A iii.145 dhamma).
Āyūhaka (adj.) [fr. āyūhati] keen, eager, active Miln 207 (+ viriyavā).
Āyūhati [ā + y + ūhati with euphonic y, fr. Vedic ūhati, ūh1, a gradation of vah (see etym. under vahati). Kern's etym. on Toev. 99 = āyodhati is to be doubted, more acceptable is Morris' expln. at J.P.T.S. 1885, 58 sq., although contradictory in part.] lit. to push on or forward, aim at, go for, i. e. (1) to endeavour, strain, exert oneself S i.1 (ppr. anāyūhaŋ unstriving), 48; J vi.35 (= viriyaŋ karoti C.), 283 (= vāyamati C.). -- (2) to be keen on (w. acc.), to cultivate, pursue, do Sn 210 (= karoti SnA 258); Miln 108 (kammaŋ ūyūhitvā), 214 (kammaŋ āyūhi), 326 (maggaŋ). -- pp. āyūhita (q. v.).
Āyūhana (adj. -- nt.) [fr. āyūhati] -- 1. endeavouring, striving, Ps i.10 sq., 32, 52; ii.218; Vism 103, 212, 462, 579. f. āyūhanī Dhs 1059 ("she who toils" trsl.) = Vbh 361 = Nd2 taṇhā 1. (has āyūhanā). -- 2. furtherance, pursuit DA i.64 (bhavassa).
Āyūhā f. [āyu + ūhā] life, lifetime, only in ˚pariyosāna at the end of (his) life PvA 136, 162; VvA 319.
Āyūhāpeti [Caus. II. fr. āyūhati] to cause somebody to toil or strive after DhsA 364.
Āyūhita [*Sk. ā + ūhita, pp. of ūh] busy, eager, active Miln 181.
Āyoga [Sk. āyoga, of ā + yuj; cp. āyutta] -- 1. binding, bandage Vin ii.135; Vv 3341; VvA 142 (˚paṭṭa). -- 2. yoke Dhs 1061 (avijj˚), 1162. -- 3. ornament, decoration Nd1 226; J iii.447 (˚vatta, for v. l. ˚vanta?). -- 4. occupation, devotion to, pursuit, exertion D i.187; Dh 185 (= payoga -- karaṇa DhA iii.238). -- 5. (t. t.) obligation, guarantee(?) SnA 179. -- Cp. sam˚.
Ārakatta (nt.) [*ārakāt + tvaŋ] warding off, keeping away, holding aloof, being far from (c. gen.); occurring only in pop. etym. of arahant at A iv.145; DhA iv.228; DA i.146 = VvA 105, 106 = PvA 7; cp. DhsA 349.
Ārakā (adv.) [Sk. ārāt & ārakāt, abl. form. fr. *āraka, see ārā2] far off, far from, away from, also used as prep. c. abl. and as adj. pl. keeping away from, removed, far Vin ii.239 = A iv.202 (sanghamhā); D i.99, 102 (adj.) 167; M i.280 (adj.) S ii.99; iv.43 sq.; A i.281; It 91; J i.272; iii.525; v.451; Miln 243; VvA 72, 73 (adj. + viratā).
Ārakkha [ā + rakkha] watch, guard, protection, care D ii.59; iii.289; S iv.97, 175, 195; A ii.120; iii.38; iv. 266, 270, 281 (˚sampadā), 322 (id.), 400; v.29 sq.; J i.203; ii.326; iv.29 (˚purisa); v.212 (˚ṭṭhāna, i. e. harem), 374 (˚parivāra); Pug 21 (an˚), 24; Miln 154; Vism 19 (˚gocara preventive behaviour, cautiousness); SnA 476 (˚devatā); KhA 120 (id.), 169; DhA ii.146; PvA 195; Sdhp 357, 365.
Ārakkhlka [fr. ārakkha] a guard, watchman J iv.29.
Ārakkheyya see arakkheyya.
Āragga (nt.) [ārā + agga; Sk. ārāgra of ārā an awl, a prick] the point of an awl, the head of certain arrows, having the shape of an awl, or an arrow of that kind (see Halayudha p. 151) A i.65; Sn 625, 631; Dh 401, 407; Vism 306; DhA ii 51; iv.181.
Āracayāracayā [ā + racayā a ger. or abl. form. fr. ā + *rac, in usual Sk. meaning "to produce", but here as a sound -- root for slashing noise, in reduplication for sake of intensification. Altogether problematic] by means of hammering, slashing or beating (like beating a hide) Sn 673 (gloss ārajayārajayā fr. ā + *rañj or *raj). -- SnA 481 explns. the passage as follows: ārajayārajayā; i. e. yathā manussā allacammaŋ bhūmiyaŋ pattharitvā khīlehi ākoṭenti, evaŋ ākoṭetvā pharasūhi phāḷetvā ekam ekaŋ koṭiŋ chinditvā vihananti, chinnachinnakoṭi punappuna samuṭṭhāti; āracayāracayā ti pi pāṭho, āviñjitvā (v. l. BB. āvijjhitvā) āviñjitvā ti attho. -- Cp. ārañjita.
Āraññaka (adj.) [fr. arañña + ka] belonging to solitude or the forest, sequestered; living in the forest, fond of seclusion, living as hermits (bhikkhū). Freq. spelt araññaka (q. v.). -- Vin i.92 (bhikkhū); ii.32, 197, 217 (bh.), 265 (bh.); M i.214; A iii.100 sq., 219; iv.21; v.66; J iii.174 (v. l. BB. a˚); Miln 342; DhA ii.94 (vihāra).
Āraññakatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. āraññaka, see also arañña- katta] the habit of sequestration or living in solitude M i.214; iii.40; A i.38.
Āraññika (adj.) = āraññaka Vin iii.15; A i.24; Pug 69; Vism 61, 71 (where defined); Miln 341.
Ārañjita [in form = Sk. *ārañjita, ā + pp. of rañjayati, Caus. of rañj or raj, but in meaning different. Perhaps to rac (as *racita) to furnish with, prepare, or better still to be regarded as an idiomatic Pāli form of soundroot *rac (see āracayā˚) mixed with rañj, of which we find another example in the double spelling of āracayā (& ārajayā) q. v.] furrowed, cut open, dug up, slashed, torn (perhaps also "beaten") M i.178 (hatthipadaŋ dantehi ārañjitaŋ an elephant -- track bearing the marks of tusks, i. e. occasional slashes or furrows).
Ārata [Sk. ārata, pp. of ā + ram, cp. ārati] leaving off, keeping away from, abstaining J iv.372 (= virata); Nd2 591 (+ virata paṭivirata).
Ārati (f.) [Sk. ārati, ā + ram] leaving off, abstinence Vv 639 (= paṭivirati VvA 263); in exegetical style occurring in typ. combn. with virati paṭivirati veramaṇī, e. g. at Nd2 462; Dhs 299.
Āratta (nt.?) [Sk. cp. ārakta, pp. of ā + raj] time, period (orig. affected, tinted with), only in cpd. vassāratta the rainy season, lent J iv.444; Dāvs ii.74.
Āraddha (adj.) [pp. of ā + rabh] begun, started, bent on, undertaking, holding on to, resolved, firm A i.148 (āraddhaŋ me viriyaŋ It 30; PvA 73 (ṭhapetuŋ began to place), 212 (gantuŋ). Cp. ārādhaka 1.
-- citta concentrated of mind, decided, settled D i.176; M i.414; S ii.21; Sn p. 102; SnA 436. Cp. ārādheti 1. -- viriya (adj.) strenuous, energetic, resolute Vin i.182; D iii.252, 268, 282, 285; A i.24; Sn 68, 344; It 71 (opp. hīna -- viriya); Nd2 131; Ps i.171; ThA 95. Cp. viriyārambha; f. abstr. ˚viriyatā M i.19.
Ārabbha (indecl.) [ger. of ārabhati2 in abs. function; cp. Sk. ārabhya meaning since, from] -- 1. beginning, undertaking etc., in cpd. ˚vatthu occasion for making an effort, concern, duty, obligation D iii.256 = A iv.334 (eight such occasions enumd). -- 2. (prep. with acc.) lit. beginning with, taking (into consideration), referring to, concerning, with reference to, about D i.180; A ii.27 = It 103 (senāsanaŋ ā.); Sn 972 (upekhaŋ v. l. ārambha; C. uppādetvā); Pv i.41 (pubbe pete ā.); DhA i.3; ii.37; PvA 3 (seṭṭhiputta -- petaŋ ā.), 16, and passim.
Ārabhati1 [not with Morris J.P.T.S. 1889, 202 fr. rabh and identical with ārabhati2, but with Kern, Toev. s. v. identical with Sk. ālabhate, ā + labh meaning to seize the sacrificial animal in order to kill it; cp. nirārambha] to kill, destroy M i.371 (pāṇaŋ).
Ārabhati2 & Ārabbhati [ā + rabhati, Sk. ārabhati & ārambhati, ā + rabh] to begin, start, undertake, attempt S i.156 (ārabbhatha "bestir yourselves") = Miln 245 = Th 1, 256 (bh.); Pug 64 (bh.); viriyaŋ ārabhati to make an effort, to exert oneself (cp. ārambha) A iv.334. <-> aor. ārabhi DhA ii.38 & ārabbhi PvA 35. -- ger. ārabbha, see sep. -- pp. āraddha (q. v.).
Ārambha [Sk. ārambha in meaning "beginning", fr ā + rabh (rambh) cp. ārabhati] -- 1. attempt, effort, inception of energy (cp. Dhs trsl. 15 & K. S. p. 318 giving C. def. as kicca, karaṇīya, attha, i. e. 1. undertaking & duty, 2. object) S i.76 (mah˚); v.66, 104 sq. (˚dhātu); iii.338 (id.), 166 (˚ja; T. arabbhaja, v. l. ārambhaja to be preferred) = Pug 64; Miln 244; Net 41; DhsA 145. -- viriyārambha (cp. āraddha -- viriya) zeal, resolution, energy Vin ii.197; S iv.175; A i.12, 16. -- 2. support, ground, object, thing Nett 70 sq., 107; an˚ unsupported, independent Sn 743 (= nibbāna SnA 507). Cp. also nirambha, upārambha, sārambha.
Ārammaṇa (nt.) [cp. Sk. ālambana, lamb, but in meaning confounded with rambh (see rabhati)] primary meaning "foundation", from this applied in the foll. senses: (1) support, help, footing, expedient, anything to be depended upon as a means of achieving what is desired, i. e. basis of operation, chance Sn 1069 (= ālambana, nissaya, upanissaya Nd2 132); Pv i.41 (yaŋ kiñcɔ ārammaṇaŋ katvā); ārammaṇaŋ labhati (+ otāraŋ labhati) to get the chance S ii.268; iv.185. -- (2) condition, ground, cause, means, esp. a cause of desire or clinging to life, pl. ˚ā causes of rebirth (interpreted by taṇhā at Nd1 429), lust Sn 474 (= paccayā SnA 410), 945 (= Nd1 429); KhA 23; DhA i.288 (sappāy˚); PvA 279. -- (3) a basis for the working of the mind & intellect; i. e. sense -- object, object of thought or consciousness, the outward constituent in the relation of subject & object, object in general. In this meaning of "relation" it is closely connected with āyatana (see āyatana3), so that it sometimes takes its place, it is also similar to visaya. Cpd. 3 distinguishes a 5 fold object, viz. citta, cetasika, pasāda -- & sukhuma -- rūpa, paññatti, nibbāna. See on term especially Cpd. 3, 14; Dhs trsl. xli. & 209. -- A 1. sq.; iv.385; Sn 506; Ps i.57 sq., 84 (four ā.); ii.97, 118, 143; Dhs 1 (dhamm˚ object of ideation), 180, 584, 1186 et passim; Vbh 12, 79, 92, 319, 332 (four); Nett 191 (six); Vism 87 sq., 375 (˚sankantika), 430 sq. (in var. sets with ref. to var. objects), 533; DhsA 48, 127; VvA 11, 38. -- rūpārammaṇa lit. dependence on form, i. e. object of sight, visible form, especially striking appearance, visibility, sight D iii.228; S iii.53; A i.82; J i.304; ii.439, 442; PvA 265. <-> ārammaṇaŋ karoti to make it an object (of intellection or intention), to make it one's concern (cp. Pv i.41, above 1). -- ārammaṇa -- kusala clever in the objects (of meditation) S iii.266; ā˚ -- paccayatā relation of presentation (i. e. of subj. & obj.) Nett 80. -- (4) ( -- ˚) (adj.) being supported by, depending on, centred in, concentrated upon PvA 8 (nissay˚), 98 (ek˚); VvA 119 (buddh˚ pīti rapture centred in the Buddha).
Āraha (adj.) metri causa for araha deserving J vi.164.
Ārā1 (f.) [Sk. ārâ; *ēl "pointed", as in Ohg. āla = Ger. ahle, Ags. āēl = E awl; Oicel. alr] an awl; see cp. āragga. Perhaps a der. of ārā is āḷakā (q. v.).
Ārā2 (indecl.) [Vedic ārād, abl. as adv.; orig. a root der. fr. *ara remoteness, as in Sk. araṇa foreign & araṇya solitude q. v. under araṇa1 and arañña] far from, remote (from) (adv. as well as prep. with abl.) Sn 156 (pamādamhā), 736; Dh 253 (āsavakkhayā; DhA iii.377 expls. by dūragata); J ii.449 (jhānabhūmiyā; = dūre ṭhita C.); v.78 (saŋyame; = dūrato C.). See also ārakā.
-- cāra [in this combn. by Kern, Toev. s. v. unecessarily expld. as ārā = ārya; cp. similar phrases under ārakā] a life remote (from evil) A iv.389. -- cārin living far from evil leading a virtuous life D i.4; M i.179; iii.33; A iii. 216, 348; iv.249; v.138, 205; DA i.72 (= abrahmacariyato dūra -- cārin).
Ārādhaka (adj. -- n.) [fr. ā + rādh] 1. [perhaps for *āraddhaka because of analogy to āraddha of ā + rabh] successful, accomplishing or accomplished, undertaking, eager Vin i.70 (an˚ one who fails); M i.491; ii.197 = A i.69 = Miln 243; S v.19; A v.329 (in correlation with āraddhaviriya). -- 2. pleasing, propitiating Miln 227; VvA 220 (˚ikā f.).
Ārādhana (nt.) & ˚ā (f.) (either fr. ā + rādh or ā + rabh, cp. ārādhaka] satisfying, accomplishing; satisfaction, accomplishment D ii.287 (opp. virādhanā failure); M i.479; ii.199; A v.211 sq.; J iv.427.
Ārādhanīya (adj.) [grd. fr. ārādheti] to be attained, to be won; successful Vin i.70 (an˚); J ii.233 (dur˚).
Ārādhita [pp. of ārādheti; Sk. ārādhita, but BSk. ārāgita, e. g. Divy 131, 233] pleased Sdhp 510.
Ārādheti [Caus. of ā + rādh, in meaning 2 confused with ārabhati. In BSk. strangely distorted to ārāgayati; freq. in Divy as well as Av. Ś] -- 1. to please, win favour, propitiate, convince J i.337 (dārake), 421, 452; ii.72 (manusse); iv.274 (for ābhirādheti T.); Vism 73 (ārādhayanto Nāthassa vana -- vāsena mānasaŋ); DhA ii.71; Dāvs iii.93 (ārādhayi sabbajanaŋ); Miln 352. In older literature only in phrase cittaŋ ārādheti to please one's heart, to gladden, win over, propitiate D i.118 sq., 175 (but cp. āraddha -- citta to ārabhati); M i85, 341; S ii.107; v.109; J ii.372; Miln 25. -- 2. to attain, accomplish, fulfill, succeed S v.23 (maggaŋ), 82, 180, 294; It iii. (v. l. ārām˚); Sn 488 = 509. Cp. ārādhaka 1. -- pp. ārādhita (q. v.). -- See also parābhetvā.
Ārāma [Sk. ārāma, ā + ram] -- 1. pleasure, fondness of ( -- ˚), delight, always as adj. ( -- ˚) delighting in, enjoying, finding pleasure in (usually combd. with rata, e. g. dhammārāma dhammarata finding delight in the Dh.) S i.235; iv.389 sq. (bhav˚, upādān˚); A i.35, 37, 130; ii.28 (bhāvan˚); It 82 (dhamm˚); Sn 327 (id.; expld. by SnA 333 as rati and "dhamme ārāmo assā ti"); Pug 53 (samagg˚); Vbh 351. -- 2. a pleasure -- ground, park, garden (lit. sport, sporting); classified at Vin iii.49 as pupph˚ and phal˚ a park with flowers or with fruit (i. e. orchard), def. at DhA iii.246 as Veḷuvana -- Jīvakɔ ambavanɔ ādayo, i. e. the park of Veḷuvana, or the park belonging to Jīvaka or mango -- groves in general. Therefore: (a) (in general) a park, resort for pastime etc. Vin ii.109; D i. 106; Dh 188; Vv 795 (amb˚ garden of mangoes); VvA 305 (id.); Pv ii.78 (pl. ārāmāni = ārāmɔ ûpavanāni PvA 102). -- (b) (in special) a private park, given to the Buddha or the Sangha for the benefit of the bhikkhus, where they meet & hold discussions about sacred & secular matters; a place of recreation and meditation, a meeting place for religious gatherings. Amongst the many ārāmas given to the bhikkhus the most renowned is that of Anāthapiṇḍika (Jetavana; see J i.92 -- 94) D i.178; Vin iv.69; others more frequently mentioned are e. g. the park of Ambapālī (Vin i.233); of Mallikā (D i.178), etc. -- Vin i.39, 140, 283, 291; ii.170; iii.6, 45, 162; iv.85; A ii.176; Dpvs v.18.
-- pāla keeper of a park or orchard, gardener Vin ii. 109; VvA 288. -- ropa, -- ropana planter, planting of pleasuregroves S i.33; PvA 151. -- vatthu the site of an Ārāma Vin i.140; ii. 170; iii.50, 90.
Ārāmakinī (f.) see ārāmika.
Ārāmatā (f.) [abstr. fr. ārāma 1] pleasure, satisfaction A ii.28; iii.116; Vbh 381; Miln 233.
Ārāmika (adj.) [fr. ārāma] 1. (to ārāma 1) finding delight in, fond of (c. gen.) (or servant in general?) Miln 6 (sanghassa trsl. at the service of the order). -- 2. (to ārāma 2) belonging to an Ārāma, one who shares the congregation, an attendant of the Ārāma Vin i.207 sq.; ii.177 (& ˚pesaka), 211; iii.24; iv.40; v.204; A ii.78 (˚samaṇuddesa); iii.109 (id.), 275 (˚pesaka); J i.38 (˚kicca) Vism 74 (˚samaṇuddesa). -- f. ārāmakiṇī a female attendant or visitor of an Ārāma Vin i.208.
Ārāva [cp. Sk. ārāva, fr. ā + ru] cry, sound, noise Dāvs iv.46.
Āraha (nt.) only in pl. gihīnaŋ ārahāni, things proper to laymen, D iii.163.
Āriya in anāriya at Sn 815 is metric for anariya (q. v.).
Āruṇṇa (nt.) [orig. pp of ā + rud] weeping, crying, lam- enting Miln 357.
Āruppa (adj.) [fr. arūpa as ā (= a2) -- *rūpya] formless, incorporeal; nt. formless existence D iii.275; M i.410, cp. 472; iii.163; S i.131 (˚ṭṭhāyin); ii.123; A iv.316; It 61; Sn 754; J i.406; Dhs 1385 (cp. trsl. 57); Vism 338; DA i.224; SnA 488, 508; Sdhp 5, 10; the four: Vism iii, 326 sq.
Āruhati [ā + ruh] to climb, ascend, go up or on to Sn 1014 (aor. āruhaŋ); Sdhp 188; ger. āruhitvā Sn 321 & āruyha J vi.452; Sn 139 (v. l. abhiruyha); It 71. <-> Caus. āropeti (q. v.).
Ārūgya see ārogya.
Ārūḷha [pp. of āruhati] -- 1. ascended, mounted, gone up, gone on to iv.137; J vi.452 (T. āruḷha); Vism 135 (nekkhamma -- paṭipadaŋ an˚); VvA 64 (magga˚); PvA 47 (˚nāva), 56 (hatthi˚). -- 2. come about, effected, made, done PvA 2, 144 (cp. BSk. pratijñām ārūḍha having taken a vow Divy 26). -- 3. (of an ornament) put on (to), arrayed J vi.153, 488.
Ārūha see āroha.
Ārogatā (f.) [abstr. fr. a + roga + tā] freedom from illness, health Miln 341.
Ārogya (nt.) [abstr. fr. aroga, i. e. ā (= a2) + roga + ya] absence of illness, health D i.11; iii.220 (˚mada), 235 (˚sampadā); M i.451 (T. ārūgya, v. l. ārogya), 508, 509; S ii.109; A i.146 (˚mada); ii.143; iii.72; v.135 sq.; Sn 749, 257 = Dh 204 = J iii.196; Nd1 160; Vism 77 (˚mada pride of health); PvA 129, 198; Sdhp 234.
Ārocāpana (nt.) [fr. ārocāpeti, Caus. of āroceti] announ- cement DhA ii.167.
Ārocāpeti (Caus. II. of āroceti] to make some one announce, to let somebody know, usually in phrase kālaŋ ā. Sn p. 111; J i.115, 125; DhA ii.89; PvA 141.
Ārocita [pp. of āroceti] announced, called Vin ii.213 (kāla).
Āroceti [ā + roceti, Caus. of ruc; cp. BSk. ārocayati Sp. Av. Ś i.9 etc.] to relate, to tell, announce, speak to, address D i.109, 224; Pv ii.89 (aor, ārocayi); PvA 4, 13 (aññamaññaŋ anārocetvā not speaking to each other), 81, 274 & freq. passim. -- pp. ārocita; Caus. II. ārocāpeti (q. v.).
Ārodana (nt.) [fr. ā + rud, cp. āruṇṇa] crying, lamenting A iii.268 sq.; J i.34; DhA i.184; ii.100.
Āropana (nt.) [fr. āropeti] "putting on to", impaling Miln 197 (sūl˚), 290 (id.).
Āropita [pp. of āropeti] -- 1. produced, come forward, set up PvA 2. -- 2. effected, made S iii.12; PvA 92, 257. -- 3. put on (to a stake), impaled PvA 220 (= āvuta).
Āropeti [Caus. of āruhati]. -- 1. to make ascend, to lead up to (w. acc.) PvA 76 (pāsādaŋ), 160 (id.) -- 2. to put on, take up to (w. acc. or loc.) Pv ii.92 (yakkhaŋ yānaŋ āropayitvāna); PvA 62 (sarīraŋ citakaŋ ā.), 100 (bhaṇḍaŋ sakaṭesu ā.). -- 3. to put on, commit to the care of, entrust, give over to (w. loc.) J i.227; PvA 154 (rajjaŋ amaccesu ā.). -- 4. to bring about, get ready, make PvA 73, 257 (sangahaŋ ā. make a collection); SnA 51, 142. <-> 5. to exhibit, tell, show, give S i.160 (ovādaŋ); Miln 176 (dosaŋ); DhA ii.75 (id.) -- 6. vādaŋ āropeti to refute a person, to get the better of (gen.) Vin i.60; M ii.122; S i.160. -- pp. āropita (q. v.).
Āroha ( -- ˚) [fr. ā + ruh] -- 1. climbing up, growth, in- crease, extent, in cpd. ˚pariṇāha length & circumference S ii.206; A i.288; ii.250; iv.397; v.19; J iii.192; v. 299; vi.20; Vbh 345 (˚māna + pariṇāha -- māna); SnA 382. -- 2. one who has climbed up, mounted on, a rider, usually in cpd. ass˚ & hatth˚ horse -- rider & elephantrider S iv.310; A ii.166 = iii.162 (T. ārūha); iv.107; DhsA 305. -- 3. outfit, possession (or increase, as 1?) Sn 420 (vaṇṇ˚).
Ārohaṇa (nt.) [fr. ā + ruh] climbing, ascending; ascent J i.70; vi.488; Miln 352; Vism 244; PvA 74.
Ālaka -- manda [ālaya˚?] at Vin ii.152 is of uncertain reading and meaning ("open to view"? or "not having pegs" = āḷaka?) vv. ll. āḷakamanta & ālakamandāra; Bdhgh on p. 321 explns. āḷakamandā ti ekangaṇā manussâbhikiṇṇā, i. e. full of a crowd of people, Ch. quotes ālakamandā as "the city of Kuvera" (cp. Sk. alakā).
Ālaggeti [ā + Caus. of lag] to (make) hang on to (loc.), to stick on, fasten to Vin ii.110 (pattaŋ veḷagge ālaggetvā).
Ālapati [ā + lapati] to address S i.177, 212; J v.201; SnA 42, 347, 383, 394 (= āmantayi of Sn 997), 487 (<-> avhayati); PvA 11, 13, 33, 69.
Ālapana (nt.) & ˚ā (f.) [fr. ā + lap] talking to, addressing, conversation Vin iii.73 (with ref. to exclam. "ambho"); J v.253 (˚ā); Vism 23 (˚ā); SnA 396; PvA 131 (re ti ā.).
Ālapanatā (f.) [abstr. fr. ālapana] speaking to, conversing with, conversation M i.331) (an˚).
Ālamba [Sk. ālamba, ā + lamb] anything to hang on, support S i.53 (an˚ without support); Sn 173 (id. + appatiṭṭha); J iii.396; Miln 343; Sdhp 245, 463.
Ālambati [ā + lamb] to hang on to or up, to take hold of, to fasten to Vin i.28, J i.57; vi.192; Vv 8448; ThA 34. -- ālambeti id. VvA 32.
Ālambana (adj. -- nt.) [fr. ā + lamb, cp. ālamba] (adj.) hanging down from, hanging up J iii.396; iv.457; SnA 214. -- (nt.) support, balustrade (or screen?) Vin ii.117, 152 (˚bāha) Miln 126.
Ālambara & Āḷambara (nt.) [Sk. āḍambara] a drum Vin i.15 (l); J ii.344 (ḷ); v.390 (l); Vv 5418 (ḷ).
Ālaya (m. & nt.) [cp. Sk. ālaya, ā + lī, līyate, cp. allīna & allīyati, also nirālaya] -- 1. orig. roosting place, perch, i. e. abode settling place, house J i.10 (geh˚); Miln 213; DhA ii.162 (an˚ = anoka), 170 (= oka). -- 2. "hanging on", attachment, desire, clinging, lust S i.136 = Vin i.4 (˚rāma "devoted to the things to which it clings" K. S.); Vin iii.20, 111; S iv.372 (an˚); v.421 sq. (id.); A ii. 34, 131 (˚rāma); iii.35; It 88; Sn 177 (kām˚ = kāmesu taṇhā -- diṭṭhi -- vasena duvidho ālayo SnA 216), 535 (+ āsavāni), 635; Nett 121, 123 (˚samugghāta); Vism 293 (id.), 497; Miln 203 (Buddh ˚ŋ akāsi?); DhA i.121; iv.186 (= taṇhā); SnA 468 (= anoka of Sn 366). -- 3. pretence, pretext, feint [cp. BSk. ālaya M Vastu iii.314] J i.157 (gilān˚), 438; iii.533 (mat˚); iv.37 (gabbhinī); vi 20, 262 (gilān˚).
Ālayati see allīyati.
Ālassa (nt.) [Der. fr. alasa] sloth, idleness, laziness S i.43; D iii.182; A iv.59; v.136; Sdhp 567. Spelling also ālasya S i.43 (v. l. BB); Vbh 352; Miln 289, and ālasiya J i.427; DA i.310; DhA i.299; VvA 43.
Ālāna & Āḷāna (nt.) [for ānāhana with substitution of l for n (cp. apilandhana for apinandh˚ and contraction of ˚āhana to ˚āna originally meaning "tying to" then the thing to which anything is tied] a peg, stake, post, esp. one to which an elephant is tied J i.415; iv.308; DhA i.126 (ḷ) where all MSS. have āḷāhana, perhaps correctly.
Āli1 (m. or f.? [Sk. āḷi] a certain kind of fish J v.405.
Āli2 & Āḷi (f.) [Sk. ālī] a dike, embankment Vin ii.256; M iii.96; A ii.166 (˚pabbheda); iii.28; J i.336; iii.533, 334.
Ālika in saccālika at S iv.306 is sacc˚alika distortion of truth, falsehood S iv.306.
Ālikhati [ā + likhati] to draw, delineate, copy in writing or drawing J i.71; Miln 51.
Ālinga [ā + ling] a small drum J v.156 (suvaṇṇ˚ -- tala).
Ālingati [ā + ling] to embrace, enfold D i.230; iii.73; J i.281; iv.21, 316, 438; v.8; Miln 7; DhA i.101: VvA 260.
Ālitta [pp. of ālimpati; Sk. ālipta] besmeared, stained Th 1, 737.
Ālinda (& Āḷinda) [Sk. alinda] a terrace or verandah be- fore the house -- door Vin i.248; ii.153; D i.89; M ii.119; S iv.290 (ḷ); A v.65 (ḷ); J vi.429; DA i.252; DhA i. 26; iv.196; SnA 55 (˚ka -- vāsin; v. l. alindaka); Mhvs 35, 3. As ālindaka at J iii.283.
Ālippati Pass. of ālimpeti (q. v.).
Ālimpana (nt.) [for āḷimp˚ = Sk. ādīpana, see ālimpeti2] conflagration, burning, flame Miln 43.
Ālimpita [pp. of ālimpeti2] ignited, lit. A iv.102 (v. l. ālepita).
Ālimpeti1 [Sk. ālimpayati or ālepayati. ā + lip or limp] to smear, anoint Vin ii.107; S iv.177 (vaṇaŋ). -- Caus. II. ālimpāpeti Vin iv.316. -- Pass. ālimpīyati Miln 74 & ālippati DhA iv.166 (v. l. for lippati). -- pp. ālitta (q. v.).
Ālimpeti2 [for Sk. ādīpayati, with change of d to l over ḷ and substitution of limp for ḷīp after analogy of roots in ˚mp, like lup > lump, lip > limp] to kindle, ignite, set fire to Vin ii.138 (dāyo ālimpetabbo); iii.85; D ii.163 (citakaŋ); A i.257; DhA i.177 (āvāsaŋ read āvāpaŋ), 225; PvA 62 (kaṭṭhāni). -- pp. ālimpita (q. v.).
Ālu (nt.) [Sk. ālu & ˚ka; cognate with Lat. ālum & alium, see Walde Lat. Wtb. under alium] a bulbous plant, Radix Globosa Esculenta or Amorphophallus (Kern), Arum Campanulatum (Hardy) J iv.371 = vi.578; iv.373.
Āluka1 = ālu J iv.46 (C. for ālupa).
Āluka2 (adj.) [etym.?] susceptiblé of, longing for, affected with ( -- ˚) Vin i.288 (sīt˚); DA i.198 (id.); J ii.278 (taṇh˚ greedy).
Ālupa (nt.) [etym.? Kern, Toev. s. v. suggests ālu -- a > ālu- va > ālupa] = āluka the edible root of Amorphophallus Campanulatus J iv.46 (= āluka -- kaṇḍa C.).
the form āluva occurs at Ap 237.
Ālumpakāra [reading not sure, to ālumpati or ālopa] breaking off, falling off (?) or forming into bits(?) DhA ii.55 (˚gūtha).
Ālumpati [ā + lup or lump, cp. ālopa] to pull out, break off M i.324.
Āluḷa (adj. [fr. ā + lul] being in motion, confusion or agitation, disturbed, agitated J vi.431.
Āluḷati [ā + lul; Sk. ālolati, cp. also P. āloḷeti] to move here & there, ppr. med. āluḷamāna agitated, whirling about DhA iv.47 (T. ālūl˚; v. l. āḷul˚) confuse DhsA 375. Caus. āluḷeti to set in motion, agitate, confound J ii.9, 33. -- pp. āluḷita (q. v.).
Āluḷita [pp. of āluḷeti] agitated, confused J ii.101; Miln 397 (+ khalita).
Ālepa [cp. Sk. ālepa, of ā + lip] ointment, salve, liniment Vin i.274; Miln 74; DhsA 249.
Ālepana (nt.) [fr. ā + lip] anointing, application of salve D i.7 (mukkh˚).
Āloka [ā + lok, Sk. āloka] seeing, sight (obj. & subj.), i. e. -- 1. sight, view, look S iv.128 = Sn 763; A iii. 236 (āloke nikkhitta laid before one's eye). anāloka without sight, blind Miln 296 (andha +). -- 2. light A i. 164 (tamo vigato ā. uppanno) = It 100 (vihato); A ii. 139 (four lights, i.e. canda˚, suriya˚, agg˚, paññ˚, of the moon, sun, fire & wisdom); J ii 34; Dhs 617 (opp. andhakāra); VvA 51 (dīp˚). -- 3. (clear) sight, power of observation, intuition, in combn. with vijjā knowledge D ii.33 = S ii.7 = 105, cp. Ps ii.150 sq. (obhāsaṭṭhena, S A. on ii.7). -- 4. splendour VvA 53; DvA 71.
-- kara making light, bringing light, n. light -- bringer It 108. -- karaṇa making light, illumining It 108. -- da giving light or insight Th 1, 3. -- dassana seeing light, i. e. perceiving Th 1, 422. -- pharaṇa diffusing light or diffusion of light Vbh 334; Nett 89. -- bahula good in sight, fig. full of foresight A iii.432. -- bhūta light J vi 459. -- saññā consciousness or faculty of sight or perception D iii.223; A ii.45; iii.93 -- saññin conscious of sight, i. e. susceptible to sight or insight D iii.49; M iii.3; A ii 211; iii.92, 323; iv.437; v.207; Pug 69. -- sandhi "break for the light", a slit to look through, an opening, a crack or casement Vin i.48 = ii.209 = 218; ii.172; iii.65; iv.47; J iv.310; PvA 24.
Ālokana (nt.) [fr. ā + lok] looking at, regarding DA i.194.
Ālokita (nt.) [pp. of āloketi] looking before, looking at, looking forward (opp. vilokitaŋ looking behind or backward), always in combn. ālokita -- vilokita in ster. phrase at D i.70 = e. g. A ii.104, 106, 210; Pug 44, 45, 50; Vism 19; VvA 6; DA i.193 (ālokitaŋ purato pekkhanaŋ vil˚ anudisā p.).
Āloketar [n. ag. to āloketi] one who looks forward or be- fore, a beholder DA i.194 (opp. viloketar).
Āloketi [Sk. ālokayati, ā + lok] to look before, look at, regard, see DA i.193, 194. -- pp. ālokita (q. v.).
Ālopa [ā + lup, cp. ālumpati; BSk. ālopa, e. g. Av. Ś i. 173, 341; Divy 290, 481] a piece (cut off), a bit (of food) morsel, esp. bits of food gathered by bhikkhus D i.5 = A v.206; iii.176; A ii 209; iii.304; iv.318; Th 1, 1055; It 18; Pv ii.17; Pug 58; Miln 231, 406; Vism 106; DA i.80 (= vilopa -- karaṇaŋ).
Ālopati [ālopeti? ā + lopeti, Caus. of ālumpati] to break in, plunder, violate Th 1, 743.
Ālopika (adj.) [ālopa + ika] getting or having, or con- sisting of pieces (of food) A i.295; ii.206; Pug 55.
Āloḷa [fr. ā + luḷ, cp. āluḷati & āloḷeti] confusion, uproar, agitation DhA i.38.
Āloḷī (f.) [a + luḷ] that which is stirred up, mud, in cpd. sītāloḷī mud or loam from the furrow adhering to the plough Vin i.206.
Āloḷeti [Caus. of āluḷati, cp. āluḷeti] to confuse, mix, shake together, jumble S i.175; J ii.272, 363; iv.333; vi.331; Vism 105.
Āḷaka (or ˚ā f.) [Dimin of aḷa (?) or of ārā i (?). See Mor- ris J.P.T.S. 1886, 158] -- 1. a thorn, sting, dart, spike, used either as arrow -- straightener Miln 418; DhA i.288; or (perhaps also for piece of bone, fishbone) in making up a comb VvA 349 (˚sandhāpana = comb; how Hardy got the meaning of "alum" in Ind. to VvA is incomprehensible). -- 2 a peg, spike, stake or post (to tie an elephant to, cp. ālāna). Cp. ii.13.
Āḷamba = āḷambara Vv 189 = 5024. See ālambara.
Āḷavaka (& ˚ika) (adj. -- n.) [= āṭavika] dwelling in forests, a forest -- dweller S ii.235. As Np. at Vism 208.
Āḷādvāraka (adj.) at J v.81, 82 is corrupt & should with v. l. perhaps better be read advāraka without doors. Cp. Kern, Toev. 29 (ālāraka?). J v.81 has āḷāraka only.
Āḷāra (adj.) [= aḷāra or uḷāra or = Sk. arāla?] thick, mas- sed, dense or crooked, arched (?), only in cpd. ˚pamha with thick eyelashes Vv 6411 (= gopakhuma VvA 279); Pv iii.35 (= vellita -- dīgha -- nīla -- pamukha). Cp. alāra.
Āḷārika & ˚iya (adj. -- n.) [Sk. ārālika, of uncertain etym.] a cook D i.51 (= bhattakāraka DA i.157); J v.296 (= bhattakāraka C.); 307; vi.276 (˚iya, C. ˚ika = sūpika); Miln 331.
Āḷāhana (nt.) [fr. ā + ḍah or dah, see dahati] a place of cremation, cemetery D i.55; J i.287 (here meaning the funereal fire) 402; iii.505; Pv ii.122; Vism 76; Miln 350; DA i.166; DhA i.26; iii.276; PvA 92, 161, 163 (= sarīrassa daḍḍha -- ṭṭhāna). -- Note. For āḷāhana in meaning "peg, stake" see ālāna.
Āḷika at A iii.352, 384 (an˚) is preferably to be read āḷhika, see āḷhaka.
Āḷha (nt.) = āḷhaka; only at A iii.52 (udak˚), where perhaps better with v. l. to be read as āḷhaka. The id. p. at A ii.55 has ālhaka only.
Āḷhaka (m. & nt.) [Sk. āḍhaka, fr. *āḍha probably meaning "grain"] a certain measure of capacity, originally for grain; in older texts usually applied to a liquid measure (udaka˚). Its size is given by Bdhgh. at SnA 476 as follows: "cattāro patthā āḷhakāni doṇaŋ etc." -- udakāḷhaka S v.400; A ii.55 = iii.337; VvA 155. -- In other connections at J i.419 (aḍḍh˚); iii.541 (mitaŋ āḷhakena = dhañña -- māpaka -- kammaŋ kataŋ C.); Miln 229 (patt˚); DhA iii.367 (aḍḍh˚).
-- thālikā a bowl of the capacity of an āḷhaka Vin i. 240; A iii.369; DhA iii.370 (v. l. bhatta -- thālikā).
Āḷhiya (& āḷhika) (adj.) [fr. *āḷha, Sk. āḍhya, orig. pos- sessing grain, rich in grain, i. e. wealth; semantically cp. dhañña2] rich, happy, fortunate; only in neg. anāḷhiya poor, unlucky, miserable M i.450; ii.178 (+ daḷidda); A iii.352 sq. (so read with v. l. BB. ˚āḷhika for T. ˚āḷika; combd. with daḷidda; v. l. SS. anaddhika); J v. 96, 97 (+ daḷidda; C. na āḷhika).
Āvajati [ā + vajati, vraj] -- 1. to go into, to or towards J iii.434; iv.49, 107. -- 2. to return, come back J v.24, 479.
Āvajjati [not with Senart M Vastu 377 = ava + dhyā, but = Sk. āvṛṇakti ā + vṛj, with pres. act. āvajjeti = Sk. āvarjayati] -- 1. to reflect upon, notice, take in, advert to, catch (a sound), listen J i.81; ii.423; v.3; Miln 106. -- 2. to remove, upset (a vessel), pour out Vin i.286 (kumbhiŋ); J ii.102 (gloss āsiñcati). -- Caus. āvajjeti (q. v.).
Āvajjana (nt.) [fr. āvajjati, cp. BSk. āvarjana in diff. meaning] turning to, paying attention, apprehending; adverting the mind. -- See discussion of term at Cpd. 85, 227 (the C. derive āvajjana fr. āvaṭṭeti to turn towards, this confusion being due to close resemblance of jj and ṭṭ in writing); also Kvu trsl. 221 n. 4 (on Kvu 380 which has āvaṭṭanā), 282 n. 2 (on Kvu 491 āvaṭṭanā). -- Ps ii.5, 120; J ii.243; Vbh 320; Miln 102 sq.; Vism 432; DA i.271.
Āvajjita [pp. of āvajjeti cp. BSk. āvarjita, e. g. Divy 171; Itin 221] bent, turned to, inclined; noticed, observed Miln 297; Vism 432 (citta); Sdhp 433.
Āvajjitatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. āvajjita] inclination of mind, observation, paying attention Ps ii.27 sq.
Āvajjeti [Caus. of āvajjati] 1. to turn over, incline, bend M iii.96; J iv.56 (so read for āvijjhanto); DA i.10 (kāyaŋ). <-> 2. to incline (the mind); observe, reflect, muse, think, heed, listen for. According to Cpd. 227 often paraphrased in C. by pariṇāmeti. -- J i.69, 74, 81, 89, 108, 200; Miln 297; DhA ii.96; PvA 181 (= manasikaroti). -- 3. to cause to yield A iii.27 (perhaps better āvaṭṭ˚). <-> pp. āvajjita (q. v.).
Āvaṭa [Sk. āvṛta, pp. of ā + vṛ] covered, veiled, shut off against, prohibited D i.97, 246; M i.381 (˚dvāra); J vi.267. -- anāvaṭa uncovered, unveiled, exposed, open D i.137 (˚dvāra); iii.191 (˚dvāratā); S i.55; J v.213; Pv iii.64; Miln 283. Cp. āvuta2 & vy˚.
Āvaṭṭa (adj. -- n.) [Sk. āvarta, ā + vṛt] -- 1. turning round, winding, twisting M i.382; S i.32 (dvi -- r -- ā˚ turning twice); J ii.217; SnA 439 (˚gangā). -- 2. turned, brought round, changed, enticed M i.381; DhA ii.153. -- 3. an eddy, whirlpool, vortex M i.461 = A ii.123 (˚bhaya); Miln 122, 196, 377. -- 4. circumference J v.337; Dāvs v.24; DhA iii 184.
Āvaṭṭati [= āvattati] in phrase ā. vivaṭṭati to turn forward & backward Vism 504.
Āvaṭṭana (nt.) [fr. ā + vṛt, cp. āvaṭṭa 2 and āvaṭṭanin] turning, twisting; enticement, snare, temptation J iii.494; DhA ii.153.
Āvaṭṭanā (f.) [most likely for āvajjana. q. v. & see also Kvu trsl. 221, 282] turning to (of the mind), adverting, apprehending Kvu 380, 491.
Āvaṭṭanin (adj.) [fr. āvaṭṭana] turning (away or towards), changing, tempting, enticing M i.375, 381; A ii.190; J ii.330 = iv.471; DA i.250. -- Cp. etymologically the same, but semantically diff. āvattanin.
Āvaṭṭin (adj. -- n.) [fr. āvaṭṭa instead of āvaṭṭana] only at M i.91 in neg. an˚ not enticed by (loc.), i. e. kāmesu. <-> Cp. āvattin.
Āvaṭṭeti [ā + vatteti, Caus. of vṛt, cp. BSk. āvartayati to employ spells Divy 438] to turn round, entice, change, convert, bring or win over M i.375, 381, 383, 505; A iii.27; DA i.272.
Āvatta1 (adj.) [pp. of āvattati] gone away to, fallen back to, in phrase hīnāyɔāvatta (see same phrase under āvattati) M i.460; S ii.50; J i.206.
Āvatta2 (nt.) [Sk. āvarta, of ā + vṛt, cp. āvaṭṭa[ winding, turn, bent J i.70 (in a river); Nett 81 (v. l. āvaṭṭa?), 105 (˚hārasampāta).
Āvattaka (adj.) [āvatta + ka] turning, in dakkhiṇ˚ turning to the right, dextrorsal D ii.18; cp. dakkhiṇâvatta at DA i.259.
Āvattati [ā + vattati, of vṛt] to turn round, come to, go back, go away to, turn to; only in phrase hīnāya āvattati to turn to "the low", i. e. to give up orders & return to the world Vin i.17; M i.460; S ii.231; iv.191; Sn p. 92 (= osakkati SnA 423); Ud 21; Pug 66; Miln 246. <-> pp. āvatta (q. v.). Cp. āvaṭṭati.
Āvattana (adj. -- nt.) [Sk. āvartana] turning; turn, return Nett 113; Miln 251.
Āvattanin (adj.) [fr. āvattana] turning round or back Th 1, 16 (cp. āvaṭṭanin).
Āvattin (adj. -- n.) [fr. āvatta, cp. āvaṭṭin in diff. meaning] returning, coming back, one who returns, in spec. meaning of one who comes back in transmigration, syn. with āgāmin (an˚), only in neg. anāvattin not returning, a non -- returner, with ˚dhamma not liable to return at D i. 156; iii.132; S v.346, 357, 376, 406; M i.91; DA i.313.
Āvatthika (adj.) [ā + vatthika] befitting, original, inherent (one of the 4 kinds of nomenclature) Vism 210 = KhA 107.
Āvapati [a + vap] to give away, to offer, to deposit as a pledge Miln 279.
Āvapana (nt.) [fr. āvapati] sowing, dispersing, offering,de- positing, scattering J i.321.
Āvara (adj.) [fr. ā + vṛ] obstructing, keeping off from J v.325 (so to be read in ariya -- magg -- âvara).
Āvaraṇa (adj. -- n.) [fr. ā + vṛ, cp. āvarati; BSk. āvaraṇa in pañcɔ āvaraṇāni Divy 378] shutting off, barring out, withstanding; nt. hindrance, obstruction, bar Vin i.84 (˚ŋ karoti to prohibit, hinder); ii.262 (id.); D i.246 (syn. of pañca nīvaraṇāni); S v.93 sq.; A iii.63; J i.78 (an˚); v.412 (nadiŋ ˚ena bandhāpeti to obstruct or dam off the river); Sn 66 (pahāya pañcɔ āvaraṇāni cetaso, cp. Nd2 379), 1005 (an˚ -- dassāviṇ); Ps i.131 sq.; ii.158 (an˚); Pug 13; Dhs 1059, 1136; Vbh 341, 342; Miln 21 (dur˚ hard to withstand or oppose). -- dant˚ "screen of the teeth", lip J iv.188; vi.590.
Āvaraṇatā (f.) [abstr. fr. āvaraṇa] keeping away from, withholding from A iii 436.
Āvaraṇīya (adj.) [grd. fr. āvarati], M i.273; an˚ not to be obstructed, impossible to obstruct M iii.3; Miln 157.
Āvarati [ā + vṛ, cp. āvuṇāti] to shut out from (abl.), hold back from, refuse, withhold, obstruct M i.380 (dvāraŋ); Sn 922 (pot. ˚aye, cp. Nd1 368); DA i.235 (dvāraŋ); Dpvs i.38. -- pp. āvaṭa and āvuta2 (q. v.).
Āvalī (f.) [cp. Sk. āvalī & see valī] a row, range J v.69; DA i.140.
Āvasati [ā + vas] to live at or in, to inhabit, reside, stay M ii.72; S i.42; Sn 43, 805, 1134; Nd1 123, 127; Nd2 133; J vi.317. -- pp. āvuttha (q. v.).
Āvasatha [Sk. āvasatha, fr. ā + vas] dwelling -- place, ha- bitation; abode, house, dwelling Vin i 226 (˚âgāra restinghouse); iv.304 (= kavāṭabaddha); S i.94, 229; iv.329; Sn 287, 672; J iv.396; vi.425; Pug 51; Miln 279.
Āvaha (adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. ā + vah] bringing, going, causing Pv ii.924 (sukh˚); Vv 2211 (id); Dāvs ii.37; PvA 86 (upakār˚), 116 (anatth˚); Sdhp 15, 98, 206.
Āvahati [ā + vahati] to bring, cause, entail, give S i.42 = Sn 181, 182 (āvahāti sukhaŋ metri causā); J iii.169; v. 80; Sn 823; Nd1 302; PvA 6. -- Pass. āvuyhati VvA 237 (ppr. ˚amāna).
Āvahana (adj) ( -- ˚) [= āvaha] bringing, causing Th 1, 519; Sn 256.
Āvahanaka (adj. -- nt) [= āvahana] one who brings VvA 114 (sukhassa).
Āva (misery, misfortune) see avā.
Āvāṭa [etym.?] a hole dug in the ground, a pit, a well D i.142 (yaññ˚); J i.99, 264; ii 406; iii.286; iv 46 (caturassa); vi.10; DhA i.223; VvA 63; PvA 225.
Āvāpa [if correct, fr. ā + vā2 to blow with caus. p. -- Cp. J R A S. 1898, 750 sp.] a potter's furnace DhA i.177 (read for āvāsa?), 178.
Āvāra [Sk. āvāra, fr. ā + vṛ] warding off, protection, guard J vi 432 (yanta -- yutta˚, does it mean "cover, shield"?). <-> For cpd. khandhɔāvāra see khandha.
Āvāreti [Sk. āvārayati, ā + Caus. of vṛ] to ward off, hold back, bar, S iv 298; Nett 99.
Āvāsa [Sk. āvāsa; ā + vas] sojourn, stay, dwelling, living; dwelling -- place, residence Vin i.92; D iii.234; S iv.91; A ii 68, 168; iii.46, 262; Sn 406; Dh 73 (cp. DhA ii.77); Nd1 128; J vi.105; Dhs 1122; Pug, 15, 19, 57; KhA 40; DhA i.177 (āvāsaŋ ālimpeti: read āvāpaŋ); PvA 13, 14, 36; VvA 113; Sdhp 247. -- anāvāsa (n. & adj.) uninhabited, without a home; an uninhabited place A iv.345; J ii.77; Pv ii.333; PvA 80 (= anāgāra); VvA 46.
-- kappa the practice of (holding Uposatha in different) residence (within the same boundary) Vin ii.294, 300, 306; Dpvs iv.47, cp. v.18. -- palibodha the obstruction of having a home (in set of 10 Palibodhas) KhA 39; cp. Vism 90 sq. -- sappāyatā suitability of residence Vism 127.
Āvāsika (adj.) [āvāsa + ika] living in, residing at home, being in (constant or fixed) residence, usually appld. to bhikkhus (opp. āgantuka) Vin i.128 sq.; ii.15, 170; iii. 65; v.203 sq.; M i.473; A i.236; iii.261 sq., 366; J iv.310; Pv iv.84 (= nibaddha -- vasanaka PvA 267).
Āvāha [ā + vah] taking in marriage, lit. carrying away to oneself, marriage D i.99; J vi.363; SnA 273, 448; DhA iv.7. Often in cpd. ā˚ vivāha(ka) lit. leading to (one's home) & leading away (from the bride's home), wedding feast D iii.183 (˚ka); J i.452; VvA 109, 157. (v. l. ˚ka).
Āvāhana (nt.) [ā + vshana, of vah] -- 1. = āvāha, i. e. marriage, taking a wife D i.11 (= āvāha -- karaṇa DA i. 96). -- 2. "getting up, bringing together", i. e. a mass, a group or formation, in senā˚ a contingent of an army J iv.91.
Āvi (adv.) [Sk. āviḥ, to Gr. a)i/w to hear, Lat. audio (fr. *auizdiō) to hear] clear, manifest, evident; openly, before one's eyes, in full view. Only in phrase āvi vā raho openly or secret A v.350, 353; Pv ii.716 = DhA iv.21 (āvī v. l.), expld. at PvA 103 by pakāsanaŋ paresaŋ pākaṭavasana. Otherwise in foll. cpds. (with kar & bhū): ˚kamma making clear, evidence, explanation Vin ii.88; iii.24; Pug 19, 23; ˚karoti to make clear, show, explain D iii.121; Sn 84, 85, 349; J v.457; Pug 57; VvA 79, 150; ˚bhavati (˚bhoti) to become visible or evident, to be explained, to get clear J i.136; Vism 287 (fnt. āvibhavissati); DhA ii.51, 82; bhāva appearance, manifestation D i.78; A iii.17; J ii.50, 111; Vism 390 sq. (revelation, opp. tirobhāva). Cp. pātur.
Āvijjhati (āviñjati, āviñchati) [ā + vijjhati of vyadh to pierce; thus recognised by Morris J P T S. 1884, 72, against Trenckner, Notes 59 (to piñj) & Hardy Nett. Ind. = vicchāy] -- 1. to encircle, encompass, comprise, go round, usually in ger. āvijjhitvā (w. acc.) used as prep. round about, near J i.153 (khettaŋ), 170 (pokkharaṇiŋ); DA i.245 (nagaraŋ bahi avijjhitvā round the outer circle of the town). Ordinarily = go round (acc.) at J iv.59 (chārika -- puñjaŋ). -- 2. [as in lit. Sk.] to swing round, brandish, twirl, whirl round Vin iii.127 (daṇḍaŋ āviñji); M iii.141 (matthena āviñjati to churn); J i.313; v.291 (cakkaŋ, of a potter's wheel); SnA 481 (T. āviñj˚, v. l. āvijjh˚; see āracaya˚); DhA ii.277 (āviñchamāna T.; v. l. āsiñciy˚, āvajiy˚, āgañch˚). -- 3. to resort to, go to, approach, incline to S iv.199 (T. āviñch˚; v. l. avicch˚ & āviñj˚); Nett 13. -- 4. to arrange, set in order J ii.406. <-> 5. to pull (?) A iv.86 (kaṇṇasotani āvijjeyyāsi, v. l. āvijj˚, āviñj˚, āvicc˚, āviñch˚; cp. Trenckner, Notes 59 āviñjati "to pull"). -- pp. āviddha (q. v.).
Āvijjhana (so for āviñchana & āviñjana) (adj. -- n.) [fr. āvijj- hati, lit. piercing through, i. e. revolving axis] -- 1. (= āvijjhati 2) swinging round, hanging loose, spinning in āvijjhana -- rajju a loose, rope, esp. in mythology the swinging or whirling rope by which Sakka holds the world's wheel or axis, in the latter sense at DhA ii.143 (T. āviñch˚ (v. l. āvijj˚) = iii.97, 98 (where āviñjanaṭṭhāna for ˚rajju). Otherwise a rope used in connection with the opening & shutting of a door (pulling rope?) Vin ii.120, 148; J v.298, 299 (T. āviñj˚, v. l. āvicch˚ & āvij˚). -- 2. (cp. āvijjhati 3) going to, approach, contact with DhsA 312 (˚rasa, T. āviñj˚, v. l. āviñch˚; or is it "encompassing"? = āvijjhati 1 ?); Vism 444 (āviñjanarasa). -- 3. (cp. āvijjhati 5) pulling, drawing along Vin iii.121 (= ākaḍḍhanā nāma).
Āvijjhanaka (nt.) [fr. āvijjhati in meaning 2] whirling round, that which spins round, the whirling -- round wheel (or pole) of the world (cp. the potter's wheel), the worldaxis DhA ii.146 (T. āviñch˚).
Āviddha [pp. of āvijjhati 2, cp. BSk. āviddha in meaning curved, crooked Av. S i.87 Lal. V. 207] whirling or spinning round, revolving; swung round, set into whirling motion J iv.6 (cakkaŋ = kumbhakāra -- cakkam iva bhamati C.); v.291. What does an -- āviddha at PvA 135 mean?
Āvila (adj.) [is it a haplological contraction from ā + vi + lul to roll about?] stirred up, agitated, disturbed, stained, soiled, dirty A i.9; iii.233; J v.16, 90 (ābila); Nd1 488 (+ luḷita), 489; ThA 251; DA i.226. More frequent as anāvila undisturbed, clean, pure, serene D i.76; S iii. 83; iv,118; A i.9; iii.236; Sn 160; Dh 82, 413; J iii. 157; Miln 35; VvA 29, 30; ThA 251.
Āvilati [fr. āvila or is it a direct contraction of ā + vi + lulati?] to whirl round, to be agitated, to be in motion Miln 259 (+ luḷati).
Āvilatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. āvila] confusion, disturbance, agita- tion Sn 967; Nd1 488.
Āvisati [ā + vīś] to approach, to enter Vin iv.334; Sn 936 (aor. āvisi); J iv.410, 496; Vism 42.
Āvuṇāti [in form = *avṛṇoti, ā + vṛ, cp. āvarati, but in meaning = *āvayati, ā + vā to weave, thus a confusion of the two roots, the latter being merged into the former] to string upon, to fix on to (c. loc.), to impale J i.430; iii.35; v.145; vi.105. -- Caus. II. āvuṇāpeti J iii.218 (sūle). -- pp. āvuta1 (q. v.), whereas the other pp. āvaṭa is the true derivative of ā + vṛ.
Āvuta [pp. of āvuṇāti in meaning of Sk. āvayati, the cor- responding Sk. form being ā + uta = ota] -- 1. strung upon, tied on, fixed on to D i.76 (suttaŋ); ii.13 (id.); A i.286 (tantāvutaŋ web); J iii.52 (valliyā); vi.346 (suttakena); DA i.94 (˚sutta). -- 2. impaled, stuck on (sūle on the pale) J i.430; iii.35; v.497; vi.105; PvA 217, 220.
Āvuta2 = Āvaṭa (see āvuṇāti & āvuta1) covered, obstructed, hindered It 8 (mohena); also in phrase āvuta nivuta ophuta etc. Nd1 24 (ṭ) = Nd2 365 = DA i.59.
Āvuttha [pp. of āvasati] inhabited D ii.50 (an˚); S i.33.
Āvudha (nt.) [Vedic āyudha, fr. ā + yudh to fight] an instrument to fight with, a weapon, stick etc. D iii 219; M ii.100; A iv.107, 110; Sn 1008; J i.150; ii.110; iii. 467; iv.160, 283, 437; Nd2 on Sn 72; Miln 8, 339; DhA ii.2; iv.207; SnA 225, 466 (˚jīvika = issattha). See also āyudha.
Āvuyhamāna ppr. of āvuyhati (Pass. of āvahati), being conveyed or brought VvA 237 (reading uncertain).
Āvuso (voc. pl. m.) [a contracted form of āyusmanto pl. of āyusman, of which the regular Pāli form is āyasmant, with v for y as frequently in Pāli, e. g. āvudha for āyudha] friend, a form of polite address "friend, brother, Sir", usually in conversation between bhikkhus. The grammatical construction is with the pl. of the verb, like bhavaŋ and bhavanto. -- Vin ii.302; D i.151, 157; ii.8; SnA 227; DhA i.9; ii.93; PvA 12, 13, 38, 208.
Āveṭhana (nt.) [ā + veṭhana, veṣṭ] rolling up, winding up or round, fig. explanation Miln 28 (+ nibbeṭhana, lit. rolling up and rolling down, ravelling & unravelling), 231 (˚viniveṭhana).
Āveṭhita [pp. of āveṭheti, ā + veṣṭ, cp. āvedhikā] turned round, slung round or over J iv.383 sq. (v. l. āvedhita & āveḷita, C. expls. by parivattita).
Āveṇi (adj) ( -- ˚) [according to Trenckner, Notes 75 fr. ā + vinā "Sine quā non", but very doubtful] special, peculiar, separate Vin ii.204 (˚uposatha etc.); J i.490 (˚sangha -- kammāni).
Āveṇika (adj.) [fr. āveṇi; cp. BSk. āveṇika Av. Ś i.14, 108; Divy 2, 182, 268, 302] special, extraordinary, exceptional S iv.239; A v.74 sq.; Vism 268; VvA 112 (˚bhāva peculiarity, specialty), KhA 23, 35.
Āveṇiya (adj.) = āveṇika Vin i.71; J iv.358; vi.128.
Āvedha [cp. Sk. āviddha, ā + pp. of vyadh] piercing, hole, wound J ii.276 (v. l. aveddha; C. = viddha -- ṭṭhāne vaṇa).
Āvedhika (adj. f. scil. pannā) [ā + vedhaka of āvedha, vyadh, but confused with āveṭh˚ of ā + veṣṭ, cp. āveṭhana & nibbedhaka] piercing, penetrating; or ravelling, turning, rolling up or round (cp. āvijjhati which is derived from ā + vyadh, but takes its meaning from āveṭheti), discrimination, thinking over J ii.9 (+ nibbedhikā, v. l. for both ṭh).
Āveḷa (adj. & ˚ā f.) [not with Müller P.Gr. 10, 30, 37 = Sk. āpīḍa, but fr. ā + veṣṭh to wind or turn round, which in P. is represented by āveṭheti as well as āvijjhati; ḷ then standing for either ḍh (ṭh) or dh (āvedha, q. v.). There may have been an analogy influence through vell to move to and fro, cp. āveḷita. Müller refers to āveḷā rightly the late dial. (Prk.) āmela] -- 1. turning round, swinging round; diffusion, radiation; protuberance, with reference to the rays of the Buddha at J i.12, 95, 501. <-> 2. (f.) a garland or other ornament slung round & worn over the head Vv 362 (kañcan˚; = āveḷa -- pilandhana VuA 167). See āveḷin.
Āvelita (ḷ?) [pp. of ā + vell, cp. āveḷa & BSk. āviddha curved, crooked Av. Ś i.87, Lal. V. 207] turned round, wound, curved J vi.354 (˚singika with curved horns, v. l. āvellita).
Āveḷin (adj.) [fr. āveḷā] wearing garlands or other head- ornaments, usually in f. ˚inī J v.409 (= kaṇṇālankārehi yuttā C.); Vv 302 (voc. āvelinī, but at id. p. 482 āveline), 323; VvA 125 (on Vv 302 expls. as ratana -- maya -- pupphɔ<-> āveḷavatī).
Āvesana (nt.) [fr. āvisati] entrance; workshop; living -- place, house Vin ii 117 (˚vitthaka, meaning?); M ii 53; Pv ii.915.
Āsa1 contr. -- form of aŋsa in cpd. koṭṭhāsa part., portion etc.: see aŋsa1. Can we compare BSk. āsapātrī (see next).
Āsa2 [Sk. āśa] food, only in cpd. pātarāsa morning food, breakfast Sn 387 (pāto asitabbo ti pātar -- āso piṇḍapātassɔ etaŋ nāmaŋ SnA 374); DhA iv.211; see further ref. under pātar; and pacchā -- āsa aftermath S i.74. Can we compare BSk. āsa -- pātrī (vessel) Divy 246? Der. fr. āsa is āsaka with abstr. ending āsakattaŋ "cating", food, in nānā˚ various food or na + anāsak˚) Sn 249. See also nirāsa, which may be taken either as nir + *āśa or nir + *āsā.
Āsa3 the adj. form of āsā (f.), wish, hope. See under āsā.
Āsa4 archaic 3rd sg. perf. of atthi to be, only in cpd. itihāsa = iti ha āsa "thus it has been".
Āsaŋsa (adj.) [of *āśaŋsā, see next] hoping, expecting something, longing for A i.108 = Pug 27 (expld. by Pug A 208 as "so hi arahattaŋ āsaŋsati patthetī ti āsaŋso"); SnA 321, 336. Cp. nir˚.
Āsaŋsati [for the usual āsiŋsati, ā + śaŋs] to expect, hope for, wish Pug A 208 (= pattheti). See also āsamāna.
Āsaŋsā (f.) [from ā + śaŋs] wish, desire, expectation, hope J iv.92. -- Cp. nirāsaŋsa.
Āsạŋsuka (adj.) [fr. āsaŋsā] full of expectation, longing, hankering after, Th 2, 273 (= āsiŋsanaka ThA 217; trsl. "cadging").
Āsaka (adj.) [of āsa2] belonging to food, having food, only in neg. an˚ fasting S iv.118; Dh 141 (f. ā fasting = bhatta -- paṭikkhepa DhA iii.77); J v.17; vi.63.
Āsakatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. āsaka] having food, feeding, in an˚ fasting Sn 249 (= abhojana SnA 292).
Āsankati [ā + śank] to be doubtful or afraid, to suspect, distrust, J i.151 (pret. āsankittha), 163 (aor. āsanki); ii. 203; SnA 298. -- pp. āsankita (q v.),
Āsankā (f.) [Sk. āśankā fr. ā + śank] fear, apprehension, doubt, suspicion J i.338; ii.383; iii.533; vi.350, 370; DhA iii.485; VvA 110. -- Cp. sāsanka & nirāsanka.
Āsankita (adj.) [pp. of āsankati] suspected, in fear, afraid, apprehensive, doubtful (obj. & subj.) Miln 173, 372 (˚parisankita full of apprehension and suspicion); DhA i.223; VvA 110. -- Cp. ussankita & parisankita.
Āsankin ( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. āsankā] fearing, anxious, apprehensive Sn 255 (bhedā˚); J iii.192 (id.).
Āsanga [ā + sanga fr. sañj to hang on, cp. Sk. āsanga & āsakti] -- 1. adhering, clinging to, attachment, pursuit J iv.11. -- 2. that which hangs on (the body), clothing, garment, dress; adj. dressed or clothed in ( -- ˚); usually in cpd. uttarāsanga a loose (hanging) outer robe e. g. Vin i.289; S iv.290; PvA 73; VvÁ 33 (suddh˚), 51 (id.).
Āsangin (adj.) [fr. āsanga] hanging on, attached to J iv.11.
Āsajja (indecl.) [ger. of āsādeti, Caus. of āsīdati, ā + sad; Sk. āsādya] -- 1. sitting on, going to, approaching; allocated, belonging to; sometimes merely as prep. acc. "near" (cp. āsanna) Sn 418 (āsajja naŋ upāvisi he came up near to him), 448 (kāko va selaŋ ā. nibbijjāpema Gotamaŋ); J ii.95; vi.194; Miln 271. -- 2. put on to (lit. sitting or sticking on), hitting, striking S i.127 (khaṇuŋ va urasā ā. nibbijjapetha Gotamā "ye've thrust as 't were your breast against a stake. Disgusted, come ye hence from Gotama" trsl. p. 159; C. expls. by paharitvā, which comes near the usual paraphrase ghaṭṭetvā) <-> 3. knocking against or "giving one a setting -- to", insulting, offending, assailing D i.107 (ā. ā. avocāsi = ghaṭṭetvā DA i.276); A iii.373 (tādisaŋ bhikkhuŋ ā.); J v.267 (isiŋ ā. Gotamaŋ C. p. 272 āsādetvā); Pv iv.710 (isiŋ ā. = āsādetvã PvA 266). -- 4. "sitting on", i. e. attending constantly to, persevering, energetically, with energy or emphasis, willingly, spontaneously M i.250; D iii.258 = A iv.236 (dānaŋ deti); Vv 106 (dānaŋ adāsiŋ cp. VvA 55 samāgantvā). See āsada, āsādeti, āsīdeti, āsajjana.
Āsajjana (nt.) [fr. āsajja in meaning of no. 3] "knocking against", setting on, insult, offence Vin ii.203 (˚ŋ Tathāgataŋ an insult to the T.; quoted as such at VvA 55, where two meanings of ā. are given, corresponding to āsajja 1 & 3, viz. samāgama & ghaṭṭana, the latter in this quot.) = It 86 (so to be read with v. l.; T. has āpajja naŋ); S i.114 (apuññaŋ pasavi Māro āsajjanaŋ Tathāgataŋ trsl. "in seeking the T. to assail"); J v.208.
Āsati [from as] to sit DA i.208; h. sg. āsi S i.130. - pp. āsīna (q. v.).
Āsatta1 [pp. of ā + sañj] (a) lit. hanging on, in phrase kaṇṭhe āsatto kuṇapo a corpse hanging round one's neck M i.120; J i.5. -- (b) fig. attached to, clinging to J i. 377 (+ satta lagga); ThA 259 (an˚).
Āsatta2 [pp. of ā + śap] accursed, cursed J v.446 (an˚).
Āsatti (f.) [ā + sañj] attachment, hanging on (w. loc.), dependence, clinging Vin ii.156 = A i.138; S i.212; Sn 777 (bhavesu); Nd1 51, 221; Nett 12, 128. -- Cp. nirāsattin.
Āsada [ā + sad; cp. āsajja & āsādeti] -- 1. approach, dealing with, business with (acc.), concern, affair, means of acting or getting Vin ii.195 = J v.336 (mā kuñjara nāgam āsado); M i.326 (metaŋ āsado = mā etaŋ āsado do not meddle with this, lit., be not this any affair); J i 414 (cakkaŋ āsado you have to do with the wheel; interpreted as adj. in meaning patto = finding, getting); vi.528 (interpreted as ankusa a hook, i. e. means of getting something). -- 2. (as adj.) in phrase durāsada hard to sit on, i. e. hard to get at, unapproachable, difficult to attack or manage or conquer Sn p. 107 (cp. SnA 451); J vi.272; Vv 5016 (= anupagamanīyato kenaci pi anāsādanīyato ca durāsado VvA 213); Miln 21; Dpvs v.21; vi.38; Sdhp 384.
Āsana (nt.) [from āsati] sitting, sitting down; a seat, throne M i.469; Vin i.272 (= pallankassa okāsa); S i.46 (ek˚ sitting alone, a solitary seat); A iii.389 (an˚ without a seat); Sn 338, 718, 810, 981; Nd1 131; J iv.435 (āsān' ûdaka -- dāyin giving seat & drink); v.403 (id.); vi.413; DhA ii.31 (dhamm˚ the preacher's seat or throne); SnA 401; PvA 16, 23, 141.
-- âbhihara gift or distinction of the seat J i.81. -- ûpagata endowed with a seat, sitting down Sn 708 (= nisinna SnA 495). -- paññāpaka one who appoints seats Vin ii.305. -- paṭikkhitta one who rejects all seats, or objects to sitting down D i.167; A i.296; ii.206; Pug 55. -- sālā a hall with seating accommodation Vism 69; DhA ii. 65; iv.46.
Āsana2 (?) eating Vism 116 (visam˚, cp. visam -- āsita Miln 302). See, however, māsana.
Āsanaka (nt.) [āsana + ka] a small seat Vv 15.
Āsanika (adj.) [fr. āsana] having a seat; in ek˚ sitting by oneself Vism 69.
Āsandi (f.) [fr. ā + sad] an extra long chair, a deck -- chair Vin i.192; ii.142, 163, 169, 170; D i.7 (= pamāṇâtikkant' āsanaŋ DA i.86), 55 = M i.515 = S iii.307 (used as a bier) A i.181; J i.108. See note at Dial. i.11.
Āsandikā (f.) fr. āsandi] a small chair or tabouret Vin ii. 149; KhA 44.
Āsanna (adj.) [pp. of ā + sad, see āsīdati] near (cp. āsajja1), opp. dūra J ii.154; DhA ii 91; PvA 42, 243.
Āsappanā (fr.) [fr. + sṛp] lit. "creeping on to", doubt, mistrust, always combd. with parisappanā Nd3 1; Dhs 1004 (trsl. "evasion", cp. Dhs trsl. p 116), 1118, 1235; DA i.69.
Āsabha [the guṇa -- and compn. form of usabha, corresponding to Sk. ārṣabha > ṛṣabha, see usabha] (in compn.) a bull, peculiar to a bull, bull -- like, fig. a man of strong & eminent qualities, a hero or great man, a leader, thus in tār˚ Sn 687; nar˚ Sn 684, 696; āsabha -- camma bull's hide J vi. 453 (v. l. usabha˚).
-- ṭṭhāna (as āsabhaṇṭhāna) "bull's place", first place, distinguished position, leadership M i.69; S ii.27; A ii.8 (C. seṭṭha -- ṭṭhāna uttama -- ṭṭhāna); iii.9; v.33 sq.; DA i. 31; KhA 104.
Āsabhin (adj.) [fr. āsabha] bull -- like, becoming to a bull, lordly, majestic, imposing, bold; only in phrase ˚ŋ vācaŋ bhāsati "speak the lordly word" D ii.15, 82; M iii.123j J i.53; DA i.91; cp. Dāvs i.28 (nicchārayi vācaŋ āsabhiŋ).
Āsamāna (adj.) [ppr. of āsaŋsati or āsiŋsati, for the usual earlier āsasāna] wishing, desiring, hoping, expecting Vv 846 (kiŋ ā = kiŋ paccāsiŋ santo VvA 336); Pv iv.124 (= āsiŋsamāna patthayamana PvA 226).
Āsaya [ā + śī, cp. in similar meaning & derivation anusaya. The semantically related Sk. āśraya from ā + śri is in P. represented by assaya. Cp. also BSk. āśayataḥ intentionally, in earnest Divy 281; Av. Ś ii.161] -- 1. abode, haunt, receptacle; dependence on, refuge, support, condition S i.38; Vin iii.151; J ii.99; Miln 257; VvA 60; PvA 210; jal˚ river VvA 47; Pgdp 80; adj. depending on, living in ( -- ˚) Miln 317; Nd1 362 (bil˚, dak˚ etc.). See also āmāsaya, pakkāsaya. -- 2. (fig.) inclination, intention, will, hope; often combd. & compared with anusaya (inclination, hankering, disposition), e. g. at Ps i. 133; ii.158; Vbh 340; Vism 140 (˚posana); PvA 197. <-> SnA 182 (˚vipatti), 314 (˚suddhi), KhA 103 (˚sampatti). Cp. nirāsaya. -- 3. outflow, excretion Pv iii.53 (gabbh˚ = gabbha -- mala PvA 198); Vism 344.
Āsayati [ā + śī; lit. "lie on", cp. Ger. anliegen & Sk. āśaya = Ger. Angelegenheit] to wish, desire, hope, intend J iv.291 (grd. āsāyana, gloss esamāna). See āsaya.
Āsava [fr. ā + sru, would corresp. to a Sk. *āsrava, cp. Sk. āsrāva. The BSk. āśrava is a (wrong) sankritisation of the Pāli āsava, cp. Divy 391 & kṣīnāśrava] that which flows (out or on to) outflow & influx. 1. spirit, the intoxicating extract or secretion of a tree or flower, O. C. in Vin iv.110 (four kinds); B. on D iii.182 (five kinds) DhsA 48; KhA 26; J iv.222; vi.9. -- 2. discharge from a sore, A i.124, 127 = Pug 30. -- 3. in psychology, t.t. for certain specified ideas which intoxicate the mind (bemuddle it, befoozle it, so that it cannot rise to higher things). Freedom from the "Āsavas" constitutes Arahantship, & the fight for the extinction of these āsavas forms one of the main duties of man. On the difficulty of translating the term see Cpd. 227. See also discussion of term āsava (= āsavantī ti āsavā) at DhsA 48 (cp. Expositor pp. 63 sq). See also Cpd. 227 sq., & especially Dhs trsl. 291 sq. -- The 4 āsavas are kām˚, bhav˚, diṭṭh˚, avijj˚, i. e. sensuality, rebirth (lust of life), speculation and ignorance. -- They are mentioned as such at D ii.81, 84, 91, 94, 98, 123, 126; A i.165 sq., 196; ii.211; iii.93, 414; iv.79; Ps i.94, 117; Dhs 1099, 1448; Nd2 134; Nett 31, 114 sq. -- The set of 3, which is probably older (kāma˚, bhava˚, avijjā˚) occurs at M i. 55; A i.165; iii.414; S iv.256; v.56, 189; It 49; Vbh 364. For other connections see Vin i.14 (anupādāya āsavehi cittani vimucciŋsu), 17, 20, 182; ii.202; iii.5 (˚samudaya, ˚nirodha etc.); D i.83, 167; iii.78, 108, 130, 220, 223, 230, 240, 283; M i.7 sq., 23, 35, 76, 219, 279, 445 (˚ṭhāniya); ii.22; iii.72, 277; S ii.187 sq. (˚ehi cittaŋ vimucci); iii.45 (id.); iv.107 (id.), 20; v.8, 28, 410; A i.85 sq. (vaḍḍhanti), 98, 165 (˚samudaya, ˚nirodha etc.), 187; ii.154 (˚ehi cittaŋ vimuttaŋ), 196; iii.21, 93 (˚samudaya, ˚nirodha etc.), 245, 387 sq., 410, 414; iv.13, 146 (˚pariyādāna end of the ā.), 161 (˚vighāta -- pariḷāha); v.70, 237; Th 2, 4, 99, 101 (pahāsi āsave sabbe); Sn 162, 374, 535 (pl. āsavāni), 546, 749, 915, 1100; Dh 93, 253, 292; Nd1 331 (pubb˚); Vbh 42, 64, 426; Pug 11, 13, 27, 30 sq.; Miln 419; DhsA 48; ThA 94, 173; KhA 26; DA i 224; Sdhp 1; Pgdp 65 (piyāsava -- surā, meaning?).
Referring specially to the extinction (khaya) of the āsavas & to Arahantship following as a result are the foll. passages: (1) āsavānaŋ khaya D i.156; S ii.29, 214; iii 57, 96 sq, 152 sq; iv.105, 175; v.92, 203, 220, 271, 284; A i.107 sq., 123 sq., 232 sq., 273, 291; ii.6, 36, 44 sq., 149 sq., 214; iii 69, 114, 131, 202, 306, 319 sq.; iv.83 sq., 119, 140 sq., 314 sq.; v.10 sq., 36, 69, 94 sq, 105, 132, 174 sq., 343 sq.; It 49; Pug 27, 62; Vbh 334, 344; Vism 9; DA i.224; cp. ˚parikkhaya A v 343 sq. See also arahatta formula C. -- (2) khīṇāsava (adj.) one whose Āsavas are destroyed (see khīṇa) S i.13, 48, 53, 146; ii 83, 239; iii.199, 128, 178; iv.217; A i 77, 109, 241, 266; iv.120, 224, 370 sq.; v 40, 253 sq.; Ps ii 173; cp. parikkhīṇā āsavā A iv.418, 434, 451 sq.; āsavakhīṇa Sn 370. -- (3) anāsava (adj.) one who is free from the āsavas, an Arahant Vin ii.148 = 164; D iii.112; S i 130; ii.214, 222; iii.83; iv.128; A i.81, 107 sq., 123 sq., 273, 291; ii.6, 36, 87, 146; iii.19, 29, 114, 166; iv.98, 140 sq., 314 sq., 400; A v.10 sq., 36, 242, 340; Sn 1105, 1133; Dh 94, 126, 386; Th i.100; It 75; Nd2 44; Pv ii.615; Pug 27; Vbh 426; Dhs 1101, 1451; VvA 9. Cp. nirāsava ThA 148. -- Opp. sāsava S iii 47; v.232; A i.81 v.242; Dhs 990; Nett 10; Vism 13, 438.
Āsavati [ā + sru, cp. Sk. āsravati; its doublet is assavati] to flow towards, come to, occur, happen Nett 116.
Āsasāna [either grd. for *āsaŋsāna or contracted form of ppr. med. of āsaŋsati (= āsiŋsati) for *asaŋsamāna] hoping, wishing, desiring, longing for Sn 369 (an˚; SnA 365 however reads āsayāna), 1090; Th 1, 528; J iv.18 (= āsiŋsanto C.), 381; v.391 (= āsiŋsanto C.). See anāsasāna, āsaŋsati, āsamāna & āsayāna.
Āsā (f.) [cp. Sk. āśaḥ f.] expectation, hope, wish, longing, desire; adj. āsa ( -- ˚) longing for, anticipating, desirous of Vin i.255 (˚avacchedika hope -- destroying), 259; D ii. 206; iii.88; M iii.138 (āsaŋ karoti); A i.86 (dve āsā), 107 (vigat -- āso one whose longings have gone); Sn 474, 634, 794, 864; J i.267, 285; v.401; vi.452 (˚chinna = chinnāsa C.); Nd1 99, 261, 213 sq; Vv 3713 (perhaps better to be read with v. l. SS ahaŋ, cp. VvA 172); Pug 27 (vigat˚ = arahattāsāya vigatattā vigatāso Pug A 208); Dhs 1059 (+ āsiŋsanā etc.), 1136; PvA 22 (chinn˚ disappointed), 29 (˚âbhibhūta), 105; Dāvs v.13; Sdhp 78, 111, 498, 609.
Āsāṭikā (f.) [cp. Mārāṭhi āsāḍī] a fly's egg, a nit M i.220 sq.; A v.347 sq., 351, 359; Nett 59; J iii.176.
Āsādeti [Caus. of āsīdati, ā + sad; cp. āsajja & āsanna] - 1. to lay hand on, to touch, strike; fig. to offend, assail, insult M i.371; J i.481; v.197; aor. āsādesi Th 1, 280 (mā ā. Tathāgate); ger. āsādetvā J v.272; Miln 100, 205 (˚ayitvā); PvA 266 (isiŋ), āsādiya J v.154 (āsādiya metri causa; isiŋ, cp. āsajja3), & āsajja (q. v.); infin. āsāduŋ J v.154 & āsādituŋ ibid.; grd. āsādanīya Miln 205; VvA 213 (an˚). -- 2. to come near to (c. acc.), approach, get J iii.206 (khuracakkaŋ).
Āsāḷhā & Āsāḷhī (f.) [Sk. āṣāḍha] N. of a month (June- July) and of a Nakkhatta; only in compn. as Āsaḷha˚ & Āsaḷhi˚, viz. ˚nakkhatta J i.50; SnA 208; ˚puṇṇamā J i.63; DhA i.87; SnA 199; VvA 66; PvA 137; ˚māsa SnA 378 (= vassûpanāyikāya purimabhāge A.); VvA 307 (= gimhānaŋ pacchimo māso).
Āsāvati (f.) N. of a creeper (growing at the celestial grove Cittalatā) J iii.250, 251.
Āsāsati [cp. Sk. āśāsati & āśāsti, ā + śās] to pray for, expect, hope; confounded with śaŋs in āsaŋsati & āsiŋsati (q. v.) & their derivations. -- pp. āsiṭṭha (q. v.).
Āsi & Āsiŋ 3rd & 1st sg. aor. of atthi (q. v.).
Āsiŋsaka (adj.) [fr. ā + siŋsati, cp. āsaŋsā] wishing, aspiring after, praying for Miln 342.
Āsiŋsati [Sk. āśaŋsati, ā + śaŋs, cp. also śās & āsāsati, further abhisaŋsati, abhisiŋsati & āsaŋsati] to hope for, wish, pray for (lit. praise for the sake of gain), desire, (w. acc.) S i.34, 62; Sn 779, 1044, 1046 (see Nd2 135); J i.267; iii.251; iv.18; v.435; vi.43; Nd1 60; Mhvs 30, 100; VvA 337; PvA 226 (ppr. āsiŋsamāna for āsamāna, q. v.).
Āsiŋsanaka (adj.) [fr. āsiŋsanā] hoping for something, lit. praising somebody for the sake of gain, cadging ThA 217 (for āsaŋsuka Th 2, 273).
Āsiŋsanā (f.) [abstr. fr. ā + śaŋs, cp. āsiŋsati] desire, wish, craving J v.28; Dhs 1059, 1136 (+ āsiŋsitatta). As āsīsanā at Nett 53.
Āsiŋsaniya (adj.) [grd. of āsiŋsati] to be wished for, desir- able Miln 2 (˚ratana).
Āsikkhita [pp. of ā + śikṣ, Sk. āśikṣita] sohooled, in- structed PvA 67, 68.
Āsiñcati [ā + sic, cp. abhisiñcati & avasiñcati] to sprinkle, besprinkle Vin i.44; ii.208; J iv.376; Vv 796 (= siñcati VvA 307); PvA 41 (udakena), 104, 213 (ger. ˚itvā). <-> pp. āsitta (q. v.). Cp. vy˚.
Āsiṭṭha [pp. of āsāsati, Sk. āśiṣṭa] wished or longed for PvA 104.
*Āsita1 [= asita1?] "having eaten", but probably māsita (pp. of mṛś to touch, cp. Sk. mṛśita, which is ordinarily in massita), since it only occurs in combns. where m precedes, viz. J ii.446 (dumapakkani -- m -- asita, where C. reading is māsita & expln. khāditvā asita (v. l. āsita) dhāta); Miln 302 (visam -- āsita affected with poison = visamāsita). Cp. also the form māsi(n) touching, eating at J vi.354 (tiṇa˚, expld. by C. as khādaka). -- āsita at J v.70 is very doubtful, v. l. āsina & asita; C. expls. by dhāta suhita p. 73.
*Āsita2 [registered as such with meaning "performed" by Hardy in Index] at VvA 276 is better read with v. l. SS bhāsita ( -- vādana etc.).
Āsitta [pp. of āsiñcati, Sk. āsikta] sprinkled, poured out, anointed J v.87; Pug 31; Miln 286; DhsA 307; DhA i.10; VvA 69.
Āsittaka (adj.) [āsitta + ka] mixed, mingled, adulterated Vin ii.123 (˚ûpadhāna "decorated divan"?); ThA 61, 168 (an˚ for asecanaka, q. v.).
Āsītika (adj.) [fr. asīta] 80 years old M ii.124; J iii.395; SnA 172.
Āsītika (m.) [etym.? Cp. BSk. āsītakī Lal. V. 319] a certain plant M i 80 = 245 (˚pabba).
Āsīdati [cp. Sk. āsīdati, ā + sad] -- 1. to come together, lit. to sit by D i.248 (v. l. BB ādisitvā for āsīditvā, to be preferred?). -- 2. to come or go near, to approach (w. acc.), to get (to) A iii.69 (āsīvisaŋ), 373 (na sādhurūpaŋ āsīde, should perhaps be read without the na); J iv.56. -- 3. to knock against, insult, offend attack J v. 267 (Pot. āsīde = pharusa -- vacanehe kāyakammena vā gbaṭṭento upagaccheyya C.). -- pp. āsanna (q. v.). See also āsajja, āsajjana, āsada & Caus. āsādeti.
Āsīna (adj.) [pp. of ās, see āsati] sitting S i.195 = Nd2 136; Sn 1105, 1136; Dh 227, 386; J i.390; iii.95; v. 340; vi.297; Dāvs ii.17.
Āsīyati [etym. doubtful; Trenckner Miln p. 422 = ā + śyā to freeze or dry up, but taken by him in meaning to thaw, to warm oneself; Müller, P. Gr. 40 same with meaning "cool oneself"; Morris' J.P. T. S. 1884, 72 as ā + śrā or śrī to become ripe, come to perfection, evidently at fault because of śrā etc. not found in Sk. More likely as a Pass. formation to be referred to ā + śī as in āsaya, i. e. to abide etc.] to have one's home, one's abode or support in (loc.), to live in, thrive by means of, to depend on Miln 75 (kaddame jāyati udake āsīyati i. e. the lotus is born in the mud and is supported or thrives by means of the water).
Āsīvisa Derivation uncertain. The BSk. āsīviṣa (e. g. Jtm 3161) is a Sanskritisation of the Pali. To suppose this to come from ahi + visa (snake's poison) would give a wrong meaning, and leave unexplained the change from ahi to āsi] a snake Vin iv.108; S iv.172; A ii.110; iii. 69; J i.245; ii.274; iv.30, 496; v.82, 267; Pug 48; Vism 470 (in comp.); DhA i.139; ii.8, 38; SnA 334, 458, 465; VvA 308.
Āsīsanā see āsiŋsanā.
Āsu expletive particle = assu3 J v.241 (v. l. assu; nipāta- mattaŋ C. p.243).
Āsuŋ 3rd pl. aor. of atthi.
Āsumbhati (& Āsumhati) [ā + śumbh to glide] to bring to fall, throw down or round, sling round Vin iv.263, 265; Vv 5011 (˚itvāna); J iii.435 (aor. āsumhi, gloss khipi).
Āsevati [ā + sev] to frequent, visit; to practise, pursue, indulge, enjoy A i.10; Sn 73 (cp. Nd2 94); Ps ii.93 (maggaŋ). -- pp. āsevita.
Āsevana (nt.) & āsevanā (f.) [fr. āsevati] -- 1. practice, pursuit, indulgence in Vin ii.117; PvA 45. -- 2. succession, repetition Dhs 1367; Kvu 510 (cp. trsl. 294, 362); Vism 538.
Āsevita [pp. of āsevati] frequented, indulged, practised, en- joyed J i.21 (v.141; āsevita -- nisevita); ii.60; Sdhp 93, 237.
Āha [Vedic āha, orig. perfect of ah to speak, meaning "he began to speak", thus in meaning of pres. "he says"] a perfect in meaning of pret. & pres. "he says or he said", he spoke, also spoke to somebody (w. acc.), as at J i.197 (cullalohitaŋ āha). Usually in 3rd person, very rarely used of 2nd person, as at Sn 839, 840 (= kathesi bhaṇasi Nd 188, 191). -- 3rd sg. āha Vin ii.191; Sn 790 (= bhaṇati Nd1 87), 888; J i.280; iii.53 and freq. passim; 3rd pl. āhu Sn 87, 181; Dh 345; J i.59; SnA 377, and āhaŋsu J i.222; iii.278 and freq.
Āhacca1 ger. of āhanati.
Āhacca2 (adj.) [grd. of āharati, corresponding to a Sk. *āhṛtya] 1. (cp. āharati1) to be removed, removable, in ˚pādaka -- pīṭha & ˚mañca a collapsible bed or chair, i e. whose legs or feet can be put on & taken away at pleasure (by drawing out a pin) Vin ii.149 (cp. Vin Texts iii.164 n. 5); iv.40, 46 (def. as "ange vijjhitvā ṭhito hoti" it stands by means of a perforated limb), 168, 169. -- 2. (cp. āharati2) reciting, repeating, or to be quoted, recitation (of the Scriptures); by authority or by tradition M iii.139; DhsA 9, & in cpds. ˚pada a text quoted from Scripture), tradition Miln 148 (˚ena by reference to the text of the Scriptures); ˚vacana a saying of the Scriptures, a traditional or proverbial saying Nett 21 (in def. of suttaŋ).
Āhaṭa [pp. of āharati] brought, carried, obtained Vin i.121; iii.53; D ii.180 (spelt āhata); J iii.512 (gloss ānīta); Dāvs i.58.
Āhata [pp. of āhanati] struck, beaten, stamped; afflicted, affected with ( -- ˚) Vin iv.236 = D iii.238 (kupito anattamano āhata -- citto); Vin i.75, 76; S i.170 (tilak˚, so read for tilakā -- hata, affected with freckles, C. kāḷa -- setādi vaṇṇehi tilakehi āhatagatta, K. S. p. 318); J iii 456; Sdhp 187, 401.
Āhataka [fr. āhata] "one who is beaten", a slave, a worker (of low grade) Vin iv.224 (in def. of kammakāra, as bhaṭaka + ā).
Āhanati [ā + han] to beat, strike, press against, touch ppr. āhananto Miln 21 (dhamma -- bheriŋ); Dāvs iv.50. <-> ger. āhacca touching M i.493; J i.330; vi 2, 200; Sn 716 = uppīḷetva SnA 498; Vism 420. -- pp. āhata (q. v.).
1st sg. fut. āhañhi Vin i.8; D ii.72, where probably to be read as āhañh' (= āhañhaŋ). See Geiger, P.Gr. § 153, 2.
Āhanana (nt.) [fr. ā + han] beating, striking, coming into touch, "impinging" Vism 142 (+ pariyāhanana, in def. of vitakka) = DhsA 114 (cp. Expos. 151); Vism 515 (id.).
Āharaṇa (adj. -- n.) [fr. āharati] to be taken; taking away; only in phrase acorāharaṇo nidhi a treasure not to be taken by thieves Miln 320; Kh viii.9; KhA 224; Sdhp 589.
Āharaṇaka [āharaṇa + ka] one who has to take or bring, a messenger J ii.199; iii.328.
Āharati [ā + hṛ] -- 1. to take, take up, take hold of, take out, take away M i.429 (sallaŋ); S i 121; iii.123; J i.40 (ger. āharitvā "with"), 293 (te hattaŋ); Nd2 540c (puttamaŋsaŋ, read āhāreyya?); Pv ii.310; DA i.186, 188 <-> 2. to bring, bring down, fetch D ii.245; J iv 159 (nāvaŋ v. l. āhāhitvā); v.466; VvA 63 (bhattaŋ); PvA 75. <-> 3. to get, acquire, bring upon oneself J v.433 (padosaŋ); DhA ii.89. -- 4. to bring on to, put into (w. loc.); fig. & intrs. to hold on to, put oneself to, touch, resort to M i.395 (kaṭhalaŋ mukhe ā.; also inf. āhattuŋ); Th 1, 1156 (pāpacitte ā.; Mrs. Rh. D. Brethren ver. 1156, not as "accost" p. 419, n.). -- 5. to assault, strike, offend (for pāhari?) Th 1, 1173. -- 6. (fig.) to take up, fall or go back on (w. acc.), recite, quote, repeat (usually with desanaŋ & dasseti of an instructive story or sermon or homily) J iii.383 (desanaŋ), 401; v.462 (vatthuŋ āharitvā dassesi told a story for example); SnA 376; PvA 38, 39 (atītaŋ), 42, 66, 99 (dhamma -- desanaŋ). See also payirudāharati. <-> pp. āhaṭa (q. v.). -- Caus. II. āhārapeti to cause to be brought or fetched; to wish to take, to call or ask for J iii.88, 342; v.466; PvA 215.
Āharima (adj.) [fr. āharati] "fetching", fascinating, captiv- ating, charming Vin iv.299; Th 2, 299; ThA 227; VvA 14, 15, 77.
Āhariya [grd. of āharati] one who is to bring something J iii.328.
Āhavana & Āhavanīya see under āhuneyya.
Āhāra [fr. ā + hṛ, lit. taking up or on to oneself] feeding, support, food, nutriment (lit & fig.). The term is used comprehensively and the usual enumn. comprises four kinds of nutriment, viz. (1) kabaḷinkāra āhāro (bodily nutriment, either oḷāriko gross, solid, or sukhumo fine), (2) phassāhāro n. of contact, (3) manosañcetanā˚ n. of volition (= cetanā S. A. on ii.11 f.), (4) viññāṇ˚ of consciousness. Thus at M i.261; D iii.228, 276; Dhs 71 -- 73; Vism 341. Another definition of Dhammapāla's refers it to the fourfold tasting as asita (eaten), pīta (drunk), khāyita (chewed), sāyita (tasted) food PvA 25. A synonym with mūla, hetu, etc. for cause, Yamaka, i.3; Yam. A (J.P.T.S., 1910 -- 12) 54. See on term also Dhs trsl. 30. -- Vin i.84; D i.166; S i.172; ii.11, 13, 98 sq. (the 4 kinds, in detail); iii.54 (sa˚); v.64, 391; A iii.51 (sukhass˚), 79, 142 sq., 192 sq.; iv.49, 108; v.52 (the four), 108, 113 (avijjāya etc.), 116 (bhavataṇhāya), 269 sq. (nerayikānaŋ etc.); Sn 78, 165, 707, 747; Nd1 25; Ps i.22 (the four) 122 (id.), 55, 76 sq; Kvu 508; Pug 21, 55; Vbh 2, 13, 72, 89, 320, 383, 401 sq. (the four); Dhs 58, 121, 358, 646; Nett 31, 114, 124; DhsA 153, 401; DhA i.183 (˚ŋ pacchindati to bring up food, to vomit); ii.87; VvA 118; PvA 14, 35, 112, 148 (utu˚ physical nutriment); Sdhp 100, 395, 406; A v.136 gives ten āhāra opposed to ten paripanthā. -- an˚ without food, unfed M i.487 (aggi); S iii.126; v.105; Sn 985.
-- ûpahāra consumption of food, feeding, eating Vin iii. 136. -- ṭhitika subsisting or living on food D iii.211, 273; A v.50, 55; Ps i.5, 122. -- pariggaha taking up or acquirement of food Miln 244 or is it "restraint or abstinence in food"? Same combn. at Miln 313. -- maya "food -- like", feeding stuff, food J iii.523. -- lolatā greed after food SnA 35. -- samudaya origin of nutriment S iii.59.
Āhāratthaŋ [āhāra + tta] the state of being food. In the idiom āhārattaṇ pharati; Vin i.199, of medicine, ʻ to penetrate into food -- ness ʼ, to come under the category of food; Miln 152, of poison, to turn into food. [According to Oldenberg (Vin i.381) his MSS read about equally ˚attaŋ and ˚atthaŋ. Trenckner prints ˚atthaŋ, and records no variant (see p. 425)].
Āhāreti [Denom. fr. āhāra] to take food, eat, feed on S ii.13; iii.240; iv.104; A i.114, 295; ii.40, 145, 206; iv. 167; Nd2 540c (āhāraŋ & puttamaŋsaŋ cp. S ii.98).
Āhika ( -- ˚) (adj.) [der. fr. aha2] only in pañcāhika every five days (cp. pañcāhaŋ & sattāhaŋ) M iii.157.
Āhiṇḍati [ā + hiṇḍ, cp. BSk. āhiṇḍate Divy 165 etc.] to wander about, to roam, to be on an errand, to be engaged in (w. acc.) Vin i.203 (senāsana -- cārikaŋ), 217; ii. 132 (na sakkoti vinā daṇḍena āhiṇḍituŋ); iv.62; J i.48, 108, 239; Nd2 540b; Pv iii.229 (= vicarati PvA 185); Vism 38, 284 (aṭaviŋ); VvA 238 (tattha tattha); PvA 143.
Āhita [pp. of ā + dhā] put up, heaped; provided with fuel (of a fire), blazing Sn 18 (gini = ābhato jalito vā SnA 28). See sam˚.
Āhu 3rd pl. of āha (q. v.).
Āhuti (f.) [Vedic āhuti, ā + hu] oblation, sacrifice; vener- ation, adoration M iii 167; S i.141; Th 1, 566 (˚īnaŋ paṭiggaho recipient of sacrificial gifts); J i.15; v.70 (id.); Vv 6433 (paramâhutiŋ gato deserving the highest adoration); Sn 249, 458; Kvu 530; SnA 175; VvA 285.
Āhuna = āhuti, in āhuna -- pāhuna giving oblations and sacrificing VvA 155; by itself at Vism 219.
Āhuneyya (adj.) [a grd. form. fr. ā + hu, cp. āhuti] sacrificial, worthy of offerings or of sacrifice, venerable, adorable, worshipful D iii.5, 217 (aggi); A ii.56, 70 (sāhuneyyaka), 145 sq. (id.); iv.13, 41 (aggi); It 88 (+ pāhuneyya); Vv 6433 (cp. VvA 285). See def. at Vism 219 where expld. by "āhavanīya" and "āhavanaŋ arahati" deserving of offerings.
Āhundarika (adj.) [doubtful or āhuṇḍ˚?] according to Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 73 "crowded up, blocked up, impassable" Vin i.79; iv.297; Vism 413 (˚ŋ andha -- tamaŋ).
I in i -- kāra the letter or sound i SnA 12 (˚lopa), 508 (id.).
Ikka [Sk. ṛkṣa, of which the regular representation is P. accha2] a bear J vi.538 [= accha C.).
Ikkāsa (?) [uncertain as regard meaning & etym.] at Vin ii.151 (+ kasāva) is trsl. by "slime of trees", according to Bdhgh's expln. on p. 321 (to C. V. vi.3, 1), who however reads nikkāsa.
Ikkhaṇa (nt.) [fr. īkṣ] seeing Vism 16.
Ikkhaṇika [fr. īkṣ to look or see, cp. akkhi] a fortune- teller Vin iii.107; S ii.260; J i.456, 457; vi.504.
Ikkhati [fr. īkṣ] to look J v.153; ThA 147; DhsA 172.
Ingita (nt.) [pp. of ingati = iñjati] movement, gesture, sign J ii.195, 408; vi.368, 459.
Ingha (indecl.) [Sk. anga prob. after P. ingha (or añja, q. v.); fr. iñjati, cp. J.P.T.S. 1883, 84] part. of exhortation, lit. "get a move on", come on, go on, look here, Sn 83, 189, 862, 875 = 1052; J v.148; Pv iv.57; Vv 539 (= codan'atthe nipāto VvA 237); VvA 47; DhA iv.62.
Inghāḷa [according to Morris J.P. T.S. 1884, 74 = angāra, cp. Marāthī ingala live coal] coal, embers, in inghāḷakhu Th 2, 386 a pit of glowing embers (= angāra -- kāsu ThA 256). The whole cpd. is doubtful.
Icc' see iti.
Iccha ( -- ˚) (adj.) [the adj. form of icchā] wishing, longing, having desires, only in pāp˚ having evil desires S i.50; ii.156; an˚ without desires S i.61, 204; Sn 707; app˚ id. Sn 628, 707.
Icchaka ( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. iccha] wishing, desirous, only in nt. adv. yad -- icchikaŋ (and yen˚) after one's wish or liking M iii.97; A iii.28.
Icchati1 [Sk. icchati, iṣ, cp. Av. isaiti, Obulg. iskati, Ohg. eiscōn, Ags. āscian = E. ask; all of same meaning "seek, wish"] to wish, desire, ask for (c. acc.), expect S i.210 (dhammaŋ sotuŋ i.); Sn 127, 345, 512, 813, 836; Dh 162, 291; Nd1 3, 138, 164; Nd2 s. v.; Pv ii.63; Pug 19; Miln 269, 327; SnA 16, 23, 321; KhA 17; PvA 20, 71, 74; Pot. icche Dh 84; Sn 835 Pv ii.66 & iccheyya D ii.2, 10; Sn 35; Dh 73, 88; ppr. icchaŋ Sn 826, 831, 937; Dh 334 (phalaŋ) aor. icchi PvA 31. -- grd. icchitabba PvA 8. -- pp. iṭṭha & icchita (q. v.). <->
Note. In prep. -- cpds. the root iṣ2 (icchati) is confused with root iṣ1 (iṣati, eṣati) with pp. both ˚iṭṭha and ˚iṣita. Thus ajjhesati, pp. ajjhiṭṭha & ajjhesita; anvesati (Sk. anvicehati); pariyesati (Sk. parīcchati), pp. pariyiṭṭha & pariyesita.
Icchati2 [Sk. rcchati of ṛ, concerning which see appeti] see aticchati & cp. icchatā.
Icchatā ( -- ˚) (f.) [abstr. fr. icchā] wishfulness, wishing: only in aticchatā too great wish for, covetousness, greed Vbh 350 (cp. aticchati, which is probably the primary basis of the word); mah˚ & pāp˚ Vbh 351, 370.
Icchana (nt.) [fr. iṣ2, cp. Sk. īpsana] desiring, wish J iv. 5; vi.244.
Icchā (f.) [fr. icchati, iṣ2] wish, longing, desire D ii.243; iii.75; S i.40 (˚dhūpāyito loko), 44 (naraŋ parikassati); A ii.143; iv.293 sq.; 325 sq.; v.40, 42 sq.; Sn 773, 872; Dh 74, 264 (˚lobha -- samāpanna); Nd1 29, 30; Pug 19; Dhs 1059, 1136; Vbh 101, 357, 361, 370; Nett 18, 23, 24; Asl. 363; DhsA 250 (read icchā for issā? See Dhs trsl. 100); SnA 108; PvA 65, 155; Sdhp 242, 320.
-- âvacara moving in desires M i.27 (pāpaka); Nett 27. -- âvatiṇṇa affected with desire, overcome by covetousness Sn 306. -- pakata same Vin i.97; A iii.119, 191, 219 sq.; Pug 69; Miln 357; Vism 24 (where Bdhgh however takes it as "icchāya apakata" and puts apakata = upadduta). -- vinaya discipline of one's wishes D iii.252, A iv.15; v.165 sq.
Icchita [pp. of icchati] wished, desired, longed for J i.208; DhsA 364; PvA 3, 53, 64 (read anicchita for anijjhiṭṭha, which may be a contamination of icchita & iṭṭha), 113, 127 (twice).
Ijjhati [Vedic ṛdhyate & ṛdhnoti; Gr. a)/lqomai to thrive, Lat. alo to nourish, also Vedic iḍā refreshment & P. iddhi power] to have a good result, turn out a blessing. succeed, prosper, be successful S i.175 ("work effectively" trsl.; = samijjhati mahapphalaŋ hoti C.); iv.303; Sn 461, 485; J v.393; Pv ii.111; ii.913 (= samijjhati PvA 120); Pot. ijjhe Sn 458, 459; pret. ijjhittha (= Sk. ṛdhyiṣṭha) Vv 206 (= nippajjittha mahapphalo ahuvattha VvA 103). <-> pp. iddha. See also aḍḍha2 & aḍḍhaka. Cp. sam˚.
Ijjhana (nt.) & ˚ā (f.) [fr. ijjhati] success, carrying out suc- cessfully Ps i.17 sq., 74, 181; ii.125, 143 sq., 161, 174; Vbh 217 sq.; Vism 266, 383 (˚aṭṭhena iddhi); DhsA 91, 118, 237.
Iñjati [Vedic ṛñjati (cp. P. ajjati). Also found as ingati (so Veda), and as ang in Sk. anga = P. añja & ingha & Vedic pali -- angati to turn about. See also ānejja & añjati1] to shake, move, turn about, stir D i.56; S i.107, 132, 181 (aniñjamāna ppr. med. "impassive"); iii.211; Th 1, 42; 2, 231; Nd2 s. v. (+ calati vedhati); Vism 377; DA i.167. -- pp. iñjita (q. v.).
Iñjanā (f.) & ˚aŋ (nt.) [fr. iñj, see iñjati] shaking, movement, motion Sn 193 (= calanā phandanā SnA 245); Nett 88 (= phandanā C.). an˚ immobility, steadfastness Ps i.15; ii.118.
Iñjita [pp. of iñjati] shaken, moved Th 1, 386 (an˚). Usually as nt. iñjitaŋ shaking, turning about, movement, vacillation M i.454; S i.109; iv.202; A ii.45; Sn 750, 1040 (pl. iñjitā), 1048 (see Nd2 140); Dh 255; Vbh 390. <-> On the 7 iñjitas see J.P. T.S. 1884, 58.
Iñjitatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. iñjita nt.] state of vacillation, wavering, motion S v.315 (kāyassa).
Iṭṭha (adj.) [pp. of icchati] pleasing, welcome, agreeable, pleasant, often in the idiomatic group iṭṭha kanta manāpa (of objects pleasing to the senses) D i.245; ii.192; M i.85; S iv.60, 158, 235 sq.; v.22, 60, 147; A ii.66 sq.; v.135 (dasa, dhammā etc., ten objects affording pleasure); Sn 759; It. 15; Vbh 2, 100, 337. -- Alone as nt. meaning welfare, good state, pleasure, happiness at Sn 154 (+ aniṭṭha); Nett 28 (+ aniṭṭha); Vism 167 (id.); PvA 116 (= bhadraŋ), 140. -- aniṭṭha unpleasant, disagreeable PvA 32, 52, 60, 116. -- See also pariy˚, in which iṭṭha stands for eṭṭha.
Iṭṭhakā (Itthakā) (f.) [BSk. iṣṭakā, e. g. Divy 221; from the Idg. root *idh > *aidh to burn, cp. Sk. idhma firewood, inddhe to kindle (idh or indh), edhaḥ fuel; Gr. a)i/qw burn, ai(_qos fire -- brand; Lat. aedes, aestas & aestus; more especially Av. ištya tile, brick] -- 1. a burnt brick, a tile Vin ii 121 (˚pākara a brick wall, distinguished fr. silāpakāra & dāru˚); J iii.435, 446 (pākār iṭṭhikā read ˚aṭṭhakā); v.213 (rattiṭṭhikā); Vism 355 (˚dārugomaya); PvA 4 (˚cuṇṇa -- makkhita -- sīsa the head rubbed with brickpowder, i. e. plaster; a ceremony performed on one to be executed, cp. Mṛcchakaṭika x.5 piṣṭa -- cūṛnɔâvakīrṇaśca puruṣo ɔhaŋ paśūkṛtaḥ with striking equation iṣṭaka > piṣṭa). <-> 2. pl. (as suvaṇṇa˚) gold or gilt tiles used for covering a cetiya or tope DhA iii.29, 61; VvA 157.
Iṭṭhi˚ in ˚khagga -- dhāra at J vi.223 should be read iddha.
Iṇa (nt.) [Sk. ṛṇa, see also P. an -- aṇa] debt D i.71, 73; A iii.352; v.324 (enumd. with baddha, jāni & kali); Sn 120; J i.307; ii.388, 423; iii.66; iv.184 (iṇagga for nagga?); 256; v.253 (where enumd. as one of the 4 paribhogas, viz. theyya˚, iṇa˚, dāya˚, sāmi˚); vi.69, 193; Miln 375; PvA 273, 276, iṇaŋ gaṇhāti to borrow money or take up a loan Vism 556; SnA 289; PvA 3. -- iṇaŋ muñcati to discharge a debt J iv.280; v.238; ˚ŋ sodheti same PvA 276; labhati same PvA 3.
-- apagama absence of debt ThA 245. -- gāhaka a borrower Miln 364. -- ghāta stricken by debt Sn 246 (= iṇaŋ gahetva tassa appadānena iṇaghāta). -- ṭṭha (with iṇaṭṭa as v. l. at all passages, see aṭṭa) fallen into or being in debt M i.463 = S iii.93 = It 89 = Miln 279. -- paṇṇa promissory note J i.230; iv.256. -- mokkha release from debt J iv.280; v.239. -- sādhaka negotiator of a loan Miln 365.
Iṇāyika [fr. iṇa] one connected with a debt, viz. (1) a creditor S i.170; J iv.159, 256; vi.178; ThA 271 see also dhanika); PvA 3. -- (2) a debtor Vin i.76; Nd1 160.
Ita [pp. of eti, i] gone, only in cpd. dur -- ita gone badly, as nt. evil, wrong Davs i.61; otherwise in compn. with prep., as peta, vīta etc.
Itara1 (adj.) [Ved. itara = Lat. iterum a second time; compar. of pron. base *i, as in ayaŋ, etaŋ, iti etc.] other, second, next; different Dh 85, 104, 222; J ii.3; iii.26; iv.4; PvA 13, 14, 42, 83, 117. In repetition cpd. itarîtara one or the other, whatsoever, any Sn 42; J v.425; Nd2 141; Miln 395; KhA 145, 147; acc. itarîtaraŋ & instr. itarîtarena used as adv. of one kind or another, in every way, anyhow [cp. BSk. itaretara M Vastu iii. 348 and see Wackernagel Altind. Gram. II. Ś 121 c.] J vi 448 (˚ŋ); Dh 331 (˚ena); Vv 841 (text reads itritarena, v. l. itaritarena, expld. by itaritaraŋ VvA 333).
Itara2 (adj.) freq. spelling for ittara (q. v.).
Iti (ti) (indecl.) [Vedic iti, of pron. base *i, cp. Sk. itthaŋ thus, itthā here, there; Av. ipa so; Lat. ita & item thus. Cp. also P. ettha; lit. "here, there (now), then"] emphatic<-> deictic particle "thus". Occurs in both forms iti & ti, the former in higher style (poetry), the latter more familiar in conversational prose. The function of "iti" is expld. by the old Pāli C. in a conventional phrase, looking upon it more as a "filling" particle than trying to define its meaning viz. -- itī ti padasandhi padasaŋsaggo padapāripurī akkharasamavāyo etc." Nd1 123 = Nd2 137. The same expln. also for iti' haŋ (see below iv.) -- I. As deictic adv. "thus, in this way" (Vism 423 iti = evaŋ) pointing to something either just mentioned or about to be mentioned: (a) referring to what precedes Sn 253 (n'eso maman ti iti naŋ vijaññā), 805; It 123 (ito devā. . . taŋ namassanti); Dh 74 (iti bālassa sankappo thus think the -- foolish), 286 (iti bālo vicinteti); Vv 7910 (= evaŋ VvA 307); VvA 5. -- (b) referring to what follows D i.63 (iti paṭisañcikkhati); A i.205 (id.) -- II. As emphatic part. pointing out or marking off a statement either as not one's own (reported) or as the definite contents of (one's own or other's) thoughts. On the whole untranslatable (unless written as quotation marks), often only setting off a statement as emphatic, where we would either underline the word or phrase in question, or print it in italics, or put it in quot. marks (e. g. bālo ti vuccati Dh 63 = bālo vuccati). -- 1. in direct speech (as given by writer or narrator), e. g. sādhu bhante Kassapa lābhataŋ esā janatā dassanāyā ti. Tena hi Sīha tvaŋ yeva Bhagavato ārocehī ti. Evaŋ bhante ti kho Sīho . . . . D i.151. -- 2. in indirect speech: (a) as statement of a fact "so it is that" (cp. E. "viz.", Ger. "und zwar"), mostly untranslated Kh iv. (arahā ti pavuccati); J i.253 (tasmā pesanaka -- corā t' eva vuccanti); iii.51 (tayo sahāyā ahesuŋ makkato sigālo uddo ti); PvA 112 (ankuro pañca -- sakaṭasatehi . . . aññataro pi brāhmaṇo pañca -- sakaṭasatehī ti dve janā sakata -- sahassehi . . . patipannā). -- (b) as statement of a thought "like this", "I think", so, thus Sn 61 ("sango eso" iti ñatvā knowing "this is defilement"), 253 ("neso maman" ti iti naŋ vijaññā), 783 ("iti' han" ti), 1094 (etaŋ dīpaŋ anāparaŋ Nibbānaŋ iti naŋ brūmi I call this N.), 1130 (aparā pāraŋ gaccheyya tasmā "Parāyanaŋ" iti). -- III. Peculiarities of spelling. (1) in combn. with other part. iti is elided & contracted as follows: icc' eva, t' eva, etc. -- (2) final a, i, u preceding ti are lengthened to ā, ī, ū, e. g. mā evaŋ akatthā ti DhA i.7; kati dhurānī ti ibid; dve yeva dhurāni bhikkhū ti ibid. <-> IV. Combinations with other emphatic particles: + eva thus indeed, in truth, really; as icc' eva Pv i.119 (= evam eva PvA 59); t' eva J i.253; Miin 114; tv' eva J i.203; ii.2. -- iti kira thus now, perhaps, I should say D i.228, 229, 240. -- iti kho thus, therefore D i.98, 103; iii.135. iti vā and so on (?), thus and such (similar cases) Nd1 13 = Nd2 420 A1. -- iti ha thus surely, indeed Sn 934, 1084 (see below under ītihītihaŋ cp. SnA Index 669: itiha? and itikirā); It 76; DA i.247, as iti haŋ at Sn 783 (same expln. at Nd1 71 as for iti). -- kin ti how J ii.159.
-- kirā (f.) [a substantivised iti kira] hearsay, lit. "so I guess" or "I have heard" A i.189 = ii.191 sq. = Nd2 151. Cp. itiha. -- bhava becoming so & so (opp. abhava not becoming) Vin ii.184 (˚abhava); D i.8 (ip = iti bhavo iti abhavo DA i.91); A ii.248; It 109 (id.); syn. with itthabhava (q. v.). -- vāda "speaking so & so", talk, gossip M i.133; S v.73; A ii.26; It iii.35. -- vuttaka (nt.) [a noun formation fr. iti vuttaŋ] "so it has been said", (book of) quotations, "Logia", N. of the fourth book of the Khuddaka -- nikāya, named thus because every sutta begins with vuttaŋ h' etaŋ Bhagavatā "thus has the Buddha said" (see khuddaka and navanga) Vin iii.8; M i.133; A ii.7, 103; iii.86, 177, 361 sq.; Pug 43, 62; KhA 12. Kern, Toev. s. v. compares the interesting BSk. distortion itivṛttaŋ. -- hāsa [= iti ha āsa, preserving the Vedic form āsa, 3rd sg. perf. of atthi] "thus indeed it has been", legendary lore, oral tradition, history; usually mentioned as a branch of brahmanic learning, in phrase itihāsa -- pañca -- mānaŋ padako veyyākaraṇo etc. D i.88 = (see DA i.247); A i.163; iii.223; Sn 447, 1020. Cp. also M Vastu i.556. -- hītiha [itiha + itiha] "so & so" talk, gossip, oral tradition, belief by hearsay etc. (cp. itikirā & anītiha. Nd2 spells ītihītiha) M i.520; S i.154; Sn 1084; Nd2 151.
Ito (indecl.) [Vedic itaḥ, abl. -- adv. formation fr. pron. base *i, cp. iti, ayaŋ etc.] adv. of succession or motion in space & time "from here". "from now". (1) with ref. to space: (a) from here, from this, often implying the present existence (in opp. to the "other" world) It 77; Sn 271 (˚ja. ˚nidāna caused or founded in or by this existence = attabhāvaŋ sandhāy' āha SnA 303), 774 (cutāse), 870 (˚nidāna), 1062 (from this source, i. e. from me), 1101; Pv i.57 (ito dinnaŋ what is given in this world); i.62 (i. e. manussalokato PvA 33); i.123 (= idhalokato PvA 64); Nett 93 (ito bahiddhā); PvA 46 (ito dukkhato mutti). -- (b) here (with implication of movement), in phrases ito c' ito here and there PvA 4, 6; and ito vā etto vā here & there DhA ii.80. -- (2) with ref. to time: from here, from now, hence (in chronological records with num. ord. or card., with ref. either to past or future). (a) referring to the past, since D ii.2 (ito so ekanavuto kappo 91 kappas ago); Sn 570 (ito aṭṭhame, scil. divase 8 days ago SnA 457; T. reads atthami); VvA 319 (ito kira tiŋsa -- kappa -- sahasse); PvA 19 (dvā navuti kappe 92 kappas ago), 21 (id.), 78 (pañcamāya jātiyā in the fifth previous re -- birth). -- (b) referring to the future, i. e. henceforth, in future, from now e. g. ito sattame divase in a week VvA 138; ito paraŋ further, after this SnA 160, 178, 412, 549; PvA 83; ito paṭthāya from now on, henceforward J i.63 (ito dāni p.); PvA 41.
Ittara (sometimes spelt itara) (adj.) [Vedic itvara in meaning "going", going along, hence developed meaning "passing"; fr. i] -- 1. passing, changeable, short, temporary, brief, unstable M i.318 (opp. dīgharattaŋ); A ii.187; J i.393; iii.83 (˚dassana = khaṇika˚ C.), iv.112 (˚vāsa temporary abode); Pv i.1111 (= na cira -- kāla -- ṭṭhāyin anicca vipariṇāma -- dhamma PvA 60); DA i.195; PvA 60 (= paritta khaṇika). -- 2. small, inferior, poor, unreliable, mean M ii.47 (˚jacca of inferior birth); A ii.34; Sn 757 (= paritta paccupaṭṭhāna SnA 509); Miln 93, 114 (˚pañña of small wisdom). This meaning (2) also in BSk. itvaṛa, e. g. Divy 317 (dāna).
Ittaratā (f.) [fr. ittara] changeableness Miln 93 (of a woman).
Ittha (indecl.) [the regular representative of Vedic ittha here, there, but preserved only in cpds. while the Pāli form is ettha] here, in this world (or "thus, in such a way"), only in cpd. ˚bhāv' aññathā -- bhāva such an (i. e. earthly) existence and one of another kind, or existence here (in this life) and in another form" (cp. itibhāva & itthatta) Sn 729, 740 = 752; It 9 (v. l. itthi˚ for iti˚) = A ii.10 = Nd2 172a; It 94 (v. l. ittha˚). There is likely to have been a confusion between ittha = Sk. itthā & itthaŋ = Sk. itthaŋ (see next).
Itthaŋ (indecl.) [adv. fr. pron. base ˚i, as also iti in same meaning] thus, in this way D i.53, 213; Dāvs iv.35; v.18.
-- nāma (itthan˚) having such as name, called thus, socalled Vin i.56; iv.136; J i.297; Miln 115; DhA ii.98. -- bhūta being thus, of this kind, modal, only in cpd. ˚lakkhaṇa or ˚ākhyāna the sign or case of modality, i. e. the ablative case SnA 441; VvA 162, 174; PvA 150.
Itthatta1 (nt.) [ittha + *tvaŋ, abstr. fr. ittha. The curious BSk. distortion of this word is icchatta M Vastu 417] being here (in this world), in the present state of becoming, this (earthly) state (not "thusness" or "life as we conceive it", as Mrs. Rh. D. in K. S. i.177; although a confusion between ittha & itthaŋ seems to exist, see ittha); "life in these conditions" K. S. ii.17; expld. by itthabhāva C. on S i.140 (see K. S. 318). -- See also freq. formula A of arahatta. -- D i.18, 84; A i.63; ii.82, 159, 203; Sn 158; Dhs 633; Pug 70, 71; DA i.112.
Itthatta2 (nt.) [itthi + *tvaŋ abstr. fr. itthi] state or con- dition of femininity, womanhood, muliebrity Dhs 633 (= itthi -- sabhāva DhsA 321).
Itthi & Itthī (f.) [Vedic stri, Av. strī woman, perhaps with Sk. sātuḥ uterus fr. Idg. ˚sī to sow or produce, Lat. sero, Goth. saian, Ohg. sāen, Ags. sāwan etc., cp. also Cymr. hīl progeny, Oir. sīl seed; see J. Schmidt, K. Z. xxv.29. The regular representative of Vedic strī is P. thī, which only occurs rarely (in poetry & compn.) see thī] woman, female; also (usually as -- ˚) wife. Opp. purisa man (see e. g. for contrast of itthi and purisa J v.72, 398; Nett 93; DhA i.390; PvA 153). -- S i.33 (nibbānass' eva santike), 42, 125 (majjhim˚, mah˚), 185; A i.28, 138; ii.115, 209; iii.68, 90, 156; iv.196 (purisaŋ bandhati); Sn 112, 769 (nom. pl. thiyo = itthi -- saññikā thiyo SnA 513); J i.286 (itthi doso), 300 (gen. pl. itthinaŋ); ii.415 (nom. pl. thiyo); v.397 (thi -- ghātaka), 398 (gen. dat. itthiyā), v.425 (nom pl. itthiyo); Vbh 336, 337; DA i.147; PvA 5, 44, 46, 67, 154 (amanuss˚ of petīs); Sdhp 64, 79. -- anitthi a woman lacking the characteristics of womanhood, an unfaithful wife J ii.126 (= ucchiṭṭh˚ C.); kul' -- itthi a wife of good descent Vin ii.10; A iii.76; iv.16, 19; dahar˚ a young wife J i.291; dur˚ a poor woman J iv.38. <-> Some general characterisations of womanhood: 10 kinds of women enumd. at Vin iii.139 = A v.264 = VvA 72, viz. mātu -- rakkhitā, pitu˚, mātāpitu˚ bhātu˚, bhaginī˚, ñāti˚, gotta˚, dhamma˚, sarakkhā, saparidaṇḍā; see Vin iii.139 for expln. -- S i.38 (malaŋ brahmacariyassa), 43 (id.); J i.287 (itthiyo nāma āsa lāmikā pacchimikā); iv. 222 (itthiyo papāto akkhāto; pamattaŋ pamathenti); v. 425 (sīho yathā . . . tath' itthiyo); women as goods for sale S i.43 (bhaṇḍānaŋ uttamaŋ); DhA i.390 (itthiyo vikkiṇiya bhaṇḍaŋ).
-- agāra ( -- āgāra) as itthā̆gāra women's apartment, seraglio Vin i.72; iv.158; S i.58, 89; J i.90; also coll. for womenfolk, women (cp. Ger. frauenzimmer) D ii.249; J v.188. -- indriya the female principle or sex, femininity (opp. puris' indriya) S v.204; A iv.57 sq.; Vism 447, 492; Dhs 585, 633, 653 et passim. -- kathā talk about women D i.7 (cp. DA i.90). -- kāma the craving for a woman S iv.343. -- kutta a woman's behaviour, woman's wiles, charming behaviour, coquetry A iv.57 = Dhs 633; J i.296, 433; ii.127, 329; iv.219, 472; DhA iv.197. -- ghātaka a woman -- killer J v. 398. -- dhana wife's treasure, dowry Vin iii.16. -- dhutta a rogue in the matter of women, one who indulges in women Sn 106; J iii.260; PvA 5. -- nimitta characteristic of a woman Dhs 633, 713, 836. -- pariggaha a woman's company, a woman Nd1 11. -- bhāva existence as woman, womanhood S i.129; Th 2, 216 (referring to a yakkhinī, cp. ThA 178; Dhs 633; PvA 168. -- rūpa womanly beauty A i.1; iii.68; Th 2, 294. -- lakkhaṇa fortune -- telling regarding a woman D i.9 (cp. DhA i.94, + purisa˚); J vi. 135. -- linga "sign of a woman", feminine quality, female sex Vism 184; Dhs 633, 713, 836; DhsA 321 sq. -- sadda the sound (or word) "woman" DhA i.15. -- soṇḍī a woman addicted to drink Sn 112.
Itthikā (f.) [fr. itthi] a woman Vin iii.16; D ii.14; J i. 336; Vv 187; Sdhp 79. As adj. itthika in bahutthika having many women, plentiful in women Vin ii.256 (kulāni bahuttikāni appapurisakāni rich in women & lacking in men); S ii.264 (id. and appitthikāni).
Ida & Idaŋ (indecl.) [nt. of ayaŋ (idaŋ) in function of a deictic part.] emphatic demonstr. adv. in local, temporal & modal function, as (1) in this, here: idappaccayatā having its foundation in this, i. e. causally connected, by way of cause Vin i.5 = S i.136; D i.185; Dhs 1004, 1061; Vbh 340, 362, 365; Vism 518; etc. -- (2) now, then which idha is more freq.) D ii.267, 270, almost syn. (for with kira. -- (3) just (this), even so, only: idam -- atthika just sufficient, proper, right Th 1, 984 (cīvara); Pug 69 (read so for ˚maṭṭhika, see Pug A 250); as idam -- atthitā "being satisfied with what is sufficient" at Vism 81: expld. as atthika -- bhāva at Pug A 250. idaŋsaccâbhinivesa inclination to say: only this is the truth, i. e. inclination to dogmatise, one of the four kāya -- ganthā, viz. abhijjhā, byāpāda, sīlabbata -- parāmāsa, idaŋ˚ (see Dhs 1135 & Dhs trsl. 304); D iii.230; S v.59; Nd1 98; Nett 115 sq.
Idāni (indecl.) [Vedic idānīŋ] now Dh 235, 237; KhA 247.
Iddha1 [pp. of iddhe to idh or indh, cp. indhana & idhuma] in flames, burning, flaming bright, clear J vi.223 (˚khaggadharā balī; so read for T. iṭṭhi -- khagga˚); Dpvs vi.42.
Iddha2 [pp. of ijjhati; cp. Sk. ṛddha] (a) prosperous, opulent, wealthy D i.211 (in idiomatic phrase iddha phīta bahujana, of a prosperous town); A iii.215 (id.); J vi.227, 361 (= issara C.), 517; Dāvs i.11. -- (b) successful, satisfactory, sufficient Vin i.212 (bhattaŋ); iv.313 (ovādo).
Iddhi [Vedic ṛddhi from ardh, to prosper; Pali ijjhati]. There is no single word in English for Iddhi, as the idea is unknown in Europe. The main sense seems to be ʻ potency ʼ. -- 1. Pre -- Buddhistic; the Iddhi of a layman. The four Iddhis of a king are personal beauty, long life, good health, and popularity (D ii.177; M iii.176, cp. J iii.454 for a later set). The Iddhi of a rich young noble is 1. The use of a beautiful garden, 2. of soft and pleasant clothing, 3. of different houses for the different seasons, 4. of good food, A i.145. At M i.152 the Iddhi of a hunter, is the craft and skill with which he captures game; but at p. 155 other game have an Iddhi of their own by which they outwit the hunter. The Iddhi, the power of a confederation of clans, is referred to at D ii.72. It is by the Iddhi they possess that birds are able to fly (Dhp 175). -- 2. Psychic powers. including most of those claimed for modern mediums (see under Abhiññā). Ten such are given in a stock paragraph. They are the power to project mind -- made images of oneself; to become invisible; to pass through solid things, such as a wall; to penetrate solid ground as if it were water; to walk on water; to fly through the air; to touch sun and moon; to ascend into the highest heavens (D i.77, 212; ii.87, 213; iii.112, 281; S ii.121; v.264, 303; A i.170, 255; iii.17, 28, 82, 425; v.199; Ps i.111; ii.207; Vism 378 sq., 384; DA i.122). For other such powers see S i.144; iv.290; v.263; A iii.340. -- 3. The Buddhist theory of Iddhi. At D i.213 the Buddha is represented as saying: ʻ It is because I see danger in the practice of these mystic wonders that I loathe and abhor and am ashamed thereof ʼ. The mystic wonder that he himself believed in and advocated (p. 214) was the wonder of education. What education was meant in the case of Iddhi, we learn from M i.34; A iii.425, and from the four bases of Iddhi, the Iddhipādā. They are the making determination in respect of concentration on purpose, on will, on thoughts & on investigation (D ii.213; M i.103; A i.39, 297; ii.256; iii. 82; Ps i.111; ii 154, 164, 205; Vbh 216). It was ar offence against the regulations of the Sangha for a Bhikkhv to display before the laity these psychic powers beyond the capacity of ordinary men (Vin ii.112). And falsely to claim the possession of such powers involved expulsion from the Order (Vin iii.91). The psychic powers of Iddhi were looked upon as inferior (as the Iddhi of an unconverted man seeking his own profit), compared to the higher Iddhi, the Ariyan Iddhi (D iii.112; A i.93; Vin ii.183). There is no valid evidence that any one of the ten Iddhis in the above list actually took place. A few instances are given, but all are in texts more than a century later than the recorded wonder. And now for nearly two thousand years we have no further instances. Various points on Iddhi discussed at Dial. i.272, 3; Cpd. 60 ff.; Expositor 121. Also at Kvu 55; Ps ii.150; Vism xii; DhA i.91; J i.47, 360.
-- ânubhāva (iddhånu˚) power or majesty of thaumaturgy Vin 31, 209, 240; iii.67; S i 147; iv.290; PvA 53. -- âbhisankhāra (iddhåbhi˚) exercise of any of the psychic powers Vin i.16, 17, 25; D i.106; S iii.92; iv.289; v.270; Sn p. 107; PvA 57, 172 212. -- pāṭihāriya a wonder of psychic power Vin i.25, 28, 180, 209; ii.76, 112, 200; D i.211, 212; iii.3, 4, 9, 12 sq., 27; S iv.290; A i.170, 292; Ps ii.227. -- pāda constituent or basis of psychic power Vin ii.240; D ii.103, 115 sq., 120; iii.77, 102, 127, 221; M ii.11; iii.296; S i.116, 132; iii.96, 153; iv.360; v.254, 255, 259 sq., 264 sq., 269 sq., 275, 285; A iv.128 sq., 203, 463; v.175; Nd1 14, 45 (˚dhīra), 340 (˚pucchā); Nd1 s. v.; Ps i.17, 21, 84; ii.56, 85 sq., 120, 166, 174; Ud 62; Dhs 358, 528, 552; Nett 16, 31, 83; DhsA 237; DhA iii.177; iv.32. -- bala the power of working wonders VvA 4; PvA 171. -- yāna the carriage (fig.) of psychic faculties Miln 276. -- vikubbanā the practice of psychic powers Vism 373 sq. -- vidhā kinds of iddhi D i.77, 212; ii.213; iii.112, 281; S ii.121; v.264 sq., 303; A i.170 sq., 255; iii.17, 28, 82 sq., 425 sq.; v.199; Ps i.111; ii.207; Vism 384; DA i.222. -- visaya range or extent of psychic power Vin iii.67; Nett 23.
Iddhika1 ( -- ˚) (adj.) the compn. form of addhika in cpd. kapaṇ -- iddhika tramps & wayfarers (see kapaṇa), e. g. at J i.6; iv.15; PvA 78.
Iddhika2 ( -- ˚) (adj.) [iddhi + ka] possessed of power, only in cpd. mah -- iddhika of great power, always combd. with mah -- ânubhāva, e. g. at Vin i.31; ii.193; iii.101; S ii. 155; M i.34; Th 1, 429. As mahiddhiya at J v.149. See mahiddhika.
Iddhimant (adj.) [fr. iddhi] -- 1. (lit.) successful, proficient, only in neg. an˚ unfortunate, miserable, poor J vi.361. <-> 2. (fig.) possessing psychic powers Vin iii.67; iv.108; A i.23, 25; ii.185; iii.340; iv.312; Sn 179; Nett 23; Sdhp 32, 472.
Idha (indecl.) [Sk. iha, adv. of space fr. pron. base *i (cp. ayaŋ, iti etc.), cp. Lat. ihi, Gr. i)qa -- genh/s, Av. ida] here, in this place, in this connection, now; esp. in this world or present existence Sn 1038, 1056, 1065; It 99 (idh' ûpapanna reborn in this existence); Dh 5, 15, 267, 343, 392; Nd1 40, 109, 156; Nd2 145, 146; SnA 147; PvA 45, 60, 71. -- idhaloka this world, the world of men Sn 1043 (= manussaloka Nd2 552c); PvA 64; in this religion, Vbh 245. On diff. meanings of idha see DhsA 348.
Idhuma [Sk. idhma, see etym. under iṭṭhakā] fire -- wood - Tela -- kaṭāha -- gāthā, p. 53, J.P.T.S. 1884.
Inda [Vedic indra, most likely to same root as indu moon, viz. *Idg. *eid to shine, cp. Lat. īdūs middle of month (after the full moon), Oir. ēsce moon. Jacobi in K. Z. xxxi.316 sq. connects Indra with Lat. neriosus strong & Nero). -- 1. The Vedic god Indra D i.244; ii.261, 274; Sn 310, 316, 679, 1024; Nd1 177. -- 2. lord, chief, king. Sakko devānaŋ indo D i.216, 217; ii.221, 275; S i.219. Vepɔcitti asurindo S i.221 ff. manussinda, S i.69, manujinda, Sn 553, narinda, Sn 863, all of the Buddha, ʻ chief of men ʼ; cp. Vism 491. [Europeans have found a strange difficulty in understanding the real relation of Sakka to Indra. The few references to Indra in the Nikāyas should be classed with the other fragments of Vedic mythology to be found in them. Sakka belongs only to the Buddhist mythology then being built up. He is not only quite different from Indra, but is the direct contrary of that blustering, drunken, god of war. See the passages collected in Dial. ii.294<-> 298. The idiom sa -- Indā devā, D ii.261, 274; A v.325, means ʻ the gods about Indra, Indra's retinue ʼ, this being a Vedic story. But Devā Tāvatiŋsā sahindakā means the T. gods together with their leader (D ii.208 -- 212; S iii.90; cp. Vv 301) this being a Buddhist story].
-- aggi (ind' aggi) Indra's fire, i. e. lightning PvA 56. -- gajjita (nt.) Indra's thunder Miln 22. -- jāla deception DA i.85. -- jālika a juggler, conjurer Miln 331. -- dhanu the rainbow DA i.40. -- bhavana the realm of Indra Nd1 448 (cp. Tāvatiŋsa -- bhavana). -- linga the characteristic of Indra Vism 491. -- sāla N. of tree J iv.92.
Indaka [dimin. fr. inda] -- 1. Np. (see Dict. of names), e. g. at Pv ii.957; PvA 136 sq. -- 2. ( -- ˚) see inda 2.
Indakhīla [inda + khīla, cp. BSk. indrakīla Divy 250, 365, 544; Av. Ś i.109, 223]. "Indra's post"; the post, stake or column of Indra, at or before the city gate; also a large slab of stone let into the ground at the entrance of a house D ii.254 (˚ŋ ūhacca, cp. DhA ii.181); Vin iv.160 (expld. ibid. as sayani -- gharassa ummāro, i. e. threshold); S v.444 (ayokhīlo +); Dh 95 (˚ûpama, cp. DhA ii.181); Th 1, 663; J i.89; Miln 364; Vism 72, 466; SnA 201; DA i.209 (nikkhamitvā bahi ˚ā); DhA ii.180 (˚sadisaŋ Sāriputtassa cittaŋ), 181 (nagara -- dvāre nikhataŋ ˚ŋ).
Indagū see hindagū.
Indagopaka [inda + gopaka, cp. Vedic indragopā having Indra as protector] a sort of insect ("cochineal, a red beetle", Böhtlingk), observed to come out of the ground after rain Th 1, 13; Vin iii.42; J iv.258; v.168; DhA i.20; Brethren p. 18, n.
Indanīla [inda + nīla "Indra's blue"] a sapphire J i.80; Miln 118; VvA 111 (+ mahānīla).
Indavāruṇī (f.) [inda + vāruṇa] the Coloquintida plant J iv.8 (˚ka -- rukkha).
Indīvara (nt.) [etym.?] the blue water lily, Nymphaea Stel- lata or Cassia Fistula J v.92 (˚ī -- samā ratti); vi.536; Vv 451 (= uddālaka -- puppha VvA 197).
Indriya (nt.) [Vedic indriya adj. only in meaning "belonging to Indra"; nt. strength, might (cp. inda), but in specific pāli sense "belonging to the ruler", i. e. governing, ruling nt. governing, ruling or controlling principle] A. On term: Indriya is one of the most comprehensive & important categories of Buddhist psychological philosophy & ethics, meaning "controlling principle, directive force, élan, du/namis", in the foll. applications: (a) with reference to sense -- perceptibility "faculty, function", often wrongly interpreted as "organ"; (b) w. ref. to objective aspects of form and matter "kind, characteristic, determinating principle, sign, mark" (cp. woman -- hood, hood = Goth. haidus "kind, form"); (c) w. ref. to moods of sensation and (d) to moral powers or motives controlling action, "principle, controlling" force; (e) w. ref. to cognition & insight "category". <-> Definitions of indriya among others at DhsA 119; cp. Expositor 157; Dhs trsl. lvii; Cpd. 228, 229.
B. Classifications and groups of indriyāni. An exhaustive list comprises the indriyāni enumd under A a -- e, thus establishing a canonical scheme of 22 Controlling Powers (bāvīsati indriyāni), running thus at Vbh 122 sq. (see trsl. at Cpd. 175, 176); and discussed in detail at Vism 491 sq. (a. sensorial) (1) cakkh -- undriya ("the eye which is a power", Cpd. 228) the eye or (personal potentiality of) vision, (2) sot -- indriya the ear or hearing, (3) ghān˚ nose or smell, (4) jivh˚ tongue or taste, (5) kāy˚ body -- sensibility, (6) man˚) mind; (b. material) (7) itth˚ female sex or femininity, (8) puris˚ male sex or masculinity, (9) jīvit˚ life or vitality; (c. sensational) (10) sukh˚ pleasure, (11) dukkh˚ pain, (12) somanasa˚ joy, (13) domanass˚ grief, (14) upekh˚ hedonic indifference (d. moral) (15) saddh˚ faith, (16) viriy˚ energy, (17) sat˚ mindfulness, (18) samādh˚ concentration, (19) paññ˚ reason; (e. cognitional) (20) anaññāta -- ñassāmīt˚ the thought "I shall come to know the unknown", (21) aññ˚ (= aññā) gnosis, (22) aññātā -- v˚ one who knows. -- Jīvitindriya (no. 9) is in some redactions placed before itth˚ (no. 7), e. g. at Ps i.7, 137. -- From this list are detached several groups, mentioned frequently and in various connections, no. 6 manas (mano, man -- indriya) wavering in its function, being either included under (a) or (more frequently) omitted, so that the first set (a) is marked off as pañc' indriyāni, the 6th being silently included (see below). This uncertainty regarding manas deserves to be noted. The foll. groups may be mentioned here viz 19 (nos. 1 -- 19) at Ps i.137; 10 (pañca rūpīni & pañca arūpīni) at Nett 69; three groups of five (nos. 1 -- 5, 10 -- 14, 15 -- 19) at D iii.239, cp. 278; four (group d without paññā, i. e. nos. 15 -- 18) at A ii.141; three (saddh˚, samādh˚, paññ˚, i. e. nos. 15, 18, 19) at A i. 118 sq. Under aṭṭhavidhaŋ indriya -- rūpaŋ (Cpd. 159) or rūpaŋ as indriyaŋ "form which is faculty" Dhs 661 (cp. trsl. p. 204) are understood the 5 sensitives (nos. 1 -- 5), the 2 séx -- states (nos. 7, 8) and the vital force (no. 9), i. e. groups a & b of enumn.; discussed & defined in detail at Dhs 709 -- 717, 971 -- 973. -- It is often to be guessed from the context only, which of the sets of 5 indriyāni (usually either group a or d) is meant. These detached groups are classed as below under C. f. -- Note. This system of 22 indriyāni reflects a revised & more elaborate form of the 25 (or 23) categories of the Sānkhya philosophy, with its 10 elements, 10 indri, īni & the isolated position of manas.
C. Material in detail (grouped according to A a -- e) (a) sensorial: (mentioned or referred to as set of 5 viz B. nos. 1 -- 5): M i.295: S iii.46 (pañcannaŋ ˚ānaŋ avak kanti), 225; iv.168; A ii.151 (as set of 6, viz. B. nos. 1 -- 6): M i.9; S iv.176; v.74, 205, 230; A i.113; ii.16, 39, 152; iii.99, 163, 387 sq.; v.348. Specially referring to restraint & control of the senses in foll. phrases: in driyāni saŋvutāni S ii.231, 271; iv.112; pañcasu ˚esu saŋvuto Sn 340 (= lakkhaṇato pana chaṭṭhaŋ pi vuttaŋ yeva hoti, i. e. the 6th as manas included, SnA 343); ˚esu susaŋvuta Th 2, 196 (= mana -- chaṭṭhesu i˚ suṭṭhu saŋvutā ThA 168) indriyesu guttadvāra & guttadvāratā D iii.107; S ii.218; iv.103, 112, 175; A i.25, 94, 113; ii.39; iii.70, 138, 173, 199, 449 sq.; iv.25, 166; v.134; It 23, 24; Nd1 14; Vbh 248, 360; DA i.182 (= manachaṭṭesu indriyesu pihita -- dvāro hoti), i. vippasannāni S ii. 275; iii.2, 235; iv.294; v.301; A i.181; iii.380. ˚ānaŋ samatā (v. l. samatha) A iii.375 sq. (see also f. below) ˚āni bhāvitāni Sn 516 (= cakkh' ādīni cha i. SnA 426); Nd2 475 B8. -- Various: S i.26 (rakkhati), 48 (˚ûpasame rato); iv.40, 140 (˚sampanna); v.216, 217 sq. (independent in function, mano as referee); Ps. i.190 (man˚); Vbh 13 (rūpa), 341 (mud˚ & tikkh˚) 384 (ahīn˚). -- (b) physical: (above B 7 -- 9) all three: S v.204; Vism 447; itthi˚ & purisa˚ A iv.57; Vbh 122, 415 sq.; puris˚ A iii.404; jīvit˚ Vbh 123, 137; Vism 230 (˚upaccheda = maraṇa). See also under itthi, jīvita & purisa. -- (c) sensational (above B 10 -- 14): S v.207 sq. (see Cpd. 111 & cp. p. 15), 211 sq.; Vbh 15, 71; Nett 88. -- (d) moral (above B 15 <-> 19): S iii.96, 153; iv.36, 365 sq.; v.193 sq., 202, 219 (corresponding to pañcabalāni), 220 sq. (and amata), 223 sq. (their culture brings assurance of no rebirth), 227 sq. (paññā the chief one), 235, 237 (sevenfold fruit of), A iv.125 sq., 203, 225; v.56, 175; Ps ii.49, 51 sq., 86; Nd1 14; Nd2 628 (sat˚ + satibala); Kvu 589; Vbh 341; Nett 15, 28, 47, 54. Often in standard combn. with satipaṭṭhāna, sammappadhāna. iddhipāda, indriya, bala, bojjhanga, magga (see Nd2 s. v. p. 263) D ii.120; Vin iii. 93, Ps ii.166 & passim. As set of 4 indriyāni (nos. 16<-> 19) at Nett 83. -- (e) cognitional (above B 20 -- 22) D iii.219 = S v.204 (as peculiar to Arahantship); It 53; Ps i.115; ii.30. -- (f) collectively, either two or more of groups a -- e, also var. peculiar uses: personal; esp. physical faculties. S i.61 (pākat˚), 204 (id.); iii.207 (ākāsaŋ ˚āni sankamanti); iv.294 (vipari -- bhinnāni); A iii.441 (˚ānaŋ avekallatā). magic power A iv.264 sq. (okkhipati ˚āni). indriyānaŋ paripāko (moral or physical) over -- ripeness of faculties S ii.2, 42; A v.203; Nd2 252 (in def. of jarā); Vbh 137. moral forces Vin i.183 (˚ānaŋ samatā, + viriyānaŋ s. as sign of Arahant); ii.240 (pañc˚). principle of life ekindriyaŋ jīvaŋ Vin iii.156; Miln 259. heart or seat of feeling in phrase ˚āni paricāreti to satisfy one's heart PvA 16, 58, 77. obligation, duty, vow in phrase ˚āni bhinditvā breaking one's vow J ii.274; iv.190.
D. Unclassified material D i 77 (ahīn˚); iii 239 (domanass˚ & somanass˚) M i.437 (vemattatā), 453 (id.); ii. 11, 106; iii.296; S iii.225; v.209 (dukkh˚, domanass˚); A i.39, 42 sq., 297; ii.38 (sant˚), 149 sq.; iii.277, 282; Ps i.16, 21, 88, 180; ii.1 sq, 13, 84, 119, 132, 143, 145, 110, 223; Nd1 45 (˚dhīra), 171 (˚kusala), 341 (pucchā); Dhs 58, 121, 528, 556 (dukkh˚), 560, 644. 736; Nett 18 (sotāpannassa), 28 (˚vavaṭṭhāna), 162 (lok'uttara); Vism 350 (˚vekallatā); Sdhp 280, 342, 364, 371, 449, 473.
E. As adj. ( -- ˚) having one's senses, mind or heart as such & such S i.138 (tikkh˚ & mud˚); iii.93 (pākat˚); v.269 (id.); A i.70 (id) & passim (id.); A i.70 (saŋvut˚) 266 (id.), 236 (gutt˚); ii.6 (samāhit˚); 8n 214 (susamāhit˚ his senses well -- composed); PvA 70 (pīṇit˚ joyful or gladdened of heart).
F. Some compounds: -- gutta one who restrains & watches his senses S i.154; Dh 375. -- gutti keeping watch over the senses, self -- restraint DhA iv.111. a paropariya, b paropariyatta & c paropariyatti (˚ñāṇa) (knowledge of) what goes on in the senses and intentions of others a J i.78; b A v.34, 38; b Ps i.121 sq., 133 sq.; ii.158, 175; b Vbh 340, 342; c S v.205; c Nett 101. See remark under paropariya. -- bhāvanā cultivation of the (five, see above Cd) moral qualities Vin i.294 (+ balabhāvanā); M iii.298. -- saŋvara restraint or subjugation of the senses D ii.281; M i.269, 346; S i.54; A iii.360; iv.99; v.113 sq., 136, 206; Nd1 483; Nett 27, 121 sq; Vism 20 sq.
Indhana (nt.) [Vedic indhana, of idh or indh to kindle, cp. iddha1] firewood, fuel J iv.27 (adj. an˚ without fuel, aggi); v.447; ThA 256; VvA 335; Sdhp 608. Cp. idhuma.
Ibbha (adj.) [Ved. ibhya belonging to the servants] menial; a retainer, in the phrase muṇḍakā samaṇakā ibbhā kaṇhā (kiṇhā) bandhupādâpaccā D i.90 (v. l. SS imbha; T. kiṇhā, v. l. kaṇhā), 91, 103; M i.334 (kiṇhā, v. l. kaṇhā). Also at J vi.214. Expld. by Bdhgh. as gahapatika at DA i.254, (also at J vi.215).
Iriṇa (nt.) [Vedic iriṇa, on etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under rarus] barren soil, desert J vi.560 (= niroja C.). Cp. īriṇa.
Iriyati [fr. īr to set in motion, to stir, Sk. īrte, but pres. formation influenced by iriyā & also by Sk. iyarti of ṛ (see acchati & icchati2); cp. Caus. īrayati (= P. īreti), pp. īrṇa & īrita. See also issā] to move, to wander about, stir; fig. to move, behave, show a certain way of deportment M i.74, 75; S i.53 (dukkhaŋ aticca iriyati); iv.71; A iii.451; v.41; Sn 947, 1063, 1097; Th 1,276; J iii.498 (= viharati); Nd1 431; Nd2 147 (= carati etc.); Vism 16; DA i.70.
Iriyanā (f.) [fr. iriyati] way of moving on, progress, Dhs 19, 82, 295, 380, 441, 716.
Iriyā (f.) [cp. from iriyati, BSk. īryā Divy 485] movement, posture, deportment M i.81; Sn 1038 (= cariyā vatti vihāro Nd2 148); It 31; Vism 145 (+ vutti pālana yapana).
-- patha way of deportment; mode of movement; good behaviour. There are 4 iriyāpathas or postures, viz. walking, standing, sitting, lying down (see Ps ii.225 & DA i.183). Cp. BSk. īryāpatha Divy 37. -- Vin i.39; ii.146 (˚sampanna); Vin i.91 (chinn˚ a cripple); S v.78 (cattāro i.); Sn 385; Nd1 225, 226; Nd2 s. v.; J i.22 (of a lion), 66, 506; Miln 17; Vism 104, 128, 290, 396; DhA i.9; iv.17; VvA 6; PvA 141; Sdhp 604.
Irubbeda the Rig -- veda Dpvs v.62 (iruveda); Miln 178; DA i.247; SnA 447.
Illiyā (f.) [fr. illī, cp. Sk. *īlikā] = illī J v.259; vi.50.
Illī (f.) [cp. Vedic ilībiśa Np. of a demon] a sort of weapon, a short one -- edged sword J v.259.
Illīyituŋ v. l. for allīyituŋ at J v.154.
Iva (indecl.) [Vedic iva & va] part. of comparison: like, as Dh 1, 2, 7, 8, 287, 334; J i.295; SnA 12 (= opamma -- vacanaŋ). Elided to 'va, diaeretic -- metathetic form viya (q. v.).
Isi [Vedic ṛṣi fr. ṛṣ. -- Voc. ise Sn 1025; pl. npm. isayo, gen. isinaŋ S ii.280 & isīnaŋ S i.192; etc. inst. isibhi Th 1, 1065] -- 1. a holy man, one gifted with special powers of insight & inspiration, an anchoret, a Seer, Sage, Saint, "Master" D i.96 (kaṇho isi ahosi); S i.33, 35, 65, 128, 191, 192, 226 sq., 236 (ācāro isīnaŋ); ii.280 (dhammo isinaŋ dhajo); A ii.24, 51; Vin iv.15 = 22 (˚bhāsito dhammo); It 123; Sn 284, 458, 979, 689, 691, 1008, 1025, 1043, 1044, 1116 (dev˚ divine Seer), 1126, Nd2 149 (isi -- nāmakā ye keci isi -- pabbajjaŋ pabbajitā ājīvikā nigaṇṭhā jaṭilā tāpasā); Dh 281; J i.17 (v.90: isayo n' atthi me samā of Buddha); J v.140 (˚gaṇa), 266, 267 (isi Gotamo); Pv ii.614 (= yama -- niyam' ādīnaŋ esanatthena isayo PvA 98); ii.133 (= jhān' ādīnaŋ guṇānaŋ esanatthena isi PvA 163); iv.73 (= asekkhānaŋ sīlakkhandh' ādīnaŋ esanatthena isiŋ PvA 265); Miln 19 (˚vāta) 248 (˚bhattika); DA i.266 (gen. isino); Sdhp 200, 384. See also mahesi. -- 2. (in brahmanic tradition) the ten (divinely) inspired singers or composers of the Vedic hymns (brāhmaṇānaŋ pubbakā isayo mantānaŋ kattāro pavattāro), whose names are given at Vin i. 245; D i.104, 238; A iii.224, iv.61 as follows: Aṭṭhaka, Vāmaka, Vāmadeva, Vessāmitta, Yamataggi (Yamadaggi), Angirasa, Bhāradvāja, Vāseṭṭha, Kassapa, Bhagu.
-- nisabha the first (lit. "bull") among Saints, Ep. of the Buddha Sn 698; Vv 167 (cp. VvA 82). -- pabbajjā the (holy) life of an anchoret Vism 123; DhA i.105; iv.55; PvA 162. -- vāta the wind of a Saint Miln 19; Vism 18. -- sattama the 7th of the great Sages (i. e. Gotama Buddha, as 7th in the sequence of Vipassin, Sikhin, Vessabhu, Kakusandha, Koṇāgamana & Kassapa Buddhas) M i.386; S i.192; Sn 356; Th 1, 1240 (= Bhagavā isi ca sattamo ca uttamaṭṭhena SnA 351); Vv 211 (= buddha -- isinaŋ Vipassi -- ādīnaŋ sattamo VvA 105).
Isikā (isīkā) (f.) [Sk. iṣīkā] a reed D i.77, cp. DA i.222; J vi.67 (isikā).
Isitta (nt.) [abstr. fr. isi] rishi -- ship D i.104 (= isi -- bhāva DA i.274).
Issati [denom. fr. issā. Av. areṣyeiti to be jealous, Gr. e)/ratai to desire; connected also with Sk. arṣati fr. ṛṣ to flow, Lat. erro; & Sk. irasyati to be angry = Gr. *)/arhs God of war, a)rh\; Ags. eorsian to be angry] to bear ill-will, to be angry, to envy J iii.7; ppr. med. issamānaka Sdhp 89, f. ˚ikā A ii.203. -- pp. issita (q. v.).
Issattha (nt. m.) [cp. Sk. iṣvastra nt. bow, fr. iṣu (= P. usu) an arrow + as to throw. Cp. P. issāsa. -- Bdhgh. in a strange way dissects it as "usuñ ca satthañ cā ti vuttaŋ hoti" (i. e. usu arrow + sattha sword, knife) SnA 466] -- 1. (nt.) archery (as means of livelihood & occupation) M i.85; iii.1; S i.100 (so read with v. l.; T. has issatta, C. explns. by usu -- sippaŋ K. S. p. 318); Sn 617 (˚ŋ upajīvati = āvudha jīvikaŋ SnA 466); J vi.81; Sdhp 390. -- 2. (m.) an archer Miln 250, 305, 352, 418.
Issatthaka [issattha + ka] an archer Miln 419.
Issara [Vedic īśvara, from īś to have power, cp. also P. īsa] lord, ruler, master, chief A iv.90; Sn 552; J i.89 (˚jana), 100, 283 (˚bheri); iv.132 (˚jana); Pv iv.67 (˚mada); Miln 253 (an˚ without a ruler); DhsA 141; DA i.111; PvA 31 (gehassa issarā); Sdhp 348, 431. -- 2. creative deity, Brahmā, D iii.28; M ii.222 = A i.173; Vism 598.
Issariya [fr. issara] rulership, mastership, supremacy, domi- nion (Syn. ādhipacca) D iii.190; S i.43, 100 (˚mada); v.342 (issariy -- âdhipacca); A i.62 (˚ādhipacca); ii.205, 249; iii.38; iv.263; Sn 112; Dh 73; Ud 18; Ps ii.171, 176; J i.156; v.443; DhA ii.73; VvA 126 (for ādhipacca) PvA 42, 117, 137 (for ādhipacca); Sdhp 418, 583.
Issariyatā (f.) [fr. issariya] mastership, lordship Sdhp 422.
Issā1 (f.) [Sk. īrṣyā to Sk. irin forceful, irasyati to be angry, Lat. īra anger, Gr. *)/arhs God of war; Ags. eorsian to be angry. See also issati] jealousy, anger, envy, ill -- will D ii.277 (˚macchariya); iii.44 (id.); M i.15; S ii.260; A i.95, 105 (˚mala), 299; ii.203; iv.8 (˚saññojana), 148, 349, 465; v.42 sq., 156, 310; Sn 110; J v.90 (˚âvatiṇṇa); Pv ii.37; Vv 155; Pug 19, 23; Vbh 380, 391; Dhs 1121, 1131, 1460; Vism 470 (def.); PvA 24, 46, 87; DhA ii.76; Miln 155; Sdhp 313, 510.
-- pakata overcome by envy, of an envious nature S ii.260; Miln 155; PvA 31. See remarks under apakata & pakata.
Issā2 (f.) [cp. Sk. ṛśya -- mṛga] in issammiga (= issāmiga) J v.410, & issāmiga J v.431, a species of antelope, cp. J v.425 issāsinga the antlers of this antelope.
Issāyanā (& Issāyitatta) [abstr. formations fr. issā] = issā Pug 19, 23; Dhs 1121; Vism 470.
Issāsa [Sk. iṣvāsa, see issattha] an archer Vin iv.124; M iii.1; A iv.423 (issāso vā issās' antevāsī vā); J ii.87; iv.494; Miln 232; DA i.156.
Issāsin [Sk. iṣvāsa in meaning "bow" + in] an archer, lit. one having a bow J iv.494 (= issāsa C.).
Issita [pp. of īrṣ (see issati); Sk. īrṣita] being envied or scolded, giving offence or causing anger J v.44.
Issukin (adj.) [fr. issā, Sk. īrṣyu + ka + in] envious, jealous Vin ii.89 (+ maccharin); D iii.45, 246; M i.43, 96; S iv.241; A iii.140, 335; iv.2; Dh 262; J iii.259; Pv. ii.34; Pug 19, 23; DhA iii.389; PvA 174. See also an˚.
Iha (indecl.) [Sk. iha; form iha is rare in Pāli, the usual form is idha (q. v.)] adv. of place "here" Sn 460.
Īgha (?) [doubtful as to origin & etym. since only found in cpd. anīgha & abs. only in exegetical literature. If genuine, it should belong to ṛgh Sk. ṛghāyati to tremble, rage etc. See discussed under nigha1] confusion, rage, badness SnA 590 (in expln of anigha). Usually as an˚ (or anigha), e. g. J iii.343 (= niddukkha C.); v.343.
Īti & Ītī (f.) [Sk. īti, of doubtful origin] ill, calamity, plague, distress, often combb. with & substituted for upaddava, cp. BSk. ītay' opadrava (attack of plague) Divy 119. <-> Sn 51; J i.27 (v.189); v.401 = upaddava; Nd1 381; Nd2 48, 636 (+ upaddava = santāpa); Miln 152, 274, 418. -- anīti sound condition, health, safety A iv.238; Miln 323.
Ītika (adj.) [fr. īti] connected or affected with ill or harm, only in neg. an˚ .
Ītiha a doublet of itiha, only found in neg. an˚.
Īdisa (adj.) [Sk. īdṛs, ī + dṛś, lit. so -- looking] such like, such DhsA 400 (f. ˚ī); PvA 50, (id.) 51.
Īriṇa (nt.) [= iriṇa, q. v. & cp. Sk. īriṇa] barren soil, desert D i.248; A v.156 sq.; J v.70 (= sukkha -- kantāra C.); vi.560; VvA 334.
Īrita [pp. of īreti, Caus. of īr, see iriyati] -- 1. set in motion, stirred, moved, shaken Vv 394 (vāt'erita moved by the wind); J i.32 (id.); Vv 6420 (haday'erita); Pv ii.123 (malut'erita); PvA 156 (has erita for ī˚); VvA 177 (= calita). -- 2. uttered, proclaimed, said Dāvs v.12.
Īsa [fr. iś to have power, perf. īśe = Goth. aih; cp. Sk. īśvara = P. issara, & BSk. īśa, e. g. Jtm 3181] lord, owner, ruler J iv.209 (of a black lion = kāḷa -- sīha C.); VvA 168. f. īsī see mahesī a chief queen. Cp. also mahesakkha.
Īsaka [dimin. of īsā] a pole J ii.152; vi.456 (˚agga the top of a pole).
Īsakaŋ (adv.) [nt. of īsaka] a little, slightly, easily M i. 450; J i.77; vi.456; DA i.252, 310; VvA 36; Vism 136, 137, 231, īsakam pi even a little Vism 106; Sdhp 586.
Īsā (f.) [Vedic īṣā] the pole of a plough or of a carriage S i.104 (nangal' īsā read with v. l. for nangala -- sīsā T.), 172, 224 (˚mukha): A iv.191 (rath˚); Sn 77; J i.203 (˚mukha); iv.209; Ud 42; Miln 27; SnA 146; VvA 269 (˚mūlaŋ = rathassa uro).
-- danta having teeth (tusks) as long as a plough -- pole (of an elephant) Vin i.352; M i.414; Vv 209 = 439 (= ratha -- īsā -- sadisa -- danto); J vi.490 = 515.
Īsāka (adj.) [fr. īsā] having a pole (said of a carriage) J vi.252.
Īhati [Vedic īh, cp. Av. īžā ardour, eagerness, āziš greed] to endeavour, attempt, strive after Vin iii.268 (Bdhgh.) J vi.518 (cp. Kern, Toev. p. 112); DA i.139; VvA 35.
Īhā (f.) [fr. īh] exertion, endeavour, activity, only in adj. nir -- īha void of activity Miln 413.
U the sound or syllable u, expld. by Bdhgh at Vism 495 as expressing origin (= ud).
Ukkaŋsa [fr. ud + kṛṣ see ukkassati] exaltation, excellence, superiority (opp. avakkaŋsa) D i.54 (ukkaŋs -- âvakkaŋsa = hāyana -- vaḍḍhana DA i.165); M i.518; Vism 563 (id.); VvA 146 (˚gata excellent), 335 (instr. ukkaŋsena par excellence, exceedingly); PvA 228 (˚vasena, with ref. to devatās; v. l. SS okk˚).
Ukkaŋsaka (adj.) [fr. ukkaŋsa] raising, exalting (oneself), extolling M i.19 (att˚; opp. para -- vambhin); J ii.152. Cp. sāmukkaŋsika.
Ukkaŋsati [ud + kṛṣ, karṣati, lit. draw or up, raise] to exalt, praise M i.498; J iv.108. -- pp. ukkaṭṭha. -- ukkaŋseti in same meaning M i.402 sq. (attānaŋ u. paraŋ vambheti); A ii.27; Nd2 141.
Ukkaŋsanā (f.) [abstr. of ukkaŋsati] raising, extolling, exaltation, in att˚ self -- exaltation, self -- praise M i.402 (opp. para -- vambhanā); Nd2 505 (id.).
Ukkaṭṭha (adj.) [pp. of ukkaŋsati] -- 1. exalted, high, prominent, glorious, excellent, most freq. opp. to hīna, in phrase hīna -- m -- ukkaṭṭha -- majjhime Vin iv.7; J i.20 (v.129), 22 (v.143); iii.218 (= uttama C.). In other combn. at Vism 64 (u. majjhima mudu referring to the 3 grades of the Dhutangas); SnA 160 (dvipadā sabbasattānaŋ ukkaṭṭhā); VvA 105 (superl. ukkaṭṭhatama with ref. to Gotama as the most exalted of the 7 Rishis); Sdhp 506 (opp. lāmaka). -- 2. large, comprehensive, great, in ukkaṭṭho patto a bowl of great capacity (as diff. from majjhima & omaka p.) Vin iii.243 (= uk. nāma patto aḍḍhālhak' odanaŋ gaṇhāti catu -- bhāgaŋ khādanaŋ vā tadūpiyaŋ vā byañjanaŋ). -- 3. detailed, exhaustive, specialised Vism 37 (ati -- ukkaṭṭha -- desanā); also in phrase ˚vasena in detail SnA 181. -- 4. arrogant, insolent J v. 16. -- 5. used as nom at J i.387 in meaning "battle, conflict". -- an˚ Vism 64 (˚cīvara).
-- niddesa exhaustive exposition, special designation, term par excellence DhsA 70; VvA 231; PvA 7. -- pariccheda comprehensive connotation SnA 229, 231, 376.
Ukkaṭṭhatā (f.) [abstr. fr. ukkaṭṭha] superiority, eminence, exalted state J iv.303 (opp. hīnatā).
Ukkaṭṭhita [for ukkaṭhita, ud + pp. of kvath, see kaṭhati & kuthati] boiled up, boiling, seething A iii.231 & 234 (udapatto agginā santatto ukkaṭṭhito, v. l. ukkuṭṭhito); J iv.118 (v. l. pakkudhita = pakkuṭhita, as gloss).
Ukkaṇṭhati [fr. ud + kaṇṭh in secondary meaning of kaṇṭha neck, lit. to stretch one's neck for anything; i. e. long for, be hungry after, etc.] to long for, to be dissatisfied, to fret J i.386 (˚māna); iii.143 (˚itvā); iv.3, 160; v.10 (anukkhaṇṭhanto); DhsA 407; PvA 162 (mā ukkaṇṭhi, v. l. ukkaṇhi, so read for T. mā khuṇḍali). -- pp. ukkaṇṭhita (q. v.). Cp. pari˚.
Ukkaṇṭhanā (f.) [fr. ukkaṇṭhati] emotion, commotion D ii.239.
Ukkaṇṭhā (f.) [fr. ukkanṭḥ˚] longing, desire; distress, regret Nett 88; PvA 55 (spelt kkh), 60, 145, 152.
Ukkaṇṭhi (f.) [fr. ukkanṭḥ˚] longing, dissatisfaction ThA 239 (= arati).
Ukkaṇṭhikā (f.) [abstr. fr. ukkaṇṭhita] = ukkaṇṭhi, i. e. longing, state of distress, pain J iii.643.
Ukkaṇṭhita [pp. of ukkaṇṭhati] dissatisfied, regretting, longing, fretting J i.196; ii.92, 115; iii.185; Miln 281; DhA iv.66, 225; PvA 13 (an˚), 55, 187.
Ukkaṇṇa (adj.) [ud + kaṇṇa] having the ears erect (?) J vi.559.
Ukkaṇṇaka (ad.) [ut + kaṇṇa + ka lit. "with ears out" or is it ukkandaka?] a certain disease (? mange) of jackals, S ii.230, 271; S. A. ʻ the fur falls off from the whole body ʼ.
Ukkantati [ud + kantati] to cut out, tear out, skin Vin i.217 (˚itva); J i.164; iv.210 (v. l. for okk˚); v.10 (ger. ukkacca); Pv iii.94 (ukkantvā, v. l. BB ukkacca); PvA 210 (v. l. SS ni˚), 211 (= chinditvā).
Ukkapiṇḍaka [etymology unknown] only in pl.; vermin, Vin i.211 = 239. See comment at Vin. Texts ii.70.
Ukkantikaŋ (nt. adv.), in jhān˚ & kasiṇ˚, after the method of stepping away from or skipping Vism 374.
Ukkamati (or okk˚ which is v. l. at all passages quoted) [ud + kamati from kram ] to step aside, step out from (w. abl.), depart from A iii.301 (maggā); J iii.531; iv. 101 (maggā); Ud 13 (id.); DA i.185 (id.). Caus. ukkāmeti; Caus. II. ukkamāpeti J ii.3.
Ukkamana (nt.) [fr. ukkamati] stepping away from Vism 374.
Ukkala in phrase ukkala -- vassa -- bhañña S iii.73 = A ii.31 = Kvu 141 is trsld. as "the folk of Ukkala, Lenten speakers of old" (see Kvu trsl. 95 with n. 2). Another interpretation is ukkalāvassa˚, i. e. ukkalā + avassa˚ [*avaśya˚], one who speaks of, or like, a porter (ukkala = Sk utkala porter, one who carries a load) and bondsman M iii.78 reads Okkalā (v. l. Ukkalā) -- Vassa -- Bhaññā, all as N. pr.
Ukkalāpa see uklāpa.
Ukkalissati [= ukkilissati? ud + kilissati] to become depraved, to revoke(?) Miln 143.
Ukkā (f.) [Vedic ulkā & ulkuṣī, cp. Gr. a)/flac (= lamprw_s torch Hesychius), velxa/nos (= Volcanus); Lat. Volcanus, Oir. Olcān, Idg. *ṷI̊q to be fiery] 1. firebrand, glow of fire, torch D i.49, 108; S ii.264; Th 2, 488 (˚ûpama); J i.34 (dhamm -- okkā); ii.401; iv.291; v.322; Vism 428; ThA 287; DA i.148; DhA i.42, 205; PvA 154. Esp. as tiṇ˚ firebrand of dry grass M i.128, 365; Nd2 40Ie; DhA i.126; Sdhp 573. -- 2. a furnace or forge of a smith A i.210, 257; J vi.437; see also below ˚mukha. <-> 3. a meteor: see below ˚pāta.
-- dhāra a torch -- bearer Sn 335; It 108; Miln 1. -- pāta "falling of a firebrand", a meteor D i.10 (= ākāsato ukkānaŋ patanaŋ DA i.95); J i.374; vi.476; Miln 178. -- mukha the opening or receiver of a furnace, a goldsmith's smelting pot A i.257; J vi.217 (= kammārɔuddhana C.), 574; Sn 686; DhA ii.250.
Ukkācanā (f.) [fr. ukkāceti, ud + *kāc, see ukkācita] en- lightening, clearing up, instruction Vbh 352 (in def. of lapanā, v. l. ˚kāpanā). Note Kern, Toev. s. v. compares Vism p. 115 & Sk. uddīpana in same sense. Def. at Vism 27 (= uddīpanā).
Ukkācita [pp. either to *kāc to shine or to kāceti denom. fr. kāca1] enlightened, made bright (fig.) or cleaned, cleared up A i.72, 286 (˚vinīta parisā enlightened & trained).
Ukkāceti [according to Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 112 a denom. fr. kāca2 a carrying pole, although the idea of a bucket is somewhat removed from that of a pole] to bale out water, to empty by means of buckets J ii.70 (v. l. ussiñcati).
Ukkāmeti [Caus. of ukkamati] to cause to step aside J vi.11.
Ukkāra [fr. ud + kṛ "do out"] dung, excrement J iv.485, otherwise only in cpd. ukkāra -- bhūmi dung -- hill J i.5, 146 (so read for ukkar˚), ii.40; iii.16, 75, 377; iv.72, 305; Vism 196 (˚ûpama kuṇapa); DhA iii.208. Cp. uccāra.
Ukkāsati [ud + kāsati of kas to cough] to "ahem"! to cough, to clear one's throat Vin ii.222; iv.16; M ii.4; A v.65; aor. ukkāsi J i.161, 217. -- pp. ukkāsita.
Ukkāsikā (f.?) [doubtful] at Vin ii.106 is not clear. Vin Texts iii.68 leave it untranslated. Bdhgh's expln. is vattavaṭṭi (patta˚? a leaf? Cp. S iii.141), prob. = vaṭṭi (Sk. varti a kind of pad). See details given by Morris J.P.T.S. 1887, 113, who trsls. "rubber, a kind of pad or roll of cotton with which the delicate bather could rub himself without too much friction".
Ukkāsita [pp. of ukkāsati] coughed, clearing one's throat, coughed out, hawking D i.89; Bu i.52 (+ khipita) <-> ˚sadda the noise of clearing the throat D i.50; J i.119; DhA i.250 (+ khipita˚).
Ukkiṇṇa [pp. of ud + kṛ dig2] dug up or out D i.105; J iv.106; Miln 330; DA i.274 (= khāta).
Ukkiledeti [Caus. of ud + klid, see kilijjati] to take the dirt out, to clean out DA i.255 (dosaŋ); SnA 274 (rāgaŋ v. l. BB. uggileti).
Ukkujja (adj.) [ud + kujja] set up, upright, opp. either nikkujja or avakujja A i.131; S v.89 (ukkujjɔâvakujja); Pug 32 (= uparimukho ṭhapito C. 214).
Ukkujjati (˚eti) [Denom. fr. ukkujja] to bend up, turn up, set upright Vin i.181; ii.126 (pattaŋ), 269 (bhikkhuŋ); mostly in phrase nikkujjitaŋ ukkujjeyya "(like) one might raise up one who has fallen" D i.85, 110; ii.132, 152; Sn p. 15 (= uparimukhaŋ karoti DA i.228 = SnA 155).
Ukkujjana (nt.) [fr. ukkujjati] raising up, setting up again Vin ii.126 (patt˚).
Ukkuṭika [fr. ud + *kuṭ = *kuñc, as in kuṭila & kuñcita; lit. "bending up". The BSk. form is ukkuṭuka, e. g. Av. S i.315] a special manner of squatting. The soles of the feet are firmly on the ground, the man sinks down, the heels slightly rising as he does so, until the thighs rest on the calves, and the hams are about six inches or more from the ground. Then with elbows on knees he balances himself. Few Europeans can adopt this posture, & none (save miners) can maintain it with comfort, as the calf muscles upset the balance. Indians find it easy, & when the palms of the hands are also held together upwards, it indicates submission. See Dial. i.231 n. 4. -- Vin i.45 (˚ŋ nisīdati); iii.228; A i.296; ii.206; Pug 55; Vism 62, 104, 105 (quot. fr. Papañca Sūdanī) 426; DhA i.201, 217; ii.61 (as posture of humility); iii.195; iv.223.
-- padhāna [in BSk. distorted to utkuṭuka -- prahāṇa Divy 339 = Dh 141] exertion when squatting (an ascetic habit) D i.167; M i.78, 515; A i.296; ii.206; J i.493; iii.235; iv.299; Dh 141 (= ukkuṭika -- bhāvena āraddha -- viriyo DhA iii.78).
Ukkuṭṭhi (f.) [fr. ud + kruś, cp. *kruñc as in P. kuñca & Sk. krośati] shouting out, acclamation J ii.367; vi.41; Bu i.35; Miln 21; Vism 245; DhA ii.43; VvA 132 (˚sadda).
Ukkusa [see ukkuṭṭhi & cp. BSk. utkrośa watchman (?) Divy 453] an osprey J iv.291 (˚rāja), 392.
Ukkūla (adj.) [ud + kūla] sloping up, steep, high (opp. vikkūla) A i.35 sq.; Vism 153 (nadi); SnA 42. Cp. utkūlanikūla -- sama Lal. V. 340.
Ukkoṭana (nt.) [fr. ud + *kuṭ to be crooked or to deceive, cp. kujja & kuṭila crooked] crookedness, perverting justice, taking bribes to get people into unlawful possessions (Bdhgh.) D i.5; iii.176; S v.473; A ii.209, v.206; DA i.79 = Pug A 240 ("assāmike sāmike kātuŋ lañcagahaṇaŋ").
Ukkoṭanaka (adj.) [fr. ukkoṭana] belonging to the perversion of justice Vin ii.94.
Ukkoṭeti [denom. fr. *ukkoṭ -- ana] to disturb what is settled, to open up again a legal question that has been adjudged, Vin ii.94, 303; iv.126; J ii.387; DA i.5.
Ukkhali (˚lī) (f.) [der. fr. Vedic ukha & ukhā pot, boiler; related to Lat. aulla (fr. *auxla); Goth. auhns oven] a pot in which to boil rice (& other food) J i.68, 235; v. 389, 471; Pug 33; Vism 346 (˚mukhavaṭṭi), 356 (˚kapāla, in comp.); DhA i.136; ii.5; iii.371; iv.130; Pug A 231; VvA 100. Cp. next.
Ukkhalikā (f.) = ukkhali. Th 2, 23 (= bhatta -- pacana- bhājanaŋ ThA 29); DhA iv.98 (˚kāla); DhsA 376.
Ukkhā(?) [can it be compared with Vedic ukṣan?] in ukkha- sataŋ dānaŋ, given at various times of the day (meaning = e(kato/mbh?) S ii.264 (v. l. ukkā). Or is it to be read ukhāsataŋ d. i. e. consisting of 100 pots (of rice = mahā danaŋ?). S A: paṇītabhojana -- bharitānaŋ mahā -- ukkhalinaŋ sataŋ dānaŋ. Cp. ukhā cooking vessel ThA 71 (Ap. v.38). Kern, Toev. under ukkhā trsl. "zeker muntstuck", i. e. kind of gift.
Ukkhita [pp. of ukṣ sprinkle] besmeared, besprinkled J iv.331 (ruhir˚, so read for ˚rakkhita). Cp. okkhita.
Ukkhitta [pp. of ukkhipati] taken up, lifted up, t.t. of the canon law "suspended" Vin iv.218; J iii.487.
-- ˚āsika with drawn sword M i.377; S iv.173; J i.393; DhsA 329; Vism 230 (vadhaka), 479. -- paligha having the obstacles removed M i.139; A iii.84; Dh 398 = Sn 622 (= avijjā -- palighassa ukkhittatāya u. SnA 467 = DhA iv.161). -- sira with uplifted head Vism 162.
Ukkhittaka (adj. -- n.) [fr. ukkhitta] a bhikkbu who has been suspended Vin i.97, 121; ii.61, 173, 213.
Ukkhipati [ut + khipati, kṣip]. To hold up, to take up J i.213; iv.391: vi.350; Vism 4 (satthaŋ); PvA 265. A t. t. of canon law, to suspend (a bhikkhu for breach of rules) Vin iv.309; Pug 33. -- ukkhipiyati to be suspended Vin ii.61. Caus. II. ukkhipāpeti to cause to be supported J i.52; ii.15, 38; iii.285, 436. -- pp. ukkhitta, ger. ukkhipitvā as adv. "upright" Vism 126.
Ukkhipana (nt.) [fr. ud + kṣip] 1. pushing upwards J i.163. -- 2. throwing up, sneering Vism 29 (vācāya).
Ukkheṭita [pp. of ud + kheṭ or *khel, see kheḷa] spit out, thrown off, in phrase moho (rāgo etc) catto vanto mutto pahino paṭinissaṭṭho u. Vin iii.97 = iv.27.
Ukkhepa (adj. -- n.) [fr. ud + kṣip] (adj.) throwing away DhA iv.59 (˚dāya a throw -- away donation, tip). -- (m.) lifting up raising J i.394 (cel˚); vi.508; DA i.273; dur˚ hard to lift or raise Sdhp 347.
Ukkhepaka (adj.) [fr. ukkhepa] throwing (up); ˚ŋ (acc.) in the manner of throwing Vin ii.214 = iv.195 (piṇḍ˚).
Ukkhepana (nt.) [fr. ud + kṣip] suspension J iii.487.
Ukkhepanā (f.) [= last] throwing up, provocation, sneering Vbh 352 = Vism 23, expld. at p. 29.
Ukkhepaniya (adj.) [ukkhepana + iya, cp. BSk. utkṣepa- nīyaŋ karma Divy 329] referring to the suspension (of a bhikkhu), ˚kamma act or resolution of suspension Vin i.49, 53, 98, 143, 168; ii.27, 226, 230, 298: A i.99.
Uklāpa (ukkalāpa) (adj.) [cp. Sk. ut -- kalāpayati to let go] - 1. deserted J ii.275 (ukkalāpa T.; vv. ll. uklāpa & ullāpa). -- 2. dirtied, soiled Vin ii.154, 208, 222; Vism 128; DhA iii.168 (ukkalāpa).
Ugga1 (adj.) [Vedic ugra, from ukṣati, weak base of vakṣ as in vakṣana, vakṣayati = Gr. a)ve/cw, Goth. wahsjan "to wax", also Lat. augeo & P. oja] mighty, huge, strong, fierce, grave, m. a mighty or great person, noble lord D i.103; S i.51 = VvA 116 (uggateja "the fiery heat"); J iv.496; v.452 (˚teja); vi.490 (+ rājaputtā, expld. with etymologising effort as uggatā paññātā by C.); Miln 331; DhA ii.57 (˚tapa); Sdhp 286 (˚daṇḍa), 304 (id.). <-> Cp. sam˚. As Np. at Vism 233 & J i.94.
-- putta a nobleman, mighty lord S i.185 ("high born warrior" trsl.); J vi.353 (= amacca -- putta C.); Th 1, 1210.
Ugga2 = uggamana, in aruṇ -- ugga sunrise Vin iv.272.
Uggacchati [ud + gam] to rise, get up out of (lit. & fig.) Th 1, 181; aruṇe uggacchante at sunrise VvA 75; Pv iv.8; Vism 43, ger. uggañchitvāna Miln 376. -- pp. uggata (q. v.).
Uggajjati [ud + gajjati] to shout out Nd1 172.
Uggaṇhāti [ud + gṛh, see gaṇhāti] to take up, acquire, learn [cp. BSk. udgṛhṇāti in same sense, e. g. Divy 18, 77 etc.] Sn 912 (uggahaṇanta = uggahaṇanti = uggaṇhanti SnA 561); imper. uggaṇha J ii.30 (sippaŋ) & uggaṇhāhi Miln 10 (mantāni); ger. uggayha Sn 832, 845; Nd1 173. -- Caus. uggaheti in same meaning Sdhp 520; aor. uggahesi Pv iii.54 (nakkhatta -- yogaŋ = akari PvA 198); ger. uggahetvā J v.282, VvA 98 (vipassanākammaṭṭhānaŋ); infin. uggahetuŋ VvA 138 (sippaŋ to study a craft). -- Caus. II. uggaṇhāpeti to instruct J v. 217; vi.353. -- pp. uggahita (q. v.). See also uggahāyati. -- A peculiar ppr. med. is uggāhamāna going or wanting to learn DA i 32 (cp. uggāhaka).
Uggata [pp. of uggacchati] come out, risen; high, lofty, exalted J iv.213 (suriya), 296 (˚atta), 490; v.244; Pv iv.14 (˚atta one who has risen = uggata -- sabhāva samiddha PvA 220); VvA 217 (˚mānasa); DA i.248; PvA 68 (˚phāsuka with ribs come out or showing, i. e. emaciated, for upphāsulika). Cp. acc˚.
Uggatta in all Pv. readings is to be read uttatta˚, thus at Pv iii.32; PvA 10, 188.
Uggatthana at J vi.590 means a kind of ornament or trinket, it should prob. be read ugghaṭṭana [fr. ghaṭṭeti] lit. "tinkling", i. e. a bangle.
Uggama [fr. ud + gam; Sk. udgama] rising up Sdhp 594.
Uggamana (˚na) (nt.) [fr. ud + gam] going up, rising; rise (of sun & stars) D i.10, 240; S ii.268 (suriy˚); J iv.321 (an˚), 388; Pv ii.941 (suriy˚); DA i.95 (= udayana); DhA i.165 (aruṇ˚); ii.6 (id.); VvA 326 (oggaman˚); PvA 109 (aruṇ˚). Cp. ugga2 & uggama.
Uggaha (adj) ( -- ˚) [fr. ud + gṛh, see gaṇhāti] -- 1. taking up, acquiring, learning Vism 96 (ācariy˚), 99 (˚paripucchā), 277 (kananaṭṭhānassa). -- 2. noticing, taking notice, perception (as opp. to manasikāra) Vism 125, 241 sq. neg. an˚ Sn 912 (= gaṇhāti Nd1 330). Cp. dhanuggaha.
Uggahaṇa (nt.) [fr. uggaṇhāti] learning, taking up, studying PvA 3 (sipp˚). As uggaṇhana at Vism 277.
Uggahāyati [poetic form of uggaheti (see uggaṇhati), but according to Kern, Toev. s. v. representing Ved. udgṛbhāyati] to take hold of, to take up Sn 791 (= gaṇhāti Nd1 91). -- ger. uggahāya Sn 837.
Uggahita [pp. of uggaṇhāti] taken up, taken, acquired Vin i.212; J iii.168 (˚sippa, adj.), 325; iv.220; vi 76; Vism 241. The metric form is uggahīta at Sn 795, 833, 1098; Nd1 175 = Nd2 152 (= gahita parāmaṭṭha).
Uggahetar [n. ag. to ugganhāti, Caus. uggaheti] one who takes up, acquires or learns A iv.196.
Uggāra [ud + gṛ or *g&lcircle; to swallow, see gala & gilati; lit. to swallow up] spitting out, vomiting, ejection Vism 54; DA i.41; KhA 61.
Uggāhaka (adj. -- n.) [fr. ud + gṛh, see uggaṇhāti] one who is eager to learn J v.148 [cp. M Vastu iii.373 ogrāhaka in same context].
Uggāhamāna see uggaṇhāti.
Uggirati1 [Sk. udgirati, ud + gṛ2; but BSk. udgirati in meaning to sing, chant, utter, formation fr. gṛ2 instead of gṛ1, pres. gṛṇāti; in giraŋ udgirati Jtm 3126. -- The by -- form uggirati is uggilati with interchange of I̊ and ṛ, roots *gr̥ & *gI̊, see gala & gilati] to vomit up ("swallow up") to spit out Ud 14 (uggiritvāna); DA i.41 (uggāraŋ uggiranto). Cp. BSk. prodgīrṇa cast out Divy 589.
Uggirati2 [cp. Sk. udgurate, ud + gur] to lift up, carry Vin iv.147 = DhA iii.50 (talasattikaŋ expld. by uccāreti); J i.150 (āvudhāni); vi.460, 472. Cp. sam˚.
Uggilati = uggirati1, i. e. to spit out (opp. ogilati) M i.393; S iv.323; J iii.529; Miln 5; PvA 283.
Uggīva (nt.) [ud + gīva] a neckband to hold a basket hanging down J vi.562 (uggīvañ cɔâpi aŋsato = aŋsakūṭe pacchi -- lagganakaŋ C.).
Ugghaŋseti [ud + ghṛṣ, see ghaŋsati1] to rub Vin ii.106. - pp. ugghaṭṭha (q. v.).
Ugghaṭita (adj.) [pp. of ud + ghaṭati; cp. BSk. udghaṭaka skilled Divy 3, 26 and phrase at M Vastu iii.260 udghaṭitajña] striving, exerting oneself; keen, eager in cpd. ˚ññū of quick understanding A ii.135; Pug 41; Nett 7 -- 9, 125; DA i.291.
Ugghaṭeti [ud + ghaṭati] to open, reveal (? so Hardy in Index to Nett) Nett 9; ugghaṭiyati & ugghaṭanā ibid.
Ugghaṭṭa (Ugghaṭṭha?) [should be pp. of ugghaŋsati = Sk. udghṛṣṭa, see ghaŋsati1, but taken by Bdhgh. either as pp. of or an adj. der. fr. ghaṭṭ, see ghaṭṭeti] knocked, crushed, rubbed against, only in phrase ughaṭṭa -- pāda foot -- sore Sn 980 (= maggakkamaṇena ghaṭṭa -- pādatala etc. SnA 582); J iv.20 (ṭṭh; expld. by uṇha -- vālukāya ghaṭṭapāda); v.69 (= raj okiṇṇa -- pāda C. not to the point).
Uggharati [ud + kṣar] to ooze Th 1, 394 = DhA iii.117.
Ugghāṭana (nt.?) [fr. ugghāṭeti] that which can be removed, in ˚kiṭikā a curtain to be drawn aside Vin ii.153 (cp. Vin Texts iii.174, 176). Ch s. v. gives "rope & bucket of a well" as meaning (kavāṭaŋ anugghāṭeti). Cp. ugghaṭanā .
Ugghāṭita [pp. of ugghāṭeti] opened Miln 55; DhA i.134.
Ugghāṭeti [for ugghaṭṭeti, ud + ghaṭṭ but BSk. udghāṭayati Divy 130] to remove, take away, unfasten, abolish, put an end to Vin ii.148 (tālāni), 208 (ghaṭikaŋ); iv.37; J ii.31; vi.68; Miln 140 (bhava -- paṭisandhiŋ), 371; Vism 374. -- Caus. II. ugghāṭāpeti to have opened J v.381.
Ugghāta [ud + ghāta] shaking, jolting; jolt, jerk Vin ii. 276 (yān˚); J vi.253 (an˚); DhA iii.283 (yān˚).
Ugghāti (f.) [fr. ud + ghāta] -- 1. shaking, shock VvA 36. -- 2. striking, conquering; victory, combd. with nighāti Sn 828; Nd1 167; SnA 541; Nett 110 (T. reads ugghāta˚).
Ugghātita [pp. of ugghāteti, denom. fr. udghāta] struck, killed A iii.68.
Ugghosanā (f.) [abstr. fr. ugghoseti, cp. ghosanā] procla- mation DA i.310.
Ugghoseti [ud + ghoseti] to shout out, announce, proclaim J i.75; DhA ii.94; PvA 127.
Ucca (adj.) [For udya, adj. formation from prep. ud above, up] high (opp. avaca low) D i.194; M ii.213; A v.82 (˚ṭhāniyaŋ nīce ṭhāne ṭhapeti puts on a low place which ought to be placed high); Pv iv.74 (uccaŋ paggayha lifting high up = uccataraŋ katvā PvA 265); Pug 52, 58; DA i.135; PvA 176.
-- âvaca high and low, various, manifold Vin i.70, 203; J iv.115, 363 (= mahaggha -- samaggha C. p. 366); Sn 703, 714, 792, 959; Dh 83; Nd1 93, 467; Vv 121 (= vividha VvA 60); 311. -- kulīnatā high birth A iii.48 (cp. uccā˚).
Uccaka (adj.) [fr. ucca] high Vin ii.149 (āsandikā a kind of high chair).
Uccatta (nt.) [fr. ucca = Sk. uccatvaŋ] height J iii.318.
Uccaya [fr. ud + ci, see cināti; Sk. uccaya] heaping up, heap, pile, accumulation Dh 115, 191, 192; Vv 4711; 827 (= cetiya VvA 321); DhA iii.5, 9; DhsA 41 (pāpassa). -- siluccaya a mountain Th 1, 692; J i.29 (v.209); vi.272, 278; Dāvs V.63.
Uccā (˚ -- ) (adv.) [cp. Sk. uccā, instr. sg. of uccaŋ, cp. paścā behind, as well as uccaiḥ instr. pl. -- In BSk. we find ucca˚ (uccakulīna Av. Ś iii.117) as well as uccaŋ (uccaŋgama Divy 476). It is in all cases restricted to cpds.] high (lit. & fig.), raised, in foll. cpds.
-- kaṇerukā a tall female elephant M i.178. -- kāḷārikā id. M i.178 (v. l. ˚kaḷārikā to be preferred). -- kula a high, noble family Pv iii.116 (= uccā khattiya -- kul -- âdino PvA 176). -- kulīnatā birth in a high -- class family, high rank M iii.37; VvA 32. -- sadda a loud noise D i.143, 178; A iii.30. -- sayana a high bed (+ mahāsayana) Vin i. 192; D i.5, 7; cp. DA i.78.
Uccāra [Ud + car] discharge, excrement, faeces Vin iii.36 (˚ŋ gacchati to go to stool); iv.265, 266 (uccāro nāma gūtho vuccati); DhA ii.56 (˚karaṇa defecation); uccārapassāva faeces & urine D i.70; M i.83; J i.5; ii.19.
Uccāranā (f.) [fr. uccāreti] lifting up, raising Vin iii.121.
Uccārita [pp. of uccāreti] -- 1. uttered, let out PvA 280 (akkharāni). -- 2. lifted, raised ThA 255.
Uccāreti [ud + cāreti, Caus. of car] to lift up, raise aloft Vin iii.81; iv.147 = DhA iii.50; M i.135. -- pp. uccārita (q. v.).
Uccālinga [etym.?] a maw -- worm Vin iii.38, 112; J ii.146.
Uccināti [ud + cināti] to select, choose, search, gather, pick out or up Vin i.73; ii.285 (aor. uccini); J iv.9; Pv iii.2 4 (nantake = gavesana -- vasena gahetvāna PvA 185); Dpvs iv.2.
Ucchanga [Sk. utsanga, ts > cch like Sk. utsahate > BSk. ucchahate see ussahati] the hip, the lap Vin i.225; M i. 366; A i.130 (˚pañña); J i.5, 308; ii.412; iii.22; iv.38, 151; Pug 31; Vism 279; DhA ii.72.
Ucchādana (nt.) [ut + sād, Caus. of sad, sīdati, cp. ussada] rubbing the limbs, anointing the body with perfumes shampooing D i.7, 76; at the latter passage in combn. anicc˚ -- dhamma, of the body, meaning "erosion, decay", and combd. with parimaddana abrasion (see about detail of meaning Dial. i.87); thus in same formula at M i. 500; S iv.83; J i.146 & passim; A i.62; ii.70 (+ nahāpana); iv.54, 386; It 111; Th 2, 89 (nahāpan˚); Miln 241 (˚parimaddana) 315 (+ nahāpana); DA i.88.
Ucchādeti [fr. ut + sād, see ucchādana] to rub the body with perfumes J vi.298; Miln 241 (+ parimaddati nahāpeti); DA i.88.
Ucchiṭṭha [pp. of ud + śiṣ] left, left over, rejected, thrown out; impure, vile Vin ii.115 (˚odakaŋ); iv.266 (id.); J ii.83 (bhattaŋ ucchiṭṭhaŋ akatvā), 126 (˚nadī impure; also itthi outcast), 363; iv.386 (˚ŋ piṇḍaŋ), 388; vi.508; Miln 315; DhA i.52; ii.85; iii.208; PvA 80 (= chaḍḍita), 173 (˚bhattaŋ). At J iv.433 read ucch˚ for ucciṭṭha. -- an˚ not touched or thrown away (of food) J iii.257; DhA ii.3. -- See also uttiṭṭha & ucchepaka.
Ucchiṭṭhaka (fr. ucchiṭṭha) = ucchiṭṭha J iv.386; vi.63, 509.
Ucchindati [ud + chid, see chindati] to break up, destroy, annihilate S v.432 (bhavataṇhaŋ), A iv.17 (fut. ucchecchāmi to be read with v. l. for T. ucchejjissāmi); Sn 2 (pret. udacchida), 208 (ger. ucchijja); J v.383; Dh 285. <-> Pass. ucchijjati to be destroyed or annihilated, to cease to exist S iv.309; J v.242, 467; Miln 192; PvA 63, 130 (= na pavattati), 253 (= natthi). -- pp. ucchinna (q. v.).
Ucchinna [pp. of ucchindati] broken up, destroyed S iii. 10; A v.32; Sn 746. Cp. sam˚.
Ucchu [Sk. cp. Vedic Np. Ikṣvāku fr. ikṣu] sugar -- cane Vin iv.35; A iii.76; iv.279; Miln 46; DhA iv.199 (˚ūnaŋ yanta sugar -- cane mill), PvA 257, 260; VvA 124.
-- agga (ucch˚) top of s. c. Vism 172. -- khaṇḍikā a bit of sugar -- cane Vv 3326. -- khādana eating s. c. Vism 70. -- khetta sugar -- cane field J i.339; VvA 256. -- gaṇṭhikā a kind of sugar -- cane, Batatas Paniculata J i.339; vi.114 (so read for ˚ghaṭika). -- pāla watchman of s. -- c. VvA 256. -- pīḷana, cane -- pressing, Asl. 274. -- puṭa sugar -- cane basket J iv.363. -- bīja seed of s. -- c. A i.32; v.213. -- yantra a sugar -- mill J i.339. -- rasa s. -- c. juice Vin i.246; Vism 489; VvA 180 -- vāta, Asl. 274. -- sālā, Asl. 274.
Uccheda [fr. ud + chid, chind, see ucchindati & cp. cheda] breaking up, disintegration, perishing (of the soul) Vin iii.2 (either after this life, or after kāmadeva life, or after brahmadeva life) D i.34, 55; S iv.323; Nd1 324; Miln 413; Nett 95, 112, 160; DA i.120.
-- diṭṭhi the doctrine of the annihilation (of the soul), as opp. to sassata -- or atta -- diṭṭhi (the continuance of the soul after death) S ii.20; iii.99, 110 sq; Ps i.150, 158; Nd1 248 (opp. sassati˚); Dhs 1316; Nett 40, 127; SnA 523 (opp. atta˚). -- vāda (adj.) one who professes the doctrine of annihilation (ucchedadiṭṭhi) Vin i.235; iii.2; D i.34, 55; S ii.18; iv.401; A iv.174, 182 sq.; Nd1 282; Pug 38. -- vādin = ˚vāda Nett 111; J v.244.
Ucchedana (adj.) [fr. ud + chid] cutting off, destroying; f. ˚anī J v.16 (surā).
Ucchedin (adj.) an adherent of the ucchedavāda J v.241.
Ucchepaka (nt.) [= ucchiṭṭhaka in sense of ucchiṭṭha- bhatta] leavings of food M ii.7 (v. l. uccepaka with cc for cch as ucciṭṭha: ucchiṭṭha). The passage is to be read ucchepake va te ratā. A diff. connotation would be implied by taking ucchepaka = uñchā, as Neumann does (Majjhima trsl.2 ii.682).
Uju & Ujju (adj.) [Vedic ṛju, also ṛjyati, irajyate to stretch out: cp. Gr. o) re/gw to stretch; Lat. rego to govern; Goth. ufrakjan to straighten up; Ohg. recchen = Ger. recken = E. reach; Oir. rēn span. See also P. ajjava] straight, direct; straightforward, honest, upright D iii.150 T. ujja), 352 (do.) 422, 550; Vv 187 (= sabba -- jimha -- vanka -- kuṭilabhāvɔâpagama -- hetutāya u. VvA 96); Pug 59; Vbh 244 (ujuŋ kāyaŋ paṇidhāya); Vism 219 (uju avanka akuṭila); DA i.210 (id.), KhA 236; DhA i.288 (cittaŋ ujuŋ akuṭilaŋ nibbisevanaŋ karoti); VvA 281 (˚koṭi -- vanka); PvA 123 (an˚).
-- angin (ujjangin) having straight limbs, neg. an˚ not having straight limbs, i. e. pliable, skilful, nimble, graceful J v.40 (= kañcana -- sannibha -- sarīra C.); vi.500 (T. anuccangin = anindita -- agarahitangin C.). -- gata walking straight, of upright life M i.46; A iii.285 sq. (˚citta); v.290 sq.; Sn 350 (ujju˚), 477 (id.); Dh 108 (ujju˚, see DhA ii.234 for interpretation). -- gāmin, neg. an˚ going crooked, a snake J iv.330. -- cittatā straightness, unwieldiness of heart Vbh 350. -- diṭṭhitā the fact of having a straightforward view or theory (of life) Miln 257. -- paṭipanna living uprightly D i.192; S iv.304; v.343; Vism 219. -- magga the straight road D i.235; Vin v.149; It 104; J i.344; vi.252; DhA ii.192. -- bhāva straightness, uprightness SnA 292, 317; PvA 51. -- bhūta straight, upright S i.100, 170; ii.279; v.384, 404; A ii.57; iv.292; J i.94; v.293 (an˚); Vv 3423 (see VvA 155); Pv i.1010 (= citta -- jimha -- vankaKutīla -- bhāva -- karānaŋ kilesānaŋ abhāvena ujubhāvappatta PvA 51). -- vaŋsa straight lineage, direct descendency J v.251. -- vāta a soft wind Miln 283. -- vipaccanīka in direct opposition D i.1; M i.402; DA i.38.
Ujuka & Ujjuka (adj.) [uju + ka] straight, direct, upright M i.124; S i.33 (ujuko so maggo, the road to Nibbāna), 260 (citta); iv.298; v.143, 165; J i.163; v.297 (opp. khujja); DhA i.18 (˚magga); Sdhp 321. -- anujjuka crooked, not straight S iv.299; J iii.318.
Ujukatā (f.) [abstr. fr. ujuka] straightness, rectitude Dhs 50, 51 (kāyassa, cittassa); Vism 436 sq.
Ujutā (f.) [abstr. of uju] straight(forward)ness, rectitude Dhs 50, 51.
Ujjagghati [ud + jagghati] to laugh at, deride, mock, make fun of Vin iii.128; Th 2, 74 (spelt jjh = hasati ThA 78); A iii.91 (ujjh˚, v. l. ujj˚) = Pug 67 (= pāṇiŋ paharitvā mahāhasitaŋ hasati Pug A 249).
Ujjangala [ud + jangala] hard, barren soil; a very sandy and deserted place D ii.146 (˚nagaraka, trsl. "town in the midst of a jungle", cp. Dial. ii.161); J i.391; Vv 855 (= ukkaŋsena jangala i. e. exceedingly dusty or sandy, dry); Pv ii.970 (spelt ujjhangala, expld. by ativiya -- thaddhabhūmibhāga at PvA 139); Vism 107. Also in BSk. ujjangala, e. g. M Vastu ii.207.
Ujjala (adj.) [ud + jval, see jalati] blazing, flashing; bright, beautiful J i.220; Dāvs ii.63.
Ujjalati [ud + jalati, jval] to blaze up, shine forth Vin i.31; VvA 161 (+ jotati). -- Caus. ujjāleti to make shine, to kindle Vin i.31; Miln 259; Vism 428; ThA 69 (Ap. v.14, read dīpāŋ ujjālayiŋ); VvA 51 (padīpaŋ).
Ujjava (adj.) [ud + java] "running up", in cpd. ujjav -- ujjava a certain term in the art of spinning or weaving Vin iv. 300, expld. by "yattakaŋ patthena (patthana?) añcitaŋ hoti tasmi takkamhi vedhite".
Ujjavati [ud + javati] to go up -- stream Vin ii.301.
Ujjavanikāya instr. fem. of ujjavanaka used as adv. [ud + javanaka, q. v.] up -- stream, lit "running up" Vin ii.290; iv.65 (in expln. of uddhaŋgāmin, opp. ojavanikāya).
Ujjahati [ud + jahati] to give up, let go; imper. ujjaha S i.188; Th 2, 19; Sn 342.
Ujju & Ujjuka see uju & ujuka.
Ujjota [ud + *jot of jotati, Sk. uddyotate] light, lustre J i.183 (˚kara); Miln 321.
Ujjotita [pp. of ujjoteti, ud + joteti] illumined Dāvs v.53.
Ujjhaggati see ujjagghati.
Ujjhaggikā (f.) [fr. ujjagghati, spelling varies] loud laughter Vin ii.213, cp. iv.187.
Ujjhati [Sk. ujjhati, ujjh] -- 1. to forsake, leave, give up J vi.138; Dāvs ii.86. -- 2. to sweep or brush away J vi.296. -- pp. ujjhita (q. v.).
Ujjhatti (f.) [fr. ud + jhāyati1, corresponding to a Sk. *ud -- dhyāti] irritation, discontent A iv.223, 467 (v. l. ujj˚); cp. ujjhāna.
Ujjhāna (nt.) [ud + jhāna1 or jhāna2?] -- 1. taking offence, captiousness Dh 253 (= paresaŋ randha -- gavesitāya DhA iii.377); Miln 352 (an˚ -- bahula). -- 2. complaining, wailing J iv.287.
-- saññin, -- saññika irritable S i.23; Th 1, 958; Vin ii.214, cp. iv.194; Dpvs ii.6; DhA iii.376 (˚saññitā irritability).
Ujjhāpana (nt.) [fr. ud + jhāyati1 or jhāyati2 to burn, to which jhāpeti to bring to ruin etc.? cp. ujjhāna] stirring up, provoking J v.91 (devat˚), 94 (˚kamma).
Ujjhāpanaka (adj.) [fr. ujjhāpana] one who stirs up an- other to discontent Vin iv.38.
Ujjhāpeti [Caus. of ujjhāyati] to harass, vex, irritate M i. 126; S i.209 ("give occasion for offence"); Vin iv.38 (cp. p. 356); J v.286; PvA 266.
Ujjhāyati [ud + jhāyati1 or perhaps more likely jhāyati2 to burn, fig. to be consumed. According to Müller P. G. pp. 12 & 42 = Sk. ava -- dhyā, but that is doubtful phonetically as well as semantically] to be irritated, to be annoyed or offended, to get angry, grumble; often in phrase ujjhāyati khīyati vipāceti expressing great annoyance Vin i.53, 62, 73; ii.207; iv.226; S i.232 & passim. -- S i.232 (mā ujjhāyittha); J ii.15; DhA ii.20; aor. ujjhāyi J i.475; DhA ii.88; inf. ujjhātuŋ J ii.355. <-> Caus. ujjhāpeti (q. v.).
Ujjhita [pp. of ujjhati] destitute, forsaken; thrown out, cast away M i.296 (+ avakkhitta); Th 1, 315 (itthi); 2, 386 (cp. ThA 256 vātakkhitto viya yo koci dahano); Dh 58 (= chaḍḍita of sweepings DhA i.445); J iii.499; v.302; vi.51.
Uñcha & Uñchā (f.) [Sk. uñcha & uñchana, to uñch. Neu- mann's etym. uñchā = E. ounce, Ger. unze (Majjhima trsl.2 ii.682) is incorrect, see Walde Lat. Wtb. under uncia] anything gathered for sustenance, gleaning S ii. 281; A i.36; iii.66 sq., 104; Vin iii.87; Sn 977; Th 2, 329, 349; J iii.389; iv.23, 28, 434, 471 (˚ya, dat. = phalâphalɔatthāya C.); ThA 235, 242. Cp. samuñchaka.
-- cariyā wandering for, or on search for gleaning, J ii.272; iii.37, 515; v.3; DA i.270; VvA 103; ThA 208. -- cārika (adj.) going about after gleanings, one of 8 kinds of tāpasā SnA 295 (cp. DA i.270, 271). -- patta the gleaning -- bowl, in phrase uñchāpattāgate rato "fond of that which has come into the gl. b." Th 1, 155 = Pv iv.73 (= uñchena bhikkhācārena laddhe pattagate āhāre rato PvA 265; trsld. in Psalms of Brethren "contented with whatever fills the bowl"). aññāt˚, marked off as discarded (goods) S ii.281, so S A.
Uñchati [fr. uñch] to gather for sustenance, seek (alms), glean Vism 60 (= gavesati).
Uññā (f.) [= avaññā (?) from ava + jñā, or after uññā- tabba?] contempt Vin iv.241; Vbh 353 sq. (att˚).
Uññātabba (adj.) [grd. fr. ava + jñā (?)] to be despised, contemptible, only in stock -- phrase "daharo na uṇṇātabbo na paribhotabbo" S i.69; Sn p. 93; SnA 424 (= na avajānitabbo, na nīcaŋ katvā jānitabbo ti). In same connection at J v.63 mā naŋ daharo [ti] uññāsi (v. l. maññāsi) apucchitvāna (v. l. ā˚).
Uṭṭitvā at Vin ii.131 is doubtful reading (see p. 318, v. l. uḍḍhetvā), and should perhaps be read uḍḍetvā (= oḍḍetva, see uḍḍeti), meaning "putting into a sling, tying or binding up".
Uṭṭepaka one who scares away (or catches?) crows (kāk˚) Vin i.79 (vv. ll. uṭṭhe˚, uḍḍe˚, uḍe˚). See remarks on uṭṭepeti.
Uṭṭepeti in phrase kāke u. "to scare crows away" (or to catch them in snares?) at Vin i.79. Reading doubtful & should probably be read uḍḍepeti (? Caus. of uḍḍeti = oḍḍeti, or of uḍḍeti to make fly away). The vv. ll. given to this passage are uṭṭeceti, upaṭṭhāpeti, uḍḍoyeti. See also uṭṭepaka.
Uṭṭhapana see vo˚.
Uṭṭhahati & Uṭṭhāti [ud + sthā see tiṭṭhati & uttiṭṭhati] to rise, stand up, get up, to arise, to be produced, to rouse or exert oneself, to be active, pres. uṭṭhahati Pug 51. -- pot. uṭṭhaheyya S i.217; as imper. uttiṭṭhe Dh 168 (expld. by uttiṭṭhitvā paresaŋ gharadvāre ṭhatvā DhA iii.165, cp. Vin Texts i.152). -- imper. 2nd pl. uṭṭhahatha Sn 331; 2nd sg. uṭṭhehi Pv ii.61; J iv.433. -- ppr. uṭṭhahanto M i.86; S i.217; J i.476. -- aor. uṭṭhahi J i.117; PvA 75. -- ger. uṭṭhahitvā PvA 4, 43, 55, 152, & uṭṭhāya Sn 401. -- inf. uṭṭhātuŋ J i.187. <-> Note. When uṭṭh˚ follows a word ending in a vowel, and without a pause in the sense, a v is generally prefixed for euphony, e. g. gabbho vuṭṭhāsi an embryo was produced or arose Vin ii.278; āsanā vuṭṭhāya arising from his seat, Vism 126. See also under vuṭṭhahati. -- pp. uṭṭhita; Caus. uṭṭhāpeti. -- Cp. pariyuṭṭhāti.
Uṭṭhahāna [ppr. of uṭṭhahati] exerting oneself, rousing one- self; an˚ sluggish, lazy Dh 280 (= ayāyāmanto DhA iii. 409); cp. anuṭṭhahaŋ S i.217.
Uṭṭhātar [n. ag. of ut + ṣṭhā, see uṭṭhahati] one who gets up or rouses himself, one who shows energy S i.214; A iv.285, 288, 322; Sn 187; J vi.297. -- an˚ one who is without energy S i.217; Sn 96.
Uṭṭhāna (nt.) [fr. ut + ṣṭhā] -- 1. rising, rise, getting up, standing (opp. sayana & nisīdana lying or sitting down) D ii.134 (sīha -- seyyaŋ kappesi uṭṭhāna -- saññaŋ manasikaritvā); Dh 280 (˚kāla); J i.392 (an˚ -- seyyā a bed from which one cannot get up); Vism 73 (aruṇ -- uṭṭhānavelā time of sunrise) DhA i.17. -- 2. rise, origin, occasion or oppertunity for; as adj. ( -- ˚) producing J i.47 (kapp˚); vi.459; Miln 326 (dhaññ˚ khettaŋ atthi). -- 3. "rousing", exertion, energy, zeal, activity, manly vigour, industry, often syn. with viriya M i.86; A i.94; ii.135 (˚phala); iii.45 (˚viriya), 311; iv.281 (˚sampadā); It 66 (˚adhigataŋ dhanaŋ earned by industry); Pv iv.324; Pug 51 (˚phala); Miln 344, 416; ThA 267 (˚viriya); PvA 129 (+ viriya). -- an˚ want of energy, sluggishness A iv.195; Dh 241. <-> Note. The form vuṭṭhāna appears for uṭṭh˚ after a vowel under the same conditions as vuṭṭhahati for uṭṭhahati (q. v.) gabbha -- vuṭṭhānaŋ J i.114. See also vuṭṭh˚, and cp. pariy˚.
Uṭṭhānaka ( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. uṭṭhāna] -- 1. giving rise to yielding (revenue), producing J i.377, 420 (satasahass˚); iii. 229 (id.); v.44 (id.). Cp. uṭṭhāyika. -- 2. energetic J vi.246.
Uṭṭhānavant (adj.) [uṭṭhāna + vant] strenuous, active Dh 24.
Uṭṭhāpeti [Caus. ii. of utthahati] -- 1. to make rise, only in phrase aruṇaŋ (suriyaŋ) u. to let the sun rise, i. e. wait for sunrise or to go on till sunrise J i.318; vi.330; Vism 71, 73 (aruṇaŋ). -- 2. to raise J vi.32 (paṭhaviŋ). <-> 3. to fit up J vi.445 (nāvaŋ). -- 4. to exalt, praise DA i.256. -- 5. to turn a person out DhA iv.69. -- See also vuṭṭhāpeti.
Uṭṭhāyaka (adj.) [adj. formation fr. uṭṭhāya, ger. of uṭṭha- hati] "getting -- up -- ish", i. e. ready to get up, quick, alert, active, industrious; f. ˚ikā Th 2, 413 (= uṭṭhāna -- viriyasampannā ThA 267; v. l. uṭṭhāhikā)
Uṭṭhāyika (adj.) [= uṭṭhānaka] yielding, producing J ii.403 (satasahass˚).
Uṭṭhāyin (adj.) [adj. form. fr. uṭṭhāya, cp. uṭṭhāyaka] getting up D i.60 (pubb˚ + pacchā -- nipātin rising early & lying down late).
Uṭṭhāhaka (adj.) [for uṭṭhāyaka after analogy of gāhaka etc.] = uṭṭhāyaka J v.448; f. ˚ikā A iii.38 (v. l. ˚āyikā); iv.266 sq.
Uṭṭhita [pp. of uṭṭhahati] -- 1. risen, got up Pv ii.941 (kāl˚); Vism 73. -- 2. arisen, produced J i.36; Miln 155. -- 3. striving, exerting oneself, active J ii.61; Dh 168; Miln 213. -- an˚ S ii.264; Ps i.172. -- Cp. pariy˚. <-> Note. The form is vuṭṭhita when following upon a vowel; see vuṭṭhita & uṭṭhahati, e. g. paṭisallāṇā vutthito arisen from the seclusion D ii.9; pāto vuṭṭhito risen early PvA 128.
Uḍḍayhana (nt.) [fr. uḍḍayhati, see uddahati] burning up, conflagration Pug 13 (˚velā = jhāyana -- kālo Pug A 187); KhA 181 (T. uḍḍahanavelā, v. l. preferable uḍḍayh˚).
Uḍḍahati [ud + ḍahati] to burn up (intrs.) KhA 181 (uḍḍaheyya with v. l. uḍḍayheyya, the latter preferable). Usually in Pass. uḍḍayhati to be burnt, to burn up (intrs.) S iii.149, 150 (v. l. for ḍayhati); J iii.22 (udayhate); v.194. fut. uḍḍayhissati J i.48.
Uḍḍita [pp. of uḍḍeti2] ensnared (?), bound, tied up S i.40 (= taṇhāya ullanghita C.; trsld. "the world is all strung up").
Uḍḍeti1 [ud + ḍeti to fly. The etym. is doubtful, Müller P. Gr. 99 identifies uḍḍeti1 & uḍḍeti2 both as causatives to ḍī. Of uḍḍeti2 two forms exist, uḍḍ˚ & oḍḍ˚, the latter of which may be a variant of the former, but with specialisation of meaning ("lay snares"), it may be a cpd. with ava˚ instead of ud˚. It is extremely doubtful whether uḍḍeti2 belongs here, we should rather separate it & refer it to another root, probably lī, layate (as in allīna, nilīyati etc.), to stick to, adhere, fasten etc. The change l > ḍ is a freq. Pāli phenomenon. Another Caus. II. of the same root (ḍī?) is uṭṭepeti] to fly up M i.364 (kāko maŋsapesiŋ ādāya uḍḍayeyya; vv. ll. ubbaḍaheyya, uyya, dayeyya); J v.256, 368, 417.
Uḍḍeti2 [see discussion under uḍḍeti1] (a) to bind up, tie up to, string up Vin ii.131 (so read for uṭṭitvā, v. l. uḍḍhetvā). -- (b) to throw away, reject PvA 256 (+ chaḍḍayāmi gloss). -- pp. uḍḍita.
Uḍḍha ( -- ˚) (num. ord.) [the apocope form of catuttha = uttha, dialectically reduced to uḍḍha under the influence of the preceding aḍḍha] the fourth, only in cpd. aḍḍhuḍḍha "half of the fourth unit", i. e. three & a half (cp. diyaḍḍha 1 1/2 and aḍḍha -- teyya 2 1/2) J v.417 sq. (˚āni itthisahassāni); Mhvs xii.53.
Uṇṇa (nt.) & Uṇṇā (f.) [Sk. ūrṇa & ūrṇā; Lat. lāna wool; Goth. wulla; Ohg. wolla = E. wool; Lith. vilna; Cymr. gwlan (= E. flannel); Gr. lh_nos, also ou_) los = Lat. vellus (fleece) = Ags. wil -- mod] -- 1. wool A iii.37 = iv.265 (+ kappāsā cotton) J ii.147; SnA 263 (patt˚). -- 2. hair between the eyebrows Sn 1022, & in stock phrase, describing one of the 32 signs of a Mahāpurisa, bhamukɔantare jātā uṇṇā odātā etc. D ii.18 = iii.144 = 170 = SnA 285. Also at Vism 552 in jāti -- uṇṇāya.
-- ja in uṇṇaja mukha J vi.218, meaning "rounded, swelling" (C. expls. by kañcanɔādāso viya paripuṇṇaŋ mukhaŋ). -- nābhi (either uṇṇa˚ or uṇṇā, cp. Vedic ūrṇavābhi, ūrṇa + vābhi from Idg. *ṷebh to weave as in Lat. vespa = wasp, of which shorter root in Sk. vā) a spider, lit. "wool -- i. e. thread -- weaver", only in combn. with sarabū & mūsikā at Vin ii.110 = A ii.73 = J ii.147 (= makkaṭaka C).
Uṇṇata (adj.) [pp. of uṇṇamati, Sk. unnata] raised, high, fig. haughty (opp. oṇata) A ii.86; Sn 702 (an˚ care = uddhaccaŋ nɔāpajjeyya SnA 492); Pug 52 (= ucca uggata Pug A 229). Cp. unnata.
Uṇṇati (f.) [fr. uṇṇamati] haughtiness Sn 830; Nd1 158, 170; Dhs 1116, 1233. Cp. unnati.
Uṇṇama [fr. uṇṇamati] loftiness, height, haughtiness Dhs 1116, 1233. Cp. unnama .
Uṇṇamati [ud + nam] to rise up, to be raised, to straighten up, to be haughty or conceited Sn 366, 829, 928; Nd1 169; J vi.346 inf. uṇṇametave Sn 206. Cp. unnamati.
Uṇṇī (f.) [Sk. aurṇī fr. aurṇa woollen, der. of ūrṇa] a woollen dress Vin ii.108.
Uṇha (adj. -- n.) [Vedic uṣṇā f. to oṣati to burn, pp. uṣṭa burnt, Sk. uṣṇa = Lat. ustus; cp. Gr. eu)/w, Lat. uro to burn, Ags. ysla glowing cinders, Lith. usnis nettle] hot, as adj. only in phrase uṇhaŋ lohitaŋ chaḍḍeti to spill hot blood, i. e. to kill oneself DhA i.95; otherwise in cpds.; abs. only as nt. "heat" & always in contrast to sītaŋ "cold" Vin ii.117 (sītena pi uṇhena pi); D ii.15 (opp. sīta); M i.85; A i.145 = 170 = J v.417 (sītaŋ vā uṇhaŋ vā tiṇaŋ vā rajo vā ussāvo vā); Sn 52, 966 (acc ˚); Nd1 486 = Nd2 677 (same as under sita); J i.17 (v.93); Miln 410 (megho uṇhaŋ nibbāpeti); PvA 37 (ati˚).
-- ākāra appearance of heat, often in phrase (Sakkassa) paṇḍu -- kambala -- silɔāsanaŋ uṇhākāraŋ dassesi, of Sakka's throne showing an appearance of heat as a sign of some extraordinary event happening in the world, e. g. J i.330; v.92; DhA i.17, and passim. -- odaka hot water VvA 68. -- kalla glowing -- hot embers or ashes J ii.94 (so read for ˚kalala); iv.389 (˚vassa, rain of hot ashes, v. l. ˚kukkuḷavassa). -- kāla hot weather Vin ii.209.
Uṇhatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. uṇha] hot state, heat Vism 171.
Uṇhīsa [Sk. uṣṇīṣa] a turban D i.7; ii.19 = iii.145 (˚sīsa cp. Dial. ii.16); J ii.88; Miln 330; DA i.89; DhsA 198.
Ut(t)aṇḍa see uddaṇḍa.
Utu (m. & nt.) [Vedic ṛtu special or proper time, with adj. ṛta straight, right, rite, ṛti manner to Lat. ars "art", Gr. damar(t), further Lat. rītus (rite), Ags. rīm number; of *ar to fit in, adjust etc. q. v. under appeti] -- 1. (lit.) (a) (good or proper) time, season: aruṇa -- utu occasion or time of the sun( -- rise) DhA i.165; utuŋ gaṇhāti to watch for the right time (in horoscopic practice), to prognosticate ibid. sarīraŋ utuŋ gaṇhāpeti "to cause the body to take season", i. e. to refresh the body by cool, sleep, washing etc. J iii.527; DA i.252. -- (b) yearly change, time of the year, season Vism 128. There are usually three seasons mentioned, viz. the hot, rainy and wintry season or gimha, vassa & hemanta A iv.138; SnA 317. Six seasons (in connection with nakkhatta) at J v.330 & vi.524. Often utu is to be understood, as in hemantikena (scil. utunā) in the wintry season S v.51. -- (c) the menses SnA 317; J v.330 (utusinātāya read utusi nhātāya; utusi loc., as expld. by C. pupphe uppanne utumhi nahātāya). -- 2. (applied in a philosophical sense: one of the five fold cosmic order, physical change, physical law of causation (opp. kamma), physical order: see Asl. 272 f.; Dialogues, II, 8, n.; Kvu trsln. 207; cp. Mrs. Rh. D. Buddhism, p. 119 f., Cpd. 161, Dhs trsln. introd. xvii; & cp. cpds. So in connection with kamma at Vism 451, 614; J vi.105 (kamma -- paccayena utunā samuṭṭhitā Veraraṇī); perhaps also at Miln 410 (megha ututo samuṭṭhahitvā).
-- āhāra physical nutriment (cp. Dhs trsln. 174) PvA 148. -- ûpasevanā seasonable activity, pursuit (of activities) according to the seasons, observance of the seasons Sn 249 (= gimhe ātapa -- ṭṭhāna -- sevanā vasse rukkha -- mūla -- sevanā hemante jalappavesa -- sevanā SnA 291). -- kāla seasonable, favourable time (of the year) Vin i.299; ii.173. -- ja produced by the seasons or by physical change Miln 268 (kamma˚, hetu˚, utu˚); Vism 451. -- nibbatta coming to existence through physical causes Miln 268. -- pamāṇa measure of the season, i. e. the exact season Vin i.95. -- pariṇāma change (adversity) of the season (as cause of disease) S iv.230; A ii.87; iii.131; v.110; Miln 112, 304; Vism 31. -- parissaya danger or risk of the seasons A iii.388. -- pubba festival on the eve of each of the (6) seasons J vi.524. -- vāra time of the season, ˚vārena ˚vārena according to the turn of the season J i.58. -- vikāra change of season Vism 262. -- veramanī abstinence during the time of menstruaīion Sn 291 (cp. SnA 317). -- saŋvacchara the year or cycle of the seasons, pl. ˚ā the seasons D iii.85 = A ii.75; S v.442. The phrase utusaŋvaccharāni at Pv ii.955 is by Dhammapāla taken as a bahuvrīhi cpd., viz. cycles of seasons & of years, i. e. vasanta -- gimh ādike bahū utū ca citta -- saŋvaccharɔadi bahūni saŋvaccharāni ca PvA 135. Similarly at J v.330 (with Cy). -- sappāya suitable to the season, seasonable DhA 327. -- samaya time of the menses SnA 317.
Utuka ( -- ˚) (adj.) [utu + ka] seasonable, only in cpd. sabb- otuka belonging to all seasons, perennial D ii.179; Pv iv. 122 (= pupphupaga -- rukkhādīhi sabbesu utūsu sukkhāvaha PvA 275); Sdhp 248.
Utunī (f.) [formed fr. utu like bhikkhunī fr. bhikkhu] a menstruating woman Vin iii.18; iv.303; S iv.239; A iii. 221, 229; Miln 127. an˚ A iii.221, 226.
Utta [pp. of vac, Sk. ukta; for which the usual form is vutta only as dur˚ speaking badly or spoken of badly, i. e. of bad repute A ii.117, 143; iii.163; Kh viii.2; KhA 218.
Uttaṇḍāla (adj.) [ud + taṇḍula] "grainy", i. e. having too many rice grains (of rice gruel), too thick or solid (opp. atikilinna too thin or liquid) J i.340; iii.383 (id.); iv.44 (id.).
Uttatta [ud + tatta1, pp. of ud + tap, Sk. uttapta] heated; of metals: molten, refined; shining, splendid, pure J vi. 574 (hemaŋ uttattaŋ agginā); Vv 8417; Pv iii.32 (˚rūpa, so read for uggata˚, reading correct at PvA 188 ˚singī); PvA 10 (˚kanaka, T. uggatta˚); Mhbv 25 (id.).
Uttanta [= utrasta, is reading correct?] frightened, faint Vin iii.84. See uttasta & utrasta.
Uttama (adj.) [superl. of ud˚, to which compar. is uttara. See etym. under ud˚] "ut -- most", highest, greatest, best Sn 1054 (dhammaŋ uttamaŋ the highest ideal = Nibbāna, for which seṭṭhan Sn 1064; cp. Nd2 317); Dh 56; Nd1 211; Nd2 502 (in paraphrase of mahā combd. with pavara); KhA 124; DhA i.430: PvA 1, 50. -- dum -- uttama a splendid tree Vv 393; nar˚ the best of men Sn 1021 (= narāsabha of 996); pur˚ the most magnificent town Sn 1012; puris˚ the noblest man Th 1, 629, 1084; nt. uttamaŋ the highest ideal, i. e. Arahantship J i.96.
-- anga the best or most important limb or part of the body, viz. (a) the head Vin ii.256 = M i.32 = A iv.278 (in phrase uttamange sirasmiŋ); J ii.163; also in cpd. ˚bhūta the hair of the head Th 2, 253 (= kesa -- kalāpa ThA 209, 210) & ˚ruha id. J i.138 = vi.96 (= kesā C.); (b) the eye J iv.403; (c) the penis J v.197. -- attha the highest gain or good (i. e. Arahantship SnA 332) Sn 324; Dh 386, 403; DhA iv.142; ThA 160. -- adhama most contemptible J v.394, 437. -- guṇā (pl.) loftiest virtues J i.96. -- purisa It 97 & -- porisa the greatest man (= mahāpurisa) Dh 97 (see DhA ii.188). -- bhāva the highest condition, state or place DhA ii.188 (˚ŋ patto = puris'<-> uttamo).
Uttamatā (f.) [abstr. fr. uttama] highest amount, climax, limit DA i.169 (for paramatā).
Uttara1 (adj.) compar. of ud˚, q. v. for etym.; the superl. is uttama] -- 1. higher, high, superior, upper, only in cpds., J ii.420 (musal˚ with the club on top of him? Cy not clear, perhaps to uttara2); see also below. -- 2. northern (with disā region or point of compass) D i.153; M i.123; S i.224; PvA 75. uttarāmukha (for uttaraŋmukha) turning north, facing north Sn 1010. -- 3. subsequent, following, second (˚ -- ) J i.63 (˚āsāḷha -- nakkhatta). <-> 4. over, beyond ( -- ˚): aṭṭhɔutara -- sata eight over a hundred, i. e. 108; DhA i.388. -- sa -- uttara having something above or higher, having a superior i. e. inferior D i.80 (citta), ii.299; M i.59; S v.265; Vbh 324 (paññā); Dhs 1292, 1596; DhsA 50. -- anuttara without a superior, unrivalled, unparalleled D i.40; S i.124; ii.278; iii.84; Sn 179. See also under anuttara.
-- attharaṇa upper cover J vi.253. -- âbhimukha facing North D ii.15. -- āsanga an upper robe Vin i.289; ii. 126; S i.81; iv.290; A i.67, 145; ii.146; DhA i.218; PvA 73; VvA 33 = 51. -- itara something higher, superior D i.45, 156, 174; S i.81; J i.364; DhA ii.60; iv.4. -- oṭṭha the upper lip (opp. adhar˚) J ii.420; iii.26; iv. 184. -- chada a cover, coverlet, awning (sa˚ a carpet with awnings or canopy above it) D i.7; A i.181; iii.50. -- chadana = ˚chada D ii.187; DhA i.87. -- dvāra the northern gate J vi.364. -- dhamma the higher norm of the world (lok˚), higher righteousness D ii.188 (paṭividdha -- lokɔuttara -- dhammatāya uttama -- bhāvaŋ patta). -- pāsaka the (upper) lintel (of a door) Vin ii.120 = 148. -- pubba north -- eastern J vi.518. -- sse (v. l. ˚suve) on the day after tomorrow A i.240.
Uttara2 (adj.) [fr. uttarati] crossing over, to be crossed, in dur˚ difficult to cross or to get out of S i.197 (not duruttamo); Miln 158; and in cpd. ˚setu one who is going to cross a bridge Miln 194 (cp. uttara -- setu).
Uttaraṇa (nt.) [fr. uttarati] bringing or moving out, saving, delivery Th 1, 418; J i.195. In BSk. uttaraṇa only in sense of crossing, overcoming, e. g. Jtm 31 8 (˚setu). <-> Cp. uttara.
Uttarati [ud + tarati1] -- 1. to come out of (water) Vin ii.221 (opp. otarati); J i.108 (id.). -- 2. to go over, to flow over (of water), to boil over Miln 117, 118, 132, 260, 277. -- 3. to cross over, to go beyond M i.135; aor. udatāri Sn 471 (oghaŋ). -- 4. to go over, to overspread J v.204 (ger. uttariyāna = avattharitvā C.). -- pp. otiṇṇa (q. v.). -- Caus. uttareti (q. v.).
Uttari (˚ -- ) & Uttariŋ (adv.) [compn. form of uttara, cp. angi -- bhūta uttāni -- karoti etc.] out, over, beyond; additional, moreover, further, besides. -- (1) uttariŋ: D i.71; M i.83; iii.148; S iv.15; Sn 796 (uttariŋ kurute = uttariŋ karoti Nd2 102, i. e. to do more than anything, to do best, to esteem especially); J ii.23; iii.324; Miln 10 (ito uttariŋ anything beyond this, any more) DhA iv.109 (bhaveti to cultivate especially; see vuttari); VvA 152. -- uttariŋ appaṭivijjhanto not going further in comprehension, i. e. reaching the highest degree of comprehension, Vism 314, referring to Ps ii.131, which is quoted at Miln 198, as the last of the 11 blessings of mettā. -- (2) uttari˚ in foll. cpds.
-- karaṇīya an additional duty, higher obligation S ii. 99; iii.168; A v.157 = 164; It 118. -- bhanga an extra portion, tit -- bit, dainties, additional or after -- meal bits Vin ii.214; iii.160; iv.259; J ii.419; DhA i.214 sa -- uttaribhanga together with dainty bits J i.186, cp. 196 (yāgu). -- bhangika serving as dainties J i.196. -- manussa beyond the power of men, superhuman, in cpd. ˚dhamma an order which is above man, extraordinary condition, transcendental norm, adj. of a transcendental character, miraculous, overwhelming Vin i.209; ii.112; iii.105; iv.24; D i.211; iii.3, 12, 18; M i.68; ii.200; S iv.290, 300, 337; A iii.430; v.88; DhA iii.480. -- sāṭaka a further, i. e. upper or outer garment, cloak, mantle J ii.246; DhA iv.200; PvA 48, 49 (= uttarīyaŋ).
Uttarika (adj.) [fr. uttara] transcending, superior, super- human Nett 50.
Uttariya (nt.) [abstr. fr. uttara; uttara + ya = Sk. *ut- tarya] -- 1. state of being higher. Cp. iii.35; neg. an˚ state of being unsurpassed (lit. with nothing higher), preeminence; see anuttariya. -- 2. an answer, rejoinder DhA i.44 (karaṇ˚ -- karaṇa).
Uttarīya (nt.) [fr. uttara] an outer garment, cloak Pvi.103 (= uparivasanaŋ uparihāraŋ uttarisāṭakaŋ PvA 49); Dāvs iii.30; ThA 253.
Uttasati1 [identical in form with next] only in Caus. uttā- seti to impale, q. v.
Uttasati2 [ut + tasati2] -- 1. to frighten J i.47 (v.267). - to be alarmed or terrified Vin i.74 (ubbijjati u. palāyati); iii.145 (id.); J ii.384; vi.79; ppr. uttasaŋ Th 1, 863; & uttasanto Pv ii.23. -- See utrasati. Caus. uttāseti (q. v.). <-> pp. uttasta & utrasta (q. v.). Cp. also uttanta.
Uttasana (adj. -- nt.) [fr. ud + tras, cp. uttāsana] frightening, fear J i.414 (v. l. for uttasta).
Uttasta [pp. of uttasati2; usual form utrasta (q. v.)] frightened, terrified, faint -- hearted J i.414 (˚bhikkhu; v. l. uttasana˚).
Uttāna (adj.) [fr. ut + tan, see tanoti & tanta] -- 1. streched out (flat), lying on one's back, supine Vin i.271 (mañcake uttānaŋ nipajjāpetvā making her lie back on the couch); ii.215; J i.205; Pv iv.108 (opp. avakujja); PvA 178 (id.), 265. -- 2. clear, manifest, open, evident [cp. BSk. uttāna in same sense at Av. S ii.106] D i.116; S ii.28 (dhammo uttāno vivaṭo pakāsito); J ii.168 (= pākaṭa); v.460; PvA 66, 89, 140, 168. -- anuttāna unclear, not explained J vi.247. -- The cpd. form (˚ -- ) of uttāna in combn. with kṛ & bhū is uttānī˚ (q. v.). -- 3. superficial, "flat", shallow A i.70 (parisa); Pug 46.
-- mukha "clear mouthed", speaking plainly, easily understood D i.116 (see DA i.287); DhA iv.8. -- seyyaka "lying on one's back", i. e. an infant M i.432; A iii.6; Th 1, 935; Miln 40; Vism 97 (˚dāraka).
Uttānaka (adj.) [fr. uttāna] -- 1. (= uttāna1) lying on one's back J vi.38 (˚ŋ pātetvā); DhA i.184. -- 2. (= uttāna2) clear, open D ii.55; M i.340 = DhA i.173.
Uttānī (˚ -- ) [the compn. form of uttāna in cpds. with kṛ & bhū cp. BSk. uttānī -- karoti M Vastu iii.408; uttānī -- kṛta Av. Ś i.287; ii.151] open, manifest etc., in ˚kamma (uttāni˚) declaration, exposition, manifestation S v.443; Pug 19; Vbh 259, 358; Nett 5, 8, 9, 38. -- ˚karaṇa id. SnA 445. -- ˚karoti to make clear or open, to declare, show up, confess (a sin) Vin i.103; S ii.25, 154; iii.132, 139; iv.166; v.261; A i.286; iii.361 sq.
Uttāpeti [Caus. of uttapati] to heat, to cause pain, torment J vi.161.
Uttāra [fr. ud + tṛ as in uttarati] crossing, passing over, ˚setu a bridge for crossing (a river) S iv.174 = M i.134; cp. uttara2.
Uttārita [pp. of uttāreti] pulled out, brought or moved out J i.194.
Uttāritatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. uttārita] the fact of having or being brought or moved out J i.195.
Uttāreti [Caus. of uttarati] to make come out, to move or pull out J i.194; SnA 349. -- pp. uttārita (q. v.).
Uttāsa [Sk. uttrāsa, fr. ud + tras] terror, fear, fright D iii.148; S v.386; Miln 170; PvA 180.
Uttāsana (nt.) [fr. uttāseti2] impalement J ii.444; SnA 61 (sūle).
Uttāsavant (adj.) [uttāsa + vant] showing fear or fright, fearful S iii.16 sq.
Uttāsita [pp. of uttāseti2] impaled Pv iv.16 (= āvuta āropita VvA 220); J i.499; iv.29.
Uttāseti1 [Caus of uttasati, ud + tras, of which taŋs is uttā- seti2 is a variant] to frighten, terrify J i.230, 385; ii.117.
Uttāseti2 [cp. Sk. uttaŋsayati in meaning to adorn with a wreath; ud + taŋs to shake, a variation of tars to shake, tremble] to impale A i.48; J i.230, 326; ii.443; iii.34; iv.29. -- pp. uttāsita (q. v.). Cp. uttāsana.
Uttiṭṭha [= ucchiṭṭha? Cp. ucchepaka. By Pāli Cys. referred to uṭṭhahati "alms which one stands up for, or expects"] left over, thrown out Vin i.44 (˚patta); Th 1, 1057 (˚piṇḍa); 2, 349 (˚piṇḍa = vivaṭadvāre ghare ghare patiṭṭhitvā labhanaka -- piṇḍa ThA 242); J iv.380 (˚piṇḍa; C. similarly as at ThA; not to the point); 386 (˚piṇḍa = ucchiṭṭhaka piṇḍa C.); Miln 213, 214.
Uttiṭṭhe see uṭṭhahati.
Uttiṇa (adj.) [ud + tiṇa] in uttiṇaŋ karoti to take the straw off, lit. to make off -- straw; to deprive of the roof M ii.53. Cp. next.
Uttiṇṇa [pp. of uttarati] drawn out, pulled out, nt. outlet, passage J ii.72 (paṇṇasālāya uttiṇṇāni karoti make entrances in the hut). Or should it be uttiṇa?
Utrasta [pp. of uttasati, also cp. uttasta] frightened, ter- rified, alarmed Vin ii.184; S i.53, 54 (an˚); Sn 986; Miln 23; DhA ii.6 (˚mānasa); PvA 243 (˚citta), 250 (˚sabhāva).
Utrāsa [= uttāsa] terror J ii.8 (citt˚).
Utrāsin (adj.) [fr. *Sk. uttrāsa = P. uttāsa] terrified, fright- ened, fearful, anxious S i.99, 219. -- Usually neg. an˚ in phrase abhīru anutrāsin apalāyin without fear, steadfast & not running away S i.99; Th 1, 864; Nd2 13; J iv.296; v.4; Miln 339. See also apalāyin.
Ud -- [Vedic ud -- ; Goth. ūt = Ohg. ūz = E. out, Oir. ud -- ; cp. Lat. ūsque "from -- unto" & Gr. u(/steros = Sk. uttara] prefix in verbal & nominal combn. One half of all the words beginning with u˚ are combns. with ud˚, which in compn. appears modified according to the rules of assimilation as prevailing in Pāli. -- I. Original meaning "out in an upward direction", out of, forth; like ummujjati to rise up out of (water), ujjalati to blaze up high; udeti to come out of & go up; ukkaṇṭha stretching one's neck out high (cp. Ger. "empor"); uggilati to "swallow up", i. e. spit out. -- The opposites of ud -- are represented by either ava or o˚ (see under II. & IV. & cp. ucc -- âvaca; uddhambhāgiya: orambhāgiya), ni (see below) or vi (as udaya: vi -- aya or vaya). -- II. Hence develop 2 clearly defined meanings, viz. (1) out, out of, away from -- : ˚aṇha ("day -- out"); ˚agga ("top -- out"); ˚āgacchati; ˚ikkhati look out for, expect; ˚kantati tear out; ˚khitta thrown off; ˚khipati pick out; ˚gacchati come out; ˚gamaṇa rising (opp. o˚); ˚gajjati shout out; ˚gilati (opp. o˚); ˚ghoseti shout out; ˚cināti pick out; ˚chiṭṭha thrown out; ˚jagghati laugh at, cp. Ger. aus -- lachen ˚tatta smelted out; ˚tāna stretched out; ˚dāleti tear out; ˚dhaṭa lifted out, drawn out; ˚disati point out to; ˚drīyati pull out; ˚pajjati to be produced; ˚patti & ˚pāda coming out, origin, birth; ˚paṭipatiyā out of reach; ˚paḷāseti sound out; ˚phāsulika "ribs out"; etc. etc. -- (2) up (high) or high up, upwards, on to (cp. ucca high, uttara higher) -- : ˚kujja erect (opp. ava˚); ˚kūla sloping up (opp. vi˚); ˚khipati throw -- up, ˚gaṇhāti take up; ˚chindati cut up; ˚javati go up -- stream, ˚javana id. (opp. o˚); uñña pride; ˚thāna "standing up" ˚ṭhita got up; ˚tarati come out, go up (opp. o˚); ˚nata raised up, high (opp. o˚); ˚nama e -- levation; ˚nāmin raised (opp. ni˚); ˚patati fly up; etc. etc. -- III. More specialised meanings (from elliptical or figurative use) are: (1) ud˚ = without, "ex -- ", e. g. unnangala "outplough" = without a plough; uppabbajita an ex -- bhikkhu. <-> (2) ud˚ = off, i. e. out of the way, wrong, e. g. uppatha a wrong road, ummagga id. -- (3) ud˚ = out of the ordinary, i. e. exceedingly, e. g. ujjangala extremely dusty; uppanduka very pale; uppoṭheti to beat hard. -- IV. Dialectical variations & combinations. -- (1) Owing to semantic affinity we often find an interchange between ud˚ and ava˚ (cp. E. break up = break down, grind up or down, tie up or down), according to different points of view. This wavering between the two prefixes was favoured by the fact that o always had shown an unstable tendency & had often been substituted for or replaced by ū, which in its place was reduced to u before a double consonant, thus doing away with the diff. between ū & u or o & u. For comparison see the foll.: ukkamati & okk˚; uññā: avañña; uddiyati: odd˚; uḍḍeyya oḍḍ˚; uppīḷeti: opīḷ˚; etc., & cp. abbhokirati > abbhukkirati. -- (2) the most freq. combns. that ud˚ enters into are those with the intensifying prefixes abhi˚ and sam˚; see e. g. abhi + ud (= abbhud˚) + gacchati, ˚jalati; ˚ṭhāti; ˚namati etc.; sam + ud + eti; ˚kamati; ˚chindati; ˚tejeti; ˚pajjati etc.
Uda1 (indecl.) [Sk. uta & u, with Lat. aut (or), Gr. au(_ti (again), au)ta/r (but, or), Goth. auk = Ger. auch to pron. base ava˚ yonder, cp. ava ii.] disjunctive part. "or"; either singly, as at Sn 455, 955, 1090; J v.478 (v. l. udāhu); Nd1 445 (expld. as "padasandhi" with same formula as iti, q. v.); Pv ii.1216 (kāyena uda cetasā); or combd. with other synonymous particles, as uda vā at Sn 193, 842, 1075; It 82 = 117 (caraŋ vā yadi vā tiṭṭhaŋ nisinno uda vā sayaŋ walking or standing, sitting or lying down); KhA 191. -- See also udāhu.
Uda2 (˚ -- ) [Vedic udan (nt.), also later uda (but only ˚ -- ), commonly udaka, q. v.] water, wave. In cpds. sometimes the older form udan˚ is preserved (like udañjala, udaññavant), but generally it has been substituted by the later uda˚ (see under udakaccha, udakanti, udakumbha, udapatta, udapāna, udabindu).
Udaka (nt.) [Vedic udaka, uda + ka (see uda2), of Idg. *ṷed, *ud, fuller form *eṷed (as in Sk. odatī, odman flood, odana gruel, q. v.); cp. Sk. unatti, undati to water, udra = Av. udra = Ags. otor = E. otter ("water -- animal"); Gr. u(/dwr water ("hydro"), u(/dra hydra ("water -- animal"); Lat. unda wave; Goth. watō = Ohg. wazzar = E. water; Obulg. voda water, vydra otter] water Vin ii.120, 213; D ii.15 (˚assa dhārā gushes or showers of w.); Dh 80, 145; J i.212; Pv i.57; Pug 31, 32; Miln 318; VvA 20 (udake temanaŋ aggimhe tāpanaŋ); DhA i.289; DhA iii. 176, 256; PvA 39, 70. -- Syn. ambu, ela, jala etc. <-> The compn. form ( -- ˚) is either ûdaka (āsanûdaka -- dāyin J iv.435) or ˚odaka (pādodaka water for the feet PvA 78). odaka occurs also in abs. form (q. v.), cp. also oka. Bdgh.'s kaŋ = udakaŋ, tena dāritan: kandaran ti is a false etymology; DA i.209.
-- aṇṇava water -- flood M i.134. -- āyatika a water -- pipe Vin ii.123. -- āḷhaka a certain measure of water, an āḷhaka of w. S v.400; A ii.55 = iii.337; VvA 155. -- ûpama resembling water, like water A iv.11 (puggala). -- ogāhana plunging into water J iii.235. -- ogha a water flood VvA 48. -- orohaka descending into water, bathing; N. of a class of ascetics, lit. "bather" M i.281; S iv.312; A v. 263. -- orohaṇa plunging into water, taking a bath, bathing D i.167; S i.182; A i.296; ii.206; J iv.299; Pug 55. -- kalaha the "water dispute" DhA iii.256. -- kāka a water crow J ii.441. -- kicca libation of water, lit. water -- performance; cleansing, washing D ii.15. -- kīḷā sporting in the w. J vi.420. -- gahaṇasāṭaka bathing -- gown J v.477. -- ghaṭa a water pitcher PvA 66. -- cāṭi a water jar DhA i.52. -- ṭṭhāna a stand for water Vin ii.120. -- tumba a water vessel J ii.441; DA i.202; DhA ii.193. -- telaka an oily preparation mixed with water Vin ii.107. -- dantapoṇa water for rinsing the mouth & tooth -- cleaner Vin iii.51; iv.90, 92, 233; J iv.69. -- daha a lake (of water) D i.45. -- doṇikā a water -- tub or trough Vin ii.220. -- dhārā a shower of water Ps i.125; J iv.351. -- niddhamana a water spout or drain Vin ii.120, 123; DhA ii.37. -- nibbāhana an aquaduct Miln 295. -- paṭiggaha receiving or accepting water Vin ii.213. -- patta a waterbowl Vin ii. 107; D i.80; S iii.105. -- puñchanī a towel Vin ii.122. -- posita fed or nourished by water VvA 173. -- phusita a drop of water S ii.135. -- bindu a drop of w. It 84 (v. l. for udabindu); PvA 99. -- bubbula a w. bubble A iv.137; Vism 109, 479 (in comp.). -- bhasta devoid of water ThA 212 (for anodaka Th 2, 265). -- maṇika a water -- pot Vin i.227; M i.354; A iii.27; Miln 28; DhA i.79. -- mallaka a cup for w. A i.250. -- rakkhasa a water -- sprite DhA iii.74. -- rahada a lake (of w.) D i.74, 84; A i.9; ii.105; iii.25; Sn 467; Pug 47. -- rūha a water plant Vv 356. -- lekhā writing on w. A i.283 = Pug 32 (in simile ˚ûpama like writing on w.; cp. Pug A 215). -- vāra "waterturn", i. e. fetching water DhA i.49. -- vāraka bucket S ii.118. -- vāha a flow of water, flowing w. J vi.162. -- vāhaka rise or swelling (lit. carrying or pulling along (of water), overflowing, flood A i.178. -- vāhana pulling up water Vin ii.122 (˚rajju). -- sadda sound of water Dhs 621. -- sarāvaka a saucer for w. Vin ii.120. -- sāṭaka = sāṭikā J ii.13. -- sāṭikā "water -- cloak", a bathing -- mantle Vin i. 292; ii.272; iv.279 (= yāya nivatthā nhāyati C.); DhA ii.61 (T. ˚sāṭaka). -- suddhika ablution with water (after passing urine) Vin iv.262 (= mutta -- karaṇassa dhovanā C.).
Udakaccha [uda + kaccha] watery soil, swamp J v.137.
Udakumbha [uda + kumbha] a water jug J i.20; Dh 121, 122; Pv i.129.
Udagga (adj.) [ud + agga, lit. "out -- top", cp. Sk. udagra] top- most, high, lofty Th 1, 110; fig. elated, exalted, exultant, joyful, happy D i.110 (˚citta); Sn 689 (+ sumana), 1028 (id.); Pv iv.155 (attamana +); iv.58 (haṭṭha +); Miln 248; DhA ii.42 (haṭṭha -- pahaṭṭha udagg -- udagga in high glee & jubilant); Vism 346 (id.); Sdhp 323. See also der. odagya.
Udaggatā (f.) [abstr. fr. udagga] exaltation, jubilation, glee Sdhp 298.
Udaggi˚ in udaggihuttaŋ [= ud + aggi + hutta, cp. Vedic agnihotra] the fire prepared (for sacrifice) J v.396 (= uda -- aggihuttaŋ C. wrongly), lit. "the sacrifice (being) out"
Udangaṇa (nt.) [ud + angaṇa1; Kern unnecessarily changes it to uttankana "a place for digging for water" see Toev. p. 96] an open place J i.109.
Udacchidā 3rd sg. praet. of ucchindati to break up Sn 2, 3 (˚ā metri causa).
Udañcana (nt.) [fr. ud + añc, see añchati] a bucket for drawing water out of a well DhA i.94.
Udañcanin (adj. -- n.) [ud + añcanin to añc see añchati] draining, pulling up water f. ˚ī a bucket or pail J i. 417 (f. ˚ī).
Udañjala [udan + jala see uda2] in ˚ŋ kīḷati a water -- game: playing with drops of water (?) Vin iii.118 (Bdhgh.: udañjalan ti udaka -- cikkhallo vuccati p. 274)
Udaññavant (adj.) [udan = uda(ka) + vant] rich in water, well -- watered J v.405 (= udaka -- sampanna C.).
Udaṇha [ud + aṇha] day -- break, dawn, sunrise J v.155.
Udatāri 3rd sg aor. of uttarati to cross over Sn 471 (oghaŋ).
Udatta (adj.) [Sk. udātta] elevated, high, lofty, clever Nett 7, 118, 123 (= uḷārapañña C.).
Udadhi [uda + dhi, lit. water -- container] the sea, ocean S i.67; It 86; Sn 720; J v.326; vi.526; ThA 289; VvA 155 ("udakaŋ ettha dhīyatī ti udadhi"); Sdhp 322, 577.
Udapatta1 [ụda for ud, and patta, pp. of pat, for patita? Kern, Toev. s. v. takes it as udak -- prāpta, risen, flying up, sprung up J iii.484 (= uppatita C.); v.71 (= uṭṭhita C.).
Udapatta2 [uda + patta; Sk. udapātra] a bowl of water, a water -- jug, ewer M i.100; S v.121; A iii.230 sq., 236; v.92, 94, 97 sq.
Udapādi 3rd sg. aor. of uppajjati to arise, originate, be- come D i.110, 180, 185; S ii.273; It 52, 99; SnA 346, 462.
Udapāna [uda + pāna lit. "(place for) drinking water"; cp. opāna, which in the incorrect opinion of Pāli Commentators represents a contracted udapāna] a well, a cistern Vin i.139; ii.122; M i.80; A iv.171; J iii.216; Ud 78; Pv ii.78; ii.925; Miln 411; Vism 244 (in simile); DA i.298; VvA 40; PvA 78.
Udappatta see udapatta.
Udabindu [uda + bindu] a drop of water M i.78; Sn 812; Dh 121, 122, 336; It 84 (v. l. udaka˚); Nd1 135; SnA 114; DhA ii.51.
Udabbhadhi aor. 3rd sg. of ubbadhati [ud + vadh] to destroy, kill Sn 4 (= ucchindanto vadhati SnA 18).
Udabbahe 3rd sg. Pot. of ubbahati [ud + bṛh1, see also abbahati] to draw out, tear out, remove Th 1, 158; Sn 583 (= ubbaheyya dhāreyya (?) SnA 460); J ii.223 (= udabbaheyya C.); vi.587 (= hareyya C.); aor. udabbahi Vin iv.5.
Udaya [fr. ud + i, cp. udeti] rise, growth; increment, in- crease; income, revenue, interest A ii.199; Ps i.34; Vv 847 (dhanɔatthika uddayaŋ patthayāna = ānisaŋsaŋ atirekalābhaŋ VvA 336); 8452; DhA ii.270; PvA 146 (ulār˚ vipāka), 273 (˚bhūtāni pañca kahāpaṇa -- satāni labhitvā, with interest); Sdhp 40, 230, 258. -- See also uddaya.
-- attha rise and fall, birth & death (to attha2) M i.356; S v.197 sq., 395; A iii.152 sq.; iv.111, 289, 352; v.15, 25. -- atthika desirous of increase, interest or wealth (cp. above Vv 847 dhanɔatthika) A ii.199. -- bbaya (ud -- aya + vy -- aya) increase & decrease, rise & fall, birth & death, up & down D iii.223; S i.46 = 52 (lokassa); iii.130; A ii.90; iii. 32; iv.153; It 120; Vism 287; Ps i.54; ThA 90. -- vyaya = ˚bbaya S iv.140; A ii.15 (khandhānaŋ); Dh 113, 374 (khandhānaŋ, see DhA iv.110).
Udayaŋ & Udayanto ppr. of udeti (q. v.).
Udayana (nt.) [fr. ud + i] going up, rise DA i.95.
Udara (nt.) [Vedic udara, Av udara belly, Gr. u(/steros = Lat. uterus belly, womb; Lith. védaras stomach, See also Walde, Lat. Wtb. under vensica] -- 1 the belly, stomach D ii.266; Sn 78, 604, 609, 716; J i.146, 164, 265; Miln 213; PvA 283; KhA 57, 58; DhA i.47 (pregnant); Sdhp 102. -- 2. cavity, interior, inside Dāvs i.56 (mandir -- odare). -- ūnûdara with empty belly Th 1, 982; Miln 406, 407; cp. ūna.
-- aggi the fire of the belly or stomach (i. e. of digestion) KhA 59; SnA 462; PvA 33; -- âvadehakaŋ (adv.) bhunjati to eat to fill the stomach, eat to satiety, to be gluttonous M i.102; A v.18; Th 1, 935; Vism 33. -- paṭala the mucous membrane of the stomach Vism 359 (= sarīr˚abbhantara 261); SnA 248; KhA 55, 61. -- pūra stomachfilling Vism 108. -- vaṭṭi "belly -- sack", belly Vin iii.39, 117; Vism 262 where KhA reads ud. paṭala). -- vāta the wind of the belly, stomach -- ache 9J i.33, 433; Vism 41 (˚ābādha); DhA iv.129.
Udariya (nt.) [fr. udara] the stomach Kh iii. (cp. KhA 57); Vism 258, 358. Cp sodariya.
Udassaye 2nd sg. pot. of ud + assayati [ā + śri, cp. assaya] J v.26 (meaning to instal, raise?), expld. by C. as ussayāpesi (?) Reading may be faulty for udāsase (?).
Udahāraka [uda + hāraka] a water -- carrier J ii.80.
Udahāriya (adj.) [fr. udahāra fetching of water, uda + hṛ] going for water Vv 509.
Udāgacchati [ud + ā + gacchati] to come to completion Da i.288. Cp sam.
Udāna (nt.) [fr. ud + an to breathe] -- 1. "breathing out", exulting cry, i e. an utterance, mostly in metrical form, inspired by a particularly intense emotion, whether it be joyful or sorrowful (cp. K. S. p. 29 n. 2) D i.50, 92; S i.20, 27, 82, 160; A i.67; J i.76; Pug 43, 62; Nett 174; PvA 67; Sdhp 514. -- The utterance of such an inspired thought is usually introduced with the standing phrase "imaŋ udānaŋ udānesi" i. e. breathed forth this solemn utterance [Cp. BSk. udānaŋ udānayati Divy 99 etc.], e. g. at Vin i.2 sq., 12, 230, 353; D i.47; ii.107 (udāna of triumph); S iii.55; Mhvs xix.29; DA i.140; Ud. 1 passim; SnA 354 ("the familiar quotation about the sakyas"). Occasionally (later) we find other phrases, as e. g. udānaŋ pavatti J i.61; abhāsi Vin iv.54; kathesi J vi. 38. -- 2. one of the angas or categories of the Buddhist Scriptures: see under nava & anga. -- Cp. vodāna.
Udānita [pp. of udāneti] uttered, breathed forth, said DhA iv.55.
Udāneti [denom. f. udāna, cp. BSk. udānayati] to breathe out or forth, usually in phrase udānaŋ udānesi: see under udāna1. Absolutely only at J iii.218.
Udāpatvā at J v.255 is uncertain reading (v. l. udapatvā, C. explns. reading udapatvā by uppatitvā = flying up), perhaps we should read udapatta flew up, pret. of ud + pat = Sk. *udapaptat (so Kern, Toev. s. v.).
Udāyati at DA i.266 (udāyissati fut.) is hardly correct; D i.96 has here udrīyissati (q. v.), which belongs to darati to break, tear etc., udāyati could only belong to dāyāti meaning to cut, mow, reap. but not to split etc. DA i.266 explns. udāyissati with bhijjhissati. The difficulty is removed by reading udrīyissati. To v. l. undriyati cp. ˚undriya for ˚uddaya (dukkh˚ for dukkhudraya see udraya). We find udāyati once more at Vism 156 in expln. of ekodi where it is evidently meant for udeti (Caus. = uṭṭhapeti).
Udāra (adj.) [Sk. udāra, of which the usual P. form is ulāra (q. v.). Cp. BSk. audāra & audārika.] raised, sublime, noble, excellent Dāvs iii.4 (samussit -- odāra -- sitātapattaŋ); DA i.50 (˚issariya); Sdhp 429, 591.
Udāvatta [pp. of udāvattate, ud + ā vattati] retired, de- sisting J v.158 (= udāvattitva nivattitva C).
Udāsīna (adj.) [ud + āsīna, pp. of ās to sit; lit. sit apart, be indifferent] indifferent, passive, neutral DhsA 129.
Udāhaṭa [pp of udāharati] uttered, spoken; called, quoted Pug 41.
Udāharaṇa (nt.) [fr. udāharati] example, instance J iii.401 (˚ŋ āharitvā dassento), 510; Miln 345; SnA 445; VvA 297.
Udāharati [ud + ā + hṛ] to utter, recite. speak. Sn 389; J iii.289; DA i.140 (see udāhāra). -- pp udāhaṭa (q. v.). Cp. pariy˚.
Udāhāra [fr. udāharati] utterance, speech DA i.140 (˚ŋ udāhari = udānaŋ udānesi); Pug A 223,
Udāhu (indecl.) [uta + āho, cp. P. uda & aho and Sk. utāro] disjunctive -- adversative particle "or", in direct questions D i 157; ii.8; Sn 599, 875, 885; J i.20, 83; VvA 258 (= ādu); PvA 33, 51; Miln 10. -- The first part of the question is often introduced with kiŋ, while udāhu follows in the second (disjunctive) part, e. g. kin nakkhattaŋ kīḷissasi udāhu bhatiŋ karissasi VvA 63; kiŋ amhehi saddhiŋ āgamissasi udāhu pacchā will you come with us or later? DhA ii.96: See under kiŋ. -- Often combd with other expletive particles, e. g. udāhu ve Sn 1075, 1077; udāhu no Sn 347; eva . . . no udāhu (so . . . or not) D i.152; (ayaŋ) nu kho -- udāhu (ayaŋ) is it (this) -- (this) Vism 313.
Udi (or udī) is artificial adj. formn. fr. udeti, meaning "rising, excelling", in expln. of ekodi at Vism 156 (udayatī ti udi uṭṭhapetī ti attho).
Udikkhati [ud + īkṣ, Sk. udīkṣate] -- 1. to look at, to survey. to perceive Vin i.25 (udiccare, 3sd. pl. pres. med.); J v.71, 296; Vv 8121 (aor. udikkhisaŋ = ullokesiŋ VvA 316); Dāvs ii 109; Sdhp 308. -- 2. to look out for, to expect J i.344; VvA 118. -- 3. to envy Miln 338.
Udikkhitar [n. ag. of udikkhati] one who looks for or after D iii 167.
Udicca (adj.) [apparently an adjectivised ger. of udeti but distorted from & in meaning = Sk. udañc, f. udīcī northern, the north] "rising", used in a geographical sense of the N. W. country, i. e. north -- westerly, of north -- western origin (cp. Brethren 79, Miln trsln. ii.45 n. 1) J i.140, 324, 343, 373; Miln 236. -- See also uddiya.
Udiccare 3sd. pl. pres. med. of udikkhati (q. v.).
Udita1 [pp. of ud -- i, see udeti] risen, high, elevated Miln 222; (˚odita); Dāvs iv.42; Sdhp 14 (of the sun) 442 (˚odita).
Udita2 [pp. of vad, see vadati] spoken, proclaimed, uttered Vuttodaya 2 (quoted by Childers in Khuddaka -- pātha ed. 1869, p. 22).
Udīraṇa (nt.) [fr. udīreti] utterance, saying J v.237; Dhs 637, 720; Miln 145.
Udīrita [pp. of udīreti] uttered J iii.339; v.394 = 407.
Udīreti [ud + īreti, cp. in meaning īrita] -- 1. to set in motion, stir up, cause J iii.441 (dukkhaŋ udīraye Pot. = udīreyya C.); v.395 (kalahaŋ to begin a quarrel). -- 2. to utter, proclaim, speak, say S i.190; Sn 632 (pot. ˚raye = bhāseyya SnA 468); Dh 408 (giraŋ udīraye = bhāseyya DhA iv.182); J v.78 (vākyaŋ); Pass. udīyati (uddiyyati = Sk. udīryate) Th 1, 1232 (nigghoso).
Udu (adj.) [= *ṛtu? cp. utu & uju] straight, upright, in ˚mano straight -- minded D iii.167, 168 (= uju˚ in v. l. and expln. by C.).
Udukkhala (m. & nt.) [Sk. ulukhala] a mortar Vin i.202 (+ musala pestle); J i.502; ii.428; v.49; ii.161, 335; Ud 69 (m; + musaḷa); DhA ii.131 (˚sala); Vism 354 (in comp.). The relation between udukkhala and musala is seen best from the description of eating at Vism 344 and DA i.200, where the lower teeth play the role of ud., the upper teeth act as m., while the tongue takes the part of a hand. On this passage & other connections as well as etym. see Morris J.P.T.S. 1893, 37.
Udukkhalikā (f.) [fr. udukkhala] part of a door (threshold?) Vin ii.148 (+ uttara -- pasaka lintel of a door).
Udumbara [Sk. udumbara] the glomerous fig tree, Ficus Glomerata D ii.4; Vin iv.35; A iv.283 (˚khādika), 283 (id.), 324 (id.); Sn 5; DhA i.284; SnA 19; KhA 46, 56; VvA 213. Cp. odumbara.
Udeti (ud + eti of i to go] to go out or up, to rise (of the sun), to come out, to increase Asl. 169; Vism 156 (eko udetī ti ekodi); J ii.33; iii.324; ppr. udayaŋ It 85 (ādicco), & udayanto PvA 154 (udayante suriye = sole surgente). -- pp. udita (see udita1). Cp. udicca & udi.
Udda1 [Vedic udra, to uda2 water, lit. living in water; Cp. Gr. u(/dros "hydra"; Ohg. ottar = Ags. otor = E. otter; Lith. ûdra = Obulg. vydra otter] an aquatic animal, the otter (?) Childers s. v. doubts the identity of this creature with the regular otter, since it lives in the jungle. Is it a beaver -- Vin i.186 (˚camma otter -- skin, used for sandals); Cp. i.102 (˚pota); J iii.51 sq., 335. The names of two otters at J iii.333 are Gambhīra -- cārin and Anutīra -- cārin.
Udda2 [for uda2?] water, in passage amakkhito uddena, amakkhito semhena, a. ruhirena i. e. not stained by any kind of (dirty) fluid D ii.14; M iii.122.
Uddaṇḍa [ud + daṇḍa] a kind of building (or hut), in which the sticks stand out (?) Nd1 226 = Nd2 976 (uṭanda) = Vism 25 (v. l. BB uṭṭanda).
Uddaya1 [a (metric?) variant of udaya] gain, advantage, profit Vv 847 (see udaya); J v.39 (satt˚ -- mahāpaduma of profit to beings?).
Uddaya2 in compounds dukkh˚ and sukh˚. see udraya.
Uddalomī [= udda + lomin beaver -- hair -- y ] a woollen coverlet with a fringe at each end D i.7 (= ubhato dasaŋ uṇṇā -- mayɔ attharaṇaŋ keci ubhato uggata -- pupphaŋ ti vadanti DA i.87); A i.181. See however uddha -- lomin under uddhaŋ.
Uddasseti [ud + dasseti, Caus. of dassati1] to show, reveal, point out, order, inform, instruct D ii.321 sq.; M i.480 (read uddassessāmi for conjectured reading uddisissāmi?); ii.60 (v. l. uddiset˚) A iv.66.
Uddāna (nt.) [fr. ud + dā, dayati to bind: see under dāma] a group of Suttas, used throughout the Vinaya Piṭaka, with ref. to each Khandhaka, in the Saŋyutta, the Anguttara and other books (cp. Miln 407) for each group of about ten Suttas (cp. DhsA 27). The Uddāna gives, in a sort of doggerel verse, at the end of each group, the titles of the Suttas in the group. It may then be roughly rendered "summary". If all the Uddānas were collected together, they would form a table of contents to the whole work. -- Otherwise the word has only been found used of fishes "macchuddāna" (so J ii.425; DhA ii.132). It then means a group of fish placed apart for for sale in one lot. Perhaps a set or a batch would meet the case.
Uddāpa [*udvāpa] foundation of a wall, in stock phrase daḷh˚ etc. D iii.101; S v.194 = also at J vi.276 (= pākāra -- vatthu C.). Kern, Toev. s. v. refers it to Sk. ud -- vapati to dig out, and translates "moat, ditch". The meaning "wall" or "mound" however harmonises quite well with the der. fr. "digging", cp. E. dike > Ger. Teich. See also uddāma 2.
Uddāpavant (adj.) [fr. uddāpa] having a wall or embank- ment S ii.106 (v. l. uddhā˚); C. expls. as apato uggatattā J iv.536 (so read with v. l. for T. uddhā pavatta; C. expls. as tīra -- mariyādā -- bandhana).
Uddāma [fr. ud + dā as in uddāna, see dāma] 1. (adj.) "out of bounds", unrestrained, restless Dāvs v.56 (˚sāgara). -- 2. (n.) wall, enclosure (either as "binding in", protecting or as equivalent of uddāpa fr. ud + vam "to throw up" in sense of to throw up earth, to dig a mound = udvapati) in phrase aṭṭāla -- uddāma -- parikhâdīni watchtowers, enceintes, moats etc. DhA iii.488.
Uddāraka [?] some wild animal J v.416 (reading uncertain, expln. ditto).
Uddāla = uddālaka, only as Np. J iv.298 sq.
Uddālaka [fr. ud + dal, see dalati] the Uddāla tree, Cassia Fistula (also known as indīvara), or Cordia Myxa, lit. "uprooter" Vv 67 (= vātaghātako yo rājarukkho ti pi vuccati VvA 43); J iv.301 (˚rukkha), 440; v.199 (= vātaghātaka C.), 405; vi.530 (so read for uddh˚); VvA 197 (˚puppha = indīvara); PvA 169.
Uddālanaka (adj.) [fr. uddālana > ud + dāleti] referring to destruction or vandalism, tearing out Vin iv.169.
Uddāleti [ud + dāleti, Caus. of dal, see dalati] to tear out or off Vin iv.170; S iv.178.
Uddiṭṭha [pp. of uddisati] -- 1. pointed out, appointed, set out, put forth, proposed, put down, codified M i.480 (pañha); Sn p. 91 (id. = uddesa -- mattenɔ eva vutta, na vibhangena SnA 422); SnA 372. -- 2. appointed, dedicated J v.393 (an ˚ŋ pupphaŋ = asukassa nāma dassāmī ti); PvA 50; KhA 138.
Uddiya (adj.) [Sk. udīcya?] northern, northwestern (i. e. Nepalese) J iv.352 (˚kambala) in expln. of uddiyāna [Sk. udīcīna?]. See udicca & cp. Morris in J.P.T.S. 1889, 202, and last not least Lüders in K. Z. 1920 (vol. 49), 233 sq. The word is not sufficiently cleared up yet.
Uddisati [ud + disati] -- to propose, point out, ap- point, allot Dh 353, cp. DhA iv.72; Miln 94 (satihāraŋ); fut. uddisissati M i.480 (ex conj., is probably to be changed to uddassessati, q. v.). -- 2. to specify PvA 22 (aor. uddisi), 25 (= nīyādeti, dadāti), 27. -- Pass. uddissati to show oneself, to be seen Pv iii.212, and uddissiyati PvA 46. -- pp. uddiṭṭha (q. v.). -- Caus. II. uddisāpeti (q. v.). -- ger. uddissa (q. v.)
Uddisāpeti [Caus. II. of uddisati] -- 1. to make recite Vin i.47 = ii.224; iv.290. -- 2. to dedicate PvA 35 (v. l. ādisati).
Uddissa (indecl.) [orig. ger. of uddisati] -- 1. indicating, with signs or indications J iii.354 = Miln 230. -- 2. prep w. acc.: (a) (lit.) pointing to, tending towards, towards, to PvA 250 Suraṭṭha -- visayaŋ). -- (b) (appld.) with reference to, on account of, for, concerning PvA 8 (pete), 17 (= ārabbha), 49 (ratanattayaŋ), 70 (maŋ), 146.
-- kata allotted to, specified as, meant for (cp. odissa & odissaka) Vin i.237 (maŋsa); ii.163; D i.166 = A i. 295 = Pug 55 (viz. bhikkhā); M i.77; KhA 222; J ii. 262, 263 (bhatta).
Uddissana (nt.) [fr. uddissa] dedication PvA 27, 80.
Uddīpanā (f.) [fr. ud + dīpeti] explanation, reasoning, argument Vism 27 (for ukkācanā).
Uddīyati, Uddīyana ete. see udrī˚.
Uddeka [Sk. udreka, ud + ric] vomit, spouting out, erup- tion Vism 261 (where id. p. at KhA 61 reads uggāra); ˚ŋ dadāti to vomit Vin i.277.
Uddekanika (adj.) [uddeka + ana + ika] spouting, ejecting M ii.39 (maṇika; perhaps better to be read with v. l. as udañjanika = udañcanika fit for drawing up water).
Uddesa [fr. uddisati] -- 1. pointing out, setting forth, proposition, exposition, indication, programme M iii.223 (u. uddiṭṭha), 239; S iv.299; SnA 422. -- 2. explanation S v.110 sq.; sa -- uddesa (adj.) with (the necessary) expln., point by point, in detail, D i.13, 81; iii.111; A iii.418; It 99; Nd2 6171. -- 3. samaṇuddesa one marked as a Samaṇa, a novice (cp. sāmaṇera) D i.151; M iii.128; A iv.343; uddesa -- bhatta special or specified food Vin i.58 = 96, cp. ii.175, propounding, recitation, repetition Vin i.50 = ii.228 (uddesena paripucchāya ovādena by recitation, questioning & advice); ii.219 (˚ŋ dadāti to hold a recitation + paripucchaŋ d); A iv.114 (+ paripucchā); v.50 sq. (pañho, u. veyyākaraṇaŋ); Nd2 3852 (+ paripucchā); J i.116; Miln 257 (+paripucchā). ek'uddesa a single repetition Vin iii.47; A iii.67, 180; Miln 10, 18.
Uddesaka (adj.) [fr. uddesa] assigning, defining, determining, in bhatt˚ one who sorts out the food VvA 92.
Uddesika (adj. nt.) [fr. uddesa] -- 1. indicating, referring to, respecting, defining; (nt.) indication, definition D ii. 100 (mam ˚bhikkhusangho); Miln 159 (id.); KhA 29. <-> Esp. as -- ˚ in phrase aṭṭha -- vass' uddesika -- kāla the time referring to (or indicating) the 8th year, i. e. at the age of 8 PvA 67; soḷasa -- vass˚ M i.88; J i.456; VvA 259. In the same application padesika (q. v.). -- 2. memorial J iv.228 (cetiya).
Uddehaka (adj.) [fr. ud + dih, see deha] "bubbling up", only adv. ˚ŋ in cpd. pheṇ˚ (paccamāna) boiling) under production of scum (foam) M iii.167; A i.141; J iii.46; Miln 357.
Uddosita [Derivation uncertain. Cp. Müller P. Gr. 42] shed, stable (?) Vin i.140; ii.278; iii.200; iv.223.
Uddha (adj.) [possibly a combn. of aḍḍha2 & uddhaŋ or should we read aḍḍh˚ or vuḍḍh˚?] in phrase uddhehi vatthehi in rich, lofty clothes J iv.154 (of a devatā; passage may be corrupt).
Uddhaŋ (& Uddha˚) (indecl.) [nt. of adj. *uddha = Sk. ūrdhva high; to Idg. *ared(h) as in Lat. arduus steep, or *ured as in Sk. vardhate to raise, Gr. o) rqo/s straight] high up, on top, above (adv. & prep.). -- On uddhaŋ in spatial, temporal, ethical & psychological application see in detail Nd2 155. -- I. (adv.). -- A. (of space) up, aloft, on top, above (opp. adho) Vin iii.121; KhA 248 (= upari). -- In contrast with adho (above > below) D i.23, 153, 251; Vism 176 (u. adho tiriyaŋ expld.); DA i.98 (see also adho). -- Esp. with ref. to the points of the compass as "in zenith" (opp. adho "in nadir"), e. g. at D i.222 ("straight up"); It 120; J i.20. <-> B. (of time) in future, ahead, hence Sn 894; Nd1 303 (u. vuccati anāgataŋ). -- II. (prep. with abl. & instr.). <-> A. (of space) in phrase uddhaŋ pādatalā adho kesamatthakā (above the soles & below the scalp) D ii. 293, 294; iii.104; A iii.323; v.109. -- B. (of time) after, hence Pv i.1012 (u. catūhi māsehi after 4 months = catunnaŋ māsānaŋ upari PvA 52); PvA 147 (sattahi vassa satehi u., meaning here 700 years ago, cp. ito in similar application, meaning both past & future), 148 (sattāhato u. after a week; uttari v. l. BB.). -- In cpds. uddha˚ & uddhaŋ˚ (see below). The reading udhogalaŋ at PvA 104 is to corrected to adho˚. -- III. Note (cp. Trenckner, Notes 60). In certain cases we find ubbhaŋ for uddhaŋ. Notice the foll.: ubbhaŋ yojanaŋ uggato J v.269; ubbhaṭṭhako hoti "standing erect" D i.167; M i.78; ubbhamukhu "mouth (face) upwards", turned upwards S iii.238; Miln 122.
(1) uddha˚ in: -- gāmin going upwards S v.370 sq. cchiddaka ( -- vātapānā) (windows) having openings above DhA i.211. -- pāda heels upwards either with adhosira (head down) A iv.133, or avansira Vv 5225 (v. l.); J i. 233. -- mukha turned upwards, adv. ˚ā upwards or backwards (of a river) Miln 295 (Gangā u. sandati; in same context ubbha˚ Miln 122). -- lomin "having hair on the upper side", a kind of couch or bed (or rug on a couch) Vin i.192 = ii.163, 169. So is prob. to be read for uddalomī (q. v.). -- virecana action of an emetic (lit. throwing up) (opp. adho -- virecana of a purgative) D i.12 (= uddhaŋ dosānaŋ nīharaṇaŋ DA i.98); DhA iii.126; SnA 86. -- suddha clean on top Vin ii.152. -- (2) uddhaŋ˚ in: -- āghātanika an after -- deather, a teacher who maintains that the soul exists after death D i.31, cp. DA i.119. -- pāda feet up (& head down) Vv 5225 (v. l. uddha˚). -- bhāgiya belonging to the upper part (opp. oram˚): see saŋyojana. -- virecana v. l. BB. at SnA 86 for uddha˚. -- sara(ŋ) (adv.) with raised or lofty voice, lit. "sounding high" Sn 901, see Nd1 315. -- sota (adj.) one who is going upwards in the stream of life [cp. BSk. ūrdhvasrotaḥ Mahāvy § 46] D iii.237; S v.69, 201, 205, 237, 285, 314, 378; A i.233; ii.134; iv.14 sq., 73 sq., 146, 380; v.120; Dh 218; Th ii.12; Pug 17; Nett 190; DhA iii.289; lit. up -- stream at J iii.371.
Uddhaŋsati [ud + dhaŋsati, in lit. meaning of dhvaŋs, see dhaŋsati] to fly out or up (of dust) Vv 784 na tatthɔ uddhaŋsati rajo; expld. by uggacchati VvA 304. -- pp. uddhasta (q. v.).
Uddhagga (adj.) [uddha + agga] -- 1. standing on end (lit. with raised point). bristling, of the hair of a Mahāpurisa D ii.18 = iii.144, 154. -- 2. prominent, conspicuous J iv.345 (˚rājin having prominent stripes, of a lion). <-> 3. pointing upwards (of the lower teeth, opp. adhagga point -- downwards) J v.156 (= heṭṭhima -- danta C.). <-> 4. lofty, beneficial (of gifts) A ii.68 (dakkhiṇā); iii.46 (id.) see also uddhaggika.
Uddhaggika (adj.) [cp. uddhagga) aiming at or resulting in a lofty end, promoting spiritual welfare, beneficial (of gifts) D i.51 = iii.66; S i.90; A iii.259; DA i.158.
Uddhacca (nt.) [substantivised ger. of ud -- dharati, ud + dhṛ, cp. uddhaṭa & uddhata. The BSk. auddhatya shows a strange distortion. BSk. uddhava seems to be also a substitute for uddhacca] over -- balancing, agitation, excitement, distraction, flurry (see on meaning Dialogues i.82; Dhs trsln. 119; Cpd. 18, 45, 83). A i.256, 282; iii.375, 421, 449; iv.87; v.142, 145, 148; D iii.234; S v.277 sq.; DhSA 260; SnA 492 (in sense of "haughtiness"? for Sn 702 uṇṇata); Nd1 220, 501; Ps i.81, 83; ii.9, 97 sq.; 119, 142, 145, 169, 176; Pug 18, 59; Dhs 427, 429 (cittassa), 1159, 1229, 1426, 1482; Vbh 168, 369, 372, 377; Vism 137, 469 (= uddhata -- bhāva); Sdhp 459. Together with kukkucca "flurry or worry" u. is enumd. as the 4th of the 5th nīvaraṇa's and as the 9th of the 10 saŋyojana's (q. v.), e. g. at D i.71, 246; iii.49, 234, 269, 278; S i.99; A i.3; iii.16; v.30; Nd2 379; Dhs 1486.
Uddhaja (adj.) [uddhaŋ + ja] upright, honest M i.386 (v. l. for pannadhaja).
Uddhaṭa [pp. of uddharati2; see also uddhata, uddhita & uddhacca] -- 1. pulled out J ii.26. -- 2. pulled out, destroyed, extirpated, in phrase˚ dāṭha with its fangs removed (of a snake) J i.505; ii.259; vi.6. -- 3. cut off or out Miln 231 (uddhaṭ -- uddhaṭe ālope whenever a piece is cut off). -- 4. drawn out, lifted out, raised J i.143; sass˚kāle at the time of lifting the corn; v.49 (˚paŋsu). Cp. uddhaṭa -- bīja castrated J ii.237.
Uddhata [pp. of uddharati1; as to its relation to uddhaṭa see remarks under uddhacca]. -- 1. lifted up, raised, risen, high (of the sun, only in this special phrase u. aruṇo) Vin ii.236; Ud 27 (vv. ll. uggata & uddhasta). <-> 2. unbalanced, disturbed, agitated, shaken S i.61 (+ unnaḷa "muddled in mind & puffed up" trsl.), 204 (id.) v.112 (līnaŋ cittaŋ uddhataŋ c.), 114 = Vism 133, 269; A ii.23; iii.391; v.93 sq., 142, 163; It 72; Th 2, 77 (so read with v. l., T. has uddhaṭa; ThA 80 explns. as nānɔ ārammaṇe vikkhitta -- citta asamāhita); Nd2 433 (+ avūpasanta -- citto); Pug 35 (= uddhaccena samannāgata Pug A 217). -- an˚ well balanced, not shaken, calm, subdued M i.470; A ii.211; v.93 sq., 104; Sn 850 (= uddhaccavirahita SnA 549); Dh 363 (= nibbutacitto DhA iv.93); J v.203; Vv 648. -- See also ubbhata.
Uddhana (nt.) [*ud -- dhvana, fr. ud + dhvan instead of dhmā, for uddhamana (*uddhmāna Sk.), see dhamati] an oven J i.33, 68, 71, 346; ii.133, 277; iii.178, 425; v.385, 471; ii.218 (kammār˚), 574; Sn p. 105; Miln 118, 259; Vism 171, 254; DhA i.52, 224; ii.3; iii.219 (˚panti); iv.176.
Uddhamma [ud + dhamma] false doctrine Dpvs v.19.
Uddharaṇa (nt.) [abstr. fr. uddharati] -- 1. taking up, lifting, raising Miln 307 (sass˚ -- samaya the time of gathering the corn; to uddharati 1. but cp. in same meaning uddhaṭa from uddharati 2). DA i.192. -- 2. pulling or drawing out (cp. uddharati 2) Vin iii.29. See also ubbahati2.
Uddharati [ud + dharate of dhṛ] -- 1. (in this meaning confused with ubbharati from bṛh, cp. interchange of ddh & bbh in uddha: ubbha, possibly also with bṛh: see abbahati and cp. ubbahati1). (a) to raise, rise, lift up; hence: to raise too much, overbalance, shake etc.: see pp. uddhata (*udbhṛta) & cp. uddhacca & uddharaṇa. -- (b) to take up, lift, to remove, take away D i.135 (baliŋ uddhareyya raise a tax); M i.306 (hiyaŋ); J i.193 (aor. poet. udaddhari = uddharitvā kaḍḍhitvā pavaṭṭesi C.); VvA 157. -- Caus. uddharāpeti Vin ii.180, 181; J vi.95. -- 2. to pull out, draw out (syn. with abbahati, q. v. for comparison) D i. 77 (ahiŋ karaṇḍā uddhareyya, further on ahi k. ubbhato) PvA 115 (= abbahati); imper. uddharatha J ii.95 (for abbaha); Dh 327 (attānaŋ duggā); aor. uddhari J iii.190 (ankena); cond. uddhare Th 1, 756; ger. uddharitvā D i.234; Nd1 419; SnA 567; DhA iv.26; PvA 139, & (poet.) uddhatvā J iv.406 (cakkhūni, so read for T. laddhatvañ cakkhūni = akkhīni uddharitvā C.). -- pp. uddhaṭa & ubbhata.
Uddharin īn an˚ Sn 952 see under niṭṭhurin.
Uddhasetā see uddhasta.
Uddhasta [pp. of uddhaŋseti, see dhaŋsati & cp. anuddhaŋ seti] attacked, perhaps "spoilt" (smothered!) in combn. with pariyonaddha (covered) at A i.202 (T. uddhaseta, expld. by upari dhaŋsita C.); ii.211 (vv. ll. uddhasotā for ˚etā & uddhaŋso). -- Registered with an˚ as anuddhasta in Index vol. to A, should however be read as anuddhasta (q. v.). Cp. also viddhasta.
Uddhāra (& ubbhāra in Vin.; e. g. ii.255, cp. 256 where ubbhata unterchanges with uddhāra) [fr. uddharati1] <-> 1. taking away, withdrawal, suspension, in kaṭhin˚ (q. v.) Vin i.255 sq.; iii.262; iv.287; v.177 sq. -- 2. a tax, levy, debt, in phrase ˚ŋ sodheti (so read for sādheti loc. cit.) to clear up a debt J ii.341; iii.106; iv.45, 247. uddhāra -- sodhana (v. l. sādh˚) the clearance of a debt J ii.341. -- 3. synopsis or abstract Dpvs v.37 (atth˚ of the meaning of the Vin.); SnA 237 (atth˚ + pad˚).
Uddhālaka at J vi.530 is to be read uddālaka.
Uddhita [a by -- form of uddhaṭa] pulled out, destroyed, extirpated, removed J vi.237 (˚pphala = uddhaṭa -- bīja C.).
Uddhunāti [ud + dhunāti] to shake VvA 279.
Uddhumāta (adj.) [pp. of uddhumāyati] swollen, bloated, risen (of flour) A i.140; Sn 200 (of a corpse); SnA 100 sq., 171; DA i.114. Cp. next.
Uddhumātaka (adj.) [prec. + ka] swollen, bloated, puffed up M i.88 (of a corpse; + vinīlaka); Vism 178, 193 (id.); J i.164 (udaraŋ ˚ŋ katvā), 420 (˚nimitta appearance of being blown up); Miln 332; DhA i.307. See also subha & asubha.
-- saññā the idea of a bloated corpse A ii.17; Dhs 263; Miln 331; cp. Dhs trsln. 69.
Uddhumātatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. uddhumāta] swollen con- dition Vism 178.
Uddhumāyati [ud + dhmā, see dhamati & remarks on uddhacca] to be blown up, to swell up, rise; aor. ˚āyi J iii.26; VvA 76; ger. ˚ājitvā J ii.18; DhA i.126. -- pp. uddhumāta & ˚āyita (q. v.).
Uddhumāyana (nt.) [fr. uddhumāyati] puffing, blowing or swelling up J iv.37.
Uddhumāyika (adj.) [cp. uddhumāyita] like blowing or swelling up, of blown -- up appearance M i.142 sq.
Uddhumāyita [pp. of uddhumāyati] swollen, bloated, puffed up VvA 218.
Udrabhati [? doubtful in form & etym.] to eat M i.306 (upacikā bījaŋ na udrabheyyuŋ vv. ll. on p. 555: udrah˚, udah˚, udāh˚, uddhah˚, uṭṭhah˚; udraheyyun ti khādeyyuŋ C. (udrabhāsane, Dhātum.)). -- Note. The Dhātupāṭha, 212, and the Dhātu -- mañjūsā, 311, explain udrabha by adane, eating.
Udraya (& Uddaya) ( -- ˚) [perhaps a bastard form of uddaya = udaya yielding etc. The BSk. usually renders P. dd by dr. If so, then equal to adaya & uddaya1] coming forth, result, consequence. Usually in foll. two phrases: dukkh˚ (yielding pain) & sukh˚ (giving pleasure); e. g. as dukkh˚ at M i 415; J iv.398; v.119 (v. l. ˚indriya); Pv i.1110 (so read for T. ˚andriya, cp. undriyati as v. l. for udāyati); Ps ii.79 (kammaŋ); as sukh˚ at J v.389 (v. l. ˚indriya); DhA ii.47 (˚uddaya). Both dukkh˚ & sukh˚ at Ps i.80. Besides these in foll. combns.: kaṭuk˚ causing bitterness J v.241; sa˚ with (good or evil) consequences S ii.29; M i.271.
Udrīyati (& Uddīyati) [cp. Sk. ud dīryate, Pass of ud + dṛ, dṛṇōti, and P. darati & dalati; see also avadīyati which may be a Sanskritised oddīyati for uddīyati] to burst, split open, break, fall to pieces Vin i.148 (vihāro udriyati); ii 174 (id); iv.254 (i); D i.96 (˚īyissati = bhijjhissati DA i 96, so read for udāyati); S i 113, 119.
Udrīyana & Uddīyana (nt.) [fr. udrīyati] breaking or splitting open, bursting J i.72; DhA ii.7 (˚sadda), 100 (paṭhavī -- uddīyana -- sadda; vv. ll. uddri˚, udri˚).
Undura [etym ?] a rat Vin i.209; ii.148, 152; iii.151; J i.120; Miln 23, 363. Spelt undūra at Vism 62.
Unna [pp. of ud, unatti & undati, see udaka] in phrase pīti -- vegenɔunna "bubbling up with the excitement of joy", overflowing with joy Mhvs 19, 29 (expld. by uggatacitta i. e. lofty, exalted C.). -- It may however be better & more in keeping with Pāli word -- formation as well as with meaning & interpretation to explain the word as ud + na, taking ˚na as abs. (base) -- form of nam, thus lit. "bent up", i. e. raised, high, in meaning of unnata. Cp. the exactly similar formation, use & meaning of ninna = ninnata. Thus unna / ninna would correspond to unnata / ninnata.
Unnaka [etym.?] a species of perfume J vi 537 (gloss kuṭantaja).
Unnangala (adj.) [ud + nangala, on meaning of ud in this case see ud] in phrase ˚ŋ karoti, according to Morris, J P T S 1887, 120 "to make an up -- ploughing, to turn up etc.", but more aptly with C. on J vi.328 to make "out -- plough" (not "up -- plough") in sense of out -- of -- work, i. e. to make the people put their ploughs (or work in general) away and prepare for a festival; to take a holiday. A typical "Jātaka" -- phrase; J i.228; ii.296, 367; iii. 129, 414; iv.355; vi.328; DhA iii.10.
Unnata [pp. of unnamati. Besides this form we find uṇṇata in fig. special meaning, q. v.] raised, high, lofty, in high situation (opp. oṇata) Pv iv.66 (= sāmin PvA 262); J i.71; ii369; vi 487; Miln 146, 387; DA i.45 See also unnaḷa.
Unnati (f) [fr. unnamati; cp. uṇṇati] rising, lifting up, elevation Miln 387 (˚avanati).
Unnadati [ud + nadati] to resound, shout out, roar J i.110; ii 90; iii.271, 325; Miln 18; aor. unnadi J i 74; Miln 13. -- Caus. unnādeti (q. v.).
Unnama [fr ud + nam; cp. also uṇṇama in fig. meaning] rising ground, elevation, plateau Kh vii.7 = Pv i.57 (= thala unnata -- padesa PvA 29); Miln 349; DA i.154.
Unnamati [ud + namati, see uṇṇamati in fig. meaning] to rise up, ascend Miln 117 (oṇamati +); Vism 306. -- Caus. unnāmeti (q. v.). -- pp. unnara & uṇṇata (q. v.).
Unnala & Unnaḷa (adj.) [Bdhgh. has ud + nala; but it is either a dissimilated form for *ullala (n > l change freq., cp. P. nangala > lāngala; nalāṭa > lalaṭa) from ud + lal to sport, thus meaning "sporting, sporty, wild" etc.; or (still more likely) with Kern, Toev. s. v. a dial. form of unnata P. uṇṇata, although the P. Commentators never thought of that. Cp. with this the BSk. unnata in same stock phrase uddhata unnata capala M Vastu i.305, and the Marathic Prk. mula = Sk. mṛta, Pischel, Gr. § 244. To these may be added P. celakedu > cetakedu J vi.538] showing off, insolent, arrogant, proud, haughty, in phrase uddhata unnaḷa capala M i.32; S i.61 = 204 (trsld. as "muddled in mind, puffed up, vain", expld. as uggata -- nala uddhaṭa -- tuccha -- māna K. S. 318); A i.70, 266; ii.26; iii 199, 355, 391; It 113 (+ asamāhita); Dh 292 (+ pamatta; expld. as "māna -- naḷaŋ ukkhipitvā caraṇena unnala" DhA iii.452); Th 1, 634; Pug 35 (= uggatanaḷo tuccha -- mānaŋ ukkhipitvā ti attho PugA 217).
Unnahanā (f.) [ud + nah, see nayhati] flattering, tying or pushing oneself on to somebody, begging Vism 27.
Unnāda [fr. ud + nad] shout, shouting J ii 405.
Unnādin (adj.) [fr. ud + nad] shouting out; resounding, noisy, loud, tumultuous Vin iii.336; D i.95, 143, 178; J ii.216.
Unnādeti [Caus. of unnadati] to make resound J i.408 (paṭhaviŋ), ii.34.
Unnāmin (adj) [ud + nam in Caus. form] raising or rising; in combn. with ninnāmin raised & bent, high & low A iv.237 (of cultivated land).
Unnāmeti (unn˚) [Caus. of unnamati] to raise DhsA 5; written uṇṇameti (with a for ā before mutes & liquids) at Sn 206 (inf. uŋṇametave).
Upa -- [Vedic upa; Av. upa on, up; Gr. u(po/ under, u(pe/r over; Lat. sub fr. * (e)ks -- upo; Goth. uf under & on; Ohg. ūf = Ags. up = E. up; Oir. fo under. See also upari] prefix denoting nearness or close touch (cp. similarly ā), usually with the idea of approach from below or rest on top, on, upon, up, by. -- In compn. a upa is always contracted to upa, e. g. devūpaṭṭhāna, lokûpaga, puññûpatthambhita. -- Meanings: (1) (Rest): on upon, up -- : ˚kiṇṇa covered over; ˚jīvati live on (cp. anu˚); ˚tthambhita propped up, sup -- ported; ˚cita heaped up, ac -- cumulated; ˚dhāreti hold or take up; ˚nata bent on; ˚nissaya foundation; ˚nissita depending on etc. -- (2) (Aim): (out) up to (the speaker or hearer); cp. the meanings developed out of this as "higher, above" in upara, upari, upama = Lat. superus, supremus E. g. ˚kaḍḍhati drag on to; ˚kappati come to, accrue; ˚kappana ad -- ministering; ˚kāra service to; ˚kkhata administered; ˚gacchati go to, ap -- proach (cp. upâtigacchati); ˚disati ad -- vise; ˚dhāvati run up to: ˚nadati to sound out; ˚nikkhamati come out up to; ˚nisevita gone on to or after; ˚neti bring on to; etc. -- (3) (Nearness): close by, close to, near, "ad -- "; e. g. ˚kaṇṇaka close to the ear; ˚cāra ap -- plication; ˚ṭṭhāna at -- tending; ṭṭhita ap -- proached; ˚tiṭṭhati stand by, look after; ˚dduta urged; ˚nāmeti place close to; ˚nibandhati tie close to; ˚nisīdati sit close to or down by. -- (4) (Intensive use): quite, altogether, "up"; e. g. ˚antika quite near; ˚chindati cut up. -- (5) (Diminutive use as in Lat. subabsurdus; Gr. u(po/leukos whitish; Oir. fo -- dord; Cymr. go -- durdd murmur): nearly, about, somewhat, a little, secondary, by -- , miniature, made after the style of, e. g. ˚aḍḍha about half; ˚kacchaka like a little hollow; ˚kaṇḍakin (= ˚paṇḍukin? whitish); ˚deva a minor god; ˚nibha somewhat similar to; ˚nila bluish; upapurohita minor priest; uparajja viceroyalty; upalohitaka, uparopa; ˚vana a little forest. etc. Note. The nearest semantie affinity of upa is ā˚.
Upaka ( -- ˚) [for ˚upaga] found only in combn. kulûpaka where second k stands for g. through assimilation with first k. Only with ref. to a bhikkhu = one who frequents a certain family (for the purpose of getting alms), a family friend, associate Vin i.192, 208; iii.84; S ii.200 sq.; A iii.258 sq.; Nd2 3851; Pv iii.85; PvA 266. -- f. kulûpikā (bhikkhunī) Vin ii.268; iv.66. -- Sporadic in gayhūpaka (for ˚ûpaga) at J iv.219.
Upakaccha (˚ -- ) [upa + kacchā2] only in combn. with ˚antare lit. "in between the hips or loins or arm -- pits", in 3 phrases (cp. Kern, Toev. ii.140 s. v.), viz. upakacchantare katvā taking (it) between the legs J i.63, 425, khipitvā throwing (it) into the armpits J v.211 & ṭhapetvā id. J v.46.
Upakacchaka [upa + kacchā + ka, cp. Sk. upakakṣa in diff. meaning] (1) [= upa + kaccha1 + ka] like an enclosure, adj. in the form of a hollow or a shelter J i.158. (2) [= upa + kacchā2 + ka] like the armpit, a hollow, usually the armpit, but occasionally it seems to be applied to the hip or waist Vin iii.39; iv.260 (pudendum muliebre); Miln 293; J v.437 (= kaccha2).
Upakaṭṭha (adj.) [pp. of upa + karś to draw up or near to] approaehing, near J iv.213 (yāva upakaṭṭha -- majjhantikā till nearly noon). Usually in foll. two phrases: upakaṭṭhe kāle when the time was near, i. e. at the approach of meal time Vin iv.175; VvA 6, 294; and upakaṭṭhāya vassûpanāyikāya as Lent was approaching Vin i.253; PvA 42; VvA 44. Cp. vūpakaṭṭha. -- loc. upakaṭṭhe as adv. or prep. "near, in the neighbourhood of" Nd2 639 (= santike); Dāvs v.41 (so read for upakaṇṭhe).
Upakaḍḍhati [upa + kaḍḍhati, cp. upakaṭṭha] to drag or pull on to (w. dat.), or down to D i.180 (+ apakaḍḍhati); iii.127 (id.); M i.365; S i.49; ii.99; Dh 311 (nirayāya = niraye nibbattapeti DhA iii.484).
Upakaṇṭha at Dāvs v.41 is to be corrected to upakaṭṭha.
Upakaṇḍakin (Pv ii.113) see under uppaṇḍukin.
Upakaṇṇa (˚ -- ) [upa + kaṇṇa] lit. (spot) near the ear, only in oblique cases or in der. ˚ka (q. v.) Th 1, 200 (upakannamhi close to the ear, under the ear).
Upakannaka (adj.) [upa + kaṇṇa + ka) by the ear, being at or on the ear of somebody, only in loc. as adv. upakaṇṇake secretly Vin i.237; ii.99; iv.20, 271; S i.86; A iii.57; SnA 186; and in cpd. ˚jappin one who whispers into the ear (of another), spreader of reports A iii. 136. Cp. kaṇṇajappaka & kaṇṇajappana.
Upakappati [upa + kappati] intrs.) to be beneficial to (w. dat.), to serve, to accrue S i.85; Pv i.44 (= nippajjati PvA 19); i.57 (petānaŋ); i.104 (= viniyujjati PvA 49); J v.350; PvA 8, 29 (petānaŋ), 27 (id.), 241; Sdhp 501, 504.
Upakappana (nt.) [fr. upakappati] profit PvA 29 (dān˚), 49 (an˚).
Upakappanaka (adj.) [fr. upakappana] profitable J i.398; DhA ii.133.
Upakaraṇa (nt.) [fr. upa + kṛ] help, service, support; means of existence, livelihood D ii.340; A ii.86; J i.7; PvA 60 (commodities), 133 (˚manussa, adj. suitable, fit); Sdhp 69. In general any instrument or means of achieving a purpose, viz. apparatus of a ship J iv.165; tunnavaya˚ a weaver's outfit J ii.364; dabb˚ fit to be used as wood Vism 120; dān˚ materials for a gift PvA 105 (so read & cp. upakkhaṭa); nahān˚ bathing requisites VvA 248; vitt˚ luxuries A v.264 sq., 283, 290 sq.; PvA 71.
Upakaroti [upa + karoti] to do a service, serve, help, sup- port Th 2, 89 (aor. upakāsiŋ = anugaṇhiŋ santappesiŋ ThA 88). -- pp. upakkhaṭa (q. v.).
Upakāra [fr. upa + kṛ, cp. upakaraṇa] service, help, be- nefit, obligation, favour D iii.187 sq.; VvA 68; PvA 8, 18 (˚āya hoti is good for); Sdhp 283, 447, 530. <-> bahûpakāra (adj.) of great help, very serviceable or helpful S iv.295; PvA 114. upakāraŋ karoti to do a favour, to oblige PvA 42, 88, 159 (kata); katûpakāra one to whom a service has been rendered PvA 116.
-- āvaha useful, serviceable, doing good PvA 86.
Upakāraka (adj.) [fr. upakāra] serviceable, helping, effec- tive J v.99; Vism 534. -- f. upakārikā 1. benefactress, helper J iii.437. -- 2. fortification (strengthening of the defence) on a city wall D i.105, see DA i.274 & cp. parikkhāra; M i.86 (= Nd2 1996). -- 3. (philosophy) = cause (that which is an aid in the persistence or happening of any given thing) Tikapaṭṭhāna i.11
Upakārin (adj. -- n.) [fr. upakāra; cp. ASk. upakārin Jtm. 3142] a benefactor J iii.11; DA i.187; Sdhp 540, 546.
Upakiṇṇa [pp. of upakirati] strewn over with ( -- ˚), covered Vv 351 (rucak˚, so read for rājak˚; expld by okiṇṇa VvA 160).
Upakiriyā (f.) [fr. upa + kr] implement, ornament J v.408.
Upakūjati [upa + kūjati] to sing to (of birds) J iv.296 (kūjantaŋ u. = replies w. song to the singing). -- pp. upakūjita (q. v.).
Upakūjita ( -- ˚) [pp. of upakūjati] resounding, filled with the hum or song of (birds) J iv.359; PvA 154.
Upakūla [upa + kūla] embankment, a river's bank, river- side J vi.26 (rukkhɔûpakūlaje the trees sprung up at its bank).
Upakūlita [derivation uncertain] used of the nose in old age Th 2, 258 (jarāya paṭisedhikā viya says the commentary. Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 74 trsls. obstructed; Mrs. Rh. D. in "Sisters" takes it for upakūḷita and trsls. seared and shrivelled. So also Ed. Müller J R A S. 1919. 538. This is probably right; but Oldenberg, Pischel and Hardy all read upakūlita.
Upakūḷita [pp. of kūḍ, a variant of kuth, kvathati] singed, boiled, roasted J i.405 ("half -- roasted" = aḍḍhajjhāmaka C.). See also upakūsita.
Upakūsita at J ii.134 is perhaps faulty for ˚kūḷita, which is suggested by C. expln. "kukkule jhāmo" and also by v. l. ˚kuṭhita (for kuṭṭhita boiled, sweltering, hot). The variant (gloss) ˚kūjita may have the same origin, viz. ˚kūḷita, was however interpreted (v. l. BB.) by ˚kupita (meaning "shaken, disturbed by fire").
Upakka see uppakka.
Upakkanta [pp. of upakkamati] 1. attacked by ( -- ˚) Miln 112. -- 2. attacking, intriguing or plotting against (loc.) DA i.140.
Upakkama [fr. upa + kram] (1) lit. (a) going to, nearing, approach ( -- ˚) VvA 72. -- (b) attack Vin ii.195; Miln 157; DA i.69, 71. -- (2) applied (a) in general: doing, acting, undertaking, act S i.152 = Sn p. 126. -- (b) in special: ways, means, i. e. either good of helpful means, expedient, remedy Sn 575; Miln 151, 152; or bad or unfair means, treachery, plotting Th 1, 143; J iv.115 (punishment); Miln 135, 176.
Upakkamati [upa + kamati of kram] to go on to, i e. (1) to attack M i.86 = Ud 71. -- (2) to undertake Vin iii.110, 111. -- (3) to begin Vin iv.316; DA i.318.
Upakkamana (nt.) [fr. upa + kram] going near to, attacking J iv.12.
Upakkitaka [fr. upa + krī to buy] a buyer, hawker, dealer combd. with bhataka DhA i.119 = Ud 23 (C. expls. by "yo kahāpaṇâdīhi kiñci kināti so upakkitako ti vuccati"); Ps ii.196 (? T. upakkhittaka).
Upakkiliṭṭha [pp. of upa + klid or kliś, cp. kilesa & next] soiled, stained, depraved, impure S i.179; A i.207 (citta); Vism 13.
Upakkilesa [fr. upa + kliś] anything that spoils or obstructs, a minor stain, impurity, defilement, depravity, Vin ii.295 (cp. SnA 487 & VvA 134 & see abbha); M i.36, 91; D iii.42 sq., 49 sq., 201; S v.92 sq. (pañca cittassa upakkilesā), 108, 115; A i.10 (āgantuka), 207 (cittassa), 253 (oḷārika etc.); ii.53 (candima -- suriyānaŋ samaṇa -- brāhmaṇānaŋ), 67; iii.16 (jātarūpassa, cittassa), 386 sq.; iv.177 (vigatā); v.195; Ps i.164 (eighteen); Pug 60; Dhs 1059, 1136; Nett 86 sq., 94, 114 sq.; Sdhp 216, 225 (as upaklesa). Ten stains at Vism 633.
Upakkuṭṭha [pp. of upakkosati] blamed, reproached, cen- sured, faulty D i.113 (an˚); Sn p. 115 (id.); J iii.523; DA i.211.
Upakkosa [fr. upa + kruś] censure, reproach J vi.489.
Upakkosati [upa + kosati] to scold, reprove, blame D i. 161; J iii.436, 523; iv.81, 317, 409.
Upakkhaṭa & ˚ta [pp. of upakaroti] done as a favour or service, given, prepared, administered D i.127 (= sajjita DA i.294); Pv ii.84 (= sajjita PvA 107); J vi.139; Miln 156.
Upakkhalati [upa + khalati] to stumble, trip D ii.250; M ii.209; A iii.101; J iii.433.
Upakkhalana (nt.) [fr. prec.] stumbling, tripping Vism 500.
Upakkhittaka at Ps ii.196 see upakk˚.
Upakhandha [upa + khandha] lit. upper (side of the) trunk, back, shoulder J iv.210 (= khandha C.).
Upaga (always as ˚ûpaga) (adj.) [upa + ga] -- 1. going to, getting to, reaching, in phrases kāy˚, S ii.24; ākāsɔānañcɔ āyatan˚ etc. Ps i.84; kāy˚ S ii.24; brahmalok˚ Pv ii.1319; yathākamm˚ D i.82. -- 2. coming into, experiencing, having, as vikappan˚ according to option Vin iv.283; phal˚ bearing fruit, & pupph˚ having flowers, in flower PvA 275. <-> 3. attached to, belonging to, being at J i.51 (hatth˚); VvA 12 (id. + pādûpaga). -- 4. in phrase gayh˚ lit. "accessible to the grip", acquisition of property, theft J iv.219 (T. gayhûpaka); Miln 325; DhA ii.29; PvA 4.
Upagacchati [upa + gacchati] -- 1. to come to, go to, approach, flow to (of water) D ii.12; PvA 12 (vasanaṭṭhānaŋ), 29, 32 (vāsaŋ) 132; ger. ˚gantvā PvA 70 (attano santikaŋ), & ˚gamma S ii.17, 20. -- 2. to undergo, go (in) to, to begin, undertake Sn 152 (diṭṭhiŋ anupagamma); J i.106 (vassaŋ); PvA 42 (id.); J i.200; niddaŋ upagacchati to drop off into sleep PvA 43 (aor. upagacchi, MSS. ˚gañchi), 105, 128. -- pp. upagata (q. v.).
Upagaṇhanā (f.) [abstr. of upa + gṛh] taking up, keeping up. meditating Miln 37.
Upagaṇhāti [upa + gaṇhāti] to take up (for meditation) Miln 38.
Upagata [pp. of upagacchati] -- 1. gone to, come, ap- proached (intrs.) Sn 708 (āsan˚ = nisinna SnA 495); PvA 77 (santikaŋ), 78, 79 (petalokaŋ), 123. -- 2. undergoing, coming or come under, overpowered, suffering Nd2 under asita (= ajjhupagata in same conn. at A v.187); Pv i.1110 (khuppipās˚); PvA 60 (= abhibhūta).
Upagamana (nt.) [fr. upa + gam] approaching, going or coming to, undergoing, undertaking Vin ii.97 (+ ajjhupag˚); Nett 27; Vism 600; PvA 42 (vass˚).
Upagamanaka (adj.) [fr. upagamana] going to, one who goes to (with acc.) PvA 168 (= ˚upaga).
Upagaḷita [pp. of upagaḷati] flowing out, spat or slobbered out J v.471 (˚khelo; v. l. paggharita).
Upagāmin (adj.) [fr. upa + gam, cp. ˚upaga] going to, undergoing, experiencing A ii.6 (jāti jar˚).
Upagūhati [upa + gūhati] to embrace J i.346, 349; ii.424; iii.437; v.157, 328, 384. -- ger. upaguyha J vi.300.
Upagghāta [pp. of next] scented, smelled, kissed J vi.543 (C. sīsamhi upasinghita).
Upagghāyati [upa + ghrā, see ghāyati1] to smell at, in sense of "to kiss" J v.328 (also inf. upagghātuŋ).
Upaghaṭṭita [pp. of upaghaṭṭeti] knocked or knocking against J i.26 (v.179).
Upaghāta [fr. upa + (g)han, cp. ghāta] hurting, injuring, injury M iii.237; S ii.218; iv.323 sq.; A iii.173; Th 1, 583; Miln 274, 307, 347; DA i.273. an˚ not hurting others, kindness Dh 185.
Upaghātana (nt.) [fr. upaghāta] hurting DhA iii.237 (an˚).
Upaghātika (adj.) [fr. upaghāta] injuring, offending Vin ii.13.
Upaghātin (adj.) [fr. upaghāta] hurting, injuring J iii.523.
Upacaya [fr. upa + ci, cp. caya & ācaya] heaping up, gathering, accumulation, heap. As t.t. with ref. to kamma "conservation", with ref. to body & form "integration". (See discussion & defin. at Cpd. 253; Dhs trsl. 195). <-> D i.76 (= odana = kummāsɔûpacayo, see under kāya); Dhs 582, 642 (rūpassa u. = āyatanānaŋ ācayo), 864; Vbh 147, 151 sq.; Kvu 520; Nett 113; Vism 449; DA i.220; PvA 198 (but v. l. paccayassa preferable).
Upacarati [upa + carati] to deal with, handle, use J vi. 180. -- pp. upaciṇṇa & upacarita (q. v.).
Upacarita [pp. of upacarati] practised, served, enacted, performed Miln 359, 360.
Upacāra [fr. upa + car] -- 1. approach, access Vin ii.120, 152; iv.304; J i.83, 172; DhsA 328 (phal˚). -- 2. habit, practice, conduct Vin ii.20 (dassan˚); SnA 140 (id.); J iii.280. -- 3. way, means application, use of (esp. of spells etc.) J iii.280 (mantassa); vi.180; Miln 153, 154 (dur˚ an evil spell); VvA 127 (gram. t.t. kāraṇ˚). -- 4. entrance, access, i. e. immediate vicinity or neighbourhood of ( -- ˚) J iv.182 (nagar˚); usually as gām˚ Vin i.109; iii.46; iv.230; KhA 77; SnA 83, 179. -- 5. attention, attendance Vin iv.272; J vi.180; Miln 154. -- 6. civility, polite behaviour J ii.56; vi.102. -- 7. On upacāra as philos, t.t. and its relation to appanā see Dhs trsln. 53, 54; Cpd. 55; Mystic p. xi. Thus used of samādhi (neighbourhood -- , or access -- concentration, distinguishing it from appanā -- samādhi) at Vism 85, 126, 144 and passim.
Upacikā (f.) [connected with Sk. upadīkā, although the relation is not quite clear. Attempts at explns. by Trencker Notes 62 (*utpādikā > upatikā > upacikā) & Kern, Toev. p. 102 (upacikā = Vedic upajīka, this fr. upajihikā for ˚dihikā, vv. ll. upadehihā & upadīkā). It may however be a direct der. from upa + ci, thus meaning "making heaps, a builder"] the termite or white ant Vin ii.113, 148, 152; iii.151; M i.306; J iii.320; iv.331; Miln 363, 392; Vism 62, DhA ii.25; iii.15.
Upaciṇṇa [pp. of upacarati] used, frequented, known (as value) J vi.180.
Upacita [pp. of upacināti] -- 1. heaped up, accumulated, collected, produced (usually of puñña merit, & kamma karma) Sn 697; KhA 132; SnA 492; VvA 7, 271, 342; PvA 30, 150. -- 2. built up, conserved (of the body) Miln 232; DA i.220.
Upacitatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. upacita] storing up, accumulation Dhs 431.
Upacināti [upa + ci] -- 1. to collect, heap up, accumulate (puññaŋ or pāpaŋ) VvA 254; PvA 8, 241. -- 2. to concentrate, pay attention Th 1, 199 (C. upacetuŋ for ocetuŋ T.); J v.339 (= oloketi). -- Pass. upaciyyati Th 1, 807. -- pp. upacita (q. v.).
Upacca = uppacca (q. v.) "flying up" (= uppatitvā PvA 103) at Th 2, 248 (= ThA 205, where v. l. and gloss upecca & upacca, expld. by upanetvā), as well as at Pv ii.717 (= PvA 103 where read upaccha; & gloss upacca & upecca).
Upaccagā [upa + ati + agā of gam] 3rd sg. pret. of upâ- tigacchati (q. v.) to escape, pass, go by; to overcome Sn 333 (mā upaccagā = mā atikkami SnA 339) = Th 2, 5 (= mā atikkami ThA 12); Sn 636, 641, 827 (= accagā atikkanta Nd1 167); Dh 315, 412, 417 (= atikkanta DhA iv.225); Bu ii.43. -- pl. upaccaguŋ S i.35; A iii.311.
Upaccati (?) in phrase "akkhīni upacciŋsu" at J vi.187 is probably faulty for apaciyiŋsu aor. of apaciyyati, Pass. of apacināti (cp. upaciyyati > upacināti) "the eyes failed", lost power, went bad; cp. apacaya falling off, diminution. If not this reading we should suggest upacchijjiŋsu from upacchindati "were destroyed", which however is not quite the sense wanted.
Upacchindati [upa + chindati] to break up or off, to destroy, interrupt, to stop Sn 972 (pot. ˚chinde); J iv. 127; Nd1 502; ThA 267; PvA 31 (kulavaŋso upacchijji aor. pass.); Vism 164, 676 (bhavangaŋ).
Upacchinna [pp. of upacchindati] cut off, interrupted J i. 477; Miln 306.
Upacchubhati [upa + chubhati from kṣubh or chubh, see chuddha, khobha, nicchubhati, nicchodeti] to throw at M i.364 (vv. ll. ˚chumbh˚, ˚cubh˚).
Upaccheda [fr. upa + chid] breaking or cutting off, destruction, stoppage, interruption M i.245, 327 (pāṇ˚ murder); J i.67; Miln 134 (paveṇ˚ break of tradition) PvA 82 (kulavaŋs˚); DhA i.152 (āhār ˚ŋ karoti to prevent fr. taking food); DA i.136, 159.
Upacchedaka (adj. -- n.) [fr. upaccheda] destroying, breaking off, stopping, interrupting J i.418 (vacan˚); iv.357; DA i.69 (jīvitɔ indriy˚); VvA 72 (id.).
Upajānāti [upa + jānāti] to learn, acquire or have know- ledge of (w. gen. or instr.), to know Vin i.272 (saŋyamassa); ii.181 (gharāvāsɔatthena); A i.50 (dvinnaŋ dhammānaŋ upaññāsin). -- fut. upaññissati (& upaññassati Sn 716) Sn 701, 716 (= upaññayissati kathayissati SnA 498); J v.215. -- pp. upaññāta (q. v.).
Upajīvati [upa + jīvati] to live on (w. acc.), to depend on, to live by somebody, to be supported by (acc.) D i.228; S i.217; Sn 612 sq.; Th 1, 943; J iii.309, 338; iv.271 (= anujīvati); Pv ii.950 (Ankuraŋ u. ti taŋ nissāya jīvanti PvA 134); Miln 231.
Upajīvika (adj.) [= upajīvin] Sdhp 501 (see next).
Upajīvin ( -- ˚) (adj. -- n.) [fr. upa + jīv] living on, sub- sisting by A ii.135 (phal˚); Sn 217 (para -- datt˚), J i.227 (vohār˚); iv.380; Pug 51; Miln 160 (Satth˚); VvA 141 (sipp˚). f. upajīvinī in rūp˚ (itthi) a woman earning her living by her beauty (i. e. a courtesan) Miln 122; PvA 46; cp. kiliṭṭha -- kamm˚ gaṇikā PvA 195.
Upajūta (nt.) [upa + jūta] stake at game J vi.192.
Upajjha see next.
Upajjhāya [Vedic upādhyāya, upa + adhi + i, līt. "one who is gone close up to"] a spiritual teacher or preceptor, master. Often combd. with ācariya e. g. Vin i. 119; Nd1 350; the ācariya being only the deputy or substitute of the upajjhāya. Vin i.45, 53, 62, 120; iv. 130; S i.185; A ii.66, 78; iii.69; SnA 346; DhA ii.93; PvA 55, 60, 230. -- A short form of upajjhāya is upajjha, found in the Vinaya, e. g. at Vin i.94; iii.35; with f. upajjhā Vin iv.326.
Upaññāta [pp. of upajānāti] found out, learnt, known Vin i.40; J v.325, 368; A i.61.
Upaṭṭita [upa + aṭṭita, from ard, see aṭṭita] pained, terri- fied; overcome, overwhelmed J vi.82 (visavegena).
Upaṭṭhapeti & ˚ṭṭhāpeti [Caus. II. of upaṭṭhahati] 1. to provide, procure, get ready, put forth, give Vin ii.210; D ii.19; M i.429; J i.266; iv.2; v.218; Pug 59, 68; Miln 15, 257, 366 (pānīyaŋ paribhojanīyaŋ), 397; DA i.270; Sdhp 356. -- 2. to cause to be present Vin i.45; S i.170; Pv iv.170. -- 3. to cause to be waited on or to be nursed A v.72 (gilānaŋ upaṭṭhātuŋ vā upaṭṭhāpetuŋ vā). -- 4. to keep (a servant) for hire Vin ii.267. <-> 5. to ordain Vin i.62, 83.
Upaṭṭhahati & ˚ṭṭhāti [upa + sthā, cp. upatiṭṭhati] 1 (trs.) to stand near or at hand (with acc.), to wait on, attend on, serve, minister, to care for, look after, nurse (in sickness) Vin i.50, 302; iv.326; M iii.25; S i.167; A iii.94; v.72; Sn 82 = 481 (imper. ˚ṭṭhahassu); J i.67 (ppr. ˚ṭṭhahamāna), 262 (ppr. ˚ṭṭhahanto); iv.131; v.396; Dpvs ii.16; PvA 19, 20. -- aor. upaṭṭhahi PvA 14, 42, 82. -- inf. upaṭṭhātuŋ A v.72; PvA 20. -- ger. upaṭṭhahitvā PvA 76. -- grd. upaṭṭhātabba Vin i.302; PvA 20. -- pp. upaṭṭhita (q. v.). -- 2. (intrs.) to stand out or forth, to appear, to arise, occur, to be present M i.104 sq.; A iv.32; J iv.203 (mante anupaṭṭhahante since the spell did not occur to him); v.207; Miln 64; ThA 258. <-> aor. upaṭṭhāsi J i.61; iv.3; PvA 42. -- Caus. I. upaṭṭheti; Caus. II. upaṭṭhapeti & ˚ṭṭhāpeti (q. v.). -- Pass. upaṭṭhīyati J iv.131 (ppr. ˚ṭṭhiyamāna), & upaṭṭhahīyati A iii.94 (ppr. ˚ṭṭhahiyamāna).
Upaṭṭhāka [fr. upa + sthā, cp. BSk. upasthāka M Vastu i.251, and upasthāyaka Divy 426; Av. Ś. i.214; ii.85, 112.] a servitor, personal attendant, servant, "famulus". Ānanda was the last u. of Gotama Buddha (see D i.206; Th 1, 1041 f.; ThA in Brethren loc. cit.; Vin i.179 (Sāgato u.), 194; ii.186; iii.66; iv.47; D i.150 (Nāgita); S iii.113; A i.121; iii.31, 189; J i 15, 100 (a merchant's); ii.416; Pug 28; DhA ii.93; VvA 149; PvA 211. -- agg˚ main follower, chief attendant D ii.6; gilān˚ an attendant in sickness, nurse Vin i.303; A i.26; sangh˚ one who looks after the community of Bhikkhus Vin i.216; A i.26; iii.39. -- dupaṭṭhāka & supaṭṭhāka a bad (& good) attendant Vin i.302.
-- kula a family entertaining (or ministering to) a thera or a bhikkhu, a family devoted to the service of (gen.) Vin i.83 (Sāriputtassa), 213; iii.62, 66, 67; iv.283, 286; VvA 120.
Upaṭṭhāna (nt.) [fr. upa + sthā] -- 1. attendance, waiting on, looking after, service, care, ministering A i.151, 225; Sn 138; J i.226, 237, 291; ii.101; iv.138; vi.351. Ps i.107; ii.7 sq., 28, 230; PvA 104, 145 (paccekabuddhassa), 176; VvA 75 (ther˚); Sdhp 560. -- 2. worship, (divine) service D iii.188 sq. (˚ŋ gacchati); PvA 122. Buddh˚ attendance on a Buddha PvA 93; ThA 18. <-> 3. a state room J iii.257.
-- sambhāra means of catering, provisions PvA 20. -- sālā hall for attendance, assembly room, chapel [cp. BSk. upasthāna -- śālā Divy 207] Vin i.49, 139; ii.153, 208; iii. 70 (at Vesālī); iv.15, 42; D ii.119 (at Vesālī); S ii.280; v.321; A ii.51, 197; iii.298; DhA i.37, 38; iii.413.
Upaṭṭhāpana (nt.) [fr. upa + sthā] attendance, service Vin iv. 291.
Upaṭṭhita [pp. of upaṭṭhahati or upatiṭṭhāti, cp. BSk. upa- sthita Divy 281, 342] -- 1. furnished provided, served, got ready, honoured with Sn 295 (˚asmiŋ yaññasmiŋ); J v.173 (annena pānena); Pv i.52 (= sajjita paṭiyatta PvA 25); ii.98 (= payirupāsita PvA 116); PvA 132. <-> 2. come, come about, appeared, arrived; present, existing Sn 130 (bhattakāle upaṭṭhite when mealtime has come), 898; Dh 235; Miln 274; PvA 124 (dānakāle ˚e). <-> 3. standing up (ready), keeping in readiness M i.77; A ii.206; Sn 708 (= ṭhito C.); Pv ii.953 (ready for service, serving, waiting upon cp. PvA 135.
-- sati with ready attention, one whose attention is fixed, concentrated Vin i.63; D iii.252, 282; S iv.186; A iii. 251; Pug 25.
Upaṭṭheti [Caus. of upaṭṭhahati] to make serve or attend; sakkaccaŋ u. (with acc.) to bestow respect (upon) Vin iv.275. fut. ˚essati Vin iv.291. to place, fix (parimukhaŋ satiŋ upaṭṭhapetvā) Vibh. 244.
Upaḍayhati [upa + ḍayhati] to be burnt up Miln 277.
Upaḍḍha (adj. -- nt.) [upa + aḍḍha, used abs. whereas aḍḍha only in compn., cp. also BSk. upārdha Divy 86, 144, 514; AvS i.211, 240] half Vin i.281 (˚kāsina); ii.200 (˚āsana); J iii.11 (˚rajja); Vism 320 (˚gāma); DhA i.15, 205 (˚uposathakamma); ii.85; KhA 239 (˚gāthā); SnA 298; VvA 38, 61, 120; PvA 209, 276.
Upatappati [upa + tappati1)] to be vexed or tormented J v.90; DhsA 42.
Upatāpa [fr. upa + tap] vexation, trouble Vism 166.
Upatāpana (nt.) [upa + tāpana] vexation, tormenting, torture J iv.13; ThA 243.
Upatāpika (adj.) [fr. upatāpa] causing pain, molesting J ii.224.
Upatāpeti [upa + tāpeti] to cause pain, to vex, torment, harass J ii.178, 224; iv.11; DhsA 42 (vibādhati +).
Upatiṭṭhati [upa + sthā, cp. upaṭṭhahati, ˚ṭṭhāti etc.] lit. "to stand by", to look after, to worship Pv iii.118; J ii.73 (ādiccaŋ = namassamāno tiṭṭhati C.); Miln 231 (ger. ˚tiṭṭhitvā); J v.173 (˚tiṭṭhate). pp. upaṭṭhita (q. v.).
Upatta [upa + akta, pp. of añj] smeared, spread over M i.343; J i.399.
Upatthaddha [upa + thaddha, pp. of upatthambhati] - 1. stiff Vin iii.37 (angāni). -- 2. supported or held up by, resting on, founded on, relying on Th 1, 1058, 1194; 2, 72 (yobbanena); J i.47 (v. 267: mettābalena); v. 121, 301; Kvu 251 (cakkhu dhamm˚ "when it is the medium of an idea"); Nett 117; Miln 110 (kāruñña -- bal˚).
Upatthambha [fr. upa + stambh] -- 1. a support, prop, stay Miln 355, 415, 417; Sdhp 565. -- 2. relief, ease Vin iii.112. -- 3. encouragement J v.270; DhA i.279.
Upatthambhaka (adj. nt.) [fr. upatthambha) holding up, supporting, sustaining DhsA 153.
Upatthambhana (nt.) = upatthambha Miln 36; J i.447; DA i.124; ThA 258; Vism 279.
Upatthambhita [pp. of upatthambheti] propped up, sup- ported, sustained J i.107; Miln 36; DA i 234; PvA 117 (puñña -- phal˚), 148 (utu -- āhārehi u.).
Upatthambheti [upa + thambheti, Caus. of thambhati] to make firm, shore up, support, prop up J i.127 [ppr. ˚ayamāna), 447; DA i.113; DhA iii.73 (˚ayamāna ppr.). <-> pp. upatthambhita.
Upatthara [fr. upa + stṛ] a (floor) covering, carpet, rug D i.103 (rath˚); J ii.126 (pabbat˚); ii.534.
Upatheyya [for upadheyya, see Trenckner, Notes 6216] a cushion J vi.490, 513.
Upadaŋsitar [n. ag. fr. upadaŋseti] one who shows Pug 49 (where upadhaŋsita is to be corrected to upad˚, as already pointed out by Morris J P T S. 1887, 126. The word seems to be a crux to commentators, philologists, and translators, like upadaŋseti. Kern, Toev. s. v. keeps to the reading upah˚, tries to connect it with Sk. dharṣati & trsls. "one who confirms". The Pug A leaves the word unexplained).
Upadaŋseti [= upadasseti with ˚aŋs˚ for ˚ass˚ like dhan- seti = Sk. dharṣayati, haŋsa = harṣa etc. only in poetical passages] to cause to appear, to manifest M ii.120; S i. 64, 65 (of gods, to become resplendent, to show divers colour -- tones); A ii.84 = iii.139 = 264 = Pug 49 (to show pleasure); Th i.335, to bring forth (a goad, and so incite, urge on); Vin iv.309.
Upadasseti (upa + dasseti, Caus. of drś, cp. also upa- daŋseti] to make manifest, to show Miln 276, 316, 347.
Upadahati [upa + dahati1] to put down, supply, furnish, put on; give, cause, make Vin iv.149; D ii.135 (vippaṭisāraŋ); A i.203 (dukkhaŋ); Miln 109, 139, 164, 286, 383. grd. pass. ˚dahātabba to be given or caused Vin ii.250 = A iii.197 (vippaṭisāra). Cp. upadhi.
Upadāyaka (adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. upa + dā] giving, bestowing Sdhp 319.
Upadiṭṭha [pp. of upadisati] pointed out, put forth, speci- fied Miln 144 (pañha).
Upadisati [upa + disati] to point out, show, advise, specify J v. 457 (sippaŋ); Miln 21 (dhamma -- maggaŋ). -- pp. upadiṭṭha (q. v.).
Upadissati [upa + dissati] to be seen (open), to be shown up, to be found out or discovered Sn 140 (pres. upadissare = ˚nti SnA 192).
Upadeva [upa + deva, on use of upa in this meaning see upa 5] a secondary, lesser, minor god PvA 136.
Upadesa [fr. upadisati] pointing out, indication, instruction, advice PvA 26 (tadupadesena read for tadupād˚; KhA 208 differs at id. p.); KhA 100; Sdhp 227.
Upaddava [upa + dava2 of dru] lit. rushing on; accident, misfortune, distress, oppression S ii.210; A i.101; Sn 51; Dh 338 (an˚); DhA i.16; Sdhp 267, 398.
Upaddavati [fr. upa + dru] to annoy, trouble DA i.213. -- pp. upadduta (q. v.).
Upadduta [pp. of upaddavati] overrun, oppressed, annoyed, overcome, distressed Vin ii.170; iii.144, 283; S ii.210; iv.29; J i.26, 61, 339; ii.102; iv.324, 494; Pv ii.108; Vism 24 (= apakata); Miln 279; VvA 311 (aṭṭita +); PvA 61. an˚ unmolested PvA 195; anupaddutatta state of not being molested VvA 95.
Upadhaŋsitar & Upadhaŋseti at Pug 49 is to be read upad˚ (q. v.).
Upadhāna (adj. nt.) [fr. upa + dhā, cp. upadahati] "putting under", i. e. (1) a pillow, cushion D i.7; S ii.267 = Miln 366 (kaḷingar˚); S iii.145; A i.137, 181; iii.50, J iv.201; v.506 (tamb˚ = ratt˚ C.); (2) imposing, giving, causing Dh 291 dukkh˚).
Upadhāneti [f. upa + dhā] to suppose, think, reflect DhA i.239 (should be corrected to upadhāreti).
Upadhāraṇā (nt.) [fr. upa + dhṛ) "receptacle", milk -- pail D ii.192; A iv.393; J vi.503. See kaŋs˚. Kern, Toev. i. 142 proposes corruption fr. kaŋsɔûpadohana, which latter however does not occur in Pali.
Upadhāraṇā (f) [cp. upadhāraṇa] calculation VvA 7.
Upadhārita [pp. of upadhāreti] considered, reflected upon Dh i.28; sûpadh˚ Miln 10; dûpadh˚ Vin iv.275.
Upadhāreti (Caus. of upa + dhṛ, cp. dhāreti 3] 1. "to hold or take up" (cp. semantically Lat. teneo = E. tenet), to reason out, conclude, reflect, surmise, know as such & such, realise J i.338; DhA i.28, 41; ii.15, 20, 37, 96; iv.197 (an˚); VvA 48, 200 (an˚), 234, 260 (an˚), 324; PvA 119 (for jānāti). -- 2. to look out for (acc.) J iii. 65; vi.2.
Upadhāvati [upa + dhāvati 1] to run up to or after, fall upon, surround Vin ii.207; iv.260 (pp. ˚dhāvita); S i.185; S ii.26 (aparantaŋ); Th 1, 1209; Miln 209; VvA 256; PvA 154, 168, 173 (for padhāvitā).
Upadhi [fr. upa + dhā, cp. upadahati & BSk. upadhi Divy 50, 224, 534] 1. putting down or under, foundation, basis, ground, substratum (of rebirth) S i.117, 124, 134, 186; A ii.24 (˚sankhaya); iii.382 (id.); iv.150 (˚kkhaya); It 21, 69; Sn 364, 728 (upadhī -- nidānā dukkha = vaṭṭa -- dukkhaŋ SnA 505), 789, 992; Nd1 27, 141; Nd2 157; Vbh 338; Nett 29; DhA iv.33. -- (2) clinging to rebirth (as impeding spiritual progress), attachment (almost syn. with kilesa or taṇhā, cp. nirupadhi & anupadhi); S A. = pañcakkhandhā, S ii.108. At M i 162 (cp. Sn 33 = S i.6 = i.107) wife and children, flocks and herds, silver and gold are called upadhayo. upadhi is the root of sorrow ib. 454; S ii.108; Sn 728 = 1051 = Th i.152 and the rejection of all upadhis is Nibbāna D ii.36. (cp. S i.136; iii.133; v.226; A i.80; M i.107 = ii.93; Vin i.5, 36 = J i.83 = Mvst ii.444; It 46, 62); D iii.112 calls that which has upadhi ignoble (= non -- Aryan). At S i.117 = Divy 224 upadhi is called a bond (saŋgo). Cp. opadhika. -- The upadhis were later systematized into a set of 10, which are given at Nd2 157 as follows: 5 taṇhɔ upadhis (taṇhā, diṭṭhi, kilesa, kamma, duccarita), āhār -- upadhi, paṭigh˚, catasso upādinnā dhātuyo u. (viz. kāma, diṭṭhi, sīlabbata, attavāda; see D iii.230), cha ajjhattikāni āyatanāni u., cha viññāṇa -- kāyā u. Another modified classification see at Brethren p. 398.
Upadhika (Upadhīka) (adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. upadhi] having a substratum, showing attachment to rebirth, only in cpds. an˚ free from clinging Vin i.36; Sn 1057, & nir˚ id. S i.141.
Upadheyya (nt.) [cp. upadhāna] a cushion J vi.490 (for upatheyya, q. v.).
Upanaccati [upa + naccati] to perform a dance D ii.268.
Upanata [pp. of upanamati] inclined, bent, prone PvA 190.
Upanadati [upa + nadati] to resound (with song) Pv iii.34 (= vikūjati PvA 189).
Upanandha [pp. of upanayhati, see naddha & nandhati] scorned, grumbled at Vin ii.118.
Upanandhati [a secondary der. fr. upanandha, pp. of upa- nayhati] to bear enmity towards, to grumble at (with loc.); aor. upanandhi Vin ii.118 (tasmiŋ); iv.83; Mhvs 36, 117.
Upanamati [upa + namati] to be bent on, strive after J iii 324 (= upagacchati C.). -- pp. upanata; Caus. upanāmeti (q. v.).
Upanayana (nt.) [fr. upa + ni; cp. naya & nayana] tt. for the minor premiss, subsumption (see Kvu trsl. 11) Miln 154; Nett 63; DhsA 329 (so read with v. l. for ˚najana).
Upanayhati [upa + nayhati] -- 1. to come into touch with It 68 = J iv.435 (pūtimacchaŋ kusaggena, cp. DhA i.45). -- 2. to bear enmity towards (loc.), to grudge, scorn Dh 3, 4. -- pp. upanandha (for ˚naddha). -- See also upanandhati.
Upanayhanā (f.) & ˚nayhitatta (nt.) are syn. for upanāha (grudge, ill -- will) in exegesis at Pug 18 = 22, whereas id. p. at Vbh 357 reads upanahanā upanahitattaŋ (with v. l. upanayihanā & upanayihitattaŋ).
Upanāmita [pp. of upanāmeti] brought up to, placed against D ii.134.
Upanāmeti [Caus. of upanamati] 1. to bend over to, to place against or close to, to approach, bring near D ii. 134; S i.207; Th 1, 1055; Sn p. 48 (= attano kāyaŋ Bhagavato upanāmeti); J i.62; v.215; SnA 151. -- 2. to offer, to present J iv.386; ii.5; Miln 210, 373; PvA 274. -- pp. upanāmita (q. v.). [cp. BSk. upanāmayati to hand over Divy 13, 14, 22].
Upanāyika ( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. upa + nī] -- 1. referring to, belonging to in cpd. att˚ ref. to oneself Vin iii.91; Vism 27. -- 2. beginning, in phrase vass'ûpanāyikā (f.) the approach of the rainy season, period for entering on Lent (cp. BSk. varṣopanāyikā Divy 18, 489 & see also upakaṭṭha and vassa) Vin i.253; A i.51 (divided into 2 parts, first & second, or purimikā & pacchimikā); J iii.332; DA i.8; DhA i.203; iii.438; VvA 44; PvA 42.
Upanāha [fr. upa + nah, see upanayhati, same in BSk.; e. g. at M Vastu ii.56.] ill -- will, grudge, enmity M i.15; A i.91, 95, 299; iv.148, 349, 456; v.39, 41 sq., 209, 310; Pug 18 = Vbh 357 (pubbakālaŋ kodho aparakālaŋ upanāho Miln 289.
Upanāhin (adj. -- n.) [fr. upanāha] one who bears ill -- will, grudging, grumbling, finding fault Vin ii.89; M i.95; D iii.45; S ii.206; iv.241; A iii.260, 334; v.123, 156; Sn 116; Th 1, 502; J iii.260 (kodhana +); Pug 18; Vbh 357. -- Opp. an˚ not being angry (loc.) D iii.47; S ii. 207; iv.244; A v.124 sq.; J iv.463.
Upanikkhamati [upa + nikkhamati] to go out, to come out (up to somebody) Th 2, 37; 169; J iii 244; Pv i. 101 (aor. ˚nikkhami; imper. ˚nikkhamassu).
Upanikkhitta [upa + n˚] laid down (secretly), placed by or on top S v.457; J vi.390; Miln 80. -- m. a spy J vi.394 (˚purisa).
Upanikkhittaka [= prec.] a spy J vi 409 (˚manussa), 431 (id.), 450 (id.).
Upanikkhipati (upa + n˚] to deposit near, to lay up Vin i.312; S ii.136 sq.; Miln 78, 80; Nett 21, 22; DA i. 125. -- pp. upanikkhitta (q. v.).
Upanikkhipana (nt.) [fr. ˚nikkhipati] putting down (near somebody), putting in the way, trap Vin iii.77.
Upanikkhepa [fr. upa + nis + kṣip] "putting near", depositing; -- 1. appld. to the course of memory, association of ideas Miln 78, 80; cp. ˚nikkhepana S ii.276. -- 2. deposit, pledge J vi.192, 193 (= upajūta).
Upanighaŋsati [upa + ni + ghaŋsati1] to rub up against, to crush (close) up to DhA i.58.
Upanijjhāna (nt.) [upa + nijjhāna1] meditation, reflection, consideration only in two phrases: ārammaṇa˚ & lakkhaṇa˚, with ref. to jhāna J v.251; DhA i.230; iii.276; VvA 38, 213. Cp. nijjhāyana.
Upanijjhāyati [upa + nijjhāyati] to meditate upon, con- sider, look at, reflect on Vin i.193 ("covet"); ii 269; iii. 118; D i.20; A iv.55; Miln 124; Vism 418. -- pp. upanijjhāyita (q. v.).
Upanijjhāyana [for ˚nijjhāna] meditation, reflection Miln 127; Vism 418.
Upanijjhāyita [pp. of ˚nijjhāyati] considered, looked at, thought over or about Sn p. 147 (= diṭṭha, ālokita SnA 508).
Upanidhā (f.) [abstracted from upanidhāya or direct for- mation fr. upa + ni + dhā?] comparison Nd2 158 (= upamā; should we read upanidhāya?).
Upanidhāya (indecl.) [ger. of upa + nidahati of dhā] comparing in comparison, as prep. w. acc. "compared with" M i.374; iii.177 (Himavantaŋ pabbatarājānaŋ); S ii.133 (mahāpaṭhaviŋ), 262; v.457 (Sineru -- pabbata -- rājānaŋ); A iii.181 sq.; iv.253 sq. (dibbasukhaŋ); Th 1, 496 (kammaŋ); J ii.93; DA i.29, 59, 283.
Upanidhi (f.) [upa + ni + dhā, cp. nidhi] -- 1. deposit, pledge Vin iii.51. -- 2. comparison, in phrase upanidhiŋ na upeti "does not come into comparison, cannot be compared with" M iii.177; S ii.263; v.457 (so read for upanidhañ); Ud 23.
Upanipajjati [upa + ni + pad] to lie down close to or on top of (acc.) Vism 269; J v.231.
Upanibajjhati see upanibandhati.
Upanibaddha [pp. of ˚nibandhāti] -- 1. tied on to Miln 253, 254. -- 2. closely connected with, close to Vin iii. 308 (Samanta Pāsādikā). -- 3. attached to DA i.128.
Upanibandha [upa + ni + bandh] 1. close connection, dependence Vism 19 (˚gocara). -- 2. (adj. -- ˚) connected with, dependent on Vism 235 (jīvitaŋ assāsa -- passāsa˚ etc).
Upanibandhati [upa + n˚) to tie close to, to bind on to, attach M iii.132; Miln 254, 412. -- Pass. upanibajjhati to be attached to Sn 218. -- pp. ˚nibaddha (q. v.).
Upanibandhana (adj. nt.) [upa + n˚] (adj.) closely con- nected with D i.46; DA i.128; (nt.) tie, fetter, leash Miln 253.
Upanibbatta [upa + nibbatta] come out, produced DA i.247.
Upanibha (adj. [upa + nibha] somewhat like ( -- ˚) M i. 58 = A iii.324 (sankha -- vaṇṇa˚); J i.207 (= sadisa C.); v.302 (tāla˚).
Upanivattati [upa + n˚] to return Sn 712; J iv.417; v.126.
Upanisā (f.) [if = Vedic upaniṣad, it would be fr. upa + ni + sad, but if, as is more likely, a contracted form of upanissaya, it would be fr. upa + ni + śri . The history of this word has yet to be written, cp. Kern, Toev. s. v. & Divy 530 svopaniṣad] -- 1. cause, means D ii. 217, 259; M iii.71 (samādhiŋ sa -- upanisaŋ); S ii.30 -- 32 (S A. = kāraṇa, paccaya); v.25; A i.198; iii.20, 200 sq., 360; iv.99, 336, 351; v.4 sq., 313 sq.; Sn 322 (= upanissaya SnA 331); p. 140 (= kāraṇa, payojana SnA 503); Dh 75 (cp. DhA ii.102 aññā nibbānagāminī paṭipadā). <-> 2. likeness, counterfeit [= Sk. upaniṣad = aupamye Pāṇini i.4, 79] J vi.470 (= paṭirūpaka C.).
Upanisīdati [upa + nisīdati of sad] to sit close to or down by D i.95; A iv.10; J ii.347; Pv iv.163 (ger. ˚sajja = ˚sīditvā PvA 242); Vism 269.
Upanisevati [upa + n˚] to pursue, follow, go up after, cling to (acc) M i.306. -- pp. upanisevita (q. v.).
Upanisevana (adj.) [fr. upanisevati] going close after, fol- lowing J v.399 [f. ˚ī.).
Upanisevita [pp. of upanisevati] gone on to, furnished with, sticking or clinging to, full of J v.302 (kakka˚).
Upanissaya [upa + ni˚] basis, reliance, support, founda- tion, assurance, certainty; esp. sufficing condition or qualification for Arahantship (see long article in Childers s. v.); no 9 in the 24 paccayas, Tikapatthāṇa, Tikapaṭṭhāna i.1, a term only found in the Paṭṭhāna, the Jātaka & later exegetical literature J i.78, 508; iv.96; vi.70; Nett 80; Vism 19 (˚gocara), 535 (˚paccaya); DhsA 315 (id.); DhA ii.33; VvA 98; PvA 38 (sotāpatti -- phalassa), 55 (˚sampatti); Sdhp 265, 320.
Upanissayati [upa + ni˚] to depend or rely on (acc.) Miln 240 (attānaŋ). -- ger. ˚nissāya (q. v.); -- pp. ˚nissita (q. v.).
Upanissāya (adv.) [ger. of upanissayati, cp. nissayati in same use & meaning) near, close by (with acc.); depending on, by means of (acc) M ii.3; S ii.269; Sn 867 (taŋ), 901 (tāpa˚), 978, PvA 9 (Rājagahaŋ), 67 (id.); VvA 63 (Rājagaha -- seṭṭhiŋ "with"). Cp. BSk. upaniśritya also a ger. formation, in same meaning, e. g. at Divy 54, 207, 505.
Upanissita [upa + ni˚] dependent or relying on Sn 877; Nd1 283, Miln 245.
Upanīta [pp. of upaneti] 1. brought up to or into (mostly -- ˚) Th 2, 498; Sn 677 (niraye), 774 (dukkha˚), 898 (bhava˚); J iii.45 (thūṇa˚); iv.271 (dukkh˚); Nd1 38; Dh 237 (˚yaya = atikkantavayo DhA iii.337, advanced in age); Pv iv.110 (dukkha˚ made to suffer). an˚ Sn 846. -- 2. offered, presented J i.88; PvA 274, 286. <-> 3. brought to conclusion, brought to an end (of life) J v.375 (= maraṇa -- santikaŋ u. C.). -- 4. bringing up (for trial), charging M i.251 (vacanapatha, cp. upanīya).
Upanīya (˚īyya, ˚eyya) [ger. of upaneti] "bringing up" (for trial), charging, accusing D i.107 (vadati, cp. DA i. 276); A i.172 (˚vācā); cp. upanīta 3.
Upanīla (adj.) [upa + nīla] somewhat dark -- blue J v.168.
Upaneti [upa + neti] to bring up to, conduce, adduce; to present, give J i.200; Miln 396; DA i.276; PvA 39, 43, 49, 53, 74. -- Pass. upanīyati (˚niyyati) -- 1. to be brought (up to) J iv.398; ppr. ˚nīyamāna J i.200; PvA 5. -- 2. to be brought to conclusion, or to an end (of life) M ii.68; S i.2. -- 3. to be carried along or away A i.155. -- pp. upanīta (q. v.). -- ger. upanīya (q. v.).
Upanti (adv.) [upa + anti] near, before, in presence of J iv.337.
Upantika (adj.) [upa + antika] nt. acc. ˚ŋ near J iv.337; v.58 (with gen.); vi.418 (so read for ˚ā); loc. ˚e near or quite near Pv ii.915 (= samīpe gehassa PvA 120).
Upapacciyati see uppaccati.
Upapajjati [doubtful whether a legitimate form as upa + pad or a diaeretic form of uppajjati = ud + pad. In this case all passages ought to go under the latter. Trenckner however (Notes 77) defends upa˚ & considers in many cases upp˚ a substitution for upa. The diaeresis may be due to metre, as nearly all forms are found in poetry. The v. l. upp˚ is apparently frequent; but it is almost impossible to distinguish between upap˚ and upp˚ in the Sinhalese writing, and either the scribe or the reader may mistake one for the other] to get to, be reborn in (acc.); to originate, rise Vin iii.20 (nirayaŋ); A iii.415; v.292 sq.; Sn 584; It 13 (nirayaŋ), 14 (sugatiŋ v. l. upp˚), 67 (saggaŋ lokaŋ v. l. upp˚); 43 = Dh 307 (nirayaŋ); Dh 126, 140; Pv i.107 (v.l. BB. udapajjatha = uppajja PvA 50); Pug 16, 51, 60; Nett 37, 99, cp. Kvu 611 sq. <-> pp. upapannā (q. v.). -- Caus. upapādeti & pp. upapādita (q. v.).
Upapatti [fr. upa + pad, cp. uppatti] -- 1. birth, re- birth, (lit. attainment) M i.82; S iii.53; iv.398; A v. 289 sq.; Sn 139, 643, 836; Dh 419 (sattānaŋ); in var. specifications as: deva˚ rebirth among gods PvA 6, 81; devaloka˚ A i.115; kāma˚ existence in the sensuous universe D iii.218; It 94; arūpa˚ in the formless spheres Vbh 172, 267, 296; rūpa˚, in the world of form Vbh 171 sq., 263 sq.; 299; niraya˚ in Purgatory PvA 53. <-> 2. occasion, opportunity (lit. "coming to"); object for, in dāna˚ objects suitable for gifts A iv.239 (where 8 enumd., see dāna).
-- deva a god by birth (or rebirth) VvA 18; also given as uppatti -- deva, e. g. at KhA 123. See detail under deva.
Upapattika ( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. upapatti] belonging to a birth or rebirth; in peta˚ born as a Peta PvA 119. -- Cp. upapātika.
Upapanna [pp. of upapajjati] -- 1. ( -- ˚) possessed of, having attained, being furnished with Sn 68 (thāma -- bala), 212, 322, 1077 (ñāṇa˚, cp. Nd2 266b and uppanna -- ñāṇa). <-> 2. reborn, come to existence in (with acc.) S i.35 (Avihaŋ, expld. by C. not quite to the point as "nipphattivasena upagata", i. e. gone to A, on account of their perfection. Should we read uppanna?) A v.68.
Upaparikkhaṇa (nt.) = upaparikkhā VvA 232.
Upaparikkhati [upa + pari + īkṣ; cp. BSk. upaparīkṣate Divy 5, 230] to investigate, ascertain, test, examine M i.133, 292, 443; S ii.216; iii.42, 140; iv.174; J i.489; ii.400; v.235; Miln 91, 293; Dāvs v.27; Sdhp 539; PvA 60 (paññāya u. = ñatvā), 140 (= viceyya).
Upaparikkhā (f.) [fr. upaparikkhati, cp. BSk. upaparīkṣā Divy 3 etc.] investigation, examination Vin iii.314; M ii.175 (attha˚); A iii.381 sq.; iv.221; v.126; Dhs 16, 20, 292; Pug 25; Nett 8, 42; DA i.171.
Upaparikkhin (adj.) [fr. upaparikkhati] investigating, re- flecting, testing S iii.61; A iv.221 sq., 296, 328. Cp. BSk. upaparīkṣaka Divy 212.
Upapāta = upapatti [but der. fr. pat (cp. uppāda1 = ud + pat but uppāda2 = ud + pad) with the meaning of the casual & unusual] rebirth Vin iii.4; S iv.59 (cut˚); Pug 50.
Upapātika (adj.) [fr. upapāta but evidently mixed with uppāda1 and uppāda2, cp. upapajjati, upapatti & BSk. upapāduka Av. S ii.94, 95; Divy 523] = opapātika i. e. rebirth without parents, as a deva DA on D iii.107; ThA 207.
Upapādita [pp. of upapādeti, Caus. of upapajjati] accom- plished J ii.236.
Upapādeti [Caus. of upapajjati] to execute, perform J v.346.
Upapāramī (f.) [upa + pāramī, cp. upa 5] minor perfection Bu i.77 (opp. paramattha -- pāramī); DhA i.84.
Upapisana [upa + piṣ] grinding, powder, in añjan˚ pow- dered ointment (for the eyes) Vin i.203; ii.112.
Upapurohita [upa + purohita, see upa 5] a minor or assistant priest J iv.304.
Upapīla at D i.135 read uppīḷa (q. v.).
Upapphusati [upa + phusati, of spṛś] to touch; aor. upap- phusi J v.417, 420.
Upaplavati [upa + plavati, cp. uppilavati] to swim or float to (acc.), in uncertain reading as aor. upaplaviŋ at Sn 1145 (dīpā dīpaŋ upaplaviŋ floatcd from land to land; vv. ll. at SnA 606 uppalaviŋ & upallaviŋ all MSS. of Nd2 p. 54 & no. 160 write upallaviŋ). Perhaps we should better read uppalaviŋ (or upallaviŋ) as diaeretic form for *upplaviŋ, aor. of uppilavati (or uplavati), q. v. Expld. at Nd2 160 by samupallaviŋ.
Upabbajati [upa + vraj] to go to, resort to, visit Th 1, 1052; J iv.270, 295; v.495 (= upagacchati C.); vi.43.
Upabbūḷha see sam˚.
Upabrūhaṇa (nt.) [fr. upa + bṛh2, cp. BSk. upabṛŋhita Jtm 3195] expansion, increase, augmentation Vism 145; DhsA 117.
Upabhunjaka (adj.) [fr. next] one who eats or enjoys Vism 555.
Upabhunjati [upa + bhuj] to enjoy J iii.495; v.350 (inf. ˚bhottuŋ) -- grd. upabhogga. -- pp. upabhattu (q. v.).
Upabhutta [pp. of upabhunjati] enjoyed Dāvs iii.65.
Upabhoga [fr. upa + bhuj cp. upabhuñjati] enjoyment, profit Vin iv.267; J ii.431; iv.219 (v. l. paribhoga); vi. 361; Miln 201, 403; PvA 49, 220 (˚paribhoga); DhA iv.7 (id.); Sdhp 268, 341, 547.
Upabhogin (adj.) [fr. upabhuñjati] enjoying Miln 267.
Upabhogga (adj.) [Sk. upabhogya, grd. of upabhuñjati] to be enjoyed, enjoyable Miln 201.
Upama (adj.) [compar. -- superl. formation fr. upa, cp. Lat. summus fr. *(s)ub -- mo] "coming quite or nearly up to", i. e. like, similar, equal D i.239 (andha -- veṇ˚); M i.432 (taruṇ˚ a young looking fellow); A iv.11 udak˚ puggala a man like water); Pv i.11 (khett˚ like a well cultivated field; = sadisa PvA 7); PvA 2, 8 etc. -- Note. ūpama metri causa see ū˚ and cp. opamma & upamā.
Upamā (f.) [f. of upama in abstract meaning] likeness, simile, parable, example (cp. formula introducing u. S ii. 114; M i.148); Sn 705 (cp. Dh 129, 130), 1137 (= upanidhā sadisaŋ paṭibhāgo Nd2 158); It 114; Vism 341, 478, 512, 582 sq., 591 sq.; PvA 29, 112 (dhen˚); SnA 329, 384; Sdhp 29, 44, 259.
-- vacana expression of comparison (usually applied to part. evaŋ) SnA 13, 472; KhA 185, 195, 208, 212; PvA 25.
Upamāna (nt.) [fr. upa + mā] comparison, the 2nd part of the comparison J v.341; VvA 13.
Upamānita [pp. of caus. upa + mā] measured out, likened, like, comparable Th 2, 382 (= sadisa ThA 255).
Upameti [upa + mā] to measure one thing by another, to compare J vi.252; Vism 314 (˚metvā, read ˚netvā?).
Upameyya (adj.) [grd. of upa + mā] to be compared, that which is to be likened or compared, the 1st part of a comparison VvA 13.
Upaya [fr. upa + i, cp. upāya] approach, undertaking, taking up; clinging to, attachment, only as adj. ( -- ˚) in an˚ (anûpaya metri causā) not going near, aloof, unattached S i.141, 181; ii.284; Sn 786, 787, 897 (cp. SnA 558); and in rūpûpaya (vv. ll. rūpupaya & rūpupāya) "clinging to form" (etc.) S iii.53 = Nd1 25 = Nd2 570 (+ rupɔārammaṇa).
Upayācati [upa + yācati] to beg, entreat, pray to J vi. 150 (divyaŋ).
Upayācitaka (nt.) [of adj. upa + yācita + ka; pp. of yācati] begging, asking, praying, propitiation J vi.150 (= devatānaŋ āyācana).
Upayāti [upa + yāti of yā] to go to, to approach S i.76; ii.118 (also Caus. ˚yāpeti); Dpvs vi.69; Sdhp 579.
Upayāna (nt.) [fr. upa + yā, cp. BSk. upayāna Jtm 3163] nearing, approach, arrival D i.10; DA i.94.
Upayānaka [fr. upayāna] a crab J vi.530.
Upayuñjati [upa + yuj] to combine, connect with; to use, apply; ppr. med. upayujjamāna VvA 245 (preferably be read as ˚bhuñjamāna, with reference to enjoying drink & food).
Upayoga [fr. upa + yuj] connection, combination; em- ployment, application J vi.432 (nagare upayogaŋ netvā for use in the town? v. l. upabhogaŋ). Usually in cpd. ˚vacana as tt. g. meaning either combined or condensed expression, ellipsis SnA 386; KhA 236; PvA 73, 135; or the acc. case, which is frequently substituted for the foll. cases: sāmi -- vacana SnA 127; PvA 102; bhumma˚ SnA 140; KhA 116; karaṇa˚ SnA 148; sampadāna˚ J v.214; SnA 317; itthambhūta˚ SnA 441; nissakka˚ J v.498.
Uparacita [pp. of upa + rac] formed ThA 211; Sdhp 616.
Uparajja (nt.) [upa + rajja, cp. uparaja] viceroyalty A iii. 154 (v. l. opa˚); J i.511; iv.176; DA i.134.
Uparata [pp. of uparamati] having ceased, desisting from ( -- ˚), restraining oneself (cp. orata) Vin i.245 (ratt -- ûparata abstaining from food at night = ratti -- bhojanato uparata DA i.77); D i.5 (id.); M i.319 (bhaya˚); Sn 914 (= virata etc. Nd1 337); Miln 96, 307; DhsA 403 (vihiŋs˚).
Uparati (f.) [fr. upa + ram] ceasing, resting; cessation M i.10; S iv.104; Miln 274.
Uparamati [upa + ram] to cease, desist, to be quiet J iii. 489; v.391 (v. l. for upāramati, also in C.); Miln 152.
Uparamā (f.) [cp. lit. Sk. uparama, to uparamati] cessation Miln 41, 44 (an˚).
Uparava [fr. upa + ru] noise J ii.2.
Uparājā [upa + rājā; see upa 5] a secondary or deputy king, a viceroy J i.504; ii.316; DhA i.392.
Upari (indecl.) [Vedic upari, der. fr. upa, Idg. *uper(i); Gr. uper, Lat. s -- uper; Goth. ufar, Ohg. ubir = Ger. über E. over; Oir. for] over, above (prep. & prefix) 1. (adv.) on top, above (opp. adho below) Vin iv.46 (opp. heṭṭhā); J vi.432; KhA 248 (= uddhaŋ opp. adho); SnA 392 (abtimukho u. gacchati explaining paccuggacchati of Sn 442); PvA 11 (heṭṭhā manussa -- saṇṭhānaŋ upari sūkara -- s˚), 47 (upari chattaŋ dhāriyamāna), 145 (sabbattha upari upon everything). -- 2. (prep. w. gen) with ref. either to space = on top of, on, upon, as in kassa upari sāpo patissati on whom shall the curse fall? DhA i 41; attano u. patati falls upon himself PvA 45; etissā upari kodho anger on her, i. e. against her VvA 68; or to time = on top of, after, later, as in catunnaŋ māsānaŋ upari after 4 months PvA 52 (= uddhaŋ catūhi māsehi of Pv i.1012); sattannaŋ vassa -- satānaŋ upari after 700 years PvA 144. <-> 3. (adv. in compn., meaning "upper, higher, on the upper or top side", or "on top of", if the phrase is in loc. case. See below.
-- cara walking in the air, suspended, flying J iii.454. -- pāsāda the upper story of a palace, loc. on the terrace D i.112 (loc.); PvA 105, 279. -- piṭṭhi top side, platform Vin ii 207 (loc). -- bhaddaka N. of a tree [either Sk. bhadraka Pinus Deodara, or bhadra Nauclea Cadamba, after Kern, Toev. s. v.] J vi.269. -- bhāga the upper part; used in instr., loc or aor. in sense of "above, over, beyond" J iv.232 (instr.). -- bhāva higher state or condition M i.45 (opp. adh˚). -- mukha face upwards DA i. 228; Pug A 214. -- vasana upper garment PvA 49. -- vāta higher than the wind, loc. on the wind J ii.11; or in ˚passe (loc.) on the upper (wind -- ) side DhA ii.17. -- visāla extended on top, i. e. of great width, very wide J iii.207. -- vehāsa high in the air (˚ -- ), in ˚kuṭī a lofty or open air chamber, or a room in the upper story of the Vihāra Vin iv.46 (what the C. means by expln. majjhimassa purisassa asīsa -- ghaṭṭā "not knocking against the head of a middle -- (sized) man" is not quite clear). -- sacca higher truth PvA 66 (so read for upari sacca).
Upariṭṭha (adj.) [superl. formation fr. upari in analogy to seṭṭha] highest, topmost, most excellent Th 1, 910. Cp. next.
Upariṭṭhima (adj) [double -- superl. formation after analogy of seṭṭha, pacchima & heṭṭhima: heṭṭhā] = upariṭṭha & uparima Dhs 1016, 1300, 1401; Pug 16, 17 (sañyojanāni = uddhaŋbhāgiya -- sañyojanāni Pug A 198).
Uparima (adj.) [upari + ma, superl. formation] uppermost, above, overhead D iii.189 (disā); Nett 88. Cp. upariṭṭhima.
Upariya (adv.) [fr. upari] above, on top, in compd. heṭṭh˚ below and above Vism 1.
Uparujjhati [Sk. uparudhyate, Pass. of uparundhati] to be stopped, broken, annihilated, destroyed D i.223; Th 1, 145; It 106; Sn 724, 1036, 1110; Nd2 159 (= nirujjhati vūpasammati atthangacchati); Miln 151; Sdhp 280. <-> pp. uparuddha.
Uparuddha [pp. of uparujjhati] stopped, ceased Miln 151 (˚jīvita).
Uparundhati [upa + rudh] to break up, hinder, stop, keep in check M i.243; J i.358; Th 1, 143, 1117; Sn 118, 916 (pot. uparundhe, but uparuddhe Nd1 346 = uparuddheyya etc.); Miln 151, 245, 313. -- ger. uparundhiya Th 1, 525; Sn 751; aor. uparundhi J iv.133; PvA 271. -- Pass. uparujjhati (q. v.).
Uparūḷha [upa + rūḷha, pp. of ruh] grown again, recovered J iv.408 (cakkhu).
Uparocati [upa + ruc] to please (intrs.) J vi.64.
Uparodati [upa + rud] 1. to lament J vi.551 (fut ˚rucchati) -- 2. to sing in a whining tone J v.304.
Uparodha [fr. upa + rudh] obstacle; breaking up, destruc- tion, end J iii.210, 252; Pv iv.15; Miln 245, 313.
Uparodhana (nt.) [fr. upa + rudh] breaking up, destruc- tion Sn 732, 761.
Uparodheti [Caus of uparundhati] to cause to break up; to hinder, stop; destroy Vin iii.73.
Uparopa [upa + ropa, cp. upa 5] "little plant", sapling Vin ii.154. See also next.
Uparopaka = uparopa, sapling J ii.345; iv.359.
Upala [Lit. Sk. upala, etym. uncertain] a stone Dāvs iii.87.
Upalakkhaṇā (f.) & ˚aŋ (nt.) [upa + lakkhaṇa] discrimi- nation S iii.261 (an˚); Dhs 16, 20, 292, 1057; Pug 25; VvA 240.
Upalakkheti [upa + lakṣay] to distinguish, discriminate Vism 172.
Upaladdha [pp. of upalabhati] acquired, got, found J vi. 211 (˚bāla; v. l. paluddha˚); Sdhp 4, 386.
Upaladdhi (f.) [fr. upa + labh] acquisition; knowledge Miln 268; VvA 279.
Upalabhati [upa + labh] to receive, get, obtain to find, make out Miln 124 (kāraṇaŋ); usually in Pass. upalabbhati to be found or got, to be known; to exist M i.138 (an˚); S i.135; iv.384; Sn 858; Pv ii.111 (= paccanubhavīyati PvA 146); Kvu 1, 2; Miln 25; PvA 87.
Upalāpana (nt.) [fr. upa + lap] talking over or down, per- suasion; diplomacy, humbug D ii.76; Miln 115, 117.
Upalāpeti [Caus. of upa + lap] to persuade, coax, prevail upon, talk over, cajole Vin i.119; iii.21; J ii.266; iii.265; iv.215; PvA 36, 46, 276.
Upalāḷita [pp. of upalāḷeti] caressed, coaxed Sdhp 301.
Upalāḷeti [Caus. of upa + lal; cp. BSk. upalāḍayati Divy 114, 503]. -- 1. to caress, coax, fondle, win over J ii. 267; Vism 300; Sdhp 375. -- 2. to boast of, exult in J ii.151. -- pp. upalāḷita (q. v.).
Upaḷāseti [upa + Caus. of las] to sound forth, to (make) sound (a bugle) D ii.337 (for uppaḷāseti? q. v.).
Upalikkhati [upa + likh] to scratch, scrape, wound A iii. 94 sq. (= vijjhati C.).
Upalitta [pp. of upalimpati] smeared with ( -- ˚), stained, tainted Th 2, 467 (cp. ThA 284; T. reads apalitta); Pug 56. Usually neg. an˚ free from taint, undefiled M i.319, 386; Miln 318; metri causa anûpalitta S i.141; ii.284; Sn 211, 392, 468, 790, 845; Dh 353 (cp. DhA iv.7).
Upalippati [Pass. of upalimpati] to be defiled; to stick to, hang on to Sn 547, 812; J iii.66 (= allīyati C.); Miln 250, 337.
Upalimpati [upa + lip] to smear, defile D ii.18; Vin iii. 312; J i.178; iv.435; Miln 154. -- Pass. upalippati, pp. upalitta (q. v.).
Upalepa [fr. upa + lip] defilement J iv.435.
Upalohitaka (adj. [upa + lohita + ka, see upa 5] reddish J iii.21 (= rattavaṇṇa C.).
Upallaviŋ Sn 1145 see upaplavati.
Upavajja (adj.) [grd. of upavadati] blameworthy S iv.59, 60; A ii.242. an˚ blameless, without fault S iv.57 sq; A iv.82; Miln 391.
Upavajjatā (f.) [abstr. fr. upavajja] blameworthiness S iv. 59 (an˚).
Upavaṇṇeti [upa + vaṇṇeti] to describe fully Sdhp 487.
Upavattati [upa + vṛt] to come to pass, to take place J vi.58.
Upavadati [upa + vad] to tell (secretly) against, to tell tales; to insult, blame D i.90; S iii.125 (attā sīlato na upav.); A ii.121 (id.); v.88; J ii.196; PvA 13.
Upavana (nt.) [upa + vana, see upa 5] a kind of wood, miniature wood, park J iv.431; v.249; Miln 1; VvA 170 (= vana), 344; ThA 201; PvA 102 (ārām˚), 177 (mahā˚).
Upavasati [upa + vasiti]. -- 1. to dwell in or at J iii.113; DA i.139. -- 2. to live (trs.); to observe, keep (a holy day); only in phrase uposathaŋ upavasati to observe the fast day S i.208; A i.142, 144, 205; Sn 402 (ger. upavassa); J iii.444; SnA 199; PvA 209. -- pp. upavuttha (q. v.). See also uposatha.
Upavāda [fr. upa + vad] insulting, railing; blaming, finding fault Nd1 386; PvA 269; an˚ (adj.) not grumbling or abusing Dh 185 (anûpa˚ metri causa).
Upavādaka (adj.) [fr. upavāda] blaming, finding fault, speaking evil of (gen.), generally in phrase ariyānaŋ u. insulting the gentle Vin iii.5; A i.256; iii.19; iv.178; v.68; It 58, 99. -- an˚ Ps i.115; Pug 60.
Upavādin (adj. [fr. upavāda] = upavādaka; in ariy˚ S i. 225; ii.124; v.266; Pv iv.339. an˚ M i.360.
Upavāyati [upa + vāyati] to blow on or towards somebody M i.424; A iv.46; Th 1, 544; Pv iii.66; Miln 97.
Upavāsa [fr. upa + vas, see upavasati] keeping a prescri- bed day, fasting, self -- denial, abstaining from enjoyments [Same as uposatha; used extensively in BSk. in meaning of uposatha, e. g. at Av. Ś i.338, 339; Divy 398 in phrase aṣṭânga -- samanvāgataŋ upavāsaŋ upavasati] A v.40 (? uncertain; vv. ll. upāsaka, ovāpavāssa, yopavāsa); J vi.508; SnA 199 (in expln. of uposatha).
Upavāsita (adj.) (upa + vāsita] perfumed PvA 164 (for gandha -- samerita).
Upavāhana (nt.) [upa + vāhana] carrying away, washing away Sn 391 (sanghāṭi -- raj -- ûpa˚ = paŋsu -- malādino sanghāṭirajassa dhovanaŋ SnA 375).
Upavicāra [upa + vicāra; cp. BSk. upavicāra Divy 19, trsld on p. 704 in Notes by "perplexed by doubts" (?)] applying (one's mind) to, discrimination D iii.245 (domanass˚); M iii.239; S iv.232 (somanass˚ etc.); A iii.363 sq.; v.134; Ps i.17; Dh 8, 85, 284; Vbh 381.
Upavijaññā (f.) (adj.) [grd. formation of upa + vi + jan, cp. Sk. vijanya] about to bring forth a child, nearing childbirth M i.384; Th 2, 218; Ud 13; Dāvs iii.38; ThA 197.
Upavisati [upa + visati] to come near, to approach a per- son J iv.408; v.377; aor. upāvisi Sn 415, 418 (āsajja upāvisi = samīpaŋ gantvā nisīdi SnA 384).
Upavīna [upa + vīṇā] the neck of a lute S iv. 197; Miln 53.
Upavīta [?] covered (?) at VvA 8 in phrase "vettalatâdīhi upavītaŋ āsanaŋ" should prob. be read upanīta (vv. ll. uparivīta & upajita); or could it be pp. of upavīyati (woven with)?
Upavīyati [Pass. of upa + vā2 to weave] te be woven J vi.26.
Upavuttha [pp. of upavasati] celebrated, kept (of a fastday) A i.211 (uposatha); Sn 403 (uposatha). Cp. uposatha.
Upavhyati [upa + ā + hū, cp. avhayati for *āhvayati] to invoke, call upon D ii.259; S i.168.
Upasaŋvasati [upa + saŋ + vas] to live with somebody, to associate with (acc.) J i.152.
Upasaŋharaṇa (nt.) [fr. upasaŋharati] drawing together, bringing up to, comparison Vism 232 sq.; J v.186.
Upasaŋharati [upa + saŋ + hṛ] -- 1. to collect, bring together, heap up, gather Miln 132. -- 2. to dispose, arrange, concentrate, collect, focus Vin iv.220 (kāyaŋ); M i.436 (cittaŋ), 468 (cittaŋ tathattāya); S v.213 sq. (id.); DhsA 309 (cakkhuŋ). -- 3. to take hold of, take care of, provide, serve, look after Miln 232.
Upasaŋhāra [fr. upa + saŋ + hṛ] taking hold of, taking up, possession, in devat˚ being seized or possessed by a god Miln 298.
Upasaŋhita (adj.) [pp. of upa + saŋ + dhā] accompanied by, furnished or connected with ( -- ˚) D i.152; M i.37, 119 (chand˚); S ii.220 (kusal˚); iv.60 (kām˚), 79 (id.); Sn 341 (rāg˚), 1132 (giraŋ vaṇṇ˚ = vaṇṇena upetaŋ Nd2); Th 1, 970; J i.6; ii.134, 172; v.361.
Upasankamati [upa + saŋ + kram, cp. BSk. upasankra- mati Av. S. i.209] -- 1. to go up to (with acc.), to approach, come near; freq. in stock phrase "yena (Pokkharasādissa parivesanā) tenɔ upasankami, upasankamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdiɔ', e. g. Vin i.270; D i.109; ii.1, and passim. -- aor. ˚sankami Pv. ii.210; SnA 130, 140; KhA 116; PvA 88; ger. ˚sankamitvā SnA 140; PvA 6, 12, 19, 20, 88; ˚sankamma Sn 166, 418, 460, 980, 986; inf. ˚sankamituŋ PvA 79. -- . 2. to attend on (as a physician), to treat Miln 169, 233, 353; DA i.7.
Upasankamana (nt.) [fr. upasankamati] going near, ap- proach M ii.176; S v.67 = It 107; PvA 232.
Upasankheyya (adj.) [grd of upa + sankharoti] to be prepared, produced or contracted Sn 849 (= ˚sankhātabba SnA 549; cp. Nd1 213).
Upasagga [Sk upasarga, of upa + sṛj] -- 1. attack, trouble, danger Vin i.33; A i.101; Th 2, 353; Dh 139 (where spelt upassaga, cp. DhA iii.70); Miln 418. -- 2. (tt. g.) prefix, preposition J ii.67 (saŋ), 126 (apa); iii.121 (ni, pa); DA i.245 (adhi); KhA 101 (sa˚ and an˚); PvA 88 (atthe nipāto a particle put in metri causa, expln. of handa); DhsA 163, 405.
Upasaṇṭhapanā (f.) [fr. upa + sanṭḥapeti] stopping, cau- sing to cease, settling Pug 18 (see also an˚).
Upasanta [pp. of upa + śam, cp. upasammati] calmed, composed, tranquil, at peace M i.125; S i.83, 162; A iii. 394; Sn 848, 919, 1087, 1099; Nd1 210, 352, 434; Nd2 161; Dh 201, 378; Miln 394; DhA iii.260; iv.114; PvA 132 (= santa).
Upasama [Sk. upaśama, upa + śam] calm, quiet, appea- sement, allaying, assuagement, tranquillizing Vin i 10 = S iv.331 = v.421 (in freq. phrase upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saŋvattati; see nibbāna iii.7); D i.50; iii.130 sq., 136 sq., 229 (as one of the 4 objects of adhiṭṭhāna, viz. paññā˚ sacca˚ cāga˚ upasama˚); M i. 67; iii.246; S i.30, 34 (sīlena), 46 citta -- v -- ûpasama), 48, 55; ii.223, 277; iii.86 (sankhārānaŋ . . . v -- ūpasamo) D ii. 157; S i.158 (see vūpasama and sankhāra); (ariyaŋ maggaŋ dukkh˚ -- gāminaŋ); iv.62, 331; v.65 (avūpasama), 179, 234 (˚gāmin), 378 sq.; A i.3 (avūpasama), 30, 42; ii.14 (vitakk˚); iii.325 sq.; v.216, 238 sq.; Sn 257, 724, 735, 737; It 18 (dukkh˚) 83; Dh 205; Nd1 351; J i.97; Ps i.95; Miln 170, 248; Vism 197 (˚ânussati); Sdhp 587. Cp. vi˚ (vū˚).
Upasamati [upa + śam in trs. meaning for usual sammati in intrs. meaning] to appease, calm, allay, assuage Sn 919; Th 1, 50 (pot. upasame = upasameyya nibbāpeyya Nd1 352). -- pp. upasanta q. v.).
Upasamāna (nt.) = upasama Th 1, 421; Sdhp 335 (dukkh˚).
Upasampajjati [upa + sampajjati] to attain, enter on, acquire, take upon oneself usually in ger. upasampajja M i.89; S iii.8; A iv.13; v.69; Dhs 160 (see DhsA 167); DA i.313; SnA 158. -- pp. upasampanna (q. v.).
Upasampadā (f.) [fr. upa + saŋ + pad] -- 1. taking, acquiring; obtaining, taking upon oneself, undertaking D ii.49; M i.93; A iii.65; Dh 183 (cp. DhA iii.236); Nett 44 (kusalassa). -- 2. (in special sense) taking up the bhikkhuship, higher ordination, admission to the privileges of recognized bhikkhus [cp. BSk. upasampad & ˚padā Divy 21, 281 etc.] Vin i.12, 20, 95, 146 and passim; iii.15; iv.52; D i.176, 177, 202; S i.161; A iv.276 sq. & passim; DhA ii.61 (pabbajjā +); PvA 54 (laddh˚ one who has received ordination), 179 (id.).
Upasampanna [pp. of upasampajjati] obtained, got, received; in special sense of having attained the recognition of bhikkhuship, ordained [cp. BSk. upasampanna Divy 281] S i.161; A v.70; Vin iii.24; iv.52, 130; Miln 13.
Upasampādeti [Denom. fr. upasampadā] 1. to attain to, obtain, produce DhsA 167 (= nipphādeti). -- 2. to admit to bhikkhuship, to ordain Vin iv.130, 226, 317 (= vutṭhāpeti); grd. ˚etabba Vin i.64 sq.; iv.48; A v.72.
Upasamphassati [upa + sam + spṛś] to embrace J v.297.
Upasammati [Sk. upasamyati, upa + śam in intrs. function] to grow calm, to cease, to be settled or composed, to be appeased S i.62, 221; Dh 100 sq.
Upasavyāna (nt.?) [?] "a robe worn over the left shoulder" (Hardy, Index to ed.) VvA 166 (v. l. upavasavya).
Upasiŋsaka (adj.). [fr. upa + siŋsati = śaŋs, cp. āsiŋsaka] striving after, longing or wishing for Miln 393 (āhār˚; Morris J P T S. 1884, 75 proposes reading upasinghaka).
Upasinghaka (adj.) [fr. upa + singh] sniffing after J ii. 339; iii.144; Miln 393 (? see upasiŋsaka).
Upasinghati [upa + singh] -- 1. to sniff at S i.204 (pa- dumaŋ); i.455; J ii.339, 408; vi.336. -- 2. to sniff up Vin i.279. -- Caus. āyati to touch gently KhA 136. Caus. II. apeti to touch lightly, to stroke J iv.407.
Upasinghita [pp. of upasinghati] scented, smelled at (loc.) J vi.543 (sisaŋhi, C. for upagghata).
Upasussati [upa + sussati] to dry up M i.481; Sn 433; J i.71.
Upasecana (nt.) [fr. upa + sic] sprinkling over, i. e. sauce Th 1, 842; J ii.422; iii.144; iv.371 (maŋs˚); vi.24. See also nandi˚ & maŋsa˚.
Upaseniyā (f.) [Sk. upa + either śayanika of śayana, or sayaniya of śī] (a girl) who likes to be always near (her mother), a pet, darling, fondling J vi.64 (=mātaraŋ upagantvā sayanika C.).
Upasevati [upa + sev] -- 1. to practice, frequent, pursue Miln 355. -- 2. to serve, honour, Sn 318 (˚amāna). <-> pp. upasevita (q. v.).
Upasevanā (f.) [abstr. fr. upasevati] serving, pursuing, fol- lowing, service, honouring, pursuit S iii.53 = Nd1 25 = Nd2 570 (nand˚ pleasure -- seeking); It 68 (bāl˚ & dhīr˚); Sn 249 (utu˚ observance of the seasons); Miln 351.
Upasevita [pp. of upasevati] visited, frequented PvA 147 (for sevita).
Upasevin (adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. upasevati] pursuing, following, going after A iii.136 (vyatta˚); Miln 264 (rāj˚); DhA iii.482 (para -- dār˚).
Upasobhati [upa + śubh] to appear beautiful, to shine forth Th 1, 1080. -- Caus.˚sobheti to make beautiful, embellish, adorn Vv 526; J v.132; PvA 153. -- pp. upasobhita (q. v.).
Upasobhita [pp. of upasobheti] embellished, beautified, adorned PvA 153, 187; Sdhp 593.
Upassagga see upasagga.
Upassaṭṭha [Sk. upasṛṣṭa, pp. of upa + sṛj] "thrown upon", overcome, visited, afflicted, ruined, oppressed S iv.29; A iii.226 (udak˚); J i.61; ii.239.
Upassaya [fr. upa + śri, cp. assaya & missaya] abode, resting home, dwelling, asylum S i.32, 33; Vv 684; Miln 160. Esp. freq. as bhikkhuni˚ or bhikkhun˚ a nunnery Vin ii.259; iv.265, 292; S ii.215; J i.147, 428; Miln 124.
Upassāsa [upa + assāsa; upa + ā + śvas] breathing J i.160.
Upassuti (f.) [fr. upa + śru] listening to, attention S ii. 75; iv.91; J v.100; Miln 92.
Upassutika (adj.) [fr. upassuti] one who listens, an eaves- dropper J v.81.
Upahacca (˚ -- ) [ger. of upahanti] -- 1. spoiling, impairing, defiling J v.267 (manaŋ) -- 2. reducing, cutting short; only in phrase upahacca -- parinibbāyin "coming to extinction after reducing the time of rebirths (or after having almost reached the destruction of life") S v.70, 201 sq.; A i.233 sq.; iv.380; Pug 17 (upagantvā kālakiriyaŋ āyukkhayassa āsane ṭhatvā ti attho Pug A 199); Nett 190. -- The term is not quite clear; there seems to have existed very early confusion with upapacca > upapajja > uppajja, as indicated by BSk. upapadya -- parinirvāyin, and by remarks of C. on Kvu 268, as quoted at Kvu trsln. 158, 159.
Upahaññati [Pass. of upahanti] to be spoilt or injured Sn 584; J iv.14; Miln 26.
Upahata [pp. of upahanti] injured, spoilt; destroyed D i.86 (phrase khata + upahata); S i.238 (na sûpahata "not easily put out" trsl.); ii 227; A i.161; Dh 134; J vi. 515; Miln 223, 302; DhA ii.33 (an˚).
The formula at D i.86 (khata+upahata) is doubtful as to its exact meaning. According to Bdhgh it means "one who has destroyed his foundation of salvation," i.e. one who cannot be saved. Thus at DA i.237: "bhinna -- patiṭṭho jāto," i.e. without a basis. Cp. remarks under khata. The trsln at Dial. i.95 gives it as "deeply affected and touched in heart": doubtful. The phrase upahaccaparinibbāyin may receive light from upahata.
Upahattar [Sk. *upahartṛ, n. ag. of upa + hṛ] a bringer (of) M i.447 sq.
Upahanti (& ˚hanati J i.454) [upa + han] to impair, in- jure; to reduce, cut short; to destroy, only in ger. upahacca; pp. upahata & Pass. upahaññati (q. v.).
Upaharaṇa (nt.) [fr. upa + hṛ] -- 1. presentation; luxury J i.231. -- 2. taking, seizing J vi.198.
Upaharati [upa + hṛ] to bring, offer, present A ii.87; iii. 33; Dh i.301, 302; J v.477.
Upahāra [fr. upa + hṛ] bringing forward, present, offering, gift Vin iii.136 (āhār˚) A ii.87; iii.33; v.66 (mett˚); J i.47; iv.455; vi.117; DA i.97.
Upahiŋsati [upa + hiŋs] to injure, hurt Vin ii.203; J iv.156.
Upāgacchati [upa + ā + gam] to come to, arrive at, reach, obtain, usually aor. upāgañchi Cp i 1010, pl. upāgañchuŋ Sn 1126; or upāgami Sn 426, 685, pl. upāgamuŋ Sn 302, 1126. Besides in pres. imper. upāgaccha PvA 64 (so read for upagaccha). -- pp. upāgata.
Upāgata [pp. of upāgacchati] come to, having reached or attained Sn 1016; PvA 117 (yakkhattaŋ); Sdhp 280.
Upāta [according to Kern, Toev. s. v. = Sk. upātta, pp of upa + ā + dā "taken up"; after Morris J.P. T. S. 1884, 75 = uppāta "flying up"] thrown up, cast up, raised (of dust) Th 1, 675.
Upâtigacchati [upa + ati + gacchati] to "go out over", to surpass, overcome, only in 3rd sg. pret. upaccagā Sn 333, 636, 641, 827; Th 1, 181; 2, 4; J i.258; vi.182; & 3rd pl. upaccaguŋ S i.35; A iii.311; J iii.201.
Upâtidhāvati [upa + ā + dhāvati] to run on or in to Ud 72.
Upâtipanna [pp. of upâtipajjati, upa + ā + pad] fallen into, a prey to (with loc.) Sn 495 (= nipanna with gloss adhimutta SnA 415).
Upâtivatta [pp. of upâtivattati] gone beyond, escaped from, free from (with acc.) S i.143; A ii.15; Sn 55, 474, 520, 907; J iii.7, 360; Fd1 322 = Nd2 163. Cp. BSk. upātivṛtta in same sense at M Vastu iii.281.
Upâtivattati [upa + ati + vattati] to go beyond, overstep M i.327; Sn 712 (v. l. for upanivattati); Nett 49. <-> pp. upâtivatta (q. v.).
Upādā (adv.) [shortened ger. of upādiyati for the usual upādāya in specialised meaning] lit. "taking up", i. e. subsisting on something else, not original, secondary, derived (of rūpa form) Dhs 877, 960, 1210; Vism 275, 444 (24 fold); DhsA 215, 299, 333, cp. Dhs trsln. 127, 197. -- Usually (and this is the earlier use of upādā) as neg. anupādā (for anupādāya) in meaning "not taking up any more (fuel, so as to keep the fire of rebirth alive)", not clinging to love of the world, or the kilesas q. v., having no more tendency to becoming; in phrases a. parinibbānaŋ "unsupported emancipation" M i.148; S iv.48; v.29; DhA i.286 etc.; a. vimokkho mental release A v.64 (A A: catuhi upādānehi agahetvā cittassa vimokkho; arahattassɔetaŋ nāmaŋ); Vin v.164; Ps ii.45 sq.; a. vimutto D i.17 (= kinci dhammaŋ anupādiyitvā vimutto DA i.109); cp. M iii.227 (paritassanā).
Upādāna (nt.) [fr. upa + ā + dā] -- (lit. that (material) substratum by means of which an active process is kept alive or going), fuel, supply, provision; adj. ( -- ˚) supported by, drawing one's existence from S i.69; ii 85 (aggikkhandho ˚assa pariyādānā by means of taking up fuel); v.284 (vāt˚); J iii.342 sa -- upādāna (adj.) provided with fuel S iv.399; anupādāna without fuel DhA ii.163. <-> 2. (appld.) "drawing upon", grasping, holding on, grip, attachment; adj. ( -- ˚) finding one's support by or in, clinging to, taking up, nourished by. See on term Dhs trsln. 323 & Cpd. 171. They are classified as 4 upādānāni or four Graspings viz. kām˚, diṭṭh˚, sīlabbat˚, attavād˚ or the graspings arising from sense -- desires, speculation, belief in rites, belief in the soul -- theory D ii.58; iii.230; M i.51, 66; S ii.3; v 59; Dhs 1213; Ps i.129; ii.46, 47; Vbh 375; Nett 48; Vism 569. -- For upādāna in var. connections see the foll. passages: D i.25; ii.31, 33, 56; iii.278; M i.66, 136 (attavād˚) 266; S ii.14, 17, 30, 85; iii.10, 13 sq., 101, 135, 167, 191; iv.32, 87 sq., 102 (tannissitaŋ viññāṇaŋ tadupādānaŋ), 390, 400 (= taṇhā); A iv.69; v.111 (upāy˚); Sn 170, 358, 546; Ps i.51 sq., 193; ii.45 sq, 113; Vbh 18, 30, 67, 79, 119, 132; Dhs 1059, 1136, 1213, 1536 sq.; Nett 28 sq., 41 sq., 114 sq.; DhA iv.194. -- sa˚ full of attachment (to life) M i.65; Vin iii.111; S iv.102; an˚ unattached, not showing attachment to existence S iv.399; Vin iii.111; Th 1, 840; Miln 32; DA i.98.
-- kkhandha, usually as pañcɔ upādāna -- kkhandhā the factors of the "fivefold clinging to existence" [cp. BSk. pañcɔ u˚ -- skandhāḥ Av. Ś ii.1681 & note] D ii.35, 301 sq.; iii.223, 286; M i.61, 144, 185; iii.15, 30, 114, 295; Ps ii.109 sq.; Vbh 101; Vism 505 (khandha -- pañcaka). See for detail khandha ii.B 2. -- kkhaya extinction or disappearance of attachment S ii.54; A iii.376 sq.; Sn 475, 743; It 75. -- nidāna the ground of upādāna; adj. founded on or caused by attachment Ps ii.111; Vbh 135 sq. -- nirodha destruction of "grasping" Vin i.1 (in formula of paṭicca -- samuppāda); S ii.7; iii.14; A i.177. -- paccaya = ˚nidāna S ii.5; iii 94; Sn 507, 742.
Upādāniya (adj.) [fr. upādāna, for *upādānika > ˚aka] be- longing to or connected with upādāna, sensual, (inclined to) grasping; material (of rūpa), derived. See on term Dhs trsln. 203, 322. -- S ii.84; iii.47; iv.89, 108; Dhs 584, 1219, 1538; Vbh 12 sq., 30, 56, 119, 125, 319, 326.
Upādāya (adv.) [ger. of upādiyati] -- 1. (as prep. with acc.) lit. "taking it up" (as such & such), i. e. (a) out of, as, for; in phrase anukampaŋ upādāya out of pity or mercy D i.204; PvA 61, 141, 164. -- (b) compared with, alongside of, with reference to, according to D i.205 (kālañ ca samayañ ca acc. to time & convenience); DhA i.391; VvA 65 (paŋsucuṇṇaŋ); PvA 268 (manussalokaŋ). The same use of upādāya is found in BSk., e. g. at Divy 25, 359, 413; Av. Ś i.255. -- 2. (ic same meaning & application as upādā, i. e. in neg. form first & then in positivé abstraction from the latter) as philosophical term "hanging on to", i. e. derived, secondary (with rūpa) Vbh 12, 67 etc.; Nd1 266. Usually as anupādāya "not clinging to", without any (further) clinging (to rebirth), emancipated, unconditioned, free [cp. BSk. paritt -- anupādāya free from the world Divy 655], freq. in phrase a. nibbuta completely emancipated S ii.279; A i.162; iv. 290; besides in foll. pass.: Vin i.14 (a. cittaŋ vimuccati) 182 (id.); S ii.187 sq.; iv.20, 107; v.317; Dh 89 = S v.24 (ādānapaṭi -- nisagge a. ye ratā); Dh 414; Sn 363; It 94 (+ aparitassato).
Upādi˚ [the compn. -- from of upādāna, derived fr. upādā in analogy to nouns in ˚a & ˚ā which change their a to i in compn. with kṛ & bhū; otherwise a n. formation fr. dā analogous to ˚dhi fr. dhā in upadhi] = upādāna, but in more concrete meaning of "stuff of life", substratum of being, khandha; only in combn. with ˚sesa (adj.) having some fuel of life (= khandhas or substratum) left, i. e. still dependent (on existence), not free, materially determined S v.129, 181; A iii.143; It 40; Vism 509. More frequently neg. an -- upādi -- sesa (nibbāna, nibbānadhātu or parinibbāna, cp. similarly BSk. anupādi -- vimukti M Vastu i.69) completely emancipated, free, without any (material) substratum Vin ii.239 (nibbāna -- dhātu); D iii.135; M i.148 (parinibbāna); A ii.120; iv.75 sq., 202, 313; J i.28, 55; Sn 876; It 39, 121 (nibbāna -- dhātu); Ps. i.101; Vism 509; DhA iv.108 (nibbāna); VvA 164, 165. Opp. saupādisesa A iv.75 sq., 378 sq.; Sn 354 (opp. nibbāyi); Vism 509; Nett 92. See further ref. under nibbāna & parinibbāna.
Upādiṇṇa [for ˚ādinna with substitution of ṇṇ for nn owing to wrong derivation as pp. from ādiyati2 instead of ādiyati1] grasped at, laid hold of; or "the issue of grasping", i. e. material, derived, secondary (cp. upādā), see def. at Dhs trsln. 201, 324. -- Dhs 585, 877, 1211, 1534; Vbh 2 sq., 326, 433; Vism 349, 451; an˚ Vin iii.113; Dhs 585, 991, 1212, 1535.
Upādiṇṇaka (adj,) = upādiṇṇa DhsA 311, 315, 378; Vism 398.
Upādiyati [upa + ā + dā, see ādiyati1] to take hold of, to grasp, cling to, show attachment (to the world), cp. upādāna D ii.292; M i.56, 67; S ii.14; iii.73, 94, 135; iv. 168 (na kiñci loke u. = parinibbāyati); Sn 752, 1103, 1104; Nd1 444 (= ādeti); Nd2 164. ppr. upādiyaŋ S iv. 24 = 65 (an˚); -- ppr. med. upādiyamāna S iii.73; SnA 409, & upādiyāna (˚ādiyāno) Sn 470; Dh 20. <-> ger. upādāya in lit. meaning "taking up" J i.30; Miln 184, 338, 341; for specialised meaning & use as prep. see separately as also upādā and upādiyitvā VvA 209; DA i.109 (an˚); DhA iv.194 (an˚). -- pp. upādiṇṇa (q. v.).
Upādhi [fr. upa + ā + dhā] 1. cushion J vi.253. -- 2. sup- plement, ornament (?), in ˚ratha "the chariot with the outfit", expld. by C. as the royal chariot with the golden slipper J vi.22.
Upādhiya [fr. upāhi] being furnished with a cushion J vi. 252 (adj.).
Upāya [fr. upa + i, cp. upaya] approach; fig. way, means, expedient, stratagem S iii.53 sq., 58; D iii.220 (˚kosalla); Sn 321 (˚ññū); J i.256; Nd2 570 (for upaya); PvA 20, 31, 39, 45, 104, 161; Sdhp 10, 12. 350, 385. -- Cases adverbially; instr. upāyena by artifice or means of a trick PvA 93; yena kenaci u. PvA 113. -- abl. upāyaso by some means, somehow J iii.443; v.401 (= upāyena C.). <-> anupāya wrong means J i.256; Sdhp 405; without going near, without having a propensity for S i.181; M iii.25.
-- kusala clever in resource J i.98; Nett 20; SnA 274.
Upāyatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. upāya] a means of ( -- ˚) VvA 84 (paṭipajjan˚).
Upāyana (nt.) [fr. upa + i, cp. upāya] going to (in special sense), enterprise, offering, tribute, present J v.347; vi. 327; Miln 155, 171, 241; Sdhp 616, 619.
Upāyāsa [upa + āyāsa, cp. BSk. upāyāsa Divy 210, 314.] (a kind of) trouble, turbulence, tribulation, unrest, disturbance, unsettled condition M i.8, 144, 363; iii.237; A i.144, 177, 203 (sa˚); ii.123, 203; iii.3, 97, 429; Sn 542; It 89 = A i.147 = M i.460; J ii.277 (˚bahula); iv 22 (id.); Pug 30, 36; Vbh 247; Nett 29; Miln 69; Vism 504 (def.); DA i.121. -- anupāyāsa peacefulness, composure, serenity, sincerity D iii.159; A iii.429; Ps i 11 sq.
Upāramati [upa + ā + ram] to cease, to desist J v.391, 498.
Upāraddha [pp. of upārambhati] blamed, reprimanded, reproved A v 230.
Upārambha [Sk. upārambha, upa + ālambhatc] -- 1. re- proof, reproach, censure M i.134, 432; S iii.73; v.73; A i.199; ii.181; iii.175; iv.25; Vbh 372. -- 2. (adj.) indisposed, hostile Th 1, 360 sq.; DA i.21, 263.
Upārambhati [Sk. upālambhate, upa + ā + labh] to blame, reprimand, reproach M i.432, 433. -- pp. upāraddha (q. v.).
Upālāpeti at PvA 276 read upalāpeti (q. v.).
Upāvisi 3rd sg. aor. of upavisati (q. v.).
Upāsaka [fr. upa + ās, cp. upāsati] a devout or faithful layman, a lay devotee Vin i.4, 16 (tevāciko u.), 37, 139, 195 sq.; ii.125; iii.6, 92; iv.14, 109; D i.85; ii.105, 113; iii.134, 148, 153, 168, 172 sq., 264; M i.29, 467, 490; S v.395, 410; A i.56 sq.; ii.132 (˚parisā); iii 206 (˚caṇḍāla, ˚ratana); iv.220 sq. (kittāvatā hoti); Sn 376, 384; J i.83; Pv i 104; Vbh 248 (˚sikkhā); DA i.234; PvA 36, 38, 54, 61, 207. -- f. upāsikā Vin i.18, 141, 216; iii.39; iv.21, 79; D iii.124, 148, 172, 264; M i.29, 467, 491; S ii.235 sq.; A i.88; ii.132; v.287 sq.; Miln 383; PvA 151, 160.
Upāsakatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. upāsaka] state of being a be- lieving layman or a lay follower of the Buddha Vin i.37; S iv,301; Vv 8421.
Upāsati [upa + ās] lit. "to sit close by", to go after, attend, follow, serve, honour, worship D ii.287; A i.162; J v. 339, 371 (= upagacchati C.); Miln 418 (lakkhe upāseti fix his attention on the target). -- 3rd pl. pres. med. upāsare A i.162; J iv.417 (= upāyanti C.). Cp. payirupāsati. -- pp. upāsita & upāsīna (q. v.). See also upāsaka, upāsana1.
Upāsana1 (nt.) [fr. upāsati] attendance, service, honour S i.46 (samaṇ˚); Th 1, 239; Miln 115. Cp. payir˚.
Upāsana2 (nt.) [fr. upāsati] -- 1. archery J vi.448; usually in phrase katûpāsana skilled in archery M i.82; S ii. 266; A ii.48; J iv.211; Mhvs 24, 1. -- Miln 232 (˚ŋ sikkhitvā). -- 2. practice Miln 419. -- 3. in ˚sālā gymnasium, training ground Miln 352.
Upāsikā see upāsaka; cp. payir˚.
Upāsita [pp. of upāsati] honoured, served, attended S 1133, cp. Nd2 165; Th 1, 179.
Upāsīna [pp. of upāsati] sitting near or close to J v.336.
Upāhata [upa + āhata] struck, afflicted, hurt J i.414.
Upāhanā (f.) [with metathesis for upānahā = Sk. upānah f. or upānaha m.; but cp. BSk. upānaha nt. Divy 6] a shoe, sandal Vin i.185; ii.118, 207 (adj. sa -- upāhana), 208; S i.226; J iv.173, 223; Pv ii.49; Nd2 226; KhA 45; DhA i.381 (chatt ˚ŋ as nt? v. l. ˚nā); PvA 127, 186. <-> upāhanaŋ (or upāhanā) ārohati to put on sandals J iv. 16; vi. 524; opp. omuñcati take off Vin ii.207, 208; J iii.415; iv.16. -- Note. An older form upānad˚ (for upānadh = Sk. upānah) is seen by Kern in pānadûpama J ii.223, which is read by him as upānadûpama (v. l. upāhan -- upama). See Toev. s. v. upānad.
Upiya [ger. of upeti] undergoing, going into, metri causa as ūpiya ( -- ˚) and opiya, viz. hadayasmiŋ opiya S i 199 = Th 1, 119; senûpiya J v.96 (v. l. senopiya; C. sayanûpagata). In tadûpiya the 2nd part upiya represents an adj. upaka fr. upa (see ta I. a), thus found at Miln 9.
Upekkhaka (adj.) [fr. upekkhā] disinterested, resigned, stoi- cal Vin iii.4; D i.37, 183; iii.113, 222, 245, 269, 281; S v.295 sq., 318; A iii.169 sq., 279; v.30; Sn 515, 855, 912; It 81; Nd1 241, 330; Pug 50, 59; Dhs 163; DhsA 172.
Upekkhati [upa + īkṣ] to look on, to be disinterested or indifferent Sn 911; Nd1 328; J vi.294.
Upekkhanā (f.) [abstr. fr. upa + īkṣ] is commentator's paraphrase for upekkhā (q. v.) Nd1 501 = Nd2 166; Vbh 230.
Upekkhavant (adj.) = upekkhaka J v.403.
Upekkhā & Upekhā (f.) [fr. upa + īkṣ, cp. BSk. upekṣā Divy 483; Jtm 211. On spelling upekhā for upekkhā see Müller P. Gr. 16] "looking on", hedonic neutrality or indifference, zero point between joy & sorrow (Cpd. 66); disinterestedness, neutral feeling, equanimity. Sometimes equivalent to adukkham -- asukha -- vedanā "feeling which is neither pain nor pleasure". See detailed discussion of term at Cpd. 229 -- 232, & cp. Dhs trsln. 39. -- Ten kinds of upekkhā are enumd. at DhsA 172 (cp. Dhs trsln. 48; Hardy, Man. Buddhism 505). -- D 138 (˚sati -- parisuddhi purity of mindfulness which comes of disinterestedness cp. Vin iii.4; Dhs 165 & Dhs trslnn. 50), 251; ii.279 (twofold); iii.50, 78, 106, 224 sq., 239, 245 (six ˚upavicāras), 252, 282; M i.79, 364; iii 219; S iv.71, 114 sq., v.209 sq. (˚indriya); A i 42; 81 (˚sukha), 256 (˚nimitta); iii.185, 291 (˚cetovimutti); iv.47 sq., 70 sq., 300, 443; v.301, 360; Sn 67, 73, 972, 1107, (˚satisaŋsuddha); Nd1 501 = Nd2 166; Ps i.8, 36, 60, 167, 177; Pug 59 (˚sati); Nett 25, 97 (˚dhātu), 121 sq.; Vbh 12, 15 (˚indriya), 54 (id.), 69, 85 (˚dhātu), 228, 324, 326 (˚sambojjhanga), 381 (˚upavicāra); Dhs 150, 153, 165, 262, 556, 1001, 1278, 1582; Vism 134 (˚sambojjhanga, 5 conditions of), 148 (˚ânubrūhanā), 160 (def. & tenfold), 317 (˚bhāvanā), 319 (˚brahmavihāra), 325 (˚vihārin), 461; SnA 128; Sdhp 461.
Upeta [pp. of upeti] furnished with, endowed with, pos- sessed of Sn 402, 463, 700, 722; Dh 10, 280; Nd2 s. v., Th 1, 789; Pv i.76 (bal˚); ii 712 (phal˚, v. l. preferable ˚upaga), iv.112 (ariyaŋ aṭṭhangavaraŋ upetan = aṭṭhahi angehi upetaŋ yuttaŋ PvA 243); Vism 18 (+ sam˚, upagata, samupagata etc); PvA 7. --
Note. The BSk. usually has samanvāgata for upeta (see aṭṭhanga).
Upeti [upa + i] to go to (with acc.), come to, approach, undergo, attain D i.55 (paṭhavi -- kāyaŋ an -- upeti does not go into an earthly body), 180; M i.486 (na upeti, as answer: "does not meet the question"); S iii.93; It 89; Sn 209, (na sankhaŋ "cannot be reckoned as") 749, 911, 1074; 728 (dukkhaŋ), 897; Sn 404 (deve); Nd1 63; Nd2 167; Dh 151, 306, 342; Sn 318; J iv.309 (maraṇaŋ upeti to die), 312 (id.), 463 (id.); v.212 (v. l. opeti, q. v.); Th 1, 17 (gabbhaŋ); Pv ii.334 (saggaŋ upehi ṭhānaŋ); iv. 352 (saraṇaŋ buddhaŋ dhammaŋ); Nett 66; fut. upessaŋ Sn 29; 2nd sg. upehisi Dh 238, 348. -- ger. upecca Vv 337; S i.209 = Nett 131; VvA 146 (realising = upagantvā cetetvā vā); PvA 103 (gloss for uppacca flying up); see also upiya & uppacca. -- pp. upeta.
Upocita [pp. of upa + ava + ci] heaped up, abounding, comfortable J iv.471.
Uposatha [Vedic upavasatha, the eve of the Soma sacrifice, day of preparation]. At the time of the rise of Buddhism the word had come to mean the day preceding four stages of the moon's waxing and waning, viz. 1st, 8th, 15th, 23d nights of the lunar month that is to say, a weekly sacred day, a Sabbath. These days were utilized by the pre -- Buddhistic reforming communities for the expounding of their views, Vin i.101. The Buddhists adopted this practice and on the 15th day of the half -- month held a chapter of the Order to expound their dhamma, ib. 102. They also utilized one or other of these Up. days for the recitation of the Pāṭimokkha (pāṭimokkhuddesa), ibid. On Up. days laymen take upon themselves the Up. vows, that is to say, the eight Sīlas, during the day. See Sīla. The day in the middle of the month is called cātudassiko or paṇṇarasiko according as the month is shorter or longer. The reckoning is not by the month (māsa), but by the half -- month (pakkha), so the twenty -- third day is simply aṭṭhamī, the same as the eighth day. There is an accasional Up. called sāmaggi -- uposatho, "reconciliation -- Up.", which is held when a quarrel among the fraternity has been made up, the gen. confession forming as it were a seal to the reconciliation (Vin v.123; Mah. 42). -- Vin i.111, 112, 175, 177; ii.5, 32, 204, 276; iii.164, 169; D iii. 60, 61, 145, 147; A i.205 sq. (3 uposathas: gopālaka˚, nigaṇṭha˚, ariya˚), 208 (dhamm˚), 211 (devatā˚); iv.248 (aṭṭhanga -- samannāgata), 258 sq. (id.), 276, 388 (navah angehi upavuttha); v.83; Sn 153 (pannaraso u); Vbh 422; Vism 227 (˚sutta = A i.206 sq.); Sdhp 439; DA i.139; SnA 199; VvA 71, 109; PvA 66, 201. -- The hall or chapel in the monastery in which the Pāṭimokkha is recited is called uposathaggaŋ (Vin iii.66), or ˚āgāraŋ (Vin i.107; DhA ii.49). The Up. service is called ˚kamma (Vin i.102; v.142; J i.232; iii.342, 444; DhA i.205). uposathaŋ karoti to hold the Up. service (Vin i.107, 175, 177; J i.425). Keeping the Sabbath (by laymen) is called uposathaŋ upavasati (A i.142, 144, 205, 208; iv.248; see upavasati), or uposathavāsaŋ vasati (J v.177). The ceremony of a layman taking upon himself the eight sīlas is called uposathaŋ samādiyati (see sīlaŋ & samādiyati); uposatha -- sīla observance of the Up. (VvA 71). The Up. day or Sabbath is also called uposatha -- divasa (J iii.52).
Uposathika (adj.) [fr. uposatha] -- 1. belonging to the Upo- satha in phrase anuposathikaŋ (adv.) on every U., i. e. every fortnight Vin iv.315. -- 2. observing the Sabbath, fasting (cp. BSk. uposadhika M Vastu ii.9); Vin i.58; iv. 75, 78; J iii.52; Vism 66 (bhatta); DhA i.205.
Uposathin (adj.) [fr. upusatha] = uposathika, fasting Mhvs 17, 6.
Uppakitaka indexed at Ud iii.2 wrongly for upakki- taka (q. v.).
Uppakka (adj.) [fr. ud + pac, cp. Sk. pakva & see also uppaccati] -- 1. "boiled out", scorched, seared, dried or shrivelled up; in phrase itthiŋ uppakkaŋ okiliniŋ okiriniŋ Vin iii.107 = S ii.260; expld. by Bdhgh. Vin iii.273 as "kharena agginā pakkasarīra". -- 2. "boiled up", swollen (of eyes through crying) J vi.10.
Uppacca [ger. of uppatati] flying up Th 2, 248 (see under upacca); S i.209 (v. l. BB. upecca, C. uppatitvā pi sakuṇo viya) = Pv ii.717 (= uppatitvā PvA 103) = DhA iv.21 (gloss uppatitvā) = Nett 131 (upecca).
Uppaccati [ud + paccati, Pass. of pac] in ppr. uppacci- yamāna (so read for upapacciyamāna, as suggested by v. l. BB. uppajj˚) "being boiled out", i. e. dried or shrivelled up (cp. uppakka 1) J iv.327. Not with Morris J P T S. 1887, 129 "being tormented", nor with Kern, Toev. under upapacc˚ as ppr. to pṛc (*upapṛcyamāna) "dicht opgesloten", a meaning foreign to this root.
Uppajjati [ud + pajjati of pad] to come out, to arise, to be produced, to be born or reborn, to come into existence D i.180; Sn 584; Pv ii.111 (= nibbattati PvA 71); PvA 8 (nibbattati +), 9, 20, 129 (= pātubhavati); DA i.165. <-> Pass. uppajjiyati Vin i.50. -- ppr. uppajjanto PvA 5, 21; fut. ˚pajjissati PvA 5 (bhummadevesu, corresp. with niraye nibbattissati ibid.), 67 (niraye); aor. uppajji PvA 21, 50, 66; & udapādi (q. v.) Vin iii.4; J i.81; ger. ˚pajjitvā D ii.157 = S i.6, 158 = ii.193 = J i.392 = Th 1, 1159; & uppajja J iv.24. -- Caus. uppādeti (q. v.). <-> pp. uppanna (q. v.). See also upapajjati and upapanna.
Uppajjana (adj. -- nt.) [fr. uppajjati] coming into existence; birth, rebirth PvA 9 (˚vasena), 33 (id.).
Uppajjanaka (adj.) [fr. uppajjana] (belonging to) coming into existence, i. e. arising suddenly or without apparent cause, in ˚bhaṇḍa a treasure trove J iii.150.
Uppajjitar [n. ag. fr. uppajjati] one who produces or is reborn in (with acc.) D i.143 (saggaŋ etc.).
Uppaṭipāṭiyā [abl. of uppaṭipāṭi, ud + paṭipāṭi] lit. "out of reach", i. e. in a distance J i.89; or impossible Vism 96 (ekapañho pi u. āgato nâhosi not one question was impossible to be understood). As tt. g. "with reference to the preceding", supra Vism 272; SnA 124, 128; DhsA 135 (T. ˚paṭipāṭika).
Uppaṇḍanā (f.) [abstr. fr. ut + paṇd or unknown etym.] ridiculing, mocking Miln 357; Vism 29; PugA 250 (˚kathā).
Uppaṇḍuppaṇḍukajāta (adj.) [redupl. intens. formation; ud + paṇḍu + ka + jāta; paṇḍu yellowish. The word is evidently a corruption of something else, perhaps upapaṇṇḍuka, upa in meaning of "somewhat like", cp. upanīla, upanibha etc. and reading at Pv ii.113 upakaṇḍakin. The latter may itself be a corruption, but is expld. at PvA 72 by upakaṇḍaka -- jāta "shrivelled up all over, nothing but pieces (?)". The trsln. is thus doubtful; the BSk. is the P. form retranslated into utpāṇḍuka Divy 334, 463, and trsld. "very pale"] "having become very pale" (?), or "somewhat pale" (?), with dubbaṇṇa in Khp, A 234, and in a stock phrase of three different settings, viz. (1) kiso lūkho dubbaṇṇo upp˚ dhamani -- santhata -- gatto Vin i.276; iii.19, 110; M ii.121; distorted to BSk. bhīto utp˚. kṛśāluko durbalako mlānako at Divy 334. -- (2) kiso upp˚. J vi. 71; DhA iv.66. -- (3) upp˚ dhamanisanth˚ J i.346; ii.92; v.95; DhA i.367. Besides in a doubtful passage at Pv ii.112 (upakaṇḍakin, v. l. uppaṇḍ˚ BB.), expld. at PvA 72 "upakaṇḍakajāta", vv. ll. uppaṇḍaka˚ and uppaṇḍupaṇḍuka˚.
Uppaṇḍeti [ut + paṇḍ, of uncertain origin] to ridicule, mock, to deride, make fun of Vin i.216, 272, 293; iv. 278; A iii.91 = Pug 67 (ūhasati ullapati +); J v.288, 300; DhA ii.29; iii.41; PvA 175 (avamaññati +). <-> Note. The BSk. utprāsayati at Divy 17 represents the P. uppaṇḍeti & must somehow be a corruption of the latter (vv. ll. at Divy 17 are utprāśayati, utprāṇayati & utprāśrayati).
Uppatati [ud + patati] to fly or rise up into the air; to spring upwards, jump up; 3rd sq. pret. udapatta [Sk. *udapaptat] J iii.484 (so read for ˚patto, & change si to pi); ger. uppatitvā J iii.484; iv.213; PvA 103, 215; and uppacca (q. v.). -- pp. uppatita (q. v.).
Uppatita [pp. of uppatati] jumped up, arisen, come about Sn 1 (= uddhamukhaŋ patitaŋ gataŋ SnA 4), 591; Dh 222 (= uppanna DhA iii.301); Th 1, 371.
Uppatti (f.) [Vedic utpatti, ud + pad] coming forth, product, genesis, origin, rebirth, occasion A ii.133 (˚paṭilābhikāni sanyojanāni); Vbh 137 (˚bhava), 411; cp. Compendium, 262 f. (khaṇa); Miln 127 (˚divasa); Vism, 571 sq. (˚bhava, 9 fold: kāma˚ etc.); SnA 46, 159, 241, 254, 312, 445; PvA 144, 215. On uppatti deva see deva and upapatti. <-> See also aṭṭhuppatti, dānuppatti.
Uppatha [Sk. utpatha, ud + patha] a wrong road or course D i.10 (˚gamana, of planets); S i.38, 43; J v.453; vi. 235; DhA iii.356 (˚cāra).
Uppanna [pp. of uppajjati] born, reborn, arisen, produced, D i.192 (lokaŋ u. born into the world); Vin iii.4; Sn 55 ˚ñāṇa; see Nd2 168), 998; J i.99; Pv ii.22 (pettivisayaŋ); Dhs 1035, 1416; Vbh 12, 17, 50, 319; 327; DhA iii. 301; PvA 21 (petesu), 33, 144, 155. -- anuppanna not arisen M ii.11; not of good class D i.97 (see DA i.267).
Uppabbajati [ud + pabbajati] to leave the Order DhA i. 68; PvA 55. -- pp. ˚pabbajita. -- Caus. uppabbājeti to turn out of the Order J iv.219; DhA iv.195. -- Caus. II. uppabbajāpeti to induce some one to leave the Order J iv.304.
Uppabbajjta [ud + pabbajita] one who has left the community of bhikkhus, an ex -- bhikkhu VvA 319; DhA i.311.
Uppala [Sk. utpala, uncertain etym.] the (blue) lotus; a waterlily. The 7 kinds of lotuses, mentioned at J v.37 are: nīla -- ratta -- set -- uppala, ratta -- seta -- paduma, seta -- kumuda, kalla -- hāra. -- D i.75; ii.19; Vin iii.33 (˚gandha); J ii. 443; Dh 55; Vv 322; 354; Pv ii.120; iii.105; DhA i.384 (nīl˚); iii.394 (id.); ThA 254, 255; VvA 132, 161. <-> What is meant by uppala -- patta (lotus -- leaf?) at Vin iv.261?
Uppalaka [uppala + ka] "lotus -- like", N. of a hell (cp. BSk. utpala at Divy 67 etc.) A v.173. See also puṇḍarika.
Uppalin (adj. -- n.) [fr. uppala] having lotuses rich in l., only in f. uppalinī a lotus -- pond D i.75; ii.38; S i.138; A iii. 26; Vv 322; DA i.219.
Uppaḷāseti [ud + pra + las, cp. Sk. samullāsayati in same meaning] to sound out or forth, to make sound Miln 21 (dhamma -- sankhaŋ). Reading at D ii.337 is upaḷāseti in same meaning.
Uppāṭaka [fr. ud + paṭ in meaning of "biting, stinging"] an insect, vermin S i.170 (santhāro ˚ehi sañchanno "a siesta -- couch covered by vermin swarm" trsld. p. 215 & note).
Uppāṭana (nt.) [fr. ud + paṭ] pulling out, uprooting, de- stroying, skinning J i.454; ii.283; vi.238; Miln 166; PvA 46 (kes˚); Sdhp 140 (camm˚). Cp. sam˚.
Uppāṭanaka (adj.) [fr. uppāṭana] pulling up, tearing out, uprooting J i.303 (˚vāta); iv.333 (id.).
Uppāṭeti [Sk. utpāṭayati, Caus. uf ud + paṭ to split, cp. also BSk. utpāṭayati nidhānaṇ to dig out a treasure Av. Ś i.294] to split, tear asunder; root out, remove, destroy Vin ii.151 (chaviŋ to skin); M ii.110 (attānaŋ); Th 2, 396 (ger. uppāṭiyā = ˚pāṭetvā ThA 259); J i.281 (bījāni); iv.162, 382; vi.109 (= luñcati); Miln 86; DhA iii.206. <-> Caus. uppāṭāpeti in pp. uppāṭāpita caused to be torn off DhA iii.208. See also upphāleti.
Uppāda1 [Sk. utpāta, ud + pat] flying up, jump; a sudden & unusual event, portent, omen D i.9 (v. l. uppāta) = Vism 30 (T. uppāta, v. l. uppāda) Sn 360; J i.374; vi. 475; Miln 178.
Uppāda2 [Sk. utpāda, ud + pad] coming into existence, appearance, birth Vin i.185; D i.185; S iii.39 (+ vaya); iv.14; v.30; A i.152 (+ vaya), 286, 296; ii.248 (taṇh˚); iii.123 (citt˚ state of consciousness); iv.65 (id.); Dh 182, 194; J i.59, 107 (sat˚); Vbh 303 (citt˚), 375 (taṇh˚); PvA 10; ThA 282. -- anuppāda either "not coming into existence" D iii.270, M i.60; A i.286, 296; ii.214, 249: iii.84 sq.; Ps i.59, 66; Dhs 1367; or "not ripe" D i.12.
Uppādaka (adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. uppāda2] producing, generating PvA 13 (dukkh˚). f. ˚ikā DhA iv.109 (jhānɔ).
Uppādana (nt.) [fr. uppada2] making, generating, causing PvA 71 (anubal˚ read for anubalappadāna?) 114.
Uppādin (adj.) [fr. uppāda2] having an origin, arising, bound to arise Dhs 1037, 1416; Vbh 17, 50, 74, 92 and passim; DhsA 45.
Uppādetar [n. ag. fr. uppādeti] one who produces, causes or brings into existence, creator, producer M i.79; S i. 191; iii.66; v.351; Miln 217.
Uppādeti [Caus. of uppajjati, ud + pad] -- 1. to give rise to, to produce, put forth, show, evince, make D i.135; M. i.162, 185; Pug 25; PvA 4, 16, 19, 59; Sdhp 539. cittaŋ u. to give a (temporary) thought to (with loc.) J i.81; Miln 85; DhA ii.89; PvA 3. -- 2. to get, obtain, find J iv.2; Miln 140; DhA i.90; PvA 121. -- 3. in lohitaŋ u. to draw (blood) Miln 214.
Uppilavati (& Uplavati) [Sk. utplavati, ud + plu, cp. utplutya jumping up, rising Sp. Av. Ś i.209] -- 1. to emerge (out of water), to rise, float S iv.313 (uplava imper.); Miln 80, 379; VvA 47 (uplavitvā, v. l. uppalavitvā); DA i.256 (v. l. upari lavati). -- 2. to jump up, frisk about, to be elated or buoyant J ii.97 (cp. Morris J P T S. 1887, 139); Miln 370. -- See also upaplavati, uplāpeti & ubbillāvita etc.
Uppīḷa (adj.) [ud + pīḍ] oppressing or oppressed: an˚ free from oppression, not hurt or destroyed D i.135 (opp. sa -- uppīḷa; T. upapīḷa but v. l. upp˚); J iii.443; v.378; PvA 161.
Uppīḷita [pp. of uppīḷeti] pressed J vi.3.
Uppīḷeti [ud + pīḍ for ava + pīḍ, cp. uplāpeti = opilāpeti, & opīḷeti] -- 1. to press (down) on to, to hold (tight) to (with acc.), to cover up or close M i.539 (piṭṭhi -- pāṇiŋ hanukena); J i 483 (hatthena akkhīni); ii.245 (hatthikumbhe mukhaŋ); v.293 (aggalaŋ); ThA 188. -- 2. to stampede VvA 83 (paṭhaviŋ).
Uppoṭheti [ud + poṭheti] to beat PvA 4.
Upplavana at DhA i.309 remains to be explained, T. faulty.
Upphāleti [Caus. of ud + phal] to cut, rip or split open Vin i.276 (udara -- cchaviŋ upphāletvā; v. l. uppāṭetvā, perhaps preferable).
Upphāsulika (adj.) [ud + phāsulikā for phāsukikā = phā- suka a rib] "with ribs out", i. e. with ribs showing, emaciated, thin, "skinny" Pv ii.11 (= uggata -- phāsuka PvA 68); iv.101 (MSS. uppā˚); ThA 133 (spelt uppā˚).
Uplāpeti [Sk. avaplāvayati, Caus. of ava + plu, with sub- stitution of ud for ava; see also uppilavati] to immerse M i.135 (vv. ll. upal˚ & opil˚); J iv.162 (fig. put into the shade, overpower; v. l. upal˚). See also opilāpeti & ubbillāvita.
Ubbaṭuma (adj.) [ud + *vṛti (of vṛt) + ma (for mā > mant); cp. Sk. udvṛtta & vṛtimant] going out of its direction, going wrong (or upset?), in phrase ubbaṭumaŋ rathaŋ karoti to put a cart out of its direction A iv. 191, 193.
Ubbaṭṭeti [Caus. of ud + vṛt, as doublet of ubbatteti, cp. BSk. udvartayati Divy 12, 36] to anoint, give perfumes (to a guest), to shampoo J i.87 (gandhacuṇṇena), 238 (id.); v.89, 438.
Ubbaṭṭhaka misprint in Pug Index as well as at Pug A 233 for ubbhaṭṭhaka (q. v.).
Ubbattati [ud + vṛt] to go upwards, to rise, swell J vi. 486 (sāgaro ubbatti). See also next.
Ubbatteti [Caus. of ud + vṛt, of which doublet is ubbaṭṭeti; cp. also ubbaṭuma] -- 1. to tear out J i.199; Miln 101 (sadevake loke ubbattiyante); DhA i.5 (hadayamaŋsaŋ), 75 (rukkhaŋ). -- 2. to cause to swell or rise J iii.361 (Gangāsotaŋ); iv.161 (samuddaŋ). -- 3. (intrs.) to go out of direction, or in the wrong direction Vism 327 (neva ubbaṭṭati na vivaṭṭati; v. l. uppaṭṭati); DhA iii.155.
Ubbadhati [ud + vadhati] to kill, destroy Sn 4 (praet. udabbadhi = ucchindanto vadheti SnA 18).
Ubbandhati [ud + bandhati] to hang up, strangle Vin iii. 73 (rajjuyā); J i.504 (id.); iii.345; Th 2, 80; Vism 501; VvA 139, 207 (ubbandhitu -- kāmā in the intention of hanging herself).
Ubbarī (f.) [Sk. urvarā, Av. urvara plant] fertile soil, sown field; fig. woman, wife J vi 473 (= orodha C.).
Ubbasati see ubbisati.
Ubbaha (adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. ud + vṛh, i. e. to ubbahati1] only in cpd. dur˚ hard to pull out, difficult to remove Th 1, 124, 495 = 1053.
Ubbahati1 [ud + bṛh or vṛh, see also uddharati] to pull out, take away, destroy Sn 583 (udabbahe pot. = ubbaheyya dhāreyya SnA 460); Th 1, 158; J ii.223 (udabbahe = udabbaheyya C.); iv.462 (ubbahe); vi.587 (= hareyya C.).
Ubbahati2 [ud + vahati, although possibly same as ubba- hati1, in meaning of uddharati, which has taken up meanings of *udbharati, as well as of *udbṛhati and *udvahati] to carry away, take away, lift (the corn after cutting); only in Caus. II. ubbahāpeti to have the corn harvested Vin ii 180 = A i.241. -- Here belong uddhaṭa and uddharaṇa. Cp. also pavāḷha.
Ubbāḷha [adj. pp. of ud + bāhati = vāh or more likely of ud + bādh] oppressed, troubled, harassed, annoyed, vexed Vin i.148, 353; ii.119; iv.308; J i.300; Vism 182 (kuṇapa -- gandhena); DhA i.343.
Ubbāsīyati [Pass. of ubbāseti, ud + vas] "to be dis -- inhabited", i. e. to be abandoned by the inhabitants Mhvs 6, 22 (= chaḍḍīyati C.). -- Cp. ubbisati.
Ubbāhana (nt.) [fr. ubbahati2] carrying, lifting, in ˚sa- mattha fit for carrying, i. e. a beast of burden, of an elephant J vi.448.
Ubbāhikā (f.) [orig. f. of ubbāhika, adj. fr. ubbāheti in abstr. use] a method of deciding on the expulsion of a bhikkhu, always in instr. ubbāhikāya "by means of a referendum", the settlement of a dispute being laid in the hands of certain chosen brethren (see Vin Texts iii.49 sq.) Vin ii.95, 97, 305; v.139, 197; A v.71; Mhvs 4, 46.
Ubbāheti [hardly to be decided whether fr. ud + vāh (to press, urge), or bṛh or bādh; cp. uddharati 2] to oppress, vex, hinder, incommodate J v.417 sq.
Ubbigga [Sk. udvigna, pp. of ud + vij] agitated, flurried, anxious Vin ii.184; S i.53; Th 1, 408; J i.486; iii.313; Miln 23, 236, 340 (an˚); Vism 54 (satat˚); DhA ii.27; ThA 267; Sdhp 8, 77.
Ubbijjati [Pass. of ud + vij] to be agitated, frightened or afraid Vin i.74 (u. uttasati palāyati); iii.145 (id.); S i. 228 (aor. ubbijji); Miln 149 (tasati +), 286 (+ saŋviji); Vism 58. -- Caus. ubbejeti (q. v.). -- pp. ubbigga (q. v.).
Ubbijjanā (f.) [abstr. fr. ubbijjati] agitation, uneasiness DA i.111. Cp. ubbega.
Ubbinaya (adj.) [ud + vinaya] being outside the Vinaya, ex -- or un -- Vinaya, wrong Vinaya Vin ii.307; Dpvs v.19.
Ubbilāpa (v. l. uppilāva, which is prob. the correct reading] joyous state of mind, elation Ud 37. See next.
Ubbilāvita (according to the very plausible expln. given by Morris J P T S. 1887, 137 sq. for uppilāpita, pp. of uppilāpeti = uplāpeti < uplāveti, as expld. under uppilavati, ud + plu; with ll for l after cases like Sk. ālīyate > P. allīyati, ālāpa > allāpa etc., and bb for pp as in vanibbaka = Sk. vanīpaka (*vanipp˚)] happy, elated, buoyant, ltt. frisky; only in cpds. ˚atta rejoicing, exultancy, elation of mind D i.3, 37; J iii 466; Miln 183; DA i.53, 122; and ˚ākāra id. DhA i.237. At Vism 158 "cetaso ubbilāvitaŋ" stands for ubbilāvitattaŋ, with v. l. BB uppilāvitaŋ. Cp. J v.114 (ubbilāvita -- cittatā).
Ubbilla [either a secondary formation fr. ubbilāvita, or representing uppilava (uppilāva) for upplava, ud + plu, as discussed under ubbilāvita. The BSk. word udvilya Lal. V. 351, 357, or audvilya Divy 82 is an artificial reconstruction from the Pāli, after the equation of Sk. dvādaśa > dial. P. bārasa, whereas the original Sk. dv. is in regular P. represented by dd, as in dvīpa > dīpa, *udvāpa > uddāpa. Müller's construction ubbilla > *udvela rests on the same grounds, see P. Gr. 12.] elation, elated state of mind M iii.159; ˚bhāva id. DA i.122; Sdhp 167. See next.
Ubbisati [better reading v. l. ubbasati, ud + vas] "to be out home", to live away from home J ii.76. -- See also ubbāsīyati. -- pp. ubbisita (˚kāle) ibid.
Ubbūḷhavant see uruḷhavant.
Ubbega [Sk. udvega, fr. ud + vij] excitement, fright, an- guish D iii.148; later, also transport, rapture, in cpd. (˚pīti); Vism 143; DhsA 124; PugA 226.
Ubbegin (adj.) [fr. ubbega] full of anguish or fear J iii. 313 (= ubbegavant C.).
Ubbejanīya (adj.) [fr. ubbejeti] agitating, causing anxiety J i.323, 504.
Ubbejitar & Ubbejetar [n. ag. fr. ubbejeti] a terrifier, a terror to A ii.109 (˚etar); iv.189 (id.); Pug 47, 48 (= ghaṭṭetvā vijjhītvā ubbegappattaŋ karotī ti PugA 226).
Ubbejeti [Caus. of ud + vij] to set into agitation, terrify, frighten Miln 388 (˚jayitabba grd.); PugA 226.
Ubbeṭhana (nt.) [fr. ud + veṣṭ] an envelope, wrap J vi.508.
Ubbedha [ud + vedha of vyadh] height, only as measure, contrasted with āyāma length, & vitthāra width J i.29 (v.219; asīti -- hatth˚), 203 (yojana -- sahass˚); VvA 33 (yojana˚), 66 (asīti -- hatth˚), 158 (hattha -- sat˚), 188 (soḷasa -- yojan˚), 221, 339; PvA 113. See also pabbedha.
Ubbedhati [ud + vedhati = Sk. vyathate] to be moved, to shake (intrs.), quiver, quake J vi.437 (= kampati C.).
Ubbhaŋ (& Ubbha˚) (indecl.) [a doublet of uddhaŋ, see uddhaŋ iii.] up, over, above, on top J v.269 (ubbhaŋ yojanaŋ uggata); in cpds. like ubbhakkhakaŋ above the collar bone Vin iv.213; ubbhajānumaṇḍalaŋ above the knee Vin iv.213; ubbhamukha upwards S iii.238; Miln 122.
Ubbhaṭṭhaka (adj.) [ubbha + ṭha + ka of sthā, prob. contracted fr. ubbhaṭṭhitaka] standing erect or upright D i.167; M i.78, 92, 282, 308, 343; A i.296; ii.206; Pug 55 (ubb˚; = uddhaŋ ṭhitaka PugA 233).
Ubbhaṇḍita [pp. of ubbhaṇḍeti, ud + *bhaṇḍ, cp. bhāṇḍa] bundled up, fixed up, wrapped up, full Vin i.287.
Ubbhata [pp. of uddharati with bbh for ddh as in ubbhaŋ for uddhaŋ cp. ubbahati and see also the doublet uddhaṭa] drawn out, pulled out, brought out, thrown out or up, withdrawn Vin i.256 (kaṭhina, cp. uddhāra & ubbhāra); iii.196 (id.); D i.77 (cp uddharati); M i.383 (ubbhatehi akkhihi); Dh 34 (okamokata u. = *okamokataḥ u.); J i.268; PvA 163.
Ubbhava [ud + bhava] birth, origination, production Pgdp 91 (dānassa phal˚). Cp. BSk. udbhāvanā Divy 184 (guṇ˚) 492 (id.).
Ubbhāra = uddhāra (suspension, withdrawal, removal) Vin i.255, 300; v.136, 175; cp. Vin Texts i.19; ii.157.
Ubbhijjati [ud + bhid] to burst upwards, to spring up out of the ground, to well up; to sprout D i.74 = M iii. 93 = iii.26; J i.18 (v.104); Dh 339 (ger. ubbhijja = uppajitvā DhA iv.49); DA i.218. -- pp. ubbhinna.
Ubbhida1 (nt.) [Sk. udbhida] kitchen salt Vin i.202, cp. Vin Texts ii.48.
Ubbhida2 (adj.) [fr. ud + bhid] breaking or bursting forth, in cpd. ˚odaka "whose waters well up", or "spring water" D i.74; M i.276; DA i.218.
Ubbhinna [pp. of ubbhijjati] springing up, welling up Dh i.218.
Ubbhujati [ud + bhuj] to bend up, to lift up (forcibly), ger. ˚itvā in meaning of "forcibly" Vin ii.222; iii.40.
*Ubha see ubho; cp. ubhato & ubhaya.
Ubhato (adv.) [abl. of *ubha, to which ubhaya & ubho] both, twofold, in both (or two) ways, on both sides; usually ˚ -- , as ˚bhāgavimutta one who is emancipated in two ways D ii.71; Dialogues ii.70, n. 1; M i.477 (cp. 385 ˚vimaṭṭha); S i.191; A i.73; iv.10, 77; Png 14, 73; Nett 190; ˚byañjanaka (vyañj˚) having the characteristics of both sexes, hermaphrodite Vin i.89, 136, 168; iii.28; v. 222; ˚sangha twofold Sangha, viz. bhikkhu˚ & bhikkhunī Vin ii.255; iv.52, 242, 287; Mhvs 3234. <-> See further Vin ii.287 (˚vinaye); D i.7 (˚lohitaka, cp. DA i.87); M i.57 (˚mukha tied up at both ends), 129 (˚daṇḍakakakaca a saw with teeth on both sides), 393 (koṭiko pañho; S iv.323 (id.).
Ubhaya (adj.) [*ubha + ya, see ubho] both, twofold Sn 547, 628, 712, 1106, 1107, 801 (˚ante); Nd1 109 (˚ante); J i.52; PvA 11, 24, 35, 51. -- nt. ˚ŋ as adv. in combn. with ca c'ûbhayaŋ following after 2nd. part of comprehension) "and both" for both -- and; and also, alike, as well Dh 404 (gahaṭṭhehi anāgārehi c'ûbhayaŋ with householders and houseless alike); Pv i.69. -- Note. The form ubhayo at Pv ii.310 is to be regarded as fem. pl. of ubho (= duve PvA 86).
-- aŋsa lit. both shoulders or both parts, i. e. completely, thoroughly, all round (˚ -- ) in ˚bhāvita thoroughly trained D i.154 (cp. DA i.312 ubhaya -- koṭṭhāsāya bhāvito).
Ubhayattha [adv.) [Sk. ubhayatra, fr. ubhaya] in both places, in both cases Vin i.107; A iii.64; Dh 15 -- 17; DhA i.29 (˚ettha), 30; PvA 130.
Ubho (udj.) [Sk. ubhau, an old remnant of a dual form in Pāli; cp. Gr. a)/mfw both, Lat. ambo, Lith. abū, Goth. bai, Ohg. beide = E. both. To prep. -- adv. *amb, *ambi; see abhi & cp. also vīsati] both; nom. acc. ubho S i.87 = A iii.48 = It 16; It 43 = Sn 661 = Dh 306; Sn 220, 543, 597; Dh 74, 256, 269; 412; Nd1 109; Pv i.76; J i.223; ii.3; PvA 13, 82 (tā ubho). -- ubhantaŋ both ends, both sides Sn 1042 (see Nd2 169; Sn A 588 expls. by ubho ante). -- gen. ubhinnaŋ S i.162; ii. 222; J ii.3; instr. ubhohi (hatthehi) Vin ii.256; J iv.142; loc. ubhosu Sn 778 (antesu); J i.264 (passesu; PvA 94 (hatthesu). <-> Note. The form ubhayo at Pv ii.310 is to be regarded as a nom. fem. (= duve PvA 86).
Ummagga [ud + magga, lit. "off -- track"] -- 1. an underground watercourse, a conduit, main M i.171; A ii.189; J vi.426, 432; SnA 50 ("ummaggo paññā pavuccati"); DhA i.252 (˚cora); ii.37 (v l. umanga); iv.104; PvA 44 (read with v. l. SS kummagga). -- 2. a side track, a wrong way, devious way S i.193 (v. l. ˚manga) = Th 1, 1242; S iv.195; A iv.191.
Ummanga [ud + manga (?) or for ummagga, q. v. for vv. ll.] "out luck", i. e. unlucky; or "one who has gone off the right path" Vin v.144.
Ummatta (adj.) [ud + matta of mad] out of one's mind, mad S v.447 (+ viceta); J v.386; Miln 122; Sdhp 88; PvA 40 (˚puggala read with v. l. SS for dummati puggala). Cp. next & ummāda.
-- rūpa like mad, madly, insane Pv i.81; ii.62 (where J iii.156 has santaramāna).
Ummattaka (adj.) = ummatta; Vin i.123, 321; ii.60, 80; iii.27, 33; A iv.248; Vism 260 (reason for); Miln 277; PvA 38, 39, 93 (˚vesa appearance of a madman), 95. <-> f. ummattikā Vin iv.259, 265; ThA 111.
Ummaddeti [ud + maddeti, Caus. of mṛd] to rub something on (acc.) Vin ii.107 = 266 (mukhaŋ).
Ummasati [ud + masati of mṛś.] to touch, take hold of, lift up Vin iii.121. Cp. next.
Ummasanā (f.) [abstr. fr. ummasati] lifting up Vin iii.121 (= uddhaŋ uccāraṇā).
Ummā (f.) [cp. Sk. umā] flax, only in cpd. ˚puppha the (azure) flower of flax M ii.13 = A v.61 (v. l. dammā˚, ummāta˚); D ii.260; Th 1, 1068; DhsA 13. Also (m.) N. of a gem Miln 118.
Ummāda [ud + māda] madness, distraction, mental aberra- tion S i.126 (˚ŋ pāpuṇeyya citta -- vikkhepaŋ vā); A ii.80; iii.119; v.169; Pug 69; PvA 6 (˚patta frantic, out of mind), 94 (˚vāta), 162 (˚patta).
Ummādanā (f.) (or ˚aŋ nt.) [abstr. fr. ummāda] maddening Sn 399 (+ mohanaŋ = paraloke ummādanaŋ ihaloke mohanaŋ SnA 377); ThA 2, 357 (cp. ThA 243).
Ummāra [according to Müller P. Gr. = Sk. udumbara (?)] - 1. a threshold Vin iv.160 (= indakhīla); Th 2, 410; J i. 62; iii.101; Vism 425; DhA i.350. -- 2. a curb -- stone J vi.11. -- 3. as uttar˚ (the upper threshold) the lintel J i.111; DhA ii.5 (v. l. upari˚). -- 4. window -- sash or sill J i.347; iv.356.
Ummi (& Ummī) (f.) [for the usual ūmi, cp. similar double forms of bhummi > bhūmi] a wave Th 1, 681; Miln 346.
Ummisati [ud + misati] to open one's eyes J iii.96 (opp. nimisati; v. l. ummisati for ˚mīḷ˚?).
Ummihati [ud + mih] to urinate Vin i.78 (ūhanati +).
Ummīleti [Caus. of ud + mīl; opp. ni(m)mīleti] to open one's eyes J i.439; ii.195; iv.457; vi.185; Miln 179, 357, 394; Vism 185, 186; DhA ii.28 (opp. ni˚); VvA 205, 314.
Ummuka (nt.) [Sk. ulmuka perhaps to Lat. adoleo, cp. also alāta firebrand; see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. adoleo] a fire brand Vin iv.265; S iv.92 (T. ummukka meaning "loosened"?); J ii.69 v. l. ˚kk), 404 (kk); iii.356.
Ummujjati [ud + majj] to emerge, rise up (out of water) Vin i.180; S iv.312; A iv.11 sq; J ii.149, 284; iii.507; iv.139; Pug 71; Miln 118; DA i.37, 127; PvA 113.
Ummujjana (nt.) [fr. ummujjati] emerging Vism 175 (+ nim- mujjana); DA i.115.
Ummujjamānaka (adj.) [ummujjamāna, ppr. med, of um- mujjati, + ka] emerging A ii.182.
Ummujjā (f.) [fr. ummujjati] emerging, jumping out of (water), only in phrase ummujja -- nimujjaŋ karoti to emerge & dive D i.78; M i.69; A i.170; J iv.139; Nett 110; Vism 395 (= Ps ii.208).
Ummūla (adj.) [ud + mūla] "roots -- out", with roots showing, laying bare the roots J i.249 (˚ŋ karoti); Sdhp 452.
Ummūlaka (adj.) [= ummūla] uprooting, laying bare the roots J i.303 (vāta).
Ummūleti [Caus. fr. ummūla] to uproot, to root out J i.329.
Umhayati [Sk. *ut -- smayate, ud + smi] to laugh out loud J ii.131 (= hasitaŋ karoti); iii.44; iv.197; v.299 (˚amāna = hasamāna C.). Caus. umhāpeti J v.297.
Uyyassu (imper. 3rd. sg.) is v. l. BB. and C. reading at J vi.145, 146 for dayassu, fly; probably for (i) yassu of yā to go.
Uyyāti [ud + yā] to go out, to go away J ii.3, 4 (imper. uyyāhi); iv.101. -- Caus. uyyāpeti to cause to go away, to bring or take out S iv.312.
Uyyāna (nt.) [Sk. udyāna, fr. ud + yā] a park, pleasure grove, a (royal) garden J i.120, 149; ii.104; iv.213; v.95; vi.333; PvA 6, 74, 76; VvA 7; Sdhp 7.
-- kīḷā amusement in the park, sports DhA i.220; iv.3. -- pāla overseer of parks, head gardener, park keeper J ii. 105, 191; iv.264 bhūmi garden ground, pleasure ground J i.58; Vv 6419; Pv ii.129; DA i.235.
Uyyānavant (adj.) [fr. uyyāna] full of pleasure gardens Pv iii.36.
Uyyāma [Sk. udyama, ud + yam; P. uyyāma with ā for a, as niyāma > niyama; cp. BSk. udyama Jtm 210] exertion, effort, endeavour Dhs 13, 22, 289, 571; DhsA 146.
Uyyuñjati [ud + yuj] to go away, depart, leave one's house Dh 91 (cp. DhA ii.170). -- pp. uyyutta. -- Caus. uyyojeti (q. v.).
Uyyuta (adj.) [ud + yuta] striving, busy (in a good or bad cause) Sn 247, 248; J v.95.
Uyyutta [pp. of uyyuñjati] striving, active, zealous, energ- etic J i.232.
Uyyoga [fr. ud + yuj] departure, approach of death Dh 236 (cp. DhA iii.335).
Uyyojana (nt.) [fr. uyyojeti] inciting, instigation A iv.233.
Uyyojita [pp. of uyyojeti] instigated Miln 228; PvA 105.
Uyyojeti [Caus. of uyyuñjati] -- 1. to instigate Vin iv.235; J iii.265. -- 2. to dismiss, take leave of (acc.), send off, let go Vin i.179; A iii.75; J i.119 (bhikkhu -- sanghaŋ), 293; iii.188; v.217; vi.72; Vism 91; DhA i.14, 15, 398; ii.44; VvA 179; PvA 93. -- pp. uyyojita (q. v.).
Uyyodhika (nt.) [fr. ud + yudh] a plan of combat, sham fight Vin iv.107; D i.6; A v.65; DA i.85.
Ura (m. nt.) & Uro (nt.) [Sk. uras] -- 1. the breast, chest. -- Cases after the nt. s. -- declension are instr. urasā Th 1, 27; Sn 609; & loc. urasi Sn 255; J iii.148; iv. 118, also urasiŋ J iii.386 (= urasmiŋ C.). Other cases of nt. a -- stem, e. g. instr. urena J iii.90; PvA 75; loc. ure D i.135; J i.156, 433, 447; PvA 62 (ure jāta; cp. orasa). -- Vin ii.105 (contrasted with piṭṭhi back); iv.129; J iv.3; v.159, 202; Nd2 659; Pv iv.108; DhA iii.175; DA i.254; DhsA 321; PvA 62, 66. -- uraŋ deti (with loc.) to put oneself on to something with one's chest, fig. to apply oneself to J i.367, 401, 408; iii.139, 455; iv.219; v.118, 278. -- 2. (appld.) the base of a carriage pole Vv 6328 (= īsāmūla VvA 269).
-- ga going on the chest, creeping, i. e. a snake S i.69; Sn 1, 604; J i.7; iv.330; vi.208; Vv 808; Pv i.121 (= urena gacchati ti urago sappassɔ etaŋ adhivacanaŋ PvA 63); PvA 61, 67. -- cakka an iron wheel (put on the chest), as an instrument of torture in Niraya J i.363, 414. -- cchada "breast cover", breast plate (for ornament) Vin ii.10; J iv.3; v.215, 409; vi.480; ThA 253. -- ttāḷi beating one's breast (as a sign of mourning & sorrow) M i.86, 136; A ii.188; iii.54, 416; iv.293; PvA 39. -- tthala the breast A ii.174.
Urabbha [Sk. urabhra, with ulā & uraṇa to be compared with Gr. a)rh/n wether, cp. Hom. ei)=ros wool; Lat. vervex; Ags. waru = E. ware (orig. sheepskins) = Ger. ware. Here also belongs P. urāṇī] a ram D i.127; A i.251 sq.; ii.207; iv.41 sq.; J v.241; Pug 56; DA i.294; DhA ii.6. See also orabbhika.
Urāṇī (f.) [or uraṇī?, f. of uraṇa, see urabbha] an ewe J v.241 (= urāṇikā C.); v. l. uraṇī & uraṇikā.
Uru (adj.) [cp. Av. ravah space; Gr. eu)rus wide; Lat. rūs free or wide space, field; Idg. *ru, *uer wide, to which also Goth. rūms space = Ags. rūm, E. room, Ger. raum] wide, large; excellent, eminent J v.89; Miln 354; Sdhp 345, 592. -- pl. urū sands, soil J v.303.
Urundā (f.) [ura + undā?] freedom of the chest, free breathing, relief D ii.269 (v. l. uruddhā perhaps preferable, for ura + uddharana lifting or raising the chest).
Urūḷhava (adj.) [doubtful, prob. for urūḷhavant, with affix vant to a pp. formed with ud˚. The word is taken by Kern, Toev. s. v. as ud -- ūḷha of vah (with d for r). The well accredited (and older) variant ubbuḷhavā is expld. (see Kern, s. v.) as pp. of ud + bṛh2, cp. upabrūhana. Perhaps we have to consider this as the legitimate form urūḷhava as its corruption. Morris, J. P.T.S. 1887, 141 takes urūḷhavā as ud + rūḷha, pp. of ruh (with r. for rr = dr), thus "overgrown"] large, bulky, immense; great, big, strong. Only in one stock phrase "nāgo isādanto urūḷhavo" Vv 209, 439; J vi.488; of which variant n. ī. ubbuḷhavā M i.414 = 450. The word is expld. at J vi.488 by "ubbāhana -- samattha"; at VvA 104 (pl. urṳ̄ḷhavā) by "thāmajava -- parakkamehi byūhanto (v. l. brahmanto) mahantaŋ yuddha -- kiccaŋ vahituŋ samatthā ti attho". The BSk. udviddha (Divy 7) may possibly be a corruption of ubbūḷha.
Ulati is a commentator's invention; said to be = gacchati to go Vism 60 (in definition of paŋsu -- kūla; paŋsu viya kucchita -- bhāvaŋ ulatī ti paŋsu -- kūlaŋ).
Ulūka [Sk. ulūka; cp. Lat. ulucus & ulula owl, ululāre to howl, Ger. uhu; onomat. *ul, as in Gr. o)lolu/zw, Sk. ululi, Lith. ulůti] an owl Vin i.186 (˚camma, sandals of owl's skin); iii.34; A v.289 sq.; J ii.208, 352 (as king of the birds); Miln 403; DhA i.50 (kāka˚ crows & owls).
-- pakkha owls' wings (used as dress) Vin i.305; D i.167. -- pakkhika dress of owls' wings, or owl feathers A i.241, 296; ii.206; Pug 55 (= ulūka -- pattāni ganthetvā kata -- nivāsanaŋ Pug A 233).
Ullanghati [ud + langh, cp. BSk. prollanghya transgres- sing (= pra + ullangh˚) Divy 596] to leap up J iii.222 (udakato ˚itvā). -- Caus. ullangheti to make jump up (always with olangheti, i. e. to make dance up & down) Vin iii.121; J v.434; DhA iv.197. -- pp. ullanghita (q v.).
Ullanghanā (f.) [abstr. fr. ud + langh] jumping up, lifting up, raising Vin iii.121; J iv.5 (˚samattha?).
Ullanghita [pp. of ullangheti] being jumped on, set on C. on S i.40 (see K. S. i.318) (for uḍḍita = taṇhāya ullanghita).
Ullapati [ud + lapati] to call out, to talk to, lay claim to Vin i.97; iii.105; Pug 67 (= katheti Pug A 249).
Ullapana (nt.) & ˚ā (f.) [fr. ullapati] calling out, enticing, laying claim to Vin iii.101; Th 2, 357; Miln 127; ThA 243. -- ullapanā = uddhaŋ katvā lapanā Vism 27.
Ullahaka (adj.) [?] only in acc. nt. ullahakaŋ used adverbially, in cpd. dant˚ after the manner of rubbing the teeth, by means of grinding the teeth M iii.167. Seems to be a a(/pac legome/non.
Ullāpa is v. l. for uklāpa (q. v.).
Ullikhana (nt.) [fr. ud + likh] combing, scratching VvA 349; ThA 267.
Ullikhita [pp. of ud + likh] scratched, combed Vin i.254; J ii.92 (aḍḍhullikhitehi kesehi); Ud 22 (id. with upaḍḍh˚ for aḍḍh˚); VvA 197.
Ullingeti [Denom. of ud + linga] to exhibit, show as a characteristic Vism 492.
Ullitta [pp. of ud + lip] smeared; only in combn. ullittâ- valitta smeared up & down, i. e. smeared all round Vin ii 117; M ii.8; A i.101, 137; iv.231; Th 1, 737.
Ullumpati [ud + lup, cp. BSk. ullumpati Mahāvy § 268] to take up, to help (with acc.), to save Vin ii.277; D i.249.
Ullumpana (nt.) [fr. ullumpati] saving, helping; in phrase ˚sabhāva -- saṇṭhita of a helping disposition, full of mercy DA i.177; PvA 35. Same as ullopana (q. v.).
Ullulita [pp. of ulloleti] waved, shaken (by the wind); waving J vi.536.
Ulloka [ud + lok˚] doubtful in its meaning; occurs at Vin i.48 = ii.209 as ullokā paṭhamaŋ ohāreti, trsl. Vin Texts by "a cloth to remove cobwebs", but better by Andersen, Pāli Reader as "as soon as it is seen"; at Vin ii.151 the translators give "a cloth placed under the bedstead to keep the stuffing from coming out". See on term Morris J.P.T.S. 1885, 31. -- In cpd ulloka -- paduma at J vi.432 it may mean "bright lotus" (lit. to be looked at). See ulloketi.
Ullokaka (adj.) [fr. ulloketi] looking on (to), looking out; in phrase mukh˚ looking into a person's face; i. e. cheerful, winning; or "of bright face", with a winning smile D i.60; DA i.59, 168; PvA 219 (˚ika for ˚aka).
Ullokita [pp. of ulloketi] looked at, looked on J i.253; DA i 193.
Ulloketi [ud + lok˚, cp. loka, āloka & viloka] to look on to, look for, await J i.232 (ākāsaŋ), 253; ii.221, 434; DA i.153, 168; VvA 316. -- pp. ullokita (q. v.).
Ullopana (nt.) = ullumpana DhA i.309 (T. faulty; see remarks ad locum).
Ullola [fr. ud + lul] -- 1. a wave J iii.228; vi.394. - 2. commotion, unrest J iv.306, 476.
Ullolanā (f.) [fr. ulloleti] wavering, loitering (in expectation of something), greed ThA 243.
Ulloleti [denom. fr. ullola] to stroll or hang about, to wait for, expect ThA 243. -- pp. ullulita.
Uḷāra (adj.) [Vedic udāra, BSk. audāra] great, eminent, excellent, superb, lofty, noble, rich. -- Dhammapāla at VvA 10 -- 11 distinguishes 3 meanings: tīhi atthehi ūḷāraŋ paṇītaŋ (excellent), seṭṭhaŋ (best), mahantaŋ (great) Vin iii.41 (˚bhoga); D i.96; M iii.38 (˚bhogatā); S v.159; Sn 53, 58, 301; Nd2 170; J i.399; v.95; Vv 11; 8426; Pv i.512 (= hita samiddha PvA 30); VvA 18 (˚pabhāva = mahānubhāva); ThA 173, 280; PvA 5, 6, 7, 8, 25, 30, 43, 58 and passim; Sdhp 26, 260, 416. <-> Der. oḷārika (q. v.).
Uḷāratā (f.) = uḷāratta Sdhp 254.
Uḷāratta (nt.) [abstr. fr. uḷāra] greatness etc.; only neg. an˚ smallness, insignificance, inferiority VvA 24.
Uḷu [Sk. uḍu, dialectical?] a lunar mansion Miln 178.
Uḷunka [dial.?] a ladle, a spoon Vin i.286; J i.120, 157; iii.461; Miln 8; DhA i.425; ii.3, 20; iv.75, 123.
Uḷumpa [dial.?] a raft, a float Vin i.230; iii 63 (˚ŋ ban- dhati); J iv.2; DhA ii.120.
Uviṭṭa [= viṭṭha, pp. of viś, with prefixed u] having entered, come in D ii.274 (v. l. BK. upa˚).
Usabha1 [Vedic ṛṣabha; Av. aršan male, Gr. a)/rshn, a)/rrhn masculine, to Idg. *eres & *rēs to wet, sprinkle (with semen), as also in Sk. rasa juice, rasā wet, liquid, Lat. rōs dew. A parallel root *ueres in Sk. varṣa rain, Gr. e)/rsh dew; Sk. vṛṣan & vṛṣabha bull] a bull; often fig. as symbol of manliness and strength (cp. nisabha) D i.6 (˚yuddha bull -- fight), 9 (˚lakkhaṇa signs on a b.), 127; Vin iii.39 (puris˚ "bull of a man", a very strong man); A i.188; ii.207; iv.41 sq., 376; v.347, 350; Sn 26 sq., 416, 646, 684; Dh 422; J i.28 (v.203; ˚kkhandha broadshouldered), 336; v.99 (bharatûsabha); vi.136; Pug 56; Vism 153 (˚camma, in simile); DhA i.396; SnA 226, 333; KhA 144; PvA 163; VvA 85. -- The compn. forms of usabha are āsabha, isabha (in nisabha) & esabha (q. v.). The relations between usabha, vasabha & nisabha are discussed at SnA 40.
Usabha2 (nt.) [= usabha1, in special application (?)] a cer- tain measure of length, consisting of 20 yaṭṭhis (see yaṭṭhi) or 140 cubits J i.64 (eight), 70 (id.); ii.91; iv.17 (one), 142 (eight); DhA i.108 (˚mattaŋ).
Usā (f.) [doubtful] (a certain) food J vi.80.
Usīra (m. & nt.) [Sk. uśīra] the fragrant root of Andropogon Muricatum (cp. bīraṇa) Vin i.201; ii.130 (˚mayā vijanī); S ii.88 (˚nāḷi); A ii.199 (id.); Dh 337; J v.39; Th 1, 402 (˚attho).
Usu (m. & f) Sk. iṣu] an arrow Vin iii.106 (˚loma); D i.9; M i.86; iii.133; S i.127; A ii.117; iii.162; J iv.416; vi.79, 248, 454; Miln 331, 339; SnA 466; PvA 155.
-- kāra an arrow -- maker, fletcher M ii.105; Dh 80, 145; Th 1, 29; J ii.275; vi.66; DhA i.288.
Usumā (f.) [the diaeretic form of Sk. uṣman, of which the direct equivalent is P. usmā (q. v.)] heat J i.31 (= uṇha iii.55), 243; ii.433; Vism 172 (usuma -- vaṭṭi -- sadisa); DA i.186; DhA i.225; ii.20.
Usuyyaka (adj.) [fr. usuyyā] envious, jealous Vin ii.190; Sn 318, 325; J ii.192 (v. l. asuyy˚); v.114. -- Note. The long vowel form usūyaka occurs in cpd. abbhusūyaka (q. v.). Spelling ussuyikā occurs at Vv 3321 (see VvA 147).
Usuyyati & Usūyati [Sk. asūyati; fr. usuyā envy] to be jealous or envious, to envy (with acc.) Vin i.242; J iii. 27 (ppr. an -- usuyyaŋ); Pv ii.320 (maŋ usūyasi = mayhaŋ issaŋ karosi PvA 87).
Usuyyanā (f.) & Usuyyitatta (nt.) are exegetical abstr. formations of usuyyā (q. v.). Dhs 1121; Pug 19.
Usuyyā & Usūyā (f.) [Sk. asūyā] envy, jealousy, detraction S i.127 (ū); Sn 245 (u); J ii.193 (ū); iii.99 (ū; v. l. ussuyyā); Miln 402 (ū); Dhs 1121 (u); VvA 71 (u); SnA 332 (u).
Usmā (f.) [see usumā] heat D ii.335, 338; M i.295; S ii. iii.143; iv.215, 294; v.212; Dhs 964; DA i.310. -- In combn. with ˚kata it appears as usmī˚, e. g. at M i 132, 258.
-- gata heated, belonging to heat Dhs 964; as tt. one who mortifies or chastises himself, an ascetic J v.209 (= samaṇateja C.; cp. BSk. uṣṇagata & uṣmagata Divy 166, 240, 271. 469, & see Kern's mistakes at Toev. s. v.).
Ussa (adj.) [der. fr. ud = *ud -- s(y)a, in analogy to oma fr. ava; but taken by Kern, Toev. s. v. as an abbreviated ussada] superior, higher (opp. oma inferior) A iii.359; Sn 860 (= Nd1 251 with spelling ossa), 954.
Ussakkati1 [ud + sakkati, see sakkati] to creep out or up to, to rise A iii.241 sq.; Miln 260.
Ussakkati2 [by -- form of ussukkati] to endeavour Vism 437; VvA 95 (Caus. II. ussakkāpesi), 214.
Ussankita (adj.) [pp. of ud + śank] = ussankin A iii.128; DhA iii.485 (+ pari˚; cp. ā˚).
Ussankin (adj.) [fr. ud + śank] distrustful, fearful, anxious Vin ii.192.
Ussankha (adj.) [ud + sankha] with ankles midway (?) in ˚pāda the 7th of the characteristics of a Mahāpurisa D ii.17; iii.143, 154; DA explains: the ankles are not over the heels, but midway in the length of the foot.
Ussajjati [ud + sṛj, cp. BSk. protsṛjati Divy 587] to dis- miss, set free, take off, hurl A iv.191.
Ussaṭa [pp. of ud + sarati of sṛ, cp. saṭa for *sūta] run away M ii.65.
Ussada [most likely to ud + syad; see ussanna]: this word is beset with difficulties, the phrase satt -- ussada is applied in all kinds of meanings, evidently the result of an original application & meaning having become obliterated. satt˚ is taken as *sapta (seven) as well as *sattva (being), ussada as prominence, protuberance, fulness, arrogance. The meanings may be tabulated as follows: (1) prominence (cp. Sk. utsedha), used in characterisation of the Nirayas, as "projecting, prominent hells", ussadanirayā (but see also below 4) J i.174; iv.3, 422 (pallankaŋ, v. l. caturassạŋ, with four corners); v.266. -- adj. prominent ThA 13 (tej -- ussadehi ariyamaggadhammehi, or as below 4?). -- 2. protuberance, bump, swelling J iv.188; also in phrase sattussada having 7 protuberances, a qualification of the Mahāpurisa D iii.151 (viz. on both hands, feet, shoulders, and on his back). -- 3. rubbing in, anointing, ointment; adj. anointed with ( -- ˚), in candan˚ J iii.139; iv.60; Th 1, 267; Vv 537; DhA i.28; VvA 237. -- 4. a crowd adj. full of ( -- ˚) in phrase sattussada crowded with (human beings) D i.87 (cp. DA i.245: aneka -- satta -- samākiṇṇa; but in same sense BSk. sapt -- otsada Divy 620, 621); Pv iv.18 (of Niraya = full of beings, expld. by sattehi ussanna uparûpari nicita PvA 221. -- 5. qualification, characteristic, mark, attribute, in catussada "having the four qualifications (of a good village)" J iv.309 (viz. plenty of people, corn, wood and water C.). The phrase is evidently shaped after D i.87 (under 4). As "preponderant quality, characteristic" we find ussada used at Vism 103 (cf. Asl. 267) in combns. lobh˚, dos˚, moh˚, alobh˚ etc. (quoted from the "Ussadakittana"), and similarly at VvA 19 in Dhammapāla's definition of manussa (lobhɔādīhi alobhɔādīhi sahitassa manassa ussannatāya manussā), viz. sattā manussa -- jātikā tesu lobhɔ <-> ādayo alobhɔādayo ca ussadā. -- 6. (metaph.) self -- elevation, arrogance, conceit, haughtiness Vin i.3; Sn 515, 624 (an˚ = taṇhā -- ussada -- abhāvena SnA 467), 783 (expld. by Nd1 72 under formula sattussada; i. e. showing 7 bad qualities, viz. rāga, dosa, moha etc.), 855. -- See also ussādana, ussādeti etc.
Ussadaka (adj.) [fr. ussada 4] over -- full, overflowing A iii.231, 234 (˚jāta, of a kettle, with vv. ll. ussuraka˚ & ussuka˚).
Ussanna (adj.) [pp. of ud + syad, cp. abhisanna] -- 1. overflowing, heaped up, crowded; extensive, abundant, preponderant, excessive, full of (˚ -- ) Vin i.285 (cīvaraŋ u. overstocked; ii.270 (āmisaŋ too abundant); iii.286; Th 2, 444 (= upacita ThA 271); J i.48, 145 ˚kusalamūla); DhA i.26 (id.); (lobho etc.) Asl. 267; Miln 223 (id.); J i.336 (kāla, fulfilled); iii.418; iv.140; Pv iii.51 (˚puñña, cp. PvA 197); PvA 71 (˚pabhā thick glow). Cp. accussanna. -- 2. anointed VvA 237. -- 3. spread out, wide DhA ii.67 (mahāpaṭhavī u.), 72 (id.).
Ussannatā (f.) [abstr. fr. ussanna] accumulation, fulness, plenty Kvu 467 (where Kvu trsln. p. 275 gives ussadattā); VvA 18, 19.
Ussaya in ˚vādika Vin iv.224 is a variant of usuyya˚ "using envious language, quarrelsome". -- Another ussaya [fr. ud + śri, cp. Sk. ucchrita, P. ussita & ussāpeti] meaning "accumulation" is found in cpd. samussaya only.
Ussayāpeti see udassaye.
Ussarati [ud + sarati of sṛ] to run out, run away J i.434 (imper. ussaratha); v.437. -- pp. ussaṭa (q. v.). -- Caus. ussāreti (q. v.).
Ussava [Sk. utsava] feast, making merry, holiday Vin iii. 249; J i.475; ii.13, 248; VvA 7, 109 (˚divasa).
Ussahati [ud + sah, cp. BSk. utsaha Jtm 215; utsahetavya Divy 494; utsahana Divy 490; ucchahate for utsahate Av. Ś ii.21] to be able, to be fit for, to dare, venture Vin i.47, 83; ii.208; iii.17; D i.135; S iv.308, 310; Miln 242; VvA 100. -- Caus. ussāheti (see pp. ussāhita).
Ussāda [fr. ussādeti] throwing up on DA i.122.
Ussādana (nt.) [to ussādeti, cp. ussādita] -- 1. overflowing, piling up, abundance M iii.230 (opp. apasādana). -- 2. (probably confused with ussāraṇa) tumult, uproar, confusion A iii.91, 92 (v. l. ussāraṇa) = Pug 66 (= hatthiassarathâdīnaŋ cɔeva balakāyassa ca uccāsadda -- mahāsaddo Pug A 249).
Ussādita [fr. ussādeti, BSk. ucchrāyita Divy 76, 77, 466]. [See ussāpita & ussārita under ussāpeti & ussāreti. There exists in Pāli as well as in BSk. a confusion of different roots to express the notion of raising, rising, lifting & unfolding, viz. sṛ, syad, śri, sad, chad. (See ussada, ucchādana, ussādeti, ussāpeti, ussāreti)].
Ussādiyati [Pass. med. of ussādeti, cp. ussada 4] to be in abundance, to be over Vin ii.167.
Ussādeti [denom. fr. ussada 1] -- 1. to dismiss D iii.128 [for ussāreti1] -- 2. to raise, cause to rise up on, haul up, pile up M i.135; iii.230; A iv.198, 201; Miln 187, 250. -- Pass. ussādiyati (q. v.). -- pp. ussādita (q. v.).
Ussāpana (nt.) [fr. ussāpeti] lifting up, raising, erecting, unfolding (of a flag or banner) A iv.41; Nd2 503 (dhamma -- dhajassa).
Ussāpita [pp. of ussāpeti, cp. ussādita] lifted, raised, un- furled Miln 328 (dhamma -- dhaja); J ii.219.
Ussāpeti [Caus. of ud + śri, cp. BSk. ucchrāpayati Av. S i.384, 386, 387; ii.2] to lift up, erect, raise, exalt Vin ii.195; A iv.43; J ii.219; iv.16; v.95 (chattaŋ); PvA 75 (id.); Miln 21; DhA i.3; iii 118 (kaṭṭhāni). -- pp. ussāpita & ussita (q. v.). See also usseti.
Ussāraṇa (nt.) [fr. ussāreti] procession, going or running about, tumult DhA ii.7 (so read for ossāraṇā). Cp. ussādana.
Ussārita [pp. of ussāreti2] lifted out or up Vism 63 (samudda- vīcīhi thale ussārita; v. l. ussādita).
Ussāreti1 [Caus. of ussarati] to cause to move back, to cause to go away or to recede Vin i.32, 46 (here a student, when folding up his master's robe, has to make the corners move back a hand's breadth each time. Then the crease or fold will change and not tend to wear through), 276; ii.237 (here the reading ussādeti may be preferred); J i.419; iv.349; v.347. -- Caus. II. ussārāpeti J ii.290.
Ussāreti2 [= ussādeti] to cause to raise aloft (of a flag), to lift J v.319 (= ussāpeti). -- pp. ussārita.
Ussāva1 [either = Sk. avaśyāya, or to ud + sru] hoar- frost, dew D ii.19; J iv.120; v.417; ˚bindu a dew drop A iv.137; Pv iv.15; SnA 458; in comparisons: Vism 231, 633.
Ussāva2 [fr. ud + sru] outflow, taint, stain (cp. āsava) DhA iv.165 (taṇhā˚; v. l. ussada, to ussada 6).
Ussāvana (nt.) [= ussāpana] proclamation (of a building as legal store house); in ˚antika within the proclaimed limit Vin i.239.
Ussāsa see nirussāsa.
Ussāha [Sk. utsāha & utsaha, see ussahati] strength, power, energy; endeavour, good -- will M ii.174; S v.440; A i. 147; ii.93, 195; iii.75, 307; iv.320; v.93 sq.; Miln 323, 329 (dhiti +) Vism 330; Sdhp 49, 223, 535, 619; SnA 50; DhA iii.394; PvA 31, 106, 166; VvA 32, 48. -- In exegetical literature often combd. with the quâsi synonym ussoḷhi e. g. at Nd2 s. v.; Dhs 13, 22, 289, 571.
Ussāhana (f.) [fr. ussahati cp. BSk. utsahana Divy 490] = ussāha Nett 8.
Ussāhita [pp. of ussāheti, Caus. of ussahati] determined, incited, encouraged, urged J i.329; VvA 109; PvA 201. Cp. sam˚.
Ussiñcati [ud + sic] to bale out, exhaust J i.450, ii.70; iv.16; Miln 261.
Ussiñcana (nt.) [fr. ussiñcati] drying, baling out, raising water, exhausting J i.417.
Ussita [Sk. ucchrita, pp. of ud + sri, see ussāpeti] erected, high S v.228; Th 1, 424 (pannaddhaja); J v.386; Vv 8415; VvA 339. Cp. sam˚.
Ussīsaka (nt.) [ud + sīsa + ka] the head of a bed, a pillow for the head J i.266; ii.410, 443; iv.154; v.99; vi.32, 37, 56; DhA i.184 (˚passe, opp. pāda -- passe).
Ussuka (adj.) [Sk. utsuka, also BSk. e. g. Jtm 3168] -- 1. endeavouring, zealous, eager, active S i.15 (an˚ inactive); A iv.266; Sn 298. -- 2. greedy, longing for Dh 199 (an˚).
Ussukita (adj.) = ussukin; only neg. an˚ free from greed VvA 74.
Ussukin (adj.) [fr. ussuka] greedy, longing; only neg. an˚ Pug 23.
Ussukka (nt.) [*utsukya fr. ussuka; cp. BSk. utsukya Divy 601 and autsukya Av. Ś i.85] zeal, energy, endeavour, hard work, eagerness Vin i.50; S iv.288, 291, 302; Nd2 s. v. Nett 29; VvA 147; PvA 5, 135; Vism 90 (āpajjati); 644 (˚ppahānaŋ). -- Cp. appossukka.
Ussukkatā (f.) = ussukka A y.195.
Ussukkati [denom. fr. ussukka] to endeavour D i.230. - Caus. II. ussukkāpeti to practice eagerly, to indulge in, to perform VvA 95, 98, 243. See also ussakkati .
Ussuta (adj.) [pp. of ud + sru, cp. avassuta] defiled, lust- ful (cp. āsava), only neg. an˚ free from defilement Dh 400.
Ussuyā, Ussuyaka, uss.
Ussussati [ud + sussati of śuṣ] to dry up (intrs.) S i.126; iii.149 (mahāsamuddo u.); Sn 985; J vi.195.
Ussūra (adj) [ut + sūra] "sun -- out", the sun being out; i. e. after sunrise or after noon, adverbially in ˚bhatta eating after mid -- day, unpunctual meals A iii.260, and ˚seyyā sleep after sunrise, sleeping late D iii.184; DhA ii.227. Besides as loc. adv. ussūre the sun having been up (for a long time), i. e. at evening Vin i 293; iv.77; J ii.286, also in ati -- ussūre too long after sunrise VvA 65; DhA iii.305.
Usseti [ud + śri] to erect, raise, stand up J iv 302; aor. ussesi J vi.203. -- Caus. ussāpeti; pp. ussita & ussāpita (q. v.).
Usseneti [denom. fr. ussena = ussayana, ud + śri (?)] to draw on to oneself, to be friendly S iii.89 (v. l. ussi˚); A ii.214 sq. (opp. paṭisseneti); Ps ii.167 (ussi˚); Kvu i. 93 (reading ussineti + visineti). See also paṭiseneti.
Usseḷheti (?) Vin ii.10 (for ussoḷh˚?); cp. ussoḷhikāya.
Ussota (adj.) [ud + sota] nt. ussotaŋ as adv. "up -- stream" Miln 117.
Ussoḷhi (f.) [a by -- form of ussāha fr. ud + sah, pp. *soḍha dialectical] exertion M i.103; S ii.132; v.440; A. ii. 93, 195; iii.307; iv.320; v.93 sq. Often comḅd. with ussāha (q. v.).
Ussoḷhikā (f.) [adj. of ussoḷhi] belonging to exertion, only in instr. as adv. ussoḷhikāya "in the way of exertion", i. e. ardently, keenly, eagerly S i.170 (naccati).
Uhunkara [onomat. uhu + kara, see under ulūka] an owl (lit. "uhu" -- maker) J vi.538 (= ulūka C.).
Ūkā (f.) [Sk. yūkā, prob. dialectical] a louse J i.453; ii. 324; iii.393; v.298; Miln 11; Vism 445; DhsA 307, 319; DhA iii.342; VvA 86.
is also used as linear measure (cp. Sk. yūkālikṣaŋ) VbhA 343 (where 7 likkhā are said to equal 1 ūkā).
Ūtagītaŋ at J i.290 in phrase "jimaŋ ūtagītaŋ gāyanto" read "imaŋ jūtagītaŋ g."
Ūna (adj.) [Vedic ūna; cp. Av. ūna, Gr. eu)_nis, Lat. vāpus, Goth. wans, Ags. won = E. want] wanting, deficient, less M ii.73; J v.330; DhA i.77; DhA iv.210. Mostly adverbially with numerals = one less, but one, minus (one or two); usually with eka (as ekūna one less, e. g. ekūna -- aṭṭhasataŋ (799) J i.57; ekūna -- pañcasate KhA 91, ekūna -- vīsati (19) Vism 287; ekenɔūnesu pañcasu attabhāvasatesu (499) J i.167; also with eka in instr. as eken'ūnapañcasatāni (deficient by one) Vin ii.285; KhA 91; sometimes without eka, e. g. ūnapañcasatāni (499) Vin iii.284; ūnavīsati (19) Vin iv.130, 148. With "two" less: dvīhi ūnaŋ sahassaŋ (998) J i.255. -- anūna not deficient, complete PvA 285 (= paripuṇṇa).
-- udara (ūnudara, ūnūdara, ūnodara) an empty stomach, adj. of empty stomach; ˚udara J ii.293; vi.295; ˚ūdara J vi.258; Miln 406; odara Sn 707; DhA i.170. -- bhāva depletion, deficiency SnA 463 (v. l. hānabhāva).
Ūnaka (adj.) [ūna + ka] deficient, wanting, lacking Vin iii.81, 254; iv.263; Sn 721; Miln 310, 311, (˚satta -- vassika one who is not yet 7 years old), 414; DhA i.79.
Ūnatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. ūna] depletion, deficiency Vin ii. 239; J v.450.
Ūpāya at DhA ii.93 stands for upāya.
Ūpiya see upiya & opiya.
Ūmika [f. ūmi] wave Miln 197 (˚vanka waterfall, cataract).
Ūmī & Ūmi (f.) [Sk. ūrmi, fr. Idg. *ṷel (see nibbāna i.2); cp. Gr. e)lu/w io wind, e(/lic wound; Lat. volvo to roll; Ags. wylm wave; Ohg. wallan; also Sk. ulva, varutra, valaya, valli, vṛṇoti. See details in Walde, Lat. Wtb. under volvo] a wave M i.460 (˚bhaya); S iv.157; v.123 (˚jāta); A iii.232 sq. (id.); Sn 920; J ii.216; iii.262; iv.141; Miln 260 (˚jāta). -- Note. A parallel form of ūmī is ummī.
Ūru [Vedic ūru; cp. Lat. vārus bow -- legged, of Idg. *ṷā, to which also Ohg. wado = Ger. wade calf of leg] the thigh Sn 610; Vin ii.105 (in contrast with bāha); iii. 106; J i.277; ii.275, 443; iii.82; v.89, 155; Nd2 659 (so read for uru); Vv 6413; DA i.135 = Vin ii.190.
-- aṭṭhi(ka) the thigh bone M i.58; iii.92; J i.428 (ūraṭṭhika); KhA 49, 50 (ūraṭṭhi). -- (k)khambha stiffening or rigidity of the thigh, paralysis of the leg (as symptom of fright) M i.237; J v.23.
Ūsa [Sk. ūṣa] salt -- ground; saline substance, always combd. with khāra S iii 131 (˚gandha); A i.209.
Ūsara (adj.) [Sk. ūṣara, fr. ūṣa] saline S iv.315; A iv.237; DhsA 243. -- nt. ˚ŋ a spot with saline soil PvA 139 (gloss for ujjhangala).
Ūha see vy˚, sam˚.
Ūhacca1 (indecl.) [ger. of ūharati, ud + hṛ (or ava + hṛ, cp. ohacca & oharati) for uddharati 1 & 2] -- 1. lifting up, raising or rising J iii.206. -- 2. pulling out, taking away, removing D ii.254 (cp. DhA ii.181); S i.27 (v. l. for ohacca); Sn 1119 (= uddharitvā uppāṭayitvā Nd2 171).
Ūhacca2 (indecl.) [ger. of ūhanati2 = ūhadati] soiling by defe- cation, defecating J ii.71 (= vaccaŋ katvā C.).
Ūhaññati [Pass. of ūhanati1] to be soiled; to be disturbed aor. ūhaññi Vin i.48; M i.116; aor. also ūhani M i.243.
Ūhata1 [pp. of ud + hṛ or dhṛ thus for uddhaṭa as well as uddhata] -- 1. lifted, risen, raised Vin iii.70; J v.403. <-> 2. taken out, pulled out, destroyed Th 1, 223 = Nd2 974; Th 1, 514; Dh 338 (= ucchinna DhA iv.48). -- 3. soiled with excrements Vin ii.222.
Ūhata2 [pp. of ūhanati1] disturbed M i.116.
Ūhadati [for ūhanati2 (?) or formed secondarily fr. ūhacca or ohacca?] to defecate J ii.355; DhA ii.181 (so read with v. l. for T. ūhadayati).
Ūhana (nt.) [fr. ūhanati?] reasoning, consideration, examin- ation Miln 32 ("comprehension" trsl.; as characteristic of manasikāra); Vism 142 = DhsA 114 ("prescinding" trsl.; as characteristic of vitakka).
Ūhanati1 [ud + han] to disturb, shake up, defile, soil M i.243; J ii.73. -- Pass. aor. ūhani: see ūhaññati. -- pp. ūhata2 (q. v.). Cp. sam˚.
Ūhanati2 [either ud + han or ava + han, cp. ohanati] 1. to cut off, discharge, emit, defecate Vin i.78; iii.227. <-> 2. [prob. for ūharati, cp. ūhacca1] to lift up, to take away M i.117 (opp. odahati). Cp. ohana in bimb ohana. <-> ger. ūhacca2 (q. v.).
Ūharati [for uddharati] only in forms of ger. ūhacca1 and pp. ūhata1 (q. v.).
Ūhasati [either ud or ava + has, cp. avahasati] to laugh at, deride, mock A iii.91; J v.452 (+ pahasati); Pug 67 (= avahasati Pug A 249).
Ūhasana (nt.) [fr. ūhasati] laughing, mocking Miln 127.
Ūhā (f.) [etym.?] life, only in cpd. āyūha lifetime PvA 136, 162 (˚pariyosāna). -- As N. of a river at Miln 70. <-> Cp. BSk. ūhā in ūhāpoha Av. S i.209, 235.
Eka (adj. -- num.) [Vedic eka, i. e. e -- ka to Idg. *oi as in Av. aēva, Gr. oi)_os one, alone; and also with diff. suffix in Lat. ū -- nus, cp. Gr. oi)no/s (one on the dice), Goth. etc. ains = E. one] one. Eka follows the pron. declension, i. e. nom. pl. is eke (e. g. Sn 43, 294, 780 etc.) -- 1. "one" as number, either with or without contrast to two or more; often also "single" opp. to nānā various, many (q. v.). Very frequent by itself as well as with other numerals, ekangula one thumb Mhvs 29, 11; DhA iii. 127; ekapasse in one quarter DhA ii.52; ekamaccha a single fish J i.222. In enumeration: eka dve pañca dasa DhA i.24. With other numerals: eka -- tiŋsa (31) D ii.2; ˚saṭṭhi (61) Vin i.20; ˚navuti (91) DhA i.97; ˚sata (101) DhA ii.14. Cp. use of "one less" in ekūna (see under cpds. & ūna). -- 2. (as predicative and adj.) one, by oneself, one only, alone, solitary A iii.67 (ek -- uddesa); J i.59 (ekadivasena on the one day only, i. e. on the same day); Dh 395; Sn 35, 1136 (see Nd2 172a), ekaŋ ekaŋ one by one S i 104 (devo ekaŋ ekaŋ phusāyati rains drop by drop), cp. ekameka. -- 3. a certain one, some one, some; adj. in function of an indefinite article = a, one (definite or indefinite): ekasmiŋ samaye once upon a time J i.306; ekena upāyena by some means J iii.393; ekaŋ kulaŋ gantuŋ to a certain clan (corresp. with asuka) DhA i.45; ekadivasaŋ one day J i.58; iii.26; PvA 67. Cp. Sn 1069 (see Nd2 172b). -- All these three categories are found represented in freq. cpds., of which the foll. are but a small selection.
-- akkhi see ˚pokkhara. -- agga calm, tranquil (of persons just converted), collected [cp. Buddh. Sk. ekāgra Jtm 3170] S iv.125; A i.70, 266; ii.14, 29; iii.175 (˚citta), 391; Sn 341; J i.88; Nett 28, cp. Miln 139. -- aggatā concentration; capacity to individualise; contemplation, tranquillity of mind (see on term Cpd. 16, 1785, 237, 240) S v.21, 197, 269 (cittassa); A i.36; iv.40; Dhs 11 (cittassa); Vism 84. -- anga a part, divisioh, something belonging to J iii.308; Ud 69. -- angaṇa one (clear) space J ii.357. -- āgārika a thief, robber D i.52, 166; A i.154, 295; ii.206; iii.129; Nd1 416; Nd2 304 iii.a. DA i.159 (= ekam eva gharaŋ parivāretvā vilumpanaŋ DA i.159). -- āyana leading to one goal, direct way or "leading to the goal as the one & only way (magga) M i.63; S v.167, 185. -- ārakkha having one protector or guardian D iii.269; A v.29 sq. -- ālopika = ekāgārika D i.166; A i.295; ii.206. -- āsana sitting or living alone M i.437; Sn 718; Dh 305; J v.397; Miln 342; Vism 60 (expld. with reference to eating, viz. ekāsane bhojanaŋ ekāsanaŋ, perhaps comparing āsana with asana2. The foll. ˚āsanika is ibid. expld. as "taŋ sīlam assā ti ekāsaniko"). -- āsanika one who keeps to himself Miln 20, 216; Vism 69. -- âha one day M i.88; usually in cpd. ekâhadvîhaŋ one or two days J i.255; DhA i.391. -- âhika of or for one day D i.166. -- uttarika( -- nikāya) is another title for Anguttarika -- nikāya Miln 392. -- ūna one less, minus one, usually as 1st part of a numeral cpd., like ˚vīsati (20 -- 1 = 19) DhA i.4; ˚paññāsa (49) J iii.220; ˚saṭṭhi (59) DhA iii.412; ˚pañcasatā (499) DhA ii.204. See ūna. -- eka one by one, each, severally, one to each D ii.18 (˚loma); iii.144 (id.), 157; J i.222; DhA i.101 (ekekassa no ekekaŋ māsaŋ one month for each of us); ii.114; VvA 256; PvA 42, 43. -- ghana compact, solid, hard Dh 81. -- cara wandering or living alone, solitary S i.16; Sn 166, 451; Dh 37. -- cariyā walking alone, solitude Dh 61; Sn 820. -- cārin = ˚cara Miln 105. -- cittakkhaṇika of the duration of one thought Vism 138. -- cintin "thinking one thing (only)", simple Miln 92. -- thūpa (all) in one heap, mixed up, together J v.17 (= sūkarapotakā viya C.). -- doṇikā( -- nāvā) a trough -- shaped canoe with an outrigger J vi.305. -- paṭalika having a single sole (of sandals, upāhanā) Vism 125. -- paṭṭa single cloth (cp. dupaṭṭa) Vism 109. -- padika( -- magga) a small (lit. for one foot) foot -- path J i.315; v.491. -- pala one carat worth (see pala) Vism 339. -- passayika is to be read ekɔapassayika (see under apa˚). -- pahārena all at once Vism 418; DhsA 333. -- piṭaka knowing one Piṭaka Vism 62. -- puttika having only one son KhA 237. -- purisika (itthi) (a woman) true to one man J i.290. -- pokkhara a sort of drum J vi.21, 580 (C. explns. by ek -- akkhi -- bherī). -- bījin having only one (more) seed, i. e. destined to be reborn only once S v.205; A i.233; iv.380; Nett 189. -- bhattika having one meal a day A i.212; iii.216; J i.91. -- bhattakinī a woman true to one husband J iii.63. -- rajja sole sovereignty Dh 178; PvA 74. -- rājā universal king J i.47 (of the Sun). -- vāciya a single remark or objection J ii.353. -- vāraŋ once J i.292; ˚vārena id. DhA i.10. -- sadisa fully alike or resembling, identical J i.291. -- sama equal J vi.261. -- sāṭa & sāṭaka having a single vestment, a "one -- rober" S i.78 (˚ka); Ud 65.
Ekaŋsa1 (adj.) [eka + aŋsa1] belonging to one shoulder, on or with one shoulder; only in phṛase ekaŋsaŋ uttarāsangaŋ karoti to arrange the upper robe over one shoulder (the left) Vin i.46; ii.188 & passim.
Ekaŋsa2 [eka + aŋsa1 or better aŋsa2] "one part or point", i. e. one -- pointedness, definiteness; affirmation, certainty, absoluteness D i.153; A ii.46; Sn 427, 1027; J iii.224 (ekaŋsatthe nipāto for "nūna"); SnA 414 (˚vacana for "taggha"). -- Opp. an˚ Miln 225. -- instr. ekaŋsena as adv. for certain, absolutely, definitely, inevitably D i.122, 161, 162; M i.393; S iv.326; A v.190; J i.150; iii. 224; PvA 11.
Ekaŋsika (adj.) [fr. ekaŋsa2] certain D i.189, 191; an˚ uncertain, indefinite D i.191.
Ekaŋsikatā (f.) [abstr. fr. ekaŋsika] as neg. an˚ indefini- teness Miln 93.
Ekaka (adj.) [eka + ka] single, alone, solitary Vin ii.212; J i.255; ii.234; iv.2. -- f. ekikā Vin iv.229; J i.307; iii.139.
Ekacca (adj.) [der. fr. eka with suffix *tya, implying likeness or comparison, lit. "one -- like", cp. E. one -- like = one -- ly = only] one, certain, definite D i.162, A i.8; often in pl. ekacce some, a few D i.118; A v.194; Th 2, 216; J ii. 129; iii.126. See also app˚ under api.
Ekaccika (adj.) [fr. ekacca] single, not doubled (of cloth, opp. to diguṇa) J v.216 (˚vasana = eka -- paṭṭa -- nivattha).
Ekacciya (adj.) = ekacca S i.199; J iv.259; acc. as adv. ˚ŋ once, single Vin i.289 (cp. Vin Texts ii.212).
Ekajjhaŋ (adv.) [fr. eka, cp. literary Sk. aikadhyaŋ, but BSk. ekadhyaŋ M Vastu i.304] in the same place, in conjunction, together Miln 144 (karoti), KhA 167; SnA 38.
Ekato (adv.) [abl. formation fr. eka, cp. Sk. ekataḥ] -- 1. on the one side (opp. on the other) J iii.51; iv.141. <-> 2. together J ii.415; iii.57 (vasanto), 52 (sannipatanti), 391; iv.390; DhA i.18. ekato karoti to put together, to collect VvA 3. ekato hutvā "coming to one", agreeing DhA i.102, cp. ekato ahesuŋ J i.201.
Ekatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. eka] -- 1. unity D i.31. -- 2. lone- liness, solitude, separation Sn 718; Th 1, 49; Miln 162; J vi.64; VvA 202 (= ekībhāva).
Ekattatā (f.) [fr. ekatta] unity, combination, unification, concentration Nett 4, 72 sq, 107 sq.
Ekadatthu (adv.) [eka -- d -- atthu, cp. aññadatthu] once, defi- nitely, specially J iii.105 (= ekaŋsena C.).
Ekadā (adv.) [fr. eka] once, at the same time, at one time, once upon a time S i.162; Sn 198; DhA ii.41; Miln 213.
Ekanta (adj.) [Sk. ekānta] one -- sided, on one end, with one top, topmost (˚ -- ) usually in function of an adv. as ˚ -- , meaning "absolutely, extremely, extraordinary, quite" etc. <-> 1. (lit.) at one end, only in ˚lomin a woollen coverlet with a fringe at one end D i.7 (= ekato dasaŋ uṇṇāmayɔ attharaṇaŋ keci ekato uggata -- pupphan ti vadanti DA i.87); Vin i.192; ii.163, 169; A i.181. -- 2. (fig.) extremely, very much, in freq. combns; e. g. ˚kāḷaka A iii.406; iv. 11; ˚gata S v.225; A iii.326; ˚dukkha M i.74; S ii.173; iii.70 (+ sukha); A v.289; ˚dussīlya DhA iii.153; ˚nibbida A iii.83; iv.143; ˚paripuṇṇa S ii.219; v.204; ˚manāpa S iv.238; ˚sukha A ii.231; iii.409; ˚sukhin DA i.119 etc.
Ekantarika (adj.) [eka + antarika] with one in between, alternate J iv.195, ˚bhāvena (instr. adv.) in alternation, alternately Vism 374; ekantarikāya (adv.) with intervals Vism 244.
Ekamantaŋ (adv.) [eka + anta, acc. in adv. function, cp. BSk. ekamante M Vastu i.35] on one side, apart, aside Vin i.47, 94 = ii.272; D i.106; Sn p. 13 (expld. at SnA 140 as follows: bhāvana -- puŋsaka -- niddeso, ekɔokāsaŋ ekapassan ti vuttaŋ hoti, bhummatthe vā upayogavacanaŋ); Sn 580, 1009, 1017; J i.291; ii.102, 111; SnA 314, 456. <-> Also in loc. ekamante on one side DhA i.40.
Ekameka (adj.) [eka -- m -- eka, cp. BSk. ekameka M Vastu iii.358] one by one, each A v.173; Vv 782.
Ekavidha (adj.) [eka + vidha] of one kind, single, simple Vism 514; adv. ekavidhā singly, simply Vism 528.
Ekaso (adv.) [Sk. ekaśaḥ] singly, one by one J iii.224 (an˚).
Ekākiya (adj.) alone, solitary Th 1, 541; Miln 398.
Ekādasa (num.) [Sk. ekādaśa] eleven Vin i.19. -- num. ord. ekādasama the eleventh Sn 111, 113.
Ekānika (adj) = ekākiya; instr. ekānikena as adv. "by oneself" Miln 402.
Ekikā see ekaka.
Ekībhāva [eka + bhāva, with ī for a in compn. with bhū] being alone, loneliness, solitude D iii 245; M ii.250; A iii.289; v.89, 164; Vism 34; SnA 92, 93; DhA ii.103; VvA 202; DA i.253, 309.
Ekodi (adj.) [most likely eka + odi for odhi, see avadhi2 & cp. avadahati, avadahana, lit. of one attention, limited to one point. Thus also suggested by Morris J.P.T.S. 1885, 32 sq. The word was Sanskritised into ekoti, e. g. at M Vastu iii.212, 213; Lal. Vist. 147, 439] concentrated, attentive, fixed A iii.354; Nd1 478. Usually in compn. with kṛ & bhū (which points however to a form ekoda˚ with the regular change of a to i in connection with these roots!), as ekodi -- karoti to concentrate M i.116; S iv. 263; ˚bhavati to become settled S iv.196; v.144; ˚bhūta concentrated Sn 975; ˚bhāva concentration, fixing one's mind on one point D i.37; iii.78, 131; A i.254; iii.24; Vism 156 (expld. as eko udeti); Dhs 161 (cp. Dhs trsln. 46); DhsA 169; Nett 89.
Ejā (f.) [to iñj, q. v. and see ānejja. There is also a Sk. root ej to stir, move] motion, turbulence, distraction, seduction, craving S iv.64; Sn 791; It 91; Nd1 91, 353; Dhs 1059 (cp. Dhs trslu. 277); VvA 232. -- aneja (adj.) unmoved, undisturbed, calm, passionless S i.27, 141, 159; iii.83; iv.64; A ii.15; Nd1 353; VvA 107.
Eṭṭha [pp. of ā + iṣ] see pariy˚; do. ˚eṭṭhi.
Eṭṭhi (f.) [fr. eṭṭha, ā + iṣ, cp. Sk. eṣṭi] desire, wish, in combn. with gaveṭṭhi pariyeṭṭhi etc. Vbh 353 = Vism 23, 29 etc.
Eṇi (f.) [etym.? dial.] a kind of antelope, only two foll. cpds.: ˚jangha "limbed like the antelope" (one of the physical characteristics of the Superman) D ii.17; iii.143, 156; M ii.136; S i.16; Sn 165; ˚miga the eṇi deer J v.416; SnA 207, 217.
Eṇeyya D iii.157; J vi.537 sq., & Eṇeyyaka A i.48; ii. 122; J v.155 Nd2 604 = eṇi.
Etad (pron. adj.) [Vedic etad, of pron. base *e; see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under equidem] demonstr. pron. "this", with on the whole the same meaning and function as tad, only more definite and emphatic. Declined like tad. Cases: nt. sg. etad (poetical -- archaic form) A ii.17; Sn 274, 430, 822, 1087; J i.61, 279; & etaŋ (the usual form) Sn 51, 207, 1036, 1115; J ii.159; pl. etāni Sn 52; J ii.159. -- m. sg. esa Sn 81, 416, 1052; J i.279; ii. 159; Miln 18; DhA i.18; & eso Sn 61, 312, 393; J vi. 336; pl. ete Sn 188, 760; J i.223. -- f. sg. esā Sn 80, 451; J i.307; pl. etā Sn 297, 897; J ii.129. -- Oblique cases: gen. dat. etassa J ii.159; f. etissā J iii.280; instr. etena Sn 655; J i.222; pl. loc. etesu Sn 248, 339, 1055; f. etāsu Sn 607. Other cases regular & frequent.
Etarahi (adv.) [Sk. etarhi, cp. tarahi & carahi] now, at present D i.29, 151, 179, 200; ii.3; J i.215 (opp. tadā); iii.82; vi.364 (instead of paccuppanna).
Etādisa (adj.) [etad + disa, of dṛś, cp. Sk. etādṛśa] such, such like, of this kind D ii.157; Sn 588, 681, 836; Pv i. 94; iv.186 (= edisa yathā -- vutta -- rūpa PvA 243); PvA ii.71.
Eti [P. eti represents Sk. eti as well as ā -- eti, i. e. to go and to come (here); with Sk. eti cp. Av. aeiti, Gr. ei)_si, Lat. eo, it; Goth. iddja went, Obulg. iti, Oir. etha] to go, go to, reach; often (= ā + eti) to come back, return Sn 364, 376, 666 (come); J vi.365 (return); ppr. ento J iii.433 (acc. suriyaŋ atthaŋ entaŋ the setting sun); imper. 2nd sg. ehi only in meaning "come" (see separately), 3rd etu D i.60; 2nd pl. etha D i.211; Sn 997; J ii.129; DhA i.95 (in admission formula "etha bhikkhavo" come ye [and be] bhikkhus! See ehi bhikkhu). -- fut. essati J vi.190, 365, & ehiti J ii.153; 2nd sg. ehisi Dh 236, 369. -- pp. ita (q. v.).
Etta (adv.) [= Sk. atra, see also ettha] there, here Pv i.56 (sic; cp. KhA 254 note).
Ettaka (adj.) [etta + ka, contrasting -- comparative function, cp. tattaka] so much, this much, according to context referring either to deficiency or abundance, thus developing 2 meanings, viz. (1) just as much (& no more), only so little, all this, just this, such a small number, a little; pl. so few, just so many D i.117 (opp. aparimāṇa), 124; A iv.114; Nd2 304iii. (ettakena na tussati is not satisfied with this much); Vv 7912 (cp. VvA 307); Miln 10, 18 (alaŋ ettakena enough of this much); DhA i.90 (enough, this much), 93, 399 (pl. ettakā); ii.54 (only one), 174 sq.; VvA 233 (a little), 323. -- ettakaŋ kālaŋ a short time (but see also under 2) J i.34; DhA ii.20. -- (2) ever so much (and not less), so much, pl. so many, ever so many, so & so many, such a lot A iii.337; J i.207 (pl. ettakā), 375 (nt. ettakaŋ); iii.80 (id.), 94 (˚ŋ dhanaŋ such great wealth); Miln 37 (pl.); DhA i.392, 396 (pl. f. ettikā), 397, 398; ii.14, 89 (pl.), 241 (pl. so many); VvA 65 (dhanaŋ). -- ettakaŋ kālaŋ for some time, such a long time (see also above, under 1) DhA ii.62, 81; iii.318; VvA 330.
Ettato (adv.) [with double suffix for *atra -- taḥ] from here, therefore S i.185.
Ettāvatā (adv.) [fr. etta = ettaka, cp. kittāvatā: kittaka] so far, to that extent, even by this much D i.205, 207; S ii.17; Sn 478; Vv 556 (cp. VvA 248); Pv iv.167; Miln 14; DA i.80; SnA 4; PvA 243.
Etto (adv.) [in analogy to ito fr. *et˚, as ito fr. *it˚] orig. abl. of etad; from this, from it, thence, hence, out of here Sn 448, 875; J i.223 (opp. ito), v.498; Pv i.11; ii.104; DhA ii.80 (ito vā etto vā here & there); PvA 103.
Ettha (adv.) [= Sk. atra, cp. etta] here, in this place; also temporal "now", & modal "in this case, in this matter" D ii.12; S v.375; Dh 174; Sn 61, 171, 424, 441, 502, 1037, & freq. passim.
Edisa (adj.) [Sk. īdṛśa] such like, such Vv 373; PvA 69, 243.
Edisaka = edisa Sn 313.
Edha [Sk. edhaḥ, cp. idhma, inddhe; Gr. ai)_qos, a)i/qw, Lat. aedes, Ohg. eit, Ags. ād funeral pile, etc. See idhuma & iṭṭhaka] fuel, fire etc. Only in adj. neg. an˚ without fuel J iv.26.
Edhati [edh, cp. iddhati] to prosper, succeed in, increase S i.217 (sukhaŋ); Sn 298; Dh 193; J i.223; iii.151. <-> sukh˚edhita at Vin iii.13 is better read as sukhe ṭhita, as at J vi.219.
Ena (pron.) [fr. pron. base *ē̆, cp. e -- ka; to this cp. in form & meaning Lat. ūnus, Gr. oi)no/s, Ohg. ein, Oir. ōin] only used in acc. enaŋ (taŋ enaŋ) "him, this one, the same" Sn 583, 981, 1114; Dh 118, 313; J iii.395; Nd2 304iii.b. See also naŋ.
Eraka1 (adj.) [fr. ereti] driving away, moving J iv.20 (˚vāta); ˚vattika a certain kind of torture M i.87 = A i.47 = ii.122 = Nd2 604 = Miln 197.
Eraka2 (nt.) [fr. ereti] Typha -- grass J iv.88. As eragu(?) a kind of grass used for making coverlets Vin i.196 (eraka Bdhgh. on D i.166).
Eraṇḍa [dial.?] the castor oil plant Nd2 680ii.; J ii.440. Cp. elaṇḍa.
Erāvaṇa N. of Indra's elephant Sn 379; Vv 4413; VvA 15.
Erita [pp. of ereti] moved, shaken, driven J iv.424; Vv 394, 424; Th 1, 104, Pv ii.123; Vism 172 (+ samerita), 342 (vāt˚ moved by the wind). Cp. īrita.
Ereti [=īreti (q. v.) Caus. of īr, Sk. īrayati] to move, set into motion, raise (one's voice) M i.21; Sn 350 (eraya imper.); Th 1, 209 (eraye); J iv.478. -- pp. erita (q.v.).
Ela (nt.) [?] salt(?) or water(?) in elambiya (= el˚ambu -- ja) born in (salt) water Sn 845 (= ela -- saññaka ambumhi jāta); Nd1 202 (elaŋ vuccati udakaŋ).
Elaṇḍa = eraṇḍa (?) M i.124.
Elambaraka [?] N. of a creeping vine J vi.536.
Elāluka (Eḷāluka) (nt.) [etym.?] a kind of cucumber(?) Vv 3329; J i.205; v.37; DhA i.278.
Eḷa (nt.) [Sk. enas] in eḷamūga deaf & dumb A ii.252; iii.436; iv.226; Miln 20, 251 (cp. Miln trsl. ii.71). A rather strange use and expln. of eḷamūga (with ref. to a snake "spitting") we find at J iii.347, where it is expld. as "eḷa -- paggharantena mukhena eḷamūgaŋ" i. e. called eḷamūga because of the saliva (foam?) dripping from its mouth, v. l. elamukha. -- Cp. neḷa & aneḷa.
Eḷaka1 [?] a threshold (see Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 146) Vin ii.149 (˚pādaka -- pītha, why not "having feet resembling those of a ram"? Cp. Vin Texts iii.165 "a chair raised on a pedestal"); D i.166; A i.295; ii.206. The word & its meaning seems uncertain.
Eḷaka2 [Sk. eḍaka] a ram, a wild goat Sn 309; Vism 500 (in simile); J i.166; Pug A 233 (= urabbha). -- f. eḷakā S ii.228, eḷakī Th 2, 438, eḷikī J iii.481.
Eḷagala see aneḷa.
Eḷagalā (f.) [dial.?] the plant Cassia Tora (cp. Sk. eḍagaja the ringworm -- shrub, Cassia Alata, after Halāyudha), J iii. 222 (= kambojī C.).
Eḷagga in kāmāmis˚ at PvA 107 is to be read kāmā- mise lagga˚.
Eva (adv.) [Vedic eva] emphatic part "so, even, just"; very freq. in all contexts & combns. -- 1. eva J i.61 (ajjɔeva this veryday), 278 (tathɔeva likewise); ii.113 (ahaŋ e. just I), 154 (ekam e. just one), 160 (attano e. his very own). -- 2. eva often appears with prothetic (sandhi -- )y as yeva, most frequently after i and e, but also after the other vowels and ŋ, cp. J i.293, 307; ii.110, 128, 129, 159; iv.3; vi.363. -- 3. After ŋ eva also takes the form of ñeva, mostly with assimilation of ŋ to ñ, viz. tañ ñeva J i.223; tasmiñ ñeva J i.139; ahañ ñeva Miln 40. -- 4. After long vowels eva is often shortened to va (q. v.).
-- rūpa (1) such, like that Sn 279, 280; It 108; J ii. 352, etc. -- (2) of such form, beauty or virtue J i.294; iii.128, etc.
Evaŋ (adv.) [Vedic evaŋ] so, thus, in this way, either re- ferring to what precedes or what follows, e. g. (1) thus (as mentioned, expld. at Vism 528 as "niddiṭṭha -- nayanidassana") D i.193 (evaŋ sante this being being so), 195 (id.); Vin ii.194 (evaŋ bhante, yes); J i.222; Pv ii.1312 evaŋ etaŋ, just so). -- (2) thus (as follows) M i. 483 (evaŋ me sutaŋ "thus have I heard"). -- Often combd. with similar emphatic part., as evam eva kho "in just the same way" (in final conclusions) D i.104, 199, 228, 237, 239; in older form evaŋ byā kho (= evam iva kho) Vin ii.26; iv.134 = DA i.27; evam evaŋ "just so" D i.51; Sn 1115; evaŋ kho D i.113; evam pi Sn 1134; evaŋ su D i.104; etc. etc.
-- diṭṭhin holding such a view M i.484. -- nāma having that name M i.429.
Esa1 see etad.
Esa2 (adj.) = esin Sn 286.
Esati [ā + iṣ1 with confusion of iṣ1 and iṣ2, icchati, see also ajjhesati, anvesati, pariyesati] to seek, search, strive for Sn 592 (esāno ppr. med.), 919; Dh 131.
Esanā (f.) [fr. esati] desire, longing, wish D iii.216, 270; M i.79; S v.54, 139; A i.93; ii.41; v.31; VvA 83; PvA 98, 163, 265. See also anesanā, isi & pariy˚.
Esanī (f.) [fr. iṣ] a surgeon's probe M ii.256.
Esabha ( -- ˚) a by -- form of usabha (q. v.), in cpd. rathesabha.
Esika (nt.) & Esikā1 (f.) [a by -- form of isīkā] a pillar, post A iv.106, 109. Freq. in cpd. ˚ṭṭhāyin as stable as a pillar D i.14; S iii.202, 211, 217; DA i.105.
Esikā2 desire, see abbūḷha.
Esin (adj.) [Sk. eṣin, of iṣ] seeking, wishing, desiring S ii.11 (sambhav˚); J i.87 (phal˚); iv.26 (dukkham˚); Pv ii.928 (gharam); PvA 132.
Ehi [imper. of eti] come, come here Sn 165; J ii 159; vi. 367; DhA i.49. In the later language part. of exhortation = Gr. a)/ge, Lat. age, "come on" DhA ii.91; PvA 201 (+ tāva = a)/ge dh/). ehipassika (adj.) [ehi + passa + ika] of the Dhamma, that which invites every man to come to see for himself, open to all, expld. at Vism 216 as "ehi, passa imaŋ dhamman ti evaŋ pavattaŋ ehi -- passavidhaŋ arahatī ti", D ii.217; iii.5, 227; S i.9; iv.41, 272; v.343; A i.158; ii.198. ehibhadantika one who accepts an invitation D i.166; M i.342; ii.161; A i.295; ii.206. ehi bhikkhu "come bhikkhu!" the oldest formula of admission to the order Vin i.12; iii.24; DhA i.87; J i.82; f. ehi bhikkhunī Vin iv.214 pl. etha bhikkhavo DhA i.95. ehibhikkhu -- pabbajjā initiation into Bhikkhuship SnA 456. ehibhikkhubhāva -- state of being invited to join the Sangha, admission to the Order J i.82, 86; DhA ii.32; SnA 456. ehisāgata -- (& svāgata -- )vādin a man of courtesy (lit. one who habitually says: "come you are welcome") D i.116; Vin ii.11; iii.181.
O Initial o in Pali may represent a Vedic o or a Vedic au (see ojas, ogha, etc.). Or it may be guṇa of u (see oḷārika, opakammika, etc.). But it is usually a prefix representing Vedic ava. The form in o is the regular use in old Pali; there are only two or three cases where ava, for metrical or other reasons, introduced. In post -- canonical Pali the form in ava is the regular one. For new formations we believe there is no exception to this rule. But the old form in o has in a few cases, survived. Though o; standing alone, is derived from ava, yet compounds with o are almost invariably older than the corresponding compounds with ava (see note on ogamana).
Oka (nt.) [Vedic okas (nt.), fr. uc to like, thus orig. "comfort", hence place of comfort, sheltered place, habitation. The indigenous interpretation connects oka partly with okāsa = fig. room (for rising), chance, occasion (thus Nd1 487 on Sn 966: see anoka; SnA 573 ibid.; SnA 547: see anoka; SnA 573 ibid.; SnA 547: see below), partly with udaka (as contraction): see below on Dh 34. Geiger (P. Gr. § 20) considers oka to be a direct contraction of udaka (via *udaka, *utka, *ukka, *okka). The customary synomym for oka (both lit. & fig.) is ālaya] resting place, shelter, resort; house, dwelling; fig. (this meaning according to later commentators prevailing in anoka, liking, fondness, attachment to (worldly things) S iii.9 = Sn 844 (okam pahāya; oka here is expld. at SnA 547 by rūpa -- vatthɔ ādi -- viññaṇassɔ okāso); S v.24 = A v. 232 = Dh 87 (okā anokam āgamma); Dh 34 (oka -- m -- okata ubbhato, i. e. oka -- m -- okato from this & that abode, from all places, thus taken as okato, whereas Bdhgh. takes it as okasya okato and interprets the first oka as contracted form of udaka, water, which happens to fit in with the sense required at this passage, but is not warranted otherwise except by Bdhgh's quotation "okapuṇṇehi cīvarehī ti ettha udakaŋ". This quot. is taken from Vin i.253, which must be regarded as a corrupt passage cp. remarks of Bdhgh. on p. 387: oghapuṇṇehī ti pi pāṭho. The rest of his interpretation at DhA i.289 runs: "okaŋ okaŋ pahāya aniketa -- sārī ti ettha ālayo, idha (i. e. at Dh 34) ubhayam pi labbhati okamokato udaka -- sankhātā ālayā ti attho", i. e. from the water's abode. Bdhgh's expln. is of course problematic); Dh 91 (okam okaŋ jahanti "they leave whatever shelter they have", expld. by ālaya DhA ii.170).
-- cara (f. ˚carikā J vi.416; ˚cārikā M i.117) living in the house (said of animals), i. e. tame (cp. same etym. of "tame" = Lat. domus, domesticus). The passage M i. 117, 118 has caused confusion by oka being taken as "water". But from the context as well as from C. on J vi.416 it is clear that here a tame animal is meant by means of which other wild ones are caught. The passage at M i.117 runs "odaheyya okacaraŋ ṭhapeyya okacārikaŋ" i. e. he puts down a male decoy and places a female (to entice the others), opp. "ūhaneyya o. nāseyya o." i. e. takes away the male & kills the female. -- (ñ)jaha giving up the house (and its comfort), renouncing (the world), giving up attachment Sn 1101 (= ālayaŋjahaŋ SnA 598; cp. Nd2 176 with v. l. oghaŋjaha). -- anoka houseless, homeless, comfortless, renouncing, free from attachment: see separately.
Okaḍḍhati [o + kaḍḍhati] to drag away, remove Th 2, 444. See also ava˚.
Okantati (okkant˚) [o + kantati, cp. also apakantati] to cut off, cut out, cut away, carve; pres. okantati M i. 129; Pv iii.102 (= ava˚ PvA 213); ger. okantitvā J i. 154 (migaŋ o. after carving the deer); PvA 192 (piṭṭhi<-> maŋsāni), & okacca J iv.210 (T. okkacca, v. l. BB ukk˚; C. expls. by okkantitvā). -- pp. avakanta & avakantita.
Okappati [o + kappati] to preface, arrange, make ready, settle on, feel confident, put (trust) in Vin iv.4; Ps ii.19 (= saddahati ibid. 21); Miln 150, 234; DA i.243.
Okappanā (f.) [o + kappanā] fixing one's mind (on), sett- ling in, putting (trust) in, confidence Dhs 12, 25, 96, 288; Nett 15, 19, 28; Vbh 170.
Okappeti [o + kappeti] to fix one's mind on, to put one's trust in M i.11; Miln 234 (okappessati).
Okampeti [o + Caus. of kamp] to shake, to wag, only in phrase sīsaŋ okampeti to shake one's head M i.108, 171; S i.118.
Okassati [o + kassati, see also apakassati & avakaḍḍhati] to drag down, draw or pull away, distract, remove. Only in ger. okassa, always combd. with pasayha "removing by force" D ii.74 (T. okk˚); A iv.16 (T. okk˚, v.l. ok˚), 65 (id.); Miln 210. Also in Caus. okasseti to pull out, draw out Th 2, 116 (vaṭṭiŋ = dīpavaṭṭiŋ ākaḍḍheti ThA 117). [MSS. often spell okk˚].
Okāra [o + kāra fr. karoti, BSk. okāra, e. g. M Vastu iii. 357] only in stock phrase kāmānaŋ ādīnavo okāro sankileso D i.110, 148 (= lāmaka -- bhāva DA i 277); M i.115, 379, 405 sq.; ii.145; A iv.186; Nett 42 (v. l. vokāra); DhA i.6, 67. The exact meaning is uncertain. Etymologically it would be degradation. But Bdhgh. prefers folly, vanity, and this suits the context better.
Okāsa [ava + kāś to shine] -- 1. lit. "visibility", (visible) space as geometrical term, open space, atmosphere, air as space D i.34 (ananto okāso); Vism 184 (with disā & pariccheda), 243 (id.); PvA 14 (okāsaŋ pharitvā permeating the atmosphere). This meaning is more pronounced in ākāsa. -- 2. "visibility", i. e. appearance, as adj. looking like, appearing. This meaning closely resembles & often passes over into meaning 3, e. g. katokāsa kamma when the k. makes its appearance = when its chance or opportunity arises PvA 63; okāsaŋ deti to give one's appearance, i. e. to let any one see, to be seen by (dat.) PvA 19. -- 3. occasion, chance, opportunity, permission, consent, leave A i.253; iv.449; J iv.413 (vātassa o. natthi the wind has no access); SnA 547. -- In this meaning freq. in combn. with foll. verbs: (a) okāsaŋ karoti to give permission, to admit, allow; to give a chance or opportunity, freq. with pañhassa veyyā -- karaṇāya (to ask a question), e. g. D i.51, 205; M ii.142; S iv 57. <-> Vin i.114, 170; Nd1 487; PvA 222. -- Caus. ˚ŋ karoti Vin ii.5, 6, 276; Caus. II. ˚ŋ kārāpeti Vin i.114, 170. <-> katokāsa given permission (to speak), admitted in audience, granted leave Sn 1031; VvA 65 (raññā); anokāsakata without having got permission Vin i.114. -- (b) okāsaŋ yācati to ask permission M ii.123. -- (c) okāsaŋ deti to give permission, to consent, give room J ii.3; VvA 138. <-> (d) with bhū: anokāsa -- bhāva want of opportunity Sdhp 15; anokāsa -- bhūta not giving (lit. becoming) an opportunity SnA 573. Elliptically for o. detha Yogāvacara's Man. 4 etc.
-- âdhigama finding an opportunity D ii.214 sq.; A iv. 449. -- kamma giving opportunity or permission Sn p. 94 (˚kata allowed); Pv iv.111 (˚ŋ karoti to give permission). -- matta permission Sn p. 94. -- loka the visible world (= manussa -- loka) Vism 205; VvA 29.
Okāsati [ava + kāś] to be visible; Caus. okāseti to make visible, let appear, show S iv.290.
Okiṇṇa [pp. of okirati; BSk. avakīrṇa Divy 282; Jtm 3192] strewn over, beset by, covered with, full of J v.74, 370; PvA 86, 189 (= otata of Pv iii.33).
Okiraṇa [o + kiraṇa] casting out (see the later avakirati2), only as adj. -- f. okirinī (okilinī through dialect. variation) a cast -- out woman (cast -- out on acct of some cutaneous disease), in double combn. okilinī okirinī (perhaps only the latter should be written) Vin iii.107 = S ii.260 (in play of words with avakirati1). Bdhgh's allegorical expln. at Vin iii.273 puts okilinī = kilinnasarīrā, okiriṇī = angāraparikiṇṇa. Cp. kirāta.
Okirati [o + kirati] -- 1. to pour down on, pour out over M i.79; aor. okiri Vin iii.107 = S ii.260; Pv ii.38; PvA 82. -- 2. to cast -- out, reject, throw out: see okiraṇa. <-> pp. okiṇṇa (q. v.). -- Caus. II. okirāpeti to cause to pour out or to sprinkle over Vism 74 (vālikaŋ).
Okilinī see okiraṇa.
Okoṭimaka (adj.) [o + koṭi + mant + ka. Ava in BSk., in formula durvarṇa durdarśana avakoṭimaka Sp. Av. Ś i. 280. Kern (note on above passage) problematically refers it to Sk. avakūṭara = vairūpya (Pāṇini v.2, 30). The Commentary on S i.237 explns. by mahodara (fat -- bellied) as well as lakuṇṭaka (dwarf); Pug A 227 expls. by lakuṇṭaka only] lit. "having the top lowered", with the head squashed in or down, i. e. of compressed & bulging out stature; misshapen, deformed, of ugly shape (Mrs. Rh. D. trsls hunchback at S i.94, pot -- bellied at S i.237; Warren, Buddhism p. 426 trsls. decrepit). It occurs only in one stock phrase, viz. dubbaṇṇa dud -- das(s)ika okoṭimaka "of bad complexion, of ugly appearance and dwarfed" at Vin ii.90 = S i.94 = A i.107 = ii.85 = iii.285 sq. = Pug 51. The same also at M iii.169; S i.237; ii.279; Ud 76.
Okkanta [pp. of okkamati] coming on, approaching, taking place D ii.12; Miln 299 (middhe okkante). See also avakkanta S ii.174; iii.46.
Okkanti (f.) [fr. okkamati] entry (lit. descent), appearance, coming to be. Usually in stock phrase jāṭi sañjāti o. nibbatti M iii.249; S ii.3; iii.225; Nd2 257; Pug A 184. Also in gabbh˚ entry into the womb DA i.130.
Okkantika (adj.) [fr. okkanti] coming into existence again and again, recurring. Only as epithet of pīti, joy. The opposite is khaṇika, momentary Vism 143 = DhsA 115 (Expositor 153 trsls. "flooding").
Okkandika [kand or kram?] at J ii.448 is doubtful, v. l. okkantika. It is used adverbially: okkandikaŋ kīḷati to sport (loudly or joyfully). C. explns. as "migo viya okkandi -- katvā kīḷati"; in the way of roaring(?) or frisking about (?), like a deer.
Okkamati [o + kamati fr. kram] lit. to enter, go down into, fall into. fig. to come on, to develop, to appear in (of a subjective state). It is strange that this important word has been so much misunderstood, for the English idiom is the same. We say ʻ he went to sleep ʼ, without meaning that he went anywhere. So we may twist it round and say that ʻ sleep overcame him ʼ, without meaning any struggle. The two phrases mean exactly the same <-> an internal change, or developement, culminating in sleep. So in Pali niddā okkami sleep fell upon him, Vin i.15; niddaŋ okkami he fell on sleep, asleep, DhA i.9; PvA 47. At It 76 we hear that a dullness developed (dubbaṇṇiyaŋ okkami) on the body of a god, he lost his radiance. At D ii.12; M iii.119 a god, on his rebirth, entered his new mother's womb (kucchiŋ okkami). At D ii 63 occurs the question ʻ if consciousness were not to develop in the womb? ʼ (viññāṇaŋ na okkamissatha) S v.283 ʻ abiding in the sense of bliss ʼ (sukha -- saññaŋ okkamitvā). See also Pug 13 = 28 (niyāma okk˚, ʻ he enters on the Path ʼ). <-> Caus. okkāmeti to make enter, to bring to S iv.312 (saggaŋ). -- pp. okkanta. See also avakkamati.
Okkamana (nt.) [fr. okkamati] entering into, approaching, reaching M iii.6; A iii.108 (entering the path); also in phrase nibbānassa okkamanāya A iv.111 sq., cp. 230 sq.
Okkala see ukkala.
Okkassa see okassati.
Okkhāyati [ava + khāyati, corresp. to Sk. kṣeti fr. kṣi to lie] to lie low, to be restrained (in this sense evidently confounded with avakkhipati) S iv.144 sq. (cakkhuŋ etc. okkhāyati).
Okkhāyika (adj.) [fr. ava + khāyin fr. kṣi, cp. avakkhā- yati; Kern, Toev. s. v. suggests relation to BSk. avakhāta of khan, and compares Lal. V. 319] low -- lying, deep, remote, only in one phrase, viz. udaka -- tarakā gambhīragatā okkhāyikā M i.80, 245.
Okkhita [pp. of ava + ukkhati, Sk. avokṣita, fr. ukṣ to sprinkle] besprinkled, bestrewn with ( -- ˚) Th 2, 145 (candan˚ = candanânulitta ThA 137); J v.72 (so in v. l. T. reads okkita; C. explns. by okiṇṇa parikkita parivārita).
Okkhitta [pp. of okkhipati] thrown down, flung down, cast down, dropped; thrown out, rejected; only in phrase okkhitta -- cakkhu, with down -- cast eyes, i. e. turning the eyes away from any objectionable sight which might impair the morale of the bhikkhu; thus meaning "with eyes under control"Sn 63, 411, 972; Nd1 498; Nd2 177; Pv iv.344 (v. l. ukkh˚); VvA 6. -- For further use & meaning, see avakkhitta.
Okkhipati [ava + khipati; Sk. avakṣipati] to throw down or out, cast down, drop; fig. usually appld. to the eyes = cast down, hence transferred to the other senses and used in meaning "keep under, restrain, to have control over" (cp. also avakkhāyati); aor. ˚khipi A iv.264 (indriyāni); ger. ˚khipitvā Vin iv.18 (id.). -- pp. avakkhitta & okkhitta (q. v.).
Ogacchati [ava + gacchati] to go down, sink down, recede; of sun & moon: to set D i.240 (opp. uggacchati); A iv. 101 (udakāni og.). See also ava˚.
Ogaṇa (adj.) [Vedic ogaṇa with dial. o for ava] separated from the troop or crowd, standing alone, Vin i.80; J iv. 432 = (gaṇaŋ ohīna C.).
Ogadha ( -- ˚) (adj.) [Sk. avagāḍha; P. form with shortened a, fr. ava + gāh, see gādha1 & gāhati] immersed, merging into, diving or plunging into. Only in two main phrases, viz. Amatogadha & Nibbānogadha diving into N. <-> Besides these only in jagatɔogadha steeped in the world S i.186.
Ogamana (nt.) [o + gam + ana; Sk. avagamana. That word is rather more than a thousand years later than the Pāli one. It would be ridiculous were one to suppose that the P. could be derived from the Sk. On the other hand the Sk. cannot be derived from the P. for it was formed at a time & place when & where P. was unknown, just as the Pali was formed at a time & place when & where Sk. was unknown. The two words are quite independent. They have no connection with one another except that they are examples of a rule of word -- formation common to the two languages] going down, setting (of sun & moon), always in contrast to uggamana (rising), therefore freq. v.l. ogg˚ D i.10, 68; DA i.95 (= atthangamana); VvA 326.
Ogahana (nt.) [o + gahana fr. gāhati; Sk. avagāhana; concerning shortening of ā cp. avagadha] submersion, ducking, bathing; fig. for bathing -- place Sn 214 (= manussānaŋ nahāna -- tittha SnA 265). See also avagāhana.
Ogādha1 (adj.) [Sk. avagāḍha; ava + gādha2] immersed, entered; firm, firmly footed or grounded in ( -- ˚), spelt ogāḷha Miln 1 (abhidhamma -- vinay˚). Cp. BSk. avagādhaśrāddha of deep faith Divy 268. Cp. pariyogāḷha.
Ogādha2 (nt.) [ava + gādha2] a firm place, firm ground, only in cpd. ogādhappatta having gained a sure footing A iii.297 sq.
Ogāha [fr. o + gah] diving into; only in cpd. pariy˚.
Ogāhati (ogāheti) [Sk. avagāhate; ava + gāhati] to plunge or enter into, to be absorbed in (w. acc. or loc.). Pv ii. 1211; Vv 61 (= anupavisati VvA 42), 392 (sālavanaŋ o. = pavisati VvA 177). ogāheti PvA 155 (pokkharaṇiŋ); ger. ogāhetvā M iii.175 (T. ogah˚; v. l. ogāhitvā); PvA 287 (lokanāthassa sāsanaŋ, v. l. ˚itvā). See also ava˚.
Ogāhana (nt.) [fr. ogāhati] plunging into ( -- ˚) PvA 158.
Ogilati [o + gilati] to swallow down (opp. uggilati) M. i. 393 (inf. ogilituŋ) Miln 5 (id.).
Oguṇṭhita [pp. of oguṇṭheti, cp. BSk. avaguṇṭhita, e. g. Jtm 30] covered or dressed (with) Vin ii.207; PvA 86 (v. l. okuṇṭhita).
Oguṇṭheti [o + guṇṭheti] to cover, veil over, hide S iv.122 (ger. oguṇṭhitvā sīsaŋ, perhaps better read as oguṇṭhitā; v. l. SS. okuṇṭhitū). -- pp. oguṇṭhita (q. v.).
Ogumpheti [ava + Denom. of gumpha garland] to string together, wind round, adorn with wreaths, cover, dress Vin i.194 (Pass. ogumphiyanti; vv. ll. ogumbhiyanti, ogubbiy˚, ogummīy˚, okumpiy˚); ii.142 (ogumphetvā).
Oggata [pp. of avagacchati: spelling gg on acct. of con- trast with uggata, cp. avagamana. Müller P. Gr. 43 unwarrantedly puts oggata = apagata] gone down, set (of the sun) Vin iv.55 (oggate suriye = atthangate s.), 268 (id. = rattɔ andhakāre); Th 1, 477 (anoggatasmiŋ suriyasmiŋ).
Ogha [Vedic ogha and augha; BSk. ogha, e. g. Divy 95 caturoghɔ ottīrṇa, Jtm 215 mahaugha. Etym. uncertain]. 1. (rare in the old texts) a flood of water VvA 48 (udakɔ ogha); usually as mahogha a great flood Dh 47; Vism 512; VvA 110; DhA ii.274 = ThA 175. -- 2. (always in sg.) the flood of ignorance and vain desires which sweep a man down, away from the security of emancipation. To him who has "crossed the flood", oghatiṇṇo, are ascribed all, or nearly all, the mental and moral qualifications of the Arahant. For details see Sn 173, 219, 471, 495, 1059, 1064, 1070, 1082; A ii.200 sq. Less often we have details of what the flood consists of. Thus kāmogha the fl. of lusts A iii.69 (cp. Dhs 1095, where o. is one of the many names of taṇhā, craving, thirst). In the popular old riddle at S i.3 and Th 1, 15, 633 (included also in the Dhp. Anthology, 370) the "flood" is 15 states of mind (the 5 bonds which impede a man on his entrance upon the Aryan Path, the 5 which impede him in his progress towards the end of the Path, and 5 other bonds: lust, ill -- temper, stupidity, conceit, and vain speculation). Five Oghas referred to at S i.126 are possibly these last. Sn 945 says that the flood is gedha greed, and the avijjogha of Pug 21 may perhaps belong here. As means of crossing the flood we have the Path S i.193 (˚assa nittharaṇatthaŋ); iv.257; v.59; It iii (˚assa nittharanatthāya); faith S i.214 = Sn 184 = Miln 36; mindfulness S v.168, 186; the island Dh 25; and the dyke Th 1,7 = Sn 4 (cp. D ii.89). 3. Towards the close of the Nikāya period we find, for the first time, the use of the word in the pl., and the mention of 4 Oghas identical with the 4 Āsavas (mental Intoxicants). See D iii.230, 276; S iv.175, 257; v.59, 292, 309; Nd1 57, 159; Nd2 178. When the oghas had been thus grouped and classified in the livery, as it were, of a more popular simile, the older use of the word fell off, a tendency arose to think only of 4 oghas, and of these only as a name or phase of the 4 āsavas. So the Abhidhamma books (Dhs 1151; Vbh 25 sq., 43, 65, 77, 129; Comp. Phil. 171). The Netti follows this (31, 114 -- 24). Grouped in combn. āsavagantha -- ogha -- yoga -- agati -- taṇhɔupādāna at Vism 211. The later history of the word has yet to be investigated. But it may be already stated that the 5th cent. commentators persist in the error of explaining the old word ogha, used in the singular, as referring to the 4 Āsavas; and they extend the old simile in other ways. Dhammapāla of Kāñcipura twice uses the word in the sense of flood of water (VvA 48, 110, see above 1).
-- âtiga one who has overcome the flood Sn 1096 (cp. Nd2 180). -- tiṇṇa id. S i.3, 142; Sn 178, 823, 1082, 1101, 1145; Dh 370 (= cattāro oghe tiṇṇa DhA iv.109); Vv 6428 (= catunnaŋ oghānaŋ saŋsāra -- mahɔoghassa taritattā o. VvA 284); 827; Nd1 159; Nd2 179.
Oghana (nt.) watering, flooding (?) M i.306 (v. l. ogha).
Oghaniya (adj.) [fr. ogha(na)] that which can be engulfed by floods (metaph.) Dhs 584 (cp. Dhs trsl. 308); Vbh 12, 25 & passim; DhsA 49.
Ocaraka [fr. ocarati] in special meaning of one who makes himself at home or familiar with, an investigator, informant, scout, spy (ocarakā ti carapurisā C. on Ud 66). -- Thus also in BSk. as avacaraka one who furnishes information Divy 127; an adaptation from the Pāli. -- Vin iii.47, 52; M i.129 = 189 (corā ocarakā, for carā?); S i.79 (purisā carā (v. l. corā) ocarakā (okacarā v. l. SS) janapadaŋ ocaritvā etc.; cp. K. S. p. 106 n. 1) = Ud 66 (reads coiā o.).
Ocarati [o + carati] to be after something, to go into, to search, reconnoitre, investigate, pry Vin iii.52 (ger. ˚itvā); M 1502 (ocarati); S i.79 (˚itvā: so read for T. ocaritā; C. explns. by vīmaŋsitvā taŋ taŋ pavattiŋ ñatvā). <-> pp. ociṇṇa.
Ociṇṇa [pp. of ocarati] gone into, investigated, scouted, explored S i.79 = Ud 66 (reads otiṇṇa).
Ocita [o + cita, pp. of ocināti1] gathered, picked off J iii. 22; iv.135, 156; Sdhp 387.
Ocināti (ocinati) -- 1. [= Sk. avacinoti, ava + ci1] to gather, pluck, pick off DhA i.366; also in pp. ocita. <-> 2. [= Sk. avacinoti or ˚ciketi ava + ci2, cp. apacināti2] to disregard, disrespect, treat with contempt; pres. ocināyati (for ocināti metri causa) J vi.4 (= avajānāti C.).
Ocīraka see odīraka.
Occhindati [o + chindati] to cut off, sever J ii.388 (maggaŋ occhindati & occhindamāna to bar the way; v. l. BB. ochijjati), 404.
Ojavant (adj.) [fr. ojā; Vedic ojasvant in diff. meaning: powerful] possessing strengthening qualities, giving strength M i.480; S i.212 (so read for ovajaŋ phrase ojavaŋ asecanakaŋ of Nibbāna, trsld. "elixir"); Th 2, 196 (id. = ojavantaŋ ThA 168); A iii.260 (an˚ of food, i. e. not nourishing DhA i.106.
Ojavantatā (f.) [abstr. fr. ajavant] richness in sap, strength giving (nourishing) quality J i.68 (of milk).
Ojahāti [o + jahati] to give up, leave, leave behind, renounce, ger. ohāya D i.115 (ñāti -- sanghaŋ & hirañña -- suvaṇṇaŋ); M ii.166 (id.); J v.340 (= chaḍḍetvā C.); PvA 93 (maŋ). <-> Pass. avahīyati & ohīyati, pp. ohīna (q. v.). -- See also ohanati.
Ojā (f.) [Vedic ojas nt., also BSk. oja nt. Divy 105; fr. *aug to increase, as in Lat. auges, augustus & auxilium, Goth. aukan (augment), Ags. ēacian; cp. also Gr. a)e/cw, Sk. ukṣati & vakṣana increase] strength, but only in meaning of strength -- giving, nutritive essence (appld. to food) M i.245; S ii.87; v.162 (dhammɔ); A iii.396; J i.68; Dhs 646, 740, 875; Miln 156; DhA ii.154 (paṭhav˚). See also def. at Vism 450 (referring to kabalinkārɔāhāra. The compn. form is oja, e. g. ojadāna J v.243; ojaṭṭhamaka (rūpa) Vism 341.
Ojināti [Sk. avajayati, ava + ji] to conquer, vanquish, sub- due J vi.222 (ojināmase).
Oñāta [pp. o + jānāti, see also avañāta] despised Miln 191, 229, 288.
Oṭṭha1 [Vedic oṣṭha, idg. *ō (u) s; Av. aosta lip; Lat. ōs mouth = Sk. āḥ Ags. ōr margin] the lip A iv.131; Sn 608; J ii.264; iii.26 (adhar˚ & uttar˚ lower & upper lip), 278; v.156; DhA i.212; iii.163; iv.1; VvA 11; PvA 260. Cp. bimboṭṭha.
Oṭṭha2 [Vedic uṣṭra, f. uṣṭrī, buffalo = Ohg. Ags. ur, Lat. urus bison, aurochs. In cl. Sk. it means a camel]. It is mentioned in two lists of domestic animals, Vin iii.52; Miln 32. At J iii.385 a story is told of an oṭṭhī -- vyādhi who fought gallantly in the wars, and was afterwards used to drag a dung -- cart. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 150 suggests elephant.
Oṭṭhubhati [cp. Sk. avaṣṭhīvati] to spit out M i.79, 127.
Oḍḍita [pp. of oḍḍeti] thrown out, laid (of a snare) J i. 183; ii.443; v.341; ThA 243.
Oḍḍeti [for uḍḍeti (?). See further under uḍḍeti] to throw out (a net), to lay snares A i.33 = J ii.37, 153; iii.184 and passim; ThA 243. -- pp. oḍḍita (q. v.).
Oḍḍha [better spelling oḍha, pp. of ā + vah] carried away, appropriated, only in cpd. sah -- oḍhā corā thieves with their plunder Vism 180 (cp. Sk. sahoḍha Manu ix.270).
Oṇata [pp. of oṇamati] bent down, low, inclined. Usually of social rank or grade, combd. with & opp. to uṇṇata, i. e. raised & degraded, lofty and low A ii.86 = Pug 52 (= nīca lāmaka Pug A 229); Pv iv.66; Miln 387; DA i.45; PvA 29.
Oṇamati [o + namati] (instr.) to incline, bend down to, bow to (dat.) Miln 220, 234 (oṇamati & oṇamissati), 400; DA i.112. Caus. oṇāmeti M ii.137 (kāyaŋ). -- pp. oṇata & Caus. oṇamita.
Oṇamana (nt.) [fr. oṇamati] bending down, inclining, bowing down to Miln 234.
Oṇamita [pp. of oṇameti, Caus. of nam] having bowed down, bowing down Miln 234.
Oṇi (m. or f.) [cp. Vedic oṇi charge, or a kind of Soma vessel] charge, only in cpd. oṇi -- rakkha a keeper of entrusted wares, bailee Vin iii.47, 53 (= āhaṭaŋ bhaṇḍaŋ gopento).
Oṇīta see onīta.
Oṇojana (nt.) [fr. oṇojeti, Sk. avanejana] washing off, cleaning, washing one's hands Vin ii.31 (Bdhgh. refers it to fig. meaning onojeti2 by explaining as "vissajjana" gift, presentation).
Oṇojeti (with vowel assimilation o < e for oṇejeti = ava + nejeti, Sk. ˚nejayati fr. nij. Kern, Toev. ii.138, complementary to remarks s. v. on p. 5 explns. as assimil. onuj˚< onij˚, like anu˚ BSk. ani˚ (ānisaŋsa < ānuśaŋsā), the further process being onoj˚ for onuj˚. The etym. remains however doubtful] -- 1. to cause to wash off, to wash, cleanse: see oṇojana. -- 2. (fig.) to give as a present, dedicate (with the rite of washing one's hands, i. e. a clean gift) Vin i.39; iv.156; A iv.210 = 214 (oṇojesi aor.); Miln 236.
Otata [o + tata, pp. of tan] stretched over, covered, spread over with; Dh 162 (v. l. otthata); Miln 307 (+ vitata); DhA iii.153 (= pariyonandhitvā ṭhita). See also avatata & sam -- otata.
Otaraṇa (adj.) [fr. otarati] going down, descending Nett 1, 2, 4, 107.
Otarati [o + tarati] to descend, to go down to (c. acc.), to be -- take oneself to. ppr. otaranto Vin ii.221. -- aor. otari SnA 486 (for avaŋsari); DhA i.19 (cankamanaŋ); PvA 47 (nāvāya mahāsamuddaŋ), 75. -- inf. otarituŋ Pug 65, 75 (sangamaŋ). -- ger. otaritvā PvA 94 (pāsādā from the palace), 140 (devalokato). -- Caus. II. otarāpeti to cause to descend, to bring down to J vi.345. -- pp. otiṇṇa. -- Caus. I. otāreti. Opp. uttarati.
Otallaka (adj.) [of uncertain etym. perhaps *avatāryaka from ava + tṛ, or from uttāḷa?] clothed in rags, poor, indigent J iv.380 (= lāmaka olamba -- vilamba -- nantakadharo C.).
Otāpaka (adj.) [fr. otāpeti] drying or dried (in the sun), with ref. to food SnA 35 (parivāsika -- bhattaŋ bhuñjati hatthɔotāpakaŋ khādati).
Otāpeti [o + tāpeti] to dry in the sun Vin ii.113; iv.281; Miln 371 (kummo udakato nikkhamitvā kāyaŋ o. fig. applied to mānasa).
Otāra [fr. otarati, BSk. avatāra. The Sk. avatāra is cen- turies later and means ʻ incarnation ʼ] -- 1. descent to, i. e. approach to, access, fig. chance, opportunity otāraŋ labhati. Only in the Māra myth.He, the tempter, ʻ gets his chance ʼ to tempt the Buddha or the disciples, M i. 334; S i.122; iv.178, 185; DhA iii.121. (avatāraŋ labhati, Divy 144, 145) ot˚ adhigacchati, to find a chance, Sn 446. [Fausböll here translates ʻ defect ʼ. This is fair as exegesis. Every moral or intellectual defect gives the enemy a chance. But otāra does not mean defect]. Ot˚ gavesati to seek an opportunity, DhA iii.21. Otārāpekkha, watching for a chance, S i.122. At one passage, A iii. 67 = 259, it is said that constant association leads to agreement, agreement to trust, and trust to otāra. The Com. has nothing. ʻ Carelessness ʼ would suit the context. o. gavesati to look for an opportunity DhA iii.21, and otāraŋ labhati to get a chance S i.122; iv.178, 185; M i.334; DhA iii.21 (gloss okāra & okāsa); cp. avatāraŋ labhati Divy 144, 145 etc. -- 2. access, fig. inclination to, being at home with, approach, familiarity (cp. otiṇṇa and avacara adj.) A iii.67, 259. -- 3. (influenced by ocarati2 and ociṇṇa) being after something, spying, finding out; hence: fault, blame, defect, flaw Sn 446 (= randha vivara SnA 393); also in phrase otārâpekkha spying faults S i.122 (which may be taken to meaning 1, but meaning 3 is accredited by BSk. avatāraprekṣin Divy 322), Mrs. Rh. D. translates the latter passage by "watching for access".
Otāreti [Caus. of otarati] to cause to come down, to bring down, take down J i.426; iv.402; Nett 21, 22; DhA ii.81.
Otiṇṇa [pp. of otarati; the form ava˚ only found in poetry as -- ˚ e. g. issâvatiṇṇa J v.98; dukkha˚, soka˚ etc. see below 2] -- 1. (med.) gone down, descended PvA 104 (uddho -- galaŋ na otiṇṇaŋ not gone down further than the throat). -- 2. (pass.) beset by (cp. avatāra 2), affected with, a victim of, approached by M i.460 = A ii.123 (dukkhɔ otiṇṇa) = It 89 (as v. l.; T. has dukkhâbhikiṇṇa, which is either gloss or wrong reading for dukkhâvatiṇṇa); M ii.10; S i.123 (sokâva˚), 137 (id.); Sn 306 (icchâvatiṇṇa affected with desire), 939 (sallena otiṇṇo = pierced by an arrow, expld. by Nd1 414 as "sallena viddho phuṭṭho"); J v.98 (issâva˚ = issāya otiṇṇa C.). -- 3. (in special sense) affected with love, enamoured, clinging to, fallen in love with Vin iii.128 (= sāratto apekkhavā paṭibaddha -- citto); A iii.67, 259 (˚citta); SnA 322 (id.). -- Note. otiṇṇa at S v.162 should with v.l. SS be deleted. See also avatiṇṇa.
Ottappa (nt.) [fr. tappati1 + ud, would corresp. to a Sk. form *auttapya fr. ut -- tapya to be regretted, tormented by remorse. The BSk. form is a wrong adaptation of the Pāli form, taking o˚ for apa˚, viz. apatrapya M Vastu iii. 53 and apatrapā ibid. i.463. Müller, P. Gr. & Fausböll, Sutta Nipāta Index were both misled by the BSk. form, as also recently Kern, Toev. s. v.] fear of exile, shrinking back from doing wrong, remorse. See on term and its distinction from hiri (shame) Dhs trsl. 20, also DhsA 124, 126; Vism 8, 9 and the definition at SnA 181. Ottappa generally goes with hiri as one of the 7 noble treasures (see ariya -- dhanā). Hiri -- ottappa It 36; J i.129; hir -- ottappa at M i.271; S ii.220; v.1; A ii.78; iv.99, 151; v.214; It 34; J i.127, 206; VvA 23. See also hiri. -- Further passages: D iii.212; M i.356; S ii.196, 206, 208; v.89; A i.50, 83, 95; iii.4 sq., 352; iv.11; v.123 sq.; Pug 71; Dhs 147, 277; Nett 39. -- anottappa (nt.) lack of conscience, unscrupulousness, disregard of morality A i.50, 83, 95; iii.421; v.146, 214; Vbh 341, 359, 370, 391; as adj. It 34 (ahirika +).
-- gāravatā respect for conscience, A iii.331; iv.29. -- dhana the treasure of (moral) self -- control D iii.163, 251, 282; VvA 113. -- bala the power of a (good) conscience D iii.253; Ps ii.169, 176; Dhs 31, 102 (trln. power of the fear of blame).
Ottappati [ut + tappati1] to feel a sense of guilt, to be conscious or afraid of evil S i.154; Ps ii.169, 176; Pug 20, 21; Dhs 31; Miln 171.
Ottappin & Ottāpin (adj.) [fr. ottappa] afraid of wrong, conscientious, scrupulous (a) ottappin D iii.252, 282; It 28, 119. -- (b) ottāpin M i.43 sq.; S ii.159 sq., 196, 207; iv.243 sq.; A ii.13 sq.; iii.3 sq., 112; iv.1 sq.; v.123, 146. Anottappin bold, reckless, unscrupulous Pug 20 (+ ahirika). anottāpin at S ii.159 sq., 195, 206; iv. 240 sq.; Sn 133 (ahirika +).
Otthaṭa [pp. of ottharati] -- 1. spread over, veiled, hidden by ( -- ˚) Miln 299 (mahik˚ suriya the sun hidden by a fog). -- 2. strewn over (with) Sdhp 246 ( -- ˚).
Otthata = Otthaṭa, v. l. at Dh 162 for otata.
Ottharaka (nt.) [fr. of tharati] a kind of strainer, a filter Vin ii.119.
Ottharaṇa (nt.) [fr. ottharati] spreading over, veiling Miln 299 (mahik˚).
Ottharati [o + tharati, Sk. root str] to spread over, spread out, cover Miln 121 (opp. paṭikkamati, of water). See also avattharati.
Odaka (nt.) [compn. form of udaka] water; abs. only at J iii.282. -- an˚ without water, dried up Th 2, 265 (= udaka -- bhasta ThA 212). Cp. combn. sītodaka, e. g. M i. 376. See udaka.
-- antika -- 1. neighbourhood of the water, a place near the water (see antika1) Kh viii.1, 3 (gambhīre odakantike, which Childers, Kh. trsln. p. 30, interprets "a deep pit"; see also KhA 217 sq.). -- 2. "water at the end", i. e. final ablution (see antika2), in spec. sense the ablution following upon the sexual act Vin iii.21; cp. odak -- antikatā (f. abstr.) final ablution, cleansing J ii.126.
Odagya (nt.) [der. fr. udagga] exultation, elation Nd1 3 = Nd2 446 = Dhs 9, 86, 285, 373; DhsA 143 (= udaggasabhāva a "topmost" condition).
Odana (m. & nt.) [Sk. odana, to Idg. *ud, from which also udaka, q. v. for full etym.] boiled (milk -- )rice, gruel Vin ii.214 (m.); D i.76, 105; S i.82 (nāḷik˚); DhA iv. 17 (id.); A iii.49; iv.231; Sn 18; J iii.425 (til˚ m.); Dhs 646, 740, 875; PvA 73; VvA 98; Sdhp 113. Combd. with kummāsa (sour milk) in phrase o -- k -- upa -- caya a heap of boiled rice and sour milk, of the body (see kāya I.); also at M i.247.
Odanika [fr. odana] a cook J iii.49.
Odaniya (adj.) [fr. odana, cp. Sk. odanika] belonging to rice -- gruel, made of rice -- gruel Vin iii.59 (˚ghara a ricekitchen); VvA 73 (˚surā rice -- liquor).
Odapattakinī (f.) (adj.) [f. of uda + pattaka + in, i. e. having a bowl of water, Ep. of bhariyā a wife, viz. the wife in the quality of providing the house with water. Thus in enumn. of the 10 kinds of wives (& women in general) at Vin iii.140 (expld. by udakapattaŋ āmasitvā vāseti) = VvA 73.
Odapattiyā at Cp. ii.48 = last.
Odarika & ˚ya (adj.) [fr. udara] living for one's belly, vor- acious, gluttonous Miln 357; J vi.208 (˚ya); Th 1, 101.
Odarikatta (nt.) [fr. odarika] stomach -- filling M i.461; Vism 71.
Odahati [o + dahati, fr. dhā] -- 1. to put down, to put in, supply M i.117 (okacaraŋ, see under oka); ii.216 (agadɔangāraŋ vaṇa -- mukhe odaheyya); Th 1, 774 (migavo pāsaŋ odahi the hunter set a snare; Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 76 suggests change of reading to oḍḍayi, hardly justified); J iii.201 (visaŋ odahi araññe), 272 (passaŋ o. to turn one's flanks towards, dat.); Miln 156 (kāye ojaŋ odahissāma supply the body with strength). -- 2. (fig.) to apply, in phrase sotaŋ odahati to listen D i.230; Dāvs v.68. -- pp. ohita.
Odahana (nt.) [fr. odahati] -- 1. putting down, applying, application M ii.216; heaping up, storing DhA iii.118. <-> 2. putting in, fig, attention, devotion Nett 29.
Odāta (adj.) [Derivation unknown. The Sk. is avadāta, ava + dāta, pp. of hypothetical dā4 to clean, purify] clean, white, prominently applied to the dress as a sign of distinction (white), or special purity at festivities, ablutions & sacrificial functions D ii.18 (uṇṇā, of the Buddha); iii.268; A iii.239; iv.94, 263, 306, 349; v.62; Dhs 617 = (in enumn. of colours); DA i.219; VvA 111. See also ava˚.
-- kasiṇa meditation on the white (colour) Vism 174. -- vaṇṇa of white colour, white M ii.14; Dhs 247. -- vattha a white dress; adj. wearing a white dress, dressed in white D i.7, 76, 104; J iii.425 (+ alla -- kesa). -- vasana dressed in white (of householders or laymen as opposed to the yellow dress of the bhikkhus) D i.211; iii.118, 124 sq., 210; M i.491, ii.23; A i.73; iii.384; iv.217 [cp. BSk. avadāta -- vasana Divy 160].
Odātaka (adj.) [fr. odāta] white, clean, dressed in white S ii.284 (v. l. SS odāta); Th 1, 965 (dhaja).
Odissa (adv.) [ger. of o + disati = Sk. diśati, cp. uddissa] only in neg. anodissa without a purpose, indefinitely (?) Miln 156 (should we read anudissa?).
Odissaka (adj.) [fr. odissa] only in adv. expression odis- saka -- vasena definitely, in special, specifically (opp. to anodissaka -- vasena in general, universally) J i.82; ii.146; VvA 97. See also anodissaka & odhiso.
Odīraka in odīrakajāta S iv.193 should with v. l. be read ocīraka [= ava + cira + ka] "with its bark off", stripped of its bark.
Odumbara (adj.) [fr. udumbara] belonging to the Udum- bara tree Vv 5016; cp. VvA 213.
Odhasta [Sk. avadhvasta, pp. of ava + dhvaŋsati: see dhaŋsati] fallen down, scattered M i.124 = S iv.176 (˚patoda; S reads odhasata but has v. l. odhasta).
Odhānīya (nt.) [fr. avadhāna, ava + dhā, cp. Gr. a)poqh/kh, see odahati] a place for putting something down or into, a receptacle Vin i.204 (salāk˚, vy. ll. and gloss on p. 38 as follows: sālākāṭṭhāniya A, salākātaniya C, salākadhāraya B, salākɔodhāniyan ti yattha salākaŋ odahanti taŋ D E). -- Cp. samodhāneti.
Odhi [from odahati, Sk. avadhi, fr. ava + dhā] putting down, fixing, i. e. boundary, limit, extent DhA ii.80 (jaṇṇu -- mattena odhinā to the extent of the knee, i. e. kneedeep); iv.204 (id.). -- odhiso (adv.) limited, specifically Vbh 246; Nett 12; Vism 309. Opp. anodhi M iii. 219 (˚jina), also in anodhiso (adv.) unlimited, universal, general Ps ii. 130, cp. anodissaka (odissaka); also as anodhikatvā without limit or distinction, absolutely Kvu 208, and odhisodhiso "piecemeal" Kvu 103 (cp. Kvu trsln. 762, 1271).
-- sunka "extent of toll", stake J vi.279 (= sunkakoṭṭhāsaŋ C.).
Odhika (adj.) [fr. odhi] "according to limit", i. e. all kinds of, various, in phrase yathodhikāni kāmāni Sn 60, cp. Nd2 526; J v.392 (id.).
Odhunāti [o + dhunāti] to shake off M i.229; S iii.155; A iii.365 (+ niddhunāti); Pv iv.354 (v. l. BB ophun˚, SS otu˚) = PvA 256; Vin ii.317 (Bdhgh. in expln. of ogumphetvā of CV. v.11, 6; p. 117); Miln 399 (+ vidhunāti).
Onaddha [pp. of onandhati] bound, tied; put over, covered Vin ii.150, 270 sq. (˚mañca, ˚pīṭha); M ii.64; Dh 146 (andhakārena); Sdhp 182. See also onayhati.
Onandhati [o + nandhati, a secondary pres. form con- structed from naddha after bandhati > baddha; see also apiḷandhati] to bind, fasten; to cover up Vin ii.150 (inf. onandhituŋ); Miln 261.
Onamaka (adj.) [fr. onamati] bending down, stooping DhA ii.136 (an˚).
Onamati [o + namati] to bend down (instr.), stoop D ii. 17 (anonamanto ppr. not bending); iii.143 (id.); Vv 393 (onamitvā ger.). -- pp. oṇata.
Onamana (nt.) [abstr. fr. onamati] in compn. with ˚unna- mana lowering & raising, bending down & up DhA i.17.
Onayhati [ava + nayhati] to tie down, to cover over, envelop, shroud DhsA 378 (megho ākāsaŋ o.) -- pp. onaddha.
Onāha [fr. ava + nah, cp. onaddha & onayhati] drawing over, covering, shrouding D i.246 (spelt onaha); Miln 300; Dhs 1157 (= megho viya ākāsaŋ kāyaŋ onayhati).
Onīta [in form = Sk. avanīta, but semantically = apanīta. Thus also BSk. apanīta, pp. of apa + nī, see apaneti] only found in one ster. phrase, viz. onīta -- patta -- pāṇi "having removed (or removing) his hand from the bowl", a phrase causing constructional difficulties & sometimes taken in glosses as "onitta˚" (fr. nij), i. e. having washed (bowl and hands after the meal). The Cs. expln. as onīto pattato pāṇi yeva, i. e. "the hand is taken away from the bowl". The spelling is frequently oṇīta, probably through BB sources. See on term also Trenckner, Notes 6624 & cp. apa -- nīta -- pātra at M Vastu iii.142. The expression is always combd. with bhuttāvin "having eaten" and occurs very frequently, e. g. at Vin ii.147: D i.109 (= DA i. 277, q. v. for the 2 explns. mentioned above M ii.50, 93; S v.384; A ii.63; Sn p. 111 (= pattato onītapāṇi, apanītahattha SnA 456); VvA 118; PvA 278.
Oneti, prob. for apaneti, see apaneti & pp. onīta.
Onojeti see oṇojeti.
Opakkamika (adj.) [fr. upakkama] characterising a sensa- tion of pain: attacking suddenly, spasmodic, acute; always in connection with ābādha or vedanā M i.92, 241; S iv. 230 = A ii.87 = iii.131 = v.110 = Nd2 304ic = Miln 112.
Opakkhin (adj.) [o + pakkhin, adj. fr. pakkha wing, cp. similarly avapatta] "with wings off" i. e. having one's wings clipped, powerless A i.188 (˚ŋ karoti to deprive of one's wings or strength; so read for T. opapakkhiŋ karoti).
Opaguyha see opavayha.
Opatati [o + pat] to fall or fly down (on), to fall over (w. acc.) J ii.228 (lokāmisaŋ ˚anto); vi.561 (˚itvā ger.); Miln 368, 396. -- pp. opatita.
Opatita [pp. of opatati] falling (down) PvA 29 (udaka; v. l. ovuḷhita, opalahita; context rcads at PvA 29 mahāsobbhehi opatitena udakena, but id. p. at KhA 213 reads mahāsobbha -- sannipātehi).
Opatta (adj.) [o + patta, Sk. avapattra] with leaves fallen off, leafless (of trees) J iii.495 (opatta = avapatta nippatta patita -- patta C.).
Opadhika (adj.) [fr. upadhi. BSk. after the P., aupadhika Divy 542] forming a substratum for rebirth (always with ref. to puñña, merit). Not with Morris, J. P.T.S. 1885, 38 as "exceedingly great"; the correct interpretation is given by Dhpāla at VvA 154 as "atta -- bhāva -- janaka paṭisandhi -- pavatti -- vipāka -- dāyaka". -- S i.233 = A iv.292 = Vv 3421; It 20 (v. l. osadhika), 78.
Opanayika (adj.) [fr. upaneti, upa + nī] leading to (Nib- bāna) S iv.41 sq., 272, 339; v.343; A i.158; ii.198; D iii.5; Vism 217.
Opapakkhi in phrase ˚ŋ karoti at A i.188 read opakkhiŋ karoti to deprive of one's wings, to render powerless.
Opapaccayika (adj.) [= opapātika] having the character- istic of being born without parents, as deva Nett 28 (upādāna).
Opapātika (adj.) [fr. upapatti; the BSk. form is a curious distortion of the P. form, viz. aupapāduka Av. Ś ii.89; Divy 300, 627, 649] arisen or reborn without visible cause (i. e. without parents), spontaneous rebirth (Kvu trsl. 2832), apparitional rebirth (Cpd. 1654, q. v.) D i.27, 55, 156; iii.132, 230 (˚yoni), 265; M i.34, 73, 287, 401 sq., 436 sq, 465 sq.; ii.52; iii.22, 80, 247; S iii.206, 240 sq., 246 sq.; iv.348; v.346, 357 sq., 406; A i.232, 245, 269; ii.5, 89, 186; iv.12, 226, 399, 423 sq.; v. 265 sq., 286 sq., 343 sq.; Pug 16, 62, 63; Vbh 412 sq.; Miln 267; Vism 552 sq., 559; DA i.165, 313. The C. on M i.34 explns. by "sesa -- yoni -- paṭikkhepa -- vacanaŋ etaŋ". See also Pug. A 1, § 40.
Opapātin (adj.) = opapātika, in phrase opapātiyā (for opapātiniyā?) iddhiyā at S v.282 (so read for T. opapāti ha?) is doubtful reading & perhaps best to be omitted altogether.
Opama at J i.89 & Sdhp 93 (anopama) stands for ūpama, which metri causā for upama.
Opamma (nt.) [fr. upama; cp. Sk. aupamya] likeness, simile, comparison, metaphor M i.378; Vin v.164; Miln 1, 70, 330; Vism 117, 622; ThA 290.
Oparajja viceroyalty is v. l. for uparajja. Thus at M ii. 76; A iii.154.
Opavayha (adj. n.) [fr. upavayha, grd. of upavahati] fit for riding, suitable as conveyance, state -- elephant (of the elephant of the king) S v.351 = Nett 136 (v. l. opaguyha; C. explns. by ārohana -- yogga); J ii.20 (SS opavuyha); iv. 91 (v. l. ˚guyha); vi.488 (T. opavuyha, v. l. opaguyha; gajuttama opavayha = rāja -- vāhana C.); DA i.147 (ārohanayogga opavuyha, v. l. ˚guyha); VvA 316 (T. opaguyha to be corrected to ˚vayha).
Opasamika (adj.) [fr. upa + sama + ika; cp. BSk. aupaśamika Av. Ś ii.107; M Vastu ii.41] leading to quiet, allaying, quieting; Ep. of Dhamma D iii.264 sq.; A ii.132.
Opasāyika (adj.) [fr. upasaya, upa + śī] being near at hand or at one's bidding (?) M i.328.
Opāṭeti [ava + Caus. of paṭ, Sk. avapāṭayati] to tear as- under, unravel, open Vin ii.150 (chaviŋ opāṭetvā).
Opāta [o + pāta fr. patati to fall, Vedic avapāta] -- 1. falling or flying down, downfall, descent J vi.561. -- 2. a pitfall J i.143; DhA iv.211.
Opāteti [o + Caus. of pat] to make fall, to destroy (cp. atipāteti), i. e. 1. to break, to interrupt, in kathaŋ opāteti to interrupt a conversation M ii.10, 122, 168; A iii.137, 392 sq.; Sn p. 107. -- 2. to drop, to omit (a syllable) Vin iv.15.
Opāna (nt.) [o + pāna fr. pivati. Vedic avapāna. The P. Commentators however take o as a contracted form of udaka, e. g. Bdhgh. at DA i.298 = udapāna]. Only in phrase opāna -- bhūta (adj.) a man who has become a welling spring as it were, for the satisfaction of all men's wants; expld. as "khata -- pokkharaṇī viya hutvā" DA i. 298 = J v.174. -- Vin i.236; D i.137; M i.379; A iv. 185; Vv 654; Pv iv.160; J iii.142; iv.34; v.172; Vbh 247; Miln 411; Vism 18; VvA 286; DA 1177, 298.
Opārambha (adj.) [fr. upārambha] acting as a support, supporting, helpful M ii.113.
Opiya is metric for upiya [upa + ger. of i] undergoing, going into S i.199 = Th 1, 119 (nibbānaŋ hadayasmiŋ opiya; Mrs. Rh. D. trsls. "suffering N. in thy heart to sink", S A. hadayasmiŋ pakkhipitvā.
Opilavati [Sk. avaplavati, ava + plu] to be immersed, to sink down S ii.224. -- Caus. opilāpeti (see sep.).
Opilāpita [pp. of opilāpeti] immersed into (loc.), gutted with water, drenched J i.212, 214.
Opilāpeti [Caus. of opilavati, cp. Sk. avaplāvayati] to im- merse, to dip in or down, to drop (into = loc.) Vin i. 157 = 225 = S i.169 (C.: nimujjapeti, see K. S. 318); M i.207 = iii.157; DhA iii.3 (˚āpetvā; so read with vv. ll. for opīḷetvā); J iii.282. -- pp. opilāpita.
Opīḷeti in "bhattaŋ pacchiyaŋ opīḷetvā" at DhA ii.3 is with v. l. to be read opilāpetvā (gloss odahitvā), i. e. dropping the food into the basket.
Opuñchati is uncertain reading for opuñjeti.
Opuñchana or Opuñjana (nt.) [fr. opuñjeti] heaping up, covering over; a heap, layer DhA iii.296.
Opuñjeti or ˚ati [o + puñjeti Denom. of puñja, heap] to heap up, make a heap, cover over with (Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 153 trsls. "cleanse") Vin ii.176 (opuñjati bhattaŋ); J iv.377 (opuñchetvā T., but v. l. opuñjetvā; gloss upalimpitvā); DhA iii.296 (opuñchitvā, gloss sammajjitvā). <-> Caus. opuñjāpeti in same meaning "to smear" Vin iii.16 (opuñjāpetvā; v. l. opuñchāpetvā).
Opunāti also as opuṇāti (Dh) [o + punāti fr. pū] to win- now, sift; fig. lay bare, expose Dh 252 (= bhusaŋ opuṇanto viya DhA iii.375); SnA 312. -- Caus. opunāpeti [cp. BSk. opunāpeti M Vastu iii.178] to cause to sift A i.242; J i.447.
Opuppha [o + puppha] bud, young flower J vi.497 (vv. ll. p. 498 opaṇṇa & opatta).
Opeti [unless we here deal with a very old misspelling for oseti we have to consider it a secondary derivation from opiya in Caus. sense, i e. Caus. fr. upa + i. Trenckner, Notes 77, 78 offers an etym. of ā + vapati, thus opiya would be *āvupiya, a risky conclusion, which besides being discrepant in meaning (āvapati = to distribute) necessitates der. of opiya fr. opati (*āvapati) instead of vice versā. There is no other instance of *āva being contracted to o. Trenckner then puts opiya = ūpiya in tadūpiya ("conform with this", see ta˚ Ia), which is however a direct derivation from upa = upaka, upiya, of which a superl. formation is upamā ("likeness"). Trenckner's expln. of ūpiya as der. fr. ā + vap does not fit in with its meaning] to make go into (c. loc.), to deposit, receive (syn. with osāpeti) S i.236 (SA na . . pakkhipanti) = Th 2, 283 = J v.252 (T. upeti); in which Th 2, 283 has oseti (ThA 216, with expln. of oseti = ṭhapeti on p. 219). -- aor. opi J iv.457 (ukkhipi gloss); vi.185 (= pakkhipi gloss). <-> ger. opitvā (opetvā?) J iv.457 (gloss khipetvā).
Ophuṭa [a difficult, but legitimate form arisen out of analogy, fusing ava -- vuta (= Sk. vṛta from vṛ; opp. *apāvuta = P. apāruta) and ava -- phuṭa (Sk. sphuṭa from sphuṭ). We should probably read ovuta in all instances] covered, obstructed; always in combn. āvuta nivuta ophuṭa (oputa, ovuta) D i.246 (T. ophuta, vv. ll. ophuṭa & opuṭa); M iii.131 (T. ovuṭa); Nd1 24 ovuṭa, v. l. SS ophuṭa); Nd2 365 (ophuṭa, v. l. BB oputa; SS ovuta); DA i.59 (oputa); SnA 596 (oputa = pariyo -- naddha); Miln 161 (ovuta).
Obandhati [o + bandhati] to bind, to tie on to Vin ii.116 (obandhitvā ger.).
Obhagga [o + bhagga, pp. of bhañj, Sk. avabhagna] broken down, broken up, broken S v.96 (˚vibhagga); A iv.435 (obhaggɔobhagga); DhA i.58 (id.); J i.55 (˚sarīra).
Obhañjati [o + bhañj] to fold up, bend over, crease (a garment); only Caus. II. obhañjāpeti J i.499 (dhovāpeti +). See also pp. obhagga.
Obhata [pp. of obharati] having taken away or off, only in cpd. ˚cumbaṭā with the "cumbaṭa" taken off, descriptive of a woman in her habit of carrying vessels on her head (on the cumbaṭa stand) Vin iii.140 = VvA 73 (Hardy: "a woman with a circlet of cloth on her head"?).
Obharati [ava + bharati, cp. Sk. avabharati = Lat. aufero] to carry away or off, to take off. -- pp. obhata.
Obhāsa [from obhāsati] shine, splendour, light, lustre, efful- gence; appearance. In clairvoyant language also "aura" (see Cpd. 2141 with C. expln. "rays emitted from the body on account of insight") -- D i.220 (effulgence of light); M iii.120, 157; A ii.130, 139; iv.302; It 108 (obhāsakara); Ps i.114, 119 (paññā˚); ii.100, 150 sq., 159, 162; Vism 28, 41; PvA 276 (˚ŋ pharati to emit a radiance); Sdhp 325. With nimitta and parikathā at Vism 23; SnA 497. See also avabhāsa.
Obhāsati1 [o + bhāsati from bhās, cp. Sk. avabhāsati] to shine, to be splendid Pv i.21 (= pabhāseti vijjoteti PvA 10). -- Caus. obhāseti to make radiant or resplendent, to illumine, to fill with light or splendour. -- pres. obhāseti Pv iii.115 (= joteti PvA 176); Miln 336; ppr. obhāsayanto Pv i.111 (= vijjotamāna PvA 56) & obhāsento Pv ii.110 (= jotanto ekālokaŋ karonto PvA 71); ger. obhāsetvā S i.66; Kh v. = Sn p. 46; KhA 116 (= ābhāya pharitvā ekobhāsaŋ karitvā). -- pp. avabhāsita.
Obhāsati2 [ava + bhāsati fr. bhāṣ; Sk. apabhāṣati] to speak to (inopportunely), to rail at, offend, abuse Vin ii.262; iii.128.
Obhāsana (nt. -- adj.) [fr. obhāsa, cp. Sk. avabhāsana] shining VvA 276 (Hardy: "speaking to someone").
Obhoga [o + bhoga from bhuj to bend] bending, winding, curve, the fold of a robe Vin i.46 (obhoge kāyabandhanaŋ kātabbaŋ).
Oma (adj.) [Vedic avama, superl. formation fr. ava] lower (in position & rank), inferior, low; pl. omā A iii.359 (in contrast with ussā superiors); Sn 860 (ussā samā omā superiors, equals, inferiors), 954; SnA 347 (= paritta lāmaka). -- More freq. in neg. form anoma not inferior, i. e. excellent.
Omaka (adj.) [oma + ka] lower in rank, inferior; low, in- significant Nd1 306 (appaka +); J ii.142; DhA i.203.
Omaṭṭha [pp. of omasati] touched S i.13 = 53 = Th 1, 39.
Omaddati [o + maddati from mṛd, BSk. avamardati Jtm 3133] -- 1. to rub J vi.262 (sarīraŋ omaddanto); Miln 220. -- 2. to crush, oppress M i 87 = Nd2 1996 (abhivaggena); J ii.95.
Omasati [o + mas = Sk. mṛṣ] -- 1. (lit.) to touch J v. 446. -- 2. (fig.) to touch a person, to reproach, insult Vin iv.4 sq. -- pp. omaṭṭha.
Omasanā (f.) [fr. omasati] touching, touch Vin iii.121 (= heṭṭhā oropanā).
Omāna1 [fr. o + man, think. The Sk. avamāna is later] disregard, disrespect, contempt DhA ii.52 (+ atimāna). Cp. foll. & see also avamāna.
Omāna2 [at J ii.443 we read ucce sakuṇa omāna meaning ʻ Oh bird, flying high ʼ. With the present material we see no satisfactory solution of this puzzle. There is a Burmese correction which is at variance with the commentary] "flying", the v. l. BB is ḍemāna (fr. ḍī). C. explns. by caramāna gacchamāna. Müller, P. Gr. 99 proposes to read ḍemāna for omāna.
Omissaka (adj.) [o + missaka] mixed, miscellaneous, various J v.37; vi.224 (˚parisā). Cp. vo˚.
Omukka (adj.) [fr. + muc] cast off, second hand Vin i.187.
Omuñcati [o + muc] to take off, loosen, release; unfasten, undo, doff D i.126 (veṭhanaŋ as form of salute); J ii.326; vi.73 (sāṭakaŋ); Vism 338; PvA 63 (tacaŋ); VvA 75 (ābhāraṇāni). -- Caus. omuñcāpeti to cause to take off Vin i.273. -- pp. omutta.
Omutta [pp. of omuñcati] released, freed, discharged, taken off It 56 (read omuttɔassa Mārapāso for T. omukkassa m.).
Omutteti [Sk. avamūtrayati, Denom. fr. mūtra, urine] to discharge urine, pass water M i.79, 127.
Oyācati [o + yāc, opp. āyācati] to wish ill, to curse, imprecate Vin iii.137.
Ora (adj.) [compar. formation fr. ava; Vedic avara] below, inferior, posterior. Usually as nt. oraŋ the below, the near side, this world Sn 15; VvA 42 (orato abl. from this side). -- Cases adverbially: acc. oraŋ (with abl.) on this side of, below, under, within M ii.142; Sn 804 (oraŋ vassasatā); Pv iv.335 (oraŋ chahi māsehi in less than 6 months or after 6 months; id. p. at Pv i.1012 has uddhaŋ); PvA 154 (dahato); instr. orena J. v.72; abl. orato on this side Miln 210.
-- pāra the below and the above, the lower & higher worlds Sn 1 (see SnA 13 = Nd2 422b and cp. paroparaŋ); Miln 319 (samuddo anorapāro, boundless ocean). -- pure (avarapure) below the fortress M i.68 (bahinagare +). -- mattaka belonging only to this world, mundane; hence: trifling, insignificant, little, evanescent Vin ii.85, 203 = It 85; D i.3; M i.449; A iv.22; v.157, 164; Vbh 247; Nett 62; DhA i.203; DA i.55.
Oraka (adj.) [ora + ka] inferior, posterior Vin i.19; ii. 159; M ii.47; Sn 692 (= paritta SnA 489; cp. omaka); J i.381.
Orata [o + rata, pp. of ramati] -- 1. delighted, satisfied, pleased Miln 210 (cp. abhirata). -- 2. desisting, abstaining from, restraining oneself VvA 72 (= virato; cp. uparata).
Orabbhika [fr. urabbha. The Sk. aurabhrika is later & differs in meaning] one who kills sheep, a butcher (of sheep) M i.343, 412; S ii.256; A i.251; ii.207 = Pug 56; iii.303; Th 2, 242 (= urabbhaghātaka ThA 204); J v.270; vi.111 (and their punishment in Niraya); Pug A 244 (urabbhā vuccanti eḷakā; urabbhe hanatī ti orabbhiko).
Oramati [Denom. fr. ora instead of orameti] to stay or be on this side, i. e. to stand still, to get no further J i.492 (oramituŋ na icchi), 498 (oramāma na pārema). Note. This form may also be expld. & taken as imper. of ava + ramati (cp. avarata 2), i. e. let us desist, let us give up, (i. e. we shall not get through to the other side). -- anoramati (neg.) see sep. -- On the whole question see also Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 154 sq.
Oramāpeti (Caus. II. of oramati] to make someone desist from J v.474 (manussa -- maŋsā).
Orambhāgiya (adj.) [ora + bhāga + iya; BSk. avarabhā- gīya, e. g. Divy 533] being a share of the lower, i e. this world, belonging to the kāma world, Ep. of the 5 saŋyojanāni (see also saŋyojana) D i.156; iii.107, 108, 132; M i.432; It 114; Pug 22; Nett 14; SnA 13; DA i.313. -- Note. A curious form of this word is found at Th 2, 166 orambhāga -- manīya, with gloss (ThA 158) oraŋ āgamanīya. Probably the bh should be deleted.
Oravitar [ora + n. ag. of vitarati?] doubtful reading at A v.149, meaning concerned with worldly things (?). The vv. ll. are oramitā, oravikā, oramato, oravi.
Orasa (adj.) [Fr. ura, uras breast Vedic aurasa] belonging to one's own breast, self -- begotten, legitimate; innate, natural, own M ii.84; iii.29; S ii.221 (Bhagavato putto o. mukhato jāto); iii.83; J iii.272; Vv 5022; ThA 236; KhA 248; PvA 62 (urejāta +).
Orima [superl. formation fr. ora, equivalent to avama] the lower or lowest, the one on this side, this (opp. yonder); only in combn. orima -- tīra the shore on this side, the near shore (opp. pāra˚ and pārima˚ the far side) D i.244; S iv.175 (sakkāyassɔ adhivacanaŋ) = SnA 24; Dhs 597; Vism 512 (˚tīra -- mahɔogha); DhA ii.99.
Oruddha [fr. orundhati. In meaning equalling Sk. aparuddha as well as ava˚] -- 1. kept back, restrained, subdued A iii.393. -- 2. imprisoned J iv.4. See also ava˚.
Orundhati [cp. Sk. avarundhate] to get, attain, take for a wife. -- ger. orundhiya J iv.480. -- aor. oruddha Th 2, 445. -- pp. oruddha. See also avarundhati.
Orodha [fr. orundhati; Sk. avarodha] obstruction; con- finement, harem, seraglio Vin ii.290; iv.261 (rājɔ orodhā harem -- lady, concubine); J iv.393, 404.
Oropaṇa (nt.) [abstr. fr. oropeti] taking down, removal, cutting off (hair), in kes' oropaṇa hair -- cutting DhA ii. 53 (T. has at one place orohaṇa, v. l. oropaṇa).
Oropeti [Caus. fr. orohati; BSk. avaropayati] to take down, bring down, deprive of, lay aside, take away, cut off (hair) VvA 64 (bhattabhājanaŋ oropeti) -- ger. oropayitvā Sn 44 (= nikkhipitvā paṭippassambhayitvā Nd2 181; apanetvā SnA 91); J vi.211 (kesamassuŋ).
Orohaṇa (nt.) [abstr. fr. orahati] descent, in udakɔorohaṇâ- nuyoga practice of descending in to the water (i. e. bathing) Pug 55; J i.193; Miln 350.
Orohati [o + rohati] to descend, climb down D ii.21; M iii.131; J i.50; Miln 395; PvA 14. -- Caus. oropeti (q. v.).
Olaggeti [Caus. of o + lag] to make stick to, to put on, hold fast, restrain M ii.178; A iii.384 (vv. ll. oloketi, olabheti, oketi); Th 1, 355.
Olagga [Sk. avalagna, pp. of avalagati] restrained, checked Th 1, 356
Olanghanā (f.) [fr. olangheti] bending down Vin iii.121 (= heṭṭhā onamanā).
Olangheti [Caus. of ava + langh] to make jump down, in phrase ullangheti olangheti to make dance up & down J v.434 = DhA iv.197 (the latter has T. ullaggheti ol˚; but v. l. ullangheti ol˚).
Olamba (adj.) [fr. ava + lamb] hanging down Vin iii.49; J iv.380 (˚vilamba).
Olambaka (adj. -- n.) [see olambati] -- 1. (adj.) hanging down VvA 32 (˚dāma). -- 2. (n.) (a) support, walking stick J iv.40 (hatth˚). -- (b) plumb -- line J vi.392.
Olambati & avalambati [ava + lamb] to hang down, hang on, to be supported by, rest on. The form in o is the older. Pres. avalambare Pv ii.118 (= olambamānā tiṭṭhanti PvA 77); ii.102 (= olambanti PvA 142); olambati M iii.164 (+ ajjholambati); J i.194; PvA 46. -- ger. avalamba (for ˚bya) Pv iii.35 (= olambitva PvA 189) & olambetvā J iii.218. See also olubbha.
Olambanaka [fr. olambati] an armchair, lit. a chair with supports Vin ii.142.
Olikhati [o + likh, cp. Sk. apalikhati] to scrape off, cut off, shave off (hair) A iii.295 (veṇiŋ olikhituŋ); Th 1, 169 (kese olikhissaŋ); 2, 88.
Oligalla [of unknown etym.: prob. Non -- Aryan, cp. BSk. oḍigalla Saddh. P. chap. vi.] a dirty pool near a village M iii.168; S v.361; A i.161; iii.389; Miln 220; Vism 343.
Oliyati [o + līyate from lī] to stick, stick fast, adhere, cling to It 43; Nett 174. -- pp. olīna (see avalīna).
Olīna [pp. of oliyate] adhering, sticking or clinging to (worldliness), infatuated M i.200 (˚vuttika); J vi.569 (anolīna -- mānasa); Vbh 350 (˚vuttikā); Miln 393 (an˚).
Olīyanā [fr. oliyati] adhering, infatuation Ps i.157; Dhs 1156, 1236.
Olugga [pp. of olujjati] breaking off, falling to pieces, rotting away M i.80, 245 (olugga -- vilugga), 450 (id.); Vism 107 (id.).
Olujjati [Sk. avarujyate, Pass. of ava + ruj] to break off, go to wreck, fall away S ii.218 (v. l. ull˚). -- pp. olugga.
Olubbha [assimil. form of olumbha which in all likelihood for olambya, ger. of olambati. The form presents difficulties. See also Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 156] holding on to, leaning on, supporting oneself by (with acc.); most frequently in phrase daṇḍaŋ olubbha leaning on a stick, e. g. M i.108 (= daṇḍaŋ olambitvā C.; see M i 539); A iii.298; Th 2, 27 (= ālambitvā); VvA 105. In other connections: S i.118; iii.129; J i.265 (āvāṭa -- mukha -- vaṭṭiyaŋ); vi.40 (hatthe); DhA ii.57 (passaŋ gloss olambi); VvA 217, 219.
Olumpeti [o + Caus. of lup] to strip off, seize, pick, pluck Vin i.278 (bhesajjan olumpetvā, vv. ll. ulumpetvā, oḷump˚, odametvā).
Olokana (nt.) [see oloketi] looking, looking at, sight Sdhp 479 (mukhassɔ).
Olokanaka (adj. -- n.) [fr. oloketi] window Vin ii.267 (olo- kanakena olokenti, adv.).
Oloketi [BSk. avalokayati or apaloketi] to look at, to look down or over to, to examine, contemplate, inspect, consider J i.85, 108 (nakkhattaŋ); Pv ii.964; DhA i.10, 12, 25, 26; ii.96 (v. l. for T. voloketi); iii.296; PvA 4, 5, 74, 124.
Oḷāra at PvA 110 is with v. l. BB to be read uḷāra.
Oḷārika (adj.) [fr. uḷāra] gross, coarse, material, ample (see on term Dhs trsl. 208 & Cpd. 159 n. 4) D i.37, 186 sq. (attā) 195, 197, 199; M i.48, 139, 247; ii.230; iii.16, 299; S ii.275 (vihāra); iii.47 (opp. sukhuma); iv.382 (id.); v.259 sq.; A iv.309 sq. (nimittaŋ obhāso); J i.67; Dhs 585, 675, 889; Vbh 1, 13, 379; Vism 155 (˚anga), 274 sq. (with ref. to breathing), 450.
Oḷumpika (adj.) [Deriv. unknown, BSk. olumpika and oḍum- pika M Vastu iii.113, 443. In the Śvet -- Upan. we find the form uḍupa a skiff.] Sen. Kacc 390 belonging to a skiff (no ref. in Pāli Canon?); cp. BSk. olumpika M Vastu iii. 113 & oḍumpika ibid. 443.
Ovaja at S i.212 read ojava.
Ovaṭa [o + vaṭa, pp. of vṛ, another form of ovuta = ophuta, q. v.] obstructed, prevented Vin ii.255 = iv.52 = A iv.277 (v. l. ovāda); also an˚ ibid.
Ovaṭṭika (nt.) [fr. ava + vṛt] -- 1. girdle, waistband M ii.47; J iii.285 (v. l. ovaddhi˚); Vism 312; DhA ii.37; iv.206; DA i.218 (Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 156: a kind of bag). -- 2. a bracelet Vin ii.106 (= vaḷayaŋ C.). <-> 3. a patch, patching (˚karaṇa), darning (?) Vin i.254 (vv. ll. ovaṭṭiya˚, ovadhita˚ ovadhīya˚); J ii.197 (v. l. ovaddhi˚). See also ovaddheyya (ava˚).
Ovadati [o + vadati. The Sk. avavadati is some centuries later and is diff. in meaning] to give advice, to admonish, exhort, instruct, usually combd. with anusāsati. -- pres. ovadati Vin iv.52 sq.; DhA i.11, 13; imper. ovadatu M iii.267. -- pot. ovadeyya Vin iv.52 (= aṭṭhahi garudhammehi ovadati); Sn 1051 (= anusāseyya). -- aor. ovadi DhA i.397. -- inf. ovadituŋ Vin i.59 (+ anusāsituŋ). -- grd. ovaditabba Vin ii.5; and ovadiya (see sep.). -- Pass. avadiyati; ppr. ˚iyamāna Pug 64 (+ anusāsiyamāna).
Ovadiya (adj.) [grd. of ovadati] who or what can be ad- vised, advisable Vin i.59 (+ anusāsiya); Vv 8436 (= ovāda -- vasena vattabbaŋ VvA 345).
Ovaddheyya a process to be carried out with the kaṭhina robes. The meaning is obscure Vin i.254. See the note at Vin. Texts ii.154; Vin i.254 is not clear (see expln. by C. on p. 388). The vv. ll. are ovadeyya˚ ovadheyya˚ ovaṭṭheyya˚.
Ovamati [o + vam] to throw up, vomit Ud 78.
Ovaraka (nt.) [Deriv. uncertain. The Sk. apavaraka is some centuries later. The Sk. apavaraka forbidden or secret room, Halāyudha "lying -- in chamber"] an inner room Vin i.217; M i.253; J i.391 (jāto varake T. to be read as jātɔovarake i. e. the inner chamber where he was born, thus also at VvA 158); Vism 90, 431; VvA 304 (= gabbha).
Ovariyāna [ger. of o + vṛ] forbidding, obstructing, holding back, preventing Th 2, 367 (v. l. ovadiyāna, thus also ThA 250 explained "maŋ gacchantiŋ avaditvā gamanaŋ nisedhetvā").
Ovassa & ˚ka see anovassa(ka).
Ovassati [o + vassati] to rain down on, to make wet. - Pass. ovassati to become wet through rain Vin ii.121.
Ovahati [o + vahati] to carry down. -- Pass. ovuyhati It 114 (ind. & pot. ovuyheyya).
Ovāda [BSk. avavāda in same sense as P.] advice, instruc- tion, admonition, exhortation Vin i.50 = ii.228; ii.255 = iv.52; D i.137 (˚paṭikara, function of a king); J iii.256 (anovādakara one who cannot be helped by advice, cp. ovadaka); Nett 91, 92; DhA i.13, 398 (dasavidha o.); VvA 345. -- ovādaŋ deti to give advice PvA 11, 12, 15,
Ovādaka (adj. -- n.) [fr. ovāda; cp. BSk. avavādaka in same meaning, e. g. Divy 48, 254, 385] admonishing (act.) or being admonished (pass.); giving or taking advice; a spiritual instructor or adviser M i.145; A i.25; S v.67 = It 107. -- anovādaka one who cannot or does not want to be advised, incorrigible J i.159; iii.256, 304; v.314.
Ovādin (adj. -- n.) [fr. ovāda] = ovādaka M i.360 (anovādin).
Ovijjhati [ava + vyadh] to pierce through Vism 304.
Ovuta see ophuta.
Ovuyhati [Pass. of ovahati] to be carried down (a river) It 114.
Osakkati [o + sakkati fr. P. sakk = *Sk. ṣvaṣk, cp. Māgadhī osakkai; but sometimes confused with sṛp, cp. P. osappati & Sk. apasarpati] to draw back, move back D i.230; J iv.348 (for apavattati C.); v.295 (an -- osakkitvā). See also Trenckner, Notes p. 60.
Osajjati [o + sṛj] to emit, evacuate PvA 268 (vaccaŋ excrement, + ohanati). -- pp. osaṭṭha.
Osaṭa [pp. of o + sṛ] having withdrawn to (acc.), gone to or into, undergone, visited M i.176, 469 (padasamācāro sangha -- majjhe o.); ii.2 (Rājagahaŋ vass˚āvāsaŋ o.); Miln 24 (sākacchā osaṭā bahū). See also avasaṭa.
Osaṇheti [o + saṇheti, denom. fr. saṇha] to make smooth, to smooth out, comb or brush down (hair) Vin ii.107 (kese); J iv.219 (id.).
Osadha (nt.) [Vedic auṣadha] see osadhī.
Osadhika v. l. It 20 for opadhika.
Osadhikā (f.) [fr. osadha] remedy, esp. poultice, foment- ation J iv.361.
Osadhī (f.) [Vedic avaṣa + dhī: bearer of balm, comfort, refreshment]. There is no difference in meaning between osadha and osadhī; both mean equally any medicine, whether of herbs or other ingredients. Cp. e. g. A iv.100 (bījagāma -- bhūtagāmā . . osadhi -- tiṇavanappatayo) Pv ii.610, with Sn 296 (gāvo . . . yāsu jāyanti osadhā); D i.12, cp. DA i.98; Pv iii.53; PvA 86; J iv.31; vi.331 (? trsln. medicinal herb). Figuratively, ʻ balm of salvation ʼ (amatosadha) Miln 247. Osadhi -- tārakā, star of healing. The only thing we know about this star is its white brilliance, S i.65; It 20 = A v.62; Vv 92; Pv ii.110; cp. PvA 71; Vism 412. Childers calls it Venus, but gives no evidence; other translators render it ʻ morning star ʼ. According to Hindu mythology the lord of medicine is the moon (oṣadhīśa), not any particular star.
Osanna (adj.) [o + pp. of syad to move on] given out, exhausted, weak Miln 250 (˚viriya).
Osappati [o + sṛp to creep] to draw back, give way J vi.190 (osappissati; gloss apīyati).
Osaraka (adj.) [fr. osarati, osarana & osaṭa] of the nature of a resort, fit for resorting to, over -- hanging eaves, affording shelter Vin ii.153. See also osāraka.
Osaraṇa (nt.) [fr. avasarati] -- 1. return to, going into (acc.) visiting J i.154 (gāmantaŋ ˚kāle). -- 2. withdrawal, distraction, drawing or moving away, heresy Sn 538 (= ogahanāni titthāni, diṭṭhiyo ti attho SnA 434).
Osarati [o + sṛ] to flow, to go away, to recede to, to visit M i.176 (gāmaŋ etc.); ii.122. -- pp. osaṭa. See also avasarati.
Osāna (nt.) [fr. osāpeti] stopping, ceasing; end, finish, con- clusion S v.79 (read paṭikkamosāna), 177, 344; Sn 938
Osāpeti [With Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 158 Caus. of ava + sā, Sk. avasāyayati (cp. P. avaseti, oseti), but by MSS. & Pāli grammarians taken as Caus. of sṛ: sarāpeti contracted to sāpeti, thus ultimately the same as Sk. sārayati = P. sāreti (thus vv. ll.). Not with Trenckner, Notes 78 and Müller P. Gr. 42. Caus. of ā + viś to sling] to put forth, bring to an end, settle, put down, fix, decide S i.81 (fut. osāpayissāmi; vv. ll. oyayiss˚ and obhāyiss˚ = Ud 66 (T. otarissāmi? vv. ll. obhāyiss˚, otāy˚ & osāy˚; C. paṭipajjissāmi karissāmi); J i.25 (osāpeti, v. l. obhāseti); Nd1 412 (in expln. of osāna); VvA 77 (agghaŋ o. to fix a price; vv. ll. ohāpeti & onarāpeti) = DhA iii.108 (v. l. osāreti). Cp. osāreti.
Osāraka [fr. osarati] shelter, outhouse J iii.446. See also osaraka.
Osāraṇā (f.) [fr. osāreti 3] -- 1. restoration, rehabilitation reinstatement (of a bhikkhu after exclusion from the Sangha) Vin i.322; Miln 344. -- 2. procession (?) (perhaps reading should be ussāraṇā) DhA ii.1 (T. oss˚).
Osārita [pp. of osāreti 3] restored, rehabilitated Vin iv.138.
Osāreti [Caus. of o +sṛ to flow] -- 1. (with v. l. osāpeti, reading osāreti is uncertain) to stow away, deposit, put in, put away (see also opeti) J vi.52, 67 (pattaŋ thavikāya o.). -- 2. to bring out, expound, propound, explain Miln 13 (abhidhammapiṭikaŋ), 203 (kāraṇaŋ), 349 (lekhaŋ to compose a letter). -- 3. (t.t.) to restore a bhikkhu who has undergone penance Vin i.96, 322, 340; iv.53 (osārehi ayyā ti vuccamāno osāreti). -- Pass. osāriyati Vin ii.61; pp. osārita (cp. osāraṇā).
Osiñcati [o + siñcati] -- 1. to pour out or down over, to besprinkle Vin ii.262; M i.87 (telena); Pv i.85 (ppr. osiñcaŋ = āsiñcanto PvA 41). -- 2. to scoop out, empty, drain (water) J v.450 (osiñciyā, pot. = osiñceyya C.). <-> pp. avasitta & ositta.
Osita [pp. of ava + sā] inhabited (by), accessible (to) Sn 937 (an˚). Cp. vy˚.
Ositta [pp. of osiñcati] sprinkled, besprinkled J v.400. See also avasitta.
Osīdati [fr. o + sad] to settle down, to sink, run aground (of ships) S iv.314 (osīda bho sappi -- tela); Miln 277 (nāvā osīdati). -- ger. osīditvā J ii.293. -- Caus. II. osīdāpeti J iv.139 (nāvaŋ).
Osīdana (nt.) [fr. osīdati] sinking DhsA 363.
Ossa see ussa.
Ossakk˚ see osakk˚.
Ossagga [fr. ossajati] relaxation, in cpd. sati -- ossagga (for which more common sati -- vossagga) relaxation of memory, inattention, thoughtlessness DhA iii.163 (for pamāda Dh 167). See vossagga.
Ossajjati [o + sṛj send off] to let loose, let go, send off, give up, dismiss, release D ii.106 (aor. ossaji); Sn 270 = S i.207; Th 1, 321; J iv.260. -- pp. ossaṭṭha. See also avassajati.
Ossajjana (nt.) [fr. ossajati] release, dismissal, sending off DA i.130.
Ossaṭṭha [pp. of ossajati] let loose, released, given up, thrown down D ii.106; S iii.241; J i.64; iv.460 (= nissaṭṭha).
Ossanna [pp. of osīdati for osanna, ss after ussanna] sunk, low down, deficient, lacking J i.336 (opp. ussanna). Hardly to be derived from ava + syad .
Ossavana (nt.) [fr. ava + sru] outflow, running water M i.189 (v. l. ossāvana & osavana). Cp. avassava.
Ohana only in cpd. bimbɔohana, see under bimba.
Ohanati [ava + han, but prob. a new formation from Pass. avahīyati of hā, taking it to han instead of the latter] to defecate, to empty the bowels PvA 268 (+ osajjati).
Oharaṇa (nt.) [fr. oharati] lit. "taking away", leading astray, side -- track, deviating path J vi.525 (C.: gamana -- magga). Cp. avaharaṇa.
Oharati [o + hṛ take] -- 1. to take away, take down, take off S i.27 (ger. ohacca, v. l. ūhacca); Pv ii.66 (imper. ohara = ohārehi PvA 95); DhA iv.56 (see ohārin). See also ava˚. -- Caus. I. ohāreti (see avahārati); Caus. II. oharāpeti in meaning of oharati to take down, to cut or shave off (hair) J vi.52 (kesamassuŋ); DhA ii.53 (cp. oropeti). -- pp. avahaṭa.
Ohāya ger. of ojahāti.
Ohāra see avahāra & cp. vohāra.
Ohāraṇa (nt.) [fr. ohāreti, cp. avaharaṇa] taking down, cutting off (hair) J i.64 (kesa -- massu˚).
Ohārin (adj. -- n.) [fr. avaharati] dragging down, weighty, heavy Dh 346 (= avaharati heṭṭhā haratī ti DhA iv.56).
Ohāreti [Caus. of oharati] -- 1. to give up, leave behind, renounce (cp. ojahāti) Sn 64 (= oropeti Nd2 183). -- 2 to take down (see oharati 1) Vin i.48; PvA 95. -- 3 to cut down, shave off (hair; see oharāpeti under oharati) It 75 (kesamassuŋ hair & beard, v. l. ohāyāpetvā); Pug 56 (id.).
Ohita [pp. of odahati; BSk. avahita (Jtm 210 e. g.) as well as apahita (Lal. V. 552 e. g.)] -- 1. put down into, deposited Dh 150. -- 2. put down, laid down, taken off, relieved of, in phrase ohitabhāro (arahaŋ) (a Saint) who has laid down the burden: see arahatta iii. C.; cp. ˚khandhabhāra DhA iv.168. -- 3. put down in, hidden, put away in ( -- ˚) Sn 1022 = (kosɔohita). -- 4. (fig.) put down to, applied to, in ohita -- sota listening, attentive, intent upon (cp. sotaŋ odahati to listen) usually in phrase ohitasoto dhammaŋ suṇāti; M i.480; iii.201; S v.96; A iv.391; Vism 300 (+ aṭṭhiŋ katvā).
Ohiyyaka (adj. -- n.) [fr. ohīyati, avahiyyati] one who is left behind (in the house as a guard) Vin iii.208; iv.94; S i.185 (vihārapāla).
Ohīna [pp. of ojahāti] having left behind J iv.432 (gaṇaŋ).
Ohīyati (ohiyyati) [ava + hīyati, Pass. of ha, see avajahāti] - 1. to be left behind, to stay behind J v.340 (avahīyati = ohiyyati C.). -- 2. to stay behind, to fall out (in order to urinate or defecate); ger. ohīyitvā Vin iv.229; DhA ii.21 (cp. ohanati). See also ohiyyaka.
Ohīḷanā (f.) [ava + hīḷanā, of hīḍ] scorning, scornfulness Vbh 353 (+ ohīḷattaŋ).
Ka˚ (pron. interr.) [Sk. kaḥ, Idg. *qṷo besides *qui (see ki˚ & kiŋ) & *qṷu (see ku˚). Cp. Av. ka -- ; Gr. ph=|, pw_s, poi_os, etc.; Lat. quī; Oir. co -- te; Cymr. pa; Goth. hvas, Ags. hwā (=E. who), Ohg. hwër] who? -- m. ko, f. kā (nt. kiŋ, q. v.); follows regular decl. of an atheme with some formations fr. ki˚, which base is otherwise restricted to the nt. -- From ka˚ also nt. pl. kāni (Sn 324, 961) & some adv. forms like kathaŋ, kadā, kahaŋ, etc. -- 1. (a) ka˚: nom. m. ko Sn 173, 765, 1024; J i.279; Dh 146; f. kā J vi.364; PvA 41; gen. sg. kassa Miln 25; instr. kena; abl. kasmā (nt.) as adv. "why" Sn 883, 885; PvA 4, 13, 63, etc. -- (b) ki˚ (m. & f.; nt. see kiŋ): gen. sg. kissa Dh 237; J ii.104. ko -- nāmo (of) what name Miln 14; DhA ii.92, occurs besides kin -- nāmo Miln 15. -- kvattho what (is the) use Vv 5010 stands for ko attho. -- All cases are freq. emphasized by addition of the affirm. part. nu & su. e. g. ko su'dha tarati oghaŋ (who then or who possibly) Sn 173; kena ssu nivuto loko "by what then is the world obstructed?" Sn 1032; kasmā nu saccāni vadanti . . . Sn 885. <-> 2. In indef. meaning combd with -- ci (Sk. cid: see under ca 1 and ci˚): koci, kāci, etc., whoever, some (usually with neg. na koci, etc., equalling "not anybody"), nt. kiñci (q. v.); e. g. mā jātu koci lokasmiŋ pāpiccho It 85; no yāti koci loke Dh 179; n'âhaŋ bhatako 'smi kassaci Sn 25; na hi nassati kassaci kammaŋ "nobody's trace of action is lost" Sn 666; kassaci kiñci na (deti) (he gives) nothing to anybody VvA 322; PvA 45. -- In Sandhi the orig. d of cid is restored, e. g. app' eva nāma kocid eva puriso idh' agaccheyya, "would that some man or other would come here!" PvA 153. <-> Also in correl. with rel. pron. ya (see details under ya˚): yo hi koci gorakkhaŋ upajīvati kassako so na brāhmano (whoever -- he) Sn 612. See also kad˚.
Kaŋsa [cp. Sk. kaŋsa; of uncertain etym., perhaps of Babylonian origin, cp. hirañña] 1. bronze Miln 2; magnified by late commentators occasionally into silver or gold. Thus J vi.504 (silver) and J i.338; iv.107; vi.509 (gold), considered more suitable to a fairy king. -- 2. a bronze gong Dh 134 (DhA iii.58). -- 3. a bronze dish J i.336; āpānīya˚ a bronze drinking cup, goblet M. i.316. -- 4. a "bronze," i. e. a bronze coin worth 4 kahāpaṇas Vin iv.255, 256. See Rhys Davids, Coins and Measures §§ 12, 22. -- "Golden bronze" in a fairy tale at Vv 54 is explained by Dhammapāla VvA 36 as "bells." -- It is doubtful whether brass was known in the Ganges valley when the earlier books were composed; but kaŋsa may have meant metal as opposed to earthenware. See the compounds.
-- upadahārana (n. a.) metal milk -- pail (?) in phrase: dhenusahassāni dukūla -- sandanāni (?) kaŋsūpadhāraṇām D ii.192; A iv.393; J vi.503 (expld at 504). Kern (Toev. p. 142) proposes correction to kaŋs'ûpadohana (=Sk. kāŋsy'opodohana), i.e. giving milk to the extent of a metal pailful. -- kaṇṭaka metal thorns, bits of sharp metal, nails J v.102 (cp. sakaṇṭaka) -- kūta cheating with false or spurious metal D i.5 (=DA i.79: selling brass plates for gold ones). -- tāla bronze gong DhA i.389; DhsA 319 (˚tāḷa); VvA 161 or cymbals J vi.277. 411. -- thāla metal dish, as distinguished from earthenware D i.74 (in simile of dakkho nahāpako=A iii.25) cp. DA i. 217; Vism 283 (in simile); DhA iii.57 (: a gong); DA i.217; DhA iv.67 =J iii.224; reading at Miln 62 to be ˚tāla (see J.P.T.S. 1886, 122). -- pattharika a dealer in bronze ware Vin ii.135. -- pāti & pātī a bronze bowl, usually for food: M i.25; A iv.393; Sn 14; PvA 274. -- pūra full of metal J iv.107. -- bhaṇḍa brass ware Vin ii.135. -- bhājana a bronze vessel Vism 142 (in simile). -- maya made of bronze Vin i.190; ii.112; -- mallaka metal dish, e. g. of gold J iii.21. -- loha bronze Miln 267.
Kaŋsati=kassati, see ava˚.
Kakaca [onomat. to sound root kr̥, cp. note on gala; Sk. krakaca] a saw Th 1, 445; J iv.30; v.52; vi.261; DA i.212; in simile ˚ -- ūpama ovāda M i.129. Another simile of the saw (a man sawing a tree) is found at Ps i.171, quoted & referred to at Vism 280, 281.
-- khaṇḍa fragment or bit of saw J i.321. -- danta tooth of a saw, DA i.37 (kakaca -- danta -- pantiyaŋ kīḷamāna).
Kakaṇṭaka, the chameleon J i.442, 487; ii.63; vi.346; VvA 258.
Kaku [Brh. kakud, cp. kākud hollow, curvature, Lat. cacumen, & cumulus] a peak, summit, projecting corner S i.100 (where satakkatu in Text has to be corrected to satakkaku: megho thanayaŋ vijjumālā satakkaku. Com. expln sikhara, kūṭa) A iii.34 (=AA 620~kūṭa). Cp. satakkaku & Morris, J.P.T.S. 1891 -- 93, 5.
Kakuṭa a dove, pigeon, only in cpds.:
-- pāda dove -- footed (i. e. having beautiful feet) DhA i.119; f. pādī appl. to Apsaras, J ii.93; DhA i.119; Miln 169.
Kakutthaka see ku˚.
Kakudha [cp. Sk. kakuda, and kaku above] 1. the hump on the shoulders of an Indian bull J ii.225; J vi.340. <-> 2. a cock's comb: see sīsa kakudha. -- 3. a king's symbol or emblem (nt.) J v.264. There are 5 such insignia regis, regalia: s. kakudha -- bhaṇḍa. -- 4. a tree, the Terminalia Arjuna, Vin i.28; J vi.519; kakudharukkha DhA iv.153. Note. On pakudha as twin -- form of ka˚ see Trenckner, J.P.T.S. 1908, 108.
-- phala the fruit of the kakudha tree Mhvs xi.14, where it is also said to be a kind of pearl; see mutta. -- bhaṇḍa ensign of royalty J i.53; iv.151; v.289 (=sakāyura). The 5 regalia (as mentioned at J v.264) are vāḷavījanī, uṇhīsa, khagga, chatta, pādukā: the fan, diadem, sword, canopy, slippers. -- pañcavidha -- k˚ PvA 74.
Kakka1 [cp. Sk. kalka, also kalanka & kalusa] a sedi- ment deposited by oily substances, when ground; a paste Vin i.205 (tila˚), 255. Three kinds enumerated at J. vi.232: sāsapa˚ (mustard -- paste), mattika˚ (fragrant earth -- paste, cp. Fuller's earth), tila˚ (sesamum paste). At DA i.88, a fourth paste is given as haliddi˚, used before the application of face powder (poudre de riz, mukha -- cuṇṇa). Cp. kakku.
Kakka2 [cp. Sk. karka) a kind of gem; a precious stone of yellowish colour VvA 111.
Kakkaṭa a large deer (?) J vi.538 (expld as mahāmiga).
Kakkaṭaka [cp. Sk. karkaṭa, karkara "hard," kankata "mail"; cp. Gr. karki/nos & Lat. cancer; also B. Sk. kakkaṭaka hook] a crab S i.123; M i.234; J i.222; Vv 546 (VvA 243, 245); DhA iii.299 (mama . . . kakkaṭakassa viya akkhīni nikkhamimsu, as a sign of being in love). Cp. kakkhaḷa.
-- nala a kind of sea -- reed of reddish colour, J iv.141; also a name for coral, ibid. -- magga fissures in canals; frequented by crabs, DhsA 270. -- yantaka a ladder with hooks at one end for fastening it to a wall, Mhvs ix.17. -- rasa a flavour made from crabs, crab -- curry, VvA 243.
Kakkara [onomat, cp. Sk. kṛkavāku cock, Gr. ke/rkac, kerki/s, Lat. querquedula, partridge; sound -- root kr̥, see note on gala] a jungle cock used as a decoy J ii.162, purāṇa˚, ii.161; cp. dīpaka1 & see Kern, Toev. p. 118: K˚ -- Jātaka, N˚ 209.
Kakkaratā (f.) roughness, harshness, deceitfulness, Pug 19, 23.
Kakkariya (nt.) harshness, Pug 19, 23.
Kakkaru a kind of creeper (˚jātāni=valliphalāni) J vi.536.
Kakkasa (adj.) [Sk. karkaśa to root kr̥ as in kakkaṭaka] rough, hard, harsh, esp. of speech (vācā para -- kaṭukā Dhs 1343), M i.286=Dhs 1343; A v.265=283, 293; DhsA 396. -- akakkasa: smooth Sn 632; J iii.282; v.203, 206, 405, 406 (cp. J.P.T.S. 1891 -- 93, 13); akakkasanga, with smooth limbs, handsome, J v.204.
Kakkassa roughness Sn 328, Miln 252.
Kakkārika (and ˚uka) [fr. karkaru] a kind of cucumber Vv 3328=eḷāluka VvA 147.
Kakkāru (Sk. karkāru, connected with karkaṭaka] 1. a pumpkin -- gourd, the Beninkasa Cerifera J vi.536: kakkārujātāni=valliphalāni (reading kakkaru to be corr.). -- 2. a heavenly flower J iii.87, 88=dibbapuppha
Kakkāreti [*kaṭ -- kāreti to make kaṭ, see note on gala for sound -- root kr̥ & cp. khaṭakhaṭa] to make the sound kak, to half choke J ii.105.
Kakku [cp. kakka=kalka] a powder for the face, slightly adhesive, used by ladies, J v.302 where 5 kinds are enumd: sāsapa˚, loṇa˚, mattika˚, tila˚, haliddi˚.
Kakkoṭaka (?) KhA 38, spelt takk˚ at Vism 258.
Kakkola see takkola.
Kakkhaḷa [kakkhaṭa, cp. Sk. karkara=P. kakkaṭaka] 1. rough, hard, harsh (lit. & fig.) Dhs 648 (opp. muduka Dhs 962 (rūpaŋ paṭhavīdhātu: kakkhalaŋ kharagataŋ kakkhaḷattaŋ kakkhaḷabhāvo); Vism 349 (=thaddha), 591, 592 (˚lakkhaṇa); DhA ii.95; iv.104; Miln 67, 112; PvA 243 (=asaddha, akkosakāraka, opp. muduka); VvA 138 (=pharusa). -- 2. cruel, fierce, pitiless J i.187, 266; ii.204; iv162, 427. Akakkhaḷa not hard or harsh, smooth, pleasant DhsA 397. -- ˚vacata, kind speech, ibid. (=apharusa ˚vācatā mudu˚).
-- kathā hard speech, cruel words J vi.561. -- kamma cruelty, atrocity J iii.481. -- bhāva rigidity Dhs 962 (see kakkhala) MA 21; harshness, cruelty J iii.480. a˚ absence of hardness or rigidity DhsA 151.
Kakkhaḷatā (f.) [abstr. fr. prec.] hardness, rigidity, Dhs 859; Vbh 82; J v.167; DhsA 166. -- akakkhaḷatā absence of roughness, pleasantness Dhs 44, 45, 324, 640, 728, 859; DhsA 151; VvA 214 (=saṇha).
Kakkhalatta (nt.) hardness, roughness, harshness Vin ii.86; Vbh 82; Vism 365; cp. M.Vastu i.166: kakkhaṭatva.
Kakkhaḷiya hardness, rigidity, roughness, Vbh 350.
Kanka [Sk. kanka, to sound -- root kn̊, cp. kinkiṇī & see note on gala] a heron M i.364, 429; J v.475.
-- patta a heron's plume J v.475.
Kankata [=kaŋ or kiŋ+kṛta, to kiṇi, "the tinklings"] elephant's trappings VvA 104 (=kappa).
Kankaṇa (nt.) [to same root as kanka] a bracelet, orna- ment for the wrist Th 2, 259 (=ThA 211).
Kankala [Sk. kankāla & cp. śṛnkhala (as kaṇṇa>śṛnga), orig. meaning "chain"] skeleton; only in cpd. atthi˚. Aṭṭhikankal' ūpamā kāmā Vin ii.25; M i.130, 364; J v.210; Th 1, 1150 (˚kuṭika): aṭṭhikankalasannibha Th 2, 488 (=ThA 287; cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885, 75): aṭṭhikankala aṭṭhi -- puñja aṭṭhi -- rāsi S ii.185= It 17 (but in the verses on same page: puggalass' aṭṭhisañcayo). Cp. aṭṭhisankhalikā PvA 152; aṭṭhika sankhalikā J i.433; aṭṭhi -- sanghāṭa Th 1, 60.
Kankuṭṭhaka [cp. Sk. kankuṣṭha] a kind of soil or mould, of a golden or silver colour Mhvs 32. 6 (see note on p. 355).
Kankhati [Sk. kānkṣ cp. śank, Lat. cunctor] 1. with loc.: to be uncertain, unsettled, to doubt (syn. vicikicchati, with which always combined). Kankhati vicikicchati dvīsu mahāpurisa -- lakkhaṇesu D i.106 is in doubt and perplexity about (Bgh's gloss, patthanaŋ uppādati DA i.275, is more edifying than exact.)= Sn 107; na kankhati na vicikicchati S ii.17=iii.135; kankheyya vicikiccheyya S ii.50, 54; iii.122; v.225 (corr. khankheyya!) 226; same with Satthari kankheyya dhamme˚ sanghe˚ sikkhāya˚ A iv.460=v.17=M i.101=Dhs 1004; cp. Dhs. 1118. -- 2. with acc.: to expect, to wait for, to look forward to. Kālaŋ k. to abide one's time, to wait for death S i.65 (appiccho sorato danto k. k. bhāvito (so read for bhatiko) sudanto); Sn 516 (id. with bhāvito sadanto); It 69 (id. bhāvitatto). -- J v.411 (=icchati); vi.229 (=oloketi). pp. kankhita S iii.99; Sn 540; (+vicikicchita); inf. kankhituŋ S iv.350=399 (+vicikicchituŋ).
Kankhana (nt.) doubting, doubt, hesitation MA 97; DhsA 259.
Kankhanīya [grd. of kankhati] to be doubted S iv.399.
Kankhā (f.) [cp. Sk. kānkṣā] 1. doubt, uncertainty S i.181; iii.203 (dukkhe k. etc.; cp. Nd2 1); Sn 541, 1149; ˚ŋ vinayati Sn 58, 559, 1025; k. pahīyati Ps ii.62; combd with vimati: D i.105; iii.116; S iv.327; v.161; A ii.79, 160, 185; DA i.274; with vicikicchā: S iv.350; Dhs. 425. Defined as = kankhāyanā & kankhāyitatta Nd21; Dhs 425 (under vicikicchā). 3 doubts enumd at D iii.217; 4 in passages with vimati (see above); 7 at Dhs 1004; 8 at Nd2 1 & Dhs 1118; 16 at M i.8 & Vism 518. -- 2. as adj. doubting, doubtful, in akankha one who has overcome all doubt, one who possesses right knowledge (vijjā), in combns akankha apiha anupaya S i.181; akhila a. Sn 477, 1059; Nd2i; cp. vitiṇṇa˚ Sn 514; avitiṇṇa˚ Sn 249, 318, 320 (=ajānaŋ); nikkankha S ii.84 (+nibbicikiccha). -- 3. expectation SA 183. -- On connotation of k. in general see Dhs trsl. p. 115 n1.
-- cchida removing or destroying doubt Sn 87. -- cchedana the removal of d. J i.98; iv.69. -- ṭṭhāniya founded on d., doubtful (dhammā) D iii.285; A iv.152, 154; v.16; AA 689. -- dhamma a doubting state of mind, doubt D ii.149; S iv.350. -- vitaraṇa overcoming of doubt Miln 233; DhsA 352, ˚visuddhi complete purification in consequence of the removal of all doubt D iii.288; M i.147; Ud 60; Vism 523; Bdhd 116 sq. -- samangin affected with doubts, having doubts DhsA 259.
Kankhāyati [Denom. fr. kankhā] to doubt, pp. Kankhā- yita Sn 1021.
Kankhāyanā (f.) +kankhāyitatta (nt.) doubting and hesitation, doubtfulness, Nd2 1; Dhs 425, 1004, 1118; DhsA 259.
Kankhin (adj.) [Sk. kānkṣin] 1. doubting, wavering, un- decided, irresolute D ii.241; Sn 1148; Nd2 185; combd with vecikicchin S iii.99; M i.18; A ii.174; Sn 510. -- 2. longing for Pgdp 106 (mokkha˚). -- akankhin not doubting, confident, sure (cp. akankha) D ii.241; A ii.175.
Kangu (f.) [derivation unknown, prob. non -- Aryan, cp. Sk. kangu] the panic seed, Panicum Italicum; millet, used as food by the poor (cp. piyangu); mentioned as one of the seven kinds of grains (see dhañña) at Vin iv.264; DA i.78. -- Miln 267; Mhvs 32, 30.
-- piṭṭha millet flour, in ˚maya made of m. meal J vi.581. -- bhatta a dish of (boiled) millet meal Vism 418 (in simile).
Kaca [Sk. kaca, cp. kāñcī and Latin cingo, cicatrix] the hair (of the head), in ˚kalāpa a mass of hair, tresses Dāvs iv.51.
Kacavara [to kaca?] 1. sweepings, dust, rubbish (usually in combn with chaḍḍeti and sammajjati) J i.292; iii.163; iv.300; Vism 70; DA i.7; DhA i.52; SnA 311. -- 2. rags, old clothes SA 283 (=pilotikā).
-- chaḍḍana throwing out sweepings, in ˚pacchi a dust basket, a bin J i.290. -- chaḍḍanaka a dust pan J i.161 (+ muṭṭhi -- sammjjanī). -- chaḍḍani a dust pan DhA iii.7 (sammajjanī+). -- chaḍḍikā (dāsī) a maid for sweeping dust, a cinderella DhA iv.210.
Kacci & kaccid (indecl.) [Sk. kaccid=kad+cid, see kad˚] indef. interrog. particle expressing doubt or suspense, equivalent to Gr. a)/n, Lat. ne, num, nonne: then perhaps; I doubt whether, I hope, I am not sure, etc., Vin i.158, 350; D i.50 (k. maŋ na vañcesi I hope you do not deceive me), 106; S iii.120, 125; Sn. 335, 354, p. 87; J i.103, 279; v.373; DhA ii.39 (k. tumhe gatā "have you not gone," answer: āma "yes"); PvA 27 (k. tan dānaŋ upakappati does that gift really benefit the dead?), 178 (k. vo piŋḍapāto laddho have you received any alms?). Cp. kin. -- Often combd with other indef. particles, e. g. kacci nu Vin i.41; J iii.236; vi.542; k. nu kho "perhaps" (Ger. etwa, doch nicht) J i.279; k. pana J i.103. -- When followed by nu or su the original d reappears according to rules of Sandhi: kaccinnu J ii.133; v.174, 348; vi. 23; kaccissu Sn 1045, 1079 (see Nd2 186).
Kaccikāra a kind of large shrub, the Caesalpina Digyna J vi.535 (should we write with BB kacchi˚?).
Kaccha1 (nt.) [cp. Sk. kaccha, prob. dial.] 1. marshy land, marshes; long grass, rush, reed S i.52 (te hi sotthiŋ gamissanti kacche vāmakase magā), 78 (parūḷha k -- nakha -- lomā with nails and hair like long -- grown grass, cp. same at J iii.315 & Sdhp 104); J v.23 (carāmi kacchāni vanāni ca); vi.100 (parūḷha -- kacchā tagarā); Sn 20 (kacche rūḷhatiṇe caranti gāvo); SnA 33 (pabbata˚ opp. to nadī˚, mountain, & river marshes). Kern (Toev. ii.139) doubts the genuineness of the phrase parūḷha˚. -- 2. an arrow (made of reed) M i.429 (kaṇḍo . . . yen' amhi viddho yadi vā kacchaŋ yadi vā ropiman ti).
Kaccha2 (adj.) [ger. of kath] fit to be spoken of A i.197 (Com.=kathetuŋ yutta). akaccha ibid.
Kacchaka1 a kind of fig -- tree DA i.81. -- 2. the tree Cedrela Toona Vin iv.35; S v.96; Vism 183.
Kacchati1 Pass. of katheti (ppr. kacchamāna A iii.181). -- 2. Pass. of karoti.
Kacchantara (nt.) [see kacchā2] 1. interior, dwelling, apartment VvA 50 (= nivesa). -- 2. the armpit: see upa˚.
Kacchapa [Sk. kacchapa, dial. fr. *kaśyapa, orig. Ep of kumma, like magga of paṭipadā] a tortoise, turtle S iv.177 (kummo kacchapo); in simile of the blind turtle (kāṇo k.) M iii.169=S v.455; Th 2, 500 (cp. J.P.T.S. 1907, 73, 174). -- f. kacchapinī a female t. Miln 67.
-- lakkhaṇa "tortoise -- sign," i. e. fortune -- telling on the ground of a tortoise being found in a painting or an ornament; a superstition included in the list of tiracchāna -- vijjā D i.9≈; DA i.94. -- loma "tortoise -- hair," i. e. an impossibility, absurdity J iii.477, cp. sasavisāṇa; ˚maya made of t. hair J iii.478.
Kacchapaka see hattha˚.
Kacchapuṭa [see kaccha1] reed -- basket, sling -- basket, pingo, in -- vāṇija a trader, hawker, pedlar J i.111.
Kacchā1 (f.) [derivation unknown, cp. Sk. kakṣā, Lat. cohus, incohare & see details under gaha1] 1. enclosure, denoting both the enclosing and the enclosed, i. e. wall or room: see kacchantara. -- 2. an ornament for head & neck (of an elephant), veilings, ribbon Vv 219=699 (=gīveyyaka VvA); J iv.395 (kacchaŋ nāgānaŋ bandhatha gīveyyaŋ paṭimuñcatha). 3. belt, loin -- or waist -- cloth (cp. next) Vin ii.319; J v.306 (=saŋvelli); Miln 36; DhA i.389.
Kacchā2 (f.) & kaccha (m. nt.) [Derivation unknown, cp. Sk. kakṣa & kakṣā, Lat. coxa, Ohg. hahsa]; the armpit Vin i.15 (addasa . . . kacche vīṇaŋ . . . aññissā kacche ālambaraŋ); S i.122=Sn 449 (sokaparetassa vīŋā kacchā abhassatha); It 76 (kacchehi sedā muccanti: sweat drops from their armpits); J v.434=DhA iv.197 (thanaŋ dasseti k˚ŋ dass˚ nābhiŋ dass˚); J v.435 (thanāni k˚ āni ca dassayantī; expld on p. 437 by upakacchaka); vi.578. The phrase parūḷha -- kaccha -- nakhaloma means "with long -- grown finger -- nails and long hair in the armpit," e. g. S i.78.
-- loma (kaccha˚) hair growing in the armpit Miln 163 (should probably be read parūḷha -- k. -- nakha -- l., as above).
Kacchikāra see kacci˚.
Kacchu [Derivation uncertain, cp. Sk. kacchu, dial. for kharju: perhaps connected with khajjati, eating, biting] 1. the plant Carpopogon pruriens, the fruit of which causes itch when applied to the skin DhA iii.297 (mahā˚ -- phalāni). -- 2. itch, scab, a cutaneous disease, usually in phrase kacchuyā khajjati "to be eaten by itch" (cp. E. itch>eat) Vin i.202, 296; J v.207; Pv ii.311 (cp. kapi˚); Vism 345; DhA i.299.
-- cuṇṇa the powdered fruit of Carpopogon pruriens, causing itch DhA iii.297. -- piḷakā scab & boils J v.207.
Kajjala [Sk. kajjala, dial. fr. kad+jala, from jalati, jval, orig. burning badly or dimly, a dirty burn] lamp -- black or soot, used as a collyrium Vin ii.50 (read k. for kapalla, cp. J.P.T.S. 1887, 167).
Kajjopakkamaka a kind of gem Miln 118 (vajira k. phus- sarāga lohitanka).
Kañcaka a kind of tree (dāsima˚) J vi.536 (expld as "dve rukkhajātiyo"). BB have koñcaka.
Kañcana (nt.) [Derivation uncertain, cp. Sk. kāñeana, either from khacati (shine=the shining metal, cp. kāca (glass) & Sk. kāś), or from kanaka gold, cp. Gr. knhko/s (yellow). P. kañcana is poetical] gold A iii.346= Th 1, 691 (muttaŋ selā va k.); Th 2, 266 (k˚ ssa phalakaŋ va); VvA 4, 9 (=jātarūpa). Esp. freq. in cpds.=of or like gold.
-- agghika a golden garland Bu X. 26. -- agghiya id. Bu v.29. -- āveḷā id. J vi.49; Vv 362; Pv ii.127 (thus for ˚ācela); iii.93; PvA 157. -- kadalikkhaṇḍa a g. bunch of bananas J vi.13. -- thūpa a gilt stupa DhA iii.483; iv.120. -- patimā a gilt or golden image or statue J vi.553; VvA 168. -- paṭṭa a g. turban or coronet J vi.217. -- patta a g. dish J v.377. -- pallanka a gilt palanquin J i.204. -- bimba the golden bimba fruit Vv 366 (but expld at VvA 168 by majjita -- kpaṭimā -- sadisa "like a polished golden statue"). -- bubbula a gilt ornament in form of a ball Mhvs 34, 74. -- rūpa a g. figure J iii.93. -- latā g. strings surrounding the royal drum J vi.589. -- vaṇṇa of g. colour, gilt, shining, bright J v.342 (=paṇḍara). -- velli a g. robe, girdle or waist cloth J v.398 (but expld as "k -- rūpakasadisa -- sarīra "having a body like a g. statue"), cp. J v.306, where velli is expld by kacchā, girdle. -- sannibha like g., golden -- coloured (cp. k -- vaṇṇa and Sk. kanaka -- varṇa Sp. Av. Ś. i.121, 135, etc.), in phrase ˚taca "with golden -- coloured skin," Ep. of the Buddha and one of the 32 signs of a great man (mahāpurisa -- lakkhaṇa) D ii.17; iii.143, 159; M ii.136; Miln 75; attr. of a devatā Vv 302, 322; VvA 284; of a bhikkhu Sn 551=Th 1, 821. -- sūci a gold pin, a hair -- pin of gold J vi.242.
Kañcanaka (adj.) golden J iv.379 (˚daṇḍa).
Kañcuka [from kañc (kac) to bind, cp. Gr. ka/kala fetter, Sk. kañcuka] 1. a closely fitting jacket, a bodice Vin i.306=ii.267; A i.145; DhA iii.295 (paṭa˚ŋ paṭimuncitvā dressed in a close bodice); PvA 63 (urago tacaŋ kañcukaŋ omuñcanto viya). -- 2. the slough of a snake (cp. 1) DA i.222. -- 3. armour, coat of mail J v.128 (sannāha˚); DA i.157 (of leather); Dāvs v.14. -- 4. a case, covering, encasement; of one pagoda incasing another: Mhvs i.42.
Kañjaka N. of a class of Titans PvA 272 (kāḷa -- k˚ -- bhedā Asurā; should we read khañjaka? Cp. Hardy, Manual of Buddhism 59).
Kañjika (nt.) [Sk. kāñjika] sour rice -- gruel J i.238 (udaka˚); Vv 3337 (amba˚), 435 (=yāgu VvA 186); DhA i.78, 288; VvA 99 (ācāma -- k˚ -- loṇudaka as expln of loṇa -- sovīraka "salty fluid, i. e. the scum of sour gruel"). Cp. next.
Kañjiya (nt.)=kañjika; J iii.145 (ambila˚); vi.365 (˚āpaṇa); DhA ii.3; iv.164.
-- teḷa a thick substance rising as a scum on rice -- gruel, used in straightening arrows DhA i.288.
Kaññā (f.) [from kanīna young, compar. kanīyah, superl. kaniṣṭha; orig. "newly sprung" from *qen, cp. Gr. kaino/s, Vedic kanyā, Lat. re -- cen(t)s, Ags. hindema "novissimus." See also kaniṭṭha] a young (unmarried) woman, maiden, girl Pv i.111. -- As emblem of beauty in simile khattiya -- kaññā vā . . . pannarasa -- vassuddesikā vā solasa -- vassuddesikā vā . . . M i.88; in combn khattiya -- kaññā, brāhmaṇa -- k˚, etc. A ii.205; iv.128; Kisāgotamī nāma khattiya -- k˚ J i.60; deva˚ a celestial nymph J i.61.
-- dāna giving away of a girl in marriage Pgdp 85.
Kaṭa1 [Sk. kaṭa from kṛṇatti: to do wicker -- work, roll up, plait; *gert, cp. Gr. ka/rtalos, Lat. cratis=E. crate, Goth. haurds, E. hurdle] a mat: see cpds. & kaṭallaka.
-- sara a reed: Saccharum Sara, used as medicine DhsA 78. -- sāra (DhA i.268) & sāraka a mat for sitting or lying on, made of the stalks of the screw -- pine, Pandanus Furcatus J vi.474; v.97; DA i.137; DhA ii.183
Kaṭa2 another form of kaṭi (hip), only used in cpds.:
-- aṭṭhika the hip -- bone D ii.296=M i.58, 89=M iii.92 (as v.l.). Note. kaṭiṭṭhika at M iii.92 and as v.l. at D ii.296. -- sāṭaka a loin -- cloth J iv.248.
Kaṭa3=kata [pp. of karoti] in meaning of "original," good (cp. sat); as nt. "the lucky die" in phrase kaṭaggaha (see below). Also in combn with su˚ & duk˚ for sukata & dukkata (e. g. Vin ii.289; DhA iii.486; iv.150), and in meaning of "bad, evil" in kaṭana. Cp. also kali.
-- ggaha "he who throws the lucky die," one who is lucky, fortunate, in phrase "ubhayattha k." lucky in both worlds, i. e. here & beyond Th 1, 462; J iv.322 (=jayaggaha victorious C.); cp. Morris in J.P.T.S. 1887, 159. Also in "ubhayam ettha k." S iv.351 sq. -- Opposed to kali the unlucky die, in phrase kaliŋ gaṇhāti to have bad luck J vi.206 (kaliggaha=parājayasaŋkhāta, i. e. one who is defeated, as opp. to kaṭaggaha=jayasankhāta), 228, 282.
Kaṭaka (m. nt.) anything circular, a ring, a wheel (thus in kara˚ Vin ii.122); a bracelet PvA 134.
Kaṭakañcukatā see kaṭu˚.
Kaṭakaṭāyati=taṭataṭāyati to crush, grind, creak, snap PugA. i.34; VvA 121 (as v.l.); Vism 264. Cp. also karakarā.
Kaṭacchu [cp. on etym. Morris in J.P.T.S. 1887, 163] a ladle, a spoon; expld by uḷunka DhA iv.75, 123; by dabbi PvA 135. Used for butter VvA 68, otherwise for cooked food in general, esp. rice gruel. -- Vin ii.216; J i.454; iii.277.
-- gāha "holding on to one's spoon," i. e. disinclination to give food, niggardliness, stinginess DhsA 376, cp. Dhs trsl. 300 n2. -- gāhika "spoon in hand," serving with ladles (in the distribution of food at the Mahādāna) PvA 135. -- parissāvana a perforated ladle Vin ii.118. -- bhikkhā "ladle -- begging," i. e. the food given with a ladle to a bhikkhu when he calls at a house on his begging tour Th 1, 934; Miln 9; DhA iv.123; as representing a small gift to one individual, opposed to the Mahādanā Pv ii.957; as an individual meal contrasted with public feeding (salāka -- bhatta) DhA i.379. -- matta (bhatta) "only a spoonful of rice" Miln 8; DhA iv.75.
Kaṭacchuka (adj.) relating to spoons Vin ii.233.
Kaṭana (nt.) [from kaṭa, pp. of karoti] an evil deed A iv.172 (v.l.=AA 744 kaṭanaŋ vuccati pāpakammaŋ).
Kaṭallaka [to kaṭa1] a puppet (pagliaccio), a marionette with some contrivance to make it dance J v.16 (dāru˚ expld by dārumaya -- yanta -- rūpaka).
Kaṭasī (f.) [prob. a contamination of kaṭa + sīva(thikā), charnel -- house, under influence of foll. va(ḍḍh˚), cp. Sk. kaṭa (?) a corpse] a cemetery; only in phrase kaṭasiŋ vaḍḍheti "to increase the cemetery" referring to dying and being buried repeatedly in the course of numerous rebirths, expld by susāna & āḷāhana ThA 291. -- vaḍḍhenti kaṭasiŋ ghoraŋ ādiyanti punabbhavaŋ Vin ii.296=A ii.54=Th 1, 456 (where ācinanti (?) for ādiy˚), 575; Th 2, 502. Also in cpds. ˚vaḍḍhana J i.146; Ud 72=Nett 174; ˚vaḍḍhita S ii.178 sq.= Nd2 664.
Kaṭākaṭa see kata i.3.
Kaṭāha (m. nt.) [Sk. kaṭāha] a pot [in older texts only as -- ˚]. -- 1. pot, vessel, vase, receptacle. udaka˚ Vin ii.122; ghaṭi˚ Vin ii.115; loha˚ Vin ii.170. ayo˚ (in simile "diva -- santatte ayokaṭāhe") M i.453=A iv.138; gūtha˚ Vin iv.265; tumba˚ (a gourd used as receptacle for food) vin ii.114; alābu˚ DhsA 405. -- Uncompounded only at Dpvs 92 (˚ka); Mhvs 17, 47; 18, 24. -- 2. anything shaped like a pot, as the skull: sīsa˚ D ii.297= M i.58; Miln 197.
Kaṭi [Sk. kaṭi, *(s)qṷel; orig. bending, curvature, cp. Gr. ske/los hip, Lat. scelus crooked deed, Ger. scheel squint] hip, waist Vin iii.22, 112; Nd2 659; J iv.32; Miln 418. In cpds. also kaṭa (q. v.).
-- thālaka a cert. bone on the small of the back J vi.509. -- padesa the buttocks J iii.37. -- pamāṇa (adj.) as far as the waist J vi.593. -- pariyosāna the end of the hips, the bottom J ii.275. -- puthulaka (adj.) with broad hips, having beautiful hips J v.303 (in expln of soṇī puthulā). -- bhāga the waist J iii.373. -- bhāra a burden carried on the hip (also a way of carrying children) Vin ii.137; iii.49. -- sandhi the joint of the hip Miln 418, Vism 185. -- samohita (adj.) fastened or clinging to the waist J v.206. -- sutta a belt, girdle (as ornament) PvA 134. -- suttaka a string or cord around the waist to fasten the loin -- cloth Vin ii.271; also an ornamental waist -- band, girdle Vin ii.107 (see Vin. Texts iii.69, 142, 348).
Kaṭuka (adj.) [Sk. kaṭu(ka), from *(s)qṷer to cut; cp. Sk. kṛṇoti (kṛṇtati), Lat. caro "cutlet." -- k. is almost exclusively poetical; usually expld in prose by aniṭṭha, tikhiṇa, ghora (of niraya); often combd with khara, opp. madhura, e. g. PvA 119] sharp, bitter, acid, severe. -- 1. severe, sharp (fig.), of dukkha, vedanā, kāmā, etc. M i.10=A ii.143; J vi.115; Th 2, 451 (= ThA 281); SA 56. -- painful, terrible, frightful ( -- appld to the fruits of evil actions and to the sufferings in Niraya: see kammapphala & niraya) J iii.519; Pv i.102, 111; iv.18, 76. -- bitter, or perhaps pungent of taste DhS 291; Miln 65, 112; J iii.201. -- 2. (nt.) pungency, acidity, bitterness D ii.349=J i.380; Th 2, 503 (pañca˚); J vi.509. -- Note. Is k. to be written instead of kadukkha at VvA 316, where it explains maraṇa? Cp. J iii.201: tesaŋ taŋ kaṭukaŋ āsi, maraṇaŋ ten' upāgamuŋ.
-- udraya causing bitterness or pain J v.241, cp. dukkhudraya J v.119. -- odaka a bitter draught Sdhp 159. -- pabhedana (adj.) having a pungent juice exuding from the temples, said of an elephant in rut Dh 324 (=tikhiṇamada DhA iv.13). -- pphala a kind of perfume made of the berry of an aromatic plant J ii.416=DhA iii.475 (kappūra -- k˚ -- ādīni), cp. Sk. kakkolaka. -- (adj.) of bitter fruit J ii.106 (of the mango); S i.57=J iii.291=Dh 66 (of kamma); Pv i.1110 (id.). -- bhaṇḍa (sg. & pl.) spices. There are 4 enumd at J iii.86: hingujīraka, singiveraka, marica, pipphali; 3 at VvA 186 (as tikaṭuka, cp. kaṭula): ajamoja, hingujīraka, lasuṇa; PvA 135; DhA ii.131. -- bhāva stinginess DhsA 376. -- rohiṇī the black hellebore Vin i.201 (as medicine). -- vipāka (adj.) having a bitter result (of pāpa) Miln 206; compar. ˚tara S ii.128. -- sāsana a harsh command J vi.498.
Kaṭukañcukatā (f.) [der. by Bdhgh. as kaṭuka + añcuka (añc), a popular etymology (DhsA 376). At Dhs 1122 and as v.l. K in Vbh we have the spelling kaṭakancukatā (for kaṭakuñcakatā?), on which and ˚kuñcaka see Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 159 sq. and Dhs. trsl. 300 n2. -- Morris' derivation is kaṭa (kar) + kañcuka + tā (kañcuka=kuñcaka to kuñc, to contract), thus a dern fr. kañcuka "bodice" and meaning "being tightened in by a bodice," i. e. tightness. Although the reading kaṭukañc˚ is the established reading, the var. lect. kaṭakuñc˚ is probably etym. correct, semantically undoubtedly better. It has undergone dissimilatory vowel -- metathesis under influence of popular analogy with kaṭuka. With kuñcikatā cp. the similar expression derived from the same root: kuṇalī -- mukha, of a stingy person Pv ii.928, which is expld by "sankucitaŋ mukhaŋ akāsi" (see kuñcita)] closeness, tightness, close -- fistedness, niggardliness. Expld as "the shrinking up of the heart," which prevents the flow or manifestation of generosity. It occurs only in the stock phrase "vevicchaŋ kadariyaŋ k. aggahitattaŋ cittassa" in macchariya -- passage at Nd2 614=Dhs 1122 =Pug 19, 23=Vbh 357, 371; and in the macchariya expln at Vism 470.
Kaṭukatta (nt.) pungency, acidity, bitterness Miln 56, 63.
Kaṭumikā (f.) [from karoti; see Sk. kṛtrima & kuṭṭima; also kutta & kutti] artificiality, outward help, suggestion, appld to sati Miln 78, 79 (cp. Miln trsl. i.121 n and MVastu i.477).
Kaṭula (adj.) [Sk. kaṭura] containing pungent substances (generally three: tekaṭula) Vin i.210 (yāgu), cp. tikaṭuka.
Kaṭuviya (adj.) [kaṭu viya?] impure, defiled, in ˚kata A i.280.
Kaṭerukkha a kind of creeper J vi.536 (perhaps read as next).
Kaṭeruha a flowering plant J vi.537 (=pupphagaccha). Cp. kaseruka.
Kaṭṭha1 [Sk. kṛṣṭa, pp. of kasati, cp. kiṭṭha] ploughed, tilled Sn 80; Miln 255; PvA 45, 62. a˚ untilled, unprepared Anvs 27. su˚ well -- ploughed A i.229; Miln 255.
Kaṭṭha2 (adj.) [Sk. kaṣṭa] bad, useless: see kaṭṭhaka2. Only in cpds.; perhaps also in pakaṭṭhaka.
-- anga pithless, sapless, of no value (of trees) J ii.163= DhA i.144. -- mukha "with the injurious mouth," a kind of snake DhsA 300.
Kaṭṭha3 (nt.) [Brh. kāṣṭha, cp. Ohg. holz] 1. a piece of wood, esp. a stick used as fuel, chips, firewood S i.168=Sn 462; M i.234 (+ kaṭhala); PvA 256 (+ tiṇa). In phrase "sattussada sa -- tiṇa -- kaṭṭh' odaka sa -- dhañña" (densely populated with good supply of grass, firewood, water, and corn) in ster. description of a prosperous place (cp. Xenophon's po/lis oi)koume/nh eu)dai/mwn kai\ mega/lh) D i.87, 111, etc. Both sg. (coll.) & pl. as "sticks" D ii.341, esp. in phrase kaṭṭhaŋ phāleti to chop sticks Vin i.31; Sn p. 104; J ii.144; Pv ii.951 (=PvA 135), or k˚ŋ pāteti (phāṭeti=phāleti? See pāteti) M i.21. Frequent also in similes: M i.241= ii.93=iii.95 (alla k.); M iii.242=S ii.97=iv.215= v.212 (dve k.); A iii.6 (+ kaṭhala); iv.72 (+ tiṇa); i.124=Pug 30, 36 (+ kaṭhala). -- 2. a piece of stick used for building huts (wattle and daub) M i.190. <-> 3. a stick, in avalekhana˚ (for scraping) Vin ii.141, 221, and in danta˚ a tooth -- pick VvA 63, etc. (see danta). -- 4. (adj.) in cpds.=of wood, wooden.
-- aggi wood -- fire, natural fire A iv.41, 45, enumerated last among the 7 fires. -- atthaŋ for the purpose of fuel, in phrase k. pharati to serve as fuel A ii.95=S iii.93= It 90=J i.482. -- atthara a mat made of twigs (cp. kaṭasāra) J v.197, also as -- attharika (& ˚kā) J vi.21; DhA i.135; f. at J i.9; iv.329; vi.57. -- kalingara chips and chaff DhA iii.122 (cp. k -- khaṇḍa). -- khaṇḍa a piece of wood, splinter, chip, suggesting something useless, trifling DhA i.321 (as expln of niratthaŋ va kalingaraŋ); ThA 284 (as expln of chuṭṭho kalingaraŋ viya). -- tāla a wooden key Vin ii.148 (cp. Vin. Texts iii.162). -- tāḷa a w. gong DhsA 319. -- tumba a w. vessel Vin i.205. -- pādukā a wooden shoe, clog Vin i.188. -- puñja a heap of w. A iv.72; J ii.327. -- phālaka wood -- cutter Vism 413. -- bhatin a wood -- cutter Dpvs 20, 28, where given as a nickname of King Tissa. -- mañcaka a wooden bed Miln 366. -- maya wooden Vin i.203; J i.289 = v.435. -- rūpa (& ˚ka) a w. figure, doll J i.287. -- vāha a cartload of fire -- wood S ii.84. -- vāhana riding on a faggot J i.136. -- vipalāvita drifting wood J i.326. -- hatthin a w. elephant, built by order of King Caṇḍapajjota to decoy King Udena (cp. the horse of Troy) DhA i.193. -- hāraka (f. ˚ikā) gathering fire -- wood, an occupation of poor people M i.79; S i.180; J i.134; ii.412; iv. 148; v.417; Miln 331; Vism 120; VvA 173. -- hārin=˚hāraka Vin iii.41; J i.133 (title of J no. 7. referred to at DhA i.349).
Kaṭṭhaka1 (m. nt.) [to kaṭṭha3] a kind of reed Dh 164; DhA iii.156 (=velu -- sankhāta -- kaṭṭha).
Kaṭṭhaka2 (m. pl.) [to kaṭṭha2] a kind of fairy D ii.261
Kaṭṭhissa (nt.) [Sk.?] a silken coverlet embroidered with gems D i.7=Vin i.192= ii.163; DA i.87=AA 445.
Kaṭhati [Sk. kvathati; cp. Goth. hvapo scum, hvapjan to seethe. The Dhātumañjūsā (no. 132, ed. Andersen & Smith) comments on kaṭh with "sosāna -- pākesu." See also kuthati] 1. to boil, to stew Bdhgh on Vin i.205, see Vin. Texts ii.57 n1, where pp. is given as kuthita. Similarly Th 2, 504 (cp. Sisters 174 n4, but cp. Mil. trs. ii.271 "distressed"; E. Müller, J.R.A.S. 1910, 539). -- 2. to be scorched, pp. kaṭhita (=hot) Miln 323, 325, 357, 397. -- The pp. occurs as ˚kaṭṭhita & ˚kuṭṭhita in cpds uk˚ pa˚ (q. v.). See also kuṭṭhita.
Kaṭhala [Sk. kaṭhara (˚la, ˚lla, ˚lya: all found in Av. S and Divy), to kṛṇāti; cp. khāṭi] gravel, pebble, potsherd J iii.225; v.417; VvA 157; combd with sakkhara at D i.84=A i.9, and in simile at A i.253. As f. combd with kaṭṭha at A i.124=Pug 30, 36; A iii.6; as m. in same combn at Vism 261.
Kaṭhalaka gravel, potsherd J iii.227; Miln 34.
Kaṭhina (adj. -- n.) [Sk. kaṭhina & kaṭhora with dial. ṭh for rth; cp. Gr. kratu/s, kratero/s strong, kra/tos strength; Goth. hardus=Ags. heard=E. hard. Cp. also Sk. kṛtsna=P. kasiṇa]. 1. (adj.) hard, firm, stiff. Cp. ii.2; Dhs 44, 45 (where also der. f. abstr. akaṭhinatā absence of rigidity, combd with akakkhalatā, cp. DhsA 151 akaṭhina -- bhāva); PvA 152 (˚dāṭha). -- (fig.) hard, harsh, cruel J i.295=v.448 (=thaddha -- hadaya); adv. ˚ŋ fiercely, violently Miln 273, 274. -- 2. (nt.) the cotton cloth which was annually supplied by the laity to the bhikkhus for the purpose of making robes Vin i.253 sq.; also a wooden frame used by the bh. in sewing their robes Vin. ii.115 -- 117. -- On the k. robe see Vin. i.298 sq.; iii.196 sq., 203 sq., 261 sq.; iv.74, 100, 245 sq., 286 sq.; v.15, 88, 119, 172 sq.; 218. Cp. Vin. Texts i.18; ii.148; iii.92.
-- attharaṇa the dedication of the k. cloth Vin i.266; see next. -- atthāra the spreading out, i. e. dedication of the k. cloth by the people to the community of bhikkhus. On rules concerning this distribution and description of the ceremony see Vin i.254 sq.; Bu ix.7; cp. Vin v.128 sq., 205 -- uddhāra the withdrawal or suspension of the five privileges accorded to a bhikkhu at the k. ceremony Vin i.255, 259; iii.262; iv.287, 288; v.177 -- 179, cp. next & Vin. Texts ii.157, 234, 235. -- ubbhāra=˚uddhāra, in kaṭhinassa ubbhārāya "for the suspension of the k. privileges" Vin i.255. -- khandhaka the chapter or section treating of k., the 7th of the Mahāvagga of the Vinaya Vin ii.253 -- 267. -- cīvara a k. robe made of k. cloth Bu ix.7. -- dussa the k. cloth Vin i.254. -- maṇḍapa a shed in which the bhikkhus stitched their k. cloth into robes Vin ii.117. -- rajju string used to fix the k. cloth on to the frame Vin ii.116. -- sālā=˚maṇḍapa Vin ii.116.
Kaṭhinaka (adj.) referring to the kaṭhina cloth Vin v.61, 114.
Kaḍḍhati [dialect. form supposed to equal Sk. karṣati, cp. Prk. kaḍḍhai to pull, tear, khaḍḍā pit, dug -- out. See also Bloomfield, J.A.O.S. xiv. 1921 p. 465.] 1. to draw out, drag, pull, tug J i.193, 225, 265, 273 (khaggaŋ k. to draw the sword). -- 2. to draw in, suck up (udakaŋ) J iv.141. -- 3. to draw a line, to scratch J. i.78, 111, 123; vi.56 (lekhaŋ).
Kaḍḍhana (nt.). 1. pulling, drawing Miln 231. - 2. refusing, rejecting, renunciation, appl. to the selfdenial of missionary theras following Gotama Buddha's example Mhvs 12, 55.
Kaḍḍhanaka (adj.) pulling, dragging J v.260.
Kaṇa [Derivation uncertain, possibly connected with kana; positive of kanīyān= small; Vedic kaṇa] the fine red powder between the husk and the grain of rice, huskpowder D i.9 (˚homa), expld at DA i.93 by kuṇḍaka. <-> (adj.) made of husk -- powder or of finely broken rice, of cakes J i.423 (k -- pūva=kuṇḍakena pakka -- pūva). -- akaṇa (adj.) free from the coating of red powder. characteristic of the best rice Mhvs 5, 30; Anvs 27 (akaṇaŋ karoti to whiten the rice). Cp. kākaṇa.
-- bhakkha eating husk -- powder, a practice of cert. ascetics D i.166=M i.78=A i.241≈.
Kaṇaya [Derivation unknown, cp. Sk. kaṇaya=kaṇapa] a sort of spear, lance J i.273; ii.364 (like a spear, of a bird's beak); Miln 339.
-- agga the point of a spear J i.329 (like . . ., of a beak).
Kaṇavīra [Sk. karavīra] Nerium odorum, oleander, the flower of which is frequently used in the garland worn by criminals when led to the place of execution (cp. Rouse, J. trsl. iv.119 and Mṛcchakaṭika X. beginning: diṇṇa -- kalavīla -- dāme. See also under kaṇṭha) Vism 183 (n); DhsA 317; SnA 283; VvA 177; cp. next.
Kaṇavera=kaṇavīra J iii.61; iv.191; v.420; vi.406.
Kaṇājaka (nt.) a porridge of broken rice, eaten together with sour gruel (bilanga -- dutiya; always in this combn except at J v.230) Vin ii.77 (cp. Vin. Texts iii.9); S i.90, 91; A i.145; iv.392; J i.228; iii.299; DhA iii.10; iv.77; VvA 222, 298 (corr. bilanka; Hardy at VvA Index p. 364 expl. as "a certain weight"(?)).
-- bhatta a meal of k. porridge J v.230.
Kaṇikā (f.) [cp. kaṇa] 1. a small particle of broken rice (opp. taṇḍula a full grain) J vi.341, 366 (˚āhi pūvaŋ pacitvā). 2. a small spot, a freckle, mole, in a˚ (adj.) having no moles D i.80, and sa˚ with moles D. i.80 (cp. DA i.223).
Kanikāra (m. nt.) & kaṇṇikāra J iv.440; v.420; the difference stated at J v.422 is kaṇi˚=mahāpupphā kaṇṇi˚=khuddakapupphā) [Sk. karṇikāra] -- 1. (m.) the tree Pterospermum acerifolium J i.40; v.295; vi.269, 537. -- 2. (nt.) its (yellow) flower (k -- puppha), taken metaphorically as typical emblem of yellow and of brightness. Thus in similes at D ii.111 (=pīta)= M ii.14 (ṇṇ)=A v.61 (ṇṇ); DhA i.388; of the yellow robes (kāsāyāni) J ii.25; with ref. to the blood of the heart Vism 256;=golden VvA 65; DhA ii.250 (v. l. ṇṇ).
-- makula a k. bud J ii.83.
Kaṇerika (nt.) a helmet (?) J vi.397.
Kaṇeru (m. f.) [Derivation uncertain, just possibly con- nected with kara, trunk. Sanskrit has kareṇu, but the medieval vocabularies give also kaṇeru] a young elephant J ii.342; iv.49; v.39, 50, 416; vi.497; DhA i.196 (v. l.) kareṇukā) -- f. ˚kā M i.178. -- See also kareṇu.
Kaṇṭa (cp. next) a thorn Miln 351.
Kaṇṭaka [From kantati2 to cut. Brh. kaṇṭaka. Spelt also kaṇṭhaka] 1. a thorn Sn 845; Vin i.188; J v.102; vi.105 (in description of the Vetaraṇī); cp. kusa˚. -- 2. any instrument with a sharp point Sdhp 201. <-> 3. a bone, fish -- bone J i.222; in piṭṭhi˚ a bone of the spine D ii.297≈ (see kaṭaṭṭhi); M i.80=245; Vism 271; Sdhp 102. -- 4. (fig.) an obstacle, hindrance, nuisance ("thorn in my side"); Kvu 572; enemy, infestor; a dacoit, thief, robber D i.135 (sa˚ and a˚, of the country as infested with dacoits or free from them, cp. DA i.296); J i.186 (paṭikaṇṭaka, enemy); v.450; Th 1, 946; DhA i.177 (akkhimhi); VvA 301. -- 5. (fig.) anything sharp, thorny, causing pain: of kāmā (passions) S iv.189, 195, 198; Ud 24; Kvu 202; cp. sa˚. -- Thus grouped, like saŋyojanāni, into 10 obstacles to perfection (dasa k.) A v.134; as "bringing much trouble" J iv.117. Often in standing phrase khāṇu -- kaṇṭaka stumbling and obstruction A i.35; SnA 334. As abstr. kaṇṭakattaŋ hindrance at Vism 269 (sadda˚). -- akaṇṭaka 1. free from thorns J ii.118; v.260. -- 2. (fig.) free from thieves, quiet, peaceful D i.135; also not difficult, easy, happy, bringing blessings (of the right path) A v.135; Vv 187; VvA 96. -- sakaṇṭaka 1. having bones (of food) J iv.192, 193. -- 2. (fig.) beset with thieves, dangerous D i.135; thorny, i. e. painful, miserable (of duggati and kāmā) S iv.195; Th 2, 352; J v.260. -- Cp. also kaṇḍaka and nikkaṇṭaka.
-- âpacita covered with thorns J vi.249 (cp. ˚ācita); -- âpassaya (=kaṇṭak' apāśraya) a bed made of an outstretched skin, under which are placed thorns or iron spikes; to lie or stand on such is a practice of certain naked ascetics D i.167=M i.78≈. -- âpassayika (adj. to prec.) "bed -- of -- thorns -- man" D i.167≈. At J i.493 the reading is k -- āpassaya, at iii.74 k -- apassaya; at iii.235 the reading is kaṇṭhaka -- seyyaŋ kappetha (should it be k -- āpassaye seyyaŋ k˚?); D i.167 reads kaṇṭhakā -- passayika. -- ācita covered with thorns J v.167. -- ādhāna a thorny brake, a thorny hedge M i.10 (k -- dhāna; for dhāna =ṭhāna see dhāna & cp. rāja -- dhānī); A i.35; Miln 220. -- kasā a thorny whip used for punishment and torture J iii.41. -- gahana a thorny thicket or jungle S ii.228. -- gumba a th. bush J i.208. -- latā a th. creeper, the Capparis Zeilanica J v.175. -- vaṭṭa a thorny brake or hedge M i.448.
Kaṇṭaki (f.) in cpd. ˚vāṭa a thorny fence (cactus hedge?) Vin ii.154.
Kaṇṭha [*qṷent from *qṷelt, primarily neck, cp. Lat. collus "the turner." Syn. with k. is gīvā, primarily throat, Brh. kaṇṭha] 1. throat A iv.131; J v.448; Miln 152 (kaṇṭho ākurati, is hoarse); PvA 280 (akkharāni mahatā kaṇṭhena uccaritāni). The throat of Petas is narrow and parched with thirst: PvA 99 (k -- oṭṭha -- tālūnaŋ tassita), 180 (sūci˚ like a needle's eye, cp. sūcicchidda. v. l. sūcikaṭṭha "whose bones are like needles"), 260 (visukkha -- k -- ṭṭha -- jivhā). -- 2. neck Vin i.15; Dh 307 (kāsāva˚); Vv 6417 (expid at VvA 280 by gīvūpagasīsūpagādi -- ābharaṇāni). Esp. in loc. kaṇṭhe round the neck, with ref. to var. things tied round, e. g. kuṇapaŋ k. āsattaŋ A iv.377; kuṇapaŋ k. baddhaŋ J i.5; k. mālā J i.166, 192; k. bandhanti vaḍḍhanaŋ J iii.226; with the wreath of karavīra flowers (q. v.) on a criminal ready for execution: rattavaṇṇa -- virala -- mālāya bandhakaṇṭha PvA 4 (cp. AvŚ i.102; ii.182; karavīra -- mālābaddha [sakta ii.182] -- kaṇṭheguṇa).
-- kūpa the cavity of the throat Mhbv 137. -- ja produced in the throat, i. e. guttural Sāsv 150. -- suttaka an ornamental string or string of beads worn round the neck Vin ii.106.
Kaṇṭhaka1 thorn, see kaṇṭaka.
Kaṇṭhaka2 N. of Gotama's horse, on which he left his father's palace Mhbv 25; spelt kanthaka at J i.54, 62 sq.
Kaṇḍa (m. nt.) [perhaps as *kaldno fr. *kalad to break, cp. Gr. kladaro/s, Lat. clades, etc., Sk. kāṇḍa. See also khagga and khaṇḍa] 1. the portion of a stalk or cane between one knot and another; the whole stalk or shaft; the shaft of an arrow, an arrow in general M i.429 (two kinds of arrows: kaccha & ropima, cp. kaṇḍa -- cittaka); J i.150; ii.91; iii.273; v.39; Miln 44, 73; Mhvs 25, 89. As arrow also in the "Tell" story of Culladhanuggaha at J iii.220 & DhA iv.66. <-> 2. a section, portion or paragraph of a book DA i.12; Pgdp 161. -- 3. a small portion, a bit or lump DhA i.134 (pūva˚); Mhvs 17, 35. -- 4. kaṇḍaŋ (adv.) a portion of time, for a while, a little Pgdp 36. -- See also khaṇḍa, with which it is often confounded. Der. upa -- kaṇḍakin (adj.) (thin) like a stalk or arrow Pv. ii.113 (of a Petī).
-- gamana the going of an arrow, i. e. the distance covered by an arrow in flight, a bow -- shot J ii.334; cp. kaṇḍu. -- cittaka (Sk. kāṇḍa -- citraka) an excellent arrow A ii.202. -- nāḷī a quiver J iii.220. -- pahāra an arrow -- shot, arrow -- wound Miln 16 (ekena k -- paharena dve mahākāyā padālitā "two birds killed with one stone"), 73. -- vāraṇa (adj.) warding off arrows, appl. to a shield J vi.592 (nt.); a shield J iv.366.
Kaṇḍaka=kaṇṭaka Vin ii.318 (Bdhgh.); A iii.383; Bu xiii.29. -- akaṇḍaka free from thieves, safe, secure PvA 161.
Kaṇḍarā (f.) sinew, tendon Vin i.91, 322 (in cpd. kaṇ- ḍara -- cchinna one whose tendons (of the feet) have been cut); Kvu 23, 31; Vism 253, 254 (where KhA 49 reads miñja).
Kaṇḍita at J i.155 is misprint; read: kaṇḍam assa atthī ti kaṇḍī taŋ kaṇḍinaŋ.
Kaṇḍin (adj.) having a shaft inserted, appl. to the head of an arrow (salla) J i.155; (m.) an archer ibid.
Kaṇḍu1 (f.) [perhaps from *kanad to bite, scratch; cp. Sk. kandara, Gr. knada/ llw to bite, knw/dwn, knw/dalon, etc., Sk. kaṇḍu m. & f.] the itch, itching, itchy feeling, desire to scratch Vin i.202, 296; J. v.198; Vism 345. kaṇḍuŋ karoti to make or cause to itch J v.198; vineti to allay the itch, to scratch J v.199. -- (fig.) worldly attachment, irritation caused by the lusts, in "kaṇḍuŋ saŋhanti" (as result of jhāna) A iv. 437.
-- uppala a kind of lotus -- blossom Dāvs iv.48; -- paṭicchādi an "itch -- cloth," i. e. a covering allowed to the bhikkhus when suffering from itch or other cutaneous disease Vin i.296, 297; iv.171, 172. -- rogin (adj.) suffering from the itch Khus 105.
Kaṇḍu˚2 [=kaṇḍa in compn] an arrow -- shot (as measure), in sahassa -- kaṇḍu sata -- bheṇḍu Th 1, 164=J ii.334 (but the latter: sata -- bhedo), expld at Th 1, 164n by sahassakaṇḍo sahassa [sata?] -- bhūmako, and at J ii.334 by sahassa -- kaṇḍubbedho ti pāsādo satabhūmiko ahosi; in preceding lines the expression used is "sahassa -- kaṇḍagamanaŋ uccaŋ."
Kaṇḍuka the itch, itchy feeling, irritation J v.198.
Kaṇḍuvati (kandūvati) [Denom. fr. kaṇḍu. Sk. kandū- yati] 1. to itch, to be itchy, to be irritated, to suffer from itch Vin i.205; ii.121; J v.198 (kaṇḍuvāyati); DhA iii.297 (kaṇḍūvantī). -- 2. to scratch, rub, scrape A ii.207; J vi.413; Pug 56.
Kaṇḍuvana (nt.) [fr. kaṇḍūvati] 1. itching, itchy feeling DhA i.440; cp. Dhātumañjūsā no. 416 kaṇḍūvana.<-> 2. scratching, scraping M i.508; J ii.249 (appl. to bad music).
Kaṇḍusa (nt.) a strip of cloth used to mark the kaṭhina robe, in ˚karaṇa Vin i.254, and ˚ka ibid. 290.
Kaṇḍūyana (nt.) [See kaṇḍuvana] the itch J v.69.
Kaṇḍolikā (f.) a wicker -- basket or stand Vin ii.114, 143 (see Vin. Texts iii.86).
Kaṇṇa [Vedic karṇa, orig. not associated with hearing, therefore not used to signify the sense (sota is used instead; cp. akkhi>cakkhu), but as "projection" to *ker, from which also Sk. śṛṇga horn. Cp. Gr. ko/rus helmet; Lat. cornu & cervus=E. corner, horn & hart. Further related Sk. aśri (caturaśraḥ four -- cornered), śaṣkuli auditory passage; Lat. ācer=Gr. a)/kris, a)/kanos, o)cu/s; Ger. ecke; also Sk. śūla & P. koṇa] 1. a corner, an angle Vin i.48, 286; J i.73; iii.42; v.38; vi.519; PvA 74; DhA ii.178; Dāvs ii.111. -- cīvara˚ the edge of the garment Vism 389. Freq. in cpd. catu˚ (catukkaṇṇa) four -- cornered, square, as Ep. of Niraya Nd2 304iii=Pv i.1013 (expld by catu -- koṇa). Also of cloth Vin ii.228; J i.426; iv.250. -- 2. the ear Sn 608; J i.146, 194; DhA i.390 (dasā˚). Freq. in phrase kaṇṇaŋ chindati (to cut off the ear) as punishment, e. g. A i.47. -- loc. kaṇṇe in the ear, i. e. in a low tone, in a whisper DhA i.166. -- 3. the tip of a spoon J. i.347. -- assakaṇṇa N. of a tree (see under assa3).
-- alankāra an ornament for the ear J v.409. -- āyata (mutta) (a pearl) inserted in the lobe of the ear J ii. 275, 276. -- kita (should it be kaṇha˚? cp. paŋsukita, malaggakita; kita=kata) spoiled, rusty, blunt Vin ii.115 (of needles); dirty, mouldy Vin i.48 (of a floor); ii.209 (of walls); stained, soiled Vin iv.281 (of robes). -- gūthaka the cerumen, wax, of the ear, Vin ii.134; Sn 197= J i.146. -- cālana shaking the ears J iii.99. -- cūḷa the root of the ear J vi.488; as ˚cūlikā at J ii.276; Vism 255; DhA iv.13. -- chidda (nt.) the orifice of the ear, the outer auditory passage (cp. sūci -- chidda eye of the needle) Vin iii.39; J ii.244, 261. -- chinna one whose ears are cut off Vin i.322; Kvu 31. -- cheda cutting or tearing off of the ear Miln 197, 290. -- jappaka one who whispers into the ear, one who tells secretly, also a gossip Vin ii.98; sa˚ whispered into the ear, appl. to a method of taking votes ibid. Cp. upakaṇṇakajappin. -- jappana whispering into the ear D i.11; DA i.97. -- tela anointing the ear with medicinal oil D i.12 (expld at DA i.98, where reading is ˚telanaŋ). -- nāsa ear & nose J ii.117; Miln 5 (˚chinna). -- patta the lobe of the ear J v.463. As ˚panta at ThA 211. -- pāli=˚patta Th 2, 259 (expld by ˚panta). -- piṭṭhī the upper part or top of the ear DhA i.394. -- puccha the "tail" or flap of the ear Sdhp 168. -- bila orifice of the ear Vism 195. -- bheri a sort of drum. Cp. ix.24. -- mala "ear -- dirt," ear -- wax, in ˚haraṇī, an instrument for removing the wax from the ear Vin ii.135. -- mālā a garland from corner to corner (of a temple) Dāvs ii.111. -- muṇḍa 1. (adj.) one whose ears have been shorn or clipped Pv ii.1218 (of the dog of Hell, cp. PvA 152 chinnakaṇṇa). -- 2. (˚ka) "with blunt corners," N. of the first one of the fabulous 7 Great Lakes (satta -- mahāsarā) in the Himavant, enumd at J v.415; Vism 416; DA i.164. -- mūla the root of the ear, the ear in gen. J i.335; iii.124; loc. fig in a low tone DhA i.173; near, near by DhA ii.8 (mama k.). -- roga a disease of the ear DhsA 340. -- vallī the lobe of the ear Mhvs 25, 94. -- vijjhana perforating the ear, ˚mangala the ceremony of ear -- piercing DhA ii.87; cp. mangala. -- vedha (cp. prec.) ear -- piercing, a quasi religious ceremony on children J v.167. -- sakkhali & ˚ikā the orifice or auditory passage of the ear DhA i.148; DhsA 334, in which latter passage ˚ikaŋ paharati means to impinge on the ear (said of the wind); ˚ikaŋ bhindati (=bhindanto viya paharati) to break the ear (with unpleasant words) DhA ii.178 (T. sankhaliŋ, v. l. sakkhaliŋ). -- sankhali a small chain attached to the ear with a small ornament suspended from it J v.438. -- sandhovika washing the ears A v.202. -- sukha 1. (adj.) pleasant to the ear, agreable D i.4=M i.179, 268 =A ii.209≈; Miln 1; DA i.75=DhsA 397; -- 2. (nt.) pleasant speech J ii.187; v.167; opp. kaṇṇa -- sūla. -- sutta an ornamental string hanging from the ear Vin ii.143. -- suttaka a string from corner to corner, a clothes -- line Vin i.286. -- sūla 1. a piercing pain (lit. stake) in the ear, ear -- ache VvA 243. -- 2. what is disagreeable to hear, harsh speech DhsA 397 (opp. ˚sukha).
-- sota the auditory passage, the ear (+ nāsika -- sotāni, as ubho sotāni, i. e. heṭṭhā & uparimā) D i.106=Sn p. 108; A iv.86; J ii.359; Miln 286, 357; DhA ii.72.
Kaṇṇaka (& ˚ika) (adj.) [fr. kaṇṇa] having corners or ears ( -- ˚); f. ˚ikā Vin ii.137; J ii.185. -- kāḷa -- kaṇṇika see under kāḷa.
Kaṇṇavant (adj.) [fr. kaṇṇa] having an (open) ear, i. e. clever, sharp J ii.261 (=kaṇṇachiddaŋ pana na kassaci n'atthi C.).
Kaṇṇikā (f.) [cp. kaṇṇaka & Sk. karṇikā] 1. an ornament for the ear, in ˚lakkhaṇa: see below. -- 2. the pericarp of a lotus J i.152, 183; v.416; Miln 361; Vism 124 (paduma˚); VvA 43. -- 3. the corner of the upper story of a palace or pagoda, house -- top J i.201; iii.146, 318, 431, 472; DhA i.77 (kūṭāgāra˚); DA i.43; VvA 304; Bdhd 92. -- 4. a sheaf in the form of a pinnacle DhA i.98. -- In cpds. kaṇṇika˚.
-- baddha bound into a sheaf; fig. of objects of thoughts DhA i.304. -- maṇḍala part of the roof of a house J. iii.317; DhA iii.66; vi.178. -- rukkha a tree or log, used to form the top of a house J i.201=DhA i.269. -- lakkhaṇa the art of telling fortune by marks on ornaments of the ear, or of the house -- top D i.9 (=pilandhana -- k˚ pi geha -- k˚ pi vasena DA i.94).
Kaṇṇikāra see kaṇikāra.
Kanha (adj.) [cp. Vedic kṛṣṇa, Lith. kérszas] dark, black, as attr. of darkness, opposed to light, syn. with kāḷa (q. v. for etym.); opp. sukka. In general it is hard to separate the lit. and fig. meanings, an ethical implication is to be found in nearly all cases (except 1.). The contrast with sukka (brightness) goes through all applications, with ref. to light as well as quality. I. Of the sense of sight: k -- sukka dark & bright (about black & white see nīla & seta), forming one system of coloursensations (the colourless, as distinguished from the red -- green and yellow -- blue systems). As such enumd in connection with quasi definition of vision, together with nīla, pīta, lohita, mañjeṭṭha at D ii.328=M i.509 sq. =ii.201 (see also mañjeṭṭha). -- II. (objective). 1. of dark (black), poisonous snakes: kaṇhā (f.) J ii.215 (=kāḷa -- sappa C); ˚sappa J i.336; iii.269, 347; v.446; Vism 664 (in simile); Miln 149; PvA 62; ˚sīsā with black heads A iii.241 (kimī). -- 2. of (an abundance of) smooth, dark (=shiny) hair (cp. in meaning E. gloom: gloss=black: shiny), as Ep. of King Vasudeva Pv ii.61, syn. with Kesavā (the Hairy, cp. *)apo/llwn *ou)lai_os Samson, etc., see also siniddha -- , nīla -- , kāla -- kesa). sukaṇha -- sīsa with very dark hair J v.205, also as sukaṇha -- kaṇha -- sīsa J v.202 (cp. susukāḷa). ˚jaṭi an ascetic with dark & glossy hair J vi.507, cp. v.205 sukaṇhajaṭila. ˚añjana glossy polish J v.155 (expld as sukhumakaṇha -- lom' ācitattā). -- 3. of the black trail of fire in ˚vattanin (cp. Vedic kṛṣṇa -- vartaniŋ agniŋ R. V. viii.23, 19) S i.69=J iii.140 (cp. iii.9); J v.63. <-> 4. of the black (fertile) soil of Avanti "kaṇh -- uttara" black on the surface Vin i.195. -- III. (Applied). 1. ˚pakkha the dark (moonless) half of the month, during which the spirits of the departed suffer and the powers of darkness prevail PvA 135, cp. Pv iii.64, see also pakkha1 3. -- 2. attr. of all dark powers and anything belonging to their sphere, e. g. of Māra Sn 355, 439 (= Namuci); of demons, goblins (pisācā) D i.93 with ref. to the "black -- born" ancestor of the Kaṇhāyanas (cp. Dh i.263 kāḷa -- vaṇṇa), cp. also kāḷa in ˚sunakha, the Dog of Purgatory PvA 152. -- 3. of a dark, i. e. miserable, unfortunate birth, or social condition D iii.81 sq. (brāhmano va sukko vaṇṇo, kaṇho añño vaṇṇo). ˚abhijāti a special species of men according to the doctrine of Gosāla DA i.162; A iii.383 sq. ˚abhijātika "of black birth," of low social grade D iii.251=A. iii.384; Sn 563; cp. Th 1, 833 and J.P.T.S. 1893, 11; in the sense of "evil disposition" at J v.87 (expld as kāḷaka -- sabhāva). -- 4. of dark, evil actions or qualities: ˚dhamma A v.232=Dh 87; D iii.82; Sn 967; Pug 30; Miln 200, 337; ˚paṭipadā J i.105, and ˚magga the evil way A v.244, 278; ˚bhāvakara causing a low (re -- )birth J iv.9 (+ pāpa -- kammāni), and in same context as dhamma combd with ˚sukka at A iv. 33; Sn 526 (where kaṇhā˚ for kaṇha˚): Miln 37; ˚kamma "black action" M i.39; ˚vipāka black result, 4 kinds of actions and 4 results, viz. kaṇha˚, sukka˚, kaṇha -- sukka˚, akaṇha -- asukka˚ D iii.230=M i.389 sq.=A ii.230 sq.; Nett 232. akaṇha 1. not dark, i. e. light, in ˚netta with bright eyes, Ep. of King Pingala -- netta J ii.242 in contrast with Māra (although pingala -- cakkhu is also Ep. of Māra or his representatives, cp. J v.42; Pv ii.41). -- 2. not evil, i. e. good A ii.230, 231. -- atikaṇha very dark Vin iv.7; sukaṇha id. see above ii.2.
Kata (& sometimes kaṭa) [pp. of karoti] done, worked, made. Extremely rare as v. trs. in the common meaning of E. make, Ger. machen, or Fr. faire (see the cognate kapp and jan, also uppajjati & vissajjati); its proper sphere of application is either ethical (as pāpaŋ, kusalaŋ, kammaŋ: cp. ii.1 b) or in such combinations, where its original meaning of "built, prepared, worked out" is still preserved (cp. i.1 a nagara, and 2 a).
I. As verb -- determinant (predicative). -- 1. in verbal function (Pass.) with nominal determination "done, made" (a) in predicative (epithetic) position: Dh 17 (pāpaŋ me kataŋ evil has been done by me), 68 (tañ ca kammaŋ kataŋ), 150 (aṭṭhīnaŋ nagaraŋ kataŋ a city built of bones, of the body), 173 (yassa pāpaŋ kataŋ kammaŋ). -- (b) in absolute (prothetic) position, often with expression of the agent in instr. D i.84=177=M i.40=Sn p. 16 (in formula kataŋ karanīyaŋ, etc., done is what had to be done, cp. arahant ii.A.); Vin iii.72 (kataŋ mayā kalyāṇaŋ akataŋ mayā pāpaŋ); Pv i.55 (amhākaŋ katā pūjā done to us is homage). -- So also in composition (˚ -- ), e. g. (nahāpakehi) ˚parikammatā the preparations (being) finished (by the barbers) J vi.145; (tena) ˚paricaya the acquaintance made (with him) VvA 24; PvA 4; (tattha) ˚paricayatā the acquaintance (with that spot) VvA 331; (tesaŋ) ˚pubba done before D ii.75=A iv.17; (kena) J vi.575; ˚matta (made) drunk Th 1, 199; (cira) ˚saŋsagga having (long) been in contact with, familiar J iii.63 (and a˚). 2. in adj. (med -- passive) function (kaṭa & kata); either passive: made, or made of; done by= being like, consisting of; or medio -- reflexive: one who has done, having done; also "with" (i. e. this or that action done). -- (a) in pregnant meaning: prepared, cultivated, trained, skilled; kaṭ -- âkaṭa prepared & natural Vin i.206 (of yūsa); akaṭa natural ibid., not cultivated (of soil) Vin i.48= ii.209; DA i.78, 98; untrained J iii.57, 58. -- ˚atta selfpossessed, disciplined J vi.296; ˚indiya trained in his senses Th 1, 725; ˚ûpāsana skilled, esp. in archery M i.82; S i.62; A ii.48=iv.429; S i.99; J iv.211; Miln 352, ˚kamma practised, skilled J v.243; of a servant S i.205 (read āse for ase), of a thief A iii.102 (cp. below ii.1 a); ˚phaṇa having (i. e. with) its hood erected, of a snake J vi.166; ˚buddhi of trained mind, clever J iii.58; a˚ ibid.; ˚mallaka of made -- up teeth, an artificial back -- scratcher Vin ii.316; a˚ not artificially made, the genuine article Vin ii.106; ˚yogga trained serviceable S i.99; a˚ useless S i.98. ˚rūpa done naturally, spontaneously J v.317 (expld by ˚jāniya; ˚sabhāva); ˚veṇī having (i. e. with) the hair done up into a chignon J v.431; ˚hattha (one) who has exercised his hands, dexterous, skilful, esp. in archery M i.82; S i.62, 98; ii.266; A ii.48; J iv.211,; v.41; vi.448; Miln 353; DhA i.358; a˚ unskilled, awkward S i.98; su˚ well -- trained J v 41 (cp. ˚upāsana), ˚hatthika an artificial or toy -- elephant J vi.551. -- (b) in ordinary meaning: made or done; ˚kamma the deed done (in a former existence) J i.167; VvA 252; PvA 10; ˚piṭṭha made of flour (dough) PvA 16 (of a doll); ˚bhāva the performance or happening of J iii.400; Mhbv 33; ˚sanketa (one who has made an agreement) J v.436 -- (c) with adverbial determination (su˚, du˚; cp. dūrato, puro, atta, sayaŋ, & ii.2 c): sukata well laid out, of a road J vi.293, well built, of a cart Sn 300=304; J iv.395, well done, i. e. good A i.102 (˚kamma -- kārin doing good works). -- dukkata badly made, of a robe Vin iv.279 (ṭ), badly done, i. e. evil A i.102 (˚kamma kārin); sukata -- dukkata good & evil (˚kammāni deeds) D i.27= 55=S iv.351; Miln 5, 25. 3. as noun (nt.) kataŋ that which has been done, the deed. -- (a) absolute: J iii.26 (katassa appaṭikāraka not reciprocating the deed); v.434 (kataŋ anukaroti he imitates what has been done) kat -- âkataŋ what has been done & left undone Vin iv.211; katāni akatāni ca deeds done & not done Dh 50. -- (b) with adv. determination (su˚, du˚): sukataŋ goodness (in moral sense) Sn 240; Dh 314; dukkataŋ badness Vin i.76; ii.106; Dh 314; dukkatakārin doing wrong Sn 664.
II. As noun -- determinant (attributive) in composition (var. applications & meanings). -- 1. As 1st pt. of compd: Impersonal, denoting the result or finishing of that which is implied in the object with ref. to the act or state resulting, i. e. "so and so made or done"; or personal, denoting the person affected by or concerned with the act. The lit. translation would be "having become one who has done" (act.: see a), or "to whom has been done" (pass.: see b). -- (a) medio -- active. Temporal: the action being done, i. e. "after." The noun -- determinates usually bear a relation to time, especially to meal -- times, as kat -- anna -- kicca having finished his meal Dāvs i.59; ˚bhatta -- kicca after the meal J iv.123; PvA 93; ˚purebhatta -- kicca having finished the duties of the morning DA i.45 sq.; SnA 131 sq.; ˚pātarāsa breakfast J i.227; DhA i.117, a˚ before br. A iv.64; ˚pātarāsa -- bhatta id. J vi.349; ˚ânumodana after thanking (for the meal) J i.304; ˚bhatt'ânumodana after expressing satisfaction with the meal PvA 141. In the same application: kat -- okāsa having made its appearance, of kamma Vv 329 (cp. VvA 113); PvA 63; ˚kamma ( -- cora) (a thief) who has just "done the deed," i. e. committed a theft J iii.34; Vism 180 (katakammā corā & akata˚ thieves who have finished their "job" & those who have not); DhA ii.38 (corehi katakammaŋ the job done by the th.), cp. above i.2 a; ˚kāla "done their time," deceased, of Petas J iii.164 (pete kālakate); PvA 29, cp. kāla; ˚cīvara after finishing his robe Vin i.255, 265; ˚paccuggamana having gone forth to meet J iii. 93. ˚paṇidhāna from the moment of his making an earnest resolve (to become a Buddha) VvA 3; ˚pariyosita finished, ready, i. e. after the end was made VvA 250; ˚buddha -- kicca after he had done the obligations of a Buddha VvA 165, 319; DA i.2; ˚maraṇa after dying, i. e. dead PvA 29; ˚massu -- kamma after having his beard done J v.309 (see note to ii.1 b). -- Qualitative: with ethical import, the state resulting out of action, i. e. of such habit, or "like, of such character." The qualification is either made by kamma, deed, work, or kicca, what can be or ought to be done, or any other specified action, as ˚pāpa -- kamma one who has done wrong DhA i.360 (& a˚); ˚karaṇīya one who has done all that could be done, one who is in the state of perfection (an Arahant), in formula arahaŋ khīṇ'āsavo vusitavā ohitabhāro (cp. above i.1 b & arahant ii.A) M i.4, 235; It 38; Miln 138; ˚kicca having performed his obligations, perfected, Ep. of an Arahant, usually in combn with anāsava S i.47, 178; Dh 386; Pv ii.615; Th 2, 337, as adj.: kata -- kiccāni hi arahato indriyāni Nett 20; ˚kiccatā the perfection of Arahantship Miln 339. -- With other determinations: -- āgasa one who has done evil Sdhp 294. -- âdhikāra having exerted oneself, one who strives after the right path J i.56; Miln 115. -- âparādha guilty, a transgressor J iii.42. -- âbhinihāra (one) who has formed the resolution (to become a Buddha) J i.2; DhA i.135. -- âbhinivesa (one) who studies intently, or one who has made a strong determination J i.110 (& a˚). -- ussāha energetic Sdhp 127. -- kalyāṇa in passage kata -- kalyāno kata -- kusalo katabhīruttāṇo akata -- pāpo akata -- luddho (luddo) [: ˚thaddho It] akata -- kibbiso having done good, of good character, etc. A ii.174=Vin iii.72=It 25=DhsA 383; PvA 174; also Pass. to whom something good has been done J i.137; iii.12; Pv ii.99; akata -- kalyāṇa a man of bad actions It 25; Pv ii.79. -- kibbisa a guilty person M i.39; Vin iii.72 (a˚), of beings tormented in Purgatory Pv iv.77; PvA 59. -- kusala a good man: see ˚kalyāṇa. -- thaddha hard -- hearted, unfeeling, cruel: see ˚kalyāṇa. -- nissama untiring, valiant, bold J v.243. -- parappavāda practised in disputing with others DA i.117. -- pāpa an evil -- doer It 25; Pv ii.79 (+ akata -- kalyāṇa); PvA 5; a˚: see ˚kalyāṇa. -- puñña one who has done good deeds, a good man D ii.144; Dh 16, 18, 220; Pv iii.52; Miln 129; PvA 5, 176; a˚ one who has not done good (in previous lives) Miln 250; VvA 94. -- puññatā the fact of having done good deeds D iii.276 (pubbe in former births); A ii.31; Sn 260, cp. KhA 132, 230; J ii.114. -- bahukāra having done much favour, obliging Dāvs iv.39. -- bhīruttāṇa one who has offered protection to the fearful: see ˚kalyāṇa. -- bhūmikamma one who has laid the ground -- work (of sanctification) Miln 352. -- ludda cruel M iii.165; a˚ gentle Nett 180; cp ˚kalyāṇa. -- vināsaka (one) who has caused ruin J i.467. -- vissāsa trusting, confiding J i.389. -- ssama painstaking, taking trouble Sdhp 277 (and a˚). -- (b) medio -- passive: The state as result of an action, which affected the person concerned with the action (reflexive or passive), or "possessed of, afflicted or affected with." In this application it is simply periphrastic for the ordinary Passive. -- Note. In the case of the noun being incapable of functioning as verb (when primary), the object in question is specified by ˚kamma or ˚kicca, both of which are then only supplementary to the initial kata˚, e. g. kata -- massu -- kamma "having had the beard ( -- doing) done," as diff. fr. secondary nouns (i. e. verb -- derivations). e. g. kat -- âbhiseka "having had the anointing done." -- In this application: ˚citta -- kamma decorated, variegated DhA i.192; ˚daṇḍa -- kamma afflicted with punishment (=daṇḍāyita punished) Vin i.76; ˚massu -- kamma with trimmed beard, after the beard -- trimming J v.309 (cp. J iii.11 & karana). -- Various combinations: katañjalin with raised hands, as a token of veneration or supplication Sn 1023; Th 2, 482; J i.17=Bu 24, 27; PvA 50, 141; VvA 78. -- attha one who has received benefits J i.378. -- ânuggaha assisted, aided J ii.449; VvA 102. -- âbhiseka anointed, consecrated Mhvs 26, 6. -- ûpakāra assisted, befriended J i.378; PvA 116. -- okāsa one who has been given permission, received into audience, or permitted to speak Vin i.7; D ii.39, 277; Sn 1030, 1031 (˚âva˚); J v.140; vi.341; Miln 95. -- jātihingulika done up, adorned with pure vermilion J iii.303. -- nāmadheyya having received a name, called J v.492. -- paṭisanthāra having been received kindly J vi.160; DhA i.80. -- pariggaha being taken to wife, married to (instr.) PvA 161 (& a˚). -- paritta one on whom a protective spell has been worked, charm -- protected Miln 152. -- bhaddaka one to whom good has been done PvA 116. -- sakkāra honoured, revered J v.353; Mhvs 9, 8 (su˚). -- sangaha one who has taken part in the redaction of the Scriptures Mhvs 5, 106. -- sannāha clad in armour DhA i.358. -- sikkha (having been) trained Miln 353. -- 2. As 2nd pt. of compd: Denoting the performance of the verbal notion with ref. to the object affected by it, i. e. simply a Passive of the verb implied in the determinant, with emphasis of the verb -- notion: "made so & so, used as, reduced to" (garukata=garavita). <-> (a) with nouns (see s. v.) e. g., anabhāva -- kata, kavi˚, kāla -- vaṇṇa˚ (reduced to a black colour) Vin i.48= ii.209, tāl'āvatthu˚, pamāṇa˚, bahuli˚, yāni˚, sankhār'ûpekkhā˚, etc. -- (b) with adjectives, e. g. garu˚, bahu˚. -- (c) with adverbial substitutes, e. g. atta˚, para˚ (paraŋ˚), sacchi˚, sayaŋ, etc.
Kataka (nt.) [fr. kantati2] a scrubber, used after a bath Vin ii.129, 143; cp. Vin. Texts ii.318.
Kataññu (adj.) [cp. Sk. kṛtajña] lit. knowing, i. e. acknowledging what has been done (to one), i. e. grateful often in combn with katavedin grateful and mindful of benefits S ii. 272; A i.87=Pug 26; Vv 8127; Sdhp 509, 524. akataññu 1. ungrateful S i.225; J iii.26 (=kata -- guṇaŋ ajānanto C.), 474; iv.124; PvA 116; Bdhd 81. -- 2. (separate akata -- ññu) knowing the Uncreated, i. e. knowing Nibbāna Dh 97, 383; DhA ii.188; iv.139. -- akataññu -- rūpa (& ˚sambhava) of ungrateful nature J iv.98, 99.
Kataññutā (f.) [abstr. fr. last] gratefulness (defined at KhA 144 as katassa jānanatā) Sn 265; J i.122 (T. ˚nā, v. l. ˚tā); iii.25; Pv ii.97; VvA 63; Sdhp 497, 540. In combn with kataveditā S ii.272; A i.61; ii.226, 229. kataññū -- kataveditā J iii.492. -- akataññutā ungratefulness, in combn with akataveditā A i.61; iii.273; J v.419; as one of the 4 offences deserving of Niraya A ii.226.
Katatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. kata, cp. Sk. kṛtatvaŋ] the doing of, performance of, only in abl. katattā D ii.213; A i.56; J iii.128; Dhs 431, 654; SnA 356; DhA iii.154; iv.142. Used adverbially in meaning of "owing to, on account of" Miln 275; DhsA 262; Mhvs 3, 40. -- akatattā through non -- performance of, in absence or in default of A. i.56; PvA 69, 154.
Katana (nt.) [fr. kata] a bad deed, injuring, doing evil (cp. kaṭana) J iv.42 (yam me akkhāsi . . . katanaŋ kataŋ), cp. Morris in J.P.T.S. 1893, 15.
Katama (adj.) [cp. Vedic katama, interr. pron. with formation of num. ord., in function=katara, cp. antama > antara, Lat. dextimus>dexter] which, which one (of two or more) Vin ii.89; M i.7; J i.172; Miln 309; PvA 27. In some cases merely emphatic for ko, e. g. Vin i.30 (katamena maggena āgato?); D i.197 (katamo so atta -- paṭilābho?); J i.97; Sn 995; Miln 51. -- instr. katamena (scil. maggena) adv. by which way, how? Miln 57, 58.
Katara (adj.) [Vedic katara, interr. pron. with formation of num. ord., cp. Gr. po/teros, Lat. uter] which one (of a certain number, usually of two) J i.4; PvA 119. Often only emphatic for ko, e. g. J i.298 (kataraŋ upaddavaŋ na kareyya), and used uninflected in cpds., as katara -- geha J iii.9; ˚gandhaŋ J vi.336; ˚divasaŋ J ii.251; ˚nagarato (from what city) DhA i.390; ˚nāma (kataraŋnāma, adj.) (of what name) ibid. -- katarasmiŋ magge in which way, how? J iv.110.
Katavedin (adj.) [kata + vedin, see kataññu] mindful, grateful S i.225; Pug 26; J i.424; ii.26.
Kataveditā (f.) [abstr. fr. last] gratefulness: see Kataññutā.
Katāvin (adj. -- n.) [secondary formation fr. kata] one who has done (what could be done), used like katakicca to denote one who has attained Arahantship S i.14; Miln 264.
Kati (indecl.) [interr. pron.; used like Lat. quot. Already Vedic.] how many? Vin i.83 (k. sikkhāpadāni), 155; S i.3 (˚sangâtiga having overcome how many attachments? ), 70; Sn 83, 960, 1018; Ps ii.72; Miln 78; DhA i.7, 188; PvA 74.
Katikā (f.) [to katheti or karoti?] 1. agreement, contract, pact Vin i.153 (T. kātikā), 309; J vi.71; Miln 171, 360. -- 2. talking, conversation, talk (adhammikā k., cp. kathikā & kathā) J ii.449. -- katikaŋ karoti to make an arrangement or agreement Vin iii.104, 220, 230; J. i.81; iv.267; DhA i.91; VvA 46. In cpds. katika˚, e. g. ˚vatta observance of an agreement, ˚ŋ karoti to be faithful to a pact Dh i.8; ˚ŋ bhindati to break an agreement J vi.541; ˚saṇṭhāna the entering of an agreement Vin ii.76, 208: iii.160.
Katipaya (adj.) [cp. Sk. katipaya] some, several; a few (in cpds. or in pl.) J i.230, 487; iii.280, 419; iv.125; v.162; Pv ii.920 (=appake only a few); DhA i.94 (very few); PvA 46. In sg. little, insignificant Vv 5320 (=appikā f.). ˚vāre a few times, a few turns J v.132; vi.52; PvA 135; Mhbv 3.
Katipāhan (adv.) [katipaya + ahan, contracted, see aha2] (for) a few days Vin iii.14; J i.152, 298, 466; ii.38; iii.48; iv.147; Mhvs 7, 38; PvA 145, 161; VvA 222. katipāhena (instr.) within a few days Mhvs 17, 41; DhA i.344; PvA 13, 161. katipāh'accayena after (the lapse of) a few days J i.245; DhA i.175; PvA 47.
Katima [num. ord. fr. kati], f. katimī in k. pakkhassa which (of many other) day of the half -- month Vin i.117.
Kativassa (adj.) [kati + vassa] 1. (having) how many years, how old? J v.331. -- 2. (having had) how many rainy seasons (in the bhikkhu's career) of how many years' seniority? Vin i.86; Ud 59; Miln 28; DhA i.37.
Katividha (adj.) [kati + vidha, for Vedic katidhā] of how many kinds Vism 84.
Kate (adv.) [loc. of kata] for the sake of, on behalf of; with acc. maŋ k. J iv.14; with gen. maŋsassa k. J v.500.
Katta [pp. of kantati2; cp. Sk. kṛtta] is represented in Pali by kanta2; katta being found only in cpd. pari˚.
Kattabba (adj.) [grd. of karoti] 1. to be done, to be made or performed; that which might or could be done Dh 53; J i.77, 267; v.362. -- 2. (nt.) that which is to be done, obligation, duty Th 1, 330; J ii.154; v.402; DhA i.211. -- akattabba (adj.) not to be done J iii.131; v.147; (nt.) that which ought not to be done J v.402. kattabb' âkattabba to be done and not to be done J i.387. kattabba -- yuttaka 1. (adj.) fit or proper to be done DhA i.13. -- 2. (nt.) duty, obligation J iii.9; vi.164; DhA i.180; (the last) duties towards the deceased J i.431. -- Cp. kātabba.
Kattabbaka (nt.) [fr. last] task, duty Th 1, 330.
Kattabbatā (f.) [fr. kattabba] fitness, duty, that which is to be done J ii. 179 (iti -- ˚āya because I had to do it thus).
Kattar [n. ag. fr. karoti, cp. Sk. kartṛ] one who makes or creates, a maker, doer; in foll. construction. I. Dependent. Either in verb -- function with acc., as n. agent to all phrases with karoti e. g. pañhaŋ karoti to put a question, pañhaŋ kattā one who puts a question; or in n. function with gen., e. g. mantānaŋ kattāro the authors of the Mantas, or in cpd. rāja -- kattāro makers of kings. -- II. Dependent. as n. kattā the doer: kattā hoti no bhāsitā he is a man of action, and not of words. -- 1. (indef.) one who does anything (with acc.) A i.103; ii.67; v.347, 350 sq.; (with gen.) J i.378; iii.136 (one who does evil, in same meaning at iii.26, C. akataññū, cp. J.P.T.S. 1893, 15: not to kṛt!); iv.98 (expld as kata by C); v.258; Miln 25, 296; Bdhd 85 sq. -- 2. an author, maker, creator D i.18 (of Brahmā: issaro, k., nimmātā), 104 (mantānaŋ); A ii.102; Dh i.111. -- 3. an officer of a king, the king's messenger J v.220 (=225); vi.259, 268, 302, 313, 492. Note. At J v.225 & vi.302 the voc. is katte (of a -- decl.), cp. also nom. ˚katta for ˚kattā in salla -- katta. -- 4. as t.t.g. N. of the instr. case VvA 97; Kacc 136, 143, 277.
Kattara (adj.) (only˚ -- ) [cp. Sk. kṛtvan (?), in diff. meaning] ˚daṇḍa a walking -- stick or staff (of an ascetic) Vin i.188; ii.76=208 sq.; iii.160; J i.9; v.132; vi.52, 56, 520; Vism 91, 125, 181. ˚yaṭṭhi=prec. J ii.441; DA i.207; iii.140. ˚ratha an old (?) chariot J iii.299. ˚suppa a winnowing basket Vin i.269=DhA i.174 (˚e pakkhipitvā sankāra -- kūṭe chaḍḍehi).
Kattari & ˚ī (f.) [to kantati2] scissors, shears J iii.298, with ref. to the "shears" of a crab, "as with scissors": cp. Vin. Texts iii.138 (see next).
Kattarikā (f.) [fr. last] scissors, or a knife Vin ii.134; J. i.223.
Kattikā (f.) (& ˚kattika) [cp. Sk. kṛttikā f. pl. the Pleiades & BSk. karthika] N. of a month (Oct. -- Nov.), during which the full moon is near the constellation of Pleiades. It is the last month of the rainy season, terminating on the full moon day of Kattikā (kattika -- puṇṇamā). This season is divided into 5 months: Āsāḷha, Sāvaṇa, Bhaddara (Poṭṭhapāda), Assayuja, Kattikā; the month Assayuja is also called pubba -- kattikā, whereas the fifth, K., is also known as pacchima -- kattikā; both are comprised in the term k. -- dvemāsika. Bhikkhus retiring for the first 3 months of the Vassa (rainy season) are kattika -- temāsikā, if they include the 4th, they are k. -- cātumāsikā. The full moon of Assayuja is termed k. -- temāsinī; that of Kattika is k. -- cātumāsinī. See Vinaya passages & cp. nakkhatta. -- Nett 143 (kattiko, v. l. kattikā).
-- cātumāsinī see above Vin iii.263. -- coraka a thief who in the month of K., after the distribution of robes, attacks bhikkhus Vin iii.262. -- chaṇa a festival held at the end of Lent on the full moon of pubba -- kattikā, and coinciding with the Pavāraṇā J i.433; ii.372; v.212 sq.; Mhvs 17, 17. -- temāsi ( -- puṇṇamā) (the full moon) of pubbakattikā Vin iii.261; Mhvs 17, 1 (˚puṇṇamāsī). -- māsa the month K. J ii.372; Mhvs 12, 2 (kattike māse). -- sukkapakkha the bright fortnight of K. Mhvs 17, 64.
Kattu˚ 1. base of inf. kattuŋ (of karoti), in compds ˚kamyatā willingness to do something Vbh 208; Vism 320, 385; DhA iii.289; ˚kāma desirous to do Vin ii.226. ˚kāmatā desire to do or to perform Vism 466; VvA 43. -- 2. base of kattar in compn.
Kattha (adv.) [der. fr. interr. base ka˚ (kad2), whereas Sk. kutra is der. fr. base ku˚, cp. kuttha] where? where to, whither? Vin i.83, 107; ii.76; D i.223; Sn 487, 1036; J iii.76; Pv ii.916; DhA i.3. -- k. nu kho where then, where I wonder? D i.215 sq., PvA 22 (with Pot.) -- katthaci(d) (indef.) anywhere, at some place or other J i.137; v.468; wherever, in whatever place Miln 366; PvA 284; KhA 247; J iii.229; iv.9, 45; as katthacid eva J. iv. 92; PvA 173. Sometimes doubled katthaci katthaci in whatsoever place J iv.341. -- na k. nowhere M. i.424; Miln 77; VvA 14.
-- ṭhita fig. in what condition or state? D ii.241 (corresp. with ettha); J iv.110. -- vāsa in what residence? Sn 412. -- vāsika residing where? J ii.128, 273.
Katthati [cp. Sk. katthate, etym. unexpld] to boast Sn 783 (ppr. med. akatthamāna). Cp. pavikatthita.
Katthitar (n. ag. fr. katthati] a boaster Sn 930.
Katthin (adj.) [fr. katth] boasting A v.157 (+ vikatthin).
Katthu (?) a jackal, in ˚soṇā j. & dogs J vi.538 (for koṭṭhu˚).
Kathaŋ (adv.) [cp. Vedic kathaŋ & kathā] dubit. interr. part. 1. how; with ind. pres. PvA 6 (k. puriso paṭilabhati), or with fut. & cond. J i.222; ii.159 (k. tattha gamissāmi); vi.500; PvA 54 (na dassāmi) -- 2. why, for what reason? J iii.81; v.506. Combined with -- ca Vin i.114; ii.83. -- carahi D ii.192. -- nu & -- nu kho Vin ii.26, J iii.99; iv. 339; Nd2 189, see also evaŋ nu kho. -- pana D ii.163. -- su Nd2 189. -- hi J iv.339; DhA i.432. -- hi nāma Vin i.45; ii.105; iii.137; iv.300; all in the same meaning; -- ci (kathañci) scarcely, with difficulty Th 1, 456.
-- kathā "saying how? how?" i. e. doubt, uncertainty, unsettled mind (cp. kaṅkhā); expl. as vicikicchā dukkhe kankhā Nd2 190; D ii.282; Sn 500, 866, 1063, 1088; DhA iv.194; as adj. and at end of cpd. ˚ -- katha, e. g. vigata˚ (in phrase tiṇṇa -- vicikiccha . . . vesārajjappatta) D i.110=Vin i.12; tiṇṇa˚ (+ visalla) Sn 17, 86, 367. k -- k -- salla "the arrow of doubt" D ii.283 (vicikicchā +). -- kathin having doubts, unsettled, uncertain D ii.287; M i.8; Nd2 191; DhsA 352; a˚ free from doubt, Ep. of Arahant (expld DA i.211: "not saying how and how is this?"); M i.108; It 49; Sn 534, 635, 868, 1064; in phrases tiṇṇa -- vicikiccho viharati akathankathī kusalesu dhammesu D i.71=Pug 59, jhāyī anejo a˚ Dh 414 (: DhA iv.194)=Sn 638. -- kara (adj.) how acting, what doing? k. ahaŋ no nirayam pateyyaŋ ("ti/ poiw_n maka/rios e)/somai") J iv.339; Sn 376; J iv.75; v.148. -- jīvin leading what kind of life? Sn 181. -- dassin holding what views? Sn 848 (see ˚sīla). -- pakāra of what kind Vin i.358; Sn 241 (:kathappakāra). -- paṭipanna going what way, i. e. how acting? D ii.277, 279, 281. -- bhāvita how cultivated or practised? S v.119. -- bhūta "how being," of what sort, what like D ii.139, 158; -- rūpa of what kind? M i.218; A i.249; iii.35; J iii.525. -- vaṇṇa of what appearance, what like? D ii.244. -- vidha what sort of? J v.95, 146; DhsA 305. -- sameta how constituted? Sn 873. -- sīla of what character or conduct? how in his morality? Sn 848 (kathaŋdassī kathaŋsīlo upasanto ti vuccati).
Kathana (nt.) [fr. kath, see katheti] 1. conversing, talking J i.299; iii.459; vi.340. -- 2. telling i. e. answering, solving (a question) J v.66 (pañha˚). -- 3. preaching DhA i.7. -- 4. reciting, narrating Kacc. 130. Cp. kathita. -- akathana not talking or telling J i.420; vi.424; not speaking fr. anger J iv.108; DhA i.440.
-- ākāra, in ˚ŋ karoti to enter into conversation with J vi.413. -- samattha able to speak (of the tongue) J iii.459; able to talk or converse with (saddhiŋ) J vi.340. -- sīla (one) in the habit of talking, garrulous J i.299; a˚ J i.420.
Kathala (potsherd) spelling at Vism 261 for kaṭhala.
Kathali (metri causâ)=next, in the Uddāna at Vin ii.234
Kathalika (nt.) [der. uncertain], always in combn pād'- odaka pāda -- pīṭha pāda -- k˚: either a cloth to wipe the feet with after washing them, or a footstool Vin i.9, 47; ii.22 sq., 210, 216. At VvA 8 however with pāda -- pīṭha expld as a footstool (pāda -- ṭhāpana -- yoggaŋ dārukhaṇḍaŋ āsanaŋ). Bdhgh (on CV ii.1.1) expld pādapīṭha as a stool to put the washed foot on, pāda -- kathalika as a stool to put the unwashed foot on, or a cloth to rub the feet with (ghaŋsana).
the meaning "bowl" seems to be preferable to Bdhgh's forced interpretation as "towel."
Kathā (f.) [fr. kath to tell or talk, see katheti; nearest synonym is lap, cp. vāc' âbhilāpa & sallāpa] 1. talk, talking, conversation A i.130; PvA 39. So in antarā˚ D i.179; Sn p. 107, 115; cp. sallāpa. Also in tiracchāna˚ low, common speech, comprising 28 kinds of conversational talk a bhikkhu should not indulge in, enumd in full at D i.7=178=iii.36 & passim (e. g. S v.419: corr. suddha˚ to yuddha˚!; A v.128=Nd2 192); ref. to at A iii.256; v.185; J i.58; Pug 35. Similarly in gāma˚ Sn 922; viggāhikā k. A iv.87; Sn 930. Ten good themes of conversation (kathā -- vatthūni) are enumd at M iii.113=A iii.117=iv.357=v.67; Miln 344; similarly dhammī kathā A ii.51; iv.307; v.192; Sn 325; pavattanī k. A i.151; yutta kathāyaŋ Sn 826; sammodanīyā k. in salutation formula s˚ŋ k˚ŋ sāraṇīyaŋ vītisāretvā D i.52, 108, etc.; A v.185; Sn 419, pp. 86, 93, 107, 116. -- 2. speech, sermon, discourse, lecture Vin i.203, 290 (˚ŋ karoti to discuss); A iii.174; iv. 358. Freq. in anupubbi˚ a sermon in regular succession, graduated sermon, discussing the 4 points of the ladder of "holiness," viz. dānakathā, sīla˚, sagga˚, magga˚ (see anupubba) Vin i.15; A iii.184; iv.186, 209, 213; DhA i.6; VvA 66. -- 3. a (longer) story, often with vitthāra˚ an account in detail, e. g. PvA 19. bāhira˚ profane story KhA 48. -- 4. word, words, advice: ˚ŋ gaṇhāti to accept an advice J ii.173; iii.424. -- 5. explanation, exposition, in aṭṭha˚ (q. v.), cp. gati˚ Ps ii.72. -- 6. discussion, in ˚vatthu (see below) Mhvs 5, 138. -- dukkathā harmful conversation or idle talk A iii. 181; opp. su˚ A iii.182. -- kathaŋ vaḍḍheti "to increase the talk," to dispute sharply J i.404; v.412. ˚ŋ samuṭṭhāpeti to start a conversation J i.119; iv. 73. -- At the end of cpds. (as adj.) ˚kathā e. g. chinna˚ Sn 711; ṭhita˚ DA i.73; madhura˚ J iii.342; vi.255.
-- âbhiññāṇa recollection due to speech Miln 78, 79. -- ojja (k˚ -- udya, to vad) a dispute, quarrel Sn 825, 828. -- dhamma a topic of conversation DA i.43. -- nigghosa the sound of praise, flattery J ii.350. -- pavatti the course of a conversation J i.119; DhA i.249; Mhbv 61. -- pābhata subject of a conversation, story J i.252, 364. -- bāhulla abundance of talk, loquacity A iv.87. -- magga narrative, account, history J i.2. -- rasa the sweetness of (this) speech Miln 345. -- vatthu 1. subject of a discourse or discussion, argument M i.372; ii.127, 132. There are 10 enumd at A iv.352, 357 (see kathā) and at Vism 19 as qualities of a kalyāṇa -- mitta, referred to at A v.67, 129; Vism 127; DhA iv.30. Three are given at D iii.220=A i.197. ˚kusala well up in the subjects of discussion VvA 354. -- 2. N. of the fifth book of the Abhidhamma Piṭaka, the seven constituents of which are enumd at var. places (e. g. DA i.17; Mhbv 94, where Kvu takes the 3rd place), see also J.P.T.S. 1882, 1888, 1896. -- samuṭṭhāna the arising of a discussion Mhvs 5, 138. -- samuṭṭhāpana starting a conversation J i.119; iii.278; DhA i.250. -- sampayoga conversational intercourse A i.197. -- sallāpa talk, conversation Vin i.77; D i.89 sq., 107 sq.; ii.150; M i.178; A ii.197; v.188; Ud 40; J ii.283; Miln 31; DA i.276 (expld as kathanapaṭikathana); DhA ii.91 (˚ŋ karoti) VvA 153.
Kathāpeti Caus. ii. of katheti (q. v.).
Kathālikā(f.) [fr. kuth, to boil] kettle, cooking pot; in daṇḍa˚ (a pot with a handle) Vin i.286 (v. l. kathālaka), and meda˚ A iv. 377; DhA ii. 179.
Kathika (adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. kathā, cp. Sk. kathaka] relating, speaking, conversing about, expounding, in cpds. citta˚ Th 2, 449 (cp. citra -- kathin); (a) tiracchāna˚ A iv.153; dhamma˚ J i.148; iii.342; iv.2 (˚thera); vi.255 (mahā˚); as noun a preacher, speaker, expounder A iii.174; Mhvs 14, 64 (mahā˚).
Kathikā (f.) [fr. last?] agreement Dpvs 19, 22; see katikā.
Kathita [pp. of katheti, cp. Sk. kathita] said, spoken, related J ii.310; iv.73; v.493. su˚ well said or told J. iv.73. As nt. with instr. J iv.72 (tena kathitaŋ the discourse (given) by him).
Kathin (adj.) ( -- ˚) [cp. kathika] speaking; one who speaks, a speaker, preacher J i.148 (dhamma -- kathikesu citrakathī); Miln 90, 348 (˚seṭṭha best of speakers). See also kathaŋ -- kathin.
Katheti (v. den. fr. kathā, cp. Sk. kathayate] aor. kathesi, inf. kathetuŋ & kathetave (Vin i.359); Pass. kathīyati & katheti (Miln 22, cp. Trenckner, Notes 122); ppr. Pass. kathīyamāna & kacchamāna (A. iii.181); grd. kathetabba, kathanīya & kaccha, -- 1. to speak, say, tell, relate (in detail: vitthārato PvA 77). mā kathesi (=mā bhaṇi) do not speak PvA 16. -- to tell (a story): J. i.2; iv.137; PvA 12, 13. -- 2. to converse with J. vi.413; PvA 86 (=āmantayi). -- 3. to report, to inform J v.460. -- 4. to recite DhA i.166. -- 5. to expound, explain, preach J i.30; Miln 131; DhA i.88; Nd2 s. v. -- 6. to speak about (with acc.) Vin ii.168. -- 7. to refer to J i.307. -- 8. to answer or solve (a question) J i.165; v.66. -- Caus ii. kathāpeti to make say Mhvs 24, 4 (aor. kathāpayi); DhA ii.35; KhA 118.
Kad˚ [old form of interr. pron. nt., equal to kiŋ cp. (Vedic) kad in kadarthaŋ =kiŋarthaŋ to what purpose] orig. "what?" used adverbially; then indef. "any kind of," as (na) kac( -- cana) "not at all"; kac -- cid "any kind of; is it anything? what then?" Mostly used in disparaging sense of showing inferiority, contempt, or defectiveness, and equal to kā˚ (in denoting badness or smallness, e. g. kākaṇika, kāpurisa, see also kantāra & kappaṭa), kiŋ˚, ku.˚ For relation of ku>ka cp. kutra> kattha & kadā.
-- anna bad food Kacc 178. -- asana id. Kacc 178. -- dukkha (?) great evil (=death) VvA 316 (expld as maraṇa, cp. kaṭuka).
Kadamba (cp. Sk. kadamba] the kadamba tree, Nauclea cordifolia (with orange -- coloured, fragrant blossoms) J. vi.535, 539; Vism 206; DhA i.309 (˚puppha); Mhvs 25, 48 (id.).
Kadara (adj.) miserable J ii.136 (expld as lūkha, kasira).
Kadariya (adj.) [cp. Sk. kadarya, kad + arya?] mean, miserly, stingy, selfish; usually expld by thaddhamaccharī (PvA 102; DhA iii.189, 313), and mentioned with maccharī, freq. also with paribhāsaka S i.34, 96; A ii.59; iv.79 sq.; Dh 177, 223; J v.273; Sn 663; Vv 295. As cause of Peta birth freq. in Pv., e. g. i.93; ii.77; iv.148; PvA 25, 99, 236. -- (nt.) avarice, stinginess, selfishness, grouped under macchariya Dhs 1122; Sn 362 (with kodha).
Kadariyatā (f.) [abstr. fr. last] stinginess, niggardliness D ii.243; Miln 180; PvA 45.
Kadala (nt.) the plantain tree Kacc 335.
Kadalī1 (f.) [Sk. kadalī] -- 1. the plantain, Musa sapien- tium. Owing to the softness and unsubstantiality of its trunk it is used as a frequent symbol of unsubstantiality, transitoriness and worthlessness. As the plantain or banana plant always dies down after producing fruit, is destroyed as it were by its own fruit, it is used as a simile for a bad man destroyed by the fruit of his own deeds: S i.154=Vin ii.188=S ii.241=A ii.73 =DhA iii.156; cp. Miln 166; -- as an image of unsubstantiality, Cp. iii.24. The tree is used as ornament on great festivals: J i.11; vi.590 (in simile), 592; VvA 31. -- 2. a flag, banner, i. e. plantain leaves having the appearance of banners ( -- dhaja) J v.195; vi.412. In cpds. kadali˚.
-- khandha the trunk of the plantain tree, often in similes as symbol of worthlessness, e. g. M i.233= S iii.141=iv.167; Vism 479; Nd2 680 Aii.; J vi.442; as symbol of smoothness and beauty of limbs VvA 280; -- taru the plantain tree Dāvs v.49; -- toraṇa a triumphal arch made of pl. stems and leaves Mhbv 169; -- patta a pl. leaf used as an improvised plate to eat from J v.4; DhA i.59; -- phala the fruit of the plantain J v.37.
Kadalī2 (f.) a kind of deer, an antelope only in ˚miga J v.406, 416; vi.539; DA i.87; and ˚pavara -- pacc.<-> attharaṇa (nt.) the hide of the k. deer, used as a rug or cover D i.7=A i.181=Vin i.192=ii.163, 169; sim. D. ii.187; (adj.) (of pallanka) A i.137=iii.50=iv.394.
Kadā (indecl.) [Vedic kadā. Cp. tadā, sadā in Pali, and perhaps Latin quando]. interr. adv. when? (very often foll. by fut.) Th 1, 1091 -- 1106; J ii.212; vi. 46; DhA i.33; PvA 2. -- Combd with -- ssu J v.103, 215; vi.49 sq. -- ci [cid] indef. -- 1. at some time A iv.101. -- 2. sometimes J i.98; PvA 271. -- 3. once upon a time Dāvs i.30. -- 4. perhaps, may be J i.297; vi.364. + eva: kadācideva VvA 213; -- kadāci kadāci from time to time, every now and then J i.216; iv. 120; DhsA 238; PvA 253. -- kadāci karahaci at some time or other, at times A i.179; Miln 73; DhA iii.362. -- na kadāci at no time, never S i.66; J v.434; vi.363; same with mā k˚ J vi.310; Mhvs 25, 113; cp. kudācana. -- kadāc<-> -- uppattika (adj.) happening only sometimes, occasional Miln 114.
Kaddama [Derivation unknown. Sk. kardama] mud, mire, filth Nd2 374 (=panka); J i.100; iii.220 (written kadamo in verse and kaddemo in gloss); vi.240, 390; PvA 189 (=panka), 215; compared with moral impurities J iii.290 & Miln 35. a˚ free from mud or dirt, clean Vin ii.201, of a lake J iii.289; fig. pure of character J iii.290. kaddamīkata made muddy or dirty, defiled J vi.59 (kilesehi).
-- odaka muddy water Vin ii.262; Vism 127. -- parikhā a moat filled with mud, as a defence J vi. 390; -- bahula (adj.) muddy, full of mud DhA i.333;
Kanaka (nt.) [cp. Sk. kanaka; Gr. knh_kos yellow; Ags. hunig=E. honey. See also kañcana] gold, usually as uttatta˚ molten gold; said of the colour of the skin Bu i.59; Pv iii.32; J v.416; PvA 10 suvaṇṇa).
-- agga gold -- crested J v.156; -- chavin of golden complexion J vi.13; -- taca (adj.) id. J v.393; -- pabhā golden splendour Bu xxiii.23; -- vimāna a fairy palace of gold VvA 6; PvA 47, 53; -- sikharī a golden peak, in ˚rājā king of the golden peaks (i. e. Himālayas): Dāvs iv.30.
Kaniṭṭha (adj.) [Sk. kaniṣṭha; compar. & superl.; see kaññā] younger, youngest, younger born Vin iii.146 (isi the younger); J ii.6; PvA 42, 54; esp. the younger brother (opp. jeṭṭha, ˚ka) J i.132; DhA i.6, 13; Mhvs. 9, 7; PvA 19, 55. Combd with jeṭṭhaka the elder & younger brothers J i.253; sabba -- k. the very youngest J i.395. f. kaniṭṭhā the youngest daughter DhA i.396. -- fig. later, lesser, inferior, in ˚phala the lesser fruit (of sanctification) Pv iv.188. -- akaniṭṭha "not the smaller" i. e. the greatest, highest; in akaniṭṭhagāmin going to the highest gods (cp. parinibbāyin) S v.237= 285, etc. ˚bhavana the abode of the highest gods J. iii.487.
Kaniṭṭhaka (adj.) younger (opp. jeṭṭha) A iv.93=J ii.348; DhA i.152; the younger brother Mhvs 5, 33, 8, 10; 35, 49; 36, 116; -- ˚ikā and ˚akā a younger sister, Mhvs 1, 49; Pv i.115 (better read for kaniṭṭhā).
Kaniṭṭhatta (nt.) the more recent and therefore lower, less developed state (of sanctification) DhA i.152.
Kaniṭṭhī (f.) a younger sister Mhvs 7, 67.
Kaniya (adj.) [compar. of kan˚, Sk. kanīyaŋs] younger, less, inferior Kacc 122 (only as a grammarian's construction, not in the living language where it had coalesced with *kanyā=kaññā).
Kanta1 [Sk. kānta, pp. of kāmeti] -- 1. (adj.) in special sense an attribute of worldly pleasure (cp. kāma, kāmaguṇā): pleasant, lovely, enjoyable; freq. in form. iṭṭhā kantā manāpā, referring to the pleasures of the senses S i.245; ii.192; iv.60, 158, 235 sq.; v.22, 60, 147; A ii.66 sq.; M i.85; Sn 759; It 15; Vbh 2, 100, 337; bāla˚ (lovely in the opinion of the ignorant) Sn 399.<-> D ii.265; iii.227 (ariya˚); J iii.264; v.447; with ref. to the fruit of action as giving pleasure: ˚phala Kvu 35, 211, PvA 277 (hatthi -- ) k˚ pleasing to elephants; of manta DhA i.163; of vīṇā J vi.255, 262; DhA i.163. -- 2. beloved by, favourite of, charming J vi.255, 262; DhA i.163. -- 3. (n.) the beloved one, the husband J vi.370 (wrongly written kan tena); of a precious stone Miln 118; Sdhp 608, cp. suriya˚, canda˚ -- kantā (f.) the beloved one, the wife J v.295; kantena (instr.) agreeably, with kind words A ii.213; J v.486 (where porisādassa kante should be read as porisādassak' ante). -- a˚ undesired, disagreeable, unpleasant, in same form as kanta, e. g. D ii.192; in other combn J v.295; Vbh 100; Nett 180; PvA 193. -- akantena with unpleasant words A ii.213. -- kantatara compar. J iii.260.
-- bhāva the state of being pleasant DA i.76; VvA 323.
Kanta2 [pp. of kantati2, Sk. kṛtta. kanta is analogy- form. after pres. kantati, regularly we should expect katta. See also avakanta. It may be simply misreading for katta, cp. Kern, Toev. under parikanta.] cut, cut out or off Th 2, 223 (˚salla=samucchinna -- rāg' -- ādisalla ThA 179) cp. katta & pari˚.
Kantati1 [Sk. kṛṇatti, *qert, cp. kata, & Lat. cratis, crassus, E. crate] to plait, twist, spin, esp. suttaŋ (thread) Vin iv.300; PvA 75; DhA iii.273; kappāsaŋ A iii.295. Cp. pari˚.
Kantati2 [Sk. kṛṇtati; *(s)qert, to cut; cp. Gr. kei/rw, to shear; Lat. caro, cena; Ohg. sceran, E. shear; see also kaṭu] to cut, cut off J ii.53 (: as nik˚ in gloss, where it should be mūlāni kant˚); iii.185; vi.154; DhA iii.152 (+ viddhaŋseti).
Kantāra (adj. n.) [perhaps from kad -- tarati, difficult to cross, Sk. (?) kāntāra] difficult to pass, scil. magga, a difficult road, waste land, wilderness, expld as nirudaka īriṇa VvA 334 (on Vv 843), combd with maru˚ PvA 99 and marukantāramagga PvA 112; opp. khemantabhūmi. Usually 5 kinds of wilds are enumerated: cora˚, vāla˚, nirudaka˚, amanussa˚, appabbhakkha˚ J i.99; SA 324; 4 kinds at Nd2 630: cora˚, vāla˚, dubhikkha˚, nirudaka˚. The term is used both lit. & fig. (of the wilds of ignorance, false doctrine, or of difficulties, hardship). As the seat of demons (Petas and Yakkhas) freq. in Pv (see above), also J i.395. As diṭṭhi˚ in pass. diṭṭhi -- gata, etc. M i.8, 486, Pug 22 (on diṭṭhi vipatti).
-- addhāna a road in the wilderness, a dangerous path (fig.)Th 1, 95~D i.73= M i.276; -- paṭipanna a wanderer through the wilderness, i. e. a forester J iii.537. -- magga a difficult road (cp. kummagga) J ii.294 (lit.); in simile: S ii.118. -- mukha the entrance to a desert J i.99.
Kantāriya (adj.) [from kantāra] (one) living in or belonging to the desert, the guardian of a wilderness, applied to a Yakkha Vv 8421 (=VvA. 341).
Kantika1 (adj.) [to kantati1] spinning PvA 75 (sutta˚ itthiyo).
Kantika2=kanta1 in a˚ unpleasant, disgusting Pv iii.41 (=PvA 193).
Kantita1 [Sk. kṛtta, pp. of kantati1] spun, (sutta) Vin iv.300.
Kantita2 (adj.) Sk. kṛtta pp. of kantati2] cut off, severed, at Miln 240 better as kantita1, i. e. spun.
Kanda [Sk. kanda] a tuberous root, a bulb, tuber, as radish, etc. J i.273; iv.373; vi.516; VvA 335; ˚mūla bulbs and roots (˚phala) D i.101; a bulbous root J v.202.
Kandati [Sk. krandati to *q(e)lem; cp. Gr. kale/w, ke/lados, Lat. clamor, calare, calendae, Ohg. hellan to shout] to cry, wail, weep, lament, bewail Dh 371; Vv 8312; J vi.166; Miln 11, 148; freq. of Petas: PvA 43, 160, 262 (cp. rodati). -- In kāmaguṇā pass. urattāḷiŋ k. M. i.86=Nd2 s. v.; A iii.54 (urattāḷī for ˚iŋ v. l.); in phrase bāhā paggayha k˚ Vin i.237; ii.284; J v.267.
Kandana (nt.) [Sk. krandana] crying, lamenting PvA 262
Kandara [Sk. kandara] -- 1. a cave, grotto, generally, on the slope or at the foot of a mountain Vin ii.76, 146; used as a dwelling -- place Th 1, 602; J i.205; iii.172. <-> 2. a glen, defile, gully D i.71=A ii.210=Pug 59; A iv.437; Miln 36; expld at DA i.209 (as a mountainous part broken by the water of a river; the etym. is a popular one, viz. "kaŋ vuccati udakaŋ tena dāritaŋ"). k -- padarasākhā A i.243=ii.240; PvA 29.
Kandala N. of a plant with white flowers J iv.442. -- ma- kuḷa knob (?) of k. plant Vism 253 (as in description of sinews).
Kandaḷa N. of esculent water lily, having an enormous bulb D i.264.
Kandita (adj.) [pp. of kandati] weeping, lamenting Dāvs iv.46; a˚ not weeping J iii.58. (n. nt.) crying, lamentation J iii.57; Miln 148.
Kanna (adj.) [Sk. skanna] trickling down J v.445.
Kannāma=kinnāma J vi.126.
Kapaṇa (adj. n.) [Sk. kṛpaṇa from kṛp wail, cp. Lat. crepo; Ags. hraefn=E. raven. Cp. also Sk. kṛcchra] -- 1. poor, miserable, wretched; a beggar; freq. expld by varāka, duggata, dīna and daḷidda; very often classed with low -- caste people, as caṇḍālā Pv. iii.113 & pesakārā (Ud 4). Sn 818; J i.312, 321; iii.199; Pv ii.914; iii.113, iv.52; DA i.298; DhA i.233; ThA 178. -- 2. small, short, insignificant A i.213; Bdhd 84. (f.) ˚ā a miserable woman J iv.285; -- ˚an (adv.) pitifully, piteously, with verbs of weeping, etc. J iii.295; v.499; vi.143; a˚ not poor J iii.199; -- ati˚ very miserable Pgdp 74. Der. ˚tā wretchedness Sdhp 315.
-- addhikā pl. often with ˚ādi, which means samaṇabrāhmaṇa -- k˚ -- vaṇibbaka -- yācakā (e. g. D i.137; PvA 78) beggars and wayfarers, tramps J i.6, 262, DhA i.105, 188 (written k˚ -- andhika); see also DA i.298 and kapaṇikā; -- iddhikā pl. (probably miswriting for ˚addh˚, cp. Trenckner, J.P.T.S. 1908, 130) D i.137; It 65; DA i.298; -- itthī a poor woman J iii.448; -- jīvikā in ˚aŋ kappeti to make a poor livelihood J i.312; -- bhāva the state of being miserable PvA 274; -- manussa a wretched fellow, a beggar Vism 343; -- laddhaka obtained in pain, said of children J vi.150, cp. kiccha laddhaka; -- visikhā the street or quarter of the poor, the slums Ud 4; -- vuttin leading a poor life PvA 175.
Kapaṇikā (f.) a (mentally) miserable woman Th 2, 219; ThA 178; cp. kapaṇā; also as kapaṇiyā J vi.93.
Kapalla at Vin i.203, is an error for kajjala, lamp -- black, used in preparation of a collyrium (cp. J.P.T.S. 1887, 167).
Kapalla (nt.) [Sk kapāla; orig. skull, bowl, cp. kapola & Lat. caput, capula, capillus, Goth. haubi, E. head]<-> 1. a bowl in form of a skull, or the shell of reptiles; see kapāla. -- 2. an earthenware pan used to carry ashes J i.8; vi.66, 75; DhA i.288. -- 3. a frying pan (see cpds. & cp. angāra -- kapalla) Sn 672. -- kapalla is only a variant of kapāla.
-- pāti an earthen pot, a pan J i.347=DhA i.371; -- pūva a pancake J i.345; DhA i.367; VvA 123; Mhvs 35, 67.
Kapallaka -- 1. a small earthen bowl J vi.59; DhA i.224. -- 2. a frying pan J i.346.
Kapāla (nt.) [Sk. kapāla, see kapalla] -- 1. a tortoise- or turtle -- shell S i.7=Miln 371; S iv.179; as ornament at DA i.89. -- 2. the skull, cp. kaṭāha in sīsakaṭāha. <-> 3. a frying pan (usually as ayo˚, of iron, e. g. A iv.70; Nd2 304iii; VvA 335) J ii.352; Vv 845; DhA i.148 (v. l. ˚kapalla); Bdhd 100 (in simile). -- 4. a begging bowl, used by certain ascetics S iv.190; v.53, 301; A i.36; iii.225; J i.89; PvA 3. -- 5. a potsherd J ii.301.
-- ābhata the food collected in a bowl A i.36; -- khaṇḍa a bit of potsherd J ii.301; -- hattha "with a bowl in his hand," begging, or a beggar, Th 1, 1118; J i.89; iii.32; v.468; PvA 3.
Kapālaka -- 1. a small vessel, bowl J i.425. -- 2. a beggar's bowl J i.235; DhA ii.26.
Kapāsa=kappāsa, q. v. Dāvs ii.39.
Kapi [Sk. kapi, original designation of a brownish colour, cp. kapila & kapota] a monkey (freq. in similes) Sn 791; Th 1, 1080; J i.170; iii.148, cp. kavi.
-- kacchu the plant Mucuna pruritus Pv ii.310; ˚phala its fruit PvA 86; -- citta "having a monkey's mind," capricious, fickle J iii.148=525; -- naccanā Npl., Pv iv.137; -- niddā "monkey -- sleep," dozing Miln 300.
Kapiñjala [Derivation unknown. Sk. kapiñjala] a wild bird, possibly the francolin partridge Kvu 268; J vi.538 (B.B. kapiñjara).
Kapiṭhana the tree Thespesia populneoides Vin iv. 35.
Kapiṭṭha and ˚ttha -- 1. the tree Feronia elephantum, the wood -- apple tree J vi.534; Vism 183 (˚ka); Mhvs 29, 11; -- 2. ˚ŋ (nt.) the wood apple Miln 189; -- 3. the position of the hand when the fingers are slightly and loosely bent in J i.237; kapitthaka S v.96.
Kapitthana=kapiṭhana J ii.445; vi.529, 550, 553; v. l. at Vism 183 for ˚itthaka.
Kapila (adj.) [Sk. kapila, cp. kapi] brown, tawny, reddish, of hair & beard VvA 222; ˚ā f. a brown cow DhA iv.153.
Kapisīsa [Sk. kapiśīrṣa] the lintel of a door D ii.143 (cp. Rh.D. Buddh. Suttas p. 95 n1) -- ˚ka the cavity in a doorpost for receiving the bolt Vin ii.120, 148 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.106 n3).
Kapota [Sk. kapota, greyish blue, cp. kapi) -- 1. (m.) a pigeon, a dove J i.243; Miln 403; -- 2. (f.) ˚i a female pigeon PvA 47; ˚ka (f. ˚ikā Miln 365) a small pigeon J i.244.
-- pāda (of the colour) of a pigeon's foot J i.9.
Kapola [Sk. kapola, cp. kapalla, orig. meaning "hollow"] the cheek Vism 263, 362; DhA i.194.
Kappa (adj. n.) [Sk. kalpa, see kappeti for etym. & forma- tion] anything made with a definite object in view, prepared, arranged; or that which is fit, suitable, proper. See also DA i.103 & KhA 115 for var. meanings. -- I Literal Meaning. -- 1. (adj.) fitting, suitable, proper (cp. ˚tā) (=kappiya) in kappâkappesu kusalo Th 1, 251, ˚kovido Mhvs 15, 16; Sn 911; as juice Miln 161. <-> ( -- ˚) made as, like, resembling Vin i.290 (ahata˚); Sn 35 (khaggavisāṇa˚); hetu˚ acting as cause to Sn 16; Miln 105; -- a˚ incomparable Mhvs 14, 65; -- 2. (nt.) a fitting, i. e. harness or trapping (cp. kappana) Vv 209 (VvA 104); -- a small black dot or smudge (kappabindu) imprinted on a new robe to make it lawful Vin i.255; iv.227, 286: also fig. a making -- up (of a trick): lesa˚ DA i.103; VvA 348. -- II. Applied Meaning. <-> 1. (qualitative) ordinance, precept, rule; practice, manner Vin ii.294, 301 (:kappati singiloṇa -- kappo "fit is the rule concerning . . ."); cp. Mhvs 4, 9; one of the chalanga, the 6 disciplines of Vedic interpretation, VvA 265; -- 2. (temporal) a "fixed" time, time with ref. to individual and cosmic life. As āyu at DA i.103 (cp.kappaŋ); as a cycle of time=saŋsāra at Sn 521, 535, 860 (na eti kappaŋ); as a measure of time: an age of the world Vin iii.109; Miln 108; Sdhp 256, 257; PvA 21; It 17=Bdhd 87=S ii.185. There are 3 principal cycles or aeons: mahā˚, asankheyya˚, antara˚; each mahā˚ consists of 4 asankheyya -- kappas, viz. saŋvaṭṭa˚ saŋvaṭṭaṭṭhāyi˚ vivaṭṭa˚ vivaṭṭaṭṭhāyi˚ A ii.142; often abbreviated to saŋvaṭṭa -- vivaṭṭa˚ D i.14; It 15; freq. in formula ekampijātiŋ, etc. Vin iii.4=D iii.51, 111= It 99. On pubbanta˚ & aparanta˚, past & future kappas see D i.12 sq. paṭhama -- kappe at the beginning of the world, once upon a time (cp. atīte) J i.207. When kappa stands by itself, a Mahā -- kappa is understood: DA i.162. A whole, complete kappa is designated by kevala˚ Sn pp. 18=46~125; Sn 517; also dīgha˚ S ii.181; Sdhp 257. For similes as to the enormous length of a kappa see S ii.181 & DA i.164=PvA 254. -- acc. kappaŋ adv.: for a long time D ii.103=115= Ud 62, quot. at DA i.103; Vin ii.198; It 17; Miln 108; mayi āyukappaŋ J i.119, cp. Miln 141. Cp. sankappa.
-- âtīta one who has gone beyond time, an Arahant Sn 373. -- âvasesaŋ (acc.) for the rest of the kappa, in kappaŋ vā k -- âvasesaŋ vā D ii.117=A iv.309=Ud 62; Miln 140: -- āyuka (one) whose life extends over a kappa Mhvs v.87; -- uṭṭhāna arising at or belonging to the (end of a) kappa: -- aggi the fire which destroys the Universe J ii.397; iii.185; iv.498; v.336; vi.554; Vism 304; -- kāla the time of the end of the world J v.244; -- uṭṭhāna (by itself) the end of the world J i.4=Vism 415; -- kata on which a kappa, i. e. smudge, has been made, ref. to the cīvara of a bhikkhu (see above) Vin i.255; iv.227, 286; DA i.103; -- (ñ)jaha (one) who has left time behind, free from saŋsāra, an Arahant Sn 1101 (but expld at Nd2 s. v., see also DA i.103, as free from dve kappā: diṭṭhi˚ taṇha˚). -- jāla the consumption of the kappa by fire, the end of a kappa Dpvs i.61. -- ṭṭha staying there for a kappa, i. e. in purgatory in āpāyiko nerayiko + atekiccho, said of Devadatta Vin ii.202, 206; A iii.402 ~iv.160; It 11~85. -- ṭṭhāyin lasting a whole cycle, of a vimāna Th 1, 1190. -- ṭṭhika enduring for an aeon: kibbisa (of Devadatta) Vin ii.198=204; (cp. Vin. Texts iii.254) sālarukkha J v.416; see also ṭhitakappiŋ Pug 13. -- ṭṭhitika id. DhA i.50 (vera); Miln 108 (kammaŋ). ("sabbe pi magga -- samangino puggalā ṭhita -- kappino.") -- ṭṭhiya -- =prec. A v.75; J i.172, 213; v.33; Miln 109, 214. ˚rukkha the tree that lasts for a kappa, ref. to the cittapāṭalī, the pied trumpet -- tree in the abode of the Asuras J i.202; -- nibbatta originated at the beginning of the k. (appl. to the flames of purgatory) J v.272; -- parivaṭṭa the evolution of a k; the end of the world Dpvs i.59; -- pādapa= ˚rukkha Mhbv 2; -- rukkha a wishing tree, magical tree, fulfilling all wishes; sometimes fig. J vi.117, 594; Vism 206; PvA 75, 176, 121; VvA 32 (where combd with cintāmaṇi); DhA iv.208; -- latā a creeper like the kapparukkha VvA 12; -- vināsaka (scil. aggi): the fire consuming the world at the end of a k. Vism 414 sq.; (mahāmegho) DhA iii.362; -- samaṇa an ascetic acc. to precepts, an earnest ascetic J vi.60 (cp. samaṇa -- kappa); -- halāhala "the k -- uproar," the uproar near the end of a kalpa J i.47.
Kappaka [fr. kḷp, kappeti] a barber, hairdresser, also attendant to the king; his other function (of preparing baths) is expressed in the term nahāpaka (Pv ii.937) or nahāpita (˚ā?) (DA i.157) Vin. i.344; ii.182; D i.51 (=DA i.157, in list of various occupations); J i.60, 137; iii.315; Pv ii.937; iii.14 (where expl. by nahāpita in the meaning of "bathed," cp. expl. ad i.106) DhA i.85 (˚vesa disguise of a barber), 342 (pasādhana˚ one who arranges the dress, etc., hairdresser).
-- jātika belonging to or reborn in the barber class, in this sense representing a low, "black" birth PvA 176.
Kappaṭa [kad -- paṭa=ku -- paṭa] a dirty, old rag, torn gar- ment (of a bhikkhu) Th 1,199.
Kappatā (f.) [abstr. fr. kappa] fitness, suitability DA i.207.
Kappati [Pass. of kappeti, cp. Sk. kalpyate] to be fit, seeming, proper, with dat. of person D ii.162; Vin ii.263, 294; iii.36; Th 1,488; Mhvs 4, 11; 15, 16.
Kappana (nt.) [fr. kappeti, cp. Sk. kalpana] the act of preparing, fixing; that which is fixed, arranged, performed. 1. kappanā (f.) the fixing of a horse's harness, harnessing, saddling J i.62; -- 2. (nt.) ( -- ˚) procuring, making: jīvika˚; a livelihood J iii.32; putting into order; danta˚ J i.321; -- 3. (adj.) ( -- ˚) trimmed, arranged with: nānāratana˚ VvA 35.
Kappara [cp. Sk. kūrpara] the elbow Vin iii.121=iv.221; J i.293, 297; DhA i.48, 394; VvA 206.
Kappāsa [cp. Sk. karpāsa] 1. the silk -- cotton tree J iii.286; vi.336. -- 2. cotton D ii.141; A iii.295; S v.284; J i.350; vi.41; comb. w. uṇṇa A iii.37= iv.265=268.
-- aṭṭhi a cotton seed DhA iii.71; -- paṭala the film of the cotton seed Vism 446; Bdhd 66; -- picu cotton S v.284; J v.110, 343; vi.184: -- maya made of cotton PvA 77.
Kappāsika (adj.) made of cotton D ii.188, cp. A iv.394; D ii.351; Vin i.58=97= 281; J vi.590; Pv ii.117. (nt) cotton stuff Miln 267.
-- paṇṇa the leaf of the cotton tree, used medicinally Vin i.201; -- sukhuma fine, delicate cotton stuff D ii.188; A iv.394; Miln 105.
Kappāsī (f.) [=kappāsa] cotton J vi.537; PvA 146.
Kappika ( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. kappa] 1. belonging to a kappa, in paṭhama˚ -- kāla the time of thé first Age DA i.247; Vbh 412 (of manussā); VvA 19 (of Manu); without the kāla (id.) at J i.222; as noun the men of the first Age J ii.352. -- 2. In cpds. . . . pubbanta˚ and aparanta˚ the ika˚ belongs to the whole cpd. D i.39 sq.; DA i.103. See also kappiya 2.
Kappita [pp. of kappeti] 1. prepared, arranged, i. e. har- nessed D i.49; J vi.268; i. e. plaited DA i.274; i. e. trimmed: ˚kesamassu "with hair & beard trimmed" D ii.325; S iv.343; J v.173, 350; vi.268; Vv 731. <-> 2. getting procuring; as ˚jīvika a living J v.270; made ready, drawn up (in battle array) D ii.189; <-> 3. decorated with, adorned with Sdhp 247. -- su˚ well prepared, beautifully harnessed or trimmed Vv 601.
Kappin (adj.) [fr. kappa] 1. (cp. kappa ii.1a) getting, procuring, acquiring (pañña˚) Sn 1090; -- 2. (cp. kappa ii.1b) having a kappa (as duration), lasting a Cycle Pug 13; in Mahā˚ enduring a Mahākappa DA i.164=PvA 254.
Kappiya (adj.) [fr. kappa] 1. (cp. kappa ii.1a) according to rule, right, suitable, fitting, proper, appropriate (PvA 26=anucchavika paṭirūpa) J i.392; DA i.9; PvA 25, 141. -- a˚ not right, not proper, unlawful Vin i.45, 211; ii.118; iii.20; (nt) that which is proper A i.84; Dhs 1160; -- a˚ ibid; -- kappiyâkappiya (nt) that which is proper and that which is not J i.316; DA i.78. <-> 2. (cp. kappa ii.1b) connected with time, subject to kappa, i. e. temporal, of time, subject to saŋsāra; of devamanussā Sn 521; na+of the Muni Sn 914. In another sense ("belonging to an Age") in cpd. paṭhama ˚ -- kāla the time of the first Age J ii.352. -- a˚ delivered from time, free from saŋsāra, Ep. of an Arahant Sn 860; cp. Miln 49, 50. See also kappika.
-- ânuloma (nt.) accordance with the rule Nett 192. -- kāraka "one who makes it befitting," i. e. who by offering anything to a Bhikkhu, makes it legally acceptable Vin i.206; -- kuṭī (f.) a building outside the Vihāra, wherein allowable articles were stored, a kind of warehouse Vin i.139; ii.159; -- dāraka a boy given to the Bhikkhus to work for them in the Vihāra DA i.78 (v. l. BB ˚kāraka); -- bhaṇḍa utensils allowable to the Bhikkhus J i.41; DhA i.412. a˚ thing unauthorised Vin. ii.169; a list of such forbidden articles is found at Vin i.192; -- bhūmi (f.) a plot of ground set apart for storing (allowable) provisions Vin i.239 (cp. ˚kuṭi); -- lesa [cp. Sk. kalpya] guile appropriate to one's own purpose VvA 348; -- saññin (a) imagining as lawful (that which is not) A i.84; a˚ opp. ibid. -- ˚tā the imagining as lawful (that which is not) appl. to kukkucca Dhs 1160; a˚ opp. ibid.
Kappu (nt.)=kappa in the dialect used by Makkhali Gosāla, presumably the dialect of Vesāli, D i.54; DA i.164 (a Burmeṣe MS. reads kappi, and so do Pv iv.332; PvA 254).
Kappūra (m. & nt.) [cp. Sk. karpūra] camphor: (a) the plant J vi.537. -- (b) the resinous exudation, the prepared odoriferant substance (cp. kaṭukapphala) J ii.416=DhA iii.475; Miln 382; Dāvs v.50.
Kappeti [Der. from kappa, cp. Sk. kṛpa shape, form; *qṷrep caus. from. fr. *qṷer=Sk. kr, karoti to shape, to make, cp. karoti] to cause to fit, to create, build, construct, arrange, prepare, order.
I. lit. 1. in special sense: to prepare, get done, i. e. harness: J i.62; plait DA i.274, an offering (yaññaŋ) Sn 1043; i. e. to trim etc. M ii.155; J i.223; Mhvs 25, 64. 2, generally (to be translated according to the meaning of accompanying noun), to make, get up, carry on etc. (=Fr. passer), viz. iriyāpathaŋ to keep one's composure Th i.570; J v.262; Bdhd 33; jīvitaŋ: to lead one's life PvA 3, 4, 13; divāvihāraŋ to take the noonday rest Mhvs 19, 79; nisajjaŋ to sit down Vin iii.191; vāsaŋ, saŋvāsaŋ to make one's abode D ii.88; Sn 283; PvA 36, 47; saŋvāsaŋ to have (sexual) intercourse with J iii.448; Mhvs 5, 212; PvA 6; seyyaŋ: to lie down, to make one's bed Pug 55 etc. (acelaka -- passage=D i.166).
II. fig. 1. in special sense: to construct or form an opinion, to conjecture, to think Sn 799; DA i.103; -- 2. generally: to ordain, prescribe, determine J v.238 (=say vidahati) -- Caus. II. kappāpeti to cause to be made in all senses of kappeti; e. g. Vin ii.134 (massuŋ k. to get one's beard done); J v.262 (hatthiyānāni k. to harness the elephant -- cars); DA i.147 (pañca hatthinikā -- satāni k. harness the 500 elephants). Pass. kappiyati in ppr. kappiyamāna getting harnessed J i.62.
Kabara (adj.) [cp. Sk. kabara] variegated, spotted, striped; mixed, intermingled; in patches Vism 190. Of a cow (˚gāvī) DhA i.71 (˚go -- rūpa) ibid. 99; of a calf (˚vaccha) J v.106; of a dog (˚vaṇṇa=sabala q. v.) J vi.107; of leprosy J v.69; of the shade of trees (˚cchāya, opp. sanda˚) M i.75; J iv.152; DhA i.375.
-- kucchi having a belly striped with many colours, of a monster J i.273; -- kuṭṭha a kind of leprosy J v.69; -- maṇi the cat's eye, a precious stone, also called masāragalla, but also an emerald; both are prob. varieties of the cat's eye VvA 167, 304.
Kabala (m., nt.) [cp. Sk. kavala BSk. kavaḍa Divy 290 (+ālopa), 298, 470] a small piece (=ālopa PvA 70), a mouthful, always appl. to food, either solid (i. e. as much as is made into a ball with the fingers when eating), or liquid Vin ii.214; It 18=J iii.409; iv.93; Dh 324; Miln 180, 400; Bdhd 69; DhA ii.65; PvA 39; Mhvs 19, 74. Kabale kabale on every morsel J i.68; Miln 231; -- sakabala appl. to the mouth, with the mouth full of food Vin ii.214; iv. 195; -- Sometimes written kabala.
-- âvacchedaka choosing portions of a mouthful, nibbling at a morsel Vin ii.214; iv.196.
Kabalinkāra (adj.) [kabala in compn form kabalī˚ before kr & bhū; kabalin for kabalī˚] always in combn with āhāra, food "made into a ball," i. e. eatable, material food, as one of the 4 kinds of food (see stock phrase k˚ āhāro oḷāriko vā sukhumo vā . . . at M i.48= S ii.11, 98=D iii.228, 276; Bdhd 135) Dhs 585, 646 (where fully described), 816; Miln 245; Vism 236, 341, 450, 616; Bdhd 69, 74; DA i.120. Written kabalīkāra nearly always in Burmese, and sometimes in Singh. MSS.; s. also Nett 114 -- 118.
-- āhāra -- bhakkha (of attā, soul) feeding on material food D i.34, 186, 195; -- bhakkha, same A iii.192=v.336 (appl. to the kāmâvacara devas); DA i.120.
Kabaḷikā (f.) [cp. Sk. kavalikā] a bandage, a piece of cloth put over a sore or wound Vin i.205 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.58 n4).
Kabba (nt.) [cp. Sk. kāvya] a poem, poetical composition, song, ballad in ˚ŋ karoti to compose a song J vi.410; -- karaṇa making poems DA i.95; and -- kāra a poet Kh 21; J vi.410.
Kabya=kabba in cpds. ˚âlankāra composing in beautiful verse, a beautiful poem in ˚ŋ bandhati, to compose a poem ibid.; and -- kāraka a poet, ibid.
Kama [fr. kram, cp. Vedic krama ( -- ˚) step, in uru˚, BSk. krama reprieve, Divy 505] -- 1. (nt.) going, proceeding, course, step, way, manner, e. g. sabbatth'âvihatakkama "having a course on all sides unobstructed" Sdhp 425; vaḍḍhana˚ process of development Bdhd 96 paṭiloma˚ (going) the opposite way Bdhd 106; cp. also Bdhd 107, 111. a fivefold kama or process (of development or division), succession, is given at Vism 476 with uppattik˚, pahāna˚, patipattik˚, bhūmik˚, desanāk˚, where they are illustrated by examples. Threefold applied to upādāna at Vism 570 (viz. uppattik˚, pahānak˚, desanāk˚) -- 2. oblique cases (late and technical) "by way of going," i. e. in order or in due course, in succession: kamato Vism 476, 483, 497; Bdhd 70, 103; kamena by & by, gradually Mhvs 3, 33; 5, 136; 13, 6; Dāvs i.30; SnA 455; Bdhd 88; yathākkamaŋ Bdhd 96. -- 3. (adj.) ( -- ˚) having a certain way of going: catukkama walking on all fours (= catuppāda) Pv i.113.
Kamaṇa a step, stepping, gait J v.155, in expln J v.156 taken to be ppr. med. -- See san˚.
Kamaṇḍalu (m., nt.) [etym. uncertain] the waterpot with long spout used by non -- Buddhist ascetics S i.167; J ii.73 (=kuṇḍikā); iv.362, 370; vi.86, 525, 570; Sn p. 80; DhA iii.448 -- adj. kamaṇḍaluka [read kā˚?] "with the waterpot" A v.263 (brāhmaṇā pacchābhūmakā k.).
Kamati [kram, Dhtp. expld by padavikkhepe; ppr. med. kamamāna S i.33; Sn 176; Intens. cankamati.] to walk. (I) lit. 1. c. loc. to walk, travel, go through: dibbe pathe Sn 176; ariye pathe S i.33; ākāse D i.212=M i.69=A iii.17; -- 2. c. acc. to go or get to, to enter M ii.18; J vi.107; Pv i.12 (saggaŋ) -- (II) fig. 1. to succeed, have effect, to affect M i.186; J v.198; Miln 198; -- 2. to plunge into, to enter into A ii.144; <-> 3. impers. to come to (c. dat) S iv.283.
Kamatthaŋ (adv.) [kaŋ atthaŋ] for what purpose, why? J iii.398 (=kimatthaŋ).
Kamanīya (adj.) [grd of kāmayati] (a) desirable, beautiful, lovely J v.155, 156; Miln 11; (b) pleasant, sweet ( -- sounding) D ii.171; J i.96. -- As nt. a desirable object S i.22.
Kamala (nt.) a lotus, freq. combd with kuvalaya; or with uppala J i.146; DA i.40, expld as vārikiñjakkha PvA 77. 1. lotus, the lotus flower, Nelumbium J i.146; DA i.40; Mhbv 3; Sdhp 325; VvA 43, 181, 191; PvA 23, 77; -- At J i.119, 149 a better reading is obtained by corr. kambala to kamala, at J i.178 however kamb˚ should be retained. -- 2. a kind of grass, of which sandals were made Vin. i.190 (s. Vin. Texts ii.23 n.) -- 3. f. kamalā a graceful woman J v.160;
-- komalakarā (f.) (of a woman) having lotus -- like (soft) hands Mhbv 29; -- dala a lotus leaf Vism 465; Mhbv 3; Bdhd 19; DhsA 127; VvA 35, 38. -- -- pādukā sandals of k. grass Vin i.190.
Kamalin (adj.) [fr. kamala] rich in lotus, covered with lotuses (of a pond) in kamalinī -- kāmuka "the lover of lotuses," Ep. of the Sun Mhbv. 3 (v. l. ˚sāmika perhaps to be preferred).
Kampa ( -- ˚) [fr. kamp] trembling, shaking; tremor DA i.130 (paṭhavi˚); Sdhp 401; a˚ (adj.) not trembling, unshaken; calm, tranquil Sdhp 594; Mhvs 15, 175.
Kampaka (adj.) [fr. kampa] shaking, one who shakes or causes to tremble Miln 343 (paṭhavi˚).
Kampati [kamp to shake Dhtp. 186: calane; p. pres. kam- panto, kampaŋ, kampamāna; aor. akampi; caus. kampeti; p. pres. kampetan Dpvs xvii.51; ger. kampayitvāna D ii.108; J v.178] -- to shake, tremble, waver Kh 6; J i.23; Sn 268 (expl. KhA 153: calati, vedhati); Bdhd 84; -- Cp. anu˚, pa˚, vi˚, sam˚. -- kampamāna (adj.) trembling J iii.161; agitated, troubled (˚citta) J ii.337; a˚ not trembling, unhesitating, steadfast J vi. 293.
Kampana [fr. kamp] 1. adj. causing to shake DhA i.84, trembling Kacc 271; 2. (nt) (a) an earthquake J i.26 47; (b) tremor (of feelings) J iii.163.
-- rasa (adj.) "whose essence is to tremble," said of doubt (vicikicchā) DhsA 259.
Kampin (adj.) [fr. kampa] see vi˚.
Kampiya (adj.) [grd. of kampati] in a˚ not to be shaken, immovable, strong Th 2, 195; Miln 386; (nt.) firmness, said of the 5 moral powers (balāni) DA i.64.
Kampurī (va.) at Th 2, 262 is to be corr. into kambu -- r -- iva (see Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 76).
Kambala (m., nt.) [cp. Sk. kambala] 1. woollen stuff, woollen blanket or garment. From J iv.353 it appears that it was a product of the north, probably Nepal (cp. J.P.T.S. 1889, 203); enumd as one of the 6 kinds of cīvaras, together w. koseyya & kappāsika at Vin i.58=96, also at A iv.394 (s. ˚sukhuma); freq. preceded by ratta (e. g. DA i.40. Cp. also ambara2 and ambala), which shows that it was commonly dyed red; also as paṇḍu Sn 689; Bdhd 1. -- Some woollen garments (aḍḍhakāsika) were not allowed for Bhikkhus: Vin i.281; ii.174; see further J i.43, 178, 322; iv.138; Miln 17, 88, 105; DhA i.226; ii.89 sq. 2. a garment: two kinds of hair<-> (blankets, i. e.) garments viz. kesa˚ and vāla˚ mentioned Vin i.305=D i.167=A i.240, 295. -- 3. woollen thread Vin i.190 (expld by uṇṇā) (cp. Vin. Texts ii.23); J vi.340; -- 4. a tribe of Nāgas J vi.165.
-- kañcuka a (red) woollen covering thrown over a temple, as an ornament Mhvs 34, 74; -- kūṭâgāra a bamboo structure covered with (red) woollen cloth, used as funeral pile DhA i.69; -- pādukā woollen slippers Vin i.190; -- puñja a heap of blankets J i.149; -- maddana dyeing the rug Vin i.254 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.154); -- ratana a precious rug of wool J iv.138; Miln 17 (16 ft. long & 18 ft. wide); -- vaṇṇa (adj.) of the colour of woollen fabric, i. e. red J v.359 (˚maŋsa); -- silāsana (paṇḍu˚) a stone -- seat, covered with a white k. blanket, forming the throne of Sakka DhA i.17; -- sukhuma fine, delicate woollen stuff D ii.188=A iv.394; Miln 105; -- sutta a woollen thread J vi.340.
Kambalin (adj.) [fr. kambala] having a woollen garment D i.55; ii.150.
Kambalīya (nt.) [fr. kambala] (a sort of) woollen garment Pv ii.117 (cp. PvA 77).
Kambu [cp. Sk. kambu, Halāyudha=śankha; Dhtp. saŋvaraṇe] 1. a conch, a shell: saṇha -- kambu -- r -- iva . . . sobhate su gīvā Th 2, 262 (for kampurī'va); s. cpds. -- 2. a ring or bracelet (made of shells or perhaps gold: see Kern. Toev. s. v.) J iv.18, 466 (+kāyūra); Pv ii.127, iii.93 (=PvA 157, sankhavalaya) Vv 362 (=VvA 167 hatth'âlankāra), worn on the wrist, while the kāyūra is worn on the upper part of the arm (bhujâlankāra ibid.); -- 3. a golden ring, given as second meaning at VvA 167, so also expl. at J iv.18, 130; J v.400.
-- gīva (adj.) having a neck shaped like a shell, i. e. in spirals, having lines or folds, considered as lucky J iv.130 (=suvaṇṇālingasadisagīvo), cp. above 1; -- tala the base or lower part of a shell, viz. the spiral part, fig. the lines of the neck J v.155 (˚ābhāsā gīvā, expld on p. 156 as suvaṇṇālingatala -- sannibhā); also the (polished) surface of a shell, used as simile for smoothness J v.204, 207; -- pariharaka a wristlet or bracelet VvA 167.
Kambussa [fr. preceding] gold or golden ornament (bracelet) J v.260, 261 (: kambussaŋ vuccati suvaṇṇaŋ).
Kambojaka (adj.) coming fr. Kamboja J iv.464 (assatara).
Kambojā (f.) N of a country J v.446 (˚ka raṭṭha); Pv ii.91 (etc.); Vism 332, 334, 336.
Kamboji (m., nt.) [meaning & etym. unexpld] the plant Cassia tora or alata J iii.223 (˚gumba=elagalāgumba; vv. ll. kammoja˚ & tampo˚ [for kambo˚]).
Kamma (nt.) [Vedic karman, work esp. sacrificial process. For ending ˚man=Idg. *men cp. Sk. dhāman=Gr. dh=ma, Sk. nāman=Lat nomen] the doing, deed, work; orig. meaning (see karoti) either building (cp. Lit. kùrti, Opr. kūra to build) or weaving, plaiting (still in mālākamma and latā˚ "the intertwining of garlands and creepers"; also in kamma -- kara possibly orig. employed in weaving, i. e. serving); cp. Lat. texo, to weave=Sk. takṣan builder, artisan, & Ger. wirken, orig. weben. Grammatically karman has in Pāli almost altogether passed into the -- a decl., the cons. forms for instr. & abl. kammā and kammanā gen. dat. kammuno, are rare. The nom. pl. is both kammā and kammāni.
I. Crude meaning. 1. (lit.) Acting in a special sense, i. e. office, occupation, doing, action, profession. Two kinds are given at Vin iv.6, viz. low (hīna) & high (ukkaṭṭha) professions. To the former belong the kammāni of a koṭṭhaka and a pupphacchaḍḍaka, to the latter belong vāṇijjā and gorakkhā. -- Kamma as a profession or business is regarded as a hindrance to the religious life, & is counted among the ten obstacles (see palibodha). In this sense it is at Vism 94 expld by navakamma (see below 2a). -- kassa˚ ploughing, occupation of a ploughman Vism 284; kumbhakāra˚ profession of a potter J vi.372; tunna˚ weaving Vism 122; PvA 161. purohita˚ office of a high -- priest (=abstr. n. porohiccaŋ) SnA 466; vāṇija˚ trade Sāsv. 40. -- kammanā by profession Sn 650, 651; kammāni (pl.) occupations Sn 263=Kh v.6 (anavajjāni k.=anākulā kammantā Sn 262). paresaŋ k˚ŋ katvā doing other people's work=being a servant VvA 299; sa˚ pasutā bent upon their own occupations D i.135, cp. attano k˚ -- kubbānaŋ Dh 217. kamma -- karaṇa -- sālā work -- room (here: weaving shed) PvA 120.
2. Acting in general, action, deed, doing (nearly always -- ˚) (a) (active) act, deed, job, often to be rendered by the special verb befitting the special action, like cīvara˚ mending the cloak VvA 250; uposatha˚ observing the Sabbath Vbh 422; nava˚ making new, renovating, repairing, patching Vin ii.119, 159 (˚karoti to make repairs); J i.92: Vism 94, adj. navakammika one occupied with repairs Vin ii.15; S i.179; patthita˚ the desired action (i. e. sexual intercourse) DhA ii.49; kammaŋ karoti to be active or in working, to act: nāgo pādehi k.k. the elephant works with his feet M i.414; kata˚ the job done by the thieves DhA ii.38 (corehi), as adj. kata˚ cora (& akata ˚cora) a thief who has finished his deed (& one who has not) Vism 180, also in special sense: occasion for action or work, i. e. necessity, purpose: ukkāya kammaŋ n'atthi, the torch does not work, is no good Vism 428. (b) (passive) the act of being done ( -- ˚), anything done (in its result), work, often as collect. abstr. (to be trsld. by E. ending -- ing): apaccakkha˚ not being aware, deception Vbh 85; daḷhī˚ strengthening, increase Vbh 357, Vism 122; citta˚ variegated work, mālā˚ garlands, latā˚ creeper ( -- work) Vism 108; nāma˚ naming Bdhd 83; pañhā˚ questioning, "questionnaire" Vism 6. -- So in definitions niṭṭhuriya˚= niṭṭhuriya Vbh 357; nimitta˚= nimitta, obhāsa˚=obhāsa (apparition > appearing) Vbh 353. -- (c) (intrs.) making, getting, act, process ( -- ˚). Often trsl. as abstr. n. with ending -- ion or -- ment, e. g. okāsa˚ opportunity of speaking, giving an audience Sn p. 94; pātu˚ making clear, manifestation DhA iv.198 anāvi˚, anuttāni˚ concealment Vbh 358; kata˚ (adj.) one who has done the act or process, gone through the experience SnA 355; añjali˚, sāmīci˚ veneration, honouring (in formula with nipaccakāra abhivādana paccuṭṭhāna) D iii.83 (≈Vin ii.162, 255); A i.123; ii.180; J. i.218, 219.
3. (Specialised) an "act" in an ecclesiastical sense; proceedings, ceremony, performed by a lawfully constituted chapter of bhikkhus Vin i.49, 53, 144, 318; ii.70, 93; v.220 sq.; Khus J.P.T.S. 1883, 101. At these formal functions a motion is put before the assembly and the announcement of it is called the ñatti Vin i.56, after which the bhikkhus are asked whether they approve of the motion or not. If this question is put once, it is a ñattidutiyakamma Vin ii.89; if put three times, a ñatticatuttha˚ Vin i.56 (cp. Vin. Texts i.169 n2). There are 6 kinds of official acts the Sangha can perform: see Vin i.317 sq.; for the rules about the validity of these ecclesiastical functions see Vin i.312 -- 333 (cp. Vin T. ii.256 -- 285). The most important ecclesiastical acts are: apalokanakamma, ukkhepanīya˚ uposatha˚ tajjaniya˚ tassapāpiyyasikā˚ nissaya˚, patiññākaraṇīya˚, paṭipucchākaraṇīya˚ paṭisāraṇiya˚ pabbājaniya˚, sammukhākaraṇīya˚. -- In this sense: kammaŋ karoti (w. gen.) to take proceedings against Vin i.49, 143, 317; ii.83, 260; kammaŋ garahati to find fault with proceedings gone through Vin ii.5; kammaŋ paṭippassambheti to revoke official proceedings against a bhikkhu Vin iii.145.
4. In cpds.: -- -- âdhiṭṭhāyaka superintendent of work, inspector Mhvs 5, 174; 30, 98; -- âdhipateyya one whose supremacy is action Miln 288; -- ārambha commencement of an undertaking Mhvs 28, 21; -- âraha (a) entitled to take part in the performance of an "act" Vin iv.153; v.221; -- ārāma (a) delighting in activity D ii.77; A iv.22; It 71, 79; -- ārāmatā taking pleasure in (worldly) activity D ii.78=A iv.22, cp. Vbh 381; A iii.116, 173, 293 sq., 330, 449; iv.22 sq., 331; v.163; It 71; âvadāna a tale of heroic deeds J vi.295; -- kara or ˚kāra: used indiscriminately. 1. (adj.) doing work, or active, in puriso dāso+pubbuṭṭhāyī "willing to work" D i.60 et sim. (=DA i.168: analaso). A i.145; ii.67; Vv 754; 2. (n.) a workman, a servant (a weaver?) usually in form dāsā ti vā pessā ti vā kammakarā ti vā Vin i.243; D i.141=Pug 56 (also ˚kārā); A ii.208; iii.77, 172; Th 2, 340; J i.57. Also as dāsā pessā k˚kārā A iii.37= iv.265, 393, and dāsā k˚ kārā Vin i.240, 272; ii.154; D iii.191; S i.92; -- a handyman J i.239; Miln 378; (f) -- ī a female servant Vin ii.267; ˚kāra Vin iv.224, kārī Dhs A98=VvA 73 (appl. to a wife); -- karaṇa 1. working, labour, service J iii.219; PvA 120; DA i.168; 2. the effects of karma J i.146; -- karanā and kāraṇā see below; -- kāma liking work, industrious; a˚ lazy A iv.93= J ii.348; -- kāraka a workman, a servant DA i.8; Mhvs 30, 42; Nd2 427; a sailor J iv.139; -- garu bent on work Miln 288; -- ccheda the interruption of work J i.149; 246; iii.270; -- jāta sort of action J v.24 (=kammam eva); -- dhura (m. nt.) draught -- work J i.196; -- dheyya work to be performed, duty A iv.285= 325; cp. J vi.297; -- dhoreyya "fit to bear the burden of action" Miln 288 (cp. Mil. trsl. ii.140); -- niketavā having action as one's house or temple ibid.; -- nipphādana accomplishing the business J vi.162; -- ppatta entitled to take part in an eccles. act Vin i.318; v.221; -- bahula abounding in action (appl. to the world of men) Miln 7; -- mūla the price of the transaction Miln 334; -- rata delighting in business D ii.78; It 71; -- vatthu objects, items of an act Vin v.116; -- vācā the text or word of an official Act. These texts form some of the oldest literature and are embodied in the Vinaya (cp. Vin i.317 sq.; iii.174, 176; iv.153, etc.). The number of officially recognized k˚ is eleven, see J.P.T.S. 1882, 1888, 1896, 1907; k˚ŋ karoti to carry out an official Act Mhvs 5, 207; DhsA 399; -- ˚ŋ anussāveti to proclaim a k˚, to put a resolution to a chapter of bhikkhus Vin i.317; -- vossagga difference of occupation J vi.216; -- sajja (a) "ready for action," i. e. for battle J v.232; -- sādutā "agreeableness to work" DhsA 151 (cp. kammaññatā & kamyatā); -- sāmin "a master in action," an active man Miln 288; -- sippī an artisan VvA 278; -- sīla one whose habit it is to work, energetic, persevering Miln 288; a˚ indolent, lazy J vi.245; a˚ -- ttaŋ indolence, laziness Mhvs 23, 21; -- hīna devoid of occupation, inactive Miln 288.
II. Applied (pregnant) meaning: doing, acting with ref. to both deed and doer. It is impossible to draw a clear line between the source of the act (i. e. the acting subject, the actor) and the act (either the object or phenomenon acted, produced, i. e. the deed as objective phenomenon, or the process of acting, i. e. the deed as subjective phenomenon). Since the latter (the act) is to be judged by its consequences, its effects, its manifestation always assumes a quality (in its most obvious characteristics either good or bad or indifferent), and since the act reflects on the actor, this quality is also attached to him. This is the popular, psychological view, and so it is expressed in language, although reason attributes goodness and badness to the actor first, and then to the act. In the expression of language there is no difference between: 1. the deed as such and the doer in character: anything done (as good or bad) has a corresponding source; 2. the performance of the single act and the habit of acting: anything done tends to be repeated; 3. the deed with ref. both to its cause and its effect: anything done is caused and is in itself the cause of something else. As meanings of kamma we therefore have to distinguish the foll. different sides of a "deed," viz.
1. the deed as expressing the doer's will, i. e. qualified deed, good or bad; 2. the repeated deed as expression of the doer's habit=his character; 3. the deed as having consequences for the doer, as such a source qualified according to good and evil; as deed done accumulated and forming a deposit of the doer's merit and demerit (his "karma"). Thus pāpakamma=a bad deed, one who has done a bad deed, one who has a bad character, the potential effect of a bad deed=bad karma. The context alone decides which of these meanings is the one intended by the speaker or writer.
Concerning the analysis of the various semantic developments the following practical distinctions can be made: 1. Objective action, characterized by time: as past=done, meaning deed (with kata); or future=to be done, meaning duty (with kātabba). 2. Subjective action, characterized by quality, as reflecting on the agent. 3. Interaction of act and agent: (a) in subjective relation, cause and effect as action and reaction on the individual (individual "karma," appearing in his life, either here or beyond), characterized as regards action (having results) and as regards actor (having to cope with these results): (b) in objective relation, i. e. abstracted from the individual and generalized as Principle, or cause and effect as Norm of Happening (universal "karma," appearing in Saŋsāra, as driving power of the world), characterized (a) as cause, (b) as consequence, (c) as cause -- consequence in the principle of retribution (talio), (d) as restricted to time.
1. (Objective): with ref. to the Past: kiŋ kammaŋ akāsi nārī what (deed) has this woman done? Pv i.92; tassā katakammaŋ pucchi he asked what had been done by her PvA 37, 83, etc. -- with ref. to the Future: k. kātabbaŋ hoti I have an obligation, under 8 kusītavatthūni D iii.255=A iv.332; cattāri kammāni kattā hoti "he performs the 4 obligations" (of gahapati) A ii.67.
2. (Subjective) (a) doing in general, acting, action, deed; var. kinds of doings enum. under micchājīva D i.12 (santikamma, paṇidhi˚, etc.); tassa kammassa katattā through (the performance of) that deed D iii.156; dukkaraŋ kamma -- kubbataŋ he who of those who act, acts badly S i.19; abhabbo taŋ kammaŋ kātum incapable of doing that deed S iii.225; sañcetanika k. deed done intentionally M iii.207; A v.292 sq.; pamāṇakataŋ k. D i.251=S iv.322. kataraŋ k˚ŋ karonto ahaŋ nirayaŋ na gaccheyyaŋ? how (i. e. what doing) shall I not go to Niraya? J iv.340; yaŋ kiñci sithilaŋ k˚ŋ . . . na taŋ hoti mahapphalaŋ . . . S i.49=Dh 312=Th 1, 277; kadariya˚ a stingy action PvA 25; k. classed with sippa, vijjā -- caraṇa D iii.156; kāni k˚āni sammā -- niviṭṭha established slightly in what doings? Sn 324; (b) Repeated action in general, constituting a person's habit of acting or character (cp. kata ii.1. a.); action as reflecting on the agent or bearing his characteristics; disposition, character. Esp. in phrase kammena samannāgata "endowed with the quality of acting in such and such a manner, being of such and such character": tīhi dhammehi samannāgato niraye nikkhitto "endowed with (these) three qualites a man will go to N." A i.292 sq.; asucinā kāyak˚ena sam˚ asucimanussā "bad people are those who are of bad ways (or character)" Nd2 112; anavajja kāya -- k˚ sam˚ A ii.69 (cp. A iv.364); kāya -- kammavacī -- kammena sam˚ kusalena (pabbajita) "a bhikkhu of good character in deed and speech" D i.63; kāya . . . (etc.) -- k˚sam˚ bāla (and opp. paṇḍita) A ii.252 (cp. A i.102, 104); visamena kāya (etc.) -- k˚ sam˚ A i.154=iii.129; sāvajjena kāya (etc.) -- k˚ sam˚ A ii.135 -- kammaŋ vijjā ca dhammo ca sīlaŋ jīvitam uttamaŋ, etena maccā sujjhanti, na gottena dhanena vā S i.34=55; M iii.262, quoted at Vism 3, where k. is grouped with vipassanā, jhāna, sīla, satipaṭṭhāna as main ideals of virtue; kammanā by character, as opp. to jaccā or jātiyā, by birth: Sn 136; 164; 599; nihīna˚ manussā (of bad, wretched character) Sn 661; manāpena bahulaŋ kāya (etc.) -- kammena A ii.87= iii.33, 131; and esp. with mettā, as enum. under aparihāniyā and sārāṇīyā dhammā D ii.80; A iii.288; mettena kāya<-> (etc.) -- kammena D ii.144; iii.191; A v.350 sq. (c) Particular actions, as manifested in various ways, by various channels of activity (k˚ -- dvārā), expressions of personality, as by deed, word and thought (kāyena, vācāya, manasā). Kamma kat) e)coxh/n means action by hand (body) in formula vacasā manasā kammanā ca Sn 330, 365; later specified by kāya -- kamma, for which kāya -- kammanta in some sense (q. v.), and complementing vacī -- k˚ mano -- k˚; so in foll. combns: citte arakkhite kāya -- k˚ pi arakkhitaŋ hoti (vacī˚ mano˚) A i.261 sq.; yaŋ nu kho ahaŋ idaŋ kāyena k˚ kattukāmo idaŋ me kāya -- k˚ attabyādhāya pi saŋvatteyya . . . "whatever deed I am going to do with my hands (I have to consider:) is this deed, done by my hands, likely to bring me evil?" M i.415; kāya -- (vacī -- etc.) kamma, which to perform & to leave (sevitabbaŋ and a˚) A i.110=iii.150; as anulomika˚ A i.106; sabbaŋ kāya -- k˚ (vacī˚ mano˚) Buddhassa ñāṇânuparivattati "all manifestation of deed (word & thought) are within the knowledge of Buddha" Nd2 235; yaŋ lobhapakataŋ kammaŋ karoti kāyena vā vācāya vā manasā vā tassa vipākaŋ anubhoti . . . Nett 37; kin nu kāyena v˚ m˚ dukkaṭaŋ kataŋ what evil have you done by body, word or thought? Pv ii.13 and freq.; ekūna -- tiŋsa kāyakammāni Bdhd 49. (d) Deeds characterized as evil (pāpa -- kammāni, pāpāni k˚, pāpakāni k˚; pāpakamma adj., cp. pāpa -- kammanta adj.). pāpakamma: n'atthi loke raho nāma p˚ pakubbato "there is no hiding ( -- place) in this world for him who does evil" A i.149; so p˚ -- o dummedho jānaŋ dukkaṭaŋ attano . . . "he, afflicted with (the result of) evil -- doing . . ." A iii.354; p˚ -- ŋ pavaḍḍhento ibid.; yaŋ p˚ -- ŋ kataŋ sabban taŋ idha vedanīyaŋ "whatever wrong I have done I have to suffer for" A v.301; pabbajitvāna kāyena p˚ -- ŋ vivajjayī "avoid evil acting" Sn 407; nissaŋsayaŋ p˚ -- ŋ . . . "undoubtedly there is some evil deed (the cause of this) i. e. some evil karma Pv iv.161. -- pāpaŋ kammaŋ: appamattikam pi p˚ k˚ kataŋ taŋ enaŋ nirayaŋ upaneti "even a small sin brings man to N." A i.249, tayā v'etaŋ p˚ k˚ kataŋ tvañ ñeva etassa vipākaŋ paṭisaŋvedissasi "you yourself have done this sin you yourself shall feel its consequences" M iii.180= A i.139, na hi p˚ kataŋ k˚ sajju khīraŋ va muccati Dh 71=Nett 161; yassa p˚ kataŋ k˚ kusalena pithīyatiso imaŋ lokaŋ pabhāseti "he will shine in this world who covers an evil deed with a good one" M ii.104= Dh 173=Th 1, 872; p˚ -- ssa k˚ -- ssa samatikkamo "the overcoming of evil karma" S iv.320; p˚ssa k˚ssa kiriyāya "in the performance of evil" M i.372; p˚āni k˚āni karaŋ bālo na bujjhati "he, like a fool, awaketh not, doing sinful deeds" Dh 136=Th 1, 146; pāpā p˚ehi k˚ehi nirayaŋ upapajjare "sinners by virtue of evil deeds go to N." Dh 307; te ca p˚esu k˚esu abhiṇham upadissare Sn 140. -- pāpakāni kammāni: p˚ānaŋ k˚ānaŋ hetu coraŋ rājāno gāhetvā vividhā kammakāraṇā kārenti "for his evil deeds the kings seize the thief and have him punished" A i.48; ye loke p˚āni k˚ karonti te vividhā kamma -- kāraṇā karīyanti "those who do evil deeds in this world, are punished with various punishments" M iii.186=A i.142; k˚ŋ karoti p˚ŋ kāyena vācā uda cetasā vā Sn 232 (=kh 190); similarly Sn 127; karontā p˚ŋ k˚ŋ yaŋ hoti kaṭukapphalaŋ, "doing evil which is of bitter fruit" Dh 66= S i.57=Nett 131; k˚ehi p˚ehi Sn 215. -- In the same sense: na taŋ k˚ŋ kataŋ sādhu yaŋ katvā anutappati "not well done is that deed for which he feels remorse" S i.57=Dh 67 =Nett 132; āveni -- kammāni karonti (with ref. to sangha -- bheda) A v.74; adhammikakammāni A i.74; asuci -- k˚āni (as suggested by 5 and attributes: asuci, duggandha, etc.) A iii.269; sāvajjakammāni (as deserving Niraya) (opp. avajja > sagga) A ii.237; kammāni ānantarikāni deeds which have an immediate effect; there are five, enumd at Vbh 378. <-> (e) deeds characterized as good or meritorious (kusala, bhaddaka, etc.) taŋ k˚ŋ katvā kusalaŋ sukhudrayaŋ D iii.157; puñña -- kammo of meritorious (character) S i.143; kusalehi k˚ehi vippayuttā carati viññāṇacariyā Ps i.80; kusalassa k˚ssa katattā Vbh 173 sq.; 266 sq.; 297 sq.; kusala -- k˚ -- paccayāni Bdhd 12; puññakamma, merit, compd with kapparukkha in its rewarding power VvA 32 (cp. puññânubhāva -- nissandena "in consequence of their being affected with merit" PvA 58) -- Cp. also cpds.: kamma -- kilesa, k˚ -- ṭṭhāna, k˚ -- patha; k˚lakkhaṇa k˚ -- samādāna.
3. (Interaction) A. in subjective relation; (a) character of interaction as regards action; action or deed as having results: phala and vipāka (fruit and maturing); both expressions being used either singly or jointly, either˚ -- or independt; phala: tassa mayhaŋ atīte katassa kammassa phalaŋ "the fruit of a deed done by me in former times" ThA 270; Vv 479 (=VvA 202); desanā . . . k -- phalaŋ paccakkhakāriṇī "an instruction demonstrating the fruit of action" PvA 1; similarly PvA 2; cp. also ibid. 26, 49, 52, 82 (v. l. for kammabala). vipāka : yassa k˚ssa vipākena . . . niraye pacceyyāsi . . . "through the ripening of whatever deed will you be matured (i. e. tortured) in N." M ii.104; tassa k˚ssa vipākena saggaŋ lokaŋ uppajji "by the result of that deed he went to Heaven" S i.92; ii.255; k -- vipāka -- kovida "well aware of the fruit of action," i. e. of retribution Sn 653; kissa kvipākena "through the result of what (action)" Pv i.65; inunā asubhena k -- vipākena Nett 160; k -- vipāka with ref. to avyākata -- dhammā: Vbh 182; with ref. to jhāna ibid. 268, 281; with ref. to dukkha ibid. 106; k -- vipāka -- ja produced by the maturing of (some evil) action, as one kind of ābādha, illness: A v.110=Nd2 3041; same as result of good action, as one kind of iddhi (supernatural power) Ps ii.174; -- vipāka (adj.). asakkaccakatānaŋ kammānaŋ vipāko the reaper of careless deeds A iv.393; der. vepakka (adj.) in dukkha -- vepakka resulting in pain Sn 537. -- -- phala+vipāka: freq. in form. sukaṭa dukkhaṭānaŋ kammānaŋ phalaŋ vipāko: D i.55= iii.264=M i.401=S iv.348=A i.268=iv.226= v.265, 286 sq.; cp. J.P.T.S. 1883, 8; nissanda -- phalabhūto vipāko ThA 270; tiṇṇaŋ k˚ānaŋ phalaŋ, tiṇṇaŋ k -- ānaŋ vipāko D ii.186 -- (b) the effect of the deed on the doer: the consequences fall upon the doer, in the majority of cases expressed as punishment or affliction: yathā yathâyaŋ puriso kammaŋ karoti tathā tathā taŋ paṭisaŋvedissati "in whichever way this man does a deed, in the same way he will experience it (in its effect)" A i.249; na vijjati so jagati -- ppadeso yathā ṭhito muñceyya pāpa -- kammā "there is no place in the world where you could escape the consequences of evil -- doing" Dh 127=Miln 150=PvA 104, cp. Divy 532; so the action is represented as vedaniya, to be felt; in various combinations: in this world or the future state, as good or bad, as much or little A iv.382; the agent is represented as the inheritor, possessor, of (the results of) his action in the old formula: kammassakā sattā k -- dāyādā k -- yonī k -- bandhū . . . yaŋ k˚ŋ karonti kalyānaŋ vā pāpakaŋ vā tassa dāyādā bhavanti M iii.203=A iii.72 sq.=186=v.88~288 sq. (see also cpds.). The punishment is expressed by kammakaraṇa (or ˚kāraṇa), "being done back with the deed," or the reaction of the deed, in phrase kamma -- karaṇaŋ kāreti or kārāpeti "he causes the reaction of the deed to take place" and pass, kamma -- karaṇā karīyati he is afflicted with the reaction, i. e. the punishment of his doing. The 5 main punishments in Niraya see under kāraṇaŋ, the usual punishments (beating with whips, etc.) are enumerated passim, e. g. M iii.164, 181; and Nd2 604. [As regards form and meaning Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 76 and 1893, 15 proposes kāraṇā f. "pain, punishment, " fr. kṝ to tear or injure, "the pains of karma, or torture"; Prof. Duroiselle follows him, but with no special reason: the derivation as nt. causative -- abstr. fr. karoti presents no difficulty.] -- ye kira bho pāpakāni k˚ -- āni karonti te diṭṭh' eva dhamme evarūpā vividhā k -- kāraṇā karīyanti, kim anga pana parattha! "Those who, as you know, do evil are punished with various tortures even in this world, how much more then in the world to come!" M iii.181; M iii.186=A i.142; sim. k˚ -- kāraṇāni kārenti (v. l. better than text -- reading) S iv.344; Sdhp 7; Nd2 on dukkha. As k -- karaṇaŋ saŋvidahiŋsu J ii.398; kamma -- kāraṇa -- ppatta one who undergoes punishment Vism 500. See also examples under 2d and M i.87; A i.47; J v.429; Miln 197.
B. in objective relation: universal karma, law of cause and consequence. -- (a) karma as cause of existence (see also d, purāṇa˚ and pubbe kataŋ k˚): compared to the fruitful soil (khetta), as substratum of all existence in kāma, rūpa, arūpa dhātu A i.223 (kāmadhātu -- vepakkañ ce kammaŋ nâbhavissa api nu kho kāmabhavo paññāyethā ti? No h'etaŋ . . . iti kho kammaŋ khettaŋ . . .); as one of the 6 causes or substrata of existence A iii.410; kammanā vattati loko kammanā vattati pajā "by means of karma the world goes on, mankind goes on" Sn 654; kamma -- paccayā through karma PvA 25 (=Kh 207); k˚ŋ kilesā hetu saŋsārassa "k. and passions are the cause of saŋsāra (renewed existence)" Nett 113; see on k. as principle: Ps ii.78; 79 (ch. vii., kamma -- kathā) M i.372 sq.; Nett. 161; 180 -- 182; k. as 3 fold: Bdhd 117; as 4 fold M iii.215; and as cause in general Vism 600 (where enumd as one of the 4 paccaya's or stays of rūpa, viz. k., citta, utu, āhāra); Bdhd 63, 57, 116, 134 sq.; Vbh 366; Miln 40 sq. as a factor in the five -- fold order (dhammatā or niyama) of the cosmos: k˚ -- niyama DA. on D 11, 12; DhsA. 272; Cp. cpds.: kammaja (resulting from karma) Bdhd 68, 72, 75; ˚ -- vātā, birth -- pains i. e. the winds resulting from karma (caliŋsu) DhA i.165; DhA ii.262; k˚ -- nimitta Bdhd 11, 57, 62; k˚ -- sambhava Bdhd 66; k˚ -- samuṭṭhāna Vism 600; Bdhd 67, 72; see further cpds. below. -- (b) karma as result or consequence. There are 3 kamma -- nidānāni, factors producing karma and its effect: lobha, dosa, moha, as such (tīṇi nidānāni kammānaŋ samudayāya, 3 causes of the arising of karma) described A i.134=263=iii.338=Nd2 517; so also A v.86; 262; Vbh 208. With the cessation of these 3 the factor of karma ceases: lobha -- kkhayā kamma -- nidāna -- saŋkhayo A v.262. There are 3 other nidānāni as atīte anāgate paccuppanne chanda A i.264, and 3 others as producing or inciting existence (called here kamma -- bhava, consequential existence) are puñña, apuñña, ānejja (merit, demerit and immovability) Vbh 137=Nd2 471. -- (c) karma as causeconsequence: its manifestation consists in essential likeness between deed and result, cause and effect: like for like "as the cause, so the result." Karma in this special sense is Retribution or Retaliation; a law, the working of which cannot be escaped (cp. Dh 127, as quoted above 3 A (b), and Pv ii.717: sace taŋ pāpakaŋ kammaŋ karissatha karotha vā, na vo dukkhā pamutt' atthi) -- na hi nassati kassaci kammaŋ "nobody's (trace, result of) action is ever lost" Sn 666; puññâpuñña -- kammassa nissandena kanaka vimāne ekikā hutvā nibbatti "through the consequence of both merit and demerit" PvA 47; cp. VvA 14; yatth' assa attabhāvo nibbattati tattha taŋ k˚ŋ vipaccati "wherever a man comes to be born, there ripens his action" A i.134; -- correspondence between "light" and "dark" deeds and their respective consequence are 4 fold: kaṇha -- kamma>kaṇha vipāka, sukka˚, kaṇhasukka, akaṇha -- asukka: D iii.230=M i.389=A ii.230 sq.; so sakena kammena nirayaŋ upapajjati Nd2 304iii; k˚ -- ânubhāva -- ukkhitta "thrown, set into motion, by the power of k." PvA 78; sucarita -- k -- ânubhavâvanibbattāni vimānāni "created by the power of their result of good conduct" VvA 127; k -- ânubhāvena by the working of k. PvA 77; k˚ -- vega -- ukkhittā (same) PvA 284; yathā kamm -- ûpaga "undergoing the respective consequences (of former deeds) affected with respective karma: see cpds., and cp. yathā kammaŋ gato gone (into a new existence) according to his karma J i.153 & freq.; see cpds.; k -- sarikkhatā "the karma -- likeness," the correspondence of cause and consequence: taŋ k -- s˚ŋ vibhāventaŋ suvaṇṇamayaŋ ahosi "this, manifesting the karma -- correspondence, was golden" VvA 6; so also k -- sarikkhaka, in accordance with their deed, retributionary, of kamma -- phalaŋ, the result of action: tassa kamma -- sarikkhakaŋ kammaphalaŋ hoti "for her the fruit of action became like action," i. e. the consequence was according to her deed. PvA 206; 284; 258; as nt.: k -- s˚ŋ pan'assa udapādi "the retribution for him has come" DhA i.128; J iii.203; cp. also Miln 40 sq.; 65 sq.; 108. -- (d) The working and exhaustion of karma, its building up by new karma (nava˚) and its destruction by expiration of old karma (purāṇa). The final annihilation of all result (˚kkhaya) constitutes Arahantship. nava>purāṇa -- kamma: as aparipakka, not ripe, and paropakka, ripe D i.54=S iii.212; as pañca -- kammuno satāni, etc. ibid.; kāyo . . . purāṇaŋ k˚ŋ abhisankhataŋ ("our body is an accumulation of former karma") S ii.65=Nd2 680 D; see also A ii.197; Pv iv.71; PvA 1, 45; Nett 179; and with simile of the snake stripping its slough (porāṇassa k˚ssa parikkhīṇattā . . . santo yathā kammaŋ gacchati) PvA 63. -- k˚ -- nirodha or ˚kkhaya: so . . . na tāva kālaŋ karoti yāva na taŋ pāpakammaŋ vyanti hoti "He does not die so long as the evil karma is unexhausted" A i.141≈; nava -- purāṇāni k˚āni desissāmi k˚ -- nirodhaŋ k˚ -- nirodha -- gāminiñ ca paṭipadaŋ "the new and the old karma I shall demonstrate to you, the destruction of k. and the way which leads to the destruction of k." S iv.132~A iii.410; . . . navānaŋ k˚ānaŋ akaraṇā setughātaŋ iti k -- kkhayā dukkhakkhayo . . . (end of misery through the end of karma) A i.220=M ii.214; same Ps i.55 -- 57; cp. also A i.263; Nd2 411 (expl. as kamma -- parāyaṇa vipāka -- p˚: "gone beyond karma and its results," i. e. having attained Nibbāna). See also the foll. cpds.: k˚ -- âbhisankhīsa, ˚āvaraṇa, ˚kkhaya, ˚nibandhana.
-- âdhikata ruled by karma, Miln 67, 68; ˚ena by the influence of k. ibid. -- âdhiggahita gripped by karma Miln 188, 189; -- ânurūpa (adj.) (of vipāka) according to one's karma J iii.160; DA i.37; -- âbhisankhāra (3 B) accumulation of k. Nd2 116, 283, 506. -- âbhisanda in ˚ena in consequence of k. Miln 276, cp. J.P.T.S. 1886, 146; -- âraha see I.; -- âyatana 1. work Vbh 324, cp. Miln 78; 2. action=kamma J iii.542; cp. J iv.451, 452. -- âyūhana the heaping up of k. Vism 530; DhsA 267, 268; cp. k˚ŋ āyūhi Miln 214 and J.P.T.S. 1885, 58. -- āvaraṇa the obstruction caused by k. A iii.436= Pug 13=Vbh 341 (in defin. of sattā abhabbā: kammāvaraṇena samannāgatā, kiles˚, vipāk˚ . .), Kvu 341; Miln 154, 155; Vism 177 (=ānantariya -- kamma); -- ūpaga in yatha kamm -- ûpage satte: the beings as undergoing (the consequences of) their respective kamma (3B) in form. cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate . . . pajānāti (or passati) Vin iii.5=D i.82=S ii.122 (214)= v.266=A iv.178= v.13 (35, 200, 340)=Vbh 344; abbreviated in M iii.178; Nett. 178; see also similar Sn 587; Bdhd 111; -- upacaya accumulation of k. Kvn A. 156; -- kathā exposition of k.; chapter in Ps ii.98; -- kāma (adj.) desirous of good karma Th 2, 275; PvA 174; a˚ opp.= inactive, indolent A iv.92, PvA 174; -- kiriyā -- dassana (adj.) understanding the workings of k. J i.45; -- kiliṭṭha bad, evil k. Dh 15 (=DhA i.129, expl. kiliṭṭha -- k˚); -- kilesa (2) depravity of action, bad works, there are 4 enumd at D iii.181=J iii.321, as the non -- performance of sīla 1 -- 4 (see sīla), equal to pāpa -- kāya -- k˚; -- kkhaya (3 B) the termination, exhaustion of the influence of k.; its destruction: sabba -- k˚ -- kkhayaŋ patto vimutto upadhi -- sankhaye S i.134; as brought about by neutral, indifferent kamma: D iii.230=A ii.230 sq.; M i.93, DhsA 89; -- ja (3 B) produced by k. J i.52; as one mode of the origin of disease Miln 135; Nd2 3041; appld. to all existence Miln 271; Vism 624 (kammajaŋ āyatanadvāra -- vasena pākaṭaŋ hoti); appld to rūpa Vism 451, 614; appl. to pains of childbirth (˚vātā) J i.52, DhA i.165; a˚ not caused by k., of ākāsa and nibbāna Miln 268, 271; -- ṭṭhāna (2) 1. a branch of industry or occupation, profession, said of diff. occupations as farmer, trader, householder and mendicant M ii.197; A v.83. 2. occasion or ground for (contemplating) kamma (see ṭhāna ii.2. c.), kamma -- subject, a technical term referring to the instruments of meditation, esp. objects used by meditation to realize impermanence. These exercises ("stations of exercise" Expos. 224) are highly valued as leading to Arahantship DhA i.8 (yāva arahattaŋ kamma -- ṭṭhānaŋ kathesi), 96; PvA 98 (catu -- saccakamma -- ṭṭhāna -- bhāvanā meditation on the 4 truths and the objects of meditation). Freq. in phrase kammaṭṭhāne anuyutto (or anuyoga vasena) na cirass'eva arahattaŋ pāpuṇi: J iii.36; Sāsv 49; see also J i.7, 97, 182, 303, 414; Sdhp 493. These subjects of meditation are given as 38 at DhsA 168 (cp. Cpd. 202), as 32 (dvattiŋs' ākāra -- k˚) at Vism 240 sq., as 40 at Vism 110 sq. (in detail); as pañca -- sandhika at Vism 277; some of them are mentioned at J i.116; DhA i.221, 336; iv.90; -- ˚ŋ anuyuñjati to give oneself up to meditation Sāsv 151; PvA 61; -- ˚ŋ uggaṇhāti to accept from his teacher a particular instrument of meditation Vism 277 sq. (also ˚assa uggaho & uggaṇhana); KhA 40; DhA i.9, 262; iv.106; PvA 42; -- ˚ŋ katheti to teach a pupil how to meditate on one of the k˚ DhA i.8, 248, 336; PvA 61; -- ˚ŋ adāsi DhA iv.106; ˚gaṇhāti J iii.246; Vism 89; ˚ācikkhana instruction in a formula of exercise DhsA 246; ˚dāyaka the giver of a k -- ṭṭh˚ object, the spiritual adviser and teacher, who must be a kalyāṇamitta (q. v.), one who has entered the Path; Vism 89; Bdhd 89, 91, cp. Vism 241; -- ṭṭhānika a person practising kammaṭṭhāna Vism 97, 187, 189; DhA i.335; -- tappana the being depressed on acct. of one's (bad) karma DhA i.150. -- -- dāyāda (3 A (b) and cp. ˚ssaka) the inheritor of k., i. e. inheriting the consequences of one's own deeds M i.390; Miln 65=DhsA 66; -- dvāra "the door of action," i. e. the medium by which action is manifested (by kāya, vacī, mano) (s. 2b) J iv.14; KvuA 135; DhsA 82; Bdhd 8; -- dhāraya name of a class of noun -- compounds Kacc 166; -- nānatta manifoldness of k. DhsA 64 (also -- nānākaraṇa ib.); -- nibandhana (3 B) bound to k. (: rathass'āṇī va yāyato, as the linchpin to the cart) Sn 654; -- nibbatta (3 B) produced through k. Miln 268; DhsA 361; -- nimitta the sign, token of k. DhsA 411; -- nirodha the destruction of k. [see 3 B (d)]; -- paccaya the ground, basis of karma Vism 538; KvuA 101; ˚paccayena by means of k. J vi.105, Vism 538; (adj.) J v.271, DhsA 304; -- paṭisaraṇa (a) having k. as a place of refuge or as a protector J vi.102; Miln 65; cp. DhsA 66; -- paṭibāḷha strong by k. Miln 301; -- pathā (2 b) pl. the ways of acting (=sīla q. v.), divided into kusala (meritorious, good) and akusala (demeritorious, evil) and classified according to the 3 manifestations into 3 kāya˚, 4 vācī˚, 3 mano˚, altogether 10; so at Vin v.138, S ii.168, A v.57, 268; as kus˚ and akus˚ at D iii.71, 269, 290; as 7 only at S ii.167; as akus˚ only at A v.54, 266; Vbh 391; Nett 43; Bdhd 129, 131; ˚ppatta having acquired the 10 items of (good) action Sdhp 56, 57. -- phala [3 A (a)] the fruit of k., the result of (formerly) performed actions J i.350; VvA 39, PvA 1, 26, 52; ˚ -- upajīvin 1. living on the fruit of one's labour (ad I) J iv.160; -- 2. living according to the result of former deeds A ii.135; -- bandhu having k. as one's relative, i. e. closely tied to one's karma (see ˚ssaka) Th 1, 496; cp. J vi.100, etc. -- bala the power of k. J vi.108; PvA 82. -- bhava [3 B (b)] karmic existence, existence through karma Vbh 137; DhsA 37; -- bhūmi 1. the place of work J iii.411; 2. the ground of actions, i. e. the field of meritorious deeds Miln 229; -- mūla (good) k. as a price (for long life, etc.) Miln 333, 334, 341; -- mūlaka produced by k. Miln 134; -- yoni having k. for matrix, i. e. as the cause of rebirth Miln 65; DhsA 66. -- lakkhaṇa having k. as distinctive characteristic A i.102; AA 370; -- vagga name of section in Nipāta IV of Anguttara (Nos. 232 -- 238) A ii.230 sq.; -- vavaṭṭhāna the continuance of k. DhsA 85; -- vāda (a) holding to the view of (the power and efficacy of) k. S ii.33 sq.; A i.287 (+kiriyavāda, viriyavāda); -- vādin believing in k. D i.115; Vin i.71; J vi.60; -- vipāka [3 A (a)] the ripening of k., the result of one's actions (see above) Vbh 106, 182, 268, 281; as one of the four mysteries (acinteyyāni) of Buddhism at Miln 189. -- ˚ja produced as a result of k.: D ii.20; Mhbv 78; Ps ii.174, 213; Miln 135; Vism 382 (appld to iddhi); concerning disease as not produced by k., see A v.110; Miln 134, 135; AA 433, 556. -- visuddhi meritorious karma Dh 16 (=Dh i.132); -- visesa variety or difference of k. DhsA 313; -- vega the impetus of k. PvA 284; -- sacca (adj.) having its reality only in k.; said of loka, the world A ii.232. -- samādāna (2) the acquisition of ways of acting, one's character, or the incurring of karma, either as micchādiṭṭhi˚ (of wrong views) or sammādiṭṭhi (conforming to the right doctrine), so in yathākamm -- ûpaga passage (q. v.): D iii.96; M i.70; iii.178, 179; four such qualities or kinds of karma enum. at Nett 98; of Buddha's knowledge as regards the quality of a man's character: S v.304; A iii.417 sq.; Ps ii.174; Vbh 338; -- samārambha [3 B (a)] having its beginning in k.; said of loka, the world of men; with ˚ṭṭhāyin: lasting as long as the origin (cause) of k. exists A ii.232; -- samuṭṭhāna [3 B (a)] rising from k. Miln 127; DhsA 82; Kvn 100; -- sambhava produced by k. Miln 127; -- sarikkhaka [see above 3 B (c)] similar or like in consequence to the deed done DhA iii.334 (˚vipāka). -- sarikkhatā (do.) the likeness between deed and result; -- sahāya "companion to the deed," said of thought DhsA 323; -- socana sorrowing for one's (bad) deeds DhA i.128. -- (s)saka [3 A (b), q. v.] (a) one whose karma is his own property, possessed of his own k. M iii.203, etc. (in phrase k., kamma -- dāyāda, kamma -- bandhu, etc.; cp. Vism 301); J iv.128; Miln 65; DA i.37=who goes according to his own karma (attano k˚ânurūpaŋ gatiŋ gacchanti, n'eva pitā puttassa kammena gacchati, na putto pitu kammena . . .); der. ˚tā the fact that every being has his very own karma A iii.186; Dhs 1366; Vbh 324; ˚ta as adj.; qualifying ñāṇa, i. e. the knowledge of the individual, specific nature of karma Dhs 1366, Vbh 328.
Kammaka (adj.) [fr. kamma] connected with, dependt on karma Miln 137 (a˚).
Kammanīya, ˚iya & kammañña (adj.) "workable," fit for work, dexterous, ready, wieldy. Often of citta "with active mind" in formula vigatūpakkilesa mudubhūta k˚ ṭhita ānejjappatta D i.76, etc.=M i.22= Pug 68; S iii.232; v.92, 233; A i.9; DhA i.289; Bdhd 101, expld at Vism 377 (˚iya). Further of citta (muduñ ca kammaññañ ca pabhassarañ ca) A i.257 (reads ˚iyañ)=Vism 247; of upekhā and sati Nd2 661, cp. Bdhd 104; of kāya & citta Bdhd 121. Said of a lute=workable, ready for playing A iii.375=Vin i.182. Of the body A iv.335. -- a˚ not ready, sluggish A iv.333; Vism 146. -- kammañña -- bhāva the state of being workable, readiness, of kāya Dhs 46, of vedanā, etc., Dhs 326, of citta DhsA 130, see next; a˚ unworkable condition DhsA 130.
Kammaññatā (f.) [abstr. fr. prec.] workableness, adapta- bility, readiness, appl. to the wood of the sandal tree (in simile) A i.9; said of kāya and citta in connection with kammaññattaŋ k˚bhāvo k˚mudutā: Dhs 46, 47=326=641=730; cp. Dhs 585; similar Bdhd 16, 20, 71; DhsA 136, 151 (=kammasādutā) a˚ unworkableness, inertness, unwieldiness, sluggishness Miln 300; Nett 86, 108, cp. Dhs 1156, 1236; DhsA 255; expld as cittagelaññaŋ DhsA 377; as cetaso līnattaŋ Vbh 373.
Kammanta [Sk. karmānta; kamma+anta, cp. anta 14.] 1. doing, acting, working; work, business, occupation, profession. paṭicchanna˚ of secret acting Sn 127= Vbh 357; as being punished in Niraya A i.60; S iv.180; as occupation esp. in pl. kammantā: S v.45=135; DhA i.42 (kammantā nappavattanti, no business proceeds, all occupations are at a standstill); anākula˚ Sn 262=Kh v.5; abbhantarā k˚ uṇṇā ti vā, kappāsā ti vā as housework, falling to the share of the wife A iii.37=iv.365; khetta˚ occupation in the field A iii.77; see also D i.71; M iii.7; S i.204; Miln 9, 33; and below; as place of occupation: Sn p. 13, PvA 62. Phrases: ˚ŋ adhiṭṭhāti to look after the business A i.115; PvA 141; jahati give up the occupation S iv.324; PvA 133; ˚ŋ payojeti to do or carry on business D i.71; ii.175; iii.66, 95; A iii.57; ˚ŋ pavatteti to set a business on foot PvA 42 (and vicāreti: PvA 93); ˚ŋ saŋvidahati to provide with work A iv.269=272. Mhvs vi.16. -- 2. deed, action in ethical sense= kamma, character, etc., Kh 136 (k˚=kamma); pāpa˚ doing wrong Pv iv.81; iv.161; J vi.104 (opp. puñña˚); as specified by kāya˚ vacī ˚mano˚ A v.292 sq.; VvA 130 (in parisuddha -- kāya -- kammantatā); dhammikā k˚ā M ii.191; ākiṇṇa -- k˚ (evam -- ) of such character S i.204; kurūra -- k˚ (adj.) of cruel character A iii.383=Pug 56 (in def. of puggalo orabbhiko); sammā˚ of right doing, opp. micchā˚, as constituting one element of character as pertaining to "Magga" (: q. v.) D ii.216; S ii.168; v.1; A iii.411; Bdhd 135; expl. as kāya -- kamma (=sīla 1 -- 3) at S v.9=Vbh 105; Vbh 235; as kāya -- duccaritehi ārati virati . . . Vbh 106.
-- âdhiṭṭhāyika superintendent of work DhA i.393; -- ṭṭhāna: 1. the spot where the ceremonies of the Ploughing Festival take place J i.57; 2. the common ground of a village, a village bazaar J iv.306; -- dāsa a farm -- servant J i.468; -- bheri the drum announcing the (taking up of) business DhA iii.100; -- vipatti "failure of action," evil -- doing A i.270 opp. -- sampadā "perfection of action, right -- doing" A i.271; -- saŋvidhāna the providing of work D iii.191 (one of the 5 duties of the gahapati).
Kammantika (adj.) [fr. kammanta] 1. a business manager J i.227. -- 2. a labourer, artisan, assistant J i.377.
Kammāra [Vedic karmāra] a smith, a worker in metals generally D ii.126, A v.263; a silversmith Sn 962= Dh 239; J i.223; a goldsmith J iii.281; v.282. The smiths in old India do not seem to be divided into black -- , gold -- and silver -- smiths, but seem to have been able to work equally well in iron, gold, and silver, as can be seen e. g. from J iii.282 and VvA 250, where the smith is the maker of a needle. They were constituted into a guild, and some of them were well -- to -- do as appears from what is said of Cunda at D ii.126; owing to their usefulness they were held in great esteem by the people and king alike J iii.281.
-- uddhana a smith's furnace, a forge J vi.218; -- kula a smithy M i.25; kūṭa a smith's hammer Vism 254; -- gaggarī a smith's bellows S i.106; J vi.165; Vism 287 (in comparison); -- putta "son of a smith," i. e. a smith by birth and trade D ii.126; A v.263; as goldsmith J vi.237, Sn 48 (Nd2 ad loc.: k˚ vuccati suvaṇṇakāro); -- bhaṇḍu (bhaṇḍ, cp. Sk. bhāṇḍika a barber) a smith with a bald head Vin i.76; -- sālā a smithy Vism 413; Mhvs 5, 31.
Kammāsa [Vedic kalmāṣa, which may be referred, with kalana, kaluṣa, kalanka and Gr. kelaino/s to *qel, fr. which also Sk. kāla black -- blue, Gr. khla/s, khli/ s; Lat. cālīgo & callidus] 1. variegated, spotted, blemished J v.69 (˚vaṇṇa), said of the spotted appearance of leprosy. -- fig. inconsistent, varying A ii.187. -- 2. (nt.) inconsistency, blemish, blot A iv.55; Vism 51. -- a˚ not spotted, i. e. unblemished, pure, said of moral conduct D ii.80; A ii.52; iii.36, 572; vi.54, 192; Bdhd 89.
-- kārin in a˚ not acting inconsistently A ii.187; cp. ibid. 243. -- pāda 1. (a) having speckled feet J v.475; (b) (m) one who has speckled feet, i. e. an ogre; also N. of a Yakkha J v.503, 511 (cp. J.P.T.S. 1909, 236 sq.).
Kammika (adj. -- n.) [fr. kamma] 1. ( -- ˚) one who does or looks after; one whose occupation is of such & such a character: āya˚ revenue -- overseer, treasurer DhA i.184; sabba˚ (always with ref. to amacca, the king's minister) one who does everything, the king's confidant Vism 130; PvA 81. -- On term ādi˚ beginner (e. g. Vism 241) see Cpd. 53, 129 n.2. -- 2. a merchant, trader, in jalapatha˚ and thalapatha˚ by sea & by land J i.121. -- 3. a superintendent, overseer, manager J ii.305 (executioner of an order); vi.294; Mhvs 30, 31. -- 4. one connected with the execution of an ecclesiastical Act Vin ii.5 (cp. p. 22); Bdhd 106.
Kammin (adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. kamma, cp. kammaka] doing, per- forming, practising J vi.105; Sdhp 196, 292.
Kamya (adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. kām] wishing for, desiring DhsA 365 (sādhu˚; v. l. ˚kāma); kamyā, abl. in the desire for, see next.
Kamyā ( -- ˚) in abl. function (of kamyā f. for kamyāya or kamya adj.?) in the desire for: S i.143=J iii.361 (expld by kāmatāya); Sn 854, 929.
Kamyatā ( -- ˚) & kammatā (Nd) [fr. kām] wish, desire, longing for, striving after; with inf. or equivalent: kathetu˚ VvA 18; muñcitu˚ (+paṭisankhā) Ps i.60, 65; Bdhd 123; asotu˚, adaṭṭhu˚ and adassana˚ Vbh 372. Esp. in definitions, as of chanda: kattu˚ Vbh 208; Bdhd 20; of jappā: puñcikatā sādhu˚ Vbh 351; 361=Dhs 1059; Nd2 s. v. taṇhāii (: has the better reading mucchañci katā asādhu˚; v. l. pucchañci˚; both Vbh and Dhs have sādu in text which should be corrected to asādhu˚; see detail under puñcikatā); of māna; ketu˚ Nd2 505; Dhs 1116=1233; Vbh 350 sq.; Bdhd 24; of lapanā: pāṭu˚ (v. l. cāṭu˚) Vbh 246= 352. -- As abl. (=kamyā) in dassana˚ S i.193=Th 1, 1241; Sn 121 (expl. as icchāya SnA 179). Cp. kammaññatā & kamma -- sādutā.
Kaya [fr. kri] purchase, buying A iii.226 (+vi˚).
-- (a)kkaya, buying & selling Pv i.56 (see also Kh vii.6 and note). -- vikkaya (kraya vikraya) buying & selling, trade in ˚paṭivirata D i.5=A ii.209= v.205= Pug 58; D i.64; S v.473; Sn 929; J v.243; Khus 114; DhA i.78; PvA 29 (= KhA 212).
Kayati [krī, perhaps connected with kṛ] to buy; Inf. ketuŋ J iii.282; cp. kiṇāti.
Kayika [fr. krī, cp. BSk. krayika Divy 505] a buyer, trader, dealer Miln 334.
Kayin a buyer J vi.110.
Kara [fr. kṛ] 1. (adj.) ( -- ˚) producing, causing, forming, making, doing, e. g. anta˚ putting an end to; pabhaŋ causing splendour; pāpa˚ doing evil; divā˚ & divasa the day -- maker, i. e. the sun; kaṇhabhāva˚ causing a "black" existence (of pāpakamma) J iv.9; padasandhi˚ forming a hiatus PvA 52; vacana˚, etc. <-> 2. (m) "the maker," i. e. the hand Mhvs 5, 255 -- 256; 30, 67. -- atikaraŋ (adv.) doing too much, going too far J i.431; -- dukkara (a) difficult to do, not easy, hard, arduous S i.7; iv.260; A i.286; iv.31, 135; v.202; +durabhisambhavo Sn 429 701; Ud. 61; (n. nt.) something difficult, a difficult task A i.286 (cp. iv.31); J i.395; Miln 121, dukkara -- kārikā "doing of a hard task," exertion, austerity M i.93; Nd2 262b. -- sukara easy to do S i.9; ii.181; Dh 163; Ud 61; na sukaraŋ w. inf. it is not easy to . . . D i.250; A iii.52, 184; iv.334.
-- kaṭaka (m. nt.) a hand -- wheel, i. e. a pulley by which to draw up a bucket of water Vin ii.122; cp. Vin. Texts iii.112; -- ja "born of kamma" in karaja -- kāya the body sprung from action, an expression always used in a contemptible manner, therefore=the impure, vile, low body A v.300; J i.5; Vism 287, 404; DA i.113, 217, 221; DhA i.10; iii.420; DhsA 403. karaja -- rūpa Vism 326. -- tala the palm of the hand Mhbv 6, 34; -- mara "one who ought to die from the hand (of the enemy)," but who, when captured, was spared and employed as slave; a slave J iii.147, 361; iv.220; DhA iii.487; -- ˚ānītā a woman taken in a raid, but subsequently taken to wife; one of the 10 kinds of wives (see itthi) Vin iii.140 (=dhajāhaṭā); -- gāhaŋ gaṇhāti to make prisoner J i.355; iii.361; -- mita "to be measured with (two) hands," in ˚majjhā, a woman of slender waist J v.219; vi.457.
Karaka1 [Etymology unknown. The Sanskrit is also karaka, and the medieval koṣas give as meaning, besides drinking vessel, also a coco -- nut shell used as such (with which may be compared Lat. carīna, nutshell, keel of a boat; and Gr. ka/ rua, nut.) It is scarcely possible that this could have been the original meaning. The coconut was not cultivated, perhaps not even known, in Kosala at the date of the rise of Pali and Buddhism] 1. Water -- pot, drinking -- vessel (=: pānīya -- bhājana PvA 251). It is one of the seven requisites of a samaṇa Vin ii.302. It is called dhammakaraka there, and at ii. 118, 177. This means "regulation waterpot" as it was provided with a strainer (parissavana) to prevent injury to living things. See also Miln 68; Pv iii.224; PvA 185. -- 2. hail (also karakā) J iv. 167; Miln 308; Mhvs xii. 9.
-- vassa a shower of hail, hail -- storm J iv.167; Miln 308; DhA i.360.
Karakarā (for kaṭakaṭā, q. v.) (adv.) by way of gnashing or grinding the teeth (cp. Sk. dantān kaṭakaṭāpya), i. e. severely (of biting) J iii.203 (passage ought to be read as karakarā nikhāditvā).
Karañja [cp. Sk. karañja, accord. to Aufrecht, Halāyudha p. 176 the Dalbergia arborea] the tree Pongamia glabra, used medicinally Vin i.201; J vi.518, 519.
Karaṇa [fr. kṛ, cp. Vedic karaṇa] 1. adj. (f. ī) ( -- ˚) doing, making, causing, producing; as cakkhu˚ ñāṇa˚ (leading to clear knowledge) S iv.331; v.97; It 83; and acakkhu˚ etc. S v.97; nāthā ˚ā dhammā A v.23 (cp. v.89) and thera˚ A ii.22; dubbaṇṇa˚ S v.217; see also D i.245; M. i.15; S v.96, 115; A iv.94; v.268; Miln 289. <-> 2. (nt.) ( -- ˚) the making, producing of; the doing, performance of (=kamma), as bali˚ offering of food =bali kamma) PvA 81; gabbha˚ Sn 927; pānujja˚ Sn 256. 3. (abs.) (a) the doing up, preparing J v.400, vi.270 (of a building: the construction) (b) the doing, performance of, as pāṇâtipātassa k˚ and ak˚ ("commission and omission"); DhA i.214; means of action J iii.92. (c) ttg. the instrumental case (with or without ˚vacana) PvA 33; VvA 25, 53, 162, 174. -- ˚atthe in the sense of, with the meaning of the instrumental case J iii.98; v.444; PvA 35; VvA 304; DhsA 48; Kacc 157. -- 4. ( -- ˚) state, condition; in noun -- abstract function= ˚ttaŋ (cp. kamma I.2) as nānā˚ (=nānattaŋ) difference M ii.128; S iv.294; Bdhd 94; kasi˚ ploughing PvA 66; kattabba˚ (=kattabbattaŋ) "what is to be done," i. e. duty PvA 30; pūjā˚ veneration PvA 30. sakkāra˚ reverence, devotion SnA 284.
Note: in massu˚ and kamma˚ some grammarians have tried to derive k˚ from a root kṛ, to hurt, cut, torture (see Morris J.P.T.S. 1893, 15), which is however quite unnecessary [see kamma 3 A (b), kataii 1 (b)]. Karaṇa here stands for kamma, as clearly indicated by semantic grounds as well as by J vi.270 where it explains kappita -- kesa -- massu, and J v.309 & DhA i.253 where massukamma takes the place of ˚karaṇa, and J iii.314, where it is represented by massu -- kutti (C.: massukiriya). Cp. also DA i.137. a˚ Negative in all meanings of the positive, i. e. the non -- performing J i.131; v.222; Nett 81; PvA 59; DhsA 127; non -- undertaking (of business) J i.229; noncommission M i.93; abstaining from Dhs 299. Cpd. -- uttariya (nt.) angry rejoinder, vehement defence DhA i.44.
Karaṇīya [grd. of karoti] 1. adj. (a) that ought to be, must or should be done, to be done, to be made (=kātabbaŋ karaṇârahaŋ KhA 236) Vin i.58; D i.3, cp. Miln 183; A v.210; DA i.7. Often -- ˚ in the sense of "doing, making," as yathā kāma˚ S ii.226; cp. iv.91, 159; "having business" bahu˚ D ii.76; A iii.116; S ii.215; anukampa˚ PvA 61: -- (b) done, in the sense of undoing, i. e. overcome, undone D ii.76 cp. Dial. ii.81 n. -- 2. (m.) one who has still something left to perform (for the attainment of Arahantship, a sekha J iii.23. -- 3. (nt.) (a) what ought to be done, duty, obligation; affairs, business D i.85; ii.68, 74 cp. A iv.16; M i.271; S iii.168; iv.281 cp. Vin iii.12; Vin i.139; A i.58; Sn 143; Sn p. 32 (yan te karanīyaŋ taŋ karohi "do what you have to do"); -- ˚ŋ tīreti to conclude a business Vin. ii.158; J v.298. Kataŋ ˚ŋ done is what was to be done, I have done my task, in freq. formula "khīṇā jāti vusitaŋ brahmacariyaŋ . . ." to mark the attainment of Arahantship D i.84; ii.68=153; Th 2, 223; Vin i.14; Sn p. 16; DA i.226, etc. See Arahant ii.C. <-> There are 3 duties each of a samaṇa, farmer and householder enumerated at A i.229; 3 of a bhikkhu A i.230; -- (b) use, need (with instr.): appamādena k˚ S iv.125; cetanāya k˚ A v.2, 312; cp. Miln 5, 78. akaraṇīya 1. (adj.) (a) what ought not to be done, prohibited A i.58; iii.208=DA i.235. -- (b) incapable of being done (c. gen.) It 18. -- (c) improper, not befitting (c. gen.) Vin i.45=216=iii.20; PvA 64. -- (d) not to be "done," i. e. not to be overcome or defeated D ii.76; A iv.113; -- (e) having nothing to do Vin i.154. <-> 2. (nt.) a forbidden matter, prohibition Vin ii.278 <-> sa˚ 1. having business, busy Vin i.155; -- 2. one who has still something to do (in sense of above 2) D ii.143; Th 1, 1045; DA i.9.
Karaṇīyatā (f.) [abstr. fr. prec.] the fact that something has to be performed, an obligation Vin ii.89, 93; sa˚ being left with something to do Miln 140.
Karaṇḍa (m. nt.) [cp. Sk. karaṇḍa, ˚ka, ˚ikā. The Dhātu- mañjūsā expls k. by "bhājanatthe"] 1. a basket or box of wicker -- work Mhvs 31, 98; Dāvs v.60; DhA iii.18; -- 2. the cast skin, slough of a serpent D i.77 (=DA i.222 ahi -- kañcuka) cp. Dial. i.88.
Karaṇḍaka [fr. last] a box, basket, casket, as dussa˚ M i.215=S v.71=A iv.230 (in simile); S iii.131; v.351 cp. Pug 34; J i 96; iii.527; v.473 (here to be changed into koraṇḍaka); DA i.222 (vilīva˚); SnA 11.
Karamanda [etym.?] a shrub Vism 183 (+kanavīra).
Karati1 [cp. Sk. kṛntati] to cut, injure, hurt; in "karato kārayato chindato chedāpayato . . ." D i.52=M i.516; S iii.208.
Karati2 (˚tī) (f.) a superior kind of bean, the Dolichos catjang J vi.536 (= rājamāsa).
Karabha the trunk of an elephant; in karabhoru (k˚+ūru) (a woman) with beautiful thighs Mhbv 29.
Karamara see Kara.
Karaḷa (karala) a wisp of grass (tiṇa˚) DhA iii.38; DhsA 272.
Karavī [cp. Sk. kala -- kaṇṭha cuckoo, & kalavinka sparrow] the Indian cuckoo J vi.539.
Karavīka same J v.204, 416; Vv 364; Vism 112, 206; VvA 166, 219.
-- bhāṇin speaking like the cuckoo, i. e. with a clear and melodious voice, one of the mahāpurisa -- lakkhaṇas D ii.20=iii.144=173=M ii.137, etc.; cp. Dial. ii.17 n. and BSk. kalaviṅka -- manojña -- bhāṣin Sp. Av.Ś i.371 (Index p. 225, where references to Lalitavist. are given).
Karavīya (˚iya)=prec. J vi.538.
Karavīra [cp. Sk. karavīra] 1. the oleander, Nerium odorum. Its flower was used especially in garlands worn by delinquents (see kaṇṭha) -- 2. a kind of grass J iv.92. -- patta a kind of arrow M i.429.
Karahi (Sk. karhi, when? kar=loc. of pron. st. *quo= Lat. cur why, Goth. hvar, E. where), only in karaha -- ci (karhi cid) at some time, generally preceded by kadāci D i.17; ii.139; M i.177, 454; A i.179; iv.101; Miln 73, 76.
Karin (adj.) [fr. kara] "one who has a hand," an elephant (cp. hatthin) Mhvs 24, 34; 25, 68; Dāvs iv.2. In cpds. kari.
-- gajjita the cry of the elephant, an elephant's trumpeting Dāvs v.56; -- vara an excellent elephant Mhbv 4, 143; Dāvs iv.2.
Kari -- paribandha (adj.) [=karīsa -- paribaddha] bound up in filth, full of filth, disgusting; Ep. of the body Th 1, 1152. Kari here is abbrev. of karīsa2 (see note ad loc.).
Karīsa1 (nt.) a square measure of land, being that space on which a karīsa of seed can be sown (Tamil karīsa), see Rhys Davids, Ancient Coins and Measures of Ceylon, p. 18; J i.94, 212; iv.233, 276; VvA 64.
Karīsa2 (nt.) [cp. Sk. karīṣa, to chṛṇatti to vomit, cp. Lat. -- cerda in mūscerda, sūcerda] refuse, filth, excrement, dung D ii.293; J i.5; Vism 259, 358 (in detail); PvA 87, 258; KhA 59; mutta˚ urine and faeces A i.139; Sn 835.
-- magga the anus J iv.327; -- vāca (nt.) a cesspool J iii.263 (=gūthakūpa); -- vāyin, f. ˚inī diffusing an odour of excrement PvA 87.
Karuṇā (f.) [cp. Vedic karuṇa nt. (holy) action; Sk. karuṇā, fr. kṛ. As adj. karuṇa see under 3.] pity, compassion. Karuṇā is one of the 4 qualities of character significant of a human being who has attained enfranchisement of heart (ceto -- vimutti) in the 4 sentiments, viz. mettā k.˚ upekhā muditā Freq. found in this formula with ˚sahagatena cetasā. The first two qualities are complementary, and SnA 128 (on Sn 73) explains k˚ as "ahita -- dukkh -- âpanaya -- kāmatā," the desire of removing bane and sorrow (from one's fellowmen), whilst mettā is expl. as "hita -- sukh -- ûpanayakāmatā," the desire of bringing (to one's fellow -- men) that which is welfare and good. Other definitions are "paradukkhe sati sādhūnaŋ hadayakampanaŋ karotī ti" Bdhd 21; "sattesu k˚ karuṇāyanā karuṇāyitattaŋ karuṇā cetovimutti" as expl. of avihiŋsa dhātu Vbh 87; paradukkhāsahana -- rasā Vism 318. K˚ -- sahagatena cetasā denotes the exalted state of compassion for all beings (all that is encompassed in the sphere of one's good influence: see cātuddisa "extending over the 4, i. e. all, directions): D i.251; iii.78, 50, 224; S iv.296, 322, 351; v.115; A i.183, 196; ii.129, 184; iii.225; v.300, 345; J ii.129; Nd2 on Sn 73; Vbh 273, 280; Dhs 1258. The def. of karuṇā at Vism 318 runs "paradukkhe sati sādhūnaŋ hadaya -- kampanaŋ karoti." Frequently referred to as an ideal of contemplation (in conn. w. bhāvanā & jhāna), so in "karuṇaŋ cetovimuttiŋ bhāveti" S v.119; A i.38; v.360; in k˚ cetovimutti bhāvitā bahulī -- katā, etc. D iii.248; A iii.291; iv.300; in k˚ -- sahagataŋ saddhindriyaŋ A i.42; unspecified S v.131; A iii.185; Nett 121, 124; Ps i.8; k˚+mettā Nett 25; k˚+muditā Bdhd 16 sq., 26 sq., 29; ananta k˚ pañña as Ep. of Buddha Bdhd 1; karuṇaŋ dūrato katvā, without mercy, of the Yamadūtā, messengers of Death Sdhp 287; mahā˚ great compassion Ps i.126, 133; -- ˚samāpatti a ʻ gest, ʼ feat of great compassion: in which Buddha is represented when rising and surveying the world to look for beings to be worthy of his mercy and help D ii.237; Ps. 1, 126 f. DhA i.26, 367; PvA 61, 195; -- 3. As adj. only in cpds. (e. g. ˚vācā merciful speech; neg. akaruṇa merciless Mhbv 85, & ati˚ very merciful J iv.142) and as adv. karuṇaŋ pitifully, piteously, mournfully, in k˚ paridevati J vi.498, 513, 551; Cp. ix.54; also in abl. karuṇā J vi.466. -- See also kāruñña.
-- âdhimutta intent upon compassion D ii.241, 242; -- ânuvattin following the dictates of mercy Dāvs iii.46; -- guṇaja originating in the quality of compassion Sdhp 570; -- jala water of c., shower of mercy Miln 22; Mhbv 16; -- jhāna meditation on pity, ecstasy of c. D ii.237 -- 39; -- ṭṭhāniya worthy of c. PvA 72; -- para one who is highest in compassion, compassionate Sdhp 112, 345; -- bala the power of c. Mhvs 15, 61, 130; Sdhp 577; -- brahmavihāra divine state of pity Vism 319. -- bhāvanā consideration or cultivation of pity Vism 314 sq. -- rasa the sweetness of c. Mhbv 16; -- vihāra (a heart) in the state of c. Vism 324 (& adj. ˚vihārin); DA i.33; -- sāgara an ocean of mercy Mhbv 7; -- sītala "cool with c." +hadaya, whose heart is tempered with mercy Sdhp 33; DA i.1.
Karuṇāyati [v. den. fr. karuṇā; cp. BSk. karuṇāyati Divy 105] to feel pity for, to have compassion on Sn 1065 (˚āyamāna; expl. by Nd2 as anuddayamāno anurakkh˚ anuggaṇh˚ anukamp˚); Vbh 273; Vism 314. Der. ˚āyanā compassionateness Vbh 87= 273 (and ˚āyitattaŋ ibid.).
Karumbhaka a species of rice -- plant of a ruddy colour Miln 252 (see Mil. trsl. ii.73).
Karumhā (pl.) a class of Devas D ii.260.
Kareṇu [metathesis for kaṇeru, q. v., cp. Sk. kareṇu] elephant, in cpd. -- lolita resounding with the noise made by elephants, of a forest Th 2, 373.
Kareṇukā (f.) [fr. kareṇu) a female elephant J ii.343; DhA i.196 (v. l. for kaṇeru).
Kareri in Childers the tree Capparis trifoliata, but see Brethren, p. 363, n. 2: musk -- rose tree or "karer"; Th 1, 1062; Ud 31; J v.405; vi.534.
Karoṭi1 (f.) 1. a basin, cup, bowl, dish J i.243; ii.363; iii.225; iv.67; v.289, 290. -- 2. the skull (cp. kaḷopi. On the form cp. Dial. i.227 n.) J vi.592.
Karoṭi2 (m.) a class of genii that formed one of the 5 guards of the devas against the asuras J i.204, associated with the nāgas (cp. Divy 218; and Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893, 22). As N. of Supaṇṇas (a kind of Garuḍas) expld as "tesaŋ karoṭi nāma pānabhojanaŋ" by C. on J i.204. Kern, Toev. s. v. compares BSk. karoṭapāṇayah a class of Yakṣas MVastu i.30.
Karoṭika [fr. karoṭi1)] 1. a bowl, basin J iv.68; DhA ii.131 (sappi˚). -- 2. the skull J vi.592; where it may be a helmet in the form of a skull.
Karoṭiya=karoṭika 2, J vi.593.
Karoti v. irreg. [Sk. karoti, *qṷer to form, to build (or plait, weave? see kamma), cp. kar -- man, Lith. kùrti to build, O.Tr. cruth form; Lat. corpus, with p -- addition, as Sk. kṛpa, kḷp=kṛp. Derived are kalpa > kappa, kalpate > kappeti]. Of the endless variety of forms given by grammarians only the foll. are bona fide and borne out by passages from our texts (when bracketed, found in gram. works only): I. Act. 1. Ind. Pres. karomi, etc. Sn 78, 216, 512, 666= Dh 306=It 42; Opt. kare Dh 42, 43, pl. (kareyyāma) kareyyātha Sn p. 101; or (sing.) kareyya (freq.), kareyyāsi PvA 11; kareyya Sn 920, 923; kuriyā (=Sk. kuryāt) J vi.206; Ppr. karan Dh 136, or karonto (f. karontī) Dh 16, 116. -- 2. Impf. (akara, etc.). -- 3. Aor. (akaŋ) akariŋ, etc., 3rd sing. akāsi Sn 343, 537, 2nd pl. akattha Pv i.112; PvA 45, 75; 3rd pl. akariŋsu; akaŋsu Sn 882; PvA 74; without augment kari DhA ii.59. Prohibitive mā(a)kāsi Sn 339, 1068, etc. -- 4. Imper. karohi Sn p. 32; 1062; karotha Sn 223; KhA 168. -- 5. Fut. karissāmi, etc.; kassāmi Pv iv.139; kāsaŋ J iv.286; vi.36; kāhāmi (in sense of I will do, I am determined to do, usually w. puññaŋ & kusalaŋ poetical only) Pv ii.113; Vv 33192; 2nd sing. kāhasi Sn 427, 428; Dh 154; 1st pl. kāhāma Pv iv.1011. -- 6. Inf. kātuŋ PvA 4, 61, 69, 115, Kh vi.10, etc.; kattuŋ VvA 13; kātave Mhvs 35, 29; Vv 4415 (=kātuŋ); kātuye Th 2, 418. -- 7. Pp. kata, see sep. -- 8. Ger. katvā Sn 127, 661, 705, etc.; katvāna (poet.) Sn 89, 269, Pv i.13; karitvā see iv. II. Med. 1. Ind. pres. (kubbe, etc.) 3rd sing. kubbati Sn 168, 811; 3rd pl. kubbanti Sn 794; or 3rd sing. kurute Sn 94, 796, 819; It. 67; Opt. (kubbe, etc.) 2nd pl. kubbetha Sn 702, 719, 917; It 87; or 3rd sing. kayirā Sn 728= 1051; S i.24; Dh 53, 117; kayirātha (always expl. by kareyya) Dh 25, 117; It 13; Pv i.1111; KhA 224; kubbaye Sn 943. -- Ppr. (kurumāna, kubbāno, karāno) (a) kubbaŋ Sn 844, 913; (a)kubbanto It 86; f. (vi)kubbantī Vv 112; (a)kubbamāna Sn 777, 778, 897; (vi)kubbamāna Vv 331. -- 2. Impf. (akariŋ, 2nd sing. akarase, etc.) 3rd sing. akubbatha Pv ii.1318; 1st pl. akaramhase J iii.26, ˚a DhA i.145. -- 3. Aor. (none) -- 4. Imper. (2nd sing. kurussu, 3rd sing. kurutaŋ, 2nd pl. kuruvho) 3rd sing. kurutaŋ (=Sk. kurutāŋ) J vi.288. -- 5. Fut. (none). III. Pass. 1. Ind. pres. (karīyati, etc.) kayirati Dh 292=Th 1, 635; KhA 168; and kīrati Th 1, 143. Ppr. (karīyamāna, kayīra˚). <-> 2. Fut. kariyissati Vin i.107. -- 3. Grd. karaṇīya (q. v.), (kayya) kātabba DhA i.338. IV. Caus. I. (Denom. to kāra) kārayati=kāreti, in origin. meaning of build, construct, and fig. perform, exercise, rule, wield (rajjaŋ): kārehi PvA 81 (of huts), kārayissāmi Pv ii.64 (of doll); kāressaŋ J v.297 (do.), akārayi Pv ii.1310; akārayuŋ Mhvs iv.3; akāresi Mhvs 23, 85; kāretuŋ PvA 74; kārayamāna VvA 9 (of chair); kāretvā (nāmaŋ) PvA 162; karitvā Sn 444 (vasiŋ) 674; 680 (vittiŋ); p. 97 (uttarāsangaŋ). V. Caus. II. Kārāpeti S i.179; PvA 20; Aor. kārāpesi he had (=caused to be) erected, constructed Vin ii.159; fut. kārāpessāmi Mhvs 20, 9; ger. kārāpetvā PvA 123; grd. kārapetabba Vin ii.134.
Meanings of karoti: 1. to build, erect Mhvs 19, 36; 20, 9 (Caus.). -- 2. to act, perform, make, do Vin i.155; J i.24; ii.153 (tathā karomi yathā na . . . I prevent, cp. Lat. facio ne . . .); iii.297; Pv i.88=ii.619; Mhvs 3, 1; 7, 22; -- 3. to produce DhA i.172; -- 4. to write, compose J vi.410; PvA 287; -- 5. to put on, dress Vin ii.277; J i.9; -- 6. to impose (a punishment) Mhvs 4, 14; -- 7. to turn into (with loc. or two acc.) J ii.32; Mhvs 9, 27; -- 8. to use as (with two acc.) J i.113; ii.24; -- 9. to bring into (with loc.) J v.454 <-> 10. to place (with loc.) J v.274; (with acc. of the person) Dh 162. It is very often used periphrastically, where the trsln would simply employ the noun as verb, e. g. kathaŋ k˚ D ii.98; kodhaŋ k˚ and kopaŋ k˚ to be angry J iv.22; vi.257; cayaŋ k˚ to hoard up; corikaŋ k˚ to steal Vin i.75; taṇhaŋ k˚ (c. loc.) to desire J i.5; sītaŋ k˚ to cool D ii.129. -- It is often compd with nouns or adjectives with a change of final vowel to ī (i) uttāni˚ to make clear D ii.105; pākaṭī˚, bahulī˚, muṭṭhī˚, etc. (q. v.). Cp. the same process in conn. with bhavati. -- The meanings of karoti are varied according to the word with which it is connected; it would be impossible and unnecessary to give an exhaustive list of all its various shades. Only a few illustrations may suffice: aŋse k˚ to place on one's shoulder J i.9; antarāyaŋ k˚ to prevent J i.232; ādiŋ k˚ (c. acc.) to begin with; nimittaŋ k˚ to give a hint D ii.103; pātarāsaŋ k˚ to breakfast; mānasaŋ k˚ to make up one's mind; mahaŋ k˚ to hold a festival D ii.165; massuŋ k˚ to trim the beard DhA i.253; musāvādaŋ k˚ to tell a lie J vi.401; rajjaŋ k˚ to reign S i.218; vase k˚ to bring into one's power J i.79; sandhiŋ k˚ to make an agreement Mhvs 16; sinehaŋ k˚ to become fond of J i.190. -- Similarly, cpd with adverbs: alaŋ k˚ to make much of, i. e. to adorn, embellish; dūrato k˚ to keep at a distance, i. e. keep free from PvA 17; Sdhp 287; purak k˚ (purakkharoti) to place before, i. e. to honour Pv iii.71. --
Note phrase kiŋ karissati what difference does it make? (Cp. Ger. was macht's) D i.120; or what about . . . J i.152.
Kalakala (adj.) [cp. Sk. kala] any indistinct and confused noise Mhbv 23 (of the tramping of an army); in -- mukhara sounding confusedly (of the ocean) ibid. 18. Cp. karakarā.
Kalati [kal, kālayati] to utter an (indistinct) sound: pp. kalita Th 1, 22.
Kalanda [cp. Sk. karaṇḍa piece of wood?] heap, stack (like a heap of wood? cp. kalingara) Miln 292 (sīsa˚).
Kalandaka 1. a squirrel Miln 368; -- 2. an (ornamental) cloth or mat, spread as a seat J vi.224; -- nivāpa N. of a locality in Veḷuvana, near Rājagaha, where oblations had been made to squirrels D ii.116; Vin i.137; ii.105, 290, etc.
Kalabha [cp. Sk. kalabha] the young of an elephant: see hatthi˚ and cp. kalāra.
Kalamba (nt.) [cp. Sk. kalamba menispermum calumba, kalambī convolvulus repens] N. of a certain herb or plant (Convolv. repens?); may be a bulb or radish J iv.46 (=tālakanda), cp. p. 371, 373 (where C expls by tāla -- kanda; gloss BB however gives latā -- tanta); vi.578. See also kaḍamba & kaḷimba.
-- rukkha the Cadamba tree J vi.290.
Kalambaka=kalamba, the C. tree J vi.535.
Kalambukā (f.)=kalambaka D iii.87 (vv. ll. kaladukā, kalabakā) the trsln (Dial. iii.84) has "bamboo."
Kalala (m. nt.) 1. mud J i.12, 73; Miln 125, 324, 346; Mhbv 150; PvA 215 (= kaddama); DhA iii.61; iv.25. -- su˚ "well -- muddied" i. e. having soft soil (of a field) Miln 255. -- 2. the residue of sesamum oil (tela˚), used for embalming J ii.155. -- 3. in Embryology: the "soil," the placenta S i.206=Kvu ii.494; Miln 125. Also the first stage in the formation of the foetus (of which the first 4 during the first month are k., abbuda, pesi, ghana, after which the stages are counted by months 1 -- 5 & 10; see Vism 236; Nd1 120; & cp. Miln 40). -- 4. the foetus, appl. to an egg, i. e. the yolk Miln 49. -- In cpds with kar & bhū the form is kalalī˚.
-- gata (a) fallen into the mud Miln 325; -- gahaṇa "mud thicket," dense mud at the bottom of rivers or lakes J i.329; -- kata made muddy, disturbed Vv 8431 (VvA 343); -- bhūta=prec., A i.9, cp. J ii.100; A iii.233; Miln 35; -- makkhita soiled with mud DhA iii.61.
Kalasa (nt.) [cp. Vedic kalaśa] 1. a pot, waterpot, dish, jar M iii.141; J iv.384; Dāvs iv.49; PvA 162. -- 2. the female breasts (likened to a jar) Mhbv 2, 22.
Kalaha [cp. Sk. kalaha, fr. kal] quarrel, dispute, fight A i.170; iv.196, 401; Sn 862, 863 (+vivāda); J i.483; Nd2 427; DhA iii.256 (udaka˚ about the water); iv.219; Sdhp 135. ˚ŋ udīreti to quarrel J v.395; karoti id. J i.191, 404; PvA 13; vaḍḍheti to increase the tumult, noise J v.412; DhA iii.255. -- a˚ harmony, accord, agreement S i.224; mahā˚ a serious quarrel, a row J iv.88.
-- âbhirata delighting in quarrels, quarrelsome Sn 276; Th 1, 958. -- ŋkara picking up a quarrel J vi.45; -- karaṇa quarrelling, fighting J v.413; -- kāraka (f. -- ī) quarrelsome, pugnacious A iv.196; Vin i.328; ii.1; -- kāraṇa the cause or reason of a dispute J iii.151; vi.336; -- jāta "to whom a quarrel has arisen," quarrelling, disputing A i.70; Vin i.341; ii.86, 261; Ud 67; J iii.149; -- pavaḍḍhanī growth or increase of quarrels, prolongation of strife (under 6 evils arising from intemperance) D iii.182=DhsA 380; -- vaḍḍhana (nt.) inciting & incitement to quarrel J v.393, 394; -- sadda brawl, dispute J vi.336.
Kalā [Vedic kalā *squel, to Lat scalpo, Gr. ska/llw, Ohg scolla, scilling, scala. The Dhtp. (no 613) expls kala by "sankhyāne."] 1. a small fraction of a whole, generally the 16th part; the 16th part of the moon's disk; often the 16th part again subdivided into 16 parts and so on: one infinitesimal part (see VvA 103; DhA ii.63), in this sense in the expression kalaŋ nâgghati soḷasiŋ "not worth an infinitesimal portion of"=very much inferior to S i.19; iii.156= v.44=It 20; A i.166, 213; iv.252; Ud 11; Dh 70; Vv 437; DhA ii.63 (=koṭṭhāsa) DhA iv.74. -- 2. an art, a trick (lit. part, turn) J i.163. -- kalaŋ upeti to be divided or separated Miln 106; DhA i.119; see sakala. -- In cpd. with bhū as kalī -- bhavati to be divided, broken up J i.467 (=bhijjati). Cp. vikala.
Kalāpa [cp. Sk. kalāpa] 1. anything that comprises a number of things of the same kind; a bundle, bunch; sheaf; a row, multitude; usually of grass, bamboo -- or sugar -- canes, sometimes of hair and feathers S iv.290 (tiṇa˚); J i.158 (do.); 25 (naḷa˚), 51 (mālā˚), 100 (uppalakumuda˚); v.39 (usīra˚); Miln 33; PvA 257, 260 (ucchu˚), 272 (veḷu˚); 46 (kesā), 142 (mora -- piñja˚) -- 2. a quiver Vin ii.192; It 68; J vi.236; Miln 418; PvA 154, 169. -- 3. in philosophy: a group of qualities, pertaining to the material body (cp. rūpa˚) Vism 364 (dasadhamma˚) 626 (phassa -- pañcamakā dhammā); Bdhd 77 (rūpa˚) 78, 120.
-- agga (nt.) "the first (of the) bunch," the first (sheaves) of a crop, given away as alms DhA i.98. -- sammasanā grasping (characteristics) by groups Vism 287, 606, 626 sq.
Kalāpaka 1. a band, string (of pearls) Vin ii.315; Mhvs 30, 67. -- 2. a bundle, group J i.239.
Kalāpin (adj.) [fr. kalāpa] having a quiver J vi.49 (acc. pl. ˚ine). f. kalāpinī a bundle, sheaf (yava˚) S iv.201; ii.114 (naḷa˚).
Kalābuka (nt.) [cp. Sk. kalāpaka] a girdle, made of several strings or bands plaited together Vin ii.136, 144, 319;
Kalāya a kind of pea, the chick -- pea M i.245 (kaḷāya); S i.150; A v.170; Sn p. 124; J ii.75 (=varaka, the bean Phaseolus trilobus, and kālarāja -- māsa); J iii.370; DhA i,319. Its size may be gathered from its relation to other fruits in ascending scale at A v.170=S i.150= Sn p. 124 (where the size of an ever -- increasing boil is described). It is larger than a kidney bean (mugga) and smaller than the kernel of the jujube (kolaṭṭhi).
-- matta of the size of a chick -- pea S i.150; A v.170; Sn p. 124 (ḷ); J iii.370; DhA i.319.
Kalāyati [Denom. fr. kalā] to have a measure, to outstrip J i.163 (taken here as "trick, deceive").
Kalāra in hatthi˚ at Ud 41, expld in C by potaka, but cp. the same passage at DhA i.58 which reads kalabha, undoubtedly better. Cp. kaḷārikā.
Kali (m.) [cp. Sk. kali] 1. the unlucky die (see akkha); "the dice were seeds of a tree called the vibhītaka . . . An extra seed was called the kali" (Dial. ii.368 n.) D ii.349; J i.380; Dh 252 (= DhA iii.375) at J vi.228, 282, 357 it is opposed to kaṭa, q. v. -- 2. (=kaliggaha) an unlucky throw at dice, bad luck, symbolically as a piece of bad luck in a general worldly sense or bad quality, demerit, sin (in moral sense) kaliŋ vicināti "gathers up demerit" Sn 658; appamatto kali . . . akkhesu dhanaparājayo . . . mahantataro kali yo sugatesu manam padosaye S i.149=A ii.3=v.171, 174=Sn 659=Nett 132; cp. M iii.170; A v.324; Dh 202 (=DhA iii.261 aparādha). -- 3. the last of the 4 ages of the world (see ˚yuga). -- 4. sinful, a sinner Sn 664 (=pāpaka). <-> 5. saliva, spittle, froth (cp. kheḷa) Th 2, 458, 501; J v.134.
-- (g)gaha the unlucky throw at dice, the losing throw; symbolically bad luck, evil consequence in worldly & moral sense (ubhayattha k˚ faring badly in both worlds) M i.403=406; iii.170 (in simile). See kaṭaggaha; -- devatā (m. pl.) the devotees of kali, the followers of the goddess kali Miln 191 (see Miln trsl. i.266 n.); -- (p)piya one who is fond of cheating at dice, a gambler Pgdp 68; -- yuga (nt.) one of the 4 (or 8) ages of the world, the age of vice, misery and bad luck; it is the age in which we are Sāsv 4, 44, Vinl 281; -- sāsana (nt.) in ˚ŋ āropeti to find fault with others Vin iv.93, 360.
Kalingara (m. nt.) (BB ḷ) [cp. Sk. kaḍankara & kaḍangara, on which in sense of "log" see Kern, Toev. s. v. kalingara] 1. a log, a piece of wood M i.449, 451; S ii.268; DhA iii.315; often in sense of something useless, or a trifle (combd with kaṭṭha q. v.) Dh 41; DhA i.321 (=kaṭṭhakhaṇḍa, a chip) Th 2, 468 (id.) as kaṭṭhakalingarāni DhA ii.142. -- 2. a plank, viz. a step in a staircase, in sopāna˚ Vin ii.128, cp. sopāna -- kaḷevara.
-- ûpadhāna a wooden block used for putting one's head on when sleeping S ii.267; Miln 366; -- kaṇḍa a wooden arrow J iii.273 (acittaŋ k˚: without feeling)
Kalingu (m. nt.) [cp. Sk. kalinga & kalingaka] the Laurus camphora, the Indian laurel J vi.537.
Kalita [pp. of kalati] sounding indistinctly Th 1, 22.
Kalusa [cp. Sk. kaluṣa] muddy, dirty, impure; in ˚bhāva the state of being turbid, impure, obscured (of the mind) DA i.275.
Kalevara see kaḷebara.
Kalya see kalla; -- rūpa pleased, glad Sn 680, 683; a˚ not pleased Sn 691.
Kalyatā (f.) 1. the state of being sound, able, pliant J ii.12. -- 2. pleasantness, agreeableness, readiness, in a˚ opp. (appld to citta) Dhs 1156; DhsA 377 (=gilānabhāva).
Kalyāṇa (& kallāṇa) [Vedic kalyāṇa] 1. (adj.) beautiful, charming; auspicious, helpful, morally good. Syn. bhaddaka PvA 9, 116) and kusala (S ii.118; PvA 9, 122); opp. pāpa (S i.83; M i.43; PvA 101, 116 and under ˚mitta). kata˚= katûpakāra PvA 116 Appld to dhamma in phrase ādi˚ majjhe˚ pariyosāne˚ D i.62 and ≈; S v.152; Sn p. 103; VvA 87; Vism 213 sq. (in var. applications); etc. -- As m. one who observes the sīlapadaŋ (opp. pāpa, who violates it) A ii.222, cp. k˚ -- mittā=sīlâdīhi adhikā SnA 341. -- S iv.303; v.2, 29, 78; A iii.77; iv.361; Vin ii.8, 95; J i.4; Miln 297; -- kata˚ (opp. kata -- pāpa) of good, virtuous character, in phrase k˚ katakusala, etc. It 25, etc. (see kata ii.1 a). k˚ of kitti ( -- sadda) D i.49 (=DA i.146 seṭṭha); S iv.374; v.352; of jhāna (tividha˚) Bdhd 96, 98, 99; of mittā, friends in general (see also cpd.) Dh 78 (na bhaje pāpake mitte . . . bhajetha m˚ kalyāṇe), 116, 375 (= suddhâjīvin); Sn 338. -- 2. (nt.) (a) a good or useful thing, good things Vin i.117; A iii.109; cp. bhadraŋ. <-> (b) goodness, virtue, merit, meritorious action J v.49 (kalyāṇā here nt. nom. in sense of pl.; cp. Vedic nt.), 492; -- ˚ŋ karoti to perform good deeds S i.72; A i.138 sq.; Vin i.73; PvA 122. -- (c) kindness, good service J i.378; iii.12 (=upakāra), 68 (˚ŋ karoti). <-> (d) beauty, attraction, perfection; enumd as 5 kalyāṇāni, viz. kesa˚, maŋsa˚, aṭṭhi˚, chavi˚, vaya˚ i. e. beauty of hair, flesh, teeth, skin, youth J i.394; DhA i.387.
-- ajjhāsaya the wish or intention to do good DhA i.9; -- -- âdhimuttika disposed towards virtue, bent on goodness S ii.154, 158; It 70, 78; Vbh 341; -- kāma desiring what is good A iii.109; -- kārin (a) doing good, virtuous (opp. pāpa˚) S i.227, cp. J ii.202=iii.158; DhsA 390; (m.) who has rendered a service J vi.182; -- carita walking in goodness, practising virtue Vbh 341; -- jātika one whose nature is pleasantness, agreeable J iii.82; -- dassana looking nice, lovely, handsome Sn 551=Th 1, 821 (+kañcanasannibhattaca); -- dhamma (1) of virtuous character, of good conduct, virtuous Vin i.73; iii.133; S v.352; Pug 26; It 96; Pv iv.135; Miln 129; DhA i.380; J ii.65 (=sundara˚), PvA 230 (= sundara -- sīla); sīlavā+k˚ (of bhikkhu, etc.) M i.334; S iv.303; PvA 13. -- k˚ena k˚atara perfectly good or virtuous A ii.224. -- (2) the Good Doctrine DhA i.7. -- ˚tā the state of having a virtuous character A ii.36; -- pañña "wise in goodness" possessed of true wisdom Th 1, 506; It 97; -- paṭipadā the path of goodness or virtue, consisting of dāna, uposathakamma & dasakusalakammapathā J iii.342; -- paṭibhāṇa of happy retort, of good reply A iii.58, cp. Miln 3; -- pāpaka good and bad J v.238; vi.225; Kvu 45; (nt.) goodness and evil J v.493; -- pīti one who delights in what is good Sn 969; -- bhattika having good, nice food Vin ii.77; iii.160 (of a householder); -- mitta 1. a good companion, a virtuous friend, an honest, pure friend; at Pug 24 he is said to "have faith, be virtuous, learned, liberal and wise"; M i.43 (opp. pāpa˚); S i.83, 87 (do.); A iv.30, 357; Pug 37, 41; J iii.197; Bdhd 90; a˚ not a virtuous friend DhsA 247. -- 2. as t.t. a spiritual guide, spiritual adviser. The Buddha is the spiritual friend par excellence, but any other Arahant can act as such S v.3; Vism 89, 98, 121; cp. kammaṭṭhāna -- dāyaka. -- mittatā friendship with the good and virtuous, association with the virtuous S i.87; such friendship is of immense help for the attainment of the Path and Perfection S v.3, 32; it is the sign that the bhikkhu will realize the 7 bojjhangas S v.78=101; A i.16, 83, it is one of the 7 things conducive to the welfare of a bhikkhu D iii.212; A iv.29, 282; Th 2, 213; It 10; Dhs 1328=Pug 24; Vism 107. -- a˚ not having a virtuous friend and good adviser DhsA 247. -- rūpa beautiful, handsome J iii.82; v.204; -- vākkaraṇa, usually comb. with ˚vāca, of pleasant conversation, of good address or enunciation, reciting clearly D i.93, 115; A ii.97; iii.114, 263; iv.279; Vin ii.139; Miln 21; DA i.263 (=madhura -- vacana); a˚ not pronouncing or reciting clearly D i.94. 122; -- ˚tā the fact of being of good and pleasing address A i.38; -- vāca, usually in form. k˚ k˚ -- vākkaraṇo poriyā vācāya samannāgato D i.114; A ii.97; iii.114, 195, 263; iv.279; Vin ii.139; DA i.282; -- sadda a lucky word or speech J ii.64; -- sampavanka a good companion A iv.357 (in phrase k˚ -- mitta k˚ -- sahāya k˚ -- s˚); Pug 37; -- ˚tā companionship with a virtuous friend S i.87. -- sahāya a good, virtuous companion A iv.284; 357; Pug 37; cp. prec., -- ˚tā=prec. S i.87; -- sīla practising virtue, of good conduct, virtuous Th 1, 1008; It 96.
Kalyāṇaka (adj.) [fr. last] good, virtuous DA i.226; DhsA 32.
Kalyāṇatā (f.) [abstr. fr. kalyāṇa] beauty, goodness, virtuousness Vism 4 (ādi); k˚ -- kusala clever, experienced in what is good Nett 20.
Kalyāṇin (adj.) [fr. kalyāṇa] (a) beautiful, handsome Vv iv.5; -- (b) auspicious, lucky, good, proper J v.124; Ud 59; -- (c) f. [cp. -- ī Vedic kalyāṇī] a beautiful woman, a belle, usually in janapada˚ D i.193=M ii.40; S ii.234; J i.394; v.154.
Kalla1 & Kalya (adj.) [cp. Sk. kalya] 1. well, healthy, sound Vin i.291. -- 2. clever, able, dexterous Miln 48, 87. -- 3. ready, prepared J ii.12, cp. -- citta. -- 4. fit, proper, right S ii.13 (pañha). -- nt. kallaŋ it is proper, befitting (with inf. or inf. -- substitute): vacanāya proper to say D i.168, 169; A i.144; abhinandituŋ D ii.69; -- kallaŋ nu [kho] is it proper? M iii.19; S iv.346; Miln 25. -- a˚ 1. not well, unfit Th 2, 439, cp. ThA 270. <-> 2. unbecoming, unbefitting D ii.68; J v.394.
-- kāya sound (in body), refreshed Vin i.291; -- kusala of sound skill (cp. kallita) S iii.265; -- citta of ready, amenable mind, in form. k˚, mudu -- citta, vinīvaraṇa˚, udagga˚, etc. D i.110=148=ii.41=A iv.209=Vin i.16=ii.156; VvA 53, 286; Vv 5019 (=kammaniya -- citta "her mind was prepared for, responsive to the teaching of the dhamma"); PvA 38. -- cittatā the preparedness of the mind (to receive the truth) J ii.12 (cp citta -- kalyatā); -- rūpa 1. of beautiful appearance Th 1, 212, -- 2. pleased, joyful (kalya˚) Sn 680, 683, 691; -- sarīra having a sound body, healthy J ii.51; a˚ -- tā not being sound in body, ill -- health VvA 243.
Kalla2 (m. nt.) ashes J iii.94 (for kalala), also in ˚ -- vassa a shower of ashes J iv.389.
Kallaka (adj.) [fr. last] in a˚ unwell, indisposed Vin iii.62; J iii.464; DhsA 377.
Kallatā (f.) see kalyatā; -- a˚ unreadiness, unpreparedness, indisposition (of citta), in expln of thīna Nd2 290= Dhs 1156=1236=Nett 86; DhsA 378; Nett 26. The reading in Nd2 is akalyāṇatā, in Dhs akalyatā; follows akammaññatā.
Kallahāra [cp. Sk. kahlāra, the P. form to be expld as a diaeretic inversion kalhāra > kallahāra] the white esculent water lily J v.37; Dpvs xvi.19.
Kallita (nt.) [fr. kalla] pleasantness, agreeableness S iii.270, 273 (samādhismiŋ -- ˚kusala); A iii.311; iv.34 (id.).
Kallola [cp. Sk. kallola] a billow, in -- ˚mālā a series of billows Dāvs iv.44.
Kaḷāya=kalāya.
Kaḷāra (adj.) [cp. Sk. karāla projecting (of teeth), whereas kaḍāra means tawny] always referring to teeth: with long, protruding teeth, of Petas (cp. attr. of the dog of the "Underworld" PvA 152: tikhiṇâyatakaṭhina -- dāṭho and the figure of the witch in fairy -- tales) J v.91 (=nikkhantadanto); vi.548 (= sūkara -- dāṭhehi samannāgato p. 549); Pv ii.41 (=k˚ -- danto PvA 90).
Kaḷārikā (f.) [fr. last, lit. with protruding teeth] a kind of large (female) elephant M 1. 178 (so read with v. l. for kāḷ˚). Cp. kalāra.
Kaḷingara=kalingara.
Kaḷimb(h)aka (cp. kaḍamba, kalamba) a mark used to keep the interstices between the threads of the kaṭhina even, when being woven Vin ii.116, 317 (v. l. kaḷimpaka).
Kaḷīra the top sprout of a plant or tree, esp. of the bamboo and cert. palm trees (e. g. coco -- nut tree) which is edible Sn 38 (vaŋsa˚=veḷugumba Nd2 556 and p. 58); Th 1, 72; J i.74, cp. iii.179; vi.26; Miln 201 (vaŋsa˚); Vism 255 (vaŋsa˚ -- cakkalaka, so read for kalira˚; KhA 50 at id. passage reads kaḷīra -- daṇḍa).
-- (c)chejja (nt.) "the cutting off of the sprout," a kind of torture Miln 193, cp. Miln. trsl. i.270 and kadalīccheda.
Kaḷebara (: kale˚ and kalevara) (m. & nt.) [cp. BSk. kaḍe- bara Av. Ś. ii.26] 1. the body S i.62=A ii.48;=iv.429 =M i.82; J ii.437, iii.96, 244; Vism 49, 230. -- 2. a dead body, corpse, carcass; often in description of death: khandhānaŋ bhedo k˚assa nikkhepo, D ii.355= M. i.49=Vbh 137; Th 2, 467; J iii.180, 511; v.459; Mhvs 2010; 3781; PvA 80. Cp. kuṇapa. -- 3. the step in a flight of stairs M ii.92, cp. kalingara.
Kaḷopī (=khaḷopi) f. 1. a vessel, basin, pot: see cpds. - 2. a basket, crate (= pacchi ThA 219; J v.252) M i.77, 342; S i.236=Th 2, 283 (where osenti is to be corr. to openti); J v.252. -- On the form of the word (=karoṭi?) see Trenckner J.P.T.S. 1908, 109 and Davids, Dial. i.227. kaḷopī (as khaḷopī) is expld at Pug A p. 231 as "ukkhalī, pacchi vā."
-- mukha the brim of a pan or cooking vessel D i.166 =M i.77=342=A i.295= ii.206 (kumbhi -- m˚+kaḷopim˚); -- hattha with a vessel or basket in his hand A iv.376.
Kavaca (nt.) [cp. Sk. kavaca] a mail, a coat of mail, armour D ii.107=Ud 64 (appld to existence); Th 1, 614 (of sīla); J iv.92, 296; Miln 199, 257; Vism 73.
-- jālikā a mail -- coat Miln 199.
Kavandha (m. nt.) [cp. Sk. kavandha & kabandha] 1. the (headless) trunk of the body, endowed with the power of motion Vin iii.107; cp. S ii.260 (asīsaka˚); Miln 292; DhA i.314. -- 2. a headless dwarf, whose head has been crushed down into his body J v.424, 427 (cp. the story of Dhanu, the Rākṣasa who was punished by having his head and thighs forced into his body, Raghuvaŋsa xii.57).
Kavāṭa (m. nt.) 1. the panels of the door, the door proper, not the aperture Vin ii.114, 120, 207, 208 (see Vin ii.148 for the description of a door) iv.269, 304 (˚baddha =āvasatha); J i.19; Nd2 2351d; Vism 28 (˚koṇa doorcorner). -- 2. dvāra˚ a door -- post J i.63; ii.334; PvA 280. -- 3. a window Mhvs ix.17; -- ˚ŋ paṇāmeti to open the door Vin ii.114, 120, 207; ˚ŋ ākoṭeti to knock at the door D i.88 (=DA i.252); Vin ii.208. -- akavāṭaka (adj.) having no doors, doorless Vin ii.148, 154 (v. l. for akkavāta Text).
-- piṭṭha the panels and posts of a door; the door and the door -- posts Vin i.47, 48=ii.208, 218; -- baddha "door -- bound," closed, secure Vin iv.292 (see also above).
Kavāṭaka=kavāṭa Vin ii.148; DA i.62 (nīvaraṇa˚).
Kavi [Vedic kavi] a poet S i.38; ii.267; Dāvs i.10; four classes enumd at A ii.230 & DA i.95, viz. 1. cintā˚ an original p. 2. suta˚ one who puts into verse what he Las heard. 3. attha˚ a didactic p. 4. paṭibhāṇa˚ an improvisor.
-- kata composed by poets S ii.267; A i.72.
Kavya [cp. Vedic kavya wise; sacrificer] poetry; ballad, ode (cp. kabba) J vi.213, 216.
-- kāra a poet J vi.216.
Kaviṭṭha [cp. kapittha] the elephant -- apple tree, Feronia elephantum J v.38 (˚vana).
Kasaka see kassaka.
Kasaṭa (metathesis of sakaṭa, cp. Trenckner, Miln p. 423) 1. (adj.) bad, nasty; bitter, acrid; insipid, disgusting A i.72; J ii.96; 159. -- 2. (m.) (a) fault, vice, defect M i.281; Ps ii.87. -- (b) leavings, dregs VvA 288 (v. l. sakaṭa). -- (c) something bitter or nasty J ii.96; v.18. -- (d) bitter juice J ii.105 (nimba˚). -- sa˚ faulty, wrong, bitter to eat, unpalatable Miln 119.
-- ôdaka insipid, tasteless water J ii.97.
Kasati [kṛṣ or karṣ] to till, to plough S i.172, 173=Sn 80; Th i.531; J i.57; ii.165; vi.365. -- kassate (3rd sing. med.) Th 1, 530. -- pp. kattha (q. v.) Caus. II. kasāpeti Miln 66, 82; DhA i.224.
Kasana (nt.) ploughing, tilling J iv.167; vi.328, 364; Vism 384 (+vapana sowing).
Kasambu [Derivation uncertain] anything worthless, rubbish, filth, impurity; fig. low passions S i.166; Sn 281=Miln 414=A iv.172; Vism 258 (maŋsa˚), 259 (parama˚).
-- jāta one whose nature is impurity, in comb. brahmacāripaṭiñño antopūti avassuto k˚ S iv.181; A ii.240; iv.128, 201; Vin ii.236; Pug 27, 34, 36; Vism 57 (+avassuta pāpa). ˚ka -- jāta ibid. in vv. ll.
Kasā (f.) [Vedic kaśā] a whip Vin i.99 (in Uddāna); M i.87, etc.; Dh 143; Miln 197. -- -- kasāhi tāḷeti to whip, lash, flog as punishment for malefactors here, as well as in Niraya (see kamma -- karaṇā) M i.87=A i.47= ii.122, etc.; PvA 4 (of a thief scourged on his way to the place of execution); DhA ii.39 (id.).
-- niviṭṭha touched by the whip, whipped Dh 144 (=DhA iii.86); -- pahāra a stroke with the whip, a lash J iii.178; -- hata struck with the whip, scourged Vin i.75; 91=322; Sdhp 147.
Kasāya and Kasāva [Derivation uncertain. The word first appears in the late Vedic form kaṣāya, a decoction, distillation, essence; used figy of evil. The old Pali form is kasāva] 1. a kind of paste or gum used in colouring walls Vin ii.151. -- 2. an astringent decoction extracted from plants Vin i.201, 277; J v.198. -- 3. (of taste), astringent DhS 629; Miln 65; DhA ii.31. <-> 4. (of colour) reddish -- yellow, orange coloured Vin i.277. -- 5. (ethical) the fundamental faults (rāga, dosa, moha) A i.112; Dh 10; Vbh 368. -- a˚ faultless, flawless, in akasāvattaŋ being without defect A i.112 (of a wheel, with -- sa˚ ibid.); -- sa˚ faulty DhA i.82; -- mahā˚ wicked J iv.387. In cpds. both forms, viz. (kasāya) -- yoga an astringent remedy J v.198 (kasāva˚ ibid.); -- rasa reddishyellow dye J ii.198; (kasāva) -- ôdaka an astringent decoction Vin i.205; -- gandha having a pungent smell Vin i.277; -- rasa having an astringent taste ibid.; -- vaṇṇa of reddish -- yellow colour ibid.
Kasāyatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. kasāya] astringency Miln 56.
Kasi and Kasī (f.) [fr. kasāti] tilling, ploughing; agricul- ture, cultivation M ii.198; S i.172, 173=Sn 76 sq.; Vin iv.6; Pv i.56 (k˚, gorakkha, vaṇijjā); PvA 7; Sdhp 390 (k˚, vaṇijjā); VvA 63. -- ˚ŋ kasati to plough, to till the land J i.277; Vism 284.
-- kamma the act or occupation of ploughing, agriculture J ii.165, 300; iii.270. -- karaṇa ploughing, tilling of the field PvA 66; -- khetta a place for cultivation, a field PvA 8 (kasī˚); -- gorakkha agriculture and cattle breeding D i.135; -- bhaṇḍa ploughing implements DhA i.307.
Kasiṇa1 [Vedic kṛtsna] (adj.) entire, whole J iv.111, 112.
Kasiṇa2 [Deriv. uncertain] (nt.) one of the aids to kam- maṭṭhāna the practice by means of which mystic meditation (bhāvanā, jhāna) may be attained. They are fully described at A v.46 sq., 60; usually enumerated as ten [sāvakā dasa k˚ -- āyatanāni bhāventi]; paṭhavī˚, āpo˚, tejo˚, vāyo˚, nīla˚, pīta˚, lohita˚, odāta˚, ākāsa˚, viññāṇa˚ -- that is, earth, water, fire, air; blue, yellow, red, white; space, intellection (or perhaps consciousness) M ii.14; D iii.268, 290; Nett 89, 112; Dhs 202; Ps i.6, 95; cp. Manual 49 -- 52; Bdhd 4, 90 sq., 95 sq. -- For the last two (ākāsa˚ and viññāṇa˚) we find in later sources āloka˚ and (paricchinn') ākāsa˚ Vism 110; cp. Dhs trsl. 43 n. 4, 57 n. 2; Cpd. 54, 202. -- Eight (the above omitting the last two) are given at Ps i.49, 143, 149. -- See further J i.313; iii.519; DhsA 186 sq. There are 14 manners of practising the kasiṇas (of which the first nine are: k˚ -- ânulomaŋ k˚ -- paṭilomaŋ k˚ -- ânupaṭilomaŋ jhānânulomaŋ jh˚paṭi˚; jh˚ -- ânupaṭi˚; jh˚ -- ukkantikaŋ k˚ ukk˚; jh˚k˚ -- ukk˚) Vism 374; cp. Bdhd 5, 101 sq., 104, 152. <-> Nine qualities or properties of (paṭhavi -- ) kasiṇa are enumd at Vism 117. -- Each k. is fivefold, according to uddhaŋ, adho, tiriyaŋ, advayaŋ, appamāṇaŋ M ii.15, etc. -- kasiṇaŋ oloketi to fix one's gaze on the particular kasiṇa chosen J v.314; ˚ŋ samannāharati to concentrate one's mind on the k. J iii.519.
-- āyatana the base or object of a kasiṇa exercise (see above as 10 such objects) D iii.268; M ii.14; Ps i.28, etc.; -- ārammaṇa=˚āyatana Vism 427 (three, viz. tejo˚, odāta˚, āloka˚). -- kamma the k. practice J i.141; iv.306; v.162, 193. -- jhāna the k. meditation DhsA 413. -- dosa fault of the k. object Vism 117, 123 (the 4 faults of paṭhavī -- kasiṇa being confusion of the 4 colours). -- parikamma the preliminary, preparatory rites to the exercise of a kasiṇa meditation, such as preparing the frame, repeating the necessary formulas, etc. J i.8, 245; iii.13, 526; DhsA 187; -- ˚ŋ katheti to give instructions in these preparations J iii.369; ˚ŋ karoti to perform the k -- preparations J iv.117; v.132, 427; vi.68; -- maṇḍala a board or stone or piece of ground divided by depressions to be used as a mechanical aid to jhāna exercise. In each division of the maṇḍala a sample of a kasiṇa was put. Several of these stone maṇḍalas have been found in the ruins at Anurādhapura. Cp. Cpd. 54 f. 202 f. J iii.501; DhA iv.208. -- samāpatti attainment in respect of the k. exercise Nd2 4668 (ten such).
Kasita (pp. of kasati) ploughed, tilled Anvs 44; -- a˚ un- tilled ibid. 27, 44. -- Cp. vi˚.
Kasira (adj.) [Probably fr. Vedic kṛcchra, the deriv. of which is uncertain] miserable, painful, troubled, wretched A iv.283; Sn 574; J ii.136; iv.113= vi.17; Pv iv.121 (=PvA 229 dukkha). -- adv. kasirā (abl.) with difficulty J v.435; -- kasirena (instr.) D i.251; M i.104; S i.94; Vin i.195; J i.338; iii.513. a˚ without pain, easy, comfortable J vi.224 (=niddukkha); -- lābhin obtaining without difficulty (f˚ inī A iv.342) in formula akicchalābhī akasiralābhī etc. M i.33; S ii.278; A i.184; ii.23, 36; iv.106; Ud 36; Pug 11, 12.
-- ābhata amassed with toil and difficulty (of wealth) J v.435; -- vuttika finding it hard to get a livelihood A i.107=Pug 51.
Kaseruka [etym. connected with Sk. kaseru backbone?] a plant, shrub SnA 284 (v. l. kaŋsīruka for kiŋsuka?). See also kaṭeruha.
Kassaka [fr. kasati] a husbandman, cultivator, peasant, farmer, ploughman D i.61 (k˚ gahapatiko kārakārako rāsi -- vaḍḍhako); A i.241; A. i.229, 239 (the three duties of a farmer); S i.172=Sn 76; iii.155 (v. l. for T. kasaka); iv. 314; Vin iv.108; Bdhd 96; DA i.170; often in similes, e. g. Pv i.11; ii.968 (likeness to the doer of good works); Vism 152, 284, 320. -- vaṇṇa (under) the disguise of a peasant S i.115 (of Māra).
Kassati [kṛṣ] see ava˚, anu˚ (aor. anvakāsi), pari˚; other- wise kasati; cp. also kissati.
Kassāma fut. of karoti.
Kahaŋ [cp. Vedic kuha; for a: u cp. kad˚.] interr. adv. where? whither? Vin i.217; D i.151; Sn p. 106; J ii.7; iii.76; v.440. -- k -- nu kho where then? D i.92; ii.143, 263.
Kahāpaṇa [doubtful as regards etym.; the (later) Sk. kārṣāpaṇa looks like an adaptation of a dial. form] 1. A square copper coin M ii.163; A i.250; v.83 sq.; Vin ii.294; iii. 238; DhsA 280 (at this passage included under rajataŋ, silver, together with loha -- māsaka, dārumāsaka and jatu -- māsaka); S i.82; A i.250; Vin ii.294; iv.249; J i.478, 483; ii.388; Mhvs 3014. The extant specimens in our museums weigh about 5/6 of a penny, and the purchasing power of a k. in our earliest records seems to have been about a florin. -- Frequent numbers as denoting a gift, a remuneration or alms, are 100,000 (J ii.96); 18 koṭis (J i.92); 1,000 (J ii.277, 431; v.128, 217; PvA 153, 161); 700 (J iii.343); 100 (DhA iii.239); 80 (PvA 102); 10 or 20 (DhA iv.226); 8 (which is considered, socially, almost the lowest sum J iv.138; i.483). A nominal fine of 1 k. (=a farthing) Miln 193. -- ekaŋ k˚ pi not a single farthing J i.2; similarly eka -- kahāpaṇen' eva Vism 312. -- Various qualities of a kahāpaṇa are referred to by Bdhgh in similes at Vism 437 and 515. Black kahāpaṇas are mentioned at DhA iii.254. -- See Rh. Davids, Ancient Measures of Ceylon; Buddh. India, pp. 100 -- 102, fig. 24; Miln trsl. i.239.
-- gabbha a closet for storing money, a safe DhA iv.104; -- vassa a shower of money Dh 186 (=DhA iii.240).
Kahāpaṇaka (nt.) N. of a torture which consisted in cutting off small pieces of flesh, the size of a kahāpaṇa, all over the body, with sharp razors M i.87=A i.47, ii.122; cp. Miln 97, 290, 358.
Kā (indecl.) interj. imitating the crow's cry: kā kā J iv.72.
Kā˚ in composition, is assimilated (and contracted) form of kad˚ as kāpuppha, kāpurisa.
Kāka [onomat., cp. Sk. kāka; for other onomat. relatives see note on gala] the crow; freq. in similes: S i.124= Sn 448; J i.164. Its thievish ways are described at DhA iii.352; said to have ten bad qualities A v.149; J i.342; iii.126; kākā vā kulalā vā Vin iv.40. -- As bird (of the dead) frequenting places of interment and cremation, often with other carcass -- eating animals (sigāla, gijjha) Sn 201; PvA 198 (=dhanka); cp. kākoḷa. -- In cpds. often used derisively. -- f. kākī J ii.39, 150; iii.431.
-- āmasaka "touching as much as a crow," attr. of a person not enjoying his meals DhA iv.16; DhsA 404; -- uṭṭepaka a crow -- scarer, a boy under fifteen, employed as such in the monastery grounds Vin i.79 cp. 371. -- opamā the simile of the crow DhA ii.75. -- orava "crow -- cawing," appld to angry and confused words Vin i.239, cp. iv.82; -- ôlūka crows and owls J ii.351; DhA i.50; Mhbv 15; -- guyha (tall) enough to hide a crow (of young corn, yava) J ii.174; cp. J. trsl. ii.122; -- nīḷa a crow's nest J ii.365; -- paññā "crow -- wisdom," i. e. foolishness which leads to ruin through greed J v.255, 258; cp. vi.358; -- paṭṭanaka a deserted village, inhabited only by crows J vi. 456; -- pāda crow's foot or footmark Vism 179 (as pattern); -- peyya "(so full) that a crow can easily drink of it," full to the brim, overflowing, of a pond: samatittika k˚ "with even banks and drinkable for crows" (i. e. with the water on a level with the land) D i.244; S ii.134 (do.); D ii.89; M i.435; A iii.27; J ii.174; Ud 90; cp. note to J. trsl. ii.122; PvA 202. See also peyya. -- bhatta "a crow's meal," i. e. remnants left from a meal thrown out for the crows J ii.149; -- vaṇṇa "crow -- coloured" N. of a king Mhvs 2211; -- vassa the cry of a crow Vin ii.17; -- sīsa the head of a crow J ii.351; as adj.: having a crow's head, appld to a fabulous flying horse D ii.174; cp. J ii.129; -- sūra a "crow -- hero," appl. to a shameless, unconscientious fellow Dh 244; DhA iii.352; -- ssaraka (having a voice) sounding like a crow Vin i.115.
Kākacchati [derived by Fausböll fr. kās, to cough; by Trenckner fr. krath; by Childers & E. Müller fr. kath; should it not rather be a den. fr. kakaca a saw?] to snore Vin iv.355; A iii.299; J i.61, 160 (=ghurughurûpassāsa; cp. DA i.42 ghurû -- ghurûpassāsī); i.318; vi.57; Miln 85; Vism 311.
Kākaṇa (nt.) [kā (for kad˚) + kaṇa=less than a particle] a coin of very small value Sdhp 514.
Kākaṇikā (f.)=prec. J i.120, 419; vi.346; DA i.212; DhA i.391; VvA 77=DhA iii.108. From the latter passages its monetary value in the opinion of the Commentator may be guessed at as being 1/8 of a kahāpaṇa; it occurs here in a descending line where each succeeding coin marks half the value of the preceding one, viz., kahāpaṇa, aḍḍha, pāda, māsaka, kākaṇikā, upon which follows mudhā "for nothing."
-- agghanaka "not even a farthing's worth," worth next to nothing J vi.346.
Kākola and Kākoḷa [Onomat. The Lit. Sk. has the same form] a raven, esp. in his quality as bird of prey, feeding on carrion (cp. kāka) J iii.246 (=vanakāka); v.268, 270 (gijjha k˚ ā ca ayomukhā . . . khādanti naraŋ kibbisakārinaŋ); vi.566.
-- gaṇā (pl.) flocks of ravens Sn 675; VV5215 (=VvA 227).
Kāca1 [Der. unknown. The word first occurs in the Śat Br. & may well be non -- Aryan] a glass -- like substance made of siliceous clay; crystal Vin i.190; ii.112 (cp. Divy 503, kācamaṇi rock -- crystal). -- a˚ not of glass or quartz, i. e. pure, clear, flawless, appl. to precious stones D ii.244=J ii.418 (= akakkasa) Sn 476. In the same sense also MVastu i.164.
-- ambha (nt.) red crystal J vi.268 (=rattamaṇi); -- maya made of crystal, crystalline Vin i.190; ii.112.
Kāca2 [cp. Sk. kāca & kāja] a pingo, a yoke, a carrying- pole, usually made of bamboo, at both ends of which baskets are hung (double pingo). Besides this there is a single pingo (ekato -- kājo) with only one basket and "middle" p. (antarā˚) with two bearers and the basket suspended in the middle Vin ii.137; J i.154; v.13, 293, 295 sq., 320, 345; PvA 168.
-- daṇḍaka the pole of a pingo DA i.41.
Kācanā (f.) [fr. kāca2] balancing like carrying on a kāca, fig. deliberation, pondering Vbh 352=Vism 27.
Kācin (adj.) [fr. kāca1], only neg. a˚ free from quartz, free from grit, flawless Vv 601 (=niddosa VvA 253).
Kāja=kāca2, i. e. carrying -- pole M iii.148; J i.9; iii.325; v.200; Dpvs xii.3; Mhvs 5, 24; DhA iv.232.
-- koṭi the end of a carrying -- pole J i.9; v.200. -- hāraka a pingo -- bearer DhA iv.128.
Kāṭa -- koṭacikā [kāṭa + koṭacikā] a low term of abuse, "pudendum virile & muliebre" Vin iv.7 (buddhagh iv.354: kātan ti purisa -- nimittaŋ); cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 89.
Kāṇa (adj.) [cp. Sk. kāṇa] blind, usually of one eye, occa- sionally of both (see PugA 227) S i.94; Vin ii.90= A i.107=ii.85=Pug 51 (in expln of tamaparāyaṇa purisa); Th 2, 438; J i.222 (one -- eyed); vi.74 (of both eyes); DhA iii.71.
-- kaccha Np. Sdhp 44; -- kacchapa "the blind turtle" in the well -- known parable of a man's chances of human rebirth after a state of punishment Th 2, 500 (=ThA 290); Miln 204; DhsA 60; cp. M iii.169=S v.455.
Kātabba (adj. -- n.) (grd. of karoti) that which ought to, can or must be done (see karoti) J i.264, etc. Also as kattabba PvA 30.
Kātuŋ and Kātu˚ (in compn with kāma) inf. of karoti.
-- kāma desirous of doing or making, etc. Mhvs 3734 (a˚). PvA 115; -- kāmatā the desire to do, etc. J iv.253; v.364. See also kattu˚ in same combns.
Kātuye is Vedic inf. of karoti Th 2, 418 (in ThA 268 taken as kātuŋ ayye!).
Kādamba [cp. Sk. kādamba] a kind of goose with grey wings J v.420; VvA 163.
Kādambaka made of Kadamba wood; also ˚ya for ˚ka; both at J v.320.
Kānana (nt.) [cp. Sk. kānana] a glade in the forest, a grove, wood Sn 1134 (= Nd2 s. v. vanasaṇḍa); Th 2, 254 (=ThA 210 upavana); J vi.557; Sdhp 574.
Kānāmā f. of konāma of what name? what is her (or your) name? Vin ii.272, 273; J vi.338.
Kāpilanī patron. f. of Kapila; the lady of the Kapila clan Th 2, 65.
Kāpilavatthava (adj.) of or from Kapilavatthu, belonging to K. D ii.165, 256; S iv.182.
Kāpurisa [kad + purisa] a low, vile, contemptible man, a wretch Vin ii.188; D iii.279; S i.91, 154; ii.241; v.204; Th 1, 124, 495; J ii.42; vi.437; Pv ii.930 (PvA 125=lāmaka˚); sometimes denoting one who has not entered the Path A iii.24; Th 2, 189.
Kāpotaka (adj.) [fr. kapota] pigeon -- coloured, grey, of a dull white, said of the bones of a skeleton D i.55; Dh 149 (=DhA iii.112).
Kāpotikā (f.) [of doubtful origin, fr. kapota, but probably popular etym., one may compare Sk. kāpiśāyana, a sort of spirituous liquor Halāyudha 2, 175, which expresses a diff. notion, i. e. fr. kapi] a kind of intoxicating drink, of a reddish colour (like pigeons' fect) Vin iv.109, cp. J i.360 (surā).
Kāma (m. nt.) [Dhtp (603) & Dhtm (843) paraphrase by "icchāyaŋ," cp. Vedic kāma, kam=Idg. *qā] to desire, cp. Lat. carus, Goth. hōrs, E whore. -- 1. Objective: pleasantness, pleasure -- giving, an object of sensual enjoyment; -- 2. subjective: (a) enjoyment, pleasure on occasion of sense, (b) sense -- desire. Buddhist commentators express 1 and 2 by kāmiyatī ti kāmo, and kametī ti kāmo Cpd. 81, n. 2. Kāma as sense -- desire and enjoyment plus objects of the same is a collective name for all but the very higher or refined conditions of life. The kāma -- bhava or -- loka (worlds of sensedesire) includes 4 of the 5 modes (gati's) of existence and part of the fifth or deva -- loka. See Bhava. The term is not found analyzed till the later books of the Canon are consulted, thus, Nd1 1 distinguishes (1) vatthukāmā: desires relating to a base, i. e. physical organ or external object, and (2) kilesakāmā: desire considered subjectively. So also Nd2 202, quoted DhA ii.162; iii.240; and very often as ubho kāmā. A more logical definition is given by Dhammapāla on Vv 11 (VvA 11). He classifies as follows: 1. manāpiyā rūpādi -- visayā. -- 2. chandarāga. -- 3. sabbasmiŋ lobha. -- 4. gāmadhamma. -- 5. hitacchanda. -- 6. serībhāva, i. e. k. concerned with (1) pleasant objects, (2) impulsive desire, (3) greed for anything, (4) sexual lust, (5) effort to do good, (6) self -- determination.
In all enumerations of obstacles to perfection, or of general divisions and definitions of mental conditions, kāma occupies the leading position. It is the first of the five obstacles (nīvaraṇāni), the three esanās (longings), the four upādānas (attachments), the four oghas (floods of worldly turbulence), the four āsavas (intoxicants of mind), the three taṇhās, the four yogas; and k. stands first on the list of the six factors of existence: kāmā, vedanā, saññā, āsavā, kamma, dukkha, which are discussed at A iii.410 sq. as regards their origin, difference, consequences, destruction and remedy. <-> Kāma is most frequently connected with rāga (passion), with chanda (impulse) and gedha (greed), all expressing the active, clinging, and impulsive character of desire. <-> The foll. is the list of synonyms given at various places for kāma -- cchanda: (1) chanda, impulse; (2) rāga, excitement; (3) nandī, enjoyment; (4) taṇhā, thirst; (5) sineha, love; (6) pipāsā, thirst; (7) pariḷāha, consuming passion; (8) gedha, greed; (9) mucchā, swoon, or confused state of mind; (10) ajjhosāna, hanging on, or attachment Nd1. At Nd2 200; Dhs 1097 (omitting No. 8), cp. DhsA 370; similarly at Vism 569 (omitting Nos. 6 and 8), cp. Dhs 1214; Vbh 375. This set of 10 characteristics is followed by kām -- ogha, kāma -- yoga, kām -- upādāna at Nd2 200, cp. Vism 141 (kām -- ogha, ˚āsava, ˚upādāna). Similarly at D iii.238: kāme avigata -- rāga, ˚chanda, ˚pema, ˚pipāsa, ˚pariḷāha, ˚taṇha. See also kāma -- chanda below under cpds. In connection with synonyms it may be noticed that most of the verbs used in a kāma -- context are verbs the primary meaning of which is "adhering to" or "grasping," hence, attachment; viz. esanā (iṣ to Lat ira), upādāna (upa + ā + dā taking up), taṇhā (tṛṣ, Lat. torreo= thirst) pipāsā (the wish to drink), sineha (snih, Lat. nix=melting), etc. -- On the other hand, the reaction of the passions on the subject is expressed by khajjati "to be eaten up" pariḍayhati "to be burnt," etc. The foll. passage also illustrates the various synonymic expressions: kāme paribhuñjati, kāmamajjhe vasati, kāma -- pariḷāhena pariḍayhati, kāmavitakkehi khajjati, kāma -- pariyesanāyā ussukko, A i.68; cp. M i.463; iii.129. Under this aspect kāma is essentially an evil, but to the popular view it is one of the indispensable attributes of bliss and happiness to be enjoyed as a reward of virtue in this world (mānussakāmā) as well as in the next (dibbā kāmā). See kāmāvacara about the various stages of next -- world happiness. Numerous examples are to be found in Pv and Vv, where a standing Ep. of the Blest is sabbakāmasamiddha "fully equipped with all objects of pleasure," e. g. Pv i.105; PvA 46. The other -- world pleasures are greater than the earthly ones: S v.409; but to the Wise even these are unsatisfactory, since they still are signs of, and lead to, rebirth (kāmûpapatti, It (4): api dibbesu kāmesu ratiŋ so nâdhigacchati Dh 187; rāgaŋ vinayetha mānusesu dibbesu kāmesu cāpi bhikkhu Sn 361, see also It 94. -- Kāma as sensual pleasure finds its most marked application in the sphere of the sexual: kāmesu micchācārin, transgressing in lusts, sinning in the lusts of the flesh, or violating the third rule of conduct equivalent to abrahmacariyā, inchastity (see sīla) Pug 38, 39; It 63, etc. itthi -- kāmehi paricāreti "he enjoys himself with the charms of woman" S iv.343. Kāmesu brahmacariyavā practising chastity Sn 1041. Kāmatthā for sexual amusement A iii.229.
Redemption from kāma is to be effected by selfcontrol (saŋyama) and meditation (jhāna), by knowledge, right effort and renunciation. "To give up passion" as a practice of him who wishes to enter on the Path is expressed by: kāmānaŋ pahānaŋ, kāmasaññānaŋ pariññā, kāma -- pipāsānaŋ -- paṭivinayo, kāmavitakkānaŋ samugghāto kāma -- pariḷāhānaŋ vūpasamo Vin iii.111; -- kāmesu (ca) appaṭibaddhacitto "uddhaŋsoto" ti vuccati: he whose mind is not in the bonds of desire is called "one who is above the stream" Dh 218; cp. Th 2, 12; -- tasmā jantu sadā sato kāmāni parivajjaye Sn 771; -- yo kāme parivajjeti Sn 768=Nett 69. -- nikkhamma gharā panujja kāme Sn 359; -- ye ca kāme pariññāya caranti akutobhayā te ve pāragatā loke ye pattā āsavakkhayaŋ A iii.69. -- Kāmānaŋ pariññaŋ paññāpeti Gotamo M i.84; cp. A v.64; kāme pajahati: S i.12=31; Sn 704; kāmānaŋ vippahāna S i.47; -- ye kāme hitvā agihā caranti Sn 464; -- kāmā nirujjhanti (through jhāna) A iv.410; kāme panudati Dh 383=S i.15 (context broken), cp. kāmasukhaŋ analaŋkaritvā Sn 59; -- kāmesu anapekkhin Sn 166=Ś i.16 (abbrev.); S ii.281; Sn 857; -- cp. rāgaŋ vinayetha . . . Sn 361. vivicc' eva kāmehi, aloof from sensuous joys is the prescription for all Jhāna -- exercise.
Applications of these expressions: -- kāmesu palāḷita A iii.5; kāmesu mucchita S i.74; kāmālaye asatta S i.33; kāmesu kathaŋ nameyya S i.117; kāmesu anikīḷitāvin S i.9 (cp. kela); kittassa munino carato kāmesu anapekhino oghatiṇṇassa pihayanti kāmesu gathitā pajā Sn 823 (gadhitā Nd1); -- kāmesu asaññata Sn 243; -- yo na lippati kāmesu tam ahaŋ brūmi brāhmaṇaŋ Dh 401; -- Muni santivādo agiddho kāme ca loke ca anûpalitto Sn 845; kāmesu giddha D iii.107; Sn 774; kāmesu gedhaŋ āpajjati S i.73; -- na so rajjati kāmesu Sn 161; -- kāmānaŋ vasam upāgamum Sn 315 (=kāmānaŋ āsattataŋ pāpuniŋsu SnA 325); kāme parivajjeti Sn 768, kāme anugijjhati Sn 769.
Character of Kāmā. The pleasures of the senses are evanescent, transient (sabbe kāmā aniccā, etc. A ii.177), and of no real taste (appāsādā); they do not give permanent satisfaction; the happiness which they yield is only a deception, or a dream, from which the dreamer awakens with sorrow and regret. Therefore the Buddha says "Even though the pleasure is great, the regret is greater: ādīnavo ettha bhīyyo" (see k -- sukha). Thus kāmā as kālikā (needing time) S i.9, 117; aniccā (transitory) S i.22; kāmā citrā madhurā "pleasures are manifold and sweet" (i. e. tasty) Sn 50; but also appassādā bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā: quot. M i.91; see Nd2 71. Another passage with var. descriptions and comparisons of kāma, beginning with app' assādā dukkhā kāmā is found at J iv.118. -- atittaŋ yeva kāmesu antako kurute vasaŋ Dh 48; -- na kahāpaṇavassena titti kāmesu vijjati appasādā dukkhā kāmā iti viññāya paṇḍito "not for showers of coins is satisfaction to be found in pleasures -- of no taste and full of misery are pleasures: thus say the wise and they understand" Dh 186; cp. M i.130; Vin ii.25 (cp. Divy 224). -- Kāmato jāyatī soko kāmato jāyatī bhayaŋ kāmato vippamuttassa n'atthi soko kuto bhayan ti "of pleasure is born sorrow, of pleasure is born fear" Dh 215. <-> Kāmānam adhivacanāni, attributes of kāma are: bhaya, dukkha, roga, gaṇḍa, salla, sanga, panka, gabbha A iv.289; Nd2 p. 62 on Sn 51; same, except salla & gabbha: A iii.310. The misery of such pleasures is painted in vivid colours in the Buddha's discourse on pains of pleasures M i.85 and parallel passages (see e. g. Nd2 199), how kāma is the cause of egoism, avarice, quarrels between kings, nations, families, how it leads to warfare, murder, lasciviousness, torture and madness. Kāmānaŋ ādīnavo (the danger of passions) M i.85 sq. =Nd2 199, quot. SnA 114 (on Sn 61); as one of the five anupubbikathās: K˚ ādīnavaŋ okāraŋ saŋkilesaŋ A iv.186, 209, 439; -- they are the leaders in the army of Māra: kāmā te paṭhamā senā Sn 436; -- yo evamvādī . . . n'atthi kāmesu doso ti so kāmesu pātavyataŋ āpajjati A i.266=M i.305 sq.
Similes. -- In the foll. passage (following on appassādā bahudukkhā, etc.) the pleasures of the senses are likened to: (1) aṭṭhi -- kankhala, a chain of bones; <-> (2) maŋsapesi, a piece of (decaying) flesh; -- (3) tiṇ'ukkā, a torch of grass; (4) angāra -- kāsu, a pit of glowing cinders; -- (5) supina, a dream; (6) yācita, beggings; -- (7) rukkha -- phala, the fruit of a tree; -- (8) asisūna, a slaughter -- house; -- (9) satti -- sūla, a sharp stake; -- (10) sappa -- sira, a snake's head, i. e. the bite of a snake at Vin ii.25; M i.130; A iii.97 (where aṭṭhisankhala); Nd2 71 (leaving out No. 10). Out of this list are taken single quotations of No. 4 at D iii.283; A iv.224=v.175; No. 5 at DhA iii.240; No. 8 at M i.144; No. 9 at S i.128=Th 2, 58 & 141 (with khandhānaŋ for khandhāsaŋ); No. 10 as āsīvisa (poisonous fangs of a snake) yesu mucchitā bālā Th 2, 451, and several at many other places of the Canon.
Cases used adverbially: -- kāmaŋ acc. as adv. (a) yathā kāmaŋ according to inclination, at will, as much as one chooses S i.227; J i.203; PvA 63, 113, 176; yena kāmaŋ wherever he likes, just as he pleases A iv.194; Vv i.11 (= icchānurūpaŋ VvA 11) -- (b) willingly, gladly, let it be that, usually with imper. S i.222; J i.233; iii.147; iv.273; VvA 95; kāmaŋ taco nahāru ca aṭṭhi ca avasissatu (avasussatu in J) sarīre upasussatu maŋsa -- lohitaŋ "willingly shall skin, sinews and bone remain, whilst flesh and blood shall wither in the body" M i.481; A i.50; S ii.28; J i.71, 110; -- kāmasā (instr.) in same sense J iv.320; vi.181; -- kāmena (instr.) do. J v.222, 226; -- kāmā for the love of, longing after (often with hi) J iii.466; iv.285, 365; v.294; vi.563, 589; cp. Mhv iii.18, 467. -- akāmā unwillingly D i.94; J vi.506; involuntarily J v.237.
˚kāma (adj.) desiring, striving after, fond of, pursuing, in kāma -- kāma pleasure -- loving Sn 239 (kāme kāmayanto SnA 284); Dh 83 (cp. on this passage Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893, 39 -- 41); same expln as prec. at DhA ii.156; Th 2, 506. -- atthakāma well -- wishing, desirous of good, benevolent J i.241; v.504 (anukampakā +); sic lege for attakāmarūpā, M i.205, iii,155, cf. S i.44 with ib. 75; A ii.21; Pv iv.351; VvA 11 (in quotation); PvA 25, 112; mānakāma proud S i.4; lābhakāma fond of taking; grasping, selfish A ii.240; dūsetu˚ desiring to molest Vin iv.212; dhamma˚ Sn 92; pasaŋsa˚ Sn 825. So frequently in comb. w. inf., meaning, willing to, wishing to, going to, desirous of: jīvitu˚, amaritu˚, dātu˚, daṭṭhu˚, dassana˚, kātu˚, pattu˚, netu˚, gantu˚, bhojetu˚, etc. -- sakāma ( -- adj.) willing J v.295. -- akāma 1. not desiring, i. e. unwilling: M ii.181; mayhaŋ akāmāya against my wish (=mama anicchantiyā) Pv ii.107, J v.121, 183, etc. 2. without desire, desireless, passionless Sn 445. -- nikkāma same Sn 1131.
-- agga (nt.) the greatest pleasure, intense enjoyment M ii.43; Vv 163 (=VvA 79, attributed to the Paranimmita -- vasavattino -- devā); -- aggi the fire of passion J v.487; -- ajjhosāna (nt.) attachment to lust and desire, No. 10 in kāmacchanda series (see above); -- âdhikaraṇa having its cause in desire M i.85; S i.74; -- âdhimutta, bent upon the enjoyment of sensual pleasures A iii.168; J vi.159; -- ânusārin pursuing worldly pleasures J ii.117; -- andha blinded by passion Ud 76=Th 1, 297; -- âbhibhū overcoming passions, Ep. of the Buddha D ii.274; -- âbhimukha bent upon lust, voluptuous PvA 3; -- âvacara "having its province in kāma," belonging to the realm of sensuous pleasures. This term applies to the eleven grades of beings who are still under the influence of sensual desires and pleasures, as well as to all thoughts and conditions arising in this sphere of sensuous experience D i.34 (of the soul, expld DA 120: cha k˚ -- devapariyāpanna); J i.47; Dhs 1, 431; Ps 1, 84, 85, 101; Vbh 324; Vism 88, 372, 452 (rūpa˚, arūpa˚, lokuttara), 493 (of indriyas), 574; PvA 138. -- kamma an action causing rebirth in the six kāma -- worlds Dhs 414, 418, 431; -- devatā PvA 138 (+brahmādevatā) and -- devā the gods of the pleasure -- heavens J i.47; v.5; vi.99; Vism 392; or of the kāmâvacara -- devaloka J vi.586, -- bhūmi and -- loka the plane or world of kāma Ps i.83; J vi.99; see also avacara; -- âvacaraka belonging to the realm of kāma J vi.99; Sdhp 254 (˚ika); -- assāda the relish of sensual pleasures PvA 262; DA i.89, 311; -- ātura affected by passion, love -- sick J iii.170; -- ārāma pleasure -- loving A iv.438 (gihī k -- bhogī, ˚ratā, ˚sammuditā); -- ālaya, the abode of sensual pleasure (i. e. kāma -- loka) S i.33=Sn 177; Sn 306; -- āvaṭṭa the whirlpool of sensuality J ii.330; -- āsava the intoxication of passion, sensuality, lusts; def. as kāmesu kāma -- chando, etc. (see above k -- chando) Vbh 364, 374; Dhs 1097; as the first of four impurities, viz. k˚, bhava˚, diṭṭhi˚, avijjā˚ at Vin iii.5 (the detachment from which constitutes Arahantship); Vbh 373; Dhs 1096, 1448; as three (prec. without diṭṭhi˚) at It 49; Vbh 364; cp. D i.84; ii.81; iii.216; M i.7; -- itthi a pleasure -- woman, a concubine Vin i.36; J i.83; v.490; vi.220; -- upabhoga the enjoyment of pleasures VvA 79; -- upādāna clinging to sensuality, arising from taṇhā, as k˚ diṭṭhi˚ sīlabbata˚, attavāda˚ D iii.230; M i.51; Vbh 136, 375; Vism 569; -- ûpapatti existence or rebirth in the sensuous universe. These are three: (1) Paccupaṭṭhita -- kāmā (including mankind, four lowest devalokas, Asuras, Petas and animals), (2) Nimmāna -- ratino devā, (3) Paranimmita -- vasavattino devā D iii.218; It 94. -- ûpasaŋhita endowed with pleasantness: in formula rūpā (saddā, etc.) iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā k˚ rajaniyā "forms (sounds, etc.=any object of sense), desirable, lovely, agreeable, pleasant, endowed with pleasantness, prompting desires" D i.245=M i.85; 504; D ii.265; M iii.267; VvA 127. -- esanā the craving for pleasure. There are three esanās: kāma˚, bhava˚, brahmacariya˚ D iii.216 270; A ii.42; Vbh 366; It 48; S v.54; -- ogha the flood of sensual desires A iii.69; D iii.230, 276; Vbh 375; Vism 141; DhsA 166; Nd2 178 (viz. kām˚, bhav˚, diṭṭh˚, avijj˚). -- kaṇṭaka the sting of lust Ud 27; -- kara the fulfilment of one's desires J v.370 (=kāmakiriyā) -- karaṇīya in yathā˚ pāpimato the puppet of the wicked (lit. one with whom one can do as one likes) M i.173; It 56; -- kalala the mud of passions J iii.293; -- kāra the fulfilment of desires Sn 351=Th 1, 1271; -- kārin acting according to one's own inclination Th 1. 971; or acting willingly DA i.71; -- koṭṭhāsa a constituent of sensual pleasure (=kāmaguṇa) J iii.382; v.149; DA i.121; PvA 205; -- kopa the fury of passion Th 1, 671; -- gavesin, pleasure -- seeking Dh 99=Th 1, 992. -- gijjha J i.210 and -- giddha greedy for pleasure, craving for love J iii.432; v.256; vi.245; -- giddhimā, same J vi.525. -- giddhin f. ˚inī same Mhvs vi.3. -- guṇā (pl.) always as pañca: the five strands of sensual pleasures, viz., the pleasures which are to be enjoyed by means of the five senses; collectively all sensual pleasures. Def. as cakkhuviññeyyā rūpā, etc. A iii.411; D i.245; ii.271; iii.131, 234; Nd2 s. v.; Ps i.129; as manāpiyehi rūpâdīhi pañcahi kāma -- koṭṭhāsehi bandhanehi vā DA i.121, where it is also divided into two groups: mānusakā and dibbā. As constituents of kāmarāga at Nett 28; as vana (desire) Nett 81. -- In the popular view they are also to be enjoyed in "heaven": saggaŋ lokaŋ upapajjissāmi tattha dibbehi pañcahi k -- guṇehi samappito samangibhūto paricāressāmī ti Vin iii.72; mentioned as pleasures in Nandana S i.5; M i.505; A iii.40, iv.118; in various other connections S iv.202; Vv 307; Pv iii.71 (˚ehi sobhasi; expl. PvA 205 by kāma -- koṭṭhāsehi); PvA 58 (paricārenti); cp. also kāma -- kāmin. As the highest joys of this earth they are the share of men of good fortune, like kings, etc. (mānusakā k˚ guṇā) S v.409; A v.272, but the same passage with "dibbehi pañcahi k˚ -- guṇehi samappita . . ." also refers to earthly pleasures, e. g. S i.79, 80 (of kings); S v.342 (of a Cakkavatti); A ii.125; iv.55, 239; v.203; of the soul D i.36; Vbh 379; other passages simply quoting k -- g˚ as worldly pleasures are e. g. S i.16=Sn 171; S i.92; iv.196. 326; A iii.69 (itthirūpasmiŋ); D i.60, 104; Sdhp 261. In the estimation of the early Buddhists, however, this bundle of pleasures is to be banned from the thought of every earnest striver after perfection: their critique of the kāmaguṇā begins with "pañc' ime bhikkhave kāmaguṇā . . ." and is found at various places, e. g. in full at M i.85=Nd2 s. v.; M i.454; ii.42; iii.114; quoted at M i.92; A iii.411; iv.415, 430, 449, 458. Other expressions voicing the same view are: gedho pañcannaŋ k˚ -- guṇānaŋ adhivacanaŋ A iii.312 sq.; asisūnā . . . adhivac˚ M i.144; nivāpo . . . adhivac˚ M. i.155; sāvaṭṭo . . . adhivac˚ It 114. In connection w. rata & giddha PvA 3; pahīna M iii.295; gathita & mucchita M i.173; mā te kāmaguṇe bhamassu cittaŋ "Let not thy heart roam in the fivefold pleasures" Dh 371; cittassa vossaggo Vbh 370; asantuṭṭha Vbh 350. See also Sn 50, 51, 171, 284, 337. -- guṇika consisting of fivefold desire, appl. to rāga S ii.99; J iv.220; Dhs A.371; -- gedha a craving for pleasure S i.100; ThA 225; -- cāgin he who has abandoned lusts Sn 719. -- citta impure thought J ii.214; -- chanda excitement of sensual pleasure, grouped as the first of the series of five obstacles (pañca nīvaraṇāni) D i.156, 246; iii.234, 278; A i.231; iv.457; A i.134=Sn 1106; S i.99; v.64; Bdhd 72, 96, 130; Nd2 200, 420A. Also as the first in the series of ten fetters (saŋyojanāni) which are given above (p. 31) as synonyms of kāma. Enumerated under 1 -- 10 at Nd2 200 as eight in order: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 9, 10 (omitting pipāsā and gedha) Vbh 364; Dhs 1114, 1153; Nd2 ad chandarāga and bhavachanda; in order: 2, 3, 5, 9, 6, 7, 10, 4 at A ii.10; -- as nine (like above, omitting gedha) at Vbh 374; Dhs 1097; -- as five in order: 1, 5, 9, 6, 7, (cp. above passage A ii.10) at M i.241; -- as four in order: 1, 5, 9, 7 at S iv.188; -- as six nīvaraṇas (5 + avijjā) at Dhs 1170, 1486. See also D i.246; iii.234, 269; Ps i.103, 108; ii.22, 26, 44, 169; Vism 141; Sdhp 459; -- jāla the net of desires Th 1, 355; -- taṇhā thirst after sensual pleasures; the first of the three taṇhās, viz. kāma˚, bhava˚, vibhava˚ D iii.216, 275; It 50; Vbh 365 (where defined as kāmadhātupaṭisaŋyutto rāgo); Dhs 1059, 1136 (cp. taṇhā: jappāpassage); as the three taṇhā, viz. ponobbhavikā, nandirāga -- sahagatā, tatratatr' âbhinandinī at Vin i.10= Vbh 101; as k -- taṇhāhi khajjamāno k -- pariḷāhena pariḍayhamāno M i.504. See also D ii.308; S i.131; A ii.11; Th 2, 140; J ii.311; v.451; Miln 318. -- da granting desires, bestowing objects of pleasure and delight; Ep. of Yakkhas and of Vessantara (cp. the good fairy) J vi.498, 525; Mhvs 19, 9; as sabba˚ Pv ii.138; -- dada= prec. Pv ii.918; PvA 112; J vi.508; of a stone Miln 243, 252; of Nibbāna Miln 321; Kh viii.10: esa devamanussānaŋ sabbakāmadado nidhi "this is the treasure which gives all pleasures to gods and men"; -- dukkha the pain of sensual pleasures J iv.118; -- duha granting wishes, like a cow giving milk J v.33; vi.214; f. ˚duhā the cow of plenty J iv.20; -- dhātu "element of desire." i. e. 1. the world of desire, that sphere of existence in which beings are still in the bonds of sensuality, extending from the Avīci -- niraya to the heaven of the Paranimmita -- vasavatti -- devas S ii.151; Th 1, 181; also 2. sensual pleasures, desires, of which there are six dhātus, viz. kāma˚, vyāpāda, vihiŋsā˚, nekkhamma˚, avyāpāda˚, avihiŋsā˚, Vbh 86; Nett 97; D iii.215= Vbh 363 (as the first three=akusaladhātus); Vbh 404. See also D iii.275; Th 1, 378; J v.454; Vism 486 (cp. Vbh 86). -- nandī sensual delight (cp. ˚chanda) A ii.11; Dhs 1114, etc. -- nidānaŋ acc. adv. as the consequence of passion, through passion, M i.85, etc. (in kāmaguṇā passage); -- nissaraṇa deliverance from passion, the extinction of passion It 61 (as three nissaraṇīyā dhātuyo), cp. A iii.245; -- nissita depending on craving Miln 11; -- nīta led by desire J ii.214, 215; -- panka the mire of lusts Sn 945; Th 2, 354; J v.186, 256; vi.230, 505; Mhbv 3; -- paṭisandhi -- sukhin finding happiness in the association with desire M iii.230; -- pariḷāha the flame or the fever of passion M i.242, 508; S iv.188; A i.68 (pariḍayhati, khajjati, etc.); A ii.11; Vin iii.20; Nd2 374 (comd with ˚palibodha); DhA ii.2; see also kāmacchanda passage. -- pāla the guardian of wishes, i. e. benefactor J v.221; -- pipāsā thirst for sensuality M i.242; A ii.11, and under k˚ -- chanda; -- bandha Ud 93, and -- bandhana the bonds of desire J vi.28, also in the sense of k˚ -- guṇā, q. v.; -- bhava a state of existence dominated by pleasures. It is the second kind of existence, the first being caused by kamma Vbh 137. It rests on the effect of kamma, which is manifested in the kāma -- dhātu A i.223. It is the first form of the 3 bhavas, viz. kāma˚, rūpa˚, arūpa˚ Vin i.36; D iii.216; A iv.402; Vism 572. Emancipation from this existence is the first condition to the attainment of Arahantship: kāmabhave asatta akiñcana Sn 176, 1059, 1091 (expl. SnA 215: tividhe bhave alaggana); Bdhd 61. ˚parikkhīṇa one who has overcome the desire -- existence Dh 415=Sn 639. -- bhoga enjoyment of sensual pleasures, gratification of desires S i.74 (sāratta -- ˚esu giddhā kāmesu mucchitā); Th 2, 464; It 94 ( -- ˚esu paṇḍito who discriminates in worldly pleasures); J ii.65; -- bhogin enjoying the pleasures of the senses Vin i.203, 287; ii.136, 149; D iii.124, 125; Miln 243, 350, as Ep. of the kāmûpapatti -- beings It 94; as ten kinds A v.177; as bringing evil, being blameworthy S i.78; cp. A iv.281, 438; S iv.333 sq.; A iii.351; Th 2, 486; J iii.154. ye keci kāmesu asaññatā janā avītarāgā idha k -- bhogino (etc.) A ii.6, cp. ii.17. kāmabhogī kām'ārāmo kāmarato kāma -- sammudita A iv.439; -- ˚seyyā sleeping at ease, way of lying down, the second of the four ways of sleeping (kāmabhogīseyyā vāmena passena) A ii.244; -- bhojin=˚bhogin Ud 65; -- magga the path of sensuous pleasures J v.67; -- matta intoxicated with sensuous pleasures J vi.231; -- mucchā sensual stupor or languor S iv.189; A ii.11; Dhs 1114, etc. (see kāmacchanda); -- yoga application to sensuous enjoyment, one of the four yogas, viz. kāma˚, bhava˚, diṭṭhi˚, avijjā˚ (cp. āsavā) A ii.10; only the first two at It 95; cp. D iii.230, 276; S v.59; DhsA 166; -- rata delighting in pleasures J v.255; -- rati amorous enjoyment (as arati) Th 2, 58 and 141; J i.211; iii.396; iv.107. -- n'atthi nissaraṇaŋ loke kiŋ vivekena kāhasi bhuñjassu kratiyo mâhu pacchânutāpinī S i.128. mā pamādam anuyuñjetha, mā kāmaratisanthavaŋ appamatto hi jhāyanto pappoti paramaŋ sukhan S i.25=Dh 27=Th 1, 884; -- rasa the taste of love J ii.329; iii.170; v.451; -- rāga sensual passion, lust. This term embraces the kāmaguṇā & the three rāgas: Dhs 1131, 1460; Nett 28; M i.433 sq.; D iii.254, 282; S i.22= A iii.411; S i.13, 53; iii.155; Th 2, 68, 77; PvA 6; see also k -- chanda passage. Relinquishing this desire befits the Saint: Sn 139 (˚ŋ virājetvā brahmalokûpago). As k -- rāgavyāpāda Dhs 362; SnA 205; -- rūpa a form assumed at will VvA 80, or a form which enjoys the pleasures of heaven Vbh 426; -- lāpin talking as one likes D i.91 (=DA i.257 yadicchaka -- bhāṇin); -- lābha the grasping of pleasures, in ˚abhijappin A iii.353; -- loka the world of pleasures=kāmâvacara, q. v. Sdhp 233, 261; -- vaṇṇin assuming any form at will, Protean J ii.255= iii.409=Vv 33191; J v.157; Vv 163; VvA 80, 143, 146; -- vasika under the influence of passions J ii.215; -- vitakka a thought concerning some sensuous pleasure, one of the three evil thoughts (kāma˚ vyāpāda˚ vihiŋsā˚) D iii.215, 226; M i.114; A i.68; J i.63; iii.18, 375; iv.490; vi.29; It 82, 115; Vbh 362; Miln 310; -- vega the impulse of lust J vi.268; -- sagga the heaven of sensuous beings, there are six q. v. under sagga J i.105; ii.130; iii.258; iv.490; vi.29, 432; at all these passages only referred to, not enumd; cp. k -- âvacara; -- sankappa-bahula full of aspirations after pleasure A iii.145, 259; D iii.215; -- sanga attachment to passion Ud 75; -- saññā lustful idea or thought; one of the three akusalasaññās (as vitakka) D i.182; iii.215; M ii.262; S i.126; Vbh 363; Th 1, 1039; virata k˚ āya S i.53=Sn 175; -- saññojana the obstacle or hindrance formed by pleasures; ˚âtiga Ep. of Arahant, free of the fetters of lust A iii.373 (+ kāmarāgaŋ virājetvā); -- sineha love of pleasures Dhs 1097 (also as ˚sneha M i.241; S iv.188; A ii.10); see k -- chanda; -- sukha happiness or welfare arising from (sensual) pleasure, worldly happiness, valued as mīlha˚, puthujjana˚, anariya˚, and not worth pursuit: see kāmaguṇā, which passage closes: yaŋ ime pañca k -- guṇe paṭicca uppajjati sukhaŋ somanassaŋ idaŋ vuccati k -- sukhaŋ A iv.415; S iv.225; varying with . . . somanassaŋ ayaŋ kāmānaŋ assādo M i.85, 92, etc. -- As kāma˚ and nekkhamma˚ A i.80; as renounced by the Saint: anapekkhino k˚ ŋ pahāya Dh 346= S i.77; M iii.230; Sn 59 (see Nd2 s. v.). See also S iv.208; M ii.43; Th 2, 483; Vv 617; J ii.140; iii.396; v.428; kāmasukhallik' ânuyoga attachment to worldly enjoyment S iv.330; v.421; Vin i.10; D iii.113; Nett 110; Vism 5, 32; -- sutta N. of the first sutta of the Aṭṭhakavagga of Sn; -- seṭṭhā (pl.) a class of devas D ii.258; -- sevanā pursuit of, indulgence in, sensuous pleasure J ii.180; iii.464; -- sevin adj. to prec. J iv.118; -- hetu having craving as a cause: in ādīnava -- section, foll. on kāmaguṇā M i.86, etc., of wealth S i.74; -- hetuka caused by passion Th 2, 355=ThA 243; J v.220, 225.
Kāmaka (adj.) [fr. kāma] only -- ˚ in neg. akāmaka un- willing, undesirous D i.115; M i.163; Vin iii.13; J iv.31; cp. kāmuka.
Kāmaṇḍaluka (adj.) having a kamaṇḍalu (q. v.) S iv.312 cp. A v.263.
Kāmatā (f.) [abstr. fr. kāma] desire, longing, with noun: viveka˚ . . . to be alone PvA 43; anattha˚ J iv.14; with inf. PvA 65 (gahetu˚); J iii.362 (vināsetu˚); Mhvs 5, 260; DhA i.91.
Kāmin (adj.) [fr. kāma] 1. having kāma, i. e. enjoying pleasure, gratifying one's own desires in kāma -- kāmin realizing all wishes; attr. of beings in one of the Sugatis, the blissful states, of Yakkhas, Devas or Devaññataras (Pv i.33 =PvA 16), as a reward for former merit; usually in combn with bhuñjāmi paribhogavant (Pv iv.346) or as "nandino devalokasmiŋ modanti kkāmino" A ii.62= It 112; Th 1, 242; J iii.154; Pv ii.115; Pv iii.116 (expl. "as enjoying after their hearts' content all pleasures they can wish for"). -- 2. giving kāma, i. e. benevolent, fulfilling people's wishes; satisfying their desires, in atthakāminī devatā Sn 986. -- akāmakāmin passionless, dispassionate Sn 1096, syn. of vītataṇhā without desire (cp. Nd2 4).
Kāmuka (adj. -- n.) [cp. Sk. kāmuka] desiring, loving, fond of; a sweetheart, lover J v.306; Mhbv 3.
Kāmeti [den. fr. kāma] to desire, to crave, 1. to crave for any object of pleasure: Th 1, 93; J iii.154; iv.167; v.480; -- 2. to desire a woman, to be in love with D i.241; M ii.40; J ii.226; v.425; vi.307, 326, etc. <-> pp. kāmita in kāmita -- vatthu the desired object PvA 119; VvA 122; grd. kāmitabba to be desired, desirable PvA 16 (v. l. for kañña, better), 73; VvA 127; and kāmetabba J. v.156 (=kamaṇīya); ppr. (kāmaŋ) kāmayamānassa Sn 766 (=icchamānassa, etc., Nd1); J vi.172=Nett 69.
Kāya [der. probably fr. ci, cinoti to heap up, cp. nikāya heaping up, accumulation or collection; Sk. kāya] group, heap, collection, aggregate, body. -- Definitions and synonyms. -- SnA 31 gives the foll. synonyms and similes of kāya: kuṭī, guhā (Sn 772), deha, sandeha (Dh 148=Th 1, 20), nāvā (Dh 369), ratha (S iv.292), dhaja, vammīka (M i.144), kuṭikā (Th 1, 1); and at KhA 38 the foll. def.: kāye ti sarīre, sarīraŋ hi asucisañcayato kucchitānaŋ vā kesādīnaŋ āyabhūtato kāyo ti vuccati. . . . It is equivalent to deha: S i.27; PvA 10; to sarīra KhA 38; PvA 63, to nikāya (deva˚) D iii.264; and cp. formula of jāti: sattānaŋ tamhi tamhi sattanikāye jāti . . . Nd2 257.
Literal meaning. -- 1. mahājana -- kāya a collection of people, a crowd S iv.191; v.170; VvA 78; -- bala˚ a great crowd Sn p. 105; DhA i.193, 398. -- 2. group or division: satta kāyā akaṭā, etc. (seven eternal groups or principles) D i.56=M i.517=S iii.211 (in Pakudha Kaccāyana's theory); with reference to groups of sensations or sense -- organs, as vedanā -- kāya, saññā˚, viññāṇa˚, phassa˚, etc. S iii.60, 61; D iii.243, 244; taṇhā˚ D iii.244; appl. to hatthi˚, ratha˚, patti˚, groups of elephants, carriages or soldiers S i.72. -- A good idea of the extensive meaning of kāya may be gathered from the classification of the 7 kāyas at J ii.91, viz. camma˚, dāru˚, loha˚, ayo˚, vāluka˚, udaka˚, phalaka˚, or "bodies" (great masses, substances) of skin, wood, copper, iron, sand, water, and planks. -- Var. other combns: Asura˚ A i.143; D iii.7; Ābhassara˚ ("world of radiance") D i.17=iii.29, 84; Deva˚ S i.27, 30; D iii.264 (˚nikāya); dibbā kāyā A i.143; Tāvatiŋsa˚ D iii.15.
Applied meaning. -- I. Kāya under the physical aspect is an aggregate of a multiplicity of elements which finally can be reduced to the four "great" elements, viz. earth, water, fire, and air (D i.55). This "heap," in the valuation of the Wise (muni), shares with all other objects the qualities of such elements, and is therefore regarded as contemptible, as something which one has to get rid of, as a source of impurity. It is subject to time and change, it is built up and kept alive by cravings, and with death it is disintegrated into the elements. But the kamma which determined the appearance of this physical body has naturally been renewed and assumes a new form. II. Kāya under the psychological aspect is the seat of sensation (Dhs §§ 613<-> 16), and represents the fundamental organ of touch which underlies all other sensation. Developed only in later thought DhsA. 311 cf. Mrs. Rhys Davids, Bud. Psy. Ethics lvi. ff.; Bud. Psy. 143, 185 f.
I. (Physical). -- (a) Understanding of the body is attained through introspection (sati). In the group of the four sati -- paṭṭhānas, the foundations of introspection, the recognition of the true character of "body" comes first (see Vbh 193). The standing formula of this recognition is kāye kāyânupassī . . . contemplating body as an accumulation, on which follows the description of this aggregate: "he sees that the body is clothed in skin, full of all kinds of dirty matter, and that in this body there are hair, nails, teeth," etc. (the enumeration of the 32 ākāras, as given Kh iii.). The conclusions drawn from this meditation give a man the right attitude. The formula occurs frequently, both in full and abridged, e. g. D ii.293, 294; iii.104, 141; A iii.323=v.109; S iv.111=v.278; Vbh 193, 194; Nett 83, 123; with slight variation: kāye asubhânupassī . . . A iii.142 sq.; v.109 (under asubhasaññā); It 81; cp. kāye aniccânupassī S iv.211; and kāyagatā sati. -- This accumulation is described in another formula with: ayaŋ . . . kāyo rūpī cātum(m)ahābhūtiko mātā -- pettika -- sambhavo odana -- kummās' upacayo, etc. "this body has form (i. e. is material, visible), is born from mother and father, is a heap of gruel and sour milk, is subject to constant dressing and tending, to breaking up and decay," etc., with inferences D i.55=S iii.207; S ii.94; iv.194; v.282, 370; D i.76, 209; M i.144, 500; ii.17; A iv.386=S iv.83.
(b) Various qualities and functions of the material body. As trunk of the body (opposed to pakkhā and sīsa) S ii.231; also at Pv i.83; as depending on nourishment (āhāra -- ṭṭhitika, etc.) Sv.64; A ii.145 (with taṇhā, māna, methuna); as needing attention: see ˚parihārika. As saviññāṇaka, having consciousness A iv.53= S ii.252=S iii.80, 103, 136, 169; cp. āyu usmā ca viññānaŋ yadā kāyaŋ jahant' imaŋ S iii.143. As in need of breathing assāsa -- passāsa S v.330, 336; as tired, fatigued (kilanta -- kāya) kilanta -- kāyā kilanta -- cittā te devā tamhā kāyā cavanti "tired in body, tired in mind these gods fall out of this assembly" (D i.20; iii.32≈); in other connection PvA 43; see also kilanta. kāyo kilanto D iii.255 sq.;=A iv.332; S v.317; M i.116; jiṇṇassa me . . . kāyo na paleti Sn 1144; ātura -- kāyo S iii.1 (cittaŋ anāturaŋ); paripuṇṇa -- k˚ suruci sujāto, etc., with a perfect body (of the Buddha) Sn 548= Th 1, 818; cp. mahā -- k˚ (of Brahmins) Sn 298. The body of a Buddha is said to be endowed with the 32 signs of a great man: Bhagavato kāye dvattiŋsa mahāpurisa -- lakkhaṇāni . . . Sn p. 107, cp. 549. The Tathāgata is said to be dhamma -- kāyo "author and speaker of Doctrine," in the same sense Brahma -- kāyo "the best body" (i. e. of Doctrine) D iii.84 (Dial. iii, 81).
(c) Valuation of physical body. From the contemplating of its true character (kāyânupassī) follows its estimation as a transient, decaying, and repulsive object. -- kāye anicc' ânupassī S iv.211 (and vay' ânupassī, nirodh' ânupassī), so also asubhânupassī It 81; kāyañ ca bhindantaŋ ñatvā It 69; evaŋdhammo (i. e. a heap of changing elements) A iii.324; aciraŋ vat' ayaŋ kāyo paṭhaviŋ adhisessati chuddho apetaviññāṇo niratthaŋ va kalingaraŋ Dh 41. pittaŋ semhañ ca vamati kāyamhā Sn 198. As bahu -- dukkho bahuādīnavo A v.109; as anicca dukkha, etc. M i.500; ii.17; kāyena aṭṭiyamānā harayamānā S iv.62; v.320; dissati imassa kāyassa ācayo pi apacayo pi ādānam pi nikkhepanam pi S ii.94. -- This body is eaten by crows and vultures after its death: S v.370. Represented as pūti˚ foul S i.131; iii.120. -- Bdhgh. at Vism 240 defines kāya as "catu -- mahābhūtika pūti -- kāya" (cp. similar passages on p. 367: patthaddho bhavati kāyo, pūtiko bhavati kāyo).
(d) Similes. -- Out of the great number of epithets (adhivacanāni) and comparisons only a few can be mentioned (cp. above under def. & syn.): The body is compared to an abscess (gaṇḍa) S iv.83=A iv.386; a city (nagara) S iv.194; a cart (ratha) S iv.292; an anthill (vammīka) M i.144; all in reference to its consisting of the four fundamental elements, cp. also: pheṇ' ûpamaŋ kāyaŋ imaŋ viditvā "knowing that the body is like froth" Dh 46; kumbh' ûpamaŋ kāyaŋ imaŋ viditvā nagar' ûpamaŋ cittaŋ idaŋ ṭhapetvā Dh 40: the body is as fragile as a water -- pot.
(e) Dissolution of the body is expressed in the standard phrase: kāyassa bhedā param maraṇā . . ., i. e. after death . . . upon which usually follows the mention of one of the gatis, the destinies which the new kāya has to experience, e. g. D i.82, 107, 143, 162, 245, 247, 252; iii.96, 97, 146, 181, 235; M i.22; S i.94; iii.241; Dh 140; It 12, 14; J i.152; PvA 27, etc., etc. Cp. also iv.
II. (Psychological). -- As the seat of feeling, kāya is the fifth in the enumeration of the senses (āyatanāni). It is ajjhattika as sense (i. e. subjective) and its object is the tangible (phoṭṭhabba). The contact between subject and object consists either in touching (phusitvā) or in sensing (viññeyya). The formulas vary, but are in essence the same all through, e. g. kāya -- viññeyyā phoṭṭhabbā D i.245; kāyena phoṭṭhabbaŋ phusitvā D iii.226, 250, 269; M i.33; ii.42; S iv.104, 112; kāyena phusitvā A v.11; kāyo c' eva phoṭṭhabbā ca D iii.102. Best to be grouped here is an application of kāya in the sense of the self as experiencing a great joy; the whole being, the "inner sense," or heart. This realization of intense happiness (such as it is while it lasts), pīti -- sukha, is the result of the four stages of meditation, and as such it is always mentioned after the jhānas in the formula: so imaŋ eva kāyaŋ vivekajena pīti -- sukhena abhisandeti . . . "His very body does he so pervade with the joy and ease born of detachment from worldliness" D i.73 sq.=M i.277; A ii.41, etc. -- A similar context is that in which kāya is represented as passaddha, calmed down, i. e. in a state which is free from worldly attachment (vivekaja). This "peace" of the body (may be translated as "my senses, my spirits" in this connection) flows out of the peace of the mind and this is born out of the joy accompanying complete satisfaction (pamuditā) in attaining the desired end. The formula is pamuditassa pīti jāyati pītimanassa kāyo passambhati, passaddhakāyo sukhaŋ vedeti, sukhino cittaŋ samādhiyati D iii.241, 288; S iv.351; M i.37; A iii.21, 285; iv.176; v.3, 333; Vbh 227. <-> Similarly: pamuditāya pīti jāyati, pītimanāya kāyo p˚, passadhakāyā sukhaŋ ved˚ Vin i.294 (c̣p. Vin. Texts ii.224: "all my frame will be at peace," or "individuality"; see note) passaddhakāya -- sankhāra mentioned at A v.29 sq. is one of the ten ariya -- vāsā, the noblest conditions. A quasi -- analogy between kāya and kāma is apparent from a number of other passages: kāya -- chando -- ˚sneho -- ˚anvayatā pahīyati M i.500; ajjhattañ ca bahiddha ca kāye chandaŋ virājaye Sn 203; kāye avigata -- rāgo hoti (kāme, rūpe) D iii.238=A iii.249; madhurakajāto viya kāyo S iii.106; A iii.69.
III. (Ethical). -- Kāya is one of the three channels by which a man's personality is connected with his environment & by which his character is judged, viz. action, the three being kāya, vacī (vāca) and manas. These three kammantas, activities or agents, form the three subdivisions of the sīla, the rules of conduct. Kāya is the first and most conspicuous agent, or the principle of action kat) e)coxh/n, character in its pregnant sense.
Kāya as one of a triad. -- Its usual combination is in the formula mentioned, and as such found in the whole of the Pāli Canon. But there is also another combination, found only in the older texts, viz. kayenā vācāya uda cetasā: yañ ca karoti kāyena vācāya uda cetasā taŋ hi tassa sakaŋ hoti tañ ca ādāya gacchati S i.93 yo dhammacārī kāyena vācāya uda cetasā idh eva nam pasaŋsanti pacca sagge pamodati S i.102. -- So also at A i.63; Sn 232. Besides in formula arakkhitena kāyena a˚ vācāya a˚ cittena S ii.231=271; iv.112. <-> With su -- and duccarita the combn is extremely frequent, e. g. S i.71, 72; M i.22, etc., etc. In other comb. we have kāya -- (v˚., m.˚) kamma, moneyya, soceyya, etc. -- k˚. v˚. m˚. hiŋsati S i.165; saŋsappati A v.289 sq.; kāye (v˚. m˚.) sati kāya -- sañcetanā -- hetu uppajjati S ii.39 sq.; The variations of k -- in the ethics of the Dhamma under this view of k˚. v˚. m˚. are manifold, all based on the fundamental distinctions between good and bad, all being the raison d'être of kamma: yaŋ . . . etarahi kammaŋ karoti kāyena v. m. idaŋ vuccati navakammaŋ S iv.132. -- Passages with reference to good works are e. g. D iii.245; A i.151; v.302 sq.; (see also Kamma ii.2 b. c.). -- With reference to evil: S iii.241, 247; A i.201; kin nu kāyena vācāya manasā dukkaṭaŋ kataŋ Pv ii.13 and passim. Assutavā puthujjano tīhi ṭhānehi micchā paṭipajjati kāyena v. m. S ii.151; pāpaŋ na kayirā vacasā manasā kāyena vā kiñcana sabbaloke S i.12=31; yassa kāyena vācāya manasā n'atthi dukkaṭaŋ saŋvutaŋ tīhi ṭhānehi, tam ahaŋ brūmi brāhmaṇaŋ Dh 391=Nett 183. Kāyena saŋvaro sādhu sādhu vācāya saŋvaro manasā saŋvaro sādhu sādhu sabbattha saŋvaro Dh 361=S i.73= Miln 399; ye ca kāyena v. m. ca susaŋvutā na te Māravasânugā, na te Mārassa paccagū S i.104; vācānurakkhī manasā susaŋvuto kāyena ca akusalaŋ na kayirā Dh 281=Nett 183.
Kāya as one of a dyad: vācā and kāya: S i.172 (˚gutta) M i.461 (rakkhita and a˚); Pv i.22 (˚saññatā and opp.); Vism 28 (k˚ -- vacī -- kamma); PvA 98.
Kāya alone as a collective expression for the three: A i.54; Dh 259, 391; Sn 206, 407; kāye avītarāgo M i.101; A iii.249; iv.461 sq.; ˚ -- samācāra S v.354; kāyaŋ paṇidhāya Ps i.175; Vbh 244=252; bhāvita˚ and a˚ M i.239; A i.250; iii.106 sq., cp.: kāya -- ppakopaŋ rakkheyya, kāyena saŋvuto siyā kāyaduccaritaŋ hitvā, kāyena sucaritaŋ care Dh 231. Ahiŋsakā ye munayo niccaŋ kāyena saŋvutā Dh 225.
Kāya in combn with citta: ṭhito va kāyo hoti ṭhitaŋ cittaŋ . . . S v.74; anikaṭṭha -- kāyo nikaṭṭha -- citto A ii.137; sāraddha -- kāyo sankiliṭṭha -- citto A v.93=95= 97; bhāvita -- kāyo, ˚sīlo, ˚citto, ˚pañño S iv.111; A iv.111; v.42 sq. Apakassa kāyaŋ apakassa cittaŋ S ii.198. Kāya -- citta -- passaddhi, etc. Dhs §§ 29 -- 51. In these six couples (or yugalas) later Abhidhamma distinguished kāya as=the cetasikas (mental properties, or the vedanā, saññā and sankhārā khandhas), body being excluded. Cpd. 96. See also combn kilantakāya, kilanta -- citta under kilamati.
IV. (Various). -- Kāyena (i. e. "visibly") aññamaññaŋ passituŋ A ii.61; as nānatta˚ and ekatta˚ at A iv.39 =Nd2 570. The relation between rūpa -- kāya (= cātumahābhūtika), and nāma -- kāya, the mental compound (=vedanā saññā, etc.) is discussed at Nett 77, 78, and Ps i.183 sq., see also S ii.24. K. is anattā, i. e. k. has no soul A v.109; S iv.166. n'âyaŋ kāyo tumhākaŋ n'āpi paresaŋ, purāṇaŋ idaŋ kammaŋ . . . "neither is this body yours, nor anyone else's: it is (the appearance of) former karma" S ii.64, 65=Nd2 680. Dissamānena kāyena and upaḍḍha -- dissamānena S i.156. <-> Manomaya -- kāya a body made by the mind (cp. VvA 10 and DA i.110, 120, 222) according to Bdhgh only at the time of jhāna S v.282 sq.; manomaya pīti -- bhakkha sayaŋpabha D i.17=VvA 10; manomayaŋ kāyaŋ abhinimmināya . . . D i.77; m˚ sabbanga -- paccangī D i.34, 77, 186, 195. -- Under the control of psychic powers (iddhi): kāyena va saŋvatteti he does as he likes with his body, i. e. he walks on water, is ubiquitous, etc. (yāva brahmalokā pi: even up to heaven) S v.265= D i.78=A i.170: see also S v.283, 284. -- In the various stages of Saŋsāra; kāyaŋ nikkhipati he lays down his (old) body S iv.60, 400; cp. S iii.241 (ossaṭṭha -- kāya); referring to continuous change of body during day and night (of a Petī) Pv ii.1211.
-- anga a limb of the body, kāy'angaŋ vāc'angaŋ vā na kopenti: they remain motionless and speechless (ref. to the bhikkhus begging) J iii.354; DhsA 93, 240; -- ânupassin in combn kāye kāyânupassī "realizing in the body an aggregate" D ii.94, 100, 291 sq.; D iii.58, 77, 141, 221, 276; M i.56; A i.39, 296; ii.256; iii.449; iv.300, 457 sq.; S iv.211; v.9, 75, 298, 329 sq.; Vbh 193 sq.; 236; see also above. Der.: ˚anupassanā Ps. i.178, 184; ii.152, 163, 232; ˚passita Nett. 123; -- āyatana the sense of touch D iii.243, 280, 290; Dhs 585, 613, 653, 783; -- indriya same D iii.239; Dhs 585, 613, 972; -- ujjukatā straightness of body (+citta˚, of thought) Dhs 53, 277, 330; Vism 466; Bdhd 16, 20. -- ûpaga going to a (new) body S ii.24; -- kamma "bodily action," deed performed by the body in contradistinction to deeds by speech or thought (see above) D i.250; iii.191, 245, 279; M i.415; iii.206; A i.104; iii.6, 9, 141 sq.; v.289; Th 2, 277; Ps ii.195; Dhs 981, 1006; Vbh 208, 321, 366; Pug 41; Bdhd 69; DhsA 68, 77, 344. -- kammaññatā wieldiness, alertness of the bodily senses included under nāmakāya Dhs 46, 277, 326. -- kammanta=˚kamma, in comb. ˚sampatti and ˚sandosa A v.292, 294, 297; M i.17. -- kali "the misfortune of having a body"=this miserable body Th 2, 458, 501; ThA 282, 291; -- kasāva bodily impurity or depravity A i.112; -- gata "relating to the body," always combined with sati in the same sense as ˚anupassin (see above) S i.188; M. iii.92; A i.44; Sn 340 (cp. SnA 343); Th 1, 468, 1225; J i.394; Dh 293= Nett 39; Dh 299; Miln 248, 336, 393; Vism 111, 197, 240 sq. -- gantha bodily tie or fetter (binding one to saŋsāra), of which there are four: abhijjhā, byāpāda, sīlabbata -- parāmāsa, idaŋ -- saccâbhinivesa D iii.230= S v.59=Dhs 1135=Vbh 374; cp. Mrs. Rh. D., Dhs. trsl. p. 304; -- gandha spelling for ˚gantha at Nett 115<-> 119; -- gutta one who guards his body, i. e. controls his action (+vacīgutta) S i.172=Sn 74; -- gutti the care or protection of the body Vin i.295; J ii.162; -- citta body and mind: ˚ābādha physical and mental disease J iv.166; see other combns above; -- ḍāha fever Vin i.214; -- tapana chastisement of body, curbing one's material desires, asceticism PvA 98. -- thāma physical strength J iii.114; -- daratha bodily distress J v.397; vi.295; -- daḷha bodily vigour Vin ii.76, 313; -- dukkha bodily pain (+ceto˚) M iii.288; -- duccarita misconduct by the body, evil deeds done through the instrumentality of the body (cp. ˚kamma) D iii.52, 96, 111, 214; A i.48; Dh 231; It 54, 58; Dhs 300, 1305; Bdhd 16, 20; -- duṭṭhulla unchastity Th 1, 114; -- dvāra the channel or outlet of bodily senses J i.276; iv.14; VvA 73; DhA iv.85; Bdhd 69; -- dhātu the "element" of body, i. e. the faculty of touch, sensibility Dhs 613; Kvu 12; -- pakopa blameworthy conduct, misbehaviour (+vacī˚, mano˚) Dh 231=DhA 330; -- pacālaka (nt.) shaking or swaying the body, "swaggering" Vin ii.213; -- paṭibaddha 1. adj. (of the breath), dependent on, or connected with the body S iv.293; attached or bound to the body J iii.377; v.254; 2. m. an article of dress worn on the body Vin iii.123, iv.214; -- payoga the instrumentality or use of the body DA i.72=DhsA 98; -- pariyantika limited by the body, said of vedanā, sensation S v.320=A ii.198; -- parihārika tending or protecting the body D i.71=A ii.209=Pug 58; Vism 65 (cīvara); DA i.207; -- pasāda clearness of the sense of touch or sense in general DhsA 306; Bdhd 62, 66, 74; cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 173n, 198n; -- passaddhi serenity or quietude of the senses S iv.125 (cp. iv.351 and above); v.66, 104; Dhs 40, 277, 320; DhsA 130; Bdhd 16, 19, 29; -- pāgabbhiya "body -- forwardness" immodesty, lasciviousness, gener. said of women J ii.32; v.449; -- pāgabbhiniya same J i.288; -- pāguññatā good condition of the mental faculties, fitness of sense, opp. kāyagelañña, apathy Dhs 46, 277, 326; Vism 466; Bdhd 16, 20, 157; -- phandita (nt.) bodily activity J iii.25; -- baddha fastened to the body, appl. to robes DA i.207; -- bandhana a girdle or waistband Vin i.46, 51; ii.118, 135, 177, 213, 266; M i.237; -- bala physical strength PvA 30; -- bhāvanā meditation or training with regard to action D iii.219; M i.237; cp. Miln 85; -- macchera "body -- selfishness," pampering the body Th 1, 1033; -- mudutā pliability of sense=˚kammaññatā Dhs 44, 277, 324; Bdhd 16, 20, 157; -- muni a sage with regard to action It 56; -- moneyya the true wisdom regarding the use of the body as an instrument of action It 56; 67; D iii.220; A i.273; Nd2 514; -- ratha the "carriagelike" body J vi.253; -- lahutā buoyancy of sense = ˚muduta, same loci; -- vanka crookedness of action A i.112; -- vikāra change of position of the body J iii.354; -- vijambhana alertness DhA iv.113; -- viññatti intimation by body, i. e. merely by one's appearance, appl. chiefly to the begging bhikkhu Dhs 585, 636, 654, 844; DhsA 82, 301; Miln 229, 230; Vism 448; Bdhd 69, 70; -- viññāṇa consciousness by means of touch, sensory consciousness D iii.243; Dhs 556, 585, 651, 685, 790; Miln 59; Vbh 180; ˚dhātu element of touch -- consciousness Dhs 560; Vbh 88; Kvu 12; -- viññeyya to be perceived by the sense of touch (+phoṭṭhabba, see above) D i.245; ii.281; iii.234; M i.85, 144; Dhs 589, 967, 1095; Vbh 14; Kvu 210; Miln 270; -- vipphandana throbbing of the body, bodily suffusion, appld to ˚vinnatti Bdhd 69, 70; DhsA 323; -- viveka seclusion of the body, hermitism J i.289; DhsA 165; -- vūpakāsa= ˚viveka D iii.285 (+citta˚ "singleness" of heart); -- veyyāvacca menial duties J i.12; ˚kara a servant J ii.334; -- veyyāvaṭika same J vi.418; Sn p. 104; DhA i.27; ˚kamma id. J v.317 (=veyyāvacca) DhsA 160; -- saŋsagga bodily contact, sexual intercourse Vin iii.121, 190; J vi.566; -- sakkhin he who has realized and gained the final truth concerning the body (cp. ˚anupassin) D iii.105, 254; M i.478=Pug 14, 29; M ii.113; iii.45; A i.74; 118; iv.10, 451; v.23; Ps ii.52, 62; Nett 190; Kvu 58; Vism 93, 387. -- sankhāra the material aggregate, substratum of body Vin iii.71; S ii.40; iii.125; iv.293; A i.122; ii.158, 231; Ps i.184, 186; Vism 530. -- sangaha control of body (+citta˚) Nett 91; -- sañcetanā ( -- hetu) ground (for the rise of), material, i. e. impure thoughts A ii.157; Vism 530 (+vacī˚, mano˚). -- samācāra (good) conduct as regards one's actions D ii.279 (+vacī˚) M i.272 sq.; ii.113; iii.45; S v.354; A iii.186 sq. -- sampīlana crushing the body (of dukkha) Nett 29; -- samphassa the sense of touch (see āyatana) D iii.243; S v.351; Dhs 585, 616, 651, 684; ˚ja arisen through touch or sensibility D iii.244; Dhs 445, 558; -- sucarita good conduct in action, as one of the three ˚kammāni (vacī˚, mano˚) D iii.52, 96, 111, 169, 215; It 55, 59, 99, Dhs 1306; -- suci purity of body, i. e. of action (+vacī˚, ceto˚) A i.273; It 55; -- soceyya purification of body (+vacī˚, mano˚) D iii.219; A i.271; v 264, 266; It 55.
Kāyika (adj.) [fr. kāya] 1. belonging to the body, i. e. felt by the body (experienced by the senses), or resulting from the body, i. e. done by the body (=acted as opposed to spoken or thought). sukhaŋ physical happiness (opp. cetasika˚) S v.209; A i.81; dukkhaŋ D ii.306; M i.302 (opp. cetasikaŋ); kāyikaŋ (sc. dhammaŋ) sikkhati to teach the conduct of body (opp. vācasikaŋ) Vin ii.248. In comb. with vācasika also at S i.190; Pug 21; Vism 18 (of anācara); PvA 119 (of saŋyama, control) Shhp 55; Bdhd 26, 134; referring to diff. kinds of amusements Nd2 219=SnA 86. 2. -- ˚ (of devas) belonging to the company of -- : ˚ D i.220; gandhabba˚ PvA 119.
Kāyūra & Kāyura [see also keyūra, which is the only form in Sk.] 1. an ornamental bracket or ring worn on the upper arm (bāh'âlankāra Pv; bhuj˚ Vv) or neck (gīvāya pilandhana J iii.437); a bracelet or necklace Vin ii.106; J iii.437; iv.92; Pv iii.93; Vv 362. -- 2. adj. as sakāyura raṭṭha having the insignia "regis" J v.289=486.
Kāyūrin (adj.) [fr. last] wearing bracelets Pv iii.91.
Kār -- secondary root of karoti, in denom. and intensive function in kāra, kāraka, kāraṇa, kārin, kāreti and their derivations.
Kāra [fr. kār -- , cp. Vedic kāra song of praise, which is, however, derived fr. kṛ=kir to praise; also Vedic ˚kāra in brāhma˚, fr. kṛ] 1. abs. (a) deed, service, act of mercy or worship, homage: kāra -- paṇṇaka J vi.24 (vegetable as oblation); appako pi kato kāro devûpapattiŋ āvahati "even a small gift of mercy brings about rebirth among the gods" PvA 6. -- kāraka one who performs a religious duty D i.61 (=DA i.170). (b) doing, manner, way: yena kārena akattha tena k˚ pavattamānaŋ phalaŋ "as you have done so will be the fruit" PvA 45. -- 2. ( -- ˚) (a) the production or application of, i. e. the state or quality of . . .: atta˚ one's own state =ahaŋ kāra, individuality; para˚ the personality of others A iii.337; citti˚ reflection, thought PvA 26; see e. g. andha˚ darkness, sak˚ homage, etc. -- balakkārena forcibly PvA 68. -- (b) as ttg. the item, i. e. particle, letter, sound or word, e. g. ma -- kāra the letter m PvA 52; ca -- kāra the particle ca PvA 15; sa -- kāra the sound sa SnA 23. -- (c) (adj. -- n.) [cp. kara] one who does, handles or deals with: ayakāra iron -- smith Miln 331.
Kāraka (usually -- ˚) the doer (of): Vin ii.221 (capu -- capu˚); sāsana˚ he who does according to (my) advice Sn 445; Bdhd 85 sq.; -- f. kārikā: veyyāvacca˚ a servant PvA 65 (text reads ˚tā); as n. the performance of ( -- ˚), service: dukkara -- kārikā the performance of evil deeds S i.103; Th 2, 413 (=ThA 267). -- agga -- kārikā first test, sample Vin iii.80.
Kāraṇa (nt.) [in meaning 1 represented in later Sk. by kāraṇā f., in meaning 2= Sk. kāraṇa nt., equivalent to prakṛti, natural form, constituent, reason, cause]. 1. -- (a) a deed, action, performance, esp. an act imposed or inflicted upon somebody by a higher authority (by the king as representative of justice or by kamma: M iii.181; see kamma 11 3.A b.) as an ordeal, a feat or punishment: a labour or task in the sense of the 12 labours of Heracles or the labours of Hades. kāraṇaŋ kārāpeti "he makes somebody perform the task." Pass, kāraṇaŋ or kāraṇā karīyati. Thus as a set of five tasks or purgatory obligations under the name of pañcavidha -- bandhana "the group of five" (not, as Warren trsl. p. 257 "inflict on him the torture called the fivefold pinion"), a means of punishment in Niraya (q. v. under pañca). Not primarily torture (Rh. Davids, Miln trsl. i.254, and others with wrong derivation from kṛṇtati). At DhA iii.70 these punishments are comprehended under the term dasa -- dukkhakāraṇāni (the ten punishments in misery); the meaning "punishment" also at J iv.87 (tantarajjukaŋ k˚ŋ katvā), whereas at J vi.416 k. is directly paraphrased by "maraṇa," as much as "killing." Often spelt karaṇa, q. v.; the spelling kāraṇā (as f.) at Miln 185 seems to be a later spelling for kāraṇaŋ. See karaṇa for further reference. -- Kiŋ kāraṇaŋ ajja kāressati "what task will he impose on me to -- day?" A v.324; as pañcavidhabandhana K˚ A i.141, PvA 251, Nd2 304iii. -- As adj. ˚kāraṇa in dāruṇa˚ "being obliged to go through the dreadful trial" PvA 221. -- (b) duty obligation, in kāraṇ' âkāraṇā (pl.) duties great and small DhA i.385. Cp. also kāraṇaŋ karoti to try M i.444. -- (c) a trick (i. e. a duty imposed by a higher authority through training) J ii.325 (ānañja˚); Miln 201 (ākāsa -- gamana˚). 2. -- (a) acting, action as (material) cause: k˚ -- bhūta being the cause of . . . PvA 15; -- (b) (intellectual) cause, reason Miln 150; DhA i.389; esp. as -- ˚: arodana˚ the reason for not crying PvA 63; asocana˚ same, ibid. 62; āgamana˚ the reason for coming (here) ibid. 81, 106. =pariyatti, DhA. 36.=attha, SA on i.215, SnA. i.238 -- instr. kāraṇena by necessity, needs PvA 195; tena k˚ therefore ibid. 40 -- abl. kāranā by means of, through, by (=hetu or nissāya) PvA 27; imasmā k˚ therefore PvA 40; kāraṇaṭṭhā (expl. as attha -- kāraṇā Nd2) for the purpose of some object or advantage Sn 75; opp. nikkāraṇā from unselfishness ibid. -- sakāraṇa (adj.) with good reason (of vacana) PvA 109.
Kāraṇika [der. fr. prec.] the meaning ought to be "one who is under a certain obligation" or "one who dispenses certain obligations." In usu˚ S ii.257 however used simply in the sense of making: arrow -- maker, fletcher. Perhaps the reading should be ˚kāraka.
Kāraṇḍava1 [of uncertain etym., cp. karaṇḍa] chaff, offal, sweepings, fig. dirt, impurity: yava˚ A iv.169 (chaff); samaṇa˚ ibid. -- In passage kāraṇḍavaŋ niddhamatha, kasambuŋ apakassatha A iv.172=Sn 281=Miln 414 trsld by Rh. Davids Miln trsl. ii.363 "get rid of filth, put aside rubbish from you," expl. SnA 311 by kacavara (q. v.). Rh. D's note3 loc. cit. is to be modified according to the parallel passages just given.
Kāraṇḍava2 [cp. Sk. kāraṇḍava] a sort of duck Vv 358 (expld as also by Halāyudha 2, 99 by kādamba, black goose).
Kārā (f.) [cp. Sk. kārā] confinement, captivity, jail, in ˚bhedaka cora a thief who has broken out of jail Vin i.75.
Kārāpaka [fr. kārāpeti] a schemer, inventor J vi.333.
Kārāpaṇa see kāreti.
Kārāpita [pp. of kārāpeti, Caus. of karoti] made to do J vi.374.
Kārikā see kāraka
Kāritā = kārikā (performance); see pāripūri˚.
Kārin ( -- ˚) (adj.) doing: yathāvādī tathākārī "as he says so he does" D iii.135, Sn 357; see for examples the various cpds. as kamma˚, kibbisa˚, khaṇḍa˚, chidda˚, dukkaṭa˚, dvaya˚, paccakkha˚, pubba˚, sakkacca˚, sampajāna˚, etc.
Kāriya (adj.) [grd. of kāreti, Caus. of karoti] to be done, neg. akāriya to be undone, (not) to be made good It 18.
Kāruñña (nt.) [fr. karuṇa] compassion (usually with anudayā and anukampā) S ii.199; A iii.189; Vism 300; PvA 75; Sdhp 509.
Kāruññatā (f.) compassionateness S i.138.
Kāruṇika (adj.) [fr. karuṇa] compassionate, merciful Pv ii.113; PvA 16; Bdhd 49; often with mahā˚: of great mercy Sdhp 330, 557; so of the Buddha: mahākāruṇika nātha "the Saviour of great mercy" in introductory stanzas to Pv and Vv.
Kāreti (Causative of karoti), to construct, to build, etc.; pp. kārita; der. -- kārāpaṇa the construction of (vihāra˚) DhA i.416. For details see karoti iv.; see also kārāpaka & kārāpita.
Kāla (and Kāḷa) -- Preliminary. 1. dark (syn. kaṇha, which cp. for meaning and applications), black, blueblack, misty, cloudy. Its proper sphere of application is the dark as opposed to light, and it is therefore characteristic of all phenomena or beings belonging to the realm of darkness, as the night, the new moon, death, ghosts, etc. -- There are two etymologies suggestible, both of which may have been blended since IndoAryan times: (a) kāla=Sk. kāla, blue -- black, kālī black cloud from *qāl (with which conn. *qel in kalanka, spot, kalusa dirty, kammāsa speckled, Gr. kelaino/s, Mhg. hilwe mist)=Lat. cālidus spot, Gr. khli/s spot, and khla/s dark cloud; cp. Lat. cālīgo mist, fog, darkness. -- (b) see below, under note. -- Hence. 2. the morning mist, or darkness preceding light, daybreak, morning (cp. E. morning=Goth. maúrgins twilight, Sk. marka eclipse, darkness; and also gloaming= gleaming=twilight), then: time in general, esp. a fixed time, a point from or to which to reckon, i. e. term or terminus (a quo or ad quem). -- Note. The definition of colour -- expressions is extremely difficult. To a primitive colour -- sense the principal difference worthy of notation is that between dark and light, or dull and bright, which in their expressions, however, are represented as complements for which the same word may be used in either sense of the complementary part (dark for light and vice versa, cp. E. gleam > gloom). All we can say is that kāla belongs to the group of expressions for dark which may be represented simultaneously by black, blue, or brown. That on the other hand, black, when polished or smooth, supplies also the notion of "shining" is evidenced by kāḷa and kaṇha as well, as e. g. by *skei in Sk. chāyā=Gr. skia/ shadow as against Ags. hāēven "blue" (E. heaven) and Ohg. skīnan, E. to shine and sky. The psychological value of a colour depends on its light -- reflecting (or light-absorbing) quality. A bright black appears lighter (reflects more light) than a dull grey, therefore a polished (añjana) black (=sukāḷa) may readily be called "brilliant." In the same way kāla, combined with other colour -- words of black connotation does not need to mean "black," but may mean simply a kind of black, i. e. brown. This depends on the semasiological contrast or equation of the passage in question. Cp. Sk. śyāma (dark -- grey) and śyāva (brown) under kāsāya. That the notion of the speckled or variegated colour belongs to the sphere of black, is psychologically simple (: dark specks against a light ground, cp. kammāsa), and is also shown by the second etymology of kāla=Sk. śāra, mottled, speckled=Lat. caerulus, black -- blue and perhaps caelum "the blue" (cp. heaven)=Gr. khru/los the blue ice -- bird. (On k > s cp. kaṇṇa > śṛṇga, kilamati > śramati, kilissati > ślis˚, etc.) The usual spelling of kāla as kāḷa indicates a connection of the ḷ with the r of śāra. -- The definition of kāḷa as jhām' angārasadisa is conventional and is used both by Bdhgh. and Dhpāla: DhsA 317 and PvA 90.
1. Kāḷa, dark, black, etc., in enumn of colours Vv 221 (see VvA 111). na kāḷo samaṇo Gotamo, na pi sāmo: mangura -- cchavi samano G. "The ascetic Gotamo is neither black nor brown: he is of a golden skin" M i.246; similarly as kāḷī vā sāmā vā manguracchavī vā of a kalyāṇī, a beautiful woman at D I.193= M. ii.40; kāḷa -- sāma at Vin iv.120 is to be taken as dark -- grey. -- Of the dark half of the month: see ˚pakkha, or as the new moon: āgame kāḷe "on the next new moon day" Vin i.176. -- of Petas: Pv ii.41 (kāḷī f.); PvA 561 (˚rūpa); of the dog of Yama (˚sunakha) PvA 151. -- In other connn: kāḷavaṇṇa -- bhūmi darkbrown (i. e. fertile) soil Vin i.48=ii.209.
-- añjana black collyrium Vini .203; -- ânusārī black, (polished?) Anusāri ("a kind of dark, fragrant sandal wood" Vin. Texts ii.51) Vin i.203; S iii.156= v.44= A v.22; -- ayasa black (dark) iron (to distinguish it from bronze, Rh. D., Miln trsl. ii.364; cp. blacksmith > silversmith) Miln 414, 415; -- kañjaka a kind of Asuras, Titans D iii.7; J v.187; PvA 272; -- kaṇṇī "black -- cared," as an unlucky quality. Cp. iii.611; J i.239; iv.189; v.134, 211; vi.347; DhA i.307; ii.26; the vision of the "black -- eared" is a bad omen, which spoils the luck of a hunter, e. g. at DhA iii.31 (referring here to the sight of a bhikkhu); as "witch" PvA 272; DhA iii.38, 181; as k -- k. sakuṇa, a bird of ill omen J ii.153; -- kaṇṇika= prec.; -- kabara spotted, freckled J vi.540; -- kesa (adj.) with glossy or shiny hair, by itself (kāḷa -- kesa) rare, e. g. at J vi.578; usually in cpd. susukāḷa -- kesa "having an over -- abundance of brilliant hair" said of Gotama. This was afterwards applied figuratively in the description of his parting from home, rising to a new life, as it were, possessed of the full strength and vigour of his manhood (as the rising Sun). Cp. the Shamash -- Saga, which attributes to the Sun a wealth of shiny, glossy (=polished, dark) hair (=rays), and kāḷa in this connection is to be interpreted just as kaṇha (q. v.) in similar combinations (e. g. as Kṛṣṇa Hṛṣīkesa or Kesavā). On this feature of the Sun -- god and various expressions of it see ample material in Palmer, The Samson Saga pp. 33 -- 46. -- The double application of su˚ does not offer any difficulty, sukāḷa is felt as a simplex in the same way as eu)plokamo/s or duh˚ in combns like sudubbala PvA 149, sudullabha VvA 20. Bdhgh. already interprets the cpd. in this way (DA i.284= suṭṭhu -- k˚, añjana -- vaṇṇa k˚ va hutvā; cp. kaṇh -- añjana J v.155). Cp. also siniddha -- nīla -- mudu -- kuñcita -- keso J i.89, and sukaṇhakaṇha J v.202. -- susukāḷakesa of others than the Buddha: M ii.66. Modern editors and lexicographers see in susu˚ the Sk. śiśu young of an animal, cub, overlooking the semantical difficulty involved by taking it as a separate word. This mistake has been applied to the compound at all the passages where it is found, and so we find the reading susu kāḷakeso at M i.82=A ii.22 =J ii.57; M i.163=A i.68=S i.9, 117; also in Childers' (relying on Burnouf), or even susū k˚ at S iv.111; the only passages showing the right reading susu -- k˚ are D i.115, M i.463. Konow under susu J.P.T.S. 1909, 212 has both. -- kokila the black (brown) cuckoo VvA 57; -- jallika (kāḷi˚ for kāḷa˚) having black drops or specks (of dirt) A i.253; -- daṇḍa a black staff, Sdhp 287 (attr. to the messengers of Yama, cp. Yama as having a black stick at Śat. Br. xi. 6, 1, 7 and 13); -- pakkha the dark side, i. e. moonless fortnight of the month A ii.18; -- ˚ cātuddasī the 14th day of the dark fortnight PvA 55; -- ˚ ratti a moonless night VvA 167; (opp. dosina r.) -- meyya a sort of bird J vi.539; -- loṇa black (dark) salt Vin i.202 (Bdhgh. pakati -- loṇa, natural salt); -- loha "black metal," iron ore Miln 267; -- valli a kind of creeper Vism 36, 183. -- sīha a special kind of lion J iv.208. -- sutta a black thread or wire, a carpenter's measuring line J ii.405; Miln 413; also N. of a Purgatory (nivaya) J v.266. See Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 76 -- 78; -- hatthin "black elephant," an instrument of torture in Avīci Sdhp 195.
2. Kāla time, etc. (a) Morning: kāle early Pv ii.941 (=pāto PvA 128), kālassa in the morning (gen. of time), early VvA 256. Cp. paccūsa -- kāle at dawn DhA iii.242. Opposed to evening or night in kāḷena in the morning Pv i.63 (opp. sāyaŋ). Kāle juṇhe by day and by night Nd2 631. -- (b) time in general: gacchante gacchante kāle in course of time DhA i.319; evaŋ gacchante kāle as time went on PvA 54, 75, 127, etc. -- kālaŋ for a time Vin i.176 (spelt kāḷaŋ); kañci kālaŋ some time yet VvA 288; ettakaŋ kālaŋ for a long time PvA 102. -- kālena kālaŋ (1) from time to time PvA 151; VvA 255, 276; -- (2) continuously, constantly A iv. 45; Pug 11 (+samayena samayaŋ); D i.74 (: but expld at DA i.218 by kāle kāle in the sense of "every fortnight or every ten days"). kāle in (all) time, always (cp. ai)ei/) Sn 73 (expl. in Nd2 by niccakāle under sadā; but at SnA 128 by phāsu -- kālena "in good time"); -- kāle kāle from time to time, or repeatedly VvA 352. See also cira˚, sabba˚. -- (c) Time in special, either (1) appointed time, date, fixed time, or (2) suitable time, proper time, good time, opportunity. Cp. Gr. kairi/s and w(=ra; or (3) time of death, death. <-> (1) Mealtime: PvA 25; VvA 6; esp. in phrase kālo bho Gotamo, niṭṭhitaŋ bhattaŋ "it is time, Gotama, the meal is ready" D i.119=226; Sn p. 111; and in kālaŋ āroceti or ārocāpeti he announces the time (for dinner) D i.109, 226; Sn p. 111; PvA 22, 141; VvA 173. -- date: kālato from the date or day of . . ., e. g. diṭṭha˚ paṭṭhāya "from the day that she first saw her" VvA 206; gihī˚ paṭṭhāya "from the day of being a layman" PvA 13. (2) proper time, right time: also season, as in utu˚ favourable time (of the year) Vin i.299; ii.173; kālaŋ jānāti "he knows the proper time" A iv.114; as cattāro kālā, four opportunities A ii.140; yassa kālaŋ maññasi for what you think it is time (to go), i. e. goodbye D i.106, 189, etc. The 3 times of the cycle of existence are given at Vism 578 as past, present, and future. -- kāla˚ (adj.) in (due) time, timely Vism 229 (˚maraṇa timely death). -- Opp. akāla (it is the) wrong time or inopportune D i.205; akāla -- cārin going (begging) at the improper time Sn 386. akālamegha a cloud arising unexpectedly (at the wrong time) Miln 144. -- kāle at the proper time, with vikāle (opp.) Vin i.199, 200; J ii.133; Sn 386. akāle in the wrong season VvA 288. kālena in proper time, at the right moment A ii.140; Sn 326, 387 (=yutta kālena SnA 374); Pv i.53 (=ṭhitakālena PvA 26); Pug 50; It 42; KhA 144 (=khaṇena samayena). Cp. vikāla. (3) The day, as appointed by fate or kamma, point of time (for death, cp. Vism 236), the "last hour," cp. h)mar, illa dies. So in the meaning of death appld not only to this earthly existence, but to all others (peta˚, deva˚, etc.) as well, in phrase kālaŋ karoti "he does his time=he has fulfilled his time" Vin iii.80; Sn 343, DhA i.70; and frequently elsewhere; cp. -- kata, -- kiriyā. -- As death in kālaŋ kankhati to await the appointed time S i.187; Sn 516 (cp. kankhati) and in dern kālika. -- Other examples for this use of kāla see under bhatta˚, yañña˚, vappa˚.
-- antara interval, period: kālantarena in a little while PvA 13; na kālantare at once PvA 19; -- kata (adj.) dead Sn 586, 590; in combn petā kālakatā "the Petas who have fulfilled their (earthly) time Sn 807; Pv i.57; i.121. Also as kālankata Pv ii.79; Vv 809; Vism 296. -- kiriyā death (often combd with maraṇa) M ii.108; A i.22, 77, 261 (as bhaddikā, cp. A iii.293); iv.320; Sn 694; Pv i.1012 (of a Petī who has come to the end of her existence); DhA ii.36; iv.77. -- gata=˚kata PvA 29, 40. -- ññū knowing the proper time for . . . (c. dat. or loc.) Sn 325; described at A iv.113 sq.; as one of the five qualities of a rājā cakkavattī (viz. atthaññū, dhamma˚, matta˚, k˚, parisa˚) A iii.148; one of the seven qual. of a sappurisa, a good man (=prec.+atta˚, puggala˚) D iii.252, 283; as quality of the Tathāgata D iii.134=Nd2 276; Pug 50. -- ññutā n. abstr. to prec. A ii.101; -- (p)pavedana announcement of death ( -- time) Th 1, 563=J i.118=Vism 389=DhA i.248. -- bhojana in a˚ eating at the improper time S v.470; -- vādin speaking at the proper time, in formula kāla˚ bhūta˚ attha˚ dhamma˚ vinaya˚ under sīla No. 7: D i.4; iii.175; DA i.76; A ii.22, 209; Pug 58; -- vipassin considering the right moment, taking the opportunity It 41. -- sataŋ (˚sahassaŋ, etc.) a hundred (thousand, etc.) times Vism 243.
Kālika (adj.) [fr. kāla 2] belonging to time, in time, as sabba -- kālika always in time, cp. Gr. w(rai_os Vv 392; with time, i. e. gradual, slowly, delayed S i.117=Nd2 645; usually neg. akālika 1. not delayed, immediate, in this world, comb. with sandiṭṭhika S ii.58; S i.117= iv.41=339=v.343; -- 2. subject to time, i. e. temporal, vanishing PvA 87; -- 3. unusual, out of season Miln 114 (cp. akāla). -- See also tāva -- kālika.
Kālīya a kind of (shiny) sandal wood; so to be read for tālīsa at Vin i.203 (see note on p. 381).
Kālusiya (and Kālussiya) (nt.) [der. fr. kalusa, stained, dirty see cognates under kammāsa and kāla] darkness, obscurity DA i.95; PvA 124 (cakkhu˚); fig. (dosa˚) VvA 30.
Kāḷa see kāla 1.
Kāḷaka (adj.) [fr. kāḷa] black, stained; in enumeration of colours at Dhs 617 (of rūpa) with nīla, pītaka, lohitaka, odāta, k˚, mañjeṭṭha; of a robe A ii.241; f. kāḷikā VvA 103; -- (nt.) a black spot, a stain, also a black grain in the rice, in apagata˚ without a speck or stain (of a clean robe) D i.110=A iv.186=210=213; vicita˚ (of rice) "with the black grains removed" D i.105; A iv.231; Miln 16; vigata˚ (same) A iii.49. -- A black spot (of hair) J v.197 (= kaṇha -- r -- iva). -- Fig. of character DhA iv.172.
Kāḷārika see kaḷārika.
Kāveyya (nt.) [grd. fr. kāvyate fr. kavi poet cp. Sk. kāvya] 1. poetry, the making of poems, poetry as business. one of the forbidden occupations D i.11 (= DA i.95 kabba -- karaṇa) -- 2. poetry, song, poem (of suttanta) A i.72=iii.107.
-- matta intoxicated with poetry, musing, dreaming S i.110, 196.
Kāsa1 [cp. Sk. kāśa] a kind of reed, Saccharum sponta- neum S iii.137.
Kāsa2 [cp. Sk. kāsa] cough; in list of diseases under ābādhā A v.110=Nd2 3041.
Kāsāya and Kāsāva (adj.) [Sk. kāṣāya from the Pāli; kāsāya prob. fr. Sk. śyāma or śyāva brown=Pāli sāma, with kā=kad, a kind of, thus meaning a kind of brown, i. e. yellow. See further under sāma and cp. kāla] 1. Kāsāya as attr. of vatthāni, the yellow robes of the Buddhist mendicant, in phrase kāsāyāni v˚ acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaŋ pabbajitvā, describing the taking up of the "homeless state" D i.60, 61, 63, 115; M ii.67; A i.107; ii.208; iv.118, 274, 280; Pug 57; Nd2 172. ˚vattha (adj.) with yellow robes Sn 64; cp. ɔnivattha J iii.179 (dressed in yellow, of the executioner: see Fick, Soziale Gliederung p. 104 & cp. kāsāya -- nivāsana J iii.41; kāsāviya J iv.447); PvA 20; ˚vāsin dressed in yellow Sn 487. -- 2. Kāsāva (vattha) the yellow robe (never in above formula) Vin i.287; S iv.190=v.53=301; Dh 9, 10=Th 1, 969, 970=J ii.198 =v.50; Miln 11. ˚kaṇṭhā (pl.) the "yellow necks" those whose necks are dressed in yellow Dh 307 (= DhA iii.480)=It 43; ˚pajjota glittering with yellow robes Vbh 247; Miln 19.
Kāsāvaka [fr. kāsāva] a yellow robe DhA ii.86.
Kāsāviya [fr. kāsāva] one who is dressed in yellow, esp. of the royal executioner (cp. kāsāya -- vattha) J iv.447 (=cora -- ghātaka C.).
Kāsika (adj.) [cp. Sk. kāśika & in a diff. sense aḍḍha -- kāsika] belonging to the Kāsī country, or to Benares; in ˚uttama (scil. vattha) an upper garment made of Benares cloth Pv i.108; J vi.49 (where to be read kāsik' uttama for kāsi -- kuttama). ˚vattha Benares muslin A i.248; iii.50; Pug 34; Miln 2; DhA i.417; Vism 115.
Kāsu [cp. Sk. karṣū, fr. kṛṣ] a hole; only in cpd. angāra- kāsu a cinderhole, a fire -- pit, usually understood as a pit of glowing cinders J i.232. Mostly found in similes, e. g. S iv.56, 188; Sn 396; Sdhp. 208; and in kāmā angārakās' ûpamā metaphor A iv.224=v.175; see also kāma.
Ki˚ 2nd. stem of interr. pron. (cp. ka˚ ku˚); 1. in oblique cases of ko (kaḥ), as gen. kissa. loc. kismiŋ & kiŋhi. <-> 2. in nt. kiŋ what? (cp. Gr. ti/, Lat. quid; ending -- m besides -- d in kad, as Lat. quom, tum besides quod, id). -- 3. in primary derivations, as kittaka, kīva (=Sk. kiyant) which stands in same relation to *qṷi as Lat. quantus to *qṷo; and in secondary derivations from kiŋ, as kiñci, kiñcakkha, kīdisa, etc.
Kiŋ [nt. of rel. pron. ka] 1. as nt. subst. what? sotānaŋ kiŋ nivāraṇaŋ what is the obstruction? Sn 1032; kiŋ tava patthanāya what is it about your wish, i. e. what good is your wish? VvA 226; kim idaŋ this is what, that is why, therefore, PvA 11; often with su in dubitative question: kiŋ sū' dha vittaŋ purisassa seṭṭhaŋ what, then, is the best treasure of man in this world? Sn 181; or with nu: kiŋ nu kho what is it then (in series evañ nu kho, na nu kho, kathaŋ nu kho) Nd2 186. -- Gen. kissa of what? Pv i.91; ii.940 (=kīdisassa) and in kissa hetu on the ground of what i. e. why? Sn 1131; Pv ii.81 (=kiŋ nimittaŋ). -- Instr. kena by what or how is it that: kena ssu nivuto loko Sn 1032. -- Acc. kiŋ: kiŋ kāhasi what will you do? Sn 428; kiŋ āgamma kiŋ ārabbha on what grounds & for what reason? D i.13, 14, etc.; kiŋ nissita to what purpose Sn 1043. -- Loc., kismiŋ in what or what about: kismiŋ vivādo "what is the quarrel about?" D i.237; or kimhi, e. g. kimhi sikkhamāno in what instructed? D ii.241 (corresponds to ettha=in this). The ŋ of kiŋ in Sandhi is either elided or contracted or undergoes the usual Sandhi changes; ki ha=kiŋ ha KhA 78, kissa= kiŋ assa Sn 1032; kīdisa (q. v.)=kiŋ disa; kiñci (see below)=kiŋ cid; kiŋ va a little: see kittaka. -- 2. as interr. particle, introducing a question=Lat. nonne, Gr. a)/n: kiŋ idāni pi dinne te labheyyuŋ? "Will they receive that which is given now?" PvA 22. So as disjunctive particle in comb. with udāhu (whether -- or): kiŋ -- udāhu what (about this) . . . or is it (otherwise), is it so . . . or is it not so? (cp. po/teron -- h)/, Lat. utrum -- an): kim imasmiŋ attabhāve pitaraŋ pucchasi udāhu atīte? "do you enquire about your father in this existence, or in a past one?" PvA 38; kiŋ nakkhattaŋ kīḷissasi udāhu bhatiŋ karissasi? "Will you take a holiday or will you work?" VvA 63. -- Very often modified and intensified by other exhortative particles: kiŋ aññatra (with abl.) unless (by), except for Sn 206 (see aññatra) kin nu kho why, but why, why in the world? D ii.131; J ii.159; DhA ii.91. As kimo in kimo nu why then? J iii.373; v.479 (=kim eva); kimu Sdhp 137; kim pana=nonne: kim pana bhante addasa? "Have you not seen?" D ii.132; kim pana tvaŋ maññasi what then do you think=do you not think then, that? . . . J i.171; kim anga how much more or less, i. e. far more, or far less Miln 274 as kim anga pana why then? M iii.181; Miln 23; Vism 233; kin ti how then? D ii.74; kin ti te sutaŋ have you not heard? D i.104; kintikaro= kathankaro q. v.; kiñca (cp. kiñcâpi under kiñci)= num -- que, nonne; is it not that, rather J i.135 (expld in c. by garahatte ca anuggahatthe nipāto). -- kiñci in comb. with yaŋ or yad: whatever; in other combn positive: some, neg.: na kiñci nothing; yad atthi kiñci whatever there is of . . . Sn 231; n'atthi kiñci there is nothing: see under atthi and kiñcana; kiñci n'atthi loke there is nothing in this world . . . Sn 1122. <-> kiñcâpi whatever, however much: kiñcâpi te tattha yatā caranti "however much they endeavour in this" Sn 1080; J i.147; It 114; KhA 187, 190. Same as disjunctive conjunction with foll. pana: (=Lat. quamvis) kiñcâpi hi . . . pana although . . . yet DhA i.391; kiñcâpi with pot. . . . atha kho although -- yet; it may be that -- but S i.72. -- 3. In composition (˚ -- ) often implying doubt, uncertainty ("what is it, that is so & so?"), or expressing strangeness (: doubtful likeness), e. g. kinnara a kind of man (but not sure about it), a half -- man; kimpakka odd -- looking or doubtful (poisonous) fruit; kimpurisa a strange man (doubtful whether man or beast); cp. kiŋsuka.
-- akkhāyin preaching what? in conn. with kiŋ vādin saying what? i. e. holding what views? A i.62; -- atthaŋ for what purpose J i.279. -- atthiya to what purpose J iv.239; Miln 19; VvA 230; to any purpose, of any use S v.171; -- abhiñña having what name? J vi.126. -- kara doing whatever (his duty), a servant, in k˚ -- patissāvin an obedient servant D i.60 (cp. expln at DA i.168) A iii.37; iv.265 sq.; ThA 252; -- karaṇīya business, occupation A iii.113, 116, 258; v.24, 90, 338; -- kāraṇā (abl. of kāraṇa) by reason of what, i. e. why? PvA 25; -- kusalagavesin striving after that which is good M i.163=240; -- jacca of what caste? Sn p. 80; -- nāma of what name? Miln 15, 17; DhA iii.397 (both konāma and kiŋnāma). -- pakka strange or unknown (doubtful) fruit, in ˚rukkha a tree with odd fruit (i. e. poisonous fruit, cp. Rām. ii.66, 6; Kern, Toev. s. v. takes it to be Strychnos nux vomica) J i.368. -- purisa 1. a wild man of the woods J iv.254; vi.272, 497. -- 2. =kinnara (q. v.) A i.77; J v.42, 416. f. kimpurisī J v.215, 216. -- phala=˚pakka, in ˚rukkha a tree with unknown (poisonous) fruit J i.271. -- rukkha what kind of tree J v.203. -- vādin holding what view? A i.62; -- samācāra (a) of what conduct, in comb. with; -- sīla of what character Sn 324 (=SnA 331).
Kiŋsuka [kiŋ+su+ka] N. of a tree (creeper), lit. "what- ever -- like," or "what do you call it," i. e. strange tree (see kiŋ su & kiŋ 3), pop. name for the Butea frondosa S iv.193 (parable of the k.); J ii.265 (˚opama -- jātaka); v.405; vi.536. Perhaps v. l. at SnA 284.
-- puppha the (red) flower of the k. tree Vism 252. -- vaṇṇa of the colour of the k. (flower) J i.73 (angārā ashes).
Kikita (?) dense, thick (?) SS at S iv.289 (for kuṭṭhita), said of the heat.
Kikī [onomat. to sound -- root kṛ (see note on gala), cp. Sk. kṛka -- vāku cock, after the cry of the bird] 1. (m.) the blue jay (J ii.350 k. sakuṇo). -- 2. (f.) a hen (or the female of the jay?), in simile fr. the Apadāna of a hen watching her egg Vism 36 (aṇḍaŋ anurakkhamānā); J iii.375 (rakkhati); cp. SnA 317 (kikī sakuṇikā aṇḍassa upari seti).
Kinkaṇika (m. nt.) [=kinkiṇika] a small bell J iv.362; VvA 12.
Kinkiṇika (m. nt.) [onomat. formation fr. sound part. kiṇi, see note on gala] a small bell J iv.259, 413; (suvaṇṇa˚); Vv 781 (=kinkiṇi VvA 303); Vin iii.42 (kinkiṇikā saddo).
-- jāla a net or fringe of tinkling bells D ii.183; J i.32; DhA i.274.
Kicca (nt.) [grd. of karoti=Sk. kṛtya] 1. (adj.) that which ought to be done, that which is to be performed; nt. something to do DhA i.15. Defd as kātabban ti kiccaŋ, kiñcid eva karaṇīyan ti KhA 218; kattabaŋ karaṇīyaŋ DhA iii.452. -- 2. (nt.) (a) duty, obligation, service, attention; ceremony, performance. The sg. is used collectively as pl. -- adj. ( -- ˚) one who is under an obligation, etc., or to whom an obligation, etc., is due A ii.67; Dh 276, 293; J iii.26; DhA i.5. -- kattabbak˚ -- karaṇa "the performance of incumbent duties" PvA 30; idaŋ me kiccaŋ akāsi "he has done me this service" PvA 29. -- In special sense of the duties to the dead: ahaŋ tava pitu ˚ŋ karomi "I will do the last duty to your father" PvA 274. -- a˚ that which is not (his) duty A ii.67; Dh 292, 293. -- (b) (as philos. term) function; rasa (essence) is either kicca r˚ -- or sampatti r, function or property. Cpd. 13, 213, n. l.; Vism 162 (parivyatta˚ quite conspicuous f.), 264 (abbhañjana˚ f. of lucubrating), 338, 493 (indriyānaŋ kiccaŋ), 547 (tad -- ārammaṇa˚, bhavanga˚, cuti˚, etc.); kiccavasena by way of f. Abhdh. -- sangaha v.8, cp. Dhs. trsl. 132 (with ref. to DhsA 264); kiccato Vism 581. -- appa˚ having few or no duties Sn 144 (cp. KhA 241. -- ārāmika˚ duties of the Ārāma J i.38. -- udaka˚ water -- performance, ablution D ii.15. -- kata˚ one who has performed his duties or mission, i. e. an Arahant Sn 1105; Vv 531 (cp. VvA 231. -- bahu˚ having many obligations, being very busy A iii.116 sq. -- bhatta˚ meal DA i.45 sq.; PvA 76; freq. in formula kata˚ (see kata), cp. kat -- annakicca Dāvs i.59. -- mata˚ funeral rites PvA 274. -- sarīra˚ the duties of the body, i. e. funeral rites PvA 74). <-> Note. In compn with kud˚ kicca appears as kuk -- kucca (q. v.).
-- âkiccā pl. (kicca+kicca, see Trenckner, Notes J.P.T.S. 1908, 127; cp. ṭhānāṭhāna, bhavābhava maggāmagga, phalāphala, etc.) duties of all kinds, various duties: ativasā assu kiccākiccesu "they shall serve me in all duties" Dh 74 (DhA ii.78=khuddakamahantesu karaṇīyesu "in small and great duties"); ˚esu yuttapayutto māṇavo (cp. a maid "of all work") VvA 298; ˚esu ussukā endeavouring to do all duties Sn 298 (but expld at SnA 319 as "zeal in what is to be done and what is not to be done," taken as kicca+ akicca cp. akicca); -- âdhikaraṇa settlement of the agenda at formal meetings of a chapter Vin ii.89= iii.164; iii.168; v.101 sq.; 150 sq.; See Vin Texts iii.45; -- kara doing one's duty S i.91; Sn 676; -- karaṇīyāni pl.=kiccākicca, various duties A iv.87; -- kārin=kiccakara A iii.443.
Kiccayatā (f.) [abstr. fr. last] duty Vin ii.89 (k˚ karaṇī- yatā); Miln 42.
Kiccha [see kasira] 1. (adj.) (a) distressed, in difficulty, poor, miserable, painful: kicchā vatâyaŋ idha vutti yaŋ jano passati kibbisakārī (miserable is the life of one who does wrong) Sn 676=parihīnattha, in poverty PvA 220 (kicco= kiccho). -- (b) difficult to obtain, hard, troublesome Dh 182 (kiccho manussapaṭilābho, DhA 235=dullabho). -- 2. (nt.) distress, misery, pain, suffering: kicchaŋ āpanno loko D ii.30; S ii.5; ˚ŋ vā so nigacchati "he gets into difficulties (i. e. becomes poor)" J v.330 (=dukkhaŋ nigacchati); Vism 314; DhA i.80. -- Oblique cases used adverbially: instr. kicchena with difficulty J i.147, 191 (paṭijaggita); v.331 (id.) abl. kicchā id. J v.330. -- akiccha (˚ -- ) without difficulty, easily, in phrase akiccha -- lābhin taking or sharing willingly (+kasira -- lābhin) M i.33, 354=S ii.278 =A ii.23, 36; A iii.31, 114.
-- patta fallen into misery Pv iii.54 (=PvA 199 dukkhappatta) -- vuttin living in misery, poor Pv ii.914 (=dukkhajīvita).
Kicchati [v. denom. fr. kiccha, cp. Sk. kṛcchrāyate] to be troubled, to be wearied, to suffer Th 1, 962 (w. acc. of obj.); usually with kilamati: k˚ kāyo kilamati Th 1, 1073. Used in a play of words with vicikicchati by Bdhgh at DhsA 354 as "ārammaṇaŋ nicchetuŋ asakkonto kicchati kilamati" and at Bdhd. 25 (on vicikicchā) as sabhāvaŋ vicinanto etāya kicchati kilamati.
Kiñcana (adj. -- nt.) [kiŋ+cana, equal to kiŋ+ci, indef. pron.] only in neg. sentences: something, anything. From the freq. context in the older texts it has assumed the moral implication of something that sticks or adheres to the character of a man, and which he must get rid of, if he wants to attain to a higher moral condition. <-> Def. as the 3 impurities of character (rāga, dosa, moha) at D iii.217; M i.298; S iv.297; Vbh 368; Nd2 206b (adding māna, diṭṭhi, kilesa, duccarita); as obstruction (palibujjhana), consisting in rāga, etc. at DhA iii.258 (on Dh 200). Khīṇa -- saŋsāro na c'atthi kiñcanaŋ "he has destroyed saŋsāra and there is no obstruction (for him)" Th 1, 306. n'āhaŋ kassaci kiñcanaŋ tasmiŋ na ca mama katthaci kiñcanaŋ n'atthi "I am not part of anything (i. e. associated with anything), and herein for me there is no attachment to anything" A ii.177.<-> akiñcana (adj.) having nothing Miln 220. -- In special sense "being without a moral stain," def. at Nd2 5 as not having the above (3 or 7) impurities. Thus freq. an attribute of an Arahant: "yassa pure ca pacchā ca majjhe ca n'atthi kiñcanaŋ akiñcanaŋ anādānaŋ tam ahaŋ brūmi brāhmaṇan" Dh 421=Sn 645, cf. Th i. 537; kāme akiñcano "not attached to kāma" as Ep. of a khīṇāsava A v.232 sq.=253 sq. Often combd with anādāna: Dh 421; Sn 620, 645, 1094. -- Akiñcano kāmabhave asatto "having nothing and not attached to the world of rebirths" Vin i.36; Sn 176, 1059; -- akiñcanaŋ nânupatanti dukkhā "ill does not befall him who has nothing" S i.23. -- sakiñcana (adj.) full of worldly attachment Sn 620=DA 246.
Kiñcikkha (nt.) [E. Mūller P. Gr. p. 35 expls kiñcid+ka] a trifle, a small thing: yaŋ vā taŋ vā appamattakaŋ Sn 121; 131; PugA 210 (iii.4). āmisa -- kiñcikkha -- hetu "for the sake of a little gain" A i.128=Pug 29; at Pv ii.83 as āmisa -- kiñci -- hetu (but all vv. ll. B. have ˚kiñcakkha˚) "for some food" (expld at PvA 107: kiñci āmisaŋ patthento); -- katā kiñcikkhabāvanā at S iv.118 is evidently corrupt (v. l. ˚bhādhanā for bādhanā? ).
-- kamyatā in the desire for some little thing Sn 121 (cp. SnA 179: appamattake kismiñcid eva icchāya).
Kiñjakkha (m. nt.) [cp. Sk. kiñjalka & remarks at Aufrecht Halāyudha p. 186] a filament, esp. of the lotus S iii.130; J i.60, 183; v.39; Vv 221; -- vāri˚ Pv ii.120 (=kesara PvA 77) in combn with kesara VvA 12, 111, 175.
Kiṭaka [doubtful] only at Pv i.92,4, of clothes which are changed into missā kiṭakā, which is expl. at PvA 44 by kiṭakasadisāni lohapaṭṭasadisāni bhavanti "they become like (hot) copper plates."
Kiṭika at Vin ii.153 of ālinda, a verandah, said to be saŋ- saraṇa˚ ugghāṭana˚ (a movable screen or a curtain that can be drawn aside) Vin Texts iii.174, 176.
Kiṭṭha [cp. Sk. kṛṣṭa kṛṣ] growing corn, the crop on the ground, a cornfield A iii.393 (in simile), cp. S iv.195.
-- āda eating corn A iii.393. -- ārakkha the guardian of the cornfield S iv.196. -- sambādha "when the corn is thick," in ˚samaye near harvest -- time M i.115 (in simile); J i.143 (sassa -- samaye+), 338.
Kiṇakiṇāyati [=kinkiṇāyati, denom. fr. kinkiṇi, small bell] to tinkle; also spelt kiṇikiṇāyati J iii.315. See also kilikilāyati and cp. Sk. kiṭikiṭāyati to grind (one's teeth) & Prk. kiḍikiḍiya (chattering) Weber, Bhagavatī p. 289; also BSk. kaṭakaṭāyati Tal. Vist. 251. See taṭataṭayati & note on gala.
Kiṇāti [krī Vedic kriṇāti] to buy Vism 318; pot. kiṇe J v.375; ger. kiṇitvā M i.384; J i.92, 94; inf. kiṇituŋ J iii.282.
Kiṇi (indecl.) a part., expressing the sound of a small bell: "tink" DhA i.339 (v. l. kiri; see also kili and note on gala).
Kiṇṇa1 [cp. Sk. kiṇva] ferment, yeast; Vin ii.116; VvA 73.
Kiṇṇa2 [pp. of kirati] strewn, scattered, covered; only in compn with profixes: ā˚, o˚, ud˚, upa˚, pari˚, saŋ˚; see also appa˚.
Kiṇha (adj.) [see kaṇha; DA i.254 kiṇhā ti kaṇhā, kāḷakā ti attho] black; in the stock phrase muṇḍakā samaṇakā ibbhā k˚ bandhupādâpaccā D i.90=116; S iv.117; M i.334; ii.177; in a moral sense=bad, wicked, with nâlam -- ariyā dhammā D i.163.
Kita [pp. of kṛ, with i for a, cp. kiraṇa for karaṇa. The Dhtp. expld by nivāsane] 1. adorned: mālā˚ adorned with garlands Vin iii.249. -- 2. soiled, only in cpds. kaṇṇa˚ said of a wall, also of the ground at Vin i.48= ii.209; and paŋsu˚, soiled with dust Vin ii.121, 174.
Kitava & kitavā [=kaṭavā? cp. kaṭa] one who plays false; a cheat; adj. deceitful S i.24; J v.116; 117 (a˚); -- kitavā at Dh 252 (=DhA iii.375) in combn with saṭha also at J vi.228, where the connection with kaṭa is evident: kaṭaŋ Aḷāto gaṇhāti kiṭavā sikkhito yathā= like one who is skilled in having the kaṭa, the lucky die. Expld at DhA iii.375 as taken from fowling: kitavāya attabhāvaŋ paṭicchādeti "he hides himself by means of a pretence" (behind sham branches).
Kittaka (pron. interr.) [fr. kīva, cp. ettaka & BSk. kettaka (MVastu i.50); see Trenckner, Notes p. 134] how much? how great? nt. as adv.: to what extent? pl.: how many? Vin i.297; k˚ŋ antovassaŋ avasiṭṭhaŋ "how much of the rainy season is left?" VvA 66; kittakā pana vo bhante parivāra -- bhikkhū? "How many bhikkhus are in your retinue?" J i.32. -- As indef.: a little; kittakaŋ jīvissāmi, J v.505; kittakaŋ addhānaŋ a short time VvA 117 (=kiŋva ciraŋ).
Kittana (nt.) [f. kitteti] praise PvA 31, 107.
Kittāvatā (adv.) to what extent? how far? in what respect? K˚ nu kho mahāpurisa hoti "in what respect is a man a great man?" Nd2 502 B; k˚ nu kho paññavā ti vuccati? M i.292.
Kitti & Kittī f. [Vedic kīrti, *qer: cp. Gr. karkai/rw, Ohg. hruod, hruom=Ger. ruhm; *qār: cp. Sk. kāru poet; Gr. kh_ruc herald, Lat. carmen hymn of praise. -- The explns of Dhtp (579) & Dhtm (812) are saŋsadde & saŋsaddane] fame, renown, glory, honour, yaso ca kittī ca S i.25; kittiñ ca sukhañ ca S i.187; yaso kitti sukhañ ca A ii.32 yaso kittī ca "fame and renown" Sn 817 (=Nd1 147, where appl. to the religious perfection attained by a samaṇa); Sn 185 (in the same sense); VvA 68 (bāhira˚ -- bhāva becoming known outside); yaso kitti Sdhp 234.
-- sadda the sound of fame, praise, renown (thutighosa DA i.146) esp. appld to the Buddha, whose fame is heralded before him: Bhagavantaŋ Gotamaŋ evaŋ kalyāṇo k˚ -- saddo abbhuggato "the high reputation went forth over the world, concerning the Venerable Gotama": (such is this Exalted One, Arahant, etc.) D i.49, 87, 115, 116, 236; S iv.323, 374; v.352; A i.57, 180; iii.30, 39, 58, 253, 267; iv.80; etc. The same with reference to others: Miln 284. Appld to the good reputation of a man (of a kalyāṇamitta) at Pug 37; the opposite is pāpako kittisaddo, bad reputation: A i.126; iii.269; Pug 36; -- vaṇṇa praise, in ˚hara receiving or deserving praise D iii.191; cp. ˚bhatā Nd1 147.
Kittika (adj.) [fr. kitti] famous VvA 200.
Kittita (pp. of kitteti] told Bdhd 124; su˚ well told Sn 1057.
Kittima (adj.) [cp. Sk. kṛtimā, der. fr. kṛti, karoti, in sense of kata i.2 (a) made up, artificial; clever, skilful ThA 227; DhA 391 (of nāma); VvA 275 (of ratha: cleverly constructed)]. Cp. also kutta, -- f. kittimā at J iii.70; vi.508 is according to Kern, Toev. s. v. a misspelling for tittima.
Kitteti [v. den. fr. kitti] 1. to praise, extol PvA 124, 162; -- 2. to proclaim, announce, relate, tell; ppr. kittento praising PvA 159. -- fut. kittayissati in sense of aor. Vv 345 (=katheti VvA 151). -- kittayissāmi I shall relate Sn 1053, 1132. grd: kittanīya to be praised PvA 9. -- aor. akittayi Sn 875, 921. -- pp. kittita.
Kinnara [kiŋ+nara, lit. what -- man, see kiŋ 3] a little bird with a head like a man's] J iv.106, 254, 438, v.47, 456; Mil 267. Canda kinnara Np. J i.91, vi.283, vi.74. <-> f. kinnarā Np. of a queen J v. 437 sq., and kinnarī Th 2, 381 (cp. ThA 255), J ii.121 (matta -- kinnarī viya), 230; iv.432 sq. Cp. kimpurisa.
Kinnāma see under kiŋ.
Kipillikā (f.) & Kipillaka (nt.) [Cp. Sk. pipīlikā, see Trenckner, Notes, p. 108] an ant Sn 602 (kuntha˚); DhA i.360; J iv.142 (kuntha˚); v.39 (tamba˚ -- ˚āni); Miln 272. -- kipillaka J i.487 (v. l. BB. for pillaka); iv.375 (tamba˚ -- puṭa); DhA iv.134 (v. l. SS. for T. pillaka). -- Cp. kuntha & pipīlikā.
Kibbisa (nt.) [Ved. kilbiṣa, according to Grassmann to *kil as in kilāsa, thus originally "stain, dirt." Buddh. Sk. kilviṣa classed with aparādha at Mvyntp. 245 No. 903] wrongdoing, demerit, fault, usually with ˚ŋ karoti to do wrong Sn 246; Sdhp, 204; J iii.135 or ˚ŋ pasavati A v.75; Vin ii.198. -- kata˚ (adj.) having done wrong in akata -- kalyāṇo, etc. A ii.174 and ≈(see kalyāṇa and kata ii.1 a); M i.39; Pv iv.77; PvA 59.
-- kāraka1=next J iii.14; -- kārin, doing wrong Sn 665 sq.; PvA 58.
Kibbisaka=kibbisa Sdhp 290.
Kimi m. [Vedic kṛmi] a worm, vermin: setā kimī kaṇha- sīsā A iii.241; Miln 272; DA i.199; -- As animal of death and putrefaction M i.507; J i.146; Sn 201; esp. with ref. to the punishment of Petas: Pv i.31; Th 2, 439; PvA 192; Sdhp 603. As glow -- worm M ii.34; 41 (with khajjopanaka); sālaka˚ a very minute insect Miln 312. In similes: Th 1, 1175 (kimī va mīlhasallitto); Vism 500, 598. In cpd. kimi -- kula the worm kind (genus worm) Miln 100; Vism 235; ˚gaṇa crowd of worms Vism 314.
Kimina (adj.) [from kimi] covered with worms J v.270.
Kira (& Kila) [Vedic kila] adv. 1. emphatic: really, truly, surely. (Gr. dh/) -- 2. presumptive (with pres. or fut.): I should think one would expect. -- 3. narrative (with aor.): now, then, you know (Gr. de\, Lat. at, G. aber). <-> kira in continuous story is what "iti" is in direct or indirect speech. It connects new points in a narrative with something preceding, either as expected or guessed. It is aoristic in character (cp. Sk. sma). In questions it is dubitative, while in ordinary statements it gives the appearance of probability, rather than certainty, to the sentence. Therefore the definitions of commentators: "people say" or "I have heard": kirasaddo anussavane: "kira refers to a report by hearsay" PvA 103; kira -- saddo anussav'atthe J i.158; VvA 322 are conventional and one -- sided, and in both cases do not give the meaning required at the specified passages. The same holds good for J i.158 & ii.430 (kirā ti anussavatthe nipāto). -- 1. mahantaŋ kira Bārāṇasirajjaŋ "the kingdom of B. is truly great" J i.126; attā hi kira duddamo "self is difficult to subdue, we know" Dh 159; amoghaŋ kira me puṭṭhaŋ Sn 356. -- na kira surely not Sn 840; J i.158. -- 2. esā kira Visākhā nāma "that I presume is the Visākhā" (of whom we have heard) DhA i.399; petā hi kira jānanti "the petas, I should say, will know" Pv ii.710; evaŋ kira Uttare? "I suppose this is so, Uttarā" VvA 69. evaŋ kira saggaŋ gamissatha "thus you will surely go to Heaven" Vv 828; "I hear" DhA i.392. -- 3. atīte kira with aor. once upon a time . . . PvA 46, etc.; so kira pubbe . . . akāsi, at one time, you know, he had made . . . J i.125; sā kira dāsī adāsi now the maid gave her . . . PvA 46; cp. J i.195, etc.
Kiraṇa (nt.) 1. [fr. kṛ, karoti to do] an occupation, place of work, workshop J iv.223. Cp. kita & kittima. <-> 2. [fr. kṛ, kirati to scatter, cp. pp. kiṇṇa] scattering, effusion (of sun rays), effulgence VvA 169, 199.
Kirati [kīr] to scatter, strew; not found in simples, only in cpds. apa˚, abbhuk˚, abhi˚, ava˚ (o˚), pari˚, vi˚. See also pp., kiṇṇa2.
Kirāta (& kirāṭa) [prob. dial.] a man of a tribe of jungle- men, classed with dwarfs among the attendants of a chief DA i.148. See on the Kirāta as a mountain tribe Zimmer, Altindisches Leben p. 34. Cp. also apakiritūna & okirati2, okiraṇa. -- A secondary meaning of kirāṭa is that of a fraudulent merchant, a cheat (see kirāsa & kerāṭika).
Kirāsa (adj.) [a by -- form of kirāṭa] false, fraudulent J iv.223 (=kerāṭika).
Kiriyati [Pass. of kirati or karoti] to be affected or moved Vism. 318.
Kiriya, Kiriyā & Kriyā [abstr. fr. karoti] 1. (n.) -- (a) ( -- ˚) action, performance, deed; the doing=fulfilment; cp. ˚karaṇa, anta˚, making an end of, putting a stop to (dukkhassa) S iii.149; iv.93; Sn 454, 725; -- kāla˚ "fulfilment of one's time" i. e. death S iii.122; Pv i.1012; Sn 694; Pug 17; kusala˚ performance of good actions S i.101; v.456; dāna˚ the bestowing of gifts PvA 123; pāpa˚ commission of sin Pug 19=23; puñña˚ the performance of good works S i.87=89=A iii.48; a˚ PvA 54 mangala˚ celebration of a festival PvA 86; massu -- kiriyā the dressing of the beard J iii.314 (cp. m -- karaṇa and kappanā); sacchi˚ realization, see s. v. -- akiriyā the non -- performance of, omission, abstaining from (a˚ akaraṇa=veramaṇī) J iii.530; Vbh 285. <-> (b) an act in a special sense=promise, vow, dedication, intention, pledge: PvA 18; justice: Miln 171; kiriyaŋ bhindati to break one's vow Miln 206. -- (c) philosophically: action ineffective as to result, non -- causative, an action which ends in itself (Mrs. Rh. D. in Dhs. trsl. xciii.), inoperative (see Cpd. 19). In this sense it is grouped with kamma (cp. for relation kamma: kiriyā= Ger. sache: ursache). Thus is the theory of Makkhali: n'atthi kammaŋ, n'atthi kiriyaŋ n'atthi viriyan ti= there is no karma, no after -- effect and no vigour in this world A i.286 (different at D i.53); n'atthi kiriyā it does not matter M i.405. -- 2. (adj.) (a) making no difference, indefinite; of no result, as def. of avyākatā dhammā Vbh 106, 182=302=Dhs 566 and 989 (manodhātu kiriyā neva kusalā nâkusalā na ca kammavipākā: indifferent, neither good nor bad and having no fruit of kamma), same of jhāna Vbh 268=281; DhsA 388. -- (b) indecisive, in akiriyaŋ vyākaroti to give an indecisive answer, to reply evasively D i.53 and≈
-- pada (ttg.) the verb (i. e. that which supplies the action) VvA 315; -- vāda (adj.) promulgating the (view of a) consequence of action, believing in merit and demerit, usually combd with kammavāda (q. v.) also ˚vādin: D i.115 (of Gotama) A i.62; Vin i.71; a˚<-> denying the difference between merit & demerit A iv.174=Vin i.234; 242, Vin iii.2; A iv.180 sq.; S iii.73. (+natthikavāda); -- vādin adj. to prec. A i.62; -- hetu being a cause of discrimination Dhs 1424 sq.
Kiriyatā (f.) [abstr. fr. last] the performance of ( -- ˚), state of, etc. See sakkacca˚, sacchi˚, sātacca˚.
Kirīṭin (adj.) enveloped, adorned Pv iii.91 (=veṭhitasīsa).
Kila see kili (the sound click).
Kilañjā (f.) a mat of fibre or rushes, matting Vism 327; also a screen, a fascine, hurdle, faggots; a crate, crating: tassa gandhabbaŋ kilañjā -- kaṇḍūvanaŋ viya hutvā . . . J ii.249; "his music was like the scraping of a mat"; suvaṇṇa -- kilañjā a gilt mat J iv.212. As a fascine, used in making a road: DhA i.442. as a screen (combd with chatta, fan) PvA 127; as faggots: J i.158; Miln 287; as a crate or basket, used by distillers: M i.228= 374 (soṇḍikā -- kilañjā) (cp. the trsln under soṇḍa in J.P.T.S. 1909); to which is likened the hood of a snake: S i.106 (snake=māra).
Kilanta [pp. of kilamati] tired, exhausted, weary, either with ˚kāya tired in body PvA 43; VvA 65 (indicating the falling asleep); or ˚citta tired in mind D i.20= iii.32 (paduṭṭhacitta+, of the waning of the gods); or both ˚kāya -- citta Pv iii.23; opp. akilanta -- kāya -- citta alert, vigorous; with sound body and mind.
Kilama [spelt klama, fr. klam] fatigue J v.397 (=kilanta- bhāva).
Kilamati [Sk. klamati, a variation of śramati sri from sri to lean, cp. kilanta, as "sleepy," and Lat. clīnāre, clemens. To k > ś cp. kaṇṇa > śṛṇga, kilissati > śliṣyati, etc. The Dhtp (222) & Dhtm (316) paraphrase kilam by gilāne.] 1. to go short of, to be in want of (instr.) DhA ii.79; na piṇḍakena kilamati does not go short of food Vin ii.15, 87; iv.23 sq. -- 2. to weary, to be wearied, tired, fatigued; to be in trouble or in misery PvA 215 (to be incommodated) 277 (be in distress); fut. kilamissāmi PvA 76. Cp. pari˚. -- pp. kilanta.
Kilamatha [fr. klam, in formation cp. samatha] tiredness, fatigue, exhaustion M i.168; A ii.199; S i.136; as kāya˚, citta˚ S v.128; as daratha˚ A iii.238; PvA 23; as niddā˚ A ii.48, 50.
Kilamita [pp. of kilameti] worn out, tired, fatigued Pvii.83.
Kilameti [denom. fr. kilama] to be tired or fatigued J i.115; ppr. kilamayanto D i.52. -- pp. kilamita.
Kilāsa [cp. Sk. kilāsa] a cutaneous disease, perhaps leprosy, enumd under the var. diseases (ābādhā) together with kuṭṭha gaṇḍa k˚ sosa Vin ii.271; A v.110; Nd2 3041.
Kilāsika & ˚iya (adj.) [fr. last] afflicted with a cutaneous disease, a leper, in same combn as kilāsa, Vin i.93; Kvu 31 (˚iya).
Kilāsu [fr. sram, cp. kilamatha. E Müller P. Gr. 38= glāsnu, glā, cp. gilāna] exhausted, tired of (c. dat. or inf.) Vin iii.8; a˚ untiring in (c. dat. or acc.) S i.47; v.162; J i.109; Miln 382.
Kili (sometimes kila) [onomat. fr. sound -- root k&lcircle;] 1. in- decl. the sound "click," of the noise of a trap when shutting J i.243; ii.363, 397 (as "kilī"). -- Also repeated "kilikilī ti" click, click J i.70. -- 2. as n. f. tinkling, clicking, ticking (cp. kiṇi), in kiliŋ karoti to tinkle J v.203.
Kilikilāyati [denom. fr. kili with reduplication] to tinkle J v.206; (freq. fr. kili or den. fr. kilikilā; cp. kilakilā "shouting for joy" AvŚ i.48 and in cpd. hāhākārakilakilā "shouting hā -- hā and hail -- hail" ibid. i.67 MVastu iii.312 and Divy 459). See also kiṇakiṇāyati. Note. -- Kil is one of the variations of the sound -- imitating qel, which otherwise appears as qal, qul in Gr. kel -- ados, L. cal -- are, Ohg. hell -- an (cp. Sk. krandati?) also Gr. kla/zw, L. clango, Goth. hlahjan ("laugh") and in Sk kolāhala, kokila, cp. cuculus (cuckoo) and perhaps Sk. ululī, ulūka (owl), Gr. o)lolu/zw, L. ululare. See also the cognate qer under kitti.
Kilijjati [med -- pass. of kilid=Sk. klid, to be wet. prob.= śliṣ to stick to, and confounded with svid, cp. also kelana & khela. The meaning "to get wet, to be soiled" only in pp. kilinna. -- The Dhtm (199), however, expls k. by parideva lament, to be in trouble, which is not quite in harmony with the meaning; it is more likely that in P. we have a confusion between klid & kliś in a meaning which differs from Sk.] to become heated, to get into a state of inflammation, to fester (of wounds) Vin i.205 (vaṇo kilijjittha festered); Sn 671 (gloss for kilissati, expld at SnA 481 by pūti hoti). -- pp. kilinna. See also ukkiledeti (to clean out a stain, to "disinfect").
Kiliṭṭha [pp of kilissati] 1. soiled, stained, impure; of gatta, limbs J i.129; of cīvara, cloak Bdhd 92; of vattha, clothes DhA ii.261; of pāvāra -- puppha, mango blossom KhA 58=Vism 258. -- 2. unclean, lustful (morally) bad, in ˚kamma dirty pursuit, i. e. cohabitation J iv.190; PvA 195 (of a gaṇikā); together with kuthita Miln 250.
Kilinna [pp. of kilijjati] 1. wet, usually with saliva and perspiration Vin iii.37; J i.61 (lālā˚), 164 (kheḷa˚); DA i.284 (assu˚); VvA 67 (seda˚). -- 2. The other meaning of kilid (to get inflamed) is to be found in kilinna -- sarīra (adj.) with an inflamed body (i. e. suffering from a skin -- disease), which is Bdhgh's expln of okilinī: see under okiraṇa.
Kilissati [Sk. kliśyati=kliś or śliṣ to adhere, cp. P. kheḷa and silesuma or semha, Sk. śleṣma, slime. Same root as Gr. lei/mac snail; Ags. slīm slime. Another, specifically Pali, meaning is that of going bad, being vexed, with ref. to a heated state. This lies at the bottom of the Dhtp. (445) & Dhtm. (686) expln by upatāpe.] 1. to get wet, soiled or stained, to dirty oneself, be impure It 76 (of clothes, in the passing away of a deva); Th 1, 954 (kilisissanti, for kilissanti); Ps i.130. Kilisseyya Dh 158 (expld as nindaŋ labhati) to do wrong. Cp. pari˚.
Kilissana (nt.) getting dirty, staining J i.8.
Kilesa (and klesa) [from kilissati] 1. stain, soil, impurity, fig. affliction; in a moral sense, depravity, lust. Its occurrence in the Piṭakas is rare; in later works, very frequent, where it is approx. tantamount to our terms lower, or unregenerate nature, sinful desires, vices, passions.
1. Kilesa as obstacle (see ˚āvaraṇa, ˚ -- sampayutta, ˚ -- vippayutta, ˚pahāna) Ps i.33; Sdhp 455; bhikkhu bhinnakileso "one whose passions are broken up" Vḅh 246, PvA 51; upasanta kileso "one whose passions are calmed" PvA 230; no ce pi jātu puriso kilese vāto yathā abbhaghanaŋ vihāne Sn 348; pariyodapeyya attānaŋ cittaklesehi paṇḍito S v.24=A v.232, 253=Dh 88. 2. Occurs in such combinations as kilesā ca khandhā ca abhisankhārā ca Nd2 487; kilesa+khandha: Ps i.69<-> 72; ii.36, 140; cp. Vbh 44, 68; kilesa+saŋsāra PvA 7; kammaŋ kilesā hetu saŋsārassa Nett 113, cp. 191. <-> 3. kilesa also occurs in a series explanatory of taṇhā, in the stereotype combn of t., diṭṭhi, kilesa "clinging to existence, false ideas and lust" (see Nd2 s. v. taṇhā v.). -- 4. In the same function it stands with rāga, viz. rāga dosa moha kilesa, i. e. sensuality, bewilderment and lust (see Nd2 s. v. rāga ii.), cp. Dhs 982, 1006. <-> The grouping as dasa kilesa -- vatthūni is: lobha dosa moha māna diṭṭhi vicikicchā thīnaŋ uddhaccaŋ ahirikaŋ anottappaŋ Dhs 1548=Vbh 341; Vism 683; mentioned at Ps i.130. -- These with the exception of the last two, are also grouped as aṭṭha k˚ -- vatthūni at Vbh 385. -- As three kilesas (past, present and future) at Ps ii.217. -- 5. The giving up of kilesa is one of the four essentials of perfection: the recognition of evil, the removal of its source (which is kilesa), the meditation on the Path, and the realization of the extinction of evil (see Nd2 s. v. dukkha ii.). Kilesa in this connection interchanges with samudaya, as denoting the origin of evil; cp. samudayo kilesā Nett 191.
-- āvaraṇa the obstacle of lust Vbh 342 Pug 13; Vism 177; ˚āvaraṇatā id. A iii.436; -- kkhaya the destruction of lust Bdhd 81; -- paripantha danger of lust J vi.57; -- pahāna the giving up of worldly lust Vin iii.92 sq., iv.25; Bdhd 129, 131; -- puñja the heap of lusts; consisting of ten qualities, viz. the four āhārā (etc. four of each:), vipallāsā, upādānāni, yogā, gandhā, āsavā, oghā, sallā, viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo, agatigamanāni. Nett 113, 114; 116 sq. -- bhūmi the substratum or essence of lust Nett 2, 192; there are four mentioned at Nett 161: anusaya˚, pariyuṭṭhāna˚, saŋyojana˚, upādāna˚; -- māra death which is the consequence of sinful desire DhA i.317 (in expl. of Māra); -- vatthūni (pl.) the (10) divisions of kilesa (see above) Dhs 1229, 1548; Vism 20. -- vinaya the discipline of lust Nett 22; -- vippayutta free from lust (dhamma principles, to which belongs Nibbāna) Dhs 1555; -- sampayutta connected or affected with lust Dhs 1554 (as 12 principles); Vbh 18=30=44=56, 68, 80, 96, 120, 323.
Kileseti [v. den. fr. kilesa] to become soiled or stained (fig.): indriyāni kilesenti Sdhp. 364.
Kiloma [=next?] at J iii.49 taken as syn. of loma, hair and used in sense of pharusa, shaggy, rough (in kiloma maŋsakhaṇḍa as simile for kiloma -- vācā).
Kilomaka [=Sk. kloman, the right lung, cp. Greek pleu/mwn, Lat. pulmo] the pleura M i.185 = Kh iii, Nett 77=Vbh 193; J iv.292; Miln 26. Discussed in detail at Vism 257, 357.
Kisa (adj.) [Sk. kṛśa, perhaps to Lat. gracilis, slim] lean, haggard, emaciated, opp. thūla fat (VvA 103). As Ep. of ascetics Sn 165, Dh 395=Th 1, 243; esp. as Ep. of petas: Pv ii.113; Sn 426, 585; Sdhp 101; Miln 303. For phrase kisa -- dhamani -- santhata see the latter.
Kisaka=kisa Vin i.36=J i.83; f. kisikā Th 2, 27.
Kissati [den. fr. kisa] 1. to get thin, to become exhausted, to waste, weary, worry J vi.495 (pret. mā kisittha= C. mā kisā bhava). -- 2. [Pass. of kassati, kṛṣ] see pari˚
Kissava in neg. akissava at S i.149 is doubtful in origin and meaning. The trsln gives "without wisdom." Should we read akittima or akiñcana, as we suggested under a˚, although this latter does not quite agree with the sense required?
Kīṭa (nt.) [cp. Sk. kīṭa] a general term for insect DhA i.187; usually in combn with paṭanga, beetle (moth?) M iii.168 (with puḷava); Sn 602; J vi.208; Miln 272 (˚vaṇṇa); PvA 67; Vism 115. kīṭa at J v.373 means a kind of shield (= cāṭipāla ? c.), the reading should prob. be kheṭa.
Kīṭaka (nt.) one or all kinds of insects Vin i.188.
Kīta [pp. of kiṇāti] bought J i.224 (˚dāsa a bought slave) ii.185.
Kīdisa (interr. adj.) [cp. Sk. kīdṛś=kiŋ dṛśa] what like? of what kind? which? (cp. tādisa) Sn 836, 1089 (=kiŋ saṇṭhita Nd2; Pv ii.63; PvA 50, 51; VvA 76). -- As Np. S iv.193. -- See also Kīrisa.
Kīra [cp. Sk. kīra] a parrot Abhp 640 (cp. cirīṭi).
Kīrisa=kīdisa Th 2, 385 (cp. ThA 256).
Kīla=a pin, a stake, see Khīla.
Kīḷati [Sk. krīḍati] to play, sport, enjoy or amuse oneself Vin iv.112 (udake k. sport in the water); Pv ii.121 (=indriyāni paricarāmi PvA 77) D ii.196; J v.38; Th 2, 147; PvA 16, 67, 77, 189; -- c. acc. to celebrate: nakkhattaŋ J i.50; VvA 63; PvA 73; ThA 137; chaṇaŋ DhA iii.100. -- pp. kīḷita. Caus. II. kīḷāpeti to make play, to train J ii.267 (sappaŋ to train or tame a snake).
Kīḷanaka [fr. kīḷati] a plaything, a toy Th 2, 384 (with ref. to the moon).
Kīḷanā (f.) [fr. same) playing, sport, amusement Nett 18; PvA 67; DhA iii.461 (nakkhatta˚ celebration).
Kīḷā f. [fr. krīḍ, cp. Sk. krīḍā] play, sport, enjoyment; udakakīḷaŋ kīḷantī enjoying herself on the water PvA 189. -- uyyāna˚ amusement in the park DhA i.220; iv. 3; nakkhatta -- kīḷaŋ kīḷati to celebrate a festival (i. e. the full moon when standing in a certain Nakkhatta) VvA 109, ThA 137; sāla -- kīḷā sport in the sāla woods J v.38; kīḷādhippāyena in play, for fun PvA 215; -- Cp. kīḷikā.
-- goḷa a ball to play with Vism 254. -- goḷaka id. Vism 256 (cp. KhA 53); ThA 255; -- pasuta bent on play J i.58; -- bhaṇḍaka (nt.) toy Miln 229 (= kīḷāpanaka M i.266); -- maṇḍala play -- circle, children's games, playground J vi.332; DhA iii.146; -- sālā playhouse J vi.332.
Kīḷāpanaka 1. (nt.) a plaything, toy M i.266, 384; a list given at A v.203. -- 2. (adj.) one who makes play J iv.308 (sappa˚ a snake -- trainer, cp. sappaŋ kīḷāpeti J ii.267).
Kīḷikā (f.) play, sport, amusement; always -- ˚, like kumāra˚ D ii.196; uyyāna˚ (sport in the garden) J iii.275; iv.23, 390; udaka˚ ThA 186.
Kīḷita [pp. of kīḷati] played or having played, playing, sporting; celebrated (of a festival) A iv.55 (hasitalapita˚); PvA 76 (sādhu˚). -- (nt.) amusement, sport, celebration M i.229 (kīḷita -- jātaŋ kīḷati). Cp. sahapaŋsu˚˚; see also keḷi & khiḍḍā.
Kīvant & Kīva (interr. adj. and adv.) [Sk. kiyant and kīvant; formed fr. interr. stem ki] how great? how much? how many? and in later language how? (cp. rel. yāva). As indef.: Kīvanto tattha bheravā "however great the terrors" Sn 959. -- Kīva kaṭuka how painful? PvA 226; k˚ -- ciraŋ how long? Pj and Sn 1004; k˚ -- dīghaŋ same Sn p. 126; k˚ dūre how far? Miln 16; DhA i.386; k˚ -- mahantaŋ how big? DhA i.29; VvA 325; k˚ bahuŋ how much? DhA iv.193.
Kīvatika (interr. adj.) [fr. last] of number: how much? how many? Kīvatikā bhikkhū how many Bhikkhus? Vin i.117.
Ku (kud -- and kum -- ) 3rd stem of interrog. pron. ka (on form and meaning cp. kad;=Lat.* qṷu in (qṷ)ubi, like katara < (qṷ)uter; cp. also Vedic kū how? Sk. kutra, kutaḥ, kuha, kva) where? when? whither? whence? As adv. in cpds. in disparaging sense of "what of"? i. e. nothing of, bad, wrong, little, e. g. kum -- magga wrong path; kuk -- kucca=kud -- kicca doing wrong, troubling about little=worry. -- kuŋ at PvA 57 (in expl. of kuñjara) is interpreted as paṭhavi.
1. Kuto where from? whence? Dh 62; k˚bhayaŋ whence i. e. why fear? Dh 212 sq.; Sn 270, 862; Pv ii.69; how? J vi.330; with nu whence or why then? Sn 1049 (=kacci ssu Nd2 s. v.). kut -- ettha=kuto ettha J. i.53. -- na kuto from nowhere Sn 35, 919; a -- kuto id. in akutobhaya "with nothing to fear from anywhere" i. e. with no reason for fear S i.192; Th 1, 510; Th 11, 333; Sn 561 (modāmi akutobhayo); Pv ii.121 (id.); kuto -- ja arisen from where? Sn 270; -- ˚nidāna having its foundation or origin in what? Sn 270, 864 sq.
2. Kudā at what time, when? (cp. kadā) Pug 27; indef. kudācanaŋ: at any time, na k˚ never Sn 221 (expl. by soḷasim pi kalaŋ SnA 277); Dh 5, 210; Bdhd 125; gamanena na pattabbo lokass' anto k˚ "by walking, the end of the world can never be reached" S i.62.
3. Kuva, kva, where? Sn 970 (kuvaŋ & kuva) indef. kvaci anywhere; with na: nowhere; yassa n'atthi upamā kvaci "of whom (i. e. of Gotama) there is no likeness anywhere" Sn 1137; cp. 218, 395; expld by Nd2 like kuhiñci. kuvaŋ at D iii.183.
4. Kutha (kudha) where? J v.485 (=kuhiŋ).
5. Kuhiŋ (=kuhaŋ, cp. Sk. kuha) where? whither? Often with fut.: k˚ bhikkhu gamissati Sn 411; ko gacchasi where are you going? Pv ii.81; tvaŋ ettakaŋ divasaŋ k˚ gatā where have you been all these days? PvA 6; 13; 42; indef. kuhiñci, anywhere, with na k˚: nowhere, or: not in anything, in: n'atthi taṇhā k˚ loke "he has no desire for anything in this world" Sn 496, 783, 1048 see Nd on 783 & 1048=kimhici; Dh 180.
Kukutthaka (v. l. BB. kukkuṭhaka) a kind of bird J vi.539. Kern (Toev. s. v.) takes it to be Sk. kukkuṭaka, phasianus gallus.
Kukku [cp. Sk. kiṣku?] a measure of length S v.445= A iv.404, and in kukkukata Vin i.255=v.172 (cp. however Vin. Texts i.154, on Bdhgh's note=temporary).
Kukkuka [fr. kukku] "of the kukku -- measure," to be measured by a kukku. Of a stone -- pillar, 16 k's high S v.445 A iv.404. -- akukkuka -- jāta of enormous height (of a tree) M i.233=S iii.141 (text: akukkajāta) =iv.167; A ii.200 (text: akukkuccakajāta). Kern (Toev. s. v. kukka) takes it to mean "grown crooked," a˚ the opposite.
Kukkucca [kud -- kicca] 1. bad doing, misconduct, bad character. Def. kucchitaŋ kataŋ kukataŋ tassa bhāvo kukkuccaŋ Vism 470 & Bdhd 24; -- Various explanations in Nd2 on Sn 1106=Dhs 1160, in its literal sense it is bad behaviour with hands and feet (hattha -- pada˚) J i.119=DA i.42 (in combn with ukkāsita & khipitasadda); hattha˚ alone J ii.142. -- 2. remorse, scruple, worry. In this sense often with vippaṭissāra; and in conn. w. uddhacca it is the fourth of the five nīvaraṇas (q. v.) Vin i.49; iv.70; D i.246; S i.99; M i.437; A i.134=Sn 1106; A i.282; Sn 925; Nd2 379; DhA iii.483; iv.88; Sdhp 459; Bdhd 96. -- na kiñci k˚ŋ na koci vippaṭissāreti "has nobody any remorse?" S iii.120=iv.46. The dispelling of scrupulousness is one of the duties and virtues of a muni: k˚ŋ vinodetuŋ A v.72; k. pahāya D i.71=A ii.210=Pug 59; chinnakukkucca (adj.) free from remorse M i.108; khīṇāsava k˚ -- vūpasanta S i.167=Sn 82. -- akukkucca (adj.) free from worry, having no remorse Sn 850. Kukkuccaŋ kurute (c. gen.) to be scrupulous about J i.377; kariŋsu DhA iv.88; cp. kukkuccaŋ āpajjati (expl. by sankati) J iii.66.
Kukkuccaka (adj.) conscientious (too) scrupulous, "faith- ful in little" J i.376; VvA 319.
Kukkuccāyati [denom. fr. kukkucca] to feel remorse, to worry A i.85; Pug 26. Der. are kukkuccāyanā and ˚āyitatta=kukkucca in def. at Dhs 1160=Nd2 s. v.
Kukkucciya=kukkucca Sn 972.
Kukkuṭa (Sk. kurkuṭa & kukkuṭa; onomatopoetic=Lat. cucurio, Ger. kikeriki) a cock Miln 363; J iv.58; VvA 163; f. kukkuṭī a hen DhA i.48; ThA 255; in simile M i.104=357=A iv.125 sq., 176 sq. (cp. ˚potako).
-- aṇḍa (kukkuṭ˚) a hen's egg Vism 261. -- patta the wing of a cock A iv.47. -- potaka a chicken, in simile M i.104=357=A iv.126=176. -- yuddha a cock fight D i.6; -- lakkhaṇa divining by means of a cock D i.9; -- sampātika a shower of hot ashes (cock as symbol of fire) A i.159=D iii.75, cp. Divy 316 and see Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885, 38; -- sūkarā (pl.) cocks and pigs D i.5= A ii.209=Pug 58; D i.141; A ii.42 sq.; It 36.
Kukkura [Sk. kurkura, or is it ku -- krura? Cp. kurūra) a dog. usually of a fierce character, a hound A iii.389; v.271; J i.175 sq.; 189; Pv iii.79; Sdhp 90. In similes: S iv.198; M i.364; A iv.377. -- f. kukkurinī Miln 67.
-- vatika (adj.) imitating a dog, cynic M i.387 (+dukkara kāraka; also as k˚ -- vata, ˚sīla, ˚citta, ˚ākappa); D iii.6, 7; Nett 99 (+govatika; -- sangha a pack of hounds A iii.75.
Kukkuḷa [taken as variant of kukkuṭa by Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885, 39; occurs also in BSk. as Name of a Purgatory, e. g. MVastu i.6; iii.369, 455. The classical Sk. form is kukūla] hot ashes, embers S iii.177; J ii.134; Kvu 208, cf. trans. 127; with ref. to Purgatory S i.209; J v.143 (˚nāma Niraya); Sdhp 194; Pgdp 24.
-- vassa a shower of hot ashes J i.73; iv.389 (v. l.).
Kukkusa 1. the red powder of rice husks Vin ii.280 (see Bdgh ii.328: kukkusaŋ mattikaŋ=kuṇḍakañ c'eva mattikañ ca). -- 2. (adj.) variegated, spotted J vi.539 (=kaḷakabara 540; v. l. B. ukkusa).
Kunkuma (nt.) [cp. Sk. kunkuma] saffron Miln 382; Vism 241.
Kunkumin (adj.) fidgety J v.435.
Kunkumiya (nt.) noise, tumult J v.437 (=kolāhala).
Kucchi (f.) [Sk. kukṣiḥ, cp. kośa] a cavity, esp. the belly (Vism 101) or the womb; aṇṇava˚ the interior of the ocean i.119, 227; J v.416; jāla˚ the hollow of the net J i.210. As womb frequent, e. g. mātu˚ J i.149; DA i.224; PvA 19, 63, 111, 195; as pregnant womb containing gabbha J i.50; ii.2; vi.482; DhA ii.261.
-- ḍāha enteric fever DhA i.182; -- parihārika sustaining, feeding the belly D i.71=Pug 58; -- roga abdominal trouble J i.243; -- vikāra disturbance of the bowels Vin i.301; -- vitthambhana steadying the action of the bowels (digestion) Dhs 646=740=875.
Kucchita [Sk. kutsita, pp. of kutsāy] contemptible, vile, bad, only in Coms VvA 215; in def. of kāya KhA 38; in def. of kusala DhsA 39; VvA 169; in def. of kukkucca Vism 470; in def. of paŋsu -- kūla Vism 60.
Kucchimant (adj.) [fr. kucchi] pregnant J v.181.
Kujati [or kujjati? see kujja] in kujantā dīnalocanā Sdhp 166: to be bent, crooked, humpbacked?
Kujana (adj.) [fr. kujati] only neg. a˚ not going crooked, in ratho akujano nāma S i.33.
Kujja (adj.) [Sk. kubja, humpbacked; √qub, Lat. cubare, Gr. kufo/s, Mhg. hogger, humpback] lit. "bent," as nt. kujjaŋ in ajjhena -- kujjaŋ Sn 242 crookedness, deceit, fraud (cp. SnA 286 kūṭa?). Cp. kujati & khujja, see also ava˚, uk˚, nik˚, paṭi˚, pali˚.
Kujjhati [cp. Vedic krunhyate, fr. krudh] to be angry with (dat.) A i.283=Pug 32, 48; Vism 306; mā kujjhittha kujjhataŋ, "don't be angry" S i.240; mā kujjhi J iii.22; na kujjheyya Dh. 224; ger. kujjhitvā PvA 117, grd. kujjhitabba Pv iv.1.11
Kujjhana (adj.) [fr. kujjhati] angry=kodhana VvA 71; Pug A 215 (˚bhāva). Kujjhanā (f.) anger, irritation, together with kujjhitattaŋ in defn of kodha Dhs 1060= Pug 18, 22.
Kujjhāpana (nt.) [Caus. formation fr. kujjhati] being angry at DhA iv.182.
Kuñca (nt.) [kruñc, cp. Sk. krośati, Pali koñca, Lat. crocio, cornix, corvus; Gr. krw/cw, kraugh/; all of crowing noise; from sound -- root k&rcircle;, see note on gala] a crowing or trumpeting noise (in compounds only). -- kāra cackling (of a hen) ThA 255; -- nāda trumpeting (of an elephant) J iii.114.
Kuñcikā (f.) a key, Bdhgh on C. V. v.29, 2 (Vin ii.319) cp. tāla Vin ii.148; Vism 251 (˚kosaka a case for a key); DA i.200, 207, 252; DhA ii.143.
Kuñcita (adj.) [pp. of kuñc or kruñc; cp. Sk. kruñcati, to be crooked, Lat. crux, Ohg. hrukki, also Sk. kuñcita bent] bent, crooked J i.89 (˚kesa with wavy hair); v.202 (˚agga: kaṇṇesu lambanti ca kuñcitaggā: expld on p. 204 by sīhakuṇḍale sandhāya vadati, evidently taking kuñcita as a sort of earring); of Petas, Sdhp 102.
Kuñja (m.) a hollow, a glen, dell, used by Dhpāla in expln of kuñjara at VvA 35 (kuñjaro ti kuñje giritale ramati) and PvA 57 (kuŋ pathaviŋ jīrayati kuñjo suvāraŋ aticarati kuñjaro ti). -- nadī˚ a river glen DA i.209.
Kuñjara (m.) [Deriv. unknown. The sound is not unlike an elephant's trumpeting & need not be Aryan, which has hasti. The Sk. of the epics & fables uses both h˚ and k˚] an elephant Vin ii.195; M i.229, 375; S i.157; Dh 322, 324, 327; J v.336; Vv 51; Pv i.113; DhA iv.4; ThA 252; Miln 245. -- deva˚ chief of the gods, Ep. of Sakka Vv 477; J v.158.
-- vara a state elephant VvA 181. -- sālā an elephant's stable DhA iv.203.
Kuṭa a pitcher Vv 509; J i.120; DhA ii.19, 261; iii.18. Kuṭa is to be read at J i.145 for kūṭa (antokuṭe padīpo viya; cp. ghaṭa). Note. Kuṭa at DhsA 263 stands for kūṭa3 sledge -- hammer.
Kuṭaka a cheat Pgdp 12; read kūtaka. So also in gāma kuṭaka S ii.258.
Kuṭaja a kind of root (Wrightia antidysenterica or Neri- cum antidysentericum), used as a medicine Vin i.201 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.45).
Kuṭati see paṭi˚ and cp. kūṭa1, koṭṭeti & in diff. sense kuṭṭa1.
Kuṭava (v. l. S. kū˚; B. kulāvaka) a nest J iii.74; v. l. at DhA ii.23 (for kuṭikā).
Kuṭikā (f.) from kuṭī [B. Sk. kuṭikā Av.Ś. ii.156] a little hut, usually made of sticks, grass and clay, poetical of an abode of a bhikkhu Vin iii.35, 41, 42 =VvA 10; PvA 42, 81; DhA ii.23. Cp. also tiṇa˚, dāru˚; arañña˚ a hut in the woods S i.61; iii.116; iv.380. Often fig. for body (see kāya). Th 1, 1. -- As adj. -- ˚, e. g. aṭṭhakuṭiko gāmo a village of 8 huts Dh i.313.
Kuṭimbika (also kuṭumbika) a man of property, a land- lord, the head of a family, J i.68, 126, 169, 225; ii.423; PvA 31, 38, 73, 82. Kutumbiya -- putta Np. Vism 48.
Kuṭila (adj.) bent, crooked (cp. kuj and kuc, Morris J.P.T.S. 1893, 15) J iii.112 (=jimha); Miln 297 (˚sankuṭila), 418 (of an arrow); nt. a bend, a crook Miln 351. -- a˚ straight Vv 167 ( -- magga).
-- bhāva crookedness of character Vism 466; PvA 51; VvA 84. -- a˚ uprightness Bdhd 20.
Kuṭilatā (f.) [fr. kuṭila] crookedness, falseness, in a˚, up- rightness of character Dhs 50, 51; DhA i.173.
Kuṭī (kuṭi˚) (f.) any single -- roomed abode, a hut, cabin, cot, shed Vin iii.144 (on vehāsa -- kuṭī see vehāsa & Vin iv.46); Sn 18, 19; Pv ii.28; VvA 188, 256 (cīvara˚, a cloak as tent). See also kappiya˚, gandha˚, paṇṇa˚, vacca˚.
-- kāra the making of a hut, in ˚sikkhāpada, a rule regarding the method of building a hut J ii.282; iii.78. 351; -- dūsaka (a) destroying a hut or nest DhA ii. 23; -- purisa a "hut man," a peasant Miln 147.
Kuṭukuñcaka see kaṭukañcuka.
Kuṭumba (nt.) family property & estates J i.122, 225; rāja˚ (and ˚kuṭumbaka) the king's property J i.369, 439. -- kuṭumbaŋ saṇṭhapeti to set up an establishment J i.225; ii.423; iii.376.
Kuṭumbika see kuṭimbika.
Kuṭṭa1 [cp. koṭṭeti, kuṭ to crush, which is expld by Dhtp (90, 555) & Dhtm (115, 781) together with koṭṭ by chedana; it is there taken together with kuṭ of kūṭa1, which is expld as koṭilla] powder. Sāsapa˚ mustard powder Vin i.205; ii.151 (at the latter passage to be read for ˚kuḍḍa, cp. Vin Texts iii.171), 205.
Kuṭṭa2 [of doubtful origin & form, cp. var. BSk. forms koṭṭa -- rājā, koṭa˚ & koḍḍa˚, e. g. MVastu i.231] only found in cpds. ˚dārūni sticks in a wattle & daub wall Vism 354, and in kuṭṭa -- rājā subordinate prince, possibly kuḍḍa˚ a wattle and daub prince S iii.156 (v. l. kuḍḍa˚); =v.44 (v. l. kujja˚); cp. kuḍḍa˚ J v.102 sq., where expl. pāpa -- rājā, with vv. ll. kuṭa and kūṭa. See also khujja and khuddaka -- rājā.
Kuṭṭha1 (nt.) (cp. kus; Sk. kuṣṭhā f.) leprosy J v.69, 72, 89; vi.196, 383; Vism 35 (+gaṇḍa); DA i.260, 261, 272. The disease described at DhA 161 sq. is probably leprosy. Cp. kilāsa. On var. kinds of leprosy see J v.69, iv.196.
Kuṭṭha2 a kind of fragrant plant (Costus speciosus) or spice J vi.537.
Kuṭṭhita hot, sweltering (of uṇha) S iv.289 (v. l. kikita); molten (of tamba, cp. uttatta) Pgdp 33. See also kathati kuthati, ukkaṭṭhita & pakkuṭṭhita.
Kuṭṭhin a leper M i.506 (in simile); Th 1, 1054; J v.413; vi.196; Ud 49; DhA iii.255.
Kuṭṭhilikā the pericarp or envelope of a seed (phala˚) VvA 344 (=sipāṭikā).
Kuṭhārī (f.) [cp. Sk. kuṭhāra, axe=Lat. culter, knife from *(s)qer, to cut, in Lat. caro, etc]. An axe, a hatchet Vin iii.144; S iv.160, 167; M i.233=S iii.141; A. i.141; ii.201; iv.171; J i.431; DhA iii.59; PvA 277. Purisassa hi jātassa kuthārī jāyate mukhe "when man is born, together with him is born an axe in his mouth (to cut evil speech)" S i.149=Sn 657=A v.174.
Kuḍumalaka [for kusuma˚] an opening bud A iv.117, 119.
Kuḍḍa [to kṣud to grind, cp. cuṇṇa] a wall built of wattle and daub, in ˚nagaraka "a little wattle and daub town" D ii.146, 169 (cp. Rh.D. on this in Buddh. Suttas p. 99). Three such kinds of simply -- built walls are mentioned at Vin iv.266, viz. iṭṭhakā˚ of tiles, silā˚ of stone, dāru˚ of wood. The expln of kuḍḍa at Vism 394 is "geha -- bhittiyā etam adhivacanaŋ." Kuḍḍa -- rājā see under kuṭṭa). Also in tirokuḍḍaŋ outside the wall M i.34=ii.18; A iv.55; Vism 394, and tirokuḍḍesu Kh viii1=Pv i.51. -- parakuḍḍaŋ nissāya J ii.431 (near another man's wall) is doubtful; vv. ll. S. kuḍḍhaŋ. B. kuṭaŋ and kuṭṭaŋ. (kuḍḍa -- ) pāda the lower part of a lath and plaster wall Vin ii.152. Note. Kuḍḍa at Vin ii.151 is to be read kuṭṭa.
Kuḍḍa -- mūla a sort of root Vin iii.15.
Kuḍḍaka in eka˚ and dvi˚ having single or double walls J i.92.
Kuṇa (adj.) [cp. kuṇi lame from *qer, to bend=Gr. kullo/s crooked and lame, Lat. curvus & coluber snake] distorted, bent, crooked, lame Pv ii.926 (v. l. kuṇḍa; cp. PvA 123. kuṇita paṭikuṇita an -- ujubhūta); DhA iii.71 (kāṇa˚ blind and lame).
Kuṇapa [der. fr. kuṇa? cp. Sk. kuṇapa] a corpse, carcase, Vin iii.68=M i.73=A iv.377 (ahi˚, kukkura˚, manussa˚ pūti˚); A iv.198 sq.; Sn 205; J i.61, 146; PvA 15. Kaṇṭhe āsatto kuṇapo a corpse hanging round one's neck M i.120; J i.5; also Vin iii.68≈. -- The abovementioned list of corpses (ahi˚, etc.) is amplified at Vism 343 as follows: hatthi˚, assa˚, go˚, mahiŋsa˚, manussa˚, ahi˚, kukkura˚. Cp. kaḷebara.
-- gandha smell of a rotting corpse SnA 286; PvA 32.
Kuṇalin in kuṇalīkata and kuṇalīmukha contracted, con- torted Pv ii.9 26.28. (Hardy, but Minayeff and Hardy's S.S. Kuṇḍalī˚), expld PvA 123 by mukhavikārena vikuṇitaŋ (or vikucitaŋ SS.) sakuṇitaŋ (better: sankucitaŋ) (cp. Sk. kuc or kuñc to shrink).
Kuṇāla N. of a bird (the Indian cuckoo) J v.214 sq. (kuṇāla -- jātaka). Kuṇāla -- daha "cuckoo -- lake," N. of one of the seven great lakes in the Himavant Vism 416.
Kuṇālaka [fr. kuṇāla] the cuckoo J v.406 (=kokila).
Kuṇi (adj.) deformed, paralysed (orig. bent, crooked, cp. kuṇa) only of the arm, acc. to Pug A iv.19 either of one or both arms (hands) J i.353 (expl. kuṇṭhahattha)= DhA i.376; Pug 51 (kāṇa, kuṇi, khañja); see khañja.
Kuṇita (or kuṇika)=kuṇa PvA 123, 125 (or should it be kucita?). Cp. paṭi˚.
Kuṇṭha [cp. kuṇa and kuṇḍa] 1. bent, lame; blunt (of a sword) DhA i.311 (˚kuddāla); Pug A i.34 (of asi, opp. tikkhina); ˚tiṇa a kind of grass Vism 353. -- 2. a cripple J ii.117.
Kuṇṭhita [a variant of guṇṭhita, as also found in cpd. palikuṇṭhita] Pv ii.38 and kuṇḍita S i.197, both in phrase paŋsu˚, according to Hardy, PvA p. 302 to be corrected to guṇṭhita covered with dust (see guṇṭheti). The v. l. at both places is ˚kuṭṭhita. Also found as paŋsukuṇṭhita at J vi.559 (=˚makkhita C; v. l. B B. kuṇḍita).
Kuṇḍa (a) bent, crooked DA i.296 (˚daṇḍaka); PvA 181.
Kuṇḍaka the red powder of rice husks (cp. kukkusa) Vin ii.151; 280; J ii.289 (text has kuṇḍadaka)=DhA iii.325 (ibid. as ācāma˚). Also used as toilet powder: DhA ii.261 (kuṇḍakena sarīraŋ makkhetvā). -- sakuṇḍaka ( -- bhatta) (a meal) with husk powder -- cake J v.383.
-- angārapūva pancake of rice powder DhA iii.324; -- kucchi in ˚sindhavapotaka "the rice -- (cake -- ) belly colt" J ii.288; -- khādaka (a) eating rice -- powder J ii.288; (cp. DhA iii.325); -- dhūma, lit. smoke of red rice powder, Ep. of the blood J iii.542; -- pūva cake of husk -- powder J i.422 sq.; -- muṭṭhi a handful of rice -- powder VvA 5; DhA i.425; -- yāgu husk -- powder gruel J ii.288.
Kuṇḍala [cp. kuṇḍa, orig. bending, i. e. winding] a ring esp. earring A i.254= iii.16; J iv.358 (su˚ with beautiful earrings); DhA i.25. Frequent as maṇi˚, a jewelled earring Vin ii.156; S i.77; M i.366; Pv ii.950; sīha˚ or sīhamukha˚ an earring with a jewel called "lion's mouth" J v.205 (=kuñcita), 438. In sāgara˚ it means the ocean belt Miln 220=J iii.32 (where expl. as sāgaramajjhe dīpavasena ṭhitattā tassa kuṇḍalabhūtaŋ). Cp. also rajju˚ a rope as belt VvA 212. -- kuṇḍalavatta turning, twisting round D ii.18 (of the hair of a Mahāpurisa).
Kuṇḍalin1 (adj.) [fr. kuṇḍala] wearing earrings S iv.343; J v.136; vi.478. su˚ Vv 731. Cp. Maṭṭha˚ Np. DhA i.25; Pv ii.5.
Kuṇḍalin2 in kuṇḍalī -- kata contorted Pv ii.927. See kuṇalin and cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893, 14.
Kuṇḍi (f.) [=kuṇḍikā] a pail or pot, in phrase kuṇḍi- paddhana giving a pailful of milk J vi.504 (Kern, Toev. s. v. compares phrase Sk. kāŋsy'ôpadohana & proposes reading kuṇḍ' opadohana. See also kaŋsupadhāraṇa).
Kuṇḍika [cp. kuṇḍa] bending, in ahi -- kuṇḍika (?) a snake charmer (lit. bender) J iv.308 (v. l. S. guṇṭhika) see ahi; and catu -- kuṇḍika bent as regards his four limbs, i. e. walking on all fours M i.79; Pv iii.24 (expl. at PvA 181).
Kuṇḍikā (f.) a water -- pot J i.8, 9, ii.73 (=kamaṇḍalu), 317; v.390; DhA i.92 (cp. kuṭa).
Kutuka (adj.) eager, in sakutuka eagerness Dāvs iv.41.
Kutumbaka ( -- puppha) N. of a flower J i.60.
Kutūhala (m. nt.) tumult, excitement; Dāvs v.22; DhA iii.194 (v. l. kot˚). a˚ (adj.) unperturbed, not shamming J i.387 (expl. by avikiṇṇa -- vaco of straight speech). See also kotūhala.
-- mangala a festivity, ceremony, Nd2 in expl. of anekarūpena Sn 1079, 1082; -- sālā a hall for recreation, a common room D i.179=S iv.398=M ii.2, cp. Divy 143.
Kuto see under ku˚.
Kutta (nt.) [Der. fr. kattā=Sk. kṛtṛ as kṛttra=P. kutta, cp. Sk. kṛtrima artificial=P. kuttima, in caus. -- pass. sense=kappita of kḷp)] "being made up." 1. Work. The beginning of things was the work of Brahmā. The use of kutta implies that the work was so easy as to be nearer play than work, and to have been carried out in a mood of graceful sport. D iii.28. -- 2. behaviour, i. e. charming behaviour, coquetry J ii.329, combd with līḷā (graceful carriage) J i.296, 433; and with vilāsa (charming behaviour) J ii.127; iv.219, 472; itthi˚ and purisa˚ A iv.57=Dhs 633 (expl. at DhsA 321 by kiriyā). -- As adj. in kuttavāla, well arranged, plaited tails D i.105 (expld at DA i.274 as kappita -- vāla; cp. kappita).
Kuttaka [der. fr. kutta, that which is made up or "woven," with orig. meaning of karoti to weave?] 1. nt. a woollen carpet (DA i.87=as used for dancing -- women), together with kaṭṭhissa and koseyya in list of forbidden articles of bedding D i.7=A i.181=Vin i.192=ii.163. -- 2. adj. "made up," pretending, in samaṇa -- k˚ a sham ascetic Vin iii.68 -- 71.
Kuttama in kāsi -- kuttama J vi.49 should be read as kāsik'- uttama.
Kutti (f.) [cp. kutta] arrangement, fitting, trapping, harnessing Vin ii.108 (sara˚: accuracy in sound, harmony); J iii.314 (massu˚ beard -- dressing, expld by massu -- kiriyā. Here corresponding to Sk *kḷpti!); iv.352 (hattha˚, elephant trappings, cp. kappanā); v.215 (=karaṇa, cp. Sk. kalpa).
Kutthaka S i.66 should be replaced by v. l. koṭṭhuka.
Kutha see under ku˚.
Kuthati [Sk. kvathati cp. kaṭhati, kaṭhita, kuṭṭhita, ukkaṭṭhita & upakūḷita2] to cook, to boil: kuthanto (ppr) boiling (putrid, foul? So Kern, Toev, s. v.) J vi.105 (of Vetaraṇī, cp. kuṭṭhita). -- pp. kuthita.
Kuthana (nt.) [fr. kvath=kuth] digestion Vism 345.
Kuthita [pp. of kuthati] 1. boiled, cooked Th 2, 504; KhA 62; Vism 259=KhA 58. Cp. vikkuthita. <-> 2. digested Vism 345. -- 3. fig. tormented, distressed (perhaps: rotten, foul, cp. kilijjati=pūti hoti) Miln 250 (+kiliṭṭha). -- Cp. Vin. Texts ii.57 on Bdhgh's note to MV vi.14, 5.
Kudaṇḍaka a throng J iii.204.
Kudassu (kud -- assu) interj. to be sure, surely (c. fut.) A i.107; Nett 87; SnA 103.
Kudā see under ku˚.
Kudāra (ku -- dāra) a bad wife Pv iv.147.
Kudārikā at Pv iv.147 & PvA 240 is spelling for kuṭhārikā.
Kudiṭṭhi (f.) [ku+diṭṭhi] wrong belief Sdhp 86.
Kuddāla a spade or a hoe (kanda -- mūla -- phalagahaṇ'- atthaŋ DA i.269) Vin iii.144; J v.45; DhA iv.218. Often in combn kuddāla -- piṭaka "hoe and basket" D i.101; S ii.88; v.53; A i.204; ii.199; J i.225, 336.
Kuddālaka=prec. DhA i.266.
Kuddha (adj.) [pp. of kujjhati] angry A iv.96 (and akkuddha iv.93); Pv i.77; J ii.352, 353; vi.517; DhA ii.44. Nom. pl. kuddhāse It 2=7.
Kudrūsa a kind of grain Miln 267; also as kudrūsaka Vin iv.264; D iii.71; Nd2 314; DA i.78; DhsA 331.
Kunta [cp. Sk. kunta lance?] a kind of bird, otherwise called adāsa J iv. 466.
Kuntanī (f.) a curlew (koñca), used as homing bird J iii.134.
Kuntha, only in combn kuntha -- kipillaka (or ˚ikā) a sort of ant J i.439; iv.142; Sn 602 (˚ika); Vism 408; KhA 189. Cp. kimi.
Kunda (nt.) the jasmine Dāvs v.28.
Kunnadī (f.) (kuŋ -- nadī) a small river, a rivulet S i.109; ii.32, 118; A iv.100; J iii.221; Vism 231, 416; DA i.58.
Kupatha (kuŋ+patha) wrong path (cp. kummagga) Miln 390.
Kupita (adj.) [pp. of kuppati] -- 1. shaken, disturbed Th 2, 504 (by fire=ThA 292); J iii.344 (˚indriya). <-> 2. offended, angry D iii.238=M i.101=A iv.460= v.18; M. i.27; A iii.196 sq.; Pv i.67. Often combd with anattamana "angry and displeased" Vin ii.189; D i.3, 90 (=DA i.255 kuddha). -- As nt. kupitaŋ disturbance, in paccanta˚ a disturbance on the borderland J iii.497; Miln 314; PvA 20.
Kuppa (adj.) [ger. of kuppati] shaking, unsteady, movable; A iii.128 (˚dhammo, unsteady, of a pāpabhikkhu); Sn 784; of a kamma: a proceeding that can be quashed Vin ii.71 (also a˚). nt. kuppaŋ anger Vin ii.133 (karis<-> sāmi I shall pretend to be angry). -- akuppa (adj.) and akuppaŋ (nt.) steadfast, not to be shaken, an Ep. of arahant and nibbāna (cp. asankuppa); akuppa -- dhammo Pug 11 (see akuppa). Akuppaŋ as freedom from anger at Vin ii.251.
Kuppati [Sk. kupyate, *qup to be agitated, to shake= Lat. cupio, cupidus, "to crave with agitation," cp. semantically Lat. tremere>Fr. craindre] to shake, to quiver, to be agitated, to be disturbed, to be angry. <-> aor. kuppi, pp. kupita, ger. kuppa, caus. kopeti A iii.101; Sn. 826, 854; Pug 11, 12, 30. Of the wind Miln 135; of childbirth udaravāto kuppi (or kupita) J ii.393, 433; paccanto kuppi the border land was disturbed J iv.446 (cp. kupita).
Kuppila [?] a kind of flower J vi.218 (C: mantālaka- makula).
Kubbati2 etc. see karoti ii.
Kubbanaka [fr. kuŋ -- vana] brushwood or a small, and therefore unproductive, wood Sn 1134 (expl. Nd2 by rittavanaka appabhakkha appodaka).
Kubbara the pole of a carriage A iv.191, 193; VvA 269, 271, 275. ratha˚ S i.109, Vv 642 (=vedikā VvA). Der. (vividha -- ) kubbaratā VvA 276.
Kumati wrong thought, wrong view (cp. kudiṭṭhi) Bdhd 137.
Kumāra [Vedic kumāra] a young boy, son Sn 685 sq. (kuhiŋ kumāro aham api daṭthukāmo: w. ref. to the child Gotama); Pv iii.52; PvA 39, 41 (=māṇava); daharo kumāro M ii.24, 44. -- a son of ( -- ˚) rāja˚ PvA 163; khattiya˚, brāhmaṇa˚ Bdhd 84; deva˚ J iii.392 yakkha˚ Bdhd 84.
-- kīḷā the amusement of a boy J i.137; -- pañhā questions suitable for a boy Kh iii.; -- lakkhaṇa divination by means of a young male child (+kumāri˚) D i.9.
Kumāraka 1. m. a young boy, a youngster, kumārakā vā kumāriyo boys and girls S iii.190. 2. nt. ˚ŋ a childish thing A iii.114. -- f. ˚ikā a young girl, a virgin J i.290, 411; ii.180; iv.219 (thulla˚); vi.64; DhA iii.171.
-- vāda speech like a young boy's; S ii.219.
Kumārī (f.) a young girl Vin ii.10; v.129 (thulla˚); A iii.76; J iii.395 (daharī k˚); Pug 66 (itthī vā k˚ vā).
-- pañha obtaining oracular answers from a girl supposed to be possessed by a spirit D i.11 (cp. DA i.97).
Kumina (nt.) a fish net Vin iii.63; Th 1, 297; J ii.238; ThA 243.
Kumuda (nt.) 1. the white lotus Dh 285; Vv 354 (=VvA 161); J v.37 (seta˚); Vism 174; DA i.139. -- 2. a high numeral, in vīsati kumudā nirayā A v.173=Sn p. 126.
-- naḷa a lotus -- stalk J i.223; -- patta ( -- vaṇṇa) (having the colour of) white lotus petals J i.58 (Ep. of sindhavā, steeds); -- bhaṇḍikā a kind of corn Miln 292; -- vaṇṇa (adj.) of the colour of white lotus (sindhavā) PvA 74, -- vana a mass of white lotuses J v.37.
Kumbha [for etym. s. kūpa and cp. Low Ger. kump or kumme, a round pot] 1. a round jar, waterpot (=kulālabhājana earthenware DhA i.317), frequent in similes, either as illustrating fragility or emptiness and fullness: A i.130, 131=Pug 32; A v.337; S ii.83; Miln 414. As uda˚ waterpot Dh 121; J i.20; Pv i.129. -- 2. one of the frontal globes of an elephant Vin ii.195 (hatthissa); VvA 182 (˚ālankārā ornaments for these).
-- ûpama resembling a jar, of kāya Dh 40 (=DhA i.317); of var. kinds of puggalā A ii.104=Pug 45. -- kāra 1. a potter; enumerated with other occupations and trades at D i.51=Miln 331. Vin iv.7. In similes, generally referring to his skill D i.78=M ii.18; Vism 142, 376; Sn 577; DhA i.39 (˚sālā). rāja˚ the king's potter J i.121. -- 2. a bird (Phasianus gallus? Hardy) VvA 163. -- Cpds.: ˚antevāsin the potter's apprentice D i.78=M ii.18; -- ˚nivesana the dwelling of a potter Vin i.342, 344; S iii.119; ˚pāka the potter's oven S ii.83; A iv.102; ˚ -- putta son of a potter (cp. Dial. i.100), a potter Vin iii.41 sq.; -- kārikā a large earthen vessel (used as a hut to live in, Bdhgh) Vin ii.143, cp. Vin. Texts iii.156; -- ṭṭhānakathā gossip at the well D i.8=D iii.36=A v.128= S v.419, expld. at DA i.90 by udaka -- ṭṭhānakathā, with variant udakatittha -- kathā ti pi vuccati kumbha -- dāsikathā vā; -- thūṇa a sort of drum D i.6 (expl. at DA i.84: caturassara -- ammaṇakatāḷaŋ kumbhasaddan ti pi eke); D iii.183; J v.506 (pāṇissaraŋ+). -- ˚ika one who plays that kind of drum Vin iv.285=302; -- tthenaka of cora, a thief, "who steals by means of a pot" (i. e. lights his candle under a pot (?) Bdhgh on Vin ii.256, cp. Vin. Texts iii.325 "robber burglars") only in simile Vin ii.256=S ii.264=A iv.278; -- dāsī a slave girl who brings the water from the well D i.168; Miln 331; DhA i.401 (udakatitthato k˚ viya ānītā). -- dūhana milking into the pitchers, giving a pail of milk (of gāvo, cows) Sn 309. Cp. kuṇḍi. -- bhāramatta as much as a pot can hold J v.46; -- matta of the size of a pot, in kumbhamattarahassangā mahodarā yakkhā, expln. of kumbhaṇḍā J iii.147.
Kumbhaṇḍa 1. m. a class of fairies or genii grouped with Yakkhas, Rakkhasas and Asuras S ii.258 (k˚ puriso vehāsaŋ gacchanto); J i.204; iii.147 (with def.); Miln 267; DhA i.280; Pgdp 60. -- 2. nt. a kind of gourd J i.411 (lābu˚); v.37; (elāḷuka -- lābuka˚); DA i.73= DhA i.309 (placed on the back of a horse, as symbol of instability); the same as f. kumbhaṇḍī Vism 183 (lābu+).
Kumbhī (f.) a large round pot (often combd with kaḷopī,) Vin i.49, 52, 286; ii.142, 210; Th 2, 283. loha˚ a copper (also as lohamaya k˚ Sn 670), in ˚pakkhepana, one of the ordeals in Niraya PvA 221. Also a name for one of the Nirayas (see lohakumbhī). Cp. nidhi˚.
-- mukha the rim of a pot (always with kaḷopi -- mukha) D i.166 and≈(see kaḷopī); Vism 328.
Kumbhīla (kuŋ+bhīra?) a crocodile (of the Ganges) J i.216, 278; DhA i.201; iii.362.
-- bhaya the fear of the crocodile, in enumeration of several objects causing fear, at M i.459 sq.=A ii.123 sq.; Miln 196=Nd2 on bhaya. -- Th 2, 502; -- rājā the king of the crocodiles J ii.159.
Kumbhīlaka [fr. kumbhīla] a kind of bird ("little croco- dile") J iv.347.
Kumma [Vedic kūrma] a tortoise S iv.177 (+kacchapa); M i.143; J v.489; Miln 363, 408 (here as land -- tortoise: cittaka -- dhara˚).
Kummagga (and kumagga) [kuŋ+magga] a wrong path (lit. and fig.) Miln 390 (+kupatha); fig. (=micchāpatha) Dhs 381, 1003; Pug 22. Kummaggaŋ paṭipajjati to lose one's way, to go astray. lit. Pv iv.35; PvA 44 (v. l. SS.); fig. Sn 736; It 117; Th 2, 245.
Kummāsa [Vedic kulmāṣa] junket, usually with odana, boiled rice. In formula of kāya (cātummahābhūtika etc., see kāya) D i.76=M ii.17 and ≈; in enum. of material food (kabaḷinkārâhāra) Dhs 646, 740, 875. <-> Vin iii.15; J i.228; Vv 146 (=VvA 62 yava˚); VvA 98 (odana˚). In combn with pūva (cake) DhA i.367; PvA 244.
Kummiga (kuŋ+miga] a small or insignificant animal Miln 346.
Kuyyaka a kind of flower J i.60 (˚puppha).
Kuraṇḍaka [cp. Sk. kuraṇṭaka blossom of a species of Amaranth] a shrub and its flower Vism 183 (see also kuravaka & koraṇḍaka). ˚leṇa Npl. Vism 38.
Kurara an osprey J iv.295, 397 (=ukkusa); v.416; vi.539 (=seta˚).
Kuravaka [=Sk. kuraṇṭaka Halāyudha, cp. kuraṇḍaka] N. of a tree, in ratta˚ J i.39 (=bimbijāla the red Amaranth tree).
Kurunga [deriv. unknown. The corresponding Sk. forms are kulunga and kulanga] a kind of antelope, in -- miga the antelope deer J i.173 (k˚ -- jatāka); ii.153 (do.).
Kuruṭṭharū (v. l. kururū) a badly festering sore D ii.242.
Kurundī N. of one of the lost SS commentaries on the Vinaya, used by Buddhaghosa (cp. Vin. Texts i.258; ii.14).
Kuruvindaka vermillion in cuṇṇa, a bath -- powder made from k. J iii.282; and ˚suttī a string of beads covered with this powder Vin ii.106 (cp. Bdhgh Vin ii.315; Vin. Texts iii.67).
Kurūra (adj.) [Sk. krūra, cp. Lat. cruor thick blood, Gr. kre/as (raw) flesh, Sk. kravih; Ohg. hrō, E. raw] bloody, raw, cruel, in ˚kammanta following a cruel (bloody) occupation (as hunting, fishing, bird killing, etc.) A iii.383= Pug 56 (expld. Pug A 233 by dāruṇa˚, also at PvA 181).
Kurūrin=kurūra Pv iii.23.
Kula (nt.; but poetic pl. kulā Pv ii.943 [Idg. *qṷel (revolve); see under kaṇṭha, cakka and carati] 1. clan, a high social grade, "good family," cp. Gr. (doric) fua/, Goth. kuni. A collection of cognates and agnates, in sense of Ohg. sippa, clan; "house" in sense of line or descent (cp. House of Bourbon, Homeric gene/h). Bdhgh at Vism 91 distinguishes 2 kinds of kulāni, viz. ñātikulaŋ & upaṭṭhāka -- kulaŋ. -- 1. A ii.249 (on welfare and ill -- luck of clans); Sn 144; 711; It 109 sq. (sabrahmakāni, etc.); Dh 193. -- brāhmaṇa˚ a Brahmanic family A v.249; J iv.411, etc.; vāṇija˚ the household of a trader J iii.82; kassaka˚ id. of a farmer J ii.109; purāṇaseṭṭhi˚ of a banker J vi.364; upaṭṭhāka˚ (Sāriputtassa) a family who devoted themselves to the service of S. Vin i.83; sindhava˚ VvA 280. -- uccākula of high descent Pv iii.116, opp. nīca˚ of mean birth Sn 411 (cp. ˚kulīno); viz. caṇḍālakula, nesāda˚, veṇa˚, etc. M ii.152=A i.107=ii.85=iii.385=Pug 51; sadisa˚ a descent of equal standing PvA 82; kula -- rūpa -- sampanna endowed with "race" and beauty PvA 3, 280. -- 2. household, in the sense of house; kulāni people DhA i.388; parakulesu among other people Dh 73; parakule do. VvA 66; kule kule appaṭibaddhacitto not in love with a particular family Sn 65; cp. kule gaṇe āvāse (asatto or similar terms) Nd2 on taṇhā iv. -- devakula temple J ii.411; rāja˚ the king's household. palace J i.290; iii.277; vi.368; kulāni bahutthikāni (= bahuitthikāni, bahukitthī˚ A iv.278) appapurisāni "communities in which there are many women but few men" Vin ii.256=S ii.264=A iv.278; ñāti -- kula (my) home Vv 3710 (: pitugehaŋ sandhāya VvA 171).
-- angāra "the charcoal of the family" i. e. one who brings a family to ruin, said of a squanderer S iv.324 (text kulangāroti: but vv. ll. show ti as superfluous); printed kulanguro (for kul -- ankuro? v. l. kulangāro) kulapacchimako (should it be kulapacchijjako? cp. vv. ll. at J iv.69) dhanavināsako J vi.380. Also in kulapacchimako kulagaro pāpadhammo J iv.69. Both these refer to an avajāta putta. Cp. also kulassa angārabhūta DhA iii.350; Sn A 192 (of a dujjāto putto), and kulagandhana; -- itthi a wife of good descent, together with kuladhītā, ˚kumārī, ˚suṇhā, ˚dāsī at Vin ii.10; A iii.76; Vism 18. -- ûpaka (also read as ˚upaka, ˚ûpaga; ˚upaga; for ûpaga, see Trenckner, P.M. 62, n. 16; cp. kulopaka Divy 307) frequenting a family, dependent on a (or one & the same) family (for alms, etc.); a friend, an associate. Freq. in formula kulūpako hoti bahukāni kulāni upasankamati, e. g. Vin iii.131, 135; iv.20. -- Vin i.192, 208; iii.84, 237; v.132; S ii.200 sq.; A iii.136, 258 sq.; Pv iii.85; Vism 28; DA i.142 (rāja˚); PvA 266. f. kulūpikā (bhikkhunī) Vin ii.268; iv.66; -- gandhana at It 64 and kule gandhina at J iv.34 occur in the same sense and context as kulangāra in J. -- passages on avajāta -- putta. The It -- MSS. either explain k -- gandhana by kulacchedaka or have vv. ll. kuladhaŋsana and kusajantuno. Should it be read as kulangāraka? Cp. gandhina; -- geha clanhouse, i. e. father's house DhA i.49. -- tanti in kulatantikulapaveṇi -- rakkhako anujāto putto "one who keeps up the line & tradition of the family" J vi.380; -- dattika (and ˚dattiya) given by the family or clan J iii.221 (˚sāmika); iv.146 (where DhA i.346 reads ˚santaka), 189 (˚kambala); vi.348 (pati). -- dāsī a female slave in a respectable family Vin ii.10; VvA 196; -- dūsaka one who brings a family into bad repute Sn 89; DhA ii.109; -- dvāra the door of a family Sn 288; -- dhītā the daughter of a respectable family Vin ii.10; DhA iii.172; VvA 6; PvA 112; -- pasāda the favour received by a family, ˚ka one who enjoys this favour A i.25, cp. SnA 165, opp. of kuladūsaka; -- putta a clansman, a (young) man of good family, fils de famille, cp. Low Ger. haussohn; a gentleman, man of good birth. As 2nd characteristic of a Brahmin (with sujāto as 1st) in formula at D i.93, 94≈; Vin i.15, 43, 185, 288, 350; M i.85≈(in kāmānaŋ ādīnavo passage), 192, 210, 463; A ii.249; J i.82; vi.71; It 89; VvA 128; PvA 12, 29; -- macchariya selfishness concerning one's family, touchiness about his clan D iii.234 (in list of 5 kinds of selfishness); also to be read at Dhs 1122 for kusala˚; -- vaŋsa lineage, progeny M ii.181; A iii.43; iv.61; DA i.256; expressions for the keeping up of the lineage or its neglect are: ˚ṭhapana D iii.189; PvA 5; nassati or nāseti J iv.69; VvA 149; upacchindati PvA 31, 82; -- santaka belonging to one's family, property of the clan J i.52; DhA i.346 (where J iv.146 reads ˚dattika).
Kulanka -- pādaka "buttresses of timber" (Vin. Texts iii.174) Vin ii.152 (cp. Bdhgh. p. 321 and also Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 78).
Kulattha a kind of vetch M i.245 (˚yūsa): Miln 267; Vism 256 (˚yūsa).
Kulala a vulture, hawk, falcon, either in combn with kāka or gijjha, or both. Kāka+k˚ Vin iv.40; Sn 675 (=SnA 250); gijjha+k˚ PvA 198; gijjhā kākā k˚ Vin iii.106; kākā k˚ gijjhā M i.58; cp. gijjho kanko kulalo M i.364, 429.
Kulāla a potter; only in -- cakka a potter's wheel J i.63; -- bhājana a potter's vessel DhA i.316; PvA 274.
Kulāva 1. waste (?) Vin ii.292: na kulāvaŋ gamenti "don't let anything go to waste." Reading doubtful. -- 2. a cert. bird J vi.538.
Kulāvaka (nt.) a nest D i.91 (=DA i.257 nivāsaṭṭhanaŋ); S i.8; S i.224=J i.203 (a brood of birds=supaṇṇapotakā); J iii.74 (v. l. BB), 431; vi.344; DhA ii.22.
Kulika (adj.) [fr. kula] belonging to a family, in agga˚ coming from a very good family PvA 199.
Kuḷika (?) in kata˚ -- kalāpaka a bundle of beads? Bdhgh Vin ii.315 (C.V. v.1, 3) in expln of kuruvindaka -- sutti.
Kulinka a bird J iii.541 (=sakuṇika 542). Cp. kulunka.
Kulin=kulika, in akulino rājāno ignoble kings Anvs. introd. (see J.P.T.S. 1886 p. 355, where akuliro which is conjectured as akulino by Andersen, Pāli Reader, p. 1024).
Kulīna=prec. in abhijāta -- kula -- kulīna descendant of a recognized clan Miln 359 (of a king); uccā˚ of noble birth, in uccākulīnatā descent from a high family S i.87; M iii.37; VvA 32; nīca˚ of mean birth Sn 462.
Kulīra a crab, in kulīra -- pādaka "a crab -- footer," i. e. a (sort of) bedstead Vin ii.149; iv.40 (kulira), cp. Bdhgh on latter passage at Vin iv.357 (kuḷira˚ and kuḷiya˚): a bedstead with curved or carved legs; esp. when carved to represent animal's feet (Vin. Texts iii.164).
Kulīraka a crab J vi.539 (=kakkaṭaka 540).
Kulunka a cert. small bird J iii.478. Cp. kulinka.
Kulla1 a raft (of basket -- work) (orig. meaning "hollow shaft," cp. Sk. kulya, bone; Lat. caulis stalk, Gr. kaulo/s, Ohg. hol, E. hollow) Vin i.230; D ii.89 (kullaŋ bandhati); M i.134 (kullūpama dhamma).
Kulla2 (adj.) [fr. kula, Sk. kaula & kaulya, *kulya] be- longing to the family J iv.34 (˚vatta family custom).
Kullaka crate, basket work, a kind of raft, a little basket J vi.64.
-- vihāra (adj.) the state of being like one who has found a raft (?) Vin ii.304 (cp. Bdhgh uttānavihāra ibid. p. 330, and Vin. Texts iii.404: an easy life). More correct is Kern's expln (Toev. s. v.) which puts kullaka in this combn=kulla2 (Sk. kauyla), thus meaning well -- bred, of good family, gentlemanly. -- saṇṭhāna consisting of stalks bound together, like a raft J ii.406 -- 408 (not correct Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 78). Cp. Kern, Toev. i.154.
Kuva(ŋ) see ku -- .
Kuvalaya the (blue) water -- lily, lotus, usually combd with kamala, q. v. Vv 354; DA i.50; VvA 161, 181; PvA 23, 77.
Kuvilāra=koviḷāra J v.69 (v. l. B. ko˚).
Kusa 1. the kusa grass (Poa cynosuroides) DhA iii.484: tikhiṇadhāraŋ tiṇaŋ antamaso tālapaṇṇam pi; Dh 311; J i.190 (=tiṇa); iv.140. -- 2. a blade of grass used as a mark or a lot: pātite kuse "when the lot has been cast" Vin i.299; kusaŋ sankāmetvā "having passed the lot on" Vin iii.58.
-- agga the point of a blade of grass PvA 254=DA i.164; Sdhp 349; kusaggena bhuñjati or pivati to eat or drink only (as little as) with a blade of grass Dh 70; VvA 73 (cp. Udānavarga p. 105); -- kaṇṭhaka=prec. Pv iii.228; -- cīra a garment of grass Vin i.305=D i.167 =A i.240, 295=ii.206=Pug 55; -- pāta the casting of a kusa lot Vin i.285; -- muṭṭhi a handful of grass A v.234= 249.
Kusaka=prec. Vv 355 (=VvA 162).
Kusala (adj.) [cp. Sk. kuśala] 1. (adj.) clever, skilful, expert; good, right, meritorious M i.226; Dh 44; J i.222. Esp. appl. in moral sense (=puñña), whereas akusala is practically equivalent to pāpa. ekam pi ce pāṇaŋ aduṭṭhacitto mettāyati kusalo tena hoti It 21; sappañño paṇḍito kusalo naro Sn 591, cp. 523; Pv i.33 (=nipuṇa). With kamma=a meritorious action, in kammaŋ katvā kusalaŋ D iii.157; Vv iii.27; Pv i.1011 see cpds. -- ācāra -- k˚ good in conduct Dh 376; parappavāda˚ skilled in disputation Dpvs iv.19; magga˚ (and opp. amagga˚) one who is an expert as regards the Path (lit. & fig.) S iii.108; samāpatti˚, etc. A v.156 sq.; sālittaka -- payoge k˚ skilled in the art of throwing potsherds PvA 282. -- In derivation k. is expld by Dhpāla & Bdhgh by kucchita and salana, viz. kucchita -- salanādi atthena kusalaŋ VvA 169; kucchite pāpadhamme salayanti calayanti kappenti viddhaŋsenti ti kusalā DhsA 39; where four alternative derivations are given (cp. Mrs. Rh. D., Dhs. trsl. p. lxxxii). -- 2. (nt.) a good thing, good deeds, virtue, merit, good consciousness (citta omitted; cp. DhsA 162, 200, etc.): yassa pāpaŋ kataŋ kammaŋ kusalena pithīyati, so imaŋ lokaŋ pabhāseti "he makes this world shine, who covers an evil deed with a good one" M ii.104=Dh 173=Th 1, 872; sukhañ ca k. pucchi (fitness) Sn 981; Vv 301 (=ārogyaŋ); D i.24; J vi.367; Pv i.13 (=puñña); PvA 75; Miln 25. -- In special sense as ten kusalāni equivalent to the dasasīlaŋ (cp. sīla) M i.47; A v.241, 274. All good qualities (dhammā) which constitute right and meritorious conduct are comprised in the phrase -- kusala -- dhammā Sn 1039, 1078, expld. in extenso Nd2 s. v. See also cpd. ˚dhamma. -- Kusalaŋ karoti to do what is good and righteous, i. e. kāyena, vācāya, manasā It 78; cp. Dh 53; sabba -- pāpassa akaraṇaŋ kusalassa upasampadā sacittapariyodapanaŋ etaŋ Buddhānusāsanaŋ D ii.49=Dh 183; cp. Nett 43, 81, 171, 186. Kusalaŋ bhāveti to pursue righteousness (together with akusalaŋ pajahati to give up wrong habits) A i.58; iv.109 sq.; It 9. -- akusala adj.: improper, wrong, bad; nt.: demerit, evil deed D i.37, 163; bālo+akusalo Sn 879, 887;=pāpa PvA 60, cp. pāpapasuto akatakusalo ib. 6. kusalaŋ & akusalaŋ are discussed in detail (with ref. to rūpâvacara˚ fivefold, to arūpâvacara˚ & lokuttara˚ fourfold, to kāmâvacara˚ eight & twelvefold) at Vism 452 -- 454. -- kusalâkusala good and bad M i.489; S v.91; Miln 25; Nett 161, 192; Dhs 1124 sq. -- sukusala (dhammānaŋ) highly skilled D i.180 (cp. M. ii.31).
-- anuesin striving after righteousness Sn 965; cp. kinkusalānuesin D ii.151 and kinkusalagavesin M i.163 sq.; -- abhisanda overflow of merit (+puñña˚) A ii.54 sq.; iii.51; 337; -- kamma meritorious action, right conduct A i.104; 292 sq.; Ps i.85; ii.72 sq.; PvA 9, 26; -- cittā (pl.) good thoughts Vbh 169 -- 173, 184, 285 sq., 294 sq.; -- cetanā right volition Vbh 135; -- dhammā (pl.) (all) points of righteousness, good qualities of character S ii.206; M i.98; A iv.11 sq.; v.90 sq.; 123 sq.; Pug 68, 71; Vbh 105; Ps i.101, 132; ii.15, 230; VvA 74, 127; -- pakkha "the side of virtue," all that belongs to good character M iii.77 (and a˚) with adj. ˚pakkhika S v.91; -- macchariya Dhs 1122 is to be corrected to kula˚ instead of kusala˚ (meanness as regards family) cp. Nd2 on veviccha; -- mūla the basis or root of goodness or merit; there are three: alobha, adosa, amoha M i.47, 489=A i.203=Nett 183; D iii.214; Dhs 32, 313, 981; Vbh 169 sq., 210; Nett 126. Cp. ˚paccaya Vbh 169; ˚ropanā Nett 50; -- vitakka good reasoning, of which there are three: nekkhamma˚, avyāpāda˚, avihiŋsā˚ D iii.215; It 82; Nett 126; -- vipāka being a fruit of good kamma Dhs 454; Vism 454 (twofold, viz. ahetuka & sahetuka). -- vedanā good, pure feeling Vbh 3 sq.; cp. ˚saññā and ˚sankhārā Vbh 6 sq.; Nett 126 (three ˚saññā, same as under ˚vitakkā); -- sīla good, proper conduct of life M ii.25 sq.; adj. ˚sīlin D i.115 (=DA i.286).
Kusalatā [fem. abstr. fr. kusala] (only -- ˚) skill, cleverness, accomplishment; good quality. -- lakkhaṇa˚ skill in interpreting special signs VvA 138; aparicita˚ neglect in acquiring good qualities PvA 67. For foll. cp. Mrs. Rh. D. Dhs. trsl. pp. 345 -- 348; āpatti˚ skill as to what is an offence; samāpatti˚ in the Attainments; dhātu˚ in the Elements; manasikāra˚ proficiency in attention; āyatana˚ skill in the spheres; paṭiccasamuppāda˚ skill in conditioned Genesis; ṭhāna˚ and aṭṭhāna˚ skill in affirming (negating) causal conjuncture: all at D iii.212 and Dhs 1329 -- 1338; cp. A i.84, 94.
Kusi (nt.) one of the four cross seams of the robe of a bhikkhu Vin i.287; ii.177; and aḍḍha˚ intermediate cross seam ibid. See Bdhgh's note in Vin. Texts ii.208.
Kusīta (adj.) [Sk. kusīda; cp. kosajja] indolent, inert, inactive. Expl. by kāma -- vitakkādīhi vitakkehi vītināmanakapuggalo DhA ii.260; by nibbiriyo DhA iii.410; by alaso PvA 175, Often combd with hīnaviriya, devoid of zeal; It 27, 116; Dh 7, 112, 280; Miln 300, 396. Also equivalent to alasa Dh 112; combd with dussīla Miln 300, 396; with duppañña D iii.252=282; A ii.227, 230; iii.7, 183, 433. -- In other connections: M i.43, 471; A iii.7 sq., 127; v.95, 146, 153, 329 sq.; S ii.29, 159, 206; It 71, 102; J iv.131 (nibbiriya+); Vism 132; DhA i.69. The eight kusītavatthūni, occasions of indolence, are enumerated at A iv.332; D iii.255; Vbh 385. -- akusīta alert, mindful, careful Sn 68 (+alīnacitto); Nd2 s. v.; Sdhp 391.
Kusītatā (f.) [abstr. fr. kusīta] in a˚ alertness, brightness, keenness VvA 138.
Kusuma (nt.) any flower J iii.394 (˚dāma); v.37; PvA 157 (=puppha); VvA 42; Dpvs i.4; Sdhp 246, 595; Dāvs v.51 (˚agghika), fig. vimutti˚ the flower of emancipation Th 1, 100; Miln 399.
Kusumita (adj.) in flower, blooming VvA 160, 162.
Kusumbha (nt.) the safflower, Carthamus tinctorius, used for dying red J v.211 (˚rattavattha); vi.264 (do); Khus iv.2.
Kussubbha and kussobbha (nt.) [Sk. kuśvabhra] a small pond, usually combd with kunnadī and appld in similes: S ii.32=A i.243=v.114; S ii.118; v.47, 63, 395; A ii.140; iv.100; Sn 720; PvA 29; DA i.58.
Kuha (adj.) [Sk. kuha; *qeudh to conceal, cp. Gr. keu/dw; Ags hȳdan, E. hide] deceitful, fraudulent, false, in phrase kuhā thaddhā lapā singī A ii.26=Th 1, 959= It 113. -- akuha honest, upright M i.386; Sn 957; Miln 352.
Kuhaka [der. fr. prec.] deceitful, cheating; a cheat, a fraud, combd with lapaka D i.8; A iii.111. -- A v.159 sq.; Sn 984, 987; J i.375 (˚tāpasa); DhA iv.152 (˚brāhmaṇa); iv.153 (˚cora); Miln 310, 357; PvA 13; DA i.91.
Kuhanā (f.) [abstr. fr. adj. kuhana=kuhaka] 1. deceit, fraud, hypocrisy, usually in combn kuhana -- lapana "deceit and talking -- over"=deceitful talk D i.8; A iii.430; DA i.92; Miln 383; Nd2 on avajja. -- M i.465=It 28, 29; S iv.118; A v.159 sq.; Vism 23; Vbh 352; Sdhp 375. -- 2. menacing SnA 582. -- Opp. akuhaka Sn 852. -- Var. commentator's derivations are kuhāyanā (fr. kuhanā) and kuhitattaŋ (fr. kuheti), to be found at Vism 26.
-- vatthūni (pl.) cases or opportunities of deceit, three of which are discussed at Nd2 on nikkuha, mentioned also at Vism 24; DA i.91 & SnA 107.
Kuhara (nt.) (der. fr. kuha) a hole, a cavity; lit. a hiding- place Dāvs i.62.
Kuhiŋ see under ku˚.
Kuhilikā (pl.) kuhali flowers Attanugaluvaŋsa 216.
Kuhīyati only in pahaŋsīyati+k˚ "he exults and rejoices" at Miln 325 (cp. Miln trsl. ii.220, where printed kuhūyati).
Kuheti [v. denom. fr. kuha] to deceive DA 91; ger. kuhitvā deceiving J vi.212.
Kūjati [kuj, expld with guj at Dhtp 78 by "avyatte sadde"] to sing (of birds; cp. vikūjati) J ii.439; iv.296; Dāvs v.51. -- pp. kūjita see abhi˚, upa˚.
Kūṭa1 (nt.) [Dhtp 472 & Dhtm 526 expl. kuṭ of kūṭa1 by koṭille (koṭilye), cp. Sk. kūṭa trap, cp. Gr. paleu/w to trap birds] a trap, a snare; fig. falsehood, deceit. As trap J i.143 (kūṭapāsādi); iv.416 (expln paṭicchannapāsa). As deceit, cheating in formula tulā˚ kaŋsa˚ māna˚ "cheating with weight, coin and measure" (DA i.78=vañcana) D i.5=iii.176=S v.473=M i.180 =A ii.209; v.205=Pug 58. māna˚ PvA 278. -- As adj. false, deceitful, cheating, see cpds. -- Note. kūṭe J i.145 ought to be read kuṭe (antokuṭe padīpo viya, cp. ghaṭa).
-- aṭṭa a false suit, in ˚kāra a false suitor J ii.2; DhA i.353; -- jaṭila a fraudulent ascetic J i.375; DhA i.40; -- māna false measure PvA 191; -- vāṇija a false -- trader Pv iii.42; PvA 191; -- vinicchayikatā a lie (false discrimination) PvA 210. -- vedin lier, calumniator J iv.177.
Kūṭa2 (m. nt.) [Vedic kūṭa horn, bone of the forehead, prominence, point, *qele to jut forth, be prominent; cp. Lat. celsus, collis, columen; Gr. kolwno/s kolofw/n; Ags. holm, E. hill] -- (a) prominence, top (cp. koṭi), in abbha˚ ridge of the cloud Vv i.1 (=sikhara); aŋsa˚ shoulder, clavicle, VvA 121, 123 pabbata˚ mountain peak Vin ii.193; J i.73. Cp. koṭa. -- (b) the top of a house, roof, pinnacle A i.261; Vv 784 (=kaṇṇikā VvA 304); gaha˚ Dh 154; PvA 55. Cp. also kūṭāgāra. -- (c) a heap, an accumulation, in sankāra˚ dust -- heap M ii.7; PvA 144. -- (d) the topmost point, in phrase desanāya kūṭaŋ gahetvā or desanā kūtaŋ gaṇhanto "leading up to the climax of the instruction" J i.275, 393, 401; v.151; vi.478; VvA 243. Cp. arahattena kūṭaŋ gaṇhanto J i.114; arahattaphalena k. gaṇhiŋ ThA 99.
-- anga the shoulder Vv 158 (=VvA 123). -- âgāra (nt.) a building with a peaked roof or pinnacles, possibly gabled; or with an upper storey Vin i.268; S ii.103= v.218; iii.156; iv.186; v.43, 75, 228; A i.101, 261; iii.10, 364; iv.231; v.21; Pv iii.17; 221; Vv 82 (=ratanamayakaṇṇikāya bandhaketuvanto VvA 50); VvA 6 (upari˚, with upper storey) v. l. kuṭṭhāgāra; PvA 282 (˚dhaja with a flag on the summit); DhA iv.186. In cpds.: -- ˚ matta as big as an upper chamber J i.273; Miln 67; -- ˚sālā a pavilion (see description of Maṇḍalamāḷa at DA i.43) Vin iii.15, 68, 87; iv.75; D i.150; S ii.103=v.218; iv.186. -- (n) gama going towards the point (of the roof), converging to the summit S ii.263= iii.156=v.43; -- ṭṭha standing erect, straight, immovable, in phrase vañjha k˚ esikaṭṭhāyin D i.14=56= S iii.211=M i.517 (expl. DA i.105 by pabbatakūṭaŋ viya ṭhita); -- poṇa at Vism 268 is to be read ˚goṇa: see kūṭa4.
Kūṭa3 (nt.) [*qolā to beat; cp. Lat. clava; Gr. kla/w, ko/los, and also Sk. khaḍga; Lat. clades, procello; Gr. kladaro/s. The expln of kuṭ3 at Dhtp 557 & Dhtm 783 is "āko ṭane"] a hammer, usually as aya˚ an iron sledge hammer J i.108; or ayo˚ PvA 284; ayomaya˚ Sn 669; kammāra˚ Vism 254.
Kūṭa4 (adj.) [Sk. kūṭa, not horned; *(s)qer to cut, mutilate, curtail, cp. Lat. caro, curtus; also Sk kṛdhu maimed. The expln of kuṭ as "chede," or "chedane" (cutting) at Dhtp 90, 555; Dhtm 115, 526, 781 may refer to this kūṭa. See also kuṭṭa] without horns, i. e. harmless, of goṇa a draught bullock Vin iv.5=J i.192 (in play of words with kūṭa deceitful J. trsl. misses the point & translates "rascal"). These maimed oxen (cows & calves) are represented as practically useless & sluggish in similes at Vism 268, 269: kūṭa -- goṇa -- (so read for ˚poṇa) -- yutta -- ratha a cart to which such a bullock is harnessed (uppathaŋ dhāvati runs the wrong way); kūṭa -- dhenuyā khīraŋ pivitvā kūṭa -- vaccho, etc., such a calf lies still at the post. -- Kūṭa -- danta as Np. should prob. belong here, thus meaning "ox -- tooth" (derisively) (D i.127; Vism 208), with which may be compared danta -- kūṭa (see under danta).
Kūṭeyya (nt.) [der. fr. *kūṭya of kūṭa1, cp. in formation sāṭheyya] fraud, deceit, in combn with sāṭheyya & vankeyya M i.340; A v.167.
Kūpa (m.) [Vedic kūpa, orig. curvature viz. (a) interior= cavity, cp. Lat. cupa, Gr. ku/pellon cup; also Gr. ku/mbh, Sk. kumbha; -- (b) exterior=heap, cp. Ags. hēap, Ohg. heap, Sk. kūpa mast]. 1. a pit, a cavity: akkhi˚ the socket of the eye M i.80, 245; DhsA 306; gūtha˚ a cesspool D ii.324; Sn 279; Pv ii.316; Pug 36; miḷha˚ a pit for evacuations Pgdp 23, 24; loma˚ the root of the hair, a pore of the skin DA i.57; Vism 262, 360; also in na loma -- kūpamattaŋ pi not even a hairroot J i.31; iii.55; vacca˚=gūtha˚ Vin ii.141, 222. As a tank or a well: J vi.213; VvA 305. -- 2. the mast of a boat J iii.126; Miln 363, 378. See next.
-- khaṇa one who digs a pit J vi.213. -- tala the floor of a pit Vism 362.
Kūpaka=kūpa 1. Vism 361 (akkhi˚), 362 (nadītīra˚), 449 (id.); =kūpa. 2. J ii.112; iv.17.
Kūla (nt.) [Dhtp 271: kūla āvaraṇe] a slope, a bank, an embankment. Usually of rivers: S i.143=J iii.361; A i.162; Sn 977; J i.227; Miln 36: udapāna˚ the facing of a well Vin ii.122; vaccakūpassa k˚ the sides of a cesspool Vin ii.141. See also paŋsu˚, & cp. uk˚, upa˚, paṭi˚.
Kūra (nt.) in sukkha˚ boiled rice (?) Vin iv.86; DhA ii.171.
Keka [?] N. of a tree J v.405. Kern, Toev. s. v. suggests misreading for koka Phoenix sylvestris.
Keṭubha [deriv. unknown] expld by Buddhaghosa DA i. 247 as "the science which assists the officiating priests by laying down rules for the rites, or by leaving them to their discretion" (so Trenckner, J.P.T.S. 1908, 116). In short, the ritual; the kalpa as it is called as one of the vedangas. Only in a stock list of the subject a learned Brahmin is supposed to have mastered D i.88; A i.163, 166; Sn 1020; Miln 10, 178. So in BSk; AvŚ ii.19; Divy 619.
Keṭubhin [deriv. unknown] MA 152 (on M i 32) has "trained deceivers (sikkhitā kerātikā); very deceitful, false all through"; iii.6=A iii.199.
Ketaka [etym. uncertain] N. of a flower J iv.482.
Ketana sign etc., see saŋ˚.
Ketu [Vedic ketu, *(s)qait, clear; cp. Lat. caelum (=*caid- lom), Ohg heitar, heit; Goth. haidus; E. -- hood, orig. appearance, form, like] -- 1. ray, beam of light, splendour, effulgence Th 1, 64; which is a riddle on the various meanings of ketu. -- 2. flag, banner, sign, perhaps as token of splendour Th 1, 64. dhamma -- k˚ having the Doctrine as his banner A i.109=iii.149; dhūma -- k˚ having smoke as its splendour, of fire, J iv.26; VvA 161 in expln of dhūmasikha.
-- kamyatā desire for prominence, self -- advertisement (perhaps vainglory, arrogance) Vism 469; Dhs 1116 (Dhs A. trs. 479), 1233=Nd2 505; Nd1 on Sn 829 (= uṇṇama); -- mālā "garland of rays" VvA 323.
Ketuŋ see kayati.
Ketuvant (adj.) [fr. ketu] having flags, adorned with flags VvA 50.
Kedāra (m. nt.) an irrigated field, prepared for ploughing, arable land in its first stage of cultivation: kedāre pāyetvā karissāma "we shall till the fields after watering them" J i.215; as square -- shaped (i. e. marked out as an allotment) Vin i.391 (caturassa˚; Bdhgh on MV viii.12, 1); J iii.255 (catukkaṇṇa˚); surrounded by a trench, denoting the boundary ( -- mariyādā) DhA iii.6. -- J iv.167; v.35; PvA 7 (=khetta). The spelling is sometimes ketāra (J iii.255 v. l.) see Trenckner, J.P.T.S. 1908, 112. Note. The prefix ke -- suggests an obsolete noun of the meaning "water," as also in kebuka, ke -- vaṭṭa; perhaps Sk. kṣvid, kṣvedate, to be wet, ooze? ke would then be k(h)ed, and kedara= ked+dṛ, bursting forth of water=inundation; kebuka =kedvu(d)ka (udaka); kevaṭṭa=ked+vṛ, moving on the water, fisherman; (cp. AvŚ Index Kaivarta: name of an officer on board a trading vessel).
-- koṭi top or corner -- point of a field Vism 180.
Kebuka [on ke -- see note to prec.] water J vi.38 (=42: k. vuccati udakaŋ). As nadī a river at J iii.91, where Seruma at similar passage p. 189.
Keyūra (nt.) a bracelet, bangle DhA ii.220 (v. l. kāyura).
Keyūrin (adj.) wearing a bracelet PvA 211 (=kāyūrin).
Keyya (ger. of kayati) for sale J vi.180 (=vikkiṇitabba).
Kerāṭika (adj.) [fr. kirāṭa] deceitful, false, hypocritic J i.461 (expld by biḷāra); iv.220; iv.223 (=kirāsa); MA 152; DhA iii.389 (=saṭha). -- a˚ honest, frank J v.117 (=akitava, ajūtakara).
Kerāṭiya=prec. J iii.260 (˚lakkhaṇa); MA 152.
Kelisā at Th 1, 1010 is to be corrected into keḷiyo (see keḷi2).
Keḷanā (f.) [fr. kilissati? or is it kheḷana?] desire, greed, usually shown in fondness for articles of personal adornment: thus "selfishness" Vbh 351=DA i.286 (+paṭikeḷanā). In this passage it is given as a rather doubtful expln of cāpalla, which would connect it with kṣvel to jump, or khel to swing, oscillate, waver, cp. expln Dhtp 278 kela khela=calane. Another passage is Nd2 585, where it is combd with parikeḷanā and acts as syn. of vibhūsanā.
Keḷāyati [Denom. fr. kīḷ in meaning "to amuse oneself with," i. e. take a pride in. Always combd with mamāyati. BSk. same meaning (to be fond of): śālikṣetrāṇi k. gopāyati Divy 631. Morris. J.P.T.S. 1893, 16 puts it (wrongly?) to kel to quiver: see also keḷanā] to adorn oneself with (acc.), to fondle, treasure, take pride in (gen.) M i.260 (allīyati kelāyati dhanāyati mamāyati, where dhanāyati is to be read as vanāyati as shown by v. l. S. iii.190 & M i.552); S iii.190 (id.); Miln 73. -- pp. keḷāyita.
Keḷāyana (nt.) [fr. keḷāyati, cp. kelanā & keḷi] playfulness, unsettledness Vism 134 (opp. majjhatta), 317.
Keḷāyita [pp. of keḷāyati] desired, fondled, made much of J iv.198 (expld with the ster. phrase kelāyati mamāyati pattheti piheti icchatī ti attho).
Keḷāsa (cp. Sk. kailāsa] N. of a mountain Bdhd 138.
Keḷi1 (f.) [fr. krīḍ to play, sport: see kīḷati] 1. play, amusement, sport PvA 265 (=khiḍḍā); parihāsa˚ merry play, fun J i.116. -- 2. playing at dice, gambling, in ˚maṇḍala "circle of the game," draught -- board; ˚ŋ bhindati to break the board, i. e. to throw the die over the edge so as to make the throw invalid (cp. Cunningham, Stupa of Bharhut, plate 45) J i.379.
Keḷi2 (f.) [either fr. kil as in kilijjati & kilissati, or fr. kel, as given under keḷanā] the meaning is not quite defined, it may be taken as "attachment, lust, desire," or "selfishness, deceit" (cp. kerāṭika & kilissati), or "unsettledness, wavering." -- keḷi -- sīla of unsettled character, unreliable, deceitful PvA 241. ˚sīlaka id. J ii.447. -- pañca citta -- keḷiyo=pañca nīvaraṇāni (kāmacchanda etc.), the gratifications of the heart Th 1, 1010 (corr. kelisā to keḷiyo!). -- citta -- keḷiŋ kīḷantā bahuŋ pāpakammaŋ katvā enjoying themselves (wrongly) to their heart's content J iii.43. Cp. kāmesu a -- ni -- kīḷitāvin unstained by desires S i.9, 117.
Kevaṭṭa [on ke -- see kedāra] fisherman D i.45 (in simile of dakkho k˚) A iii.31=342, cp. iv.91; Ud 24 sq.; J i.210; DhA ii.132; iv.41; PvA 178 (˚gāma, in which to be reborn, is punishment, fishermen being considered outcast); cp. J vi.399 N. of a brahmin minister, also D i.411 N. of Kevaḍḍha (?).
-- dvāra N. of one of the gates of Benares, and a village near by Vv 197; VvA 97.
Kevala (adj. -- adv.) [cp. Lat. caelebs=*caivilo -- b˚ to live by oneself, i. e. to live in celibacy, perhaps also, Goth. hails, Ohg. heil, E. whole] expression of the concept of unity and totality: only, alone; whole, complete; adv. altogether or only -- 1. ˚ŋ (adv.) (a) only=just: k. tvaŋ amhākaŋ vacanaŋ karohi "do all we tell you" PvA 4; -- only=but, with this difference: VvA 203, 249; -- k. . . . vippalapati he only talks PvA 93; <-> and yet: "sakkā nu kiñci adatvā k. sagge nibbattituŋ? " is it possible not to give anything, and yet go to heaven? kevalaŋ mano -- pasāda -- mattena only by purity of mind DhA i.33; kevalaŋ vacchake balava -- piyacittatāya simply by the strong love towards the babycalf Vism 313; (b) alone: k. araññaŋ gamissāmi VvA 260; -- exclusive Miln 247. -- na k. . . . atha kho not only . . . but also VvA 227. -- 2. whole, entire Sn p. 108; Cp. i.1019; Pv ii.63 (=sakala PvA 95); Vism 528 (=asammissa, sakala); Pv ii.63 (=sakala PvA 95). <-> k.>akevala entire>deficient M i.326. ˚ŋ entirely, thoroughly, all round: k˚ obhāsenti VvA 282.
-- kappa a whole kappa Sn pp. 18, 45, 125; KhA 115; VvA 124, 255. -- paripuṇṇa fulfilled in its entirety (sakala DA i.177) of the Doctrine; expld also at Nett 10.
Kevalin (adj.) [fr. kevala] one who is fully accomplished, an Arahant; often with mahesi and uttamapurisa. Defn sabbaguṇa -- paripuṇṇa sabba -- yoga -- visaŋyutta Sn A 153. -- ye suvimuttā te kevalino ye kevalino vaṭṭaŋ tesaŋ natthi paññâpanāya S iii.59 sq., i. e. "those who are thoroughly emancipated, these are the accomplished . . ."; kevalīnaŋ mahesiŋ khīṇ' āsavaŋ Sn 82=S i.167; -- k. vusitavā uttamapuriso Nd2 on tiṇṇa=A v.16. -- with gen.: brahmacariyassa k. "perfected in morality" A ii.23. -- As Ep. of "brāhmaṇa" Sn 519=Nd2 s. v.; of dhammacakka A ii.9; see also Sn 490, 595. -- akevalin not accomplished, not perfected Sn 878, 891.
Kesa [Vedic keśa; cp. kesara hair, mane=Lat. caesaries, hair of the head, Ags. heord=E. hair] the hair of the head S i.115 (haṭa -- haṭa -- k˚, with dishevelled hair); A i.138 (palita -- kesa with grey hair; also at J i.59); Sn 456 (nivutta˚), 608; Th 1, 169; J i.59, 138; iii.393; Miln 26; KhA 42; Vism 353 (in detail). The wearing of long hair was forbidden to the Bhikkhus: Vin ii.107 sq.; 133 (cp. kesa -- massu); -- dark (glossy) hair is a distinction of beauty: susukāḷa -- keso (of Gotama) D i.115; cp. kaṇha and kalyāṇa; PvA 26. -- The hair of Petas is long and dishevelled PvA 56; Sdhp 103; it is the only cover of their nakedness: kesehi paṭicchanna "covered only with my hair" Pv i.102. -- kesesu gahetvā to take by the hair (in Niraya) D i.234; -- kesaŋ oropeti to have one's hair cut Vin ii.133.
-- oropaṇa ( -- satthaka) (a) hair -- cutting (knife), i. e. a razor DhA i.431; -- ohāraka one who cuts the hair, a barber Vism 413. -- kambala a hair blanket (according to Bdhgh human hair) D i.167=A i.240, 295=ii.206= Vin i.305= M i.78=Pug 55; A i.286. -- kambalin wearing a hair blanket (of Ajita) D i.55. -- kalāpā (pl.) (atimanohara˚) beautiful tresses PvA 46; -- kalyāṇa beauty of hair DhA i.387; -- kārika hairdresser Vv 175; -- dhātu the hair -- relic (of the Buddha) J i.81; -- nivāsin covered only with hair of Petas (: keseh' eva paṭicchādita -- kopīnā) Pv iii.16. ˚massu hair and beard; kappita -- k˚ -- m˚ (adj.) with h. and b. dressed D i.104; A iv.94; J vi.268. Esp. freq. in form kesa -- massuŋ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaŋ pabbajati "to shave off hair & beard, dress in yellow robes and leave the home for the homeless state," i. e. renounce the world and take up the life of a Wanderer D i.60, 115; iii.60, 64, 76; A i.107; iii.386; It 75; Pug 57; similarly A ii.207=Pug 56. -- sobha the splendour or beauty of the hair PvA 46. -- hattha a tuft of hair PvA 157; VvA 167.
Kesayati see kisa.
Kesara1 a mane, in -- sīha a maned lion J ii.244; SnA 127.
Kesara2 [fr. kesa] filament of flowers, hairy structures of plants esp. of the lotus; usually of kiñjakkha PvA 77; VvA 12; 111; -- sa -- kesarehi padumapattehi lotusleaves with their hairs VvA 32; nicula -- k˚ fibres of the Nicula tree VvA 134.
-- bhāra a sort of fan (cp. vāladhi and cāmara) VvA 278.
Kesarin [fr. kesara1] having a mane, of a lion, also name of a battle -- array (˚saŋgāmo) Dpvs i.7; cp. AvŚ i.56.
Kesava [fr. last] of rich hair, of beautiful hair. Ep. of King Vāsudeva (cp. kaṇha) Pv ii.62.
Kesika (adj.) [fr. kesa] hairy, of mangoes Miln 334.
Ko see ka.
Koka1 [not=Sk. koka, cuckoo] a wolf J vi.525; Nd1 13= Nd2 420; Miln 267=J v.416. ˚vighāsa remainder of a wolf's meal Vin iii.58.
Koka2 [cp. Sk. koka] N. of a tree, Phoenix sylvestris: see keka.
Kokanada (nt.) [cp. Sk. kokanada] the (red) lotus A iii.239=J i.116.
Kokāsika the red lotus in ˚jāta "like the red lotus," said of the flower of the Pāricchattaka tree A iv.118.
Kokila [cp. Sk. koka a kind of goose, also cuckoo, with derivation kokila cuckoo; cp. Gr. ko/kkuc, Lat. cuculus, E. cuckoo] the Indian cuckoo. Two kinds mentioned at VvA 57: kāḷa˚ and phussa˚ black and speckled k. <-> As citra˚ at J v.416. -- Vv 111, 588; VvA 132, 163.
Koca [fr. kuc] see saŋ˚.
Koci see ka.
Koccha1 (nt.) some kind of seat or settee, made of bark, grass or rushes Vin ii.149; iv.40 (where the foll. def. is given: kocchaŋ nāma vāka -- mayaŋ vā usīra -- mayaŋ vā muñjamayaŋ vā babbaja -- mayaŋ vā anto saŋveṭhetvā baddhaŋ hoti. Cp. Vin. Texts i.34; iii.165); J v.407. Also in list of 16 obstructions (palibodhā) at Miln 11.
Koccha2 (nt.) a comb (for hair -- dressing) Vin ii.107; Vv 8446 (=VvA 349); Th 2, 254, 411 (=ThA 267).
-- kāra a comb -- maker Miln 331 (not in corresp. list of vocations at D i.51).
Koja mail armour J iv.296 (=kavaca).
Kojava a rug or cover with long hair, a fleecy counterpane Vin i.281; DhA i.177; iii.297 (pāvāra˚); Dāvs v.36. Often in expln of goṇaka (q. v.) as dīgha -- lomaka mahākojava DA i.86; PvA 157.
Koñca1 [cp. Sk. krauñca & kruñc] the heron, often in combn with mayūra (peacock): Th 1, 1113; Vv 111, 358; J v.304; vi.272; or with haŋsa Pv ii.123. -- Expld as sārasa VvA 57; jiṇṇa˚ an old heron Dh 155.
Koñca2=abbr. of koñca -- nāda, trumpeting, in koñcaŋ karoti to trumpet (of elephants) Vin iii.109; J vi.497.
-- nāda the trumpeting of an elephant ("the heron's cry") [not with Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 163 sq. to kruñc. (meaning to bend, cp. Lat. crux, E. ridge), but prob. a contamination of krośa, fr. krus to crow, and kuñja=kuñjara, elephant (q. v.). Partly suggested at Divy 251; see also expln at VvA 35, where this connection is quite evident.] J i.50; Miln 76 (in etymol. play with koñca); VvA 35. -- rāva=prec. DhA iv.70. -- vādikā a kind of bird J vi.538.
Koṭa [fr. kūṭa2] belonging to a peak, in cpd. ˚pabbata "peak -- mountain," Npl. Vism 127 (write as K˚), 292.
Koṭacikā pudendum muliebre, in conn. with kāṭa as a vile term of abuse Vin iv.7 (Bdhgh. koṭacikā ti itthinimittaŋ . . . hīno nāma akkoso).
Koṭi (f.) [cp. Sk. koṭi & kūṭa2] the end -- (a) of space: the extreme part, top, summit, point (cp. anta to which it is opposed at J vi.371): dhanu -- koṭiŋ nissāya "through the (curved) end of my bow," i. e. by means of hunting J ii.200; aṭṭhi -- koṭi the tip of the bone J iii.26; cāpa˚ a bow VvA 261; vema˚ the part of a loom that is moved DhA iii.175; khetta˚ the top (end) of the field SnA 150; cankamana˚ the far end of the cloister J iv.30; PvA 79. -- (b) of time: a division of time, with reference either to the past or the future, in pubba˚ the past (cp. pubbanta), also as purima˚; and pacchima˚ the future (cp. aparanta). These expressions are used only of saŋsāra: saŋsārassa purimā koṭi na paññāyati "the first end, i. e. the beginning of S. is not known" Nd2 664; DhsA 11; of pacchimā koṭi ibid. -- anamatagg' âyaŋ saŋsāro, pubba˚ na paññāyati S's end and beginning are unthinkable, its starting -- point is not known (to beings obstructed by ignorance) S ii.178=iii.149= Nd2 664=Kvu 29=PvA 166; cp. Bdhd 118 (p.k. na ñāyati). -- koṭiyaŋ ṭhito bhāvo "my existence in the past" J i.167. -- (c) of number: the "end" of the scale, i. e. extremely high, as numeral representing approximately the figure a hundred thousand (cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie. p. 336). It follows on satasahassāni Nd2 664, and is often increased by sata˚ or sahassa˚, esp. in records of wealth (dhana) Sn 677; J i.227, 230, 345=DhA i.367 (asīti˚ -- vibhavo); J i.478; PvA 3, 96; cp. also koṭisatā arahanto Miln 6, 18. -- kahāpaṇa -- koṭi -- santhārena "for the price (lit. by the spreading out) of 10 million kahāpaṇas" Vin ii.159= J i.94 (ref. to the buying of Jetavana by Anāthapiṇḍika).
-- gata "gone to the end," having reached the end, i. e. perfection, nibbāna. Nd2 436; -- ppatta=prec. Nd2 436; as "extreme" J i.67. -- simbalī N. of a tree (in Avīci) Sdhp 194.
Koṭika (adj.) [fr. koṭi] 1. having a point or a top, with ref. to the human teeth as eka˚, dvi˚, ti˚, catu˚, or teeth with one, two, etc., points Vism 251. -- 2. having an end or climax SA on pariyanta (see KS. p. 320); āpāna˚ lasting till the end of life Miln 397: Vism 10. <-> 3. referring to (both) ends (of saŋsāra), in ubhato˚ pañhā questions regarding past & future M i.393 sq.
Koṭin (adj.) [fr. koṭi] aiming for an end or goal J vi.254 (cp. ākoṭana2).
Koṭilla (nt.) [fr. kuṭila] crookedness Dhtm 526; Abhp 859. As koṭilya at Dhtp 472.
Koṭumbara (nt.) [cp. BSk. kauṭumba Divy 559] a kind of cloth J vi.47 (coming from the kingdom of k.), 500 (spelt kodumb˚). -- ˚ka k. -- stuffs Miln 2.
Koṭṭa (?) breaking, asi -- k˚ note on Vin iv.363 (for asikoṭṭha Vin iv.171?); ˚aṭṭhi at Vism 254 read koṭṭh˚.
Koṭṭana [fr. koṭṭeti] 1. grinding, crushing, pounding (grains) J i.475; ˚pacan' ādi pounding and cooking, etc. DhA ii.261. -- 2. hammering or cutting (?) in dāru˚ J ii.18; vi.86 (maŋsa˚, here "beating," T. spells ṭṭh). Cp. adhikuṭṭanā.
Koṭṭita (pp. of kotteti] beaten down, made even Vism 254, 255.
Koṭṭima a floor of pounded stones, or is it cloth? Dāvs iv.47.
Koṭṭeti [cp. Sk. kuṭ & kuṭṭa1. Expld one -- sidedly by Dhtp (91 & 556) as "chedane" which is found only in 3 and adhikuṭṭanā. The meaning "beat" is attributed by Dhtp (557) & Dhtm (783) to root kuṭ3 (see kūṭa3) by expla "akoṭane." Cp. also kūṭa4; ākoṭeti & paṭikoṭeti] -- 1. to beat, smash, crush, pound J i.478; vi.366 (spelt ṭṭh); DhA i.25 (suvaṇṇaŋ) 165. -- 2. to make even (the ground or floor) Vin ii.291 (in making floors); J vi.332. -- 3. to cut, kill SnA 178 (=hanti of Sn 121); DhA i.70 (pharasunā). -- pp. koṭṭita. -- Caus. koṭṭāpeti to cause to beat, to massage Vin ii.266; J iv.37 (ṭṭ the only v. l. B.; T. has ṭṭh).
Koṭṭha1 (m. nt.) [Sk. koṣṭha abdomen, any cavity for holding food, cp. kuṣṭa groin, and also Gr. ku/tos cavity, ku/sdos pudendum muliebre, ku/stis bladder = E. cyst, chest; Lat. cunnus pudendum, Ger. hode testicle] anything hollow and closed in (Cp. gabbha for both meanings) as -- 1. the stomach or abdomen Miln 265, Vism 357; Sdhp 257. -- 2. a closet, a monk's cell, a storeroom, M i.332; Th 2, 283 (?)=ThA, 219; J ii.168. <-> 3. a sheath, in asi˚ Vin iv.171.
-- aṭṭhi a stomach bone or bone of the abdomen Vism 254, 255. -- abbhantara the intestinal canal Miln 67; -- âgāra (nt.) storehouse, granary, treasury: in conn. with kosa (q. v.) in formula paripuṇṇa -- kosa -- koṭṭhâgāra (adj.) D i.134, expld at DA i.295 as threefold, viz. dhana˚ dhañña˚ vattha˚, treasury, granary, warehouse; PvA 126, 133; -- âgārika a storehouse -- keeper, one who hoards up wealth Vin i.209; DhA i.101; -- āsa [=koṭṭha +aŋsa] share, division, part; ˚koṭṭhāsa (adj.) divided into, consisting of. K. is a prose word only and in all Com. passages is used to explain bhāga: J i.254; 266; vi.368; Miln 324; DhA iv.; 108 (=pada), 154; PvA 58, 111, 205 (kāma˚=kāmaguṇā); VvA 62; anekena k˚ -- ena infinitely PvA 221.
Koṭṭha2 a bird J vi.539 (woodpecker?).
Koṭṭha3 [cp. Sk. kuṭṭha] N. of a plant, Costus speciosus (?) J v.420.
Koṭṭhaka1 (nt.) "a kind of koṭṭha," the stronghold over a gateway, used as a store -- room for various things, a chamber, treasury, granary Vin ii.153, 210; for the purpose of keeping water in it Vin ii.121=142; 220; treasury J i.230; ii.168; -- store -- room J ii.246; koṭthake pāturahosi appeared at the gateway, i. e. arrived at the mansion Vin i.291.; -- udaka -- k a bath -- room, bath cabinet Vin i.205 (cp. Bdhgh's expln at Vin. Texts ii.57); so also nahāna -- k˚ and piṭṭhi -- k˚, bath -- room behind a hermitage J iii.71; DhA ii.19; a gateway, Vin ii.77; usually in cpd. dvāra -- k˚ "door cavity," i. e. room over the gate: gharaŋ satta -- dvāra -- koṭṭhakapaṭimaṇḍitaŋ "a mansion adorned with seven gateways" J i.227=230, 290; VvA 322. dvāra -- koṭṭhakesu āsanāni paṭṭhapenti "they spread mats in the gateways" VvA 6; esp. with bahi: bahi -- dvārakoṭṭhakā nikkhāmetvā "leading him out in front of the gateway" A iv.206; ˚e thiṭa or nisinna standing or sitting in front of the gateway S i.77; M i.161, 382; A iii.30. -- bala -- k. a line of infantry J i.179. -- koṭṭhaka -- kamma or the occupation connected with a storehouse (or bathroom?) is mentioned as an example of a low occupation at Vin iv.6; Kern, Toev. s. v. "someone who sweeps away dirt."
Koṭṭhaka2 [cp. Sk. koyaṣṭika] the paddy -- bird, as rukkha˚ J iii.25; ii.163 (v. l. ṭṭ).
Koṭṭhu see kotthu.
Koṭṭheti at J ii.424 the v. l. khobheti (nāvaŋ) should be substituted. See also koṭṭeti.
Koṇa [cp. Sk. koṇa & also P. kaṇṇa] 1. a corner Vin ii.137; catu˚=catu -- kaṇṇa PvA 52; -- ˚racchā crossroads PvA 24. -- 2. a plectrum for a musical instrument Miln 53.
Koṇṭa (v. l. B. koṇḍa) (?) a man of dirty habits J ii.209. 210, 212.
Koṇṭha a cripple J ii.118.
Koṇḍa -- damaka (?) [cp. kuṇḍa] J iv.389; also as v. l. B at J ii.209.
Koṇḍañña a well -- known gotta J ii.360.
Kotūhala (nt.) [on formation cp. kolāhala; see also kutūhala] excitement, tumult, festival, fair Dāvs ii.80; esp. in ˚mangalaŋ paccāgacchati he visits the fair or show of . . . M i.265; A. iii.439; ˚mangalika celebrating feasts, festive A iii.206; J i.373; Miln 94 (cp. Miln trsl. i.143n: the native commentator refers it to erroneous views and discipline called kotūhala and mangalika) -- (b) adj.: kotūhala excited, eager for, desirous of Miln 4; DhA i.330.
-- sadda shout of excitement Miln 301.
Kotthalī (koṭṭhalī?) a sack (?) Vin iii.189=iv.269.
Kotthu [koṭṭhu J only: cp. Sk. kroṣṭu, of kruś] a jackal D iii.25, 26; M i.334; Nd1 149 (spelt koṭṭhu); J vi.537 (˚sunā: expld by sigāla -- sunakhā, katthu -- soṇā ti pi pāṭho). kotthuka (and koṭṭhuka)=prec. S i.66 (where text has kutthaka) J ii.108; Miln 23.
Kodaṇḍa (nt.) [cp. Sk. kodaṇḍa] a cross -- bow M i.429 (opp. to cāpa); Miln 351 (dhanu and k˚). ˚ka same J iv.433 (expld by dhanu).
Kodumbara see koṭumbara.
Kodha [Vedic krodha fr. krudh, cp. kujjhati] anger. Nearest synonyms are āghāta (Dhs. 1060=Nd2 576, both expositions also of dosa), upanāha (always in chain rāga, dosa, moha, kodha, upanāha) and dhūma (cp. qumo/s, Mhg. toûm=anger). As pair k. and upanāha A i.91, 95; in sequence kodha upanāha makkha paḷāsa, etc. Nd2 rāga 1.; Vbh 357 sq.; Vism 53, 107, 306; in formula abhijjhā byāpāda k. upanāha M i.36; A i.299=iv.148; cp. A iv.456=v.209; v.39, 49 sq., 310, 361. As equivalent of āghāta Dhs 1060=Nd2 576, cp. Pug 18. In other combn: with mada and thambha Sn 245; kadariya Sn 362; pesuniya Sn 928; mosavajja Sn 866, 868 (cp. S i.169). Other passages, e. g. A i.283; S i.240; Sn 537, (lobha˚); Pv ii.37; Dh i.52 (anattha -- janano kodho); PvA 55, 222. -- kodha is one of the obstacles to Arahantship, and freedom from kodha is one of the fundamental virtues of a well-balanced mind. -- mā vo kodho ajjhabhavi "let not anger get the better of you" S i.240; māno hi te brāhmaṇa khāribhāro kodho dhūmo bhasmani mosavajjaŋ, etc. "anger is the smoke (smouldering) in the ashes" S i.169=Nd2 576. -- kodhaŋ chetvā cutting off anger S i.41=47=161=237; kodhaŋ jahe vippajaheyya mānaŋ "give up anger, renounce conceit" J i.23 25=Dh 221; kodhaŋ pajahanti vipassino: "the wise give up anger" It 2=7; panuṇṇa -- kodha (adj.) one who has driven out anger Sn 469; akkodhena jine kodhaŋ conquer anger by meekness Dh 223=J ii.4=VvA 69. Yo ye uppatitaŋ kodhaŋ rathaŋ bhantaŋ va dhāraye tam ahaŋ sārathiŋ brūmi -- "He who restrains rising anger as he would a drifting cart, him I call a waggoner" Dh 222, cp. Sn 1. -- akkodha freedom from anger, meekness, conciliation M i.44; S i.240 (with avihiŋsā tenderness, kindness); A i.95; Dh 223=J ii.4=VvA 69.
-- âtimāna anger and conceit Sn 968. -- upāyāsa companionship or association with anger, the state of being pervaded with anger (opp. akkodh˚) M i.360, 363; often compared with phenomena of nature suggesting swelling up, viz. "uddhumāyika" kodhupāyāsassa adhivacanaŋ M i.144; "sa -- ummī" It 114; "sobbho papāto" S iii.109; -- garu "having respect for" i. e. pursuing anger (opp. saddhammagaru) A ii.46 sq., 84; -- paññāṇa (adj.) knowing the true nature of anger Sn 96 (cp. SnA 170); -- bhakkha feeding on, i. e. fostering anger, Ep. of a Yakkha S i.238; -- vinaya the discipline or control of anger A i.91; v.165, 167 (combd. with upanāha vinaya).
Kodhana (adj.) [fr. kodha) having anger, angry, uncon- trolled]; usually in combn with upanāhin, e. g. Vin ii.89; D iii.45, 246; A v.156, cp. Sn 116; S ii.206; Pug 18. -- k˚ kodhābhibhūta A iv.94 sq.; k˚ kodhavinayassa na vaṇṇavādī A v.165. -- Used of caṇḍa PvA 83. -- Cp. S iv.240; M i.42 sq., 95 sq.; PvA 82. <-> akkodhana friendly, well -- disposed, loving D iii.159; S ii.207; iv.243; M i.42 sq., 95 sq.; Sn 19, 624, 850, 941; Vv 155; VvA 69.
Konta a pennant, standard (cp. kunta) J vi.454; DA i.244; SnA 317.
Kontīmant at J vi.454 is expld by camma -- kāra, thus "worker in leather ( -- shields or armour)," with der. fr. konta ("satthitāya kontāya likhattā . . ."), but reading and meaning are uncertain.
Kopa [fr. kup] ill -- temper, anger, grudge Vin ii.184=Sn 6; Dhs 1060; with appaccaya (mistrust) M i.27; almost exclusively in phrase kopañ ca dosañ ca appaccayañ ca pātukaroti (pātvakāsi) "he shows forth ill -- temper, malice and mistrust" (of a "codita" bhikkhu) D iii.159; S iv.305; M i.96 sq., 250, 442; A i.124, 187; ii.203; iii.181 sq.; iv.168, 193; J i.301; Sn p. 92. <-> akopa (adj.) friendly, without hatred, composed Sn 499.
-- antara (adj.) one who is under the power of ill-temper S i.24.
Kopaneyya (adj.) [fr. kopa] apt to arouse anger J vi.257.
Kopīna (nt.) [cp. Sk. kaupīna] a loin -- cloth J v.404; Pv ii.323; PvA 172; Sdhp 106.
-- niddaŋsanin "one who removes the loin -- cloth," i. e. shameless, impure D iii.183.
Kopeti [caus. of kuppati] to set into agitation, to shake, to disturb: rājadhamme akopetvā not disturbing the royal rules PvA 161; J ii.366=DhA iv.88; kammaŋ kopetuŋ Vin iv.153 to find fault with a lawful decision; kāyangaŋ na kopeti not to move a limb of the body: see kāya. Cp. paṭi˚, pari˚, vi˚, saŋ˚.
Komala see kamala; Mhbv 29.
Komāra [fr. kumāra] (adj.) juvenile, belonging to a youth or maiden: f. komārī a virgin A iv.210.
-- pati husband of a girl -- wife J ii.120. -- brahmacariyā (˚ŋ carati) to practise the vow of chastity or virginity A iii.224; ThA 99. -- bhacca Np. "master of the k˚ -- science," i. e. of the medical treatment of infants (see note on Vin i.269 at Vin. Texts ii.174). As such it is the cognomen of Jīvaka D i.47 (as Komārabhacca DA i.132); Vin i.71; J i.116; cp. Sdhp 351.
Komāraka (and ˚ika)=prec. A i.261; J ii.180 (dhamma virginity); of a young tree S iv.160. -- f. ˚ikā J iii.266.
Komudī (f.) [fr. kumuda the white waterlily, cp. Sk. kaumudī] moonlight; the full -- moon day in the month Kattika, usually in phrase komudī catumāsinī Vin i.155, 176, sq.; D i.47 (expld at DA i.139 as: tadā kira kumudāni supupphitāni honti) or in phrase komudiyā puṇṇamāya DhA iii.461.
Koraka (m. nt.) [cp. Sk. koraka] 1. a bud J ii.265. - 2. a sheath J iii.282.
Korakita (adj.) [fr. koraka] full of buds VvA 288.
Korajika (adj.) [fr. ku+raj or rañj, cp. rāga] affected, excitable, infatuated Nd1 226=Nd2 342 (v. l. kocaraka)=Vism 26 (v. l. korañjika).
Koraṇḍaka [=kuraṇḍaka] a shrub and its flower J v.473 (˚dāma, so read for karaṇḍaka), vi.536; as Npl. in Koraṇḍaka -- vihāra Vism 91.
Korabya [Sk. kauravya] Np. as cognomen: the descendant of Kuru J ii.371 (of Dhanañjaya).
Koriyā (f.) a hen v. l. (ti vā pāḷi) at Th 2, 381 for turiyā. See also ThA 255 (=kuñcakārakukkuṭī).
Kola (m. nt.) [Halāyudha ii.71 gives kola in meaning of "hog," corrupted fr. kroḍa] the jujube fruit M i.80; A iii.49 (sampanna -- kolakaŋ sūkaramaŋsa "pork with jujube"); J iii.22 (=badara); vi.578.
-- mattiyo (pl.) of the size of a j. truit, always comb. w. kolaṭṭhi -- mattiyo, of boils A v.170=Sn p. 125, cp. S i.150; -- rukkha the j. tree SnA 356; DA i.262; -- sampāka cooked with (the juice of) jujube Vv 435 (=VvA 186).
Kolankola [der. fr. kula] going from kula to kula (clan to clan) in saŋsāra: A i.233=Pug 16; S v.205; Nett 189, cp. A iv.381; A v.120.
Kolañña (adj.) [fr. kula] born of (good) family (cp. ku- laja); as -- ˚, belonging to the family of . . . D i.89; DA i.252; Miln 256. -- khīṇa -- kolañña (adj.) one who has come down in the world Vin i.86.
Kolaṭṭhi the kernel of the jujube, only in cpd. ˚mattiyo (pl.) S i.150=A v.170= Sn p. 125 (with kolamattiyo), and ˚mattā Th 2, 498=ThA 289; DhA i.319.
Kolaputti at A i.38 is composition form of kulaputta, and is to be combined with the foll. -- vaṇṇa -- pokkharatā, i. e. light colour as becoming a man of good family. Kern, Toev. s. v. quite unnecessarily interprets it as "heroncolour," comparing Sk. kolapuccha heron. A similar passage at Nd1 80=Nd2 505 reads kolaputtikena vā vaṇṇapokkharatāya vā, thus taking kolaputtikaŋ as nt, meaning a man of good virtue. The A passage may be corrupt and should then be read ˚puttikaŋ.
Kolamba (and koḷamba VvA) a pot or vessel in general. In Vin always together with ghaṭa, pitcher: Vin i.208, 213, 225, 286; J i.33; DA i.58; VvA 36.
Kolāhala (nt.) (cp. also halāhala) shouting, uproar, excite- ment about ( -- ˚), tumult, foreboding, warning about something, hailing. There are 5 kolāhalāni enumd at KhA 120 sq. viz. kappa˚ (the announcement of the end of the world, cp. Vism 415 sq.), cakkavatti˚ (of a worldking), buddha˚ (of a Buddha), mangala˚ (that a Buddha will pronounce the "eu)agge/lion"), moneyya˚ (that a monk will enquire of the Lord after the highest wisdom, cp. SnA 490). One may compare the 3 (mahā -- )halāhalāni given at J i.48 as kappa -- halāhala, buddha˚ and cakkavatti˚, eka -- kolāhalaŋ one uproar J iv.404; vi.586; DhA ii.96. See also Vin ii.165, 275, 280; J v.437; DhA i.190; PvA 4; VvA 132.
Koliya (adj.) [fr. kola] of the fruit of the jujube tree J iii.22, but wrongly expld as kula -- dattika ph.=given by a man of (good) family.
Kolīniyā (f.) well -- bred, of good family J ii.348 (BB koley- yaka).
Koleyyaka (adj.) of good breed, noble, appld to dogs J i.175; iv.437. Cp. kolīniyā, and Divy 165: kolikagadrabha a donkey of good breed.
Koḷāpa (and kolāpa) (adj.) 1. dry, sapless; always appld to wood, freq. in similes S iv.161, 185; M i.242; iii.95; J iii.495; Miln 151; DhA ii.51; iv.166. -- 2. hollow tree Nd2 40; SnA 355 (where Weber, Ind. Streifen v.1862, p. 429 suggests reading koṭara=Sk. koṭara hollow tree; unwarranted).
Koḷikā (or kolika?) (f.) adj.=kolaka, appl. to boils, in pīḷikoḷikā (itthi) having boils of jujube size Th 2, 395 (expl. at ThA 259; akkhidalesu nibbattanakā pīḷikā vuccati).
Kovida (adj.) [ku+vid.] one who is in the possession of right wisdom, with ref. either to dhamma, magga, or ariyasaccāni, closely related to medhāvin and paṇḍita. S i.146, 194, 196 (ceto -- pariyāya˚); A ii.46; M i.1, 7, 135, 300, 310, 433; Dh 403=Sn 627; Sn 484 (jātimaraṇa˚), 653 (kammavipāka˚); Pv i.1112; Vv 159 (=VvA 73), 6330 (=VvA 269); Miln 344; Sdhp 350. -- akovida ignorant of true wisdom (dhammassa) S i.162; Sn 763; S iv.287=Nd2 on attānudiṭṭhi.
Koviḷāra [cp. Sk. kovidāra] Bauhinia variegata; a tree in the devaloka (pāricchattaka koviḷāra: k -- blossom, called p. VvA 174) A iv.117 sq.; Sn 44; J iv.29; Vv 381; DhA i.270.
-- puppha the flower of the K. tree SnA 354 (where the limbs of one afflicted with leprosy are compared with this flower).
Kosa1 (m. nt.) [cp. Sk. kośa and koṣa, cavity, box vessel, cp. Goth. hūs, E. house; related also kukṣi=P. kucchi] any cavity or enclosure containing anything, viz. 1. a store -- room or storehouse, treasury or granary A iv.95 (rāja˚); Sn 525; J iv.409 (=wealth, stores); J vi.81 (aḍḍhakosa only half a house) in cpd. -- ˚ koṭṭhāgāra, expld at DA i.295 as koso vuccati bhaṇḍāgāraŋ. Four kinds are mentioned: hatthī˚, assā˚, rathā˚, raṭṭhaŋ˚. <-> 2. a sheath, in khura˚ Vism 251, paṇṇa˚ KhA 46. <-> 3. a vessel or bowl for food: see kosaka. -- 4. a cocoon, see -- ˚kāraka; -- 5. the membranous cover of the male sexual organ, the praeputium J v.197. The Com. expls by sarīra -- saŋkhāta k˚. See cpd. kosohita. <-> Cp. also kosī.
-- ārakkha the keeper of the king's treasury (or granary) A iii.57; -- ohita ensheathed, in phrase kosohita vatthaguyha "having the pudendum in a bag." Only in the brahmin cosmogonic myth of the superman (mahā -- purisa) D iii.143, 161. Applied as to this item, to the Buddha D i.106 (in the Cy DA i.275, correct the misprint kesa into kosa) D ii.17; Sn 1022 pp. 106, 107; Miln 167. For the myth see Dial iii.132 -- 136. -- kāraka the "cocoon -- maker," i. e. the silk -- worm, Vin iii.224; Vism 251. -- koṭṭhāgāra "treasury and granary" usually in phrase paripuṇṇa -- k -- k (adj.) "with stores of treasures and other wealth" Vin i.342; D i.134; S i.89; Miln 2; & passim.
Kosa2 at VvA 349 is marked by Hardy, Index and trsld by scar or pock. It should be corrected to kesa, on evidence of corresp. passage in ThA 267 (cp. koccha).
Kosaka [fr. kosa] 1. a sheath for a needle J iii.282; - 2. a bowl, container, or vessel for food J i.349 (v. l. kesaka); M ii.6, 7, ( -- ˚āhāra adj. living on a bowl -- full of food; also aḍḍha˚) Vism 263. -- 3. case for a key (kuñcikā˚) Vism 251.
Kosajja (nt.) [From kusīta] idleness, sloth, indolence; expld at Vbh 369. -- Vin ii.2; S v.277 -- 280; A i.11, 16; ii.218; iii.375, 421; v.146 sq.; 159 sq.; A iv.195= Dh 241; Miln 351; Vism 132; Nett 127; DhA iii.347; iv.85; DhsA 146; SnA 21.
Kosamattha=ka+samattha "who is able," i. e. able, fit DA i.27.
Kosalla (nt.) [der. fr. kusala] proficiency. There are 3 kinds mentioned at D iii.220, Vbh 325 & Vism 439 sq., viz. āya˚, apāya˚ and upāya˚; at Dhs 16=20=292 = 555=Nd2 ad paññā it is classed between paṇḍicca and nepuñña. See also Pug 25; Vism 128 sq. (appanā˚), 241 sq. (uggaha˚ & manasikāra˚), 248 (bojjhanga˚); PvA 63, 99 (upāya˚).
Kosātakī (f.) [cp. Sk. kośātakī] a kind of creeper Vv 474; Vism 256, 260, 359; VvA 200; -- bīja the seed of the k. A i.32=v.212.
Kosika=kosiya, an owl J v.120.
Kosiya an owl J ii.353, cp. Np. Kosiyāyana J i.496. Biḷārakosika (and ˚kosiya) J iv.69.
Kosī (f.) a sheath D i.77=M ii.17.
Koseyya [der. fr. kosa, cp. Sk. kauśeya silk -- cloth and P. kosa -- kāraka] silk; silken material Vin i.58=Miln 267; Vin i.192, 281; ii.163, 169; D i.7, cp. A i.181 (see DA i.87); A iv.394; Pv ii.117; J i.43; vi.47.
-- pāvāra a silk garment Vin i.281; -- vattha a silk garment DhA i.395.
Kohañña (nt.) [fr. kuhana] hypocrisy, deceit J ii.72; iii.268; iv.304; DhA i.141.
Kvaṇ (indecl.) is together with kuṇ registered as a part. of sound ("sadde") at Dhtp 118 & Dhtm 173.
Kha syllable & ending, functioning also as root, meaning "void, empty" or as n. meaning "space"; expld. by Bdhgh with ref. to dukkha as "khaŋ saddo pana tucche; tucchaŋ hi ākāsaŋ khan ti vuccati" Vism 494. -- In meaning "space, sky" in cpd. khaga "sky -- goer" (cp. viha -- ga of same meaning), i. e. bird Abhp 624; Bdhd 56.
Khagga [Sk. khaḍga; perhaps to Lat. clades and gladius; cp. also kūṭa3] 1. a sword (often with dhanu, bow) at D i.7 (Dh i.89=asi) as one of the forbidden articles of ornament (cp. BSk. khaḍga -- maṇi Divy 147, one of the royal insignia); -- khaggaŋ bhandati to gird on one's sword PvA 154, khaggaŋ sannayhati id. DhA iii.75; ˚gāhaka a sword -- bearer Miln 114; ˚tala sword -- blade Mhvs 25, 90. -- 2. a rhinoceros J v.406 (=gavaja), 416; vi.277 (˚miga), 538. In cpd. ˚visāṇā (cp. BSk. khaḍgaviṣāṇa Divy 294=Sn 36) the horn of a rh. (: khagga -- visāṇaŋ nāma khagga -- miga -- singaŋ SnA 65) Sn 35 sq. (N. of Sutta); Nd2 217 (khagga -- visāṇa -- kappa "like the horn of the rh." Ep. of a Paccekabuddha, (cp. Divy 294, 582), also at Vism 234.
Khacita [pp. of khac as root expld at Dhtm. 518 by "bandhana"] inlaid, adorned with, usually with jewels e. g. VvA 14, 277; maṇi -- muttâdi khacitā ghaṇṭā "bells inlaid with jewels, pearls, etc." VvA 36; of a fan inlaid with ivory (danta -- khacita) Vin iii.287 (Sam. Pās.). Suvaṇṇa -- khacita -- gajak' attharaṇā "elephants' trappings interwoven with gold" VvA 104; of a chair, inlaid with pearls J i.41; of a canopy embroidered with golden stars J i.57.
Khajja (adj. -- nt.) [grd. of khajjati] to be eaten or chewed, eatable, solid food, usually in cpd. -- bhojja solid and other food, divided into 4 kinds, viz. asita, pīta, khāyita, sāyita Pv i.52 (=PvA 25) J i.58; Miln 2. -- bhājaka a distributor of food (an office falling to the lot of a senior bhikkhu) Vin ii.176 (=v.204); iv. 38, 155.
Khajjaka (adj.) [fr. last] eatable, i. e. solid food (as ˚bhoj- janāni opposed to yāgu PvA 23); (nt.) J i.186 (of 18 kinds, opp. yāgu); i.235 (id.); Miln 294. -- ˚bhājaka= prec.
Khajjati (=khādiyati, Pass. of khādati; Dhtm 93 bhak- khaṇa) 1. to be eaten, chewed, eaten up, as by animals: upacikāhi Vin ii.113; suṇakhehi Pv iii.78; puḷavehi J iii.177; cp. Pv iv.52 (cut in two) -- 2. to be itchy, to be irritated by itch (cp. E. "itch"=Intens. of "eat") J v.198 (kh˚ kanduvāyati); Pv ii.39 (kacchuyā kh˚) -- 3. to be devoured (fig.), to be consumed, to be a victim of: kāmataṇhāhi M. i.504; rūpena S iii.87, 88 (khajjanīya -- pariyāya, quoted Vism 479). <-> ppr. khajjamāna Pv ii.15 (consumed by hunger & thirst).
Khajjara caterpillar Pgdp 48.
Khajjopanaka [cp. Sk. khadyota] the fire -- fly M ii.34=41; J ii.415; vi.330, 441; DhA iii.178; also khajjūpanaka Vism 412 (in simile). See Trenckner J.P.T.S. 1908, 59 & 79.
Khañja (adj.) [cp. Sk. khañja, Dhtp 81: khañja gati- vekalye] lame (either on one foot or both: PugA 227) Vin ii.90=A i.107=ii.85=Pug 51 (comb. with kāṇa and kuṇi); Th 2, 438 (+kāṇa); DhA i.376 (+kuṇi).
Khañjati [fr. khañja] to be lame Pv iii.228.
Khañjana (nt.) hobbling, walking lame PvA 185.
Khaṭakhaṭa (khāṭ -- kata, making khāṭ; cp. kakkāreti) the noise of hawking or clearing one's throat: -- sadda Vin i.188; DhA iii.330; cp. khakkhaṭa (v. l. khaṭkhaṭa) Divy 518=utkāśanaśabda.
Khaṭopikā (f.) [perhaps connected with Sk khaṭvā? uncertain] couch, bedstead M i.450, 451 (vv. ll. ka˚, khajj˚).
Khaṇa1 (m.) [Derivation unknown. It has been suggested that khaṇa and the Sk. kshaṇa are derived from īkshaṇa (seeing) by process of contraction. This seems very forced; and both words are, in all probability, other than the word from which this hypothesis would derive them.] 1. (1) a (short), moment, wink of time; in phrase khaṇen' eva "in no time" PvA 38.117; Sdhp 584 (etc.). Sdhp 584; khaṇo ve mā upaccagā "let not the slightest time be wasted" Sn 333=Dh 315; cf. Th. ii.5 (cp. khaṇâtīta); n' atthi so kh˚ vā layo vā muhutto vā yaŋ (nadī) āramati "there is no moment, no inkling, no particle of time that the river stops flowing" A iv.137 (as simile of eternal flow of happening, of unbroken continuity of change); Vism 238 (jīvita˚), 473; (khaṇa -- vasena uppād'<-> ādi -- khaṇa -- ttaya, viz. uppāda, ṭhiti, bhanga, cp. p. 431); J iv.128; aṭṭha -- kkhaṇa -- vinimmutto kh˚ paramadullabho: one opportunity out of eight, very difficult to be obtained Sdhp 4, 16; cp. 45, 46. -- 2. moment as coincidence of two events: "at the same moment," esp. in phrase taŋ khaṇaŋ yeva "all at once," simultaneously, with which syn. ṭhānaso J i.167, 253; iii.276, PvA 19; PvA 27, 35; tasmiŋ khaṇe J ii.154; PvA 67; Sdhp 17. <-> 3. the moment as something expected or appointed (cp. kairo/s), therefore the right moment, or the proper time. So with ref. to birth, rebirth, fruit of action, attainment of Arahantship, presence on earth of a Buddha, etc., in cpds.: cuti -- kkhaṇo Bdhd 106; paṭisandhi˚ Ps ii.72 sq.; Bdhd 59, 77, 78; uppatti˚ Vbh 411 sq.; sotāpattimagga˚ Ps ii.3; phala˚ Ps i.26, Bdhd 80; nikanti˚ Ps ii.72 sq.; upacāra˚ Bdhd 94; citta˚ id. 38, 95. -- khaṇe khaṇe from time to time Dh 239 (= okāse okāse DhA iii.340, but cp. Comp. 161, n. 5), Buddhuppāda˚, Th ii.A, 12. akkhaṇa see sep. Also akkhaṇavedhin. -- akkhaṇe at the wrong time, inopportune Pv iv.140 (=akāle). On kh. laya, muhutta cp. Points of Contr. 296, n. 5.
-- âtīta having missed the opportunity Sn 333=Dh 315 (=DhA iii.489); -- ññū knowing, realizing the opportunity Sn 325 (cp. SnA 333). -- paccuppanna arisen at the moment or momentarily Vism 431 (one of the 3 kinds of paccuppanna: kh˚., santati˚, addhā˚). -- paritta small as a moment Vism 238.
Khaṇa2 [fr. khaṇ] digging J ii.296. Cp. atikhaṇa.
Khaṇati [fr. khan or khaṇ; Dhtp 179: anadāraṇe] 1. to dig (? better "destroy"; cp. Kern Toev. s. v.), dig out. uproot Dh 247, 337; Sn p. 101; J ii.295; iv.371, 373: Sdhp 394. Also khanati & cp. abhikkhaṇati, palikkhaṇati. -- 2. [= Sk. kṣanati] to destroy Vin ii.26 (attānaŋ); M i.132 (id.). -- pp. khata & khāta (cp. palikkhata).
Khaṇana (nt.) [fr. khaṇ] digging Miln 351 (pokkharaṇi˚).
Khaṇika (adj.) [fr. khaṇa] unstable, momentary, temporary, evanescent, changeable; usually syn. with ittara, e. g. J i.393; iii.83; PvA 60. -- Vism 626 (khaṇikato from the standpoint of the momentary). Khaṇikā pīti "momentary joy" is one of the 5 kinds of joy, viz. khuddikā, khaṇikā, okkantikā, ubbegā, pharaṇā (see pīti) Vism 143, DhsA 115.
-- citta temporary or momentary thought Vism 289. -- maraṇa sudden death Vism 229. -- vassa momentary, i. e. sudden rain ( -- shower) J vi.486.
Khaṇikatta (nt.) [fr. khaṇika] evanescence, momentariness Vism 301.
Khaṇḍa [freq. spelt kaṇḍa (q. v.). Cp. Sk. khaṇḍa; expld at Dhtp 105 as "chedana"] 1. (adj.) broken, usually of teeth; Th 2, 260 (=ThA 211); Miln 342; Vism 51. <-> 2. (m. nt.) a broken piece, a bit, camma˚ a strip of hide Vin ii.122; coḷa˚ a bit of cloth PvA 70; pilotika˚ bits of rags PvA 171; pūva˚ a bit of cake J iii.276; -- akhaṇḍa unbroken, entire, whole, in -- kārin (sikkhāya) fulfilling or practising the whole of (the commandments) Pv iv.343 and ˚sīla observing fully the sīla -- precepts Vv 113; cp. Vism 51 & Bdhd 89.
-- âkhaṇḍa (redupl. -- iter. formation with distributive function) piece by piece, nothing but pieces, broken up into bits Vism 115. -- âkhaṇḍika piece by piece, consisting of nothing but bits, in kh ˚ŋ chindati to break up into fragments A i.204 (of māluvālatā); ii.199 (of thūṇā); S ii.88 (of rukkha); cp. Vin iii.43 (dārūni ˚ŋ chedāpetvā); J v.231 (˚ŋ katvā). -- danta having broken teeth, as sign of old age in phrase kh˚ palitakesa, etc. "with broken teeth and grey hair" A i.138 and ≈; J i.59, 79 (id.). -- phulla [Bdhgh on Vin ii.160; khaṇḍa =bhinn'okāso, phulla=phalit' okāso.] broken and shattered portions; ˚ŋ paṭisankharoti to repair dilapidations Vin ii.160 (=navakammaŋ karoti) 286; iii.287; A iii.263; cp. same expression at Divy 22. a˚ unbroken and unimpaired fig. of sīla, the rule of conduct in its entirety, with nothing detracted Vv 8316=Pv iv.176 (cp. akhaṇḍasīla)=DhA i.32.
Khaṇḍati to break, DhA iv.14; pp. khaṇḍita broken, PvA 158 ( -- kaṇṇo= chinnakaṇṇo).
Khaṇḍikā (f.) [fr. khaṇḍa] a broken bit, a stick, in ucchu˚ Vv 3326 (=ucchu -- yaṭṭhi DhA iii.315).
Khaṇḍicca (nt.) the state of being broken (of teeth), having broken teeth, in phrase kh˚ pālicca, etc., as signs of old age (see above) M i.49=D ii.305; A iii.196; Dhs 644=736=869; DhA iii.123; in similar connection Vism 449.
Khaṇḍeti [v. denom. fr. khaṇḍa] to renounce, to remit, in vetanaŋ ˚etvā J iii.188.
Khata1 [pp. of khanati] 1. dug up, uprooted, fig. one whose foundation (of salvation) has been cut off; in combn with upahata D i.86 (=DA i.237); khataŋ upahataŋ attānaŋ pariharati "he keeps himself uprooted and half -- dead" i. e. he continues to lead a life of false ideas A i.105=ii.4; opp. akkhataŋ anupahataŋ, etc. A i.89.
Khata2 [pp. of kṣan, to wound] hurt, wounded; pādo kh˚ hoti sakalikāya "he grazed his foot" S i.27=Miln 134, 179. -- akkhata unmolested, unhurt Vv 8452 (= anupadduta VvA 351). See also parikkhata.
Khataka [fr. khata2] damage, injury VvA 206, khatakaŋ dāsiyā deti "she did harm to the servant, she struck the s." Or is it khalikaŋ? (cp. khaleti); the passage is corrupt.
Khatta (nt.) [Sk. kṣatra, to kṣi, cp. Gr. kta/omai, kth_ma, possession] rule, power, possession; only in cpds.:
-- dhamma the law of ruling, political science J v.490 (is it khattu˚= khattā˚?) -- vijjā polity D i.9, condemned as a practice of heretics. Bdhgh at DA i.93 explains it as nīti -- sattha, political science (=˚dhamma), See Rh. D. Dialogues i.18. -- vijjavādin a person who inculcates Macchiavellian tricks J v.228 (paraphrased: mātāpitaro pi māretvā attano va attho kāmetabbo ti "even at the expense of killing father and mother is wealth to be desired for oneself"), so also J v.240; -- vijjācariya one who practises kh -- ˚vijjā ibid.; -- vida (so read for ˚vidha)=˚vijja (adj.) a tricky person, ibid. (v. l. ˚vijja, better). Cp. Sk. kṣātra -- vidya.
Khattar [Sk. kṣattṛ fr. kṣatra] attendant, companion, charioteer, the king's minister and adviser (Lat. satelles "satellite" has been compared for etym.) D i.112 (=DA i.280, kh˚ vuccati pucchita -- pucchita -- pañhaŋ vyākaraṇa -- samattho mahāmatto: "kh˚ is called the King's minister who is able to answer all his questions"); Buddhaghosa evidently connects it with katheti, to speak, respond=katthā; gādhaŋ k˚ A ii.107=Pug 43 v. l. for kattā (cp. Pug A 225).
Khattiya [der. fr. khatta=kṣatra "having possessions"; Sk. kṣatriya] pl. nom. also khattiyāse J iii.441. A shortened form is khatya J vi.397. -- f. khattiyā A iii.226 -- 229, khattī D. i.193, and khattiyī. A member of one of the clans or tribes recognised as of Aryan descent. To be such was to belong to the highest social rank. The question of such social divisions in the Buddha's time is discussed in Dialogues i.97 -- 107; and it is there shown that whenever they are referred to in lists the khattiyas always come first. Khattiyo seṭṭho jane tasmiŋ D i.199=ii.97=M i.358=S i.153, ii.284. This favourite verse is put into the mouth of a god; and he adds that whoever is perfect in wisdom and righteousness is the best of all. On the social prestige of the khattiyas see further M ii.150 -- 157; iii.169; A ii.86; S i.71, 93; Vin iv.6 -- 10. On the religious side of the question D iii.82; 93; M i.149, 177; ii.84; S i.98. Wealth does not come into consideration at all. Only a very small percentage of the khattiyas were wealthy in the opinion of that time and place. Such are referred to at S i.15. All kings and chieftains were khattiyas D i.69, 136; iii.44, 46, 61; A i.106; iii.299; iv.259. Khattiyas are called rājāno Dhp 294, quoted Netti 165.
-- âbhiseka the inauguration of a king A i.107, 108 (of the crown -- prince) =A ii.87; -- kaññā a maid of khattiya birth J i.60; iii.394; -- kula a khattiya clan, a princely house, Vin ii.161 (w. ref. to Gotama's descent); iii.80; -- parisā the assembly of the khattiyas; as one of the four parisās (kh˚, brāhmaṇa˚, gahapati˚, samaṇa) at Vin i.227; A ii.133; as the first one of the eight (1 -- 4 as above, Cātummahārājika˚, Tāvatiŋsa˚, Māra˚, Brahma˚) at M i.72 =D iii.260; -- mahāsāla "the wealthy khattiya" (see above ii.1) D iii.258, etc.; -- māyā "the magic of the noble" DhA i.166; -- vaŋsa aristocratic descent DA i.267; -- sukhumāla a tender, youthful prince (of the Tathāgata: buddha˚, kh˚) DhA i.5.
Khattiyī (f.) a female khattiya, in series brāhmaṇī kh˚ vessī suddī caṇḍālī nesādī veṇī rathakārī pukkusī A iii.229; similarly M ii.33, 40.
˚Khattuŋ [Sk. ˚kṛtvah, cp. ˚kad] in compn with numerals "times": dvikkhattuŋ, tikkhattuŋ, etc.; twice, three times, etc.
Khadira [Sk. khadira; Gr. ki/ssaros, ivy; Lat. hedera, ivy] the tree Acacia catechu, in cpds. -- angārā (pl.) embers of (burnt) acacia -- wood J i.232; PvA 152; -- ghaṭikā a piece of a. -- wood J iv.88; -- tthambha a post of a. -- wood DhA iii.206; -- patta a bowl made of a. -- wood J v.389; -- vana a forest of acacias J ii.162; -- sūla an impaling stake of a. -- wood J iv.29.
Khanati see khaṇati.
Khanittī (f.) [to khan, cp. Sk. khanitra] a spade or hoe Vin i.270; J vi.520= V.89 (+ankusa).
Khantar [n. agent of khanti] possessed of meekness or gentleness; docile, manageable. Said of an elephant A ii.116=iii.161 sq.
Khanti & Khantī f. [Sk. kṣānti] patience, forbearance, forgiveness. Def. at Dhs 1341: khantī khamanatā adhivāsanatā acaṇḍikkaŋ anasuropo attamanatā cittassa. Most frequent combinations: with mettā (love) (see below); -- titikkhā (forbearance): khantī paramaŋ tapo titikkhā nibbānaŋ paramaŋ vadanti Buddhā Dh 184=D ii.49=Vism 295; khantiyā bhiyyo na vijjati, S i.226; cp. DhA iii.237: titikkhā -- sankhātā khantī; -- avihiŋsā (tolerance): kh˚, avihiŋsā, mettatā, anudayatā, S v.169; -- akodhana (forbearing, gentle) VvA 71; -- soraccaŋ (docility, tractableness) D iii.213= A i.94; also with maddava (gentleness) and s. as quality of a well -- bred horse A iii.248, cp. A ii.113 and khantā; -- sovaccassatā (kind speech) Sn 266 (cp. KhA 148). See also cpds. -- Khantī is one of the ten paramitās J i.22, 23: cp. A iii.254, 255. -- In other connections: khantiyā upasamena upeta S i.30; ativissuto Sdhp 473; anulomikāya kh˚iyā samannāgata (being of gentle and forbearing disposition) A iii.437, 441; Ps ii.236 sq.; Vbh 340. See also A iii.372; Sn 189, 292, 897, 944. <-> In scholastic language frequent in combination diṭṭhi khanti ruci, in def. of idha (Vbh 245), tattha (Nd2), diṭṭhi (Nd2), cp. Nd2 151 and Vbh 325 sq. -- akkhanti intolerance Vin iv.241 (=kopa); Vbh 360 (in def as opp. of khanti Dhs 1341. q. v. above), 378.
-- bala (nt.) the force of forbearance; (adj.) one whose strength is patience: . . . aduṭṭho yo titikkhati khantībalaŋ balānīkaŋ tam ahaŋ brūmi brāhmaṇaŋ Dh 399=Sn 623; -- DhA iv.164; Ps ii.171, 176; -- mettā forbearing love, in phrase kh˚ -- mettânuddayasampanna (adj.) one whose character is compassion and loving forbearance J i.151, 262; PvA 66 (+yuttakāra); VvA 71 (in expln of akodhana); -- suñña (nt.) the void of khanti Ps ii.183; -- soracca (nt.) gentleness and forbearance S i.100, 222; A ii.68; J iii.487; DhA i.56; ˚e niviṭṭha "established in forbearance and meekness" A iii.46=D iii.61.
Khantika (adj.) [fr. prec.] acquiescing in -- , of such and such a belief, in añña˚ belonging to another faith, combd with aññadiṭṭhika and aññarucika D i.187; M i.487.
Khandati [skand] to jump, only in cpd. pakkhandati; given as root khand at Dhtm 196 with meaning "pakkhandana."
Khandha [Sk. skandha] -- I. Crude meaning: bulk, massiveness (gross) substance. A. esp. used (a) of an elephant: the bulk of the body, i. e. its back S i.95; vāraṇassa J iii.392; hatthi -- khandha -- vara -- gata on the back of the state elephant J i.325; PvA 75. Also with ref. to an elephant (hatthināga) sañjāta˚ "to whom has grown bulk=a large back" Sn 53, expl. SnA 103 by susaṇṭhitakkhandho "well endowed with bulk." <-> (b) of a person: the shoulder or back: nangalaŋ khandhe karitvā S i.115 appl. to Māra; Vism 100; DhA iv.168 (ohita˚ -- bhāra the load lifted off his shoulder). <-> -- (c) of a tree: the trunk. rukkhassa PvA 114, also as rukkha˚ J i.324; tāla˚ the stem of a palm PvA 56; nigrodhassa khandhaja (see cpds.) S i.207=Sn 272; mūlaŋ atikkamma kh˚ ŋ sāraŋ pariyesitabbaŋ "one must go beyond the root and search the trunk for sweetness" S iv.94. -- (d) as t.t. in exegetical literature: section, chapter, lit. material as collected into uniform bulk; freq. in postscripts to Texts and Commentaries. See also khandhaka. -- B. More general as denoting bulk ( -- ˚); e. g. aggi˚ a great mass of fire M ii.34, 41; J iv.139; udaka˚ a mass of water (i. e. ocean) A iii.336; S iv.179; J i.324; PvA 62; puñña˚ a great accumulation of merit A iii.336=S v.400; bhoga˚ a store of wealth A v.84; J i.6; maṇi˚ an extraordinarily large jewel (possessing magic power) J ii.102 sq. -
II. Applied meaning. -- A. ( -- ˚) the body of, a collection of, mass, or parts of; in collective sense "all that is comprised under"; forming the substance of. <-> (a) dukkha˚ all that is comprised under "dukkha," all that goes to make up or forms the substance, the idea of "ill." Most prominent in phrase kevalassa dukkhakhandhassa samudaya and nirodha (the origin & destruction of all that is suffering) with ref. to the paṭiccasamuppāda, the chain of causal existence (q. v.) Vin i.1; S ii.95; iii.14; A i.177; v. 184 & passim. Similarly: samudaya Vbh 135 sq. nirodha Nett 64; antakiriyā A i.147; vyādhimaraṇatunnānaŋ dukkhakkhandhaŋ vyapānudi Th 2, 162. -- (b) lobha˚ dosa˚ moha˚ the three ingredients or integrations of greed, suffering and bewilderment, lit. "the big bulk or mass of greed" (see also under padāleti), S v.88 (nibbijjhati through the satta bojjhangā). -- (c) vayo˚ a division of age, part of age, as threefold: purima˚, majjhima˚, pacchima˚ Nd2 in def. of sadā. -- (d) sīla (etc.) kh˚ the 3 (or 5) groups or parts which constitute the factors of right living (dhamma), viz. (1) sīla˚ the group dealing with the practice of morality; (2) samādhi˚ that dealing with the development of concentration; (3) paññā˚ that dealing with the development of true wisdom. They are also known under the terms of sīla -- sampadā, citta˚, paññā˚ D i.172 sq.; see sīla. -- D i.206; Nett 64 sq.; 126. tīhi dhammehi samannāgato "possessed of the three qualities," viz. sīla -- kkhandhesu, etc. It 51; cp. A i.291; v.326. tīhi khandhehi . . . aṭṭhangiko maggo sangahito M i.301; sīlakkhandhaŋ, etc. paripūreti "to fulfil the sīla -- group" A i.125; ii.20, iii.15 sq. These 3 are completed to a set of 5 by (4) vimutti˚ the group dealing with the attainment of emancipation and (5) vimutti -- ñāṇa -- dassana ˚the group dealing with the realization of the achievement of emancipation. As 1 -- 4 only at D iii.229 (misprint puñña for paññā); cp. A i.125. As 5 at S i.99=A i.162; S v.162; A iii.134, 271; v.16 (all loc.=S i.99); It 107, 108; Nd2 under sīla.
B. (absolute) in individual sense: constituent element, factor, substantiality. More especially as khandhā (pl.) the elements or substrata of sensory existence, sensorial aggregates which condition the appearance of life in any form. Their character according to quality and value of life and body is evanescent, fraught with ills & leading to rebirth. Paraphrased by Bdhgh. as rāsi, heap, e. g. Asl. 141; Vibh A 1 f.; cf. B. Psy. 42. 1. Unspecified. They are usually enumerated in the foll. stereotyped set of 5: rūpa˚ (material qualities), vedanā (feeling), saññā (perception), sankhārā (coefficients of consciousness), viññāṇa (consciousness). For further ref. see rūpa; cp. also Mrs. Rh. D. Dhs trsl. pp. 40 -- 56. They are enumerated in a different order at S i.112, viz. rūpaŋ vedayitaŋ saññaŋ viññāṇaŋ yañ ca sankhataŋ n' eso 'ham asmi. Detailed discussions as to their nature see e. g. S iii.101 (=Vbh 1 -- 61); S iii.47; iii.86. As being comprised in each of the dhātus, viz. kăma˚ rūpa˚ arūpa -- dhātu Vbh 404 sq.
(a) As factors of existence (cp. bhava). Their rôle as such is illustrated by the famous simile: "yathā hi angasambhārā hoti saddo ratho iti evaŋ khandhesu santesu hoti satto ti sammuti" "just as it is by the condition precedent of the co -- existence of its various parts, that the word ʻ chariot ʼ is used, just so it is that when the skandhas are there, we talk of a ʻ being ʼ" (Rh. D.) (cp. Hardy, Man. Buddh. p. 425) S i.135=Miln 28. Their connotation "khandha" is discussed at S iii.101 =M iii.16: "kittāvatā nu kho khandhānaŋ khandhâdhivacanaŋ? rūpaŋ (etc.) atītânāgatapaccuppannaŋ ajjhattaŋ vā bahiddhā vā oḷārikaŋ," etc.: i.e. material qualities are equivalent terms for the kh. What causes the manifestation of each kh.? cattāro mahābhūtā . . . paccayo rūpa -- khandhassa paññāpanāya; phasso . . . vedana˚, saññā˚, sankhārā˚, etc.; nāmarūpaŋ . . . viññāṇa˚: the material elements are the cause of rūpa, touch is that of vedanā, saññā, sankhārā, name and shape that of viññāṇa (S iii.101); cp. M i.138 sq., 234 sq. On the same principle rests their division in: rūpa -- kāyo rūpakkhandho nāmakāyo cattāro arūpino khandhā "the material body forms the material factor (of existence), the individualized body the 4 immaterial factors" Nett 41; the rūpakkhandha only is kāmadhātu -- pariyāpanno: Vbh 409; the 4 arūpino kh˚ discussed at Ps ii.74, also at Vbh 230, 407 sq. (grouped with what is apariyāpanna) -- Being the "substantial" factors of existence, birth & death depend on the khandhas. They appear in every new conjuncture of individuality concerning their function in this paṭisandhi -- kkhaṇe; see Ps ii.72 -- 76. Thus the var. phases of life in transmigration are defined as -- ( jāti:) ya tesaŋ tesaŋ sattānaŋ tamhi tamhi satta -- nikāye jāti sañjāti okkanti abhinibbatti khandhānaŋ pātubhāvo āyatanānaŋ paṭilābho Nd2 on Sn 1052; cp. jāti dvīhi khandhehi sangahitā ti VvA 29; khandhānaŋ pātubhāvo jāti S ii.3; Nett 29; khandhānaŋ nibbatti jāti Vism 199. -- (maraṇaŋ:) yā tesaŋ tesaŋ sattānaŋ . . . cuti cavanatā bhedo antaradhānaŋ maccu maraṇaŋ kālakiriyā khandhānaŋ bhedo kalevarassa nikkhepo M i.49=Vbh 137=S ii.3, 42. -- vivaṭṭa -- kkhandha (adj.) one whose khandhas have revolved (passed away), i. e. dead S i.121=iii.123. -- kh˚anaŋ udaya -- vyaya (or udayabbaya) the rising and passing of the kh., transmigration Dh 374=Th 1, 23, 379=It 120=KhA 82; Ps i.54 sq. -- (b) Their relation to attachment and craving (kāma): sattisūlûpamā kāmā khandhānaŋ adhikuṭṭanā S i.128=Th 2, 58, 141 (ThA 65: natthi tesaŋ adhik˚?); craving is their cause & soil: hetupaṭicca sambhūtā kh. S i.134; the 4 arūpino kh. are based on lobha, dosa, moha Vbh 208. -- (c) their annihilation: the kh. remain as long as the knowledge of their true character is not attained, i. e. of their cause & removal: yaŋ rūpaŋ, etc. . . . n' etaŋ mama n' eso 'haŋ asmi na m' eso attā ti; evaŋ etaŋ yathābhūtaŋ sammappaññāya passati; evaŋ kho jānato passato . . . ahankāramamankāra -- mānânusayā na hontī ti S iii.103; -- pañca -- kkhandhe pariññāya S iii.83; pañca -- kkhandhā pariññātā tiṭṭhanti chinnamūlakā Th 2, 106. See also S i.134. -- (d) their relation to dhātu (the physical elements) and āyatana (the elements of sense -- perception) is close, since they are all dependent on sensory experience. The 5 khandhas are frequently mentioned with the 18 dhātuyo & the 12 āyatanāni: khandhā ca dh˚ cha ca āyatanā ime hetuŋ paṭicca sambhūtā hetubhangā nirujjhare S i.134; kh˚ -- dh˚ -- āyatanaŋ sankhataŋ jātimūlaŋ Th 2, 472; dhammaŋ adesesi khandh'<-> āyatana -- dhātuyo Th 2, 43 (cp. ThA 49). Enumerated under sabba -- dhammā Ps i.101= ii.230; under dhammā (states) Dhs 121, as lokuttara -- kkhandhā, etc. Dhs 358, 528, 552. -- khandhānaŋ khandhaṭṭho abhiññeyyo, dhātūnaŋ dhātuṭṭho, etc. Ps i.17; cp. i.132; ii.121, 157. In def. of kāmâvacarā bhūmi Ps i.83. In def. of dukkha and its recognition Nett 57. In def. of arahanto khīṇāsavā Nd2 on sankhāta -- dhammā ("kh. sankhātā," etc.), on tiṇṇa ("khandha -- (etc.) pariyante thitā"), & passim. -- (e) their valuation & their bearing on the "soul" -- conception is described in the terms of na mama (na tumhākaŋ), anattā, aniccaŋ and dukkhaŋ (cp. upādānakkh˚ infra and rūpa) rūpaŋ (etc.) . . . aniccaŋ, dukkhaŋ, n' eso 'ham asmi, n 'eso me attā "material qualities (etc. kh. 2 -- 5) are evanescent, bad, I am not this body, this body is not my soul" Vin i.14=S iv.382. n' eso 'ham asmi na m' eso attā S i.112; iii.103, 130 & passim; cp. kāyo na tumhākaŋ (anattā rūpaŋ) S ii.65; Nd2 680; and rūpaŋ na tumhākaŋ S iii.33 M i.140=Nd2 680. -- rūpaŋ, etc. as anattā: Vin i.13; S iii.78, 132 -- 134; A i.284= ii.171; 202; cp. S iii.101; Vin i.14. -- as aniccaŋ: S iii.41, 52, 102, 122, 132 sq., 181 sq., 195 sq., 202 -- 224, 227; A iv.147 (aniccânupassī dukkhânupassī); anicca dukkha roga, etc., Ps ii.238 sq.; Vbh 324. -- 2. Specified as panc' upādāna -- kkhandhā the factors of the fivefold clinging to existence. Defined & discussed in detail (rūpûpadāna -- kkhandha, etc.) S iii.47; 86 -- 88; also Vin i.10; S iii.127 sq. Specified S iii.58 iii.100=M iii.16; S iii.114, 158 sq.; v.52, 60; A iv.458; Vism 443 sq. (in ch. xiv: Khandha -- niddesa), 611 sq. (judged aniccato, etc.). -- Mentioned as a set exemplifying the number 5: Kh iii.; Ps i.22, 122. Enumerated in var. connections S i.112; D iii.233; M i.190; A v.52; Kh iv. (expld KhA 82=A v.52); Miln 12 (var. references concerning the discussion of the kh. in the Abhidhamma). -- What is said of the khandhas alone -- see above 1 (a) -- (e) -- is equally applied to them in connection with upādāna. <-> (a) As regards their origin they are characterized as chandamūlakā "rooted in desire, or in wilful desire" S iii.100; cp. yo kho . . . pañcas' upādānakkhandhesu chandarāgo taŋ tattha upādānaŋ ti M i.300, 511. Therefore the foll. attributes are characteristic: kummo pañcann' etaŋ upād˚ ānaŋ adhivacanaŋ M i.144; bhārā have pañcakkh˚ā S iii.26; pañcavadhakā paccatthikā pañcann' . . . adhivacanaŋ S iv.174; pañc' upād˚ . . . sakkāyo vutto M i.299= S iv.259. -- (b) their contemplation leads to the recognition of their character as dukkha, anicca, anattā: na kiñci attānaŋ vā attaniyaŋ vā pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu S iii.128; rogato, etc. . . . manasikātabbā pañc˚ S iii.167; pañcasu upād˚esu aniccânupassī "realizing the evanescence in the 5 aggregates of attachment" A v.109; same with udayavyayânupassī S iii.130; A ii.45, 90; iii.32; iv.153; and dhammânupassī M i.61. Out of which realization follows their gradual destruction: pañc' . . . khandhānaŋ samudayo atthangamo assādo, etc. S iii.31, 160 sq.; A ii.45, 90; iv.153; Nd2 under sankhārā. That they occupy a prominent position as determinants of dukkha is evident from their rôle in the exposition of dukkha as the first one of the noble truths: sankhittena pañc'upādānakkhandhā pi dukkhā "in short, the 5 kh. are associated with pain" Vin i.10=M i.48=A i.177=S v.421; Ps i.37, 39; Vbh 101 & passim; cp. katamaŋ dukkham ariyasaccaŋ? pañc'upād˚ ā tissa vacanīyaŋ, seyyathīdaŋ . . . S iii.158= v.425; khandhādisā dukkhā Dh 202 (& expl. DhA iii.261). -- 3. Separately mentioned: khandhā as tayo arūpino kh˚ (ved˚, sañña˚, sankh˚) DhA i.22; viññāṇa -- kh˚ (the skandha of discriminative consciousness) in Def. of manas: manindriyaŋ viññāṇaŋ viññ˚ -- khandho tajjā manoviññāṇadhātu Nd2 on Sn 1142=Dhs 68.
-- âdhivacana having kh. as attribute (see above) S iii.101=M iii.16; -- āvāra a camp, either (1) fortified (with niveseti) or (2) not (with bandhāpeti), esp. in the latter meaning w. ref. to a halting place of a caravan (=khandhāvāra?) (1) J iv. 151; v.162; DhA i.193, 199.<-> (2) J i.101, 332; PvA 113; DhA ii.79. Said of a hermitage J v.35. -- fig. in sīla -- khandhāvāraŋ bandhitvā "to settle in the camp of good conduct" DA i.244; -- ja (adj. -- n.) sprung from the trunk (of the tree), i. e. a growth or parasite S i.207=Sn 272, expl. at SnA 304; khandhesu jātā khandha -- jā, pārohānam etaŋ adhivacanaŋ. -- niddesa disquisition about the khandhas Vism (ch. xiv esp.) 482, 485, 492, 509, 558, 389. -- paṭipāṭi succession of khandhas Vism 411 sq. -- paritta protective spell as regards the khandhas (as N. of a Suttanta) Vism 414. -- bīja "trunk seed" as one kind of var. seeds, with mūla˚ phaḷu˚ agga˚ bīja˚ at Vin v.132, & D i.5, expld. DA i.81: nāma assattho nigrodho pilakkho udumbaro kacchako kapitthano ti evam -- ādi. -- rasa taste of the stem, one of various tastes, as mūla˚ khandha˚ taca˚ patta˚ puppha˚, etc. Dhs 629=Nd2 540. -- loka the world of sensory aggregates, with dhātu -- and āyatanaloka Ps i.122. -- vibhanga division dealing with the khandhas (i. e. Vibh. 1 sq.) Miln 12. -- santāna duration of the khandhas Vism 414.
Khandhaka [fr. khandha] division, chapter, esp. in the Vinaya (at end of each division we find usually the postscript: so & so khandhakaŋ niṭṭhitaŋ "here ends the chapter of . . ."); in cpd. ˚vatta, i. e. duties or observances specified in the v. khandha or chapter of the Vinaya which deals with these duties Vism 12, 101 (cp. Vin ii.231), 188.
Khandhiman (adj.) having a (big) trunk, of a tree A iii.43.
Khama (adj.) [fr. kṣam] (a) patient, forgiving. (b) en- during, bearing, hardened to (frost & heat, e. g.), fit for. -- (a) kh. belongs to the lovable attributes of a bhikkhu (kh. rūpānaŋ, saddānaŋ, etc.; indulgent as regards sights, sounds, etc.) A iii.113=138; the same applied to the king's horse A iii.282. Khamā paṭipadā the way of gentleness (and opp. akkhamā), viz. akkosantaŋ na paccakosati "not to shout back at him who shouts at you" A ii.152 sq.; cp. Nett 77; classified under the four paṭipadā at D iii.229. In combn. w. vacana of meek, gentle speech, in vattā vacana˚ a speaker of good & meek words S i.63; ii.282; Miln 380; cp. suvaco khamo A v.24 sq., forgiving: Miln 207.<-> (b) khamo sītassa uṇhassa, etc., enduring frost & heat A iii.389=v.132; addhāna˚ padhāna˚ (fit for) A iii.30; ranga˚, anuyoga˚, vimajjana˚ M i.385. -- akkhama (adj.) impatient, intolerant, in combn dubbaca dovacassa karaṇehi dhammehi samannāgata S ii.204 sq.= A ii.147 sq. With ref. to rūpa, saddā, etc. (see also above), of an elephant A iii.156 sq. -- D iii.229; Sdhp 95.
Khamati [Dhtp 218: sahane, cp. Sk. kṣamate, perhaps to Lat. humus, cp. Sk. kṣāh, kṣāman soil; Gr. xqw/n, xamai] 1. to be patient, to endure, to forgive (acc. of object and gen. of person): n' âhaŋ bhayā khamāmi Vepacittino (not do I forgive V. out of fear) S i.221, 222; aparādhaŋ kh. to forgive a fault J iii.394. khamatha forgive DhA ii.254; khamatha me pardon me Miln 13; DhA i.40. -- 2. (impers.) to be fit, to seem good; esp. in phrase yathā te khameyya "as may seem good to you; if you please" D i.60, 108; M i.487. sabbaŋ me na khamati "I do not approve of" M i.497 sq.; na khamati "it is not right" D ii.67. -- 3. to be fit for, to indulge in, to approve of, in nijjhānaŋ khamanti M i.133, 480; cp. diṭṭhi -- nijjhāna -- kkhanti M i.480 & A i.189. -- ppr. med. khamamāna Vin i.281 (uppaḍḍhakāsinaŋ kh˚) fit for, allowing of, worth, cp. Bdhgh. note Vin Texts i.195. -- grd. khamanīya to be allayed, becoming better (of a disease) Vin i.204; D ii.99. -- caus. khamāpeti to pacify, to ask one's pardon, to apologize (to=acc.) J i.267; PvA 123, 195; DhA i.38, 39; ii.75, 254. -- to ask permission or leave (i. e. to say good -- bye) DhA i.14.
Khamana (nt.) long -- suffering Miln 351; bearing, suffering Sdhp 202; and a˚ intolerance Bdhd 24.
Khamanatā (f.) forbearance and a˚ intolerance, harsh- ness both as syn. of khanti & akkhanti Dhs 1342, Vbh 360.
Khamā (f.) [fr. ksam] (a) patience, endurance. (b) the earth (cp. chamā & see khamati) J iv.8 (v. l. B. chamāya).
Khamāpanā (f.) [abstr. fr. khamāpeti, Caus. of khamati] asking for pardon J iv.389.
Khambha [Sk. khambha & sthambha] 1. prop, support, in ˚kata "making a prop," i. e. with his arms akimbo Vin ii.213=iv.188. -- 2. obstruction, stiffening, paralysis, in ūru˚ "stiffening of the thigh" M i.237 (through pain); J v.23 (through fear). See also chambheti & thambha.
Khambheti [Caus. fr. prec. -- Sk. skambh, skabhnāti] 1. to prop, to support Th 2, 28 (but expl. at ThA 35 by vi˚, obstruct) -- 2. to obstruct, to put out, in pp. khambhita (=vi˚) Nd2 220, where it explains khitta. <-> ger. khambhiya: see vi˚.
Khaya [Sk. kṣaya to kṣi, kṣiṇoti & kṣiṇāti; cp. Lat. situs withering, Gr. fqi/ sis, fqi/nw, fqi/w wasting. See also khepeti under khipati] waste, destruction, consumption; decay, ruin, loss; of the passing away of night VvA 52; mostly in applied meaning with ref. to the extinction of passions & such elements as condition, life, & rebirth, e. g. āsavānaŋ kh. It 103 sq., esp. in formula āsavānaŋ khayā anāsavaŋ cetovimuttiŋ upasampajja A i.107= 221=D iii.78, 108, 132=It 100 and passim. -- rāgassa, dosassa, mohassa kh. M i.5; A i.299, cp. rāga˚, dosa˚, moha˚, A i.159; dosa˚ S iii.160, 191; iv.250. -- taṇhānaŋ kh. Dh 154; sankhārānaŋ kh. Dh. 383; sabbamaññitānaŋ, etc. M i.486; āyu˚, puñña˚ Vism 502. -- yo dukkhassa pajānāti idh' eva khayaŋ attano Sn 626=Dh 402; khayaŋ virāgaŋ amataŋ paṇītaŋ Sn 225. -- In exegesis of rūpassa aniccatā: rūpassa khayo vayo bhedo Dhs 645=738=872. -- See also khīṇa and the foll. cpds. s. v.: āyu˚, upadhi˚, upādāna˚, jāti˚, jīvita˚, taṇha˚, dukkha˚, puñña˚, bhava˚, loka˚, saŋyojana, sabbadhamma˚, samudda˚.
-- âtīta (a) gone beyond, recovered from the waning period (of chanda, the moon=the new moon) Sn 598; -- ânupassin (a) realizing the fact of decay A iv.146 sq.= v.359 (+vayânupassin); -- ñāṇa knowledge of the fact of decay M ii.38=Pug 60; in the same sense khaye ñāṇa Nett 15, 54, 59, 127, 191, cp. kvu 230 sq.; -- dhamma the law of decay A iii.54; Ps i.53, 76, 78.
Khara1 [cp. Sk. khara] 1. (adj.) rough, hard, sharp; painful D ii.127 (ābādha); J iii.26 (vedanā) Miln 26 (+sakkhara -- kaṭhala -- vālikā), PvA 152 (loma, shaggy hair; cp. Np. Khara -- loma -- yakkha Vism 208). -- ˚ka= khara rough, stony PvA 265 (=thaṇḍila). -- 2. (m.) a donkey, a mule, in -- putta, nickname of a horse J iii.278. -- 3. a saw J ii.230 (=kakaca C.); vi.261.
-- âjina a rough skin, as garment of an ascetic Sn 249 (=kharāni ajina -- cammāni Sn A 291); Pug 56; -- gata of rough constitution Dhs 962; also as khari -- gata M i.185; Vism 349 (=pharusa). -- mukha a conch J vi.580. -- ssara of rough sound S ii.128.
Khara2 [Sk. kṣara] water J iii.282.
Kharatta (nt.) [fr. khara] roughness A i.54; PvA 90 (in expln of pharusa).
Khala [cp. Sk. khala] 1. corn ready for threshing, the threshing floor Nd2 587; Vism 120; DA i.203 (khalaŋ sodheti). -- 2. threshing, mash, in ekamaŋsa -- khalaŋ karoti "to reduce to one mash of flesh" D i.52=M i.377 (+maŋsa -- puñja; DA i.160=maŋsa -- rāsi).
-- agga the best corn for threshing DhA i.98; iv.98; -- kāla the time for threshing DhA iv.98; -- bhaṇḍ'agga the best agricultural implement for threshing DhA i.98; iv.98; -- bhaṇḍa -- kāla the time for the application of the latter DhA iv.98; -- maṇḍala a threshing -- floor Vism 123; DhA i.266 (˚matta, as large as . . .).
Khalanka in -- pāda at J vi.3 should probably be read kalanka˚ (q. v.).
Khalati [Dhtp 260: kampane; Dhtm 375: sañcalane; cp. Sk. skhalati, cp. Gr. sfa/ llw to bring to fall, to fail] to stumble; ger. khalitvā Th 1, 45; Miln 187; pp. khalita q. v. Cp. upa˚, pa˚.
Khali a paste Vin ii.321 (:Bdhgh. on C.V. vi.3, 1 for madda).
Khalika (or khalikā f.) a dice -- board, in khalikāya kīḷanti to play at dice (see illustr. in Rh. D. Buddh. India p. 77) Vin ii.10; cp. D i.6 (in enumn of various amusements; expl. at DA i.85 by jūta -- khalika pāsaka -- kīḷanaŋ). See also kali.
Khalita1 [Sk. khalati=Lat. calvus, bald; cp. khallāṭa] bald -- headed A i.138 (+vilūna); Th 2, 255 (=vilūnakesa ThA 210).
Khalita2 [pp. med. of khalati, cp. Dhtp 611; Dhtm 406 khala=soceyye] (adj. & n.) 1. faltering, stumbling, wrong -- doing, failure A i.198; Nd1 300; Th 2, 261; DhA iii.196 (of the voice; ThA 211=pakkhalita); J i.78; Miln 94, 408. -- 2. disturbed, treated badly J vi. 375. -- akhalita undisturbed Th 1, 512.
Khalu [indecl., usually contracted to kho, q. v.] either positive: indeed, surely, truly D i.87; Sn p. 103; J iv.391 (as khaḷu); Mhvs vii.17; or negative: indeed not Vism 60 (=paṭisedhan' atthe nipāto). -- pacchābhattika (adj.)=na p˚: a person who refuses food offered to him after the normal time Vin v.131=193; Pug 69; Vism 61. See Com. quot. by Childers, p. 310.
Khalunka [adj. fr. khala in caus. sense of khaleti, to shake. In formation= khalanga>khalanka>khalunka, cp. kulūpaka for kulūpaga] only appld to a horse= shaking, a shaker, racer (esp. as java A i.287), fig. of purisa at Anguttara passages. Described as bold and hard to manage A iv.190 sq.; as a horse which cannot be trusted and is inferior to an ājānīya (a thoroughbred) A v.166. Three kinds at A i.287 sq.=iv.397 sq. In expl. of vaḷavā (mare) at J i.180= sindhavakule ajāto khalunk'asso; as vaḷavā khaḷunkā J i.184. -- Der. khalunkatā in a˚, not shaking, steadiness VvA 278.
Khaleti [Sk. kṣālayati of kṣal?] lit. to wash (cp. pakkhā- leti), slang for "to treat badly," "to give a rubbing" or thrashing (exact meaning problematic); only at J iv.205=382: gale gahetvā khalayātha jammaŋ "take the rascal by the throat and thrash him" (Com. khalayātha khalīkāraŋ (i. e. a "rub," kind of punishment) pāpetvā niddhamatha=give him a thrashing & throw him out. v. l. at both passages is galayātha).
Khallaka in baddhā upāhanāyo shoes with heel -- coverings (?) Vin i.186 (see Bdhgh. note on it Vin Texts ii.15). <-> Also as khalla -- baddhâdibhedaŋ upāhanaŋ at PvA 127 in expln of upāhana. Kern (Toev. s. v.) sees in it a kind of stuff or material.
Khallāta [Sk. khalvāta, cp. khalita] bald, in -- sīsa a bald head DhA i.309. Der. khallātiya baldness, in khallātiyapetī the bald -- headed Petī PvA 46 (where spelled khalātiya) and 67.
Khallika only at S v.421; cp. S iv.330 (Dhamma- cakka -- p -- Sutta). It is a misreading. Read with Oldenberg, Vin i.10, kāmesu kāmasukhallikānuyoga (devotion to the passions, to the pleasures of sense). See kāmasukha and allika .
Khaḷopī [and khalopi, also kalopī, q. v. Cp. Trenckner Notes, p. 60, possibly= karoṭi] a pot, usually with kumbhī: D i.167 ( -- mukha+kumbhi -- mukha); Pug 55; Miln 107.
Khāṇu [also often spelled khānu; prob.=Sk. sthāṇu, corrupted in etym. with khaṇati, cp. Trenckner, Notes 58, n. 6] a stump (of a tree), a stake. Often used in description of uneven roads; together with kaṇṭaka, thorns A i.35; iii.389; Vism 261 (˚paharaṇ' aggi), 342 (˚magga); SnA 334. -- jhāma˚ a burnt stump (as characteristic of kālaka) S iv.193. -- nikhāta˚ an uprooted trunk DA i.73. Khāṇu -- kondañña N. of a Thera Vism 380; DhA ii.254.
Khāṇuka=khāṇu S v.379 (avihata˚): J ii.18, 154; v.45 (loha -- daṇḍa -- kh˚ pins & stakes of brass); Miln 187 (mūle vā khāṇuke vā . . . khalitvā stumbling over roots & stumps); Vism 381=DhA ii.254 (with ref. to the name of Khāṇu -- kondañña who by robbers was mistaken for a tree stump); VvA 338 (in a road=sankuka).
Khāta (adj.) [Sk. khāta; pp. of khan] dug DA i.274 (=ukkiṇṇa), a˚ not dug Miln 351 (˚taḷāka). Cp. atikhāta J ii.296.
Khāda (nt.) eating, in -- kāraṇa the reason of eating . . . PvA 37.
Khādaka (adj.) eating (nt.) Vism 479; eating, living on (adj. -- ˚), an eater J iv.307; PvA 44; lohita -- maŋsa˚ (of Yakkhas) J i.133, 266; camma˚ J i.176; gūtha˚ (of a Peta) PvA 266.
Khādati [Dhtp 155 "khāda bhakkhane"; cp. Sk. khā- dati, cp. Gr. knw/dwn the barbed hook of a javelin, i. e. "the biter"; Lith. kándu to bite] to chew, bite, eat, devour (=Ger. fressen); to destroy. -- Pres. Dh 240; J i.152 (sassāni); iii.26; Pv i.63 (puttāni, of a Petī); i.94. -- kaṭṭhaŋ kh˚ to use a toothpick J i.80, 282, <-> dante kh˚ to gnash the teeth J i.161. -- santakaŋ kh˚ to consume one's property DhsA 135. -- of beasts, e. g. Sn 201, 675. -- Pot. khādeyya J iii.26. -- Imper. khāda J i.150 (maŋsaŋ); ii.128 (khādaniyaŋ); vi.367. (pūvaŋ); PvA 39, 78. -- Part. pres. khādanto J i.61; iii.276. -- Fut. khādissati J i.221; ii.129. -- Aor. khādiŋsu PvA 20. -- Pass. ppr. khādiyamāna (cp. khajjati) PvA 69 (taṇhāya) (expl. of khajjamāna). <-> Inf. khādituŋ J i.222; ii.153; DhA iv.226. -- Ger. khāditvā J i.266, 278 (phalāni); PvA 5, 32 (devour); poetical khādiyā J v.464 (=khāditvā). -- Grd. khāditabba J iii.52, and khādaniya (q .v.). -- Pp. khādita (q. v.). Cp. pali˚.
Khādana (nt.) the act of eating (or being eaten) PvA 158. -- adj. f. khādanī the eater Dpvs 238; khādana at J ii.405 is to be read as ni˚ (q. v.). Cp. vi˚.
Khādaniya [grd. of khādati; also as khādanīya] hard or solid food, opp. to and freq, combd with bhojaniya (q. v.). So at D ii.127; J i.90, 235; iii.127; Sn. p 110; Miln 9, 11. -- Also in combn anna, pāna, kh˚ Sn 924; ii.49. By itself J iii.276. -- piṭṭha˚ pastry Vin i.248.
Khādā (f.) food, in rāja˚ royal food Sn 831 (rājakhādāya puṭṭho=rājakhādanīyena rājabhojanīyena posito Nd1 171; where printed ˚khadāya throughout).
Khādāpana [fr. khādāpeti] causing to be eaten (kind of punishment) Miln 197 (sunakhehi).
Khādāpeti (Caus. ii. of khādati] to make eat J iii.370; vi.335.
Khādika=khādaka, in aññamañña˚ S v.456.
Khādita (adj.) [pp. med. & pass. of khādati] eaten, or having eaten, eaten up, consumed J i.223; ii.154; PvA 5. -- A twin form of khādita is khāyita, formed prob. on analogy of sāyita, with which freq. combined (cp., however, Trenckner P.M. 57), e. g. Pug 59; Vism 258; PvA 25. Used as the poetical form Pv i.1211 (expl. PvA 158=khādita). -- Der. khāditatta (nt.) the fact of being eaten J i.176.
-- ṭṭhāna the eating place, place of feeding J v.447.
Khādin, f. khādinī=khādaka PvA 31.
Khāyati [pass.=Sk. khyāyate, khyā] to seem to be, to appear like (viya) J i.279; aor. khāyiŋsu J i.61; ppr. med. khāyamāna J iv. 140; PvA 251. Cp. pakkhāyati.
Khāyita see khādita; cp. avakkhāyika.
Khāra [Sk. kṣāra, pungent, saline, sharp to ksā, kṣāyati to burn, cp. Gr. chro/ s, dry; Lat. serenus, dry, clear, seresco to dry] any alkaline substance, potash, lye. In combn with ūsa (salt earth) at S iii.131 ( -- gandha); A i.209. -- Used as a caustic Pv iii.102; Sdhp 281. See also chārikā.
-- âpatacchika a means of torturing, in enumn of var. tortures (under vividha -- kamma -- kāranā kārenti) M i.87= A i.48=ii.122=Nd2 604; J vi.17 (v. l. ˚ṭicch˚; C. has āpatacchika, v. l. paṭicchaka); Vism 500; Miln 197. Both A & Nd have v. l. kharāpaṭicchaka; -- ôdaka an alkaline solution Vism 264, 420; DhA i.189; PvA 213; cp. khārodikā nadī (in Niraya) Sdhp 194.
Khāraka (adj.) [fr. khāra] sharp or dry, said of the buds of the Pāricchattaka A iv.117 sq.
Khārī (f.) [and khāri -- ] a certain measure of capacity (esp. of grain, see below khārika). It is used of the eight requisites of an ascetic, and often in conn. with his yoke (kāja): "a khārī -- load."
-- kāja Vin i.33 (cp. Vin Texts i.132); J v.204. -- bhaṇḍa DhA iii.243 (:kahaŋ te kh -- bh˚ ko pabbajita parikkhāro); -- bhāra a shoulder -- yoke S i.169; J iii.83; -- vidha=˚kāja S i.78=Ud 65; D i.101. At Ud and D passages it is read vividha, but DA i.269 makes it clear: khārī ti araṇi -- kamaṇḍalu -- sūcâdayo tāpasa -- parikkhārā; vidho ti kāco, tasmā khāribharitaŋ kācam ādāyā ti attho. As Kern (Toev. s. v.) points out, ˚vidha is a distortion of vivadha, which is synonymous with kāja.
Khārika1 [adj. to khāra] alkaline, in enumn of tastes (cp. rasa) at S iii 87; Dhs 629 and ≈.
Khārika2 [adj. of khārī] of the khārī measure, in vīsati˚ kosalako tilavāho A v.173=Sn p. 126.
Khāleti Caus. of khalati: see khaleti & vikkhāleti.
Khāhinti at Th 2, 509 is to be read kāhinti (=karissanti ThA 293).
Khiḍḍā [Vedic krīḍā, cp. kīḷati] play, amusement, pleasure usually combd with rati, enjoyment. Var. degrees of pleasures (bāla˚, etc.) mentioned at A v.203; var. kinds of amusement enumerated at Nd2 219; as expounded at D i.6 under jūta -- pamādaṭṭhāna. Generally divided into kāyikā & vācasikā khiḍḍā (Nd2; SnA 86). Expl. as kīḷanā SnA 86, as hassādhippāya (means of mirth) PvA 226; sahāyakādīhi keḷi PvA 265. Cp. Sn 926; Pv iv.121.
-- dasaka "the decad of play," i. e. the second 10 years of man's life, fr. 11 -- 20 years of age Vism 619. -- padosika corrupted by pleasures D i.19, 20= DA i.113 (v. l. padūsika); -- rati play & enjoyment Sn 41, 59; Vv 1612, 327; Pv iv.72; Vism 619.
Khitta [pp. of khip, to throw Dhtp 479; peraṇe] thrown; cast, overthrown Dh 34; rajo paṭivātaŋ kh˚, dirt thrown against the wind S i.13, 164=Sn 662=Dh 125= J iii.203; ratti -- khittā sarā arrows shot in the night Dh 304=Nett 11; acchi vātavegena khittā a flame overthrown by the power of the wind, blown out Sn 1074 (expld Nd2 220 by ukkhittā nuṇṇā, khambhitā); in interpret. of khetta PvA 7 said of sowing: khittaŋ vuttaŋ bījaŋ. -- akkhitta not upset, not deranged, undisturbed, in qualities required of a brahmin w. ref. to his genealogy: yāva sattamā pitāmahāyugā akkhitto D i.113=Sn p. 115, etc. Cp. vi˚.
-- citta (a) one whose mind is thrown over, upset, unhinged, usually combd with ummattaka, out of one's mind Vin i.131, 321; ii.64, etc.; Sdhp 88. Cp. citta -- kkhepa.
Khipa (nt.) [fr. ksip] a throw, anything thrown over, as ajina˚ a cloak of antelope hide D i.167 and ≈; or thrown out, as a fishing net (=kumina) eel -- basket A i.33=287; Th 2, 357 (=ThA 243). Cp. khippa & vikkhepika.
Khipati [Vedic kṣipati] to throw, to cast, to throw out or forth, to upset Sn p. 32 (cittaŋ); J i.223 (sīsaŋ). 290 (pāsake); ii.3 (daḷhaŋ dalhassa: to pit force against force) -- aor. khipi S iv.2, 3 (khuracakkaŋ); PvA 87 (= atthāresi). -- ger. khipitvā J i.202. -- 1st caus. khepeti (perhaps to kṣi, see khaya) to throw in, to put in, to spend (of time): dīgham addhānaŋ khepetvā J i.137; Th 2, 168 (khepeti jātisaŋsāraŋ=pariyosāpeti ThA 159); DhA i.102 (dvenavuti -- kappe khepesuŋ); āyuŋ khepehi spend (the rest of) your life PvA 148; ger. khepayitvāna (saŋsāraŋ) Pv iv.332 (=khepetvā PvA 254). In this sense Trenckner (P. M. 76) takes it as corresponding to Sk. kṣāpayati of kṣi=to cause to waste. See also khepana. -- 2nd caus. khipāpeti to cause to be thrown J i.202; iv.139 (jalaŋ). Cp also khepa.
Khipana (nt.) the act of throwing or the state of being thrown J i.290 (pasaka -- k˚).
Khipanā (f.) [fr. khipati] throwing up, provocation, mockery, slander Miln 357; Vbh 352; cp. Vism 29.
Khipita (nt.) [pp. of khipati=that which is thrown out; acc. to Trenckner Notes p. 75 for khupita fr. kṣu to sneeze; possibly a contamination of the two] sneezing, expectoration Pv ii.23 (expl. PvA 80: mukhato nikkhantamala); DhA i.314 (˚roga+kāsa, coughing).
-- sadda the sound of expectorations D i.50; DhA i.250.
Khippa (adj.): [Vedic kṣipra to kṣip] 1. quick, lit. in the way of throwing (cp. "like a shot") Sn 350 (of vacana =lahu SnA). -- 2. a sort of fishing net or eel -- basket (cp. khipa & Sk. kṣepaṇī) S i.74. -- nt. adv. khippaŋ quickly A ii.118=iii.164; Sn 413, 682, 998; Dh 65, 137, 236, 289; J iv.142; Pv ii.84, 92, 1221, Pug 32. -- Compar. khippatara Sn p. 126.
-- âbhiññā quick intuition (opp. dandh˚) D iii.106; Dhs 177; Nett 7, 24, 50, 77, 112 sq.; 123 sq.; Vism 138.
Khippati [fr. kṣip] to ill -- treat, in ppr. khippamāna Vv 8444, expld at VvA 348 by vambhento, pīḷanto.
Khila (m. nt.) [cp. Sk. khila] waste or fallow land A iii.248; fig. barrenness of mind, mental obstruction. There are five ceto -- khilā enumd in detail at M i.101=A iv.460= D iii.238 (see under ceto); mentioned A v.17; SnA 262. As three khilā, viz. rāga, dosa, moha at S v.57; also with other qualities at Nd2 9. In combn with paligha S i.27 (chetvā kh˚ ŋ); khilaŋ pabhindati to break up the fallowness (of one's heart) S i.193; iii.134; Sn 973.<-> akhila (adj.) not fallow, unobstructed, open -- hearted: cittaŋ susamāhitaŋ . . . akhilaŋ sabbabhūtesu Dii.261; S iv.118; in combn with anāsava Sn 212; with akankha Sn 477, 1059; with vivattacchada Sn 1147; cp. vigatakhila Sn 19.
Khiḷa [cp. Sk. kiṇa] hard skin, callosity J v.204 (v. l. kiṇa).
Khīṇa [pp. of khīyati, Pass. to khayati] destroyed, exhausted, removed, wasted, gone; in cpds. ˚ -- often to be translated "without." It is mostly applied to the destruction of the passions (āsavā) & demerit (kamma). Khīṇā jāti "destroyed is the possibility of rebirth," in freq. occurring formula "kh. j. vusitaŋ brahmacariyaŋ kataŋ karaṇīyaŋ nâparaŋ itthattāya," denoting the attainment of Arahantship. (See arahant ii, formula A) Vin i. 35; D i.84, 177, 203; M ii.39; Sn p. 16; Pug 61 etc. See expln at DA i.225= SnA 138. -- khīṇaŋ mayhaŋ kammaŋ J iv.3, similarly khīṇaŋ purāṇaŋ navaŋ natthi sambhavaŋ Sn 235 (khīṇa=samucchinna KhA 194); pāpakamme khīṇe PvA 105. āsavakhīṇa one whose cravings are destroyed Sn 370, cp. 162.
-- āsava (adj.) whose mind is free from the four mental obsessions, Ep. of an Arahant Vin i.183; M i. 145; ii.43; iii.30; D iii.97, 133, 235; It 95; Sn 82, 471, 539, 644; Dh 89, 420; PvA 7 (=arahanto); cp. BSk kṣīṇāśrava Divy 542. -- The seven powers of a kh.˚ (khīṇāsava -- balāni) discussed at D iii.283; Ps i.35; ten powers at Ps ii.173, 176; cp. Vism 144 (where a kh. walks through the air). -- punabbhava one in whom the conditions of another existence have been destroyed (=khīṇāsava) Sn 514, 656; -- bīja one who is without the seed (of renewed existence) (=prec.) Sn 235 (=ucchinna -- bīja KhA 194); -- maccha without fish (of a lake) Dh 155; -- vyappatha without the way of (evil) speech (vyapp˚=vācāya patho; expl. SnA 204 as na pharusavāco) Sn 158; -- sota with the stream gone, i. e. without water, in macche appodake kh˚ Sn 777.
Khīṇatta (nt.) DA i.225 & khīṇatā (f.) DhA iv.228, the fact of being destroyed.
Khīya [cp. khīyati2] in -- dhammaŋ āpajjati to fall into a state of mental depression Vin iv.151, 154; A iii.269; iv.374. See also remarks by Kern, Toev. s. v.
Khīyati [Sk. kṣīyate, pass. to khayati] to be exhausted, to waste away, to become dejected, to fall away from Vin iv.152; J i.290 (dhạna); Pv ii.942; 112; Ps i.94, 96; ii.31 (āsavā); Bdhd 80. -- ppr. khīyamāna Sn 434; Bdhd 19. aor. khīyi D iii.93; grd. khīyitabba ibid. see also khāya and khīyanaka. In phrase "ujjhāyati khīyati vipāceti it seems to correspond to jhāyati2 [Sk. kṣāyati] and the meaning is "to become chafed or heated, to become vexed, angry; to take offence"; as evidenced by the combn with quâsi -- synonyms ujjhāyati & vipāceti, both referring to a heated state, fig. for anger (cp. kilissati). Thus at Vin ii.259 & passim. See ujjhāyati for further refs.
Khīyanaka (a) [der. fr. khīya] in combn with pācittiya a "falling away" offence (legal term denoting the falling away from a consent once given) (see khīya) Vin ii.94, 100; iv.38.
Khīra (nt.) [Sk. kṣīra] milk, milky fluid, milky juice Vin i.243; ii.301; M i.343 sq.=A ii.207=Pug 56; A ii.95 (in simile with dadhi, navanīta, sappi, sappi -- maṇḍa)= D i.201; DhA i.98; enumd with dadhi, etc., as one constituent of material food (kabalinkāro ähāro) at Dhs 646=740=875; -- J iv.138 (mātu kh˚); 140; Dh 71=Nett 161; Miln 41; PvA 198 (=sneha, milky juice); VvA 75; DhA i.98 (nirudaka kh˚, milk without water). -- duddha -- khīra one who has milked Sn 18.
-- ôdaka (nt.) milk -- water or milk & water lit. J ii.104, 106; fig. in simile khīrodakībhūtā for a samaggā parisā "a congregation at harmony as milk and water blend" A i.70; S iv.225=M i.207, 398=A iii.67, 104; -- odana (nt.) milk -- rice (boiled) Vv3324 (=VvA 147). -- gandha the smell of milk J vi.357. -- ghaṭa a pot of milk Miln 48; -- paka drinking milk; sucking (of a calf: vaccho mātari kh˚) Dh 284 (v. l. khīra -- pāna); DhA iii.424; -- paṇṇin (m.) N. of a tree the leaves of which contain a milky sap, Calotropis gigantea M i.429; -- matta having had his fill of milk, happy (of a babe) S i.108; -- mūla the price of milk; money with which to buy milk DhA iv.217; -- sāmin master of the milk (+dhīrasāmin) Bdhd 62.
Khīranikā (f.) a milk -- giving cow S i.174.
Khīla [Sk. kīla & khīla] a stake, post, bolt, peg Vin ii.116 (khīlaŋ nikhanitvā digging in or erecting a post); S iii.150 (kh˚ vā thambha vā); iv.200 (daḷha˚ a strong post, Ep. of satī); Mhvs 29, 49. -- ayo˚ an iron stake A i.141; S v.444; Nd2 304iii; Sn 28 (nikhāta, erected); SnA 479. Cp. inda˚.
-- ṭṭhāyi -- ṭhita standing like a post (of a stubborn horse) A iv.192, 194.
Khīlaka (adj.) having sticks or stumps (as obstacles), in a˚ unobstructed J v.203 (=akāca nikkaṇṭaka 206).
Khīḷana [der. fr. khīḷeti] scorn Miln 357.
Khīḷeti [to kīḷ or to khila?] to scorn, deride, only in combn hīḷita khīḷita garahita (pp.) Miln 229, 288; cp. khīḷana.
Khu ( -- ˚) is doubtful second part of inghāḷa˚ (q. v.).
Khuŋseti [kruś? Dhtp 625: akkosane; cp. Müller P.G. 52 to scold, to curse, to be angry at, to have spite against D i.90, DA i.256 (= ghaṭṭeti); Vin iv.7; SnA 357; DhA iv.38. -- pp. khuŋsita DhA ii.75.
Khujja (adj.) [either Sk kubja, of which khujja would be the older form (cp. Walde, Lat. Etym. Wtb. s. v. cubitum), or Sk. kṣudra (?) (so Müller, P.G. p. 52). See also the variant kujja & cp. kuṭṭa2] 1. humpbacked J v.426 (+piṭhasappī); DA i.148 (in combn with vāmana & kirāta); f. DhA i.194, 226. -- 2. small, inferior, in kh˚ -- rājā a smaller, subordinate king Sdhp 453.
Khuṇḍali at PvA 162 (mā kh.) is to be read ukkaṇṭhi.
Khudā [Sk. kṣudh & kṣudhā, also BSk. kṣud in kṣuttarṣa hunger & thirst Jtm p. 30] hunger Sn 52 (+pipāsā: Nd2 s. v. kh˚ vuccati chātako), 966; Pv i.64 (= jighacchā) ii.15 (+taṇhā), 24; PvA 72. See khuppipāsā.
Khudda (adj.) [Vedic kṣudra] small, inferior, low; trifling, insignificant; na khuddaŋ samācare kiñci "he shall not pursue anything trifling" Sn 145 (=lāmakaŋ KhA 243); kh˚ ca bālaŋ Sn 318. Opp. to strong Vv 3210 (of migā= balavasena nihīnā VvA 136).
-- ânukhuddaka, in ˚āni sikkhāpadāni the minor observances of discipline, the lesser & minor precepts Vin ii.287=D ii. 154; Vin iv.143; A i.233; cp. Divy 465; -- âvakāsa in akhuddâvakāso dassanāya not appearing inferior, one of the attributes of a well -- bred brahmin (with brahmavaṇṇī) D i.114, 120, etc. -- desa, in ˚issara ruler of a small district Sdhp 348.
Khuddaka=khudda; usually in cpds. In sequence khuddaka -- majjhima -- mahā Vism 100. Of smaller sections or subdivisions of canonical books Vin v.145 sq. (with ref. to the paññattis), see also below. -- catuppade kh˚ ca mahallake Sn 603. Khuddaka (m.) the little one, Miln 40 (mātā ˚assa).
-- nadī=kunnadī, a small river PvA 154; -- nikāya name of a collection of canonical books, mostly short (the fifth of the five Nikāyas) comprising the foll. 15 books: Khuddaka -- Pāṭha, Dhammapada, Udāna, Itivuttaka, Sutta -- Nipāta, Vimāna -- Vatthu, Peta -- Vatthu, Thera and Therī Gāthā, Jātaka (verses only), Niddesa, Paṭisambhidāmagga, Apadāna, Buddha -- Vaŋsa, CariyāPiṭaka. The name Kh -- N. is taken from the fact that it is a collection of short books -- short, that is, as compared with the Four Nikāyas. Anvs (J.P.T.S. 1886) p. 35; Gvns (J.P.T.S. 1886) p. 57; PvA 2, etc. -- pāṭha N. of the first book in the Khuddaka Nikāya; -- mañcaka a small or low bed J i.167; -- rājā an inferior king J v.37 (+mahārājā); SnA 121; cp. khujja & kuṭṭa; -- vaggulī (f.) a small singing bird DhA iii.223; -- vatthuka belonging to or having smaller sections Vin v.114.
Khuppipāsā [cp. khudā] hunger & thirst: ˚āya mīyamāno M i.85. Personified as belonging to the army of Māra Sn 436=Nd2 on visenikatvā. To be tormented by hunger & thirst is the special lot of the Petas: Pv i.1110; ii.22, PvA 10, 32, 37, 58, etc.; Vism 501; Sdhp 9, 101, 507.
Khubhati see saŋ˚ & khobha. The root is given at Dhtp 206 & 435 as "khubha= sañcalane."
Khura1 [Vedic khura] the hoof of an animal Vv 6410 (of a horse=turagānaŋ khuranipāta, the clattering of a horse's hoof VvA 279), cp. Sk. kṣura, a monkey's claw Sp. AvŚ i.236.
khura -- kāse M i.446, read (with Neumann) for khura -- kāye, "in the manner of dragging (kṛṣ) the hoofs."
Khura2 [Vedic kṣura, to kṣṇu, kṣṇoti to whet, kṣṇotra whet- stone; cp. Gr. xnau /w scrape, cu/w shave, Lat. novacula razor. The Pali Dhtp (486) gives as meanings "chedana & vilekhana"] a razor Vin ii.134; S iv.169 (tiṇha a sharp r.) DhA ii.257.
-- agga the hall of tonsure PvA 53; -- appa a kind of arrow D i.96; M i.429 (+vekaṇḍa); Vism 381. -- kosa razor -- sheath Vism 251, 255. -- cakka a wheel, sharp as a razor J iv.3; -- dhāra 1. carrying razors, said of the Vetaraṇī whose waters are like razors Sn 674 (+tiṇha<-> dhāra); J v.269; Vism 163. -- 2. the haft of a razor, or its case Sn 716 (˚ûpama); Vism 500; DhA ii.257; -- nāsa having a nose like a razor J iv.139; -- pariyanta a disk as sharp as a razor, a butcher -- knife D i.52 (=DA i.160; khura -- nemi khura -- sadisa -- pariyanta), cp. ˚cakka; -- māla N. of an ocean, in ˚samudda J iv.137; -- mālī (f.)= prec. ibid.; -- muṇḍa close -- shaven Vin i.344; VvA 207. Khuramuṇḍaŋ karoti to shave closely D i.98; S iv.344= A ii.241; -- bhaṇḍa the outfit of a barber, viz. khura, khura -- silā, khura -- sipāṭikā, namataka Vin i.249; ii.134, cp. Vin. Texts iii.138; -- silā a whetstone Vin ii.134; -- sipāṭikā a powder prepared with s. gum to prevent razors from rusting Vin ii.134.
Khulukhulu -- kaṛakaŋ (nt. adv.) "so as to make the sound khulu, khulu," i.e. clattering or bumping about M ii.138. Cp. ghuru -- ghuru.
Kheṭa [cp. Sk. kheṭaka] a shield: see kīṭa.
Khetta (nt.) [Vedic kṣetra, to kṣi, kṣeti, kṣiti, dwelling -- place, Gr. kti/ zw, Lat. situs founded, situated, E. site; cp. also Sk. kṣema "being settled," composure. See also khattiya. Dhammapāla connects khetta with kṣip & trā in his expln at PvA 7: khittaŋ vuttaŋ bījaŋ tāyati . . . ti khettaŋ] 1. (lit.) a field, a plot of land, arable land, a site, D i.231; S i.134 (bījaŋ khette virūhati; in simile); three kinds of fields at S iv.315, viz. agga˚, majjhima˚, hīna˚ (in simile); A i.229=239; iv.237 (do.); Sn 524; J i.153 (sāli -- yava˚); Pv ii.968=DhA iii.220 (khette bījaŋ ropitaŋ); Miln 47; PvA 62; DhA i.98. Often as a mark of wealth=possession, e. g. D iii.93 in defn of khattiya: khettānaŋ patī ti khattiya., In the same sense connected with vatthu (field & farm cp. Haus und Hof), to denote objects of trade, etc. D i.5 (expld at DA i.78: khetta nāma yasmiŋ pubbaṇṇaŋ rūhati, vatthu nāma yasmiŋ aparaṇṇaŋ rūhati, "kh. is where the first crop grows and v. where the second." A similar expln at Nd1 248, where khetta is divided into sāli˚, vīhi. mugga˚, māsa˚, yava˚, godhūma˚, tila˚, i. e. the pubbaṇṇāni, and vatthu expld ghara˚, koṭṭhaka˚, pure˚, pacchā˚, ārāma˚, vihāra˚ without ref. to aṇṇa.) S ii.41; Sn 769. Together with other earthly possessions as wealth (hirañña, suvaṇṇa) Sn 858; Nd2 on lepa, gahaṭṭha, etc. As example in definition of visible objects Dhs 597; Vbh 71 sq. -- Kasī˚ a tilled field, a field ready to bear Pv i.12, cp. PvA 8; jāti˚ "a region in which a Buddha may be born" (Hardy, after Childers s. khetta) PvA 138. Cp. the threefold division of a Buddha -- kkhetta at Vism 414, viz. jāti˚, āṇā˚, visaya˚. -- 2. fig. (of kamma) the soil of merit, the deposit of good deeds, which, like a fertile field, bears fruit to the advantage of the "giver" of gifts or the "doer" of good works. See dakkhiṇeyya˚, puñña˚ (see detailed expln at Vism 220; khetta here= virūhana -- ṭṭhāna), brahma˚. -- A i.162, 223 (kammaŋ, khettaŋ, viññāṇaŋ bījaŋ); iv.237; It 98; VvA 113.<-> akhetta barren soil A iii.384 (akhettaññu not finding a good soil); iv.418 (do.); PvA 137. Sukhetta a good soil, fertile land S i.21; PvA 137; opp. dukkhetta S v.379.
-- ûpama to be likened to a (fruitful) field, Ep. of an Arahant Pv i.11; -- kammanta work in the field A iii.77; -- gata turned into a field, of puññakamma "good work becoming a field of merit" PvA 136, 191; -- gopaka a field watcher J iii.52; -- ja "born on one's land," one of the 4 kinds of sons Nd1 247; Nd2 448; J i.135. -- jina one unsurpassed in the possession of a "field" Sn 523, 524; -- pāla one who guards a field J iii.54; -- mahantatā the supremeness of the field (of merit) VvA 108; -- rakkhaka the guardian of a field J ii.110; -- vatthu possession of land & goods (see above) D iii.164; S v.473=A ii.209; A v.137; Pug 58; PvA 3; -- sampatti the successful attainment of a field of (merit) PvA 198; VvA 102; see VvA 30, 32 on the three sampattis, viz. khetta˚, citta˚, payoga˚; -- sāmika the owner of the field Miln 47; VvA 311. -- sodhana the cleaning of the field (before it is ploughed) DhA iii.284.
Kheda (adj.) [Sk. kheda fatigue, khedati; perhaps to Lat. caedo] subject to fatigue, tired VvA 276. -- As noun "fatigue" at Vism 71.
Khepa [cp. khipati] ( -- ˚) throwing, casting, Sdhp 42. Usually in citta -- kkhepa loss of mind, perplexity Dh 138. Cp. vi˚, saŋ˚.
Khepana [cp. khepeti] -- ˚ the passing of, appld to time: āyu˚ VvA 311.
Khepita [pp. of khepeti] destroyed, brought to waste, annihilated, khepitatta (nt.) the fact of being destroyed, destruction, annihilation, DhA ii.163 (kilesavaṭṭassa kh.).
Khepeti see khipati.
Khema [Vedic kṣema to kṣi, cp. khetta] 1. (adj.) full of peace, safe; tranquil, calm D i.73 (of a country); S i.123 (of the path leading to the ambrosial, i. e. Nibbāna) i.189=Sn 454 (of vācā nibbānapattiyā); M i.227 (vivaṭaŋ amatadvāraŋ khemaŋ nibbānapattiyā "opened is the door to the Immortal, leading to peace, for the attainment of Nibbāna") A iii.354 (of ñāna) It 32; Sn 268 (=abhaya, nirupaddava KhA 153); Dh 189 sq.; Pv iv.33 (of a road=nibbhaya PvA 250); VvA 85. <-> 2. (nt.) shelter, place of security, tranquillity, home of peace, the Serene (Ep. of Nibbāna). In general: D i.11 (peace, opp. bhaya); Sn 896 (+avivādabhūmi); 953. -- In particular of Nibbāna: S iv.371; A iv.455; Vv 5320 (amataŋ khemaŋ); Ps i.59. See also yoga. Abl. khemato, from the standpoint of the Serene S ii.109; Sn 414, 1098; Nd2 s. v. (+tāṇato, etc.).
-- atta one who is at peace (+viratta) S i.112 (=khemībhūtaŋ assabhāvaŋ SA). -- anta security, in ˚bhūmi a peaceful country (opp, kantāra), a paradise (as Ep. of Nibbāna) D i.73; Nd2 on Satthā; Vism 303. -- ṭṭhāna the place of shelter, the home of tranquillity Th 2, 350 (=Nibbāna ThA 242); -- ṭṭhita peaceful, appeased, unmolested D i.135; -- dassin looking upon the Serene Sn 809; -- ppatta having attained tranquillity (=abhayappatta, vesārajjappatta) M i.72=A ii.9.
Khemin (adj.) one who enjoys security or peace S iii.13; Sn 145 (=abhaya KhA 244); Dh 258.
Kheḷa [Sk. kheṭa, cp. kṣveḍa and śleṣma, P. silesuma. See also kilid & kilis, cp. ukkheṭita. On root khela see keḷanā; it is given by Dhtp 279 in meaning "calana." The latter (khela) has of course nothing to do with kheḷa] phlegm, saliva, foam; usually with singhānikā mucus, sometimes in the sense of perspiration, sweat A i.34; iv.137; Sn 196 (+singh˚); Kh ii.=Miln 26 (cp. Vism 263 in detail, & KhA 66); J i.61; iv.23; vi.367; Vism 259, 343 (+singhāṇikā), 362; DhA iii.181; iv.20, 170; Pv ii.23 as food for Petas, cp. Av.S. i.279 (kheṭamūtropajīvinī; ii.113: kheṭavadutsṛjya); PvA 80 (=niṭṭhubhana).
-- kilinna wet with exudation J i.164; -- mallaka a spitting box, a cuspidor Vin i.48; ii.175, 209 sq.; -- singhānikā phlegm & mucus DhA i.50.
Kheḷāpaka (Vin) & kheḷāsika (DhA) an abusive term "eating phlegm" (?) [Müller, P.G. 30=kheṭâtmaka] Vin ii.188, cp. Vin. Texts iii.239; ˚vāda the use of the term "phlegm -- eater," calling one by this name Vin ii.189; DhA 140. Cp. āpaka.? spittle -- dribbler; "wind bag."
Kho [before vowels often khv'; contr. of khalu=Sk. khalu] an enclitic particle of affirmation & emphasis: indeed, really, surely; in narration: then, now (cp. kira); in question: then, perhaps, really. Def. as adhikār' antara -- nidassan' atthe nipāto KhA 113; as avadhāraṇaŋ (affirmative particle) PvA 11, 18. -- A few of its uses are as foll.: abhabbo kho Vin i.17; pasādā kho D ii.155. After pron.: mayhaŋ kho J i.279; ete kho Vin i.10; idaŋ kho ibid.; so ca kho J i.51; yo kho M i.428; -- After a negation: na kho indeed not J ii.111; no ca khv' āssa A v.195; mā kho J i.253; -- Often combd with pana: na sakkhā kho pana "is it then not possible" J i.151; api ca kho pana J i.253; siyā kho pana D ii.154; -- Following other particles. esp. in aoristic narration: atha kho (extremely frequent); tatra kho; tâpi kho; api ca kho; evaŋ bhante ti kho; evaŋ byā kho Vin iv.134; Dh i.27, etc. -- In interr. sentences it often follows nu: kin nu kho J i.279; atthi nu kho J iii.52; kahan nu kho J i.255.
Khobha (m.) [cp. Vedic kṣubh kṣobhayati, to shake=Goth. skiuban Ger. schieben, to push, E. shove] shaking, shock Vism 31, 157; khobhaŋ karoti to shake VvA 35, 36, 278; khobha -- karaṇa shaking up, disturbance Vism 474. See also akkhobbha.
Khoma [cp. Vedic kṣauma] adj. flaxen; nt. a linen cloth, linen garment, usually combd with kappāsika Vin i.58, 96, 281; A iv.394; v.234=249 (˚yuga); J vi.47, 500; Pv ii.117; DhA i.417.
-- pilotikā a linen cloth Vin i.296.
˚Ga [fr. gam] adj., only as ending: going. See e. g. atiga, anuga, antalikkha˚, ura˚, pāra˚, majjha˚, samīpa˚, hattha˚. It also appears as ˚gu, e. g. in addha˚, anta˚, paṭṭha˚, pāra˚, veda˚. -- dugga (m. & nt.) a difficult road Dh 327=Miln 379; Pv ii.78 (=duggamana -- ṭṭhāna PvA 102); ii.925; J ii.385.
Gagana (nt.) the sky (with reference to sidereal motions); usually of the moon: g˚ majjhe puṇṇacando viya J i.149, 212; g˚ tale canda -- maṇḍalaŋ J iii.365; cando g˚ majjhe ṭhito J v.137; cando gagane viya sobhati Vism 58; g˚ tale candaŋ viya DhA i.372; g˚ tale puṇṇacanda "the full -- moon in the expanse of the heavens" VvA 3; g˚ talamagga the (moon's) course in the sky PvA 188; etc. Of the sun: suriyo ākāse antalikkhe gaganapathe gacchati Nd2 on Sn 1097. Unspecified: J i.57; Vism 176 (˚tal -- âbhimukhaŋ).
Gaggara [Vedic gargara throat, whirlpool. *gṷer to sling down, to whirl, cp. Gr. ba/raqron, Lat. gurges, gurgulio, Ohg. querechela "kehle"] 1. roaring, only in f. gaggarī a blacksmith's bellows: kammāra˚, in simile M i.243; S i.106; Vism 287. -- 2. (nt.) cackling, cawing, in haŋsa˚ the sound of geese J v.96 (expl. by haŋsamadhurassara). Gaggarā as N. of a lake at Vism 208. -- See note on gala.
Gaggaraka [fr. gaggara] a whirlpool, eddy J v.405; according to Kern Toev. s. v. a sort of fish (Sk. gargaraka, Pimelodus Gagora); as gaggalaka at Miln 197.
Gaggarāyati [v. den. fr. prec.; cp. gurgulio: gurges, E. gargle & gurgle] to whirl, roar, bellow, of the waves of the Gangā Miln 3. -- cp. gaḷagaḷāyati.
Gaccha [not=Sk. kaccha, grass -- land, as Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893, 16. The passage J iii.287 stands with gaccha, v. l. kaccha for gaccha at A iv.74; g˚ for k˚ at Sn 20] a shrub, a bush, usually together with latā, creeper & rukkha, tree, e. g. Nd2 235, id; J i.73; Miln 268; Vism 182 (described on p. 183). With dāya, wood A iv.74. puppha˚ a flowering shrub J i.120; khuddaka˚ -- vana a wood of small shrubs J v.37. -- PvA 274; VvA 301 ( -- gumba, brushwood, underwood); DhA i.171 ( -- pothana -- ṭṭhāna); iv.78 ( -- mūla).
Gacchati [Vedic gacchati, a desiderative (future) formation from *gṷem "I am intent upon going," i. e. I go, with the foll. bases. -- (1) Future -- present *gṷemskéti> *gaścati>Sk. gacchati=Gr. ba/skw (to bainw). In meaning cp. i, Sk. emi, Gr. ei)=mi "I shall go" & in form also Sk. pṛcchati=Lat. porsco "I want to know," Vedic icchati "to desire." -- (2) Present *gṷemi̯o=Sk. gamati=Gr. bai/nw, Lat. venio, Goth. qiman, Ohg. koman, E. come; and non -- present formations as Osk. kúmbened, Sk. gata=Lat. ventus; gantu=(ad) ventus. -- (3) *gṷā, which is correlated to *stā, in Pret. Sk. ágām, Gr. e)/bhn, cp. bh_ma]. These three formations are represented in Pāli as follows (1) gacch˚, in pres. gacchati; imper. gaccha & gacchāhi; pot. gacche (Dh 46, 224) & gaccheyya; p.pres. gacchanto, med. gacchamāna; fut (2nd) gacchissati; aor. agacchi (VvA 307; v. l. agañchi). -- (2) gam˚ in three variations; viz. (a) gam˚, in pres. caus. gameti; fut. gamissati; aor. 3 sg. agamā (Sn 408, 976; Vv 797; Mhvs vii.9), agamāsi & gami (Pv ii.86) 1. pl. agamiŋhase (Pv ii.310), pl. agamuŋ (Sn 290), agamaŋsu & gamiŋsu; prohib. mā gami; ger. gamya (J v.31); grd. gamanīya (KhA 223). See also der. gama, gamana, gāmika, gāmin. -- (b) gan˚, in aor. agañchi (on this form see Trenckner, Notes, p. 71 sq. -- In n'āgañchi J iii.190 it belongs to ā+gam); pres. -- aor gañchisi (Sn 665); inf. gantuŋ ger. gantvā; grd. gantabba. See also der. gantar. <-> (c) ga˚, in pp. gata. See also ga, gati, gatta. -- 3. gā˚, in pret. agā (Pv ii.322), 3rd pl. aor. agū (=Sk. ˚uḥ), in ajjhagū, anvagū (q. v.).
Meanings and Use: 1. to go, to be in motion, to move, to go on (opp. to stand still, tiṭṭhati). Freq. in combn with tiṭṭhati nisīdati seyyaŋ kappeti "to go, to stand, sit down & lie down," to denote all positions and every kind of behaviour; Nd2 s. v. gacchati. <-> evaŋ kāle gacchante, as time went on J iii.52, or evaŋ g˚ kāle (PvA 54, 75) or gacchante gacchante kāle DhA i.319; gacchati=paleti PvA 56; vemakoṭi gantvā pahari (whilst moving) DhA iii.176. -- 2. to go, to walk (opp. to run, dhāvati) DhA i.389. -- 3. to go away, to go out, to go forth (opp. to stay, or to come, āgacchati): agamāsi he went Pv ii.86; yo maŋ icchati anvetu yo vā n' icchati gacchatu "who wants me may come, who does not may go" Sn 564; āgacchantānañ ca gacchantānañ ca pamāṇaŋ n' atthi "there was no end of all who came & went" J ii.133; gacchāma "let us go" J i.263; gaccha dāni go away now! J ii.160; gaccha re muṇḍaka Vism 343; gacchāhi go then! J i.151, 222; mā gami do not go away! J iv.2; pl. mā gamittha J i.263; gacchanto on his way J i.255, 278; agamaŋsu they went away J iv.3; gantukāma anxious to go J i.222, 292; kattha gamissasi where are you going? (opp. agacchasi) DhA iii.173; kahaŋ gacchissatha id. J ii.128; kuhiŋ gamissati where is he going? Sn 411, 412. -- 4. with acc. or substitute: to go to, to have access to, to arrive or get at (with the aim of the movement or the object of the intention); hence fig. to come to know, to experience, to realize. -- (a) with acc. of direction: Rājagahaŋ gami he went to R. Pv ii.86; Devadaha -- nagaraŋ gantuŋ J i.52; gacchām' ahaŋ Kusināraŋ I shall go to K. D ii.128; Suvaṇṇabhūmiŋ gacchanti they intended to go ("were going") to S. J iii.188; migavaŋ g. to go hunting J i.149; janapadaŋ gamissāma J ii.129; paradāraŋ g. to approach another man's wife Dh 246. -- (b) with adverbs of direction or purpose (atthāya): santikaŋ (or santike) gacchati to go near a person (in gen.), pitu s. gacchāma DhA iii.172; devāna santike gacche Dh 224 santikaŋ also J i.152: ii.159, etc. Kathaŋ tattha gamissāmi how shall I get there? J i.159; ii.159; tattha agamāsi he went there J ii.160. dukkhānubhavanatthāya gacchamānā "going away for the purpose of undergoing suffering" J iv.3; vohāratthāya gacchāmi I am going out (=fut.) on business J ii.133. -- Similarly (fig.) in foll. expressions (op. "to go to Heaven," etc.=to live or experience a heavenly life, op. next); Nirayaŋ gamissati J vi.368; saggaŋ lokaŋ g. J i.152; gacche pāram apārato Sn 1129, in this sense interpreted at Nd2 223 as adhigacchati phusati sacchikaroti, to experience. -- Sometimes with double acc.: Bhagavantaŋ saraṇaŋ gacchāmi "I entrust myself to Bh." Vin i.16. -- Cp. also phrases as atthangacchati to go home, to set, to disappear; antarā -- gacchati to come between, to obstruct. -- 5. to go as a stronger expression for to be, i. e. to behave, to have existence, to fare (cp. Ger. es geht gut, Fr. cela va bien=it is good). Here belongs gati "existence," as mode of existing, element, sphere of being, and out of this use is developed the periphrastic use of gam˚, which places it on the same level with the verb "to be" (see b). -- (a) sugatiŋ gamissasi you will go to the state of well -- being, i. e. Heaven Vin ii.195; It 77; opp. duggatiŋ gacchanti Dh 317 -- 319; maggaŋ na jānanti yena gacchanti subbatā (which will fall to their share) Sn 441; gamissanti yattha gantvā na socare "they will go where one sorrows not" Sn 445; Vv 514; yan ca karoti . . . tañ ca ādāya gacchati "whatever a man does that he will take with him" S i.93. -- (b) periphrastic (w. ger. of governing verb): nagaraŋ pattharitvā gaccheyya "would spread through the town" J i.62; pariṇāmaŋ gaccheyya "could be digested" D ii.127; sīhacammaŋ ādāya agamaŋsu "they took the lion's skin away with them" J ii.110; itthiŋ pahāya gamissati shall leave the woman alone J vi.348; sve gahetvā gamissāmi "I shall come for it tomorrow" Miln 48.
Gaja [Sk. gaja] an elephant J iv.494; Miln 2, 346; DhsA 295 (appld to a kind of thought).
-- potaka the young of an elephant PvA 152; -- rājā the king of the elephants Miln 346.
Gajaka=gaja, in gajakattharaṇa an elephant's cover VvA 104.
Gajjati [Sk. garjati, cp. gargara & jarā roaring, cp. uggaj- jati Dhtp 76: gajja sadde] to roar, to thunder, usually of clouds. Of the earth: Dāvs v.29; of a man (using harsh speech) J i.226; ii.412 (mā gajji); Nd1 172 (=abhi˚); J iv.25. -- Caus. gajjayati, ger. gajjayitvā (megho g˚ thanayitvā (megho g˚ thanayitvā pavassati) It 66.
Gajjitar [n. agent fr. prec.] one who thunders, of a man in comparison with a cloud A ii.102=Pug 42.
Gaṇa [Vedic gaṇa; *ger to comprise, hold, or come together, cp. Gr. a)gei/rw to collect, a)gora/ meeting, Lat. grex, flock, Sk. jarante "conveniunt" (see Wackernagel, Altind. Gr. i.193). Another form of this root is grem in Sk. grāma, Lat. gremium; see under gāma] -- 1. (a) in special sense: a meeting or a chapter of (two or three) bhikkhus, a company (opposed both to sangha, the order & puggala, the individual) Vin i.58, 74, 195, 197; ii.170, 171; iv.130, 216, 226, 231, 283, 310, 316, 317; v.123, 167. -- (b) in general: a crowd, a multitude, a great many. See cpds. -- 2. as -- ˚: a collection of, viz., of gods, men, animals or things; a multitude, mass; flock, herd; host, group, cluster. -- (a) deva˚ J i.203; DhA iii.441; PvA 140 (˚parivuta); pisāca˚ S i.33; tidasa˚ Sn 679. -- (b) amacca˚ suite of ministers J i.264; ariya˚ troup of worthies J vi.50; naranarī˚ crowds of men & women Miln 2; dāsi˚ a crowd of servants J ii.127; tāpasa˚ a group of ascetics J i.140 (˚parivuta); bhikkhu˚ J i.212 (˚parivuta). -- (c) dvija˚ J i.152; dija˚ Pv ii.124; sakuṇa˚, of birds J i.207; ii.352; go˚, of cows A i.229; v.347, 359; J ii.128; kākola˚, of ravens Sn 675; bhamarā˚, of bees J i.52; miga˚ of beasts J i.150. -- (d) taru˚ a cluster of trees PvA 154; tāra˚, a host of stars A i.215; Pv ii.967; with ref. to the books of the Canon: Suttantika˚ & Ābhidhammika˚ Vism 93.
-- âcariya "a teacher of a crowd," i. e. a t. who has (many) followers. Always in phrase sanghī ca gaṇī ca ganācariyo ca, and always with ref. either to Gotama: D i.116; M ii.3; or to the 6 chief sectarian leaders, as Pūraṇa Kassapa, etc.: D i.47, 163; S i.68; iv.398; M i.198, 227, 233; ii.2; Sn p. 91; cp. DA i.143. In general: Miln 4. -- ārāma (adj.) & -- ārāmatā in phrase gaṇārāmo gaṇarato gaṇārāmataŋ anuyutto: a lover of the crowd A iii.422 sq.; M iii.110=Nd2 on Sn 54. -- gaṇin the leader of many, Ep. of Bhagavā Nd2 307. -- (ŋ)gaṇupāhanā (pl.) shoes with many linings Vin i.185, 187; cp. Vin. Texts ii.14. See also Bdhgh. on aṭaliyo (q. v. under aṭala). -- pūraka (adj.) one who completes the quorum (of a bhikkhus chapter) Vin i.143 sq.; -- bandhana in ˚ena dānaŋ datvā to give by co -- operation, to give jointly DhA ii.160; -- bhojana food prepared as a joint meal Vin ii.196; iv. 71; v.128, 135, 205; -- magga in ˚ena gaṇetuŋ to count by way of batches Vin i.117; -- vassika (adj.) through a great many years Sn 279; -- sanganika (adj.) coming into contact with one another DhA i.162.
Gaṇaka [fr. gaṇ, to comprise in the sense of to count up] a counter, one skilled in counting familiar with arithmetic; an accountant, overseer or calculator. Enumd as an occupation together with muddika at D i.51 (expl. DA i.157 by acchidda -- pāṭhaka); also with muddika and sankhāyika S iv.376; as an office at the king's court (together with amaccā as gaṇaka -- mahāmatta=a ministerial treasurer) D iii.64, and in same context D iii.148, 153, 169, 171, 177; as overseer Vin iii.43; as accountant Miln 79, 293; VvA 66.
Gaṇakī (f.)=gaṇikā Vin iii.135 -- 136, in purāṇa˚ a woman who was formerly a courtesan, & as adj. gaṇakī -- dhītā the daughter of a courtesan.
Gaṇanā (f.) counting, i. e. 1. counting up, arithmetic, number J i.29; Vism 278 sq.; Miln 79; VvA 194. <-> 2. counting, census, statistics; Tikap. 94; J i.35; Miln 4 (senā ˚ŋ kāretvā); DhA i.11, 34. -- 3. the art of counting, arithmetics as a study & a profession, forbidden to the bhikkhus Vin i.77=iv.129 (˚ŋ sikkhati to study ar.); D i.11 (expl. DA i.95 by acchiddaka -- gaṇanā); M i.85; iii.1 (˚ājīva); DA i.157. -- gaṇana -- patha (time -- ) reckoning, period of time Miln 20, 116.
Gaṇikā1 (f.) "one who belongs to the crowd," a harlot, a courtesan (cp. gaṇakī) Vin i.231 (Ambapālī) 268, (do.); ii.277 (Aḍḍhakāsī); Ud 71; Miln 122; DhA iii.104; VvA 75 (Sirimā); PvA 195, 199. -- Customs of a gaṇikā J iv.249; v.134. -- Cp. saŋ˚.
Gaṇikā2 (f.)=gaṇanā, arithmetic Miln 3.
Gaṇin1 (adj.) one who has a host of followers, Ep. of a teacher who has a large attendance of disciples; usually in standing combn sanghī gaṇī gaṇācariyo (see above). Also in foll.: Sn 955, 957; Dpvs iv.8 (mahāgaṇī), 14 (therā gaṇī); gaṇī -- bhūtā (pl.) in crowds, combd with sanghā sanghī D i.112, expld at DA i.280: pubbe nagarassa anto agaṇā bahi nikkhamitvā gaṇa -- sainpannā ti. See also paccekagaṇin.
Gaṇin2 a large species of deer J v.406 (=gokaṇṇa).
Gaṇeti [denom. to gaṇa Dhtp 574: sankhyāne] 1. to count, to reckon, to do sums Dh 19; J vi.334; Miln 79, 293; pp. gaṇita Sn 677; pass. gaṇīyati Sdhp 434; inf. (vedic) gaṇetuye Bw. iv.28; caus. gaṇāpeti M iii.1. -- 2. to regard, to take notice of, to consider, to care for J i.300; iv.267.
Gaṇṭhi (m.) [Vedic granthi, to grem to comprise, hold to- gether, cp. Lat. gremium, Sk. gaṇa & grāma, see also gantha] 1. a knot, a tie, a knot or joint in a stalk (of a plant) J i.172; DA i.163; DhA i.321 (˚jātaŋ what has be come knotty or hard); -- diṭṭhi -- gaṇṭhi the tangle of false doctrine VvA 297; anta -- gaṇṭh -- ābādha entanglement of intestines Vin i.275. -- 2. a (wooden) block Vin ii.110 (of sandal wood).
-- ṭṭhāna (for gaṇṭhikaṭṭhāna?) the place of the block (i. e. of execution) J iii.538; (reads gaṇṭhi -- gaṇṭi -- ṭṭhāna); Vism 248. -- bhedaka, in ˚cora "the thief who breaks the block" (or rope, knot?) DhA ii.30.
Gaṇṭhikā (f.) (freq. spelled gaṇḍikā, q. v.)=gaṇṭhi, viz. 1. a knot, a tie DA i.199 (catu -- pañca -- gaṇṭhik'āhata patta a bowl with 4 or 5 knots, similarly āṇi -- gaṇṭhik'<-> āhata ayopatta Vism 108; but see āṇi); DhA i.335 (˚jāta= gaṇṭhijāta knotty part), 394. -- 2. a block (or is it knot?) Vin ii.136 (? +pāsaka; cp. Vin. Texts iii.144); v.140. Esp. in phrase gaṇṭhikaŋ paṭimuñcitvā Vin i.46= ii.213, 215, trsld at Vin. Texts iii.286 "fasten the block on (to the robe)" but at i.155 "tie the knots." Also in dhamma -- gaṇṭhikā a block for execution J i.150 (v. l. gaṇḍikā). -- 3. N. of a plant PvA 127. -- ucchugaṇṭhikā sugar cane: see ucchu.
-- kāsāva a yellow robe which was to be tied (or which had a block?) J iv.446.
Gaṇḍa [a variation of gaṇṭha ( -- i), in both meanings of (1) swelling, knot, protuberance, and (2) the interstice between two knots or the whole of the knotty object, i. e. stem, stalk] -- 1. a swelling, esp. as a disease, an abscess, a boil. Freq. in similes with ref. to kāma and kāya. Mentioned with similar cutaneous diseases under kilāsa (q. v. for loci). As Ep. of kāya S iv.83=A iv.386, of kāmā A iii.310, iv.289; Nd2 on Sn 51; also Th 2, 491 (= dukkhatā sūlaya ThA 288); S iv.64 (=ejā); Sn 51, 61 (v. l. for gaḷa); J i.293; Vism 360 (˚pilakā); DhA iii.297 (gaṇḍ -- ā -- gaṇḍajāta, covered with all kinds of boils); iv.175; PvA 55. Cp. Av. S ii.1681. -- 2. a stalk, a shaft, in N. of a plant -- ˚tindu -- rukkha J v.99, and in der. gaṇḍikā & gaṇḍī, cp. also Av. S ii.13312. <-> 3.=gaṇḍuppāda in cpd. gaṇḍamattikā clay mixed with earth -- worms Vin ii.151 (cp. Bdhgh. gaṇḍuppādagūtha -- mattikā clay mixed with excrement of earthworms Vin. Texts iii.172).
-- uppāda (lit. producing upheavals, cp. a mole) an earth -- worm, classed as a very low creature with kīṭā & puḷavā at M iii.168; J v.210 (˚pāṇa); DhA iii.361 (˚yoni); SnA 317.
Gaṇḍaka (adj.) having boils Sdhp 103.
Gaṇḍamba N. of the tree, under which Gotama Buddha performed the double miracle; with ref. to this freq. in phrase gaṇḍamba -- rukkha -- mūle yamakapāṭihāriyaŋ katvā J i.77; iv.263 sq.; DA i.57; PvA 137; Miln 349; Dāvs v.54. Also at DhA iii.207 in play of words with amba -- rukkha.
Gaṇḍikā (f.) [a -- n. formation from gaṇḍa or gaṇṭha, see also gaṇṭhikā] -- 1. a stalk, a shaft (cp. gaṇḍī) J i.474; DhsA 319 (of the branches of trees: g˚ -- ākoṭana -- sadda). -- 2. a lump, a block of wood (more freq. spelling gaṇṭhikā, q. v.). -- 3. N. of a plant Vv 354 (=bandhujīvaka VvA 161).
-- âdhāna the putting on of a shaft or stem, as a bolt or bar Vin ii.172; cp. Vin. Texts iii.213 and gaṇḍī; also ghaṭikā2.
Gaṇḍin [adj. fr. gaṇḍa] -- 1. having swellings, in ure gaṇḍī (f.) with swellings on the chest, i. e. breasts J v.159, 202 (thane sandhāyâha 205). -- 2. having boils, being afflicted with a glandular disease (with kuṭṭhin & kilāsin) Kvu 31.
Gaṇḍī (f.) [=gaṇḍikā in meaning 1; prob.=Sk. ghaṇṭā in meaning 2] -- 1. a shaft or stalk, used as a bar J i.237. -- 2. a gong DhA i.291 (gaṇḍiŋ paharati to beat the g.); ii.54, 244; gaṇḍiŋ ākoṭetvā KhA 251. Cp. AvS i.258, 264, 272; ii.87, 95 & Divy 335, 336. Also in gaṇḍisaññā "sign with the gong" J iv.306. -- 3. the executioner's block (=gaṇḍikā or gaṇṭhikā) J iii.41.
Gaṇḍusa [cp. Sk. gaṇḍūṣa] a mouthful J i.249 (khīra˚).
Gaṇhati & Gaṇhāti [Vedic grah (grabh), gṛhṇāti pp. gṛhīta to grasp. *gher to hold, hold in, contain; cp. Gr. xo/rtos enclosure, Lat. hortus, co -- hors (homestead); Goth. gards (house); Ohg. gart; E. yard & garden. To this belong Vedic gṛha (house) in P. gaha˚, gihin, geha, ghara, & also Vedic harati to seize, hasta hand]. The forms of the verb are from three bases, viz. (1) gaṇha- (Sk. gṛhṇā -- ); Pres.: ind. gaṇhāti (gaṇhāsi PvA 87), pot. gaṇheyya, imper. gaṇha (J i.159; PvA 49=handa) & gaṇhāhi (J i.279). Fut. gaṇhissati; Aor. gaṇhi. Inf. gaṇhituŋ (J iii.281). Ger. gaṇhitvā. Caus. ganhāpeti & gāhāpeti. -- 2. gahe -- (Sk. gṛhī -- ): Fut. gahessati. Aor. aggahesi (Sn 847; J i.52). Inf. gahetuŋ (J i.190, 222). Ger. gahetvā & gahetvāna (poet.) (Sn 309; Pv ii.3). -- 3. gah -- (Sk. gṛh -- ): Aor. aggahi. Ger. gayha & gahāya (Sn 791). Pass. gayhati. Pp. gahita & gahīta. Cp. gaha, gahaṇa, gāha.
Meanings: to take, take up; take hold of; grasp, seize; assume; e. g. ovādaŋ g. to take advice J i.159; khaggaŋ to seize the sword J i.254 -- 255; gocaraŋ to take food J iii.275; jane to seize people J i.253; dhanaŋ to grasp the treasure J i.255; nagaraŋ to occupy the city J i.202; pāde gāḷhaŋ gahetvā holding her feet tight J i.255; macche to catch fish J iii.52; mantaŋ to use a charm J iii.280; rajjaŋ to seize the kingdom J i.263; ii.102; sākhaŋ to take hold of a branch Sn 791; J i.52. Very often as a phrase to be translated by a single word, as: nāmato g. to enumerate PvA 18; paṭisandhiŋ g. to be born J i.149; maraṇaŋ g. to die J i.151; mūlena g. to buy J iii.126; vacanaŋ g. to obey J iii.276 (in neg.). The ger. gahetvā is very often simply to be translated as "with," e. g. tidaṇḍaŋ gahetvā caranto J ii.317; satta bhikkhū gahetvā agamāsi VvA 149.
Caus. gaṇhāpeti to cause to be seized, to procure, to have taken: phalāni J ii.105; rājānaŋ J i.264. Cp. gāhāpeti.
Gata [pp. of gacchati in medio -- reflexive function] gone, in all meanings of gacchati (q. v.) viz. 1. literal: gone away, arrived at, directed to (c. acc.), opp. ṭhita: gate ṭhite nisinne (loc. abs.) when going, standing, sitting down (cp. gacchati 1) D i.70; opp. āgata: yassa maggaŋ na jānāsi āgatassa gatassa vā Sn 582 (cp. gati 2). Also periphrastic (=gacchati 5 b): aṭṭhi paritvā gataŋ "the bone fell down" J iii.26. Very often gata stands in the sense of a finite verb (=aor. gacchi or agamāsi): yo ca Buddhaŋ . . . saraṇaŋ gato (cp. gacchati 4) Dh 190; attano vasanaṭṭhānaŋ gato he went to his domicile J i.280; ii.160; nāvā Aggimālaŋ gatā the ship went to Aggimālā J iv.139. <-> 2. in applied meaning: gone in a certain way, i. e. affected, behaved, fared, fated, being in or having come into a state or condition. So in sugata & duggata (see below) and as 2nd part of cpds. in gen., viz. gone; atthaŋ˚ gone home, set; addha˚ done with the journey (cp. gat -- addhin); gone into: taṇhā˚ fallen a victim to thirst, tama˚ obscured, raho˚, secluded, vyasana˚ fallen into misery; having reached: anta˚ arrived at the goal (in this sense often combd with patta: antagata antapatta Nd2, 436, 612), koṭi˚ perfected, parinibbāna˚ having ceased to exist. vijjā˚ having attained (right) knowledge; connected with, referring to, concerning: kāya˚ relating to the body (kāyagatā sati, e. g. Vism 111, 197, 240 sq.); diṭṭhi˚ being of a (wrong) view; sankhāra˚, etc. -- Sometimes gata is replaced by kata and vice versa: anabhāvaŋkata>anabhāvaŋ gacchati; kālagata> kālakata (q. v.).
agata not gone to, not frequented: ˚ŋ disaŋ (of Nibbāna) Dh 323; purisantaraŋ ˚ŋ mātugāmaŋ "a maid who has not been with a man" J i.290.
sugata of happy, blessed existence, fortunate; one who has attained the realm of bliss (=sugatiŋ gata, see gati), blessed. As np. a common Ep. of the Buddha: Vin i.35; iii.1; D i.49; S i.192; A ii.147 et passim (see Sugata). -- D i.83; Sn 227 (see expl. KhA 183).
duggata of miserable existence, poor, unhappy, ill-fated, gone to the realm of miscry (duggatiŋ gata PvA 33, see gati) Pv i.62; ii.317; duggata -- bhāva (poverty) J vi.366; duggat -- itthi (miserable, poor) J i.290; parama -- duggatāni kulāni clans in utmost misery (poverty) PvA 176. -- Compar. duggatatara DhA i.427; ii.135.
-- atta (fr. attā) self -- perfected, perfect D i.57 (expl. by koṭippatta -- citto DA i.168); cp. paramāya satiyā ca gatiyā ca dhitiyā ca samannāgata M i.82; -- addhin (adj. of addhan) one who has completed his journey (cp. addhagata) Dh 90; -- kāle (in gata -- gata -- kāle) whenever he went J iii.188; -- ṭṭhāna place of existence PvA 38; =gamana in āgata -- ṭṭhānaŋ vā: coming and going (lit. state of going) J iii.188; -- yobbana (adj.) past youth, of old age A i.138; Sn 98=124.
Gataka a messenger J i.86.
Gatatta 1.=Sk. gat -- ātman (see prec.). -- 2.=Sk. gatatvaŋ the fact of having gone KhA 183.
Gati (f.) [fr. gacchati; cp. Gr. ba/sis, Lat. (in -- ) ventio, Goth. (ga -- ) qumps] 1. going, going away, (opp. āgati coming) (both gati & āgati usually in pregnant sense of No. 2. See āgati); direction, course, career. Freq. of the two careers of a Mahāpurisa (viz. either a Cakkavatti or a Buddha) D ii.16=Sn p. 106; Sn 1001, or of a gihī arahattaŋ patto Miln 264, with ref. to the distinction of the child Gotama J i.56. -- phassâyatanānaŋ gati (course or direction) A ii.161; jagato gati (id.) A ii.15, 17; sakuntānaŋ g. the course, flight of birds Dh 92=Th 1, 92. -- Opp. āgati Pv ii.922. -- tassā gatiŋ jānāti "he knows her going away, i. e. where she has gone" PvA 6. -- 2. going away, passing on (=cuti, opp. upapatti coming into another existence); course, esp after death, destiny, as regards another (future) existence A i.112; D ii.91; M i.388 (tassa kā gati ko abhisamparāyo? what is his rebirth and what his destiny?); in combn āgati vā gati vā (=cutûpapatti), rebirth & death M i.328, 334. In defn of saŋsāra expld as gati bhavâbhava cuti upapatti=one existence after the other Nd2 664; as gati upapatti paṭisandhi Nd2 on dhātu (also as puna -- gati rebirth). -- The Arahant as being beyond Saŋsāra is also beyond gati: yassa gatiŋ na jānanti devā gandhabba -- mānusā Dh 420=Sn 644; yesaŋ gati n' atthi Sn 499; and Nibbāna coincides with release from the gatis: gativippamokkhaŋ parinibbānaŋ SnA 368. -- attā hi attano gati "everybody is (the maker of) his own future life" Dh 380; esā maccharino gati "this is the fate of the selfish" Pv iii.114; sabbagatī te ijjhantu "all fate be a success to you" J v.393; gato so tassa yā gati "he has gone where he had to go (after death)" Pv i.122. <-> 3. behaviour, state or condition of life, sphere of existence, element, especially characterized as sugati & duggati, a happy or an unhappy existence. gati migānaŋ pavanaŋ, ākāso pakkhīnaŋ gati, vibhavo gati dhammānaŋ, nibbānaŋ arahato gati: the wood is the sphere of the beasts, the air of the birds, decay is the state of (all) things, Nibbāna the sphere of the Arahant Vin v.149=SnA 346; apuññalābho ca gatī ca pāpikā Dh 310; duggati J i.28; avijjāy' eva gati the quality of ignorance Sn 729; paramāya gatiyā samannāgato of perfect behaviour M i.82; see also defn at Vism 237. <-> 4. one of the five realms of existence of sentient beings (=loka), divided into the two categories of sugati (=Sagga, realm of bliss) & duggati (=Yamaloka, apāya, realm of misery). These gatis are given in the foll. order: (1) niraya purgatory, (2) tiracchānayoni the brute oreation, (3) pittivisaya the ghost world, (4) manussā (m -- loka) human beings, (5) devā gods: M i.73; D iii.234; A iv.459; Nd2 550; cp. S v.474 -- 77; Vism 552. They are described in detail in the Pañcagatidīpana (ed. L. Feer, J.P.T.S. 1884, 152 sq.; trsl. by the same in Annales du Musée Guimet v. 514 -- 528) under Naraka -- kaṇḍa, Tiracchāna˚, Peta˚, Manussa˚, Deva˚. Of these Nos. 1 -- 3 are considered duggatis, whilst Nos. 4 and 5 are sugati. In later sources we find 6 divisions, viz. 1 -- 3 as above, (4) asurā, (5) manussā, (6) devā, of which 1 -- 4 are comprised under apāyā (conditions of suffering, q. v.) or duggatiyo (see Pv iv.11, cp. PvA 103). These six also at D iii.264. -- lokassa gatiŋ pajānāti Bhagavā Sn 377 (gati=nirayādipañcappabhedaŋ SnA 368). The first two gatis are said to be the fate of the micchādiṭṭhino D i.228, dve niṭṭhā DA i.249 (q. v. for var. appl. of gati) as well as the dussīlā (A i.60), whilst the last two are the share of the sīlavanto (A. i.60).
-- gata gone its course (of a legal enquiry, vinicchaya) Vin ii.85 (cp. Vin Texts iii.26); J ii.1.
agati 1. no course, no access, in agati tava tattha: there you have no access S i.115. -- 2.=duggati, a wrong course. agatigamana a wrong course of life D iii.133; A i.72; ii.18 sq.; iii.274 sq.; J v.510; PvA 161. Technically the four agati -- gamanāni are: chanda˚ dosa˚ moha˚ bhaya˚ D iii.228 (see also under chanda).
sugati (sometimes suggati after duggati e. g. J vi.224) a happy existence; a realm of bliss; the devaloka. Cp. sugatin. Usually with gacchati (sugatiŋ) & gata "gone to Heaven" Vin ii.195; D ii.202; It 77; PvA 65. In combn w. sagga loka (sugatiŋ, etc. uppajjati) D i.143; A i.97; J i.152. parammaraṇā sugati pāṭikankhā It 24; suggatiŋ gata Dh 18; sugati pāpehi kammehi sulabhā na hoti "bliss is not gained by evil" PvA 87; =sugga & dibbaṭṭhāna PvA 89; sugati -- parāyana sure of rebirth in a realm of bliss, ib.
duggati a miserable existence; a realm of misery (see above gati 4). Usually with gacchati (duggatiŋ gata, reborn in a miserable state) or uppajjati D i.82; A i.97, 138 (+vinipātaŋ nirayaŋ); ii.123; iii.3; iv.364; Dh 17; Sn 141; SnA 192 (=dukkhappatti); PvA 87. Sakakammāni nayanti duggatiŋ, one's own deeds lead to rebirth in misery, Dh 240; with ref. to a Peta existence: Pv i.62; ii.16; 113; 317. Cp. duggata.
Gatika (adj.) 1. going to, staying with, in bhikkhu˚ a person living with the bhikkhus Vin i.148. -- 2. leading to: yaŋ˚ what they lead to (of the 5 indriyas) S v.230. -- 3. having a certain gati, leading to one of the four kinds of rebirth: evaŋ˚ D i.16 (w. ref. to one of the first 3 gatis: DA i.108); niyata˚ whose destiny is certain (w. ref. to sugati) and aniyata˚ whose destiny is uncertain (w. ref. to a duggati) DhA iii.173.
Gatin (adj.=gatika) 1. going, i. e. having a certain course: sabbā nadī vankagatī "every river flows crooked" J i.289. -- 2. having a certain gati, fated, destined, esp. in su˚ & dug˚: samparāye suggatī going to a happy existence after death Vin ii.162=J i.219; saggaŋ sugatino yanti "those who have a happy fate (because of leading a good life) go to one of the Heavens" Dh 126.
Gatimant (adj.) of (perfect) behaviour, going right, clever (cp. gatatta under gata, & gati 3) M i.82.
Gatta (nt.) [Vedic gātra] the body, pl. gattāni the limbs. - As body: Vin i.47; S i.169=183 (analla˚ with pure bodies; anallīna˚ at 169, but v. l. analla˚); A i.138; Sn 673 (samacchida˚ with bodies cut up); Pv i.112 (bhinna -- pabhinna˚, id.); PvA 56 (=sarīra); 68. -- As limbs: S iv.198 (arupakkāni festering with sores); M i.506 (id.); M i.80=246; J i.61 (lālākilinna˚); Sn 1001 (honti gattesu mahāpurisalakkhaṇā), 1017, 1019; Pv iii.91 (=sarīrâvayavā PvA 211); Miln 357 (arupakkāni).
Gathita (adj.) [pp. of ganthati to tie, cp. gantha, knot; Sk. grathita] tied, bound, fettered; enslaved, bound to, greedy for, intoxicated with (c. loc.). When abs. always in combn w. paribhuñjati and w. ref. to some object of desire (bhoga, lābha, kāmaguṇe). Usually in standing phrase gathita mucchita ajjhāpanna (ajjhopanna) "full of greed & blind desire." In this connection it is frequently (by B MSS.) spelt gadhita and the editors of S, A, & Miln have put that in the text throughout. With mucchita & ajjhāpanna: D i.245; iii.43; M i.162, 173; S ii.270; iv.332; A v.178, 181 Nd2 on nissita C. -- c. loc.: J iv.371 (gharesu); DA i.59 (kāmaguṇesu). In other connections: ādānaganthaŋ gathitaŋ visajja Sn 794 (cp. Nd1 98); yāni loke gathitāni na tesu pasuto siyā Sn 940. -- J iv.5 (=giddha); v.274 (gedhita for pagiddha); PvA 262 (gadhita as expln of giddha) -- agathita (agadhita) not fettered (by desire) without desire, free from the ties of craving (+m˚, a˚) S ii.194, 269; A v.181; Miln 401 (trsl. Rh.D. ii.339: "without craving, without faintness, without sinking").
Gada speech, sentence Dh i.66, DA i.66 f.; and on D iii.135 (§ 28); gada at S ii.230 (v. l.) in phrase diṭṭhagadena sallena is to be read diddhagadena s.
Gaddula (and gaddūla) a leather strap S iii.150; J ii.246; iii.204; fig, in taṇhā -- gaddūla "the leash of thirst," Nd2 on jappā (taṇhā)=Dhs 1059=Vbh 361, cp. DhsA 367.
Gaddūhana (nt.) [Derivation unknown; Sk. dadrūghna] a small measure of space & time M iii.127; S ii.264 (˚mattam pi, SA "pulling just once the cow's teat"); A iv.395; Miln 110. See Trenckner P.M. 59, 60; Rh. D. J.R.A.S. 1903, 375.
Gaddha [Vedic gṛdha; see gijjha] a vulture; in gaddha- bādhipubbo, of the bhikkhu Ariṭṭha, who had been a vulture trainer in a former life Vin ii.25= iv.218= M i.130; see also Vin. Texts ii.377.
Gadrabha [Vedic gardabha., Lat. burdo, a mule; see Walde Lat. Wtb., s. v.] an ass, donkey Vin v.129; M i.334; A i.229; J ii.109, 110; v.453; DA i.163. -- f. gadrabhī J ii.340.
-- bhāraka a donkey load J ii.109; DhA i.123; -- bhāva the fact of being an ass J ii.110; -- rava (& -- rāva) the braying of an ass ibid. & Vism 415.
Gadhita see gathita.
Gantar [n. agent of gacchati in the sense of a periphrastic future] "goer" in gantā hoti he will go, he is in the habit of going, combd w. sotā hantā khantā, of the king's elephant A ii.116=iii.161; v. l. for gatā at M ii.155.
Gantha (in BB often misspelt gandha) [fr. ganthati] -- 1. a bond, fetter, trammel; always fig. and usually referring to and enumd as the four bodily ties, or knots (kāya˚, see under kāya): S v.59=Dhs 1135; D iii.230; Nd1 98; DhA iii.276; 4 kāyaganthā, viz., abhijjhā, byāpāda, sīlabbataparāmasa, idaŋsaccâbhinivesa; thus Nd1 98; Vism 683. In other conn. Sn 347, 798, 847, 857, 912; Nd2 on jappā (taṇhā); Dh 211; Ps i.129; Dhs 1059, 1472; Vbh 18, 24, 55, 65, 77, 117, 120; Nett 31, 54, 114, 124 (gandha); Sdhp 616. -- chinna˚ (adj.) one who has cut the ties (of bad desires, binding him to the body). Combn w. anigha nirāsa S i.12 (˚gandha), 23; w. asita anāsava Sn 219. Cp. pahīnamānassa na santi ganthā S i.14. See also ādāna˚; cp. ganthaniya. -- 2. [only in late Pali, and in Sk.] composition, text, book (not with ref. to books as tied together, but to books as composed, put together. See gantheti 2).
-- dhura the burden of the books, i. e. of studying the Scriptures, expld as one who knows by heart one, two, or all Nikāyas. Always combd w. vipassanādhuraŋ, the burden of contemplation DhA i.8; iv.37; -- pamocana the state of being released from, freed from the fetters of the "body" always w. ref.to Nibbāna S i.210; A ii.24; It 104, cp. 122; -- pahīna (adj.) connected with or referring to the ganthas Dhs 1480; opp. vi˚ Dhs 1482.
Ganthati & Gantheti [Vedic grath, granth, grathnāti, to *grem, cp. Lat. gremium; see also gaṇṭhi gathita, gantha] 1. to tie, knot, bind, fasten together: kathaŋ mittāni ganthati "how does he bind friends" S i.214= Sn 185; mālaŋ ganthamāna tying a garland Vv 381 (ganthento VvA 173). Of medicines: to mix, to prepare J iv.361. -- pp. ganthita tied, bound, fettered: catūhi ganthehi g˚ Ps i.129; -- grd. ganthaniya to be tied or tending to act as a tie (of "body"); expl. as ārammaṇa -- karaṇa -- vasena ganthehi ganthitabba DhsA 69; dhammā g˚ ā ("states that tend to be are liable to be ties" Buddh. Ps. p. 305; Expositor 64) Dhs 1141; 1478. In combn saññojaniya g˚ oghaniya (of rūpa) Dhs 584=Vbh 12; of rūpa -- kkhandha Vbh 65, of dasāyatanā ib. 77, dasindriyā ib. i.29, saccā g˚ and ag˚ (=gantha -- sampayutta & vippayuttā) ib. 117. -- 2. to put together, to compose: mante ganthetvā (v. l. gandhitvā) Sn 302, 306.
Ganthika (adj.) [fr. gantha 2] hard -- studying DhA i.156 (bhikkhu; cp. gantha -- dhura).
Gandha [Vedic gandha, from ghrā ghrāti to smell, ghrāna smell, & see P. ghāna. Possibly conn. w. Lat. fragro= E. fragrant] smell, viz. -- 1. odour, smell, scent in gen. J iii.189; Dh 54 -- 56=Miln 333; Dhs 605 under ghānâyatanāni); āma˚ smell of raw flesh A i.280; D ii.242; Sn 241 sq; maccha˚ the scent of fish J iii.52; muttakarīsa˚ the smell of faeces and urine A iii.158; catujāti˚ four kinds of scent J i.265; PvA 127; dibba -- g˚puppha a flower of heavenly odour J i.289. -- 2. odour, smell in particular: enumerated as mūla˚, sāra˚, puppha˚, etc., S iii.156=v.44=A v.22; Dhs 625 (under ghandāyatanāni, sphere of odours). Specified as māla˚, sāra˚, puppha˚ under tīṇi gandhajātāni A i.225; -- puppha˚ Dh 54=A i.226. -- 3. smell as olfactory sensation, belonging to the sphere (āyatanāni) of sense -- impressions and sensory objects & enum. in set of the 12 ajjhatta -- bāhirāni āyatanāni (see under rūpa) with ghānena gandhaŋ ghāyitvā "sensing smell by means of the olfactory organ" D iii.102; 244=250= 269=Nd2 on rūpa; M iii.55, 267; S iv.71; Vin i.35; Defined at Vism 447. Also as gandhā ghānaviññeyya under kāmaguṇā M ii.42; D iii.234, etc. In series of 10 attributes of physical quality ( -- rūpa, etc.) as characteristic of devas D iii.146; Pv ii.958; as sāra˚, pheggu˚, taca˚, etc. (nine qualities in all) in definition of Gandhabba -- kāyikā devā S iii.250 sq. -- In the same sense & similar connections: vaṇṇa -- g˚ -- ras'ûpeto Dh 49; J ii.106; gandhānaŋ khamo & akkhamo (of king's elephant) A iii.158 sq.; itthi˚, purisa˚ A i.1, 2; iii.68; in combn w. other four senses Sn 387, 759, 974. <-> 4. perfume, prepared odorific substance used as a toilet requisite, either in form of an unguent or a powder. Abstinence from the use of kallaesthetics is stated in the Sīlas (D i.8) as characteristic of certain Wanderers and Brahmins. Here gandha is mentioned together with mālā (flowers, garlands): D i.5=Kh ii; D i.7 (˚kathā); Vin ii.123; Sn 401; J i.50, 291; PvA 62. The use of scented ointment ( -- vilepana & ālepa, see cpds.) is allowed to the Buddhist bhikkhus (Vin i.206); and the giving of this, together with other commodities, is included in the second part of the deyyadhamma (the list of meritorious gifts to the Sangha), under Nos. 5 -- 14 (anna -- pāna -- vattha -- yānamālā -- gandhā -- vilepana -- seyy -- âvasatha -- padīpeyya): S iii.252; Nd2 523=It 65. Out of this enumeration: g˚ -- m˚ -- v˚ -- Pv ii.316; chatta -- g˚ -- m˚ -- upāhanā Pv ii.49; ii.936; m˚ -- g˚ -- v˚ kappūra -- kaṭukapphalāni J ii.416. <-> The application of scented ointment (gandhena or gandhehi vilimpati) is customary after a bath, e. g. PvA 50 (on Pv i.106); J i.254, 265; iii.277. Var. kinds of perfumes or scented substances are given as g˚dhūpa -- cuṇṇa -- kappūra (incense, powder, camphor) J i.290; vāsa -- cuṇṇa -- dhūpanādi g˚ KhA 37. See also cpds. -- 5. occurs as v. l. for gantha (book).
duggandha a disagreeable smell Dhs 625; ˚ŋ vāyati to emit a nasty odour PvA 14; as adj. having a bad smell, putrid Sn 205; PvA 15 (=pūtigandha), f. -- ā: duggandhā pūti vāyasi "you emit a bad odour") Pv i.61 (=aniṭṭha˚). -- sugandha an agreeable smell Dhs 625; as adj. of pleasant smell J iii.277; Sdhp. 246.
-- āpaṇa a perfumery shop J i.290; ˚ika perfume seller Miln 344; -- āyatana an olfactory sense -- relation, belonging to the six bāhirāni āyatanāni, the objective sensations D iii.243, 290; Dhs 585, 625, 655; -- ārammaṇa bearing on smell, having smell as its object Dhs 147, 157, 365, 410, 556, 608; -- ālepa (nt.) anointing with perfumes Vin i.206; -- āsā "hunger for odours," craving for olfactory sensations Dhs 1059; -- odaka scented water J i.50; ii.106; iii.189; -- karaṇḍaka a perfume -- box S iii.131; v.351; Pug 34; -- kuṭī (f.) a perfumed cabin, name of a room or hut occupied by the Buddha, esp. that made for him by Anāthapiṇḍika in Jetavana (J i.92). Gotamassa g˚ J ii.416, cp. Av. Ś ii.401; DhA iv.203, 206; -- cuṇṇa scented (bath -- ) powder J iii.277; -- jāta (nt.) odour, perfume ("consisting of smell"). Three kinds at A i.225 (māla˚, sāra˚, puppha˚); enum. as candanādi DhA i.423; in defin. of gandha DA i.77; -- Dh 55; -- taṇhā thirst or craving for odours (cp. g˚ -- āsā) Dhs 1059=Nd2 on jappā; -- tela scented oil (for a lamp) J i.61; ii.104; DhA i.205; -- tthena a perfume -- thief S i.204; -- dhātu the (sensory) element of smell Dhs 585; 625. 707 (in conn. w. ˚āyatana); -- pañcangulika see sep.; -- sañcetanā the olfactory sensation; together with ˚saññā perception of odours D iii.244; A iv.147; v.359; -- sannidhi the storing up of scented unguents D i.6 (=DA i.82).
Gandhana see gandhina.
Gandhabba [Vedic gandharva] 1. a musician, a singer J ii.249 sq.; iii.188; VvA 36, 137. -- 2. a Gandharva or heavenly musician, as a class (see ˚kāyika) belonging to the demigods who inhabit the Cātummahārājika realm D ii.212; A ii.39 (as birds); iv.200 (with asurā & nāgā), 204, 207; cp. S iii.250 sq.; also said to preside over child -- conception: M i.265 sq.; Miln 123 sq.
-- kāyika belonging to the company of the G. S iii.250 sq.; PvA 119; -- mānusā (pl.) G. & men Dh 420= Sn 644; -- hatthaka "a G. -- hand," i. e. a wooden instrument in the shape of a bird's claw with which the body was rubbed in bathing Vin ii.106, see Vin. Texts iii.67.
Gandhabbā (f.) music, song J ii.254; VvA 139; Miln 3; ˚ŋ karoti to make music J ii.249; iii.188.
Gandhāra (adj.) belonging to the Gandhāra country (Kandahar) f. gandhārī in gandhārī vijjā N. of a magical charm D i.213; at J iv.498 it renders one invisible.
Gandhika (and ˚uja Pv ii.120; ii.121) -- 1. having perfume, fragrant, scentful, J i.266 (su˚); Pv ii.110 (=surabhigandha); ii.121 (sogandhiya); VvA 58 (read gandhikāgandhikehi). -- 2. dealing in perfume, a perfumer Miln 262 (cp. gandhin 2).
Gandhin (adj.) 1. having a scent of, smelling of ( -- ˚), i. e. candana˚ of sandal wood J iii.190; gūtha of˚ faeces Pv ii.315 (=karīsavāyinī PvA). -- 2. dealing with scents, a perfumer PvA 127 (=māgadha; cp. gandhika 2).
Gandhina in kule antimagandhina J iv.34 (expl. by sabba- pacchimaka) and gandhana in kula -- gandhana It 64 see under kula˚.
Gabbita (adj.) proud, arrogant J ii.340 (˚bhāva=issariya); iii.264 (˚sabhāva= dittasabhāva); Sum. V. on D iii.153 (=avamata).
Gabbha [Vedic garbha, either to *gelbh, as in Lat. galba, Goth. kalbo, Ohg. kalba, E. calf, or *gṷe bh, as in Gr. delfu/s womb, adelfo/s sharing the womb, brother, de/lfac young pig; cp. *gelt in Goth. kilpei womb. Ags. cild, Ger. kind, E. child. Meaning: a cavity, a hollow, or, seen from its outside, a swelling] 1. interior, cavity (loc. gabbhe in the midst of: angāra˚ J iii.55); an inner room, private chamber, bedroom, cell. Of a Vihāra: Vin ii.303; iii.119; iv.45; VvA 188; 220; -- J i.90 (siri˚ royal chamber); iii.276; Vv 785 (=ovaraka VvA 304); DhA i.397; Miln 10, 295. See also anto˚. <-> 2. the swelling of the (pregnant) womb, the womb (cp. kucchi). ˚ŋ upeti to be born Dh 325=Th 1, 17= Nett 34, 129; ˚ŋ upapajjati to be born again Dh 126; gabbhā gabbhaŋ . . . dukkaŋ nigacchanti from womb to womb (i. e. from birth to birth) Sn 278; gabbhato paṭṭhāya from the time of birth J i.290, 293. As a symbol of defilement g. is an ep. of kāma A iv.289, etc. -- 3. the contents of the womb, i. e. the embryo, foetus: dasa māse ˚ŋ kucchinā pariharitvā having nourished the foetus in the womb for 10 months D ii 14; dibbā gabbhā D i.229; on g. as contained in kucchi, foetus in utero, see J i.50 (kucchimhi patiṭṭhito) 134; ii.2; iv.482; M i.265; Miln 123 (gabbhassa avakkanti); DhA i.3, 47; ii.261. -- Pv i.67; PvA 31; gabbho vuṭṭhāsi the child was delivered Vin ii.278; itthi -- gabbho & purisa˚ female & male child J i.51; gabbhaŋ pāteti to destroy the foetus Vin ii.268; apagatagabbhā (adj.) having had a miscarriage Vin ii.129; mūḷha -- gabbhā id. M ii.102 (+visatā˚); paripuṇṇa -- gabbhā ready to be delivered J i.52; PvA 86; saññi˚ a conscious foetus D i.54=M i.518=S iii.212; sannisinna -- gabbhā having conceived Vin ii.278.
-- avakkanti (gabbhe okkanti Nd2 3041) conception D iii.103, 231; Vism 499, 500 (˚okkanti); this is followed by gabbhe ṭhiti & gabbhe vuṭṭhāna, see Nd2; -- āsaya the impurities of childbirth Pv iii.53 (=˚mala); -- karaṇa effecting a conception Sn 927; -- gata leaving the womb, in putte gabbhagate when the child was born PvA 112; -- dvāra the door of the bed -- chamber J i.62; -- pariharaṇa =next Vism 500; -- parihāra "the protection of the embryo," a ceremony performed when a woman became pregnant J ii.2; DhA i.4; -- pātana the destruction of the embryo, abortion, an abortive preparation Vin iii.83 sq.; Pv i.66 (akariŋ); PvA 31 (dāpesi); DhA i.47 (˚bhesajja); -- mala the uncleanness of delivery, i. e. all accompanying dirty matter PvA 80, 173 (as food for Petas), 198; DhA iv.215; -- vīsa in ahañc' amhi gabbhavīso "I am 20 years, counting from my conception" Vin i.93; -- vuṭṭhāna (nt.) childbirth, delivery J i.52; DhA i.399; ii.261; -- seyyā (f.) the womb; only in expressions relating to reincarnation, as: na punar eti (or upeti) gabbhaseyyaŋ "he does not go into another womb," of an Arahant Sn 29, 152, 535; Vv 5324; and gabbhaseyyaka (adj.) one who enters another womb Vbh 413 sq.; Vism 272, 559, 560; Bdhd 77, 78.
Gabbhara (nt.) [Derivation uncertain. Cp. Sk. gahvara] a cavern Sn 416 (giri˚); Vv 635 (giri˚).
Gabbhinī (adj. f.) pregnant, enceinte Vin ii.268; S iii.202; J i.151, 290; iv.37; Pv i.66; PvA 31, 82: VvA 110 ( -- bhāva); in combn g˚ pāyamānā purisantaragatā (pregnant, lactating & having had sex. intercourse) A i.295= ii.206=M i.77, 238, 307, 342=Pug 55; with utunī anutunī (menstruating & having ceased to menstruate) A iii.226 sq.
˚Gama 1. adj. going, able to go; going to, leading to; in vihangama going in the air Sn 221, 606; Th i.1108: J i.216 (cp. gamana); aghasi˚ id. Vv 161 (= vehāsaŋ˚ VvA 78); nabhasi˚ going on clouds Sn 687; nibbāna˚ leading to N. S v.11; dūraŋ˚ going far, hadayaŋ˚ going to one's heart, q. v. -- 2. m. course, going to; in atthaŋ˚ going home, going to rest, etc., q. v.
Gamana 1. (nt.) the fact or the state of going, movement, journey, walk; ( -- ˚) striving for, the leading of, pursuit A ii.48 sq. (gamanena na pattabbo lokass' anto=one cannot walk to the end of the world); Dh 178 (saggassa going to heaven); Sn 40, 691, cp. vāraŋ˚; J i.62; 216 (in expl. of vihaŋgama: (ākāse) gamanato pakkhī vihaŋ gamā ti vuccanti); 295; PvA 57. -- pahiṇa˚ going on messages D i.5, etc.; agati˚ wrong pursuit, ˚ŋ gacchati to pursue a wrong walk of life A ii.18; PvA 161; magga˚ tramping, being on the road PvA 43; saraṇa˚ finding shelter (in the Dhamma) PvA 49. -- 2. (adj.) ( -- ˚) going or leading to, conducive to: nibbāna˚ maggo the Path leading to Nibbāna S i.186; Dh 289; duggati˚ magga the road to misery Th 2, 355; duggamana -- ṭṭhānā (pl.) inaccessible places PvA 102 (in expl. of duggā).
-- antarāya an obstacle to one's departure J i.62; -- āgamana going & coming, rise and set Vv 836 (=ogamanuggamana VvA 326); DhA i.80 (˚kāle); ˚sampanna senāsana a dwelling or lodging fit for going and coming, i. e. easily accessible A v.15; J i.85; ˚ŋ karoti to go to and fro VvA 139. -- kamma going away DhA ii.81. -- kāraṇa a reason for or a means to going, in ˚ŋ karoti to try to go J i.2; -- bhāva the state of having gone away J ii.133; -- magga (pleonastic) the way J i.202; 279; -- vaṇṇa the praise of his course or journey J i.87.
Gamanīya (adj.; grd to gam) 1. as grd. to gacchati: (a place where one) ought to go; in a˚ not to be gone to (+ṭhāna) VvA 72. -- 2. as grd. to gameti: in bhogā pahāya gamanīyā (riches that have) to be given up (by leaving) Kh viii.8 (see expl. as KhA 223); PvA 87 (=kālikā, transient).
Gamika (and gamiya J i.87) (adj.) going away, setting out for a journey (opp. āgantuka coming back) appl. to bhikkhus only: Vin i.292 (˚ bhatta food for outgoing bh.); ii.170 (āgantuka˚), 211, 265; v.196; J vi.333 (āgantuka˚). See also under abhisankhāra. Cp. Av Ś i.87; Divy 50.
Gamina (adj.) being on a "gati," only at Sn 587 in "aññe pi passe gamine yathākamm' ûpage nare."
Gameti [caus. of gacchati] to make go, to send, to set into motion, to cause to go It 115 (anabhāvaŋ to destroy), see under gacchati.
Gambhīra (adj.) [Vedic gambhīra & gabhīra] deep, pro- found, unfathomable, well founded, hard to perceive, difficult. -- (a) lit. of lakes: Dh 83; Pv ii.119 (= agādha); Pug 46; of a road (full of swamps) J i.196. -- (b) fig. of knowledge & wisdom: dhammo g. duddaso . . . M i.487; S i.136; Tathāgato g. appameyyo duppariyogāho M i.487; parisā g. (opp. uttāna, shallow, superficial, thoughtless) A i.70; g. ṭhāna w. ref. jhāna, etc. Ps ii.21; saddhamma g. Sdhp. 530; g. gūḷha nipuṇa Nd 342; lokanātho nipuṇo g. PvA 1; also w. nipuṇa J vi.355; Miln 234; Bdhd. 118, 137; -- (nt.) the deep; deep ground, i. e. secure foundation Sn 173; Kh viii.1, 3 (see KhA 217).
-- avabhāsa (adj.) having the appearance of depth or profundity, D ii.55; S ii.36; Pug 46 (+uttāna), cp. Pug A 226; -- pañña one whose wisdom is profound Sn 176, 230; 627=Dh 403 (+medhāvin) cp. DhA iv.169 & see Ps ii.192 for detailed explanation; -- sita resting on depth (of soil), well -- founded A iv.237.
Gambhīratā (f.) [abstr. fr. prec.] depth DhA i.92.
Gamma (adj.) [fr. gāma. Vedic gramya] of or belonging to the village, common, pagan (cp. Fr. villain), always combd with hīna, low & pagan Vin i.10 and ≈ (anta, standard of life); A iii.325 (dassana, view); D iii.130 (sukhallikânuyoga, hedonist) Sdhp 254. Cp. pothujjanika.
Gayha (adj.) [grd. of gayhati; Vedic grāhya] to be taken, to be seized, as nt, the grip, in gayhūpaga (adj.) for being taken up, for common use SnA 283. -- (nt.) that which comes into one's grasp, movable property, acquisition of property DhA ii.29; iii.119; PvA 4. As gayhūpakaŋ at J iv.219.
Gayhaka (adj.=gayha) one who is to be taken (prisoner), in ˚niyyamāna id. S i.143=J iii.361 (expl. as karamaragāhaŋ gahetvā niyyamāna; cp. karamara).
Gayhati [Pass. to gaṇhāti] to get seized, to be taken (see gaṇhāti); p.pres. gayhamāna being caught DhA iii.175 (˚ka). -- grd. gayha.
Garahaka (adj.) finding fault with, rebuking; in paṭhavī˚ āpa˚, etc., combd w. paṭhavī -- jigucchaka, etc. (disgusted w. the great elements) M i.327.
Garahaṇa (nt.) reproof VvA 16, as f. ˚ṇā at Vism 29.
Garahati [Vedic garhati Dhtp 340 nindāyaŋ] to reproach, to blame, scold, censure, find fault with: agarahiyam mā garahittha "do not blame the blameless" S i.240; D i.161 (tapaŋ to reject, disapprove of); D iii.92, 93 (aor. garahi, grd. garahitabba); Sn 313, 665; Miln 222 (+jigucchanti); PvA 125, 126; Sdhp. 382. -- pp. garahita blameworthy Dh 30 (pamādo); Sn 313; J v.453; Miln 288 (dasa puggalā g.). agarahita blameless, faultless PvA 89 (=anindita, 131). -- See also gārayha & cp. vi˚.
Garahā (f.) blame, reproach D i.135 "stating an example," see DA i.296; D iii.92, 93; Sn 141; J i.10 (garahapaṭicchādanabhāva preventing all occasion for finding fault); 132 (garaha -- bhaya -- bhīta for fear of blame), 135 (garahatthe as a blame); Nett 184.
Garahin (adj.) blaming, censuring Sn 660 (ariya˚), 778 (atta˚), 913 (anatta˚); Miln 380 (pāpa˚).
Garu [Vedic guru; Gr. baru/s, Lat. gravis & brutus, Goth. kaurus] 1. adj. (a) lit. heavy, opp. lahu light, appld to bhāra, a load S iii.26; J i.196 (= bhārika); vi.420; DhA i.48; Sdhp 494 (rūpagarubhāra the heavy load of "form"). Compar. garutara (as against Sk. garīyaŋ) PvA 191. -- (b) fig. important, to be esteemed, valued or valuable A iii.110 sq. (piya manāpa g. bhavanīya); c. gen. or -- ˚ bent on (often in sequence ˚garu, ˚ninna, ˚poṇa, etc., e. g. Vism 135); pursuing, paying homage to, reverent; (or) esteemed by, honoured, venerated: Satthugaru esteeming the Lord; Dhamma˚, Sanghe g. A iii.331=iv.28 sq.; dosa˚ S i.24; kodha˚, saddhamma˚ (pursuing, fostering) A ii.46 sq.=84 sq.; Sdhp 1 (sabba -- loka˚ worshipped by all the world); Dpvs iv.12. -- agaru (c. gen.) irreverent towards Sn p. 51 (Gotamassa). Cp. garuka, gārava; also agaru & agalu. -- 2. N. a venerable person, a teacher: garunaŋ dassanāya & sakāsaŋ Sn 325, 326 (v. l. garūnaŋ to be preferred, so also SnA 332, 333); garūnaŋ dārā It 36. -- garukaroti (for garuŋ k˚) to esteem, respect, honour; usually in series sakkaroti g˚ māneti pūjeti Vin ii.162; M i.31; D i.91; A iii.76; iv.276; Nd2 334 (on namati), 530 (on yasassin); PvA 54. Expl. at DA i.256 by gāravaŋ karoti. -- garukātabba worthy of esteem PvA 9. -- garukāra (sakkāra g. mānana vandana) esteem, honour, regard Pug 19=Dhs 1121. -- See also guru.
-- upanissita (adj.) depending on a teacher, one being taught Ps ii.202; -- ṭṭhāniya one who takes the place of a teacher A iii.21, 393; Nett 8; Vism 344. -- dhamma a rule to be observed. There are 8 chief rules enum. at Vin ii.255=A iv.276, 280; see also Vin iv.51, 315; v.136. Taken in the sense of a violation of these rules Vin i.49=ii.226; i.52, 143, 144; ii.279; -- nissaya in ˚ŋ gaṇhāti to take up dependency on a teacher, i. e. to consider oneself a pupil Vin ii.303; -- saŋvasa association with a teacher Nd2 235 4˚; Miln 408.
Garuka [from garu] somewhat heavy. -- 1. lit. J i.134 (of the womb in pregnancy); Dh 310; Miln 102. Usually coupled & contrasted with lahuka, light: in def. of sense of touch Dhs 648; similarly w. sithila, dhanita, dīgha, rassa Miln 344; DA i.177 (in expl. of dasavidha vyañjana). -- 2. fig. (a) heavy, grave, serious esp. appld to -- āpatti, breach of regulations, offence (opp. lahuka) Vin v.115, 130, 145, 153; Dh 138 (ābādha, illness); appld to kamma at Vism 601 (one of the four kinds); nt. as adv. considerably Miln 92 (˚ŋ parinamati). <-> (b) important, venerable, worthy of reverence Th 2, 368 (Satthu sāsana=garukātabba ThA 251); Miln 140. -- (c) -- ˚ "heavy on," bent on, attaching importance to: nahāna˚ fond of bathing Vin i.196; tadattha˚ engaged in (jhāna) Nd2 264; kamma˚ attributing importance to k. Nd2 411; saddhamma˚ revering the Doctrine Sdhp. 520. Nibbāna -- garuka Vism 117 (+Nâdhimutta & N -- pabbhāra).
-- āpatti a grievous offence, see above. As terasa g -- ˚ino at Miln 310.
Garutta (nt.) the fact of being honoured or considered worthy of esteem, honourableness A v.164 sq.
Garuḷa [Derivation uncertain. Sk. garuḍa, Lat. volucer winged, volo to fly]. N. of a mythical bird, a harpy Ps ii.196=Nd2 235, 3 q.; Vism 206; VvA 9 (= supaṇṇa); DhA i.144.
Gala [*gel to devour, to swallow=Lat. gula, Ohg. kela, cp. Sk. gala jalukā, and *gṷel, as Gr. de/lear, cp. also Sk. girati, gilati Dhtp 262 gives as meaning of gal "adana." This root gal also occurs at Vism 410 in fanciful def. of "puggala"; the meaning here is not exactly sure (to cry, shout?)] the throat J i.216, 264, iii.26; iv.494: i.194 (a dewlap); PvA 11, 104.
-- agga the top of the throat Sdhp 379; -- ajjhoharaniya able to be swallowed (of solid food) Dhs 646, 740, 875; -- ggaha taking by the throat, throttling D i.144 (+daṇḍapahāra); -- nāḷī the larynx DhA i.253; ii.257; -- ppamāṇa (adj.) going up to the neck J i.264 (āvāṭa); -- pariyosāṇa forming the end of the throat J iii.126; -- ppavedhaka (nt.) pain in the throat M i.371; -- mūla the bottom of the throat PvA 283. -- vāṭaka the bottom (?) of the throat (oesophagus?) Vism 185, 258.
Note. -- gala with many other words containing a guttural+liquid element belongs to the onomatopoetic roots k̊l g̊l (k̊r g̊r), usually reduplicated (iterative), the main applications of which are the following:
1. The (sounding) throat in designation of swallowing, mostly with a dark (guttural) vowel: gulp, belch, gargle, gurgle.
2. The sound produced by the throat (voice) or sound in general, particularly of noises or sounds either inarticulate, confused & indefinable or natural sounds striking enough per se to form a sufficient means of recognition (i. e. name) of the animal which utters this sound (cuckoo, e. g.). To be divided into:
A. palatal group ("light" sounds): squeak, yell, giggle, etc., applied to -- (a) Animate Nature: the cackling, crowing noise of Palmipeds & related birds, reminding of laughter (heron, hen, cock; cp. P. koñca, Lat. gallus) -- (b) Inanimate Nature: the grinding, nibbling, trickling, dripping, fizzing noises or sounds (P. galati, etc.).
B. guttural group ("dark" sounds): groan, growl, howl, etc., appld to -- (a) Animate N.: the snorting, grunting noise of the Pachyderms & related quadrupeds (elephant, op. P. koñca, kuñjara; pig, boar) -- (b) Inanimate N.: the roaring, crashing, thundering noises (P. gaḷagaḷāyati, ghurughurāyati).
3. The sound as indicating motion (produced by motion):
A. palatal group ("sharp" sounds, characteristic of quick motion: whizz, spin, whirl): P. gaggaraka whirlpool, Gr. kerki/s spindle, bobbin.
B. guttural group ("dull" sounds, characteristic of slow and heavy motion: roll, thud, thunder). Sometimes with elimination of the sound -- element appld to swelling & fullness, as in "bulge" or Gr. sfarage/w (be full).
These three categories are not always kept clearly separate, so that often a palatal group shifts into the sphere of a guttural one & vice versa. -- The formation of k̊l g̊I roots is by no means an extinct process, nor is it restricted to any special branch of a linguistic family, as examples show. The main roots of Idg. origin are the foll. which are all represented in Pāli <-> (the categories are marked acc. to the foregoing scheme 1, 2A, 2B, 3): kal (2A): kla/zw, clango, Goth. hlahjan laugh; kār (2 A): kh_ruc, Sk. kāru (cp. P. kitti), cārmen; kel (2 A): ke/lados, calo (cp. P. kandati), Ohg. hellan; ker (2 Aa): karkai/rw, ko/rkoros=querquedula=kakkara (partridge); kol (2 B): cuculus, kokila (a); kolāhala and halāhala (b); kor (2 Ba): cornix (cp. P. kāka), corvus=crow=raven; Sk. krośati; P. koñca. -- gṷel (1) Lat. gula, glutio, de/lear; gṷer: (1) bo/ros, bibrw/skw, Lat. voro, Sk. girati, Ohg. querka; (3) ba/raqron (whirlpool) Sk. gargara: gel (1) Sk. gilati, Ohg. kela -- gal (2 A): gallus (a) gloria (b); gar (2 Ab): gh_rus, garrulus, Ohg. kara: gel (2 A): xelidw/n (a) hirrio (to whine), Ohg. gellan (b): ger: (1) gargari/zw (gargle) Sk. gharghara (gurgling). (2 Aa) ge/ranos = crane, Ger. krähen, Lat. gracillo (cackle); (2 Ba) Ohg. kerran (grunt), Sk. gṛṇāti (sing); (2 Ab) Sk. jarate (rustle); gur (2 Ba): gru/zw=grundio= grunt; Lat. gurgulio; Sk. ghurghura.
With special reference to Pāli formations the foll. list shows a few sound roots which are further discussed in the Dictionary s. v. Closely connected with Idg. k̊l g̊I is the Pāli cerebral ṭ, tḥ, ḷ, ṇ, so that roots with these sounds have to be classed in a mutual relation with the liquids. In most cases graphic representation varies between both (cp. gala & gaḷa) -- kil (kiṇ) (2 Ab): kikī (cp. Sk. kṛka˚), kilikilāyati & kinkiṇāyati (tinkle), kili (click), kinkaṇika (bell); kur (2 B): ākurati to hawk, to be hoarse; khaṭ (1) khaṭakhaṭa (hawking), kākacchati (snore); (2 Aa) kukkuṭa (cock); gal (1) gala (throat) uggilati (vomit); (2 Ab) galati (trickle): (2 Ba) Pk. galagajjiya (roar) & guluguliya (bellow); (2 Bb) gaḷagaḷāyati (roar); gar (2 A); gaggara (roar & cackle, cp. Sk. gargara to 3); (2 B); gaggarāyati (roar); (3) gaggaraka (whirlpool); ghar (1) Sk. gharghara (gurgling); (2 Ab) gharati (trickle), Sk. ghargharikā (bell); (2 Bb) ghurughurāyati (grunt). -- See also kakaca, kanka, kankaṇa, cakora (cankora), cakkavaka, jagghati, ciṭiciṭāyati, taṭataṭayati, timingala, papphāsa.
Galaka (nt.) throat J iii.481; iv.251.
Gaḷa [same as gala, see note on prec.] 1. a drop, i. e. a fall: see gaḷāgala. -- 2. a swelling, a boil (=gaṇḍa) J iv.494 (mattā gajā bhinnagaḷā elephants in rut, with the temple -- swellings broken; expl. p. 497 by madaŋ gaḷantā); Sn 61 (? v. l. gaṇḍa). -- 3. a hook, a fishhook Sn 61 (?), expl. at SnA 114 by ākaḍḍhanavasena baḷiso.
gaḷāgaḷaŋ gacchati to go from drop to drop, i. e. from fall to fall, w. ref. to the gatis J v.453 (expl. by apāyaŋ gacchati).
Gaḷagaḷāyati [=gaggarāyati, see note on gala] to roar, to crash, to thunder; deve gaḷagaḷāyate (loc. abs.) in a thunderstorm, usually as deve vassante deve g˚ amidst rain and heavy thunder D ii.132; S i.106; A v.114 sq. (gala˚); Th 1, 189; Miln 116 (gaganaŋ ravati galag˚); KhA 163 (mahāmegha). -- Gangā galagalantī the roaring Gangā Miln 122 (cp. halāhalasadda ibid.).
Gaḷati (and galati) [Sk. galati, cp. Ohg. quellan to well up, to flow out; see note on gala and cp. also jala water] 1. to drip, flow, trickle (trs. & intr.) Vin i.204 (natthu g.); M i.336 (sīsaŋ lohitena gaḷati); J iv.497 (madaŋ); iv.3 (lohitaŋ g.); v.472 (do. v. l. paggharati); Pv iv.53 (assukāni g.). -- 2. to rain Th 1, 524 (deve gaḷantamhi in a shower of rain. Cp. gala -- gaḷāyati). -- 3. to drop down, to fall DhA ii.146 (suriyo majjhaṭṭhānato galito). -- Cp. pari˚.
Gaḷayati [denom. to gaḷa in sense of gaḷati 1] to drip, to drop, in assukāni g. to shed tears Sn 691.
Gaḷita rough, in a˚ smooth J v.203, 206 (+mudu & akak- kasa); vi.64.
Gaḷocī (f.). N. of a shrub (Cocculus cordifolius); in gaḷocilatā DhA iii.110; a creeper. Cp. pūtilatā.
Gava˚ base of the N. go, a bull, cow, used in cpds. See gāv˚, go.
-- akkha a kind of window Mhvs 9. 15, 17; -- āghātana slaughtering of cows Vin i.182; -- âssa cows & horses Vin v.350; D i.5~; Sn 769; -- caṇḍa fierce towards cows Pug 47; -- pāna milky rice pudding J i.33; -- (˚m)pati "lord of cows," a bull Sn 26, 27 (usabha).
Gavacchita furnished with netting (?) (Hardy in Index) VvA 276, of a carriage (=suvaṇṇajālavitata).
Gavaja see gavaya.
Gavaya (and gavaja) a species of ox, the gayal [Sk. gavaya, cp. gavala, buffalo] J v.406. (˚ja=khagga); Miln 149; DhsA 331.
Gavi a tree -- like creeper, in -- pphala the fruit of a g. Sn 239 (= rukkhavalliphala SnA).
˚Gavesaka (adj. fr. next) looking for, seeking J i.176 (kāraṇa˚); ii.3 (aguṇa˚).
Gavesati [gava+esati. Vedic gaveṣate. Origin. to search after cows. Dhtp 298= maggana tracking] to seek, to search for, to wish for, strive after Dh 146 (gavessatha), 153; Th 1, 183; Nd2 2, 70, 427; J i.4, 61; Miln 326; PvA 187, 202 (aor. gavesi=vicini); Bdhd 53. In Nd2 always in combn esati gavesati pariyesati.
Gavesana search for PvA 185.
Gavesin (adj.) seeking, looking for, striving after (usually -- ˚) D i.95 (tāṇa˚, etc.); Dh 99 (kāma˚), 245 (suci˚), 355 (pāra˚); Nd2 503 (in expl. of mahesi, with esin & pariyesin); Bdhd 59.
Gassetuŋ at DhsA 324 is to be corrected into dassetuŋ.
Gaha1 [see under gaṇhāti] a house, usually in cpds. (see below). J iii.396 (= the layman's life; Com. geha).
-- kāraka a house -- builder, metaph. of taṇhā (cp. kāya as geha) Dh 153, 154=Th 1, 183, 184; DhA iii.128; -- kūṭa the peak of a house, the ridge -- pole, metaph. of ignorance Dh 154 (=kaṇṇika -- maṇḍala DhA 128), replacing thūṇirā (pillar) at Th 1, 184 in corresp. passage (= kaṇṇikā Com.); -- ṭṭha a householder, one who leads the life of a layman (opp. anagāra, pabbajita or paribbājaka) Vin i.115 (sagahaṭṭhā parisā an assembly in which laymen were present); S i.201; A iii.114, 116, 258; It. 112 (gharaŋ esino gahaṭṭhā) Dh 404= Sn 628; Sn 43 (gharaŋ āvasanto, see Nd2 226 for explanation), 90, 134 (paribbājaŋ gahaṭṭhaŋ vā) 398, 487; Sdhp 375. -- ˚vatta a layman's rule of conduct Sn 393 (=agāriyā paṭipadā SnA 376) -- ˚ka belonging to a layman; acting as a layman or in the quality of a l. A ii.35 (kinkaraṇiyāni), iii.296 (brahmacariyā); -- pati see sep.
Gaha2 [Sk. graha, gaṇhāti, q. v. for etym.] "seizer," seizing, grasping, a demon, any being or object having a hold upon man. So at S i.208 where Sānu is "seized" by an epileptic fit (see note in K.S. i.267, 268). Used of dosa (anger) Dh 251 (exemplified at DhA iii.362 by ajagara˚ the grip of a boa, kumbhīla˚ of a crocodile, yakkha˚ of a demon). sagaha having crocodiles, full of e. (of the ocean) (+sarakkhasa) It 57. Cp. gahaṇa & saŋ˚.
Gahaṇa [fr. gaṇhāti] (adj.) seizing, taking; acquiring; (n.) seizure, grasp, hold, acquisition Vism 114 (in detail). Usually -- ˚: nāma˚ -- divase on the day on which a child gets its name (lit. acquiring a name) J i.199, 262; arahatta˚ DhA i.8; dussa˚ DhA ii.87; maccha˚ J iv.139; hattha˚ J i.294; byanjana˚ -- lakkhaṇa Nett 27. gahaṇatthāya in order to get . . . J i.279; ii.352. <-> amhākaŋ g˚ sugahaṇaŋ we have a tight grip J i.222, 223.
Gahaṇī (f.) the "seizer," a supposed organ of the body dealing with digestion and gestation. Sama -- vepākiniyā g˚ iyā samannāgata "endowed with good digestion" D ii.177=iii.166. Same phrase at Av Ś i.168, 172. Cp. Vedic graha. B. Psy. 59, 67.
Gahaṇika in phrase saŋsuddha -- gahaṇika coming from a clean womb, of pure descent, in the enum. of the indispensable good qualities of a brahmin or a noble D i.113, 115, 137 (gahaṇī expl. as kucchi DA i.281); A i.163, iii.154, 223; Sn p. 115. J i.2; duṭṭha -- gahaṇika having a bad digestion Vin i.206.
Gahana [Sk. gahana, cp. also ghana] 1. adj. deep, thick, impervious, only in a˚ clear, unobstructed, free from obstacles Vv 187 (akanataka+); Miln 160 (gahanaŋ a˚ kataŋ the thicket is cleared). -- 2. nt. an impenetrable place, a thicket jungle, tangle. -- (a) 18 gahanāni at J v.46; usually appl. to grass: tiṇa˚ A i.153=iii.128 (+rukkha˚); Miln 369; adj. tiṇagahanā obstructed with grass (of vihārā) Vin ii.138; -- S i.199 (rukkhamūla˚); J i.7, 158; PvA 5 (pabbata˚), 43; VvA 230 (vana˚). -- (b) fig. imperviousness, entanglement, obstruction, appl. to diṭṭhi, the jungle of wrong views or heresy (usually combd w. diṭṭhi -- kantāra, the wilderness of d., see diṭṭhi) M i.8, 485; Pug 22; DA i.108. Of rāga˚, moha˚, etc., and kilesa˚ Nd2 630 (in expl. of Satthā; rāgagahanaŋ tāreti); DhA iv.156 (on Dh 394); VvA 96. -- manussa˚ M i.340.
-- ṭṭhāna a lair in the jungle J i.150, 253.
Gahapati [gaha+pati. Vedic gṛhapati, where pati is still felt in its original meaning of "lord," "master," implying dignity, power & auspiciousness. Cp. Sk. dampati=dominus=despo/ths; and pati in P. senāpati commander-in-chief, Sk. jāspati householder, Lat. hospes, Obulg. gospoda=potestas, Goth. brūp -- faps, bride -- groom, hunda -- faps=senāpati. See details under pati.] the possessor of a house, the head of the household, pater familias (freq.+seṭṭhi). -- 1. In formulas: (a) as regards social standing, wealth & clanship: a man of private (i. e. not official) life, classed w. khattiyā & brāhmaṇā in kh˚ -- mahāsālā, wealthy Nobles, brahm˚mahāsālā, do. Brahmins, gah˚ -- m˚ well -- to -- do gentry S i.71; Nd2 135; DhA i.388. -- kh˚ -- kula, br˚ -- kula, g˚ -- kula the kh˚, etc. clans: Vin ii.161; J i.218. kh˚, amaccā, br˚, g.˚ D i.136. -- (b) as regards education & mode of life ranking with kh˚, br˚, g.˚ and samaṇā Vin i.227; A i.66; Nd2 235, see also cpd. -- paṇḍita.<-> 2. Other applications: freq. in combn brāhmaṇagahapatikā priests & yeomen: see gahapatika. In combn w. gahapatiputta (cp. kulaputta) it comprises the members of the g. rank, clansmen of the (middle) class, and implies a tinge of "respectable people" esp. in addresses. So used by the Buddha in enumerating the people as gahapati vā gah˚ -- putto vā aññatarasmiŋ vā kule paccājāto D i.62; M i.344. gahapatī ca gahapatāniyo householders and their wives A ii.57. In sg. the voc. gahapati may be rendered by "Sir" (Miln 17 e. g. and freq.), & in pl. gahapatayo by "Sirs" (e. g. Vin i.227; M i.401; A ii.57). -- As regards occupation all resp. businesses are within the sphere of the g., most frequently mentioned as such are seṭṭhino (see below) & cp. seṭṭhi˚ Vin i.16, but also kassaka, farmer A i.229, 239 sq.; and dārukammika, carpenter A iii.391. Var. duties of a g. enum. at A i.229, 239. -- The wealth & comfortably -- living position of a g. is evident from an expression like kalyāṇa -- bhattiko g. a man accustomed to good food Vin ii.77=iii.160. -- f. gahapatānī Vin iii.211, 213 sq., 259 (always w. gahapati); DhA i.376; pl. gahapatāniyo see above. -- Note. The gen. sg. of gahapati is ˚ino (J i.92) as well as -- issa (Vin i.16; D iii.36). -- 3. Single cases of gahapatis, where g. almost assumes the function of a title are Anāthapiṇḍika g. Vin ii.158 sq.; S i.56; ii.68; A ii.65; J i.92; PvA 16; Meṇḍaka g. Vin i.240 sq.; Citta S iv.281 sq.; Nakulapitā S ii.1 sq.; Potaliya M i.359; Sandhāna D iii.36 sq.; Hāliddikāni S ii.9. -- See next.
-- 'aggi the sacred fire to be maintained by a householder, interpreted by the Buddha as the care to be bestowed on one's children & servants A iv.45; see enum. under aggī at A iv.41; D iii.217; -- cīvara the robe of a householder (i. e. a layman's robe) Vin i.280 sq.; ˚dhara wearing the householder's (private man's) robe (of a bhikkhu) M i.31; A iii.391 sq.; -- necayika (always with brāhmaṇa -- mahāsālā) a business man of substance D i.136; iii.16 sq.; -- paṇḍita a learned householder. Cp. above 1 (b), together w. khattiya˚, etc. M i.176, 396; w. samaṇa -- brāhmaṇa˚ Miln 5; -- parisā a company of gahapatis (together w. khattiya˚, etc., see above) Vin i.227; M i.72; D iii.260; -- putta a member of a g. clan D i.62, 211; M i.344; S iii.48, 112; PvA 22; -- mahāsāla a householder of private means (cp. above 1 a) usually in combn with khattiya˚, etc. D iii.258; S i.71; iv.292; A ii.86; iv.239; -- ratana the "householder -- gem" one of the seven fairy jewels of the mythical overlord. He is a wizard treasure -- finder (see ratana) D ii.16, 176; Sn p. 106. Cp. Rh.D. Dialogues etc. ii.206.
Gahapatika (adj. -- n.) belonging to the rank or grade of a householder, a member of the gentry, a man of private means (see gahapati) D i.61 (expl. as gehassa pati ekageha -- matte jeṭṭhaka DA i.171); Nd2 342; PvA 39. Often in combn w. khattiya & brāhmaṇa: A i.66; D iii.44, 46, 61; & often in contrast to brāhmaṇa only: brāhmaṇa -- gahapatika Brahmins & Privates (priests & laymen, Rh.D. Buddh. S. p. 258) M i.400; A i.110; It iii.; J i.83, 152, 267; PvA 22. -- paṇṇika g˚ "owner of a house of leaves" as nickname of a fruiterer J iii.21; of an ascetic J iv.446.
Gahita (and gahīta Dh 311) (adj.) [pp. of gaṇhāti] seized. taken, grasped D i.16; DA i.107 (=ādinna, pavattita); J i.61; iv.2; PvA 43 (v. l. for text gaṇhita). -- nt. a grasp, grip DhA iii.175; -- gahitakaŋ karoti to accept VvA 260. -- duggahīta (always ˚gahīta) hard to grasp M i.132 sq.; A ii.147, 168; iii.178; Dh 311; J vi.307 sq.; sugahita (sic) easy to get J i.222.
-- bhāva (cittassa) the state of being held (back), holding back, preventing to act (generously) DhsA 370 (in expln of aggahitattaŋ cittassa Dhs 1122 see under ā˚).
Gāthaka [demin. of gāthā]=gāthā, in ekaŋ me gāhi gāthakaŋ "sing to me only one little verse" J iii.507.
Gāthā (f.) [Vedic gāthā, on dern see gāyate] a verse, stanza, line of poetry, usually referring to an Anuṭṭhubbaŋ or a Tuṭṭhubbaŋ, & called a catuppādā gāthā, a stanza (śloka) of four half -- lines A ii.178; J iv.395. Def. as akkhara -- padaniya -- mita -- ganthita -- vacanaŋ at KhA 117. For a riddle on the word see S i.38. As a style of composition it is one of the nine Angas or divisions of the Canon (see navanga Satthu sāsana). Pl. gāthā Sn 429; J ii.160; gāthāyo Vin i.5, 349; D ii.157. gāthāya ajjhābhāsati to address with a verse Vin i.36, 38; Kh v. intr. -- gāthāhi anumodati to thank with (these) lines Vin i.222, 230, 246, 294, etc. -- gāthāyo gīyamāna uttering the lines Vin i.38. -- anantaragāthā the foll. stanza J iv.142; Sn 251; J i.280; Dh 102 (˚sataŋ).
-- abhigīta gained by verses S i.167=Sn 81, 480 (gāthāyo bhāsitvā laddhaŋ Com. cp. Ger. "ersungen"). -- âvasāne after the stanza has been ended DhA iii.171; -- jānanaka one who knows verses Anvs. p. 35; -- dvaya (nt.) a pair of stanzas J iii.395 sq.; PvA 29, 40; -- pada a half line of a gāthā Dh 101; KhA 123; -- sukhattaŋ in order to have a well -- sounding line, metri causā, PvA 33.
Gādha1 [Sk. gāḷha pp. of gāh, see gāhati] depth; a hole, a dugout A ii.107=Pug 43 (cp. PugA 225); Sdhp 394 (˚ŋ khaṇati). Cp. gāḷha2.
Gādha2 [Sk. gāḷha firm Dhtp 167 "paṭiṭṭhāyaŋ" cp. also Sk. gādha, fordable & see gāḷha1] adj. passable, fordable, in a˚ unfathomable, deep PvA 77 (= gambhīra). nt. a iord, a firm stand, firm ground, a safe place: gambhīre ˚ŋ vindati A v.202. ˚ŋ esati to seek the terra firma S i.127; similarly: ˚ŋ labhati to gain firm footing S i.47; ˚ŋ ajjhagā S iv.206; ˚ŋ labhate J vi.440 (=patiṭṭhā). Cp. o˚, paṭi˚.
Gādhati [v. der. fr. gādha2] to stand fast, to be on firm ground, to have a firm footing: āpo ca paṭhavī ca tejo vāyo na gādhati "the four elements have no footing" D i.223=S i.15; -- Dhamma -- Vinaye gādhati "to stand fast in the Doctrine & Discipline" S iii.59 sq.
Gāma [Vedic grāma, heap, collection, parish; *grem to comprise; Lat. gremium; Ags. crammian (E. cram), Obulg. gramada (village community) Ohg. chram; cp. *ger in Gr. a)geirw, a)gora/, Lat, grex.] a collection of houses, a hamlet (cp. Ger. gemeinde), a habitable place (opp. arañña: gāme vā yadi vâraññe Sn 119), a parish or village having boundaries & distinct from the surrounding country (gāmo ca gāmupacāro ca Vin i.109, 110; iii.46). In size varying, but usually small & distinguished from nigama, a market -- town. It is the smallest in the list of settlements making up a "state" (raṭṭhaŋ). See definition & description at Vin iii.46, 200. It is the source of support for the bhikkhus, and the phrase gāmaŋ piṇḍāya carati "to visit the parish for alms" is extremely frequent. -- 1. a village as such: Vin i.46; Ārāmika˚, Pilinda˚ Vin i.28, 29 (as Ārāmikagāmaka & Pilinda -- gāmaka at Vin iii.249); Sakyānaŋ gāme janapade Lumbineyye Sn 683; Uruvela˚ Pv ii.1318; gāmo nâtikālena pavisitabbo M i.469; ˚ŋ raṭṭhañ ca bhuñjati Sn 619, 711; gāme tiŋsa kulāni honti J i.199; -- Sn 386, 929, 978; J ii.153; vi.366; Dh 47, 49; Dhs 697 (suñño g.); PvA 73 (gāme amaccakula); 67 (gāmassa dvārasamīpena). -- gāmā gāmaŋ from hamlet to hamlet M ii.20; Sn 180 (with nagā nagaŋ expl. SnA 216 as devagāmā devagāmaŋ), 192 (with purā puraŋ); Pv ii.1318. In the same sense gāmena gāmaŋ Nd2 177 (with nigamena n˚, nagarena n˚., raṭṭhena r˚., janapadena j˚.). -- 2. grouped with nigama, a market -- town: gāmanigamo sevitabbo or asevitabbo A iv.365 sq., cp. v.101 (w. janapadapadeso); -- Vin iii.25, 184 (˚ŋ vā nigamaŋ vā upanissāya); iv.93 (piṇḍāya pavisati); gāmassa vā nigamassa vā avidūre D i.237; M i.488; gāme vā nigame vā Pug 66. -- 3. as a geographical -- political unit in the constitution of a kingdom, enumd in two sets: (a) gāma -- nigamarājadhāniyo Vin iii.89; A iii.108; Nd2 271iii; Pv ii.1318; DhA i.90. -- (b) gāma -- nigama -- nagara -- raṭṭha -- janapada Nd2 177, 304iii (˚bandhana), 305 (˚kathā); with the foll. variations: g. nigama nagara M ii.33 -- 40; g. nigama janapada Sn 995; Vism 152; gāmāni nigamāni ca Sn 118 (expld by SnA 178: ettha ca saddena nagarāni ti pi vattabbaŋ). -- See also dvāra˚; paccanta˚; bīja˚; bhūta˚; mātu˚.
-- anta the neighbourhood of a village, its border, the village itself, in ˚nāyaka leading to the village A iii.189; ˚vihārin (=āraññaka) living near a v. M i.31, 473; A iii.391 (w. nemantanika and gahapati -- cīvara -- dhara); -- Sn 710; -- antara the (interior of the) village, only in t. t. gāmantaraŋ gacchati to go into the v. Vin ii.300, & in ˚kappa the "village -- trip -- licence" ( Vin. Texts iii.398) ib. 294, 300; cp. iv.64, 65; v.210; -- ûpacāra the outskirts of a v. Vin i.109, 110; defined at Vin iii.46, 200; -- kathā village -- talk, gossip about v. -- affairs. Included in the list of foolish talks (+nigama˚, nagara˚, janapada˚) D i.7 (see expln at DA i.90); Sn 922. See kathā; -- kamma that which is to be done to, or in a village, in ˚ŋ karoti to make a place habitable J i.199; -- kūṭa "the village -- fraud," a sycophant S ii.258; J iv.177 (=kūṭavedin); -- goṇā (pl.) the village cattle J i.194; -- ghāta those who sack villages, a marauder, dacoit (of corā thieves) D i.135; S ii.188; -- ghātaka (corā) =˚ghāta S iv.173; Miln 20; Vism 484; nt. village plundering J i.200. -- jana the people of the v. Miln 47; -- ṭṭhāna in purāṇa˚ a ruined village J ii.102; -- dārakā (pl.) the youngsters of the v. J iii.275; f. -- dārikā the girls of the v. PvA 67; -- dvaya, in ˚vāsika living in (these) two vs. PvA 77; -- dvāra the v. gates, the entrance to the v. Vin iii.52; J ii.110, 301; cp. PvA 67; -- dhamma doings with women -- folk (cp. mātugāma), vile conduct D i.4≈(+methuna) A i.211; J ii.180 (=vasaladhamma); VvA 11; DA i.72 (= gāma -- vāsīnaŋ dhamma?); -- poddava (v. l. kāmapudava) a shampooer (? Vin. Texts iii.66; Bdhgh explains: kāmapudavā ti chavi -- rāga -- maṇḍanânuyuttā nāgarikamanussā; gāmaŋ podavā ti pi pādho es' ev' attho, Vin ii.315) Vin ii.105; -- bhojaka the village headman J i.199; DhA i.69; -- majjhe in the midst of the v. J i.199; vi.332; -- vara an excellent v. S i.97; J i.138; -- vāsin the inhabitant of a v. J ii.110; v.107; DA i.72; -- saññā the thought of a v. M iii.104; -- samīpe near a v. J i.254; -- sahassa a thousand parishes (80,000 under the rule of King Bimbisāra) Vin i.179; -- sāmanta in the neighbourhood of a v., near a v. D i.101; (+mgama˚) -- sīmā the boundary of the parish Vin i.110 (+nigama˚); -- sūkara a village pig J iii.393.
Gāmaka 1. =gāma Vin i.208; J i.199 (Macala˚), 253; iv.431 (cora˚); PvA 67 (Iṭṭhakāvatī and Dīgharājī); DhA ii.25 (dvāra˚). -- 2. a villager J v.107 (= gāmavāsin).
-- āvāsa an abode in a village PvA 12; VvA 291.
Gāmaṇika=gāmaṇi S i.61; A iii.76 (pūga˚).
Gāmaṇī (m.) the head of a company, a chief, a village headman Vin ii.296 (Maṇicūḷaka). Title of the G.<-> Saŋyutta (Book VIII. of the Saḷāyatana -- Vagga) S iv.305 sq.; & of the G. -- Jātaka J i.136, 137. -- S iv.306 (Talapuṭa naṭa˚), 308 (yodhājīvo g.), 310 (hatthāroho g.), 312 (Asibandhakaputta), 330 (Rāsiya).
Gāmaṇḍala "the round of the ox," like the oxen driven round & round the threshing -- floor Th 1, 1143. -- Cp. gomaṇḍala (s.v. go).
Gāmika 1. [to gāma] a governor of a village, overseer of a parish Vin i.179; A iii.76, 78, 300 (in series w. raṭṭhika pettanika, senāpatika, pūgagamaṇika). -- 2. [to gam] adj. going wandering, travelling ( -- ˚) J ii.112.
˚Gāmin (adj.) [from gacchati, gam] f. ˚iṇī, in composition ˚gāmi˚. -- (a) going, walking, lit.: sīgha˚ walking quickly Sn 381; -- (b) leading to, making for, usually with magga or paṭipadā (gāminī), either lit. Pāṭaliputtagāmi -- magga the road to P. Miln 17; or fig. of ways & means connected w. one of the "gatis." as apāya˚ DhA iii.175, udaya˚ paṭipadā S v.361; nibbāna˚ dhamma Sn 233; amata -- gāmi -- magga S v.8; udayatthagāmiṇī paññā A v.15; dukkhanirodha˚ paṭipadā Vin i.10; cp. ācaya˚ Dhs 584. 1013. Acc. ˚gāminaŋ: khemaŋ Amata˚ M i.508; brahmacariyaŋ: nibbān' ogadha˚ It 28, 29; dukkhûpasama˚ maggaŋ Sn 724= Dh 191; niraya˚ maggaŋ Sn 277, ThA 243. Or ˚gāmiŋ: Sn 233, 381.
Gāmeyya (adj.) belonging to a village in sa˚ of the same v., a clansman S i.36= 60 (+sakhā).
Gāyaka [fr. next] a singer PvA 3 (naṭaka˚).
Gāyati [Vedic gai, gāyate] to sing, to recite, often comb w. naccati to dance; ppr. gāyanto, gāyamāna & gīyamāna (Vin i.38); imper. gāhi (J iii.507); fut. gāyissati; grd. gāyitabba. Vin ii.108 (dhammaŋ), 196 (gāthaŋ); Sn 682 (g˚ ca vādayanti ca); J i.290 (gītaŋ); iii.507 (naccitvā gāyitvā); Vism 121 (aor. gāyi); PvA 151. Cp. gāthā, gīta, geyya.
Gāyana (nt.) singing VvA 315 (naccana+).
Gārayha (adj.) [grd. of garahati] contemptible, low Vin iii.186; iv.176 sq.; 242; v.149; M i.403; A ii.241 (kammaŋ pādaŋ gārayhaŋ mosallaŋ); Sn 141; Nett 52; SnA 192. a˚ not to be blamed J vi.200 (spelt aggarayha).
Gārava (m. and [later] nt.) [cp. Sk. gaurava, fr. garu] reverence, respect, esteem; with loc. respect for, reverence towards; in the set of six venerable objects: Buddhe [Satthari], Dhamme, Sanghe, sikkhāya, appamāde, paṭisanthāre Vin v.92=D iii.244. As 7 gāravā (the 6+samānhi) in adj. a˚ and sa˚ at A iv.84 (see below). D iii.284; Sn 265; Vism 464 (atta˚ & para˚). Expld KhA 144 by garubhāvo; often in combn with bahumāna PvA 135 (=pūjā), sañjāta -- g˚ -- bahumāna (adj.) PvA 50; VvA 205. Instr. gāravena out of respect, respectfully D ii.155; J i.465. Appld to the terms of address bhante & bhaddante PvA 33, 121, & āyasmā (see cpd. ˚adhivacana). -- agārava (m. nt.) disrespect Vin v.92 (six: as above); J i.217; PvA 54. -- As adj. in sagārava and agārava full of reverence toward (with loc.) & disrespectful; D iii.244 (six g.); A iv.84 (seven); M i.469; combd with appatissa & sappatissa (obedient) A iii.7 sq., 14 sq., 247, 340. Also in tibba -- gārava full of keen respect (Satthu -- garu Dhamma -- garu Sanghe ca tibba -- gārava, etc.) A iii.331=iv.28 sq.
-- âdhivacana a title of respect, a reverential address Nd2 466 (with ref. to Bhagavā), cp. sagārava sappaṭissâdhivacana Nd2 130 (āyasmā).
Gāravatā [Der. fr. gārava] reverence, respect, in Satthu˚, Dhamma˚, etc. A iii.330 sq., 423 sq.; iv.29 (ottappa˚).
Gāḷha (adj.) [cp. Sk. gāḍha] 1. [cp. gādha1] strong, tight, close; thick. In phrase pacchābāhaŋ g˚ bandbanaŋ bandhati to pinion the arms tightly D i.245; A ii.241; J i.264; PvA 4. Of an illness (gāḷhena rogâtankena phuṭṭha) A ii.174 sq.; appld to poison smeared on an arrow M i.429. -- gālhaŋ & gālhakaŋ (adv.) tightly J i.265, 291. -- agāḷha (? prob. to be read āgāḷha) (of vacana, speech, combd with pharusa) strong (?) Pug 32 (expl by Com. atigāḷha thaddha), cp. 2. and gaḷita. <-> 2. [cp. gādha1 deep J i.155 (˚vedhin, piercing); Miln 370 (ogāhati). Cp. ajjhogāḷha, atigāḷha, ogāḷha, nigāḷhita, pagāḷha.
Gāvī (f.) [see go] gen. sg. gāviyā (Pug 56=A ii.207); nom. pl. gāviyo (SnA 323; VvA 308); gen. pl. gāvīnaŋ DhA i.396; SnA 323; VvA 308). -- A cow Vin i.193; A iv.418; J i.50; Ud 8, 49; Vism 525 (in simile); DhA ii.35; VvA 200.
Gāvuta (nt.) [cp. Vedic gavyūti pasture land, district] a linear measure, a quarter of a yojana=80 usabhas, a little less than two miles, a league J i.57, 59; ii.209; Vism 118; DhA i.396.
Gāvutika (adj.) reaching a gāvuta in extent DA i.284.
Gāvo see go.
Gāha [fr. gaṇhāti] 1. (n.) seizing, seizure, grip (cp. gaha): canda˚ suriya˚ an eclipse (lit. the moon, etc., being seized by a demon) D i.10 (=DA i.95: Rāhu candaŋ gaṇhāti). Esp. appld to the sphere of the mind; obsession, being possessed (by a thought), an idea, opinion, view, usually as a preconceived idea, a wrong view, misconception. So in defn of diṭṭhi (wrong views) with paṭiggāha & abhinivesa Nd2 271iii (on lepa); Pug 22; Dhs 381 (=obsession like the grip of a crocodile DhsA 253), 1003; Vbh 145, 358. In the same formula as vipariyesa ggāha (wrong view), cp. viparīta˚ VvA 331 (see diṭṭhi). As doubt & error in anekaŋ sa+g˚ in defn of kankhā & vicikicchā Nd2 1; Vbh 168; ekaŋsa˚ & apaṇṇaka˚ certainty, right thought J i.97. -- gāhaŋ vissajjeti to give up a preconceived idea J ii.387. -- 2. (adj.) act. holding: rasmi˚ holding the reins Dh 222; dabbi˚ holding the spoons Pv ii.953 (=gāhaka PvA 135). -- (b) med. -- pass. taken: jīvagāha taken alive, in ˚ŋ gaheti to take (prisoner) alive S i.84, karamaragāhaŋ gaheti same J iii.361 (see kara).
Gāhaka (adj.) f. gāhikā holding ( -- ˚) chatta˚ Sn 688; Dāvs ii.119; katacchu˚ PvA 135; cāmarī˚ J vi.218. Cp. saŋ˚.
Gāhati [Sk. gāhate but Dhtp 349=viloḷana] to immerse, to penetrate, to plunge into: see gādha & gāḷha; cp. also avagadha ajjhogāhati, ogāhati, pagāhati.
Gāhana (nt.) [fr. last] submersion, see avagahana, avagā- hati & avagāhana.
Gāhavant in ekaŋsa -- gāhavatī nibbici kicchā "doubtless- ness consisting in certainty" VvA 85 in expld of ekaŋsika.
Gāhāpaka [fr. gāhāpeti] one who is made to take up, a receiver Vin ii.177 (patta˚).
Gāhāpeti [caus. of gaṇhāti] to cause to take; to cause to be seized or fetched; to remove. Aor, gāhāpesi J i.53; ii.37; gāhāpayi Pv iv.142. -- Ger. gāhāpetvā J i.166; ii.127; iii.281; DhA i.62 (patta -- cīvaraŋ). With double acc. mahājanaŋ kathaŋ g˚ made people believe your words J ii.416; cetake kasā g. made the servants seize their whips J iii.281. Cp. gaṇhāpeti.
Gāhi Imper. pres. of gāyati J iii.507.
Gāhika ( -- ˚)=gahin, see anta˚.
Gāhin (adj.) ( -- ˚) grasping, taking up, striving after, ādhāna˚ D iii.247; udaka˚ J i.5; piya˚ Dh 209; nimitta˚ anubyañjana˚, etc.
Gāheti [v. denom. fr. gāha] to understand, to account for DA i.117.
Gingamaka (v. l. BB kinkamaka) a sort of ornament J vi.590.
Gijjha [Vedic gṛdhra, cp. gijjhati] 1. (m.) a vulture. Classed with kāka, crow & kulala, hawk M i.88; (kākā+), 364 (in simile, with kankā & kulatā) 429 (do.); Sn 201 (kākā+); PvA 198 (+kulalā). It occurs also in the form gaddha. -- 2. (adj.) greedy, desirous of ( -- ˚): kāma˚ J i.210 (cp. giddha); cp. paṭi˚.
-- kūṭa "Vulture's Peak" Np. of a hill near Rājagaha Vin ii.193; DhA i.140; PvA 10 and passim. -- potaka the young of a vulture Vism 537 (in simile).
Gijjhati [Sk. gṛdhyati, to Lat. gradior?] to desire, to long for, to wish: pp. gaddha & giddha. Cp. abhi˚, pali˚. <-> pp. (Pass.) gijjhita Th 2, 152 (= paccāsiŋsita ThA).
Giñjakā (f.) a brick, in ˚āvasatha a house of bricks, as N pl. "the Brick Hall" D i.91; Vin i.232; M i.205.
Giddha (adj.) [pp. of gijjhati] greedy; greedy for, hankering after (with loc.) S i.74 (+kāmesu mucchita); ii.227; A ii.2; iii.68; Sn 243 (rasesu), 774 (kāmesu); 809; Pv iv.62 (sukhe); PvA 3 (+rata) (=gadhita), 271 (āhāre=hungry; cp. giddhin). In series with similar terms of desire; giddha gathita (or gadhita) mucchita ajjhopanna Nd2 369 (nissita); SnA 286. Cp. gathita. -- agiddha without greed, desireless, controlled It 92 (+vītagedha); Sn 210 (do), 845. Cp. pa˚.
Giddhi (f.) [cp. Sk. gṛdhyā or gṛdhnutā] greed, usually in cpds.: ˚māna greed & conceit Sn 328, ˚lobha g. & desire M i.360, 362 (also a˚ and giddhilobhin); J v.343. Der. giddhikatā (f. abstr.=Sk. gṛdhnutā) greed Vbh 351 (v. l. gedhi˚).
Giddhin (adj. fr. prec.) greedy, usually -- ˚ greedy for, desirous after Pv iv.107 (āhāra˚) f. giddhinī: gāvī vaccha˚ Vin i.193; S iv.181. Cp. also paligedhin.
Giddhimā (adj. fr. giddhi) greedy, full of greed J v.464 (rasa˚).
Gini (poet.) [Vedic agni; this the aphetic form, arisen in a combn like mahāgni =mahā -- gini, as against the usual assimilation aggi] fire A iii.347 (mahāgini); Sn 18, 19 (āhito > nibbuto: made > extinguished); J iv.26. <->
Note. The occurrence of two phonetic representatives of one Vedic form (one by diaeresis & one by contraction) is common in words containing a liquid or nasal element (l. r. n; cp. note on gala), e. g. supina & soppa (Sk. svapna), abhikkhaṇa and abhiṇha (abhīkṣṇa), silesuma & semha (śleṣman) gaḷagaḷa & gaggara (gargara), etc.
Gimha [Vedic grīṣma] I. (sg.) heat, in special application to the atmosphere: hot part (of the day or year), hot season, summer; a summer month. Always used in loc. as a designation of time. 1. of the day: VvA 40 (˚samaye; v. l. gimhānamāse). -- 2. of summer: usually in combn w. and in contrast to hemanta winter: hemanta -- gimhisu in w. & s. Dh 286 (cp. gimhika for ˚isu). Miln 274; Dpvs i.55; Vism 231 (˚âbhitatta worn out by the heat); Sdhp 275 (˚kāle). In enumn w. other seasons: vasse hemante gimhe Nd2 631 (sadā); vasanta gimhādika utū PvA 135. -- 3. of a summer month; paṭhamasmiŋ gimhe Sn 233 (see KhA 192 for expln) -- II. (pl.) gimhā the hot months, the season of summer, in ˚naŋ pacchime māse, in the last month of summer M i.79; S iii.141; v.50, 321; Vv 795 (=āsāḷhimāse VvA 307).
Gimhāna (adj. -- n.) [orig. gen. pl. of gimhā=gimhānaŋ, fr. combn gimhāna(ŋ) māse, in a month of summer] of summer, summerly, the summer season A iv.138 (+hemanta & vassa); Sn 233 (gimhānamāse); VvA 40 (v. l.). On terms for seasons in gen. cp. Miln trsl. ii.113.
Gimhika (adj. fr. gimha) summerly, relating to the summer, for the summer Vin i.15; D ii.21 (+vassika & hemantika).
Girā [Vedic gir & gēr, song; gṛṇāti to praise, announce gūrti praise=Lat. grates "grace"; to *ger or *gṷer, see note on gala] utterance (orig. song, important utterance, still felt as such in older Pāli, therefore mostly poetical), speech, words D iii.174; Sn 350, 632, 690, 1132; Dh 408; Th 2, 316, 402; Vv 5018 (=vācā VvA); Dhs 637, 720; DhsA 93; DA i.61 (aṭṭhangupetaŋ giraŋ), J ii.134.
Giri [Vedic giri, Obulg. gora mountain] a mountain; as a rule only in cpds, by itself (poetical) only at Vism 206 (in enumn of the 7 large mountains).
-- agga mountain top, in giraggasamajja N. of a festival celebrated yearly at Rājagaha, orig. a festival on the mountain top (cp. Dial. i.8 & Vin. Texts iii.71). Vin ii.107, 150; iv.85, 267; J iii.538; DhA i.89. The BSk. version is girivaggu -- samāgama AvŚ ii.24; -- kannikā (f.) N. of a plant (Clitoria ternatea) Vism 173; DhA i.383 (v. l. kaṇṇikā cp. Sk. ˚karnī;) -- gabbhara=˚guhā Sn 416; -- guhā a mountain cleft, a rift, a gorge; always in formula pabbata kandara g˚, therefore almost equivalent to kandara, a grotto or cave Vin ii.146; D i.71= M i.269, 274, 346, 440=A ii.210=Pug 59 (as giriŋ guhaŋ); A iv.437; expl. at DA i.210: dvinnaŋ pabbatānaŋ antaraŋ ekasmiŋ yeva vā ummagga -- sadisaŋ mahā -- vivaraŋ -- bbaja (nt.) [Etym. uncertain, according to Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 79 to vaja "a pen," cp. Marāthī vraja "a station of cowherds," Hindi vraja "a cow -- pen"; the Vedic giribhraj˚ (RV. x.68. 1) "aus Bergen hervorbrechend" (Roth) suggests relation to bhraj, to break=bhañj=Lat. frango]=˚guhā, a mountain cave or gorge, serving as shelter & hiding place J iii.479 (trsl. by Morris loc. cit. a hill -- run, a cattle -- run on the hills); v.260 (sīhassa, a lion's abode) expld as kañcanaguhā ibid. (for kandara -- guhā? cp. Kern, Toev. p. 130). S ii.185. Also N. for Rājagaha Sn 408; Dpvs v.5; in its Sk. form Girivraja, which Beal, Buddh. Records ii.149 expls as "the hill -- surrounded," cp. ib. ii.158 (=Chin. Shan -- Shing), 161; see also Cunningham, Ancient Geogr. 462. It does not occur in the Avadānas; -- rājā king of the mountains, of Mount Sineru Miln 21, 224; -- sikhara mountain top, peak VvA 4; (kañcana˚, shining).
Giriyā (pl.) in dhamma˚ & brahma˚, a name of certain theatrical entertainers Miln 191.
Gilati [Vedic girati & gilati Dhtp 488: adane; cp. gala throat, Ohg. kela, E. gullet; see note on gala] to swallow, to devour: mā Rāhu gilī caraŋ antalikkhe S i.51=VvA 116; mā gilī lohagulaŋ Dh 371; -- J iii.338; Miln 106. -- pp. gilita : gilitabaḷisa having swallowed the hook S iv.159. Cp. ud˚, o˚, pari˚; -- Caus. gilāpeti to make swallow J iii.338.
Gilana (nt.) [fr. gilati] devouring, swallowing Miln 101.
Gilāna (adj.) [Sk. glāna, glā to fade, wither, be exhausted, expld suitably by "hāsa -- kkhaya" at Dhtp 439] sick, ill Vin i.51, 53, 61, 92, 142 sq., 176, 302 sq.; ii.165, 227 sq.; iv.88, etc.; S v.80, 81 (bāḷha˚ very ill); A i.120=Pug 27; A iii.38, 143 sq.; iv.333; v.72 sq.; J i.150; ii.395; iii.392; PvA 14; VvA 76.
-- ālaya pretence of illness J vi.262. -- upaṭṭhāka (f. -- ī) one who attends to the sick Vin i.92, 121 sq.; 142 sq.; 161, 303, A i.26; iii.143 sq.; -- ˚bhatta food for the attendant or nurse Vin i.292 sq.; -- upaṭṭhāna tending or nursing the sick D iii.191; -- paccaya support or help for the sick PvA 144; usually with ˚bhesajja medicine for the sick in freq. formula of cīvarapiṇḍapāta˚ (the requisites of the bhikkhu): see cīvara; -- pucchaka one who asks (i. e. enquires after) the sick Vin iv.88=115, 118; -- bhatta food for the sick Vin i.142 sq.; 292 sq.; 303; Vism 66. -- bhesajja medicine Vin i.292 sq.; -- sālā a hall for the sick, hospital S iv.210; A iii.142; Vism 259.
Gilānaka (adj.) 1. ill (=gilāna) A iii.142; -- 2. fit for an illness (bhesajja medicine) Miln 74.
Gilāyati: see āgilāyati.
Giha [=gaha] only in agiha (adj.) houseless, homeless (=pabbajita, a Wanderer); poet. for anagāra Sn 456, 464, 487, 497.
Gihin (adj. -- n.) [fr. gaha, cp. gaha & geha; Sk. gṛhin] a householder, one who leads a domestic life, a layman (opp. pabbajita & paribbājaka). Geu. sg. gihissa (D iii.147, 167) & gihino (D iii.174); n. pl. gihī; in cpds. gihī˚ & gihi˚ (usually the latter). gihī agāraŋ ajjhāvasantā A i.49; gihī odātavasanā (clad in white robes as distinguished fr. kasāva -- vasanā the yellowrobed i. e. bhikkhus) D i.211; iii.117, 124, 210; M i.340; iii.261; A i.74. -- Contrasted with pabbajitā: A i.69; D iii.147, 167, 179. gihī dhaññena dhanena vaḍḍhati D iii.165. -- Other passages in general: S ii.120, 269; iii.11; iv.180, 300 sq.; A ii.65; 69 (kāmabhogī); iv.438 (do.); D iii.124 (do.); A iii.211 (sambodhiparāyano); iv.345 sq.; D iii.167 sq.; 171 sq.; 176, 192; Sn 220, 221, 404; Dh 74; Miln 19, 264; DhA i.16 (gihīniyāma); Sdhp 376, 426; PvA 13 (gihīkālato paṭṭhāya from the time of our laymanship); DhA ii.49 (id.).
-- kicca a layman's or householder's duties Pv iv.142 (=kuṭumba -- kiccāni PvA 240); -- dhamma a layman's duty A iii.41; -- parisā a congregation of laymen S i.111; M i.373; A iii.184; -- bandhanāni (pl.) a layman's fetters Sn 44 (=Nd2 228 puttā ca dāsī dāsā ca, etc.); -- byañjanāni (pl.) characteristics of a layman, or of a man of the world (w. ref. to articles of dress & ornament) Sn 44, 64 (=Nd2 229); Miln 11; -- bhūta as a householder D ii.196; -- bhoga riches of a worldly man S iii.93; It 90; -- linga characteristic of a layman DhA ii.61. -- saŋsagga association with laymen A iii.116, 258; -- saŋyojana the impediments of a householder (cp. ˚bandhanāni) M i.483; -- sukha the welfare of a g. A i.80.
Gīta [pp. of gāyati] 1. (pp.) sung, recited, solemnly pro- claimed, enunciated: mantapadaŋ gītaŋ pavuttaŋ D i.104 (cp. gira). -- 2. (nt.) singing, a song; grouped under vācasikā khiḍḍā, musical pastimes at Nd2 219; SnA 86. Usually combd with nacca, dancing: A i.261; Vv8110 as naca gītādi J i.61; VvA 131; referring to nacca -- gīta -- vādita, dancing with singing & instrumental accompaniment D iii.183 (under samajja, kinds of festivities); Vv 324. Same with visūkadassana, pantomimic show at D i.5≈(cp. DA i.77; KhA 36).
-- rava sound of song Mhvs vii.30; -- sadda id. J iv.3; Dhs 621; DhA i.15; -- ssara id. Vin ii.108; A iii.251; J iii.188.
Gītaka (nt.) & gītikā (f.) a little song J iii.507.
Gīvā (f.) [Sk. grīvā, to *gṷer to swallow, as signifying throat: see note on gala for etym.] the neck Sn 609; J i.74 (˚ŋ pasāreti to stretch forth), 167 (pasārita˚), 207, 222, 265; iii.52; VvA 27 (mayūra˚), 157; DA i.296 (˚āya kuṇḍa -- daṇḍaka -- bandhana, as exhibition & punishment): similarly in the sense of "life" (hinting at decapitation) J ii.300 (˚ŋ karissāmi "I shall go for his neck"); iv.431=v.23. -- Syn. kaṇṭha the primary meaning of which is neck, whereas gīvā orig. throat.
Gīveyyaka (nt.) [cp. Sk. graiveyaka] necklace, an orna- ment for the neck (orig. "something belonging to the neck," cp. necklet, bracelet, etc.) Vin i.287; A i.254 sq. (=Vism 247, where gīveyya only); 257; iii.16; J iv.395 (gīveyya only); v.297; vi.590; VvA 104.
Guggula [?] a kind of perfume J vi.537.
Gucch˚ in jigucchati (Des. of gup=Sk. jugupsate) to detest, see s. v.
Guñjā (f.) a plant (Abrus precatorius); the redness of its berries is referred to in similes; DhA iv.133 (˚vaṇṇāni akkhīni). See also jiñjuka.
Guṇa1 [Non -- Aryan?] 1. a string, a cord -- (a) of a robe, etc., in (kāya -- bandhanaŋ) saguṇaŋ katvā to make tight by tying with a knot Vin i.46 (Vin. Texts: "laying the garments on top of each other," wrongly construed); ii.213 (trsln. "folding his garments"); cp. guṇaka. <-> (b) of musical instruments Vin i.182=A iii.375 (vīṇā)., -- (c) of a bow, in aguna stringless J v.433 (dhanu). <-> 2. (a strand of a rope as) constituent part, ingredient, component, element; with numerals it equals -- fold, e. g. pañca kāmaguṇā the 5 strands of kāma, or 5 -- fold craving (see kāma); ekaguṇaŋ once, diguṇaŋ twice Sn 714; diguṇaŋ nivāpaŋ pacitvā cooking a double meal VvA 63; catugguṇa fourfold, of a sanghāti D ii.128; S ii.221, cp. Rhys Davids, Dialogues ii.145. aṭṭhaguṇa (hirañña) Th. 2, 153; aneka -- bhāgena guṇena seyyo many times or infinitely better Pv iv.19; sataguṇena sahassa˚ 100 and 1,000 times PvA 41; asankheyyena guṇena infinitely, inconceivably Miln 106; sataguṇaŋ sahassaguṇaŋ Vism 126. -- 3. (a part as) quality, esp. good quality, advantage, merit J i.266; ii.112; iii.55, 82. -- lobha˚ Sn 663; sādhu˚ Sn 678; sīla˚ J i.213; ii.112; Buddha˚ J ii.111; pabbajita˚ J i.59.
-- aggatā state of having the best qualities, superiority Dpos iv.1. -- aḍḍha rich in virtue Sdhp 312, 561. -- upeta in khuppipāsāhi guṇûpeto as PvA 10 is to be read khuppipās' âbhibhūto peto. -- kathā "tale of virtue," praise J i.307; ii.2. -- kittana telling one's praises PvA 107, 120. -- guṇika in phrase tantākulajāta g -- g -- jāta at S iv.158, see under guḷā -- guṇṭhika.
Guṇa2 [for which often guḷa with common substitution of ḷ for ṇ, partly due to dissimilation, as mālāguḷa > mālāguṇa; cp. Sk. guṇikā tumour: guḷa and gaḷa, veḷu: veṇu, and note on gala] a ball, a cluster, a chain (?), in anta˚ the intestines; M i.185 -- , Kh 11., cp. KhA 57 for expln. -- mālāguṇa a garland or chain (cluster) of flowers Dh 53 (but ˚guḷa at J i.73, 74). See guḷa3.
Guṇa2 [Derivation unknown. Cp. Sk. ghuna] a wood- worm J iii.431 (˚pāṇaka).
Guṇaka (adj.) [to guḷa1, cp. guḷika?] having a knot at the end, thickened at the top (with ref. to kāyabandha, see guṇa 1a) Vin ii.136, cp. Vin. Texts ii.143.
Guṇavant (adj.) [to guṇa1] possessed of good qualities, virtuous Pv ii.971 (= jhān' ādiguṇa -- yutta); PvA 62 (mahā˚).
Guṇi (f.) [of adj. guṇin, having guṇas or guḷas, i. e. strings or knots] a kind of armour J vi.449 (g. vuccate kavacaŋ C.); see Kern, Toev. p. 132.
Guṇṭhika (in meaning=guṇṭhita) one who is covered with or wrapped up in, only in ahi˚ a snake -- trainer (like a Laocoon). See details under ahi or J ii.267; iii.348 (text: ˚guṇḍika); J iv.308 (ahi -- kuṇḍika, v. l. SS guṇṭhika); iv.456 (text ˚guṇṭika; v. l. BB ˚kuṇḍika). Also in guḷā -- guṇṭhika (q. v.).
Guṇṭhima covered over (?), see pāli˚.
Guṇṭheti [cp. Sk. guṇṭhayati Dhtp (563) & Dhtm (793) give both roots guṇṭh & guṇḍ as syn. of veṭh] to cover, to veil, to hide; pp. guṇṭhita in paŋsu˚ covered with dust Pv ii.35 (in Hardy's conjecture for kuṇṭhita, q. v.). Also in cpd. paliguṇṭhita obstructed, entangled Sn 131 (mohena) where v. l. BB kuṇṭhita. Cp. o˚.
Guṇḍika see guṇṭhika.
Gutta [Sk. gupta, pp. of gup in med. -- pass. sense, cp. gopeti). -- I. as pp. guarded, protected. -- (a) lit. nagaraŋ guttaŋ a well -- guarded city Dh 315=Th 1, 653, 1005; Devinda˚ protected by the Lord of gods Vv 308. -- (b) fig. (med.) guarded, watchful, constrained; guarded in, watchful as regards . . . (with loc.) S iv.70 (agutta & sugutta, with danta, rakkhita); A iii.6 (atta˚ self -- controlled); Sn 250 (sotesu gutto+ vijitindriyo), 971 (id.+yatacārin); Dh 36 (cittaŋ). <-> II. as n. agent (=Sk. goptṛ, cp. kata in kāla -- kata= kāḷaŋ kartṛ) one who guards or observes, a guardian, in Dhammassa gutta Dh 257, observer of the Norm (expl. DhA iii.282: dhammojapaññāya samannāgata), cp. dhammagutta S i.222.
-- indriya one whose senses are guarded; with well-guarded senses Sn 63 (+rakkhita -- mānasāno; expl. SnA: chassu indriyesu gopitindriyo); Nd2 230; Vv 5015; Pv iv.132; -- dvāra "with guarded doors" always in combn with indriyesu g -- d. having the doors of the senses guarded, practising. self -- control D i.63≈(expld DA i.182 by pihita -- dvāro), 70; S ii.218; iv.103, 112, 119 sq., 175; Sn 413 (+susaŋvuta); Pug 24. Cp. foll.; -- dvāratā (f. abstr. to prec.) in indriyesu g˚ self constraint, control over (the doors of) one's senses, always combd with bhojane mattaññutā (moderation in taking food) D iii.213; It 24; Pug 20, 24; Dhs 1347; PvA 163. Opp. a˚ lack of sense -- control D iii.213; It 23; Dhs 1345.
Gutti (f.) [Vedic gupti] protection, defence, guard; watchfulness. -- (a) lit. of a city A iv.106 sq. -- (b) fig. of the senses in indriyānaŋ gutti Dh 375; Pug 24 (+gopanā); Dhs 1348; Sdhp 341 (agutti); Vin iv.305; A ii.72 (atta˚); also in pl.: guttīsu ussuka keen in the practice of watchfulness D iii.148.
Guttika [fr. last] a guardian, one who keeps watch over, in nagara˚ the town -- watchman, the chief -- constable PvA 4; Miln 345.
Gumpha see ogumpheti.
Gumba [Sk. gulma, *glem to *gel, to be thick, to con- glomerate, cp. Lat. glomus (ball), globus, etc. See guḷa] 1. a troop, a heap, cluster, swarm. Of soldiers: Vin i.345; of fish (maccha˚) D i.84=M i.279=ii.22= A i.9. -- 2. a thicket, a bush, jungle; the lair of an animal in a thicket (sayana˚ J iv.256) S iii.6 (eḷagalā˚); J iii.52 (nivāsa˚, vasana˚); VvA 301 (gaccha˚ underwood); J i.149, 167; ii.19; iii.55; iv.438; VvA 63, 66. Cp. pagumba=gumba, in vana˚ Sn 233 (see KhA 192). veḷu˚ Th 1,919. -- Acc. gumbaŋ (adv.) thickly, in masses balled together Miln 117 (of clouds).
-- antara thicket VvA 233.
Gumbiya (adj.) [fr. gumba] one of the troop (of soldiers) Vin i.345.
Guyha [ger. of guh=Vedic guhya] 1. adj. to be hidden, hidden in ˚bhaṇḍaka the hidden part (of the body) DhA iv.197. -- 2. (nt.) that which is hidden; lit. in vattha˚ hidden by the dress, i. e. the pudendum D i.106; Sn 1022, etc. (see vattha), fig. a secret Miln 92; guyhaŋ pariguyhati to keep a secret A iv.31; Nd2 510.
Guru (adj. -- n.) [a younger form of garu (q. v.); Sk. guru] venerable, reverend, a teacher VvA 229, 230 (˚dakkhiṇā a teacher's fee); PvA 3 (˚janā venerable persons); Sdhp 227 (˚ûpadesa), 417.
Guḷa1 [Sk. guḍa and gulī ball, guṭikā pill, guṇikā tumour; to *gleu to make into a ball, to conglomerate. Cp. Sk. glauḥ ball; Gr. glouto/s; Ohg. chliuwa; Ger. kugel, kloss; E. clot, cleat; also *gel with same meaning: Sk. gulma tumour, gilāyu glandular swelling; cp. Lat. glomus, globus; Ger. klamm; E. clamp, clump. A root guḷ is given by Dhtp 576,77 in meaning of "mokkha"] a ball, in cpds. sutta˚ a ball of string (=Ohg. chliuwa) D i.54=; M iii.95; PvA 145; ayo˚ an iron globe Dh 308; DA i.84; loha˚ of copper Dh 371; sela˚ a rockball, i. e. a heavy stone -- ball J i.147.
-- kīḷā play at ball DhA i.178; iii.455; iv.124. -- parimaṇḍala the circumference of a ball, or (adj.) round, globular, like a ball PvA 253.
Guḷa2 (Non -- Aryan?] sugar, molasses Vin i.210, 224 sq., 245. -- saguḷa sugared, sweet, or "with molasses" J vi.324 (saguḷāni, i. e. saguḷa -- pūve pancakes).
-- āsava sugar -- juice VvA 73. -- odaka s. -- water Vin i.226. -- karaṇa a sugar factory ibid. 210. -- pūvaka sweet cake Mhvs 10. 3. -- phāṇita molasses VvA 179.
Guḷa3 [for guṇa2, due to distance dissimilation in maṇi- guṇa and mālāguṇa> maṇigula and mālāgula; cp. similarly in meaning and form Ohg. chliuwa>Ger. knäuel] a cluster, a chain (?), in maṇi˚ a cluster of jewels, always in simile with ref. to sparkling eyes "maniguḷa -- sadisāni akkhīni" J i.149; iii.126, 184 (v. l. BB ˚guḷika); iv.256 (v. l. id.); mālā˚ a cluster, a chain of flowers, a garland J i.73, 54; puppha˚ id. Dh. 172, 233.
Guḷā (f.) [to guḷa1] a swelling, pimple, pustule, blight, in cpd. guḷā -- guṇṭhika -- jāta D ii.55, which is also to be read at A ii.211 (in spite of Morris, prelim. remarks to A ii.4, whose trsln. is otherwise correct)=guḷā -- gunṭḥita covered with swellings (i. e. blight); cp. similar expression at DhA iii.297 gaṇḍāgaṇḍa ( -- jāta) "having become covered all over with pustules (i. e. rash)." All readings at corresp. passages are to be corrected accordingly, viz., S ii.92 (guḷigandhika˚); iv.158 (guṇaguṇika˚); the reading at Dpvs xii.32, also v. l. SS at A ii.211, is as quoted above and the whole phrase runs: tantākulajātā guḷāguṇṭhikajātā "entangled like a ball of string and covered with blight."
Guḷika (adj.) [to guḷa3=guṇa, cp. also guṇaka] like a chain, or having a chain, (nt. & f.) a cluster, a chain in maṇi˚ a string of jewels, a pearl necklace J iii.184 (v. l. BB for ˚guḷa); iv.256; Vism 285 (+muttā -- guḷikā).
Guḷikā (f.) [to guḷa1; cp. Sk. guṭikā pill, guṇikā tumour] a little ball S v.462 (satta -- kolaṭṭhi -- mattiyo guḷikā, pl.); Th 2, 498 (kolaṭṭhimatta g˚ balls of the size of a jujube), cp. ThA 289.
Guhanā (f. abstr. to gūhati) hiding, concealing, keeping secret Vbh 358 (+pariguhanā). Also as gūhanā, q. v.
Guhā (f.) [Vedic guhā, guh, gūhati to hide (q. v.) Dhtp 337: saŋvaraṇa] a hiding place, a cave, cavern (cp. kandara & see giriguhā); fig. the heart (in ˚āsaya). According to Bdhgh. (on Vin i.58, see Vin. Texts i.174) "a hut of bricks, or in a rock, or of wood." Vin i.58, 96, 107, 239, 284; ii.146; iii.155; iv.48 (cp. sattapaṇṇi -- guhā); Sn 772, 958; J ii.418; vi.574; Vv 5016.
-- āsaya hiding in the heart; or the shelter of the heart A iv.98 (maccupāso+); J v.367 (id.); Dh 37 (cittaŋ see DhA i.304).
Gū ( -- ˚) [fr. gam, cp. ˚ga] going, having gone (through), being skilled or perfected in. See addha˚, anta˚, chanda˚, dhamma˚, paṭṭha˚, pāra, veda˚.
Gūtha [Sk. gūtha; probably to Lat. bubino, see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.] excrements, faeces, dung. As food for Petas frequently mentioned in Pv; (cp. Stede, Peta Vatthu 24 sq.), as a decoction of dung also used for medicinal purposes (Vin i.206 e. g.). Often combn with mutta (urine): Pv i.91; PvA 45, 78; DA i.198.
-- kaṭāha an iron pot for defecation Vin iv.265. -- kalala dung & mire J iii.393; -- kīḷana playing with excrements Vism 531. -- kūpa a privy (cp. karīsa) M i.74; Sn 279; Pv ii.316; Pug 36; J vi.370; Vism 54. -- khādaka living on faeces J ii.211 (˚pāṇaka) PvA 266; -- gata having turned to dung It 90; -- gandhin smelling of excrements Pv ii.315; -- ṭṭhāna a place for excrementation Th 1, 1153; -- naraka=foll. Vism 501; -- niraya the mirepurgatory VvA 226; Sdhp 194; -- pāṇa an insect living on excrement (=˚khādakapāṇa) J ii.209, 212; -- bhakkha feeding on stercus M iii.168; PvA 192; DhA ii.61; -- bhānin of foul speech A i.128; Pug 29 (Kern, Toev. s. v. corrects into kūṭa˚?).
Gūthaka "a sort of gūtha," excretion, secretion, rheum, in akkhi˚ and kaṇṇa˚ (of eye & ear) Sn 197 (cp. SnA 248; Vism 345 sq.).
Gūḷha & gūḷhaka (adj.) [pp. of gūhati] hidden, secret Vin ii.98 (gūḷha -- ko salākagāho).
Gūhati [Sk. gūhati, pp. gūḍha; see guyha, guhā, etc.] to hide, to conceal. See paṭi˚, pari˚. -- Caus. gūhayati Sdhp 189 (gūhayaŋ ppr.). Cp. gūḷha.
Gūhana (nt.) hiding, concealment Sdhp 65 (laddhi˚ -- citta).
Gūhanā (f.) [abstr. fr. gūhati]=gūhanā (q. v.) Pug. 19. Cp. pari˚.
Geṇḍuka a ball for playing. The SS spelling is in all places bheṇḍuka, which has been taken into the text by the editors of J. and DhsA. The misspelling is due to a misreading of Singhalese bh>g; cp. spelling parābhetvā for parāgetvā. -- bheṇḍukena kīḷi J iv.30; bhūmiyaŋ pahata -- bheṇḍuka (striking against the ground) J iv.30; Vism 143 (pahaṭa -- citra˚)=DhsA 116 (where wrongly pahaṭṭha -- citta -- bheṇḍuka); J v.196 (citra -- bh˚); DhA iii.364.
Gedha1 [Vedic gṛdhyā, cp. gijjhati] greed. Its connection with craving and worldly attachment is often referred to. Kāmesu g˚ S i.73; Sn 152; A iii.312 sq. (gedho: pañcann' etaŋ kāmaguṇānaŋ adhivacanaŋ). gedhataṇhā S i.15 (v. l. kodha˚); Sn 65, 945, 1098; Th 2, 352; Nd2 231; Dhs 1059 (under lobha), 1136; Nett 18; DhA i.366; PvA 107. -- agedhatā freedom from greed Miln 276. -- See also gedhi & paligedha.
Gedha2 [=geha? Kern] a cave A i.154=iii.128 (the latter passage has rodha, cp. v. l. under gedhi).
Gedhi [Sk. gṛdhi, cp. gedha] greed, desire, jealousy, envy: gedhiŋ karoti (c. loc.) to be desirous after M i.330. -- gedhikata in ˚citta (adj.) jealous, envious, ibid. As gedhikatā (f.) vanity, greed, conceit Nd2 585 (v. l. rodhigatā).
Gedhita [pp. of gijjhati] greedy, in gedhita -- mano greedy- minded Pv ii.82; as nt. greed, in der. gedhifatta (syn. of gedhikatā) Nd2 585.
Geyya (nt.) [grd. of gāyati, Sk. geya] a certain style of Buddhist literature consisting of mixed prose & verse. It is only found in the ster. enum of the Scriptures in their ninefold division, beginning suttaŋ geyyaŋ veyyākaraṇaŋ. See under navanga.
Geruka (nt.) & gerukā (f.) [Sk. gairika] yellow ochre (Bdhgh suvaṇṇa˚ cp. Sk. kañcana˚ & svarṇa˚), red chalk used as colouring Vin i.203; ii.151; A i.210; Miln 133 (˚cuṇṇa). Freq. in ˚parikamma a coating of red chalk, red colouring Vin ii.117, 151, 172; ˚parikammakata "coated with red colouring" Vin i.48; ii.218.
Gelañña (nt.) [n -- abstr. fr. gilāna] sickness, illness D ii.99; A i.219; iii.298; iv.333 sq.; Vism 321, 466, 478.
Geha (nt.) [Sk. geha=gṛha, to gṛh, gaṇhāti; cp. gaha, gihin, ghara; see also gedha2] a dwelling, hut, house; the household J i.145, 266, 290; ii.18, 103, 110, 155 vi.367; Vism 593; PvA 22, 62, 73, 82; fig. of kāya (body) Th 1, 184=Dh 154. -- Appld to a cowshed at Miln 396.
-- angana the open space in front of the house VvA 6; -- jana (sg. collective) the members of the household, the servants PvA 16, 62, 93; -- jhāpana incendiarism Vism 326. -- ṭṭhāna a place for a dwelling DhA iii.307; -- dvāra the house door PvA 61; -- nissita (adj.) concerning the house, connected with (the house and) worldly life Sn 280 (pāpiccha); It 117 (vitakka); cp. ˚sita; -- patana the falling of the house J iii.118. -- pavesana ( -- mangala) (the ceremony of) entering a new hut DhA iii.307; -- piṭṭhi the back of the house PvA 78; -- rakkhika keeping (in the) house, staying at home VvA 76 (dārakā); -- vigata (nt.) the resources of the house, worldly means, riches Th 2, 327 (=upakaraṇa ThA 234); -- sita (*śrita)=˚nissita, connected with worldly life (opp. nekkhamma, renunciation). Of chandā & vitakkā (pl.) M i.123; domanassa & somanassa (grief & pleasure) S iv.232=Miln 45; Vbh 381; DhsA 194; dhammā, etc. S iv.71; Vbh 380; Nett 53.
Go (m. -- f.) [Vedic go, Lat. bos, Gr. bou_s, Ohg. chuo, Ags. cū=E. cow] a cow, an ox, bull, pl. cattle. For f. cp. gāvī; see also gava˚ for cpds. -- Sg. nom. go (Sn 580, also in composition, cp. aja -- go -- mahisādi PvA 80=pasū); gen. gavassa (M i.429); instr. gavena, gāvena; acc. gavaŋ, gāvan; abl. gavamhā, gavā (D i.201=A ii.95= Pug 69); loc. gavamhi, gāvimhi (SnA 323), gave (Sn 310). -- Pl. nom. gāvo (D i.141; M i.225; A i.205; ii.42 sq.; Sn 20, 296, 307; J i.295); gen. gonaŋ A ii.75 (cp. Vedic gonām), gavaŋ (J iv.172, cp. gavaŋ pati), gunnaŋ (A i.229, ii.75; v.271; J i.194; iii.112; iv.223); instr. gohi (Sn 33); acc. gāvo (M i.225; A i.205; Sn 304; Dh 19, 135); abl. gohi; loc. gosu, gavesu. -- See also gava, gavesati, goṇa.
-- kaṇṭaka the hoof of an ox, in ˚haṭā bhūmi, trampled by the feet of cattle Vin i.195; A i.136 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.34); -- kaṇṇa a large species of deer J v.406 (=gaṇin), 416 (khagga+); DhsA 331 (gavaya+); cp. next; -- kāṇā (f.) = gokaṇṇa D iii.38=53; -- kula (nt.) a cow pen, a station of cattle S iv.289; -- gaṇa a herd of cattle M i.220; A i.229; J ii.127; DhA i.175; VvA 311; -- ghaŋsikā a cow -- hide (?). Vin ii.117 (cp. Vin. Texts iii.98); -- ghātaka one who kills cows, a butcher D ii.294 (in simile); M i.58, 244, 364 (˚sūnā, slaughter -- house); S ii.255; iv.56; A iii.302, 380; J v.270; Vism 348 (in simile). -- cara I. Lit. A. (noun -- m.) pasture, lit. "a cow's grazing," search after food; fodder, food, subsistence (a) of animals: J i.221; iii.26; Dh 135 (daṇḍena gopālo gāvo pāceti gocaraŋ: with a stick the cowherd drives the cattle to pasture). Sīho gocarāya pakkamati "the lion goes forth for his huut" A ii.33= iii.121; gocarāya gacchati to go feeding, to graze Sn 39; J i.243; gocare carati to go feeding, to feed J i.242.<-> (b) metaph. of persons, esp. the bhikkhu: pucchitabba gocara (and agocara) "enquiries have to be made concerning the fitness or otherwise of his pasturage (i. e. the houses in which he begs for food)" Vin ii.208; samaṇo gocarato nivatto an ascetic returned from his "grazing" Pv iv.142: Similarly at Vism 127, where a suitable g. -- gama ranks as one of the 7 desiderata for one intent on meditation. -- B. (adj.) ( -- ˚) feeding on or in, living in; metaph. dealing with, mixing with. vana˚ living in the woods Pv ii.65; vāri˚ (in water) Sn 605; jala˚ (id.) J ii.158 (opp. thala˚). Vesiyā˚ (etc.) associating with v. Vin i.70. -- II. Applied. A. (noun -- m. or nt.) a "field" (of sense perception, etc.), sphere, object; -- ˚ food for, an object of (a) psychologically indriyānaŋ nānāgocarāni various spheres of sense -- perception S v.218; sense -- object (=ārammaṇaŋ) Ps i.180; ii.97; 150 sq.; DhsA 314, 315 (sampatta˚ physical contact with an object, gandha˚ smell -- contact, i. e. sensation); indriya˚ Sdhp 365. -- (b) ethically: ariyānaŋ gocare ratā "finding delight in the pasture of the good," walking in the ways of the good Dh 22; vimokho yesaŋ gocaro "whose pasture is liberty" Dh 92=Th 1, 92. Esp. in phrase ācāra -- gocara -- sampanna "pasturing in the field of good conduct" D i.63=It 118; M i.33; S v.187; It. 96; analysed as Dvandva cpd. at Vbh 246, 247, but cp. pāpācāra -- gocara Sn 280, 282. This phrase (ācāra -- gocara) is also discussed in detail at Vism 19, where 3 kinds of gocarā are distinguished, viz. upanissaya˚, ārakkha˚, upanibandha˚. So also in contrast w. agocara, an unfit pasture, or an unfit, i. e. bad, sphere of life, in gocare & agocare carati to move in a congenial or uncongenial sphere A iii.389; iv.345 sq.; D iii.58=77; S v.147; Vbh 246, 247 (expl. w. vesiyā˚ etc., cp. above=having bad associations). -- B. (adj.) -- ˚: belonging to, dependent on, falling to the share of: eta˚ dependent on this M i.319; sattasaddhamma˚, moving in the sphere of the seven golden rules S iii.83; rūpa˚ to be perceived by sight J i.396; Nibbāna˚ belonging to N. Sdhp 467. -- ˚kusala (adj.) skilled in (finding proper) food; clever in right living -- ˚ behaving properly in, exercising properly M i.220=A v.347 (of a cowherd driving out his cattle); S iii.266 sq. (samādhi˚); A iii.311 (do.) v.352 sq. (w. ref. to cattāro satipaṭṭhānā); -- ˚gahaṇa the taking of food, feeding J i.242; -- ˚gāma a village for the supply of food (for the bhikkhus) PvA 12, 42; -- ˚ṭṭhāna pasturage J iii.52; -- ˚pasuta intent on feeding J iii.26; -- ˚bhūmi pasturage, a common DhA iii.60; -- ˚visaya (the sphere of) an object of sense S v.218; Vbh 319; -- caraṇa pasturing J vi.335; -- ṭṭha (nt.) [Sk. goṣṭha to sthā to stand; cp. Lat. stabulum, stable; super -- stes; Goth. awistr] a cow -- stable, cow -- pen M i.79; J iv.223; -- pa [Sk. gopa, cp. gopati] a cowherd, herdsman Sn 18; Dh 19; J iv.364 (a robber); Vism 166 (in simile); DhA 157, f. gopī Sn 22, 32; -- pakhuma (adj.) having eyelashes like a heifer D ii.18; iii.144, 167 sq.; VvA 162, 279 (=āḷārapamha); -- pada a cow's footprint, a puddle A iii.188; iv.102; Miln 287; also ˚padaka A iii.188 v. l.; DA i.283; -- pariṇāyaka leader of the cows, Ep. of a bull (gopitā+) M i.220, 225; -- pāla a cowherd (usually as ˚ka) Dh 135; -- pālaka=prec. Vin i.152, 243 sq.; M i.79, 115 sq., 220=A v.347; M i.333; S iv.181; A i.205 ( -- ˚uposatha); Miln 18, 48; Vism 279 (in comparison); DhA iii.59; -- pitā "father (protector) of the cows"=gavaŋ pati, Ep. of a bull M i.220 (+˚pariṇāyaka); -- pī f. of gopa, q. v.; -- pura (nt.) [Sk. gopura] the gate of a city J vi.433; Miln 1, 67, 330; Bdhd 138; -- balivadda in ˚nayena; in the expression gobalivadda (black -- cattle -- bull) i. e. by an accumulation of words VvA 258; -- bhatta cows' fodder J iv.67; -- maṇḍala ox -- beat, ox -- round, Cp. iii.151 (as gā˚), quoted J i.47 (cp. assa -- m˚); SnA 39; also in phrase ˚paribbūḷha Sn 301 (expld by SnA 320 as goyūthehi parikiṇṇa); J vi.27; at M i.79 however it means the cowherds or peasants (see note M i.536: gopāladārakā or gāmadārakā to v. l. gāmaṇḍala) cp. gāmaṇḍala; -- maya (m. nt.) cowdung M i.79; A i.209, 295; v.234, 250, 263 sq.; Nett 23; DhA i.377. -- ˚pāṇaka a coprophagan, dor beetle J ii.156; -- ˚piṇda a lump of cowdung J i.242; -- ˚bhakkha eating cowdung D i.166≈; -- māyu a jackal Pgdp 49; -- mutta (and ˚ka) a precious stone of light red colour VvA iii; DhsA 151; -- medaka=gomuttaka VvA 111.; -- medha a cow sacrifice, in ˚yañña SnA 323; -- yūtha a herd of cows SnA 322; DhA i.323; -- rakkhā (f.) cow -- keeping, tending cattle, usually combd with kasī, agriculturing M i.85; Pv i.56; J i.338; ii.128; given as a superior profession (ukkaṭṭha -- kamma) Vin iv.6. -- ravaka the bellowing of a cow M i.225; -- rasa (usually pl.) produce of the cow, enumd in set of five, viz. khīra, dadhi, takka, navanīta, sappi (milk, cream, buttermilk, butter, ghee) Vin i.244; DhA i.158, 323, 397; VvA 147; SnA 322; -- rūpa (collect.) cattle J i.194; iv.173; Miln 396 (bull); -- lakkhaṇa fortune telling from cows D i.9≈; -- vaccha (khīra˚ & takka˚) Vism 28. -- vatika [Sk. govratin] one who lives after the mode of cows, of bovine practices M i.387; Nett 99 (cp. govata DhsA 355, and Dhs. trsl. p. 261); -- vikattana (and ˚vikantana; Sk. vikṛntana) a butcher's knife M i.244, 449; A iii.380 Sdhp 381 (vikatta only); -- vittaka one whose wealth is cattle J i.191; -- vinda the supt. of cowherds A iii.373; -- sappi ghee from cow's milk Vin iii.251; DhsA 320; -- sālā cow -- stable A i.188; -- singa a cow's horn Vism 254. -- sita mixed with milk VvA 179; -- sīla=govatika DhsA 355; -- sīsa (nt.) an excellent kind of sandal wood PvA 215 (cp. Sp. AvS i.67, 68, 109); -- hanuka the jaw bone of a cow, in ˚ena koṭṭāpeti (koṭṭh˚ J) to massage with a cow's jaw bone Vin ii.266, J iv.188; v.303.
Goṭaviya (goṭavisa Text) v. l. J vi.225, part of a boat, the poop (expl. ib. p. 226 by nāvāya pacchimabandho).
Goṭhaphala a medicinal seed [Sk. gotravṛkṣa? Kern] Vin i.201.
Goṇa1 [The Sanskrit goṇa, according to B. R., is derived from the Pali] an ox, a bullock S iv.195 sq.; J i.194; iv.67; Pv i.82; PvA 39, 40; VvA 63 (for ploughing); DA i.163; DhA iii.60. -- ˚sira wild ox J vi. 538(=araññagoṇaka).
Goṇa2=goṇaka2, in ˚santhata (of a pallanka), covered with a woollen rug Vv 818; Pv iii.117; (text saṇṭhita; v. l. BB goṇakatthata, cp. next).
Goṇaka1 [goṇa1] a kind of ox, a wild bull J vi.538 (arañña˚).
Goṇaka2 [Sk. BSk. goṇika, cp. Pischel, Beitr. iii.236; also spelled gonaka] a woollen cover with long fleece (DA i.86: dīghalomako mahākojavo; caturangulādhikāni kira tassa lomāni) D i.7≈; S iii.144; J v.506; Pv ii.128; Th 2, 378 (+tūlika); ThA 253 (=dīgha -- lomakāḷakojava). -- ˚atthata spread w. a goṇaka -- cover A i.137= iii.50=iv.394; cp. iv.94, 231 (always of a pallanka), See also goṇa2.
Goṇisādika an ox -- stall Vin i.240; cp. Vin. Texts ii.121. As gonisādi Vin iii.46.
Gotta (nt.) [Vedic gotra, to go] ancestry, lineage. There is no word in English for gotta. It includes all those descended, or supposed to be descended, from a common ancestor. A gotta name is always distinguished from the personal name, the name drawn from place of origin or residence, or from occupation, and lastly from the nick -- name. It probably means agnate rather than cognate. About a score of gotta names are known. They are all assigned to the Buddha's time. See also Rh. D. Dialogues i.27, 195 sq. -- jāti gotta lakkhaṇa Sn 1004; gotta salakkhaṇa Sn 1018; Ādiccā nāma gottena, Sākiyā nāma jātiyā Sn 423; jāti gotta kula J ii.3; jātiyā gottena bhogena sadisa "equal in rank, lineage & wealth" DhA ii.218. -- evaŋ -- gotta (adj.) belonging to such & such an ancestry M i.429; ii.20, 33; kathaŋ˚ of what lineage, or: what is your family name? D i.92; nānā˚ (pl.) of various families Pv ii.916. -- With nāma (name & lineage, or nomen et cognomen): nāmagottaŋ Vin i.93; ii.239; D i.92 (expl. at DA i.257: paññatti -- vasena nāmaŋ paveṇi -- vasena gottaŋ: the name for recognition, the surname for lineage); Sn 648; Vv 8445 (with nāma & nāmadheyya; expl. at VvA 348<-> 349: nāmadheyya, as Tisso, Phusso, etc.; gotta, as Bhaggavo Bhāradvājo, etc.). -- gottena by the ancestral name: Vin i.93; D ii.154; Sn 1019; Dh 393; gottato same J i.56. Examples: Ambaṭṭha Kaṇhāyana -- gottena D i.92; Vipassī Koṇḍañño g˚; Kakusandho Kassapo g˚; Bhagavā Gotamo g˚ D ii.3; Nāgito Kassapo g˚ DA i.310; Vasudevo Kaṇho g˚ PvA 94.
-- thaddha conceited as regards descent (+jāti˚ & dhana˚) Sn 104; -- pañha question after one's family name Sn 456; -- paṭisārin (adj.) relying on lineage D i.99 (cp. Dialogues i.122); A v.327 sq.; -- bandhava connected by family ties (ñāti˚+) Nd2 455; -- rakkhita protected by a (good) name Sn 315; VvA 72; -- vāda talk over lineage, boasting as regards descent D i.99.
Gottā [n. ag. to gopeti=Sk. goptṛ] f. gottī protectress J v.329.
Gotrabhū "become of the lineage"; a technical term used from the end of the Nikāya period to designate one, whether layman or bhikkhu, who, as converted, was no longer of the worldlings (puthujjanā), but of the Ariyas, having Nibbāna as his aim. It occurs in a supplementary Sutta in the Majjhima (Vol. III. 256), and in another, found in two versions, at the end of the Anguttara (A iv.373 and v.23). Defined at Pug 12, 13 & Vism 138; amplified at Ps i.66 -- 68, frequent in P (Tikap. 154 sq., 165, 324 etc.), mentioned at VvA 155. On the use of gotrabhū in medieval psychology see Aung, in Compendium, 66 -- 68. Comp. the use of upanissaya at J i.235. -- ˚ñāṇa, PPA 184; Vism 673. Ā˚ Vism 683.
Godhaka a kind of bird J vi.358.
Godharaṇī (f. -- adj.) being able to be paired (of a young cow), or being with calf (?) Sn 26.
Godhā1 (f.) [Sk. godhā] iguana, a large kind of lizard Vin i.215 -- 16 (˚mukha); D i.9≈(˚lakkhaṇa, cp. DA i.94); J ii.118; iii.52; 538; DhA iii.420. As godha (m.) at J v.489. Dimin. golikā at J ii.147.
Godhā2 (f.) string of a lute J vi.580 (cp. RV. 8, 58, 9).
Godhūma wheat (usually mentioned with yava, spelt) Miln 267; DA i.163; SnA 323. See dhañña.
Gopaka a guardian, watchman DA i.148; cp. khetta˚.
Gopanā (f.) protecting, protection, care, watchfulness (cp. gutti) Pug 24 (+gutti) Dhs 1347; Miln 8, 243.
Gopānasī (f.) a beam supporting the framework of a roof, shaped *l; fig. of old people, bent by age (see ˚vanka). Vin iii.65, 81; S ii.263; iii.156; v.43, 228; M i.80; A i.261; iii.364; v.21; Vism 320; DhA ii.190; VvA 188.
-- gaṇā (pl.) a collection of beams, the rafters Vv 784; -- bhogga ( -- sama) bent like a rafter (nārī) J iii.395; -- vanka (gopānasi˚) as crooked as a rafter (of old people, cp. BSk. gopānasī -- vakra AvŚ ii.25n5) S i.117; M i.88; A i.138.
Gopita (adj.) [pp. of gopeti] protected, guarded, watched (lit. & fig.) J vi.367; Miln 345; SnA 116 (˚indriya= guttindriya); Sdhp 398.
Gopeti [Sk. gopayati, gup; cp. gutta, gottā] to watch, guard, pot. gopetha Dh 315; -- pp. gopita (q. v.).
Gopphaka [Dem. of goppha=Sk. gulpha] the ankle Vin iv.112; A iv.102; J v.472; DhA ii.80, 214; SnA ii.230.
Gomika [Sk. gomin] an owner of cows S i.6=Sn 33, 34.
Golikā see godhā1.
Golomika (adj.) [inverted diaeretic form fr. Sk. gulma=P. gumba: viz. *golmika> *golmika>golomika] like a cluster; in phrase massuŋ golomikaŋ kārāpeti "to have the beard trimmed into a ball -- or cluster -- shape" Vin ii.134. Bdhgh's expln "like a goat's beard" (cp. Vin. Texts iii.138) is based on pop. etym. go+loma+ ika "cow -- hair -- like," the discrepancy being that go does not mean goat.
Goḷaka a ball ThA 255 (kīḷā˚).
˚Gha (adj. -- suffix to ghan) killing, destroying, see hanati. -- iṇagha at Sn 246 is v. l. SS for iṇaghāta. Cp. paṭi˚ & see also ghana2 & ghāta.
Ghaŋsati1 [Sk. gharṣati, *ghṛṣ to *gher to rub or grind, cp. Gr. xe/rados, xerma/s, xri/w, enlarged in Lat. frendo= Ags. grindan to grind] to rub, crush, grind, S ii.238; J i.190 (=ghasituŋ? to next?) 216; vi.331. -- Caus. ghaŋsāpeti to rub against, to allow to be rubbed or crushed Vin ii.266. Cp. upani˚, pari˚, & pahaŋsati1. <-> Pass. ghaŋsīyati (ghaŋsiyati) to rub (intr.), to be rubbed Vin i.204; ii.112.
Ghaŋsati2 [=haŋsati for Sk. haṛsati, see haŋsati] to be pleased, to rejoice J iv.56 (v. l. ghasati). Cp. pahaŋsati2.
Ghaŋsana rubbing, in pāda -- gh ˚ī a towel for rubbing the feet Vin ii.130.
Ghaŋsikā in go˚, cow -- hide (?) see go.
Ghaccā (f.) [fr. hanati, han and ghan] destruction (usually -- ˚) D iii.67 (mūla˚); J i.176 (sakuṇa˚).
Ghañña (adj. -- n.) [fr. Sk. ghana to han, cp. ghānya & hatya] killing, destroying ( -- ˚) see atta˚.
Ghaṭa1 [Non -- Aryan?] a hollow vessel, a bowl, vase, pitcher. Used for holding water, as well as for other purposes, which are given under pānīya˚ paribhojana˚ vacca˚ at Vin i.157=352=M i.207. In the Vinaya freq. combd with kolamba, also a deep vessel: i.209, 213, 225, 286. -- As water -- pitcher: J i.52, 93 (puṇṇa˚), 166; VvA 118, 207, 244 (˚satena nhāto viya); PvA 66 (udaka˚), 179 (pānīya˚), 282. -- In general: S iv.196. For holding a light (in formula antoghaṭe padīpo viya upanissayo pajjalati) J i.235 (cp. kuṭa), PvA 38. Used as a drum J vi.277 (=kumbhathūna); as bhadda˚ Sdhp 319, 329.
-- pamāṇa (adj.) of the size of a large pot J ii.104; PvA 55.
Ghaṭa2 (m. & f.) [Sk. ghaṭā; conn. with ganthati to bind together] multitude, heap, crowd, dense mass, i. e. thicket, cluster. itthi˚ a crowd of women J iv.316; maccha˚ a swarm of fish J ii.227; vana˚ dense forest J ii.385; iv.56; v.502; vi.11, 519, 564; brahma˚ company of brahmins J vi.99.
Ghaṭaka [Dem. of prec.] 1. a small jar (?) Vin ii.129, 130 (combd w. kataka & sammajjanī); cp. Vin. Texts iii.130. -- 2. the capital of a pillar J i.32 (cp. kumbha).
Ghaṭati [Sk. ghaṭate, to granth, cp. ganthati. The Dhtp gives two roots ghaṭ, of which one is expld by "ghāṭane" (No. 554), the other by "īhāyaŋ," i. e. from exertion (No. 98)] to apply oneself to, to exert oneself, to strive; usually in formula uṭṭhahati gh˚ vāyamati M i.86; S i.267 (yamati for vāy˚); Pug 51; or yuñjati gh˚ vāy˚ J iv.131. -- Sdhp 426, 450.
Ghaṭana see [Ghaṭṭana] .
Ghaṭikā1 (f.) [to ghaṭa1] a small bowl, used for begging alms Th 2, 422 (=ThA 269: bhikkhā -- kapāla).
Ghaṭikā2 (f.) [to ghaṭa2, orig. meaning "knot," cp. gantha & gaṇṭhi, also gaṇḍa ] 1. a small stick, a piece of a branch, a twig J i.331; iv.87 (khadira˚); vi.331; Th 2, 499 (=khaṇḍa ThA 290). upadhānaghaṭikā J iii.179 (belonging to the outfit of an executioner); pāsa˚ J ii.253 is a sort of magic stick or die (=pāsaka) <-> 2. a game of sticks ("tip -- cat" sticks Miln trsl. ii.32). D i.6≈(DA i.85: ghaṭikā ti vuccati dīgha -- daṇḍakena rassa daṇḍaka -- paharaṇa kīḷā, tip -- cat); Vin ii.10; iii.181; M i.266; A v.203; Miln 229. -- 3. a stack of twigs S ii.178, 4; (a stick used as) a bolt Vin ii.120, 208; iii.119; usually as sūci˚ a needle -- shaped stick Vin ii.237 (cp. Vin. Texts iii.106); S iv.290; Ud 52; J i.346. Cp. gaṇḍikādhāna.
Ghaṭita [pp. of ghaṭeti] connected, combined Vism 192.
Ghaṭī (f.) [to ghaṭa1] a jar DhA i.426. In cpds. also ghaṭi˚.
-- odana rice boiled in a jar DhA i.426; -- kaṭāha a water pot, or rather a bowl for gathering alms (cp. ghaṭikā1) Vin ii.115 (=ghaṭi -- kapāla Bdhgh); -- kāra a potter DhA i.380; Np. of a kumbhakāra S i.35, 60; M ii.45 sq. (= ˚suttanta, mentioned as such at DhA iii.251); J i.43.
Ghaṭīyati [Pass. of ghaṭeti] 1. to be connected or con- tinued DhA i.46 (paveṇī na gh.), 174. -- 2. to be obstructed Nd2 102 (=virujjhati, paṭihaññati).
Ghaṭeti [Denom. fr. ghaṭa2, cp. gantheti] to join, to connect, to unite J i.139; freq. in anusandhiŋ ghaṭetvā adding the connection (between one rebirth & another) J i.220, 308.
Ghaṭṭa see araghaṭṭa; meaning "rubbed, knocked against" in phrase ghaṭṭa -- pāda -- tala SnA 582 (for ugghaṭṭha); also at Vin iv.46 in def. of vehāsa -- kuṭī (a cell or hut with air, i. e., spacious, airy) as majjhimassa purisassa a -- sīsa -- ghaṭṭā "so that a man of medium height does not knock his head (against the ceiling)"; of uncertain meaning ("beating"?) at J i.454 (v. l. for T. ghota).
Ghaṭṭana (nt.) [Sk. ghaṭana, to granth, cp. gantha] 1. combining, putting together, combination, composition, J i.220; PA. 312, etc. -- 2. striking, fig. insulting (ghaṭṭana=āsajjana) VvA 55. To meaning "strike" cp. saŋghaṭṭana.
Ghaṭṭeti [Sk. ghaṭṭayati] to strike, beat, knock against, touch; fig. to offend, mock, object to. (a) lit. M ii.4 (jannukena; text reads ghatteti, v. l. ghaṭeti); Sn 48 (=saŋ˚ Nd2 233); J i.218; Pv iv.109 (=paṭihaŋsati PvA 271); DA i.256 (=khuŋseti); DhA i.251. -- (b) fig. A iii.343; Sn 847 (cp. Nd1 208); Vism 18. -- pp. ghaṭṭita Pug 30, 36; psychologically ghaṭṭayati=ruppati. B or S iii.86. -- Pass. ghaṭīyati (q.v.). -- Cp. āsajja and ugghāṭeti.
Ghaṇṭā (f.) a small bell (cp. kinkanikā) J iv.215; VvA 36, 37, 279 (khuddaka˚). As ghaṇṭī at Vism 181.
Ghata (nt.) [Vedic ghṛta, ghṛ to sprinkle, moisten] clari- fied butter VvA 326; Miln 41; Sdhp 201 ( -- bindu). With ref. to the sacrificial fire (fire as eating ghee, or being sprinkled w. ghee) ghatāsana; J i.472; v.64, 446; Pv i.85 (ghatasitta).
Ghana1 [Vedic ghana, cp. Gr. eu)qhnh/s?] (a) (adj.) solid, compact, massive; dense, thick; in eka˚ of one solid mass (of sela, rock) Vin i.185=Dh 81=Th 1, 643= Miln 386; A iii.378, cp. ghanasela -- pabbata DhA i.74. -- gh. paŋsu J i.264, paṭhavī (solid ground) J i.74; PvA 75; palāsa (foliage) PvA 113; buddharasmiyo J i.12; ˚maŋsa solid, pure flesh DhA i.80; ˚sāṭaka (thick cloth) J i.292; ˚sañchanna (thickly covered) PvA 258; ˚suvaṇṇakoṭṭima DhA iv.135; abbha˚ a thick cloud Sn 348 (cp. SnA 348). -- (b) (m.) the foetus at a certain stage (the last before birth & the 4th in the enum. of the foll. stages: kalala, abbuda, pesī, gh.) S i.206; J iv.496; Miln 40; Vism 236. The latter meaning is semantically to be explained as "swelling" & to be compared with Gr. bru/w to swell and e(/mbruon=embryo (the gravid uterus).
Ghana2 [Vedic ghana to hanti (ghanti, cp. ghātayati), *gṷhen "strike," cp. Gr. qei/nw, fo/nos, Lat. of -- fendo, Ags. gud, Ohg. gundea] a club, a stick, a hammer; in ayo˚ an iron club VvA 20. Also coll. term for a musical instrument played by striking, as cymbal, tambourine, etc. VvA 37.
Ghanika [to ghana1 in meaning of "cloud" (Sk.)] a class of devas (cloud -- gods?) Miln 191.
Ghamma [Vedic gharma=Gr. qermo/s, Lat. formus, Ohg. etc. warm; to *gṷher "warm," cp. Sk. ghṛṇoti, hara; Gr. qe/ros, etc.] heat; hot season, summer. Either in loc. ghamme J iv.172 (=gimha -- kāle); Pv iv.53 & ghammani ("in summer" or "by the heat") S i.143= J iii.360 (sampareta overcome by heat); Sn 353; J iv.239; v.3. -- Or. in cpd. with ˚abhitatta (ghammâbhitatta, overpowered by heat) M i.74; D ii.266; A iii.187 sq.; Sn 1014 (cp. 353 ghammatatta); Miln 318; VvA 40; PvA 114.
Ghara1 (nt.; pl. ˚ā Dh 241, 302) [cp. gaha & geha] a house A ii.68; Sn 43 (gahaṭṭhā gharaŋ āvasantā), 337 (abl. gharā), 889 (id. gharamhā); J i.290 (id. gharato); iv.2, 364, 492 (ayo˚); Pug 57; Miln 47. Combd with vatthu PvA 3, 17. -- sūcighara a needle -- case VvA 251.
-- ājira house -- yard Vism 144 (where Dhs A 116 in id. passage reads gharadvāra). -- āvāsa the household life (as contrasted with the life of a mendicant) Vin ii.180 (gharāvāsatthaŋ); A ii.208; M i.179, 240, 267, 344; Sn 406 (cp. S v.350); J i.61; PvA 61; -- kapoṭa [Sk. gṛhakapota] the house -- pigeon Miln 364, 403; -- golikā house or domestic lizard J ii.147. -- dāsī a female house -- slave Pv ii.321; -- dvāra a house -- door J iv.142; Dhs A 116; PvA 93; -- bandhana the bonds of the house, i. e. the establishing of marriage DhA i.4; -- mukha an opening in the house, the front of the house Nd2 177; -- mesin one who looks after the house, a pater familias, householder Sn 188; It 112 (gahaṭṭha+); J vi.575; -- sandhi a cleft or crevice in the house PvA 24; -- sūkara a tame, domestic pig DhA iv.16.
Ghara2 [a drink (cp. gala) & garala poison] (˚ -- ); in -- ˚dinnak- ābādha sickness in consequence of a poisonous drink (expl. as suffering fr. the results of sorcery) Vin i.206 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.60); -- visa poison Pug 48; DhA ii.38; -- sappa a poisonous snake DhA ii.256.
Gharaṇī (f.) [fr. ghara1] a house -- wife Vin i.271; S i.201; Pv iii.19 (=ghara -- sāminī PvA 174); DhA iii.209.
Ghasa (adj. -- n.) eating, an eater; in mahagghasa a big eater A v.149 (of the crow); Dh 325; Miln 288.
Ghasati [Vedic grasati & *ghasti, pp. grasta, cp. Gr. gra/w to gnaw, gra/stis fodder, Lat. gramen grass] to eat J iii.210; ppr. ghasamāna Vin ii.201; Th 1, 749. -- Cp. ghasa, ghasta & ghāsa. See also jaddhu. Desid. jighacchati.
Ghasta [pp. of ghasati=Sk. grasta] only in vanka˚ having eaten or swallowed the hook (cp. grasta -- vanka) D ii.266 (v -- g˚ va ambujo); J vi.113.
Ghāṭa see saŋ˚; ghāṭana see ghaṭati.
Ghāta (usually -- ˚) [Sk. ghāta & ghātana; to han (ghan), strike, kill; see etym. under ghana2 & hanti] killing, murdering; slaughter, destruction, robbery D i.135 (gāma˚, etc. village robbery); setu˚ the pulling down of a bridge (fig.) Vin i.59, etc. (see setu); pantha˚ highway robbery, brigandage, "waylaying" J i.253. <-> Th 2, 474, 493 (=samugghāta Com.); Sn 246 (ina˚); VvA 72 (pāṇa˚+pāṇa -- vadha & ˚atipāta). Cp. next & vi˚; saŋ˚.
Ghātaka (adj. -- ˚) murdering, destroying, slaughtering Vin i.89 (arahanta˚), 136 (id.), 168 (id.); ii.194 (manussa˚); iv.260 (tala˚) J iv.366 (gāma˚ corā robbers infesting the village); v.397 (thī˚=itthi˚); Pug 56 (maccha˚). -- As noun: (m.) one who slays, an executioner: go˚ a bull -- slaughterer M i.244, etc. (see go); cora˚ an executioner or hangman J iii.41; Pug 56; PvA 5. -- (nt.) brigandage, robbery, slaughtering: gāmaghātakaŋ karoti J i.200.
Ghātikā (f. abstr. to ghātaka) murder J i.176 sq.
Ghātita (adj.) [pp. of ghāteti] killed, destroyed ThA 289; also in Der. ghātitatta (nt.) the fact of having killed J i.167. Cp. ugghātita.
Ghātin (adj. -- n.) killing; a murderer J i.168 (pāṇa˚); vi.67 (ghātimhi= ghātake).
Ghātimant (adj.) able to strike, able to pierce (of a needle), in ghana˚ going through hard material easily J iii.282.
Ghāteti [Denom. fr. ghāta, cp. Sk. ghātayati to han] tc kill, slay, slaughter It 22 (yo na hanti na ghāteti); Dh 129, 405; J i.255; Mhvs vii.35, 36. -- aor. aghātayi J i.254; ger. ghātetvā J i.166. -- Caus. ghātāpeti to have somebody killed J iv.124. -- Cp. ghacca, ghātita, āghāteti.
Ghāna (nt.) [Sk. ghrāṇa to ghrā, see ghāyati. On n for ṇ cp. Trenckner, Notes, p. 81] the nose; usually in its function as organ of smell=sense of smell (either in phrase ghānena gandhaŋ ghāyati: to smell an odour by means of the nose; or in ghana -- viññeyyā gandhā: odours which are sensed by the nose). In the enum. of the senses gh. is always mentioned in the 3rd place (after cakkhu & sota, eye & ear); see under rūpa. In this connection: Vin i.34; D i.21, 245; iii.102, 244 sq.; S i.115; M i.112, 191; ii.42; Dh 360; Pug 20; Miln 270; Vism 444 sq. (with defn). -- In other connections: Pv ii.24 (ghāna -- chinna, one whose nose is cut off).
-- āyatana the organ of smell D iii.243, 280; Dhs 585, 605, 608; -- indriya the sense of smell D iii.239; Dhs 585 etc. (as above); -- dhātu the element of smell Dhs. as above; -- viññāṇa perception of smell Dhs 443, 608, 628; -- samphassa contact with the sense of smell S i.115; D iii. & Dhs as above.
Ghāyati1 [Sk. ghrāti & jighrati, to ghrā, cp. gandha] to smell, always with gandhaŋ ger. ghātvā S iv.71, 74 or ghāyitvā J i.210 (jālagandhaŋ); iii.52 (macchagandhaŋ); Miln 347. Cp. sāyati & upagghāyati.
Ghāyati2 [a variant of jhāyati] to be consumed, to be tor- mented by thirst Pv i.1110 (ghāyire=ghāyanti PvA 60; v. l. BB jhāyire & jhāynati) Miln 397.
Ghāsa [Vedic ghāsa, fr. ghasati, q. v. cp. Lat. gramen= grass] grass for fodder, pasturing: food J i.511 (˚ŋ kurute); PvA 173 (˚atthāya gacchati "go feeding"). Mostly in: -- esana search for food (=gocara) S i.141; Sn 711. -- Cp. vi˚.
-- chada (chāda & chādana) food & clothing, i. e. tending, fostering, good care (=posana) (act.) or being well looked after, well provided (pass.); chada: Pug 51; chāda: J i.94; A i.107; ii.85; iii.385; chādana: D i.60; M i.360; VvA 23, 137; -- hāraka one who fetches the fodder (food) Th 1, 910.
Ghāsana (nt.)=ghāsa; in -- ˚ṭṭhāna pasture (=gocara) VvA 218.
Ghuṭṭha [Sk. ghuṣṭa, pp. ghuṣ, see ghoseti & cp. saŋ˚] pro- claimed, announced; renowned J i.50 (of festival); 425 (nakkhattaŋ); ii.248 (ussava); Pv ii.82 (dūra˚ of wide renown, world -- famed of Bārāṇasī); DhA iii.100 (chaṇe ghuṭṭhe when the fair was opened).
Ghuru -- ghuru onomat. expression of snoring & grunting noise [gṛ -- gṛ to *gel or *ger, see note on gala] in -- passāsa (& ˚in) snoring & breathing heavily, panting, snorting & puffing S i.117 (of Māra); J i.160 (of sleeping bhikkhus, gh˚ kākacchamānā breathing loud & snoring). Cp. next.
Ghurughurāyati [Denom. fr. prec.] to snore J iii.538; DhA i.307. Cp. Prk. ghurughuranti varāhā (grunting hogs) & ghurukkanti vagghā (roaring tigers).
Ghoṭaka [cp. Sk. ghoṭaka, Halāyudha 2, 281] a (bad) horse J vi.452.
Ghota is read at J i.454, probably for ghaṭṭa; meaning is "striking, stroke," combd with kasā, whip.
Ghora (adj.) [Vedic ghora, orig. meaning, wailing, howling, lamenting, to *gher, *ger, see note on gala & cp. ghuru. A root ghur is given by Dhtp 487 in meaning of "bhīma," i. e. horrible. -- Rel. to Goth. gaurs, sad; Ohg. gōrag, miserable; & perhaps Lat. funus, funeral. See Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.] terrible, frightful, awful Vin ii.147. Freq. as attr. of niraya (syn. with dāruṇa; PvA 87, 159, 206) Pv i.1012; iv.18. Of an oath (sapatha) Pv i.68; ii.1216. -- ghorassara of a terrible cry (Ep. of an ass) Miln 363, 365.
Ghosa [Vedic ghoṣa to ghus] 1. shout, sound, utterance Vin ii.155 ("Buddha" -- ghosa); M i.294; A i.87, 228; Sn p. 106; Sn 696, 698; Dhs 637, 720 (+ghosa -- kamma). -- 2. shouting, howling, wailing (of Petas) Pv iii.34; iv.36, 338.
-- pamāṇa to be measured (or judged) by one's reputation A ii.71=Pug 53; also as pamāṇika DhA iii.114 (in same context).
Ghosaka (adj.) sounding, proclaiming, shouting out ( -- ˚), in dhamma˚ praising the Law J ii.286; Satthu guṇa˚ sounding the praise of the Master DhA iii.114. As n. Name of a deva (Gh. devaputta) DhA i.173.
Ghosanā (f.) fame, renown, praise, in Māra˚ J i.71.
Ghosavant (adj.) full of sound, roaring J iii.189.
Ghosita 1. [pp. of ghoseti] proclaimed, renowned, PvA 107 (=ghuṭṭha); VvA 31 (nakkhattaŋ). As Npl. Ghositārāma DhA i.53, 161, 208. -- 2. [n. ag.=ghositṛ, cp. ghosaka] one who proclaims, advocates, or heralds; in Np. Ghositaseṭṭhi DhA i.187.
Ghoseti [Denom. of ghosa, cp. Sk. ghoṣayati, caus. to ghuṣ] to proclaim, announce; cry aloud, wail, shout J ii.112; iii.52; Pv ii.937 (=uggh˚); iv.63; pp. ghosita & ghuṭṭha (q. v.). -- Caus. ghosāpeti to have proclaimed J i.71.
Ca (indef. enchtic particle) [Vedic ca adv. to rel. pron. *qṷo, idg. *que=Cr. te, Lat. que, Goth. -- h. Cp. ka, ki, ku] 1. Indefinite (after demonstr. pron. in the sense of kiŋ=what about? or how is it? cp. kiŋ)=ever, whoever, what -- ever, etc. [Sk. kaśca, Gr. o(s te, Lat: quisque, Goth. hvazuh] so ca whoever (see below 3), tañ ca pan' amhākaŋ ruccati tena c' amhā attamanā M i.93; yañ ca kho . . . ceteti yañ ca pakappeti . . . whatever he thinks, whatever he intends . . . S ii.65. As a rule the Pali form corresp. to Sk. kaśca is *kascid=koci, & ci (cid) is the regular P. representative of the indefinite ca (cp. cana & api). -- 2. Copulative or disjunctive according to the general context being positive or negative. (a) copulative: and, then, now: tadā ca now then, and then (in historical exposition) J iii.188. Most frequent in connecting two or three words, usually placed after the second, but also after the third: atthaŋ anatthañ ca Dh 256; pubbâparāni ca Dh 352; alaŋ etehi ambehi jambūhi panasehi ca J ii.160. -- In the same sense added to each link of the chain as ca -- ca (cp. Sk. ca -- ca, Gr. te te, Lat. que que; also mixed with constituents of similar pairs as api -- ca, cp. te -- kai): tuyhañ ca tassā ca to you and her (orig. this or whatever to you, whatever to her)=to you as well as to her J i.151. Often with the first member emphasized by eva: c' eva, as well as: hasi c' eva rodi ca he laughed as well as cried J i.167; maŋsena c' eva phalāphalena ca with flesh as well as with all kinds of fruit J iii.127; subhaddako c' eva supesalo ca J iii.82; c' eva apace padūse pi ca waste and even defile ThA 72 (Ap v.40). <-> (b) disjunctive: but (esp. after a negation): yo ca but who Th 1, 401; yadā ca but when (cp. tadā ca) J iii.128. In conditional clauses (cp. 3) combd with sace=but if, on the other hand: sace agāraŋ ajjhāvasati . . . sace ca pabbajati agārā Sn 1003. With neg, na ca=but not: mahatī vata te bondi, na ca paññā tadūpikā (but your wisdom is not in the same proportion) J ii.160. <-> 3. Conditional: if [=Vedic ced, Lat. absque] D i.186, 207; ii.36, 57 (jāti ca not va); M i.91; S iii.66 (rūpañ ca attā abhavissa); A i.58; v.87; J ii.110 (ciram pi kho khadeyya yavaŋ . . . ravamāno ca dūsayi: "he might have caten a long time, if he had not come to harm by his cry," or "but"); iv.487; v.185, 216 (Sakko ca me varaŋ dajjā so ca labbhetha me varo: "if S. will give me a wish, that wish will be granted," or: "whatever wish he will allow, that one will be fulfilled"); vi.206, 208. -- na ca (at the beginning of an interrog. phrase)= if not S i.190 (ahaŋ ca kho . . . pavāremi, na ca me Bhagavā kiñci garahati: if the Bh. will not blame me). For BSk. ca=ced see AvŚ ii.189, n. o.
Cakita (adj.) [Sk. cakita, cak] disturbed; afraid, timid Dāvs iv.35, 46.
Cakora [Sk. cakora to kol (kor), see note on gala] the francolin partridge (Perdix rufa) J v.416; Vv 358; VvA 163. See also cankora.
Cakka (nt.) [Vedic cakra, redupl. formation fr. *quel to turn round (cp. P. kaṇṭha > Lat. collus & see also note on gala)=that which is (continuously) turning, i. e. wheel, or abstr, the shape or periphery of it, i. e. circle. Cakra=Gr. ku/klos, Ags. hveohl, hveol=wheel. The unredupl. form in Sk. carati (versatur), Gr. pe/lomai, poleu/w, po/los (pole); Lat. colo, incolo; Obulg. kolo wheel, Oisl. hvel] I. Crude meaning: 1. a wheel (of a carriage) Dh 1; PvA 65 (ratha˚); Miln 27. -- 2. a discus used as a missile weapon J i.74; Pgdp 36; cp. khura˚ a razor as an instr. of torture. -- 3. a disc, a circle: heṭṭhāpādatalesu cakkāni jātāni, forming the 2nd characteristic mark of a Mahāpurisa D ii.17= iii.143; D iii.149. -- J ii.331; Miln 51. -- 4. an array of troops (under tayo vyūhā: paduma˚ cakka˚ sakaṭa˚) J ii.404=iv.343. -- II. Applied meaning: 1. (a wheel as component part of a carriage, or one of a duad or tetrad=) collection, set, part; succession; sphere, region, cycle Vin i.330 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.281); iii.96; iriyāpatha˚ the 4 ways of behaviour, the various positions (standing, walking, sitting, lying down) DA i.249; Sdhp 604. sā˚, miga˚ the sphere or region of dogs & wild animals Miln 178; cakkena (instr.) in succession PvA iii. cakkaŋ kātabbaŋ, or bandhitabbaŋ freq. in Yam. and Paṭṭh, "The cycle of formulated words is to be here repeated." -- 2. (like the four wheels constituting the moving power of a carriage=) a vehicle, instrument, means & ways; attribute, quality; state, condition, esp. good condition (fit instrumentality), catucakka an instr. of four, a lucky tetrad, a fourwheeler of the body as expressing itself in the four kinds of deportment, iriyāpathas A ii.32; S i.16, 63 (catucakkaŋ). In this sense generalized as a happy state, consisting of "4 blessings": paṭirūpadesa -- vāsa, sappurisûpassaya, atta -- sammāpaṇidhi, pubbe -- kata -- puññatā A ii.32; J v.114; mentioned at Ps i.84. Cp. also Sn 554 sq.; 684. Esp. pronounced in the two phrases dhamma -- cakka (the wheel of the Doctrine, i. e. the symbol of conquering efficacy, or happiness implicated in the D.) and brahma -- c˚ the best wheel, the supreme instrument, the noblest quality. Both with pavatteti to start & kcep up (like starting & guiding a carriage), to set rolling, to originate, to make universally known. dhamma˚ e. g. S i.191; A i.23, 101; ii.34, 120; iii.151; iv.313; Sn 556 sq.; 693; J iii.412; Ps ii.159 sq.; PvA 67 (see dhamma). brahma˚ M i.71; S ii.27; A ii.9, 24; iii.9, 417; v.33; Vbh 317 sq.; 344 (see brahma). Cp. cakkavattin (below). -- Cp. vi˚.
-- chinna (udaka) (water of a well) the wheel of which is broken Ud 83; -- bhañjanin one who destroys a state of welfare & good J v.112 (patirāpadesavāsādino kusala -- cakkassa bhañjanī C.); -- bheda breaking peace or concord, sowing discord Vin ii.198; iii.171; -- yuga a pair of wheels Vv 832; -- ratana the treasure of the wheel, that is of the sun (cp. Rh. D. Buddh. Suttas p. 252; Dialogues ii.197, 102) D ii.171; iii.59 sq., 75; J i.63; ii.311; DA i.249. See also cakkavattin; -- vaṭṭaka (nt.) a scoop -- wheel (a wheel revolving over a well with a string of earthen pots going down empty & coming up full, after dredger fashion) Vin ii.122; -- vattin (cp. dhammacakkaŋ pavatteti above) he who sets rolling the Wheel, a just & faithful king (rājā hoti c. dhammiko dhammarājā cāturanto Sn p. 106, in corresp. pass. v. 1002 as vijeyya pathaviŋ imaŋ adaṇḍena asatthena dhammena -- m -- anusāsati). A definition is given by Bdhgh. at DA i.249. -- Three sorts of c. are later distinguished: a cakkavāla -- c˚ a universal king, or cāturanta -- c˚ (ruling over four great continents Sn p. 106; KhA 227), a dīpa -- c˚ (ruling over one), a padesa -- c˚ (ruling over part of one) Usually in phrase rājā cakka vattin: D i.88; iii.156; iv.302; v.44, 99, 342; D ii.16, 172; iii.59 sq., 75, 142 sq.; M iii.65; A i.76, 109 sq.; ii.37, 133, 245; iii.147 sq; 365; iv.89, 105; v.22; Kh viii.12 (˚sukha); J i.51; ii.395; iv.119; Vbh 336; PvA 117; VvA 18; Sdhp 238, 453; DhA ii.135 (˚sirī). -- ˚gabbha Vism 126: -- ˚rajjaŋ kāresi J ii.311; -- viddha (nt.) a particular form of shooting J v.130; -- samārūḷha (adj.) having mounted the wheels, i. e. their carts (of janapadā) A i.178; iii.66, 104.
Cakkalaka [fr. cakka] a disc or tuft (?) Vism 255 (kaḷīra˚, where KhA 50 reads in same context kaḷīra -- daṇḍa).
Cakkali (f.) drapery Vin ii.174.
Cakkalikā a window blind, curtain Vin ii.148.
Cakkavāka [Vedic cakravāka, cp. kṛkavāku, to sound root kṛ, see note on gala] the ruddy goose (Anas Casarca) J iii.520; iv.70 sq. (N. of J No. 451); Pv ii.123; Miln 364, 401; -- f. cakkavākī J iii.524; vi.189=501.
Cakkavāḷa (m. & nt.) a circle, a sphere, esp. a mythical range of mountains supposed to encircle the world; pl. worlds or spheres J i.53, 203; vi.330; Vism 205 (its extent), 207, 367, 421; DhsA 297; DhA 11. 15; iii.498; in the trope "cakkavāḷaŋ atisambādhaŋ brahmaloko atinīco" (=the whole world cannot hold it) to express immensity DhA i.310; VvA 68.
-- gabbha the interior of the C. sphere J iv.119; DA i.284; -- pabbata (nt.) the C. mountains, "world's end" J iii.32; vi.272; -- rajja (nt.) the whole world, strictly speaking the whole region of a sphere J ii.392.
Cakkhu (nt.) [Vedic cakṣuḥ, etym. not clear, as redupl. perhaps to īks, akṣa eye, kṣạṇa moment, or as intens. to cit, cp. cinteti, & see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under inquam] the eye (nom. sg. cakkhuŋ Vin i.34; S i.115; M iii.134, etc.). -- I. The eye as organ of sense -- (a) psychologically: cakkhunā rūpaŋ disvā "seeing visible object (shape) with the eye" (Nd2 on rūpa q. v.) is the defin. of this first & most important of the senses (cp. Pv ii.61 dakkhiṇa c.=the most valuable thing): the psychology of sight is discussed at DA i.194 sq., and more fully at Dhs 597 sq. (see DhsA 306 sq; Dhs trsl. 173 sq.); cp. cak khunā puriso ālokati rūpagatāni Nd2 234. In any enumeration of the senses cakkhu heads the list, e. g. Vin i.34; D i.21; ii.308, 336 sq.; iii.102, 225, 244 sq.; 269; Nett 28. -- See rūpa. Also combd. with sota: M i.318; iii.264; A i.281. -- cakkhusmiŋ haññati rūpehi S iv.201; hata˚ A i.129. passāmi naŋ manasā cakkhunā va "I see him with my mind as with my eye" Sn 1142. -- Vin i.184; S i.32, 199; iv.123; Dh 360; J iv.137; DA i.183; Nett 191. Vism 444 sq. As adj. ( -- ˚) seeing, having or catching sight of: eka˚ (dvi˚) one -- eyed (two˚) A i.128 sq.; āmisa˚ seeing an object of sensual enjoyment S ii.226; iv.159; J v.91 (= kilesalola). acakkhu blind A iii.250, 256; Ps i.129. -- (b) ethically: as a "sense" belonging to what is called "body" (kāya) it shares all the qualities of the latter (see kāya), & is to be regarded as an instr. only, i. e. the person must not value it by itself or identify himself with it. Subduing the senses means in the first place acquiring control over one's eyes (cp. okkhitta cakkhu, with down -- cast eyes Sn 63, 411, 972; Pv iv.344; & indriyesu guttadvāra; ˚indriya). In this connection the foll. passages may be mentioned: Vin i.34; D i.70; S iv.123; ii.244 (aniccaŋ, etc.); iii.255 (do.) iv.81, 128 (na tumhākaŋ); Ps I.132 (aniccatṭhaŋ). Numerous others see under rūpa. -- II. The eve as the most important channel of mental acquiring, as faculty of perception & apperception; insight, knowledge (cp. veda, olda to vid, to see). In connection with ñāṇa (ghw_sis) it refers to the apperception of the truth (see dhamma -- cakkhu): intuition and recognition, which means perfect understanding (cp. the use of the phrase jānāti passati "to know and to see"=to understand clearly). See e. g. S ii.7 -- 11, 105; iv.233; v.179; 258; 422 sq. Most frequently as dhamma˚ "the eye of the truth," said of the attainment of that right knowledge which leads to Arahantship, in phrase virajaŋ vitamalaŋ dh -- cakkhuŋ uppajjati Vin i.16; D i.86, 110; S ii.134 sq.; iv.47; 107; v.467; A iv.186; Ps ii.150 sq.; 162; Miln 16. Similarly paññā˚, It 52; ariya˚ M i.510. -- III. The eye as the instr. of supersensuous perception, "clear" sight, clairvoyance. This is the gift of favoured beings whose senses are more highly developed than those of others, and who through right cognition have acquired the two "eyes" or visionary faculties, termed dibba-cakkhu & buddha -- cakkhu It 52; D ii.38 resp. They are most completely described at Nd2 235 (under cakkhumā), & the foll. categories of the range of application of cakkhu are set forth: 1. maŋsa -- cakkhu: the physical eye which is said to be exceptionally powerful & sensitive. See Kv iii.7 (trans. p. 149 ff.). Vism 428 (maŋsa˚ 2 ñāṇa˚). -- 2. dibba -- ˚: the deva -- eye, the eye of a seer, all-pervading, & seeing all that proceeds in hidden worlds.<-> 3. paññā˚: the eye of wisdom; he who knows all that can be known (jānaŋ passaŋ recognizing & seeing, i. e. of perfect understanding; cakkhubhūta ñāṇa˚ dhamma˚ brahma˚). -- 4. buddha˚: the eye of a Buddha or of complete intuition, i. e. of a person who "sees the heart of man," of a being realizing the moral state of other beings and determined to help them on the Path to Right Knowledge. -- 5. samanta˚: (a summary account of Nos. 1 -- 4, & in all Scripture -- passages a standing Ep. of Gotama Buddha, see below), the eye of all round knowledge, the eye of a Tathāgata, of a being perfected in all wisdom. -- Out of these are mentioned & discussed singly or in sets: (Nos. 1 -- 5): DhsA 306; SnA 351; (Nos. 1 -- 3:) It 52=Kvu 251 sq. (It 52=Kvu 254); (dibba:) Vin i.8, 288; ii.183; iii.5; D i.82, 162; iii. 52, iii. 281; M i.213; S i.144, 196; ii.122, 213, 276; iv.240; v.266, 305; A i.165, 256, 281 sq.; iii.19, 29, 418; iv.85, 141, 178, 291; v.13, 35, 68, 200, 211, 340; J iii.346; Ps i.114; ii.175; Vbh 344; PvA 5. -- (paññā˚:) S iv.292; v.467, A i.35; DhA iii.174, 175. -- (buddha˚:) Vin i.6; S i.138; Ps ii.33; PvA 61. -- (samanta˚:) S i.137=Nd2 2354; Sn 345, 378, 1063, 1069, 1090, 1133; Ps ii.31=Nd2 2355.
-- āyatana (either cakkh' or cakkhv˚) the organ or sense of sight D iii.243, 280, 290; Dhs 585, 653; -- indriya (cakkhundriya) the organ of eye, faculty of vision D i.70; iii.225, 239; A i.113; Dhs 585, 597, 661, 830, 971; Vism 7; -- karaṇa (always in combn w. ñāṇa -- karaṇa) producing (right) insight (and knowledge) It 82 (of kusalavitakkā); f. ˚ī S iv.331 (of majjhimā paṭipadā); Ps ii.147; -- dada one who gives the eye (of understanding) Th 1, 3; -- dhātu the element of vision Dhs 597, 703, 817. -- patha the range of vision; sight J i.65 =DhA i.173; J i.146; iv.189, 378, 403 (=cakkhūnaŋ etaŋ nāmaŋ C.); VvA 119; -- bhāta (+ñāṇa˚) (adj.) one who has become the possessor of right understanding S ii.255; iv.94; A v.226 sq. -- lola greed (or greedy) with the eye Nd2 177; -- viññāṇa consciousness by means of visual perception, visual cognition Vin i.34; D ii.308, 310; iii.243; Dhs 433, 556, 585, 589, 620; cp. Mrs. Rh. D. Buddh. Psych. Eth. p. 177; Miln trsl. i.80, 89; -- viññeyya (adj.) (i. e. rūpā) to be apperceived by the sense of sight Vin i.184; D ii.281; iii.234; Dhs 589, 967, 1095; -- samphassa contact with the sense of vision (usually with ˚ja: sprung from visual contact) (of vedanā, feelings) Vin i.34; D ii.308 sq.; iii.243; Ps i.5, 40, 136.
Cakkhuka (adj.) having eyes, seeing ( -- ˚), in dibba˚ A i.23. 148 (see cakkhu iii.2) and a˚ blind D i.191; S iii.140; Nd 67.
Cakkhumant (adj.) [cakkhu+mant] having eyes, being gifted with sight; of clear sight, intuition or wisdom; possessing knowledge (cp. samantacakkhu) D i.76 (one who knows, i. e. a connoisseur); cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhinti "those who have eyes to see shall see" (of the Buddha) D i.85, 110, etc. -- Vin i.16; S i.27; A i.116, 124; iv.106; Dh 273; It 108, 115; DA i.221; DhA iii.403; iv.85. -- Esp. as Ep. of the Buddha: the Allwise S i.121, 134, 159, 210; Sn 31, 160, 992, 1028, 1116, 1128; Vv 125 (=pañcahi cakkhūhi cakkhumā Buddho Bhagavā VvA 60, cp. cakkhu iii.); Vv 8127.
Cakkhula (adj.) [=cakkhuka] in visama˚ squint -- eyed. squinting J i.353; vi.548.
Cakkhussa (adj.) [Vedic cakṣuṣya] pleasing to or good for the eyes (opp. a˚) Vin ii.137, 148.
Cankama [Sk. cankrama & cankramā, fr. cankamati] (a) walking up & down S iv.104. -- (b) the place where one is walking, esp. a terraced walk, cloister Vin i.15, 182; ii.220; D i.105; S i.212; A i.114; 183; iii.29; iv.87; J i.17; ii.273; v.132 (cp. kattaradaṇḍa -- passages).
Cankamati [Intens. of kamati, to kram=Sk. cankramīti; cp. kamati] to walk about, to walk up & down Vin i.15, 182; ii.193, 220; iv.18; S i.107, 212; PvA 105. -- Caus. cankamāpeti J iii.9.
Cankamana (nt.) [fr. cankamati] 1. walking up & down S ii.282; DhA i.10. -- 2. a cloister walk (=cankama) VvA 188. Usually ˚ -- : Vin i.139 (˚sālā); J iii.85; iv.329; PvA 79 (˚koṭi the far end of the cloister).
Cankamika (adj.) [fr. cankama] one who has the habit of walking about Miln 216 (ṭhāna˚ standing & walking).
Cankora [cp. cakora] the Greek partridge Vv 358 (cp. VvA 163); J vi.538.
Cangavāra [cp. Tamil canguvaḍa a dhoney, Anglo -- Ind. ḍoni, a canoe hollowed from a log, see also doṇi] a hollow vessel, a bowl, cask M i.142; J v.186 (in similes). As ˚ka Miln 365 (trsl. Miln ii.278 by "straining cloth"). <-> Cp. cañcu "a box" Divy 131.
Cangoṭaka [cp. cangavāra] a casket, a box J i.65; iv.257; v.110, 303; vi.369, 534; DhA ii.116; iii.101; VvA 33, 158; Mhvs iv.106; Anvs p. 35 Vism 173.
Caccara (nt.) [Sk. catvara, cp. Trenckner, Notes, p. 56] a quadrangular place, a square, courtyard; a place where four roads meet, a cross road Vin iii.151; iv.271; Miln 1 (+catukkasinghāṭaka), 330 (do.); J i.425 (˚raccha).
Caja (adj.) giving up, to be given up; in cpd. duc˚ hard to give up A iii.50; J v.8. Cp. cāga.
Cajati [Sk. tyajate, tyaj=Gr. so be/w to scare away] 1. to let loose, to emit, to discharge A ii.33; J ii.342 (mutta karīsaŋ) fig. to utter (a speech) J v.362. -- 2. to abandon, to give up, sacrifice (with loc. of person to whom: Asuresu pāṇaŋ S i.224=J i.203) Dh 290; J ii.205; iii.211; v.464; vi.570. -- pp. catta, q. v. -- grd. caja [Sk. tyajya] q. v.
Cañcala (adj.) [Intens. of cal=car, to move, with n instead of r in reduplication, cp. Sk. cañcūryate=carcarīti, cañcala (=*carcara), Gr. gargalizw & gaggalizw to tickle; see also note on gala & cp. cankamati] moving to & fro, trembling, unsteady J iv.498 (=calācala); Sdhp 317, 598.
Caṭula (adj.) [Sk. catura] clever, skilled Mhbv 148. See catura.
Caṇḍa (adj.) [Sk. caṇḍa] fierce, violent; quick -- tempered, uncontrolled, passionate Vin ii.194 (hatthī); D. i.90 (=māṇa -- nissita -- kopa -- yutta DA i.256); S i.176; ii.242; A ii.109=Pug 47 (sakagava˚); J i.450; ii.210, 349; Vism 343, 279 (˚sota, fierce current), (˚hatthi); DhA iv.9 (goṇa) 104; Sdhp 41, 590, 598. -- f. caṇḍī M i.126; J ii.443; iii.259; Pv ii.34 (=kodhanā PvA 83). <-> Compar. caṇḍatara S ii.242. -- In cpds. caṇḍi˚, see caṇḍikata & caṇḍitta.
Caṇḍaka (adj.)=caṇḍa; f. caṇḍikā Pv ii.35, & caṇḍiyā J iii.259 (=kodhaṇā).
Caṇḍāla1 [Vedic caṇḍāla] a man of a certain low tribe, one of the low classes, an outcaste; grouped with others under nīcā kulā (low born clans) as caṇḍālā nesādā veṇā rathakārā pukkusā at A i.107=ii.85=Pug 51. As caṇḍāla -- pukkusā with the four recognized grades of society (see jāti & khattiya) at A i.162. -- Vin iv.6; M ii.152; S v.168 sq. (˚vaŋsa); A iii.214, 228 (brāhmaṇa˚); iv.376; J iv.303; PvA 175; Miln 200. -- f. caṇḍālī A iii.226; Pv iii.113; DhA ii.25. See also pukkusa.
Caṇḍāla2 (nt.) a kind of amusement or trick D i.6≈(=ayo- gulakīḷā play with an iron ball DA i.84).
Caṇḍikata (adj.) [cp. caṇḍa] angry Vin iv.310.
Caṇḍikka (nt.) [*caṇḍikya, of caṇḍika > caṇḍaka] ferocity anger, churlishness Nd2 313, 576, Dhs 418, 1060, 1115, 1231; Vbh 357; DhA ii.227. Cp. caṇḍitta.
Caṇḍitta (nt.) anger Dhs 418; Pug 18=22. Cp. caṇḍikka.
Catukka1 (nt.) [fr. catu=*catuka > *catukyaŋ] 1. a tetrad, a set of four, consisting of four parts: ˚pañcakajjhānā (pl.) the fourfold & the fivefold system of meditation DhsA 168; see cpds. -- 2. a place where four roads meet J vi.389; Miln 330 (see also below); esp. in phrase catukke catukke kasāhi tāḷeti (or is it "in sets of four"? See Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 79) J i.326; ii.123; DhA iv.52. -- 3. a square (in a village) Miln 1, 365; J ii.194; v.459; DhA 317.
-- bhatta a meal for four bhikkhus Vin ii.77; iii.160; -- magga the 4 fold path Nett 113; -- yañña (usually sabba catukka˚) a sacrifice consisting of (all) the four parts J iii.44, 45; PvA 280; cp. J i.335. (Or is it the "cross -- road sacrifice"?)
Catukka2 [origin. "consisting only of one quarter"?] empty, shallow, little Nd2 415 (˚pañña, with omakapañña, lāmaka -- p˚); J iv.441 (nadī=tuccha Com.).
Catuttha (num. ord.) [Vedic caturtha, Idg. *queturto=Gr. te/tratos, Lat. quartus, Ohg. fiordo] the fourth Sn 97, 99, 450; J iii.55; vi.367; ˚ŋ (adv.) for the fourth time DhA iii.174. -- f. catutthī Sn 436; Vism 338. -- See also ( s.v. Aḍḍha) aḍḍhuḍḍha.
-- bhatta food eaten only every fourth day J v.424. -- magga "the fourth Path," of Arahantship DhA i.309; -- mana (?) (nt.) name of the tongue, in so far as it forms the fourth vatthu (beside eyes, ears, nose) according to the gloss: J v.155; extremely doubtful.
Catur, catu˚ in composition [Vedic catvārah (m.) cat- vāri (nt.) fr. *qṷetuor, *qṷetur=Gr. te/ttares (hom. pi/sures), Lat. quattuor, Goth. fidwōr, Ohg. fior, Ags fēower, E. four; catasras (f.) fr. *qṷ(e)tru, cp. tisras. Also as adv. catur fr. *quetrus=Lat. quater & quadru˚] base of numeral four; 1. As num. adj. nom. & acc. m. cattāro (Dh 109; J iii.51) and caturo (Sn 84, 188), f. catasso (Sn 1122), nt. cattāri (Sn. 227); gen. m. catunnaŋ (Sn p. 102), [f. catassannaŋ]; instr. catubbhi (Sn 229), catūhi (Sn 231) & catuhi; loc. catūsu (J i.262) & catusu. -- 2. As num. adv., catu˚ catur˚ in cpds. catuddasa (14), also through elision & reduction cuddasa PvA 55, 283, etc., cp. also cātuddasī. Catuvīsati (24) Sn 457; catusaṭṭhi (64) J i.50; ii.193; PvA 74; caturāsīti (84) usually with vassa -- sahassāni J i.137; ii.311; Pv iv.77; DhA ii.58; PvA 9, 31, 254, etc. See also cattārīsa (40).
-- (r)aŋsa (=caturassa, having four edges, four -- edged Dhs 617; PvA 189 (read ˚sobhitāya); -- (r)anga (consisting of) four limbs or divisions, fourfold M i.77; J i.390; ii.190, 192; vi.169 (uposatha, cp. aṭṭhanga); Dpvs i.6; Sdhp 64; -- (r)angika=prec. Dhs 147, 157, 397; KhA 85; Sdhp 58; -- (r)angin (adj.) comprising four parts, f. ˚inī, of an army consisting of elephants, chariots, cavalry & infantry D ii.190; J ii.102, 104; Vism 146; SnA 225, 353; DhA iv.144; cp. J vi.275; -- (r)angula (adj.) measuring 4 fingers, 4 fingers broad or wide, Vin i.46; S ii.178; J vi.534; Th 1, 1137; Vism 124. -- (r)angulika=prec. Th 2, 498 ( -- ThA, 290); -- (r)anta see cātur˚; -- (r)assa [catur+assa2] four -- cornered, quadrangular, regular Vin ii.310 (Bdhgh); J iv.46 (āvāṭa) 492 (sālā); v.49; Pv ii.119. Cp. caturaŋsa & next; -- (r)assara (see last) with 4 sharp sides (of a hammer; ˚muggara) DhA i.126; -- (r)âdhiṭṭhāna (adj.) one who has taken the four resolutions (see adhiṭṭhāna) M iii.239; -- (r)âpassena (adj.) endowed with the four apassena: lit.: reclining on four A v.29, 30; D iii.269, 270; -- ussada (catussada) full of four, endowed with 4 things, rich in four attributes J iv.309 (expld. p. 311 as having plenty of people, grain, wood & water); iv.422=461 "with four pillows" (p. 422 has caturassada for caturussada, which latter is also to be preferred to catussada, unless this is a haplology). In the same connection occurs satt -- ussada (full of people) D i.111 e. g. & Pv iv.18 (see satta). The formation "cattussada" has probably been influenced by "sattussada"; -- (k)kaṇṇa (& ˚ka) (a) with 4 corners Vin ii.137; J iii.255. -- (b) "between four ears," i. e. secret, of manta (counsel) J vi.391; -- (k) kama walking with four (feet), quadruped Vv 648; Pv i.113; -- kuṇḍika on all fours M i.79; A iii.188; D iii.6; Pv iii.27 (cp. PvA 181); -- koṇa four cornered, crossed, in ˚raccha cross road PvA 24; -- (k)khandha the four khandhas, viz. feeling, perception, synthesis & intellect (see khandha) DhsA 345; -- (g)guṇa fourfold, quadruple D ii.135; S i.27; J i.213; VvA 186; Sdhp 240; -- cakka with four wheels S i.16=63 (said of the human body, see under cakka); -- jāta of four sorts, viz. gandha (perfume) having four ingredients ThA 72 (see next) -- jāti of four kinds J i.265, v.79; (gandha). These 4 ingredients of perfume are saffron, jasmine, Turkish (tarukkha) & Greek incense (yavana); -- jātiya (& ˚jātika) in ˚gandha prec. J iii.291; iv.377; PvA 127; Miln 354; J i.178 (˚ka); -- (d)disā (pl.) the 4 quarters of the globe S i.167= Sn p. 79; D i.251; may also be taken for abl. sg. as adv.: in the 4 quarters Vin i.16, cp. acc. catuddisaŋ D ii.12; -- (d)dīpika covering the 4 continents, of megha (a cloud) DhA ii.95; -- dvāra with 4 gates, of a house D i.102 (=DA i.270); of Avīciniraya It 86; J iv.3; Pv i.1013; cp. Catudvāra Jātaka (No. 439; J iv.1 sq.); -- nahuta ninety -- four J i.25; vi.486; -- paccaya the four requisites (see paccaya) J iii.273, ˚santosa contentment with ˚DhA iv.111; -- paṇṇasa fifty-four DhA i.4; -- (p)patha a fourways J iv.460; -- (p)pada [Sk. caturpād, Gr. tetra/pous, Lat. quadrupes] a quadruped Vin ii.110; S i.6; A v.21; Sn 603, 964; It 87; J i.152; iii.82; -- parivaṭṭa (cp. aṭṭha ˚adhideva -- ñāṇadassana A iv.304) fourfold circle S iii.59 sq. (pañcupādānakkhandhe). -- parisā (f.) the fourfold assembly, scil. of male & female bhikkhus & upāsakas (cp. parisā) PvA 11; -- pala fourfold Vism 339. -- (p)pādaka (adj.) consisting of 4 padas, i. e. a sloka; f. ˚ikā (gāthā) a complete stanza or sloka Anvs p. 35; -- pārisuddhasīla (nt.) the four precepts of purity J iii.291; DhA iv.111; -- (b)bidha (catur+vidha) fourfold ThA, 74; -- (b)bipallāsa (catur+vipallāsa) the fourfold change (cp. Nett 85) Th+1, 1143; SnA 46; -- byūha (catur+vyūha) arranged in 4 arrays (of hāra) Nett 3, 105; -- bhāga the 4th part, a quarter Dh 108; -- bhūmika having 4 stories or stages (of citta or dhamma) DhA i.21; iv.72; DhsA 344, 345; cp. Vism 493 (of indriya); -- madhura (nt.) sweetness (syrup) of 4 (ingredients) DA i.136; ThA 68; -- mahāpatha a crossing on a high -- road Vism 235. -- mahābhūtika consisting of the four great elements DhsA 403; -- (m)mahārājika: see cātum˚; -- māsa 4 months, a season PvA 96; Dpvs i.24, 37 (cā˚); see under māsa; -- sacca the four truths or facts (see ariyasacca) DhA iii.380; Miln 334; (s)sāla (nt.) [catur+sāla] a square formed by 4 houses, in phrasc catuhi gabbhehi paṭimaṇḍitaŋ catussälaŋ kāretvā VvA 220; DhA iii.291; -- 'ha (catuha & catūha) 4 days; catuhena within 4 days S ii.191; catūhapañcāha 4 or 5 days Vin iv.280. -- See also cpds. with cātu˚.
Catura [Deriv. uncertain. Perhaps from tvar to move, that is quickly. Sk. catura] clever, skilled, shrewd J iii.266; vi.25. -- Der. f. abstr. caturatā cleverness Vbh 351 (=cāturiya).
Caturiya at Vv 412 is to be read ca turiya, etc. Otherwise see cāturiya.
Catta [pp. of cajati] given up. sacrificed A ii.41; iii.50; Th 1, 209 (˚vaṇṇa who has lost fame); J ii.336; iv.195; v.41 (˚jīvita).
Cattatta (nt.) [fr. catta] the fact of giving up, abandon- ment, resignation Vbh 254 sq.; DhsA 381.
Cattārīsa (& cattālīsa) [Sk. catvāriŋśat] forty S ii.85; Sn p. 87; It 99≈. Usually cattāḷīsa J i.58; v.433; DhA i.41; ii.9. 93.
-- danta having 40 teeth (one of the characteristics of a Mahāpurisa) D ii 18; iii.144, 172.
Cattārīsaka (adj.) having forty M iii.77.
Cadika at Miln 197 (ūmikavankacadika) prob. for ˚madika.
Cana ( -- ˚) [Vedic cana fr. rel. pron. *qṷo+demonstr. pron. *no, cp. anā, nānā; Gr. rh/; Lat. -- ne in quandone=P. kudācana. cana=Goth. hun, Ohg. gin, Ger. ir -- gen -- d. Cp. ci] indef. particle "like, as if," added to rel. or interrog. pronouns, as kiñcana anything, kudācana at any time, etc. Cp. ca & ci.
Canaŋ=cana; and then, if Vin iii.121 (cp. ca 3); or should it be separated at this passage into ca naŋ?
Canda [Vedic candra from *(s)quend to be light or glowing, cp. candana sandal (incense) wood, Gr. ka/hdaros cinder; Lat. candeo, candidus, incendo; Cymr. cann white; E. candid, candle, incense, cinder] the moon (i. e. the shiner) S i.196; ii.206; M ii.104; A i.227, ii.139 sq.; iii.34; Dh 413; Sn 465, 569, 1016; J iii.52; vi.232; Pv i.127; ii.66; Vv 647 (maṇi˚ a shiny jewel. or a moonlike jewel, see VvA 278, v. l. ˚sanda). -- puṇṇa˚ the full moon J i.149, 267; v.215; ˚mukha with a face like a full moon (of the Buddha) DhA iii.171. Canda is extremely frequent in similes & comparisens: see list in J.P.T.S. 1907, 85 sq. In enumerations of heavenly bodies or divine beings Canda always precedes Suriya (the Sun), e. g. D ii.259; A i.215; ii.139; Nd2 308 (under Devatā). Cp. candimant. On quâsi mythol. etym. see Vism 418.
-- kanta a gem Miln 118; -- (g)gāha a moon -- eclipse (lit. seizure, i. e. by Rāhu) D i.10 (cp. DA i.95); -- maṇḍala the moon's disc, the shiny disc, i. e. the moon A i.283; J i.253; iii.55; iv.378; v.123; Dhs 617; Vism 216 (in compar,); PvA 65; -- suriyā (pl.) sun & moon J iv.61.
Candaka=canda VvA 278 (maṇi˚); Sdhp 92 (mayūra˚ the eye in a peacock's tail).
Candatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. canda] in cpd. paripuṇṇa˚ state or condition of the full moon SnA 502.
Candana (m. & nt.) [Deriv. unknown. Possibly non- Aryan; but see under canda, Sk. candana] sandal (tree, wood or unguent, also perfume) Vin i.203; A i.9, 145, 226; iii.237; Dh 54; J v.420 (tree, m.); Miln 382; DhA i.422; iv.189 (˚pūjā); VvA 158 (agalu˚ with aloe & sandal); PvA 76. -- Kāsika˚ sandal from Kāsī A iii.391; iv.281; Miln 243, 348; ratta˚ red s. J iv.442; lohita˚ id. A v.22; J i.37; hari˚ yellow s. J i.146.
-- ussada covered with sandal perfumes Th 1, 267; Pv iii.91 (= candanasārānulitto PvA 211); -- gaṇṭhi (or better gaṇḍi; see the latter) a block of sandal wood Vin ii.110; -- gandhin having a scent of sandal J iii.190; -- vilepana sandal unguent J iv.3. -- sāra choice sandal (wood or perfume) Vv 523, J i.53, 340.
Candanikā (f.) a pool at the entrance of a village (usually, but not necessarily dirty: see Vin ii.122 & cp. candanapanka Av.Ś i.221, see also PW sub candana2) S v.361; M i.11, 73, 448; A i.161; Th 1, 567; J v.15; Miln 220; Vism 264, 343, 359; Sdhp 132.
Candimā (m. or f.?) [Sk. candramas m. & candrimā f., cp. pūrṇimā; a cpd. of canda+mā, cp. māsa. The Pāli form, however, is based on a supposed derivation fr. canda+mant, like bhagavā, and is most likely m. On this formation cp. Lat. lumen=Sk. rukmān luminous, shiny] the moon. By itself only in similes at Dh 208, 387 (at end of pada) & in "abbhā mutto va candimā" M ii.104=Dh 172=Th 1, 871; Dh 382=Th 1, 873; Ps i.175. -- Otherwise only in combn with suriya, moon & sun, D i.240; ii.12; iii.85 sq., 90, 112; S ii.266; v.264 sq.; A i.227; ii.53, 130; v.59; Vv 30; J ii.213; Miln 191; Vism 153. Also in cpd. candimāpabhā the light of the moon (thus BB, whereas SS read at all passages candiyā˚ or candiya -- pabhā) S iii.156=v.44= It 20.
Capala (adj.) [Sk. capala cp. cāpa bow; from *qep to shake or quiver, see Walde Lat. Wtb. under caperro] moving to & fro, wavering, trembling, unsteady, fickle S i.204; v.269; M i.470 (and a˚ steady); A iii.199, 355, 391; Dh 33; Pug 35; J i.295; ii.360. At J vi.548 it means one who lets the saliva flow out of his mouth (expld by paggharita -- lāla "trickle -- spit").
Capalatā (f.) [fr. last] fickleness, unsteadiness Miln 93. 251; Pgdp 47, 64. At Nd2 585 as capalanā+cāpalyaŋ with gedhikatā, meaning greed, desire (cp. capala at J vi.548).
Capu (or capucapu) a sound made when smacking one's lips Vin ii.214 (capucapukāraka adj.), 221; iv.197.
Cappeti [Sk. carvayati Dhtp 295 gives root cabb in meaning "adana"] to chew Bdhgh on Vin ii.115. Cp. jappati.
Camati (& cameti) [cam. to sip; but given at Dhtm 552 in meaning "adana," eating] to rinse, only in cpd. ācamati (ācameti).
Camara [Deriv. unknown, probably non -- Aryan. Sk. camara] 1. the Yak ox (Bos grunniens) J i.149; iii.18, 375; v.416; Miln 365. -- f. -- ī J i.20; Sdhp 621. -- In cpds. camari˚ J iv.256. -- 2. a kind of antelope ( -- ī) J vi.537.
-- vījanī (f.) a chowry (the bushy tail of the Yak made into a brush to drive away flies) Vin ii.130. This is one of the royal ensigns (see kakudhabhaṇḍa & cp. vāla -- vījanī).
Camasa [Vedic camasa, a cup] a ladle or spoon for sacri- ficing into the sacred fire J vi.52824=5294 (unite ca with masa, cp. 5299 and n. 4: aggijuhana -- kaṭacchu -- sankhātimasañca [for camasañ ca] v. l. Bd). Cp. Kern, Toevoegselen s. v.
Camu (f.) [Both derivation and exact meaning uncertain. The Vedic camū is a peculiar vessel into wh. the Soma flows from the press. In late Pali & Sk. it means a kind of small army, perhaps a division drawn up more or less in the shape of the Vedic vessel] an army J ii.22; camūpati a general Mhvs 10, 65; 23, 4; Dāvs i.3.
Campa=campaka J vi.151.
Campaka the Champaka tree (Michelia champaka) having fragrant white & yellow flowers J v.420; vi.269; Miln 338; DA i.280; Vism 514 (˚rukkha, in simile); DhA i.384; VvA 194.
Campā (f.) N. of a town (Bhagulpore) & a river D i.111; DA i.279; J iv.454.
Campeyya N. of a Nāgarāja J iv.454 (=˚jātaka, No. 506); Vism 304.
Campeyyaka (adj.) belonging to Campā Vin v.114; J vi.269 (here: a Champaka -- like tree).
Camma (nt.) [Vedic carman, cp. Lat. corium hide or leather, cortex bark, scortum hide; Ohg. herdo; Ags. heorða=E. hide; also Sk. kṛtti; Ohg. scirm (shield); E. skin; from *sqer to cut, skin (cp. kaṭu)=the cut -- off hide, cp. Gr. de/rw: (de/rma] 1. skin, hide, leather Vin i.192 (sīha˚ vyaggha˚ dīpi˚), 196 (elaka˚ aja˚ miga˚); A iv.393 (sīha˚ dīpi˚); PvA 157 (kadalimiga˚ as rug); J ii.110 (sīha˚); iii.82, 184; Miln 53; Sdhp 140. It is supposed to be subcutaneous (under chavi as tegument), & next to the bone: chaviŋ chindetvā cammaŋ chindati S ii.238=A iv.129; freq. in expr. like aṭṭhi -- cammanahāru -- matta (skin & bones) PvA 68, see under nahāru; camma -- maŋsa -- nahāru PvA 80. -- 2. a shield Vin ii.192 (asi˚ sword & shield); M i.86; A iii.93; J v.373; vi.580.
-- aṇḍa a water -- skin J i.250; -- kāra a worker in leather, a tanner Vin iv.7; Miln 331; a harness -- maker J v.45; a waggon -- builder and general artisan J iv.174 (=rathakāra); also as -- kārin PvA 175 (=rathakārin); -- khaṇḍa an animal's skin, used as a rug Miln 366; Vism 99; skin used as a water -- vessel (see khaṇḍa) Vin ii.122; Ps i.176; -- ghaṭaka a water -- skin J ii.345; -- naddha (nt.) a drum Bu i.31; -- pasibbaka a sack, made of skin or leather ThA 283; J vi.431, 432 (as v. l.); -- bandha a leather strap Vin i.194; -- bhastā (f.) a sack J v.45; -- māluka a leather bag J vi.431, 432; -- yodhin a soldier in cuirass D i.51≈(in list of var. occupations; DA i.157: cammakañcukaŋ pavisitvā); A iv.107, 110; -- varatta (f.) a leather thong J ii.153; -- vāsin one who wears the skin (of a black antelope), i. e. a hermit J vi.528; -- sāṭaka an ascetic wearing clothes of skin J iii.82 (nāma paribbājaka).
Cammaka a skin Bu ii.52.
Caya [from cināti] piling, heaping; collection, mass Vin ii.117; DhsA 44; in building: a layer Vin ii.122, 152. As -- ˚ one who heaps up, a collector, hoarder M i.452 (nikkha˚, khetta˚, etc.). See also ā˚, apa˚, upa˚.
Cara (n -- adj.) [from car, carati] 1. the act of going about, walking; one who walks or lives (usually -- ˚): oka˚ living in water M i.117; J vi.416; antara˚ S iv.173; eka˚ solitary Sn 166; saddhiŋ˚ a companion Sn 45; anattha˚ J v.433; jala˚ Dāvs iv.38. See also cāreti & gocara. -- Instr. carasā (adv.) walking M i.449. -- cara -- vāda "going about talk," gossip, idle talk S iii.12; v.419. -- sucara easy, duccara difficult Vin iii.26. -- 2. one who is sent on a message, a secret emissary, a spy S i.79. Also as carapurisa J ii.404; iv.343; vi.469; DhA i.193. <-> Note. -- cara -- purāya at A v.133 should be changed into v. l. SS paramparāya.
Caraka 1.=cara2 (a messenger) J vi.369 (attha˚); adj. walking through: sabbalokaŋ˚ J v.395. -- 2. any animal S i.106; PvA 153 (vana˚).
Caraṇa (nt.) [of a deer, called pañca -- hattha "having 5 hands," i. e. the mouth and the 4 feet] 1. walking about, grazing, feeding VvA 308 (˚ṭṭhāna). -- 2. the foot Vin iv.212; J v.431. -- 3. acting, behaviour, good conduct, freq. in combn with vijjā, e. g. A ii.163; v.327; Dh 144; Vism 202 (in detail); PvA 1, etc. <-> D iii.97, 156; Sn 410, 462, 536; Miln 24. sampannacaraṇa (adj.) accomplished in right behaviour S i.153, 166; Sn 1126; Pv ii.138. -- Cp. sañ˚.
Caraṇavant (adj.) one of good conduct (=sampanna- caraṇa) Sn 533, 536.
Carati [Vedic carati, *qṷel to move, turn, turn round (cp. kaṇṭha & kula)=Lat. colo (incolo), Gr. pe/lomai, po/los (also ai)po/los goat -- herd & bouko/los cowherd=gocara); also P. cakka, q. v. A doublet of car is cal, see calati Dhtp 243 expld car by "gati -- bhakkhanesu"] to move about, to "live and move," to behave, to be. -- Imper. act. cara (J i.152), carā (metri causa, J iii.393); <-> imper. med. carassu (Sn 696), pl. carāmase (=exhortative, Sn 32); -- ppr. caranto (J i.152; PvA 14) & caraŋ (Sn 151; Dh 61, 305; It 117); med. caramāna (Vin i.83; Pv i.1010; PvA 160); -- pot. careyya (Sn 45, 386, 1065; Dh 142, 328) & care (Sn 35; Dh 49, 168, 329; It 120); -- fut. carissati (M i.428); -- aor. sg. 1st acariŋ (S iii.29), acārisaŋ (Pv iii.95), 3rd acari (Sn 344), acāri (Sn 354; Dh 326); cari (J ii.133). -- pl. 3rd acariŋsu (Sn 809), acārisuŋ (Sn 284); cariŋsu (Sn 289), acaruŋ (Sn 289), acāruŋ (J vi.114); -- inf. carituŋ (caritu -- kāma J ii.103); -- ger. caritvā (J i.50) & caritvāna (Sn 816); -- pp. ciṇṇa (q. v.) -- Caus. cāreti (=Denom. of cara), pp. carita. 2nd caus. carāpeti (q. v.). -- See also cara, caraṇa, cariyā, cāraka, cārikā, cārin.
Meaning: 1. Lit. (a) to move about, to walk, travel, etc.; almost synon. with gacchati in contrast to tiṭṭhati to stand still; cp. phrase carañ vā yadi vā tiṭṭhaŋ nisinno udāhu sayaŋ It 117 (walking, standing, sitting, reclining; the four iriyāpathā); care tiṭṭhe acche saye It 120; tiṭṭhaŋ caraŋ nisinno vā sayāno vā Sn 151. <-> Defined as "catūhi iriyāpathehi vicarati" (i. e. more generally applied as "behaviour," irrespective of position) DhA ii.36. Expl. constantly by series viharati iriyati vattati pāleti yapeti yāpeti Nd2 237. -- carāmi loke I move about (=I live) in the world Sn 25, 455; agiho c. I lead a homeless life Sn 456, 464; eko c. he keeps to himself Sn 35, 956; Dh 305, 329; sato c. he is mindful Sn 1054, 1085; gocaraŋ gaṇhanto c. to walk about grazing (see below) J iii.275; gavesanto c. to look for J i.61. -- (b) With definition of a purpose: piṇḍāya c. to go for alms (gāmaŋ to the village) Sn 386; bhikkhāya c. id. J iii.82. -- With acc. (in etymol. constr.) to undertake, set out for, undergo, or simply to perform, to do. Either with c. cārikaŋ to wander about, to travel: Vin i.83; S i.305 (applied: "walk ye a walk"); Sn 92; Dh 326; PvA 14 (janapada -- cārikaŋ), 160 (pabbata -- c˚ wandering over the mountains); or with cāraŋ: piṇḍa -- c.˚ carati to perform the begging -- round Sn 414; or with caritaŋ: duccaritaŋ c. to lead a bad life Sn 665 (see carita). Also with acc. of similar meaning, as esanaŋ c. to beg Th 1, 123; vadhaŋ c. to kill Th 1, 138; dukkhaŋ c. to undergo pain S i.210. <-> (c) In pregnant sense: to go out for food, to graze (as gocaraŋ c. to pasture, see gocara). Appl. to cows: caranti gāvo Sn 20; J iii.479; or to the bhikkhu: Pv i.1010 (bh. caramāno= bhikkhāya c. PvA 51); Sn 386 (vikāle na c. buddhā: the Buddhas do not graze at the wrong time). -- 2. Appld meaning: (a) abs. to behave, conduct oneself Sn 1080; J vi.114; Miln 25 (kāmesu micchā c. to commit immorality). -- (b) with obj. to practise, exercise, lead a life: brahmacariyaŋ c. to lead a life of purity Vin i.17; Sn 289, 566, 1128; dhammañ c. to walk in righteousness J i.152; sucaritaŋ c. to act rightly, duccaritaŋ c. to act perversely S i.94; Dh 231.
Carahi (adv.) [Sk. tarhi; with change t > c due to analogy with ˚ci (˚cid) in combn with interr.] then, therefore, now, esp. after interr. pron.: ko carahi jānāti who then knows? Sn 990; kathañ carahi jānemu how then shall we know? Sn 999; kiñ c. A v.194. -- Vin i.36; ii.292; Sn 988; J iii.312; Miln 25; DA i.289.
Carāpeti [Caus. 11. of carati] to cause to move, to make go J i.267 (bheriŋ c. to have the drum beaten); PvA 75 (do.); DhA i.398 (to circulate). As cārāpeti J v.510 (bheriŋ).
Carita [pp. of cāreti, see cara & carati] 1. (adj.) going, moving, being like, behaving ( -- ˚) J vi.313; Miln 92 (rāgac˚=ratta); Vism 105, 114 (rāga˚, dosa˚, moha˚, etc.). -- 2. (nt.) action, behaviour, living Dh 330 (ekassa c. living alone); Ps i.124; Miln 178. See also carati 1b, 2b. Esp. freq. with su˚ and duc˚: good, right, proper or (nt.) good action, right conduct & the opposite; e. g. sucarita Dh 168, 231; PvA 12, 71, 120; duccarita A i.146; ii.85, 141; iii.267, 352; D iii.111. 214; Dh 169, Sn 665; Pv i.94 (˚ŋ caritvā), etc. See also kāya˚ vacī˚ mano˚ under kāya.
Caritaka (nt.) conduct (=carita2) Th 1, 36.
Caritar [n. agent to cāreti, cp. carita] walking, performing (c. acc.) M i.77.
Carima (adj.) [Vedic carama, Gr. te/los end, pa/lai a long time (ago)] subsequent, last (opp. pubba) Th 1, 202; It 18; J v.120. -- acarima not later (apubba ac˚ simultaneously) D i.185; M iii.65; Pug. 13.
-- bhava the last rebirth (in Saŋsāra, with ref. to Arahantship) ThA 260, cp. caramabhavika in Divy (freq.) & next.
Carimaka (adj.) last (=carima) M i.426; Nd2 569b (˚viñ- ñāṇassa nirodha, the destruction of the last conscious state, of the death of an Arahant); Vism 291.
Cariya (nt.) & cariyā (f.) [from car, carati] (mostly -- ˚) conduct, behaviour, state of, life of. Three cariyās at Ps i.79; six at Vism 101; eight at Ps ii.19 sq., 225 & four sets of eight in detail at Nd2 237b. Very freq. in dhamma˚ & brahma˚, a good walk of life, proper conduct, chastity -- eka˚ living alone Sn 820; unchā˚ begging J ii.272; iii.37; bhikkhā˚ a life of begging Sn 700; nagga˚ nakedness Dh 141. -- See also carati 2b. In cpds. cariyā˚.
-- piṭaka the last book in the Khuddaka -- nikāya; -- manussa a spy, an outpost J iii.361 (v. l. cārika˚).
Cala (adj.) [see calati] moving, quivering; unsteady, fickle, transient S iv.68 (dhammā calā c' eva vyayā ca aniccā, etc.); J ii.299; iii.381; v.345; Miln 93, 418; Sdhp 430, 494. -- acala steadfast, immovable S i.232; J i.71 (ṭṭhāna); Vv 514 (˚ṭṭhāna=Ep. of Nibbāna); acalaŋ sukhaŋ (=Nibbāna) Th 2, 350; cp. niccala motionless DhA iii.38.
-- âcala [intens. redupl.] moving to & fro, in constant motion, unsteady J iv.494, 498 (=cañcala); Miln 92; (cp. Divy 180, 281); -- kkaku having a quivering hump J iii.380 iv.330 (=calamānakakudha or calakakudha).
Calaka1 (m.) a camp marshal, adjutant D i.51≈(in list of various occupations); A iv.107 sq.
Calaka2 (nt.) [perhaps from carv to chew; but Sk. car- vana, chewing, is not found in the specific sense of P. calaka. Cp. ucchiṭṭha and cuṇṇa] a piece of meat thrown away after having been chewed Vin ii.115; iv.266 (=vighāsa); VvA 222 (˚aṭṭhikāni meat -- remnants & bones).
Calati [Dhtp 251 kampana, to shake. Perhaps connected with car, carati] to move, stir, be agitated, tremble, be confused, waver S i.107; Sn 752; J i.303 (kileso cali); iii.188 (macchā c.) Miln 260. -- ppr. med. calamāna J iv.331. -- Esp. freq. in expression kammaja -- vātā caliŋsu the labour -- pains began to stir J i.52; vi.485. <-> pp. calita (q. v.). -- caus. caleti to shake S i.109.
Calana (adj. & nt.) shaking, trembling, vibrating; excite- ment J iii.188; DhsA 72. -- f. calanī (quick,+langhī) a kind of antelope J vi.537.
Calita (adj.) [pp. of calati] wavering, unsteady Miln 93, 251; Vism 113; VvA 177. -- (nt.) Sn p. 146.
Cavati [Vedic cyavate from cyu=Gr. seu/w; cp. Lat. cieo, cio, sollicitus, Gr. ki/w, kine/w, Goth. haitan=Ohg, heizan] to move, get into motion, shift, to fall away, decease, esp. to pass from one state of existence into another D i.14 (sañsaranti c˚ upapajjanti, cp. DA i.105); Kh viii.4 (=KhA 220: apeti vigacchati acetano pi samāno puññakkhaya -- vasena aññaŋ thānaŋ gacchati); It 99= Nd2 2352 (satte cavamāne upapajjamāne); It 77 (devo deva -- kāyā c. "the god falls from the assembly of gods"), Sn 1073 for bhavetha (=Nd2 238;) PvA 10. Caus. cāveti: inf. cāvetuŋ S i.128 sq., 134 (˚kāma.) -- pp. cuta (q. v.), see also cuti.
Cavana (nt.) [from cavati] shifting, moving, passing away, only in ˚dhamma doomed to fall, destined to decease D i.18, 19; iii.31, 33; M i.326; It 76; J iv.484; vi.482 (˚dhammatā).
Cavanatā (f) state of shifting, removal S ii.3≈(cuti+); M i.49 (id.).
Cāga [from cajati, to give up, Vedic tyaj. Cp. Sk. tyāga] (a) abandoning, giving up, renunciation Vin i.10; S iii.13, 26, 158; M i.486; A i.299. More freq. as: (b) liberality, generosity, munificence (n.) generous, munificent (adj.): sīlasampanno saddho purisapuggalo sabbe maccharino loke cāgena atirocati "he who is virtuous & religious excels all stingy people in generosity" A iii.34. In freq. combns e. g. sacca dama dhiti c. Sn 188=S i.215; sacca dama c. khanti Sn 189= S i.215; mutta˚ (adj.) liberal, munificent, S v.351=392. ˚paribhāvita citta "a heart bent on giving" S v.309. In this sense cāga forms one of the (3, 4, 5 or 7) noble treasures of a man (cp. the Catholic treasure of grace & see ˚dhana below), viz. (as 5) saddhā, sīla, suta, cāga, paññā (faith, virtue, right knowledge, liberality, wisdom) S i.232; A i.210; iii.80=S iv.250; M iii.99; D iii.164, 165; cp. A i.152=iii.44; (as 4: the last minus suta) S v.395; A ii.62 (sama˚); (as 3) saddhā, sīla, cāga J ii.112; (as 7) ajjhesanā, tapo, sīla, sacca, cāga, sati, mati J ii.327; cp. śīla -- śruta -- tyāga Itm 311. -- PvA 30, 120; Sdhp 214, 323. See also anussati & anussarati.
-- âdhiṭṭhāna the resolution of generosity, as one of the 4: paññā˚, sacca˚, c˚., upasama˚ D iii.229; -- ânussati generosity A i.30; v.331; D iii.250, 280; Vism 197; -- kathā talk about munificence A iii.181; -- dhana the treasure of the good gift, as one of the 7 riches or blessings, the ariyadhanāni, viz. saddhā, sīla, hiri, ottappa, suta, c., paññā D iii.163, 251,; A iv.5; VvA 113; as one of 5 (see above) A iii.53; -- sampadā (& sampanna) the blessing of (or blessed with) the virtue of munificence A i.62; ii.66; iii.53; iv.221, etc.
Cāgavant (adj.) generous A iii.183; iv.217, 220; Pug 24.
Cāgin (adj.) giving up, sacrificing, resigning Sn 719 (kāma˚).
Cāṭi (f.) [cp. Hindī cāṭā] 1. a jar, vessel, pot J i.199; 302 (pānīya˚); iii.277 (madhu˚ honey jar); DhA i.394 (tela˚ oil tank); VvA 76 (sālibhatta˚ holding a meal of rice).<-> 2. a measure of capacity J ii.404; iv.343. -- 3. a large vessel of the tank type used for living in Vin i.153.
-- pañjara a cage made of, or of the form of a large earthen jar, wherein a man could lie in ambush J v.372, 385; -- pāla (nt.) an earthenware shield (?) J v.373 (=kīṭa).
Cāṭu [cp. cāru] pleasant, polite in ˚kammatā politeness, flattery Miln 370 (cp. Sk. cāṭukāra); cāṭu -- kamyatā Vbh 246; Vism 17, 23, 27; KhA 236.
Cātur˚ (and cātu˚) [see catur] consisting of four. Only in cpds. viz.
-- (r)anta (adj.) "of four ends," i. e. covering or belonging to the 4 points of the compass, all -- encircling, Ep. of the earth: J ii.343 (paṭhavī); iv.309 (mahī) -- (n -- m.) one who rules over the 4 points; i. e. over the whole world (of a Cakkavattin) D i.88 (cp. DA i.249); ii.16; Sn 552. See also Sp. AvS ii.111, n. 2; -- kummāsa sour gruel with four ingredients VvA 308; -- (d)dasī (f.) [to catuddasa fourteen] the 14th day of the lunar half month A i.144. PvA 55; VvA 71, 99, 129. With pancadasī, aṭṭhamī & pāṭihāriyapakkha at Sn 402; Vv 155. ˚dasika belonging to the 14th day at Vin iv.315; -- (d)disa (adj.) belonging to, or comprising the four quarters, appld to a man of humanitarian mind Sn 42 ("showing universal love," see Nd2 239); cp. RV x.136. Esp. appld to the bhikkhu -- sangha "the universal congregation of bhikkhus" Vin i 305; ii.147; D i.145; J i.93; Pv ii.28; iii.214 (expld PvA 185 by catūhi disāhi āgata -- bhikkhu -- sangha). Cp. AvŚ i.266; ii.109; -- (d)dīpa of four continents: rājā Th 2, 486; cp. M Vastu i.108, 114; -- (d)dīpaka sweeping over the whole earth (of a storm) Vin i.290, cp. J iv.314 & AvŚ i.258; -- (b)bedā (pl.) the four Vedas Miln 3; -- māsin of 4 months; f. ˚inī Vin i.155; D i.47; M iii.79; DA i.139, cp. komudī; -- (m)mahāpatha the place where 4 roads cross, a crossroad D i.102, 194=243; M i.124; iii.91; cp. catu˚. -- (m)mahābhūtika consisting of the 4 great elements (of kāya) D i.34, 55, 186, 195; S ii.94 sq.; Miln 379; cp. Av.Ś ii.191 & Sk. cāṭurbhautika; -- (m)mahārājikā (pl.) (sc. devā) the retinue of the Four Kings, inhabiting the lowest of the 6 devalokas Vin i.12; iii.18; D i.215; Nd2 307 (under devā); J ii.311 (deva -- loka); -- yāma (saŋvara) fourfold restraint (see yāma) D i.57, 58 (cp. DA i.167); iii.48 sq.; S i.66; M i.377; Vism 410. Cp. Dial. i.75 n1.
Cāturiya (nt.) [cp. catura+iya] skill, cleverness, shrewd- ness J iii.267; vi.410; ThA, 227; Vbh 551; Vism 104; Dāvs v.30.
Cāpa (m. nt.) [Sk. cāpa, from *qēp tremble, cp. capala wavering, quivering] a bow M i.429 (opposed to kodaṇḍa); Dh 156 (˚âtikhīṇa shot from the bow, cp. DhA iii.132), 320 (abl. cāpāto metri causa); J iv.272; v.400; Miln 105 (daḷha˚), 352.
-- koṭi the end of a bow VvA 261; nāḷi (f.) a bow -- case J ii.88; -- lasuṇa (nt.) a kind of garlic Vin iv.259.
Cāpalla (nt.) [Der. fr. capala, Sk. cāpalya] fickleness D i.115 (=DA i.286). Also as cāpalya M i.470; Vbh 351; Vism 106.
Cāmara (nt.) [from camara] a chowrie, the tail of bos grunniens used as a whisk Sn 688; Vv 643; J vi.510; VvA 271, 276. Cpd. cāmarī -- gāhaka J vi.218 (anka) a hook holding the whisk.
Cāmikara (nt.). [Deriv. unknown. Sk. cāmīkara] gold VvA 12, 13, 166.
Cāvati [fr. ci] to honour, only in cpd. -- apacāyati (q. v.). The Dhtp (237) defines the root cāy by pūjā.
Cāra [fr. car carati to move about] motion, walking, going; doing, behaviour, action, process Miln 162 (+vihāra); Dhs 8=85 (=vicāra); DhsA 167. Usually -- ˚ (n. & adj.): kāma˚ going at will J iv.261; pamāda˚ a slothful life J i.9; piṇḍa˚ alms -- begging Sn 414, 708; sabbaratti˚ wandering all night S i.201; samavattha˚ A iii.257. See also carati ib.
-- vihāra doing & behaving, i. e. good conduct J ii.232; Dpvs. vi.38; cp. Miln 162 (above).
Cāraka (cārika) (adj.) wandering about, living, going, behaving, always -- ˚, like ākāsa˚, niketa˚, pure˚ (see pubbangama), vana˚, -- f. cārikā journey, wandering, esp. as cārikaŋ carati to go on alms -- pilgrimage (see carati ib) Vin i.83; J i.82; ii.286; Dh 326; Miln 14, 22; ˚ñ pakkamati to set out wandering J i.87; Miln 16. <-> S i.199; M i.117; A iii.257; DA i.239 sq. (in detail on two cārikā); VvA 165; EnA 295 (unchā˚).
Cāraṇa (adj.)=cāraka Sn 162 (saŋsuddha˚).
Cāraṇika v.v. vāraṇika Th i.1129? a little play, masque, cp. Sk cāraṇa & Mrs. Rh. D. Pss of the Brethren, 419.
Cāritta (nt.) [From car] practice, proceeding, manner of acting, conduct J i.90, 367; ii.277 (loka˚); v.285 (vanka˚); Miln 133; VvA 31. -- cārittaŋ āpajjati to mix with, to call on, to have intercourse with (c. loc.) M i.470; S ii.270 (kulesu); M i.287=iii.40 (kāmesu); J iii.46 (rakkhita -- gopitesu).
-- vāritta manner of acting & avoiding J iii.195, cp. Th 1. 591; Vism 10. See on their mutual relation Vism 11; -- sīla code of morality VvA 37.
Cārin (only -- ˚) (adj.) walking, living, experiencing; be- having, acting, practising. (a) lit. asanga˚ S i.199; akāla˚ Sn 386; ambu˚ Sn 62; vihangapatha˚ Sdhp 241; sapadāna˚ M i.30; Sn 65; pariyanta˚ Sn 904. <-> (b) fig. anudhamma˚ Sn 69; āgu˚ A ii.240; A iii.163; dhamma˚ Miln 19; brahma˚ Sn 695; manāpa˚ Vv 314; yata˚ Sn 971; sama˚ Miln 19. See all s. v. & cp. caṭu.
Cāru (adj.) [Vedic cāru & cāyu to *qe -- *qā, as in kāma, Lat. carus, etc., see under kāma] charming, desirable, pleasant, beautiful J vi.481; Miln 201; Sdhp 428, 512; VvA 36 (=vaggu), sucāru S i.181; Pv ii.1212 (=suṭṭhumanorama).
-- dassana lovely to behold Sn 548; J vi.449 (expl. on p. 450 as: cāru vuccati suvaṇṇaŋ=suvaṇṇadassana); vi.579; f. -- ī Pv iii.614.
Cāreti [Denom. fr. cara; cp. carati] to set going, to pasture, feed, preserve: indriyāni c. to feast one's senses (cp. Ger. "augenweide") PvA 58; khantiŋ c. to feed meekness DA i.277; olambakaŋ cārento drooping J i.174; Pass. ppr. cāriyamāna being handed round J iv.2 (not vā˚) -- pp. carita. -- Cp. vi˚.
Cāla [From calati] shaking, a shock, only in bhūmi˚ earth- quake.
Cālanī (f.) [to cālana of calaka2] a pestle, a mortar Vin i.202 (in cuṇṇa˚ & dussa˚, cp. saṇha).
Cāleti [caus. of calati] to move, to shake J v.40; to scatter J i.71 (tiṇāni); to sift Vin i.202.
Cāvanā (f.) moving, shifting, disappearance Vin iii.112 (ṭhānato); Sdhp 61 (id.).
Cāveti [caus. of cavati] to bring to fall, move, drive away; disturb, distract A iv.343 (samādhimhā); J i.60 (inf. cāvetu -- kāma); ii.329 (jhānā, abl.). Aor. acāvayi (prohib.) Sn 442 (ṭhānā).
Ci (cid in Sandhi) [Vedic cid nom. nt. to interr. base *qṷi (as in Gr. ti/s, Lat. quis, Goth. hvi -- leiks, see ki˚, cp. ka˚, ku˚), = Gr. ti/(d), Lat. quid & quid(d)em, Av. ciṭ (cp. tad, yad, kad beside taŋ, yaŋ, kiŋ)] indef. interr. particle (always -- ˚), in koci (= Sk. kaścid) whoever, kiñci (kincid -- eva) whatever, kadāci at some time or any time, etc. (q. v.), see also ca, cana, ce.
Cikicchati [Sk. cikitsati, Desid. of cit, cinteti. Cp. vici- kicchā], usually tikicchati to reflect, think over, intend, aim at. Pp. cikicchita KhA 188 (in expln of vicikicchita q. v.).
Cikkhati (cikkhanā, etc.) [Freq. of khyā, Dhtp 19: cikkh= vacane] to tell, to announce: see ā˚ & paṭisaŋ˚.
Cikkhalla (nt.) [Sk. cikkaṇa & cikkala, slippery+ya] mud, mire, swamp; often with udaka˚. Vin i.253; ii.120, 159, 291: iii.41; A iii.394; J i.196; Miln 286, 311, 397; PvA 102, 189, 215. -- (adj.) Vin ii.221; iv.312; Pv iv.116; Miln 286.
Cikkhallavant (adj.) muddy PvA 225.
Cikkhassati [Desid. of kṣar=Sk. cikṣariṣati] to wish to drop, to ooze out Miln 152 (˚ssanto), see Kern. Toev. ii.139 & Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 87.
Cingulaka (& ˚ika) (m. nt.) 1. a kind of plant Sn 239 (=kaṇavīra -- pupphasaṇṭhāna -- sīsa SnA 283). -- 2. a toy windmill, made of palm -- leaves, etc. (DA i.86: tālapaṇṇādīhi kataŋ vātappahārena paribbhamana -- cakkaŋ) Vin ii.10; D i.6 M i.266; A v.203; Miln 229.
Cingulāyati [Denom. fr. cingula] to twirl round, to revolve like a windmill A i.112.
Cicciṭāyati [onomat. cp. ciṭiciṭāyati] to hiss, fizz, sizzle (always combd with ciṭiciṭāyati) Vin i.225; S i.169; Sn p. 15; Pug 36; Miln 258 sq.
Cicciṭāyana (nt.) fizzing Vism 408 (˚sadda).
Ciñcā (f.) [Sk. ciñcā & tintiḍikā] the tamarind tree J v.38 (˚vana); SnA 78.
Ciṭi -- ciṭi [redupl. interj.] fizz DA i.137.
Ciṭiciṭāyati see cicciṭāyati; Vin i.225; cp. Divy 606.
Ciṇṇa [pp. of carati] travelled over, resorted to, made a habit of; done, performed, practised J iii.541; Miln 360. -- su˚ well performed, accomplished S i.42=214=Sn 181; Pv iii.56. -- Cp. ā˚, pari˚, vi˚.
-- ṭṭhāna the place where one is wont to go J ii.159; -- mānatta one who performs the Mānatta Vin iv.242; -- vasin one who has reached mastership in (c. loc.) ThA 74; Vism 154, 158, 164, 169, 331 sq., 376; der. -- vāsibhāva DhsA 167 (read vasī˚).
Ciṇṇatta (nt.) [Der. fr. ciṇṇa] custom, habit Miln 57, 105.
Cita [pp. of cināti] heaped; lined or faced with (cp. citaka2) pokkharaṇiyo iṭṭhakāhi citā D ii.178, cp. Vin ii.123.
-- antaraŋsa "one whose shoulder -- hole is heaped up," one who has the shoulders well filled out (Ep. of a Mahāpurisa) D ii.18; iii.144, 164.
Citaka & Citakā (f.) [from ci, cināti to heap up]. -- 1. a heap, a pile, esp. a funeral pile; a tumulus D ii.163; cp, ii.1014. J i.255; v.488; vi.559, 576; DA i.6; DhA i.69; ii.240; VvA 234; PvA 39. -- 2. (adj.) inlaid: suvaṇṇa˚, with gold J vi.218 (=˚khacita).
Citi (f.) [From ci, cināti, to heap up] a heap, made of bricks J vi.204 (city -- avayata -- piṭṭhikā). See also cetiya.
Cittaka (nt.) [to citta1] a sectarian mark on the forehead in ˚dhara -- kumma a tortoise bearing this mark, a landtortoise Miln 364, 408, cp. Miln trsl. ii.352.
Citta1 & Citra (adj.) [to cetati; *(s)qait to shine, to be bright, cp. Sk. citra, Sk. P. ketu, Av. ciprō, Lat. caelum, Ags. hador, Ohg. heitar, see also citta2] variegated, manifold, beautiful; tasty, sweet, spiced (of cakes), J iv.30 (geṇḍuka); Dh 171 (rājaratha); Vv 479; Pv ii.112 (aneka˚); iv.313 (pūvā= madhurā PvA 251). Citta (nt.) painting Th 1, 674. -- Sn 50 (kāmā=Nd2 240 nānāvaṇṇā), 251 (gāthā); J v.196 (geṇḍuka), 241 vi.218. -- sucitta gaily coloured or dressed S i.226 (b); Dh 151 (rājaratha); Pv i.109 (vimāna).
-- akkhara (adj.) with beautiful vowels S ii.267 (Cp. ˚vyañjana); -- attharaka a variegated carpet DA i.256; -- āgāra a painted house, i. e. furnished with pictures; a picture gallery Vin iv.298; -- upāhana a gaily coloured sandal D i.7≈; -- kata adorned, dressed up M ii.64= Dh 147=Th 1, 769; DhA iii.109 (=vicitta); -- katha (adj.) =next S i.199 (+bahussuta); -- kathin a brilliant speaker, a wise speaker, an orator, preacher. Freq. combd w. bahussuta (of wide knowledge, learned), e. g. paṇḍita . . . medhāvin kalyāṇapaṭibhāna S iv.375, samaṇa bahussuta c. uḷāra Vv 8426. -- A iii.58; J i.148; Miln 1, 21; -- kathika=˚kathin A i.24; Th 2, 449 (+bahussuta), expld at ThA 281 by cittadhammakatha; -- kamma decoration, ornamentation, painting J iv.408; vi.333; Miln 278; Vism 306; PvA 147; DhsA 334; (m.) a painter J vi.481; -- kāra a painter, a decorator (cp. rajaka) S ii.101=iii.152; Th 2, 256; J vi.333; -- chatta at J vi.540 to be changed into ˚patta; -- patta (adj.) having variegated wings J vi.540, 590; -- pāṭalī (f.) N. of a plant (the "pied" trumpet -- flower) in the world of Asuras J i.202; DhA i.280; -- pekhuna having coloured wings J i.207; vi.539; -- bimba ( -- mukhi) (a woman whose face is) like a painted image J v.452 (cp cittakata); -- miga the spotted antelope J vi.538; -- rūpa (nt.) a wonder, something wonderful J vi.512; as adv. ˚ŋ (to citta2?) easily Vin ii.78=iii.161; iv.177, 232; -- latā the plant Rubia Munjista J vi.278; ˚vana the R.M. grove, one of Indra's gardens [Sk. caitraratha] J i.52, 104; ii.188; vi.590, etc.; -- vitāna a bright canopy DhA iv.14; -- vyañjana (adj.) with beautiful consonants (cp. ˚akkhara) S ii.267=A i.73=iii.107; -- sāṇī variegated cloth J ii.290; DhA iv.14; -- sālā a painted room or picture gallery DA i.253; -- sibbana with fine sewing; a cover of various embroidery Sn 304= J iv.395; J vi.218.
Citta2 (nt.) [Sk. citta, orig. pp. of cinteti, cit, cp. yutta> yuñjati, mutta> muñcati. On etym. from cit. see cinteti].
I. Meaning: the heart (psychologically), i. e. the centre & focus of man's emotional nature as well as that intellectual element which inheres in & accompanies its manifestations; i. e. thought. In this wise citta denotes both the agent & that which is enacted (see kamma II. introd.), for in Indian Psychology citta is the seat & organ of thought (cetasā cinteti; cp. Gr. frh/n, although on the whole it corresponds more to the Homeric qumo/s). As in the verb (cinteti) there are two stems closely allied and almost inseparable in meaning (see § III.), viz. cit & cet (citta & cetas); cp. ye should restrain, curb, subdue citta by ceto, M i.120, 242 (cp. attanā coday' attānaŋ Dhp 379 f.); cetasā cittaŋ samannesati S i.194 (cp. cetasā cittaŋ samannesati S i.194). In their general use there is no distinction to be made between the two (see § III.). -- The meaning of citta is best understood when explaining it by expressions familiar to us, as: with all my heart; heart and soul; I have no heart to do it; blessed are the pure in heart; singleness of heart (cp. ekagga); all of which emphasize the emotional & conative side or "thought" more than its mental & rational side (for which see manas & viññāṇa). It may therefore be rendered by intention, impulse, design; mood, disposition, state of mind, reaction to impressions. It is only in later scholastic lgg. that we are justified in applying the term "thought" in its technical sense. It needs to be pointed out, as complementary to this view, that citta nearly always occurs in the singular (=heart), & out of 150 cases in the Nikāyas only 3 times in the plural (=thoughts). The substantiality of citta (cetas) is also evident from its connection with kamma (heart as source of action), kāma & the senses in general. <-> On the whole subject see Mrs. Rh. D. Buddh. Psych. Eth. introd. & Bud. Psy. ch. II.
II. Cases of citta (cetas), their relation & frequency (enumd for gram. purposes). -- The paradigma is (numbers denoting %, not including cpds.): Nom. cittaŋ Gen. (Dat.) cetaso (44) & cittassa (9); Instr. cetasā (42) & cittena (3); Loc. citte (2) & cittamhi (2). -- Nom. cittaŋ (see below). Gen. cittassa only (of older passages) in c˚ upakkileso S iii.232; v.92; A i.207; c˚ damatho Dh 35 & c˚ vasena M i.214; iii.156. Instr. cittena only in S i. viz. cittena nīyati loko p. 39; upakkiliṭṭha˚ p. 179; asallīnena c˚ p. 159. Loc. citte only as loc. abs. in samāhite citte (see below) & in citte vyāpanne kāyakammam pi v. hoti A i.162; cittamhi only S i.129 & cittasmiŋ only S i.132. -- Plural only in Nom. cittāni in one phrase: āsavehi cittāni (vi) mucciŋsu "they purified their hearts from intoxications" Vin i.35; S iii.132; iv.20; Sn p. 149; besides this in scholastic works=thoughts, e. g. Vbh 403 (satta cittāni).
III. Citta & cetas in promiscuous application. There is no cogent evidence of a clear separation of their respective fields of meaning; a few cases indicate the rôle of cetas as seat of citta, whereas most of them show no distinction. There are cpds. having both citta˚ & ceto˚ in identical meanings (see e. g. citta -- samādhi & ceto˚), others show a preference for either one or the other, as ceto is preferred in ceto -- khila & ceto -- vimutti (but: vimutta -- citta), whereas citta is restricted to combn w. upakkilesa, etc. The foll. sentences will illustrate this. Vivaṭena cetasā sappabhāsaŋ cittaŋ bhāveti "with open heart he contemplates a radiant thought" S v.263=D iii.223=A iv.86; cetasā cittaŋ samannesati vippamuttaŋ "with his heart he scrutinizes their pure mind" S i.194; vigatâbhijjhena cetasā is followed by abhijjāya cittaŋ parisodheti D iii.49; anupārambhacitto bhabbo cetaso vikkhepaŋ pahātuŋ A v.149; cetaso vūpasamo foll. by vūpasanta -- citto A i.4; samāhite citte foll. by ceto -- samādhi D i.13≈; cittaŋ paduṭṭhaŋ foll. by ceto -- padosa A i.8; cp. It. 12, 13; cetaso tato cittaŋ nivāraye "a desire of his heart he shall exclude from this" S iv.195.
IV. Citta in its relation to other terms referring to mental processes.
1. citta≈hadaya, the heart as incorporating man's personality: hadayaŋ phaleyya, cittavikkhepaŋ pāpuṇeyya (break his heart, upset his reason) S i.126; cittaŋ te khipissāmi hadayan te phālessāmi id. S i.207, 214; Sn p. 32; kāmarāgena cittaŋ me pariḍayhati S i.188>nibbāpehi me hadaya -- pariḷāhaŋ Miln 318 ("my heart is on fire"); cp. abhinibbutatto Sn 343=apariḍayhamāna -- citto SnA 347; cittaŋ adhiṭṭhahati to set one's heart on, to wish DhA i.327.
2. c. as mental status, contrasted to (a) physical status: citta>kāya, e. g. kilanta˚ weary in body & mind D i.20=iii.32; ātura˚ S iii.2 -- 5; nikaṭṭha˚ A ii.137; ṭhita˚ steadfast in body & soul (cp. ṭhitatta) S v.74; ˚passaddhi quiet of body & soul S v.66. The Commentators distinguish those six pairs of the sankhārākkhandha, or the cetasikas: citta -- kāya -- passaddhi, -- lahutā, etc. as quiet, buoyancy, etc., of (a) the viññāṇakkhandha (consciousness), (b) the other 3 mental khandhas, making up the nāma -- kāya (DhsA 150 on Dhs. 62: Compendium of Phil. 96, n. 3); passaddha˚ D iii.241, 288. -- (b) intellectual status: citta>manas & viññāṇa (mind>thought & understanding). These three constitute the invisible energizer of the body, alias mind in its manifestations: yañ ca vuccati cittan ti vā mano ti vā viññāṇan ti vā: (a) ayaŋ attā nicco dhuvo, etc., D i.21; (b) tatr' assutavā puthujjano n' âlaŋ nibbindituŋ, etc. S ii.94; (g) taŋ rattiyā ca divasassa ca añña -- d -- eva uppajjati aññaŋ nirujjhati S ii.95, cf. ThA. 1 on 125. -- Under ādesanā -- pāṭihāriya (thought reading): evam pi te mano ittham pi te mano iti pi te cittaŋ (thus is your thought & thus your mind, i. e. habit of thinking) D i.213 =iii.103; A i.170. -- niccaŋ idaŋ c. niccaŋ idaŋ mano S i.53; cittena niyyati loko "by thoughts the world is led" S i.39=A ii.177 (cp. KS 55); apatiṭṭhita -- citto ādīna -- manaso avyāpaṇnacetaso S v.74; vyāpanna -- citto paduṭṭha -- manasankappo S iii.93; paduṭṭha -- citto=paduṭṭha -- manaso PvA 34, 43.
3. c. as emotional habitus: (a) active=intention, contrasted or compared with: (a) will, c. as one of the four samādhis, viz. chanda, viriya, c., vīmaŋsā D iii.77; S v.268; Vbh 288. -- (b) action, c. as the source of kamma: citte vyāpanne kāyakammam pi vyāpannaŋ hoti "when the intention is evil, the deed is evil as well" A i.262; cittaŋ appamāṇaŋ . . . yaŋ kiñci pamāṇakataŋ kammaŋ, etc. A v.299. -- Esp. in contrast to kāya & vācā, in triad kāyena vācāya cittena (in deed & speech & will otherwise as k. v. manasā, see under kāya III.) S ii.231, 271=iv.112. Similarly taŋ vācaŋ appahāya (cittaŋ˚, diṭṭhiŋ˚) S iv.319=D iii.13, 15; & under the constituents of the dakkhiṇeyyasampatti as khetta -- sampatti, citta˚, payoga˚ (the recipient of the gift, the good -- will, the means) VvA 30, 32. -- (b) passive=mood, feelings, emotion, ranging with kāya & paññā under the (3) bhāvanā D iii.219; S iv.111; A iii.106; cp. M i.237; Nett 91; classed with kāya vedanā dhammā under the (4) satipaṭṭhānas D ii.95, 100, 299 sq.; S v.114, etc. (see kāya cpds.). As part of the sīlakkhandha (with sīla ethics, paññā understanding) in adhisīla, etc. Vin v.181; Ps ii.243; Vbh 325; cp. tisso sampadā, scil. sīla, citta, diṭṭhi (see sīla & cp. cetanā, cetasika) A i.269. -- citta & paññā are frequently grouped together, e. g. S i.13 = 165; D iii.269; Th i.125 sq. As feeling citta is contrasted with intellection in the group saññā c. diṭṭhi A ii.52; Ps ii.80; Vbh 376.
4. Definitions of citta (direct or implied): cittan ti viññāṇaŋ bhūmikavatthu -- ārammaṇa -- kiriyādi -- cittatāya pan' etaŋ cittan ti vuttaŋ DhA i.228; cittan ti mano mānasaŋ KhA 153; cittaŋ manoviññāṇaŋ ti cittassa etaŋ vevacanaŋ Nett 54. yaŋ cittaŋ mano mānasaŋ hadayaŋ paṇḍaraŋ, etc. Dhs 6=111 (same for def. of manindriya, under § 17; see Buddh. Psych.). As rūpâvacara citta at Vism 376.
V. Citta in its range of semantical applications: (1) heart, will, intention, etc. (see I.).
(a) heart as general status of sensory -- emotional being; its relation to the senses (indriyāni). A steadfast & constrained heart is the sign of healthy emotional equilibrium, this presupposes the control over the senses; samādahaŋsu cittaŋ attano ujukaŋ akaŋsu, sārathī va nettāni gahetvā indriyāni rakkhanti paṇḍitā S i.26; ujugato -- citto ariyasāvako A iii.285; ṭhita c. S i.159≈; A iii.377=iv.404 (+ānejjappatta); c. na kampati Sn 268; na vikampate S iv.71; opp. capalaŋ c. Dh 33; khitta˚ a heart unbalanced A ii.52 (+visaññin); opp.: avikkhitta˚ A v.149; PvA 26; c. rakkhitaŋ mahato atthāya saŋvattati a guarded heart turns to great profit A i.7; similarly: c. dantaŋ, guttaŋ, saŋvutaŋ ibid. -- cittaŋ rakkhetha medhāvī cittaŋ guttaŋ sukhāvahaŋ Dh 36; cakkhundriyaŋ asaŋvutassa viharato cittaŋ vyāsiñcati . . . rūpesu S iv.78; ye cittaŋ saññamessanti mokkhanti Mārabandhanā "from the fetters of Māra those are released who control their heart" Dh 37; pāpā cittaŋ nivāraye Dh 116; bhikkhuno c. kulesu na sajjati, gayhati, bajjhati S ii.198 (cp. Schiller: "Nicht an die Güter hänge dein Herz").
(b) Contact with kāma & rāga: a lustful, worldly, craving heart. -- (a) kāmā: kāmā mathenti cittaŋ Sn 50; S iv.210; kāmarāgena ḍayhāmi S i.188; kāme nâpekkhate cittaŋ Sn 435; mā te kāmaguṇe bhamassu cittaŋ Dh 371; manussakehi kāmehi cittaŋ vuṭṭhapetvā S v.409; na uḷāresu kāmaguṇesu bhogāya cittaŋ namati A iv.392; S i.92; kāmāsavā pi cittaŋ vimuccati A ii.211, etc.; kāmesu c. na pakkhandati na ppasīdati na sanṭiṭṭhati (my h. does not leap, sit or stand in cravings) D iii.239; kāmesu tibbasārāgo vyāpannacitto S iii.93; kāmāmise laggacitto (divide thus!) PvA 107. -- (b) rāgā: rāgo cittaŋ anuddhaŋseti (defilement harasses his heart) S i.185; ii.231=271; A ii.126; iii.393; rāga -- pariyuṭṭhitaŋ c. hoti A iii.285; sārattacitto S iv.73; viratta˚ S iv.74; Sn 235; PvA 168. <-> (g) various: patibaddha -- c. (fettered in the bonds of ˚) A iv.60; Sn 37, 65; PvA 46, 151, etc. -- pariyādinna˚ (grasping, greedy), usually combd w. lābhena abhibhūta: S ii.226, 228; iv.125; A iv.160; D iii.249. -- upakkiliṭṭha˚ (etc.) (defiled) S i.179; iii.151, 232 sq.; v.92 (kāmacchando cittassa upakkileso); A i.207; v.93 sq. -- otiṇṇa˚ fallen in love A iii.67; SnA 322.
(c) A heart, composed, concentrated, settled, selfcontrolled, mastered, constrained. -- (a) c. pasīdati (pasanna -- ˚c) (a heart full of grace, settled in faith) S i.98; A i.207; iii.248; Sn 434; pasanna˚: A iv.209, 213; Sn 316, 403, 690, cp. c. pakkhandati pasīdati S iii.133; A iii.245; also vippasanna˚: S v.144; Sn 506; cp. vippasannena cetasā Pv i.1010. -- (b) c. santiṭṭhati in set s. sannisīdati, ekodihoti, samādhiyati (cp. cetaso ekodibhāva) S ii.273; iv.263; A ii.94, 157. -- (g) c. samādhiyati (samāhita -- c˚, cp. ceto -- samadhi quiescence) D i.13=iii.30, 108; S i.120, 129, 188; iv.78=351; A i.164; ii.211; iii.17, 280; iv.177; Vbh 227; Vism 376, etc. -- (d) supatiṭṭhita -- c˚ always in formula catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu -- s -- c˚: S iii.93; v.154; 301; D iii.101; A v.195. -- (e) susaṇṭhita c. S v.74. -- vasībhūta c. S i.132; A i.165. -- danta c. Dh 35. -- (d) "with purpose of heart," a heart set on, striving after, endeavouring, etc. -- (a) cittaŋ namati (inclines his h. on, with dat: appossukkatāya S i.137); nekkhamma -- ninna S iii.233; viveka˚ D iii.283; A iv.233; v.175. -- (b) cittaŋ padahati (pa+dhā: pro -- ti/qhti) in phrase chandaŋ janeti vāyamati viriyaŋ ārabbhati c˚ ŋ paggaṇhāti padahati D iii.221; A ii.15=iv.462; S v.269; Nd2 97; Nett 18. In the same ṣense pa -- ni -- dahati (in paṇidhi, paṇihita bent down on) (cp. ceto -- paṇidhi) S i.133 (tattha) iv.309 (dup˚); v.157; Dh 42=Ud 39; Dh 43 (sammā˚).
(e) An evil heart ("out of heart proceed evil thoughts" Mk. 7, 21) -- (a) paduṭṭha -- c˚ (cp. ceto -- padosa) D i.20= iii.32; A i.8 (opp. pasanna -- c˚); iv.92; It 12, 13; Pv A 33, 43, etc. -- (b) vyāpanna -- c˚: citte vyāpanne kāyakammam pi vyāpannaŋ hoti A i.262. Opp. a˚: S iv.322; A ii.220. -- (g) samoha -- c˚ (+sarāga, etc.) D i.79; ii.299; iii.281; Vism 410, & passim.
(f) "blessed are the pure in heart," a pure, clean, purified (cp. Ger. geläutert), emancipated, free, detached heart. (a) mutta -- c˚, vimutta -- c˚, etc. (cp. cetaso vimokkho, ceto -- vimutti, muttena cetasā), āsavehi cittāni mucciŋsu S iii.132, etc.; vi˚ Sn p. 149. -- vimutta: S i.28 (+subhāvita), 29, 46=52; iii.45 (+viratta), 90; iv.236 (rāgā); Sn 23 (+sudanta); Nd2 587. -- suvimutta: S i.126, 141, 233; iv.164; A iii.245; v.29; Sn 975 (+satimā). -- (b) cittaŋ parisodheti M i.347; A ii.211; S iv.104. -- (g) alīna c. (unstained) S i.159; A v.149; Sn 68; 717; Nd2 97 (cp. cetaso līnatta).
(g) good -- will, a loving thought, kindliness, tenderheartedness, love ("love the Lord with all your heart"). -- (a) metta -- c˚ usually in phrase mettacittaŋ bhāveti "to nourish the heart with loving thought," to produce good -- will D i.167; S ii.264; A i.10; v.81; Sn 507 (cp. mettā -- sahagatena cetasā). -- (b) bhāvita -- c˚ "keep thy heart with all diligence" (Prov. 4, 23) S i.188 (+susamāhita); iv.294; v.369 (saddhā -- paribhāvita); A i.6 (+bahulīkata, etc.); Sn 134 (=S i.188); Dh 89=S v.29; PvA 139.
(h) a heart calmed, allayed, passionless (santa˚ upasanta˚) D.iii.49; S i.141; Sn 746.
(i) a wieldy heart, a heart ready & prepared for truth, an open & receptive mind: kalla˚, mudu˚, udagga˚, pasanna˚ A iv.186; kalla˚ PvA 38 (sanctified); lahu˚ S i.201; udagga˚ Sn 689, 1028; S i.190 (+mudita); mudu˚ PvA 54.
(k) Various phrases. Abbhuta -- cittajātā "while wonder filled their hearts" S i.178; evaŋcitto "in this state of mind" S ii.199; Sn 985; cittam me Gotamo jānāti (G. knows my heart) S i.178; theyya -- citto intending to steal Vin iii.58; āraddha -- citto of determined mind M i.414; S ii.21, cp. 107; Sn p. 102; aññācittaŋ upaṭṭhāpeti S ii.267; nānā˚ of varying mind J i.295; nihīnacitto low -- minded PvA 107; nikaṭṭha˚ A ii.137; āhata˚ A iv.460=v.18; supahata˚ S i.238 (cp. Miln 26); visankhāragata˚ Dh 154; sampanna˚ Sn 164; vibbhanta˚ S i.61=A i.70=ii.30=iii.391.
(2) thought: mā pāpakaŋ akusalaŋ cittaŋ cinteyyātha (do not think any evil thought) S v.418; na cittamattam pi (not even one thought) PvA 3; mama cittaŋ bhaveyya (I should think) PvA 40. For further instances see Dhs & Vbh Indexes & cp. cpds. See also remarks above (under I.). Citta likened to a monkey Vism 425.
-- âdhipati the influence of thought (adj. ˚pateyya) Nett 16; Dhs 269, 359; DhsA 213. Commentators define c. here as javanacittuppāda, our "thought" in its specialized sense, Compendium of Phil. 177, n. 2. -- ânuparivattin consecutive to thought Dhs 671, 772, 1522; -- ânupassanā the critique of heart, adj. ˚ânupassin D ii.299; iii.221, 281; M i.59 & passim (cp. kāy˚); -- āvila disturbance of mind Nd2 576 (˚karaṇa); -- ujjukatā rectitude of mind Dhs 51, 277, etc.; -- uppāda the rise of a thought, i. e. intention, desire as theyya ˚ŋ uppādesi he had the intention to steal (a thought of theft) Vin iii.56; -- M i.43; iii.45; J ii.374; -- ekaggatā "one -- pointedness of mind," concentration Nett 15, 16; Vism 84, 137, 158; DhA iii.425; ThA 75; cp. ekagga -- citto A iii.175; -- kali a witch of a heart, a witch -- like heart Th 1, 356; -- kallatā readiness of heart, preparedness of mind VvA 330; -- kilesa stain of h. Dh 88 (DhA ii.162=pañca nīvaraṇā); -- kelisā pastime of the mind Th 1, 1010; -- kkhepa derangement of the mind, madness Vin v.189=193 (ummāda+); A iii.219 (ummāda+); DhA iii.70 (=ummāda); PvA 39; Dh 138; cp. ˚vikkhepa; -- cetasika belonging to heart & thought, i. e. mental state, thought, mind D i.213; Dhs 1022 ( -- dhammā, Mrs. Rh. D.: emotional, perceptual & synthetic states as well as those of intellect applied to sense -- impressions), 1282; Ps i.84; Miln 87; Vism 61, 84, 129, 337; -- dubbhaka a rogue of a heart, a rogue -- like heart Th 1, 214; -- pakopana shaking or upsetting the mind It 84 (dosa); -- pamaddin crushing the h. Th 2, 357 (=ThA 243; v. l. pamāthin & pamādin); -- pariyāya the ways (i. e. behaviour) of the h. A v.160 (cp. ceto -- paricca); -- passaddhi calm of h., serenity of mind (cp. kāya˚) S v.66; Dhs 62; -- bhāvanā cultivation of the h. M iii.149; -- mala stain of h. PvA 17; -- mudutā plasticity of mind (or thought) Dhs 62, 277, 325; -- rucita after the heart's liking J i.207; -- rūpaŋ according to intention, as much as expected Vin i.222; ii.78; iii.161; iv.177, 232; -- lahutā buoyancy of thought Dhs 62, 323, 1283; Vism 465; -- vikkhepa (cp. ˚kkhepa) madness S i.126 (+ummāda); Nett 27; Vism 34; -- vippayutta disconnected with thought Dhs 1192, 1515; -- visaŋsaṭṭha detached fr. thought Dhs 1194, 1517; -- vūpasama allayment of one's h. S i.46; -- sankilesa (adj.) with impure heart (opp. c. -- vodāna) S iii.151; -- saññatti conviction Miln 256; -- santāpa "heart -- burn," sorrow PvA 18 (=soka); -- samādhi (cp. ceto -- samādhi) concentration of mind, collectedness of thought, self -- possession S iv.350; v.269; Vbh 218; -- samodhāna adjustment, calming of thoughts ThA 45; -- sampīḷana (adj.) h.<-> crushing (cp. ˚pamaddin & ˚pakopana) Nett 29 (domanassa). -- sahabhū arising together with thought Dhs 670, 769, 1520. -- hetuka (adj.) caused by thought Dhs 667, 767.
Citta2 [cp. Sk. caitra, the first month of the year: March- April, orig. N. of the star Spica (in Virgo); see E. Plunket, Ancient Calendars, etc., pp. 134 sq., 171 sq.] N. of the month Chaitra PvA 135. Cp. Citra -- māsa KhA 192.
Cittaka(a) & Citraka(b) 1. (adj.)(a) coloured J iv.464. - 2. (m.)(b) the spotted antelope J vi.538. -- 3. (nt.) a (coloured) mark (on the forehead) Miln 408 (˚dharakumma). -- f. cittakā a counterpane of many colours (DA i.86 cittikā: vāna [read nāna˚] citra -- uṇṇā -- may' attharaṇaŋ) Vin i.192; ii.163, 169; D i.7; A i.181≈.
Cittaka2: see acittaka.
Cittatara, compar. of citta1, more various, more varied. S iii.151 sq. -- a punning passage, thus: by the procedure (caraṇa) of mind (in the past) the present mind (citta) is still more varied. Cp. SA in loco: Asl. 66; Expositor 88.
Cittatā. [f. abstr. to citta1] SA on S iii. 151 sq. (bhūmicittatāya dvāracittatāya ārammaṇacittatāya kammanānatta).
Cittatā [f. abstr. to citta2] "being of such a heart or mind," state of mind, character S iii.152; iv.142 (vimutta˚); v.158 (id.); A v.145 sq. (upārambha˚); Vbh 372 (id.); Vbh 359 (amudu˚); PvA 13 (visuddhi˚, noble character); paṭibaddha˚ (in love with) PvA 145, 147, 270. In S iii.152 l cittitā q. v.
Cittatta (n.) = cittatā S v.158.
Citti (f.) [fr. cit, cp. citta, cintā, cinteti, formation like mutti>muc, sitti>sic] "giving thought or heart" only in combn w. kar: cittikaroti to honour, to esteem. Ger. cittikatvā M iii.24; A iii.172; Pv ii.955 (cittiŋ k.= pūjetvā PvA 135); Dpvs i.2; -- acittikatvā M iii.22; A iv.392. -- pp. cittikata thought (much) of Vin iv.6 (& a˚); Vbh 2.
Cittikāra [see citti] respect, consideration VvA 178 (garu˚), 242; PvA 26; Vbh 371 (a˚); Vism 123 (cittī˚), 188.
Cittita [pp. of citteti, Denom. fr. citta1] painted, variegated, varied, coloured or resplendent with ( -- ˚) S iii.152 (sic l. for cittatā) So SA, which, on p. 151, reads citten' eva cittitaŋ for cintitaŋ. Th 1, 736; 2, 390 (su˚); Vv 367; 402.
Citra=citta3, the month Chaitra, KhA 192 (˚māsa).
Cināti [Sk. cinoti & cayati, ci, to which also kāya, q. v. See also caya, cita] to heap up, to collect, to accumulate. Inf. cinituŋ Vin ii.152; pp. cita (q. v.). Pass. cīyati J v.7. Caus. cināpeti to construct, to build J vi.204; Miln 81. -- Note cināti at J ii.302 (to weave) is to be corr. to vināti (see Kern, Toev. s. v.). -- Cp. ā˚, pa˚, vi˚. -- Note. cināti also occurs as cinati in pa˚.
Cintaka (adj.) [cp. cintin] one who thinks out or invents, in akkhara˚ the grammarian PvA 120, nīti˚ the lawgiver ib. 130; cp. Divy 212, 451, "overseer."
Cintana (nt.)=cintā Th 1, 695; Miln 233.
Cintanaka (adj.) thoughtful, considerate J i.222.
Cintā [to cit, cinteti] "the act of thinking" (cp. citti), thought S i.57; Pug 25; Dhs 16, 20, 292; Sdhp 165, 216. -- loka˚ thinking over the world, philosophy S v.447; A ii.80.
-- kavi "thought -- poetry," i. e. original poetry (see kavi) A ii.230; -- maṇi the jewel of thought, the true philosopher's stone VvA 32; N. of a science J iii.504; -- maya consisting of pure thought, metaphysical D iii.219; J iv.270; Vbh 324; Nett 8, 50, 60 (˚mayin, of paññā); Vism 439 (id.).
Cintita [pp. of cinteti, cp. also cintaka] (a) (adj.) thought out, invented, devised S i.137 (dhammo asuddho samalehi c.); iii.151 (caraṇaŋ nāma cittaŋ citten' eva c.); Pv ii.613 (mantaŋ brahma˚, expl. PvA 97 by kathitaŋ). -- (b) (nt.) a thought, intention, in duc˚ & su˚ (bad & good) A i.102; ThA 76; -- matta as much a, a thought, loc. cintita -- matte (yeva) at the mere thoughts just as he thought it DhA i.326 (=cintita kkhaṇe in the moment of thinking it, p. 329).
Cintin [adj. to cintā] only -- ˚: thinking of, having one's thoughts on A i.102 (duccintita˚ & su˚); Sn 174 (ajjhatta˚; v. l. B. ˚saññin) 388; J iii.306=iv.453 = v.176=v.478; Miln 92.
Cinteti & ceteti [Sk. cetati to appear, perceive, & cinta- yati to think, cit (see citta2) in two forms: (a) Act, base with nasal infix cint (cp. muñc, yuñj, siñc, etc.); (b) Med. base (denom.) with guṇa cet (cp. moc, yoj, sec, etc, & the analogous formations of chid, chind, ched under chindati) to *(s)qait: see citta1, with which further cp. caksu, cikita, ciketi, cikitsati, & in meaning passati (he sees=he knows), Gr. oi)da=vidi, E. view=thought, Ger. anschauung] -- Forms: (a) cint: pres. cinteti. pot. cinteyya; ppr. cintento & cintayanto (Sn 834); -- aor. cintesi, 3rd pl. cintesuŋ (J i.149), acintayuŋ (Sn 258); -- ger. cintetvā (J i.279) & cintiya (Mhvs vii.17, 32); -- grd. cinteyya & cintetabba; pp. cintita (q. v.). Cp. also cintana, cintin. -- (b) cet: pres. ceteti & cetayati (S i.121), pot. cetaye (Pv ii.97= cinteyya PvA 116); ppr. cetayāna (J v.339); fut. cetessati (Vin iii.19); -- aor. acetayi (Pv i.66=cetesi PvA 34); -- ger cecca (Vin iii.112; iv.290); also cicca: see sañ˚. -- grd. cetabba (for *cetetabba only at J iv.157, v. l. ceteyya, expl. by cintetabba); -- pp. cetayita (q. v.). Cp. also cetanā.
Note. The relation in the use of the two forms is that cet is the older & less understood form, since it is usually expld by cint, whereas cint is never expld by cet & therefore appears to be the more frequent & familiar form.
Meaning: (a) (intr.) to think, to reflect, to be of opinion, Grouped with (phuṭṭho) vedeti, ceteti, sañjānāti he has the feeling, the awareness (of the feeling), the consciousness S iv.68. Its seat is freq. mentioned with manasā (in the heart), viz. manasā diṭṭhigatāni cintayanto Sn 834; na pāpaŋ manasā pi cetaye Pv ii.97; J i.279; PvA 13 (he thought it over), ib. (evaŋ c. you think so); Sdhp 289 (īdisaŋ c. id.) Mhvs vii.18, 32; Miln 233 (cintayati), 406 (cintayitabba). -- Prohibitive: mā cintayi don't think about it, don't worry, don't be afraid, never mind J i.50, 292, 424; iii.289; vi.176; pl. mā cintayittha J i.457; iv.414; vi.344; Vism 426; DhA i.12; iii.196; also mā cintesi J iii.535. -- (b) (with acc.) to ponder, think over, imagine, think out, design, scheme, intend, plan. In this sense grouped with (ceteti) pakappeti anuseti to intend, to start to perform, to carry out S ii.65. maraṇaŋ ākankhati cetayati (ponders over) S i.121; acinteyyāni na cintetabbāni A ii.80; cetabba -- rūpa (a fit object of thought, a good thought) J iv.157 (= cintetabba); loka -- cintaŋ c. S v.447; ajjhattarūpe, etc. ceteti Vin iii.113; mangalāni acintayuŋ Sn 258; diṭṭhigatāni cintayanto Sn 834; kiŋ cintesi J i.221; sokavinayan' -- upāyaŋ c. to devise a means of dispelling the grief PvA 39. -- Esp. with pāpaŋ & pāpakaŋ to intend evil, to have ill -- will against (c. dat.): mā pāpakaŋ akusalaŋ cittaŋ cinteyyātha S v.418; na p. cetaye manasā pi Pv ii.97 (=cinteyya, piheyya PvA 116); p. na cintetabba PvA 114; tassā p. acetayi Pv i.66 (=cetesi PvA 34); kiŋ amhākaŋ cintesi what do you intend against us? J i.211. -- (c) (with dat.) (restricted to ceteti) to set one's heart on, to think upon, strive after, desire: āgatipunabbhavāya c. to desire a future rebirth S iv.201; vimokkhāya c. to strive after emancipation S iii.121; attavyābadhāya c. M iii.23=A i.157=S iv.339; pabbajjāya c. It 75; rakkhāya me tvaŋ vihito . . . udāhu me cetayase vadhāya J iii.146 -- acinteyya that which must not or cannot be thought A ii.80 (cattāri ˚āni four reflections to be avoided); VvA 323 (a. buddhânubhāva unimaginable majesty of a B.).
Cipiṭa (adj.) [pp. to cip (?) see next: cp. Sk. cipiṭa grain flattened after boiling] pressed flat, flattened VvA 222. To be read also at J vi.185 for vippita.
Cippiyamāna [ppr. Pass. of cip, see cipiṭa] crushed flat (Rh. D.; cp. also Kern Toev.) Miln 261.
Cimilikā (f.) see cilimikā Vin ii.150; iv.40; Cp. Vin. Texts iii.167; J.P.T.S. 1885, 39.
Cira (adj.) [Vedic. cira, perhaps to *quei̯e to rest, cp. Lat. quiēs, civis; Goth. hveila; Ohg. wīlōn; E. while] long (of time), usually in cpds. & as adv. Either ciraŋ (acc.) for a long time Sn 678, 730, 1029; Dh 248; Kh vii.5; J ii.110; iv.3; Pv ii.333 or cirena (instr.) after a long time Vin iv.86; DhsA 239; or cirāya (dat.) for long Dh 342. cirassa (gen.) see cirassaŋ. -- cirataraŋ (compar.) for a (comparatively) long time, rather long A iii.58; Pv ii.87. cir -- â -- ciraŋ continually Vin iv.261; J v.233. -- acira not long (ago) lately, newly: ˚arahattappatta S i.196; ˚pabbajita S i.185; ˚parinibbute Bhagavati shortly after the death of the Bhagavant D i.204, etc.; Sn p. 59.
-- kālaŋ (adv.) a long time freq. e. g. PvA 19, 45, 60, 109; -- ṭṭhitika perpetual, lasting long A iv.339 (opp. pariyāpajjati); Vv 801; Pug 32, 33; Vism 37, 175; DA i.3. -- dikkhita (not ˚dakkhita) having long since been initiated S i.226=J v.138 (=cirapabbajita); -- nivāsin dwelling (there) for a long time S ii.227; -- paṭika [cp. Sk. ciraŋ prati] long since, adj. constr. in conformity w. the subject Vin i.33; D ii.270= S iii.120; -- pabbajita having long since become a wanderer A iii.114; Sn p. 92; DA i.143; -- ppavāsin (adj.) long absent Dh 219 (=cirappavuttha DhA iii.293). -- rattaŋ (adv.) for a long time Sn 665, 670; J iv.371; and -- rattāya id. J ii.340; Pv i.94.
Cirassaŋ (adv.) [origin. gen. of cira=cirasya] at last Vin ii.195; D i.179; S i.142; J ii.439; iii.315; iv.446 (read cirassa passāmi); v.328; Th 1, 868; ThA 217; PvA 60. -- na cirass' eva shortly after D iii.11; J iv.2; DhA iii.176; PvA 32. -- sucirass' eva after a very long while S i.193.
Cirāyati [Sk. cirayati, v. denom. fr. cira] to be long, to tarry, to delay, DhA i.16; VvA 64, 208; cp. ciraŋ karoti id. J ii.443.
Cirīṭa [Sk. ciri, cp. kīra] a parrot J v.202 (in compn cirīti˚).
Cilimikā (f.) [Der. fr. cīra] as cimilikā at Vin ii.150; iv.40 a kind of cloth or carpeting, made from palmleaves, bark, etc. Also at PvA 144 (doubtful reading).
Cillaka [kilaka or khīlaka, q. v.] a peg, post, pillar, in dāruka˚ Th 2, 390 (cp. ThA 257). Not with Kern (Toev.) "a wooden puppet," as der. fr. citta.1
Cīnaka (m. nt.) a kind of bean Sn 239 (=aṭavi -- pabbata- padesu āropita -- jāta -- cīna -- mugga SnA 283); J v.405.
Cīnapiṭṭha (nt.) red lead DA i.40; DhsA 14.
Cīyati [Pass. of cināti] to be gathered, to be heaped up Sn 428 (cīyate pahūtaŋ puññaŋ). See also ā˚.
Cīra (nt.) [Sk. cīra, cp. cīvara] 1. bark, fibre D i.167 (kusa˚, vāka˚, phalaka˚); Vin iii.34; A i.295; Pug 55. -- a bark dress Vin i.305; J vi.500 (cp. cīraka). -- 2. a strip (orig. of bark), in suvaṇṇa˚ -- khacita gold -- brocaded VvA 280 (see also next). Cp. ocīraka (under odīraka).
Cīraka [cp. cīra] 1. bark (see cpds.) -- 2. a strip, in suvaṇṇa˚ gold brocade (dress) J v.197.
-- vāsika (nt.) bark -- dress (a punishment) M i.87=A i.48=Miln 197.
Cīriya (adj.) [fr. cīra] like or of bark, in cpd. dāru˚ (as Np.) "wood -- barker" DhA ii.35.
Cīriḷikā (f.) [cp. Sk. cīrī & jhillikā a cricket, cīrilli a sort of large fish] a cricket A iii.397 (v. l. cīrikā). Cp. on word -- formation pipiḷikā & Mod. Gr. tsi/tsikos cricket.
Cīvara (nt.) [*Sk. cīvara, prob.=cīra, appld orig. to a dress of bark] the (upper) robe of a Buddhist mendicant. C. is the first one of the set of 4 standard requisites of a wandering bhikkhu, vir. c˚, piṇḍapāta alms-bowl, senāsana lodging, a place to sleep at, gilānapaccaya -- bhesajja -- parikkhāra medicinal appliances for use in sickness. Thus mentioned passim e. g. Vin iii.89, 99, 211; iv.154 sq.; D i.61; M ii.102; A i.49; Nd2 s. v.; It 111. In abbreviated form Sn 339; PvA 7; Sdhp 393. In starting on his begging round the bhikkhu goes patta -- cīvaraŋ ādāya, The 3 robes are sanghāṭi, uttarāsaṅga, antaravāsaka, given thus, e.g. at Vin i.289. that is literally ʻ taking his bowl & robe. ʼ But this is an elliptical idiom meaning ʻ putting on his outer robe and taking his bowl. ʼ A bhikkhu never goes into a village without wearing all his robes, he never takes them, or any one of the three, with him. Each of the three is simply an oblong piece of cloth (usually cotton cloth). On the mode of wearing these three robes see the note at Dialogues ii.145. -- Vin iii.11; D ii.85; Sn p. 21; PvA 10, 13 & passim. The sewing of the robe was a festival for the laity (see under kaṭhina). There are 6 kinds of cloth mentioned for its manufacture, viz. khoma, kappāsika, koseyya, kambala, sāṇa, bhanga Vin. i.58=96=281 (cp. ˚dussa). Two kinds of robes are distinguished: one of the gahapatika (layman) a white one, and the other that of the bhikkhu, the c. proper, called paŋsukūlaŋ c. "the dust -- heap robe" Vin v.117 (cp. gahapati). -- On cīvara in general & also on special ordinances concerning its making, wearing & handling see Vin i.46, 49 sq., 196, 198, 253 sq., 285, 287 sq., 306=ii.267 (of var. colours); ii.115 sq. (sibbati to sew the c.); iii.45, 58 (theft of a c.), 195 -- 223, 254 -- 266; iv.59 -- 62, 120 -- 123, 173, 279 sq., 283 (six kinds). -- A iii.108 (cīvare kalyāṇakāma); v.100, 206; Vism 62; It 103; PvA 185. -- Sīse cīvaraŋ karoti to drape the outer robe over the head Vin ii.207, 217; ˚ŋ khandhe karoti to drape it over the back Vin ii.208, 217; ˚ŋ nikkhipati to lay it down or put it away Vin i.47 sq.; ii.152, 224; iii.198, 203, 263; ˚ŋ saŋharati to fold it up Vin i.46. -- Var. expressions referring to the use of the robe: atireka˚ an extra robe Vin iii.195; acceka˚ id. Vin iii.260 sq.; kāla˚ (& akāla˚) a robe given at (and outside) the specified time Vin iii.202 sq.; iv.284, 287; gahapati˚ a layman's r. Vin iii.169, 171; ti˚ the three robes, viz. sanghāṭī, uttarāsanga, antaravāsaka Vin i.288, 289; iii.11, 195, 198 sq.; v.142; adj. tecīvarika wearing 3 rs. Vin v.193; dubbala˚ (as adj.) with a worn -- out c. Vin iii.254; iv.59, 154, 286; paŋsukūla˚ the dust -- heap robe PvA 141; sa˚ -- bhatta food given with a robe Vin iv.77; lūkha˚ (adj.) having a coarse robe Vin i.109 (+duccola); iii.263 (id.); A i.25; vihāra˚ a robe to be used in the monastery Vin iii.212.
-- kaṇṇa the lappet of a monk's robe DhA iii.420; VvA 76=DhA iii.106, cp. cīvarakarṇaka Av.Ś ii.184, & ˚ika Divy 239, 341, 350. -- kamma (nt.) robe -- making Vin ii.218; iii.60, 240; iv.118, 151; A v.328 sq.; DhA iii.342; PvA 73, 145. -- kāra ( -- samaya) (the time of) sewing the robes Vin iii.256 sq. -- kāla ( -- samaya) the right time for accepting robes Vin iii.261; iv.286, 287; -- dāna ( -- samaya) (the ime for) giving robes Vin iv.77, 99; -- dussa clothing -- material Vin iv.279, 280; -- nidāhaka putting on the c. Vin i.284; -- paṭiggāhaka the receiver of a robe Vin i.283; ii.176; v.205; A iii.274 sq.; -- paṭivisa a portion of the c. Vin i.263, 285, 301; -- palibodha an obstacle to the valid performance of the kathina ceremony arising from a set of robes being due to a particular person [a technical term of the canon law. See Vinaya Texts ii.149, 157, 169]. It is one of the two kaṭhinassa palibodhā (c. & āvāsa˚) Vin i.265; v.117, cp. 178; -- paviveka (nt.) the seclusion of the robe, i. e. of a non -- Buddhist with two other pavivekāni (piṇḍapāta˚ & senāsana˚) at A i.240; -- bhanga the distribution of robes Vin iv.284; -- bhatta robes & a meal (given to the bh.) Vin iii.265; -- bhājaka one who deals out the robes Vin i.285; ii.176; v.205; A iii.274 sq. (cp. ˚paṭiggāhaka); -- bhisī a robe rolled up like a pillow Vin i.287 sq.; -- rajju (f.) a rope for (hanging up) the robes; in the Vinaya always combd with ˚vaŋsa (see below); -- lūkha (adj.) one who is poorly dressed Pug 53; -- vaŋsa a bamboo peg for hanging up a robe (cp. ˚rajju) Vin i.47, 286; ii.117, 121, 152, 153, 209, 222; iii.59; J i.9; DhA iii.342; -- sankamanīya (nt.) a robe that ought to be handed over (to its legal owner) Vin iv.282; 283.
Cuṇṇa [Sk. cūrṇa, pp. of carvati, to chew, to *sqer to cut, break up, as in Lat. caro, Sk. kṛṇāti (cp. kaṭu); cp Lit. kirwis axe, Lat. scrūpus sharp stone, scrupulus, scortum. See also calaka2 & cp. Sk. kṣunna of kṣud to grind, to which prob. P. kuḍḍa] 1. pp. broken up, powdered; only in cpd. ˚vicuṇṇa crushed to bits, smashed up, piecemeal J i.73; ii.120, 159, 216; iii.74. -- 2. (nt.) (a) any hard substance ground into a powder; dust, sand J i.216; VvA 65 (paŋsu˚); Pv iii.33 (suvaṇṇa˚ gold -- dust; PvA 189=vālikā); DA i.245 (id.); DhsA 12. -- (b) esp. "chunam" (Anglo -- Ind.) i. e. a plaster, of which quicklime & sand are the chief ingredients & which is largely used in building, but also applied to the skin as a sort of soap -- powder in bathing. Often combd with mattikā clay, in distinction of which c. is for delicate use (tender skin), whereas m. for rougher purposes (see Vin i.202); cuṇṇāni bhesajjāni an application of c. Vin i.202. -- Vin i.47=52; ii.220, 224 sq.; A i.208; iii.25; J v.89. cuṇṇa -- tela -- vālaṇḍupaka Vism 142 (where Asl 115 reads cuṇṇaŋ vā telaŋ vā leḍḍūpaka). -- nahāniya˚ D i.74=M iii.92; PvA 46; na -- hāna˚ J ii.403, 404. -- gandha -- cuṇṇa aromatic (bath) powder J i.87, 290; iii.276; candana˚ id. Miln 13, 18. -- iṭṭhaka˚ plaster (which is rubbed on the head of one to be executed) PvA 4, cp. Mṛcchakaṭika X, beginning (stanza 5) "piṣṭa -- cūrṇâvakīrṇaśca puruṣo 'haŋ paśūkṛtaḥ."
-- cālanī a mortar for the preparation of chunam Vin i.202; -- piṇḍa a lump of ch. Vin iii.260; iv.154 sq.
Cuṇṇaka (adj.) [fr. cuṇṇa] (a) a preparation of chunam, paint (for the face, mukha˚) D i.7; M ii.64=Th 1, 771; J v.302. -- (b) powder; cuṇṇakajātāni reduced to powder M iii.92 (aṭṭhikāni). -- f. ˚ikā in cuṇṇikamaŋsa mince meat J i.243.
Cuṇṇeti [Denom. of cuṇṇa] to grind to powder, to crush; to powder or paint w. chunam Vin ii.107 (mukhaŋ); J iv.457. -- ppr. pass cuṇṇiyamāna being ground J vi.185.
Cuta [pp. of cavati; Sk. cyuta] 1. (adj.) shifted, disappeared, deceased, passed from one existence to another Vin iv.216; Sn 774, 899; It 19, 99; J i.139, 205; Pug 17. -- -- accuta permanent. not under the sway of Death, Ep. of Nibbāna Dh 225. -- 2. (n.) in cpd. cutûpapāta disappearance & reappearance, transmigration, Saŋsāra (see cuti) S ii.67 (āgatigatiyā sati c˚ hoti); A iii.420; iv.178; DhA i.259; usually in phrase sattānaŋ cutûpapāta -- ñāṇa the discerning of the saŋsāra of beings D i.82=M i.248; D iii.111. As cutuppāta at A ii.183. Cp. jātisaŋsāra -- ñāṇa.
Cuti (f.) [cp. Sk. cyuti, to cavati] vanishing, passing away, decease, shifting out of existence (opp. upapatti, cp. also gati & āgati) D i.162; S ii.3=42; iii.53; M i.49; Sn 643; Dh 419; J i.19, 434; Vism 292, 460, 554; DhA iv.228.
Cudita (adj.) [pp. of codati] being urged, receiving blame, being reproved Vin i.173; ii.250; ii.250, 251; M i.95 sq.; A iii.196 sq. -- ˚ka id. Vin v.115, 158, 161, 164.
Cuddasa [contracted fr. catuddasa, Sk. caturdaśa, cp. catur] fourteen J i.71; vi.8; Miln 12; DhA iii.120, 186.
Cunda an artist who works in ivory J vi.261 (Com: dantakāra); Miln 331.
Cundakāra a turner J vi.339.
Cumbaṭa (nt.) [cp. Prk. cumbhala] (a) a coil; a pad of cloth, a pillow J i.53 (dukūla˚); ii.21 (id.); VvA 73. -- (b) a wreath J iii.87. Cp. next.
Cumbaṭaka (nt.) cumbaṭa, viz. (a) a pillow DhA i.139; VvA 33, 165. -- (b) a wreath J iv.231 (puppha˚); SnA 137; DhA i.72 (mālā˚).
Cumbati [Sk. cumbati. Dhtp 197 defines as "vadana- saŋyoge"] to kiss J ii.193; v.328; vi.291, 344; VvA 260. Cp. pari˚.
Culla & cūḷa (adj.) [Sk. kṣulla=kṣudra (P. khudda, see khuddaka), with c: k= cuṇṇa: kṣud] small, minor (opp. mahā great, major), often in conn. with names & titles of books, e. g. c˚ Anāthapiṇḍika=A jr. J ii.287, cp. Anglo -- Indian chota sahīb the younger gentleman (Hind. chhota=culla); or Culla -- vagga, the minor section (Vin ii.) as subordinate to Mahā -- vagga (Vin i.), Culla -- niddesa the minor exposition (following upon Mahā -- niddesa); culla -- sīla the siṃple precepts of ethics (opp. mahā˚ the detailed sīla) D i.5, etc. Otherwise only in cpds.:
-- angulī little finger DhA ii.86. -- ûpaṭṭhāka a "lesser" follower, i. e. a personal attendant (of a thera) J i.108 (cūl˚); ii.325 (cull˚; DhA i.135; ii.260; cūḷ); -- pitā an uncle ("lesser" father=sort of father, cp. Lat. matertera, patruus, Ger. Vetter=father jun.) J ii.5; iii.456 (v. l. petteyya); PvA 107; DhA i.221 (cūḷa˚).
Cullāsīti [=caturāsīti] eighty -- four J vi.226 (mahākappe as duration of Saŋsāra); PvA 254 (id.). Also as cūḷāsīti q. v.
Cūlikā (f.) [Sk. cūlikā, cp. cūḍā]=cūḷa; kaṇṇa˚ the root of the ear J ii.276; Vism 249, 255; DhA iv.13 (of an elephant). ˚baddha S ii.182; KS ii.122. See also cūḷā.
Cūḷa [Sk. cūḍa & cūlikā] 1. swelling, protuberance; root, knot, crest. As kaṇṇa -- cūḷa the root of an elephant's ear J vi.488. aḍḍha -- cūḷa a measure (see aḍḍha). See also cūlikā. -- 2. (adj.) see culla.
Cūḷaka (adj.) [fr. cūḷā] having a cūḷa or top -- knot; pañca˚ with five top -- knots J v.250 (of a boy).
Cūḷanikā (f.) [Der. fr. culla, q. v.] only in phrase sahassi cūḷanikā lokadhātu "the system of the 1,000 lesser worlds" (distinguished from the dvi -- sahassī majjhimakā & the ti -- sahassī mahāsahassi lokadhātu) A i.227; Nd2 235, 2b.
Cūḷā (f.) [Vedic cūḍā. to cūḍa]=cūḷa, usually in sense of crest only, esp. denoting the lock of hair left on the crown of the head when the rest of the head is shaved (cp. Anglo -- Indian chuḍā & Gujarāti choṭali) J i.64, 462; v.153, 249 (pañcacūḷā kumārā); DhA i.294; as mark of distinction of a king J iii.211; v.187; of a servant J vi.135. -- a cock's comb J ii.410; iii.265.
-- maṇi (m.) a jewel worn in a crest or diadem, a jewelled crest J i.65; ii.122; v.441.
Cūḷāsīti for cullāsīti at Th 2, 51.
Ce [Vedic ced; ce=Lat. que in absque, ne -- c, etc., Goth. h in ni -- h. see also ca 3] conditional particle "if," constructed either with Indicative (ito ce pi yojanasate, viharati even if he lived 100 y. from here D i.117) or Conditional (tatra ce tumhe assatha kupitā D i.3), or Potential (passe ce vipulaŋ sukhaŋ Dh 290). -- Always enclitic (like Lat. que) & as a rule placed after the emphasized word at the beginning of the sentence: puññañ ce puriso kayirā Dh 118; brāhmaṇo ce tvaŋ brūsi Sn 457. Usually added to pronouns or pron. adverbs: ahañ ce va kho pana ceteyyaŋ D i.185; ettha ce te mano atthi S i.116, or combd with other particles, as noce, yañce, sace (q. v.). Freq. also in combn with other indef. interrog. or emphatic particles, as ce va kho pana if then, if now: ahañ ce va kho pana pañhaŋ puccheyyaŋ D i.117; ahañ ce va kho pana abhivādeyyaŋ D i.125; api (pi) ce even if: api ce vassasataŋ jīve mānavo Sn 589.
Cecca=cicca (equal to sañcicca), ger. of cinteti, corresp. to either *cetya [ cet] or *cintya [cint]; only in ster. def. jānanto sañjānanto cecca abhivitaritvā Vin ii.91; iii.73, 112; iv.290.
Ceṭa a servant, a boy J iii.478. See next.
Ceṭaka a servant, a slave, a (bad) fellow Vin iv.66; ] ii.176=DhA iv.92 (duṭṭha˚ miserable fellow); iii.281; iv.82 (bhātika -- ceṭakā rascals of brothers); v.385; Miln 222.
Cetaka a decoy -- bird (Com. dīpaka -- tittira, exciting partridge) J iii.357.
Cetakedu a kind of bird J vi.538. See also cela˚.
Cetanaka (adj.) [see cetanā] connected with a thought or intention J vi.304; usually in a˚ without a thought, unintentional J ii.375; vi.178; Vbh 419.
Cetanā [f. abstr. fr. cet, see cinteti] state of ceto in action, thinking as active thought, intention, purpose, will. Defined as action (kamma: A iii.415; cp. KV. viii.9, § 38 untraced quotation; cp. A v.292). Often combd w. patthanā & paṇidhi (wish & aspiration), e. g. S ii.99, 154; A i.32, 224; v 212; Nd2 112 (in def. of asucimanussā, people of ignoble action: asuciyā cetanāya, patthanāya, paṇidhinā samannāgatā). Also classed with these in a larger group in KV., e. g. 343, 380. -- Combd w. vedanā saññā c. citta phassa manasikāra in def. of nāmakāya (opp. rūpakāya) S ii.3 (without citta), Ps i.183 (do.); Nett 77, 78. -- Enumd under the four blessings of vatthu, paccaya, c., guṇātireka ( -- sampadā) & def. as "cetanāya somanassa -- sahagatañāṇa -- sampayutta -- bhāvo" at DhA iii.94. -- C. is opposed to cetasika (i. e. ceto) in its determination of the 7 items of good conduct (see sīla) which refers to actions of the body (or are wilful, called cetanākamma Nett 43, 96; otherwise distinguished as kāya -- & vacīkammantā A v.292 sq.), whereas the 3 last items (sīla 8 -- 10) refer to the behaviour of the mind (cetasikakamma Nett., mano -- kammanta A), viz. the shrinking back from covetousness, malice, & wrong views. <-> Vin iii.112; S iii.60; A ii.232 (kaṇhassa kammassa pahānāya cetanā: intention to give up wrong -- doing); VvA 72 (vadhaka -- cetanā wilful murder); maraṇacetanā intention of death DhA i.20; āhār' āsā cetanā intention consisting in deśire for food Vism 537. <-> PvA 8, 30 (pariccāga˚ intention to give); Pug 12; Miln 94; Sdhp 52, 72. -- In scholastic lgg. often expld as cetanā sañcetanā sañcetayitatta (viz. state or behaviour of volition) Dhs 5; Vbh 285. -- Cp. Dhs 58 (+citta); Vbh 401 (id.); Vbh 40, 403; Vism 463 (cetayatī ti cetanā; abhisandahatī ti attho).
Cetayita [pp. of ceteti, see cinteti] intended A v.187; Miln 62.
Cetasa1 N. of a tree, perhaps the yellow Myrobalan J v.420.
Cetasa2 (adj.) [orig. the gen. of ceto used as nominative] only in -- ˚: sucetasa of a good mind, good -- hearted S i.4=29, 46=52; paraphrased by Buddhaghosa as sundaracetasa; pāpa˚ of a wicked mind, evil -- minded S i.70=98; a˚ without mind S i.198; sabba˚ all-hearted, with all one's mind or heart, in phrase aṭṭhikatvā manasikatvā sabbacetaso samannāharitva ohitasoto (of one paying careful & proper attention) S i.112 sq.=189, 220; A ii.116; iii.163, 402; iv.167. The editors have often misunderstood the phrase & we freq. find vv. ll. with sabbaŋ cetaso & sabbaŋ cetasā, -- appamāṇa˚ S iv.186; avyāpanna˚ S v.74.
Cetasika (adj.) belonging to ceto, mental (opp. kāyika physical). Kāyikaŋ sukhaŋ > cetasikaŋ s. A i.81; S v. 209; kāyikā darathā > c. d. M iii.287, 288; c. duk khaŋ D ii 306; A i.157; c. roga J iii.337. c. kamma is sīla 8 -- 10 (see under cetanā) Nett 43. -- As n. combd with citta it is to be taken as supplementing it, viz. mind & all that belongs to it, mind and mental properties, adjuncts, co -- efficients (cp. vitakka -- vicāra & sach cpds. as phalâphala, bhavâbhava) D i.213; see also citta. Occurring in the Nikāyas in sg. only, it came to be used in pl. and, as an ultimate category, the 52 cetasikas, with citta as bare consciousness, practically superseded in mental analysis, the 5 khandha -- category. See Cpd. p. 1 and pt. II. Mrs. Rh. D., Bud. Psy. 6, 148, 175. -- ˚cetasikā dhammā Ps i.84; Vbh 421; Dhs 3, 18, etc. (cp. Dhs. trsl. pp. 6, 148).
Cetaso gen. sg. of ceto, functioning as gen. to citta (see citta & ceto).
Cetāpana (nt.) [see cetāpeti; cp. BSk. cetanika] barter Vin iii.216, see also Vin. Texts i.22 & Kacc. 322.
Cetāpeti [Caus. of *cetati to ci, collect; see also Kern, Toev. s. v.] to get in exchange, to barter, buy Vin iii.216 (expld by parivatteti), 237; iv.250.
Cetiya (nt.) [cp. from ci, to heap up, cp. citi, cināti] 1. a tumulus, sepulchral monument, cairn, M i.20; Dh 188; J i.237; vi.173; SnA 194 (dhātu -- gharaŋ katvā cetiyaŋ patiṭṭhāpesuŋ); KhA 221; DhA iii.29 (dhātu˚); iv. 64; VvA 142; Sdhp 428, 430. Pre -- Buddhistic cetiyas mentioned by name are Aggāḷava˚ Vin ii.172; S i.185; Sn p. 59; DhA iii.170; Ānanda˚ D ii.123, 126; Udena˚ D ii.102, 118; iii.9; DhA iii.246; Gotama (ka)˚ ibid.; Cāpāla˚ D ii.102, 118; S v.250; Ma -- kuṭabandhana˚ D ii.160; Bahuputta˚ D ii.102, 118; iii.10; S ii.220; A iv.16; Sattambaka˚ D ii.102, 118; Sārandada D ii.118, 175; A iii.167; Supatiṭṭha˚ Vin i.35.
-- angaṇa the open space round a Cetiya Miln 366; Vism 144, 188, 392; DA i.191, 197; VvA 254. -- vandanā Cetiya worship Vism 299.
Ceteti see cinteti.
Ceto (nt.) [Sk. cetas]=citta, q. v. for detail concerning derivation, inflexion & meaning. Cp. also cinteti. <-> Only the gen. cetaso & the instr. cetasā are in use; besides these there is an adj. cetaso, der. from nom. base cetas. Another adj. -- form is the inflected nom. ceto, occurring only in viceto S v.447 (+ummatto, out of mind).
I. Ceto in its relation to similar terms: (a) with kāya & vācā: kāyena vācāya cetasā (with hand, speech & heart) Sn 232; Kh IX. kāya (vācā˚, ceto˚) -- muni a saint in action, speech & thought A i.273= Nd2 514. In this phrase the Nd has mano˚ for ceto˚, which is also a v. l. at A -- passage. -- (b) with paññā (see citta iv. b) in ceto -- vimutti, paññā -- vimutti (see below iv.). -- (c) with samādhi, pīti, sukha, etc.: see ˚pharaṇatā below.
II. Cetaso (gen.) (a) heart. c˚ upakkilesa (stain of h.) D iii.49, 101; S v.93. līnatta (attachment) S v.64. appasāda (unfaith) S i.179; ekodibhāva (singleness) D iii.78; S iv.236 (see 2nd jhāna); āvaraṇāni (hindrances) S 66. -- vimokkha (redemption) S i.159. santi (tranquillity) Sn 584, 593. vūpasama (id.) A i.4; S v.65. vinibandha (freedom) D iii.238= A iii.249; iv.461 sq. -- (b) mind. c˚ vikkhepa (disturbance) A iii.448; v.149: uttrāsa (fear) Vbh 367. abhiniropanā (application) Dhs 7. -- (c) thought. in c˚ parivitakko udapādi "there arose a reflection in me (gen.)" S i.139; ii.273; iii.96, 103.
III. Cetasā (instr.) -- (a) heart. mettā -- sahagatena c. (with a h. full of love) freq. in phrase ekaŋ disaŋ pharitvā, etc. e. g. D i.186, iii.78, 223; S iv.296; A i.183; ii.129; iv.390; v.299, 344; Vbh 272. ujubhūtena (upright) S ii.279; A i.63; vivaṭena (open) D iii.223= S v.263; A iv.86. macchera -- maḷa -- pariyuṭṭhitena (in which has arisen the dirt of selfishness) S iv.240; A ii.58. santim pappuyya c. S i.212. taṇhādhipateyyena (standing under the sway of thirst) S iii.103. -- vippasannena (devout) S i.32=57, 100; Dh 79; Pv i.1010. muttena A iv.244. vimariyādi -- katena S iii.31. vigatâbhijjhena D iii.49. pathavī -- āpo etc. -- samena A iv.375 sq. ākāsasamena A iii.315 sq. sabba˚ S ii.220. abhijjhā -- sahagatena A i.206. satārakkhena D iii.269; A v.30. -- migabhūtena cetasā, with the heart of a wild creature M i.450. -- acetasā without feeling, heartlessly J iv.52, 57. -- (b) mind: in two phrases, viz. (a) c. anuvitakketi anuvicāreti "to ponder & think over in one's mind" D iii.242; A i.264; iii.178; <-> (b) c. pajānāti (or manasikaroti) "to know in one's mind," in the foll. expressions: para -- sattānaŋ para -- puggalānaŋ cetasā ceto -- paricca pajānāti "he knows in his mind the ways of thought (the state of heart) of other beings" (see ceto -- paricca & ˚pariyāya) M ii.19; S ii.121, 213; v.265; A i.255=iii.17=280. puggalaŋ paduṭṭha -- cittaŋ evaŋ c˚ ceto -- paricca p. It 12, cp. 13. Arahanto . . . Bhagavanto c˚ cetoparicca viditā D iii.100. para -- cittapariyāya kusalo evaŋ c˚ ceto<-> paricca manasikaroti A v.160. Bhagavā [brāhmaṇassa] c˚ ceto -- parivitakkaŋ aññāya "perceiving in his mind the thought of [the b.]" S i.178; D iii.6; A iii.374; Miln 10.
IV. Cpds. -- khila fallowness, waste of heart or mind, usually as pañca c -- khilā, viz. arising from doubt in the Master, the Norm, the Community, or the Teaching, or from anger against one's fellow -- disciples, D iii.237, 278; M i.101; A iii.248=iv.460=v.17; J iii.291; Vbh 377; Vism 211. -- paṇidhi resolution, intention, aspiration Vv 4712 (=cittassa samma -- d -- eva ṭhapanaŋ VvA 203); Miln 129; -- padosa corruption of the h., wickedness, A i.8; It 12, 13 (opp. pasāda): -- paricca "as regards the heart," i. e. state of heart, ways of thought, character, mind (=pariyāya) in ˚ñāṇa Th 2, 71=227 (expld at ThA 76, 197 by cetopariyañāṇa) see phrase cetasā c -- p. above (iii. b.); -- pariyāya the ways of the heart (=paricca), in para -- ceto -- pariyāya -- kusalo "an expert in the ways of others' hearts" A v.160; c. -- p -- kovido encompassing the heart of others S i.146, 194=Th 1, 1248; i.196=Th 1, 1262. Also with syncope: ˚pariyañāṇa D i.79; iii.100; Vism 431; DA i.223. -- parivitakka reflecting, reasoning S i.103, 178; -- pharaṇatā the breaking forth or the effulgence of heart, as one of five ideals to be pursued, viz. samādhi, pīti -- pharaṇatā, sukha˚, ceto˚, āloka˚ D iii.278; -- vasippatta mastery over one's h. A ii.6, 36, 185; iv.312; M i.377; Vism 382; Miln 82, 85; -- vimutti emancipation of h. (always w. paññā -- vimutti), which follows out of the destruction of the intoxications of the heart (āsavānaŋ khayā anāsavā c. -- v.) Vin i.11 (akuppā); D i.156, 167, 251; iii.78, 108, 248 (muditā); S ii.265 (mettā); M i.197 (akuppā), 205, 296; iii.145 (appamāṇā, mahaggatā); A i.124; ii.6, 36; iii.84; Sn 725, 727=It 106; It 20 (mettā), 75, 97; Pug 27, 62; Vbh 86 (mettā) Nett 81 (virāgā); DA i.313 (=cittavimutti); -- vivaraṇa setting the h. free A iv.352; v.67. See also arahant II D. -- samatha calm of h. Th 2, 118; -- samādhi concentration of mind (=cittasamādhi DA i.104) D i.15; iii. 30; S iv.297; A ii.54; iii.51; -- samphassa contact with thought Dhs 3.
Cela (nt.) [Derivation unknown. Cp. Sk. cela] cloth, esp. clothes worn, garment, dress A i.206; Pv ii.127 (kañcanā˚ for kañcana˚); iii.93 (for veḷa); dhāti˚ baby's napkin J iii.539. In simile of one whose clothes are on fire (āditta˚+ādittasīsa) S v.440; A ii.93; iii.307; iv.320. -- acela a naked ascetic D i.161, 165≈; J v.75; vi.222.
-- aṇḍaka (v. l. aṇḍuka) a loincloth M i.150; -- ukkhepa waving of garments (as sign of applause), usually with sādhukāra J i.54; ii.253; iii.285; v.67; DhA ii.43; SnA ii.225; VvA 132, 140; -- paṭṭikā (not ˚pattika) a bandage of cloth, a turban Vin ii.128 (Bdhgh. celasandhara); M ii.93; DhA iii.136; -- vitāna an awning J i.178; ii.289; iv.378; Mhbv 122; Vism 108.
Celaka 1. one who is clothed; acelaka without clothes D i.166; M i.77. -- 2. a standard -- bearer [cp. Sk. ceḍaka P. ceṭa & in meaning E. knight > Ger. knecht; knave > knabe, knappe] D i.51; DA i.156; A iv. 107, 110; Miln 331.
Celakedu=cetakedu J vi.538.
Celāpaka=celāvaka J v.418.
Celāvaka [cp. Sk. chilla?] a kind of bird J vi.538 (Com. celabaka; is it celā bakā?); J v.416. See also celāpaka.
Cokkha (adj.) [Cp. Sk. cokṣa] clean J iii.21; ˚bhāva cleanliness M i.39 (= visuddhibhāva; to be read for T mokkha˚? See Trenckner's note on p. 530).
Coca (nt.) [Both derivation & meaning uncertain. The word is certainly not Aryan. See the note at Vinaya Texts ii.132] the cocoa -- nut or banana, or cinnamon J v.420 (˚vana); -- ˚pāna a sweet drink of banana or cocoa -- nut milk Vin i.246.
Codaka (adj.) [to codeti] one who rebukes; exhorting, reproving Vin i.173; ii 248 sq.; v.158, 159 etc.; S i.63; M i.95 sq.; D iii.236; A i.53; iii.196; iv.193 sq.; DA i.40.
Codanā (f.) [see codeti] reproof, exhortation D i.230; iii.218; A iii.352; Vin V.158, 159; Vism 276. -- As ttg. in codan' atthe nipāto an exhortative particle J vi.211 (for ingha); VvA 237 (id.); PvA 88 v. l. (for handa).
Codita [pp. of codeti, q. v.] urged, exhorted, incited; questioned Sn 819; J vi.256; Pv ii.966; Vv 161; PvA 152; Sdhp 309.
Codetar [n. ag. to codeti] one who reproves, one who exacts blame, etc. Vin v.184.
Codeti [Vedic codati & codayati, from cud] aor. acodayi (J v.112), inf. codetuŋ, grd. codetabba; Pass. cujjati & codiyati; pp. cudita & codita (q. v.): Caus. codāpeti (Vin. iii.165) to urge, incite, exhort; to reprove, reprimand, to call forth, to question; in spec. sense to demand payment of a debt (J vi.69 iṇaŋ codetvā; 245; Sn 120 iṇaŋ cujjamāna being pressed to pay up; PvA 3 iṇayikehi codiyamāna) D i.230; Vin i.43 (āpattiyā c. to reprove for an offence), 114, 170 sq., 322 sq.; ii.2 sq., 80 sq.; iii.164, etc.; J v.112; Dh 379; PvA 39, 74.
Copana (nt.) [cup, copati to stir, rel. to kup, see kuppati] moving, stirring DhA iv.85; DhsA 92, 240, 323.
Cora [cur, corayati to steal; Dhtp 530=theyye] a thief, a robber Vin i.74, 75, 88, 149; S ii.100, 128=A ii.240; S ii.188 (gāmaghāta, etc.); iv.173; M ii.74=Th 1, 786; A i.48; ii.121 sq.; iv.92, 278; Sn 135, 616, 652; J i.264 (˚rājā, the robber king); ii.104; iii.84; Miln 20; Vism 180 (sah' oḍḍha c.), 314 (in simile), 489 (rāja -- puris' ânubandha˚, in comparison), 569 (andhakāre corassa hattha -- pasāraṇaŋ viya); DhA ii.30; PvA 3, 54, 274. -- mahā˚ a great robber Vin iii.89; D iii.203; A i.153; iii.128; iv.339; Miln 185. -- Often used in similes: see J.P.T.S. 1907, 87.
-- âṭavi wood of robbers Vism 190; -- upaddava an attack from robbers J i.267; -- kathā talk about thieves (one of the forbidden pastimes, see kathā) D i.7=Vin i.188≈; -- ghātaka an executioner A ii.207; J iii.178; iv.447; v.303; PvA 5.
Coraka [cp. Sk. coraka] a plant used for the preparation of perfume J vi.537.
Corikā f. thieving, theft Vin i.208; J iii.508; Miln 158; PvA 4, 86, 192; VvA 72 (=theyyā).
Corī (f.) a female thief Vin iv.276; J ii.363; (adj.) thievish, deceitful J i.295. -- dāraka˚ a female kidnapper J vi.337.
Corovassikaŋ at Nd2 40 (p. 85) read terovassikaŋ (as S iv.185).
Cola (& coḷa) [Cp. Sk. coḍa] a piece of cloth, a rag S i.34; J iv.380; Miln 169; PvA 73; Sdhp 396. -- bhisi a mat spread with a piece of cloth (as a seat) Vin iv.40. <-> duccola clad in rags, badly dressed Vin i.109; iii.263.
Colaka (& coḷaka)=cola Vin i.48, 296; ii.113, 151, 174, 208, 225; Pv ii.17; Miln 53 (bark for tinder?); DhA ii.173.
Cha & Chaḷ (cha in composition effects gemination of consonant, e. g. chabbīsati=cha+vīsati, chabbaṇṇa= cha+vaṇṇa, chaḷ only before vowels in compn: chaḷanga, chaḷ -- abhiññā) [Vedic ṣaṣ & ṣaṭ (ṣaḍ=chaḷ), Gr. e(/c, Lat. sex, Goth, saihs] the number six.
Cases: nom. cha, gen. channaŋ, instr. chahi (& chambhī (?) J iv.310, which should be chambhi & prob. chabbhi=ṣaḍbhiḥ; see also chambhī), loc. chasu (& chassu), num. ord. chaṭṭha the sixth. Cp. also saṭṭhi (60) soḷasa (16). Six is applied whenever a "major set" is concerned (see 2), as in the foll.: 6 munis are distinguished at Nd2 514 (in pairs of 3: see muni); 6 bhikkhus as a "clique" (see chabaggiya, cp. the Vestal virgins in Rome, 6 in number); 6 are the sciences of the Veda (see chaḷanga); there are 6 buddha -- dhammā (Nd2 466); 6 viññāṇakāyā (see upadhi); 6 senses & sense -- organs (see āyatana) -- cha dānasālā J i.282; oraŋ chahi māsehi kālakiriyā bhavissati (l shall die in 6 months, i. e. not just yet, but very soon, after the "next" moon) Pv iv.335. Six bodily faults J i.394 (viz. too long, too short, too thin, too fat, too black, too white). Six thousand Gandhabbas J ii.334.
-- aŋsa six -- cornered Dhs 617. -- anga the set of six Vedāngas, disciplines of Vedic science, viz. 1. kappa, 2. vyākaraṇā, 3. nirutti, 4. sikkhā, 5. chando (viciti), 6. jotisattha (thus enumd at VvA 265; at PvA 97 in sequence 4, 1, 3, 2, 6, 5): D iii.269; Vv 6316; Pv ii.613; Miln 178, 236. With ref. to the upekkhās, one is called the "one of six parts" (chaḷ -- ang' upekkhā) Vism 160. -- abhiññā the 6 branches of higher knowledge Vin ii.161; Pug 14. See abhiññā. -- âsīti eighty -- six [i. e. twice that many in all directions: psychologically 6 X 80= 6 X (4 X 2)10], of people: an immense number, millions Pv ii.137: of Petas PvA 212; of sufferings in Niraya Pv iii.106. -- âhaŋ for six days J iii.471. -- kaṇṇa heard by six ears, i. e. public (opp. catukaṇṇa) J vi.392. -- tiŋsa(ti) thirty -- six A ii.3; It 15; Dh 339; DhA iii.211, 224 (˚yojana -- parimaṇḍala); iv.48. -- danta having six tusks, in ˚daha N. of one of the Great Lakes of the Himavant (satta -- mahā -- sarā), lit. lake of the elephant with 6 tusks. cp. cha -- visāṇa Vism 416. -- dvārika entering through six doors (i. e. the senses) DhA iv.221 (taṇhā). -- dhātura (=dhātuya) consisting of six elements M iii.239. -- pañca (chappañca) six or five Miln 292. -- phass' āyatana having six seats of contact (i. e. the outer senses) M iii.239; Th 1, 755; PvA 52; cp. Sn 169. -- baṇṇa (=vaṇṇa) consisting of six colours (of raŋsi, rays) J v.40; DhA i.249; ii.41; iv.99. -- baggiya (=vaggiya) forming a group of six, a set of (sinful) Bhikkhus taken as exemplification of trespassing the rules of the Vinaya (cp. Oldenberg, Buddha 7384). Their names are Assaji, Punabhasu, Paṇḍuka, Lohitaka, Mettiya, Bhummajaka Vin ii.1, 77, and passim; J ii.387; DhA iii.330. -- bassāni (= vassāni) six years J i.85; DhA iii.195. -- bidha (=vidha) sixfold Vism 184. -- bisāṇa (=visāṇa) having six (i. e. a "major set") of tusks (of pre -- eminent elephants) J v.42 (Nāgarājā), 48 (kuñjara), cp. chaddanta. -- bīsati (=vīsati) twenty-six DhA iv.233 (devalokā).
Chakana & Chakaṇa (nt.) [Vedic śakṛt & śakan; Gr. ko/pros; Sk. chagana is later, see Trenckner, Notes 62 n. 16] the dung of animals Vin i.202; J iii.386 (ṇ); v.286; vi.392 (ṇ).
Chakaṇatī (f.)=chakana Nd2 199.
Chakala [cp. Sk. chagala, from chāga heifer] a he -- goat J vi.237; ˚ka ibid. & Vin iii 166. -- f. chakalī J vi.559.
Chakka (nt.) [fr. cha) set of six Vism 242 (meda˚ & mutta˚).
Chakkhattuŋ (adv.) [Sk. ṣaṭkṛtvas] six times D ii.198; DhA iii.196.
Chaṭṭha the sixth Sn 171, 437; DhA iii.200: SnA 364. Also as chaṭṭhama Sn 101, 103; J iii.280.
Chaḍḍaka (adj.) throwing away, removing, in puppha˚ a flower -- rubbish remover (see pukkusa) Th 1, 620; Vism 194; -- f. chaḍḍikā see kacavara˚.
Chaḍḍana (nt.) throwing away, rejecting J i.290; Dhtp 571. -- ī (f.) a shovel, dust -- pan DhA iii.7. See kacavara˚.
Chaḍḍita [pp. of chaddeti] thrown out. vomited; cast away, rejected, left behind S iii.143; J i.91, 478; Pv ii.23 (=ucchiṭṭhaŋ vantan ti attho PvA 80); VvA 100; PvA 78, 185.
Chaḍḍeti [Vedic chardayati & chṛṇatti to vomit; cp. also avaskara excrements & karīsa dung. From *sqer to eliminate, separate, throw out (Gr. kri/nw, Lat. ex <-> (s)cerno), cp. Gr. skw_s, Lat. mus(s)cerda, Ags. scearn] to spit out, to vomit, throw away; abandon, leave, reject Vin 214 sq.; iv.265; M i.207; S i.169 (chaṭṭehi wrongly for chaḍḍehi)=Sn p. 15; J i.61, 254, 265, 292; v.427; Pug 33; DhA i.95 (uṇhaŋ lohitaŋ ch. to kill oneself); ii.101; iii.171; VvA 126; PvA 43, 63, 174, 211; 255; Miln 15. -- ger. chaḍḍūna Th 2, 469 (=chaḍḍetvā ThA 284); grd. chaḍḍetabba Vin i.48; J ii.2; chaḍḍanīya Miln 252; chaḍḍiya (to be set aside) M i.12 sq. -- Pass. chaḍḍīyati PvA 174. -- Caus. chaḍḍāpeti to cause to be vomited, to cast off, to evacuate, to cause to be deserted Vin iv.265; J i.137; iv.139; vi.185, 534; Vism 182. -- pp. chaḍḍita (q. v.). -- See also kacavara˚
Chaṇa a festival J i.423, 489 (surā˚), 499; ii.48 (mangala˚), 143, iii.287, 446, 538; iv.115 (surā˚); v.212; vi.221; 399 (˚bheri); DhA iii. 100 (surā˚), 443 (˚vesa); iv.195; VvA 173.
Chaṇaka [=akkhaṇa? Kern; cp. Sk. *ākhaṇa] the Chaṇaka plant Miln 352; cp. akkhaṇa.
Chatta1 (nt.) [late Vedic chattra=*chad -- tra, covering to chad, see chādati] a sunshade ("parasol" would be misleading. The handle of a chatta is affixed at the circumference, not at the centre as it is in a parasol), a canopy Vin i.152; ii.114; D i.7≈; ii.15 (seta˚, under which Gotama is seated); J i.267 (seta˚); iv.16; v.383; vi.370; Sn 688, 689; Miln 355; DhA i.380 sq.; DA i.89; PvA 47. -- Esp. as seta˚ the royal canopy, one of the 5 insignia regis (setachatta -- pamukhaŋ pañcavidhaŋ rāja -- kakudhabhaṇḍaŋ PvA 74), see kakudhabhaṇḍa. J vi.4, 223, 389; ˚ŋ ussāpeti to unfold the r. canopy PvA 75; DhA i.161, 167. See also paṇṇa˚.
-- daṇḍa the handle of a sunshade DhA iii.212; -- nāḷi the tube or shaft (of reeds or bamboo) used for the making of sunshades M ii.116; -- mangala the coronation festival J iii.407; DhA iii.307; VvA 66.
Chatta2 [cp. Sk. chātra, one who carries his master's sun- shade] a pupil, a student J ii.428.
Chattaka (m. nt.) 1. a sun -- shade J vi.252; Th 2, 23 (=ThA 29 as nickname of sun -- shade makers). See also paṇṇa˚. -- 2. ahi˚ "snake's sun -- shade," N. for a mushroom: toadstool D iii.87; J ii.95; a mushroom, toadstool J ii.95.
Chattiŋsakkhattuŋ (adv.) thirty -- six times It 15.
Chada [cp. chādeti chad=saŋvaraṇe Dhtp 586] anything that covers, protects or hides, viz. a cover, an awning D i.7≈ (sa -- uttara˚ but ˚chadana at D ii.194); -- a veil, in phrase vivaṭacchada "with the veil lifted" thus spelt only at Nd2 242, 593, DhA i.106 (vivattha˚, v. l. vaṭṭa˚) & DA i.251 (vivatta˚), otherwise ˚chadda; -- shelter, clothing in phrase ghāsacchada Pug 51 (see ghāsa & cp. chāda); -- a hedge J vi.60; -- a wing Th 1, i 108 (citra˚).
Chadana (nt.) [Vedic chad]=chada, viz. lit. 1. a cover, covering J i.376; v.241. -- 2. a thatch, a roof Vin ii.154 (various kinds), 195; J ii.281; DhA ii.65 (˚piṭṭha); iv.104 (˚assa udaka -- patana -- ṭṭhāna), 178; PvA 55. <-> 3. a leaf, foliage J i.87; Th 1, 527. -- 4. hair J v.202. -- fig. pretence, camouflage, counterfeiting Sn 89 (=paṭirūpaŋ katvā SnA 164); Dhs 1059=Vbh 361= Nd2 271ii. Dhs reads chandanaŋ & Vbh chādanaŋ.
-- iṭṭhikā a tile DhA iv.203.
Chadda (nt.) [Dhtp 590 & Dhtm 820 expln a root chadd by "vamane," thus evidently taking it as an equivalent of chaḍḍ]=chada, only in phrase vivattacchadda (or vivaṭa˚) D i.89; Sn 372, 378, 1003, 1147; DA i.251. Nd2 however & DA read ˚chada expl. by vivaṭa -- rāgadosamoha -- chadana SnA 365.
Chaddhā [Sk. ṣaṭśaḥ] sixfold Miln 2.
Chanda [cp. Vedic and Sk. chanda, and skandh to jump]. 1. impulse, excitement; intention, resolution, will; desire for, wish for, delight in (c. loc.). Expld at Vism 466 as "kattu -- kāmatāy" adhivacanaŋ by Dhtp 587 & Dhtm 821 as chand= icchāyaŋ. -- A. As virtue: dhammapadesu ch. striving after righteousness S i.202; tibba˚ ardent desire, zeal A i.229; iv.15; kusaladhamma˚ A iii.441. Often combd with other good qualities, e. g. ch. vāyāma ussāha ussoḷhi A iv.320; ch. viriya citta vīmaŋsā in set of samādhis (cp. iddhipāda) D iii.77 (see below), & in cpd. ˚âdhipateyya. -- kusalānaŋ dhammānaŋ uppādāya chandaŋ janeti vāyamati viriyaŋ ārabhati, etc., see citta v. 1 db. <-> M ii.174; A i.174 (ch. vā vāyāmo vā); iii.50 (chandasā instr.); Sn 1026 (+viriya); Vv 2412 (=kusala˚ VvA 116); J vi.72; DhA i.14. -- B. As vice: (a) kinds & character of ch. -- With similar expressions: (kāya -- ) ch. sneha anvayatā M i.500. -- ch. dosa moha bhaya D iii.182; Nd2 3372 (See also below chandâgati). Its nearest analogue in this sense is rāga (lust), e. g. ch. rāga dosa paṭigha D i.25 (cp. DA i.116); rūpesu uppajjati ch. vā rāgo S iv.195. See below ˚rāga. In this bad sense it is nearly the same as kāma (see kāma & kāmachanda: sensual desire, cp. DhsA 370, Vism 466 & Mrs. Rh. D. in Dhs trsl. 292) & the combn kāmachanda is only an enlarged term of kāma. Kāye chanda "delight in the body" M i.500; Sn 203. bhave ch. (pleasure in existence) Th 2, 14 (cp. bhavachanda); lokasmiŋ ch. (hankering after the world) Sn 866; methunasmiŋ (sexual desire) Sn 835 (expl. by ch. vā rāgo vā peman Nd1 181). -- Ch. in this quality is one of the roots of misery: cittass' upakkileso S iii.232 sq.; v.92; mūlaŋ dukkhassa J iv.328 sq. -- Other passages illustrating ch. are e. g. vyāpāda˚ & vihiŋsā˚ S ii.151; rūpa -- dhātuyā˚ S iii.10; iv.72; yaŋ aniccaŋ, etc. . . . tattha˚ S iii.122, 177; iv.145 sq.; asmī ti ch. S iii.130; atilīno ch. S v.277 sq., cp. also D ii.277. -- (b) the emancipation from ch. as necessary for the attainment of Arahantship. -- vigata˚ (free from excitement) and a˚ S i.111; iii.7, 107, 190; iv.387; A ii.173 sq.; D iii.238; ettha chandaŋ virājetvā Sn 171=S i.16. Kāye chandaŋ virājaye Sn 203. (a)vīta˚ A iv.461 sq. ˚ŋ vineti S i.22, 197; ˚ŋ vinodeti S i.186; ch. suppaṭivinīta S ii.283. na tamhi ˚ŋ kayirātha Dh 117. <-> 2. (in the monastic law) consent, declaration of consent (to an official act: kamma) by an absentee Vin i.121, 122. dhammikānaŋ kammānaŋ chandaŋ datvā having given (his) consent to valid proceedings Vin iv.151, 152; cp. ˚dāyaka ii.94. --
Note. The commentaries follow the canonical usage of the word without adding any precision to its connotation. See Nd2 s. v.; DhsA 370; DhA i.14, J vi.72, VvA 77.
-- âgati in ˚gamana the wrong way (of behaviour, consisting) in excitement, one of the four agatigamanāni, viz. ch˚, dosa˚, moha˚, bhaya˚ D iii.133, 228; Vbh 376 (see above); -- âdhipateyya (adj.) standing under the dominant influence of impulse Dhs 269, 359, 529; Vbh 288 (+viriya˚, citta˚, vīmaŋsā˚); -- ânunīta led according to one's own desire S iv.71; Sn 781; -- âraha (adj.) fit to give one's consent Vin ii.93; v.221; -- ja sprung from desire (dukkha) S i.22; -- nānatta the diversity or various ways of impulse or desire S ii.143 sq.; D iii.289; Vbh 425; -- pahāna the giving up of wrong desire S v.273; -- mūlaka (adj.) having its root in excitement A iv.339; v.107; -- rāga exciting desire (cp. kāmachanda) D ii.58, 60; iii.289; S i.198; ii.283; iii. 232 sq. (cakkhusmiŋ, etc.); iv.7 sq. 164 (Bhagavato ch -- r. n' atthi), 233; A i.264 (atīte ch -- r -- ṭṭhānīyā dhammā); ii.71; iii.73; Nd2 413; DhA i.334; -- samādhi the (right) concentration of good effort, classed under the 4 iddhipādā with viriya˚; citta˚ vīmaŋsā˚ D iii.77; S v.268; A i.39; Vbh 216 sq.; Nett 15; -- sampadā the blessing of zeal S v.30.
Chandaka a voluntary collection (of alms for the Sangha), usually as ˚ŋ saŋharati to make a vol. coll. Vin iv.250; J i.422; ii.45, 85 (saŋharitvā v. l. BB; text sankaḍḍhitvā), 196, 248; iii.288 (nava˚, a new kind of donation); Cp. BSk. chandaka -- bhikṣana AvŚ vol. ii.227.
Chandatā (f.) [see chanda] (strong) impulse, will, desire Nd2 394; Vbh 350, 370.
Chandavantatā (f.) [abstr. to adj. chandavant, chanda+ vant]=chandatā VvA 319.
Chandasā (f.) [see chando] metrics, prosody Miln 3.
Chandika (adj.) [see chanda] having zeal, endeavouring usually as a˚ without (right) effort, & always combd w. anādara & assaddha Pug 13; Vbh 341; PvA 54 (v. l.), 175.
Chandīkata (adj.) & chandīkatā (f.) (with) right effort, zealous, zeal (adj.) Th 1, 1029 (chandi˚) (n.) Vbh 208.
Chando (nt.) [Vedic chandas, from skandh, cp. in meaning Sk. pada; Gr. i)/ ambos] metre, metrics, prosody, esp. applied to the Vedas Vin ii.139 (chandaso buddhavacanaŋ āropeti to recite in metrical form, or acc. to Bdhgh. in the dialect of the Vedas cp. Vin. Texts iii.150); S i.38; Sn 568 (Sāvittī chandaso mukhaŋ: the best of Vedic metres).
-- viciti prosody VvA 265 (enumd as one of the 6 disciplines dealing with the Vedas: see chaḷanga).
Channa1 [pp. of chad, see chādeti1] 1. covered J iv. 293 (vāri˚); vi.432 (padara˚, ceiling); ThA 257. <-> 2. thatched (of a hut) Sn 18. -- 3. concealed, hidden, secret J ii.58; iv.58. -- nt. channaŋ a secret place Vin iv.220.
Channa2 [pp. to chad (chand), chandayati, see chādeti2] fit, suitable, proper Vin ii.124 (+paṭirūpa); iii.128; D i.91 (+paṭirūpa); S i.9; M i.360; J iii.315; v.307; vi.572; Pv ii.1215 (=yutta PvA 159).
Chapaka name of a low -- class tribe Vin iv.203 (=caṇḍāla Bdhgh. on Sekh. 69 at Vin iv.364), f. ˚ī ib.
Chappañca [cha+pañca] six or five Miln 292.
Chab˚ see under cha.
Chamā (f.) [from kṣam, cp. khamati. It remains doubtful how the Dhtm (553, 555) came to define the root cham (=kṣam) as 1. hīḷane and 2. adane] the earth; only in oblique cases, used as adv. Instr. chamā on the ground, to the ground (=ved. kṣamā) M i.387; D iii.6; J iii.232; iv.285; vi.89, 528; Vv 414 (VvA 183; bhūmiyaŋ); Th 2, 17; 112 (ThA 116: chamāyaŋ); Pv iv.53 (PvA 260: bhūmiyaŋ). -- loc. chamāyaŋ Vin i.118; A i.215; Sn 401; Vism 18; ThA 116; chamāya Vin ii.214.
Chambhati [see chambheti] to be frightened DhA iv.52 (+vedhati).
Chambhita [pp. of chambheti]. Only in der. chambhitatta (nt.) the state of being stiff, paralysis, stupefaction, consternation, always combd with other expressions of fear, viz. uttāsa S v.386; bhaya J i.345 (where spelled chambhittaŋ); ii.336 (where wrongly expld by sarīracalanaŋ), freq. in phrase bhaya ch. lomahaŋsa (fear, stupefaction & horripilation ("gooseflesh") Vin ii.156; S i.104; 118; 219; D i.49 (expld at DA i.50 wrongly by sakala -- sarīra calanaŋ); Nd2 470; Miln 23; Vbh 367; Vism 187. -- In other connections at Nd2 1 (=Dhs 425, 1118, where thambhitatta instead of ch˚); Dhs 965 (on which see Dhs trsl. 242).
Chambhin (adj.) [see chambheti] immovable, rigid; terri- fied, paralysed with fear S i.219; M i.19; J iv.310 (v. l. jambhī, here with ref. to one who is bound (stiff) with ropes (pāsasatehi chambhī) which is however taken by com. as instr. of cha & expld by chasu ṭhānesu, viz. on 4 limbs, body & neck; cp. cha). -- acchambhin firm, steady, undismayed S i.220; Sn 42; J i.71. -- See chambheti & chambhita.
Chambheti [cp. Sk. skabhnāti & stabhnāti, skambh, and P. khambha, thambha & khambheti] to be firm or rigid, fig. to be stiff with fear, paralysed: see chambhin & chambhitatta, Cp. ūrukhambha (under khambha2).
Challi [Sk. challi] bark, bast DhA ii.165; Bdhgh on MV. viii.29.
Chava [Derivation doubtful. Vedic śava] 1. a corpse Vin ii.115 (˚sīsassa patta a bowl made out of a skull). See cpds. -- 2. (adj.) vile, low, miserable, wretched Vin ii.112, 188; S i.66; M i.374; A ii.57; J iv.263.
-- aṭṭhika bones of a corpes, a skeleton C iii.15, 1 (?); -- âlāta a torch from a pyre S iii.93=A ii.95=It 90= J i.482; Vism 54, 299 (˚ûpama). -- kuṭikā a charnelhouse, morgue, Vin i.152; -- dāhaka one who (officially) burns the dead, an "undertaker" Vin i.152; DhA i.68 (f. ˚ikā); Vism 230; Miln 331. -- dussa a miserable garment D i.166≈A i.240; ii.206. -- sarīra a corpse Vism 178 sq. -- sitta a water pot (see above 1) Th 1, 127.
Chavaka 1. a corpse J v.449. -- 2. wretched Miln 156, 200; (˚caṇḍāla, see expln at J v.450).
Chavi (f.) [*(s)qeu to cover. Vedic chavi, skuṇāti; cp. Gr. sku_lon; Lat. ob -- scurus; Ohg. skūra (Nhg. scheuer); Ags scēo>E. sky also Goth. skōhs>E. shoe] the (outer, thin) skin, tegument S ii.256; A iv.129; Sn 194; J ii.92. Distinguished from camma, the hide (under -- skin, corium) S ii.238 (see camma); also in combn ch -- cammamaŋsa Vism 235; DhA iv.56.
-- kalyāṇa beauty of complexion, one of the 5 beauties (see kalyāṇa 2d) DhA i.387; -- dos' -- ābādha a skin disease, cutaneous irritation Vin i.206; -- roga skin disease DhA iii.295; -- vaṇṇa the colour of the skin, the complexion, esp. beautiful compl., beauty Vin i.8; J iii.126; DhA iv.72; PvA 14 (vaṇṇadhātu), 70, 71 (=vaṇṇa).
Chāta (adj.) [cp. Sk. psāta from bhas (*bhsā), Gr. yw/xw; see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under sabulum & cp. bhasman, probably Non -- Aryan] hungry J i.338; ii.301; v.69; Pv ii.113 (=bubhukkhita, khudāya abhibhūta PvA 72) ii.936 (jighacchita PvA 126); PvA 62; VvA 76; Miln 253; Mhvs vii.24. Cp. pari˚.
-- ajjhatta with hungry insides J i.345; ii.203; v.338, 359; DhA i.125; DhA i.367 (chātak'); iii.33, 40. -- kāla time of being hungry.
Chātaka [fr. prec.] 1. adj. hungry J i.245, 266. -- 2. (nt.) hunger, famine J i.266; ii.124, 149, 367; vi.487; DhA i.170.
Chātatā [f. abstr. fr. chāta] hunger (lit. hungriness) DhA i.170.
Chādana (nt.) [to chādeti] covering. clothing, often combd with ghāsa˚ food & clothing (q. v.) J ii.79 (vattha˚); Pv i.107 (bhojana˚); ii.17 (vattha˚); PvA 50 (=vattha); DhA iv.7. -- As adj. J vi.354 (of the thatch of a house).
Chādanā (f.) [fr. chādeti] covering, concealment Pug 19, 23. Cp. pari˚.
Chādi (f.) [chādeti1] shade J iv.351.
Chādiya (nt.) covering (of a house or hut), thatch, straw, hay (for eating) J vi.354 (=gehacchādana -- tiṇa).
Chādeti1 [Caus. of chad, Sk. chādayati] (a) to cover, to conceal Vin ii.211 (Pass. chādīyati); Sn 1022 (mukhaŋ jivhāya ch.); Dh 252; Pv iii.43. -- (b) (of sound) to penetrate, to fill J ii.253; vi.195. -- pp. channa1 (q. v.).
Chādeti2 [for chandeti, cp. Sk. chandati & chadayati; to khyā?] (a) to seem good, to please, to give pleasure S ii.110; A iii.54; DhA iii.285 (bhattaŋ me na ch.). <-> (b) to be pleased with, to delight in, to approve of (c acc.) esp. in phrase bhattaŋ chādeti to appreciate the meal Vin ii.138; D i.72 (= rucceyya); v.31 (chādayamāna), 33 (chādamana), 463; Th 2, 409; Pv i.118 (nacchādimhamhase), pp. channa2.
Chāpa & ˚ka [Sk. śāva] the young of an animal M i.384 (˚ka); S ii.269 (bhinka˚); J i.460; ii.439 (sakuṇa˚); Miln 402; -- f. chāpī J vi.192 (maṇḍūka˚).
Chāyā (f.) [Vedic chāyā, light & shade, *skei (cp. (s)qait in ketu), cp. Sk. śyāva; Gr. skia/ & skoio/s; Goth. skeinan. See note on kāla, vol. ii. p. 382] shade, shadow S i.72, 93; M ii.235; iii.164; A ii.114; Sn 1014; Dh 2; J ii.302; iv.304; v.445; Miln 90, 298; DhA i.35; PvA 12, 32, 45, 81, etc. -- Yakkhas have none; J v.34; vi.337. chāyā is frequent in similes: see J.P.T.S. 1907, 87.
Chārikā (f.) [Cp. kṣāyati to burn, kṣāra burning; Gr. chro/s dry, Lat. serenus dry, clear. See also khāra & bhasma.] Ashes Vin i.210; ii.220; D ii.164=Ud 93; A i.209; iv.103; J iii.447; iv.88; v.144; DhA i.256; ii.68; VvA 67; PvA 80 (chārikangāra).
Chiggaḷa [cp. chidda] a hole, in eka˚ -- yuga M iii.169≈; tāḷa˚ key hole S iv.290; Vism 394.
Chida (always -- ˚) (adj.) breaking, cutting, destroying M i.386; S i.191=Th 1, 1234; Th 1, 521; 1143; Sn 87 (kankha˚) 491, 1021, 1101 (taṇha˚); VvA 82 (id.).
Chidda [cp. Ohg. scetar. For suffix ˚ra, cp. rudhira, etc. Vedic chid+ra. Cp. Sk. chidra] 1. (adj.) having rents or fissures, perforated S iv.316; J i.419; (fig.) faulty, defective, Vin i.290. -- 2. (nt.) a cutting, slit, hole, aperture, S i.43; J i.170 (eka˚), 172, 419, 503; ii.244, 261; (kaṇṇa˚); Vism 171, 172 (bhitti˚), 174 (tāḷa˚); SnA 248 (akkhi˚); DhA iii.42; VvA 100 (bhitti˚); PvA 180 (kaṇṇa˚), 253 (read chidde for chinde); fig. a fault, defect, flaw Dh 229 (acchidda -- vutti faultless conduct) Miln 94.
-- âvachidda full of breaches and holes J iii.491; Vism 252; DhA i.122, 284 (cp. ˚vichidda); iii.151. -- kārin inconsistent A ii.187; -- vichidda= ˚âvachidda J i.419; v.163 (sarīraŋ chiddavichiddaŋ karoti to perforate a body).
Chiddaka (adj.) having holes or meshes (of a net) D i.45.
Chiddatā (f.) perforation, being perforated J i.419.
Chiddavant (adj.) having faults, full of defects M i.272.
Chindati [Vedic chid in 3 forms viz. 1. (Perf.) base chid; 2. Act. (pres.) base w. nasal infix. chind; 3. Med. (denom). base w. guṇa ched. Cp. the analagous formations of cit under cinteti. -- Idg.* sk(h)eid, Gr. sxi/zw (E. schism); Lat. scindo (E. scissors); Ohg. scīzan; Ags. scītan; cp. also Goth. skaidan, Ohg. sceidan. Root chid is defined at Dhtp 382, 406 as "dvedhākaraṇa"] to cut off, to destroy, to remove, both lit. (bandhanaŋ, pāsaŋ, pasibbakaŋ, jīvaŋ, gīvaŋ, sīsaŋ, hatthapāde, etc.) and fig. (taṇhaŋ, mohaŋ, āsavā, saŋyojanāni, vicikicchaŋ, vanathaŋ, etc.) Freq. in similes: see J.P.T.S. 1907, 88. -- Forms: (1) chid: aor. acchidā Sn 357, as acchidaŋ M ii.35, acchidda Dh 351 (cp. agamā); Pass. pres. chijjati (Sk. chidyate) Dh 284; It 70; J i.167; Th 1, 1055= Miln 395; Miln 40; aor. chijji J iii.181 (dvidhā ch. broke in two). -- fut. chijjissati J i.336; -- ger. chijjitvā J i.202; iv.120; -- pp. chijjita J iii.389; see also chida, chidda, chinna. <-> (2) chind: Act. pres. chindati S i.149=A v.174= Sn 657; PvA 4, 114; VvA 123; -- imper. chinda Sn 346; J ii.153; chindatha Dh 283; -- pot. chinde Dh 370; -- ppr. chindamāna J i.70, 233. -- fut. chindissati DhA ii.258. -- aor. acchindi Vin i.88 & chindi J i.140. -- ger. chinditvā J i.222, 254, 326; ii.155. <-> inf. chindituŋ Vin i.206; PvA 253. -- grd. chindiya J ii.139 (duc˚). -- Caus. chindāpeti J ii.104, 106; Vism 190 (rājāno core ch.). -- (3) ched: fut. checchati (Sk. chetsyati) M i.434; Dh 350; Miln 391. -- aor. acchecchi (Sk. acchaitsīt) S i.12; A ii.249; Sn 355=Th 1, 1275; J vi.261. acchejji (v. l. of acchecchi) is read at S iv.205, 207, 399; v.441; A iii.246, 444; It 47. -- inf. chetuŋ J iv.208; Pv iv.328, & chettuŋ Sn 28. -- ger. chetvā Sn 66, 545, 622; Dh 283, 369; J i.255; Nd2 245, & chetvāna Sn 44; Dh 346; J iii.396. -- grd. chetabba Vin ii.110, & chejja (often combd w. bhejja, torture & maiming, as punishments) Vin iii.47 (+bh˚); J v.444 (id.) vi.536; Miln 83, 359. Also chejja in neg. acchejja S vi.226. -- Caus. chedeti Vin i.50, & chedāpeti ib.; J iv.154. See also cheda, chedana.
Chindanaka (adj.) [fr. chindati] breaking, see pari˚.
Chinna [pp. of chindati] cut off, destroyed Vin i.71 (acchinna -- kesa with unshaven hair); M i.430; D ii.8 (˚papañca); J i.255; ii.155; iv.138; Dh 338; Pv i.112 (v. l. for bhinna), 116; DhA iv.48. Very often in punishments of decapitation (sīsa˚) or mutilation (hatthapāda˚, etc.) e. g. Vin i.91; iii.28; Pv ii.24 (ghāna -- sīsa˚); Miln 5. Cp. sañ˚. As first part of cpd., chinna˚ very frequently is to be rendered by "without," e. g.
-- āsa without hope J ii.230; PvA 22, 174; -- iriyāpatha unable to walk, i. e. a cripple Vin i.91; -- kaṇṇa without ears PvA 151; -- gantha untrammelled, unfettered Sn 219; -- pilotika with torn rags, or without rags S ii.28; PvA 171 (+bhinna˚); -- bhatta without food i. e. famished, starved J i.84; v.382; DhA iii.106=VvA 76; -- saŋsaya without doubt Sn 1112; It 96, 97, 123; Nd2 244. -- sāṭaka a torn garment Vism 51.
Chinnaka (adj.) [fr. chinna] cut; a˚ uncut (of cloth) Vin i.297.
Chinnikā (f.) deceitful, fraudulent, sly, only in combn w. dhuttā (dhuttikā) & only appld to women Vin iii.128; iv.61; J ii.114; Miln 122.
Chuddha [Sk. kṣubdha (?) kṣubh, perhaps better ṣṭīv, pp. ṣṭyūta (see niṭṭhubhati), cp. Pischel, Prk. Gr. §§ 66, 120, & Trenckner Notes p. 75. See also khipita] thrown away, removed, rejected, contemptible Dh 41=Th 2, 468 (spelled chuṭṭha); J v.302.
Chupati [Dhtp 480=samphasse] to touch Vin i.191; iii.37, 121; J iv.82; vi.166; Vism 249; DhA i.166 (mā chupi). -- pp. chupita.
Chupana (nt.) touching Vin iii.121; J vi.387.
Chupita [pp. of chupati] touched Vin iii.37; J vi.218.
Chubhati given as root chubh (for kṣubh) with def. "nicchubhe" at Dhtm 550. See khobha.
Churikā (f.) [Sk. kṣurikā to kṣura see khura, cp. chārikā> khara] a knife, a dagger, kreese Th 2, 302; J iii.370; Miln 339; cp. Miln trsln. ii.227; ThA 227; DhA iii.19.
Churita: see vi˚.
Cheka (adj.) 1. clever, skilful, shrewd; skilled in (c. loc.) Vin ii.96; M i.509; J i.290 (anga -- vijjāya); ii.161, 403; v.216, 366 (˚pāpaka good & bad); vi.294 (id.); Miln 293.; DA i.90; VvA 36, 215; DhA i.178. -- 2. genuine Vism 437 (opp. kūṭa).
Chekatā (f.) [cheka+tā] skill VvA 131.
Chejja 1. see chindati. -- 2. one of the 7 notes in the gamut VvA 139.
Cheta an animal living in mountain cliffs, a sort of leo- pard S i.198.
Chettar [Sk. chettṛ, n -- agent to chindati] cutter, destroyer Sn 343; J vi.226.
Cheda [see chindati] cutting, destruction, loss Sn 367 (˚bandhana); J i.419; 485; sīsa˚ decapitation DhA ii.204; PvA 5; aṇḍa˚ castration J iv.364; -- bhatta ˚ŋ karoti to put on short rations J i.156. pada˚ separation of words SnA 150. -- ˚gāmin (adj.) liable to break, fragile A ii.81; J v.453. -- Cp. vi˚.
Chedaka (adj.) [fr. cheda] cutting; in aṇḍa˚ one who castrates J iv.366.
Chedana (nt.) [see chindati] cutting, severing, destroying D i.5; (=DA i.80 hattha˚ -- ādi); iii.176; Vin ii.133; A ii.209; v.206; S iv.169 (nakha˚); v.473; Miln 86; Vism 102 (˚vadha -- bandana, etc.).
Chedanaka 1. (adj.) one who tears or cuts off PvA 7. - 2. (nt.) the process of getting cut (a cert. penance for offences: in combn with āpattiyo & pācittiyaŋ) Vin ii.307; iv.168, 170, 171, 279; v.133, 146 (cha ch. āpattiyo).
Cheppā (f.) [Sk. sépa] tail Vin i.191; iii.21.
Ja ( -- ˚) [adj. -- suffix from jan, see janati; cp. ˚ga; gacchati] born, produced, sprung or arisen from. Freq. in cpds.: atta˚, ito˚, eka˚, kuto˚, khandha˚, jala˚, daratha˚, dāru˚, di˚, puthuj˚, pubba˚, yoni˚, vāri˚, saha˚, sineha˚.
Jagat (nt.) [Vedic jagat, intens. of gam, see gacchati] the world, the earth A ii.15, 17 (jagato gati); S i.186 (jagatogadha plunged into the world).
Jagatī (f.) [see jagat] only in cpds. as jagati˚:
-- ppadesa a spot in the world Dh 127=PvA 104; -- ruha earth grown, i. e. a tree J i.216.
Jagga (nt.) [jaggati+ya] wakefulness S i.111.
Jaggati (=jāgarati, Dhtp 22 gives jagg as root in meaning "niddā -- khaya."] (a) to watch, to lie awake J v.269. <-> (b) to watch over, i. e. to tend, to nourish, rear, bring up J i.148 (dārakaŋ), 245 (āsīvisaŋ).
Jaggana (nt.) [from jaggati] watching, tending, bringing up J i.148 (dāraka˚).
Jagganatā (to jāgarati] watchfulness J i.10.
Jagghati [Intens. to sound -- root ghar. for *jaghrati. See note on gala. Kern compares Ved. jakṣati, Intens. of hasati (Toev. under anujagghati); Dhtp 31 jaggh= hasane] to laugh, to deride J iii.223; v.436; vi.522. <-> pp. jagghita J vi.522. See also anu˚, pa˚.
Jagghitā (f.) laughter J iii.226.
Jaghana (nt.) [Vedic jaghana, cp. Gr. koxw/nh; see janghā] the loins, the buttocks Vin ii.266; J v.203.
Jangala (nt.) a rough, sandy & waterless place, jungle A v.21; J iv.71; VvA 338. Cp. ujjangala.
Janghā (f.) [Vedic janghā; cp. Av. zanga, ankle; Goth. gaggan, to go; Ags. gang, walk. From *ghengh to walk; see also jaghana] the leg, usually the lower leg (from knee to ankle) D ii.17≈(S i.16=Sn 165 (eṇi˚); Sn 610; J ii.240; v.42; vi.34; ThA 212). In cpds. jangha˚ (except in janghā -- vihāra).
-- ummagga a tunnel fit for walking J vi.428; -- pesanika adj. going messages on foot Vin iii.185; J ii.82; Miln 370 (˚iya); Vism 17. -- bala(ŋ) (nissāya) by means of his leg (lit. by the strength of, cp. Fr. à force de); -- magga a footpath J ii.251; v.203; VvA 194. -- vihāra the state of walking about (like a wanderer), usually in phrase ˚ŋ anucankamati anuvicarati D i.235; M i.108; Sn p. 105, p. 115; or ˚ŋ carati PvA 73. -- A i.136; J ii.272; iv.7, 74; DhA iii.141.
Jangheyyaka (nt.) [see janghā] lit. "belonging to the knees"; the kneepiece of a robe Vin i.287.
Jacca (adj.) [jāti+tya] of birth, by birth (usually -- ˚) M ii.47 (ittara˚. of inferior birth); Sn p. 80 (kiŋ˚ of what birth, i. e. of what social standing); J i.342 (hīna˚ of low birth): Sdhp 416 (id.) J v.257 (nihīna˚); Miln 189 (sama˚ of equal rank).
-- andha (adj.) blind from birth Ud 62 sq. (Jaccandhavagga vi.4); J i.45, 76; iv.192; Vbh 412 sq.; in similes at Vism 544, 596.
Jaccā instr. of jāti.
Jajjara [From intensive of jarati] withered, feeble with age Th 2, 270; J i.5, 59 (jarā˚); ThA 212; PvA 63 (˚bhāva, state of being old) -- a˚ not fading (cp. amata & ajarāmara), of Nibbāna S iv.369.
Jajjarita [pp. of intens. of jar see jarati] weakened DhA i.7.
Jañña (adj.) [=janya, cp. jātya; see kula & koleyyaka] of (good) birth, excellent, noble, charming, beautiful M i.30 (jaññajañña, cp. p. 528); J ii.417 (=manāpa sādhu). a˚ J ii.436.
Jaṭa a handle, only in vāsi˚ (h. of an adze) Vin iv.168; S iii.154=A iv.127.
Jaṭā (f.) [B.Sk. jatā] tangle, braid, plaiting, esp. (a) the matted hair as worn by ascetics (see jatila) Sn 249; Dh 241, 393; J i.12 (ajina+); ii.272. -- (b) the tangled branches of trees J i.64. -- (c) (fig.) (the tangle of) desire, lust S i.13=165.
-- aṇḍuva (=˚andu?) a chain of braided hair, a matted topknot S i.117; -- âjina braided hair & an antelope's hide (worn by ascetics) Sn 1010 (˚dhara), cp. above J i.12; -- dharaṇa the wearing of matted hair M i.282.
Jaṭita [pp. of jaṭ, to which also jaṭā; Dhtp 95: sanghāte] entangled S i.13; Miln 102, 390; Vism 1 (etym.).
Jaṭin one who wears a jaṭā, an ascetic Sn 689; f. -- inī J vi.555.
Jaṭila [BSk. jaṭila] one who wears a jaṭā, i. e. a braid of hair, or who has his hair matted, an ascetic. Enumd amongst other ʻ religious ʼ as ājīvikā nigaṇṭhā j. paribbājakā Nd2 308; ājīvikā nig˚ j. tāpasā Nd2 149, 513; -- Vin i.24=iv.108; i.38 (purāṇa˚ who had previously been j.)=VvA 13=PvA 22; S i.78; Sn p. 103, 104 (Keṇiya j.); J i.15; ii.382; Ud 6; Dpvs i.38.
Jaṭilaka=jaṭila M i.282; A iii.276; Miln 202; Vism 382.
Jaṭhara (m. nt.) [Vedic jaṭhara, to *gelt=*gelbh (see gabbha), cp. Goth. kilpei uterus, Ags. cild=E. child] the belly Miln 175.
Jaṇṇu(ka) [cp. jānu & jannu] the knee D ii.160; J vi.332; SnA ii.230; DhA i.80 (˚ka); ii.57 (id.), 80; iv.204; VvA 206 (jaṇṇu -- kappara).
Jatu [Sk. jatu; cp. Lat. bitumen pitch; Ags. cwidu. resin, Ohg. quiti glue] lac. As medicine Vin i.201. ˚maṭṭhaka a decking with lac. used by women to prevent conception Vin iv.261; consisting of either jatu, kaṭṭha (wood), piṭṭha (flour), or mattikā (clay).
Jattu (nt.) [Vedic jatru] the collar -- bone DhA ii.55 (gloss: aŋsakūṭa); Dāvs iv.49.
Jaddhu [for jaddhuŋ, inf. to jakṣ (P. jaggh), corresp. to Sk. jagdhi eating food; intens. of ghasati] only in composition as a˚ not eating, abstaining from food. ˚ka one who fasts M i.245; ˚māra death by starvation J vi.63 (=anāsaka -- maraṇa; Fsb. has note: read ajuṭṭha˚?); ˚mārika A iv.287 (v. l. ajeṭṭha˚).
Jana [*genē: see janati. Cp. Gr. gi/nos, go/nos; Lat. genus=Fr. gens, to which also similar in meaning] a creature, living being: (a) sg. an individual, a creature, person, man Sn 121, 676, 807, 1023 (sabba everybody). Usually collectively: people, they, one (=Fr. on), with pl. of verb Dh 249 (dadanti); often as mahājana the people, the crowd S i.115; J i.167, 294; PvA 6; lokamahājana=loka DhA iii.175; or as bahu(j)jana many people, the many A i.68; Dh 320; DhA iii.175. See also puthujjana. -- (b) pl. men, persons, people, beings: nānā˚ various living beings Sn 1102 (expld at Nd2 248 as khattiyā brāhmaṇā vessā suddā gahaṭṭhā pabbajitā devā manussā.) dve janā J i.151; ii.105; tayo j. J i.63; iii.52; keci janā some people PvA 20. See also Sn 243, 598, 1077, 1121.
-- âdhipa a king of men J ii.369; -- inda=prec. J iii.280, 294; -- esabha the leader of men, the best of all people Dh 255; -- kāya a body or group of people J i.28; DhA i.33 (dve j.: micchā & sammā -- diṭṭhikā); Dpvs i.40; -- pada country see sep.; -- majjhe (loc.) before (all) the people J i.294; Th 2, 394; -- vāda people's talk, gossip Sn 973.
Janaka [to janati] 1. producing, production Vism 369; adj. ( -- ˚) producing: pasāda˚ Mhvs i.4 (=˚kāraka); a species of karma Vism 601; Cpd. 144 (A.i). -- 2. n. f. ˚ikā genetrix, mother J i.16; Dhs 1059≈(where it represents another jānikā, viz. deception, as shown by syn. māyā & B.Sk. janikā Lal. V. 541; Kern, Toev. p. 41).
Janatā (f.) [from janati] a collection of people ("man- kind"), congregation, gathering; people, folk D i.151 (=DA i.310, correct jananā), 206; Vin ii.128=M ii.93 (pacchimā); A i.61 (id.); iii.251 (id.); It 33; J iv.110; Pv iii.57 (= janȧsamūha upāsakagaṇa PvA 200).
Janati1 [Sk. janati (trs.) & jāyate (intrs.); *gene & *gnē to (be able to) produce; Gr. gi/gnomai (ge/nesis) gnwto/s =jāta=(g)nātus; Lat. gigno, natura, natio; Goth. knōps & kunps; Cymr. geni, Ags. cennan, Ohg. kind, etc.] only in Caus. janeti [Sk. janayati] often spelled jāneti (cp. jaleti: jāleti) & Pass. (intrs.) jāyati to bring forth, produce, cause, syn. sañjaneti nibbatteti abhinibbatteti Nd2 s. v. (cp. karoti). ussāhaŋ j. to put forth exertion J ii.407 (see chanda); (saŋ)vegaŋ j. to stir up emotion (aspiration) J iii.184; PvA 32; Mhvs i.4; dukkhaŋ j. to cause discomfort PvA 63. -- Aor. janayi Th 2, 162 (Māyā j. Gotamaŋ: she bore). -- Pp. janita produced PvA 1. -- See also jantu jamma, jāta, jāti, ñāti, etc.
Janati2 to make a sound J vi.64 (=sanati saddaŋ karoti).
Janana (adj.) [to janati] producing, causing ( -- ˚) It 84 (anattha˚ dosa); J iv.141; Dpvs i.2; DhsA 258; Dhtp 428. -- f. jananī PvA 1 (saŋvega˚ dẹsanā);= mother (cp. janettī) J iv.175; PvA 79. Note. jananā DA i.310 is misprint for janatā.
Janapada [jana+pada, the latter in function of collective noun -- abstract: see pada 3] inhabited country, the country (opp. town or market -- place), the continent; politically: a province, district, county D i.136 (opp. nigama); ii.349; A i.160, 178; Sn 422, 683, 995, 1102; J i.258; ii.3 (opp. nagara), 139, 300; PvA 20, 32, 111 (province). See also gāma. The 16 provinces of Buddhist India are comprised in the soḷasa mahā -- janapadā (Miln 350) enumd at A i.213= iv.252 sq.=Nd2 247 (on Sn 1102) as follows: Angā, Magadhā (+Kālingā, Nd2] Kāsī, Kosalā, Vajjī, Mallā, Cetī (Cetiyā A iv.), Vaŋsā (Vangā A i.), Kurū, Pañcālā, Majjā (Macchā A), Sūrasenā, Assakā, Avantī, Yonā (Gandhārā A), Kambojā. Cp. Rhys Davids, B. India p. 23.
-- kathā talk or gossip about the province D i.7≈; -- kalyāṇī a country -- beauty, i. e. the most beautiful girl in the province D i.193 (see kalyāṇa); -- cārikā tramping the country PvA 14; -- tthāvariya stableness, security, of the realm, in ˚patta, one who has attained a secure state of his realm, of a Cakkavattin D i.88; ii.16; Sn p. 106; -- padesa a rural district A iv.366; v.101.
Janavati (?) A iv.172.
Janitta (nt.) [jan+tra, cp. Gr. gene/teira] birthplace J ii.80.
Janettī (f.) [f. to janitṛ=gene/tws=genitor, cp. genetrix. The Sk. form is janitrī. On e: i cp. petti˚: pitri˚] mother D ii.7 sq.; M iii.248; A iv.276; J i.48; ii.381; iv.48.
Jantāghara [acc. to Abhp. 214=aggisālā, a room in which a fire is kept (viz. for the purpose of a steam bath, i. e. a hot room, cp. in meaning Mhg. kemenate =Lat. caminata, Ger. stube=E. stove; Low Ger. pesel (room)= Lat. pensile (bath) etc.) Etym. uncertain. Bühler KZ 25, p. 325=yantra -- gṛha (oil -- mill?); E. Hardy (D. Lit. Ztg. 1902, p. 339)=jentāka (hot dry bath), cp. Vin. Texts i.157; iii.103. In all probability it is a distorted form (by dissimilation or analogy), perhaps of *jhānt -- āgāra, to jhā to burn=Sk. kṣā, jhānti heat or heating (=Sk. kṣāti)+āgāra, which latter received the aspiration of the first part (=āghāra), both being reduced in length of vowels=jant -- āghara] -- 1. a (hot) room for bathing purposes, a sitzbath Vin i.47, 139; ii.119, 220 sq., 280; iii.55; M iii.126; J ii.25, 144; Vism 18; Dpvs viii.45. -- 2. living room J i.449.
Janti at DA i.296 in jantiyā (for D i.135 jāniyā)=hāni, abandonment, giving up, payment, fine [prob.=jahanti, to jahāti]. But see jāni.
Jantu1 [Vedic jantu, see janati] a creature, living being, man, person S i.48; A iv.227; Sn 586, 773 sq., 808, 1103; Nd2 249 (=satta, nara, puggala); Dh 105, 176, 341, 395; J i.202; ii.415; v.495; Pv ii.949 (=sattanikāya, people, a crowd PvA 134).
Jantu2 a grass Vin i.196.
Jannu [cp. jaṇṇu(ka) & jānu] the knee DhA i.394. -- ˚ka D ii.17≈(in marks of a Mahāpurisa, v. l. ṇṇ); J iv.165; DhA i.48.
Japa (& jappa vv. ll.) [fr. japati] 1. muttering, mumbling. recitation A iii.56=J iii.205 (+manta); Sn 328 (jappa) (=niratthaka -- kathā SnA 334). -- 2. studying J iii.114 (=ajjhena).
Jap(p)aka (adj.) whispering, see kaṇṇa.˚
Japati (& jappati Dhtp 189, also japp 190=vacane; sound -- root jap) to mumble, whisper, utter, recite J iv.204; Pv ii.61 (=vippalapati PvA 94); PvA 97; ppr. jappaŋ S i.166 (palāpaŋ); J iv.75. See japa, japana; also pari˚.
Japana (sic. DA i.97, otherwise jappana) whispering, mumbling (see japati), in kaṇṇa˚. See also pari˚.
Jappati [not, as customary, to jalp, Sk. jalpati (=japati), but in the meaning of desire, etc., for cappati to capp, as in cappeti=Sk, carvayati to chew, suck, be hungry (q. v.) cp. also calaka] to hunger for, to desire, yearn, long for, (c. acc.) Sn 771 (kāme), 839 (bhavaŋ), 899, 902; Nd2 79 (=pajappati), -- pp. jappita Sn 902. See also jappā, jappanā, etc., also abhijjappati & pa˚.
Jappanā=jappā Sn 945; Dhs 1059≈. Cp. pa˚.
Jappā (f.) [to jappati] desire, lust, greed, attachment, hunger (cp. Nd2 on taṇhā) S i.123 (bhava -- lobha˚); Sn 1033; Nd2 250; Nett 12; Dhs 279, 1059.
Jambāla [Sk. jambāla] mud; adj. jambālin muddy, as n. jambālī (f.) a dirty pool (at entrance to village) A ii.166.
Jambu (f.) [Sk. jambu] the rose -- apple tree, Eugenia Jambolana J ii.160; v.6; Vv 67; 4413, 164. -- As adj. f. jambī sarcastically "rose -- apple -- maid," appld to a gardener's daughter J iii.22.
-- dīpa the country of the rose -- apples i. e. India J i.263; VvA 18; Miln 27, etc. -- nada see jambonada; -- pakka the fruit of Eugenia jambolana, the rose -- apple (of black or dark colour) Vism 409; -- pesī the rind of the r. -- a. fruit J v.465; -- rukka the r. -- a. tree DhA iii.211; -- saṇḍa rose -- apple grove (=˚dīpa, N. for India) Sn 552= Th 1, 822.
Jambuka [Sk. jambuka, to jambh?] a jackal J ii.107; iii.223.
Jambonada [Sk. jāmbūnada; belonging to or coming from the Jambu river (?)] a special sort of gold (in its unwelded state); also spelled jambunada (J iv.105; VvA 13, 340) A i.181; ii.8, 29; Vv 8417. Cp. jātarūpa.
Jambhati [cp. Vedic jehate, Dhtp 208 & Dhtm 298 define jambh as "gatta -- vināma," i. e. bending the body] to yawn, to arouse oneself, to rise, go forth (of a lion) J vi.40.
Jambhanā (f.) [to jambhati] arousing, activity, alertness Vbh 352.
Jamma (adj.) [Vedic *jālma (?), dialectical?] miserable, wretched, contemptible J ii.110; iii.99 (=lāmaka); f. -- ī S v.217; Dh 335, 336 (of taṇhā); J ii.428; v.421; DhA iv.44 (=lāmakā).
Jamman(a) (nt.) [to janati] birth, descent, rank Sn 1018.
Jaya [see jayati] vanquishing, overcoming, victory D i.10; Sn 681; J ii.406; opp. parājaya Vism 401.
-- ggaha the lucky die J iv.322 (=kaṭaggaha, q. v.); -- parājaya victory & defeat Dh 201; -- pāna the drink of victory, carousing, wassail; ˚ŋ pivati DhA i.193; -- sumana "victory's joy," N. of a plant (cp. jātisumana) Vism 174; DhA i.17, 383.
Jayati (jeti, jināti) [Sk. jayati, ji to have power, to con- quer, cp. jaya=bi/ a; trans. of which the intrans. is jināti to lose power, to become old (see jīrati)] to conquer, surpass; to pillage, rob, to overpower, to defeat. -- Pres. [jayati] jeti J ii.3; jināti Sn 439; Dh 354; J i.289; iv.71. -- Pot. jeyya Com. on Dh 103; jine Dh 103=J ii.4=VvA 69; 3rd pl. jineyyuŋ S i.221 (opp. parājeyyuŋ). -- Ppr. jayaŋ Dh 201. -- Fut. jessati Vv 332; jayissati ib.; jinissati J ii.183. -- Aor. jini J i.313; ii.404; ajini Dh 3; pl. jiniŋsu S i.221 (opp. parājiŋsu), 224 (opp. parājiŋsu, with v. l. ˚jiniŋsu); A iv.432 (opp. ˚jiyiŋsu, with v. l. ˚jiniŋsu). Also aor. ajesi DhA i.44 (=ajini). -- Proh. (mā) jīyi J iv.107. -- Ger. jetvā Sn 439; jetvāna It 76. -- Inf. jinituŋ J vi.193; VvA 69. -- Grd. jeyya Sn 288 (a˚); jinitabba VvA 69 (v. l. jetabba). -- Pass. jīyati (see parā˚), jīyati is also Pass. to jarati -- Caus. 1. jayāpeti to wish victory to, to hail (as a respectful greeting to a king) J ii.213, 369, 375; iv.403. -- 2. jāpayati to cause to rob, to incite, to plunder M i.231; It 22=J iv.71 (v. l. hāpayati)= Miln 402; J vi.108 (to annul); Miln 227. -- Des. jigiŋsati (q. v.). -- pp. jina & jita (q. v.).
Jayā f. [Vedic jāyā] wife only in cpd. jayampatikā, the lady of the house and her husband, the two heads of the household. That the wife should be put first might seem suggestive of the matriarchate, but the expression means just simply "the pair of them," and the context has never anything to do with the matriarchate. <-> husband & wife, a married couple S ii.98; J i.347; iv.70, of birds. See also jāyampatikā.
Jara (adj.) (˚ -- ) [See jarati] old, decayed (in disparaging sense), wretched, miserable; -- ûdapānaŋ a spoilt well J iv.387; -- gava=˚goṇa Pv i.81; -- goṇa [cp. Sk. jaradgava] a decrepit, old bull J ii.135; -- sakka "the old S." J iv.389; -- sālā a tumble -- down shed PvA 78.
Jaratā (f.) [see jarati] old age Dhs 644≈ (rūpassa j. decay of form); Vism 449.
Jarati [Vedic jarati & jīryati, *gerā to crush, to pound, overcome (cp. jayati); as intrs. to become brittle, to be consumed, to decay, cp. Lat. granum, Goth kaúrn, E. etc. corn] to suffer destruction or decay, to become old, in two roots, viz. 1. jar [jarati] in Caus. jarayati to destroy, to bring to ruin J v.501=vi.375. -- 2. jīr [Sk. jīryati] see jīyati, jīrati, jīrayati, jīrāpeti. -- Pp. jiṇṇa. -- Cp. also jara, jarā, jajjara, jīraṇatā.
Jarā (f.) & (older) jaras (nt.) [of the latter only the instr. jarasā in use: Sn 804, 1123 (=jarāya Nd2 249). -- Sk. jarā & jaraḥ to *gerā: see jarati; cp. Gr. gh_ras, ge/ras, grau_s old age, etc. See also jīraṇa(tā)] decay, decrepitude, old age Vin i.10, 34; A i.51, 138 (as Death's messenger); v.144 sq. (bhabbo jaraŋ pahātuŋ); Sn 311 (cp. D iii.75); J i.59; Th 2, 252 sq.; Vism 502 (def. as twofold & discussed in its valuation as dukkha). Defined as "yā tesaŋ sattānaŋ tamhi tamhi sattanikāye jarā jīraṇatā khaṇḍiccaŋ pāliccaŋ valittacatā āyuno saŋhāni indriyānaŋ paripāko" D ii.305=M i.49= S ii.2=Nd2 252= Dhs 644, cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 195. -- Frequently combd with maraṇa (maccu, etc.) "decay & death" (see under jāti as to formulas): ˚maraṇa, D ii.31 sq.; M i.49; Sn 575; ˚maccu Sn 581, 1092, 1094. ajarāmara not subject to decay & death (cp. ajajjara) Th II, 512; Pv ii.611; Vv 6311; J iii.515.
-- ghara the house of age (adj.) like a decayed house Th 2, 270 (= jiṇṇagharasadisa ThA 213). -- jajjara feeble with age J i.59; -- jiṇṇa decrepit with age PvA 148; -- dhamma subject to growing old A i.138, 145; ii.172, 247; iii.54 sq., 71 sq.; -- patta old J iii.394; iv.403; -- bhaya fear of old age A i.179; ii.121; -- vata the wind of age DhA iv.25. -- sutta the Suttanta on old age, N. of Sutta Nipāta iv.6 (p. 157 sq.; beginning with "appaŋ vata jīvitaŋ idaŋ"), quoted at DhA iii.320.
Jala (nt.) [Sk. jala, conn. with gala drop (?), prob. dialec- tical; cp. udaka] water Sn 845; J i.222; iii.188; iv.137.
-- gocara living in the water J ii.158. -- ja born or sprung from w. J iv.333; v.445; VvA 42; -- da "giving water," rain -- cloud Dāvs v.32; -- dhara [cp. jalandhara rain -- cloud] the sea Miln 117; -- dhi=prec. Dāvs v.38.
Jalati [Sk. jvalati, with jvarati to be hot or feverish, to jval to burn (Dhtp 264: dittiyaŋ), cp. Ohg. kol=coal; Celt. gûal] to burn, to shine D 3, 188; M i.487; J i.62; ii.380; iv.69; It 86; Vv 462; VvA 107; Miln 223, 343. -- Caus. jaleti & jāleti (cp. janeti: jāneti) to set on fire, light, kindle S i.169; J ii.104; Miln 47. -- Pp. jalita. Intens. daddaḷhati (q. v.). Cp. ujjāleti.
Jalana (n. -- adj.) [Sk. jvalana] burning Pgdp 16.
Jalābu [Sk. jarāyu, slough & placenta, to jar see jarati, originally that which decays (=decidua); cp. Gr. gh_ras slough. As to meanings cp. gabbha] 1. the womb S iii.240. -- 2. the embryo J iv.38. -- 3. the placenta J ii.38.
-- ja born from a womb, viviparous M i.73; D iii.230; J ii.53=v.85.
Jalita (adj.) [pp. to jalati] set on fire, burning, shining, bright, splendid Sn 396, 668, 686; Vv 216 (=jalanto jotanto VvA 107); Pv i.1014 (burning floor of Niraya); ii.112 (˚ânubhāva: shining majesty); PvA 41 (=āditta burning); ThA 292.
Jalūpikā (f.) [Sk. *jalūkikā=jalūkā & (pop. etym.) jalankā (sprung fr. water), borrowed fr. Npers. ƶalū (?Uhlenbeck); cp. Gr. bde/lla leech, Celt. gel; perhaps to gal in the sense of such (?)] a leech Miln 407 (v. l. jalopikā).
jalūkā leech DA i.117.
Jalogi (nt.?) toddy (i. e. juice extracted from the palmyra, the date or the cocoa palm) Vin ii.294 (pātuŋ the drinking of j.), 301, 307; Mhvs 4, 10.
Jalla1 (nt.) [*jalya to jala or gal] moisture, (wet) dirt, perspiration (mostly as seda˚ or in cpd. rajo˚, q. v.) Sn 249 (=rajojalla SnA 291); J vi.578 (sweat under the armpits=jallikā Com.).
Jalla2 [prob.=jhalla, see Kern, Toevoegselen s. v.] athlete, acrobat J vi.271.
Jallikā (f.) [demin. of jalla] a drop (of perspiration), dirt in seda˚, etc. A i.253 (kāli˚); Sn 198=J i.146; vi.578.
Jaḷa (adj.) [Sk. jaḍa] dull, slow, stupid D iii.265 (a˚); A ii.252; Pug 13; Miln 251; DA i.290.
Java [Sk. java, to javati] 1. (n.) speed S ii.266; v.227; M i.446; A ii.113; iii.248; Sn 221; J ii.290; iv.2. Often combd with thāma, in phrase thāmajavasampanna endowed with strength & swiftness J i.62; VvA 104; PvA 4; Miln 4. -- javena (instr.) speedily J ii.377. -- 2. (adj.) swift, quick J iii.25; vi.244 (mano˚, as quick as thought); Vv 16 (=vegavanto VvA 78); VvA 6 (sīgha˚).
-- cchinna without alacrity, slow, stupid (opp. sīghajava) DhA i.262; -- sampanna full of swiftness, nimbleness, or alacrity A i.244 sq.; ii.250 sq.
Javati Vedic ju javate intr. to hurry, junāti trs. to incite, urge: to run, hurry, hasten S i.33; J iv.213; Dāvs v.24; DhsA 265, pp. jūta.
Javana (nt.) 1. alacrity, readiness; impulse, shock Ps i.80 sq.; Vism 22; DhsA 265 (cp. Dhs trsl. pp. 132, 156); DA i.194. Usually in cpd. javana -- pañña (adj.) of alert intellection, of swift understanding, together with hāsa -- pañña (hāsu˚ at M iii.25; J iv.136) & puthu˚ tikkha˚ S v.376, 377; Nd2 235, 3a. Also in cpds. ˚paññā Ps ii.185 sq.; ˚paññatā A i.45; ˚paññattaŋ S v.413. <-> 2. The twelfth stage in the function (kicca) of an act of perception (or vīthicitta): the stage of full perception, or apperception. Vism ch. xiv. (e. g. p. 459); Abhdhs. pt. iii, § 6 (kiccaŋ); Comp. pp. 29, 115, 245. In this connection javana is taken in its equally fundamental sense of "going" (not "swiftness"), and the "going" is understood as intellectual movement.
Javanaka=java 2 (adj.) VvA 78.
Jaha (adj.) ( -- ˚) [to jahati] leaving behind, giving up, see attaŋ˚, okaŋ˚, kappaŋ˚, raṇaŋ˚, sabbaŋ˚, etc (S i.52; It 58; Sn 790, 1101, etc.); duj˚ hard to give up Th 1, 495.
Jahati & jahāti [Vedic root hā. Cp. *ghē(i) & ghī to be devoid (of), Gr. xh_ros void of, xh_ra widow, xw/ra open space (cp. Sk. vihāya=ākāsa), xwri/zw separate; Lat. her -- es; Sk. jihīte to go forth=Ohg. gēn, gān, Ags. gan=go; also Sk. hāni want=Goth. gaidw, cp. Gr. xati/zw] to leave, abandon, lose; give up, renounce, forsake. Ster. expln at Nd2 255 (and passim): pajahati vinodeti byantikaroti anabhāvaŋ gameti. Lit. as well as fig.; esp. w. ref. to kāma, dosa & other evil qualities. -- Pres. jahāti Sn 1, 506 (dosaŋ), 589; Dh 91; imper. jahassu Sn 1121 (rūpaŋ); pot. jahe It 34; Dh 221; J iv.58, & jaheyya Sn 362; It 115; J i.153; iv.58. -- Fut. jahissāmi J iii.279; iv.420; v.465; in verse: hassāmi J iv.420; v.465. -- Ger. hitvā (very frequent) Sn 284, 328; Dh 29, 88, etc.; hitvāna (Sn 60), jahitvā & jahetvā (Sn 500). -- Inf. jahituŋ J i.138. -- Pp. jahita Sn 231; Kh 9; Miln 261. -- Pass. hāyati S ii.224; Sn 817; Miln 297, hāyate J v.488 & hīyati J ii.65; Sn 944 (hīyamāna), cp. hāyare J ii.327; pp. hīna (q. v.). -- Caus. hāpeti (q. v.). See also hāni, hāyin, jaha.
Jahitikā (f.) [See jahati] (a woman) who has been jilted, or rejected, or repudiated J i.148.
Jāgara (adj.) [fr. jāgarti] waking, watchful, careful, vigilant S i.3; A ii.13= It 116; M ii.31; It 41; Miln 300. -- bahu˚ wide awake, well aware, cautious Sn 972 (cp. rakkhita -- mānasāno in same context v. 63); Dh 29.
Jāgaraṇa (nt.) [der. fr. jāgara] a means for waking or keeping awake Miln 301.
Jāgaratā (f.) [cp. Sk. jāgaraṇa] watchfulness, vigilance S i.3.
Jāgarati [Sk. jāgarti to be awake (redupl. perf. for jājarti) *ger & gerēi; cp. Lat. expergiscor (*exprogrīscor); Gr. e)gei/rw, perf. e)grh/gora (for *e)gh/ gora). Def. at Dhtp 254 by niddā -- khaya] to be awake, to be watchful, to be on the alert (cp. guttadvāra) Dh 60 (dīghā jāgarato rattī), 226; It 41; Miln 300. -- pp. jāgarita (q. v.).
Jāgarita (nt.) [pp. of jāgarti] waking, vigil It 41; Pug 59.
Jāgariyā (f.) [BSk. M Vastu jāgarikā] keeping awake, watchfulness, vigilance, esp. in the sense of being cautious of the dangers that are likely to befall one who strives after perfection. Therefore freq. in combn "indriyesu guttadvāro bhojane mattaññū jāgariyaŋ anuyutto" (anuyuñjati: to apply oneself to or being devoted to vigilance), e. g. S ii.218; M i.32, 273, 354 sq., 471; A i.113 sq.; ii.40. -- Also in ˚ŋ bhajati to pursue watchfulness (bhajetha keep vigil) It 42; Sn 926 (niddaŋ na bahulīkareyya j˚ŋ bhajeyya ātāpī). -- S iv.104; M i.273, 355; Miln 388.
-- ânuyoga application or practice of watchfulness Nd1 484.
Jāta [pp. of janati (janeti), cp. Lat. (g)nātus, Goth. kunds; also Gr. (kasi/ -- ) gnhto/s, Ohg. knabo] 1. As adj. -- noun: (a) born, grown, arisen, produced (=nibbatta pātubhūta Nd2 256) Sn 576 (jātānaŋ maccānaŋ niccaŋ maraṇato bhayaŋ); jātena maccena kattabbaŋ kusalaŋ bahuŋ Dh 53=Miln 333; yakkhinī jātâsi (born a G.) J vi.337; rukkho j. J i.222; latā jātā Dh 340; gāmanissandhena jātāni sūpeyya -- paṇṇāni Vism 250. -- (n.) he who or that which is born: jātassa maraṇaŋ hoti Sn 742; jātassa jarā paññāyissati J i.59; jātaŋ+bhūtaŋ (opp. ajātaŋ abhūtaŋ) It 37. -- (b) "genuine," i.e. natural, true, good, sound (cp. kata, bhūta, taccha & opp. ajāta like akata, abhūta): see cpds. -- 2. As predicate, often in sense of a finite verb (cp. gata): born, grown (or was born, grew); become; occurred, happened Sn 683 (Bodhisatto hitasukhatāya jāto); bhayaŋ jātaŋ (arose) Sn 207; vivādā jātā Sn 828; ekadivase j. (were born on the same day) J iii.391; aphāsukaŋ jātaŋ (has occurred J i.291. -- So in loc. abs. jāte (jātamhi) "when . . . has arisen, when there is . . .," e. g. atthamhi Vin i.350=M iii.154=Dh 331; vādamhi Sn 832; oghe Sn 1092; kahāpaṇesu jātesu J i.121. -- 3. ˚jāta (nt.) characteristic; pada˚ pedal character S i.86; anga˚ the sexual organ Vin i.191; as adj. having become . . . (=bhūta); being like or behaving as, of the kind of . . ., sometimes to be rendered by an adj. or a pp. implied in the noun: cuṇṇakajātāni aṭṭhikāni (= cuṇṇayitāni) M iii.92; jālakajāta in bud A iv.117; chandajāta=chandika Sn 767; sujāta Sn 548 (well -- born, i. e. auspicious, blessed, happy); pītisomanassa˚ joyful & glad Sn p. 94; J i.60, etc.; gandhajāta a kind of perfume (see gandha). Often untranslatable: lābhappatto jāto J iii.126; vināsa -- ppaccayo jāto J i.256. -- 4. a Jātaka or Buddhist birth story DhA i.34.
-- āmaṇḍa the (wild) castor oil plant VvA 10; -- ovaraka the inner chamber where he was born VvA 158; J i.391 (so read for jāto varake). -- kamma the (soothsaying) ceremony connected w. birth, in ˚ŋ karoti to set the horoscope PvA 198 (=nakkhatta -- yogaŋ uggaṇhāti); -- divasa the day of birth, birthday J iii.391; iv.38; -- mangala birth festival, i. e. the feast held on the birth of a child DhA ii.86; -- rūpa "sterling," pure metal, i. e. gold (in its natural state, before worked, cp. jambonada). In its relation to suvaṇṇa (worked gold) it is stated to be suvaṇṇavaṇṇo (i. e. the brightcoloured metal: VvA 9; DhA iv.32: suvaṇṇo jātarūpo); at DA i.78 it is expld by suvaṇṇa only & at Vin iii.238 it is said to be the colour of the Buddha: j. Satthu -- vaṇṇa. At A i.253 it is represented as the material for the suvaṇṇakāra (the "white" -- smith as opp. to "black" -- smith). -- Combd w. hirañña Pv ii.75; very freq. w. rajata (silver), in the prohibition of accepting gold & silver (D i.5)≈ as well as in other connections, e. g. Vin i.245; ii.294 sq.; S i.71, 95; iv.326 (the moral dangers of "money": yassa jātarūpa -- rajataŋ kappati pañca pi tassa kāmaguṇā kappanti); v.353, 407; Dhs 617. -- Other passages illustr. the use & valuation of j. are S ii.234 (˚paripūra); v.92 (upakkilesā); A i.210 (id.); iii.16 (id.); -- S i.93, 117; M i.38; A i.215; iii.38; iv.199, 281; v.290; J ii.296; iv.102; -- veda [cp. Vedic jātaveda=Agni] fire S i.168; Sn 462 (kaṭṭhā jāyati j.) Ud 93; J i.214; ii.326= iv.471; v.326; vi.204, 578; Vism 171; DA i.226; DhA i.44 (nirindhana, without fuel); -- ssara a natural pond or lake Vin i.111; J i.470; ii.57.
Jātaka1 (nt.) [jāta+ka, belonging to, connected with what has happened] 1. a birth story as found in the earlier books. This is always the story of a previous birth of the Buddha as a wise man of old. In this sense it occurs as the name of one of the 9 categories or varieties of literary composition (M i.133; A ii.7, 103, 108; Vin iii.8; Pug 43. See navanga). -- 2. the story of any previous birth of the Buddha, esp. as an animal. In this sense the word is not found in the 4 Nikāyas, but it occurs on the Bharhut Tope (say, end of 3rd cent. b.c.), and is frequent in the Jātaka book. <-> 3. the name of a book in the Pāli canon, containing the verses of 547 such stories. The text of this book has not yet been edited. See Rh. Davids' Buddhist India, 189 -- 209, and Buddh. Birth Stories, introd., for history of the Jātaka literature. -- jātakaŋ niṭṭhapeti to wind up a Jātaka tale J vi.363; jātakaŋ samodhāneti to apply a Jātaka to the incident J i.106; DhA i.82. <-> Note. The form jāta in the sense of jātaka occurs at DhA i.34.
-- atthavaṇṇanā the commentary on the Jātaka book, ed. by V. Fausböll, 6 vols. with Index vol. by D. Andersen, London, 1877 sq.; -- bhāṇaka a repeater of the J. book Miln 341.
Jātaka2 (m.) [jāta+ka, belonging to what has been born] a son J i.239; iv.138.
Jātatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. jāta] the fact of being born or of having grown or arisen Vism 250; DhA i.241.
Jāti (f.) [see janati & cp. Gr. genea/, ge/nesis; Lat. gens; Goth. kind -- ins]. -- Instr. jātiyā (Sn 423) & jaccā (D ii.8; J iii.395; Dh 393); abl. jātiyā (S i.88) & jātito (by descent: D ii.8); loc. jātiyaŋ (PvA 10) & jātiyā (PvA 78). -- 1. birth, rebirth, possibility of rebirth, "future life" as disposition to be born again, "former life" as cause of this life. Defined (cp. the corresp. expln of jarā) as: yā tesaŋ tesaŋ sattanaŋ tamhi tamhi satta -- nikāye jāti sañjāti okkanti abhinibbatti khandhānaŋ pātubhāvo āyataṇānaŋ paṭilābho D ii.305 =S ii.3=Nd2 257. -- Jāti is a condition precedent of age, sickness & death, and is fraught with sorrow, pain & disappointment. It is itself the final outcome of a kamma, resting on avijjā, performed in anterior births; & forms thus the concluding link in the chain of the Paṭicca -- samuppāda. Under the first aspect it is enumd in various formulae, either in full or abbreviated (see Nd2 258), viz, (a) as (1) jāti, (2) jarā, (3) vyādhi, (4) maraṇa, (5) sokaparidevadukkhadomanass' upāyāsa in the dukkhaŋ ariyasaccaŋ (the noble truth of what is misfortune) Vin i.10; A i.176; iii.416; ˚dhamma destined to be born, etc. M i.161 sq., 173; -- A v.216; Nd2 258, 304, 630, etc., in var. connections (referring to some dukkha). -- (b) as Nos. 1 -- 4: Nd2 254, 494b; J i.168, etc. -- (c) as Nos. 1, 2, 4 (the standard quotation, implying the whole series 1 -- 5): S v.224; A v.144; jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇaŋ Vin i.1; D ii.31, 57, etc.; ˚ika A ii.11, 173; ˚īya M i.280; Nd2 40. -- (d) to this is sometimes added (as summing up) saŋsāra: Nd2 282f; cp. kicchaŋ loko āpanno jāyati ca jīyati ca mīyati ca cavati ca uppajjati ca D ii.30. -- (e) as Nos. 1+4: pahīna -- jātimaraṇa (adj.) (=free from life & death, i. e. saŋsāra) A i.162; ˚bhayassa pāraga A ii.15; ˚kovida Sn 484; atāri ˚ŋ asesaŋ Sn 355 (cp. 500); ˚assa pāraga Sn 32. -- (f)=e+saŋsāra (cp. d): sattā gacchanti saŋsāraŋ jātimaraṇagāmino A ii.12=52; jātimaraṇasaŋsāraŋ ye vajanti punappunaŋ . . . avijjāy' eva sā gati Sn 729. -- (g) as Nos. 1+2, which implies the whole series: atāri so jātijaraŋ A i.133= Sn 1048; jātijar' upaga Sn 725=It 106; saŋyojanaŋ jātijarāya chetvā It 42; -- Sn 1052, 1060; Dh 238, 348; cp. jāti ādinā nihīna PvA 198. -- Other phrases & applications: Various rebirths are seen by one who has perfect insight into all happening & remembers his former existences (D i.81; iii.50; A i.164; M ii.20). Arahantship implies the impossibility of a future rebirth: see formula khīṇā jāti (M i.139; Sn p. 16, etc.) and arahant ii.A: jātiyā parimuccati S i.88; jātiŋ bhabbo pahātuŋ A v.144 sq. -- antimā jāti the last rebirth D ii.15 (cp. carima); purimā j. a former existence PvA 1; atītajātiyaŋ in a former life (=pure) PvA 10. On jāti as dukkha see Vism 498 -- 501. <-> 2. descent, race, rank, genealogy (cp. fuh/, genus), often combd w. gotta. Two grades of descent are enumd at Vin iv.6 as hīnā jāti (low birth), consisting of Candāḷa, Veṇa, Nesāda, Rathakāra & Pukkusa; and ukkaṭṭhā j. (superior birth), comprising Khattiyas & Brāhmaṇas. -- The var. meanings of jāti are given by Bdhgh at Vism 498, 499 in the foll. classification (with examples) bhava, nikāya, sankhata -- lakkhaṇa, paṭisandhi, pasūti, kula, ariya -- sīla. -- Kiŋ hi jāti karissati? What difference makes his parentage? D i.121; jāti -- rājāno kings of birth, genuine kings J i.338; na naŋ jāti nivāresi brahmalok' ûpapattiyā Sn 139; jātiŋ akkhāhi tell me the rank of his father & mother Sn 421, 1004; cp. 462; na jaccā vasalo hoti Sn 136; 142; id. w. brāhmaṇo Sn 650; with nāma & gotta in the description of a man jātiyā nāmena gottena, etc. Vin iv.6; jātito nāmato gottato by descent, personal & family name D ii.8; cp. jāti -- gotta -- kula J ii.3. See also j. -- vāda. -- 3. a sort of, kind of (cp. jāta 3): catujātigandha four kinds of scent J i.265; ii.291. <-> 4. (jāti˚) by (mere) birth or nature, natural (opp. artificial); or genuine, pure, excellent (opp. adulterated, inferior), cp. jāta 1 (b): in cpds., like ˚maṇi, ˚vīṇā, etc.
-- kkhaya the destruction of the chance of being reborn S v.168; A i.167; Sn 209, 517, 743; Dh 423. -- khetta the realm of rebirth PvA 138 (=dasa cakkavāḷasahassāni); -- thaddha conceited, proud of birth Sn 104 (+dhanatthaddha, gotta˚: proud of wealth & name); -- thera a Th. by rank D iii.218; -- nirodha the extermination of (the cause of) rebirth Vin i.1≈; -- pabhava the origin or root of existence Sn 728; -- puppha nutmeg J vi.367; -- bhaya the fear of rebirth A ii.121; -- bhūmi natural ground, in ˚bhūmaka, ˚bhūmika, ˚bhūmiya living on nat. gr. (vassaŋ vasati) M i.145; A iii.366; -- maṇi a genuine precious stone J ii.417; -- maya constituting birth, being like birth ThA 285; -- vāda reputation of birth, character of descent, parentage. The 1st of the 5 characteristics constituting a "well -- bred" brahmin: yāva sattamā pitāmahāyugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena "of unblemished parentage back to the 7th generation" D i.120, etc. (=DA i.281); A i.166; iii.152, 223; Sn 315, 596. Cp. gotta -- vāda (e. g. D i.99); -- vibhanga a characteristic of birth, a distinction in descent Sn 600; -- vīṇā a first -- class lute J ii.249; -- sampanna endowed with (pure) birth (in phrase khattiyo muddhâvasitto j.˚) A iii.152; -- sambhava the origin of birth A i.142; iii.311; J i.168; -- sambheda difference of rank DhA i.166; -- saŋsāra the cycle of transmigration, the saŋsāra of rebirths (see above 1 d. f.): pahīna left behind, overcome (by an Arahant) M i.139; A iii.84, 86; ˚ŋ khepetvā id. Th 2, 168; vitiṇṇo j.˚ n' atthi tassa punabbhavo Sn 746; -- sindhava a well -- bred horse J ii.97; -- ssara the remembrance of (former) births (˚ñāṇa) J i.167; iv.29; DhA ii.27; iv.51; cp. cutûpapāta -- ñāṇa); -- hingulaka (& hingulikā) natural vermilion J v.67; VvA 4, 168, 324.
Jātika ( -- ˚) (adj.) 1. being like, being of, having, etc. (see jāta 3): duppañña˚ & sappañña˚ M i.225; dabba˚ A i.254; mukhara˚ Sn 275; viññū˚ Sn 294; māna˚ J i.88. -- 2. descended from, being of rank, belonging to the class of: maṇḍana˚ M ii.19; aviheṭhaka˚ Miln 219; samāna˚ (of equal rank) DhA i.390; veṇa˚ (belonging to the bamboo -- workers) PvA 175.
Jātimant (adj.) [jāti+mant] of good birth, having natural or genuine qualities, noble, excellent Sn 420 (vaṇṇārohena sampanno jātimā viya khattiyo); J i.342 (jātimanta -- kulaputtā). Of a precious stone: maṇi veḷuriyo subho j.˚ D i.76=M ii.17; DA i.221; Miln 215. Sometimes in this spelling for jutimant Sn 1136= Nd2 259 (expld by paṇḍita paññavā). -- ajātima not of good birth J vi.356 (opp. sujātimant ibid.).
Jātu (indeel.) [Vedic jātu, particle of affirmation. Perhaps for jānātu one would know, cp. Gr. oi)_mai, Lat. credo, P. maññe. But BR. and Fausböll make it a contraction of jāyatu "it might happen." Neither of these derivations is satisfactory] surely, undoubtedly (ekaŋsavacanaŋ SnA 348) usually in negative (& interrog.) sentences as na jātu, not at all, never (cp. also sādhu); mā jātu Vin ii.203; Sn 152, 348 (no ce hi jātu); J i.293, 374; iv.261; v.503. Na jātucca at J vi.60 is apparently for na jātu ca.
Jāna (adj.) [to jñā, see jānāti] knowing or knowable, understandable J iii.24 (=jānamāna). dujjāna difficult to understand D i.170, 187; M i.487; ii.43. su˚ recognizable, intelligible Pv iv.135 (=suviññeyya PvA 230). Cp. ājāna.
Jānana (nt.) [fr. jñā] knowledge, cognizance, recognition; intelligence, learning, skill J i.145 (attānaŋ -- ˚kālato paṭṭhāya from the time of self -- recognition), 200 ( -- ˚manta knowledge of a spell, a spell known by: tumhākaŋ) ii.221; SnA 330; DhA ii.73 (˚sabhāva= ñatta); DA i.86 (akkhara˚); Vism 391 (˚atthāya in order to know), 436 (=pajānana). Cp. ājānana. <-> ajānana not knowing (˚ -- ) J v.199; vi.177; not known J i.32 (˚sippa).
Jānanaka (adj.) [Sk. *jñānaka, cp. jānana & Sk. jānaka (c. gen.) expert Av Ś ii.119, 120, as n. ib. i.216] knowing DhsA 394.
Jānanatā (f.) [abstr. fr. jānana] the fact of knowing, knowledge KhA 144.
Jānapada (adj. -- n.) [fr. janapada] belonging to the country, living in the c.; pl. country -- folk (opp. negamā townsfolk) D i.136, 142; M ii.74; J ii.287, 388; DA i.297 (=janapada -- vāsin).
Jānāti [Vedic jña, jānāti *genē & *gnē, cp. Gr. gignw/skw, gnwto/s, gnw_sis; Lat. nosco, notus, (i)gnarus (cp. E. i -- gnorant); Goth. kunnan; Ohg. kennan, Ags. cnāwan=E. know] to know.
I. Forms: The 2 Vedic roots jān˚ & jñā˚ are represented in P. by jān˚ & ñā˚ (ña˚) 1. jān: pres. jānāti; pot. jāneyya (Sn 781) & jaññā (A iv.366; Sn 116, 775; Dh 157, 352; J ii.346; iv.478) 2nd sg. jāneyyāsi (M. i.487; J i.288), 1st pl. jāniyāma (Sn 873) & (archaic) jānemu (Sn 76, 599; Vv 8311); -- imper. jānāhi (Sn 596, 1026; Pv ii.912), 3rd. sg. jānātu (It 28); -- ppr. jānanto & jānaŋ (D i.192; A i.128; Sn 722), ppr. med. jānamāna (J i.168); -- fut. jānissati (J ii.342; vi.364); -- aor. ajāni (Sn 536) & jāni (J i.125, 269), 3rd pl. jāniŋsu (J ii.105; VvA 113); -- ger. jānitvā (J i.293; iii.276); inf. jānituŋ (J i.125). Caus. jānāpeti (see below iv.2). -- 2. ñā: fut. ñassati (D i.165); -- aor. aññāsi (J i.271) & nāsi (Sn 471), 3rd pl. aññaŋsu (Vv 224). -- ger. ñatvā (freq.); -- grd. ñeyya A ii.135 (see below) & ñātabba (PvA 133); -- inf. ñātuŋ (freq.) -- pp. ñāta (q. v.). <-> Pass. ñāyati to be called or named (Miln 25).
II. Cognate Forms: Nd2 s. v. explains jānāti by passati dakkhati adhigacchati vindati paṭilabhati, & ñatvā (No. 267) by jānitvā tulayitvā tirayitva vibhāvayitvā vibhūtaŋ katvā (very freq.) The 1st expln is also applied to abhijānāti, & the 2nd to passitvā, viditaŋ katvā, abhiññāya & disvā. The use of the emphatic phrase jānāti passati is very frequent. Yaŋ tvaŋ na jānāsi na passasi taŋ tvaŋ icchasi kāmesi? Whom you know not neither have seen, is it she that you love and long for? D i.193; Bhagavā jānaŋ jānāti passaŋ passati cakkhubhūto ñāṇabhūto M i.111; similarly A iv.153 sq. See further D i.2, 40, 84, 157 sq, 165, 192 sq., 238 sq.; A i.128; iii.338; v.226; Sn 908; Nd2 35, 413, 517; Vism 200.
III. Meaning: (1) Intrs. to know, to have or gain knowledge, to be experienced, to be aware, to find out: mayam pi kho na jānāma surely, even we do not know D i.216; te kho evaŋ jāneyyaŋ they ought to know ib.; jānantā nāma n' âhesuŋ "nobody knew" J iii.188; jānāhi find out J i.184; kālantarena jānissatha you will see in time PvA 13; ajānanto unawares, unsuspecting i.223; ajānamāna id. Pv ii.314. -- 2. Trs. to know recognize, be familiar with (usually c. acc., but also with gen.: J i.337; ii.243), to have knowledge of, experience, find; to infer, conclude, distinguish, state, define: yaŋ ahaŋ jānāmi taŋ tvaŋ jānāsi D i.88; aham p' etaŋ na jānāmi Sn 989; jānanti taŋ yakkhabhūtā Pv iv.135; paccakkhato ñatvā finding out personally J i.262; iii.168; cittam me Gotamo jānāti S i.178; jānāti maŋ Bhagavā S i.116; kathaŋ jānemu taŋ mayaŋ? How shall we know (or identify) him? Vv 8311; yathā jānemu brāhmaṇaŋ so that we may know what a b. is Sn 599; yath' âhaŋ jāneyyaŋ vasalaŋ Sn p. 21; ajānanto ignorant PvA 4; annapānaŋ ajāṇanto (being without bread & water) PvA 169; ittaraŋ ittarato ñatvā inferring the trifling from the trifle Pv i.1111; ingha me uṇh' odakaŋ jānāhi find me some hot water S i.174; seyyaŋ jānāhi Vin iv.16; phalaŋ pāpassa jānamāna (having experienced) J i.168; mantaŋ j. (to be in possession of a charm) J i.253; maggaŋ na j. Sn 441; pamāṇaŋ ajānitvā (knowing no measure) PvA 130. -- 3. With double acc.: to recognize as, to see in, take for, identify as, etc. (cp. Caus.): petaŋ maŋ jānāhi "see in me a Peta" Pv ii.912 (=upadhārehi PvA 119); bhadd' itthiyā ti maŋ aññaŋsu (they knew me as=they called me) Vv 224.
IV. Various: 1. Grd. ñeyya as nt.=knowledge (cp. ñāṇa): yāvatakaŋ ñeyyaŋ tāvatakaŋ ñāṇaŋ (knowledge coincides with the knowable, or: his knowledge is in proportion to the k., i. e. he knows all) Nd2 2352m; ñāṇaŋ atikkamitvā ñeyyapatho n' atthi "beyond knowledge there is no way of knowledge" ib.; ñeyyasāgara the ocean of knowledge PvA 1. -- 2. Caus. jānāpeti to make known, to inform, or (with attānaŋ) to identify, to reveal oneself J i.107 (att. ajānāpetvā); vi.363; Vism 92 (att.); PvA 149 (att.); DhA ii.62.
Jāni1 (f.) [from jahati, confused in meaning with jayati. See jahati & cp. janti] deprivation, loss, confiscation of property; plundering, robbery; using force, ill -- treatment D i.135=A i.201 (vadhena vā bandhena vā jāniyā vā); S i.66 (hatajānisu), J i.55 (v. l. jāti), 212 (mahājānikara a great robber): iv.72 (dhana,˚ v. l. hāni); Dh 138 (=DhA iii.70 dhanassa jāni, v. l. hāni).
Jāni2 (f.) wife, in jānipatayo (pl.) wife & husband (cp. jāyā(m)pati) A ii.59 sq.
Jānu (nt.) [Vedic jānu=Gr. go/nu, Lat. genu, Goth., Ohg., etc. kniu, E. knee] (also as jaṇṇu(ka), q.v.) the knee J ii.311; iv 41; vi.471; DA i.254.
-- maṇḍala the knee -- cap, the knee A i.67; ii.21; iii.241 sq.; PvA 179.
Jānuka (nt.)=jānu A iv.102.
Jāpayati Caus. of jayati.
Jāmātar (& jāmāta J iv.219) [Vedic jāmātar. Deriv. un- certain. BR. take it as jā+mātar, the builder up of the family, supposing the case where there is no son and the husband goes to live in the wife's family, a bīna marriage. More likely fr. ldg *gem, to marry. Cp. Gr. game/w; gambro/s, Lat. gener] daughter's husband, son -- inlaw Th 2, 422 (=ThA 269 duhitu pati); J ii.63; v.442.
Jāyati (jāyate) [from jan, see janati] to be born, to be produced, to arise, to be reborn. Pres. 3rd pl. jāyare J iii.459; iv.53; Miln 337; ppr, jāyanto Sn 208; aor. jāyi J iii.391; inf. jātum J i.374. -- jāyati (loko), jīyati, miyati one is born, gets old, dies D ii.30; Vism 235. Kaṭṭhā jāyati jātavedo out of fire -- wood is born the fire Sn 462. -- Vin ii.95=305; Sn 114, 296, 657; Dh 58, 193, 212, 282; Pv iii.114 (are reborn as). Cp. vi˚.
Jāyampatikā (pl.) [see jayampatikā & cp. jāyāpatī] wife & husband VvA 286.
Jāyā (f.) [from jan] wife Vin ii.259=264; J iv.285.
-- patī (pl.) husband & wife PvA 159; Dāvs v.2.
Jāyikā f. (cp. jāyā) wife M i.451.
Jāra [Vedic jāra] a paramour, adulterer J i.293; ii.309. f. ˚t adulteress Vin ii.259, 268; iii.83.
Jāla1 (nt.) [Vedic jāla, prob. from jaṭ to plait, make a tangle cp. jaṭita & jaṭā; on l:ṭ cp. phulla: sphuṭa; cāru: cāṭu; cela: ceṭa] a net; netting, entanglement (lit. or fig.): snare, deceptíon (=māyā). -- A I.it. Nd2 260 (= suttajāla, a plaiting of threads); SnA 115, 263 (=suttamaya) D i.45 (anto -- jālikata caught in a net); Sn 62, 71, 213, 669; J i.52; vi.139. -- kinkiṇika˚ a row of bells D ii.183; muttā˚ a net of pearls J i.9; VvA 40; loha˚ PvA 153; hema˚ Vv 35; a fowler's net Dh 174; a spider's web Dh 347; nets for hair J vi.188; pabbata˚ a chain of mountains J ii.399; sirā˚ network of veins J v.69; PvA 68. -- Freq. in similes: see J.P.T.S. 1907, 90. -- B. Fig. Very often appld to the snares of Māra: S i.48 (maccuno); Sn 357 (id.); DhA iii.175 (Māra˚); Sn 527 (deception); taṇhā˚ the snare of worldly thirst (cp. ˚tanhā) M i.271; Th 1, 306; SnA 351; kāma˚ Th 1, 355; moha˚ S iii.83; mohasama Dh 251; diṭṭhi˚ the fallacies of heresy D i.46; J vi.220; ñāṇa˚ the net of knowledge VvA 63; DhA iii.171. bhumma˚ (vijjā) "earthly net," i.e. gift of clearsight extending over the earth SnA 353.
-- akkhi a mesh of a net J i.208: -- taṇhā the net of thirst Dhs 1059, 1136; DhsA 367; -- pūpa a "netcake"? DhA i.319; -- hatthapāda (adj.) having net -- like hands & feet (one of the 32 marks of a Mahāpurisa) prob. with reference to long nails D ii.17 (see Dial. ii.14, note 3), cp. jālitambanakhehi Vv 8116 (expld at VvA 315: jālavantehi abhilohita -- nakkehi. Tena jāli (v. l. jāla -- ) hatthataŋ mahāpurisa -- lakkhaṇaŋ tambanakhataŋ anuvyañ anañ ca dasseti).
Jāla2 [Sk. jvāla, from jalati] glow, blaze J v.326; PvA 52 (=tejas), 154 (raŋsi˚); Miln 357; Vism 419 (kappavināsaka˚).
-- roruva N. of one of the two Roruva hells ("blazes") J v.271; -- sikhā a glowing crest i. e. a flame Nd2 11 (=accī).
Jālaka (nt.) [jāla1+ka] 1. a net J vi.536; Dāvs v.51. - 2. a bud A iv.117 sq. (˚jāta in bud). -- f. jālikā chain armour Miln 199.
Jālā (f.) [see jāla2] a flame J i.216, 322; Miln 148, 357.
Jālin (adj. -- n.) "having a net," ensnaring, deceptive: (a) lit. a fisherman J ii.178. -- (b) fig. usually in f. ˚inī of tanhā (ensnarer, witch) S i.107=Dh 180; A ii.211; Th 1, 162, 908; Dhs 1059; Vism 1; DhsA 363; cp. M Vastu i.166; iii.92.
Jāleti [caus. of jalati. See also jaleti] to cause to burn, to light, kindle J ii.104; iv.290; v.32.
-- Ji (adj. -- suffix) [From jayati to conquer] winning, vic- torious: sangāma˚ victorious in fight, in sangāmaj' uttama "greatest of conquerors" Dh 103; sabba˚ S iv.83.
Jigacchā (f.) see jighacchā.
Jigiŋsaka (adj.) [see next] one who wishes to gain, desirous of, pursuing Sn 690.
Jigiŋsati [Desid. of ji, jayati. On etym. see also Kern, Toev. p. 44] to desire, to wish to acquire, to covet; Sn 700; J ii.285; iii.172 (v. l. BB. jigissaŋ); iv.406 (v. l. SS. jihiŋ˚, BB. jigī˚); v.372; vi.268. As jigīsati Th 1, 1110.
Jigiŋsanatā (f.) [n. abstr. fr. jigiŋsati] desire for, covetous- ness Vbh 353 (v. l. BB. nijigīsanatā); cp. Vism. 29
Jigucchaka (adj.) one who dislikes or disapproves of M i.327 (paṭhavī˚, āpa˚ etc.) Miln 343.
Jigucchati [Desid. of gup] to shun, avoid, loathe, detest, to be disgusted with or horrified at (c. instr.) D i.213 (iddhi -- pāṭihāriyena aṭṭiyāmi harāyāmi j.): A iv.174 (kāyaduccaritena); Sn 215 (kammehi pāpakehi; SnA 266=hiriyati); J ii.287; Pug. 36. -- ppr. jigucchamāna It 43; grd. jigucchitabba A i.126; pp. jigucchita Sn 901. -- See also jeguccha, jegucchin.
Jigucchana (nt.) dislike, contempt, disgust Vism 159; PvA 120.
Jigucchā (f.) disgust for, detestation, avoidance, shunning: tapo˚ (detesting asceticism) D i.174; S i.67; A ii.200; jigucchabībhaccha -- dassana detestable & fearful -- looking PvA 56. Note. A diff. spelling, digucchā, occurs at DhsA 210.
Jighacchati [Desid. to ghasati, eat] to have a desire to eat, to be hungry D ii.266; pp. jighacchita DhA ii.145.
Jighacchā (f.) [from jighacchati] appetite, hunger, often combd with pipāsā, desire to drink, thirst, e. g. S i.18; A ii.143, 153; Miln 304. -- M i.13, 114; 364; iii.97, 136; A iii.163; Dh 203 (j. paramā rogā); J ii.445; iii.19; (˚abhibhūta=chāta); Miln 204, 304; Sdhp 118, 388. Cp. khudā & chāta. Note. A diff. spelling as dighacchā occurs at A ii.117.
Jiñjuka the Gunja shrub (Abrus precatorius) J iv.333 (akkhīni j. ˚phalasadisāni, cp. in same application guñjā); v.156 (j. ˚phalasannibha); DhA i.177 (˚gumba).
Jiṇṇa [pp. of jarati] 1. decayed, broken up, frail, decrepit, old: vuḍḍha mahallaka andhagata vayo -- anupatta Nd2 261; jarājiṇṇatāya jiṇṇa DA i.283. -- Vin ii.189; D i.114; M ii.48 sq., 66; A ii.249; iv.173; Sn 1 (urago va jiṇṇaŋ tacaŋ jahāti); Pv i.121 (same simile); Sn 1120, 1144; J i.58; iii.22 ( -- pilotikā worn -- out rags); Dh 155, 260; Pv ii.114 (jarājiṇṇa PvA 147); Pug 33; Vism 119 (˚vihārā), 356 (˚sandamānikā), 357 (˚koṭṭha); ThA 213 ( -- ghara a tumble -- down house); PvA 40 ( -- goṇa=jaraggava), 55 (of a roof). Cp. ˚tara J iv.108. -- 2. digested J ii.362
Jiṇṇaka (adj.)=jiṇṇa Sn 98, 124; J iv.178, 366; Sdhp 299 (sālā).
Jiṇṇatā (f.) [cp. jiṇṇa, jaratā & jīraṇatā] decrepitude DA i.283 (jarā˚).
Jita [pp. of jayati, conquer] conquered, subdued, mastered: (nt.) victory. jitā me pāpakā dhammā Vin i.8; <-> Dh 40, 104 (attā jitaŋ seyyo for attā jito seyyo see DhA ii.228), 105, 179; Vv 6427 (jitindriya one whose senses are mastered, cp. guttindriya). -- Cp. vi˚.
Jitatta (nt.) [n. abstr. of jita] mastery, conquest VvA 284.
Jina [pp. med. of jayati] conquering, victorious, often of the Buddha, "Victor": jitā me pāpakā dhammā tasmâhaŋ Upaka jino ti Vin i.8=M i.171; Vin v.217; Sn 379, 697, 989, 996. magga˚ conqueror of the Path Sn 84 sq.; saŋsuddha˚ (id.) Sn 372. Cp khetta˚. In other connections: Pv iv.333; Th 2, 419 (jin' amhase rūpinaŋ Lacchiŋ expld at ThA 268 as jinā amhase jinā vat' amha rūpavatiŋ Siriŋ).
-- cakka the Buddha's reign, rule, authority J iv.100; -- putta disciple of the B. Miln 177; -- bhūmi the ground or footing of a conqueror PvA 254; -- sāsana the doctrine of the B. Dpvs iv.3, 10.
Jināti=jayati (jeti). See also vi˚.
Jimha (adj.) [Vedic jihma] crooked, oblique, slant, fig. dishonest, false (cp. vanka, opp. uju | M i.31 (+vanka); A v.289, 290; J i.290 (spelled jima); iii.111=v.222; vi.66; Vism 219 (ajimha=uju); PvA 51 (citta˚ vanka . . .; opp. uju). Cp. kuṭila.
Jimhatā (f.) [n. abstr. to jimha] crookedness, deceit (opp. ujutā) Dhs 50, 51 (+vankatā); Vbh 359.
Jimheyya (nt.) [from jimha] crookedness, deceit, fraud M i.340 (sāṭheyyāni kūṭeyyāni vankeyyāni j.˚); A iv.189 (id.) v.167.
Jiyā (f.) [Vedic jyā=Gr. bio/s bow, cp. also Lat. filum thread] a bow string M i.429 (five kinds); J ii.88; iii.323; Vism 150; DA i.207. -- kāra bowstring -- maker Miln 331.
Jivhā (f.) [Vedic jihvā, cp. Lat. lingua (older dingua); Goth. tuggo; Ohg. zunga; E. tongue] the tongue. <-> (a) physically: Vin i.34; A iv.131; Sn 673, 716; Dh 65, 360; J ii.306; PvA 99 (of Petas: visukkha -- kanthaṭṭha j.), 152. -- Of the tongue of the mahāpurusha which could touch his ears & cover his forehead: Sn 1022; p. 108; & pahūta -- jivhatā the characteristic of possessing a prominent tongue (as the 27th of the 32 Mahāpurisa -- lakkhaṇāni) D i.106=Sn p. 107; D ii.18. -- dujjivha (adj.) having a bad tongue (of a poisonous snake) A iii.260. -- (b) psychologically: the sense of taste. It follows after ghāna (smell) as the 4th sense in the enumn of sense -- organs (jivhāya rasaŋ sāyati Nd2 under rūpa; jivhā -- viññeyya rasa D i.245; ii.281; M ii.42) Vin i.34; D iii.102, 226; M i.191; Vism 444.
-- agga the tip of the tongue A iii.109; iv.137; DhA ii.33. -- āyatana the organ of taste D iii.243, 280, 290; Dhs 585, 609, 653; -- indriya the sense of taste D iii.239; Dhs 585, 609, 972; -- nittaddana (corr. to -- nitthaddhana) tying the tongue by means of a spell D i.11 (cp. DA i.96); -- viññāṇa the cognition of taste M i.112; D iii.243; Dhs 556, 612, 632; -- samphassa contact with the sense of taste S i.115; D iii.243; Dhs 585, 632, 787.
Jīna [pp. of jīyati] diminished, wasted, deprived of (with acc. or abl.) having lost; with acc.: J iii.153, 223, 335; v.99 (atthaŋ: robbed of their possessions; Com. parihīna vinaṭṭha). -- with abl.: J v.401 (read jīnā dhanā).
Jīyati [Pass. of ji, cp. Sk. jyāti & jīryate] to become diminished, to be deprived, to lose (cp. jayati, jāni); to decay; to become old (cp. jarati, jiṇṇa) jīyasi J v.100; jīyanti J iii.336 (dhanā); jīyittha S i.54; J i.468; mā jīyi do not be deprived of (ratiŋ) J iv.107. Koci kvaci na jīyati mīyati (cp. jāyati) D ii.30; cakkhūni jīyare the eyes will become powerless J vi.528 (= jīyissanti); grd. jeyya: see ajeyya2. Cp. parijīyati. Sometimes spelt jiyy˚: jiyyati J vi.150; jiyyāma J ii.75 (we lose= parihāyāma). Pp. jīna, q. v.
Jīraka1 [Vedic jīra, lively, alert, cp. jīvati & Gr. diero/s, Lat. viridis] digestion, in ajīrakena by want or lack of digestion J ii.181. See ajīraka.
Jīraka2 cummin -- seed Miln 63; J i.244; ii.363; VvA 186.
Jīraṇa (nt.) [fr. jīr] decaying, getting old Dhtp 252.
Jīraṇatā (f.) [n. abstr. of jīr=jar, see jarati; cp. jarā & jiṇṇatā] the state of being decayed or aged, old age, decay, decrepitude M i.49; S ii.2; Nd2 252= Dhs 644; PvA 149.
Jīrati & Jīrayati [Caus. of jarati] 1. to destroy, bring to ruin, injure, hurt Vin i.237 (jīrati); J v.501 (v. l. BB. for jarayetha, Com. vināseyya)=vi.375; PvA 57. <-> 2. (cp. jīyati) to get old A iii.54 (jarā -- dhammaŋ mā jīri "old age may not get old," or "the law of decay may not work"); Vism 235 (where id. p. D ii.30 reads jīyati); DhA i.11 (cakkhūni jīranti). -- 3. (intrs.) to be digested Vism 101.
Jīreti & Jīrāpeti [Verbal formation from jīra1] to work out, to digest J i.238, 274 (jīreti); DhA i.171. Appl. to bhati, wages: bhatiŋ ajīrāpetva not working off the w. J ii.309, 381; jīrāpeti as "destroy" at ThA 269 in expln of nijjareti (+vināseti).
Jīva1 (adj. -- n.) [Sk. jīva, Idg. *gṷīṷos=Gr. bi/os, Lat. vīvus, Goth. quius, Ohg. queck, E. quick, Lith. gyvas] 1. the soul. Sabbe jīvā all the souls, enumd with sattā pāṇā bhūta in the dialect used by the followers of Gosāla D i.53 (= DA i.161 jīvasaññī). "taŋ jīvaŋ taŋ sarīraŋ udāhu aññaŋ j. aññaŋ s." (is the body the soul, or is the body one thing and the soul another?) see D i.157, 188; ii.333, 336, 339; S iv.392 sq.; M i.157, 426 sq.; A ii.41. -- Also in this sense at Miln 30, 54, 86. -- Vin iv.34; S iii.215, 258 sq.; iv.286; v.418; A v.31, 186, 193. -- 2. life, in yāvajīvaŋ as long as life lasts, for life, during (his) lifetime D iii.133; Vin i.201; Dh 64; J ii.155; PvA 76.
-- gāhaŋ (adv.) taken alive, in phrase j.˚ gaṇhāti or gaṇhāpeti S i.84; J i.180; ii.404; cp. karamara; -- loka the animate creation J iii.394; -- sūla "life -- pale," a stake for execution J ii.443; -- sokin (=sokajīvin) leading a life of sorrow J vi.509.
Jīva2 (nt.) the note of the jīvaka bird Sum. V. on D iii.201.
Jīvaka (adj.)=jīva, in bandhu˚ N. of a plant VvA 43. -- f. ˚ikā q. v.
Jīvaŋ -- jīvaka (m. onom.) name of a bird, a sort of pheasant (or partridge?), which utters a note sounding like jīvaŋ jīva D iii.201; J v.406, 416; vi.276, 538 [Fausböll reads jīvajīvaka in all the Jātaka passages. Speyer AvŚ ii.227 has jīvañjīvaka]. With this cp. the Jain phrase jīvaŋjīveṇa gacchaï jīvaŋjīveṇaŋ ciṭṭhaï, Weber Bhagavatī pp. 289, 290, with doubtful interpretation ("living he goes with life"? or "he goes like the j. bird"?).
Jīvati [Vedic jīvati, cp. jinoti (jinvati); Dhtp 282: pāṇa- dhāraṇe *gṷei̯ē =Gr. bi/omai & zw/w, zh_n; Lat. vīvo: Goth. ga -- quiunan; Mhg. quicken, cp. E. quicken] to live, be alive, live by, subsist on (c. instr. or nissāya). Imper. pres. jīva Sn 427, very freq. with ciraŋ live long . . ., as a salutation & thanksgiving. ciraŋ jīva J vi.337; c. jīvāhi Sn 1029; Pv ii.333; c. jīvantu Pv i.55; -- pot. jīve Sn 440, 589; Dh 110; -- ppr. jīvaŋ Sn 427, 432; <-> ppr. med. jīvamāna J i.307; PvA 39; -- inf. jīvituŋ J i.263; Dh 123. -- Sn 84 sq., 613 sq., 804; Dh 197; J iii.26; iv.137; vi.183 (jīvare); PvA 111.
Jīvana (nt.) living, means of subsistence, livelihood PvA 161. Spelt jīvāna (v. l. jīvino) (adj.) at J iii.353 (yācana˚).
Jīvamānaka (adj.) [ppr. med. of jīvati+ka] living, alive Vism 194.
Jīvikā (f.) [abstr. fr. jīvaka] living, livelihood S iii.93; A v.87, 210; J iv.459; Miln 122; SnA 466. Freq. in combn ˚ŋ kappeti to find or get one's living: J ii.209; PvA 40, etc.; ˚kappaka finding one's livelihood (c. ger. by) J ii.167. Cp. next.
Jīvita (nt.) [Vedic jīvita, orig. pp. of jīvati "that which is lived," cp. same formation in Lat. vīta=*vīvita; Gr. bio/th living, sustenace, & di/aita, "diet"] (individual) life, lifetime, span of life; living, livelihood (cp. jīvikā) Vin ii.191; S i.42; iv.169, 213; M ii.73 (appaŋ); A i.155, 255; iii.72; iv.136 (appakaŋ parittaŋ); Sn 181, 440, 574, 577, 931, 1077; Dh 110, 111, 130; J i.222; Pv i.1111 (ittaraŋ); ii.67 (vijahati); Dhs 19, 295; Vism 235, 236; Ps ii.245; PvA 40. -- jīvitā voropeti to deprive of life, to kill Vin iii.73; D iii.235; M ii.99; A iii.146, 436; iv.370 sq.; PvA 67.
-- āsā the desire for life A i.86; -- indriya the faculty of life, vitality Vin iii.73; S v.204; Kvu 8, 10; Miln 56; Dhs 19; Vism 32, 230 (˚upaccheda destruction of life), 447 (def.); DhA ii.356 (˚ŋ upacchindati to destroy life); VvA 72; -- kkhaya the dissolution of life, i. e. death J i.222; PvA 95, 111; -- dāna "the gift of life," saving or sparing life J i.167; ii.154; -- nikanti desire for life A iv.48; -- parikkhārā (pl.) the requisites of life M i.104 sq.; A iii.120; v.211; -- pariyādāna the cessation or consummation of life D i.46 (=DA i.128); S ii.83; A iv.13; -- pariyosāna the end of life, i. e. death J i.256; PvA 73; -- mada the pride of life, enumd under the 3 madā; viz. ārogya, yobbana, j.: of health, youth, life D iii.220; A i.146; iii.72; -- rūpa (adj.) living (lifelike) J ii.190; -- sankhaya=˚khaya Sn 74; Dh 331; Nd2 262 (= ˚pariyosāna); -- hetu (adv.) on the ground of life, for the sake of life A iv.201, 270
Jīvin (adj.) (usually -- ˚) living, leading a life (of . . .) S i.42, 61; Sn 88, 181; Dh 164; PvA 27. Cp. dīgha˚, dhamma˚.
Juṇhā (f.) [Sk. jyotsnā, see also P. dosinā) moonlight, a moonlit night, the bright fortnight of the month (opp. kālapakkha) Vin i.138, 176; J i.165; iv.498 (˚pakkha).
Juti (f.) [Sk. jyuti & dyuti, to dyotate, see jotati] splendour, brightness, effulgence, light J ii.353; PvA 122, 137, 198. The spelling juti at M i.328 (in combn gati+juti) seems to be faulty for cuti (so as v. l. given on p. 557).
-- dhara (jutin˚) carrying or showing light, shining, resplendent, brilliant S i.121; J ii.353; DhA i.432.
Jutika (adj.) ( -- ˚) having light, in mahā˚ of great splendour D ii.272; A i.206; iv.248.
Jutimatā (f.) [fr. jutimant] splendour, brightness, prominence J 14; v.405
Jutimant (adj.) [fr. juti] brilliant, bright; usually fig. as prominent in wisdom: "bright." distinguished, a great light (in this sense often as v. l. to jātimant) D ii.256 (ī); S v.24; Dh 89 (=DhA ii.163 ñāṇajutiyā jotetvā); Sn 508; Pv iv.135 (=PvA 230 ñāṇajutiyā jutimā).
Jutimantatā (f.) [fr. jutimant] splendour SnA 453.
Juhati [Sk. juhoti, *gheu(d); cp. Gr. xe/w, xu/tra, xu_los; Lat. fundo; Goth. giutan, Ohg. giozan] to pour (into the fire), to sacrifice, offer; to give, dedicate A ii.207 (aggiŋ); Sn 1046 (=Nd2 263 deti cīvaraŋ, etc.); 428 (aggihuttaŋ jūhato), p. 79 (aggiŋ); Pug 56; fut. juhissati S i.166 (aggiŋ); caus. hāpeti2 pp. huta; see also hava, havi, homa.
Juhana (nt.) [fr. juhati] offering, sacrifice D i.12, J ii.43.
Jūta (nt.) [Sk. dyūta pp. of div, dīvyati, P. dibbati to play at dice] gambling, playing at dice D i.7 (˚ppamādaṭṭhāna cp. DA i.85)≈; iii.182, 186 (id.); J i.290; iii.198; vi.281; DhA ii.228. ˚ŋ kīḷati to play at d. J i.289; iii.187. -- See also dūta2.
-- gīta a verse sung at playing dice (for luck) J i.289, 293; -- maṇḍala dice board (=phalaka J i.290) J i.293. -- sālā gambling hall J vi.281.
Je (part.) exclamation: oh! ah! now then! Vin i.232, 292 (gaccha je); M i.126; VvA 187, 207; DhA iv.105.
Jeguccha (adj.) & jegucchiya (J ii.437) [sec. der. fr. jigucchā] contemptible, loathsome, detestable J iv.305; Vism 250; Th 1, 1056; PvA 78, 192 (asuci+). Cp. pari˚. -- a˚ not despised Sn 852; Th 1, 961.
Jegucchitā (f.) [see jigucchita] avoidance, detestation, disgust Vin i.234; M i.30; A iv.182 sq.
Jegucchin (adj.) one who detests or avoids (usually -- ˚) M i.77; (parama˚), 78 A iv.174, 182 sq., 188 sq., Miln 352 (pāpa˚).
Jeṭṭha (adj.) [compar. -- superl. formation of jyā power. Gr. bi/a, from ji in jināti & jayati "stronger than others," used as superl. (& compar.) to vuḍḍha old -- elder, eldest. The compar. *jeyya is a grammarian's construction, see remarks on kaniṭṭha] better (than others), best, first, supreme; first -- born; elder brother or sister, elder, eldest D ii.15 (aggo jeṭṭho seṭṭho=the first, foremost & best of all); A i.108; ii.87; iii.152; iv.175; J i.138 (˚putta); ii.101 (˚bhātā), 128 (˚yakkhinī); iv.137.
-- apacāyin, in phrase kule -- j. -- apacāyin paying due respect to the clan -- elders D iii.72, 74; S v.468; Vism 415; DhA i.265. Same for ˚apacāyikā (f.) honour to . . . Nd2 294, & ˚apacāyitar D iii.70, 71, 145, 169. -- māsa N. of a month SnA 359.
Jeṭṭhaka=jeṭṭha J i.253; ii.101 (˚tāpasa); iii.281 (˚kam māra: head of the silversmith's guild); iv.137, 161; v.282; Pv i.113 (putta=pubbaja PvA 57); DhA iii.237 (˚sīla); iv.111 (id.); PvA 36 (˚bhariyā), 42 (˚pesakāra head of the weaver's guild), 47 (˚vāṇija), 75.
Jeti see jayati.
Jevanīya (nt.) a kind of (missile) weapon A iv.107=110 (combd with āvudha & salāka; vv. ll. vedhanika, jeganika, jevanika).
Jotaka (adj.) [from juti] illuminating, making light; explaining J ii.420; Dpvs xiv.50; Miln 343 (=lamp-lighter). -- f. ˚ikā explanation, commentary, N. of several Commentaries, e. g. the Paramatthajotikā on the Sutta Nipāta (KhA 11); cp. the similar expression dīpanī (Paramatthadīpanī on Th 2; Vv & Pv.). <-> Jotika Np. DhA i.385 (Jotiya); Vism 233, 382.
Jotati [Sk. dyotate to shine, *dei̯ā; cp. Gr. de/atai shine, dh_los clear; also Sk. dī in dīpyate; Lat. dies. Dhtp 120 gives jut in meaning "ditti," i. e. light] to shine, be splendid Jˋ i.53; vi.100, 509; PvA 71 (jotantī=obhāsentī).
Jotana (nt.) & jotanā (f.) [cp. Sk. dyotana] illumination, explanation J vi.542; Ps ii.112; VvA 17 (˚nā).
Joti (m. nt.) [Sk. jyotis (cp. dyuti) nt. to dyotate, see jotati] 1. light, splendour, radiance S i.93; A ii.85; Vv 162. -- 2. a star: see cpds. -- 3. fire S i.169; Th 1, 415; J iv.206; sajotibhūta set on fire S ii.260; A iii.407 sq.; J i.232.
-- parāyaṇa (adj.) attaining to light or glory S i.93; A ii.85; D iii.233; Pug 51; -- pāvaka a brilliant fire Vv 162 (expl. VvA 79: candima -- suriya -- nakkhatta tāraka -- rūpānaŋ sādhāraṇa -- nāmaŋ); -- pāsāṇa a burning glass made of a crystal DhA iv.209; -- mālikā a certain torture (setting the body on fire: making a fiery garland) M i.87=A i.47=ii.122=Nd1 154=Nd2 604=Miln 197; -- rasa a certain jewel (wishing stone) VvA 111, 339; DhA i.198; Miln 118; -- sattha the science of the stars, astronomy: one of the 6 Vedic disciplines: see chaḷanga, cp. jotisā.
Jotimant (adj.) [joti+mant, cp. also P. jutimant] luminous, endowed with light or splendour, bright, excellent (in knowledge) Sn 348 (=paññājoti -- sampanna SnA 348).
Jotisā (f.) [=Sk. jyotiṣa (nt.)] astronomy Miln 3.
Joteti [Caus. of jotati] (a) trs. to cause to shine, illuminate, make clear, explain A ii.51=J v.509 (bhāsaye jotaye dhammaŋ Gloss J v.510 katheyya for joteyya=jotaye) It 108; J ii.208; PvA 18. -- (b) intrs. to shine DhA ii.163 (ñāṇajutiyā jotetvā); pp. jotita resplendent PvA 53.
Jhatta [pp. of jhāpeti; cp. ñatta>*jñāpayati] set on fire, consumed, dried up (w. hunger or thirst: parched) combd w. chāta J ii.83; vi.347.
Jhatvā see jhāpeti.
Jhasa (?) a window or opening in general J ii.334.
Jhāna1 (nt.) [from jhāyati,1 BSk. dhyāna. The (popular etym -- ) expln of jhāna is given by Bdhgh at Vism 150 as follows: "ārammaṇ' ûpanijjhānato paccanīka -- jhāpanato vā jhānaŋ," i.e. called jh. from meditation on objects & from burning up anything adverse] literally meditation. But it never means vaguely meditation. It is the technical term for a special religious experience, reached in a certain order of mental states. It was originally divided into four such states. These may be summarized: 1. The mystic, with his mind free from sensuous and worldly ideas, concentrates his thoughts on some special subject (for instance, the impermanence of all things). This he thinks out by attention to the facts, and by reasoning. 2. Then uplifted above attention & reasoning, he experiences joy & ease both of body and mind. 3. Then the bliss passes away, & he becomes suffused with a sense of ease, and 4. he becomes aware of pure lucidity of mind & equanimity of heart. The whole really forms one series of mental states, & the stages might have been fixed at other points in the series. So the Dhamma -- saŋgani makes a second list of five stages, by calling, in the second jhāna, the fading away of observation one stage, & the giving up of sustained thinking another stage (Dhs 167 -- 175). And the Vibhaŋga calls the first jhāna the pañcaŋgika -- jhāna because it, by itself, can be divided into five parts (Vbh 267). The state of mind left after the experience of the four jhānas is described as follows at D i.76: "with his heart thus serene, made pure, translucent, cultured, void of evil, supple, ready to act, firm and imperturbable." It will be seen that there is no suggestion of trance, but rather of an enhanced vitality. In the descriptions of the crises in the religious experiences of Christian saints and mystics, expressions similar to those used in the jhānas are frequent (see F. Heiler Die Buddhistische Versenkung, 1918). Laymen could pass through the four jhānas (S iv.301). The jhānas are only a means, not the end. To imagine that experiencing them was equivalent to Arahantship (and was therefore the end aimed at) is condemned (D i.37 ff.) as a deadly heresy. In late Pali we find the phrase arūpajjhānā. This is merely a new name for the last four of the eight Vimokkhā, which culminate in trance. It was because they made this the aim of their teaching that Gotama rejected the doctrines of his two teachers. Āḷāra -- Kāḷāma & Uddaka -- Rāmaputta (M i.164 f.). -- The jhānas are discussed in extenso & in various combinations as regards theory & practice at: D i.34 sq.; 73 sq.; S ii. 210 sq.; iv.217 sq., 263 sq.; v.213 sq.; M i.276 sq., 350 sq., 454 sq.; A i.53, 163; ii.126; iii.394 sq.; iv.409 sq.; v.157 sq.; Vin iii.4; Nd2 on Sn 1119 & s.v.; Ps i.97 sq.; ii.169 sq.; Vbh 257 sq.; 263 sq.; 279 sq.; Vism 88, 415. -- They are frequently mentioned either as a set, or singly, when often the set is implied (as in the case of the 4th jh.). Mentioned as jh. 1 -- 4 e. g. at Vin i.104; ii.161 (foll. by sotāpanna, etc.); D ii.156, 186; iii.78, 131, 222; S ii.278 (nikāmalābhin); A ii.36 (id.); iii.354; S iv.299; v.307 sq.; M i.21, 41, 159, 203, 247, 398, 521; ii.15, 37; Sn 69, 156, 985; Dh 372; J i.139; VvA 38; PvA 163. -- Separately: the 1st: A iv.422; v.135; M i.246, 294; Miln 289; 1st -- 3rd: A iii.323; M i.181; 1st & 2nd: M ii.28; 4th: A ii.41; iii.325; v.31; D iii.270; VvA 4. -- See also Mrs. Rh. D. Buddh. Psych. (Quest Series) p. 107 sq.; Dhs. trsl. p. 52 sq.; Index to Saŋyutta N. for more refs.; also Kasiṇa.
-- anuyutta applying oneself to meditation Sn 972; -- anga a constituent of meditation (with ref. to the 4 jhānas) Vism 190. -- kīḷā sporting in the exercise of meditation J iii.45. -- pasuta id. (+dhīra) Sn 709; Dh 181 (cp. DhA iii.226); -- rata fond of meditation S i.53, 122; iv.117; It 40; Sn 212, 503, 1009; Vv 5015; VvA 38; -- vimokkha emancipation reached through jhāna A iii.417; v.34; -- sahagata accompanied by jh. (of paññābala) A i.42.
Jhāna2 (nt.) [from jhāyati2] conflagration, fire D iii.94; J i.347.
Jhānika (adj.) [fr. jhāna1] belonging to the (4) medita- tions Vism 111.
Jhāpaka (adj.) one who sets fire to (cp. jhāpeti), an in- cendiary J iii.71.
Jhāpana (nt.) setting fire to, consumption by fire, in sarīra˚ -- kicca cremation VvA 76.
Jhāpita [pp. jhāpeti] set on fire Miln 47; Vism 76 (˚kāla time of cremation).
Jhāpeti [Caus. of jhāyati2] 1. to set fire to, to burn, to cook Vin iv.265; J i.255, 294; DhA ii.66; PvA 62. -- 2. to destroy, to bring to ruin, to kill (see Kern, Toev., p. 37 sq.) J iii.441 (=ḍahati pīḷeti); VvA 38 (=jhāyati1, connected w. jhāna: to destroy by means of jhāna); inf. jhāpetuŋ J vi.300 (+ghātetuŋ hantuŋ); ger. jhatvā ref. S i.161 (reads chetvā)=Nett 145 (reads jhitvā, with v. l. chetvā). S i.19 (reads chetvā, vv. ll. ghatvā & jhatvā)=J iv.67 (T. jhatvā, v. l. chetvā; expld by kilametvā); S i.41 (v. l. for T. chetvā, Bdhgh says "jhatvā ti vadhitvā"); J ii.262 (+hantvā vadhitvā; expld by kilametvā); vi.299 (+vadhitvā); also jhatvāna J iv.57 (=hantvā). -- pp. jhatta & jhāpita.
Jhāma (adj. -- n.) [jhāyati2] burning, on fire, conflagration, in ˚khetta charcoal -- burner's field J i.238; ii.92; ˚angāra a burning cinder PvA 90. By itself: J i.405; DhA ii.67.
Jhāmaka N. of a plant J vi.537; also in ˚bhatta (?) J ii.288.
Jhāyaka (adj.) one who makes a fire D iii.94.
Jhāyati1 [Sk. dhyāyati, dhī; with dhīra, dhīḥ from didheti shine, perceive; cp. Goth. filu -- deisei cunning, & in meaning cinteti>citta1] to meditate, contemplate, think upon, brood over (c. acc.): search for, hunt after D ii.237 (jhānaŋ); S i.25, 57; A v.323 sq. (+pa,˚ ni,˚ ava˚); Sn 165, 221, 425, 709, 818 (=Nd1 149 pa˚, ni˚, ava˚); Dh 27, 371, 395; J i.67, 410; Vv 5012; Pv iv.166; Miln 66; SnA 320 (aor. jhāyiŋsu thought of). -- pp. jhāyita.
Jhāyati2 [Sk. kṣāyati to burn, kṣāy & kṣī, cp. khara & chārikā] to burn, to be on fire: fig. to be consumed, to waste away, to dry up D i.50 (=jāleti DA i.151); iii.94 (to make a fire); J i.61, 62; Pv i.1110 (jhāyare v. l. BB. for ghāyire); Miln 47; PvA 33 (=pariḍayhati); -- aor. jhāyi DhA ii.240 sq. -- (fig.) Dh 155; J vi.189. -- Caus. jhāpeti. -- Cp. khīyati2.
Jhāyana1 (nt.) [der. fr. jhāyati1] meditating, in ˚sīla the practice of meditation (cp. Sk. dhyānayoga) VvA 38.
Jhāyana2 (nt.) [fr. jhāyati2] cremation, burning Pug A 187.
Jhāyin (adj.) [see jhāyati1 & jhāna] pondering over (c. acc.) intent on: meditative, self -- concentrated, engaged in jhāna -- practice Vin ii.75; S i.46=52; ii.284; M i.334; A i.24; iii.355; iv.426; v.156, 325 sq.; Sn 85 (magga˚), 638, 719, 1009, 1105; It 71, 74, 112; J iv.7; Dh 23, 110, 387 (reminding of jhāyati2, cp. DhA iv.144); Nd2 264; Vv 58; Pv iv.132; Vbh 342. Nd1 226= Nd2 3422=Vism 26 (āpādaka˚).
Jhitvā is reading at Nett 145 for jhatvā (see jhāpeti).
Ñatta (nt.) [nomen agentis from jānāti] the intellectual faculty, intelligence Dh 72 (=DhA ii.73: jānanasabhāva).
Ñatti (f.) [Sk. jñapti, from jñāpayati, caus of jñā] announce- ment, declaration, esp. as t. t. a motion or resolution put at a kammavācā (proceedings at a meeting of the chapter. The usual formula is "esā ñatti; suṇātu me bhante sangho": Vin i.340; iii.150, 173, 228; -- ˚ŋ ṭhapeti to propose a resolution Vin iv.152. -- Vin v.142, 217 (na c' âpi ñatti na ca pana kammavācā). This resolution is also called a ñattikamma: Vin ii.89; iv.152; v.116; A i.99. Two kinds are distinguished, viz. that at which the voting follows directly upon the motion, i. e. a ñatti -- dutiya -- kamma, & that at which the motion is put 3 times, & is then followed (as 4th item) by the decision, i. e. a ñ -- catuttha -- kamma. Both kinds are discussed at Vin i.56, 317 sq.; ii.89; iii.156; iv.152; & passim. Cp. Divy 356: jñapticaturtha. Cp. āṇatti, viññatti.
Ñatvā etc.: see jānāti.
Ñāṇa (nt.) [from jānāti. See also jānana. *genē, as in Gr. gnw_ -- sis (cp. gnostic), gnw/mh; Lat. (co)gnitio; Goth. kunpi; Ogh. kunst; E. knowledge] knowledge, intelligence, insight, conviction, recognition, opp. añāṇa & avijjā, lack of k. or ignorance. -- 1. Ñāṇa in the theory of cognition: it occurs in intensive couple -- compounds with terms of sight as cakkhu (eye) & dassana (sight, view), e. g. in cakkhu -- karaṇa ñāṇa -- karaṇa "opening our eyes & thus producing knowledge" i. e. giving us the eye of knowledge (a mental eye) (see cakkhu, jānāti passati, & cpd. ˚karaṇa): Bhagavā jānaŋ jānāti passaŋ passati cakkhu -- bhūto ñāṇa -- bhūto (=he is one perfected in knowledge) M i.111=Nd2 2353h; natthi hetu natthi paccayo ñāṇāya dassanāya ahetu apaccayo ñāṇaŋ dassanaŋ hoti "through seeing & knowing," i. e. on grounds of definite knowledge arises the sure conviction that where there is no cause there is no consequence S v.126. Cp. also the relation of diṭṭhi to ñāṇa. This implies that all things visible are knowable as well as that all our knowledge is based on empirical grounds; yāvatakaŋ ñeyyaŋ tāvatakaŋ ñāṇaŋ Nd2 2353m; yaŋ ñāṇaŋ taŋ dassanaŋ, yaŋ dassanaŋ taŋ ñāṇaŋ Vin iii.91; ñāṇa+dassana (i. e. full vision) as one of the characteristics of Arahantship: see arahant ii.D. Cp. BSk. jñānadarśana, e. g. AvŚ i.210. -- 2. Scope and character of ñāṇa: ñ. as faculty of understanding is included in paññā (cp. wisdom=perfected knowledge). The latter signifies the spiritual wisdom which embraces the fundamental truths of morality & conviction (such as aniccaŋ anattā dukkhaŋ: Miln 42); whereas ñ. is relative to common experience (see Nd2 2353 under cakkhumā, & on rel. of p. & ñ. Ps i.59 sq.; 118 sq.; ii.189 sq.). -- Perception (saññā) is necessary to the forming of ñāṇa, it precedes it (D i.185); as sure knowledge ñ. is preferable to saddhā (S iv.298); at Vin iii.91 the definition of ñ. is given with tisso vijjā (3 kinds of knowledge); they are specified at Nd2 266 as aṭṭhasamāpatti -- ñāṇa (consisting in the 8 attainments, viz. jhāna & its 4 succeeding developments), pañc' abhiññā˚ (the 5 higher knowledges, see paññā & abhi˚), micchā˚ (false k. or heresy). Three degrees of k. are distinguished at DA i.100, viz. sāvaka -- pāramī -- ñāṇa, paccekabuddha˚, sabbaññuta˚ (highest k. of a relig. student, k. of a wise man, & omniscience). Four objects of k. (as objects of truth or sammādiṭṭhi) are enumd as dhamme ñāṇaŋ, anvaye ñ., paricchede ñ., sammuti ñ. at D iii.226, 277; other four as dukkhe ñ. (dukkha -- ) samudaye ñ., nirodhe ñ., magge ñ. (i. e. the knowledge of the paṭicca -- samuppāda) at D iii.227; Ps i.118; Vbh 235 (= sammādiṭṭhi). Right knowledge (or truth) is contrasted with false k. (micchā -- ñāṇa=micchādiṭṭhi): S v.384; M ii.29; A ii.222; v.327; Vbh 392. <-> 3. Ñāṇa in application: (a) Vin i.35; D ii.155 (opp. pasāda); S i.129 (cittamhi susamāhite ñāṇamhi vuttamānamhi); ii.60 (jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇan ti ñ.: see ñ -- vatthu); A i.219 (on precedence of either samādhi or ñ.); Sn 378, 789, 987 (muddhani ñāṇaŋ tassa na vijjati), 1078 (diṭṭhi, suti, ñ.: doctrine, revelation, personal knowledge, i. e. intelligence; differently expl. at Nd2 266), 1113; Pv iii.51 (Sugatassa ñ. is asādhāraṇaŋ) Ps i.194 sq.; ii.244; Vbh 306 sq. (ñ -- vibhanga), 328 sq. (kammassakataŋ ñ.); Nett 15 sq.; 161 (+ñeyya), 191 (id.). -- (b) ñāṇaŋ hoti or uppajjati knowledge comes to (him) i. e. to reason, to arrive at a conclusion (with iti=that . . .) S ii.124=iii.28 (uppajjati); D iii.278 (id.); A ii.211≈; iv.75; v.195; S iii.154. See also arahant ii.D. -- (c) Var. attributes of ñ.: anuttariya A v.37; aparapaccayā (k. of the non -- effect of causation through lack of cause) S ii.17, 78; iii.135; v.179, 422 sq. (= sammādiṭṭhi), same as ahetu -- ñāṇa S v.126; asādhāraṇa (incomparable, uncommon k.) A iii.441; PvA 197; akuppa D iii.273; ariya A iii.451; pariyodāta S i.198; bhiyyosomatta S iii.112; yathā bhūtaŋ (proper, definite, right k.) (concerning kāya, etc.) S v.144; A iii.420; v.37. -- (d) knowledge of, about or concerning, consisting in or belonging to, is expressed either by loc. or -- ˚ (equal to subj. or obj. gen.). -- (a) with loc.: anuppāde ñ. D iii.214, 274; anvaye D iii.226, 277; kāye D iii.274; khaye D iii.214, 220 (āsavānaŋ cp. M i.23, 183, 348; ii.38), 275; S ii.30; Nett 15; cutûpapāte D iii.111, 220; dukkhe (etc.) D iiii.227; S ii.4; v.8, 430; dhamme D iii.226; S ii.58; nibbāne S ii.124 (cp. iv.86). -- (b) as -- ˚: anāvaraṇa˚ DA i.100; ariya S i.228; A iii.451; khanti Ps i.106; jātissara J i.167; cutûpapāta M i.22, 183, 347; ii.38, etc.; ceto -- pariya D iii.100, & ˚pariyāya S v.160; dibbacakkhu Ps i.114; dhammaṭṭhiti S ii.60, 124; Ps i.50; nibbidā Ps i.195; pubbe -- nivāsânusati M i.22, 248, 347; ii.38, etc.; Buddha˚ Nd2 2353; Ps i.133; ii.31, 195; DA i.100; sabbaññuta Ps i.131 sq.; DA i.99 sq.; PvA 197; sekha S ii.43, 58, 80, & asekha S iii.83. -- (e) aññāṇa wrong k., false view, ignorance, untruth S i.181; ii.92; iii.258 sq.; v.126; A ii.11; Sn 347, 839; Ps i.80; Pug 21; Dhs 390, 1061; see avijjā & micchādiṭṭhi.
-- indriya the faculty of cognition or understanding Dhs 157; -- ûpapanna endowed with k. Sn 1077 (=Nd2 266b ˚upeta); -- karaṇa (adj.) giving (right) understanding, enlightening, in combn w. cakkhukaraṇa (giving (in) -- sight, cp. "your eyes shall be opened and ye shall be knowing good and evil" Gen. 35): kusalavitakkā anandha -- karaṇā cakkhu˚ ñāṇa˚ It 82; f. -- ī (of majjhimā -- paṭipadā) S iv.331; -- cakkhu the eye of k. PvA 166; -- jāla the net of k., in phrase ñāṇajālassa anto paviṭṭha coming within the net, i. e. into the range of one's intelligence or mental eye (clear sight) DhA i.26; ii.37, 58, 96; iii.171, 193; iv.61; VvA 63; -- dassana "knowing and seeing," "clear sight," i. e. perfect knowledge; having a vision of truth, i. e. recognition of truth, philosophy, (right) theory of life, all -- comprising knowledge. Defined as tisso vijjā (see above 2) at Vin iv.26; fully discussed at DA i.220, cp. also def. at Ps ii.244. -- Vin ii.178. (parisuddha˚;+ājīva, dhammadesanā, veyyākaraṇa); iii.90 sq.; v.164, 197; D i.76≈(following after the jhānas as the first step of paññā, see paññā -- sampadā); iii.134, 222 (˚paṭilābha), 288 (˚visuddhi); M i.195 sq.; 202 sq., 482; ii.9, 31; Nett 17, 18, 28; see also vimutti˚; -- dassin one who possesses perfect k. Sn 478; -- patha the path of k. Sn 868; -- phusanā experience, gaining of k. DhA i.230; -- bandhu an associate or friend of k. Sn 911; -- bhūta in comb" w. cakkhubhūta, having become seeing & knowing, i. e. being wise S ii.255; iv.94; A v.226 sq.; -- vatthūni (pl.) the objects or items of (right) knowledge which means k. of the paṭiccasamuppāda or causal connection of phenomena. As 44 (i. e. 4 X 11, all constituents except avijjā, in analogy to the 4 parts of the ariyasaccāni) S ii.56 sq., as 77 (7 X 11) S ii.59 sq.; discussed in extenso at Vbh 306 -- 344 (called ñāṇavatthu); -- vāda talk about (the attainment of supreme) knowledge D iii.13 sq.; A v.42 sq.; -- vippayutta disconnected with k. Dhs 147, 157, 270; -- vimokkha emancipation through k. Ps ii.36, 42; -- visesa distinction of k., superior k. PvA 196; -- sampayutta associated with k. Dhs 1, 147, 157, etc.; Vbh 169 sq., 184, 285 sq., 414 sq.
Ñāṇika (adj.) in pañca˚ having five truths (of samādhi) D iii.278.
Ñāṇin (adj.) knowing, one who is possessed of (right) knowledge S ii.169; A ii.89 (sammā˚); iv.340. -- aññāṇin not knowing, unaware VvA 76.
Ñāta [pp. of jānāti=Gr. gnwto/s, Lat. (g)notus; ajñāta (P. aññāta) = a)/gnwtos= ignotus] known, well -- known; experienced, brought to knowledge, realized. In Nd2 s. v. constantly expl. by tulita tirita vibhūta vibhāvita which series is also used as expln. of diṭṭha & vidita A v.195; J i.266; Sn 343 (+yasassin); Miln 21 (id.). -- aññāta not known, unknown Vin i.209; M i.430; S ii.281; DhA i.208.
Ñātaka [for *ñātika from ñāti] a relation, relative, kins- man Vin ii.194; M ii.67; Dh 43; Sn 263 (=KhA 140: ñāyante amhākaŋ ime ti ñātakā), 296, 579; Pv ii.14 (Minayeff, but Hardy ˚ika); PvA 19, 21, 31, 62, 69; DA i.90.
Ñāti [see janati; cp. Sk. jñāti, Gr. gnwto/s, Lat. cognatus, Goth. knops] a relation, relative (=mātito pitito ca sambandhā PvA 25;=bandhū PvA 86; specialized as ˚sālohitā, see below). Pl. ñātayo (Pv i.43; KhA 209, 214) and ñātī (M ii.73; KhA 210, cp. 213; acc. also ñātī Pv i.67); Sn 141; Dh 139, 204, 288; J ii.353; Pv i.53, 122; ii.313, 67. -- Discussed in detail with regard to its being one of the 10 paḷibodhā at Vism 94.
-- kathā (boastful) talk about relatives D i.7≈ (cp. DA i.90); -- gata coming into (the ties of) relationship J vi.307 (˚gataka ib. 308); -- ghara the paternal home J i.52; -- dhamma the duties of relatives Pv i.512; (=ñātīhi ñātīnaŋ kattabba -- karaṇaŋ PvA 30); -- parivatta the circle of relations D i.61; M i.267; Pug 57≈; -- peta a deceased relation Pv i.54; -- majjhagata (adj.) in the midst of one's relations Pug 29; -- mittā (pl.) friends & relatives Dh 219; J iii.396; Pv i.126; -- vyasana misfortune of relatives (opp. ˚sampada) D iii.235; enum as one of the general misfortunes under dukkha (see Nd2 304F); -- sangha the congregation of kinsmen, the clan A i.152; Sn 589; -- sālohitạ a relation by blood (contrasted with friendship: mittāmaccā Sn p. 104), often with ref. to the deceased: petā ñ -- sālohitā the spirits of deceased blood -- relations M i.33; A v.132, 269; PvA 27, 28; -- sineha the affection of relationship PvA 29; -- hetusampatti a blessing received through the kinsmen PvA 27.
Ñāpeti [Caus. of jānāti, cp. also ñatti] to make known, to explain, to announce J ii.133. Cp. jānāpeti & āṇāpeti.
Ñāya [Sk. nyāya=ni+i] 1. method, truth, system, later =logic: ˚gantha book on logic Dāvs iii.41. -- 2. fitness, right manner, propriety, right conduct, often appld to the "right path" (ariyamagga=ariyañāya Vin i.10) D iii.120; S v.19, 141, 167 sq., 185; A ii.95; iv.426; v.194; Dh i.249; ariya ñ. S ii.68; v.387;= the causal law S v.388;=kalyāṇa -- kusala -- dhammatā A ii.36; used in apposition with dhamma and kusala D ii.151; M ii.181, 197; is replaced herein by sacca S i.240;=Nibbāna at Vism 219, 524; ñ. -- paṭipanna walking in the right path S v.343; A ii.56; iii.212, 286; v.183.
-- Ñū ( -- ññū) (adj. -- suffix) [Sk. -- jña, from jānāti, *gn: cp. P. gū>Sk. ga] knowing, recognizing, acknowledging, in ughaṭita˚, kata˚, kāla˚, khaṇa˚, matta˚, ratta˚, vara˚, vipacita˚, veda˚, sabba˚, etc. (q. v.) -- fem. abstr. ˚ñutā in same combinations.
Ṭan (?) (adv.) part of sound J i.287 (ṭan ti saddo).
˚Ṭha (˚ṭṭha) (adj. -- suffix) [from tiṭṭhati] standing, as opposed to either lying down or moving; located, being based on, founded on (e. g. appa˚ based on little D i.143): see kappa˚ (lasting a k.), kūṭa˚ (immovable), gaha˚ (founding a house, householder), dhamma˚, nava˚, vehāsa˚ (=vihan -- ga). -- (n.) a stand i. e. a place for: goṭṭha a stable.
Ṭhapana (nt.) 1. setting up, placing, founding; establish- ment, arrangement, position Vin v.114; J i.99 (aggha˚ fixing prices); Miln 352 (pāda˚); DA i.294; (=vidhārite); PvA 5 (kulavaŋsa˚). -- 2. letting alone, omission, suspension, in pāṭimokkha˚ Vin ii.241.
Ṭhapanā (f.) 1. arrangement DA i.294. -- 2. application of mind, attention Pug 18, Vism 278 (=appanā).
Ṭhapita [pp. of ṭhapeti] 1. placed, put down; set up, arranged, often simply pleonastic for finite verb (=being): saŋharitvā ṭh. being folded up J i.265 (cp. similar use of gahetvā c. ger.): mukkhe ṭh. J vi.366; ˚sankāra (dustheap) PvA 82; pariccajane ṭh. appointed for the distribution of gifts PvA 124. -- 2. suspended, left over, set aside Vin ii.242 (pāṭimokkha).
Ṭhapeti [Caus. of tiṭṭhati] to place, set up, fix, arrange, establish; appoint to (c. loc.); to place aside, save, put by, leave out Vin ii.32 (pavāraṇaŋ), 191 (ucce & nīce ṭhāne to place high or low), 276 (pavāraṇaŋ); v.193 (uposathaŋ), 196 (give advice); D i.120 (leaving out, discarding); Dh 40 (cittaŋ ṭh. make firm) J i.62, 138, 223, 293 (except); ii.132 (puttaṭṭhāne ṭh. as daughter); J ii.159; vi.365 (putting by); VvA 63 (kasiŋ ṭhapetvā except ploughing); PvA 4, 20 (varaŋ ṭhapetvā denying a wish), 39, 114 (setting up); Miln 13 (ṭhapetvā setting aside, leaving till later). -- inf. ṭhapetuŋ Vin ii.194; PvA 73 (saŋharitvā ṭh. to fold up: cp. ṭhapita); grd. ṭhapetabba J ii.352 (rājaṭṭhāne); PvA 97; & ṭhapaniya (in pañha ṭh. a question to be left standing over, i. e. not to be asked) D iii.229. -- ger. ṭhapetvā (leaving out, setting aside, excepting) also used as prep. c. acc. (before or after the noun): with the omission of, besides, except D i.105 (ṭh. dve); J i.179 (maŋ but for me), 294 (tumhe ṭh.); ii.154 (ekaŋ vaddhaŋ ṭh.); iv.142 (ṭh. maŋ); VvA 100 (ṭh. ekaŋ itthiŋ); PvA 93 (ṭh. maŋ). Cp. BSk. sthāpayitvā "except" AvŚ ii.111. -- Caus. ṭhapāpeti to cause to be set up; to have erected, to put up J i.266; DhA ii.191.
Ṭhāna (ṭṭhāna) (nt.) [Vedic sthāna, sthā, see tiṭṭhati; cp. Sk. sthāman Gr. staqmi/s, Lat. stamen] -- I. Connotation. As one of the 4 iriyāpathā (behaviours) 1. contrasted (a) as standing position with sitting or reclining; (b) as rest with motion; 2. by itself without particular characterization as location.
II. Meanings -- (1) Literal: place, region, locality, abode, part ( -- ˚ of, or belonging to) -- (a) cattāri ṭhānāni dassanīyāni four places (in the career of Buddha) to be visited D ii.140=A ii.120; vāse ṭhāne gamane Sn 40 (expl. by SnA 85 as mahā -- upaṭṭhāna -- sankhāte ṭhāne, but may be referred to I. 1 (b)); ṭhānā cāveti to remove from one's place Sn 442; J iv.138; PvA 55 (spot of the body). -- (b) kumbha˚ (the "locality of the pitcher," i. e. the well) q. v.; arañña˚ (part of the forest) J i.253; PvA 32; nivāsana˚ (abode) PvA 76; phāsuka˚ J ii.103; PvA 13; vasana˚ J i.150, 278; VvA 66; virūhana˚ (place for the growing of . . .) PvA 7; vihāra (place of his sojourn) PvA 22; saka˚ (his own abode) J ii.129; PvA 66. -- (c) In this meaning it approaches the metaphorical sense of "condition, state" (see 2 & cp. gati) in: dibbāni ṭhānāni heavenly regions S i.21; tidivaŋ S i.96; saggaŋ ṭh. a happy condition Pv i.13; pitu gata˚ the place where my father went (after death) PvA 38; Yamassa ṭh.=pettivasaya PvA 59. -- (d) In its pregnant sense in combn with accuta & acala it represents the connotation I. 1 (b), i. e. perdurance, constancy, i. e. Nibbāna Vv 514; Dh 225. -- 2. Applied meanings<-> (a) state, condition; also -- ˚ (in sg.) as collective -- abstract suffix in the sense of being, behaviour (corresponding to E. ending hood, ion, or ing), where it resembles abstr. formations in ˚tā & ˚ttaŋ (Sk. tā & tvaŋ), as lahuṭṭhāna=lahutā & collect. formations in ˚ti (Sk. daśati ten -- hood; devatāti godhead, sarvatāti=P. sabbattaŋ comprehensiveness; cp. also Lat. civitātem, juventūtem). -- S i.129 (condition) ii.27 (asabha˚)=M i.69; S iii.57 (atasitāyaŋ fearless state): A ii.118 sq. (four conditions); Ḍh 137 (dasannaŋ aññataraŋ th.˚ nigacchati he undergoes one of the foll. ten conditions, i. e. items of affliction, expld at DhA iii.70 with kāraṇa "labours"), 309 (states=dukkhakāraṇāni DhA iii.482, conditions of suffering or ordeals); hattha -- pasāraṇa<-> -- ṭṭhāna condition of outstretched hands DhA i.298; loc. ṭhāne ( -- ˚) when required, at the occasion of . . . DhA i.89 (hasitabba˚, saŋvega˚, dātuŋ yutta˚); pubbe nibbatta -- ṭṭhānato paṭṭhāya "since the state (or the time) of his former birth" PvA 100. -- vibhūsanaṭṭhāna ornamentation, decoration, things for adornment D i.5; Sn 59 (DA i.77 superficially: ṭhānaŋ vuccati kāraṇaŋ SnA 112 simply vibhūsā eva v -- ṭṭhānaŋ); jūta -- pamāda˚ (gambling & intoxication) D i.6≈ (cp. expl. at KhA 26); gata˚ & āgata˚ (her) going & coming J iii.188; -- pariccāga˚ distribution of gifts PvA 124. -- (b) (part=) attribute, quality, degree: aggasāvaka˚ (degrees of discipleship) VvA 2; esp. in set of 10 attributes, viz. rūpa (etc. 1 -- 5), āyu, vaṇṇa, sukha, yasa, ādhipateyya D iii.146; S iv.275; Pv ii.958, also collectively [see (a)] as dasaṭṭhānaŋ S i.193; out of these are mentioned as 4 attributes āyu, vaṇṇa, sukha, bala at Vv 327; other ten at A v.129 (pāsaŋsāni). <-> (c) (counter -- part=) object ( -- ˚ for), thing; item, point; pl. grounds, ways, respects. With a numeral often=a (five)fold collection of . . . S iv.249 sq. (5 objects or things, cp. Ger. fünferlei); A iii.54 sq. (id.), 60 sq., 71 sq.; etehi tīhi ṭhānehi on these 3 grounds Dh 224; manussā tīhi ṭhānehi bahuŋ puññaŋ pasavanti: kāyena vācāya manasā (in 3 ways, qualities or properties) A 151 sq.; cp. ii.119 sq. (=saŋvutaŋ tīhi ṭhānehi Dh 391); catuhi ṭhānehi in Com. equals catuhi ākārehi or kāraṇehi pāmujjakaraṇaŋ ṭh. (object) Sn 256; ekaccesu ṭhānesu sameti ekaccesu na sameti "I agree in certain points, but not in others" D i.162; kankhaniya˚ doubtful point S iv.350, 399; -- n' atthi aññaŋ ṭhānaŋ no other means, nothing else DhA ii.90; agamanīya˚ something not to be done, not allowed VvA 72; cp. also kamma˚. -- (d) (standpoint=) ground for (assumption) reason, supposition, principle, esp. a sound conclusion, logic, reasonableness (opp. a˚ see 4): garayhaŋ th. āgacchati "he advocates a faulty principle" D i.161; catuhi ṭh. paññāpeti (four arguments) S iii.116; iv.380; ṭhāna -- kusala accomplished in sound reasoning S iii.61 sq. (satta˚); A ii.170 sq. Also with aṭṭhāna -- kusala: see below 4.
III. Adverbial use of some cases acc. ṭhānaŋ: ettakaŋ ṭh. even a little bit DhA i.389. -- abl. ṭhānaso: in combn w. hetuso with reason & cause, causally conditioned [see 2 (d)] S v.304; A iii.417; v.33; Nett 94 (ñāṇa); abs. without moving (see I. 1 (b) & cp. Lat. statim) i. e. without an interval or a cause (of change), at once, immediately, spontaneously, impromptu (cp. cpd.˚ uppatti) S i.193; v.50, 321, 381; Pv i.44 (=khaṇaŋ yeva PvA 19). -- loc. ṭhāne instead= like, as dhītu ṭhāne ṭhapesi he treats her like a daughter VvA 209; puttaṭṭhāne as a son J ii.132.
IV. Contrasted with negation of term (ṭhāna & aṭṭhāna). The meanings in this category are restricted to those mentioned above under 1 [esp. 1 (c)] & 2 (d), viz. the relations of place>not place (or wrong place, also as proper time & wrong time), i. e. somewhere>nowhere, and of possibility>impossibility (truth> falsehood). (a) ṭhānaŋ upagacchati (pathaviyā) to find a (resting) place on the ground, to stay on the ground (by means of the law of attraction and gravitation) Miln 255; opp. na ṭhānaŋ upa˚ to find no place to rest, to go into nothingness Miln 180, 237, 270. -- (b) ṭhānaŋ vijjati there is a reason, it is logically sound, it is possible D i.163, 175; M iii.64; Ps ii.236 sq.; cp. M Vastu ii.448; opp. na etaŋ ṭhānaŋ vijjati it is not possible, feasible, plausible, logically correct Vin ii.284; D i.104, 239; M ii.10; iii.64; Miln 237; Nett 92 sq. -- (c) aṭṭhānaŋ an impossibility Sn 54 (aṭṭhāna, with elision of ŋ); aṭṭhāne at the wrong time J i.256; ṭhāna is that one of the gatis which is accessible to human influence, as regards gifts of relief or sacrifice (this is the pettivisaya), whilst aṭṭhāna applied to the other 4 gatis (see gati) PvA 27 sq. In cpd. ṭhānâṭhāna -- gata it means referring or leading to good & bad places (gatis): of sabbe khayadhammā (i. e. keci saggûpagā keci apāyûpagā) Nett 94. In combn apucchi nipuṇe pañhe ṭhānâṭhānagate (Miln 1) it may mean either questions concerning possibilities & impossibilities or truths & falsehoods, or questions referring to happy & unhappy states (of existence); ṭhānâṭhāna -- ñāṇa is "knowledge of correct & faulty conclusions" Nett 94, cp. Kvu 231 sq.; the same combn occurs with ˚kusala ˚kusalatā "accomplished or skilled (& skill) in understanding correct or faulty conclusions" D iii.212 (one of the ten powers of the Buddha); M iii.64; Dhs 1337, 1338 (trsl. by Mrs. Rh. D. on p. 348 Dhs. trsl. as "skill in affirming or negating causal conjuncture"). In the same sense: ṭhānaŋ ṭhānato pajānāti (& aṭṭhānaŋ aṭṭhānato p.) to draw a logical inference from that which is a proper ground for inference (i. e. which is logical) S v.304; M i.69 sq.=A iii.417; v.33.
-- uppatti arising instantaneously (see ṭhānaso, above III.) VvA 37; J vi.308 (˚kāraṇavindana finding a means right on the spot); -- ka (adj.) on the spot, momentary, spontaneous J vi.304.
Ṭhānīya (adj.) [grd. of tiṭṭhati] standing, having a certain position, founded on or caused by ( -- ˚) Vin ii.194 ( -- nīca˚); A i.264 (chanda -- rāga -- dhamma˚). See also under tiṭṭhati.
Ṭhāyika (adj.) at Miln 201 "one who gains his living or subsists on" (instr.) is doubtful reading.
Ṭhāyin (adj. -- n.) [from tiṭṭhati] standing, being in, being in a state of ( -- ˚), staying with, dependent on (with gen.): pariyuṭṭhaṭṭhāyin "being in a state of one to whom it has arisen," i. e. one who has got the idea of . . . or one who imagines S iii.3 sq.; arūpa -- ṭṭhāyin It 62; Yamassa ṭhāyino being under the rule of Yama Pv i.119.
Ṭhita [pp. of tiṭṭhati=Gr. stato/s, Lat. status, Celt. fossad (firm)] standing, i. e. (see ṭhāna I) either upright (opp. nisinna, etc.), or immovable, or being, behaving in general. In the latter function often (with ger.) pleonastic for finite verb (cp. ṭhapita); -- resting in, abiding in ( -- ˚ or with loc.); of time: lasting, enduring; fig. steadfast, firm, controlled: amissīkatam ev' assa cittaŋ hoti, ṭhitaŋ ānejjappattaŋ A iii.377=iv.404; tassa ṭhito va kāyo hoti thitaŋ cittaŋ (firm, unshaken) S v.74=Nd2 475 B2; -- D i.135 (khema˚); A i.152; Sn 250 (dhamme); It 116 sq. (ṭh. caranto nisinna sayāna); J i.167; 279; iii.53. -- with ger.: nahātvā ṭh. & nivāsetvā ṭh. (after bathing & dressing) J i.265; dārakaŋ gahetvā th. J vi.336. Cp. saṇ˚.
-- atta self -- controlled, composed, steadfast D i.57 (+gatatta yatatta; expl. at DA i.168 by suppatiṭṭhitacitto); S i.48; iii.46; A ii.5; iv.93, 428; Sn 370 (+parinibbuta), 359 (id. expl. at SnA 359 by lokadhammehi akampaneyya -- citta); Pug 62; -- kappin (adj.) (for kappa -- *ṭhitin) standing or waiting a whole kappa Pug 13 (expl. at Pug A 187 by ṭhitakappo assa atthī ti; kappaŋ ṭhapetuŋ samattho ti attho); -- citta (adj.) of controlled heart (=˚atta) D ii.157≈; -- dhamma (adj.) everlasting, eternal (of mahāsamudda, the great ocean) Vin ii.237= A iv.198.
Ṭhitaka (adj.)=ṭhita in meaning of standing, standing up, erect Vin ii.165; D ii.17=iii.143; M ii.65; J i.53, 62; VvA 64.
Ṭhitatā (f.) the fact of standing or being founded on ( -- ˚) S ii.25=A i.286 (dhamma˚+dhamma -- niyāmatā).
Ṭhitatta (nt.) standing, being placed; being appointed to, appointment J i.124.
Ṭhiti (f.) [from tiṭṭhati Sk. sthiti, Gr. sta/sis, Lat. statio (cp. stationary), Ohg. stat, Ags. stede] state (as opposed to becoming), stability, steadfastness; duration, continuance, immobility; persistence, keeping up (of: c. gen.); condition of ( -- ˚) relation S ii.11; iii.31; iv.14, 104, 228 sq., A v.96; Vism 32 (kāyassa); in jhāna: S iii.264, 269 sq., saddhammassa (prolongation of) S ii. 225; A i.59; ii.148; iii.177 (always with asammosa & anantaradhāna), cp. M ii.26 sq.; -- dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇa (state or condition of) S ii.124; Ps i.50 sq. -- n' atthi dhuvaŋ ṭhiti: the duration is not for long M ii.64 =Dh 147=Th 1, 769=VvA 77, cp. Th 2, 343 (=ThA 241); Sn 1114 (viññāṇa˚) PvA 198 (position, constellation), 199 (jīvita˚ as remainder of life, cp. ṭhitakappin); Dhs 11≈(cittassa), 19≈(+āyu=subsistence).
-- bhāgiya connected with duration, enduring, lasting, permanent (only appl. to samādhi) D iii.277; A iii.427; Nett 77; cp. samādhissa ṭhitikusala "one who is accomplished in lasting concentration" A iii.311, 427; iv.34.
Ṭhiṭika (adj.) [Der. fr. ṭhiti] standing, lasting, enduring; existing, living on ( -- ˚), e. g. āhāra˚ dependent on food Kh iii. (see āhāra); nt. adv. ṭhitikaŋ constantly VvA 75.
Ṭhīyati see patiṭṭhīyati.
Ḍaŋsa [see ḍasati] a yellow fly, gadfly (orig. "the bite") Nd2 268 (=pingala -- makkhika, same at J iii.263 & SnA 101); usually in combn with other biting or stinging sensations, as ˚siriŋsapa Sn 52, & freq. in cpd. ḍaŋsa -- makasa -- vāt' ātapa -- siriŋsapa -- samphassa M i.10= A ii.117, 143=iii.163; A iii.388; v.15; Vin i.3; Nd2 s. v. (enumd under var. kinds of dukkhā); Vism 31 (here expld as ḍaŋsana -- makkhikā or andha -- makkhikā).
Ḍaṭṭha [pp. of daŋśati or dasati to bite] bitten PvA 144.
Ḍasati (& ḍaŋsati) [cp. Sk. da ati & daŋśati, Gr. da/knw, Ohg. zanga, Ags. tonge, E. tong] to bite (esp. of flies, snakes, scorpions, etc.), pres. ḍasati M i.519; pot. ḍaseyya M i.133; A iii.101=iv.320 (where ḍaŋs˚) & ḍaŋseyya A iii.306; ppr. ḍasamāna J i.265 (gīvāya); fut. ḍaŋsayissāmi J vi.193 (v. l. ḍass˚); aor. aḍaŋsi Vv 808 (=Sk. adānkṣīt), ḍaŋsi PvA 62 & ḍasi J i.502; DhA ii.258; inf. ḍasituŋ J i.265; ger. ḍasitvā J i.222; ii.102; iii.52, 538; DhA i.358. -- Pp. daṭṭha; cp. also dāṭhā & saṇḍāsa.
Ḍahati (& dahati) [Sk. dahati, pp. dagdha, cp. dāha, nidāgha (summer heat); Gr. te/fra ashes, Lat. favilla (glowing) cinders, Goth. dags, Ger. tag. E. day=hot time] to burn (trs.) consume, torment M i.365; ii.73; A v.110; J ii.44 (aor. 3 sg. med. adaḍḍha=Sk. adagdha); Dh 31, 71, 140; Miln 45, 112 (cauterize). Pp. daḍḍha -- Pass. ḍayhati S i.188 (kāmarāgena ḍayhāmi cittam me pariḍayhati); ib. (mahārāga: mā ḍayhittho punappunaŋ) M ii.73; S iii.150 (mahāpaṭhavī ḍayhati vinassati na bhavati) esp. in ppr. ḍayhamāna consumed with or by, burning, glowing Dh 371; It 23 (˚ena kāyena & cetasā Pv i.1110, 122; ii.23) (of a corpse being cremated); PvA 63, 152 (vippaṭisārena: consumed by remorse). See also similes J.P.T.S. 1907, 90. Cp. uḍ˚.
Ḍāka (m. nt.) [Sk. sāka (nt.) on ś>ḍ cp. Sk. sākinī> dākinī] green food, eatable herbs, vegetable Vin i.246 (˚rasa), 248; Th 2, 1; Vv 206 (v. l. sāka); VvA 99 (=taṇḍuleyyakādi -- sākavyañjana).
Ḍāha [Sk. dāha, see ḍahati] burning, glow, heat D i.10 (disā˚ sky -- glow= zodiacal light?); M i.244; PvA 62; Miln 325. Sometimes spelt dāha, e. g. A i.178 (aggi˚); Sdhp 201 (id.); -- dava˚ a jungle fire Vin ii.138; J i.461.
Ḍeti [Sk. *ḍayate=dīyati; ḍayana flying. The Dhtp gives the root as ḍī or ḷī with def. of "ākāsa -- gamana"] to fly; only in simile "seyyathā pakkhī sakuṇo yena yen' eva ḍeti . . ." D i.71=M i.180, 269=A ii.209= Pug 58; J v.417. Cp. dayati & dīyati, also uḍḍeti.
-- T -- as composition -- consonant (see Müller pp. 62, 63, on euphonic cons.) especially with agge (after, from), in ajja -- t -- agge, tama -- t -- agge, dahara -- t -- agge A v.300; cp. deva ta -- t -- uttari for tad -- uttari A iii.287, 314, 316.
Ta˚ [Vedic tad, etc.; Gr. to/n th/n to/; Lat. is -- te, tālis, etc.; Lith. tás tā; Goth. pata; Ohg. etc. daz; E. that] base of demonstr. pron. for nt., in oblique cases of m. & f., & in demonstr. adv. of place & time (see also sa). <-> 1. Cases: nom. sg. nt. tad (older) Vin i.83; Sn 1052; Dh 326; Miln 25 & taŋ (cp. yaŋ, kiŋ) Sn 1037, 1050; J iii.26; acc. m. taŋ J ii.158, f. taŋ J vi.368; gen. tassa, f. tassā (Sn 22, 110; J i.151); instr. tena, f. tāya (J iii. 188); abl. tasmā (J i.167); tamhā Sn 291, 1138; (J iii.26) & tato (usually as adv.) (Sn 390); loc. tasmiŋ (J i.278), tamhi (Dh 117); tahiŋ (adv.) (Pv i.57) & tahaŋ (adv.) (J i.384; VvA 36); pl. nom. m. te (J ii.129), f. tā (J ii.127), nt. tāni (Sn 669, 845); gen. tesaŋ, f. tāsaŋ (Sn 916); instr. tehi, f. tāhi (J ii.128); loc. tesu, f. tāsu (Sn 670). -- In composition (Sandhi) both tad -- & taŋ -- are used with consecutive phonetic changes (assimilation), viz. (a) tad˚: (a) in subst. function: tadagge henceforth D i.93 taduṭṭhāya DhA iii.344; tadūpiya (cp. Trenckner, Notes 77, 78=tadopya (see discussion under opeti), but cp. Sk. tadrūpa Divy 543 & tatrupāya. It is simply tad -- upa -- ka, the adj.<-> positive of upa, of which the compar. -- superlative is upama, meaning like this, i. e. of this or the same kind. Also spelt tadūpikā (f.) (at J ii.160) agreeing with, agreeable, pleasant Miln 9; tadatthaŋ to such purpose SnA 565. -- With assimilation: taccarita; tapparāyaṇa Sn 1114; tappoṇa (=tad -- pra -- ava -- nata) see taccarita; tabbisaya (various) PvA 73; tabbiparīta (different) Vism 290; DhA iii.275; tabbiparītatāya in contrast to that Vism 450. -- (b) as crude form (not nt.) originally only in acc. (nt.) in adj. function like tad -- ahan this day, then felt as euphonic d, esp. in forms where similarly the euphonic t is used (ajja -- t -- agge). Hence ta -- is abstracted as a crude (adverbial) form used like any other root in composition. Thus: tad -- ah -- uposathe on this day's fast -- day=to -- day (or that day) being Sunday D i.47; Sn p. 139 (expld as tam -- ah -- uposathe, uposatha -- divase ti at SnA 502); tadahe on the same day PvA 46; tadahū (id.) J v.215 (=tasmiŋ chaṇa -- divase). tad -- anga for certain, surely, categorical (orig. concerning this cp. kimanga), in tadanga -- nibbuta S iii.43; tadanga -- samatikkama Nd2 203; tadanga -- vikkhambhana -- samuccheda Vism 410; tadanga -- pahāna DhsA 351; SnA 8; tadangena A iv.411. -- (b) tan˚: (a) as subst.: tammaya (equal to this, up to this) Sn 846 (=tapparāyana Nd2 206); A i.150. -- (b) Derived from acc. use (like a b) as adj. is tankhaṇikā (fr. taŋ khaṇaŋ) Vin iii.140 (=muhuttikā). -- (g) a reduced form of taŋ is to be found as ta˚ in the same origin & application as ta -- d -- (under a b) in combn ta -- y -- idaŋ (for taŋidaŋ>taŋ -- idaŋ>ta -- idaŋ>ta -- y -- idaŋ) where y. takes the place of the euphonic consonant. Cp. in application also Gr. tou_to & tau_ta, used adverbially as therefore (orig. just that) Sn 1077; Pv i.33; PvA 2, 16 (=taŋ idaŋ), 76. The same ta˚ is to be seen in tāhaŋ Vv 8315 (=taŋ -- ahaŋ), & not to be confused with tāhaŋ=te ahaŋ (see tvaŋ). -- A similar combn is taŋyathā Miln 1 (this is how, thus, as follows) which is the Sk. form for the usual P. seyyathā (instead of ta -- (y) -- yathā, like ta -- y -- idaŋ); cp. Trenckner, P.M. p. 75. -- A sporadic form for tad is tadaŋ Sn p. 147 (even that, just that; for tathaŋ?). -- II. Application: 1. ta˚ refers or points back to somebody or something just mentioned or under discussion (like Gr. ou(=tos, Lat. hic, Fr. ci in voici, cet homme -- ci, etc.): this, that, just this (or that), even this (or these). In this sense combd with api: te c' âpi (even these) Sn 1058. It is also used to indicate something immediately following the statement of the speaker (cp. Gr. o(/de, E. thus): this now, esp. in adv. use (see below); taŋ kiŋ maññasi D i.60; yam etaŋ pañhaŋ apucchi Ajita taŋ vadāmi te: Sn 1037; taŋ te pavakkhāmi (this now shall I tell you:) Sn 1050; tesaŋ Buddho vyākāsi (to those just mentioned answered B.) Sn 1127; te tositā (and they, pleased . . .) ib. 1128. -- 2. Correlative use: (a) in rel. sentences with ya˚ (preceding ta˚): yaŋ ahaŋ jānāmi taŋ tvaŋ jānāsi "what I know (that) you know" D i.88; yo nerayikānaŋ sattānaŋ āhāro tena so yāpeti "he lives on that food which is (characteristic) of the beings in N.; or: whichever is the food of the N. beings, on this he lives" PvA 27. -- (b) elliptical (with omission of the verb to be) yaŋ taŋ=that which (there is), what (is), whatever, used like an adj.; ye te those who, i. e. all (these), whatever: ye pana te manussā saddhā . . . te evam ahaŋsu . . . "all those people who were full of faith said" Vin ii.195; yena tena upāyena gaṇha "catch him by whatever means (you like)," i. e. by all means J ii.159; yaŋ taŋ kayirā "whatever he may do" Dh 42. -- 3. Distributive and iterative use (cp. Lat. quisquis, etc.): . . . taŋ taŋ this & that, i. e. each one; yaŋ yaŋ passati taŋ taŋ pucchati whomsoever he sees (each one) he asks PvA 38; yaŋ yaŋ manaso piyaŋ taŋ taŋ gahetvā whatever . . . (all) that PvA 77; yo yo yaŋ yaŋ icchati tassa tassa taŋ taŋ adāsi "whatever anybody wished he gave to him" PvA 113. So with adv. of ta˚: tattha tattha here & there (freq.); tahaŋ tahaŋ id. J i.384; VvA 36, 187; tato tato Sn 390. -- (b) the same in disjunctivecomparative sense: taŋ . . . taŋ is this so & is this so (too)=the same as, viz. taŋ jīvaŋ taŋ sarīraŋ is the soul the same as the body (opp. aññaŋ j. a. s.) A v.193, etc. (see jīva). -- 4. Adverbial use of some cases (locala, temporalb, & modalc): acc. taŋ (a) there (to): tad avasari he withdrew there D. ii.126, 156; (b) taŋ enaŋ at once, presently (=tāvad -- eva) Vin i.127 (cp. Ved. enā); (c) therefore (cp. kiŋ wherefore, why), that is why, now, then: S ii.17; M i.487; Sn 1110; Pv i.23 (=tasmā PvA 11 & 103); ii.716; cp. taŋ kissa hetu Nd2 on jhāna. -- gen. tassa (c) therefore A iv.333. <-> instr. tena (a) there (direction=there to), always in correl. with yena: where -- there, or in whatever direction, here & there. Freq. in formula denoting approach to a place (often unnecessary to translate); e. g. yena Jīvakassa ambavanaŋ tena pāyāsi: where the Mangogrove of J. was, there he went=he went to the M. of J. D i.49; yena Gotamo ten' upasankama go where G. is D i.88; yena āvasathâgāraŋ ten' upasankami D ii.85 etc.; yena vā tena vā palāyanti they run here & there A ii.33; (c) so then, now then, therefore, thus (often with hi) J i.151, 279; PvA 60; Miln 23; tena hi D ii.2; J i.266; iii.188; Miln 19. -- abl. tasmā (c) out of this reason, therefore Sn 1051, 1104; Nd2 279 (=taŋ kāraṇaŋ); PvA 11, 103; tato (a) from there, thence Pv i.123; (b) then, hereafter PvA 39. -- loc. tahiŋ (a) there (over there>beyond) Pv i.57; (c) =therefore PvA 25; tahaŋ (a) there; usually repeated: see above II. 3 (a). -- See also tattha, tathā, tadā, tādi, etc.
Taka a kind of medicinal gum, enumerated with two varieties, viz. takapattī & takapaṇṇī under jatūni bhesajjāni at Vin i.201.
Takka1 [Sk. tarka doubt; science of logic (lit. "turning & twisting") *treik, cp. Lat. tricae, intricare (to "trick," puzzle), & also Sk. tarku bobbin, spindle, Lat. torqueo (torture, turn)] doubt; a doubtful view (often= diṭṭhi, appl. like sammā˚, micchā -- diṭṭhi), hair -- splitting reasoning, sophistry (= itihītihaŋ Nd2 151). Opp. to takka (=micchā -- sankappo Vbh 86, 356) is dhammatakka right thought (:vuccati sammā -- sankappo Nd2 318; cp. Dhs 7, 298), D i.16 (˚pariyāhata); M i.68 (id.); Sn 209 (˚ŋ pahāya na upeti sankhaŋ) 885 (doubt), 886; Dhs 7, 21, 298 (+vitakka, trsl. as "ratiocination" by Mrs. Rh. D.); Vbh 86, 237 (sammā˚) 356; Vism 189. See also vitakka.
-- āgama the way of (right) thought, the discipline of correct reasoning Dāvs v.22; -- âvacara as neg. atakkâvacarâ in phrase dhammā gambhīrā duddasā a˚ nipuṇā (views, etc.) deep, difficult to know, beyond logic (or sophistry: i. e. not accessible to doubt?), profound Vin i.4=D i.12=S i.136=M i.487. Gogerley trsl. "unattainable by reasoning," Andersen "being beyond the sphere of thought"; -- āsaya room for doubt Sn 972; -- gahaṇa the thicket of doubt or sophistry J i.97; -- vaḍḍhana increasing, furthering doubt or wrong ideas Sn 1084 (see Nd2 269); -- hetu ground for doubt (or reasoning?) A ii.193=Nd2 151.
Takka2 (nt.) [Should it not belong to the same root as takka1?] buttermilk (with 1/4 water), included in the five products from a cow (pañca gorasā) at Vin i.244; made by churning dadhi Miln 173; J i.340; ii.363; DhA ii.68 (takkâdi -- ambila).
Takkaṇa (nt.) thought, representation (of: -- ˚) J i.68 (ussāvabindu˚).
Takkara1 (=tat -- kara) a doer thereof D i.235, M i.68; Dh 19.
Takkara2 a robber, a thief J iv.432.
Takkaḷa (nt.) a bulbous plant, a tuberose J iv.46, 371 (biḷāli˚, expl. at 373 by takkala -- kanda)=vi.578.
Takkārī (f.) the tree Sesbania Aegyptiaca (a kind of acacia) Th 2, 297 (=dālika -- laṭṭhi ThA 226).
Takkika (adj.) [fr. takka1] doubting, having wrong views, foolish; m. a sophist, a fool Ud 73; J i.97; Miln 248.
Takkin (adj. -- n.) [fr. takka1] thinking, reasoning, esp. sceptically; a sceptic D i.16≈(takkī vīmaŋsī); M i.520; DA i.106 (=takketvā vitakketvā diṭṭhi -- gāhino etaŋ adhivacanaŋ), cp. pp. 114, 115 (takki -- vāda).
Takketi [Denom. of tarka] to think, reflect, reason, argue DA i.106; DhsA 142. -- attānaŋ t. to have self -- confidence, to trust oneself J i.273, 396, 468; iii.233.
Takkoṭaka [is reading correct?] a kind of insect or worm Vism 258. Reading at id. p. KhA 58 is kakkoṭaka.
Takkola [Sk. kakkola & takkola] Bdellium, a perfume made from the berry of the kakkola plant J i.291; also as Npl. at Miln 359 (the Takola of Ptolemy; perhaps = Sk. karkoṭa: Trenckner, Notes, p. 59).
Tagara (nt.) the shrub Tabernaemontana coronaria, and a fragrant powder or perfume obtained from it, incense Vin i.203; It 68 (=Udānavarga p. 112, No. 8); Dh 54, 55, 56 (candana+); J iv.286; vi.100 (the shrub) 173 (id.); Miln 338; Dāvs v.50; DhA i.422 (tagara -- mallikā two kinds of gandhā).
Taggaruka=tad+garuka, see taccarita.
Taggha [tad+gha, cp. in -- gha & Lat. ec -- ce ego -- met, Gr. e)gw/ -- ge] affirmative particle ("ekaŋsena" DA i.236; ekaŋsa -- vacana J v.66; ekaŋse nipāta J v.307): truly, surely, there now! Vin ii.126, 297; D i.85; M i.207, 463; iii.179; J v.65 (v. l. tagghā); Sn p. 87.
Taca (& taco nt.) [Vedic tvak (f.), gen. tvacaḥ] 1. bark. - 2. skin, hide (similar to camma, denoting the thick, outer skin, as contrasted with chavi, thin skin, see chavi & cp. J i.146). -- 1. bark: M i.198, 434, 488; A v.5. -- 2. skin: often used together with nahāru & aṭṭhi (tendons & bones), to denote the outer appearance (framework) of the body, or that which is most conspicuous in emaciation: A i.50=Sdhp. 46; tacamaŋsâvalepana (+aṭṭhī nahārusaŋyutta) Sn 194= J i.146 (where ˚vilepana); SnA 247; aṭṭhi -- taca -- mattâvasesasarīra "nothing but skin & bones" PvA 201. <-> Of the cast -- off skin of a snake: urago va jiṇṇaŋ tacaŋ jahāti Sn 1, same simile Pv i.121 (=nimmoka PvA 63). -- kañcanasannibha -- taca (adj.) of golden -- coloured skin (a sign of beauty) Sn 551; Vv 302=323; Miln 75; VvA 9. -- valita -- tacatā a condition of wrinkled skin (as sign of age) Nd2 252≈; Kh iii.; KhA 45; Sdhp 102.
-- gandha the scent of bark Dhs 625; -- pañcaka -- kammaṭṭhāna the fivefold "body is skin," etc, subject of kammaṭṭhāna -- practice. This refers to the satipaṭṭhānā (kāye kāy' ânupassanā:) see kāya I. (a) of which the first deals with the anupassanā (viewing) of the body as consisting of the five (dermatic) constituents of kesā lomā nakhā dantā, taco (hair of head, other hair, nails, teeth, skin or epidermis: see Kh iii.). It occurs in formula (inducing a person to take up the life of a bhikkhu): taca -- p -- kammaṭṭhānaŋ ācikkhitvā taŋ pabbājesi J i.116; DhA i.243; ii.87, 140, 242. Cp. also Vism 353; DhA ii.88; SnA 246, 247; -- pariyonaddha with wrinkled (shrivelled) skin (of Petas: as sign of thirst) PvA 172; -- rasa the taste of bark Dhs 629, -- sāra (a) (even) the best (bark, i. e.) tree S i.70=90= It 45; -- (b) a (rope of) strong fibre J iii.204 (=veṇudaṇḍaka).
Taccarita (adj.) in combn with tabbahula taggaruka tanninna tappoṇa tappabhāra freq. as formula, expressing: converging to this end, bent thereon, striving towards this (aim): Nd2 under tad. The same combn with Nibbāna -- ninna, N. -- poṇa, N. -- pabhāra freq. (see Nibbāna).
Taccha1 [Vedic takṣan, cp. taṣṭṛ, to takṣati (see taccheti), Lat. textor, Gr. te/ktwn carpenter (cp. architect), te/xnh art] a carpenter, usually as ˚ka: otherwise only in cpd. ˚sūkara the carpenter -- pig (=a boar, so called from felling trees), title & hero of Jātaka No. 492 (iv.342 sq.). Cp. vaḍḍhakin.
Taccha2 (adj.) [Der. fr. tathā+ya=tath -- ya "as it is," Sk. tathya] true, real, justified, usually in combn w. bhūta. bhūta taccha tatha, D i.190 (paṭipadā: the only true & real path) S v.229 (dhamma; text has tathā, v. l. tathaŋ better); as bhūta t. dhammika (well founded and just) D i.230. bhūta+taccha: A ii.100=Pug 50; VvA 72. -- yathā tacchaŋ according to truth Sn 1096. which is interpreted by Nd2 270: tacchaŋ vuccati amataŋ Nibbānaŋ, etc. -- (nt.) taccha a truth Sn 327. -- ataccha false, unreal, unfounded; a lie, a falsehood D i.3 (abhūta+); VvA 72 (=musā).
Tacchaka=taccha1. (a) a carpenter Dh 80 (cp. DhA ii.147); Miln 413. magga˚ a road -- builder J vi.348. -- (b)=taccha -- sūkara J iv.350. -- (c) a class of Nāgas D ii.258. -- f. tacchikā a woman of low social standing (=veṇī, bamboo -- worker) J v.306.
Tacchati [fr. taccha1, cp. taccheti] to build, construct; maggaŋ t. to construct or repair a road J vi.348.
Taccheti [probably a denom. fr. taccha1=Lat. texo to weave (orig. to plait, work together, work artistically), cp. Sk. taṣṭṛ architect =Lat. textor; Sk. takṣan, etc., Gr. te/xnh craft, handiwork (cp. technique), Ohg. dehsa hatchet. Cp. also orig. meaning of karoti & kamma] to do wood -- work, to square, frame, chip J i.201; Miln 372, 383.
Tajja [tad+ya, cp. Sk. tadīya] "this like," belonging to this, founded on this or that; on the ground of this (or these), appropriate, suitable; esp. in combn with vāyāma (a suitable effort as "causa movens") A i.207; Miln 53. Also with reference to sense -- impressions, etc. denoting the complemental sensation S iv.215; M i. 190, 191; Dhs 3 -- 6 (cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 6 & Com. expl. anucchavika). -- PvA 203 (tajjassa pāpassa katattā: by the doing of such evil, v. l. SS tassajjassa, may be a contraction of tādiyassa otherwise tādisassa).
Note. The expln of Kern, Toev. ii.87 (tajja=tad+ja "arising from this") is syntactically impossible.
Tajjanā (f.) [from tajjeti] threat, menace J ii.169; Vv 509; VvA 212 (bhayasantajjana).
Tajjaniya [grd. of tajjeti] to be blamed or censured Vism 115 (a˚); (n.) censure, blame, scorn, rebuke. M 50th Sta; Miln 365. As t. t. ˚kamma one of the sangha -- kammas: Vin i.49, 53, 143 sq., 325; ii.3 sq., 226, 230; A i.99.
Tajjārī a linear measure, equal to 36 aṇu's and of which 36 form one rathareṇu VbhA 343; cp. Abhp 194 (tajjarī).
Tajjita [pp. of tajjeti] threatened, frightened, scared; spurred or moved by ( -- ˚) D i.141 (daṇḍa˚, bhaya˚); Dh 188 (bhaya˚); Pug 56. Esp. in combn maraṇabhaya˚ moved by the fear of death J i.150, 223; PvA 216.
Tajjeti [Caus. of tarjati, to frighten. Cp. Gr. ta/rbos fright, fear, tarbe/w; Lat. torvus wild, frightful] to frighten, threaten; curse, rail against J i.157, 158; PvA 55. <-> Pp. tajjita. -- Caus. tajjāpeti to cause to threaten, to accuse PvA 23 (=paribhāsāpeti).
Taṭa [*t&lcircle;, see tala & cp. tālu, also Lat. tellus] declivity or side of a hill, precipice; side of a river or well, a bank J i.232, 303; ii.315 (udapāna˚); iv.141; SnA 519, DhA i.73 (papāta˚). See also talāka.
Taṭataṭāyati [Onomatopoetic, to make a sound like taṭ- taṭ. Root *k&lcircle; (on ṭ for I̊ cp. taṭa for tala) to grind one's teeth, to be in a frenzy. Cp. ciṭiciṭāyāti. See note on gala and kiṇakiṇāyati] to rattle, shake, clatter; to grind or gnash one's teeth; to fizz. Usually said of people in frenzy or fury (in ppr. ˚yanto or ˚yamāna): J i.347 (rosena) 439 (kodhena); ii.277 (of a bhikkhu kodhana "boiling with rage" like a "uddhane pakkhitta -- loṇaŋ viya"); the latter trope also at DhA iv.176; DhA i.370 (aggimhi pakkhitta -- loṇasakkharā viya rosena t.); iii.328 (vātâhata -- tālapaṇṇaŋ viya); VvA 47, 121 (of a kodhâbhibhūto; v. l. kaṭakaṭāyamāna), 206 (+akkosati paribhāsati), 256. Cp. also kaṭakaṭāyati & karakarā.
Taṭṭaka [Etym. unknown] a bowl for holding food, a flat bowl, porringer, salver J iii.10 (suvaṇṇa˚), 97, 121, 538; iv.281. According to Kern, Toev. s. v. taken into Tamil as taṭṭaŋ, cp. also Av. taśta. Morris (J.P.T.S. 1884, 80) compares Marathi tasta (ewer).
Taṭṭikā (f.) [cp. kaṭaka] a (straw) mat Vin iv.40 (Bdhgh on this: teṭṭikaŋ (sic) nāma tālapaṇṇehi vā vākehi vā katataṭṭikā, p. 357); J i.141 (v. l. taddhika); Vism 97.
Taṇḍula (*Sk. taṇḍula: dialectical] rice -- grain, rice husked & ready for boiling; freq. combd with tila (q. v.) in mentioning of offerings, presentations, etc.: loṇaŋ telaŋ taṇḍulaŋ khādaniyaŋ sakaṭesu āropetvā Vin i.220, 238, 243, 249; talitaṇḍulâdayo J iii.53; PvA 105. -- Vin i.244; A i.130; J i.255; iii.55, 425 (taṇḍulāni metri causa); vi.365 (mūla˚ coarse r., majjhima˚ medium r., kaṇikā the finest grain); Sn 295; Pug 32; DhA i.395 (sāli -- taṇḍula husked rice); DA i.93. Cp. ut˚.
-- ammaṇa a measure (handful?) of rice J ii.436. -- dona a rice -- vat or rice -- bowl DhA iv.15; -- pāladvārā "doors (i. e. house) of the rice -- guard" Npl. M ii.185; -- muṭṭhi a handful of rice PvA 131; -- homa an oblation of rice D i.9.
Taṇḍuleyyaka [cp. Sk. taṇḍulīya] the plant Amaranthus polygonoides VvA 99 (enumd amongst various kinds of ḍāka).
Taṇhā (f.) [Sk. tṛṣṇā, besides tarśa (m.) & ṭṛṣ (f.)=Av. tarśna thirst, Gr. tarsi/a dryness, Goth. paúrsus, Ohg. durst, E. drought & thirst; to *ters to be, or to make dry in Gr. te/rsomai, Lat. torreo to roast, Goth. gapaírsan, Ohg. derren. -- Another form of t. is tasiṇā] lit. drought, thirst; fig. craving, hunger for, excitement, the fever of unsatisfied longing (c. loc.: kabaḷinkāre āhāre "thirst" for solid food S ii.101 sq.; cīvare piṇḍapāte taṇhā= greed for Sn 339). Oppd to peace of mind (upekhā, santi). -- A. Literal meaning: khudāya taṇhāya ca khajjamānā tormented by hunger & thirst Pv ii.15 (= pipāsāya PvA 69). -- B. In its secondary meaning: taṇhā is a state of mind that leads to rebirth. Plato puts a similar idea into the mouth of Socrates (Phaedo 458, 9). Neither the Greek nor the Indian thinker has thought it necessary to explain how this effect is produced. In the Chain of Causation (D ii. 34) we are told how Taṇhā arises -- when the sense organs come into contact with the outside world there follow sensation and feeling, & these (if, as elsewhere stated, there is no mastery over them) result in Taṇhā. In the First Proclamation (S v.420 ff.; Vin i.10) it is said that Taṇhā, the source of sorrow, must be rooted out by the way there laid down, that is by the Aryan Path. Only then can the ideal life be lived. Just as physical thirst arises of itself, and must be assuaged, got rid of, or the body dies; so the mental "thirst," arising from without, becomes a craving that must be rooted out, quite got rid of, or there can be no Nibbāna. The figure is a strong one, and the word Taṇhā is found mainly in poetry, or in prose passages charged with religious emotion. It is rarely used in the philosophy or the psychology. Thus in the long Enumeration of Qualities (Dhs), Taṇhā occurs in one only out of the 1,366 sections (Dhs 1059), & then only as one of many subordinate phases of lobha. Taṇhā binds a man to the chain of Saŋsāra, of being reborn & dying again & again (2b) until Arahantship or Nibbāna is attained, taṇhā destroyed, & the cause alike of sorrow and of future births removed (2c). In this sense Nibbāna is identical with "sabbupadhi -- paṭinissaggo taṇhakkhayo virāgo nirodho" (see Nibbāna). -- 1. Systematizations: The 3 aims of t. kāma˚, bhava˚, vibhava˚, that is craving for sensuous pleasure, for rebirth (anywhere, but especially in heaven), or for no rebirth; cp. Vibhava. These three aims are mentioned already in the First Proclamation (S v.420; Vin i.10) and often afterwards D ii.61, 308; iii.216, 275; S iii.26, 158; It 50; Ps i.26, 39; ii.147; Vbh 101, 365; Nett 160. Another group of 3 aims of taṇhā is given as kāma˚, rūpa˚ & arūpa˚ at D iii.216; Vbh 395; & yet another as rūpa˚, arūpa˚ & nirodha˚ at D iii.216. -- The source of t. is said to be sixfold as founded on & relating to the 6 bāhirāni āyatanāni (see rūpa), objects of sense or sensations, viz. sights, sounds, smells, etc.: D ii.58; Ps i.6 sq.; Nd2 271i; in threefold aspects (as kāma -- taṇhā, bhava˚ & vibhava˚) with relation to the 6 senses discussed at Vism 567 sq.; also under the term cha -- taṇha -- kāyā (sixfold group, see cpds.) M i.51; iii.280; Ps i.26; elsewhere called chadvārika -- taṇhā "arising through the 6 doors" DhA iii.286. -- 18 varieties of t. (comprising worldly objects of enjoyment, ease, comfort & well-living are enumd at Nd2 271iii (under taṇhā -- lepa). 36 kinds: 18 referring to sensations (illusions) of subjective origin (ajjhattikassa upādāya), & 18 to sensations affecting the individual in objective quality (bāhirassa upādāya) at A ii.212; Nett 37; & 108 varieties or specifications of t. are given at Nd2 271ii (under Jappā)=Dhs 1059 =Vbh 361. -- Taṇhā as "kusalā pi akusalā pi" (good & bad) occurs at Nett 87; cp. Tālapuṭa's good t. Th i.1091 f. -- 2. Import of the term: (a) various characterizations of t.: mahā˚ Sn 114; kāma˚ Si.131; gedha˚ Si.15; bhava˚ D iii.274 (+avijjā); grouped with diṭṭhi (wrong views) Nd2 271iii, 271vi. T. fetters the world & causes misery: "yāya ayaŋ loko uddhasto pariyonaddho tantākulajāto" A ii.211 sq.; taṇhāya jāyatī soko taṇhāya jāyatī bhayaŋ taṇhāya vippamuttassa natthi soko kuto bhayaŋ Dh 216; taṇhāya uḍḍito loko S i.40; yaŋ loke piyarūpaŋ sātarūpaŋ etth' esā taṇhā . . . Vbh 103; it is the 4th constituent of Māra's army (M -- senā) Sn 436; M's daughter, S i.134. In comparisons: t.+jālinī visattikā S i.107; =bharâdānaŋ (t. ponobbhavikā nandirāga -- sahagatā) S iii 26; v.402: gaṇḍa=kāya, gaṇḍamūlan ti taṇhāy' etaŋ adhivacanaŋ S iv.83;=sota S iv.292 (and a khīṇāsavo=chinnasoto); manujassa pamatta -- cārino t. vaḍḍhati māluvā viya Dh 334. -- (b) taṇhā as the inciting factor of rebirth & incidental cause of saŋsāra: kammaŋ khettaŋ viññāṇaŋ bījaŋ taṇhā sineho . . . evaŋ āyatiŋ punabbhavâbhinibbatti hoti A i.223; t. ca avasesā ca kilesā: ayaŋ vuccati dukkha -- samudayo Vbh 107, similarly Nett 23 sq.; as ponobbhavikā (causing rebirth) S iii.26; Ps ii.147, etc.; as a link in the chain of interdependent causation (see paṭiccasamuppāda): vedanā -- paccayā taṇhā, taṇhā -- paccayā upādānaŋ Vin i.1, 5; D ii.31, 33, 56, etc.; t. & upadhi : taṇhāya sati upadhi hoti t. asati up. na hoti S ii.108; ye taṇhaŋ vaḍḍhenti te upadhiŋ vaḍḍhenti, etc. S ii.109; taṇhāya nīyati loko taṇhāya parikissati S i.39; taṇhā saŋyojanena saŋyuttā sattā dīgharattaŋ sandhāvanti saŋsaranti It 8. See also t. -- dutiya. -- (c) To have got rid of t. is Arahantship: vigata -- taṇha vigata -- pipāsa vigata -- pariḷāha D iii.238; S iii.8, 107 sq., 190; samūlaŋ taṇhaŋ abbuyha S i.16=63, 121 (Godhiko parinibbuto); iii.26 (nicchāto parinibbuto); vīta˚ Sn 83, 849, 1041 (+nibbuta); taṇhāya vippahānena S i.39 ("Nibbānan" iti vuccati), 40 (sabbaŋ chindati bandhanaŋ); taṇhaŋ mā kāsi mā lokaŋ punar āgami Sn 339; taṇhaŋ pariññāya . . . te narā oghatiṇṇā ti Sn 1082; ucchinna -- bhava -- taṇhā Sn 746; taṇhāya vūpasama S iii.231; t. -- nirodha S iv.390. -- See also M i.51; Dh 154; It 9 (vita˚+anādāna), 50 (˚ŋ pahantvāna); Sn 495, 496, 916; & cp. ˚khaya. -- 3. Kindred terms which in Commentaries are expld by one of the taṇhā -- formulae (cp. Nd2 271v & 271vii): (a) t. in groups of 5: (a) with kilesa saŋyoga vipāka duccarita; (b) diṭṭhi kilesa duccarita avijjā; (g) diṭṭhi kil˚ kamma duccarita. -- (b) quasi -- synonyms: ādāna, ejā, gedha, jappā, nandī, nivesana, pariḷāha, pipāsā, lepa, loluppa, vāna, visattikā, sibbanī. -- In cpds. the form taṇhā is represented by taṇha before double consonants, as taṇhakkhaya, etc.
-- âdhipateyya mastery over t. S iii.103; -- âdhipanna seized by t. S. i.29; Sn 1123; -- ādāsa the mirror of t. A ii.54; âbhinivesa full of t. PvA 267; -- āluka greedy J ii.78; -- uppādā (pl.) (four) grounds of the rise of craving (viz. cīvara, piṇḍapāta, senâsana, itibhavâbhava) A ii.10=It 109; D iii.228; Vbh 375; -- kāyā (pl.) (six) groups of t. (see above B i) S ii.3; D iii.244. 280; Ps i.26; Vbh 380; -- kkhaya the destruction of the excitement of cravings, almost synonymous with Nibbāna (see above B2c): ˚rata Dh 187 (expld at DhA iii.241: arahatte c' eva nibbāne ca abhirato hoti); <-> Vv 735 (expld by Nibbāna VvA 296); therefore in the expositionary formula of Nibbāna as equivalent with N. Vin i.5; S iii.133; It 88, etc. (see N.). In the same sense: sabbañjaho taṇhakkhaye vimutto Vin i.8= M i.171=Dh 353; taṇhākkhaya virāga nirodha nibbāna A ii.34, expld at Vism 293; bhikkhu arahaŋ cha ṭhānāni adhimutto hoti: nekkhammâdhimutto, paviveka˚, avyāpajjha˚, upādānakkhaya˚, taṇhakkhaya˚, asammoha˚ Vin i.183; cp. also Sn 70, 211, 1070, 1137; -- gata obsessed with excitement, i. e. a victim of t. Sn 776; -- gaddula the leash of t. Nd2 271ii≈; -- cchida breaking the cravings Sn 1021, 1101; -- jāla the snare of t. M i.271; Th 1, 306; Nd2 271ii; -- dutiya who has the fever or excitement of t. as his companion A ii.10= It 9=109=Sn 740, 741=Nd2 305; cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 278; -- nadī the river of t. Nd2 271ii; cp. nadiyā soto ti: taṇhāy' etaŋ adhivacanaŋ It 114; -- nighātana the destruction of t. Sn 1085; -- pakkha the party of t., all that belongs to t. Nett 53, 69, 88, 160; -- paccaya caused by t. Sn p. 144; Vism 568; -- mūlaka rooted in t. (dhammā: 9 items) Ps i.26, 130; Vbh 390; -- lepa cleaving to t. Nd2 271iii; (+diṭṭhi -- lepa); -- vasika being in the power of t. J iv.3; -- vicarita a thought of t. A ii.212; -- sankhaya (complete) destruction of t.; ˚sutta M i.251 (cūḷa˚), 256 (mahā˚): ˚vimutti salvation through cessation of t. M i.256, 270, & ˚vimutta (adj.) S iv.391; -- samudda the ocean of t. Nd 271ii; -- sambhūta produced by t. (t. ayaŋ kāyo) A ii.145 (cp. Sn p. 144; yaŋ kiñci dukkhaŋ sambhoti sabbaŋ taṇhāpaccayā); -- saŋyojana the fetter of t. (adj.) fettered, bound by t., in phrase t. -- saŋyojanena saŋyuttā sattā dīgharattaŋ sandhāvanti saŋsaranti It 8, & t. -- saŋyojanānaŋ sattānaŋ sandhāvataŋ saŋsarataŋ S ii.178=iii.149= PvA 166; A i.223; -- salla the sting or poisoned arrow of t. S i.192 (˚assa hantāraŋ vande ādiccabandhunaŋ), the extirpation of which is one of the 12 achievements of a mahesi Nd2 503 (˚assa abbuḷhana; cp. above).
Taṇhīyati [=taṇhāyati, denom. fr. taṇhā, cp. Sk. tṛṣyati to have thirst] to have thirst for S ii.13 (for v. l. SS. tuṇhīyati; BB. tasati); Vism 544 (+upādiyati ghaṭ <-> yati); cp. tasati & pp. tasita.
Tata [pp. of tanoti] stretched, extended, spread out S i. 357 (jāla); J iv.484 (tantāni jālāni Text, katāni v. l. for tatāni). Note: samo tata at J i.183 is to be read as samotata (spread all over).
Tatiya [Sk. tṛtīya, Av. þritya, Gr. tri/tos, Lat. tertius, Goth. pridja, E. third] Num. ord. the third. -- Sn 97 (parābhavo); 436 (khuppipāsā as the 3rd division in the army of Māra), 1001; J ii.353; Dh 309; PvA 69 (tatiyāya jātiya: in her third birth). Tatiyaŋ (nt. adv.) for the 3rd time D ii.155; Sn 88, 95, 450; tatiyavāraŋ id. DhA i.183; VvA 47 (=at last); yāva tatiyaŋ id. Vin ii.188; J i.279; DhA ii.75; PvA 272 (in casting the lot: the third time decides); yāva tatiyakaŋ id. D i.95.
Tato [abl. of pron. base ta˚ (see ta˚ ii.4)] 1. from this, in this S iii.96 (tatoja); J iii.281 (tato paraŋ beyond this, after this); Nd2 664 (id.); DA i.212 (tatonidāna). <-> 2. thence J i.278; Miln 47. -- 3. thereupon, further, afterwards J i.58; Dh 42; Miln 48; PvA 21, etc.
Tatta1 [pp. of tapati] heated, hot, glowing; of metals: in a melted state (cp. uttatta) A ii.122≈(tattena talena osiñcante, as punishment); Dh 308 (ayoguḷa); J ii.352 (id.); iv.306 (tattatapo "of red -- hot heat," i. e. in severe self -- torture); Miln 26, 45 (adv. red -- hot); PvA 221 (tatta -- lohasecanaŋ the pouring over of glowing copper, one of the punishments in Niraya).
Tatta2 (nt.) [tad+tva] truth; abl. tattato according to truth; accurately J ii.125 (ñatvā); iii.276 (ajānitvā not knowing exactly).
Tattaka1 [tatta pp. of tappati2+ka] pleasing, agreeable, pleasant Miln 238 (bhojana).
Tattaka2 (adj.) (=tāvataka) of such size, so large Vism 184 (corresponding with yattaka); tattakaŋ kālaŋ so long, just that time, i. e. the specified time (may be long or short=only so long) DhA i.103 (v. l. ettakaŋ); ii.16 (=ettaka).
Tattha [Sk. tatra adv. of place, cp. Goth. papro & also Sk. atra, yatra] A. 1. of place: (a) place where= there, in that place Sn 1071, 1085; Dh 58; J i.278; Pv i.1015; often with eva: tatth' eva right there, on the (very same) spot S i.116; J ii.154; PvA 27. In this sense as introduction to a comment on a passage: in this, here, in this connection (see also tatra) Dhs 584; DhA i.21; PvA 7, etc. (b) direction: there, to this place J ii.159 (gantvā); vi.368; PvA 16 (tatthagamanasīla able to go here & there, i. e. wherever you like, of a Yakkha). -- 2. as (loc.) case of pron. base ta˚= in this, for or about that, etc. Sn 1115 (etam abhiññāya tato tattha vipassati: SnA tatra); tattha yo manku hoti Dh 249 (=tasmiŋ dāne m. DhA iii.359); tattha kā paridevanā Pv i.123 ("why sorrow for this?"). -- 3. of time: then, for the time being, interim (=ettha, cp. tattaka2) in phrase tattha -- parinibbāyin, where corresp. phrases have antarā -- parinibbāyin (A ii.238 e. g.≈i.134; see under parinibbāyin) D i.156; A i.232; ii.5; iv.12; S v.357; M ii.52, etc. The meaning of this phrase may however be taken in the sense of tatra A 3 (see next). -- B. Repeated: tattha tattha here and there, in various places, all over; also corresponding with yattha yattha wherever . . . there It 115; Nett 96 (˚gāmini -- paṭipadā); VvA 297; PvA 1, 2, 33, 77, etc. -- See tatra.
Tatra [Sk. tatra]=tattha in all meanings & applications, viz. A. 1. there: Dh 375; PvA 54. tatrâpi D i.81=It 22≈(tatrâpâsiŋ). tatra pi D i.1 (=DA i.42). tatra kho Vin i.10, 34; A v.5 sq.; 354 sq. (cp. atha kho). <-> In explanations: PvA 19 (tatrâyaŋ vitthārakathā "here follows the story in detail"). -- 2. in this: Sn 595 (tatra kevalino smase); Dh 88 (tatr' abhirati: enjoyment in this). -- 3. a special application of tatra (perhaps in the same sense to be explained tattha A 3) is that as first part of a cpd., where it is to be taken as generalizing (=tatra tatra): all kinds of (orig. in this & that), in whatever condition, all -- round, complete (cp. yaŋ taŋ under ta˚ ii.2, yena tena upāyena): tatramajjhattatā (complete) equanimity (keeping balance here & there) Vism 466 (cp. tatra -- majjhatt' upekkhā 160); DhsA 132, 133 (majjh˚+tatra majjh˚); Bdhd 157. tatrûpāyaññū (=tatra upāyaññū) having all-round knowledge of the means and ways Sn 321 (correct reading at SnA 330); tatrupāyāya vīmaŋsāya samannāgatā endowed with genius in all kinds of means Vin iv.211 (or may it be taken as "suitable, corresponding, proportionate"? cp. tadūpiya). -- B. tatra tatra, in t. -- t. -- abhinandinī (of taṇhā) finding its delight in this & that, here & there Vin i.10; Ps ii.147; Nett 72; Vism 506.
Tatha (adj.) [an adjectivized tathā out of combn tathā ti "so it is," cp. taccha] (being) in truth, truthful; true, real D i.190 (+bhūta taccha); M iii.70; Th 1, 347; Sn 1115 (=Nd2 275 taccha bhūta, etc.). (nt.) tathaŋ=saccaŋ, in cattāri tathāni the 4 truths S v.430, 435; Ps ii.104 sq. (+avitathāni anaññathāni). As ep. of Nibbāna: see derivations & cp. taccha. abl. tathato exactly v. l. B for tattato at J ii.125 (see tatta2). -- yathā tathaŋ (cp. yathā tacchaŋ) according to truth, for certain, in truth Sn 699, 732, 1127. -- Cp. vitatha.
-- parakkama reaching out to the truth J v.395 (=saccanikkama); -- vacana speaking the truth (cp. tathāvādin) Miln 401.
Tathatā (f.) [abstr. fr. tathā>tatha] state of being such, such -- likeness, similarity, correspondence Vism 518.
Tathatta (nt.) [*tathātvaŋ] "the state of being so," the truth, Nibbāna; only in foll. phrases: (a) tathattāya paṭipajjati to be on the road to (i. e. attain) Nibbāna D i.175, similarly S ii.199; S ii.209 (paṭipajjitabba being conducive to N.); Miln 255; Vism 214. -- (b) tathattāya upaneti (of a cittaŋ bhāvitaŋ) id. S iv.294=M i. 301; S v.90, 213 sq. -- (c) tathattāya cittaŋ upasaŋharati id. M i.468. -- abl. tathattā in truth, really Sn 520 sq. (cp. M Vastu iii.397).
Tathā (adv.) [Sk. tathā, cp. also kathaŋ] so, thus (and not otherwise, opp. aññathā), in this way, likewise Sn 1052 (v. l. yathā); J i.137, etc. -- Often with eva: tath' eva just so, still the same, not different D iii.135 (taŋ tath' eva hoti no aññathā); J i.263, 278; Pv i.83; PvA 55. Corresponding with yathā: tathā -- yathā so -- that Dh 282; PvA 23 (tathā akāsi yathā he made that . . ., cp. Lat. ut consecutive); yathā -- tathā asso also Sn 504; J i.223; Pv i.123 (yath' āgato tathā gato as he has come so he has gone). -- In cpds. tath' before vowels.
-- ûpama such like (in comparisons, following upon a preceding yathā or seyyathā) Sn 229 (=tathāvidha KhA 185), 233; It 33, 90; -- kārin acting so (corresp. w. yathāvādin: acting so as he speaks, cp. tāthāvādin) Sn 357; It 122; -- gata see sep.; -- bhāva "the being so," such a condition J i.279; -- rūpa such a, like this or that, esp. so great, such Vin i.16; Sn p. 107; It 107; DA i.104; PvA 5, 56. nt. adv. thus PvA 14. Cp. evarūpa; -- vādin speaking so (cp. ˚kārin) Sn 430; It 122 (of the Tathāgata); -- vidha such like, so (= tathārūpa) Sn 772, 818, 1073, 1113; Nd2 277 (=tādisa taŋsaṇṭhita tappakāra).
Tathāgata [Derivation uncertain. Buddhaghosa (DA i.59 -- 67) gives eight explanations showing that there was no fixed tradition on the point, and that he himself was in doubt]. The context shows that the word is an epithet of an Arahant, and that non -- Buddhists were supposed to know what it meant. The compilers of the Nikāyas must therefore have considered the expression as pre -- Buddhistic; but it has not yet been found in any pre -- Buddhistic work. Mrs. Rhys Davids (Dhs. tr. 1099, quoting Chalmers J.R.A.S. Jan., 1898) suggests "he who has won through to the truth." Had the early Buddhists invented a word with this meaning it would probably have been tathaŋgata, but not necessarily, for we have upadhī -- karoti as well as upadhiŋ karoti. -- D i.12, 27, 46, 63; ii.68, 103, 108, 115, 140, 142; iii.14, 24 sq., 32 sq., 115, 217, 264 sq., 273 sq.; S i.110 sq.; ii.222 sq.; iii.215; iv.127, 380 sq.; A i.286; ii.17, 25, 120; iii.35, etc.; Sn 236, 347, 467, 557, 1114; It 121 sq.; KhA 196; Ps i.121 sq.; Dhs 1099, 1117, 1234; Vbh 325 sq., 340, etc., etc.
-- balāni (pl.) the supreme intellectual powers of a T. usually enumd as a set of ten: in detail at A v.33 sq. =Ps ii.174; M i.69; S ii.27; Nd2 466. Other sets of five at A iii.9; of six A iii.417 sq. (see bala); -- sāvaka a disciple of the T. D ii.142; A i.90; ii.4; iii.326 sq.; It 88; Sn p. 15.
Tathiya (adj.) [Sk. tathya =taccha] true, Sn 882, 883.
Tadanurūpa (adj.) [cp. ta˚ i a] befitting, suitable, going well with J vi.366; DhA iv.15.
Tadā (adv.) [Vedic; cp. kadā] then, as that time (either past or future) D ii.157; J ii.113, 158; Pv i.105; PvA 42. Also used like an adj.: te tadā -- mātāpitaro etarahi m˚ ahesuŋ "the then mother & father" J i.215 (cp. Lat. quondam); tadā -- sotāpanna -- upāsaka J ii.113.
Tadūpika & Tadūpiya see ta˚ I. a.
Tanaya & tanuya [at S i.7, v. l. tanaya, cp. BSk. tanuja AvŚ ii.200] offspring, son Mhvs vii.28. pl. tanuyā [=Sk. tanayau] son & daughter S i.7.
Tanu [Vedic tanu, f. tanvī; also n. tanu & tanū (f.) body *ten (see tanoti)=Gr. tanu -- , Lat. tenuis, Ohg. dunni, E. thin] 1. (adj.) thin, tender, small, slender Vv 162 (vara˚ graceful=uttamarūpa -- dhara VvA 79; perhaps to 2); PvA 46 (of hair: fine+mudhu). -- 2. (n. nt.) body (orig. slender part of the body= waist) Vv 537 (kañcana˚); Pv i.121; Vism 79 (uju+). Cp. tanutara.
-- karaṇa making thinner, reducing, diminishing Vin ii.316 (Bdhgh on CV. v.9, 2); -- bhāva decrease Pug 17; -- bhūta decreased, diminished Pug 17; esp. in phrase ˚soka with diminished grief, having one's grief allayed DhA iii.176; PvA 38.
Tanuka (adj.)=tanu; little, small Dh 174 (=DhA 175); Sn 994 (soka).
Tanutara the waist (lit. smaller part of body, cp. body and bodice) Vin iv.345 (sundaro tanutaro "her waist is beautiful").
Tanutta (nt.) [n. -- abstr. of tanu] diminution, reduction, vanishing, gradual disappearance A i.160 (manussānaŋ khayo hoti tanuttaŋ paññāyati); ii.144 (rāga˚, dosa˚, moha˚); esp. in phrase (characterizing a sakadāgāmin) "rāga -- d. -- mohānaŋ tanuttā sakadāgāmī hoti" D i.156; S v.357 sq., 376, 406; A ii.238; Pug 16.
Tanoti [*ten; cp. Sk. tanoti, Gr. tei/nw, to/nos, te/tanos; Lat. teneo, tenuis, tendo (E. ex -- tend); Goth. panjan; Ohg. denen; cp. also Sk. tanti, tāna, tantra] to stretch, extend; rare as finite verb, usually only in pp. tata. <-> Pgdp 17.
Tanta (nt.) [Vedic tantra, to tanoti; cp. tantrī f. string] a thread, a string, a loom J i.356 (˚vitata -- ṭṭhāna the place of weaving); DhA i.424. At J iv.484 tanta is to be corrected to tata (stretched out).
-- âkula tangled string, a tangled skein, in phrase tantākulajātā guḷāguṇṭhikajāta "entangled like a ball of string & covered with blight" S ii.92; iv.158; A ii.211; Dpvs xii.32. See guḷā; -- āvuta weaving, weft, web S v.45; A i.286; -- bhaṇḍa weaving appliances Vin ii.135; -- rajjuka "stringing & roping," hanging, execution J iv.87; -- vāya a weaver J i.356; Miln 331; Vism 259; DhA i.424.
Tantaka (nt.) "weaving," a weaving -- loom Vin ii.135.
Tanti (f.) [Vedic tantrī, see tanta] 1. the string or cord of a lute, etc.; thread made of tendon Vin i.182; Th 2, 390 (cp. ThA 257); J iv.389; DhA i.163; PvA 151. -- 2. line, lineage (+paveṇi custom, tradition) J vi.380; DhA i.284. -- dhara bearer of tradition Vism 99 (+vaŋsânurakkhake & paveṇipolake). -- 3. a sacred text; a passage in the Scriptures Vism 351 (bahu -- peyyāla˚); avimutta -- tanti -- magga DA i.2; MA i.2.
-- ssara string music Vin i.182; J iii.178.
Tantu [Vedic tantu, cp. tanta] a string, cord, wire (of a lute) J v.196.
Tandita (adj.) [pp. of tandeti=Sk. tandrayate & tandate to relax. From *ten, see tanoti] weary, lazy, giving way Miln 238 (˚kata). Usually a˚ active, keen, industrious, sedulous Dh 305, 366, 375; Vv 3322; Miln 390; VvA 142. Cp. next.
Tandī (f.) [Sk. tanita] weariness, laziness, sloth S v.64; M i.464; A i.3; Sn 926, 942; J v.397 (+ālasya); Vbh 352 (id.).
Tapa & Tapo [from tapati, cp. Lat. tepor, heat] 1. torment, punishment, penance, esp. religious austerity, selfchastisement, ascetic practice. This was condemned by the Buddha: Gotamo sabbaŋ tapaŋ garahati tapassiŋ lūkhajīviŋ upavadati D i.161=S iv.330; anattha -- sañhitaŋ ñatvā yaŋ kiñci aparaŋ tapaŋ S i.103; J iv.306 (tattatapa: see tatta). -- 2. mental devotion, self -- control, abstinence, practice of morality (often= brahmacariyā & saŋvara); in this sense held up as an ideal by the Buddha. D iii.42 sq., 232 (attan & paran˚), 239; S i.38, 43; iv.118, 180; M ii.155, 199; D ii.49= Dh 184 (paramaŋ tapo), 194 (tapo sukho); Sn 77= S i.172 (saddhā bījaŋ tapo vuṭṭhi); Sn 267 (t. ca brahmacariyā ca), 655 (id.), 901; Pv i.32 (instr. tapasā= brahmacariyena PvA 15); J i.293; Nett 121 (+indriyasaŋvara); KhA 151 (pāpake dhamme tapatī ti tapo): VvA 114 (instr. tapasā); PvA 98.
-- kamma ascetic practice S i.103; -- jigucchā disgust for asceticism D i.174; iii.40, 42 sq., 48 sq.; A ii.200; -- pakkama=˚kamma D i.165 sq. (should it be tapopakkama=tapa+upakkama, or tapo -- kamma?). -- vana the ascetic's forest Vism 58, 79, 342.
Tapati [Sk. tapati, *tep, cp. Lat. tepeo to be hot or warm, tepidus=tepid] 1. to shine, to be bright, Dh 387 (divā tapati ādicco, etc.=virocati DhA iv.143); Sn 348 (jotimanto narā tapeyyuŋ), 687 (suriyaŋ tapantaŋ). -- ger. tapanīya: see sep. -- pp. tatta1.
Tapana (adj. -- n.) [to tapati & tapa] burning, heat; fig. torment, torture, austerity. -- 1. (as nt.) PvA 98 (kāya ˚sankhāto tapo). -- 2. (as f.) tapanī J v.201 (in metaphorical play of word with aggi & brahmacārin; Com. visīvana -- aggiṭṭha -- sankhātā -- tapanī).
Tapanīya1 [grd. of tapati] burning: fig. inducing self- torture, causing remorse, mortifying A i.49=It 24; A iv.97 (Com. tāpajanaka); v.276; J iv.177; Dhs i305.
Tapanīya2 (nt.) also tapaneyya (J v.372) & tapañña (J vi.218) [orig. grd. of tapati] shining; (n.) the shining, bright metal, i. e. gold (=rattasuvaṇṇa J v.372; ThA 252) Th 2, 374; Vv 8416; VvA 12, 37, 340.
Tapassin (adj. -- n.) [tapas+vin; see tapati & tapa] one devoted to religious austerities, an ascetic (non -- Buddhist). Fig. one who exercises self -- control & attains mastery over his senses Vin i.234=A iv.184 (tapassī samaṇo Gotamo); D iii.40, 42 sq., 49; S i.29; iv.330, 337 sq.; M i.77; Sn 284 (isayo pubbakā āsuŋ saññatattā tapassino); Vv 2210; Pv i.32 (˚rūpa, under the appearance of a "holy" man: samaṇa -- patirūpaka PvA 15); ii.614 (=saŋvāraka PvA 98; tapo etesaŋ atthī ti ibid.).
Tappaṇa (nt.) [Sk. tarpaṇa] satiating, refreshing; a restorative, in netta˚ some sort of eye -- wash D i.12 (in combn w. kaṇṇa -- tela & natthu -- kamma).
Tappati1 [Sk. tapyate, Pass. of tapati] to burn, to be tormented: to be consumed (by remorse) Dh 17, 136 (t. sehi kammehi dummedho=paccati DhA iii.64).
Tappati2 [Sk. tṛpyate, caus. tarpayati; *terp=Gr. te/rpw] (instr.) to be satiated, to be pleased, to be satisfied J i.185 (puriso pāyāsassa t.); ii.443; v.485=Miln 381 (samuddo na t. nadīhi the ocean never has enough of all the rivers); Vv 8413. -- grd. tappiya satiable, in atappiya -- vatthūni (16) objects of insatiability J iii.342 (in full). Also tappaya in cpd. dut˚ hard to be satisfied A i.87; Pug 26. -- pp. titta. -- Caus. tappeti to satisfy, entertain, regale, feed It 67 (annapānena); Pv ii.48 (id.) Miln 227; -- pp. tappita.
Tappara (adj.) [Sk. tatpara] quite given to or intent upon ( -- ˚), diligent, devoted ThA 148 (Ap. 57, 66) (mānapūjana˚ & buddhopaṭṭhāna˚).
Tappetar [n. ag. to tappeti] one who satisfies, a giver of good things in combn titto ca tappetā ca: self -- satisfied & satisfying others A i.87; Pug 27 (of a Sammāsambuddha).
Tab˚ in cpds. tabbisaya, tabbahula, etc.=taŋ˚, see under ta˚ I. a.
Tama (nt.) & tamo [Sk. tamas, tam & tim, cp. tamisra= Lat. tenebrae; also timira dark & P. tibba, timira; Ohg. dinstar & finstar; Ags. thimm, E. dim] darkness (syn. andhakāra, opp. joti), lit. as well as fig. (mental darkness= ignorance or state of doubt); one of the dark states of life & rebirth; adj. living in one of the dark spheres of life (cp. kaṇhajāta) or in a state of suffering (duggati) Sn 248 (pecca tamaŋ vajanti ye patanti sattā nirayaŋ avaŋsirā), 763 (nivutānaŋ t. hoti andhakāro apassataŋ), 956 (sabbaŋ tamaŋ vinodetvā); Vbh 367 (three tamāni: in past, present & future). adj.: puggalo tamo tama -- parāyaṇo D iii.233; A ii.85= Pug 51; J ii.17. -- tamā tamaŋ out of one "duggati" into another Sn 278 (vinipātaŋ samāpanno gabbhā gabbhaŋ t. t. . . . dukkaŋ nigacchati), cp. M Vastu ii.225, also tamāto tamaŋ ibid. i.27; ii.215. -- tamat. -- agge beyond the region of darkness (or rebirth in dark spheres), cp. bhavagge (& Sk. tamaḥ pāre) S v. 154, 163.
-- andhakāra (complete) darkness (of night) v. l. for samandha˚ at J iii.60 (Kern: tamondhakāra); -- nivuta enveloped in d. Sn 348; -- nuda (tama˚ & tamo˚), dispelling darkness, freq. as Ep. of the Buddha or other sages Sn 1133, 1136; It 32, 108; Nd2 281; Vv 352 (=VvA 161); Miln 1, 21, etc.; -- parāyaṇa (adj.) having a state of darkness or "duggati" for his end or destiny S i.93; A ii.85=Pug 51.
Tamāla [Sk. tamāla] N. of a tree (Xanthochymus pic- torius) Pv iii.105 (+uppala).
Tamba (nt.) [Sk. tāmra, orig. adj.=dark coloured, leaden; cp. Sk. adj. taŋsra id., to tama] copper ("the dark metal"); usually in combinations, signifying colour of or made of (cp. loha bronze), e. g. lākhātamba (adj.) Th 2, 440 (colour of an ox); ˚akkhin Vv 323 (timira˚) Sdhp 286; ˚nakhin J vi.290; ˚nettā (f.) ibid.; ˚bhājana DhA i.395; ˚mattika DhA iv.106; ˚vammika DhA iii.208; ˚loha PvA 95 (=loha).
Tambūla (nt.) [Sk. tambūla] betel or betel -- leaves (to chew after the meal) J i.266, 291; ii.320; Vism 314; DhA iii.219. -- ˚pasibbaka betel -- bag J vi.367.
Taya (nt.) [Sk. trayaŋ triad, cp. trayī; see also tāva- tiŋsa] a triad, in ratana -- ttaya the triad of gems (the Buddha, the Norm. & the Community) see ratana; e. g. PvA 1, 49, 141. -- piṭaka -- ttaya the triad of the Piṭakas SnA 328.
Tayo [f. tisso, nt. tīṇi; Vedic traya, trī & trīṇi; Gr. trei_s, tria; Lat. trēs, tria; Goth. preis, prija; Ohg. drī; E. three, etc.] num. card. three.
nom. -- acc. m. tayo (Sn 311), & tayas (tayas su dhammā Sn 231, see KhA 188) f. tisso (D i.143; A v.210; It 99) nt. tīṇi (A i.138, etc.), also used as absolute form (eka dve tīṇi) Kh iii. (cp. KhA 79 & tīṇi lakkhaṇā for lakkhaṇāni Sn 1019); gen. m. nt. tiṇṇaŋ (J iii.52, 111, etc.), f. tissannaŋ instr. tīhi (ṭhānehi Dh 224, vijjāhi It 101); loc. tīsu (janesu J i.307; vidhāsu Sn 842). -- In composition & derivation: ti in numerical cpds.: tidasa (30) q. v.; tisata (300) Sn 566 (brāhmaṇā tisatā); 573 (bhikkhavo tisatā); tisahassa (3000) Pv ii.951 (janā ˚ā); in numerical derivations: tiŋsa (30), tika (triad), tikkhattuŋ (thrice); tidhā (threefold). -- In nominal cpds.: see ti˚ te (a) in numerical cpds.: terasa (SnA 489; DhsA 333; VvA 72: terasī the 13th day) & teḷasa (S i.192 Sn pp. 102, 103) (13) [Sk. trayodaśa, Lat. tredecim]; tevīsa (23) VvA 5; tettiŋsa (33) J i.273; DhA i.267; tesaṭṭhi (63) PvA 111 (Jambudīpe tesaṭṭhiyā nagarasahassesu). <-> (b) in nominal cpds.: see te˚.
Tara [see tarati] (n.) crossing, "transit," passing over Sn 1119 (maccu˚). -- (adj.) to be crossed, passable, in duttara hard to cross S iv.157; Sn 174, 273 (oghaŋ t. duttaraŋ); Th 2, 10; It 57. Also as su -- duttara S i. 35; v.24.
-- esin wanting to pass over J iii.230
Taranga [tara+ga] a wave Vism 157.
Taraccha [Derivation unknown. The Sk. forms are tarakṣu & tarakṣa] hyena Vin iii.58; A iii.101; Miln 149, 267; Dh A 331; Mhbv 154. -- f. taracchi J v.71, 406; vi.562.
Taraṇa (nt.) [see tarati] going across, passing over, traversing Vin iv.65 (tiriyaŋ˚); Ps i.15; ii.99, 119.
Tarati1 [Vedic tarati, *ter (tṛ) to get to the other side, cp. Lat. termen, terminus, Gr. te/rma, te/rqron; also Lat. trans=Goth. pairh=Ags. purh=E. through] (lit.) to go or get through, to cross (a river), pass over, traverse; (fig.) to get beyond, i. e. to surmount, overcome, esp. oghaŋ (the great flood of life, desire, ignorance, etc.) S i.53, 208, 214; v.168, 186; Sn 173, 273, 771, 1069; sangaŋ Sn 791; visattikaŋ Sn 333, 857; ubhayaŋ (both worlds, here & beyond) Pv iv.131 (=atikkameti PvA 278); Nd2 282 -- ppr. taranto Vin i.191 (Aciravati); grd. taritabba Vin iv.65 (nadī); aor. atari J iii.189 (samuddaŋ) & atāri Sn 355, 1047 (jāti -- maraṇaŋ), pl. atāruŋ Sn 1045. -- See also tāreti (Caus.), tāṇa, tāyate, tiro, tiriyaŋ, tīra, tīreti.
Tarati2 [tvarate, pp. tvarita; also turati, turayati from *ter to turn round, move quickly, perhaps identical with the *ter of tarati1; cp. Ohg. dweran=E. twirl; Gr. toru/nh=Lat. trua=Ger. quirl twirling -- stick, also Lat. torqueo & turba & perhaps Ger. stūren, zerstören; E. storm, see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under trua] to be in a hurry, to make haste Th 1, 291; ppr. taramāna in ˚rūpa (adj.) quickly, hurriedly Sn 417; Pv ii.62; PvA 181 (=turita) & ataramāna Vin i.248; grd. taraṇīya Th 1, 293. -- See also tura, turita, turiya.
Tarahi (adv.) [Vedic tarhi, cp. carahi & etarahi] then, at that time Vin ii.189.
Tari (f.) [from tarati] a boat Dāvs iv.53.
Taritatta (nt.) [abstr. of tarita pp. of tarati1] the fact of having traversed, crossed, or passed through VvA 284.
Taru [Perhaps dialect. for dāru] tree, PvA 154 (˚gaṇā), 251.
Taruṇa (adj.) [Vedic taruṇa, cp. Gr. te/rus, te/rhn; Lat. tener & perhaps tardus] 1. tender, of tender age, young; new, newly (˚ -- ) fresh. Esp. appld to a young calf: M i.459 (in simile); ˚vaccha, ˚vacchaka, ˚vacchī: Vin i.193; J i.191; DhA ii.35; VvA 200. -- Vin i.243 (fresh milk); D i.114 (Gotamo t. c' eva t. -- paribbājako ca "a young man and only lately become a wanderer"); PvA 3, 46 (˚janā), 62 (˚putta); Bdhd 93, 121. -- 2. (m. & nt.) the shoot of a plant, or a young plant Vin i.189 (tāla˚); M i.432; Vism 361 (taruṇa -- tāla).
Tala (nt.) [Derivation uncertain. Cp. Sk. tala m. & nt.; cp. Gr. thli/a (dice -- board), Lat. tellus (earth), tabula (=table). Oir. talam (earth), Ags. pel (=deal), Ohg. dili=Ger. diele] (a) flat surface (w. ref. to either top or bottom: cp. Ger. boden), level, ground, base J i.60, 62 (pāsāda˚ flat roof); iii.60 (id.); paṭhavī˚ (level ground) J ii.111, cp. bhūmi˚ PvA 176; ādāsa˚ surface of a mirror Vism 450, 456, 489; salila˚ (surface of pond) PvA 157; VvA 160; heṭṭhima˚ (the lowest level) J i.202; PvA 281; -- J i.233 (base); 266 (khagga˚ the flat of the sword); ii.102 (bheri˚). -- (b) the palm of the hand or the sole of the foot J ii.223; Vism 250; & cpds. -- See also taṭa, tāla, tālu.
-- ghātaka a slap with the palm of the hand Vin iv.260, 261; -- sattika in ˚ŋ uggirati to lift up the palm of the hand Vin iv.147; DhA iii.50; cp. Vin. Texts i.51.
Talika (adj.) [from tala] having a sole, in eka -- ˚upāhanā a sandal with one sole J ii.277; iii.80, 81 (v. l. BB. paṭilika); cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 165.
Taluṇa=taruṇa DhsA 333 (cp. Burnouf, Lotus 573).
Taḷāka (nt.) [Derivation uncertain. Perhaps from taṭa. The Sk. forms are taṭaka, taṭāka, taḍāga] a pond, pool, reservoir Vin ii.256; J i.4, 239; PvA 202; DA i.273; Miln 1, 66=81, 246, 296, 359.
Tasa (adj.) [from tasati2] 1. trembling, frightened J i.336=344 (vakā, expl. at 342 by tasita); perhaps the derived meaning of: -- 2. moving, running (cp. to meaning 1 & 2 Gr. tre/w to flee & to tremble), always in combn tasa -- thāvarā (pl.) movable & immovable beings [cp. M Vastu i.207 jangama -- sthāvara; ii.10 calaŋ sthāvara]. Metaphorically of people who are in fear & trembling, as distinguished from a thāvara, a selfpossessed & firm being (=Arahant KhA 245). In this sense t. is interpreted by tasati1 as well as by tasati2 (to have thirst or worldly cravings) at KhA 245: tasantī ti tasā, sataṇhānaŋ sabhayānañ c' etaŋ adhivacanaŋ also at Nd2 479: tasa ti yesaŋ tasitā (tasiṇā?) taṇhā appahīnā, etc., & ye te santāsaŋ āpajjanti. <-> S i.141; iv.117, 351; v.393; Sn 146, 629; Dh 405, Th 1, 876; J v.221; Nd2 479; DhA iv.175.
Tasati1 [Sk. tṛṣyati=Gr. te/rsomoi to dry up, Lat. torreo (=E. torrid, toast), Goth. gapairsan & gapaúrsnan, Ohg. derren; see also taṇhā & taṇhīyati] to be thirsty, fig. to crave for S ii.13; Miln 254. -- pp. tasita1. Cp. pari˚.
Tasati2 [Vedic trasati=Gr. tre/w, Lat. terreo (=terror); *ters fr. *ter in Sk. tarala, cp. also Lat. tremo (=tremble) and trepidus] to tremble, shake, to have fear; to be frightened Sn 394 (ye thāvarā ye ca tasanti loke); Nd2 479 (= santāsaŋ āpajjati); KhA 245 (may be taker as tasati1, see tasa). -- pp. tasita2 , cp. also tasa & uttasati.
Tasara (nt.) [Vedic tasara, cp. tanta, etc.] a shuttle Sn 215, 464, 497; DhA i.424; iii.172. Cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1886, 160.
Tasiṇā (f.) [Diaeretic form of taṇhā, cp. dosiṇā > juṇhā, kasiṇa > kṛtsṇa, etc.] thirst; fig. craving (see taṇhā) S v.54, 58; Nd2 479 (to be read for tasitā?); Dh 342, 343.
Tasita1 [pp. of tasati1] dried up, parched, thirsty S ii.110, 118; Sn 980, 1014 (not with Fausböll=tasita2); J iv.20; Pv ii.936 (chāta+), 103 (=pipāsita PvA 143); iii.65 (=pipāsita PvA 127, 202); Miln 318 (kilanta+).
Tasita2 [pp. of tasati2] frightened, full of fear J i.26 (bhīta+). 342, iv.141 (id.): Nd2 479 (or=tasiṇā?). <-> atasita fearless S iii.57.
Tassa -- pāpiyyasikā (f.) (viz. kiriyā) N. of one of the adhi- karaṇa -- samathā: guilt (legal wrong) of such & such a character Vin i.325; in detail expl. M ii.249; + tiṇavatthāraka D iii.254; A i.99. ˚kammaŋ karoti to carry out proceedings against someone guilty of a certain legal offence Vin ii.85, 86; ˚kata one against whom the latter is carried out A iv.347.
Tāṇa (nt.) [from Vedic root trā, variation of *ter in tarati. Orig. bringing or seeing through] shelter, protection, refuge, esp. as tt. of shelter & peace offered by the Dhamma. Mostly in combn with leṇa & saraṇa (also dīpa & abhaya), in var. contexts, esp. with ref. to Nibbāna (see Nd2 s. v.): D i.95 (˚ŋ, etc. gavesin seeking refuge); A i.155; S iv.315 (maŋtāṇa, etc. adj. protected by me, in my shelter). -- S i.2, 54, 55, 107 (˚ŋ karoti); iv.372 (˚gāmī maggo); A iv.184; Sn 668 (˚ŋ upeti); Dh 288; J i.412 (=protector, expld by tāyitā parittāyitā patiṭṭhā); Sdhp 224, 289. Cp. tātar & tāyati.
Tāṇatā (f.) [abstr. of tāṇa] protection, sheltering Dh 288.
Tāta [Vedic tāta, Gr. ta/ta & te/tta, Lat. tata, Ger. tate, E. dad(dy); onomat.] father; usually in voc. sg. tāta (and pl. tātā) used as term of affectionate, friendly or respectful address to one or more persons, both younger & older than the speaker, superior or inferior. As father (perhaps= tātā, see next) at Th 2, 423, 424 (+ammā). tāta (sg.) in addr. one: J iii.54; iv.281 (amma tāta mammy & daddy) DhA ii.48 (=father); iii.196 (id.); PvA 41 (= father), 73 (a son), 74 (a minister); J i.179 (id.); Miln 15, 16, 17 (a bhikkhu or thera), in addr. several Vin i.249; J ii.133; PvA 50. tātā (pl.) J i.166; 263; iv.138.
Tātar [from Vedic trā, n. ag. to trāyati to protect] pro- tector, saviour, helper DA i.229. For meaning "father" see tāta & cp. pitā=tāyitā at J i.412.
Tādin (adj. n.) (nom. tādī & tādi, in cpds. tādi˚) [Vedic tādṛś from tad -- dṛś of such appearance] such, such like, of such (good) qualities, "ecce homo"; in pregnant sense appl. to the Bhagavant & Arahants, characterized as "such" in 5 ways: see Nd1 114 sq.; SnA 202 & cp. Miln 382. tādī: Sn 712, 803 (& 154 tādī no for tādino, see SnA 201 sq.); tādi Sn 488, 509, 519 sq.; Dh 95; gen. tādino Dh 95, 96; with ref. to the Buddha D ii. 157≈ (ṭhitacittasa tādino, in BSk. sthiracittasya tāyinaḥ AvŚ ii.199); Vv 186 (expln VvA 95: iṭṭhādisu tādilakkhaṇasampattiyā tādino Satthu: see Nd1 114 sq.), of Arahant A ii.34; Sn 154 (or tādī no); instr. tādinā Sn 697; Miln 382; acc. tādiŋ Sn 86, 219, 957; :loc. pl. tādisu Pv ii.971 (=iṭṭhādisu tādilakkhaṇappattesu PvA 140, cp. VvA 95). -- See tādisa1.
-- bhāva "such -- ness," high(est) qualification Vism 5, 214. -- lakkhaṇa the characteristic of such (a being) J iii.98 (˚yoga, cp. nakkhatta -- yoga); SnA 200 (˚patta); VvA 95 (˚sampatti).
Tādina (adj.) [enlarged form of tādin)=tādin, only in loc. tādine Vv 212 (= tādimhi VvA 106).
Tādisa1 (adj.) [Vedic tādṛśa from tad -- dṛsa=tad -- rūpa; a reduction of this form in P. tādin] such like, of such quality or character, in such a condition J i.151; iii.280; Sn 112, 317, 459; Nd2 277 (in expl. of tathāvidha); It 68; Pv ii.94; PvA 69, 72; Miln 382. Also correlative tādisa -- tādisa the one -- the other VvA 288. -- f. tādisī [Sk. tādṛsī] Pv i.56 (vaṇijjā).
Tādisa2 (adj.) [tvaŋ+disa. Cp. Sk. tvādṛśa] like you J i.167; v.107.
Tādisaka (adj.)=tādisa1, of such character Sn 278; It 68.
Tāpana (nt.) [from tāpeti] burning, scorching, roasting; fig. tormenting, torture, self -- mortification VvA 20 (aggimhi t. udake vā temanaŋ). Cp. ā˚; upa˚; pari˚.
Tāpasa [from tapa & tapas] one who practises tapas, an ascetic (brahmin). Eight kinds are enumd at DA i.270 & SnA 295. -- J ii.101, 102; v.201; PvA 153; ˚pabbajjā the life of an a. J iii.119; DhA iv.29; DA i.270. -- f. tāpasī a female ascetic Mhvs vii.11, 12.
Tāpeti [Sk. tāpayati, Caus. to tapati] to burn out, scorch, torment, fig. root out, quench Sn 451 (attānaŋ); J v. 267 (janapadaŋ); VvA 114 (kilesaŋ t. in expl. of tapassin). Cp. pari˚.
Tāma [Sk. tāma] desire, longing, greed in tāmatamada- sangha -- suppahīna Th 1, 310, an epithet of frogs, which perhaps (with Kern, Toev. ii.88) is to be read as tāma -- tamata -- suppahita; "horribly greedy" (Kern, gruwelijk vraatzuchtig).
Tāyati [Sk. trāyate & trāte, connected with *ter in tarati, orig. to see through, to save, cp. tāṇa, etc.] to shelter, protect, preserve, guard; bring up, nourish S iv.246 (rūpa -- balaŋ, bhoga˚, ñāti˚, putta˚); J iv.387; Sn 579 (paralokato na pitā tāyate puttaŋ ñātī vā pana ñātake); PvA 7 (khettaŋ tāyati bījaŋ).
Tāyitar [n. ag. from tāyati] one who protects, shelters or guards J i.412 (in expl. of tāṇa, q. v.).
Tārā (f.) [Sk. tārā=Gr. a)sth/r, a)/ston (=Lat. astrum, in E. disaster), Lat. stella, Goth. staírnō, Ohg. sterro (:E. star), perhaps loan word from Semitic sources] a star, a planet Sn 687 (tārāsabha the lord, lit. "the bull" of the stars, i. e. the Moon).
-- gaṇa (tāra˚) the host of stars Pv ii.967 (cando va t. -- gaṇe atirocati). -- maṇivitāna "star -- jewel -- awning"; canopy of jewelled stars Vism 76.
Tārakā (f.) [Sk. tārakā] 1. a star, a planet: osadhī viya tārakā like the morning -- star (Venus) Vv 92=Pv ii.110; -- J i.108; tāraka -- rūpa the light (or sparkling) of the stars D iii.85, 90; S iii.156=It 19; S v.44; VvA 79; Dhs 617. -- 2. fig. sparkling, glitter, twinkle; akkhi˚ the pupil of the eye M i.80; udaka˚ sparkling of the water ibid.
Tāreti1 [Caus. of tarati1] to make cross, to help over, to bring through, save, help, assist Sn 319 (pare tārayetuŋ), 321 (so tāraye tattha bahū pi aññe); It 123 (tiṇṇo tarayataŋ varo: "one who is through is the best of those who can help through"); J i.28 (v.203). aor. atārayi Sn 539, 540 & ṭāresi Sn 545.
Tāreti2 [Caus. of tarati2] to make haste Th 1, 293.
Tāla [Sk. tāla, cp. Gr. ta_lis & thleqa/w (be green, sprout up) Lat. talea shoot, sprout] 1. the palmyra tree (fan palm), Borassus flabelliformis; freq. in comparisons & similes M i.187; J i.202 (˚vana), 273 (˚matta as tall as a palm): VvA 162; PvA 100 (chinnamūlo viya tālo). -- 2. a strip, stripe, streak J v.372 (=raji).
-- aṭṭhika a kernel of the palm fruit DhA ii.53, cp. 60 (˚aṭṭhi -- khaṇḍa); -- kanda a bulbous plant J iv.46 (=kalamba); -- kkhandha the trunk of a palm J iv.351; VvA 227 (˚parimāṇā mukhatuṇḍā: beaks of vultures in Niraya); PvA 56; -- cchidda see tāḷa˚; -- taruṇa a young shoot of the p. Vin i.189; -- pakka palm fruit It 84; -- paṇṇa a palm -- leaf DhA i.391; ii.249; iii.328; Bdhd 62; also used as a fan (tālapattehi kata -- maṇḍalavījanī VvA 147) Vv 3343 (Hardy for ˚vaṇṭha of Goon. ed. p. 30); VvA 147 (v. l. ˚vaṇṭa q. v.); Nd2 562 (+vidhūpana); -- patta a palm -- leaf Vin i.189; VvA 147; -- miñja the pith of a p. J iv.402; -- vaṇṭa [Sk. tālavṛṇta] a fan Vin ii.130 (+vidhūpana), 137; J i.265; VvA 44, cp. ˚paṇṇa; -- vatthu (more correct tālâvatthu=tāla -- avatthu) in tālâvatthukata a palm rendered groundless, i. e. uprooted; freq. as simile to denote complete destruction or removal (of passions, faults, etc.). Nearly always in formula pahīna ucchinna -- mūla t˚ anabhāvaŋ -- kata "given up, with roots cut out, like a palm with its base destroyed, rendered unable to sprout again" (Kern, Toev. ii.88: as een wijnpalm die niet meer geschiḳt is om weêr uit te schieten). This phrase was misunderstood in BSk.: M Vastu iii.360 has kālavastuŋ. -- The readings vary: tālāvatthu e. g. at M i.370; S i.69; iv.84; A i.135; ii.38; J v.267; tālav˚ S iii.10; v.327; Th 2, 478 (ThA 286: tālassa chindita<-> -- ṭṭhāna -- sadisa); Nd2 freq. (see under pahīna); tālāvatthukatā at Vin iii.3. -- In other combn tālāvatthu bhavati (to be pulled out by the roots & thrown away) J v.267 (=chinnamūla -- tālo viya niraye nibbattanti p. 273), cp. M i.250; -- vāra "palm -- time" (?) or is it tāḷa˚ (gong -- turn?) DhA ii.49 (note: from tala -- pratiṣṭhāyāŋ?).
Tālīsa (nt.) (also tālissa J iv.286, tālīsaka Miln 338) [cp. Sk. tālī, tālīśa & talāśā] the shrub Flacourtia cataphracta & a powder or ointment obtained from it Vin i.203 (+tagara); J iv.286 (id.); Miln 338.
Tālīsa2 (No. 40) is short for cattālīsa, e.g. Ap. 103, 234 and passim.
Tālu [Sk. tālu, see tala] the palate Sn 716; J i.419; Vism 264 (˚matthaka top of p.); PvA 260.
Tāḷa1 [taḍ, cp. Sk. tāla a blow, or musical time; tālīyaka cymbal] beating, striking, the thing beaten or struck, i. e. a musical instrument which is beaten, an instr. of percussion, as a cymbal, gong, or tambourine (for tāḷa= gong cp. thāla): (a) gong, etc. J i.3; vi.60; Th 1, 893; DA i.85; DhsA 319 (kaŋsa˚). -- (b) music in general DhA iv.67.
-- âvacara musical time or measure, music, a musician D ii.159 (v. l. tāla˚); J i.60 (l); iv.41; VvA 257 (˚parivuta, of an angel).
Tāḷa2 (nt.) [Sk. tālaka=tāḍa AvŚ ii.56, tāḍaka Divy 577] a key (orig. a "knocker"?) Vin ii.148 (3 kinds: loha˚, kaṭṭha˚, visāṇa˚); Bdhd 1.
-- cchiggala a key -- hole S iv.290; v.453; Vism 500. -- cchidda id. Vin ii.120, 148, 153 (all tāla˚); iii.118; DhA iii.8 (l).
Tāḷī (f.) a strike, a blow, in urattāḷiŋ karoti to strike one's chest (as a sign of grief) PvA 39, etc. (see ura).
Tāḷeti [Sk. tāḍayati, taḍ perhaps=tud] to strike a blow, flog, beat, esp. freq. in phrase kasāhi tāḷeti to flog with whips, etc. (in list of punishments, see kasā) M i.87; A ii.122; Nd2 604; PvA 4, etc. -- ppr. pass. taḍḍamāna (for *tāḍyamāna) J vi.60 (so read for taddamāna; Com poṭhīyamāna). -- pp. tāḷita J vi.60 (turiya˚); Vv 621 (id.); Sdhp 80. Cp. abhi˚.
Tāva (adv.) [Sk. tāvat] so much, so long; usually correl. with yāva how long, how much; in all meanings to be understood out of elliptical application of this correlation. Thus I. yāva -- tāva as long as: yāva dve janā avasiṭṭhā ahesuŋ tāva aññamaññaŋ ghātayiŋsu J i. 254; yāva dukkhā nirayā idha tattha pi tāva ciraŋ vasitabbaŋ Sn 678. Neg. na tāva -- yāva na not until: M i.428; S v.261; A i.141≈(na t. kālaŋ karoti yāva na taŋ pāpakammaŋ byantihoti he does not die until his evil kamma is exhausted). II. Elliptical: 1. temporal: so long as, for the time (tāvakālikaŋ=yāvak˚tāvak˚; see below). -- 2. comparative: (such -- ) as, like, so, such, just so, rather, in such a degree, even; tāvabahuŋ suvaṇṇaŋ so much gold Vin i.209; t. -- mahanto so much J i.207; t. madhuraphala with such sweet fruit J ii.105; asītiyā tāva kimi -- kulānaŋ sādhāraṇa (of the body) or rather, i. e. Vism 235; vatthāni t. devapātubhūtāni PvA 44; paṭhamaŋ t. (even) at once, right away PvA 113, 132; gilānāya t. ayaŋ etissā rūpasobhā even in sickness she is so beautiful VvA 76; parittakassa kusalakammassa t.=quidem PvA 51; paŋsukūlikangaŋ t. in the first place Vism. 62. -- 3. concessive: (a) (absol.) as far as it goes, considering, because: yadi evaŋ pitā tāva purisabhāve na rodati, mātu nāma hadayaŋ mudukaŋ "even if the father as man does not weep, surely," &c., PvA 63. -- (b) with imper. in expr. like gaccha tāva go as long as you like (to go) (=gaccha tāva yāva gaccheyyāsi), i. e. if you like, cp. Ger. geh'immer; passa tāva just look=Lat. licet. Therefore sometimes=please or simply an emphatic imper. as "do go," etc. J ii.5 (ete t. aguṇā hontu let them be faulty), 133 (ehi t.), 352 (tiṭṭha t. leave off please), iii.53 (pāto va t. hotu only let it be to -- morrow, i. e. wait tillt -- m.); iv.2 taŋ t. me detha give me this though); VvA 289 (vīmaŋsatha t. just think); PvA 4 (t. ayyo āgametu yāvâyaŋ puriso pānīyaŋ pivissati may your honour wait till this man shall have drunk the water), 13 (therā t. gacchantu). With prohibitive: mā tāva ito agā please do not go from here Pv ii.322. -- 4. hortative, with 1st pers. fut. equal to imperative -- subjunctive or injunctive, cp. 3 (b): let me, well, now, then (cp. Lat. age in dic age, etc.). J i.62 (puttaŋ t. passissāmi please let me see the son), 263 (vīmaŋsissāmi t. let me think), 265 (nahāyissāmi t. just let me bathe). <-> III. In other combinations: tāva -- na although -- yet= not even: ajjā pi t. me balaŋ na passasi not even to -- day have you yet seen my full strength J i.207; t. mahādhanassāmī na me dātuŋ piyaŋ ahu although lord of wealth yet I did not like to give Pv ii.76. na -- tāva (or tāva in neg. sentence) not yet, not even, not so much as (=Lat. ne -- quidem) Pv ii.112 (na ca tāva khīyati does not even diminish a bit); PvA 117 (attano kenaci anabhibhavanīyataŋ eva tāva: that he is not to be overpowered, even by anyone). tāva -- d -- eva just now, instantly, on the spot, at once Sn 30; J i.61, 151; iv.2; Pv ii.89 (=tadā eva PvA 109); PvA 23, 46, 74, 88, etc. tāvade (=tāva -- d -- eva) for all times Pv iv.338 (= PvA 255).
-- kālika (adj.) "as long as the time lasts," i. e. for the time being, temporary, pro tempore Vin ii.174; iii.66; iv.286; J i.121, 393; Vism 95; ThA 288; PvA 87 (=na sassata).
Tāvataka (adj.) [der. fr. tāva] just so much or just so long (viz. as the situation requires), with (or ellipt. without) a corresp. yāvataka Vin i.83 (yāvatake -- t. as many as): D ii.18 (yāvatakv' assa kāyo tāvatakv' assa vyāmo as tall as is his body so far can he stretch his arms: the 19th sign of a Mahāpurisa); instr. as adv. tāvatakena after a little time Miln 107; DhA iii.61. -- See also tattaka (contracted of tāvataka).
Tāvatā (adv.) [from tāva] 1. so long (corr. to yāva) Dpvs iv.17. -- 2. on that account, thus D i.104 (v. l. ettāvatā); Dh 266.
Tāvatiŋsa [tayo+tiŋsa. Cp. Vedic trayastriŋśat] No. 33, only in cpds. denoting the 33 gods, whose chief is Sakka, while the numeral 33 is always tettiŋsa. This number occurs already in the Vedas with ref. to the gods & is also found in Zend -- Avesta (see Haug, Language & Writings, etc., pp. 275, 276). The early Buddhists, though they took over the number 33, rejected the superstitious beliefs in the magical influence and mystic meaning of that & other simple numbers. And they altered the tradition. The king of the gods had been Indra, of disreputable character from the Buddhist point of view. Him they deposed, and invented a new god named Sakka, the opposite in every way to Indra (see for details Dial. ii.294 -- 298). Good Buddhists, after death in this world, are reborn in heaven (sagga), by which is meant the realm of the Thirty-three (D ii.209). There they are welcomed by the Thirty-three with a song of triumph (D ii.209, 211, 221, 227). The Thirty -- three are represented as being quite good Buddhists. Sakka their new chief and Brahmā address them in discourses suitable only for followers of the new movement (D ii.213, 221). See further Vin i.12; M i.252; ii.78; iii.100; A iii.287; iv.396=VvA 18 (cpd with the people of Jambudīpa); v.59, 331, Vism 225, etc. -- See also tidasa.
-- devaloka the god -- world of the 33; freq. e. g. J i.202; Vism 399; DhA iii.8; -- bhavana the realm of the 33 gods J i.202; Vism 207 sq., 390, 416, and passim.
Tāvata (nt.) [abstr. fr. tāva] lit. "so -- much -- ness," i. e. relative extent or sphere, relatively Vism 481, 482.
Tāsa [see tasati2] terror, trembling, fear, fright, anxiety S iii.57; J i.342; iii.177, 202; Miln 24. Cp. san˚.
Tāsaniya (adj.) to be dreaded, dreadful, fearful Miln 149.
Tāhaŋ contraction of 1. taŋ ahaŋ: see ta˚; 2. te ahaŋ: see tvaŋ.
Ti (adv.) [cp. Sk. iti] the apostrophe form of iti, thus. See iti.
Ti˚ [Vedic tris, Av. priś, Gr. tri/s, Lat. ter (fr. ters>*tris, cp. testis> *tristo, trecenti>*tricenti), Icl. prisvar, Ohg. driror] base of numeral three in compn; consisting of three, threefold; in numerical cpds. also= three (3 times).
-- kaṭuka threefold spices (kaṭuka -- bhaṇḍa) VvA 186; -- gāvuta a distance of 3/4 of a league (i. e. about 2 miles), DhA i.108 (less than yojana, more than usabha), 131, 396; ii.43, 61, 64, 69; iii.202, 269; VvA 227; B. on S i.52 (sarīra); -- catu three or four DhA i.173; -- cīvara (nt.) the 3 robes of a bhikkhu, consisting of: diguṇā sanghāṭi, ekacciya uttarāsanga, ekacciya antaravāsaka Vin i.289, 296; ii.302. ticīvarena avippavāsa Vin i.109 sq. -- Vism 60, 66; DhA iv.23. -- tālamattaŋ 3 palm -- trees high DhA ii.62. -- daṇḍa 1. a tripod as one of the requisites of a hermit to place the water -- pot on (kuṇḍikā) J i.8 (tidaṇḍakuṇḍikādike tāpasa -- parikkhārā), 9 (hanging from the kāja); ii.317 (see tedaṇḍika). -- 2. part of a chariot A iv.191 (v. l. daṇḍa only). -- diva the 3 heavens (that is the Tāvatiŋsa heaven) D ii.167, 272 (tidivûpapanna); S i.96 (˚ŋ ṭhānaŋ upeti), 181 (ākankha -- māno ˚ŋ anuttaraŋ). -- pada [cp. Vedic tripad or tripād, Gr. tri/pous, Lat. tripes: tripod] consisting of 3 feet or (in prosody) of 3 padas Sn 457 (w. ref. to metre Sāvittī); -- (p)pala threefold Vism 339; -- pallattha "turning in 3 ways," i. e. skilled in all occupations (Kern, Toev.: zeer listig) J i.163 (of miga; Com. expl. as lying on 3 sides of its lair); -- piṭaka the 3 Piṭakas Vism 62, 241; DhA i.382; -- peṭaka=tepiṭaka Miln 90; tipeṭakin at Vin v.3; -- maṇḍala (nt.) the 3 circles (viz. the navel & the 2 knees) Vin ii.213 (˚ŋ paṭicchādento parimaṇḍalaŋ nivāsento); cp. Vin. Texts i.155; -- yojana a distance of 3 leagues, i. e. 20 miles, or fig. a long dist.; Vism 392 (tiyojanika setacchatta); DhA ii.41 (˚magga); VvA 75 (˚mattake vihāraŋ agamāsi); PvA 216 (sā ca pokkharaṇī Vesaliyā ˚mattake hoti); ˚satika 300 cubits long J ii.3; -- loka the 3 worlds (i. e. kāma, rūpa, arūpa -- loka) Sdhp 29, 276, 491 (cp. tebhūmaka); -- vagga consisting of 3 divisions or books DA i.2 (Dīghāgamo vaggato t. hoti); -- (v)angika having 3 angas (of jhāna) Dhs 161; -- vassika for the 3 seasons ( -- gandha -- sālibhattaŋ bhuñjantā) DhA ii.9; J i.66 (id.); -- vidha 3 fold, of sacrifice (yañña) D i.128, 134, 143; of aggi (fire) J i.4 & Miln 97; Vism 147 (˚kalyāṇatā). -- visākha a three -- forked frown on the forehead S i.118; M i.109; -- sandhi consisting of 3 spaces J vi.397 (tāya senāya Mithilā t. -- parivāritā), expld as an army made up of elephants, chariots, cavalry, and infantry, with a space between each two.
Tiŋsaŋ (tiŋsa˚) [Vedic triŋśat, cp. Lat. trīginta, Oir. tricha] the number 30 D i.81≈(tiŋsaŋ pi jātiyo); S ii.217 (t. -- mattā bhikkhū); dat. instr. tiŋsāya A v.305 (dhammehi samannāgato); Sn p. 87 (pi dadāmi) PvA 281 (vassasahassehi): t. -- yojana -- maggaŋ (āgato) DhA ii.76, 79; iii.172; PvA 154; ˚yojanika kantāra DhA ii. 193 (cp. 192); J v.46 (magga); DhA i.26 (vimāna); t. -- vassasahassāni āyuppamāṇaŋ (of Konāgamana Buddha) D ii.3; t. -- mattāni vassāni Miln 15; t. -- vassasahassāni PvA 281=DhA ii.10. So of an immense crowd: tiŋsa bhikkhu -- sahassāni D ii.6; tiŋsa -- mattā sūkarā J ii.417; ˚sahassa -- bhikkhū DhA i.24.
Tika (adj. -- n.) [Vedic trika] consisting of 3, a triad S ii. 218 (t. -- bhojana); DhA iv.89 ( -- nipāta, the book of the triads, a division of the Jātaka), 108 (t. -- catukka -- jhāna the 3 & the 4 jhānas); Miln 12 (tika -- duka -- paṭimaṇḍitā dhammasanganī); Vism 13 sq.; DhsA 39 ( -- duka triad & pair).
Tikicchaka [fr. tikicchati] a physician, a doctor A v.219; J i.4 (adj. & vejja); iv.361; PvA 233.
Tikicchati [also cikicchati=Sk. cikitsati. Desid. of cit, to aim at, think upon, in pregnant sense of endeavouring to heal] to treat medically, to cure Vin i.276; S i.222; Miln 172, 272, 302. Caus. tikicchāpeti J i.4.
Tikicchā (f.) [from last] the art of healing, practice of medicine D i.10 (dāraka˚ infant healing); Sn 927 (˚ŋ māmako na seveyya). -- See also tekiccha.
Tikkaŋ at J v.291 in "yāva majjhantikā tikkam āgami yeva" is to be read as "yāva majjhantik' âtikkamm'<-> âgami yeva."
Tikkha (adj.) [=tikhiṇa] sharp, clever, acute, quick (only fig. of the mind), in tikkh -- indriya (opp. mud -- indriya) Nd2 2353p=Ps i.121=ii.195; & tikkha -- paññatā A i.45.
Tikkhattuŋ (adv.) [Sk. trikṛtvaḥ] three times (cp. tayo II. C 2), esp. in phrase vanditvā t. padakkhiṇaŋ katvā "having performed the reverent parting salutation 3 times" VvA 173, 219; t. sāvesi he announced it 3 times J ii.352; DhA ii.4; t. paggaṇhāpesi offered 3 times PvA 74. See also J iv.267; v.382; vi.71; DhA ii.5, 42, 65, 338; iv.122 & passim.
Tikhiṇa (adj.) [Vedic tīkṣṇa of which t. is the diaeretic form, whereas the contracted forms are tiṇha (q. v.) & tikkha. Cp. also Sk. tikta pp. of tij, tejate. From *steg in Gr. sti/zw "stitch" & stikto/s, Lat. instīgo, Ohg. stehhan, Ger. stecken, E. stick] pointed, sharp, pungent, acrid; fig. "sharp," clever, cunning, acute (in this meaning only in contr. form tikkha) J v.264; DhA ii.9; iv.13; PvA 152, 221 (=tippa). (ati -- ) tikhinatā Miln 278. See also tippa & tibba & cp. tejo.
Tiṭṭha (adj.) [pp. of tasati1] dry, hard, rough J vi.212 (˚sela hard rock).
Tiṭṭhati [Frequentative of Vedic sthā, stand (cp. sthāna, Lat. sto: see ṭhāna)= Av. hiśtaiti, Gr. i(/sthmi, Lat. sisto] to stand, etc. -- I. Forms: pres. ind. tiṭṭhati (Sn 333, 434; Pv i.51); imper. 2nd tiṭṭha, 3rd tiṭṭhatu; ppr. tiṭṭhaŋ, tiṭṭhanto, tiṭṭhamāna; pot. tiṭṭhe (Sn 918, 968) & tiṭṭheyya (Sn. 942); fut. ṭhassati (J i.172, 217); aor. aṭṭhāsi (J i.279, pl. aṭṭhaŋsu J ii.129) & aṭṭhā (cp. agā, orig. impf.) (Sn 429; J i.188); inf. ṭhātuŋ (PvA 174); ger. ṭhatvā (Sn 887); grd. ṭhānīya (PvA 72). -- pp. ṭhita, Caus. ṭhapeti. An apparent Med. -- Pass. ṭhīyati, as found in cpd. pati -- ṭṭhīyati is to be expld as Med. of paṭi+sthyā (see thīna), and should be written paṭi -- tthīyati. See under patiṭṭhīyati. See also ṭhāna & ṭhiti. -- II. Meanings. -- 1. to stand, stand up, to be standing (see ṭhāna I. 1a): ṭhānakappana -- vacanaŋ nisajjādi -- paṭikkhepato PvA 24; opp. to walking or lying down: tiṭṭhaŋ caraŋ nisinno vā Sn 151, 193; tiṭṭhamānāya eva c' assā gabbhavuṭṭhānaŋ ahosi "she was delivered standing" J i.52; ekamantaŋ aṭṭhāsi PvA 68, etc.; cankamana -- koṭiyaŋ ṭhatvā PvA 79. -- 2. to stop, stay, abide; to last, endure, be at rest; fig. to remain in, abide by, acquiesce in (see ṭhāna I. 1b). In imper. tiṭṭhatu it approaches the meanings of ṭhapeti viz. leave it alone, let it be so, all right. yāva kāyo ṭhassati tāva naŋ dakkhinti deva -- manussā (as long as the body shall last) D i.46. tiṭṭhe shall he live on (cp. ṭhāna II.d Sn 1053, 1072 =Nd2 283, tiṭṭheyya saṭṭhikappasahassāni to stay on indefinitely); tiṭṭheyya kappaŋ D ii.103. tiṭṭhantī anto vimānasmiŋ "remaining inside the castle" Pv i.101; tiṭṭha tāva "stop please" J ii.352; tiṭṭhabhadantika one who bids the guest stay (combd w. ehi -- bh˚) D i.166; M i.342; A i.295; ii.206: ovāde ṭhatvā (abiding by) J i.153; vi.367; similarly J vi.336. -- Imper. tiṭṭhatu J iv.40; Miln 14; PvA 74. -- 3. to live (on=instr.), behave, exist, be (see ṭhāna I. 2); to be in a certain condition [gati, cp. ṭhāna II. (c)]. Often periphrastically for finite verb (with ger.: cp. gata & ṭhita) tiṭṭhantam enaŋ jānāti (he knows their "gati") Sn 1114 (see Nd2 283); āhārena tiṭṭhati PvA 27 (is supported by, cp. ṭhiti); yāvatāyukaŋ ṭhatvā (outliving their lives) PvA 66; karuṇa -- ṭhānīya (=*kāruṇayitabba) deserving pity PvA 72; yā tvaŋ tiṭṭhasi (how you are or look!) Vv 441, etc. -- with ger.: pharitvā aṭṭhāsi (pervaded) J vi.367; aṭṭhiŋ āhacca aṭṭhāsi (cut through to the bone) J iv.415; gehaŋ samparivāretvā aṭṭhaŋsu (encircled the house) PvA 22.
Tiṇa (nt.) [Vedic tṛṇa, from *ter (cp. tarati) to pierce, orig. "point" (= blade); Goth. paúrnus, Ags. porn=E. thorn, Ger. dorn] grass, herb; weed; straw; thatch; hay, litter S iii.137 (tiṇa, kasā, kusa, babbaja, bīraṇa); satiṇakaṭṭhodaka full of grass, wood & water (of an estate) D i.87, 111, etc.; sītaŋ vā uṇhaŋ vā rajo vā tiṇaŋ vā ussāvo vā (dust & weeds) D ii.19; A i.145; t.+paṇṇa (grass & leaves1) A i.183; VvA 5. -- J i.108 (dabba˚), 295; iii.53; Pv i.81 (harita t.); iv.148; Vism 353 (kuṇṭha˚); DA i.77 (alla˚ fresh grass); PvA 7 (weed), 62 (grass), 112; DhA iv.121; Miln 47 (thatch), 224 (id.).
-- aṇḍupaka a roll of grass Vin i.208=iii.249; -- āgāra a thatched cottage A i.101 (+naḷāgāra); -- ukkā a firebrand of dry grass or hay S ii.152; iii.185; J i.212, 296; Vism 428; DhA i.126; ThA 287; Bdhd 107; -- karala a wisp of grass DhA iii.38; -- kājaka a load of g. DhA iv.121; -- gahana a thicket of g., a jungle A i.153; -- cuṇṇa crushed & powdered (dry) grass or herbs Vin i.203; VvA 100 ( -- rajânukiṇṇa); -- jāti grass -- creeper VvA 162; -- dāya a grass -- jungle S ii.152; -- dosa damaged by weeds (khetta) Dh 356; PvA 7; -- pupphaka ( -- roga) sickness caused by the flowering of grass, hay -- fever Miln 216; -- purisaka a straw -- man, a scarecrow Miln 352; Vism 462; DhsA 111; -- bhakkha eating grass; of animals M iii.167; of ascetics D i.166; Pug 55; A i.241, 295; -- bhusa chaff, litter, dry grass VvA 47; -- rukkha a shrub; -- vatthāraka one of the seven Adhikaraṇasamathas (ways in which litigation may be settled). In case mutual complaints of breach of the rules have been brought before a chapter, then the chapter may decline to go into the details and, with the consent of the litigants, declare all the charges settled. See Vin. Texts, iii.30 -- 34. This is the "covering over as if with grass" Vin ii.87 (in detail, cp. also tassapāpiyyasikā); D iii.254; A i.99; M ii.250; -- santhāraka a mat of grass Vin i.286; ii.113, 116; J i.360.
Tiṇava a sort of drum A ii.117.
Tiṇḍuka see tinduka.
Tiṇṇa [pp. of tarati] one who has reached the other shore (always fig.) gone through, overcome, one who has attained Nibbāna. Ogha˚ gone through the great flood S i.3, 142; Sn 178, 823, 1082, 1101, 1145; D iii. 54; Sn 21 (+pāragata), 359 (+parinibbuta), 515, 545 (tiṇṇo tāres' imaŋ pajaŋ); It 123 (tiṇṇo tārayataŋ varo); Dh 195 ( -- sokapariddava); Nd2 282.
-- kathankatha (adj.) having overcome doubt, free from doubt Sn 17, 86, 367; -- vicikiccha=prec. Vin i.16; D i.110; ii.224, 229; Pug 68; DA i.211.
Tiṇha [see tikhiṇa] sharp (of swords, axes, knives, etc.) D i.56 (sattha); S iv.160, 167 (kuṭhārī); A iv.171; Sn 667 (˚dhāra), 673 (asipattavana); J i.253; Sdhp 381.
Titikkhati [Sk. titikṣate, Desid. of tij, cp. tijo & tikhiṇa to bear, endure, stand S i.221; Sn 623; Dh 321=Nd2 475 B7; Dh 399 (titikkhissaŋ=sahissāmi DhA iv.3); J v.81, 368.
Titikkhā (f.) [see last] endurance, forgiveness, long- suffering S i.7; v.4; Dh 184; Nd2 203.
Titta [pp. of tappati2] satisfied (with=instr.) enjoying (c. gen.), happy, contented A i.87=Pug 26 (+tappetar); Miln 249; VvA 86 (=pīṇita); PvA 46 (dibbâhārassa), 59 (=suhita), 109 (=pīṇita). -- atitta dissatisfied, insatiate J i.440; iii.275; Dh 48 (kāmesu).
Tittaka (adj.) [cp. Sk. tiktaka from tij] sharp, bitter (of taste) M i.80 (˚alābu), 315 (id.); PvA 47 (id.; so read for tintaka lābu) Dhs 629=Nd2 540 (tittika; enumd between lavaṇa & kaṭuka); DhsA 320.
Tittakatta (nt.) [abstr. to tittaka] bitterness, enumd with lavaṇattaŋ & kaṭukattaŋ at Miln 56=63 (cp. Nd2 540).
Titti (f.) [from tappati2] satisfaction (in=loc.) Dh 186 =ThA 287 (na kahāpaṇavassena t. kāmesu vijjati); n' atthi t. kāmānaŋ Th 2, 487; J v.486 (dhammesu); VvA 11; PvA 32 (˚ŋ gacchati find s.) 55 (paṭilabhati), 127.
Tittika in sama˚ at D i.244, Vin i.230, brimful, of a river. Derivation & meaning doubtful. See the note at Buddhist Suttas, 178, 9.
Tittimant (adj.) [titti+mant] satisfied, contented, so read at J iii.70 & vi.508 for kittimant.
Tittira [Onomat. cp. Vedic tittira & tittiri, Gr. tatu/ras pheasant, Lit. teterva heath -- cock; Lat. tetrinnio to cackle] partridge J i.218; iii.538. -- pattikā a kind of boot Vin i.186.
Tittiriya (adj.) [fr. tittira] belonging to a partridge, like a partridge J i.219 (brahmacariya).
Tittha (nt.) [Vedic tīrtha, from *ter, tarate, to pass through, orig. passage (through a river), ford] 1. a fording place, landing place, which made a convenient bathing place D ii.89=Vin i.230 (Gotama˚ the G. ford); J i.339, 340 (titthāraṇa); ii.111; iii.228 (˚nāvika ferryman); 230 (nāvā˚ a ferry); iv.379; Pv ii.120; iii.64; iv.122 (su˚); Dāvs. v.59 (harbour). Titthaŋ jānāti to know a "fording place," i. e. a means or a person to help over a difficulty or doubt M i.223=A v.349 (neg.) 2. a sect (always with bad connotation. Promising to lead its votaries over into salvation, it only leads them into error).
-- âyatana the sphere or fold of a sect (cp. titthiya) Vin i.60, 69; ii.279; M i.483; A i.173; Pug 22; Dhs 381, 1003 (cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 101n); DA i.118; Ledi Sadaw in J.P.T.S. 1913, 117 -- 118; -- kara a "ford -- maker," founder of a sect D i.47, 116; M i.198; Sn pp. 90, 92; Miln 4, 6, etc.; -- ññutā knowledge of a ford, in fig. sense of titthaŋ jānāti (see above) Nett 29, 80.
Titthika (adj.) [Possible reading in Burmese MSS. for tittika. But the two compound letters (tt and tth) are so difficult to distinguish that it is uncertain which of the two the scribe really meant].
Titthiya [from tittha 2, cp. Divy 817; AvŚ i.48; ii.20. An adherent of another sect (often as añña˚), an heretic Vin i.54, 84, 136, 159 (˚samādāna), 306 (˚dhaja), 320; S i.65; iv.37, 394; D iii.44, 46; Sn 381, 891; Nd2 38; Ps i.160; Pug 49; Vbh 247. añña˚ e. g. Vin i.101; D i.175 sq.; iii.130 sq.; J ii.415, 417. -- sāvaka a follower of an heretic teacher Vin i.172; J i.95; Vism 17.
Tithi [Sk. tithi] a lunar day DhA i.174; PvA 198.
Tidasa (num.) [Vedic tridaśa] thirty (cp. tiŋsa), esp. the thirty deities (pl.) or belonging to them (adj.). It is the round figure for 33, and is used as equivalent to tāvatiŋsa. Nandanaŋ rammaŋ tidasānaŋ mahāvanaŋ Pv iii.119=Vv 1813; devā tidasā sahindakā Vv 301; Sdhp 420.
-- âdhipati the Lord of the 30 (viz. Sakka) Vv 478; -- inda ruler of the 30 Sdhp 411, 478; -- gaṇa the company of the 30 Sn 679 (Com. tettiŋsa); Vv 416; -- gatin going to the 30 (as one of the gatis) Vv 3512 (=tidasabhavanaŋ gata Tāvatiŋsadevanikāyaŋ uppanna VvA 164); -- pura the city of the 30, i. e. Heaven Miln 291; -- bhavana the state of the 30, i. e. heavenly existence VvA 164 (=Tāvatiŋsabhavana).
Tidhā (adv.) [ti+dhā] in three ways or parts, threefold Miln 282 ( -- pabhinna nāgarājā).
Tinta (adj.) [=timita from temeti] wet, moist Miln 286; DhA ii.40 (˚mukha).
Tintaka at PvA 47 (˚alābu) is to be read as tittaka˚.
Tintiṇa (nt.) greed, desire; (adj.) greedy. Ep. of a pāpa- bhikkhu A v.149 (Com. tintiṇaŋ vuccati taṇhā, tāya samannāgato āsankābahulo vā); Vbh 351 (tintiṇaŋ tintiṇāyanā, etc.=loluppaŋ).
Tintiṇāti & Tintiṇāyati [either=Sk. timirayati to be obscured, from tim in timira, or from stim (Sk. *tistimāyati>*stistim˚ after tiṣṭhati>*stiṣṭhati;=P. titiṇāyati) to become stiff, cp. timi, thīna and in meaning mucchati. The root tam occurs in same meaning in cpd. nitammati (q. v.=Sk. nitāmyati) at J iv.284, expld by atikilamati] to become sick, to swoon, to (stiffen out in a) faint J i.243 (tintiṇanto corresp. with mucchita); vi.347 (tintiṇāyamāna, v. l. tiṇāy˚).
Tinduka [Sk. tinduka] the tree Diospyros embryopteris D i.178 (v. l. tiṇḍ˚; J v.99; tiṇḍukāni food in a hermitage J iv.434; vi.532. -- tindukakandarā Npl. the T. cave Vin ii.76. -- See also timbaru & timbarūsaka.
Tipu [cp. Sk. trapu, non -- Aryan?] lead, tin Vin i.190 (˚maya); S v.92; J ii.296; Miln 331 (˚kāra a worker in lead, tinsmith); Vism 174 (˚maṇḍala); DhA iv.104 (˚parikhā).
Tipusa (nt.) [Sk. trapusa] a species of cucumber J v.37; VvA 147.
Tippa (adj.) [a variant of tibba=Sk. tīvra, presumably from tij (cp. tikhiṇa), but by Bdhgh connected w. tap (tapati, burn): tippā ti bahalā tāpana -- vasena vā tippā Com. to Anguttara (see M i.526)] piercing, sharp, acute, fierce; always & only with ref. to pains, esp. pains suffered in Niraya. In full combns sarīrikā vedanā dukkhā tippā kharā M i.10; A ii.116, 143, 153; ekantadukkhā t. kaṭukā ved. M i.74; bhayānaka ekantatippa Niraya Pv iv.19 (=tikhiṇadukkha˚ PvA 221); nerayikā sattā dukkhā t. kaṭukā ved˚ vediyamānā Miln 148.
Tibba (adj.) probably a contamination of two roots of different meaning; viz. tij & tim (of tamas) or=stim to be motionless, cp. styā under thīna] 1. sharp, keen, eager: tibbagārava very devout A ii.21; Nett 112 (cp. tīvraprasāda AvŚ i.130); t. -- cchanda D iii.252, 283. <-> 2. dense, thick; confused, dark, dim: t. -- rāga Dh 349 (=bahalarāga DhA iv.68); A ii.149; tibbo vanasaṇḍo avijjāya adhivacanaŋ S iii.109; tibbasārāga (kāmesu) S iii.93=It 90; A ii.30; tibbo manussaloko (dark, dense) Miln 7; ˚andhakāra dense darkness Vism 500 sq.; ˚kilesu deep blemish (of character) Vism 87.
Timi [Derivation unknown. Sk. timi] a large fish, a leviathan; a fabulous fish of enormous size. It occurs always in combn w. timingala, in formula timi timingala timitimingala, which should probably be reduced to one simple timitimingala (see next).
Timingala [timi+gila, gl, see note on gala] in combn w. timi, timitimingala. Sk. has timingila & timingilagila: redupl. in 2nd syllable where P. has redupl. in 1st; fisheater, redupl. as intens.=greedy or monstrous fisheater, a fabulous fish of enormous size, the largest fish in existence Vin ii.238=A iv.200=Nd2 2353q; Ps ii.196; Miln 377. At Ud 54 sq. & Miln 262 we find the reading timi timingala timirapingala, which is evidently faulty. A Sanskritized form of t. is timitimingala at Divy 502. See timiratipingala, & cp. also the similar Sk. cilicima a sort of fish.
Timira (adj.) [Sk. timira fr. tim=tam (as in tamas), to which also belong tibba 2 & tintiṇāti. This is to be distinguished from tim in temeti to (be or) make wet. See tama] dark; nt. darkness Vv 323 (t. -- tamba); J iii.189 (t. -- rukkha); vanatimira a flower J iv.285; v.182.
Timiratipingala (nt.) a great ocean fish, DhsA 13, v. timin- gala.
Timirāyittata (nt.) [abstr. to timirāyita, pp. of timirayati to obscure, denom. to timira] gloom, darkness S iii.124 (=Māra).
Timisa (nt.) [Vedic tamisrā=tamas] darkness J iii.433 (andhakāra -- timissāya); Pug 30 (andh˚ -- timisāya); Miln 283
Timīsikā (f.) [timisa+ka] darkness, a very dark night Vv 96; J iv.98.
Timbaru a certain tree (Strychnos nux vomica or Dios- pyros) J vi.336; ˚tthanī (f.) "with breasts like the t. fruit" Sn 110; J vi.457 (SnA 172: taruṇadārikā); VvA 137 (t. -- nādasadisa).
Timbarukkha=timbarūsaka J vi.529.
Timbarūsaka=timbaru (Diospyros or Strychnos) Vin iii.59; Vv 3327 (=tindukaphala VvA 147; tipusasadisā ekā vallijāti timbarūsakan ti ca vadanti); DhA iii.315.
Tiraccha (adv.) [Vedic tiryañc, obliquely, from *ter (tarati). Goth. pairh, Ohg. durh, E. through; cp. tiriyaŋ] across, obliquely; in ˚bhūta deviating, going wrong, swerving from the right direction DA i.89 (see under tiracchāna -- kathā).
Tiracchāna [for ˚gata=Sk. tiraścīna (˚gata)=tiraśca; "going horizontally," i. e. not erect. Cp. tiraccha, tiriyaŋ, tiro] an animal It 92 (tiracchānaŋ ca yoniyo for tiracchāna -- yoniyo); Vbh 339 (˚gāminī paṭipadā leading to rebirth among beasts); VvA 23 (manussatiracchāna an animal -- man, wild man, "werwolf").
-- kathā "animal talk"; wrong or childish talk in general Vin i.188; D i.7, 178; iii.54; Vism 127; expld at DA i.89 by anīyānikattā sagga -- mokkha -- maggānaŋ tiraccha -- bhūtā kathā; -- gata an animal, a beast Vin iv.7; S iii.152=DA i.23; (t. pāṇā) M iii.167 (t. pāṇā tiṇabhakkhā); Nd2 on Sn 72 (t. -- pāṇā); J i.459 (=vanagocara); Vbh 412 sq.; -- yoni the realm of the brute creation, the animals. Among the 5 gatis (niraya t. manussā devā pettivisaya) it counts as an apāyagati, a state of misery D i.228; iii.234; S i.34; iii.225 sq.; iv. 168, 307; A i.60; ii.127, 129; Pv iv.111; Vism 103, 427; PvA 27, 166; -- yonika (& yoniya A i.37) belonging to the realm of the animals S v.356; -- vijjā a low art, a pseudo -- science Vin ii.139; D i.9 sq.
Tiriyaŋ (adv.) [Vedic tiryañc (tiryak) to tiras, see tiro & cp. perhaps Ger. quer=E. thwart, all to *ter in tarati] transversely, obliquely, horizontally (as opp. to uddhaŋ vertically, above, & adho beneath), slanting, across. In combn uddhaŋ adho tiriyaŋ sabbadhi "in all directions whatever" D i.251=A ii.129; similarly uddhaŋ adho t. vâpi majjhe Sn 1055; with uddhaŋ & adho D i.23, 153; Vism 176 (where expld). -- A ii.48; Sn 150, 537; J i.96; It 120; DhA i.40 (dvāra -- majjhe t. across the doorway), 47 (sideways); DA i.312; KhA 248.
-- taraṇa ferrying across, adj. ˚ā nāvā, a vessel crossing over, a traject Vin iv.65.
Tiriyā (f.) a kind of grass or creeper A iii.240, 242 (tiriyā nāma tiṇajāti; Com. dabbatiṇa).
Tirivaccha a certain tree J v.46.
Tirīṭa (nt.) the tree Symplocos racemosa, also a garment made of its bark Vin i.306 (˚ka); D i.166=A i.295; M i.343; Pug 51.
Tiro (prep. & adv.) (always ˚ -- ) [Vedic tiras across, cross- ways, from *ter of tarati=to go through; cp. Av. tarō, Lat. trans, Cymr. tra] across, beyond, over, outside, afar. See also tiraccha & tiriyaŋ.
-- karaṇī (f.) a curtain, a veil (lit. "drawing across") Vin i.276; ii.152; -- kucchigata having left the womb D ii.13; -- kuḍḍa outside the fence or wall, over the wall Vin iv.265 (˚kuḍḍe uccāraŋ chaḍḍeti); D i.78= A iii.280 (in phrase tirobhāvaŋ t. kuḍḍaŋ t. pākāraŋ t. -- pabbataŋ asajjamāno gacchati to denote power of transplacement); Pv i.51 (˚kuḍḍesu tiṭṭhanti: the Tirokuḍḍa -- Sutta, Khp VII.); Vism 176, 394; DhA i.104; PvA 23, 31; -- gāma a distant village Vin iii.135; -- chada "outside the veil," conspicuous J vi.60; -- janapada a distant or foreign country D i.116; -- pākāra beyond or over a fence (˚pākāraŋ or ˚pākāre) Vin iv.266; see also ˚kuḍḍa; -- bhāva (ŋ) beyond existence, out of existence, magic power of going to a far away place or concealment Vism 393 sq. (=a -- pākaṭa -- pāṭihāriya), see also under ˚kuḍḍa. -- raṭṭha a foreign kingdom D i.161 (=pararaṭṭha DA i.286).
Tirokkha 1. (adj.) one who is outside, or absent Vin iii.185. -- 2. (adv.) [= tiras+ka, cp. tiraskāra disdain, abuse] in tirokkha -- vāca one who speaks abusively or with disregard J v.78.
Tila (m. nt.) [Vedic tila m.] the sesame plant & its seed (usually the latter, out of which oil is prepared: see tela), Sesamum Indicum. Often combd with taṇḍula, e. g. A i.130=Pug 32; J i.67; iii.53. -- Vin i.212 (navātilā); A iv.108; Sn p. 126; J i.392; ii.352; Vism 489 (ucchu˚); DhA i.79; PvA 47 (tilāni pīḷetvā telavaṇijjaŋ karoti).
-- odana rice with sesame J iii.425; -- kakka sesame paste Vin i.205; -- tela ses. oil VvA 54 (˚ŋ pātukāma); DhA iii.29; Bdhd 105; -- piññāka tila seed -- cake, oilcake VvA 142; -- piṭṭha sesamum -- grinding, crushed s. seed Vin iv.341. -- muṭṭhi a handful of ses. J ii.278; -- rāsi a heap of t. seeds VvA 54; -- vāha a cartload of t. seeds A v.173=Sn p. 126; -- sangulikā a ses. cake DhA ii.75.
Tilaka [tila+ka, from its resemblance to a sesame seed] 1. a spot, stain, mole, freckle M i.88; S i.170; VvA 253; DhA iv.172 (˚ŋ vā kālakaŋ vā adisvā). -- 2. a kind of tree Vv 67 (=bandhu -- jīvaka -- puppha -- sadisa -- pupphā ekā rukkha -- jāti).
Tilañchaka at J. iv.364 acc. to Kern (Toev. ii.91) to be read as nilañchaka.
Tisata (num.) [ti+sata] three hundred J vi.427 (˚mattā nāvā). See also under tayo.
Tīra (nt.) [Vedic tiras from *ter, tarati; orig. the opposite bank, the farther side (of a river or ocean), cp. tittha] a shore, bank Vin i.1; D i.222, 244; A ii.29, 50; Dh 85; Sn 672; J i.212, 222, 279; ii.111, 159; Dhs 597; Vbh 71 sq.; Vism 512 (orima˚); PvA 142, 152. -- tīra -- dassin finding the shore S iii.164; A iii.368. -- a -- tīra -- dassanī (f.) not seeing the shore (nāvā a ship) J v.75.
Tīraṇa [from tīreti 2] measurement, judgment, recognition, Nd2 413 (v. l. tir˚); Nett 54 (+vipassanā), 82 (≈ñāṇa), 191; Vism 162. -- tīraṇa is one of the 3 pariññās, viz. t˚, pahāna˚, ñāta -- pariññā. See under pariññā.
Tīriya (adj.) [from tīra] dwelling on the banks of . . . Vin ii.287.
Tīreti [Caus. of tarati] 1. to bring through, to finish, to execute (business), to accomplish: karaṇīyaŋ Miln 7, PvA 203; kiccaŋ PvA 278. -- 2. to measure, judge, recognize, always in formula tūleti tīreti vibhāveti (Nd2 tul˚ tir˚, etc.) as interpretation of jānāti; pp. tīrita (Nd2 tirita) Ps ii.200; Nd2 under ñāta & No. 413.
Tīvarā (pl.) N. of a people in the time of Buddha Kaku- sandha S ii.191.
Tīhaŋ (adv.) [tri+aha] a period of three days, for 3 days; usually as cpd. dvīhatīhaŋ 2 or 3 days (see dvīha) J ii.103, etc.
Tu (indecl.) [Vedic tu, belonging to pron. base of 2nd sg. tvaŋ=Lat. tu; Gr. tu /, toi/=indeed, however (orig. ethical dat, of su/), toi/nun, toi/gar; Goth. pu, etc., cp. tuvaŋ] however, but, yet, now, then (similar in appl. to tāva); kin tu but (=quid nunc). Frequent in late verse: ante tu, J.P.T.S. 1884, 5, 31, 37 etc. J.P.T.S. 1913, 53; Bd's Man. 1152 &c. Usually combd with eva: tv eva however Sn p. 141; na tv eva not however, but not A v.173.
Tunga (adj.) [Sk. tunga, tum to stand out, cp. Gr. tu/mbos hillock, Lat. tumeo & tumulus, Mir. tomm hill] high, prominent, long J i.89; iii.433 (pabbata, expld however by tikhiṇa, sharp, rough); Dāvs. iv.30.
-- nāsika one with a prominent or long nose S ii.284; cp. saṇha -- tunga -- sadisī nāsikā Th 2,258; -- vaṇṭaka having a long stalk; N. of a plant J vi.537.
Tuccha (adj.) [Sk. tuccha, prob. rel. to Lat. tesqua deserted place, see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.] empty, vain, deserted; very often combd with ritta D i.55; iii.53 (˚kumbhi); M i.207; J i.209 (˚hattha, empty -- handed); vi.365; Sn 883; Pug 45, 46; Miln 5 (+palāpa), 10 (id.), 13; DhA ii.43; PvA 202; Sdhp 431.
Tucchaka=tuccha; always combd w. rittaka D i.240; S iii.141; M i.329.
Tujjati Pass. of tudati.
Tuṭṭha [pp. of tussati to be satisfied] pleased, satisfied; often combd w. haṭṭha (q. v.) i. e. tuṭṭha -- haṭṭha J i.19 or haṭṭha -- tuṭṭha J ii.240; cp. tuṭṭha -- pahaṭṭha J ii.240. -- Sn 683; It 103; J i.62 (˚mānasa), 87, 266 (˚citta), 308 (id.); iv.138. -- tuṭṭhabba (grd.) to be pleased with Vin iv.259.
Tuṭṭhi (f.) [from tussati] pleasure, joy, enjoyment S i.48; Dh 331 (nom. tuṭṭhī); J i.60, 207.
Tuṇḍa (nt.) [Sk. tuṇḍa, prob. dial. for tunda which belongs to tudati] the beak of birds, the mouth, snout S v.148 (of a monkey); J i.222; iv.210; DhA i.394.
Tuṇḍaka (nt.)=tuṇḍa J i.222; iii.126.
Tuṇḍika see ahi˚.
Tuṇḍiya (adj.) [from tuṇḍi] having a beak; n. a pecker, fig. a tax -- collector J v.102 (=adhamma -- bali -- sādhaka 103).
Tuṇhikkhaka (adj.) [fr. tūṣṇīŋ, see next] silent J iv.25 (=kiñci avadanto).
Tuṇhī (indecl.) [Sk. tūṣṇīŋ acc. sg. of fem. abstr. tūṣṇī, used adverbially, from tussati] silently, esp. in phrase tuṇhī ahosi he remained silent, as a sign of consent or affirmative answer (i. e. he had nothing to say against it) D ii.155; A v.194; Dh 227; Sn 720 (tuṇhī yāti mahodadhi); PvA 117.
-- bhāva silence, attitude of consent, usually in form. adhivāsesi tuṇhī -- bhāvena he agreed Vin i.17; Sn p. 104, etc. -- S ii.236, 273 (ariyo t. -- bhāvo); M i.161 (id.); A iv.153 (id.). -- Miln 15; PvA 17, 20, etc.; -- bhūta silent Sn p. 140; Vv 20; DhA 172, etc.
Tuṇhīyati=taṇhāyati, misspelling at S ii.13.
Tuṇhīra inorganic form for tūṇīra quiver J v.128, also as v. l. at J v.48.
Tutta (nt.) [Sk tottra, from tudati to prick, push] a pike for guiding elephants, a goad for driving cattle (cp. tomara & patoda) D ii.266 (˚tomara); J iv.310; v.268; Cp. iii.5, 2 (t. -- vegahata).
Tudati [Vedic tudati; *steud, enlarged fr. *steu, cp. Lat. tundo, tudes (hammer); Goth. stautan, Ohg. stozan (to push), E. stutter, Nhg. stutzen; Ags. styntan=E. stunt] to strike with an instrument; to prick, peck, pierce; to incite, instigate J iii.189 (=vijjhati). Pass. tujjati to be struck Th 1, 780; Vism 503 (cp. vitujjati); Sdhp 279. -- pp. tunna. See also tuṇḍa (beak=pecker), tutta (goad), tomara (lance=striker) & thūpa (point).
Tudampatī (dual) husband & wife [tu˚=dial. for du˚, Sk. dve; dampati from dama= domus, Sk. daŋpati=Gr. despo/ths; cp. also Kern, Toev. ii.93, who compares tuvantuva for duvanduva]. See under dampati.
Tunna1 [pp. of tudati] struck Th 2, 162 (vyādhimaraṇa˚ str. with sickness and death).
Tunna2 [from tudati] any pointed instrument as a stick, a goad, a bolt, or (usually) a needle Vin i.290 (+aggaḷa, means of fastening); J i.8 (id.).
-- kamma "needle -- work," tailoring, patching, sewing J iv.40; vi.366; Vism 112. -- kāra (& ˚ka) a (mending) tailor J iv.38 (v. l. ˚ka); VvA 251 (˚ka); PvA 120); -- vāya [Sk. tunnavāya] a "needle -- weaver," a tailor Vin ii.159; J vi.364, 368 (˚vesaŋ gahetvā in the disguise of a tailor); PvA 161 (id.); Pv ii.914 (=tunnakāra PvA 120); Miln 331, 365.
Tuma (pron. -- adj.) [most likely apostrophe form of ātuma =attā, Sk. ātman self; cp. also Sk. tman oneself. See Oldenberg, KZ. xxv.319. Less likely=Sk. tva one or the other (Kern, Toev. s. v.). Expld by Com. to A iii.124 as esa.] oneself, himself, etc.; every or anybody (=quisque) yaŋ tumo karissati tumo va tena paññāyissati (quid quisque faciat) Vin ii.186=A iii.124; Sn 890 (cp. ātumānaŋ v.888), 908; Pv iii.24 (=attānaŋ PvA 181).
Tumula [Sk. tumala; to *teu, Lat. tumeo, tumulus, tumultus, etc. E. thumb (swelling), cp. tunga & tūla] tumult, uproar, commotion J vi.247 (by Com. expld as "andhakāra," darkness); Dpvs xvii.100.
Tumba (m. nt.) [possibly=Sk. tumra swollen (of shape), same root as tumula] 1. a kind of water vessel (udaka˚ DA i.202), made of copper, wood or a fruit (like a calabash, cocoanut, etc., cp. kaṭāha, E. skull) Vin i.205 (loha˚, kaṭṭha˚, phala˚); ii.114 (˚kaṭāha of gourd); J iii.430 (udaka˚); iv.114; DhA ii.193 (udaka˚). -- 2. a measure of capacity, esp. used for grain J i.233 (mahā˚), 467 (=4 nāḷi p. 468); Miln 102.
Tumhādisa (pron. -- adj.) [tumhe+ādisa] like you, of your kind Sn 459; J vi.528; DA i.146.
Tumhe [pl. of pron. 2nd pers., see tuvaŋ].
Tura (adj.) [Vedic tura, cp. tvaraṇa] swift, quick; only in composition with ˚ga, etc., "going swiftly," denoting the horse; viz. turaga VvA 279; turanga VvA 281; Miln 192 (gaja˚, etc.), 352 (id.) 364; turangama Dāvs v.56; turagamana PvA 57.
Turati [=tarati2] to be in a hurry, to be quick, hasten J vi.229 (mā turittho, Prohib.). -- pp. turita. Cp. also tura, etc.
Turita [pp. of turati] hastening, speedy, quick; hastily, in a hurry Sn 1014; J i.69 (turita -- turita); Vv 808 (=sambhamanto VvA 311); DA i.319; PvA 181. -- aturita leisurely, with leisure, slow J i.87. -- See also tuvaṭaŋ.
Turiya (nt.) [Derivation uncertain, probably connected with tuleti, Sk. tūrya] sometimes tūriya (e. g. Vv 54); musical instruments in general, usually referred to as comprising 5 kinds of special instruments (pañcangika t. e. g. Vv 54; 391; VvA 181, 183, 210, 257), viz. ātata, vitata, ātata -- vitata, ghana, susira (VvA 37). Freq. in phrase nippurisehi turiyehi parivāriyamāna (or paricāriyamāna) "surrounded by (or entertained by) heavenly music" Vin i.15; D ii.21; A i.145; J i.58. -- Vv 384; 412; 5024, 645; Pv iii.81; DhA iii.460; VvA 92; PvA 74.
-- sadda the sound of music, music Mhvs vii.30.
Turī a hen Th 2, 381 (=migī ThA 254) (v. l. korī, cp. Tamil kōḷi hen).
Tula (adj.) [see tuleti] only in negative atula incompar- able, not to be measured, beyond compare or description Vv 304 (=anupama VvA 126); Pv ii.89 (= appamāṇa PvA 110); iii.32 (=asadisarūpa PvA 188); Miln 343.
Tulanā (f.) [see tuleti] weighing, rating; consideration, deliberation M i.480; ii.174; Nett 8, 41.
Tulasi [Derivation unknown] basil (common or sweet) J v.46 (˚gahana a thicket of b.; v. l. tūlasi); vi.536 (tuḷasi=tuḷasigaccha).
Tulā (f.) [see tuleti. Vedic tulā; Gr. ta/las, ta/lanton (balance, weighing & weight=talentum), to/lma; Lat. tollo (lift); Goth. pulan (to carry patiently, suffer); Ger. geduld, etc.] 1. a beam or pole for lifting, carrying or supporting, a rafter Vin ii.122; VvA 188 (+gopānasī); DhsA 107. -- 2. a weighing pole or stick, scales, balance A i.88; J i.112; Dh 268; Miln 356 (t. nikkhepanāya). -- 3. fig. measure ("weighing," cp. tulanā), standard, rate S ii.236 (+pamāṇa).
-- kūṭa false weighing, false weight (often combd with kaŋsakūṭa & mānakūṭa, false coining & false measuring) D i.5=A ii.209≈; DA i.79; DhA i.239; -- daṇḍa the beam or lever of a balance J i.113; -- puttaka a goldsmith (using scales) J v.424 (or should it be tulādhuttaka? ).
Tulita [pp. of tuleti] weighed, estimated, compared, gauged, considered Th 2, 153 (yattakaŋ esā t. what she is worth=lakkhaṇaññūhi parichinna ThA 139); Nd2 under ñāta (as syn. of tirita); PvA 52 (in expln of mita, measured).
Tuliya [Sk.?] a flying fox J vi.537.
Tuleti [from tulā; Lat. tollo, etc.] to weigh, examine, compare; match, equal M i.480; Th 1, 107; J vi.283; -- ger. tulayitvā M i.480. -- grd. tuliya & tulya (see sep.). -- pp. tulita.
Tulya & Tuliya (also tulla J iv.102) (adj.) [orig. grd. of tuleti] to be weighed, estimated, measured; matched, equal, comparable Sn 377; J iii.324; PvA 87 (=samaka). Mostly in the negative atulya incomparable, not having its equal Sn 83, 683; J iv.102 (atulla); Miln 249 (atuliyā guṇā), 343 (id.) -- See also tula.
Tuvaŋ & Tvaŋ [Sk. tvaŋ & (Ved.) tuaŋ, cp. also part. tu; Gr. tu/, su/; Lat. tu; Goth. pu; E. thou, etc.; Oir. tū] pron. of 2nd pers. in foll. forms & applications:<-> 1. Full forms: 1. sg.: (a) tv˚, tu˚, tuyh˚: nom. tvaŋ (in prose & verse) Sn 179, 241, 1029, 1058; J i.279; ii.159; Pv i.84. Also for nom. pl. at J i.391, 395; vi.576; tuvaŋ (in verse) Sn 1064, 1102, 1121; J iii.278, 394; Pv i.33; ii.32; also for acc. Sn 377; Pv ii.81; tuyhaŋ (gen. & dat.) [Sk. tubhyaŋ] Sn 983, 1030; J i.279; PvA 3, 60, 73, etc. -- (b) ta˚, tay˚, taŋ (acc.) M i.487; Sn 31, 241, 1043, 1049; J i.222; ii.159; Pv i.101; ii.16; tayā (instr.) Sn 335, 344; J i.222; Pv ii.36 (=bhotiyā PvA 86): PvA 71; tayi (loc.) Sn 382; J i.207; tava (gen.) Sn 1102, 1110; J ii.153; PvA 106. -- 2. pl.: tumh˚ [Sk. yuṣm˚]: tumhe (nom. & acc.) It 31; J i.221 (acc.); Pv i.112. Also as pl. majesticus in addressing one person J ii.102; iv.138; tumhaŋ (gen.) PvA 58 (for sg.), 78; tumhākaŋ (gen. dat.) S ii.65; It 32; J i.150; ii.102; tumhesu (loc.) J i.292 (for sg.); tumhehi (instr.) J ii.154; Pv i.512. -- II. Enclitic forms (in function of an ethical dative "in your interest," therefore also as possessive gen. or as instrumental, or any other case of the interested person according to construction). 1. sg. te D ii.127 (dat.); Sn 76, 120, 1099 (dat.), 1102 (dat.); J i.151; ii.159 (instr.); Pv i.23 (dat.); ii.32 (gen.), 46 (gen.). -- 2. pl. vo S iii.33 (instr.) Sn 135, 172 (dat.), 331 (dat.); J i. 222 (acc.); ii.133; iii.395 (gen.).
Tuvaṭaŋ (adv.) [Sk. tvaritaŋ, cp. tūrta] quickly A v.342; J i.91; ii.61; vi.519 (as tvātaŋ); Miln 198; Vism 305, 313.
Tuvaṭṭeti (for *Sk. dvandvayati, denom. fr. dvandva] to share (with=loc. or abl.) Vin ii.10, 124; iv.288.
Tuvantuva (nt.) [Sk. dvandva, with dialect. t. (cp. tudam- pati), not (with Müller, P. Gr. 38) through confusion with pron. tvaŋ] quarrel, strife M i.110, 410.
Tussati [Sk. tuṣyati to *teus to be quiet, contented, happy] to be satisfied, pleased or happy J iii.280; iv.138; Miln 210. Cp. tuṭṭha (pp.), tuṭṭhi, tuṇhī, tosa, tosana, toseti.
Tussana (nt.) [Sk. toṣaṇa] satisfying, pleasing, in ˚kāraṇa cause for satisfaction or delight J iii.448.
Tūṇira=tūṇī, Vism 251.
Tūṇī (f.) [Sk. *tūṇa & tūṇī, to *tI̊n: see under tulā; cp. Lat. tollo. On ṇ>l. cp. cikkaṇa & cikkhala, guṇa> guḷa, kiṇi>kili, etc.] a quiver (lit. "carrier") J ii.403 (dhanuŋ tūṇiñ ca nikkhippa); v.47.
Tūla (nt.) [Sk. tūla, to *teu, Sk. tavīti, to swell or be bushy, cp. Gr. tu/lh swelling; Ags. pol peg] a tuft of grass, cotton Vin ii.150 (3 kinds: rukkha˚, latā˚, poṭaki˚); Sn 591=J iv.127 (vāto tūlaŋ va dhaŋsaye); DA i.87.
-- picu cotton -- wool Vism 282, 285, 404; DhA iii.202; KhA 173. -- puṇṇikā ("stuffed with tuft of cotton") a kind of shoe Vin i.186.
Tūlikā (f.) [der. fr. tūla] a mattress (consisting of layers of grass or wool: tiṇṇaŋ tūlānaŋ aññatara -- puṇṇa -- tūlikā DA i.87) Vin i.192; ii.150; D i.7; A i.181.
Tūlinī (f.) [Sk. tūlinī] the silk -- cotton tree M i.128.
Te˚ [Sk. trai˚] secondary base of numeral three (fr. ti) in compn: having a relation to a triad of, three -- ; in numerical cpds. also=three (see under tayo).
-- kaṭula containing 3 spices (of yāgu), viz. tila, taṇḍula, mugga Vin i.210; iii.66; -- cīvarika wearing three robes (cp. ticīvara) Vin i.253; Ud 42; Pug 69; Vism 60. -- daṇḍika carrying the tripod (see tidaṇḍa), Ep. of a brahmin ascetic A iii.276; J ii.316 (=kuṇḍikaŋ ṭhapanatthāya tidaṇḍaŋ gahetvā caranto); -- dhātuka (nt.) the (worlds of the) threefold composition of elements=tiloka Nett 14, 63 (tedhātuke vimutti= sabbadhi vippamutta), 82; cp. Kvu 605; -- piṭaka versed in the three piṭakas (see piṭaka), Ep. of theras & bhikkhus J iv.219; Miln 18 sq.; DhA i.7, 384; iii.385; Dāvs v.22. Cp. Sk. tripiṭo bhikṣuḥ (AvŚ i.334 & Index to Divy); -- bhātika having 3 brothers DhA i.88, 97. -- bhūmaka belonging to the 3 stages of being (viz. the kāma, rūpa, arūpa existences; cp. ˚dhātuka & tiloka) DhA i.305; iv.72; DhsA 50, 214 (˚kusala), 291; -- māsa (nt.) 3 months, i. e. a season M i.438; Miln 15; DhA ii.192; PvA 20; -- vācika pronouncing the threefold formula (of the saraṇa -- gata) Vin i.18; -- vijja (adj.) possessed of the 3 fold knowledge (i. e. either the higher knowledge of the Brahmins, i. e. the 3 Vedas [cp. Sk. trayī vidyā=the knowledge of the Vedas] or of the Buddha & Arahants, as defined at A i.164 sq., viz. (1) remembrance of former births, (2) insight into the (future) destiny of all beings, (3) recognition of the origin of misery & of the way to its removal, i. e. of the Path): 1. brahmanic: D i.238; A i.163; also as tevijjaka (n.) D i.88, 107, 119. -- 2. buddhistic: Vin ii.161; M i.482; S i.194; A i.167 =It 100; Sn 594=VvA 10; Pug 14; DhA i.138; Sdhp 420. -- tevijjatā (abstr.) Vism 5.
Tekiccha (adj.) [der. fr. tikiccha] curable; fig. one who can be helped or pardoned. Only in cpds. a˚ incurable, unpardonable VvA 322 (of a sick person); DhA i.25 (id.); Miln 322; of Devadatta w. ref. to his rebirth in Niraya Vin ii.202=It 85; M i.393; & sa˚ pardonable Miln 192, 221, 344.
Teja & Tejo [Vedic tejas (nt.) from tij to be sharp or to pierce=a (piercing) flame. See tejate; semantically (sharp>light) cp. Ger. strahl (ray of light)= Ags. strael (arrow). -- The nt. tejo is the usual form; instr. tejasā (Dh 387; Sn 1097) & tejena (J iii.53), cp. tapa & tapo] "sharpness," heat, flame, fire, light; radiance, effulgence, splendour, glory, energy, strength, power D ii.259 (personified as deva, among the 4 Elements paṭhavī, āpo, t., vāyo; cp. tejo -- dhātu); S iv.215; M i.327; Sn 1097 (glory of the sun compd with that of the Buddha); Dh 387 (sabbaŋ ahorattiŋ Buddho tapati tejasā); J iii.53 (sīla˚); i.93 (puñña˚ the power of merit); Vbh 426 (id.); Ps i.103; Vism 350 (def.); VvA 116.
-- kasiṇa fire -- contemplation for the purpose of kammaṭṭhāna practice (see kasiṇa) D iii.268; Dhs 203; Vism 171; DhA ii.49; iii.214; Bdhd 106; -- dhātu the element of flame (or fire), the 3rd of the 6 Elements, viz. paṭhavī āpo t. vāyo ākāsa viññāṇa (cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 242) D iii.27, 228, 247; M i.188, 422; A i.176; ii.165; Dhs 588, 648, 964; Nett 74; Vism 363.
Tejate [Vedic tejate from tij (*stij)=Lat. in -- stīgo (to spur), Gr. sti/zw, stikto/s, Ohg. stehhan, Nhg. stecken, E. stick] to be sharp or to make sharp, to prick, to incite, etc. -- See tikkha, tikhiṇa, tiṇha, titikkhati, tittaka, teja, etc.
Tejana (nt.) [see tejate] the point or shaft of an arrow, an arrow Th 1, 29; Dh 80, 145; DhA ii.147.
Tejavant (adj.) [tejas+vant] 1. splendid, powerful, majestic DhA i.426. -- 2. in flames, heated, burning with ( -- ˚) Miln 148.
Tejin (adj. -- n.) [see teja] having light or splendour, shining forth, glorious Sn 1097 (=Nd2 286 tejena samannāgata).
Tettiŋsa (num.) [tayo+tiŋsa] thirty -- three J i.273; DhA i.267 sq. See also under tayo & tāvatiŋsa.
Temana (nt.) [from temeti] wetting, moistening Vism 338; VvA 20 (aggimhi tāpanaŋ udake vā temanaŋ); DhA iii.420.
Temeti [cp. Divy 285 tīmayati; Caus. of tim to moisten. There is an ancient confusion between the roots tim, tamas, etc. (to be dark), tim, temeti (to be wet), and stim to be motionless. Cp. tintiṇāyati, tinta, tibba (=tamas), timira] to make wet, to moisten Vin i.47 (temetabba); ii.209 (temetvā); DhA i.220, 394 (id.); J i.88≈KhA 164; J ii.325 (temento); PvA 46 (sutemitvā for temetvā).
Terasa see under tayo.
Terovassika (adj.) [tiro+vassa+ika] lasting over or beyond a year (or season), a year old, dried up or decayed S iv.161 (thero vassiko in text)=185 (of wood) M i.58 (of bones).
Tela (nt.) [from tila] sesamum -- oil (prepared from tila seeds), oil in general (tela=tilatelādika DA i.93): used for drinking, anointing & burning purposes Vin i.205, 220, 245, etc.; A i.209, 278 (sappi vā t. vā); ii.122≈ (tattena pi telena osiñcante; punishment of pouring over with boiling oil); J i.293; ii.104; Pv iv.148 (tiṇena telaŋ pi na tvaŋ adāsi: frequent as gift to mendicants); Pug 55; Dhs 646, 740, 815; PvA 80 (kaḷebarānaŋ vasā telañ ca: fat or oil in general). -- tila ˚ŋ pātukāma desire to drink tila -- wine VvA 54; pāka -- tela oil concoction VvA 68=DhA iii.311; J ii.397 (sata˚); iii.372 (sahassa˚ worth a thousand); v.376 (sata˚ worth a hundred); pādabbhañjana˚ oil for rubbing the feet VvA 44; sāsapa˚ (mustard seed & oil) PvA 198; sappi˚ (butter & oil) Sn 295; PvA 278 (also+madhu) as var. objects of grocery trade (dhañña).
-- koṭṭhāgāra oil store DhA i.220; -- ghaṭa oil jar DA i.144; -- cāṭī an oil tank DhA i.220; -- dhūpita spiced or flavoured with oil (of a cake) Vv 435; -- nāḷi a reed used for keeping oil in, an oil tube Vism 99; DhA ii.193 (+udakatumba); -- pajjota an oil lamp Vin i.16= D i.85=A i.56=Sn p. 15; -- padīpa an oil lamp Vin i.15; S iii.126; v.319; VvA 198; -- pāka an oil decoction, mixed with spirits, oil -- wine Vin i.205; -- pilotikā (pl.) rags soaked in oil DhA i.221; -- makkhana anointing (the body) with oil Miln 11; -- miñjaka an oil -- cake PvA 51; -- vaṇijjā oil trade PvA 47; -- homa an oblation of oil D i.9.
Telaka (nt.)=tela Vin i.204 ("a small quantity of oil"); ii.107 (sittha -- t. oil of beeswax).
Teliya (adj.) oily J iii.522.
Tevijja see Vijjā.
Tomara (m. nt.) [Sk. tomara from tud, see tudati] a pike, spear, lance, esp. the lance of an elephant -- driver D ii.266 (tutta -- t. a driving lance); M iii.133 (t. hattha); Vism 235; DA i.147.
Toya (nt.) [Vedic toya from *tā&uarc; to melt away; Lat. tabeo, tabes (consumption); Ags. pāwan=E. dew, Oir. tām= tabes; also Gr. th/kw, etc.] water (poetical for udaka); only in simile: puṇḍarīkaŋ (or padumaŋ) toyena na upalippati A ii.39=Sn 547; Sn 71=213; Th 1, 700; Nd2 287 (t. vuccati udakaŋ); -- Bdhd 67, 93.
Toraṇa (nt.) [Sk. toraṇa, perhaps related to Gr. tu/rsis, tu/rris=Lat. turris (tower), cp. Hor. Od. i.47 "regumque turris"=palaces] an arched gateway, portal; Vin ii.154; D ii.83; Vv 351 (=dvārakoṭṭhaka -- pāsādassa nāmaŋ VvA 160); J iii.428; Dāvs v.48.
Tosana (adj. -- n.) [see toseti] satisfying, pleasing; satis- faction Sn 971.
Tosāpana (adj.) [=tosana, in formation of a 2nd causative tosāpeti] pleasing, giving satisfaction J ii.249.
Toseti [Caus. of tussati] to please, satisfy, make happy Sn 1127 (=Nd2 288); J iv.274; Sdhp 304. -- pp. tosita contented, satisfied Sn 1128. Cp. pari˚.
Tya [Sk. tya˚, nt. tyad; perhaps to Gr. sh/meron to -- day, sh_tes in this year] base of demonstr. pron.=ta˚, this, that; loc. sg. tyamhi J vi.292; loc. pl. fem. tyāsu J v.368 (Com. tāsu).
Tyassu=te assu D ii.287, see su3.
Tvaŋ see tuvaŋ.
Tvātaŋ see tuvaṭaŋ.
Thakana (nt.) [see next] covering, lid; closing up DhA iv.85 (saŋvara+).
Thaketi [Sk. sthagayati, Caus. to sthagati, from *steg to cover; cp. Gr. ste/gw cover, te/gh roof; Lat. tego, tegula (E.=tile), toga; Oir. tech house; Ohg. decchu cover, dah roof. On P. form cp. Trenckner, Notes, p. 62] to cover, cover up, close (usually of doors & windows) Vin ii.134 (kaṇṇagūthakehi kaṇṇā thakitā honti: the ears were closed up), 148 (kavaṭā na thakīyanti, Pass.), 209 (vātapāna); iv.54; J iv.4 (sabbe apihitā dvārā; api -- dhā=Gr. e)pi -- qh˚, cp. Hom. Od. 9, 243: h)li/baton pe/trhn e(pe/qhke qu/rhsin the Cyclops covered the door with a polished rock) v.214; DhA iv.180 (ṭhakesi, v. l. ṭhapesi); VvA 222; PvA 216 (dvārā) Dāvs iv.33; v.25 (chiddaŋ mālāguḷena th.).
Thañña (nt.) [see thana] mother's milk Vin ii.255=289 (˚ŋ pāyeti); A iv.276; J iii.165; vi.3 (madhura˚) Th 2, 496.
Thaṇḍila (nt.) [Vedic sthaṇḍila a levelled piece of ground prepared for a sacrifice. Cognate with sthala, level ground] bare, esp. hard, stony ground Pv iv.75 (=kharakaṭhāna bhūmippadesa PvA 265).
-- sāyikā (f.) the act of lying on the bare ground (as a penance) [BSk. sthaṇḍila -- śāyikā] S iv.118; Dh 141 (=DhA iii.77: bhūmisayana); -- seyyā (f.) a bed on bare ground D i.167≈(v. l. BB. taṇḍila˚) Miln 351; cp. Sk. sthaṇḍilaśayyā.
Thaddha [pp. of thambeti, Sk. stabhnāti to make firm, prop, hold up; cp. Av. stawra firm, Gr. a)stemfh/s, stafulh/; Goth. stafs, Ags. staef=E. staff; Ohg. stab. See also khambha & chambheti] 1. lit. hard, rigid, firm J i.293 (opp. muduka); Vism 351 (˚lakkhaṇa); PvA 139 (=ujjhangala). -- 2. fig. (a) hardened, obdurate, callous, selfish D i.118 (māna˚); iii.45 (+atimānin); A ii.26=It 113 (kuha th. lapa); Sn 104 (see gotta˚); J i.88 (māna˚) ii.136; Sdhp 90. -- (b) slow Miln 103 (opp. lahuka; cp. BSk. dhandha, on which Kern, Toev. ii.90). -- See thambha & thūṇa.
-- maccharin obdurate & selfish, or very selfish DhA iii.313; VvA 69; PvA 45; -- hadaya hard -- hearted J iii.68.
Thana [Vedic stana; cp. Gr. sthnion=sth_qos (Hesychius)] 1. the breast of a woman D ii.266; J v.205; vi.483; Sdhp 360. -- 2. the udder of a cow M i.343=Pug 56; DhA ii.67.
-- mukha the nipple J iv.37. -- sita -- dāraka [see sita] a child at the breast, a suckling Miln 364=408.
Thanaka, a little breast, the breast of a girl Th 2, 265 (=ThA 212).
Thanita (nt.) [pp. of thaneti cp. Vedic (s)tanayitnu thunder=Lat. tonitrus, Ohg. donar, etc.] thundering, thunder J i.470; Th 1, 1108; Miln 377.
Thanin (adj.) having breasts, -- breasted; in timbaru˚ Sn 110; J vi.457. -- pucimanda˚ J vi.269.
Thaneti [Vedic stanayati & stanati to thunder; cp. Gr. ste/nw, stena/zw to moan, groan, stonos; Lat. tono; Ags. stunian; Ger. stöhnen] to roar, to thunder D ii.262; S i.100, 154 (megho thanayaŋ), 154 (thaneti devo); It 66 (megho thanayitvā). -- pp. thanita. See also gajjati & thunati.
Thapati [Vedic sthapati, to sthā+pati] 1. a builder, master carpenter M i.396=S iv.223; M iii.144, <-> 2. officer, overseer S v.348.
Thabbha is to be read for ˚tthambha in para˚ J iv.313.
Thambha [see etym. under thaddha; occasionally spelt thamba, viz. A i.100; M i.324; PvA 186, 187] 1. a pillar, a post Vin i.276; D i.50 (majjhimaŋ ˚ŋ nissāya); ii.85 (id.); Sn 214; Vv 782 (veḷuriya˚, of the pillars of a Vimāna); Pv iii.31 (id.); DhA iv.203; VvA 188 (+tulā -- gopānasī); PvA 186. -- 2. (fig.) in all meanings of thaddha, applied to selfishness, obduracy, hypocrisy & deceit; viz. immobility, hardness, stupor, obstinacy (cp. Ger. "verstockt"): thambho ti thaddha -- bhāvo SnA 288, 333; th. thambhanā thambhittaŋ kakkhaliyaŋ phāruliyaŋ ujucittatā (an˚?) amudutā Vbh 350. -- Often combd w. māna (= arrogance), freq. in set sāṭheyyaŋ th. sārambho māno, etc. A i.100, 299=Nd2 under rāga=Miln 289; cp. M i.15. -- A iii.430 (+māna); iv.350, 465 (+sāṭheyya); Sn 245 (+mada), 326, 437 (as one of Māra's combatants: makkho th. te aṭṭhamo); J i.202. -- 3. a clump of grass M i.324; cp. thambhaka.
Thamhhaka (=thambha 3) a clump of grass VvA 276 (=gumba).
Thambhati & thambheti, see upa˚, paṭi˚.
Thambhanā (f.) [abstr. to thambha] firmness, rigidity, immobility Dhs 636=718; Vbh 350.
Thambhitatta (nt.) [abstr. to thambha]=thambha 2, viz. hardness, rigidity, obduracy, obstinacy Vbh 350. Note. Quite a late development of the term, caused by a misinterpretation of chambhitatta, is "fluctuation, unsteadiness, inflation" at Dhs 965 (in def. of vāyodhātu: chambhittattaŋ [?] thambhitattaŋ. See on this Dhs. trsl. p. 242), & at Vbh 168 (in def. of vicikicchā; v.l. chambhitatta), and at Asl. 338 (of vayo). None of these meanings originally belong to the term thambha.
Thambhin (adj.) obstinate Th 1, 952.
Tharaṇa (nt.) [Sk. staraṇa to stṛ] strewing, spreading. In cpds. like assa˚, bhumma˚, ratha˚, hattha˚, etc. the reading ass -- attharaṇa, etc. should be preferred (=ā<-> stṛ). See attharaṇa and cpds.
Tharati [Sk. stṛṇoti] only in cpds. ā˚, ava˚, etc.
Tharu [Sk. tsaru] the hilt or handle of a sword or other weapons, a sword A iii.152; J iii.221 (=sword); Miln 178; DhA ii.249 (˚mūla); iv.66 (asi˚). -- tharusmiŋ sikkhati to learn the use of a sword Vin ii.10; Miln 66.
-- ggaha one who carries a sword -- (handle) Miln 331 (dhanuggaha+; not in corresponding list of occupations at D i.51); -- sippā training in swordsmanship Ud 31.
Thala1 (nt.) [Vedic sthala, to sthā, orig. standing place; cp. Gr. ste/llw, sto /los; Ags. steall (place); also P. thaṇḍila] dry ground, viz. high, raised (opp. low) or solid, firm (opp. water) S iv.179. As plateau opp. to ninna (low lying place) at Sn 30 (SnA 42=ukkūla); Dh 98; It 66=S i.100 (megho thalaŋ ninnañ ca pūreti); PvA 29 (=unnatapadesa). As dry land, terra firma opp. to jala at Dh 34; J i.107, 222; Pv iv.121; PvA 260. As firm, even ground or safe place at D i.234; Sn 946. <-> Cp. J iii.53; iv.142; Vism 185.
-- gocara living on land J ii.159; -- ja sprung from land (opp. vārija Dh 34 or udakarūha Vv 356=water -- plant); referring to plants A i.35; J i.51; Vv 356 (=yodhikādikā VvA 162); Miln 281; -- ṭṭha standing on firm ground A ii.241; -- patha a road by land (opp. jala˚ by water) J i.121; iii.188.
Thala2 (nt.) [prob. dialect. variant of tharu] the haft of a sword, the scabbard J iii.221 (reading uncertain).
Thava [see thavati] praise, praising, eulogy Nett 161, 188, 192.
Thavati [Sk. stauti, Av. staviti, cp. Gr. steu_tai] to praise, extol; inf. thutuŋ Sn 217 (=thometuŋ SnA 272). <-> Caus. thaveti [Sk. stavayati] pp. thavita Miln 361. See thuta, thuti, thoma, thometi.
Thavikā (f.) [derivation uncertain] a knapsack, bag, purse; esp. used for the carrying of the bhikkhu's strainer Vin i.209 (parissāvanāni pi thavikāyo pl pūretvā), 224 (patte+pariss˚+th.); J i.55 (pattaŋ thavikāya pakkhipitvā); vi.67 (pattaŋ thavikāya osāretvā); VvA 40 (patta -- thavikato parissāvanaŋ nīharitvā). Also for carrying money: sahassathavikā a purse of 1,000 pieces J i.54, 195, 506; VvA 33; Anvs 35. See also Vin ii.152, 217; Vism. 91.
Thāma (& thāmo nt. in instr. thāmasā M i.498; S ii.278= Th 1, 1165; iii.110, see below) [Vedic sthāman & sthāmas nt., sthā cp. Gr. sth/mwn, Lat. stamen (standing structure); Goth. stoma foundation] "standing power," power of resistance, steadfastness, strength, firmness, vigour, instr. thāmena (Miln 4; PvA 193); thāmasā (see above); thāmunā (J vi.22). Often combd with bala J i.63; Sn 68; with bala+java PvA 4; with bala+ viriya Nd2 289, 651; with java J i.62; VvA 104; with viriya J i.67. -- D iii.113; S i.78; ii.28; v.227; A i.50; ii.187 sq.; iv.192. J i.8, 265 (˚sampanna); ii.158 (id.); Dhs 13, 22; Vism 233 (˚mahatta); DhA iv.18; PvA 259. -- Instr. used as adv.: thāmena hard, very much PvA 193; thāmasā obstinately, perseveringly M i.257.
-- gatadiṭṭhika (adj.) one in whom heresy has become strong J i.83=vi.220.
Thāmaka (adj.) having strength Sn 1144 (dubbala˚ with failing strength); Nd1 12 (appa˚+dubbala).
Thāmavant (adj.) [thāma+vant] strong, steadfast, power- ful, persevering S v.197, 225; A ii.250; iv.110, 234, 291; v.24; Nd2 131; Vv 51 (=thira balavā VvA 35).
Thāra see vi˚, san˚.
Thāla (nt.) [from thala orig. a flat dish] a plate, dish, vessel D i.74; J i.69; Miln 282. Kaŋsa˚ a gong Miln 62; Vism 283 (in simile). See also thālī.
Thālaka (nt.) [thāla+ka] a small bowl, beaker Pv ii.18 (thālakassa pānīyaŋ), 119 (id.); Nett 79 (for holding oil: dīpakapallika Com.).
Thālikā (f.)=thālakaVin i.203, 240. See āḷhaka˚.
Thālī (f.) (thāli˚ in cpds.) [Sk. sthālī, cp. thāla] an earthen pot, kettle, large dish; in -- dhovana washing of the dish A i.161 (+sarāva -- dhovana); -- pāka an offering of barley or rice cooked in milk Vin iii.15; D i.97 (=DA i.267); S ii.242; v.384; A i.166; J i.186; Miln 249.
Thāvara1 (adj.) [Vedic sthāvara, from sthā, cp. sthavira, Gr. stauro/s post, Lat. re -- stauro, Goth. stana judgment & stojan to judge] "standing still," immovable (opp. to tasa) firm, strong (Ep. of an Arahant: KhA 245) DhA iv.176. Always in connection with tasa, contrasting or comprising the movable creation (animal world) & the immovable (vegetable world), e. g. Sn 394 ("sabbesu bhūtesu nidhāya daṇḍaŋ ye thāvarā ye ca tasanti loke"); It 32 (tasaŋ vā thāvaraŋ vā). See tasa for ref.
Thāvara2 (nt.) [from thavira=thera, old] old age PvA 149 (thāvari -- jiṇṇa in expl. of therī, otherwise jarā -- jiṇṇa. Should we read thāvira -- jiṇṇa?).
Thāvariya (nt.) [fr. thāvara] immobility, firmness, security, solidity, an undisturbed state; always in janapada˚ an appeased country, as one of the blessings of the reign of a Cakkavattin. Expld at DA i.250 as "janapadesu dhuvabhāvaŋ thāvarabhāvaŋ vā patto na sakkā kenaci cāletuŋ." D i.88; ii.16, 146, 169; S i.100; Sn p. 106; It 15.
Thāvareyya (nt.) [from thāvara2] the rank of a Thera. A i.38; ii.23. This has nothing to do with seniority. It is quite clear from the context that Thera is to be taken here in the secondary sense explained under Thera. He was a bhikkhu so eminently useful to the community that his fellow bhikkhus called him Thera.
Thāsotu˚ in thāsotujana savana at ThA 61 according to Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 81 it is to be read ṭhānaso tu jana˚.
Thika (adj.) [cp. Sk. styāyate to congeal, form a (solid) mass; see cognates under thīna & cp. theva] dropping, forming drops: madhutthika J iii.493; vi.529 (=madhuŋ paggharantiyo madhutthevasadisā p. 530) "dropping honey."
Thiṇṇa pp. of tharati, only in cpds. parivi˚, vi˚.
Thira (adj.) [Vedic sthira, hard, solid; from sthā or Idg. ster (der. of stā) to stand out=to be stiff; cp. Gr. stereo/s; Lat. sterilis (sterile=hardened, cp. Sk. starī); Ohg. storrēn, Nhg. starr & starren, E. stare; also Lat. strenuus] solid, hard, firm; strenuous, powerful J i.220; iv.106 (=daḷha); Miln 194 (thir -- âthira -- bhāva strength or weakness); VvA 212 (id.), 35 (= thāmavant); Sdhp 321.
Thiratā (f.) [fr. thira] steadfastness, stability DhA iv.176 (thiratāya thavarā; so read for ṭhira˚).
Thī (f.) [Vedic strī, on which see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under sero. This form thī is the normal correspondent to Vedic strī; the other, more usual (& dial.) form is itthi] a woman J i.295, 300; v.296 (thī -- pura), 397; vi.238.
Thīna (nt.) [Sk. styāna; orig. pp. of styāyate to become hard, to congeal; stei̯ā (cp. also thira)=Gr. ste/as grease, tale; Lat. stīpo to compress; also Sk. stimita (motionless)=P. timi; stīma (slow), Mhg. stīm; Goth. etc. stains=E. stone; Gr. sti_fos (heap); Lat. stīpes (pale); Ohg. stīf=E. stiff] stiffness, obduracy, stolidity, indifference (cp. thaddha & tandī, closely related in meaning). Together with middha it is one of the 5 hindrances (nīvaraṇāni) to Arahantship (see below). Def. as cittassa akammaññatā, unwieldiness or impliability of mind (=immobility) at Nd2 290=Dhs 1156, 1236=Nett 86; as citta -- gelaññaŋ morbid state of mind ("psychosis") at DA i.211. -- Sn 942 (niddaŋ tandiŋ sahe thīnaŋ pamādena na saŋvase), 1106; Vbh 352 (=Nd2 290 as expln of līnatta); Vism 262 (˚sineha, where p. 361 reads patthinna˚).
-- middha sloth & drowsiness, stolidity & torpor; two of the 5 nīvaraṇāni ( Dhs. trsl. pp. 120, 310) Vin ii.200 (vigata˚); D i.71, 246; iii.49, 234, 269, 278; S i.99; iii.106; v.277 sq.; A iii.69 sq.; 421; Sn 437 (pañcamī senā Mārassa); It 27, 120; Ps. i.31, 45, 162; ii.12, 169, 179, 228; Pug 68; Dhs 1154, 1486; Vism 469; Sdhp 459.
Thīyati see patiṭṭhīyati.
Thīyanā (f.) & thīyitatta (nt.) [abstr. formations from thīna]=thīna, in exegesis at Nd2 290≈(see thīna); Vbh 352.
Thuta [cp. pp. of thavati] praised DhsA 198; J iv.101 (sada˚=sadā thuto niccapasattho); Miln 278 (vaṇṇita th. pasattha).
Thuti (f.) [cp. thavati] praise J iv.443 (thutiŋ karoti); VvA 158.
Thunati [see thaneti] 1. to moan, groan, roar S v.148 (thunaŋ ppr.; v. l. thanaŋ); Vv 521 (of beings in Niraya, otherwise ghosenti), v.l.SS thananti (better?). <-> 2. to proclaim; shout, praise (confused with thavati) Sn 884.
Thulla see thūla.
Thusa (nt.) [Vedic tuṣa (m.)] husk of grain, chaff A i.242 (together w. other qualities of corn); J iv.8; Vism 346.<-> athusa D iii.199.
-- aggi a fire of husks Nett 23; -- odaka gruel (=sabbasambhārehi kataŋ sovīrakaŋ Pug A 232) D i.166= A i.295=Pug 55; -- pacchi a bird stuffed with chaff, a straw -- bird J i.242; -- piṇḍa a lump of husks Vin ii.151; -- rāsi a heap of h. DhA i.309; -- homa an oblation of h. D i.9 (=DA i.93; v. l. BB kana, for kaṇa; cp. kaṇahoma D i.9).
Thūṇā (f.) [Vedic sthūṇā from sthā, standing fast, as in thambha, thīna, etc. Nearest relation is thāvara (=thūrā, on r: ṇ=l (thūla): n see tūṇī). Cp. Gr. stauro/s (post); Lat. restauro (to prop up again); Gr. stu_los pillar, "style"; Goth. stojan etc. (see thāvara); Ags. styran=E. steer, Ger. steuer] a pillar, prop, support A ii.198; Vv 541 (=thambha VvA 245); DA i.124. Esp. the sacrificial post in phrase thūṇûpanīta "lead to sacrifice" (yūpa -- sankhātuŋ thūṇaŋ upa˚ DA i.294): D i.127≈S i.76≈DhA ii.7; J iii.45. kumbhathūṇā a sort of drum D i.6 etc. (see kumbha, where also kumbha -- thūṇika Vin iv.285). -- eka -- thūṇaka with one support J iv.79.
Thūṇira [der. fr. thūṇā] house -- top, gable Th 1, 184 (=kan- ṇikā Com.).
Thūpa [Vedic stūpa, crown of the head, top, gable; cp. Gr. stu/pos (handle, stalk). Oicel. stūfr (stump), to *steud as in tudati] a stupa or tope, a bell -- shaped pile of earth, a mound, tumulus, cairn; dome, esp. a monument erected over the ashes of an Arahant (otherwise called dhātugabbha=dāgaba), or on spots consecrated as scenes of his acts. In general as tomb: Vin iv.308; J iii.156 (mattika˚)=Pv i.84; in special as tope: D ii.142, 161, 164 sq.; A i.77; M ii.244; J v.39 (rajata˚); VvA 156 (Kassapassa bhagavato dvādasayojanikaŋ kanaka˚); Ud 8; Pv iii.105. Four people are thūpârahā, worthy of a tope, viz. a Tathāgata, a Tathāgatasāvaka, a Paccekabuddha, a Cakkavattin D ii.143= A ii.245. -- At Dpvs vi.65 th. is to be corrected into dhūpaŋ.
Thūpika (adj.) [from thūpa. The ika applies to the whole compound] having domed roofs ("house -- tops") J vi.116 (of a Vimāna=dvādasayojanika maṇimayakañcanathūpika; cp. p. 117: pañcaṭhūpaŋ vimānaŋ, expld as pañcahi kūṭāgārehi samannāgataŋ).
Thūpikata (adj.) [thūpa+kata] "made a heap," heaped of an alms -- bowl: so full that its contents bulge out over the top Vin iv.191.
Thūla (a) & Thulla (b) (the latter usual in cpds.) (adj.) [Vedic sthūla (or sthūra); cp. Lith. storas (thick); Lat. taurus, Goth. stiur, Ags. steor (bull= strong, bulky); Ohg. stūri (strong). From sthā: see thīna, cp. thūṇā. To ūl: ull cp. cūḷa: culla] compact, massive; coarse, gross; big, strong, clumsy; common, low, unrefined, rough D i.223; Sn 146 (aṇuka˚), 633 (id.); Dh 31, 265, 409; J i.196 (b); Dhs 617; KhA 246; PvA 73, 74 (of a cloak); VvA 103; Sdhp 101, 346. -- thullāni gajjati to speak rough words J i.226 (=pharusavacanāni vadati).
-- anga (adj.) heavy -- limbed J i.420; -- accaya a grave offence Vin i.133, 167, 216; ii.110, 170 etc.; Vism 22. -- kacchā thick scurf Vin i.202; -- kumārī (Vin. v.129) & kumārikā a stout, fat girl J iii.147; iv.220 (Com. pañcakāmaguṇika -- rāgena thūlatāya thullak˚ ti vuccati); Vism 17. -- phusitaka (deva) (the rain -- god, probably with reference to the big drops of the rain cp. DA i.45) S iii.141; v.396; A i.243; ii.140 (a); v.114 sq.; DhA iii.243; -- vajja a grave sin Vin ii.87 (a); M ii.250; -- vattha a coarse garment J v.383; -- sarīra (adj.) fat, corpulent J i.420; iv.220 (opp. kisa thin); -- sāṭaka coarse cloth DhA i.393 (a).
Thūlatā (f.) [abstr. to thūla] coarseness, roughness, vile- ness J iv.220.
Theta (adj.) [Sk. from tiṭṭhita, Müller P. Gr. 7=sthātṛ] firm, reliable, trustworthy, true D i.4 (DA i.73: theto ti thiro; ṭhita -- katho ti attho); M i.179; S iv.384; A ii.209=Pug 57; Nd2 623. -- abl. thetato in truth S iii.112. -- attheta J iv.57 (=athira).
Thena [Vedic stena & stāyu, besides which tāyu, the latter prob. original, cp. Gr. tu_ta/w to deprive; Oir. tāid thief, to a root meaning "conceal"] a thief adj. stealing: athenena not stealing, not stealthily, openly D i.4; DA i.72. f. athenī A iii.38. Cp. kumbhatthena Vin ii.256 (see k.).
Thenaka [=prec.] a thief J vi.115.
Theneti [Denom. fr. thena] to steal, to conceal J iv.114; DhA i.80.
Theyya (nt.) [Vedic steya] theft Vin i.96; A i.129; Sn 119 (theyyā adinnaŋ ādiyati); 242, 967 (˚ŋ na kareyya); Vv 158 (: theyyaŋ vuccati thenabhāvo VvA 72); Miln 264, 265; Vism 43 (˚paribhoga); DA i.71; Sdhp 55, 61.
-- citta intending to steal Vin iii.58; -- saŋvāsaka one who lives clandestinely with the bhikkhus (always foll. by titthiyapakkantaka) Vin i.86, 135, 168, 320; v.222; Miln 310; -- sankhātaŋ (adv.) by means of theft, stealthily D iii.65 sq., 133; A iii.209; iv.370 sq.; v.264.
Thera [Vedic sthavira. Derivation uncertain. It may come from sthā in sense of standing over, lasting (one year or more), cp. thāvara old age, then "old= venerable"; (in meaning to be compared w. Lat. senior, etc. from num. sem "one" =one year old, i. e. lasting over one and many more years). Cp. also vetus=Gr. e)/tos, year, E. wether, one year old ram, as cpd. w. veteran, old man. Or it may come from sthā in der. *stheṷā in sthūra (sthūla: see etym. under thūla) thus, "strong= venerable"] t.t. only used with ref. to the bhikkhus of Gotama Buddha's community. -- (a) (adj.) senior, Vin i.47, 290 (th. bhikkhū opp. navā bh.), 159 (th. bhikkhu a senior bh. opp. to navaka bh. a novice), 187; ii.16, 212. Therânutherā bhikkhū seniors & those next to them in age dating not from birth, but from admission to the Order). Three grades are distinguished, thera bh., majjhima bh., nava bh., at D i.78. -- See also A ii.23, 147, 168; v.201, 348; D iii.123 sq., 218; Dh 260, 261. In Sangha -- thera, used of Bhikkhus not senior in the Order, the word thera means distinguished. Vin ii.212, 303. In Mahāthera the meaning, as applied to the 80 bhikkhus so called, must also have some similar meaning Dīpv iv.5 Psalms of the Brethren xxxvi.; J v.456. At A ii.22 it is said that a bhikkhu, however junior, may be called thera on account of his wisdom. It is added that four characteristics make a man a thera -- high character, knowing the essential doctrines by heart, practising the four Jhānas, and being conscious of having attained freedom through the destruction of the mental intoxications. It is already clear that at a very early date, before the Anguttara reached its extant shape, a secondary meaning of thera was tending to supplant that of senior -- that is, not the senior of the whole Order, but the senior of such a part of the Sangha as live in the same locality, or are carrying out the same function. -- Note. thera in thero vassiko at S iv.161 is to be read tero -- vassiko.
-- gāthā hymns of senior bhikkhus, N. of a canonical book, incorporated in the Khuddaka -- Nikāya. Theratara, very senior, oppd to navatara, novice D ii.154. -- vāda the doctrine of the Theras, the original Buddhist doctrine M i.164; Dpvs iv.6, 13.
Theraka (adj.) strong (?), of clothes: therakāni vatthāni D ii.354 (vv. ll. thevakāni, dhorakāni, corakāni).
Therī & Therikā (f.) [see thera] 1. an old woman (cp. sthavirikā M Vastu iii.283) Pv ii.116 (=thāvarijiṇṇā PvA 149). -- 2. a female thera (see cpds.), as therikā at Th 2, 1; Dpvs xviii. 11.
-- gāthā hymns of the therīs, following on the Theragāthā (q. v.).
Theva (m.?) [see etym. under thīna, with which cp. in meaning from same root Gr. stoibh/ & Lat. stīria, both= drop. Cp. also thika. Not with Trenckner (Notes p. 70) fr. stip] a drop; stagnant water. In Vin. only in phrase: cīvaraŋ . . . na acchinne theve pakkamitabbaŋ Vin i.50, 53=ii.227, 230; J vi.530 (madhu -- ttheva a drop of honey).
Thevati [fr. theva; orig. "to be congealed or thick"] to shine, glitter, shimmer (like a drop) J vi.529 (=virocati p. 530).
Thoka (adj.) [for etymology see under thīna] little, small, short, insignificant; nt. a trifle. A iv.10; J vi.366; PvA 12 (kāla): nt. thokaŋ as adv.=a little J i.220; ii.103, 159; v.198; PvA 13, 38, 43. -- thokaŋ thokaŋ a little each time, gradually, little by little Dh 121, 239; Miln 9; SnA 18; PvA 168.
Thokaka (adj.)=thoka; fem. thokikā Dh 310.
Thoma [Vedic stoma a hymn of praise] praise.
Thomana (nt.) & thomanā (f.) [see thavati] praising, praise, laudation J i.220 (=pasaŋsa); Pug 53; PvA 27.
Thometi [denom. fr. thoma; cp. thavati] to praise, extol, celebrate (often with vaṇṇeti) D i.240; Sn 679, 1046; Nd2 291; J vi.337; SnA 272 (=thutuŋ); VvA 102; PvA 196. -- pp. thomita J i.9.
-- D -- euphonic consonant inserted to avoid hiatus: (a) orig. only sandhi -- cons. in forms ending in t & d (like tāvat, kocid, etc.) & thus restored in cpds. where the simplex has lost it; (b) then also transferred to & replacing other sandhi -- cons. (like puna -- d -- eva for punar eva). <-> (a) dvipa -- d -- uttama Sn 995; koci -- d -- eva PvA 153; kincid -- eva ibid. 70; tāva -- d -- eva ib. 74; yāva -- d -- atthaŋ ib. 217; ahu -- d -- eva Miln 22 etc. -- (b) puna -- d -- eva Pv ii.113 (v. l. BB); DhA ii.76; samma -- d -- eva Sn p. 16; VvA 148; PvA 66 etc.; cp. SnA 284. bahu -- d -- eva J i.170.
-- Da (adj.) [Suffix of dā, see dadāti] giving, bestowing, presenting, only -- ˚, as anna˚, bala˚, vaṇṇa˚, sukha˚, Sn 297; vara˚ Sn 234; kāma˚ J vi.498; Pv ii.138; ambu˚ giving water, i. e. a cloud Dāvs v.32; amatamagga˚ Sdhp 1; uḷāraphala˚ ib. 26; maŋsa˚ Pgdp 49, etc.
Daŋsaka: see vi˚.
Daŋseti (for dasseti): see upa˚; pavi˚, vi˚.
Daka (nt.) [=udaka, aphaeretic from combns like sīto- daka which was taken for sīto+daka instead of sīt' odaka] Vin iii.112; S iii.85; A ii.33=Nd2 420 B3 (: the latter has udaka, but Nd1 14 daka).
-- āsaya (adj.) (beings) living in water A ii.33≈; -- ja (adj.) sprung from water, aquatic J i.18 (thalajā d pupphā); -- rakkhasa a water -- sprite J i.127, 170; vi.469.
Dakkha1 (adj.) [Vedic dakṣa=Gr. a)ri -- dei/ketos & decio/s; dakṣati to be able; to please, satisfy, cp. daśasyati to honour, Denom. fr. *dasa=Lat. decus honour, skill. All to *dek in Lat. decet to be fit, proper, etc. On var. theories of connections of root see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under decet. It may be that *deks is an intens. formation fr. *diś to point (see disati), then the original meaning would be "pointing," i. e. the hand used for pointing. For further etym. see dakkhiṇa] dexterous, skilled, handy, able, clever D i.45, 74, 78; iii.190 (+analasa) M i.119; iii.2; S i.65; Nd2 141 (+analasa & sampajāna); J iii.247; DA i.217 (=cheka); Miln 344 (rūpadakkhā those who are of "fit" appearance).
Dakkha2 (nt.) [dakkha1+ya, see dakkheyya] dexterity, ability, skill J iii.466.
Dakkhati & Dakkhiti see dassati.
Dakkhiṇa (adj.) [Vedic dakṣiṇa, Av. dašinō; adj. forma- tion fr. adv. *deksi= *deksinos, cp. purāṇa fr. purā, viṣuṇa fr. viṣu, Lat. bīni (=bisni) fr. bis. From same root *deks are Lat. dexter (with compar. -- antithetic suffix ter=Sk. tara, as in uttara) & Gr. decitero/s; cp. also Goth. taihswa (right hand), Ohg. zeso & zesawa. See dakkha for further connections] 1. right (opp. vāma left), with a tinge of the auspicious, lucky & prominent: Vin ii.195 (hattha); PvA 112, 132 (id.); Ps i.125. hattha, pāda, etc. with ref. to a Tathāgata's body); J i.50 (˚passa the right side); PvA 178 (id.), 112 (˚bāhu); Sn p. 106 (bāha); PvA 179 (˚jānumaṇḍalena with the right knee: in veneration). -- 2. skilled, well-trained (=dakkha) J vi.512 (Com. susikkhita). -- 3. (of that point of the compass which is characterized through "orientation" by facing the rising sun, & then lies on one's right:) southern, usually in combn with disā (direction): D iii.180 (one of the 6 points, see disā), 188 sq. (id.); M i.487; ii.72; S i.145, etc.
-- āvattaka (adj.) winding to the right D ii.18 (of the hairs of a Mahāpurisa, the 14th of his characteristics or auspicious signs; cp. BSk. dakṣiṇāvarta a precious shell, i. e. a shell the spiral of which turns to the right AvŚ i.205; Divy 51, 67, 116); J v.380; -- janapada the southern country the "Dekkan" (=dakkhiṇaŋ) D i.96, 153 (expld by Bdhgh as "Gangāya dakkhiṇato pākaṭa -- janapado" DA i.265); -- samudda the southern sea J i.202.
Dakkhiṇā (f.) [Vedic dakṣiṇā to dakṣ as in daśasyati to honour, to consecrate, but taken as f. of dakkhiṇa & by grammarians expl. as gift by the "giving" (i. e. the right) hand with popular analogy to dā to give (dadāti)] a gift, a fee, a donation; a donation given to a "holy" person with ref. to unhappy beings in the Peta existence ("Manes"), intended to induce the alleviation of their sufferings; an intercessional, expiatory offering, "don attributif" (Feer) (see Stede, Peta Vatthu, etc. p. 51 sq.; Feer Index to AvŚ p. 480) D i.51=iii.66 (d. -- uddhaggikā), cp. A ii.68 (uddhaggā d.); A iii.43, 46, 178, 259; iv.64 sq., 394; M iii.254 sq. (cuddasa pāṭipuggalikā d. given to 14 kinds of worthy recipients) Sn 482, 485; It 19; J i.228; Pv i.44 (=dāna PvA 18), i.59 (petānaŋ d ˚ŋ dajjā), iv.151; Miln 257; Vism 220; PvA 29, 50, 70, 110 (pūjito dakkhiṇāya). guru -- d. teacher's fee VvA 229, 230; dakkhiṇaŋ ādisati (otherwise uddisati) to designate a gift to a particular person (with dat.) Vin i.229=D ii.88.
-- âraha a worthy recipient of a dedicatory gift Pv ii.86; -- odaka water to wash in (orig. water of dedication, consecrated water) J i.118; iv.370; DhA i.112; PvA 23; -- visuddhi. purity of a gift M iii.256 sq.=A ii.80 sq.=D iii.231, cp. Kvu 556 sq.
Dakkhiṇeyya (adj. -- n.) [grd. -- formation fr. dakkhiṇā as from a verb *dakṣiṇāti=pūjeti] one worthy of a dakkiṇā. The term is expl. at KhA 183, & also (with ref. to brahmanic usage) at Nd2 291; -- S i.142, 168, 220; M i.37, 236 sq.; 446; A i.63, 150; ii.44; iii.134, 162, 248; iv.13 sq.; D iii.5; It 19 (annañ ca datvā bahuno dakkhiṇeyyesu dakkhiṇaŋ . . . saggaŋ gacchanti dāyakā); Sn 227, 448 sq., 504, 529; Nd2 291 (as one of the 3 constituents of a successful sacrifice, viz. yañña the gift, phala the fruit of the gift, d. the recipient of the gift). Cp. i.105 (where also adj. to be given, of dāna). Pv iv.133; VvA 120, 155 (Ep. of the Sangha= ujubhūta); PvA 25, 125, 128, 262.
-- aggi the (holy) fire of a good receiver of gifts; a metaphor taken from the brahmanic rite of sacrifice, as one of the 7 fires (=duties) to be kept up (or discarded) by a follower of the Buddha A iv.41, 45; D iii.217; -- khetta the fruitful soil of a worthy recipient of a gift PvA 92; -- puggala an individual deserving a donation J i.228; there are 7 kinds enumd at D iii.253; 8 kinds at D iii.255; -- sampatti the blessing of finding a worthy object for a dakkhiṇā PvA 27, 137 sq.
Dakkhiṇeyyatā (f.) [abstr. fr. prec.] the fact of being a dakkhiṇeyya Miln 240 (a˚).
Dakkhita [Vedic dīkṣita pp. of dīkṣ, Intens to daśayati: see dakkha1] consecrated, dedicated J v.138. Cp. dikkhita.
Dakkhin (adj.) [fr. dakkhati, see dassati] seeing, perceiving; f. ˚ī in atīra -- dakkhiṇī nāvā a ship out of sight of land D i.222.
Dakkheyya (nt.) [cp. dakkha2] cleverness, skill J ii.237 (Com. kusalassa -- ñāṇa -- sampayuttaŋ viriyaŋ); iii.468.
Daṭṭha [pp. of daśati, see ḍasati] bitten J i.7; Miln 302; PvA 144.
Daṭṭhar [n. ag. to dassati] one who sees A ii.25.
Daṭṭhā (f.) [cp. dāṭhā] a large tooth, tusk, fang Miln 150 (˚visa).
Daḍḍha [Sk. dagdha, pp. of dahati, see ḍahati] burnt, always with aggi˚ consumed by fire Sn 62; Pv i.74; Miln 47; PvA 56 (indaggi˚).
-- ṭṭhāna a place burnt by fire J i.212; also a place of cremation (sarīrassa d.) PvA 163 (=āḷāhana).
Daḍḍhi˚ [not with Trenckner, Notes p. 65=Sk. dārḍhya, but with Kern, Toev. 113= Sk. dṛḍhī (from dṛḍha, see daḷha), as in compn dṛḍhī karoti & bhavati to make or become strong] making firm, strengthening, in kayādaḍḍhi -- bahula strengthened by gymnastics, an athlete J iii.310 (v. l. daḷhi˚), iv.219 (v. l. distorted kādaḷiphahuna).
Daṇḍa [Vedic daṇḍa, dial.=*dal[d]ra; (on ṇ: l cp. guṇa: guḷa etc.) to *del as in Sk. dala, dalati. Cp. Lat. dolare to cut, split, work in wood; delere to destroy; Gr. dai/dalon work of art; Mhg. zelge twig; zol a stick. Possibly also fr. *dan[d]ra (r=l freq., ṇ: l as tulā: tūṇa; veṇu: veḷu, etc. cp. aṇḍa, caṇḍa), then it would equal Gr. de/ndron tree, wood, & be connected with Sk. dāru] 1. stem of a tree, wood, wood worked into something, e. g. a handle, etc. J ii.102; 405 (v. l. dabba); Vism 313; PvA 220 (nimbarukkhassa daṇḍena [v. l. dabbena] katasūla). tidaṇḍa a tripod. -- 2. a stick, staff, rod, to lean on, & as support in walking; the walking -- stick of a Wanderer Vin ii.132 (na sakkoti vinā daṇḍena āhiṇḍituŋ), 196; S i.176; A i.138, 206; Sn 688 (suvaṇṇa˚); J iii.395; v.47 (loha˚); Sdhp 399 (eka˚, ˚dvaya, ti˚). daṇḍaŋ olubbha leaning on the st. M i.108; A iii.298; Th 2, 27. -- 3. a stick as means of punishment. a blow, a thrashing: daṇḍehi aññamaññaŋ upakkamanti "they go for each other with sticks" M i.86=Nd2 199; ˚ŋ dadāti to give a thrashing J iv.382; v.442; daṇḍena pahāraŋ dadāti to hit with a stick S iv.62; brahma˚ a certain kind of punishment D ii.154, cp. Vin ii.290 & Kern, Manual p. 87; pañca satāni daṇḍo a fine of 500 pieces Vin i.247; paṇīta˚ receiving ample p. Pv iv.166; purisa -- vadha˚ J ii.417; rāja -- daṇḍaŋ karoti (c. loc.) to execute the royal beating PvA 216. See also Dh 129, 131, 310, 405 -- 4. a stick as a weapon in general, only in cert. phrases & usually in combn w. sattha, sword. daṇḍaŋ ādiyati to take up the stick, to use violence: attadaṇḍa (atta=ā -- dā) violent Sn 935; attadaṇḍesu nibbuta Dh 406=Sn 630; a.+kodhâbhibhūta S iv.117: ādinna -- daṇḍa ādinnasattha Vin i.349; opp. daṇḍaŋ nidahati to lay down the stick, to be peaceful: sabbesu bhūtesu nidhāya daṇḍaŋ Sn 35, 394, 629; nihita -- d. nihita -- sattha using neither stick nor sword, of the Dhamma D i.4, 63; M i.287; A i.211; ii.208; iv.249; v.204. daṇḍaŋ nikkhipati id. A i.206. d. -- sattha parāmasana Nd2 576. daṇḍa -- sattha -- abbhukkirana & daṇḍa -- sattha -- abhinipātana Nd2 5764. Cp. paṭidaṇḍa retribution Dh 133. <-> 5. (fig.) a means of frightening, frightfulness, violence, teasing. In this meaning used as nt. as M i.372; tīṇi daṇḍāni pāpassa kammassa kiriyāya: kāyadaṇḍaŋ vacī˚, mano˚; in the same sense as m. at Nd2 293 (as expld to Sn 35). -- 6. a fine, a penalty, penance in general: daṇḍena nikkiṇāti to redeem w. a penalty J vi.576 (dhanaŋ datvā Com.); daṇḍaŋ dhāreti to inflict a fine Miln 171, 193; daṇḍaŋ paṇeti id. Dh 310 (cp. DhA iii.482); DhA ii.71; aṭṭha -- kahāpaṇo daṇḍo a fine of 8 k. VvA 76. -- adaṇḍa without a stick, i. e. without force or violence, usually in phrase adaṇḍena asatthena (see above 4): Vin ii.196 (ad. as. nāgo danto mahesinā; thus of a Cakkavattin who rules the world peacefully: paṭhaviŋ ad. as. dhammena abhivijiya ajjhāvasati D i.89=A iv.89, 105, or dhammena -- manusāsati Sn 1002=S i.236.
-- âbhighata slaying w. cudgels PvA 58; -- âraha (adj.) deserving punishment J v.442; VvA 23; -- ādāna taking up a stick (weapon) (cp. above 4), combd with satth' ādāna M i.110, 113, 410; D iii.92, 93, 289; A iv.400; Vism 326. -- kaṭhina k. cloth stretched on a stick (for the purpose of measuring) Vin ii.116; -- kathālikā a large kettle with a handle Vin i.286; -- kamma punishment by beating, penalty, penance, atonement J iii.276, 527; v.89; Miln 8; ˚ŋ karoti to punish, to inflict a fine Vin i.75, 76, 84; ii.262; -- koṭi the tip of a branch or stick DhA i.60; -- dīpikā a torch J vi.398; Vism 39; DhA i.220, 399; -- ppatta liable to punishment Miln 46; -- paduma N. of a plant (cp. Sk. daṇḍotphala=sahadevā, Halāyudha) J i.51; -- parāyana supported by or leaning on a stick (of old people) M i.88; A i.138; Miln 282; -- parissāvana a strainer with a handle Vin ii.119; -- pahāra a blow with a stick D i.144; -- pāṇin carrying a staff, "staff in hand" M i.108; -- bali ( -- ādi) fines & taxes, etc. DhA i.251; -- bhaya fear of punishment A ii.121 sq.=Nd2 470=Miln 196; -- (m)antara among the sticks D i.166=A i.295=ii.206=M i.77, 238, 307, 342 = Pug 55; see note at Dial. i.228; -- yuddha a club -- fight D i.6; J iii.541; -- lakkhaṇa fortune -- telling from sticks D i.9; -- vākarā a net on a stick, as a snare, M i.153; -- veḷupesikā a bamboo stick J iv.382; -- sikkā a rope slung round the walking -- staff Vin ii.131; -- hattha with a stick in his hand J i.59.
Daṇḍaka [Demin. of daṇḍa] 1. a (small) stick, a twig; a staff, a rod; a handle D i.7 (a walking stick carried for ornament: see DA i.89); J i.120 (sukkha˚ a dry twig); ii.103; iii.26; DhA iii.171; Vism 353. -- aḍḍha˚ a (birch) rod, used as a means of beating (tāḷeti) A i.47; ii.122=M i.87=Nd2 604=Miln 197; ubhato˚ two handled (of a saw) M i.129=189; ratha˚ the flag -- staff of a chariot Miln 27; veṇu˚ a jungle rope J iii.204. -- See also kudaṇḍaka a twig used for tying J iii.204. -- 2. the crossbar or bridge of a lute J ii.252, 253.
-- dīpikā a torch J i.31; -- madhu "honey in a branch," a beehive DhA i.59.
Daṇḍaniya (adj.) [grd. formation from daṇḍa] liable to punishment Miln 186.
Datta1 [pp. of dadāti] given ( -- ˚ by; often in Np. as Brah- madatta, Deva -- datta=Theo -- dor. etc.) Sn 217 (para˚) =SnA 272 (v. l. dinna).
Datta2 (adj. -- n.) [prob.=thaddha, with popular analogy to datta1, see also dandha & cp. dattu] stupid; a silly fellow M i.383; J vi.192 (Com.: dandha lāḷaka).
Datti (f.) [from dadāti+ti] gift, donation, offering D i.166; M i.78, 342; A i.295; ii.206; Pug 55.
Dattika (adj.) [der. fr. datta] given; J iii.221 (kula˚); iv.146 (id.); nt. a gift D i.103 (=dinnaka DA i.271).
Dattiya=dattika, given as a present J ii.119 (kula˚); v.281 (sakka˚); vi.21 (id.): VvA 185 (mahārāja˚ by the King).
Dattu (adj.?) [is it base of n. ag. dātar? see datta2] stupid, in d˚ -- paññatta a doctrine of fools D i.55=M i.515; J iv.338.
Dada ( -- ˚) (adj. -- suff.) [Sk.˚ dad or ˚dada, cp ˚da & dadāti base 3] giving, to be given S i.33 (paññā˚); Kh viii.10 (kāma˚); Pv ii.91 (id.=dāyaka PvA 113); ii.124 (phala˚ =dāyin PvA 157); VvA 171 (puriŋ˚). -- duddada hard to give S i.19=iv.65=J ii.86=vi.571.
Dadāti [Redupl. formation dā as in Lat. do, perf. de -- di, Gr. di/dwmi; cp. Lat. dōs dowry, Gr. dw/s; Ohg. dati; Lith. důti to give] to give, etc. I. Forms. The foll. bases form the Pāli verb -- system: dā, dāy, dadā & di. -- 1. Bases dā & (reduced) da. -- (a) dā˚: fut. dassati J i.113, 279; iii.83; A iii.37; 1st sg. dassāmi J i.223; ii.160; PvA 17, 35, etc. -- dammi interpreted by Com. as fut. is in reality a contraction fr. dātuŋ īhāmi, used as a hortative or dubitative subjunctive (fr. dāhāmi, like kāhami I am willing to do fr. kātuŋ īhāmi) Sn p. 15 ("shall I give"); ii.112; iv.10 (varaŋ te dammi); Pv i.103; ii.324 (kin t' āhaŋ dammi what can I give thee=dassāmi PvA 88). -- pret. adā Sn 303; Pv ii.28 (=adāsi PvA 81); Mhvs vii.14; 2nd sg. ado J iv.10 (=adāsi Com.): Miln 384; 1st. pl. adamha J ii.71; Miln 10; 2nd pl. adattha J i.57 (mā ad.); Miln 10, & dattha J ii.181; -- aor. adāsi J i.150, 279; PvA 73, etc.; pl. adaŋsu Pv i.116. -- inf. dātuŋ J iii.53; PvA 17, 48 (˚kāma), etc. & dātave Sn 286. -- grd. dātabba J iii.52; PvA 7, 26, 88, etc. <-> (b) da˚: pp. datta -- ger. datvā J i.152, 290 (a˚); PvA 70, 72, etc. & datvāna Pv i.113; also as ˚dā (for ˚dāya or ˚dāna) in prep. cpds., like an -- upādā, ādā, etc. Der. fr. 1. are Caus. dāpeti, pp. dāpita; n. ag. dātar; nt. dāna. See also suffix dā,˚ datti, dattikā, etc.; and pp. atta (=ā -- d[a]ta). -- 2. Bases dāy & (reduced) day, contracted into de. (a) dāy˚: only in der. dāya, dāyaka, dāyin and in prep. cpds. ā -- dāye (ger. of ādāti). <-> (b) de˚: pres. ind. deti Sn 130; J ii.111, 154; PvA 8; 1st sg. demi J i.228, 307; 2nd desi J i.279; PvA 39. 1st pl. dema J i.263; iii.126; PvA 27, 75 (shall we give); 2nd detha J iii.127; 3rd denti Sn 244. -- imper. dehi Vin i.17; J i.223; iv.101; PvA 43, 73; 3rd sg. detu J i.263; ii.104; 2nd pl. detha It 66 J iii.126; PvA 29, 62, 76. -- ppr. dento J i.265; PvA 3, 11 etc. -- grd. deyya Mhvs vii.31. BtSk. deya. -- Other der. fr. base 2 are dayati & dayā (q. v.). -- 3. Base dadā: pres. ind. dadāti S i.18; Sn p. 87; 1st. sg. dadāmi J i.207; Sn 421; 3rd. pl. dadanti J iii.220; Dh 249. -- imper. dadāhi Pv ii.14. -- pot. dadeyya PvA 17; Miln 28 & dade Pv ii.322; Vv 625; 1st. sg. dadeyyaŋ J i.254, 265; 2nd. sg. dadeyyāsi J iii.276. Also contracted forms dajjā S i.18 (may he give); Dh 224; Pv i.41 (=dadeyya PvA 17); ii.940; 1st sg. dajjaŋ Vin i.232 (dajjâhaŋ=dajjaŋ ahaŋ). Cp. i.109 (dajjâhaŋ); J iv.101 (=dammi Com.); Pv ii.945; 2nd. pl. dajjeyyātha Vin i.232; 3rd y. dajjeyya & 3rd. pl. dajjuŋ in cpd. anupa˚. -- ppr. dadanto Sn p. 87. gen. etc. dadato It. 89; Dh 242; Pv ii.942; & dadaŋ Sn 187, 487; Pv ii.942; Vv 676. -- ppr. med. dadamāna J i.228, ii.154; PvA 129. -- aor. adadaŋ Vv 3411 (= adāsiŋ VvA 151); proh. 2nd. pl. mā dadiṭṭha DhA i.396; J iii.171. -- ger. daditvā Pv ii.89.ii (v. l. BB datvā): contr. into dajjā (should be read dajja) Pv ii.967 (=datvā PvA 139). -- Der. dada for ˚da. <-> 4. (Passive) base di (& dī): pp. dinna pres. dīyati S i.18; Th 2, 475; PvA 26, & diyyati VvA 75; cp. ādiyati; pret. dīyittha DhA i.395; -- ppr. dīyamāna PvA 8, 26, 49, 110, 133, etc. -- Der. fr. 4 are Desid. dicchati, diti, etc. -- II. Meanings i. (trs.) with acc. to give, to present with: dānaŋ deti (w. dat. & abs.) to be liberal (towards), to be munificent, to make a present S i.18; It 89; Pv i.41; ii3; PvA 8, 27, etc. -- (fig.) okāsaŋ to give opportunity, allow J i.265; ovādaŋ to give advice PvA 11; jīvitaŋ to spare one's life J ii.154; paṭivacanaŋ to answer J i.279; sādhukāraŋ to applaud J i.223; paṭiññaŋ to promise PvA 76; -- to offer, to allow: maggaŋ i. e. to make room Vin ii.221; J ii.4; maggaŋ dehi let me pass J iv.101; -- to grant: varaŋ a wish J iv.10; Pv ii.940; -- to give or deal out: daṇḍaŋ a thrashing J iv.382; pahāraŋ a blow S iv.62. -- 2. with ger. to give out, to hand over: dārūni āharitvā aggiŋ katvā d. to provide with fire J ii.102; sāṭake āharitvā to present w. clothes J i.265; dve koṭṭhāse vibhajitvā d. to deal out J i.226; kuṭikāyo kāretvā adaŋsu had huts built & gave them PvA 42. -- 3. (abs.) with inf. to permit, to allow: khādituŋ J i.223; nikkhamituŋ J ii.154; pavisituŋ J i.263, etc.
Daddabha [onomatop.] a heavy, indistinct noise, a thud J iii.76 (of the falling of a large fruit), v. l. duddabhayasadda to be regarded as a Sk. gloss= dundubhyaśabda. See also dabhakka.
Daddabhāyati [Denom. fr. prec.] to make a heavy noise, to thud J iii.77.
Daddara1 [onomat. from the noise, cp. next & cakora, with note on gala] partridge J iii.541.
Daddara2 [cp. Sk. dardara] a cert. (grinding, crashing) noise A iv.171; J ii.8; iii.461; N. of a mountain, expld as named after this noise J ii.8; iii.16, 461.
Daddaḷhati [Sk. jājvalyati, Intens. of jval, see jalati] to blaze, to shine brilliantly; only in pp. med. daddaḷhamāna resplendent, blazing forth S i.127=J i.469; Vv 173; 341; Pv ii.126; iii.35; VvA 89 (ativiya vijjotamāna); PvA 157 (at. virocamāna), 189 (at. abhijalanto). -- Spelling daddallamāna at J v.402; vi.118.
Daddu (nt.) [Sk. dadru f. & dardru a kind of leprosy, dadruna leprous (but given by Halāyudha in the meaning of ringworm, p. 234 Aufrecht); fr. *der in Sk. dṛṇāti to tear, chap, split (see dara & dala); cp. Lat. derbiosus; Ohg. zittaroh; Ags. teter] a kind of cutaneous eruption Miln 298; Vism 345.
-- bandhana in d. -- bandhanādi -- bandhana at ThA 241 should be read daṇḍa˚.
Daddula1 a cert. kind of rice D i.166; M i.78, 343; A i.241, 295; ii.206; Pug 55.
Daddula2 (nt.) [Sk. dārdura?] in nahāru˚ (v. l. dala & dadalla) both at M i.188 (kukkuṭapattena pi. n -- daddulena pi aggiŋ gavesanti) & A iv.47 (kukkuṭapattaŋ vā n -- daddulaŋ vā aggimhi pakkhittaŋ paṭilīyati) unexplained; perhaps a muscle.
Dadhi (nt.) [Sk. dadhi, redpl. formation fr. dhayati to suck. Cp. also dhenu cow, dhīta, etc.] sour milk, curds, junket Vin i.244 (in enumn of 5 -- fold cow -- produce, cp. gorasa); D i.201 (id.); M i.316; A ii.95; J ii.102; iv.140; Miln 41, 48, 63; Dhs 646, 740, 875; Vism 264, 362.
-- ghaṭa a milk bowl J ii.102; -- maṇḍaka whey S ii.111; -- māla "the milk sea," N. of an ocean J iv.140; -- vāraka a pot of milk -- curds J iii.52.
Danta1 [Sk. danta fr. acc. dantaŋ of dan, gen. datah= Lat. dentis. Cp. Av. dantan, Gr. o)do/nta, Lat. dentem, Oir. dēt; Goth. tunpus, Ohg. zand, Ags. tōot (=tooth) & tusc (=tusk); orig. ppr. to *ed in atti to eat="the biter." Cp. dāṭhā], a tooth, a tusk, fang, esp. an elephant's tusk; ivory Vin ii.117 (nāga -- d. a pin of ivory); Kh ii. (as one of the taca -- pañcaka, or 5 dermatic constituents of the body, viz. kesā, lomā nakhā d. taco, see detailed description at KhA 43 sq.); pankadanta rajassira "with sand between his teeth & dust on his head" (of a wayfarer) Sn 980; J iv.362, 371; M i.242; J i.61; ii.153; Vism 251; VvA 104 (īsā˚ long tusks); PvA 90, 152 (fang); Sdhp 360.
-- ajina ivory M ii.71 (gloss: dhanadhaññaŋ); -- aṭṭhika "teeth -- bone," ivory of teeth i. e. the tooth as such Vism 21. -- āvaraṇa the lip (lit. protector of teeth) J iv.188; vi.590; DhA i.387. -- ullahakaŋ (M iii.167) see ullahaka; -- kaṭṭha a tooth -- pick Vin i.46=ii.223; i.51, 61; ii.138; A iii.250; J i.232; ii.25; vi.75; Miln 15; DhA ii.184; VvA 63; -- kāra an artisan in ivory ivory -- worker D i.78; J i.320; Miln 331; Vism 336; -- kūta tooth of a maimed bullock (?) (thus taking kūṭa as kūṭa4, and equivalent to kūṭadanta), in phrase asanivicakkaŋ danta -- kūṭaŋ D iii.44=47, which has also puzzled the translators (cp. Dial. iii.40: "munching them all up together with that wheel -- less thunderbolt of a jawbone," with note: "the sentence is not clear"). -- pāḷi row of teeth Vism 251; -- poṇa tooth -- cleaner, always combd with mukh' odaka water for rinsing the teeth Vin iii.51; iv.90, 233; J iv.69; Miln 15; SnA 272. The C. on Pārāj. ii.4, 17, (Vin iii.51) gives 2 kinds of dantapoṇa, viz. chinna & acchinna. -- mūla the root of a tooth; the gums J v.172; -- vakkalika a kind of ascetics (peeling the bark of trees with their teeth?) DA i.271; -- vaṇṇa ivory -- coloured, ivory -- white Vv 4510; -- valaya an iv. bangle DhA i.226; -- vikati a vessel of iv. D i.78; M ii.18; J i.320; Vism 336. -- vikhādana biting with teeth, i. e. chewing Dhs 646, 740, 875; -- vidaŋsaka (either=vidassaka or to be read ˚ghaŋsaka) showing one's teeth (or chattering?) A i.261 (of hasita, laughter); -- sampatti splendour of teeth DhA i.390.
Danta2 (adj.) [Sk. dānta] made of ivory, or iv. -- coloured J vi.223 (yāna= dantamaya).
-- kāsāva ivory -- white & yellow Vin i.287; -- valaya see danta1.
Danta3 [Sk. dānta, pp. dāmyati to make, or to be tame, cp. Gr. dmhto/s, Lat. domitus. See dameti] tamed, controlled, restrained Vin ii.196; S i.28, 65, 141 (nāgo va danto carati anejo); A i.6 (cittaŋ dantaŋ); It 123 (danto damayataŋ seṭṭho); Sn 370, 463, 513, 624; Dh 35, 142 (=catumagga -- niyamena d. DhA iii.83), 321 sq.=Nd2 475. -- sudanta well -- tamed, restrained Sn 23; Dh 159, 323.
-- bhūmi a safe place (=Nibbāna), or the condition of one who is tamed S iii.84; Nd2 475 (in continuation of Dh 323); DhA iv.6.
Dantaka a pin of tooth or ivory; makara˚ the tooth of a sword -- fish Vin ii.113, 117; iv.47. See details under makara.
Dandha (adj.) [Sk.? Fausböll refers it to Sk. tandra; Trenckner (Notes 65) to dṛḍha; see also Müller, P. Gr. 22, & Lüders Z.D.M.G. 58, 700. A problematic connection is that with thaddha & datta2 (q. v.)] slow; slothful, indocile; silly, stupid M i.453; S iv.190; Dh 116; J i.116, 143; ii.447; v.158; vi.192 (+laḷāka); Th 1, 293; Miln 59, 102, 251; DhA i.94, 251; iii.4. Vism 105, 257 (with ref. to the liver).
-- âbhiññā sluggish intuition D iii.106; A v.63; Dhs 176; Nett 7, 24, 50, 123 sq., cp. A ii.149 sq.; Vism 85.
Dandhatā (f.) stupidity DhA i.250; as dandhattaŋ at D iii.106.
Dandhanatā (f.), in a˚ absence of sluggishness Dhs 42, 43.
Dandhāyanā (f.) clumsiness Miln 105.
Dandhāyitatta (nt.) [der. fr. dandheti] stupidity (=dan- dhatā) D i.249 (opp. vitthāyitatta); S ii.54; Miln 105; DA i.252.
Dandheti [Denom. fr. dandha] to be slow, to tarry Th 1, 293 (opp. tāreti). -- pp. dandhāyita see in der. ˚tta.
Dapeti Caus. fr. dā4 to clean, see pariyo˚; pp. dāta see ava˚.
Dappa [Sk. darpa, to dṛpyati] wantonness, arrogance J ii.277; Miln 361, 414; Pgdp 50. Cp. ditta2. -- In def. of root gabb at Dhtm 289.
Dappita (adj.) arrogant, haughty J v.232, 301.
Dabba1 (adj. -- n.) [Sk. dravya, nt. to dravati (dru)] (a) fit for, able, worthy, good, S i.187=Th 1, 1218, cp. Pss. of the Brethren, 399, n. 4 (=Sk. bhavya, cp. Pāṇini v.3, 104 dravyaŋ ca bhavyaḥ). -- (b) material, substance, property; something substantial, a worthy object Pgdp 14.
-- jātika of good material, fit for, able M i.114; A i.254 (cp. Sk. pātrabhūta); Vism 196. -- saŋhāra collecting something substantial PvA 114 (should prob. be read sambhāra). -- sambhāra the collection of something substantial or worth collecting,; a gift worth giving J iv.311; v.48; vi.427; DhA i.321; ii.114.
Dabba2 (adj. -- n.) [Sk. dravya, of dru wood, see dāru] tree- like, wooden; a tree, shrub, wood J i.108 (d. -- tiṇagaccha a jungle of wood & grass); v.46 (d. -- gahana a thicket of shrubs & trees); Vism 353 (˚tiṇa).
Dabbī (f.) [Sk. darvī=*dāru -- ī made of wood, see dāru] a (wooden) spoon, a ladle; (met.) the hood of a snake (dabbimattā, phaṇapuṭakā DhA iv.132). -- Dh 64; gen. & instr, davyā J iii.218; Miln 365. -- In cpds. dabbi˚.
-- kaṇṇa the tip of the ladle DhA i.371; -- gāha holding a spoon, viz. for the purposes of offering M ii.157 (of a priest); Pv ii.953 (=kaṭacchu -- gāhika PvA 135); -- mukha a kind of bird J vi.540 (=āṭa); -- homa a spoonoblation D i.9.
Dabbha [Sk. darbha to dṛbhati, to plait, interlace, etc. cp. Lith. darbas plaiting, crating] a bunch of kuśa grass (Poa Cynosuroides) D i.141; M i.344; A ii.207.
-- puppha "kuśa -- flower," Ep. of a jackal J iii.334.
Dabhakkaŋ (?) (indecl.)=daddabhaŋ a certain noise (of a falling fruit) J iii.77 (v. l. duddabha=daddabha).
Dama (adj. -- n.) (& of a nt. damo the instr. damasā) [Ved. dama; Ags. tam=E. tame, Ohg. zam to *demā in dameti] taming, subduing; self -- control, self -- command, moderation D i.53 (dānena damena saŋyamena=It 15; expl. at DA i.160 as indriya -- damena uposatha -- kammena) iii.147, 229; S i.4, 29, 168=Sn 463 (saccena danto damasā upeto); S iv.349; A i.151; ii.152 sq.; M iii.269 (+upasama); Sn 189, 542 (˚ppatta), 655; Dh 9, 25, 261; Nett 77; Miln 24 (sudanto uttame dame). duddama hard to tame or control Dh 159; PvA 280; Sdhp 367. -- arindama taming the enemy (q. v.).
Damaka (adj. -- n.) [=dama] 1. subduing, taming; converting; one who practises self -- control M i.446 (assa˚); iii.2 (id.) J i.349 (kula˚ bhikkhu), one who teaches a clan self -- mastery 505 (go˚, assa˚, hatthi˚); Th 2, 422 (=kāruññāya paresaŋ cittassa damaka ThA 268). -- 2. one who practises self -- mortification by living on the remnants of offered food (Childers) Abhp 467.
Damatha [Sk. damatha] taming, subduing, mastery, restraint, control M i.235; D iii.54 (+samatha); Dh 35 (cittassa d.); PvA 265; Dpvs vi.36.
Damana (adj. -- nt.) taming, subduing, mastery PvA 251 (arīnaŋ d˚ -- sīla= arindama).
Damaya (adj.) [Sk. damya, see damma] to be tamed: duddamaya difficult to tame Th 1, 5 (better to be read damiya).
Damita [Sk. damāyita=danta3; cp. Gr. a -- da/matos; Lat. domitus] subdued, tamed J v.36; PvA 265.
Dametar [n. -- ag. to dameti=Sk. damayitṛ, cp. Sk. damitṛ=Gr. (pan)dama/twr dmhth/r; Lat. domitor] one who tames or subdues, a trainer, in phrase adantānaŋ dametā "the tamer of the untamed" (of a Buddha) M ii.102; Th 2, 135.
Dameti [Sk. damayati, caus. to dāmyati of *dam to bring into the house, to domesticate; Gr. dama/w, dmhto/s; Lat. domare; Oir. dam (ox); Goth. tamjan=Ohg. zemman=Ags. temian=E. tame; to *demā of dama house, see dampati] to make tame, chastise, punish, master, conquer, convert Vin ii.196 (daṇḍena); M ii.102; Dh 80, 305 (attānaŋ); It 123 (ppr. [danto] damayataŋ seṭṭho [santo] samayataŋ isi); Miln 14, 386; PvA 54 (core d.=converted).
Dampati [Sk. dampati master of the house; dual: husband & wife; cp. also patir dan, *dam, as in Gr. dw_, dw_ma & des -- in despo/ths=dampati, short base of *dama house =Ved. dama, Gr. do/mos, Lat. domus to *demā (as also in dameti to domesticate) to build, cp. Gr. de/mw & de/mas; Goth. timrjan; Ohg. zimbar; E. timber] master of the house, householder, see tudampati & cp. gahapati.
Damma (adj.) [Sk. damya, grd. of dāmyati see dameti & cp. damaya (damiya)] to be tamed or restrained; esp. with ref. to a young bullock M i.225 (balagāvā dammagāvā the bulls & the young steers); It 80; also of other animals: assadamma -- sārathi a horse -- trainer A ii.112; & fig. of unconverted men likened to refractory bullocks in phrase purisa -- damma -- sārathi (Ep. of the Buddha) "the trainer of the human steer" D i.62 (misprint ˚dhamma˚)=ii.93= iii.5; M ii.38; A ii.112; Vv 1713 (nara -- vara -- d. -- sārathi cp. VvA 86.
Dayati1=dayati (q. v.) to fly J iv.347 (+uppatati); vi.145 (dayassu=uyyassu Com.).
Dayati2=[Ved. dayate of day to divide, share, cp. Gr. dai/omai, dai/numi, dai/ th, etc. to dā (see dadāti, base 2), & with p. Gr. dapa/nh, Lat. daps (see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.)] to have pity (c. loc.), to sympathize, to be kind J vi.445 (dayitabba), 495 (dayyāsi=dayaŋ kareyyāsi).
Dayā (f.) [Ved. dayā, to dayati2] sympathy, compassion, kindness M i.78; Sn 117; J i.23; vi.495. Usually as anuddayā; freq. in cpd. dayāpanna showing kindness D i.4 (=dayaŋ metta -- cittaŋ āpanno DA i.70); M i.288; A iv.249 sq.; Pug 57; VvA 23.
Dara [Sk. dara; see etym. connection under darī] fear, terror; sorrow, pain Vin ii.156=A i.138 (vineyya hadaye daraŋ); S ii.101, 103; iv.186 sq.; Th 2, 32 (= cittakato kilesa -- patho ThA, 38); J iv.61; Vv 838 (=daratha VvA 327); Pv i.85 (=citta -- daratha PvA 41). -- sadara giving pain, fearful, painful M i.464; A ii.11, 172; S i.101. Cp. ādara & purindada.
Daratha [Sk. daratha, der. fr. dara] anxiety, care, distress A ii.238; M iii.287 sq. (kāyikā & cetasikā d.); Sn 15 (darathajā: the Arahant has nought in him born of care Cy explains by pariḷāha fever); J i.61 (sabbakilesa -- d.) PvA 230 (id.); DhA ii.215; Miln 320; PvA 23, 41; VvA 327.
Darī (f.) [Sk. darī to dṛṇāti to cleave, split, tear, rend, caus. darayati *der =Gr. de/rw to skin, de/rma, dora/ skin); Lith. dirù (id.) Goth. ga -- taíran= Ags. teran (tear) =Ohg. zeran (Ger. zerren). To this the variant (r:l) *del in dalati, dala, etc. See also daddara, daddu, dara, avadīyati, ādiṇṇa, uddīyati, purindada (=puraŋ -- dara)] a cleavage, cleft; a hole, cave, cavern J i.18 (v. 106), 462 (mūsikā˚ mouse -- hole); ii.418 (=maṇiguhā); SnA 500 (=padara).
-- cara a cave dweller (of a monkey) J v.70; -- mukha entrance of a cave Vism 110. -- saya a lair in a cleft Cp. iii.71.
Dala (nt.) [Sk. dala, *del (var. of *der, see dara) in dalati (q. v.) orig. a piece chipped off=a chip, piece of wood, cp. daṇḍa, Mhg. zelge (branch); Oir delb (figure, form), deil (staff, rod)] a blade, leaf, petal (usually -- ˚); akkhi -- d. eyelid ThA 259; DA i.194; DhsA 378; uppala˚ DhsA 311; kamala˚ (lotus -- petal) VvA 35, 38; muttā˚ (?) DA i.252; ratta -- pavāḷa˚ J i.75.
Dalati [Sk. dalati, del to split off, tear; Gr. daida/llw, Lat. dolare & delere. See dala & dara] to burst, split, break. -- Caus. dāleti Sn 29 (dalayitvā=chinditvā SnA 40); Miln 398. -- Pass. dīyati (Sk. dīryate) see uddīyati.
Dalidda & Daḷidda (adj. -- n.) [Sk. daridra, to daridrāti, Intens. to drāti run (see dava), in meaning cp. addhika wayfarer=poor] vagrant, strolling, poor, needy, wretched; a vagabond, beggar -- (l:) Vin ii.159; S i.96 (opp. aḍḍha); A ii.57, 203; iii.351; iv.219; v.43; Pug 51; VvA 299 (ḷ:) M ii.73; S v.100, 384, 404; Vv201 (=duggata VvA 101); DA i.298; PvA 227; Sdhp 89, 528.
Daḷiddatā (f.) [Sk. daridratā] poverty VvA 63.
Daḷiddiya see dāḷiddiya.
Daḷha (adj.) [Sk. dṛḍha to dṛhyati to fasten, hold fast; *dhergh, cp. Lat. fortis (strong). Gr. tarfu/s (thick), Lith. dir̃žas (strap). For further relations see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under fortis] firm, strong, solid; steady, fast; nt. adv. very much, hard, strongly -- D i.245; S i.77; A ii.33; Sn 321 (nāvā), 357, 701, 821 (˚ŋ karoti to strengthen), 966 (id.); Dh 112; J ii.3; iv.106; DhA iv.48; KhA 184; VvA 212 (=thira); PvA 94, 277. -- daḷhaŋ (adv.) Dh 61, 313.
-- dhamma strong in anything, skilled in some art, proficient S ii.266=A ii.48 (of an archer); M i.82; J vi.77; Vv 631 acc. to Trenckner, Notes p. 60 (cp. also VvA 261)=dṛḍha -- dhanva, from dhanu=having a strong bow; -- nikkama of strong exertion Sn 68 (=Nd2 294); -- parakkama of strong effort, energetic M ii.95; A ii.250; Dh 23; Th 2, 160; -- pahāra a violent blow J iii.83; -- pākāra (etc.) strongly fortified S iv.194; -- bhattin firmly devoted to somebody DhsA 350.
Daḷhī˚ [f. of dṛḍha>daḷha in compn like dṛḍhī -- bhūta, etc.; cp. daḍḍhi] in kāya -- daḷhī -- bahula strong in body, athletic Vin ii.76, cp. Com. on p. 313; J iii.310; iv.219. daḷhīkaraṇa steadiness, perseverance SnA 290 (+ādhāraṇatā), 398 (id). In cpds. also daḷhi˚ viz. -- kamma making firm; strengthening Vin i.290; J v.254; Pug 18, 22; Vism 112.
Dava1 [Sk. dava, to dunoti (q. v.); cp. Gr. dais fire -- brand] fire, heat J iii.260. -- See also dāva & dāya.
-- ḍāha (=Sk. davāgni) conflagration of a forest, a jungle -- fire Vin ii.138; M i.306; J i.641; Cp. iii.93; Miln 189; Vism 36.
Dava2 [Sk. drava to dravati to run, flow, etc. *dreu besides *drā (see dalidda) & *dram (=Gr. dro/mos); cp. abhiddavati, also dabba=dravyaŋ] running, course, flight; quickness, sporting, exercise, play Vin ii.13; M i.273; iii.2; A i.114; ii.40, 145; iv.167; Pug 21, 25. -- davā (abl.) in sport, in fun Vin ii.101; davāya (dat.) id. Nd2 540; Miln 367; Dhs 1347, cp. DhsA 402. -- davaŋ karoti to sport, to play J ii.359, 363.
-- atthāya in joke, for fun Vin ii.113; -- kamyatā fondness for joking, Vin iv.11, 354; M i.565.
Davya [for *dravya]=dabba1, in sarīra˚ fitness of body, a beautiful body J ii.137.
Dasa1 [Sk. daśa=Av. dasa, Gr. de/ka, Lat. decem, Goth. taíhun, Oir. deich, Ags. tīen, Ohg. zehan fr. *dekm̊, a cpd. of dv+km̊="two hands"] the number ten; gen. dasannaŋ (Dh 137); instr. dasahi (Kh iii.) & dasabhi (Vin i.38). In cpds. ( -- ˚) also as ḷasa (soḷasa 16) & rasa (terasa 13; pannar˚ 15; aṭṭhār˚ 18).
Metaphorical meaning. (A) In the first place 10 is used for measurement (more recent & comprehensive than its base 5); it is the no. of a set or comprehensive unity, not in a vague (like 3 or 5), but in a definite sense. (B) There inheres in it the idea of a fixed measure, with which that of an authoritative, solemn & auspicious importance is coupled. This applies to the unit as well as its decimal combns (100, 1000). Ethically it denotes a circle, to fulfil all of which constitutes a high achievement or power.
Application (A) (based on natural phenomena): dasa disā (10 points of the compass; see disā): Sn 719, 1122; PvA 71, etc.; d. lokadhātuyo Pv ii.961 (= 10X1000; PvA 138); d. māse (10 months as time of gestation) kucchiyā pariharitvā J i.52; PvA 43, 82. -- (B) (fig.) 1. a set: (a) personal (cp. 10 people would have saved Sodom: Gen. 18, 32; the 10 virgins (2X5) Matt. 25, 1): divase divase dasa dasa putte vijāyitvā (giving birth to 10 sons day by day) Pv i.6. -- (b) impersonal: 10 commandments (dasa sikkhāpadāni Vin i.83), cp. Exod. 34, 28; 10 attributes of perfection of a Tathāgata or an Arahant: Tathāgata -- balāni; with ref. to the Buddha see Vin i.38 & cp. Vin. Texts i.141 sq.; dasah' angehi samannāgato arahā ti vuccati (in memorizing of No. 10) Kh iii. dasahi asaddhammehi sam˚ kāko J iii.127; -- 10 heavenly attributes (ṭhānāni): āyu etc. D iii.146; S v.275; PvA 9, opp. 10 afflictions as punishment (cp. 10 plagues Exod. 7 -- 11): dasannaŋ aññataraŋ ṭhānaŋ nigacchati Dh 137 (=das. dukkha -- kāraṇānaŋ, enumd v. 138, 139) "afflicted with one of the 10 plagues"; cp. DhA iii.70. -- 10 good gifts to the bhikkhu (see deyyadhamma) Nd2 523; PvA 7; 10 rules for the king: PvA 161; -- dividing the Empire into 10 parts: PvA 111; etc. vassa -- dasa a decade: das' ev' imā vassa -- dasā J iv.396 (enumd under vassa); dasa -- rāja -- dhammā J ii.367; das' akkosa -- vatthūni DhA i.212. -- See on similar sets A v.1 -- 310; D iii.266 -- 271. -- 2. a larger unity, a crowd, a vast number (of time & space): (a) personal, often meaning "all" (cp. 10 sons of Haman were slain Esth. 9, 10; 10 lepers cleansed at one time Luke 17, 12): dasa bhātaro J i.307; dasa bhātikā PvA 111; dasa -- kaññā -- sahassa -- parivārā PvA 210 etc. <-> (b) impersonal (cp. 10 X 10=many times, S.B.E. 43, 3): dasa -- yojanika consisting of a good many miles DhA iii.291. dasavassasahassāni dibbāni vatthāni paridahanto ("for ever and aye") PvA 76, etc.
-- kkhattuŋ [Sk. ˚kṛtvah] ten times DhA i.388; -- pada (nt.) a draught -- board (with 10 squares on each side); a pre -- Buddhistic game, played with men and dice, on such a board D i.6; Vin ii.10=iii.180 (˚e kīḷanti); DA i.85. -- bala, [Sk. daśabala] endowed with 10 (supernormal) powers, Ep. of the Buddhas, esp. of Kassapa Buddha Vin i.38=J i.84; S ii.27; Vism 193, 391; DhA i.14; VvA 148, 206, etc. -- vidha tenfold DhA i.398. -- sata ten times a hundred Vin i.38 (˚parivāro); Sn 179 (yakkhā); DhsA 198 (˚nayano). -- sahassa ten times a thousand (freq.); ˚ī in dasa -- sahassi -- lokadhātu Vin i.12 (see lokadhātu).
Dasa2 ( -- ˚) [Sk. -- dṛśa; cp. dassa] seeing, to be seen, to be perceived or understood D i.18 (aññadatthu˚ sureseeing, all -- perceiving=sabbaŋ passāmī ti attho DA i.111); Sn 653 (paṭiccasamuppāda˚), 733 (sammad˚); J i.506 (yugamatta˚; v. l. dassa). -- duddasa difficult to be seen or understood D i.12 (dhammā gambhīrā d.; see gambhīra); M i.167, 487; Sn 938; Dh 252; also as sududdasa Dh 36.
Dasaka (nt.) 1. a decad, decade, a decennial J iv.397; DhsA 316. khiḍḍā˚ the decad of play Vism 619; cakkhu˚ etc. sense -- decads Vism. 553; Comp. 164, 250; kāya˚, Vism. 588.
Dasana [Sk. daśana to ḍasati] a tooth Dāvs v.3 (d.- dhātu, the tooth relic of the Buddha).
Dasā (f.) & dasa (nt.) [Sk. daśā] unwoven thread of a web of cloth, fringe, edge or border of a garment D i.7 (dīgha˚ long -- fringed, of vatthāni); J v.187; DhA i.180; iv.106 (dasāni). -- sadasa (nt.) a kind of seat, a rug (lit. with a fringe) Vin iv.171 (=nisīdana); opp. adasaka (adj.) without a fringe or border Vin ii.301=307 (nisīdana). -- anta edge of the border of a garment J i.467; DhA i.180 sq., 391.
Dasika1 (adj.) ( -- ˚) [Sk. dṛśika, cp. dassin] to be seen, to behold, being of appearance, only in dud˚ or frightful app., fierce, ugly Si .94 & id. p. (q. v. under okoṭimaka); J i.504 (kodha, anger); PvA 24, 90 (of Petas). -- Note. The spelling is sometimes ˚dassika: A ii.85; Pug 51; PvA 90.
Dasika2 (adj.) [fr. dasā] belonging to a fringe, in dasika -- sutta an unwoven or loose thread Vin iii.241; DhA iv.206 (˚mattam pi not even a thread, i. e. nothing at all, cp. Lat. nihīlum=ne -- fīlum not a thread=nothing). See also dasaka under dasā.
Dassa ( -- ˚) [Sk. -- darśa; cp. dasa2] to see or to be seen, per- ceiving, perceived Sn 1134 (appa˚ of small sight, not seeing far, knowing little=paritta -- dassa thoka -- dassa Nd2 69). Cp. akkha˚ a judge Miln 114. -- su˚ easily perceived (opp. duddasa) Dh 252.
*Dassati1 [Sk. *darś in dadarśa pref. to dṛś; caus. darśa- yati. Cp. Gr. de/ rkomai to see; Oir. derc eye; Ags. torht; Goth. ga -- tarhjan to make conspicuous. The regular Pāli Pres. is dakkhiti (younger dakkhati), a new formation from the aor. addakkhi=Sk. adrākṣīt. The Sk. Fut. draksyati would correspond formally to dakkhati, but the older dakkhiti points toward derivation from addakkhi. This new Pres. takes the function of the Fut.; whereas the Caus. dasseti implies a hypothetical Pres. *dassati. On dakkhati, etc. see also Kuhn, Beitr. p. 116; Trenckner, Notes pp. 57, 61; Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 554] to see, to perceive.
1. (pres.) base dakkh [Sk. drakṣ]: pres. (a) dakkhati Nd2 428 (=passati), 1st dakkhāmi ibid. (=passāmi), 2nd dakkhasi S i.116; Pv ii.113 (v. l. BB adakkhi); imper. dakkha Nd2 428 (=passa). -- (b) dakkhiti Sn 909 (v. l. BB dakkhati), 3rd pl. dakkhinti Vin i.16≈Sn p. 15 (v. l. BB dakkhanti); D i.46. -- aor. addakkhi (Sk. adrakṣīt) Vin ii.195; S i.117; Sn 208 (=addasa SnA 257), 841, 1131; It 47; J iii.189; & dakkhi It 47; 1st sg. addakkhiŋ Sn 938. Spelling also adakkhi (v. l. BB at Pv ii.113) & adakkhiŋ (Nd2 423). -- inf. dakkhituŋ Vin i.179. -- Caus. p.p. dakkhāpita (shown, exhibited) Miln 119. -- Der. dakkhin (q. v.).
2. (pret.) base dass (Sk. darś & draś): aor. (a) addasa (Sk. adarśat) Sn 358, 679, 1016; J i.222; iv.2; Pv ii.323 (mā addasa=addakkhiŋ PvA 88); DhA i.26; PvA 73, & (older, cp. agamā) addasā Vin ii.192, 195; D i.112; ii.16; Sn 409 (v. l. BB addasa), 910 (id.); Miln 24, 1st sg. addasaŋ S i.101; Nd2 423 & addasaŋ Sn 837 (=adakkhiŋ Nd1 185), 1st pl. addasāma Sn 31, 178, 459, 3rd pl. (mā) addasuŋ Pv ii.76 (=mā passiŋsu PvA 102). <-> (b) addasāsi, 1st sg. addasāsiŋ Sn 937, 1145; Vv 3552 (v. l. addasāmi), 3rd pl. addasāsuŋ Vin ii.195; D ii.16; M i.153. -- (c) shortened forms of aor. are: adda Th 1, 986; addā J vi.125, 126. -- inf. daṭṭhuŋ Sn 685 (daṭṭhukāma); J i.290; Pv iv.13 (=passituŋ PvA 219); PvA 48, 79; VvA 75. -- ger. daṭṭhu (=Sk. dṛṣṭvā) Sn 424 (in phrase nekkhammaŋ daṭṭhu khemato)=1098; 681. Expl. at Nd2 292 with expl. of disvā=passitvā, etc. <-> grd. daṭṭhabba (to be regarded as) D ii.154; PvA 8, 9, 10, etc., Vism 464; & dassanīya (see sep.). Also in Caus. (see below) & in daṭṭhar (q. v.).
3. (med. -- pass.) base diss (Sk. dṛś): pres. pass. dissati (to be seen, to appear) Vin i.16; Sn 194, 441, 688 (dissare), 956; J i.138; Dh 304; Pv i.84; PvA 61 (dissasi you look, intrs.); ppr. dissamāna (visible) PvA 71, 6 (˚rūpa), 162 (id.); VvA 78 (˚kāya); Mhvs. vii.35, & der. dissamānatta (nt.) (visibility) PvA 103. -- ger. disvā Sn 48, 409, 687 sq. It 76; PvA 67, 68, etc., & disvāna Vin i.15; ii.195; Sn 299, 415, 1017; Pv ii.87, etc., also a ger. form diṭṭhā, q. v. under adiṭṭhā. -- pp. diṭṭha (q. v.).
4. Caus. (of base 2) dasseti (Sk. darśayati), aor. dassesi & (exceptional) dassayi, only in dassayi tumaŋ showed himself at Pv iii.24 (=attānaŋ uddisayi PvA 181) & iii.216 (=attānaŋ dassayi dassesi pākaṭo ahosi PvA 185). 3rd pl. dassesuŋ ger. dassetvā; inf. dassetuŋ to point out, exhibit, explain, intimate Dh 83; J i.84, 200, 263, 266; ii.128, 159; iii.53, 82; PvA 4, 8, 16 (ovādaŋ d. give advice), 24, 45, 73 etc. -- to point to (acc.) PvA 151 (sunakhaŋ), 257 (dārakaŋ). -- to make manifest, to make appear, to show or prove oneself; also intr. to appear J ii.154 (dubbalo viya hutvā attānaŋ dassesi: appeared weak); vi.116; Pv iii.23 (=sammukhībhāvaŋ gacchanti PvA 181); PvA 13 (mitto viya attānaŋ dassetvā: acting like a friend), Miln 271. Esp. in phrase attānaŋ dasseti to come into appearance (of Petas): PvA 32, 47, 68, 79, etc. (cp. above dassayi). -- pp. dassita.
Dassati2 fut. of dadāti, q. v.
Dassana (nt.) [Sk. darśana, see dassati1] -- 1. Lit. seeing, looking; noticing; sight of, appearance, look. Often equivalent to an infinitive "to see," esp. as dat. dassanāya in order to see, for the purpose of seeing (cp. dassana -- kāma= daṭṭhu -- kāma): [Bhagavantaŋ] dassanāya M ii.23, 46; A i.121; iii.381; Sn 325. -- (a) (nt.) "sight" D ii.157 (visūka˚, looking on at spectacles); A iii.202 (+savana hearing); iv.25 sq. (bhikkhu˚); Sn 207 (muni˚, may be taken as 2, cp. SnA 256), 266 (=pekkhaṇa KhA 148); Dh 206 (ariyānaŋ d., cp. ariyānaŋ dassāvin), 210 (appiyānaŋ), 274; Vv 342; VvA 138 (sippa˚ exhibition of art, competition). <-> (b) adj. as ( -- ˚) "of appearance" (cp. ˚dasa) Sn 548 (cāru˚ lovely to behold); PvA 24 (bhayānaka˚ fearful to look at), 68 (bībhaccha˚). -- 2. Appld. (power of) perception, faculty of apperception, insight, view, theory; esp. (a) in combn ñāṇa -- dassana either "knowing & seeing," or perhaps "the insight arising from knowledge," perfect knowledge, realization of the truth, wisdom (cp. ñāṇa): S i.52; ii.30; v.28, 422; M i.195 sq., 241, 482 (Gotamo sabbaññū sabba -- dassāvī aparisesaŋ ñ -- d ˚ŋ paṭijānāti; id. ii.31); D iii.134; A i.220; ii.220; iv.302 sq.; cp. ñ -- d -- paṭilābha A i.43; ii.44 sq.; iii 323; ñ -- d -- visuddhi M i.147 sq. Also with further determination as adhideva -- ñ -- d˚ A iv.428; alam -- ariya˚ S iii.48; iv.300; v.126 sq.; M i.68, 71, 81, 207, 246, 440 sq., A i.9; iii.64, 430; v.88; parisuddha A iii.125; maggâmagga˚ A v.47; yathābhūta˚ A iii.19, 200; iv.99, 336; v.2 sq., 311 sq.; vimutti˚ S i.139; v.67; A iii.12, 81, 134; iv.99, 336; v.130; It 107, 108; Miln 338. See also vimutti. -- (b) in other contexts: ariyasaccāna -- dassana Sn 267; ujubhūta˚ S v.384, 404; dhamma˚ (the right doctrine) S v.204, 344, 404; A iii.263; pāpa˚ (a sinful view) Pv iv.355; viparīta˚ A iii.114; iv.226; v.284 sq. (and a˚), 293 sq. sammā˚ (right view) S iii.189; A iii.138; iv.290; v.199; sabbalokena d. S iv.127; sahetu d. S v.126 sq.; suvisuddha d. S iv.191. -- S iii.28, 49; M ii.46; iii.157; Sn 989 (wisdom: Jinānaŋ eta d. corresponding with ñāṇa in preceding line); Dhs 584, 1002 (insight: cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 256). -- (adj.) perceiving or having a view (cp. dasseti) S i.181 (visuddha˚); Th 1, 422. -- (c) as nt. from the Caus. dasseti: pointing out, showing; implication, definition, statement (in Com. style) PvA 72; often as ˚ākāra -- dassana: PvA 26 (dātabba˚), 27 (thomana˚), 35 (kata˚) & in dassanatthaŋ in order to point out, meaning by this, etc. PvA 9, 68. -- 3. adassana not seeing S i.168=Sn 459; invisibility J iv.496 (˚ŋ vajjati to become invisible); wrong theory or view A v.145 sq.; Sn 206; Pug 21.
-- anuttariya (nt.) the pre -- eminence or importance of (right or perfect) insight; as one of the 3 anuttariyāni, viz. d˚, paṭipadā˚, vimutta˚ at D iii.219, 250, 281; A iii.284, 325; -- kāma (adj.) desirous of seeing A i.150; iv.115; Miln 23; -- bhūmi the level or plane of insight Nett 8, 14, 50; -- sampanna endowed with right insight S ii.43 sq., 58.
Dassanīya (adj.) [Sk. darśanīya; grd. formation of das- sana, also as dassaneyya] fair to behold, beautiful, good -- looking (=dassituŋ yutta DA i.141), often in formula abhirūpa d. pāsādika paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya samannāgəta to express matchless physical beauty: D i.114; S ii.279; PvA 46 etc. Also with abhirūpa & pāsādika alone of anything fair & beautiful: D i.47. -- Vin iv.18; S i.95; J iii.394; Pug 52, 66; DA i.281; PvA 44 (=subha), 51 (= rucira). -- Comparative dassanīyatara S i.237; Sdhp 325: DhA i.119.
Dassaneyya (adj.)=dassanīya J v.203 (bhusa˚).
Dassāvitā (f.) [abstr. to dassāvin] seeing, sight ( -- ˚) Miln 140 (guṇavisesa˚).
Dassāvin (adj. -- n.) [Sk. *darśavant] full of insight, seeing, perceiving, taking notice of. In combn with ˚ñū (knowing) it plays the part of an additional emphasis to the 1st term=knowing & seeing i. e. having complete or highest knowledge of, gifted with "clear" sight or intuition (see jānāti passati & cp. ñāṇa -- dassana). <-> (a) As adj. -- ˚: seeing, being aware of, realizing; anicca˚ S iii.1; ādīnava˚ S ii.194; iv.332; M i.173; A v.181 sq.; pariyanta˚ A v.50 sq.; bhaya˚ S v.187: It 96; esp. in phrase anumattesu vajjesu bhaya˚ D i.63=It 118 (cp bhaya -- dassin); lokavajjabhaya˚ S i.138; sabba˚ (+sabbaññū) M i.482 (samaṇo Gotamo s˚ s˚); ii.31; Miln 74 (Buddho s˚ s˚); cp. M Vastu iii.51 sarvadarśāvin; sāra˚. Vin ii.139. -- (b) (n.) one who sees or takes notice of, in phrase ariyānaŋ dassāvī (+sappurisānaŋ dassāvī & kovido) M i.8; S iii.4; opp. adassāvī one who disregards the Noble Ones S iii.3, 113; M iii.17; Dhs 1003 (cp. DhsA 350).
Dassika ( -- ˚): see dasika1.
Dassita1 [Sk. darśita, pp. of dasseti1] shown, exhibited, performed Vin iv.365; J i.330. Cp. san˚.
Dassita2 at J vi.579 accord. to Kern (Toev. p. 114)=Sk. daŋśita mailed, armed.
Dassin ( -- ˚) (adj.) [Sk. ˚darśin] seeing, finding, realizing, per- ceiving. Only in cpds., like attha˚ Sn 385; ananta˚ S i.143; ādīnava˚ Sdhp 409; ekanga˚ Ud 69; jātikkhaya˚ Sn 209; It 40; ñāṇa˚ Sn 478 (=sacchikatasabbaññuta -- ñāṇa SnA 411; cp. dassāvin); tīra˚ S iii.164 sq.; A iii.368, cp. tīra -- dakkhin; dīgha˚ (=sabbadassāvin) PvA 196; bhaya˚ Dh 31 (˚dassivā=dassī vā?), 317; It 40; DA i.181 (=bhaya dassāvin); viveka˚ Sn 474, 851.
Dassimant see attha˚.
Dassu [Sk. dasyu, cp. dāsa] enemy, foe; robber, in dassu- khīla robber -- plague D i.135, 136 (=corakhīla DA i.296).
Dassetar [Sk. darśayitṛ, n. agent to dasseti] one who shows or points out, a guide, instructor, teacher A i.62, 132=It 110.
Dasseti Caus. of dassati1 (q. v.).
Dasso n. pl. of dāsī.
Daha [Sk. draha, through metathesis fr. hrada, hlād, see hilādate] a lake D i.45 (udaka˚); J i.50; ii.104; v.412; Miln 259; PvA 152; Dpvs i.44.
Dahati1 (dahate) [Sk. dadhāti to put down, set up; *dhe=Gr. ti/qhmi, Lat. facio, Ohg. tuon, Ags. dōn= E. to do. See also dhātu] to put, place; take for (acc. or abl.), assume, claim, consider D i.92 (okkākaŋ pitāmahaŋ=ṭhapeti DA i.258); S iii.113 (mittato daheyya); A iv.239 (cittaŋ d. fix the mind on); Sn 825 (bālaŋ dahanti mithu aññamaññaŋ=passanti dakkhanti, etc. Nd1 163). Pass dhīyati (q. v.); grd. dheyya (q. v.). <-> Note. dahati is more frequent in combn with prefixes & compositions like ā˚, upa˚, pari˚, sad˚, san˚, samā˚, etc. pp. hita.
Dahati2=ḍahati to burn; as dahate Pv ii.98 (=dahati vināseti PvA 116).
Dahana [Sk. dahana, to dahati, orig. "the burner"] fire Vism 338 (˚kicca); ThA 256; Dāvs v.6; Sdhp 20.
Dahara (adj.) [Sk. dahara & dahra for dabhra to dabhnoti to be or make short or deficient, to deceive] small, little, delicate, young; a young boy, youth, lad D i.80, 115; S i.131; ii.279 (daharo ce pi paññavā); M i.82; ii.19, 66; A v.300; Sn 216, 420 (yuvā+), 578 (d. ca mahantā ye bālā ye ca paṇḍitā sabbe maccuvasaŋ yanti); J i.88 (daharadahare dārake ca dārikāyo), 291 (˚itthī a young wife); ii.160, 353; iii.393; Dh 382; Pv iv.150 (yuvā); DhA i.397 (sāmaṇera); DA i.197 (bhikkhū), 223 (=taruṇa), 284 (id.); PvA 148; VvA 76; ThA 239, 251. Opposed to mahallaka J iv.482; to vuḍḍha Vism 100. <-> f. daharā Vv 315 (young wife) (+yuvā VvA 129) & daharī J iv.35; v.521; Miln 48 (dārikā).
Daharaka=dahara, young Miln 310. -- f. ˚ikā a young girl Th 2, 464, 483.
Dāṭhā (f.) [Sk. daŋṣṭrā to ḍasati (q. v.), cp. also daṭṭha] a large tooth, fang, tusk; as adj. ( -- ˚) having tusks or fangs D ii.18 (susukkha˚); J i.505 (uddhaṭa -- dāṭho viya sappo); iv.245 (nikkhanta˚); DhA i.215; PvA 152 (kaṭhina˚); Sdhp 286.
-- āvudha [Sk. daŋṣṭrāyudha] using a tusk as his weapon J v.172; -- danta a canine tooth KhA 44; -- balin one whose strength lies in his teeth (of a lion) Sn 72.
Dāṭhikā (f.) [Sk. *dāḍhikā=Prk. for daŋṣṭrikā] beard, whiskers Vin ii.134 (na d. ṭhapetabbā, of the bhikkhus); J i.305; v.42 (tamba˚), 217 (mahā˚ having great whiskers); DA i.263 (parūḷha -- massu˚ with beard & whiskers grown long).
Dāṭhin (adj.) [cp. Sk. daŋṣṭrin] having tusks J ii.245; iv.348; Th 1, p. 1; Sdhp 286.
Dātar [Sk. dāṭr, n. ag. of dadāti to give; cp. Gr. dw/twr & doth/r] a giver, a generous person Pgdp 50. -- adātā one who does not give, a miser Pv ii.82; otherwise as na dātā (hoti) A ii.203; It 65.
Dātta (nt.) [Sk. dātra, to dā, Sk. dāti, dyati to cut, divide, deal out; cp. Gr. date/omai, dai/omai & see dāna, dāpeti, dāyati] sickle, scythe Miln 33.
Dāna (nt.) [Ved. dāna, dā as in dadāti to give & in dāti, dyāti to deal out, thus: distribution (scil. of gifts); cp. Gr. da/nos (present), Lat. damnum (E. damages); Gr. dw_ron, Lat. donum; also Ags. tīd (=E. tide, portion, i. e. of time), & tīma (=E. time). See further dadāti, dayati, dātta, dāpeti. Defn at Vism 60: dānaŋ vuccati avakhaṇḍanaŋ] (a) giving, dealing out, gift; almsgiving, liberality, munificence; esp. a charitable gift to a bhikkhu or to the community of bhikkhus, the Sangha (cp. deyyadhamma & yañña). As such it constitutes a meritorious act (puññaŋ) and heads the list of these, as enumerated in order, dānamaya puññaŋ, sīlamaya p., bhāvanāmaya p. viz. acts of merit consisting of munificence, good character & meditation (D iii.218 e. g.; cp. cāga, puñña, sīla). Thus in formula dānâdīni puññāni katvā J i.168; PvA 66, 105; cp. cpds. under ˚maya. -- (b) Special merit & importance is attached to the mahādāna the great gift, i. e. the great offering (of gifts to the Sangha), in character the buddhistic equivalent of the brahmanic mahāyajña the chief sacrifice. On 16 Mahādānas see Wilson Hindu Caste 413; on 4 Beal. Chinese Texts 88. -- A iv.246; J i.50, 74; v.383 (devasikaŋ chasatasahassa -- pariccāgaŋ karonto mahādānaŋ pavattesi "he gave the great largesse, spending daily 600,000 pieces"); PvA 19, 22, 75, 127, etc. -- (c) Constituents, qualities & characteristics of a dāna: 8 objects suitable for gifts form a standard set (also enumd as 10), viz. anna pāna vattha yāna mālā gandha -- vilepana seyyāvasatha padīpeyya (bread, water, clothes, vehicle, garlands, scented ointment, conveniences for lying down & dwelling, lighting facility) A iv.239; cp. Pv ii.49 & see ˚vatthu & deyyadhamma. Eight ways of giving alms at D iii.258= A iv.236, five ways, called sappurisa -- dāna (& asapp˚) at A iii.171 sq.; eight sapp˚ at A iv.243. Five manners of almsgiving metaphorically for sīlas 1 -- 5 at A iv.246= DA i.306. Five characteristics of a beneficial gift at A iii.172, viz. saddhāya dānaŋ deti, sakkaccaŋ d.d., kālena (cp. kāladāna A iii.41), anuggahitacitto, attānañ ca parañ ca anupahacca d.d. -- (d) Various passages showing practice & value of dāna: Vin i.236; D i.53 (+dama & saŋyama; cp. It 15; PvA 276); ii.356 sq. (sakkaccaŋ & a˚); A iv.392 sq. (id.); D iii.147 sq., 190 sq., 232; S i.98 (dānaŋ dātabbaŋ yattha cittaŋ pasīdati); A i.91=It 98 (āmisa˚ and dhamma˚, material & spiritual gifts); A i.161; iii.41 (dāne ānisaŋsā); iv.60; 237 sq. (mahapphala), 392 sq. (˚ssa vipāka); v.269 (petānaŋ upakappati); J i.8 (aggaḷa˚); ii.112 (dinna˚), iii.52 (id.); Sn 263, 713 (appaŋ dānaŋ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaŋ) PvA 54 (āgantuka˚ gift for the newcomer); Sdhp 211 -- 213. -- adāna withholding a gift, neglect of liberality, stinginess Pv ii.945; Miln 279; PvA 25; cp. ˚sīla under cpds.: atidāna excessive almsgiving Pv ii.945 (cp. PvA 129); Miln 277.
-- agga [Sk. dānāgara, cp. bhattagga, salākagga; see Trenckner, Notes p. 56] a house where alms or donations are given, a store -- house of gifts, fig. a source or giver of gifts, a horn of plenty J vi.487; DhA i.152, 189; Miln 2; PvA 121, 124, 127, 141. A possible connection w. agga=āgra is suggested by combn dānāni mahādānāni aggaññāni A iv.246; -- âdhikāra supervision or charge of alms -- distributing. PvA 124 (cp. Pv ii.927); -- ānisaŋsa praise of generosity PvA 9; cp. A iii.41; -- upakaraṇa means or materials for a gift PvA 105; -- upapatti (read uppatti at D iii.258) an object suitable for gifts, of which 8 or 10 are mentioned (see above c) A iv.239=D iii.258; -- kathā talk or conversation about (the merit & demerit of) almsgiving, one of the anupubbi -- kathā Vin i.15, 18; -- dhamma the duty or meritorious act of bestowing gifts of mercy (cp. deyyadhamma) PvA 9; -- pati "lord of alms," master in liberality, a liberal donor (def. by Bdhgh as: yaŋ dānaŋ deti tassa pati hutvā deti na dāso na sahāyo DA i.298) D i.137 (+saddho & dāyako, as one of the qualifications of a good king); A iii.39; iv.79 sq. (+saddho); Sn 487; Pv i.114 (+amaccharin); J i.199; Miln 279 sq.; Sdhp 275, 303; -- puñña the religious merit of almsgiving or liberality (see above a) PvA 73; -- phala the fruit of munificence (as accruing to the donor) A iii.39; iv.79; Pv ii.83 (˚ŋ hoti paramhi loke: is rewarded in the life to come, cp. It 19); PvA 8 (cp. Pv i.1); -- maya consisting in giving alms or being liberal (see above a) D iii.218 (puññakiriya -- vatthu); Vbh 135 (kusala -- cetanā), 325 (pañña); PvA 8 (puñña), 60 (id.), 9 (kusala -- kamma), 51, etc.; -- vaṭṭa alms J vi.333; -- vatthu that which constitutes a meritorious gift; almsgiving, beneficence, offering, donation D iii.258= A iv.236; PvA 20 (=annapānādika dasavidha dātabbavatthu PvA 7); -- veyyāvaṭika services rendered at the distribution of gifts DhA iii.19; -- saŋvibhāga liberal spending of alms D iii.145, 169; A i.150, 226; iii.53, 313; v.331; It 19; Vism 306; freq. with ˚rata fond of giving alms S v.351, 392; A iv.6 (vigatamalamaccherena cetasā), 266 (id.); -- salā a hall, built for the distribution of alms & donations to the bhikkhus & wanderers J i.231, 262; iv.402 (six); v.383 (id.); -- sīla liberal disposition PvA 89; usually as adāna -- sīla (adj.) of miserly character, neglecting the duty of giving alms Sn 244; Pv ii.83 (˚ā na saddahaṇti dānaphalaŋ hoti paramhi loke); PvA 45 (=adāyaka), 59 (+maccharin), 68 (id.).
Dānava [Sk. dānava] a kind of Asuras or Titans, the offspring of Danu J iii.527; v.89; Miln 153; Dpvs xvii.98.
Dāni (adv.) [shortened form for idāni, q. v.] now, Vin i.180; ii.154; S i.200, 202; ii.123; iv.202; J ii.246; Miln 11, etc.
Dāpana: see vo˚.
Dāpita [Sk. dāpayita pp. of dāpeti1] given, sent PvA 6; Mhvs vii.26.
Dāpeti1 [Sk. dāpayati, dap fr. dā (see dadāti & dayati) =deal out, spend, etc., cp. Gr. da/ptw, dapa/nh (expenditure), dei_pnon (meal); Lat. daps (id.), damnum (expense fr. *dapnom). See also dātta & dāna] to induce somebody to give, to order to be given, to deal out, send, grant, dedicate J vi.485; PvA 46; aor. dāpesi J iv.138; DhA i.226, 393 (sent); PvA 5 (id.), 31; fut. dāpessati J ii.3; DhA 371. Cp. ava˚.
Dāpeti2 [Sk. drāvayati & drapayati, Caus. to dru, see davati] to cause to run J ii.404.
Dāma (nt.) [Sk. dāman to dyati to bind (Gr. di/dhmi), *dē, as in Gr. de/sma (rope), dia/dhma (diadem), u(po/dhma (sandal)] a bond, fetter, rope; chain, wreath, garland S iv.163 (read dāmena for damena), 282, (id.); A iii.393 (dāmena baddho); Sn 28 (=vacchakānaŋ bandhanatthāya katā ganthitā nandhipasayuttā rajjubandhanavisesā); Vism 108. Usually -- ˚, viz. anoja -- puppha˚ J i.9; vi.227; olambaka˚ VvA 32; kusuma˚ J iii.394; gandha˚ J i.178; VvA 173, 198; puppha˚ J i.397; VvA 198; mālā˚ J ii.104; rajata˚ J i.50; iii.184; iv.91; rattapuppha˚ J iii.30; sumana˚ J iv.455.
Dāya1 [Sk. dāva, conflagration of a forest; wood=easily inflammable substance; to dunoti (to burn) caus. dāvayati, cp. Gr. dai/w (to burn) & P. dava1] wood; jungle, forest; a grove Vin i.10 (miga˚), 15, 350; ii.138; S ii.152 (tiṇa˚); iv.189 (bahukaṇṭaka d.=jungle); A v.337 (tiṇa˚); J iii.274; vi.278. See also dāva.
-- pāla a grove keeper Vin i.350; M i.205.
Dāya2 [Sk. dāya, to dadāti, etc.] a gift, donation; share, fee D i.87≈(in phrase rājadāya brahmadeyya, a king's grant, cp. rājadattiya); J iv.138; v.363; vi.346. Cp. dāyāda & brahmadeyya.
Dāyaka [Sk. dāyaka, dā as in dadāti & dāna] (adj.) giving, bestowing, distributing, providing (usually -- ˚); (n.) a donor, benefactor; a munificent person M i.236 sq.; A i.26, 161; ii.64, 80; iii.32, 336; iv.81; Sn p. 87; It 19 (ito cutā manussattā saggaŋ gacchanti dāyakā); J v.129 (kaṇḍa˚); Pv i.11 sq.; 12; 42; 55; DA i.298; PvA 113 (=dada); Miln 258 (˚ānaŋ dakkhiṇā); Sdhp 276. -- f. dāyikā Vin ii.216 (bhikkhā˚), 289 (khīrassa). -- adāyaka a stingy person, one who neglects almsgiving (cp. adānasīla) Pv i.119; f. ˚ikā Pv i.93.
Dāyajja (nt.) [Sk. dāyādya; see dāyāda] inheritance Vin i.82; D iii.189; A iii.43; J i.91; Vism 43 sq.; dowry J iii.8. -- (adj.) one who inherits Vin iii.66 (pituno of the father).
-- upasampadā, lit. the Upasampadā by way of inh., a particular form of ordination conferred on Sumana & Sopāka, both novices seven yrs. old DhA iv.137.
Dāyati [Sk. dāti & dyāti (dā) to cut, divide, etc.; cp. dayati, dātta, dāna] to cut, mow, reap, caus. dāyāpeti to cause to be cut or mowed DhA iii.285.
Dāyana (nt.) [see dayati] cutting; ˚agga the first of what has been cut (on fields) DhA i.98; ˚atthaŋ for the purpose of mowing DhA iii.285.
Dāyāda [Sk. dāyāda=dāya+ā -- da receiving the (son's) portion, same formation on ground of sam̊e idea as Lat. heres=*ghero+ē -- do receiver of what is left: see Brugmann, Album Kern p. 29 sq.] heir M i.86=Nd2 199; S i.69, 90; iv.72; A iii.72 sq.; J iii.181; vi.151; Kh viii.5. Often fig. with kamma˚ one who inherits his own deeds (see kamma 3 A b & cpds.): M i.390 sq.; A v.289; & as dhamma˚ (spiritual heir) opposed to āmisa˚ (material h.): M i.12; It 101; also as dhamma˚ D iii.84; as brahma˚ M ii.84; D iii.83. -- adāyāda not having an heir S i.69; J v.267. See dāyajja & dāyādaka.
Dāyādaka [=dāyāda] heir M ii.73; Th 1, 781, 1142; f. ˚ikā Th 2, 327 (= dāyajjarahā ThA 234).
Dāyika (adj.)=dāyaka PvA 157; Sdhp 211, 229.
-- Dāyin (adj.) [Sk. dāyin, of dadāti] giving, granting, bestowing PvA 121 (icchit' icchita˚), 157 (=[kāma] dada); Sdhp 214 (dānagga˚).
Dāra & Dārā (f.) [Sk. dāra (m.) & dārā (f.), more freq. dārā (m.pl.); instr. sg. dārena J iv.7; Pv iv.177, etc.; instr, pl. dārehi Sn 108 (sehi d. asantuṭṭho not satisfied with his own wife), loc. pl. dāresu Sn 38 (puttesu dāresu apekkhā), orig. "wives, womenfolk," female members of the household=Gr. dou_los (slave; Hesychius: dou=los=h( oi)ki/a; cp. also origin of Germ. frauenzimmer & E. womanhood). Remnants of pl. use are seen in above passage. fr. Sn.] a young woman, esp. married woman, wife. As dārā f. at Nd2 295 (d. vuccati bhariyā) & It 36; f. also dārī maiden, young girl Pv i.115. Otherwise as dāra (coll -- masc.): Dh 345; J i.120; ii.248; iv.7; v.104, 288; VvA 299 (˚paṭiggaha). -- putta -- dārā (pl.) wife & children Sn 108, 262; J i.262; cp. saputtadāra with w. & ch. Pv iv.347; putta ca dārā ca Sn 38, 123. Freq. in definition of sīla No. 3 (kāmesu micchācārin or abrahmacariyā, adultery) as sakena dārena santuṭṭha A iii.348; v.138; Sn 108 (a˚); Pv 177, etc. -- paradāra the wife of another M i.404 sq.; Dh 246, 309; Sn 396 (parassa d.) PvA 261.
Dāraka [Sk. dāraka, cp. dāra & Gr. dou=los (slave)] a (young) boy, child, youngster; a young man. f. dārikā girl (see next) Vin i.83; J i.88 (dārake ca dārikāyo boys & girls); ii.127; vi.336; Pv i.127 (=bāla˚ PvA 65); DhA i.99 (yasa˚=yasa -- kulaputta); Miln 8, 9; PvA 176. -- Freq. as gāmadārakā (pl.) the village -- boys, streeturchins J ii.78, 176; iii.275.
-- tikicchā the art of infant -- healing D i.12 (=komārabhacca -- vejjakamma DA i.98).
Dārikā (f.) [Sk. dārikā, see dāraka] a young girl, daughter J iii.172; vi.364; Miln 48, 151; PvA 16 (daughter), 55, 67, 68.
Dāru (nt.) [Sk. dāru, *dereṷo (oak) tree; cp. Av. dāuru (wood) Gr. do/ru (spear), drus (oak); Lat. larix (fr. *dārix)=larch; Oir. daur (oak); Goth. triu, Ags. treo= tree. Also Sk. dāruṇa, Lat. dūrus (hard) etc., Oir. dru strong. See also dabba2, dabbī & duma] wood, piece of wood; pl. woodwork, sticks A i.112; It 71; Dh 80; J ii.102; iii.54; vi.366; DhA i.393; PvA 76 (candana˚), 141.
-- kuṭikā a hut, log -- house Vin iii.43; -- kkhandha pile of wood PvA 62; -- gaha a wood yard Vin iii.42 sq.; -- ghaṭika wooden pitcher ThA 286. -- cīriya "woodbarked" Np, DhA ii.35. -- ja made of wood S i.77; Dh 345; -- dāha the burning of wood S i.169; -- dhītalikā a wooden doll Vin iii.36, 126; -- patta a wooden bowl Vin ii.112, 143; pattika one who uses a wooden bowl for collecting alms D i.157; iii.22; DA i.319; pādukā a wooden shoe, a clog Vin ii.143; -- bhaṇḍa wooden articles Vin ii.143 (specified), 170, 211; -- maṇḍalika a wooden disk DhA iii.180; -- maya wooden VvA 8, DhA i.192; -- yanta a wooden machine Vism 595; -- sanghāta ( -- yāna) "a vehicle constructed of wood," i. e. a boat J v.194; -- samādahāna putting pieces of wood together S i.169.
Dāruka (cp. dāru] a log S i.202=Th 1, 62=DhA iii.460; adj. made of wood Th 2. 390 (˚cillaka, a wooden post, see ThA 257).
Dāruṇa (adj.) [Ved. dāruṇa, to dāru ("strong as a tree"), cp. Gr. droo/n=i) sxuro/n Hesych; Lat. dūrus; Oir. dron (firm), Mir. dūr (hard) Ags. trum] strong, firm, severe; harsh, cruel, pitiless S i.101; ii.226; Sn 244; Dh 139; J iii.34; Pv iv.36 (=ghora PvA 251); Miln 117 (vāta); PvA 24, 52 (=ghora), 159 (sapatha a terrible oath= ghora), 181 (=kurūrin), 221 (˚kāraṇa); Sdhp 5, 78, 286.
Dālana [f. dalati] see vi˚.
Dālikā & Dālima [Sk. dālika the colocynth & dāḍima the pomegranate tree] in ˚laṭṭhi a kind of creeper; equivalent to takkāri (?) Th 2, 297 (dālikā)=ThA 226 (dālikā & dālima).
Dāḷiddiya (& daḷiddiya) (nt.) [Sk. *dāridrya] poverty D iii.65, 66; A iii.351 sq.; J i.228; Dāvs ii.60; Sdhp 78.
Dāleti see dalati.
Dāva [Sk. dāva, see dava1 & daya1] in ˚aggi a jungle -- fire J i.213; iii.140; Vism 470; DhA i.281.
Dāvika (adj.) in piṇḍa˚, a cert. rank in the army (v. l. piṇḍa -- dāyika) D i.51=Miln 331 (DA i.156: sāhasikamahāyodhā, etc., with popular expl. of the terms piṇḍa & davayati).
Dāsa [Ved. dāsa; orig. adj. meaning "non -- Aryan," i. e. slave (cp. Gr. ba/ rbaros, Ger. sklave=slave); Av. dāha= a Scythian tribe. Also connected w. dasyu (see dassukhīla)] a slave, often combd w. f. dāsī. Def. by Bdhgh as "antojāto" (DA i.300), or as "antojātadhanakkīta -- karamarânīta -- sāmaŋ dāsabyaŋ upagatānaŋ aññataro" (ibid. 168). -- In phrase dāsā ca kammakarā "slaves & labourers" Vin i.243, 272; ii.154; as dāso kammakaro "a slave -- servant" D i.60 (cp. d.<-> kammakara). -- Vin i.72, 76 (dāso na pabbājetabbo: the slave cannot become a bhikkhu); D i.72; M ii.68 (fig. taṇhā˚); J i.200, 223; iii.343 (bought for 700 kahāpaṇas), 347; Pug 56; PvA 112.
-- kammakara (porisa) a slave -- servant, an unpaid labourer, a serf Vin i.240; A i.206; D iii.189; DhA iv.1; -- gaṇa a troop of slaves Pv iv.141; -- purisa a servant J i.385; -- porisa a servant, slave Sn 769 (cp. Nd1 11, where 4 kinds of d. are mentioned); -- lakkhaṇa fortunetelling from (the condition of) slaves D i.9.
Dāsaka=dāsa in ˚putta a slave, of the sons of the slaves, mentioned as one of the sipp' āyatanas at D i.51≈ (expl. by Bdhgh as balavasinehā -- gharadāsa -- yodhā DA i.157). -- sadāsaka with slaves, followed by slaves Vv 324. -- f. dāsikā a female slave (=dāsī) M i.126; J vi.554.
Dāsabyatā (f.)=dāsavya Sdhp 498.
Dāsavya & Dāsabya (nt.) [cp. Sk. dāsya] the condition of a slave, slavery, serfdom D i.73; M i.275 (b); J i.226; DA i.168 (b), 213; DhA iii.35; PvA 112, 152.
Dāsitta (nt.) [Sk. dāsītva] the status of a (female) slave Miln 158.
Dāsima a species of tree J vi.536.
Dāsiyā=dāsikā, a female slave J vi.554.
Dāsī (f.) [Sk. dāsī, cp. dāsa. Nom. pl. dasso for dāsiyo J iv.53; in cpds. dāsi˚] a female servant, a handmaiden, a slave -- girl Vin i.217, 269, 291; ii.10 (kula˚), 78= iii.161; M i.125; ii.62 (ñāti˚); Pv ii.321 (ghara˚); PvA 46, 61, 65. -- Cp. kumbha˚.
-- gaṇa a troop of slave -- girls J ii.127; -- dāsā (pl.) maid- & man -- servants DhA i.187; freq. to cpd. d -- d -- paṭiggahaṇa slave -- trading D i.5≈ (cp. DA i.78); -- puttâle; the son of a slave, an abusive term (gharadāsiyā va putto Dh i.257; cp. Sk. dāsīsuta) D i.93 (˚vāda); -- bhoga the possessions of a slave Vin iii.136.
Dāha see ḍāha.
Di˚ secondary base of numeral "2," contracted fr. dvi: see under dvi B i.4.
Dikkhita [Sk. dīkṣita "having commenced the prepara- tory rites for sacrifice"] initiated, consecrated, cira˚ initiated long since S i.226=J v.138, 139 (where dakkhita, q. v.; Com. cira -- pabbājita).
Digucchā (f.) [=jigucchā; Sk. jugupsā] disgust DhsA 210 (asuci˚).
Dighacchā (f.) [=jighacchā] hunger A ii.117.
Dighañña (adj.) [for jighañña=Sk. jaghanya fr. janghā] inferior, low, last, hindmost (i. e. westward) J v.24 (where the Com. seems to imply a reading jighacchaŋ with meaning of 1st sg. pot. intens. of ghas, but d. is evidently the right reading), 402, 403 (˚rattiŋ at the end of the night).
Dicchati [Sk. ditsati, Desid. fr. dadāti, base 4, q. v.] to wish to give, to be desirous of giving S i.18, 20 (dicchare 3rd pl.); J iv.64.
Dija see under dvi B i.4.
Diṭṭha1 [Sk. dṛṣṭa, pp. of *dassati] 1. seen; a˚ not seen D i.222 (a˚+avedita asacchikata); M i.3 sq. (diṭṭhaŋ diṭṭhato sañjānāti); Sn 147 (diṭṭhā vā ye vā addiṭṭhā), 995 (na me diṭṭho ito pubbe na ssuto . . . Satthā); J ii.154; iii.278; Pv i.23 (sāmaŋ d.=seen by yourself); 33 (id.). -- nt. diṭṭhaŋ a vision J iii.416. -- Since sight is the principal sense of perception as well as of apperception (cp. cakkhu), that which is seen is the chief representation of any sense -- impression, & diṭṭha combd with suta (heard) and muta (sensed by means of smell, taste & touch), to which viññāta (apperceived by the mind) is often joined, gives a complete analysis of that which comprises all means of cognition & recognition. Thus diṭṭha+suta stands collectively for the whole series Sn 778, 812, 897, 1079; Pv iv.13; diṭṭha suta muta (see Nd2 298 for detail & cp. diṭṭhiyā sutiyā ñāṇena) Sn 790, 901, 914, 1082, 1086, 1122 (na tuyhaŋ adiṭṭhaŋ asutaŋ amutaŋ kiñcanaŋ atthi=you are omniscient); d. suta muta viññāta in the same sense as Sn 1122 in "yaŋ sadevakassa lokassa d. s. m. v. sabbaŋ taŋ Tathāgatena abhisambuddhaŋ" of the cognitive powers of the Tathāgata D iii.134=Nd2 276= It 121; D iii.232; Sn 1086, 1122. -- 2. known, understood M i.486; Sn 761; diṭṭha pañha a problem or question solved J vi.532. See also conclusion of No. 1. -- 3. (adj.) visible, determined by sight, in conn. with dhamma meaning the visible order of things, the world of sensation, this world (opp. samparāyika dhamma the state after death, the beyond). Usually in cpds. ( -- ˚): of this world, in this world. -- diṭṭhadhamma Vin ii.188; D iii.222 sq.; A i.249; ii.61; Nd2 297 (=ñātadhamma); DA i.278; Sdhp 470. -- ˚abhinibbuta attained to Nibbāna in this birth A i.142; Sn 1087 (see Nibbāna); ˚nibbāna earthly N. D i.36; DA i.121; ˚sukhavihāra (& ˚in) happy condition (or faring well) in this world Vin ii.188; M i.40, 331, 459; S ii.239; Dhs 577, 1283; DhsA 296; ˚vedanīya to be perceived in this condition A i.249, 251; PvA 145. -- Freq. in loc. diṭṭhe dhamme (in this world) It 17 (attha, opp. samparāyika attha), or diṭṭhe va dhamme (already or even in the present existence) D i.156, 167, 177, 196; iii.108; M i.341 sq., 485; ii.94, 103; A ii.155, 167; iii.429; Sn 141, 343, 1053; It 22, 23, etc. -- In the same sense diṭṭhadhammika (adj.) belonging or referring to this world or the present existence, always contrasted with samparāyika belonging to a future state: Vin i.179; iii.21; D iii.130; A i.47, 98; Nd2 26; It 16; VvA 149; PvA 131, etc.
-- ânugati imitation of what one sees, emulation, competition S ii.203; M i.16; A i.126; iii.108, 251, 422; Pug 33; DhA iv.39; -- āvikamma making visible or clear, open statement, confession Vin v.183, 187 sq.; -- kāla the time of seeing (anybody), opportunity VvA 120; -- ppatta one who has obtained (Nibbāna) in this world Nett 190; -- padā (pl.) visible signs or characteristics A iv.103; -- mangalika (adj.) of puccha, a question concerning visible omina. J iv.390; as ˚ikā (f.) Np at J iv.376 sq.= SnA 185 sq. -- saŋsandana Nd2 447=DhsA 55.
Diṭṭha2 [Sk. dviṣṭa, pp. of dveṣṭi dviṣ to hate] (n.) an enemy J i.280; cp. Sk. dviṣat. -- (adj.) poisoned, in diṭṭhagatena sallena with a p. arrow S ii.230; misreading for diddh -- agadena, q. v. The Cy. has diddhagatena with v. l. dibba -- gadena.
Diṭṭhaka (adj.) [=diṭṭha1] seen, visible, apparent DhA ii.53, 90.
Diṭṭhā (indecl.) [Sk. dṛṣṭyā, instr. of diṭṭhi] exclamation of joy, hurrah! D iii.73; J i.362.
Diṭṭhi (f.) [Sk. dṛṣṭi; cp. dassana] view, belief, dogma, theory, speculation, esp. false theory, groundless or unfounded opinion. -- (a) The latter is rejected by the Buddha as pāpa˚ (A iv.172) and pāpikā d. (opp. bhaddikā: A v.212 sq.; It 26): Vin i.98, 323; Dh 164; Pv iv.354; whereas the right, the true, the best doctrine is as sammā d. the first condition to be complied with by anyone entering the Path. As such the sammā d. is opposed to micchā d. wrong views or heresy (see b). Equivalent with micchā d. is kudiṭṭhi (late) Dāvs ii.58. -- (b) Characterized more especially as: (a) sammā diṭṭhi right doctrine, right philosophy Vin i.10; S ii.17; v.11, 14, 30 sq., 458 sq., M i.315; ii.12, 29, 87; iii.72; Nd2 485; Vbh 104 sq. See magga. -- ujukā d. S v.143, 165; ujugatā d. M i.46 sq. -- (b) micchā d. wrong theory, false doctrine S i.145; ii.153 (caused by avijjā); M iii.71; Dh 167, 316; Nd2 271iiib; Vbh 361, 389. -- The foll. theories are to be considered as varieties of micchā d., viz. (in limited enumn) akiriyavāda S iii.208; iv.349; aññaŋ aññena S iii.211; antaggāhikā A i.154; ii.240; iii.130; antânantikā D i.22 sq. S iii.214, 258 sq.; assāda˚ A iii.447; ahetukavādā S iii.210; ucchedavādā D i.34; S ii.20; iii.99; 110 sq.; bhava˚ S iii.93; M i.65; A i.83; sakkāya˚ A iii.438; v.144; Sn 231 (cp. KhA 188); Nd2 271iiib (20 fold, as diṭṭhilepa); sassatavādā D i.13; S ii.20; iii.98, 213 sq., 258 sq. -- (c) Various theories & doctrines are mentioned & discussed at: Vin i.115; S i.133; ii.61 sq., 75 sq., 222; iii.215 sq., 258 sq.; iv.286; v.448 (=D i.31); D iii.13 sq., 45, 246, 267; M i.40; A i.32; ii.252 sq.; iii.132, 289, 349; Th 2, 184; Ps i.135 sq.; Pug 22; Dhs 392, 1003 (cp. Dhs. trsl. pp. 257 sq., 293, 325); Vbh 145, 245, 341, 393 sq.; Sdhp 13, 333. -- (d) Miscellaneous: 4 diṭṭhiyo at Vbh 376; also at Vism 511 (sakkāya˚, uccheda˚, sassata˚, akiriya˚); 5 Vbh 378; 6 at M i.8; Vbh 382; 7 at Vbh 383; 20 see under sakkāya˚; 62 under diṭṭhigata. -- In series diṭṭhi khanti ruci laddhi characterizing "diṭṭhadhamma" at Nd2 299 & passim. Diṭṭhiyā sutiyā ñāṇena in def. of a theory of cognition at Nd2 300 as complementing taṇhā: see taṇhā B 3. Coupled with vācā & citta in formula (taŋ) vācaŋ appahāya cittaŋ appahāya diṭṭhiŋ appaṭinissajjitvā . . . (nikkhitto evaŋ niraye) at S iv.319= D iii.13, 15; combd with (& opposed to) sīla (as pāpaka & bhaddaka) at It 26, 27. -- diṭṭhiŋ āsevati to hold a view M i.323; ˚ŋ bhindati to give up a view J i.273; Dāvs ii.58.
-- ânugati a sign of speculation Vin ii.108; S ii.203; Pug 33. -- ânusaya inclination to speculation D iii.254, 282; S v.60; A iv.9; -- āsava the intoxicant of speculation, the 3rd of four āsavā, viz. kāma˚, bhava˚, d.˚, avijjā˚ Vin iii.5; Nd2 134; Dhs 1099, 1448; Vbh 373; cp. ˚ogha; -- upadānā taking up or adhering to false doctrines, the 2nd of the four upādānāni or attachments, viz. kāma˚, d.˚, sīlabbata˚, attavāda˚ D iii.230; Dhs 1215, 1536; -- ogha the flood of false doctrine, in set of four ogha's as under ˚āsava D iii.230, 276; Nd2 178; -- kantāra the wilderness of groundless speculation Dhs 381, 1003, 1099, etc.; see ˚gata; -- gaṇṭhi the web or tangle of sophisticism VvA 297; cp. ˚sanghāṭa; -- gata (nt.) "resorting to views," theory, groundless opinion, false doctrine, often followed by series of characterizing epithets: d. -- gahana, ˚kantāra, ˚visūka, ˚vipphandita, ˚saññojana, e. g. M i.8; Nd2 271iiib. Of these sophistical speculations 2 are mentioned at It 43, Ps i.129; 6 at Ps i.130; 62 (the usual number, expressing "great and small" sets, cp. dvi A ii.) at D i.12 -- 39 (in detail); S iv.286; Ps i.130; Nd2 271iiib; Nett 96, 112, 160. <-> Vin i.49; D i.162, 224, 226; S i.135, 142; ii.230; iii.109, 258 sq. (anekavihitāni); iv.286 (id.); M i.8, 176, 256 sq. (pāpaka), 326 (id.), 426 sq.; A iv.68; v.72 sq., 194 (pāpaka); Sn 649, 834, 913; Pug 15; Dhs 277, 339, 392, 505; Vism 454. -- adj. ˚gatika adhering to (false) doctrine Dpvs vi.25; -- gahana the thicket of speculation Dhs 381, 1003; see ˚gata; -- jāla the net of sophistry D i.46; DA i.129; -- ṭṭhāna a tenet of speculative philosophy D i.16; M i.136; A v.198; Ps i.138 (eight); Miln 332; DA i.107; -- nijjhānakkhanti forbearance with wrong views S ii.115; iv.139; A i.189 sq.; ii.191; Nd2 151; -- nipāta a glance VvA 279; -- nissaya the foundation of speculation M i.137; D ii.137 sq.; -- pakkha the side or party of sophists Nett 53, 88, 160; -- paṭilābha the attainment of speculation M iii.46; -- paṭivedha=prec. D iii.253; -- patta one who has formed (a right or wrong) view D iii.105, 254; M i.439; A i.74; 118, iv.10; v.23; -- parāmasa perversion by false doctrine Dhs 1498; -- maṇḍala the circle of speculative dogmatics DhsA 109; -- vipatti failure in theory, the 3rd of the four vipattiyo viz. sīla˚, ācāra˚, d.˚, ājīva˚; opp. ˚sampadā Vin v.98; D iii.213; A i.95, 268; Pug 21; Dhs 1362; Vbh 361; -- vipallāsa contortion of views A ii.52; -- visaŋyoga disconnection with false doctrine D iii.230, 276; -- visuddhi beauty of right theory A i.95; M i.147 sq.; D iii.214, 288; -- visūka (nt.) the discord or disunion (lit. the going into parties) of theories, the (?) puppet -- show of opinion M i.8, 486; Sn 55 (=dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhigatāni), K S ii.44; Vv 8426; Pv iv.137; Nd2 301 (=vīsati -- vattukā sakkāyadiṭṭhi); cp. Nd2 25 (attānudiṭṭhi); Dhs 381 (cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 101), 1003, 1099. See also ˚gata; -- vyasana failing or misfortune in theory (+sīla˚, in character) D iii.235; Nd2 304; -- saŋyojana the fetter or bond of empty speculation (cp. ˚anusaya) D iii.254; A iv.7 sq.; -- sanghāta the weft or tangle of wrong views (cp. ˚gaṇṭhi) Nd1 343; Nd2 503; -- samudaya the origin of wrong views A iv.68; -- sampadā success in theory, blessing of right views, attainment of truth D iii.213; 235 (opp. ˚vipatti), S v.30 sq.; A i.95, 269; iii.438; iv.238; Pug 25; Dhs 1364; VvA 297; -- sampanna endowed with right views S ii.43, 58, 80; v.11; A iii.438 sq.; iv.394; Vbh 366; Dialogues iii.206, n. 10; -- sārin (adj.) following wrong views Sn 911.
Diṭṭhika (adj.) ( -- ˚) seeing, one who regards; one who has a view M iii.24 (āgamana˚ one who views the arrival, i. e. of guests); S ii.168 sq. (sammā˚ & micchā˚ hoḷding right & wrong theories); D iii.96 (vītimissa˚). See añña˚, micchā˚, sammā˚.
Diṭṭhitā (f.) [fr. diṭṭhi] the fact of having a (straight- forward) view (uju˚) Miln 257.
Diṭṭhin (adj. -- n.) one who has a view, or theory, a follower of such & such a doctrine Ud 67 (evaŋ˚+evaŋ vādin).
Diṇṇa [Sk. dīrṇa, pp. of dṛ, dṛṇāti, see darī] broken, split, undone, torn, as neg. adiṇṇa unbroken D i.115 (so read for ādina -- khattiya -- kula; v. l. BB. abhinna˚); S v.74 (so read for ādīna -- mānaso, v. l. BB. adinā & SS ādina˚). Cp. also ādiṇṇa.
Ditta1 [Sk. dīpta, dīp; cp. dīpa] blazing. Dāvs v.32. Usually in cpd. āditta.
Ditta2 [Sk. dṛpta; cp. dappa] proud, arrogant, insolent; wanton Th 1, 198; J ii.432; iii.256=485; v.17, 232; vi.90, 114.
Diddha [Sk. digdha to dih, see deha] smeared J v.425 sq.; esp. smeared with poison, poisoned J iv.435 (sara, a poisoned arrow); perhaps to be read at It 68 for duṭṭha (scil. sara) and at S ii.230 for diṭṭha. Cp. san˚.
Dina (nt.) [Sk. dina; Lat. nun -- dinae (*noven -- dinom); Oir. denus; Goth. sin -- teins; cp. divasa] day Sdhp 239. -- duddinaŋ darkness Dāvs v.50 (d. sudinaŋ ahosi, cp. i.49, 51); also as f. duddinī Vin i.3.
Dindibha [cp. Sk. ṭiṭṭibha?] a kind of bird J vi.538.
Dindima (nt.) [Sk. ḍiṇḍima, cp. dundubhi] a musical instrument, a small drum J vi.580; Bu i.32. See also deṇḍima.
Dinna [Sk. dinna, pp. of dadāti] given, granted, presented etc., in all meanings of dadāti q. v.; esp. of giving alms Pv iv.326 (=mahādāna PvA 253) & in phrase adinn'ādāna taking what is not given, i. e. stealing, adj. adinnâdāyin stealing, refraining from which constitutes the 2nd sīla (see under sīla). -- dinna: D i.55≈(n' atthi dinnaŋ the heretic view of the uselessness of almsgiving); J i.291; ii.128; Sn 191, 227, 240; Dh 356; PvA 68 (given in marriage). Used as finite tense freq., e. g. J i.151, 152; vi.366. -- adinna: M i.39, 404; Sn 119 (theyyā adinnaŋ ādiyati), 156, 395, 400, 633; PvA 33 etc.
-- ādāyin taking (only) what is given D i.4; DA i.72; -- dāna almsgiving J iii.52; DhA i.396; -- dāyin giving alms, liberal, munificent D iii.191.
Dinnaka an adopted son, in enumn of four kinds of sons (atraja, khettaja, antevāsika, d.) Nd2 448; J i.135 (=posāvanatthāya dinna).
Dippati [Sk. dīpyate, see under dīpa1 & cp. jotati] to shine, to shine forth, to be illustrious Vin ii.285. Cp. pa˚.
Dibba (adj.) [Ved. divya=P. divya in verse (q. v.), Gr. di_os (*divios), Lat. dīus (*divios)=divine. Cp. deva] of the next world, divine, heavenly, celestial, superb, magnificent, fit for exalted beings higher than man (devas, heroes, manes etc.), superhuman, opp. mānusaka human. Freq. qualifying the foll. "summa bona": cakkhu the deva -- eye, i. e. the faculty of clairvoyance, attr. in a marked degree to the Buddha & other perfect beings (see cakkhumant) D i.82, 162; ii.20 (yena sudaŋ samantā yojanaŋ passati divā c' eva rattiñ ca); iii.219; S i.196; ii.55 sq.; M ii.21; It 52; Th 2, 70; Ps i.114; ii.175; Vism 434; Sdhp 482; PvA 5 (of Moggallāna); Tikp 278; Dukp 54. sota the d. ear, matching the d. eye D i.79, 154; J v.456; also as sotadhātu A i.255; M ii.19; D iii.38, 281; Vism 430. rūpa D i.153. Āyu, vaṇṇa etc. (see dasa ṭhānāni) A i.115; iii.33; iv.242; PvA 9, 89. kāmā Sn 361; Dh 187; It 94; also as kāmaguṇā A v.273. Of food, drink, dress & other commodities: A i.182; J i.50, 202; iii.189; PvA 23, 50, 70, 76 etc. <-> Def. as devaloke sambhūta DA i.120; divibhavattā dibba KhA 227; divibhāvaŋ devattabhāva -- pariyāpanna PvA 14. -- See further e. g. S i.105; D iii.146; Sn 176, 641; Dh 236, 417; Pug 60; Vism 407 (defn), 423.
-- osadha magical drugs Miln 283; -- kāmā (pl.) heavenly joys (see above) J i.138 (opp. mānusakā); -- cakkhuka endowed with the superhuman eye S ii.156; A i.23, 25; -- paṇṇākāra (dasavidha˚) the (tenfold) heavenly gift (viz. āyu, vaṇṇa etc.: see ṭhāna) DhA iii.292; -- bhāva divine condition or state PvA 110; -- yoga union with the gods S i.60; -- vihāra supreme condition of heart Miln 225; -- sampatti heavenly bliss J iv.3; DhA iii.292; PvA 16, 30.
Dibbati [Sk. dīvyati, pp. dyūta see jūta] to sport, to amuse oneself VvA 18 (in expl. of devī); to play at dice M ii.106 (akkhehi).
Dirasaññu (adj.) [Sk. dara -- saŋjña? See Kern, Toev. p. 118] one who has little common -- sense J vi.206, 207, 213, 214. Com. expls wrongly on p. 209 with "one who possesses two tongues" (of Agni), but has equivalent nippañña on p. 217 (text 214: appapañña+).
Diva [Sk. diva (nt.), weak base diṷ (div) of strong form di̯ē (see deva) to *dei̯eṷo to shine; cp. Sk. dyo heaven, divā adv. by day; Lat. biduum (bi -- divom) two days] (a) heaven J iv.134 (˚ŋ agā); v.123 (˚ŋ patta); PvA 74 (˚ŋ gata). -- (b) day Sn 507 (rattindivaŋ night & day); VvA 247 (rattindiva one night & one day, i. e. 24 hrs.); DhA ii.8 (divā -- divassa so early in the day). Also in divaŋ -- kara, daymaker,=sun, VvA 307; usually as divākara (q. v.). Cp. devasika; see also ajja.
-- santatta heated for a whole day J iv.118 (cp. divasa˚)
Divasa (m; nt. only in expression satta divasāni 7 days or a week J iv.139; Miln 15) [Sk. divasa; see diva] a day A i.206 (˚ŋ atināmeti); J iii.52 (uposatha˚); PvA 31 (yāva sattadivasā a week long), 74 (sattamo divaso). Usually in oblique cases adverbially, viz. acc. divasaŋ (during) one day, for one day, one day long A iii.304= iv.317; J i.279; ii.2; DhA iii.173 (taŋ d. that day); eka˚ one day J i.58; iii.26; PvA 33, 67. -- gen. divasassa (day) by day S ii.95 (rattiyā ca d. ca); J v.162; DA i.133. -- instr. divasā day by day J iv.310; divasena (eka˚) on the same day J i.59; sudivasena on a lucky day J iv.210. -- loc. divase on a day: eka˚ J iii.391; jāta˚ on his birth -- day J iii.391; iv.138; dutiya˚ the next day PvA 12, 13, 17, 31, 80 etc.; puna˚ id. J i.278; PvA 19, 38; sattame d. on the 7th day Sn 983; Miln 15; PvA 6; ussava˚ on the festive d. VvA 109; apara˚ on another day PvA 81. Also repeated divase divase day after day, every day J i.87; PvA 3. <-> abl. divasato from the day ( -- ˚) J i.50; DA i.140.
-- kara the "day -- maker," i. e. the sun (cp. divākara) VvA 169, 271; -- bhāga the day -- part (opp. ratti˚ the night -- part), day -- time Miln 18 (˚ena); PvA 152 (˚ŋ), 206 (˚e=divā); -- santatta heated the livelong day S i.169; M i.453; A iv.70, cp. Vin i.225; Miln 325; cp. diva˚
Divā (adv.) [Ved. divā, cp. diva] by day S i.183; M i.125; Dh 387; DA i.251; PvA 43, 142, 206 (=divasa -- bhāge). Often combd & contrasted with rattiŋ (or ratto) by night; e. g. divārattiŋ by day & by night S i.47; divā c' eva rattiñ ca D ii.20; rattim pi divā pi J ii.133; divā ca ratto ca S i.33; Sn 223; Dh 296; Vv 314; VvA 128. -- divātaraŋ (compar. adv.) later on in the day M i.125; J iii.48, 498. -- atidivā too late S i.200; A iii.117.
-- kara (=divaŋ kara) the day -- maker, the sun ThA 70 (=Ap. v.16); PvA 155; -- divassa (adv.) early in the day, at sunrise, at an early hour Vin ii.190; S i.89, 91, 97; A v.185; M ii.100, 112; J ii.1; vi.31; DhA ii.8; VvA 239, 242; -- vihāra the day -- rest, i. e. rest during the heat of the day Vin i.28, S i.129, 132, 146, 193=Th 1, 1241; Sn 679; -- saññā consciousness by day, daily c. D iii.223=A ii.45; -- seyyā=˚vihāra D i.112.
Divi˚ an abstraction fr. divya constructed for etym. expln of dibba as divi -- bhava (˚bhāva) of divine existence or character, a divine being, in "divi -- bhavāni divyāni ettha atthī ti divyā" SnA 219; "divi -- bhavattā dibbā ti" KhA 227; "divibhāvaŋ devattabhāvapariyāpanno ti dibbo" PvA 14.
Divilla a musical instrument Dpvs xvi.14.
Divya [Sk. divya; the verse -- form for the prose -- form dibba (q. v.)] (adj.) divine Sn 153 (cp. SnA 219 under divi˚), 524 (+mānusaka); J vi.172. -- (nt.) the divinity, a divine being (=devatā) J vi.150; SnA 219.
Disa [Sk. dviṣant & dviṣa ( -- ˚); dveṣṭi & dviśati to hate; cp. Gr. deino/s (corynthic dveini/a, hom. de/dvimen) fearful; Lat. dīrus=E. dire] an enemy Dh 42, 162; J iii.357; iv.217; v.453; Th i.874 -- 6; cp. Pss. Breth., 323, n. i.
Disatā1 (f.) [Sk. diśatā, see disā] direction, quarter, region, part of the world J iv.359; Pv ii.921 (kiŋ disataŋ gato "where in the world has he gone?"); Vv ii.32 (sādisatā the circle of the 6 directions, cp. VvA 102).
Disatā2 (f.) [Sk. *dviṣatā, see disa] state of being an enemy, a host of enemies J iv.295 (=disasamūha, v. l. as gloss: verasamoha).
Disati [Ved. diśati, *deik to show, point towards; cp. Gr. dei/knumi (di/kh= diśā), Lat. dico (indico, index=pointer, judex), Goth. gateihan=Ger. zeigen, Ags. taecan=E. token] to point, show; to grant, bestow etc. Usually in combn with pref. ā, or in Caus. deseti (q. v.). As simplex only at S i.217 (varaŋ disā to be read for disaŋ cp. Sk. adiśat). See also upa˚.
Disā (f.) [Ved. diś & diśā, to diśati "pointing out," point; cp. Gr. di/kh= diśā] point of the compass, region, quarter, direction, bearings. The 4 principal points usualy enumd are puratthimā (E) pacchimā (W) dakkhiṇā (S) uttarā (N), in changing order. Thus at S i.101, 145; ii.103; iii.84; iv.185, 296; Nd2 302; Pv ii.126 (caturo d.); PvA 52 (catūsu disāsu nirayo catūhi dvārehi yutto), and passim. -- To these are often added the two locations "above & below" as uparimā & heṭṭhimā disā (also as uddhaŋ adho S iii.124 e. g.; also called paṭidisā D iii.176), making in all 6 directions: D iii.188 sq. As a rule, however, the circle is completed by the 4 anudisā (intermediate points; sometimes as vidisā: S i.224; iii.239; D iii.176 etc.), making a round of 10 (dasa disā) to denote completeness, wide range & all pervading comprehensiveness of states, activities or other happening: Sn 719, 1122 (disā catasso vidisā catasso uddhaŋ adho: dasa disā imāyo); Th 2, 487; Ps ii.131; Nd2 239 (see also cātuddisa in this sense); Pv i.111; ii.110; Vism 408. sabbā (all) is often substituted for 10: S i.75; D ii.15; Pv i.21; VvA 184; PvA 71. -- anudisā (sg.) is often used collectively for the 4 points in the sense of "in between," so that the circle always implies the 10 points. Thus at S i.122; iii.124. In other combinations as 6 abbreviated for 10; four disā plus uddhaŋ & anudisaŋ at D i.222=A iii.368; four d.+uddhaŋ adho & anudisaŋ at S i.122; iii.124; A iv.167. In phrase "mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaŋ disaŋ pharitvā viharati" (etc. up to 4th) the all-comprehending range of universal goodwill is further denoted by uddhaŋ adho tiriyaŋ etc., e. g. D i.250; Vbh 272; see mettā. -- As a set of 4 or 8 disā is also used allegorically ("set, circle") for var. combinations, viz. the 8 states of jhāna at M iii.222; the 4 satipaṭṭhānā etc. at Nett 121; the 4 āhārā etc. at Nett 117. <-> See also in other applications Vin i.50 (in meaning of "foreign country"); ii.217; S i.33 (abhayā), 234 (puthu˚); iii.106; v.216; D iii.197 sq.; It 103; Th 1, 874; Vv 416 (disāsu vissutā). -- disaŋ kurute to run away J v.340. diso disaŋ (often spelt disodisaŋ) in all directions (lit. from region to region) D iii.200; J iii.491; Th 1, 615; Bu ii.50; Pv iii.16; Miln 398. But at Dh 42 to disa (enemy), cp. DhA i.324=coro coraŋ. See also J.P.T.S. 1884, 82 on abl. diso=diśatah. Cp. vidisā.
-- kāka a compass -- crow, i. e. a crow kept on board ship in order to search for land (cp. Fick, Soc. Gl. p. 173; E. Hardy, Buddha p. 18) J iii.126, 267; -- kusala one who knows the directions Vin ii.217; -- cakkhuka "seeing" (i. e. wise) in all directions J iii.344; -- ḍāha "sky -- glow," unusual redness of the horizon as if on fire, polar light (?) or zodiacal light (?) D i.10; J i.374: vi.476; Miln 178; DA i.95; cp. BSk. diśodāha AvŚ ii.198; -- pati (disampati) a king S i.86; J vi.45; -- pāmokkha world -- famed J i.166; -- bhāga [Sk. digbhāga] direction, quarter Vin ii.217; -- mūḷha [Sk. diṅmūḍha] one who has lost his bearings Dpvs ix.15; -- vāsika living in a foreign country DhA iii.176. -- vāsin=˚vāsika DhA iv.27.
Dissati Pass. of *dassati, q. v.
Dīgha (adj. -- n.) [Ved. dīrgha, cp. Caus. drāghayati to lengthen, *dlāgh as in Gr. dolixo/s (shaft), e)ndelexh/s (lasting etc.; cp. E. entelechy); Lat. indulges; Goth. tulgus (enduring)] 1. (adj.) long D i.17; M i.429; S i.104 (˚ŋ addhānaŋ); Sn 146, 633 (opp. rassa); Dh 60, 409; Pv i.1011 (˚ŋ antaraŋ all the time); ii.955 (id.); Th 1, 646 (˚m -- antare); Dhs 617; KhA 245; PvA 27, 28, 33, 46. See def. at Vism 272. -- dīghato lengthways J vi.185; dīghaso in length Vin iv.279; atidīgha too long Vin iv.7, 8. -- 2. (m.) a snake (cp. M Vastu ii.45 dīrghaka) J i.324; ii.145; iv.330. -- 3. N. of the Dīgha Nikāya ("the long collection") Vism 96.
-- angulin having long fingers (the 4th of the marks of a Mahāpurisa) D ii.17; iii.143, 150; -- antara corridor J vi.349. -- āyu long -- lived (opp. app' āyu) D i.18; J v.71. Also as ˚ka D iii.150; DA i.135; Sdhp 511; -- āvu= ˚āyu in the meaning of āyasmant (q. v.) J v.120; -- jāti (f.) a being of the snake kind, a snake DhA iii.322; also as ˚ka at J ii.145; iii.250; iv.333; v.449; DA i.252; -- dasa having long fringes D i.7; -- dassin [Sk. dīrghadarśin] far -- seeing (=sabba -- dassāvin) PvA 196; -- nāsika having a long nose Vism 283. -- bhāṇaka a repeater or expounder of the Dīgha Nikāya J i.59; Vism 36, 266, 286; DA i.15, 131; -- rattaŋ (adv.) [Sk. *dīrgharātraŋ, see Indexes to AvŚ; Divy & Lal. V.; otherwise dīrgha -- kālaŋ] a long time D i.17, 206; A v.194; Sn 649; It 8; J i.12, 72; Pv i.44; ii.1311 (˚rattāya=˚rattaŋ PvA 165); Pug 15; DhA iv.24; -- loma long -- haired Vin iii.129; also as ˚ka at J i.484, f. ˚ikā S ii.228; -- sotthiya (nt.) long welfare or prosperity DhA ii.227.
Dīghatta (nt.) [Sk. dīrghatvaŋ] length A i.54.
Dīna (adj.) [Sk. dīna] poor, miserable, wretched; base, mean, low D ii.202 (?) (˚māna; v. l. ninnamāna); J v.448; vi.375; Pv ii.82 (=adānajjhāsaya PvA 107); iv.81; Miln 406; PvA 120 (=kapaṇa), 260 (id.), 153; Sdhp 188, 324.
Dīnatta (nt.) [Sk. *dīnatvaŋ] wretchedness, miserable state Sdhp 78.
Dīpa1 [Ved. dīpa to Ved. dī, dīpyate; Idg. *dei̯ā to shine (see dibba, deva); cp. Gr. di/alos, dh_los; see also jotati] a lamp J ii.104 (˚ŋ jāleti to light a l.); DhA ii.49 (id.), 94 (id.)
-- acci the flame of a lamp ThA 154; -- āloka light of a l. J i.266; vi.391; DhA i.359; VvA 51; -- (˚ŋ)kara making light, shining, illuminating Nd2 399 (= pabhaŋ kara Sn 1136; but cp. Dh 236 under dīpa2); Vism 203. -- tittira a decoy partridge (cp. dīpaka˚) J iii.64; -- rukkha lit. lamp -- tree, the stand of a lamp, candlestick DhA iv.120; -- sikhā the flame (lit. crest) of a l. Vism 171; DhA ii.49.
Dīpa2 (m. & nt.) [Ved. dvīpa=dvi+ap (*sp.) of āpa water, lit. "double -- watered," between (two) waters] an island, continent (mahā˚, always as 4); terra firma, solid foundation, resting -- place, shelter, refuge (in this sense freq. combd w. tāṇa lena & saraṇa & expl. in Com. by patiṭṭhā) -- (a) lit. island: S v.219; J iii.187; VvA 19; Mhvs vii.7, 41. -- continent: cattāro mahādīpā S v.343; Vv 2010 (=VvA 104); VvA 19; PvA 74 etc. Opp. the 2000 paritta -- dīpā the smaller islands KhA 133. -- (b) fig. shelter, salvation etc. (see also tāṇa): S iii.42 (atta˚+attasaraṇa etc., not with S Index to dīpa1); v.154, 162 (id.) iv.315 (maŋ˚, not to dīpa1), 372; A i.55 sq. (+tāṇa etc.); Sn 501 (atta˚ selfreliant, self -- supported, not with Fausböll to dīpa1), 1092, 1094, 1145 (=Satthā); Nd2 303; Dh 236 (˚ŋ karohi= patiṭṭhā PvA 87); Pv iii.19 (id. PvA 174); J v.501=vi.375 (dīpañ ca parāyaṇaŋ); Miln 84, 257 (dhamma -- dīpa, Arahantship).
-- ālaya resting place J vi.432; -- gabbhaka same J vi.459, 460.
Dīpa3 [cp. Sk. dvīpa tiger's skin] a car covered with a panther's skin J i.259; v.259=vi.48.
Dīpaka1 (=dīpa1) (a) f. dīpikā a lamp, in daṇḍa˚ a torch DhA i.220, 399, -- (b) (˚ -- ) an image of, having the appearance of, sham etc.; in -- kakkara a decoy partridge J ii.161; -- tittira same J iii.358; -- pakkhin a decoy bird J v.376; -- miga a d. antelope J v.376.
Dīpaka2 (=dīpa2) a (little) island J i.278, 279; ii.160.
Dīpaka3 in vaṇidīpaka PvA 120 for vanibbaka (q. v.).
Dīpana (adj.) illustrating, explaining; f. ˚ī explanation, commentary, N. of several Commentaries, e. g. the Paramattha -- dīpanī of Dhammapāla on Th 2; Pv & Vv. -- Cp. jotikā & uddīpanā.
Dīpika [fr. dīpin] a panther J iii.480.
Dīpita [pp. of dīpeti] explained Vism 33.
Dīpitar [n. ag. fr. dīpeti] one who illumines Vism 211.
Dīpin [Sk. dvīpin] a panther, leopard, tiger Vin i.186 dīpicamma a leopard skin =Sk. dvīpicarman); A iii.101; J i.342; ii.44, 110; iv.475; v.408; vi.538. dīpi -- rājā king of the panthers Vism 270. -- f. dīpinī Miln 363, 368; DhA i.48.
Dīpeti [Sk. dīpayati, Caus. to dīp, see dīpa1 & cp. dippati] to make light, to kindle, to emit light, to be bright; to illustrate, explain A v.73 sq.; Dh 363; Miln 40; PvA 94, 95, 102, 104 etc.; Sdhp 49, 349. Cp. ā˚.
Du˚1 (& before vowels dur˚) (indecl.) [Sk. duḥ & duṣ=Gr. du/s -- , Oir. du -- , Ohg. zur -- , zer -- ; antithetic prefix, generally opposed to su˚=Gr. eu) -- etc. Ultimately identical with du2 in sense of asunder, apart, away from= opposite or wrong] 1. syllable of exclamation (=duḥ) "bad, woe" (beginning the word du (j) -- jīvitaŋ) DhA ii.6, 10=PvA 280, cp. J iii.47; Bdhgh's expln of the syllable see at Vism 494. -- 2. prefix, implying perverseness, difficulty, badness (cp. dukkha). Original form *duḥ is preserved at dur -- before vowels, but assimilated to a foll. consonant according to the rules of Assimilation, i. e. the cons. is doubled, with changes of v to bb & usual lengthening dū before r (but also du˚). For purposes of convenience all cpds. with du˚ are referred to the simplex, e. g. dukkaṭa is to be looked up under kata, duggati under gati etc.
See: A. dur˚. akkhāta, accaya, atikkama, atta, adhiroha, anta, annaya, abhisambhava; āgata, ājāna, āyuta, āsada; itthi; ukkhepa, ubbaha. -- B. du˚: (k)kata, kara; (g)ga, gata, gati, gandha, gahīta; (c)caja, carita, cola; (j) jaha, jāna, jivha, jīvita; (t)tappaya, tara; (d)dama, dasika; (n)naya, nikkhaya, nikkhitta, niggaha, nijjhāpaya, nibbedha, nīta; (p)pañña, paṭiānaya, paṭinissaggin, paṭipadā, paṭivijjha, paṭivedha, pabhajja, pamuñca, pameyya, parihāra, payāta, pasu, peyya, posa; (p)phassa; (bb=b): bala, balika, budha; (bb=v): dubbaca=) vaca, vacana, vaṇṇa, vijāna, vidū, vinivijjha, visodha, vuṭṭhika; (b) bhaga, bhara, bhāsita, bhikkha; (m)mati, mana, manku, mukha, mejjha, medha; (y)yiṭṭha, yuja, yutta; (du+r)=du -- ratta, ropaya (dū+r): dū -- rakkha; (l)labha; (s)saddhapaya, sassa, saha, sīla; hara.
Du˚2 in cpds. meaning two˚; see dvi B II.
Du3 ( -- ˚) (adj. -- suff.) [Sk. druha, druh, see duhana & duhitika] hurting, injuring, acting perfidiously, betraying, only in mitta˚ deceiving one's friends S i.225; Sn 244 expl. as mitta -- dūbhaka SnA 287, v. l. B mittadussaka; cp. mitta -- dubbhika & mitta -- dubbhin.
Duka (nt.) [see dvi B ii] a dyad DhsA 36, 343, 347, 406; Vism 11 sq. & in titles of books "in pairs, on pairs," e. g. Dukapaṭṭhāna; or chapters, e. g. J ii.1 (˚nipāta).
Dukūla [Sk. dukūla] a certain (jute?) plant; (nt.) [cp. Sk. dukūlaŋ woven silk] very fine cloth, made of the fibre of the d. plant S iii.145; A iv.393; J ii.21; iv.219; v.400; vi.72; Vism 257, 262; VvA 165; DA i.140; Dāvs v. 27.
Dukkha (adj. -- n.) [Sk. duḥkha fr. duḥ -- ka, an adj. forma- tion fr. prefix duḥ (see du). According to others an analogy formation after sukha, q. v.; Bdhgh (at Vism 494) expls dukkha as du+kha, where du=du1 and kha=ākāsa. See also def. at Vism 461.] A. (adj.) unpleasant, painful, causing misery (opp. sukha pleasant) Vin i.34; Dh 117. Lit. of vedanā (sensation) M i.59 (˚ŋ vedanaŋ vediyamāna, see also below iii.1 e); A ii.116=M. i.10 (sarīrikāhi vedanāhi dukkhāhi). <-> Fig. (fraught with pain, entailing sorrow or trouble) of kāmā D i.36 (=paṭipīḷan -- aṭṭhena DA i.121); Dh 186 (=bahudukkha DhA iii.240); of jāti M i.185 (cp. ariyasacca, below B I.); in combn dukkhā paṭipadā dandhābhiññā D iii.106; Dhs 176; Nett 7, 112 sq., cp. A ii.149 sq. ekanta˚ very painful, giving much pain S ii.173; iii.69. dukkhaŋ (adv.) with difficulty, hardly J i.215.
B. (nt.; but pl. also dukkhā, e. g. S i.23; Sn 728; Dh 202, 203, 221. Spelling dukha (after sukha) at Dh 83, 203). There is no word in English covering the same ground as Dukkha does in Pali. Our modern words are too specialised, too limited, and usually too strong. Sukha & dukkha are ease and dis-ease (but we use disease in another sense); or wealth and ilth from well & ill (but we have now lost ilth); or wellbeing and ill-ness (but illness means something else in English). We are forced, therefore, in translation to use half synonyms, no one of which is exact. Dukkha is equally mental & physical. Pain is too predominantly physical, sorrow too exclusively mental, but in some connections they have to be used in default of any more exact rendering. Discomfort, suffering, ill, and trouble can occasionally be used in certain connections. Misery, distress, agony, affliction and woe are never right. They are all much too strong & are only mental (see Mrs. Rh. D. Bud. Psy. 83 -- 86, quoting Ledi Sadaw).
I. Main Points in the Use of the Word. -- The recognition of the fact of Dukkha stands out as essential in early Buddhism. In the very first discourse the four socalled Truths or Facts (see saccāni) deal chiefly with dukkha. The first of the four gives certain universally recognised cases of it, & then sums them up in short. The five groups (of physical & mental qualities which make an individual) are accompanied by ill so far as those groups are fraught with āsavas and grasping. (Pañc' upādānakkhandhā pi dukkhā; cp. S iii.47). The second Sacca gives the cause of this dukkha (see Taṇhā). The third enjoins the removal of this taṇhā. And the fourth shows the way, or method, of doing so (see Magga). These ariyasaccāni are found in two places in the older books Vin i.10=S v.421 (with addition of soka -- parideva . . . etc. [see below] in some MSS). Comments on this passage, or part of it, occur S iii.158, 159; with expln of each term (+soka) D i.189; iii.136, 277; M i.185; A i.107; Sn p. 140; Nd2 under sankhārā; It 17 (with dukkhassa atikkama for nirodha), 104, 105; Ps i.37; ii.204, 147; Pug 15, 68; Vbh 328; Nett 72, 73. It is referred to as dukkha, samudaya, nirodha, magga at Vin i.16, 18, 19; D iii.227; Nd2 304iib; as āsavānaŋ khaya -- ñāṇa at D i.83; Vin iii.5; as sacca No. 1+paṭiccasamuppāda at A i.176 sq. (+soka˚); in a slightly diff. version of No. 1 (leaving out appiyehi & piyehi, having soka˚ instead) at D ii.305; and in the formula catunnaŋ ariyasaccānaŋ ananubodhā etc. at D ii.90=Vin i.230.
II. Characterisation in Detail. -- 1. A further specification of the 3rd of the Noble Truths is given in the Paṭicca -- samuppāda (q.v.), which analyses the links & stages of the causal chain in their interdependence as building up (anabolic=samudaya) &, after their recognition as causes, breaking down (katabolic=nirodha) the dukkha -- synthesis, & thus constitutes the Metabolism of kamma; discussed e. g. at Vin 1; D ii.32 sq. =S ii.2 sq.; S ii.17, 20, 65= Nd2 680i.c; S iii.14; M i.266 sq.; ii.38; A i.177; mentioned e. g. at A i.147; M i.192 sq., 460; It 89 (=dukkhassa antakiriyā). <-> 2. Dukkha as one of the 3 qualifications of the sankhārā (q. v.), viz. anicca, d., anattā, evanescence, ill, nonsoul: S i.188; ii.53 (yad aniccaŋ taŋ dukkhaŋ); iii.112 (id.) iii.67, 180, 222; iv.28, 48, 129 sq.; 131 sq. -- rūpe anicc' ânupassī (etc. with dukkh' & anatt') S iii.41. anicca -- saññā, dukkha˚ etc. D iii.243; A iii.334, cp. iv.52 sq. -- sabbe sankhārā aniccā etc. Nd2 under sankhārā. -- 3. Specification of Dukkha. The Niddesa gives a characteristic description of all that comes under the term dukkha. It employs one stereotyped explanation (therefore old & founded on scholastic authority) (Nd2 304i.), & one expln (304iii.) peculiar to itself & only applied to Sn 36. The latter defines & illustrates dukkha exclusively as suffering & torment incurred by a person as punishment, inflicted on him either by the king or (after death) by the guardians of purgatory (niraya -- pālā; see detail under niraya, & cp. below III. 2 b). -- The first expln (304i.) is similar in kind to the definition of d. as long afterwards given in the Sānkhya system (see Sānkhya -- kārikā -- bhāṣya of Gauḍapāda to stanza 1) & classifies the various kinds of dukkha in the foll. groups: (a) all suffering caused by the fact of being born, & being through one's kamma tied to the consequent states of transmigration; to this is loosely attached the 3 fold division of d. as dukkha˚, sankhāra˚, vipariṇāma˚ (see below III. 1 c); -- (b) illnesses & all bodily states of suffering (cp. ādhyātmikaŋ dukkhaŋ of Sānkhya k.); -- (c) pain & (bodily) discomfort through outward circumstances, as extreme climates, want of food, gnat -- bites etc. (cp. ādhibhautikaŋ & ādhidaivikaŋ d. of Sk.); -- (d) (Mental) distress & painful states caused by the death of one's beloved or other misfortunes to friends or personal belongings (cp. domanassa). -- This list is concluded by a scholastic characterisation of these var. states as conditioned by kamma, implicitly due to the afflicted person not having found his "refuge," i. e. salvation from these states in the 8 fold Path (see above B I.).
III. General Application, & various views regarding dukkha. -- 1. As simple sensation (: pain) & related to other terms: (a) principally a vedanā, sensation, in particular belonging to the body (kāyika), or physical pain (opp. cetasika dukkha mental ill: see domanassa). Thus defined as kāyikaŋ d. at D ii.306 (cp. the distinction between śarīraŋ & mānasaŋ dukkhaŋ in Sānkhya philosophy) M i.302; S v.209 (in def. of dukkhindriya); A ii.143 (sarīrikā vedanā dukkhā); Nett 12 (duvidhaŋ d.: kāyikaŋ=dukkhaŋ cetasikaŋ= domanassaŋ); Vism 165 (twofold), 496 (dukkhā aññaŋ na bādhakaŋ), 499 (seven divisions), 503 (kāyika); SnA 119 (sukhaŋ vā dukkhaŋ vā Sn 67=kāyikaŋ sātāsātaŋ). Bdhgh. usually paraphrases d. with vaṭṭadukkha, e. g. at SnA 44, 212, 377, 505. -- (b) Thus to be understood as physical pain in combn dukkha+ domanassa "pain & grief," where d. can also be taken as the gen. term & dom˚ as specification, e. g. in cetasikaŋ dukkhaŋ domanassaŋ paṭisaŋvedeti A i.157, 216; iv.406; S ii.69; rāgajan d ˚ŋ dom ˚ŋ paṭisaŋvedeti A ii.149; kāmûpasaŋhitaŋ d ˚ŋ dom ˚ŋ A iii.207; d ˚ŋ dom ˚ŋ paṭisaŋvediyati S iv.343. Also as cpd. dukkhadomanassānaŋ atthangamāya A iii.326, & freq. in formula soka -- parideva -- d˚ -- domanass -- upāyāsā (grief & sorrow, afflictions of pain & misery, i. e. all kinds of misery) D i.36 (arising fr. kāmā); M ii.64; A v.216 sq.; It 89 etc. (see above B I. 4). Cp. also the combn dukkhī dummano "miserable and dejected" S ii.282. -- (c) dukkha as "feeling of pain" forms one of the three dukkhatā or painful states, viz. d. -- dukkhatā (painful sensation caused by bodily pain), sankhāra˚ id. having its origin in the sankhārā, vipariṇāma˚, being caused by change S iv.259; v.56; D iii.216; Nett 12. (d) Closely related in meaning is ahita "that which is not good or profitable," usually opposed to sukha & hita. It is freq. in the ster. expression "hoti dīgharattaŋ ahitāya dukkhāya" for a long time it is a source of discomfort & pain A i.194 sq.; M i.332 D iii.157; Pug 33. Also in phrases anatthāya ahitāya dukkhāya D iii.246 & akusalaŋ . . . ahitāya dukkhāya saŋvattati A i.58. -- (e) Under vedanā as sensation are grouped the 3: sukhaŋ (or sukhā ved.) pleasure (pleasant sensation), dukkhaŋ pain (painful sens.), adukkham -- asukhaŋ indifference (indifferent sens.), the last of which is the ideal state of the emotional habitus to be gained by the Arahant (cp. upekhā & nibbidā). Their rôle is clearly indicated in the 4th jhāna: sukhassa pahānā dukkhassa pahānā pubbe va somanassadomanassānaŋ atthangamā adukkham -- asukhaŋ upekhā parisuddhiŋ catutthaŋ jhānaŋ upasampajja viharati (see jhāna). -- As contents of vedanā: sukhaŋ vediyati dukkhaŋ v. adukkham -- asukhaŋ v. tasmā vedanā ti S iii.86, 87; cp. S ii.82 (vedayati). tisso vedanā: sukha, d˚, adukkham -- asukhā˚ D iii.275; S ii.53; iv.114 sq., 207, 223 sq., cp. M i.396; A i.173; iv.442; It 46, 47. yaŋ kiñc' āyaŋ purisa -- puggalo paṭisaŋvedeti sukhaŋ vā d ˚ŋ vā a ˚ŋ vā sabban taŋ pubbe katahetū ti= one's whole life -- experience is caused by one's former kamma A i.173=M ii.217. -- The combn (as complementary pair) of sukha+dukkha is very freq. for expressing the varying fortunes of life & personal experience as pleasure & pain, e. g. n' âlam aññamaññassa sukhāya vā dukkhāya vā sukhadukkhāya vā D i.56 =S iii.211. Thus under the 8 "fortunes of the world" (loka dhammā) with lābha (& a˚), yasa (a˚), pasaŋsā (nindā), sukha (dukkha) at D iii.260; Nd2 55. Regarded as a thing to be avoided in life: puriso jīvitukāmo . . . sukhakāmo dukkha -- paṭikkūlo S iv.172, 188. -- In similar contexts: D i.81≈; iii.51, 109, 187; S ii.22, 39; iv.123 sq.; A ii.158 etc. (cp. sukha).
2. As complex state (suffering) & its valuation in the light of the Doctrine: (a) any worldly sensation, pleasure & experience may be a source of discomfort (see above, I.; cp. esp. kāma & bhava) Ps i.11 sq. (specified as jāti etc.); dukkhaŋ=mahabbhayaŋ S i.37; bhārādānaŋ dukkhaŋ loke bhāra -- nikkhepanaŋ sukhaŋ (pain is the great weight) S iii.26; kāmānaŋ adhivacanaŋ A iii.310; iv.289; cp. A iii.410 sq. (with kāmā, vedanā, saññā, āsavā, kamma, dukkhaŋ). -- (b) ekanta˚ (extreme pain) refers to the suffering of sinful beings in Niraya, & it is open to conjecture whether this is not the first & orig. meaning of dukkha; e. g. M i.74; A ii.231 (vedanaŋ vediyati ekanta -- d˚ŋ seyyathā pi sattā nerayikā); see ekanta. In the same sense: . . . upenti Roruvaŋ ghoraŋ cirarattaŋ dukkhaŋ anubhavanti S i.30; niraya -- dukkha Sn 531; pecca d˚ŋ nigacchati Sn 278, 742; anubhonti d˚ŋ kaṭuka -- pphalāni Pv i.1110 (=āpāyikaŋ d˚ŋ PvA 60); PvA 67; mahādukkhaŋ anubhavati PvA 43, 68, 107 etc. atidukkhaŋ PvA 65; dukkhato pete mocetvā PvA 8. -- (c) to suffer pain, to experience unpleasantness etc. is expressed in foll. terms: dukkhaŋ anubhavati (only w. ref. to Niraya, see b); anveti Dh 1 (=kāyikaŋ cetasikaŋ vipāka -- dukkhaŋ anugacchati DhA i.24), upeti Sn 728; carati S i.210; nigacchati M i.337; Sn 278, 742; paṭisaŋvedeti M i.313 (see above); passati S i.132 (jāto dukkhāni passati: whoever is born experiences woe); vaḍḍheti S ii.109; viharati A i.202; ii.95; iii.3; S iv.78 (passaddhiyā asati d˚ŋ v. dukkhino cittaŋ na samādhiyati); vedayati, vediyati, vedeti etc. see above III. 1 e; sayati A i.137. -- (d) More specific reference to the cause of suffering & its removal by means of enlightenment: (a) Origin (see also above I. & II. 1): dukkhe loko patiṭṭhito S i.40; yaŋ kiñci dukkhaŋ sambhoti sabbaŋ sankhāra -- paccayā Sn 731; ye dukkhaŋ vaḍḍhenti te na parimuccanti jātiyā etc. S ii.109; d˚ŋ ettha bhiyyo Sn 61, 584; yo paṭhavī -- dhātuŋ abhinandati dukkhaŋ so abhin˚ Si i.174; taṇhā d ˚ssa samudayo etc. Nett 23 sq.; as result of sakkāyadiṭṭhi S iv.147, of chanda S i.22 of upadhi S ii.109, cp. upadhīnidānā pabhavanti dukkhā Sn 728; d˚ŋ eva hi sambhoti d˚ŋ tiṭṭhati veti ca S i.135. -- (b) Salvation from Suffering (see above I.): kathaŋ dukkhā pamuccati Sn 170; dukkhā pamuccati S i.14; iii.41, 150; iv.205; v.451; na hi putto pati vā pi piyo d ˚ā pamocaye yathā saddhamma -- savanaŋ dukkhā moceti pāṇinaŋ S i,210; na appatvā lokantaŋ dukkhā atthi pamocanaŋ A ii.49. Kammakkhayā . . . sabbaŋ d˚ŋ nijjiṇṇaŋ bhavissati M ii.217, cp. i.93. kāme pahāya . . . d˚ŋ na sevetha anatthasaŋhitaŋ S i.12=31; rūpaŋ (etc.) abhijānaŋ bhabbo d -- ˚kkhayāya S iii.27; iv.89; d˚ŋ pariññāya sakhettavatthuŋ Tathāgato arahati pūraḷāsaŋ Sn 473. pajahati d˚ŋ Sn 789, 1056. dukkhassa samudayo ca atthangamo ca S ii.72; iii.228 sq.; iv.86, 327. -- dukkhass' antakaro hoti M i.48; A iii.400 sq.; It 18; antakarā bhavāmase Sn 32; antaŋ karissanti Satthu sāsana -- kārino A ii.26; d ˚parikkhīṇaŋ S ii.133; akiñcanaŋ nânupatanti dukkhā S i.23; sankhārānaŋ nirodhena n' atthi d˚assa sambhavo Sn 731. -- muniŋ d˚assa pārayuŋ S i.195=Nd2 136v; antagū 'si pāragū d˚assa Sn 539. -- sang' ātiko maccujaho nirūpadhi pahāya d˚ŋ apunabbhavāya S iv.158; ucchinnaŋ mūlaŋ d˚assa, n' atthi dāni punabbhavo Vin i.231= D ii.91.
-- âdhivāha bringing or entailing pain S iv.70; -- anubhavana suffering pain or undergoing punishment (in Niraya) J iv.3; -- antagū one who has conquered suffering Sn 401; -- âbhikiṇṇa beset with pain, full of distress It 89; -- âsahanatā non -- endurance of ills Vism 325. -- indriya the faculty of experiencing pain, painful sensation S v.209, 211; Dhs 556, 560; Vbh 15, 54, 71; -- udraya causing or yielding pain, resulting in ill, yielding distress M i.415 sq.; A i.97; iv.43 (+dukkhavipāka); v.117 (dukh˚), 243; J iv.398; of kamma: Ps i.80; ii.79; Pv i.1110 (so read for dukkhandriya, which is also found at PvA 60); DhA ii.40 (˚uddaya); -- ûpadhāna causing pain Dh 291; -- ûpasama the allayment of pain or alleviation of suffering, only in phrase (aṭṭhangiko maggo) d -- ûpasama -- gāmino S iii.86; It 106; Sn 724=Dh 191; -- (m)esin wishing ill, malevolent J iv.26; -- otiṇṇa fallen into misery S iii.93; M i.460; ii.10; -- kāraṇa labour or trials to be undergone as punishment DhA iii.70 (see Dh 138, 139 & cp. dasa1 B 1 b); -- khandha the aggregate of suffering, all that is called pain or affliction (see above B II. 1) S ii.134; iii.93; M i.192 sq.; 200 sq.; etc.; -- khaya the destruction of pain, the extinction of ill M i.93; ii.217 (kammakkhayā d -- kkhayo); S iii.27; Sn 732. Freq. in phrase (nīyāti or hoti) sammā -- d -- kkhayāya "leads to the complete extinction of ill," with ref. to the Buddha's teaching or the higher wisdom, e. g. of brahmacariyā S ii.24; of paññā D iii.268; A iii.152 sq.; of ariyā diṭṭhi D iii.264=A iii.132; of sikkhā A ii.243; of dhamma M i.72; -- dhamma the principle of pain, a painful object, any kind of suffering (cp. ˚khandha) D iii.88; S iv.188 (˚ānaŋ samudayañ ca atthagamañ ca yathābhūtaŋ pajānāti); It 38 (nirodha ˚anaŋ); -- nidāna a source of pain M ii.223; Dhs 1059, 1136; -- nirodha the destruction of pain, the extinction of suffering (see above B II. 1) M i.191; ii.10; A iii.410, 416; etc.; -- paṭikkūla averse to pain, avoiding unpleasantness, in combn sukhakāmo d -- p. S iv.172 (spelt ˚kulo), 188; M i.341; -- patta being in pain J vi.336; -- pareta afflicted by pain or misery S iii.93; It 89=A i.147; -- bhummi the soil of distress Dhs 985; -- vāca hurtful speech Pv i.32 (should probably be read duṭṭha˚); -- vipāka (adj.) having pain as its fruit, creating misery S ii.128; D iii.57, 229; A ii.172 (kamma); Ps ii.79 (id.); -- vepakka =˚vipāka Sn 537 (kamma); -- saññā the consciousness of pain Nett 27; -- samudaya the rise or origin of pain or suffering (opp. ˚nirodha; see above B II. 1) S iv.37; M i.191; ii.10; iii.267; Vbh 107 (taṇhā ca avasesā ca kilesā: ayaŋ vuccati d -- s.); -- samphassa contact with pain M i.507; Dhs 648; f. abstr. ˚tā Pug 33; -- seyya an uncomfortable couch DhA iv.8.
Dukkhatā (f.) [cp. Sk. duḥkhatā, abstr. to dukkha] state of pain, painfulness, discomfort, pain (see dukkha B III. 1 c) D iii.216; S iv.259; v.56; Nett 12 (expl.).
Dukkhati [fr. dukkha] to be painful Vism 264.
Dukkhatta (nt.) [Sk. *duhkhatvaŋ]=dukkhatā D iii.106 (+dandhatta).
Dukkhāpana (nt.) [abstr. to dukkhāpeti] bringing sorrow, causing pain Miln 275 sq., 351.
Dukkhāpita [pp. of dukkhāpeti] pained, afflicted Miln 79, 180.
Dukkhāpeti [caus. to dukkha] to cause pain, to afflict J iv.452; Miln 276 sq.; PvA 215. -- pp. dukkhāpita.
Dukkhita (adj.) [Sk. duḥkhita; pp. of *dukkhāpeti] afflicted, dejected, unhappy, grieved, disappointed; miserable, suffering, ailing (opp. sukhita) D i.72 (puriso ābādhiko d. bāḷha -- gilāno); ii.24; S i.149; iii.11=iv.180 (sukhitesu sukhito dukkhitesu dukkhito); v.211; M i.88; ii.66; Vin iv.291; Sn 984, 986; J iv.452; Miln 275; DhA ii.28; VvA 67.
Dukkhin (adj. -- n.) [Sk. duḥkhin] 1. afflicted, grieved, miserable S i.103 sq., 129 sq., ii.282 (+dummano); iv.78; A iii.57. -- 2. a loser in the game J ii.160.
Dukkhīyati [Sk. duḥkhīyati & duḥkhāyati Denom. fr. dukkha; cp. vediyati & vedayati] to feel pain, to be distressed DhA ii.28 (=vihaññati).
Dugga [du+ga] a difficult road Dh 327; Pv ii.78. dugge sankamanāni passages over difficult roads, usually combd with papā (water -- shed) S i.100; Vv 5222; Pv ii.925.
Duṭṭha (adj. -- n.) [Sk. duṣṭha, pp. of dussati, q. v.] spoilt, corrupt; bad, malignant, wicked Vin iii.118; S ii.259, 262; iv.339; A i.124 (˚âruka), 127 (id.), 157 sq.; It 68 (saro d., perhaps should be read as diddho); J i.187, 254 (˚brāhmaṇa); iv.391 (˚caṇḍāla); PvA 4 (˚corā: rogues of thieves); Sdhp 86, 367, 434. -- aduṭṭha not evil, good Sn 623; It 86; DhA iv.164. Cp. pa˚.
-- gahaṇika suffering from indigestion Vin i.206; -- citta evil -- minded Vin ii.192; M iii.65.
Duṭṭhu (adv.) [Sk. duṣṭhu, cp. suṣṭhu] badly, wrong DhsA 384; SnA 396; VvA 337.
Duṭṭhulla (adj.) wicked, lewd Vin iv.128; S i.187 (˚bhāṇin "whose speech is never lewd," cp. Th 1, 1217 padulla <-> gāhin, expld as duṭṭhullagāhin Psalms of Brethren 399 n. 3); M i.435; iii.159; Vism 313. -- (nt.) wicked <-> ness Vin iii.21; kāya˚ unchastity M iii.151; Th 1, 114; Vism 151.
-- âduṭṭhulla that which is wicked & that which is not Vin v.130; -- āpatti a grave transgression of the Rules of the Order, viz. the 4 Pārājika & the 13 Sanghādisesa Vin iv.31 (opp. a˚ Vin iv.32).
Dutiya (num. ord.) [Sk. dvitīya, with reduction of dvi to du, as in compn mentioned under dvi B II. For the meaning "companion" cp. num. ord. for two in Lat. secundusdeu/teros> deu/omai he who stays behind, also Sk. davīyas farther] (a) (num.) the second, the following J ii.102, 110; dutiyaŋ for the second time (cp. tatiyaŋ in series 1, 2, 3) Vin ii.188; D ii.155. -- (b) (adj. n.) one who follows or is associated with, an associate of; accompanying or accompanied by ( -- ˚); a companion, friend, partner Vin iv.225; S i.25 (saddhā dutiyā purisassa hoti=his 2nd self); iv.78 (id.) i.131; It 9; J v.400; Th 2, 230 (a husband); Sn 49 (=Nd2 305, where two kinds of associates or companions are distinguished, viz. taṇhā˚ & puggalo˚). taṇhā -- dutiyā either "connected with thirst" or "having thirst as one's companion" (see taṇhā) S iv.37; It 109=A ii.10; bilanga˚ kaṇājaka (rice with sour gruel) Vin ii.77; S i.90, 91. -- adutiya alone, unaccompanied PvA 161.
Dutiyaka (adj. -- n.) [Dimin. of dutiya] (a) the second, following, next J i.504 (˚cittavāre); ˚ŋ a 2nd time M i.83. -- (b) a companion; only in f. dutiyikā a wife or female compn Vin iv.230, 270 (a bhikkhunī as compn of another one); Freq. as purāṇa -- dutiyikā one's former wife Vin i.96; iii.16; S i.200; M ii.63; J i.210; v.152; DhA i.77. Cp. M Vastu ii.134 dvitīyā in the same sense.
Dutiyyatā (f.) companionship, friendship, help J iii.169.
Duddabha see daddabha.
Duddha (Sk. dugdha, pp. of duh, see dohati] milked, drawn Sn 18 (duddha -- khīra=gāvo duhitvā gahitakhīra SnA 27); M ii.186. -- (nt.) milk Dāvs v.26.
Dudrabhi [another form of dundubhi, cp. duddabha & dundubhya] a kettle -- drum, in Amata˚ the drum of Nibbāna Vin i.8=M i.171 (dundubhi at the latter passage); PvA 189 (v. l. for dundubhi).
Dundubhi (m. & f.) [Sk. dundubhi, onomat.; cp. other forms under daddabha, dudrabhi] a kettle -- drum, the noise of a drum, a heavy thud, thunder (usually as deva˚ in the latter meaning) Pv iii.34; J vi.465; PvA 40, 189 (v. l. dudrabhi). -- Amata˚ the drum of Nibbāna M i.171=Vin i.8 (: dudrabhi); deva˚ thunder D ii.156; A iv.311.
*Dunoti to burn, see der, dava, dāva & dāya.
Dupaṭṭo see dvi B II.
Dubbaṇṇa see under vaṇṇa.
Dubbuṭṭhika see under vuṭṭhi.
Dubbha (& dūbha) (adj.) [Sk. dambha, see dubbhati] deceiving, hurting, trying to injure Vin ii.203 (=It 86 where dubbhe); Pv ii.93 (mitta˚). adubbha one who does not do harm, harmless Pv ii.98 (˚pāṇin=ahiŋsakahattha). As nt. harmlessness, frankness, friendliness, good -- will Vin i.347 (adrūbhāya, but cp. vv. ll. p. 395: adubbhaya & adrabbhāvāya); S i.225 (adubbhāya trustily); J i.180 (id. as adūbhāya); spelt wrongly adrūbhaka (for adubbhaka, with v. l. adrabhaka in expl. of adubbha -- pāṇin) at J vi.311. Note: dabhāya (dat.) is also used in Sk. in sense of an adv. or infinitive, which confirms the etymology of the word. Cp. dobha.
Dubbhaka (adj.) [Sk. dambhaka] perfidious, insidious, treacherous Th 1, 214 (citta˚). Cp. dubbhaya & dūbhaka.
Dubbhati (& dūbhati) [Sk. dabhnoti cp. J.P.T.S. 1889, 204: dabh (dambh), pp. dabdha; idg. *dhebh, cp. Gr. a)te/mbw to deceive. Cp. also Sk druh (so Kern, Toev. p. 11, s. v. padubbhati). See also dahara & dūbha, dūbhaka, dūbhi] to injure, hurt, deceive; to be hostile to, plot or sin against (either w. dat. J v.245; vi.491, or w. loc. J i.267; iii.212) S i.85 (ppr. adubbhanto), 225; It 86 (dubbhe=dusseyya Com.)=Vin ii.203 (where dubbho); Th 1, 1129; J ii.125; iv.261; v.487, 503. -- ppr. also dūbhato J iv.261; ger. dubbhitvā J iv.79; grd. dubbheyya (v. l. dūbheyya) to be punished J v.71. Cp. pa˚.
Dubbhana (nt.) [Sk. *dambhana] hurtfulness, treachery, injury against somebody (c. loc.) PvA 114 (=anattha).
Dubbhaya=dubbhaka, S i.107.
Dubbhika=dubbhaka, Pv iii.113 (=mittadubbhika, mittānaŋ bādhaka PvA 175).
Dubbhikkha see bhikkhā.
Dubbhin (adj. -- n.) [Sk. dambhin] seeking to injure, deceit- ful; a deceiver, hypocrite J iv.41; Pv ii.98 (mitta˚); DhA ii.23 (mitta -- dūbhin). -- f. dubbhinī VvA 68 (so read for dubbinī).
Dubha (num. -- adj.) [See dubhaya & cp. dvi B II.] both; only in abl. dubhato from both sides Th 1, 1134; Ps i.69; ii.35, 181; Vv 4621; VvA 281 (for Vv 6419 duvaddhato).
Dubhaya (num. adj.) [a contaminated form of du(ve) & ubhaya; see dvi B II.] both (see ubhaya) Sn 517, 526, 1007, 1125; J iii.442; vi.110.
Duma [Sk. druma=Gr. drumo/s, see dāru] tree A iii.43; J i.87, 272; ii.75, 270; vi.249, 528; Vv 8414; Miln 278, 347; VvA 161.
-- agga 1. the top of a tree J ii.155. -- 2. a splendid tree Vv 354. -- 3. a tooth -- pick J v.156; -- inda "king of trees," the Bodhi tree Dpvs i.7; -- uttama a magnificent tree Vv 393; -- phala fruit of a tree M ii.74; Vism 231 (in comparison).
Duyhati Pass to dohati (q. v.).
Dussa1 (nt.) [Sk. dūrśa & dūṣya] woven material, cloth, turban cloth; (upper) garment, clothes Vin i.290; ii.128, 174; iv.159. D i.103; S v.71; M i.215; ii.92; A v.347; Sn 679; Pv i.103 (=uttarīyaŋ sāṭakaŋ PvA 49); ii.314; Pug 55; PvA 73, 75. -- cīvara˚, q. v.; chava˚ a miserable garment D i.166; A i.295; ii.206; M i.78, 308.
-- karaṇḍaka a clothes -- chest S v.71=M i.215; A iv.230; -- koṭṭhagāra a store -- room for cloth or clothes DhA i.220, 393; -- gahaṇa ( -- mangala) (the ceremony of) putting on a garment DhA ii.87; -- cālanī a cloth sieve Vin i.202; -- paṭṭa turban cloth Vin ii.266 (=setavattha -- paṭṭa Bdhgh.); S ii.102; -- phala having clothes as fruit (of magic trees, cp. kapparukkha) Vv 462 (cp. VvA 199); -- maya consisting in clothes Vv 467 (cp. VvA 199); -- yuga a suit of garments Vin i.278; M i.215=S v.71; Miln 31 (cp. M Vastu i.61); DhA iv.11; -- ratana "a pearl of a garment," a fine garment Miln 262. -- vaṭṭi fringed cotton cloth Vin ii.266. -- veṇi plaited cotton cloth Vin ii.266.
Dussa2 at J iii.54 is usually taken as=amussa (cp. amuka). C. expls as "near," & adds "asammussa." Or is it Sk. dūṣya easily spoilt? See on this passage Andersen Pali Reader ii.124.
Dussaka=dūsaka (q. v.).
Dussati [Sk. duṣyati, Denom. fr. pref. duḥ (du˚); pp. duṣṭha, caus. dūṣayati] to be or become bad or cor. rupted, to get damaged; to offend against, to do wrong Vin ii.113; S i.13=164; Dh 125=PvA 116; Dh 137; It 84 (dosancyye na d.) cp. A iii.110 (dussanīye d.); J vi.9; Miln 101, 386. -- pp. duṭṭha (q. v.). -- Caus. dūseti (q. v.). See also dosa1 & dosaniya; & pa˚.
Dussanā (f.) & Dussana (nt.) [Sk. dūṣana, cp. dussati] defilement, guilt A ii.225; Pug 18, 22; Dhs 418, 1060; DA i.195 (rajjana -- d. muyhana).
Dussanīya (adj.) [cp. Sk. dveṣanīya, because of doṣa= dveṣa taken to dus] able to give offence, hateful, evil (always combd with rajanīya, cp. rāga dosa moha) A iii.110 (dusanīye dussati, where It 84 has dosaneyye); J vi.9; Miln 386.
Dussassa see sassa.
Dussika a cloth merchant J vi.276; Miln 262, 331 sq.
Dussitatta (nt.) [Sk. *dūṣitatva]=dussanā, Pug 18, 22.
Duha (adj. -- ˚.) [Sk. duh & duha; see dohati] milking; yielding, granting, bestowing: kāma˚ giving pleasures J iv.20; v.33.
Duhati (to milk) see dohati.
Duhana (adj. -- n.) [Sk. *druhana, to druh, druhyati to hurt, cp. Oir. droch; Ohg. triogan to deceive, traum= dream; also Sk. dhvarati. For further connections see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under fraus] one who injures, hurts or deceives; insidious, infesting; a robber, only in pantha˚ a dacoit D i.135; DA i.296. -- (nt.) waylaying, robbery (pantha˚) J ii.281 (text dūhana), 388 (text: panthadūbhana, vv. ll. duhana & dūhana); DhsA 220. -- Cp. maggadūsin.
Duhitika (adj.) [cp. Sk. druha, fr. druhyati] infested with robbers, beset with dangers S iv.195 (magga). <-> Note. This interpretation may have to be abandoned in favour of duhitika being another spelling of dvīhitika= hard to get through (q. v.), to be compared are the vv. ll. of the latter at S iv.323 (S.S. dūhitika & dūhītika).
Dūta1 [Ved. dūta, prob. to dūra (q. v.) as "one who is sent (far) away," also perhaps Gr. dou=los slave. See Walde, Lat. Wtb. under dudum] a messenger, envoy Vin i.16; ii.32, 277; D i.150; S iv.194; Sn 411 (rāja˚), 417. <-> deva˚ Yama's envoy, Death's messenger A i.138, 142; M ii.75 sq.; J i.138. -- ˚ŋ pāheti to send a messenger Miln 18, PvA 133.
Dūta2 (nt.) [Sk. dyūta, see jūta] play, gaming, gambling J iv.248.
Dūteyya (nt.) [Sk. dūtya, but varying in meaning] errand, commission, messages A iv.196; J iii.134; DA i.78.<-> ˚ŋ gacchati to go on an errand Vin ii.202; ˚ŋ harati to obtain a commission Vin iii.87; iv.23.
-- kamma doing a messenger's duty Vin i.359; -- pahiṇagamana sending & going on messages D i.5=M iii.34; A ii.209; M i.180.
Dūbha (adj.) deceiving, see dubbha.
Dūbhaka1 (adj.) [Sk. dambhaka] deceiving, treacherous, harmful SnA 287 (mitta˚); f. ˚ikā J ii.297.
Dūbhaka2 [Sk. dambha, cp. dambholi] a diamond J i.363=iii.207.
Dūbhana (nt.) deceiving, pillaging, robbing etc. at J ii.388 is to be read as (pantha -- ) duhana.
Dūbhin (adj.) -- dubbhin J ii.180 (vv. ll. dūbha & dubbhi), 327; iv.257; DhA ii.23.
Dūbhī (f.) [cp. Sk. dambha, see dubbhati] perfidy, treachery, J i.412; iv.57 (v. l. dubhī); vi.59 (=aparādha).
Dūra (adj.) [Sk. dūra, Ved. duva (stirring, urging on), compar. davīyān, Av. dūrō (far), *dāu; cp. Ohg. zawen, Goth. taujan=E. do. Another form is *deṷā, far in respect to time, as in Gr. dh/n, dhro/n, Lat. dū -- dum (cp. dū -- rare= en -- dure). See also dutiya & dūta] far, distant, remote, opp. āsanna (J ii.154) or santika (Dhs 677; Vism 402). -- PvA 117. Often in cpds. (see below), also as dūri˚, e. g. dūri -- bhāva distance Vism 71, 377; DhsA 76. -- Cases mostly used adverbially, viz. acc. dūraŋ far J ii.154; DhA i.192. -- abl. dūrato from afar, aloof Vin i.15; ii.195; S i.212; Sn 511; Dh 219; J v.78 (dūra -- dūrato); Miln 23; PvA 107. dūrato karoti to keep aloof from PvA 17. -- loc. dūre at a distance, also as prep. away from, far from (c. abl.), e. g. Sn 468; J ii.155, 449 (=ārā); iii.189. -- Sn 772; Dh 304; J vi.364; Dhs 677. -- dūre -- pātin one who shoots far [cp. Sk. dūra -- pātin] A i.284; ii.170, 202. J iv.494. See also akkhaṇavedhin. -- atidūre too far Vin ii.215.
-- kantana at Th 1, 1123: the correct reading seems to be the v. l. durākantana, see ākantana; -- gata gone far away Pv ii.134 (=paralokagata PvA 164); DhA iii.377 (durā˚). -- (ŋ)gama far -- going, going here & there Dh 37 (cp. DhA i.304); Pv ii.910; -- ghuṭṭha farrenowned Pv ii.82; -- vihāra ( -- vuttin) living far away Sn 220.
Dūrakkha [du1+rakkha] see rakkha & cp. du1.
Dūratta (adj.) [du1+ratta] reddish M i.36 (˚vaṇṇa).
Dūsaka (adj. -- n.) [Sk. dūṣaka] corrupting, disgracing, one who defiles or defames; a robber, rebel A v.71 (bhikkhunī˚); J ii.270; iv.495; Sn 89 (kula˚ one who spoils the reputation of the clan); DhA ii.23 (kuṭi˚ an incendiary); Miln 20 (pantha˚). As dussaka at J v.113 (kamma˚); Sn A 287 (mitta˚, v. l. B. for dūbhaka). -- panthadūsaka a highwayman Miln 290. -- f. dūsikā J iii.179 (also as dūsiyā=dosakārikā); a˚ harmless Sn 312 (see a˚).
Dūsana (nt.) [see dūseti] spoiling, defiling J ii.270; Sdhp 453.
Dūsita [Sk. dūṣita, pp. of dūseti] depraved, sinful, evil PvA 226 (˚citta).
Dūsin (adj. -- n.) [Sk. dūṣin]=dūsạka, in magga˚ (cp. pantha -- dusaka) a highway robber Sn 84 sq
Dūseti [Sk. dūṣayati, caus. of dussati (q. v.). Also as dusseti PvA 82] to spoil, ruin; to injure, hurt; to defile, pollute, defame Vin i.79, 85, 86; iv.212 (maŋ so dūsetukāmo, said by a bhikkhunī), 316 (dūsetuŋ); A iv.169 sq.; J i.454; ii.270; DhA ii.22 (kuṭiŋ, damage, destroy). -- aor. dūsayi J ii.110 (fared ill). -- pp. dūsita. Cp. pa˚, pari˚.
Dūhana1 (nt.) [see duhana] infesting, polluting, defaming; robbing, only in pantha˚ (with v. l. duhana) waylaying J ii.281, 388; Tikp 280.
Dūhana2 (nt.) [Sk. dohana, see dohati] milking ( -- ˚), in kumbha˚ filling the pails with milk, i. e. giving much milk (gāvo; cp. Sk. droṇadughā a cow which yields much milk) Sn 309.
Dūhitika see duhitika.
Dejjha (=dvejjha, see dvi B i.5] divided, in a˚ undivided- ness J iii.7 (com. abhejja), 274=iv.258 (dhanuŋ a ˚ŋ karoti to get the bow ready, v. l. BB. sarejjhaŋ C. expld jiyāya ca sarena ca saddhiŋ ekam eva katvā).
Deḍḍubha [Sk. duṇḍubha] a water -- snake; salamander J iii.16; vi.194; Sdhp 292. See next.
Deḍḍubhaka 1. a sort of snake (see prec.) J i.361. -- 2. a kind of girdle (in the form of a snake's head) Vin ii.136 (expld by udaka -- sappi -- sira -- sadisa).
Deṇḍima (m. nt.) [Sk. diṇḍima, cp. dindima] a kind of kettle -- drum D i.79 (v. l. dindima); Nd2 219 (˚ka, v. l. dind˚); J i.355; (=paṭaha -- bheri); v.322= vi.217; vi.465=580.
Depiccha (adj.) [=dvepiccha, see dvi B I. 5] having two tail -- feathers J v.339.
Deyya (adj.) [Sk. deya, grd. of dā, see dadāti I. 2, b] (a) to be given (see below). -- (b) deserving a gift, worthy of receiving alms J iii.12 (a˚); Miln 87 (rāja˚) -- nt. a gift, offering Vin i.298 (saddhā˚).
-- dhamma a gift, lit. that which has the quality of being given; esp. a gift of mercy, meritorious gift S i.175; A i.150, 166; ii.264 (saddhā˚); Pv i.11; ii.318; PvA 5, 7 sq., 26, 92 (˚bīja), 103, 129; cp. AvŚ i.308. The deyyadhamma (set of gifts, that which it is or should be a rule to give) to mendicants, consists of 14 items, which are (as enumd at Nd2 523 under the old Brahman's term yañña "sacrifice") (1) cīvara, (2) piṇḍapāta, (3) senāsana, (4) gilāna -- paccaya -- bhesajja -- parikkhāra, (5) anna, (6) pāna, (7) vattha, (8) yāna, (9) mālā, (10) gandhā, (11) vilepana, (12) seyya, (13) āvasatha, (14) padīpeyya. A similar enumn in diff. order is found at Nd1 373.
Deva [Ved. deva, Idg. *dei̯ā to shine (see dibba & diva), orig. adj. *deiṷos belonging to the sky, cp. Av. daēvō (demon.), Lat. deus, Lith. dë̃vas; Ohg. & slashedZ;īo; Ags. Tīg, gen. Tīwes (=Tuesday); Oir. dia (god). The popular etymology refers it to the root div in the sense of playing, sporting or amusing oneself: dibbanti ti devā, pañcahi kāmaguṇehi kīḷanti attano vā siriyā jotantī ti attho KhA 123] a god, a divine being; usually in pl. devā the gods. As title attributed to any superhuman being or beings regarded to be in certain respects above the human level. Thus primarily (see 1a) used of the first of the next -- world devas, Sakka, then also of subordinate deities, demons & spirits (devaññatarā some kind of deity; snake -- demons: nāgas, tree -- gods: rukkhadevatā etc.). Also title of the king (3). Always implying splendour (cp. above etym.) & mobility, beauty, goodness & light, & as such opposed to the dark powers of mischief & destruction (asurā: Titans; petā: miserable ghosts; nerayikā sattā: beings in Niraya). A double position (dark & light) is occupied by Yama, the god of the Dead (see Yama & below 1 c). Always implying also a kinship and continuity of life with humanity and other beings; all devas have been man and may again become men (cp. D i.17 sq.; S iii.85), hence "gods" is not a coincident term. All devas are themselves in saŋsāra, needing salvation. Many are found worshipping saints (Th i.627 -- 9; Th ii.365). -- The collective appellations differ; there are var. groups of divine beings, which in their totality (cp. tāvatiŋsa) include some or most of the well -- known Vedic deities. Thus some collect. designations are devā sa -- indakā (the gods, including Indra or with their ruler at their head: D ii.208; S iii.90, A v.325), sa -- pajāpatikā (S iii.90), sa -- mārakā (see deva -- manussaloka), sa -- brahmakā (S iii.90). See below 1 b. Lists of popular gods are to be found, e. g. at D ii.253; iii.194. -- A current distinction dating from the latest books in the canon is that into 3 classes, viz. sammuti -- devā (conventional gods, gods in the public opinion, i. e. kings & princes J i.132; DA i.174), visuddhi˚ (beings divine by purity, i. e. of great religious merit or attainment like Arahants & Buddhas), & upapatti˚ (being born divine, i. e. in a heavenly state as one of the gatis, like bhumma -- devā etc.). This division in detail at Nd2 307; Vbh 422; KhA 123; VvA 18. Under the 3rd category (upapatti˚) seven groups are enumerated in the foll. order: Cātummahārājikā devā, Tāvatiŋsā d. (with Sakka as chief), Yāmā d., Tusitā d., Nimmānaratī d., Paranimmita -- vasavattī d., Bṛahmakāyikā d. Thus at D i.216 sq.; A i.210, 332 sq.; Nd2 307; cp. S i.133 & J i.48. See also devatā.
1. good etc. -- (a) sg. a god, a deity or divine being, M i.71 (d. vā Māro vā Brahmā vā); S iv.180=A iv.461 (devo vā bhavissāmi devaññataro vā ti: I shall become a god or some one or other of the (subordinate gods, angels); Sn 1024 (ko nu devo vā Brahmā vā Indo vāpi Sujampati); Dh 105 (+gandhabba, Māra, Brahmā); A ii.91, 92 (puggalo devo hoti devaparivāro etc.); PvA 16 (yakkho vā devo vā). -- (b) pl. devā gods. These inhabit the 26 devalokas one of which is under the rule of Sakka, as is implied by his appellation S. devānaŋ indo (his opponent is Vepacitti Asur -- indo S i.222) S i.216 sq.; iv.101, 269; A i.144; Sn 346; PvA 22 etc. -- Var. kinds are e. g. appamāṇ' -- ābhā (opp. paritt' ābhā) M iii.147; ābhassarā D i.17; Dh 200; khiḍḍāpadosikā D i.19; gandhabba -- kāyikā S iii.250 sq.; cattāro mahārājikā S v.409, 423; Jat i.48; Pv iv.111; PvA 17, 272; naradevā tidasā S i.5; bhummā PvA 5; manāpa -- kāyikā A iv.265 sq.; mano -- padosikā D i.20; valāhaka -- kāyikā S iii.254. -- Var. attributes of the Devas are e. g. āyuppamāṇā A i.267; ii.126 sq.; iv.252 sq.; dīghāyukā S iii.86; A ii.33; rūpino manomayā M i.410, etc. etc. -- See further in general: D i.54 (satta devā); ii.14, 157, 208; S v.475=A i.37; Sn 258 (+manussā), 310 (id.); 404, 679; Dh 30, 56, 94, 230, 366; Ps i.83 sq.; ii.149; Vbh 86, 395, 412 sq.; Nett 23; Sdhp 240. -- (c) deva=Yama see deva -- dūta (expld at J i.139: devo ti maccu). -- atideva a pre -- eminent god, god above gods (Ep. of the Buddha) Nd2 307; DhsA 2 etc.; see under cpds. -- 2. the sky, but only in its rainy aspect, i. e. rain -- cloud, rainy sky, rain -- god (cp. Jupiter Pluvius; K.S. i.40, n. 2 on Pajjunna, a Catumahārājika), usually in phrase deve vassante (when it rains etc.), or devo vassati (it rains) D i.74 (: devo ti megho DA i.218); S i.65, 154 (cp. It 66 megha); Sn 18, 30; J v.201; DhA ii.58, 82; PvA 139. devo ekam ekam phusāyati the cloud rains drop by drop, i. e. lightly S i.104 sq., 154, 184; iv.289. -- thulla -- phusitake deve vassante when the sky was shedding big drops of rain S iii.141; v.396; A i.243; ii.140; v.114; Vism 259. -- vigata -- valāhake deve when the rain -- clouds have passed S i.65; M ii.34, 42. -- 3. king, usually in voc. deva, king! Vin i.272; iii.43; A ii.57; J i.150, 307; PvA 4, 74 etc.
devī (f.) 1. goddess, of Petīs, Yakkhiṇīs etc.; see etym. expl. at VvA 18. -- Pv ii.112; Vv 13 etc. -- 2. queen Vin i.82 (Rahulamātā), 272; D ii.14; A ii.57, 202 (Mallikā) J i.50 (Māyā); iii.188; PvA 19, 75.
-- accharā a divine Apsarā, a heavenly joy -- maiden Vism 531; PvA 46, 279; -- aññatara, in phrase devo vā d. vā, a god or one of the retinue of a god S iv.180= A iv.461; PvA 16; -- âtideva god of gods, i. e. divine beyond all divinities, a super -- deva, of Buddha Nd2 307 & on Sn 1134; J iv.158=DhA i.147; Vv 6427; VvA 18; Miln 241, 258, 368, 384 & passim; cp. M Vastu i.106, 257, 283, 291; -- attabhāva a divine condition, state of a god PvA 14; -- ânubhāva divine majesty or power D ii.12; M iii.120; J i.59; -- āsana a seat in heaven It 76; -- âsurasangāma the fight between the Gods & the Titans D ii.285; S i.222; iv.201; v.447; M i.253; A iv:432 (at all passages in identical phrase); -- iddhi divine power Vv 313; VvA 7; -- isi a divine Seer Sn 1116; Nd2 310; -- ûpapatti rebirth among the gods PvA 6; -- orohaṇa descent of the gods DhA iii.443; -- kaññā a celestial maiden, a nymph S i.200; J i.61; VvA 37, 78; -- kāya a particular group of gods S i.200; It 77; Th 2, 31; -- kuñjara "elephant of the gods," of Indra J v.158; -- kumāra son of a god (cp. ˚putta) J iii.391; -- gaṇa a troop of gods J i.203; DhA iii.441; -- gaha a temple, chapel Vin iii.43; -- cārikā a visit to the gods, journeying in the devaloka VvA 3, 7, 165 etc.; -- ṭṭhāna heavenly seat J iii.55; a temple, sacred place Miln 91, 330; -- dattika given or granted by a god, extraordinary PvA 145; -- dattiya= ˚dattika J iii.37; DhA i.278; -- dāruka a species of pine J v.420; -- dundubhi the celestial drum, i. e. thunder D i.10; Miln 178; DA i.95; -- dūta the god's (i. e. Yama's see above 1˚) messenger A i.138, 142; M ii.75; iii.179; J i.138; DhA i.85 (tayo d.); Mhbv. 122 (˚suttanta); -- deva "the god of gods," Ep. of the Buddha (cp. devâtideva) Th 1, 533, 1278 (of Kappāyana); DhsA 1; PvA 140; -- dhamma that which is divine or a god A iii.277 (˚ika); DhA iii.74; -- dhītā a female deva or angel (cp. devaputta), lit. daughter of a god J ii.57; VvA 137, 153 (with ref. to Vimānapetīs); -- nagara the city of the Devas, heaven J i.168, 202; DhA i.280; -- nikāya a class, community or group of gods, celestial state or condition D ii.261 (sixty enumd); S iv.180; M i.102 sq.; A i.63 sq.; ii.185; iii.249 sq.; iv.55; v.18; -- pañha questioning a god, using an oracle D i.11 (=DA i.97: devadāsiyā sarīre devataŋ otāretvā pañha -- pucchanaŋ); -- parivāra a retinue of gods A ii.91; -- parisā the assembly of gods A ii.185; Tikp 241. -- putta "son of a god," a demi -- god, a ministering god (cp. f. deva -- dhītā), usually of Yakkhas, but also appld to the 4 archangels having charge of the higher world of the Yāmā devā (viz. Suyāma devaputta); the Tusitā d. (Santusita d.); the Nimmānaratī d. (Sunimmita d.); & the Paranimmitavasavattī d. (Vasavattī d.) D i.217 sq.; cp. J i.48. -- D ii.12, 14; S i.46 sq.; 216 sq.; iv.280; A i.278; It 76; J i.59 (jarā -- jajjara); iv.100 (Dhamma d.); vi.239 (Java d.); PvA 6, 9, 55, 92, 113 (Yakkho ti devaputto); Miln 23; -- pura the city of the gods, heaven S iv.202; Vv 6430 (= Sudassana -- mahānagara VvA 285); J iv.143; -- bhava celestial existence PvA 167; -- bhoga the wealth of the gods PvA 97; -- manussā (pl.) gods & men D i.46, 62≈, 99 (˚mānuse); M ii.38, 55; Sn 14 (sa˚), 236 (˚pūjita), 521; It 80 (˚seṭṭhā); Kh viii.10; KhA 196; PvA 17, 31, 117; -- ˚loka the world of gods and men. It comprises (1) the world of gods proper (Devas, i. e. Sakka, Māra & Brahmā; corresp. to sammuti -- devā, see above); (2) samaṇas & brāhmaṇas (cp. visuddhi -- devā); (3) gods & men under the human aspect (gati, cp. upapatti -- devā): Sn 1047, 1063; expl. at Nd2 309 & (with diff. interpretations) DA i.174 sq.; -- yāna leading to the (world of) the gods, i. e. the road to heaven Sn 139, also in ˚yāniya (magga) D i.215; -- rājā king of the devas, viz. Sakka Nd1 177; J iii.392 (=devinda); DhA iii.441; PvA 62; -- rūpa divine appearance or form PvA 92; -- loka the particular sphere of any devas, the seat of the devas, heaven; there exist 26 such spheres or heavens (see loka); when 2 are mentioned it refers to Sakka's & Brahma's heavens. A seat in a devaloka is in saŋsāra attained by extraordinary merit: Dh 177; J i.202, 203; iv.273; ThA 74; KhA 228; PvA 5, 9, 21, 66, 81, 89; Vism 415, etc.; -- vimāna the palace of a deva J i.58; VvA 173; -- sankhalikā a magic chain J ii.128; v.92, 94; -- sadda heavenly sound or talk among the devas It 75 (three such sounds).
Devaka (adj.) ( -- ˚) [deva+ka] belonging or peculiar to the devas; only in sa˚ -- loka the world including the gods in general D i.62; Nd2 309; Sn 86 377, 443, 760 etc.; Miln 234. See also devamanussa -- loka.
Devata (adj.) ( -- ˚) having such & such a god as one's special divinity, worshipping, a worshipper of, devotee of Miln 234 (Brahma˚+Brahma (garuka). -- f. devatā in pati˚ "worshipping the husband," i. e. a devoted wife J iii.406; VvA 128.
Devatā (f.) [deva+tā, qualitative -- abstr. suffix, like Lat. juventa, senecta, Goth. hauhipa, Ohg. fullida cp. Sk. pūrṇatā, bandhutā etc.] "condition or state of a deva," divinity; divine being, deity, fairy. The term comprises all beings which are otherwise styled devas, & a list of them given at Nd2 308 & based on the principle that any being who is worshipped (or to whom an offering is made or a gift given: de -- vatā=yesaŋ deti, as is expressed in the conclusion "ye yesaŋ dakkhiṇeyyā te tesaŋ devatā") is a devatā, comprises 5 groups of 5 kinds each, viz. (1) ascetics; (2) domestic animals (elephants, horses, cows, cocks, crows); (3) physical forces & elements (fire, stone etc.); (4) lower gods (: bhumma devā) (nāgā, suvaṇṇā, yakkhā, asurā, gandhabbā); (5) higher gods (: inhabitants of the devaloka proper) Mahārājā, Canda, Suriya, Inda, Brahmā), to which are added the 2 aspects of the sky -- god as devadevatā & disā -- devatā). -- Another definition at VvA 21 simply states: devatā ti devaputto pi Brahmā pi devadhītā pi vuccati. -- Among the var. deities the foll. are frequently mentioned: rukkha˚ tree -- gods or dryads M i.306; J i.221; PvA 5; vatthu˚ earth gods (the four kings) Pv 41; PvA 17; vana˚ wood -- nymphs M i.306; samudda˚ water -- sprites J ii.112 etc. etc. <-> D i.180 (mahiddhikā, pl.), 192; ii.8, 87, 139, 158; S i. sq.; iv.302; M i.245; ii.37; A i.64, 210, 211; ii.70 (sapubba˚); iii.77 (bali -- paṭiggāhikā), 287 (saddhāya samannāgatā); 309; iv.302 sq., 390 (vippaṭisāriniyo); v.331; Sn 45, 316, 458, 995, 1043; Dh 99; J i.59, 72, 223, 256; iv.17, 474; Vv 163; Pv ii.110; KhA 113, 117; PvA 44.
-- ânubhāva divine power or majesty J i.168; -- ânussati "remembrance of the gods," one of the 6 ânussatiṭṭhānāni, or subjects to be kept in mind D iii.250, 280, cp. A i.211; Vism 197. -- uposatha a day of devotion to the gods A i.211; -- paribhoga fit to be enjoyed by gods J ii.104; -- bali an offering to the gods A ii.68; -- bhāva at PvA 110 read as devattabhāva (opp. petattabhāva).
Devati [div] to lament, etc.; see pari˚. Cp. also parideva etc.
Devatta (nt.) [deva+tta] the state of being a deva, divinity ThA 70; PvA 110 (˚bhāva as Yakkha, opp. petatta bhāva; so read for devatā -- bhāva).
Devattana (nt.) [=last] state or condition of a deva Th 1, 1127; cp. petattana in the foll. verse.
Devara [Sk. devṛ & devara Gr. da_h/r (*daivh/r), Lat. levir, Ohg. zeihhur, Ags. tācor] husband's brother, brother-in-law J vi.152; Vv 326 (sa˚), popularly expld at VvA 135 as "dutiyo varo ti vā devaro, bhattu kaniṭṭha bhātā."
Devasika (adj.) [Der. fr. divasa] daily J v.383; DA i.296 (˚bhatta= bhattavetena); DhA i.187 sq., -- nt. ˚ŋ as adv. daily, every day J i.82, J i.149, 186; VvA 67, 75; DhA i.28; ii.41.
Desa [Ved. deśa, cp. disā] point, part, place, region, spot, country, Vin i.46; ii.211; M i.437; J i.308; DhsA 307 (˚bhūta); PvA 78 (˚antara prob. to be read dos˚), 153; KhA 132, 227. -- desaŋ karoti to go abroad J v.340 (p. 342 has disaŋ). -- kañcid -- eva desaŋ pucchati to ask a little point D i.51; M i.229; A v.39, sometimes as kiñcid -- eva d. p. S iii.101; M iii.15; v. l. at D i.51. -- desāgata pañha a question propounded, lit. come into the region of some one or having become a point of discussion Miln 262.
Desaka (adj.) [Sk. deśaka] pointing out, teaching, advising Sdhp 217, 519 -- (nt.) advice, instruction, lesson M i.438.
Desanā (f.) [Sk. deśanā] 1. discourse, instruction, lesson S v.83, 108; J iii.84; Pug 28; Nett 38; Vism 523 sq. (regarding Paṭiccasamuppāda); PvA 1, 2, 9, 11; Sdhp 213. 2. Freq. in dhamma˚ moral instruction, exposition of the Dhamma, preaching, sermon Vin i.16; A i.53; ii.182; iv.337 sq.; It 33; J i.106 etc. (a˚ gāminī āpatti), a Pārājika or Sanghādisesa offence Vin ii.3, 87; v.187. Cp. Vin. Texts ii.33. -- 3. (legal) acknowledgment Miln 344. -- Cp. ā˚.
-- avasāne (loc.) at the end of an instruction discourse or sermon DhA iii.175; PvA 54; -- pariyosāne=proc. PvA 9, 31 etc. -- vilāsa beauty of instruction Vism 524; Tikapaṭṭhāna 21.
Desika (adj.) [Sk. deśika]=desaka, su˚ one who points out well, a good teacher Miln 195.
Desita [pp. of deseti] expounded, shown, taught etc., given, assigned, conferred Vin iii.152 (marked out); v.137; D ii.154 (dhamma); Dh 285 (nibbāna); PvA 4 (magga: indicated), 54 (given).
Desetar [n. ag. to deseti] one who instructs or points out; a guide, instructor, teacher M i.221, 249; A i.266; iii.441; v.349.
Deseti [Sk. deśayati, Caus. of disati, q. v.] to point out, indicate, show; set forth, preach, teach; confess. Very freq. in phrase dhammaŋ d. to deliver a moral discourse, to preach the Dhamma Vin i.15; ii.87, 188; v.125, 136; D i.241, A ii.185, v.194; It 111; J i.168; iii.394; Pug 57; PvA 6. -- aor. adesesi (S i.196=Th 1 1254) & desesi (PvA 2, 12, 78 etc.) -- pp. desita (q. v.).
Dessa & Dessiya (adj.) [Sk. dveṣya, to dvis, see disa] dis- agreeable, odious, detestable J i.46; ii.285; iv.406; vi.570, ThA 268, Miln 281.
Dessati [Sk. dviṣati & dveṣṭi; see etym. under disa] to hate, dislike, detest SnA 168 (=na piheti, opp. kāmeti).
Dessatā (f.) [Sk. dvesyatā] repulsiveness Miln 281.
Dessin (adj.) [Sk. dveṣin] hating, detesting Sn 92 (dham- ma˚); better desin, cp. viddesin.
Deha [Sk. deha to *dheigh to form, knead, heap up (cp. kāya=heap), see diddha. So also in uddehaka. Cp. Kern, Toev. p. 75 s. v. sarīradeha. Cp. Gr. tei_xos (wall)=Sk. dehī; Lat. fingo & figura; Goth. deigan (knead)=Ohg. teig=E. dough] body A ii.18; PvA 10, 122. Usually in foll. phrases: hitvā mānusaŋ dehaŋ S i.60; Pv ii.956; pahāya m. d. S i.27, 30; jahati d. M ii.73; ˚ŋ nikkhipati Pv ii.615; (muni or khīṇāsavo) antima -- deha -- dhārin (˚dhāro) S i.14, 53; ii.278; Sn 471; Th ii.7, 10; It 32, 40, 50, 53. ˚nikkhepana laying down the body Vism 236.
Dehaka (nt.)=deha; pl. limbs Th 2, 392; cp. ThA 258.
Dehin (adj. -- n.) that which has a body, a creature Pgdp 12, 16.
Doṇa [Sk. droṇa (nt.) conn. with *dereṷo tree, wood, wooden, see dabbi & dāru & cp. Sk. druṇī pail] a wooden pail, vat, trough; usually as measure of capacity (4 Āḷhaka generally) Pv iv.333 (mitāni sukhadukkhāni donehi piṭakehi). taṇḍula˚ a doṇa of rice DhA iii.264; iv.15. At J ii.367 doṇa is used elliptically for doṇamāpaka (see below).
-- pāka of which a d. full is cooked, a doṇa measure of food S i.81; DhA ii.8. -- māpaka (mahāmatta) (a higher official) supervising the measuring of the doṇa -- revenue (of rice) J ii.367, 378, 381; DhA iv.88; -- mita a d. measure full D i.54; M i.518.
Doṇika (adj.) [fr. doṇa] measuring a doṇa in capacity Vin i.240 (catu˚ piṭaka).
Doṇikā (f.)=donī1, viz. a hollow wooden vessel, tub, vat Vin i.286 (rajana˚ for dyeing); ii.120 (mattikā to hold clay) 220 (udaka˚), 221 (vacca˚ used for purposes of defaecation). See also passāva˚.
Donī1 (f.) [Sk. droṇī, see doṇa] 1. a (wooden) trough, a vat, tub S ii.259; A i.253; v.323; J i.450; Miln 56. -- tela˚ an oil vat A iii.58 (āyasā made of iron & used as a sarcophagus). -- 2. a trough -- shaped canoe (cp. Marāthi ḍon "a long flat -- bottomed boat made of unḍi wood," & Kanarese ḍoni "a canoe hallowed from a log"] J iv.163 (=gambhīrā mahānāvā p. 164); PvA 189. -- 3. a hollow, dug in the ground Miln 397. -- 4. the body of a lute, the sounding -- board (?)] i.450; Miln 53; VvA 281.
Doṇī2 (f.) [Sk. droṇi?] an oil -- giving plant (?) (or is it= donī1 meaning a cake made in a tub, but wrongly interpreted by Dhammapāla?) only in -- nimmiñjana oil -- cake Pv i.1010; as ˚nimmijjani at Vv 3338; expld by telamiñjaka at PvA 51 & by tilapiññāka at VvA 147.
Dobbhagga (nt.) [Sk. daurbhāgya fr. duḥ+bhāga] ill luck, misfortune Vin iv.277; DhA 281 (text: ˚dobhagga).
Dobha [see dubbha] fraud, cheating D ii.243 (v. l. dobbha= dubbha).
Domanassa (nt.) [Sk. daurmanasya, duḥ+manas] dis- tress, dejectedness, melancholy, grief. As mental pain (cetasikaŋ asātaŋ cet. dukkhaŋ S v.209=Nd2 312; cp. D ii.306; Nett 12) opp. to dukkha physical pain: see dukkha B III. 1 a). A synonym of domanassaŋ is appaccaya (q. v.). For defn of the term see Vism 461, 504. The freq. combn dukkha -- domanassa refers to an unpleasant state of mind & body (see dukkha B III. 1 b; e. g. S iv.198; v.141; M ii.64; A i.157; It 89 etc.), the contrary of somanassaŋ with which dom˚ is combd to denote "happiness & unhappiness," joy & dejection, e. g. D iii.270; M ii.16; A i.163; Sn 67 (see somanassa). -- Vin i.34; D ii.278, 306; S iv.104, 188; v.349, 451; M i.48, 65, 313, 340; ii.51; iii.218; A i.39 (abhijjhā˚ covetousness & dejection, see abhijjhā); ii.5, 149 sq.; iii.99, 207; v.216 sq.; Sn 592, 1106; Pug 20, 59; Nett 12, 29 (citta -- sampīḷanaŋ d.) 53, Dhs 413, 421, 1389; Vbh 15, 54, 71, 138 sq.; Dh i.121.
-- indriya the faculty or disposition to feel grief D iii.239 (+som˚); S v.209 sq.; -- upavicāra discrimination of that which gives distress of mind D iii.245; -- patta dejected, disappointed J ii.155.
Dolā (f.) [Sk. dolā, *del as in Ags. tealtian=E. tilt, adj. tealt unstable=Sk. dulā iṣṭakā an unstable woman] a swing J iv.283; vi.341; Vism 280 (in simile).
Dolāyati [Denom. of dolā] to swing, to move to & fro J ii.385.
Dovacassa (nt.) [contamination of Sk. *daurvacasya evil speech & *daurvratya disobedience, defiance] unruliness, indocility, bad conduct, fractiousness S ii.204 sq. (˚karaṇā dhammā); M i.95 (id. specified); A ii.147; iii.178; Nett 40, 127.
Dovacassatā (f.) [2nd abstr. of dovacassa] unruliness, con- tumacy, stubbornness, obstinacy A i.83, iii.310, 448; v.146 sq.; D iii.212, 274; Pug 20; Dhs 1326 (cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 344); Vbh 359, 369, 371.
Dovacassiya (nt.)=dovacassa Pug 20; Dhs 1325.
Dovārika [cp. Sk. dauvārika, see dvāra] gatekeeper, janitor Vin i.269; D ii.83; iii.64 sq., 100; S iv.194; M i.380 sq.; A iv.107, 110; v.194; J ii.132; iv.382 (two by name, viz. Upajotiya & Bhaṇḍa -- kucchi), 447; vi.367; Miln 234, 332; Vism 281; Sdhp 356.
Dovila (adj.) [Sk.?] being in the state of fructification, budding J vi.529 (cp. p. 530); Miln 334.
Dosa1 [Sk. doṣa to an Idg. *deu(s) to want, to be inferior etc. (cp. dussati), as in Gr. de/omai, deu/omai] corruption, blemish, fault, bad condition, defect; depravity, corrupted state; usually -- ˚, as khetta˚ blight of the field Miln 360; tiṇa˚ spoilt by weeds Dh 356; PvA 7; visa˚ ill effect of poison Th 1, 758, 768; sneha˚ blemish of sensual affection Sn 66. Four kasiṇa -- dosā at Vism 123; eighteen making a Vihāra unsuitable at Vism 118 sq. -- J ii.417; iii.104; Miln 330 (sabba -- d. -- virahita faultless); DA i.37, 141. -- pl. dosā the (three) morbid affections, or disorder of the (3) humours Miln 43; adj. with disturbed humours Miln 172, cp. DA i.133.
Dosa2 [Sk. dveṣa, but very often not distinct in meaning from dosa1. On dveṣa see under disa] anger, ill -- will, evil intention, wickedness, corruption, malice, hatred. In most freq. combn of either rāga (lust) d. & moha (delusion), or lobha (greed) d. moha (see rāga & lobha), to denote the 3 main blemishes of character. For defn see Vism 295 & 470. Interpreted at Nd2 313 as "cittassa āghāto paṭighāto paṭigho . . . kopo . . . kodho . . . vyāpatti." -- The distinction between dosa & paṭigha is made at DA i.116 as: dosa=dubbalakodha; paṭigha=balavakodha. -- In combn lobha d. moha e. g. S i.98; M i.47, 489; A i.134, 201; ii.191; iii.338; It 45 (tīṇi akusalamūlāni). With rāga & moha: Dh 20; It 2=6; with rāga & avijjā; It 57; rāga & māna Sn 270, 631 etc. -- See for ref.: Vin i.183; D iii.146, 159, 182, 214, 270; S i.13, 15, 70; v.34 sq.; M i.15, 96 sq., 250 sq., 305; A i.187; ii.172, 203; iii.181; Sn 506; It 2 (dosena duṭṭhāse sattā gacchanti duggatiŋ); Ps i.80 sq., 102; Pug 16, 18; Dhs 418, 982, 1060; Vbh 86, 167, 208, 362; Nett 13, 90; Sdhp 33, 43. -- Variously characterised as: 8 purisa -- dosā Vbh 387; khila, nīgha, mala S v.57; agati (4 agati -- gamanāni: chanda, d. moha, bhaya) D iii.228, cp. 133, 182; ajjhattaŋ A iii.357 sq.; its relation to kamma A i.134; iii.338; v.262; to ariyamagga S v.5, 8. -- sadosa corrupted, depraved, wicked D i.80; A i.112; adosa absence of ill-will, adj. kind, friendly, sympathetic A i.135, 195, 203; ii.192; Vbh 169, 210; Dhs 33 (cp. Dhs. trsl. 21, 99); VvA 14 (+alobha amoha).
-- aggi the fire of anger or ill -- will D iii.217; S iv.19 sq.; It 92 (+rāgaggi moh˚); J i.61; -- antara (adj.) bearing anger, intending evil in one's heart Vin ii.249; D iii.237; M i.123; A i.59; iii.196 sq.; v.81 (opp. metta -- citta); perhaps at PvA 78 (for des˚); -- kkhaya the fading away, dying out of anger or malice S iii.160, 191; iv.250; v.8; Vbh 73, 89; -- gata=dosa (+paṭigha) S iv.71; -- garu full of anger S i.24; -- dosa (: dosa1) spoilt by anger Dh 357; -- saññita connected with ill -- will It 78; -- sama like anger Dh 202; -- hetuka caused by evil intention or depravity A v.261 (pāṇātipāta).
Dosaniya, Dosanīya & Dosaneyya (adj.) [grd. -- formation either to dosa1 or dosa2, but more likely=Sk. *dūṣanīya=dūṣya (see dussa2 & dussati) influenced by dveṣaṇīya] corruptible; polluting, defiling; hateful, sinful S iv.307; A ii.120; It 84 (where A iii.110 has dussanīya in same context).
Dosā (f.) [Sk. doṣā & doṣas, cp. Gr. du/w, du/omai to set (of the sun)] evening, dusk. Only in acc. as adv. dosaŋ (=doṣāŋ) at night J vi.386.
Dosin (adj.) [to dosa2] angry J v.452, 454.
Dosinā (f.) [Sk. jyotsnā, cp. P. juṇhā) a clear night, moon- light; only in phrase ramaṇīyā vata bho dosinā ratti. "lovely is the moonlight night" D i.47≈J i.509; J v.262; Miln 5, 19 etc. Expld in popular fashion by Bdhgh. as "dosâpagatā" ratti DA i.141.
-- puṇṇamāsī a clear, full moon night Th 1, 306, 1119; -- mukha the face of a clear night J vi.223.
Doha1 [Sk. doha & dogha] milking, milk J v.63, 433.
Doha2 (adj.) [Sk. droha] injuring ( -- ˚) DA i.296.
Dohaka [Sk. doha] a milk -- pail J v.105.
Dohati [Sk. dogdhi, to which prob. duhitṛ daughter: see under dhītā & cp. dhenu] to milk. -- pres. 1 pl. dohāma & duhāma J v.105; pret. 1 pl. duhāmase ibid.; pot. duhe Jvi.211; ger. duhitvā SnA 27; pp. duddha (q. v.) -- Pass. duyhati S i.174 (so read for duhanti); J v.307; ppr. duyhamāna Miln 41. -- See also dūhana, doha1, dohin.
Dohaḷa [Sk. dohada & daurhṛda, of du+hṛd, sick longing, sickness, see hadaya. Lüders Gōttinger GelehrteNachrichten 1898, 1 derives it as dvi+hṛd] (a) the longing of a pregnant woman J iii.28, 333; DhA i.350; ii.139. -- (b) intense longing, strong desire, craving in general J ii.159, 433; v.40, 41; vi.263, 308; DhA ii.86 (dhammika d.).
Dohaḷāyati [Denom. fr. dohaḷa] to have cravings (of a woman in pregnancy) J vi.263.
Dohaḷinī (adj. -- f.) a woman in pregnancy having cravings; a pregnant woman in general J ii.395, 435; iii.27; iv.334; v.330 (=gabbhinī); vi.270, 326, 484; DhA iii.95.
Dohin (adj. n.) one who milks, milking M i.220 sq.=A v.347 sq. (anavasesa˚ milking out fully).
Drūbha incorrect spelling for dubbha (q. v.) in adrūbhāya Vin i.347.
Dva˚ in numeral composition, meaning two etc., see under dvi B III.
Dvaya (adj. -- n.) [Ved. dvaya; cp. dvi B I. 6] (adj.) (a) twofold Sn 886 (saccaŋ musā ti dvayadhammaŋ); Dh 384; Pv iv.129 (dvayaŋ vipākaŋ=duvidhaŋ PvA 228). -- advaya single A v.46. -- (b) false, deceitful Vin iii.21. -- nt. a duality, a pair, couple S ii.17 (˚ŋ nissito loko); J iii.395 (gātha˚); PvA 19 (māsa˚); DhA ii.93 (pada˚ two lines, "couplet").
-- kārin "doing both," i. e. both good & evil deeds (su˚ & duccaritaŋ) S iii.241, cp. 247 sq.; D iii.96.
Dvā (cp. dva˚) see dvi B III.
Dvāra (nt.) [Ved. dvār (f.) & dvāra (nt.), base *dhvār, cp. Av. dvarəm; Gr. qu/ ra_, qurw/n; Lat. fores (gate), forum; Goth. daúr, Ohg. turi=Ger. tür, Ags. dor =E. door.] 1. lit. an outer door, a gate, entrance Vin i.15; S i.58, 138, 211; J i.346; ii.63; vi.330; Vbh 71 sq.; PvA 4, 67 (village gate), 79; Sdhp 54, 356. -- That d. cannot be used for an inner door see Vin ii.215; on knocking at a d. see DA i.252; cp. DhA i.145 (dvāraŋ ākoṭeti); to open a door: āvarati; to shut: pidahati; to lock: thaketi. dvāraŋ alabhamāna unable to get out Vin ii.220. -- mahā˚ the main or city gate J i.63; culla˚ J ii.114; catu˚ (adj.) having 4 doors (of niraya) Pv i.1013; cha˚ with 6d. (nagaraŋ, w. ref. to the 6 doors of the senses, see below) S iv.194; pure˚ the front d. J ii.153; pacchima˚ the back d. J vi.364; uttara˚ the E. gate (PvA 74); nagara˚ the city gate (J i.263; deva˚ DhA i.280); gāma˚ the village g. (Vin iii.52; J ii.110); ghara˚ (J iv.142; PvA 38) & geha˚ (PvA 61) the house door; antepura˚ the door of the inner chamber M ii.100; kula˚ the doors of the clan -- people Sn 288. -- metaph. of the door leading to Nibbāna: amata˚ S i.137; A v.346. <-> 2. (fig.) the doors=in -- & outlets of the mind, viz. the sense organs; in phrase indriyesu gutta -- dvāra (adj.) guarding the doors with respect to the senses or faculties (of the mind): see gutta (e. g. S ii.218; iv.103 & cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 175). -- S iv.117, 194 (with simile of the 6 gates of a city); VvA 72 (kāya -- vacī˚). The nine gates of the body at Vism 346. Thus also in f. abstr. guttadvāratā the condition of well protected doors (see gutta).
-- kavāṭa a door post J i.63; ii.334; vi.444; PvA 280, -- koṭṭhaka [cp. Sk. dvārakoṣṭhaka Sp. AvŚ i.24, 31] gateway; also room over the gate Ud 52, 65; J i.290; iii.2; iv.63, 229; VvA 6, 160; DhA i.50; ii.27, 46; iv.204; Vism 22; Miln 10. -- bahidvārakoṭṭhake or ˚ā outside the gate M i.382; ii.92; A iii.31; iv.206; -- gāma a village outside the city gates, i. e. a suburb (cp. bahidvāragāma J i.361) J iii.126 (˚gāmaka), 188; iv.225; DhA ii.25 (˚ka); -- toraṇa a gateway J iii.431. -- pānantara at J vi.349 should be read ˚vātapānantara; -- pidahana shutting the door Vism 78. -- bāhā a door post S i.146; Pv i.51; DhA iii.273; -- bhatta food scattered before the door Sn 286; -- vātapāna a door -- window Vin ii.211; J vi.349; -- sālā a hall with doors M i.382; ii.61.
Dvārika ( -- ˚) (adj.) referring or belonging to the door of -- ; in cha ˚ā taṇhā, craving or fever, arising through the 6 doors (of the senses) DhA iv.221, & kāya˚ -- saŋvara control over the "bodily" door, i. e. over action (opp. speech) PvA 10 (so read for kāyañ cārika˚).
Dvi [Sk. dvi, dva etc. -- Bases: I. dvi=Sk. dvi in dvipad =Lat. bipēs (fr. dṷipēs), Ags. twiféte; dvidant=bidens. Reduced to di (see B I.4) as in Gr. di\ pous (=dipad), Lat. diennium & pref. dis -- (cp. Goth. twis asunder, Ogh. zwisk between). -- II. du (=dvi in reduced grade, cp. Lat. du -- plex, dubius etc.). -- III. dvā (& dva)=Sk. dvāu, dvā, f. nt. dve (declined as dual, but the P. (plural) inflexion from base I. see B I.1); Gr. du/w, Lat. duo; Oir. dāu, dā, f. dī; Goth. twai, f. twōs; Ags. twā (=E. two); Ohg. zwēne, zwō zwei. Also in cpd. num. dva -- daśa twelve=Gr. d(*v)w/deka=Lat. duodecim. ] number two.
A. Meanings -- I. Two as unit: 1. with objective foundation: (a) denoting a combn (pair, couple) or a repetition (twice). In this conn. frequent both objective & impersonal in mentioning natural pairs as well as psychologically contrasted notions. E. g. dvipad (biped), nāgassa dve dantā (elephants' tusks), cakkhūni (eyes); dvija (bird), duvija (tooth), dijivha (snake). See also dutiya & dvaya. -- dve: kāmā, khiḍḍā, gatiyo (Sn 1001), dānāni (It 98), piyā, phalāni (Sn 896; It 39), mittā, sinehā etc. See Nd2 under dve, cp. A i.47<-> 100; D iii.212 -- 214. -- (b) denoting a separation (in two, twofold etc.): see dvidhā & cpds. -- 2. with symbolic, sentimental meaning: (a) only two (i. e. next to one or "next to nothing"), cp. the two mites of the widow (Mark xii. 42), two sons of Rachel (Gen. 30): dumāsika not more than 2 months (Vin ii.107); dvemāsiko gabbho (Pv i.67); dvevācika; duvangula (see below). -- (b) a few -- more than one, some, a couple (often intermediate between 1 & 3, denoting more than once, or a comparatively long, rather long, but not like 3 a very long time): māsadvayaŋ a couple of months; dvisahassa dīpā 2000 islands (=a large number); diyaḍḍhasata 150=very long etc.; dvīhatīha (2 or 3= a couple of days) q. v.; dvirattatiratta (id. of nights); dvīsu tīsu manussesu to some people (PvA 47); dvatikkhattuŋ soveral times; cp. dvikkhattuŋ (more than once), dutiyaŋ (for the 2nd time).
II. Two as unit in connection with its own & other decimals means a complex plus a pair, which amounts to the same as a large & a small unit, or so to speak "a year & a day." E. g. 12 (sometimes, but rarely= 10+2, see sep.); -- 32: rests usually on 4 X 8, but as No. of the Mahāpurisa -- lakkhaṇāni it denotes 30+2= the great circle plus the decisive (invisible) pair; -- 62: views of heresy: see diṭṭhi; also as a year of eternity= 60 kappas+2; -- 92: as measure of eternity=90+2 kappas=a year & a day.
III. Number twelve. 1. Based on natural phenomena it denotes the solar year (dvādasamāsako saŋvaccharo VvA 247). -- 2. Connected with the solar cult it is used with human arrangements to raise them to the level of heavenly ones and to impart to them a superior significance. Thus: (a) as denoting a set (cp. 12 months = companions of the Sun) it is the No. of a respectful, holy, venerable group (cp. 12 sons of Jacob Gen. 35, 22; cakes as shewbread Lev. 25, 5; stones erected Josh. 4, 8; apostles Math. 10, 2; patriarchs Acts 7, 8; companions of Odysseus Hom. Od. 9, 195; Knights of Arthur etc.): of theras, accompd by 12 bhikkhus PvA 67, 141. 179 etc.; dvādasa koṭisatāni Sn 677; five groups of 12 musicians VvA 96 (cp. 5 X 12 cromlechs in the outer circle of Stonehenge). -- (b) as measure of distance in space & time it implies vast extent, great importance, a climax, divine symmetry etc. 12 yojanas wide extends the radiance VvA 16; 12 y. as respectful distance PvA 137 (cp. 2000 cubits in same sense at Josh. 3, 4); 12 y. in extent (height, breadth & length) are the heavenly palaces of the Vimāna -- petas or Yakkhas Vv 551; J vi.116; VvA 6, 217, 244, 291, 298 etc. In the same connection we freq. find the No. 16: solasa -- yojanikaŋ kanaka -- vimānaŋ Vv 671; VvA 188, 289 etc. -- Of years: J iii.80; VvA 157 (dvādasa -- vassikā; in this sense also 16 instead of 12: soḷasa -- vassuddesika VvA 259 etc. See soḷasa).
B. Bases & Forms -- I. dvi; main base for numeral & nominal composition & derivation, in:
1. numeral dve (& duve) two: nom. acc. dve (Sn p. 107; It 98; J i.150; iv.137 etc.) & (in verse) duve (Sn 896, 1001); gen. dat. dvinnaŋ (It 39, 40, 98; J ii.154); instr. dvīhi (J i.87: v. l. dīhi; 151; ii.153); loc. dvīsu (J i.203; PvA 47) & duvesu (Vv 412).
2. as numeral base: -- sahassa 2000 (see A I. 2b) J i.57; VvA 261; PvA 74; also in dvittā and adv. dvikkhattuŋ twice & dvidhā in two parts. -- (b) as nominal base: -- (r)āvaṭṭa [Sk. dviḥ cp. Lat. bis] turning twice S i.32; -- ja "twice born," i. e. a bird J i.152 (gaṇā); -- jātin one who is born twice, i. e. a brāhmaṇa Th, 2, 430 (ThA 269=brahmajātin); -- tālamatta of the size of 2 palms DhA ii.62; -- pad [Sk. dvipad, Lat. bipes, Gr. di/pous etc.] a biped, man S i.6; -- pala twofold Vism 339; -- pādaka=dvipad Vin ii.110; -- bandhu having two friends J vi.281; -- rattatiratta two or three nights Vin iv.16; also in dvīha two days (q. v.).
3. as diaeretic form duvi˚: -- ja (cp. dija) "growing again" i. e. a tooth J v.156.
4. as contracted form di˚: -- (y)aḍḍha one and a half (lit. the second half, cp. Ger. anderthalb) Dh 235; J i.72 (diyaḍḍha -- yojana -- satika 150 y. long or high etc.), 202; iv.293 (˚yāma); DhA i.395; DA i.17; Miln 243, 272; DhsA 12; -- guṇa twofold, double Vin i.289; Sn 714; J v.309; Miln 84; DhA ii.6; VvA 63, 120; -- ja (cp. dvija, duvija) (a) "twice -- born," a bird S i.224; Sn 1134 (d. vuccati pakkhī Nd2 296); J i.152, 203; ii.205; iv.347; v.157; Pv ii.124; Vv 358 (cp. VvA 178); Miln 295. -- (b) a brahmin ThA, 70, 73; -- jivha "twotongued," i. e. a snake (cp. du˚) J iii.347; -- pad ( -- pada or -- pa) a biped (cp. dvi˚) A i.22; v.21; Sn 83 (dipa -- duttama), 995 (id.) 998; Dh 273; -- pādaka= ˚pad Th 1, 453=Sn 205.
5. as sec. cpd. form (with guṇa) dve˚ (and de˚): -- caturanga twice fourfold -- eightfold Th 1, 520 (˚gāmin); -- patha a "double" path, a border path, the boundary between two villages Vv 5317 ( -- sīmantika -- patha VvA 241); -- piccha having two tail -- feathers J v.341 (cp. de˚); -- pitika having two feathers J v.424; -- bhāva doubling kacc. 21; -- māsika two months old Pv i.67; -- vācika pronouncing (only) two words, viz. Buddha & Dhamma (cp. tevācika, saying the whole saraṇa -- formula), Vin i.4; J i.81; -- sattaratta twice seven nights, a fortnight [cp. Sk. dvisapta] J vi.230. -- See also der. fr. numer. adv. dvidhā, viz. dvejjha (& dejjha), dvedhā˚, dveḷhaka.
6. as noun -- derivation dvaya a dyad (q. v.).
II. du; reduced base in numeral and nominal compn & dern:
-- (v)addhato from both sides (a distorted form of dubhato q. v.) Vv 6419 (= dubhato VvA 281); -- (v)angika consisting of two parts Dhs 163; -- (v)angula & dvangula two finger -- breadths or depths, two inches long, implying a minimum measure (see above A I.2a) Vin ii.107; iv.262; usually in cpds. -- kappa the 2 inch rule, i. e. a rule extending the allotted time for the morning meal to 2 inches of shadow after mid day Vin ii.294 306; -- pannā wisdom of 2 finger -- breadths, i. e. that of a woman S i.129=Th 2, 60 (dvanguli˚, at ThA 66 as ˚saññā); -- buddhika=˚paññā VvA 96; -- jivha twotongued (cp. di˚); a snake J iv.330; v.82, 425; -- paṭṭa "double cloth" (Hind. dupaṭṭā; Kanarese dupaṭa, duppaṭa; Tamil tuppaṭṭā a cloak consisting of two cloths joined together, see Kern, Toev. i.179); J i.119; iv.114, 379 (ratta˚); DhA i.249 (suratta˚); iii.419 (˚cīvarā); -- matta (about) 2 in measure Miln 82; -- māsika 2 months old or growing for 2 months (of hair) Vin ii.107; -- vagga consisting of two Vin i.58; -- vassa 2 years old Vin i.59; -- vidha twofold, instr. duvidhena M iii.45 sq.; etc. -- Derivations from du˚ see sep. under duka (dyad), dutiya (the second), & the contamination forms dubha (to) & dubhaya (for ubha & ubhaya).
III. dvā (& reduced dva), base in numeral compn only: dvatikkhattuŋ two or three times J i.506; DA i.133, 264; DhA iv.38; dvādasa twelve (on meaning of this & foll. numerals see above A II. & III.) J iii.80; vi.116; DhA i.88; iii.210; VvA 156, 247 etc.; ˚yojanika J i.125; iv.499; dvāvīsati (22) VvA 139; dvattiŋsa (32) Kh ii. (˚ākāra the 32 constituents of the body); DhA ii.88; VvA 39 etc.; dvācattālīsa (42) Nd2 15; Vism 82; dvāsaṭṭhi (Nd2 271iii. & dvaṭṭhi (62) D i.54; S iii.211; DA i.162); dvānavuti (92) PvA 19, 21. -- Note. A singular case of dva as adv.=twice is in dvâhaŋ Sn 1116.
Dvikkhattuŋ (adv.) [Sk. *dvikṛtvaḥ] twice Nd2 on Sn 1116 (=dva); Nd2 296 (jāyati dijo). See dvi B I. 2a.
Dvittā (pl.) [Sk. dvitrā; see dvi B I. 2a] two or three S i.117 (perhaps we should read tad vittaŋ: Windisch, Māra & Buddha 108).
Dvidhā (num. adv.) [Sk. dvidhā, see dvi B I. 2a] in two parts, in two M i.114; J i.253 (karoti), 254 (chindati), 298 (id.); iii.181; iv.101 (jāta disagreeing); vi.368 (bhindati). See also dvedhā & dveḷhaka.
-- gata gone to pieces J v.197; -- patha a twofold way, a crossing; only fig. doubt Siii.108; M i.142, 144; Ud 90. See also dvedhāpatha.
Dvīha (adv.) [Sk. dvis -- ahnah; see dvi B I.2b] two days; dvīhena in 2 days S ii.192; dvīha -- mata 2 days dead M i.88; iii.91.
-- tīha 2 or 3 days (˚ŋ adv.) (on meaning cp. dvi A I.2b) D i.190 (˚assa accayena after a few days); J ii.316; DhA iii.21 (˚accayena id., gloss: katipāh'<-> accayena); DA i.190 (˚ŋ) 215; VvA 45.
Dvīhika (adj.) every other day M i.78.
Dvīhitika (adj.) [du -- īhitika, of du1+īhati] to be gained or procured with difficulty (i. e. a livelihood which is hardly procurable), only in phrase "dubbhikkhā d. setaṭṭhikā salākavuttā," of a famine Vin iii.6, 15, 87; iv.23; S iv.323. On the term & its expln by Bdhgh. (at Vin iii.268: dujjīvikā īhī tī . . . dukkhena īhitaŋ ettha pavattatī ti) see Kern, Toev. i.122. -- Note. Bdhgh's expln is highly speculative, & leaves the problem still unsolved. The case of du1 appearing as du -- (and not as dur -- ) before a vowel is most peculiar; there may be a connection with druh (see duhana), which is even suggested by vv. ll. at S iv.223 as dūhitika= duhitika (q. v.).
Dve & Dve˚ see dvi B 1 & 5.
Dvejjha (adj.) [Sk. dvaidhya; cp. dvi B I. 5] divided, twofold, only in neg. advejjha undivided, certain, doubtless; simple, sincere, uncontradictory A iii.403; J iv.77; Nd2 30 (+adveḷhaka); Miln 141. -- Cp. dejjha.
Dvejjhatā (f.) [fr. prec.] in a˚ undividedness J iv.76.
Dvedhā (adv.) [Sk. dvedhā, cp. dvidhā] in two J v.203, 206 (˚sira); DhA ii.50 (bhijji: broke in two, broke asunder).
Dvedhāpatha [cp. dvidhā & dvi B I.5] (a) a double, i. e. a branching road; a cross -- road DhA ii.192; Miln 17. <-> (b) doubt Dh 282; Dhs 1004, 1161 Vism 313.
Dveḷhaka (nt.) [Sk. *dvaidhaka fr. adv. dvidhā, cp. dvi B I. 5] doubt Vin iii.309; Dhs 1004, 1161; DA i.68; DhsA 259; ˚citta uncertain PvA 13; ˚jāta in doubt Vin iii.309; D iii.117 sq.; 210. -- adveḷhaka (adj.) sure, certain, without doubt Nd2 30 (+advejjha).
Dhaŋsati [Ved. dhvaŋsati to fall to dust, sink down, perish; Idg. dheṷes to fly like dust, cp. Sk. dhūsara "dusky"; Ags. dust; Ger. dust & dunst; E. dusk & dust; prob. also Lat. furo] to fall from, to be deprived of (c. abl.), to be gone D iii.184 (with abl. asmā lokā dh.) A ii.67; v.76, 77; It 11; Th 1, 225, 610; J iii.260, 318, 441, 457; iv.611; v.218, 375. -- Caus. dhaŋseti [Sk. dhvaŋsayati, but more likely=Sk. dharṣayati (to infest, molest= Lat. infestare. On similar sound -- change P. dhaŋs˚> Sk. dharṣ cp. P. daŋseti>Sk. darśayati). Caus. of dhṛṣṇoti to be daring, to assault cp. Gr. qa/rsos audacious, bold, Lat. festus, Goth. gadars=E. dare; Ohg. gitar] to deprive of, to destroy, assault, importune D i.211; S iii.123; Sn 591; J iii.353; Miln 227; Sdhp 357, 434. Cp. pa˚, pari˚.
Dhaŋsana (n. -- adj.) [Sk. dharṣana] destroying, bringing to ruin, only in kula˚ as v. l. to kula -- gandhana (q. v.) at It 64, and in dhaŋsanatā at DhA iii.353 in expln of dhaŋsin (q. v.).
Dhaŋsin (adj. -- n.) [Sk. dharṣin to dhṛṣṇoti, see dhaŋseti] obtrusive, bold, offensive M i.236; A ii.182; Dh 244 (=DhA iii.353 paresaŋ guṇaŋ dhaŋsanatāya dh.).
Dhanka [Sk. dhvānkṣa, cp. also dhunkṣā] a crow S i.207; ii.258; Sn 271=Nd2 420; J ii.208; v.107, 270; vi.452; Pv iii.52 (=kāka PvA 198); VvA 334.
Dhaja [Sk. dhvaja, cp. Ohg. tuoh "cloth" (fr. *dwōko)] a flag, banner; mark, emblem, sign, symbol Vin i.306 (titthiya˚: outward signs of); ii.22 (gihi˚); S i.42; ii.280; A ii. 51; iii.84 sq. (panna˚); M i.139 (id.); A iii.149 (dhamma); J i.52 (+patākā); VvA 173 (id.); J i.65 (arahad ˚;)Th i.961; J v.49=Miln 221; J v.509; vi.499; Nd1 170; Vv 361, 6428 (subhāsita˚=dhamma˚ VvA 284); Dhs 1116, 1233; Vism 469 (+paṭȧka, in comparison); PvA 282; VvA 31, 73; Miln 21; Sdhp 428, 594. Cp. also panna.
-- agga the top of a standard S i.219; A iii.89 sq.; Pug 67, 68; Vism 414 (˚paritta). -- ālu adorned with flags Th 1, 164=J ii.334 (: dhajasampanna Com.); -- āhaṭa won under or by the colours, taken as booty, captured Vin iii.139, 140; Vism 63. -- baddha captured (=˚āhaṭa) Vin i.74 (cora).
Dhajinī (f.) [Sk. dhvajinī, f. to adj. dhvajin] "bearing a standard," i. e. an army, legion Sn 442 (=senā SnA 392).
Dhañña1 (nt.) [Ved. dhānya, der. fr. dhana] grain, corn. The usual enumn comprises 7 sorts of grain, which is however not strictly confined to grain -- fruit proper ("corn") but includes, like other enumns, pulse & seeds. These 7 are sāli & vīhi (rice -- sorts), yava (barley), godhuma (wheat), kangu (millet), varaka (beans), kudrūsaka (?) Vin iv.264; Nd2 314; DA i.78. -- Nd2 314 distinguishes two oategories of dhañña: the natural (pubbaṇṇa) & the prepared (aparaṇṇa) kinds. To the first belong the 7 sorts, to the second belongs sūpeyya (curry). See also bīja -- bīja. -- Six sorts are mentioned at M i.57, viz. sāli, vīhi, mugga, māsa, tila, taṇḍula. <-> D i.5 (āmaka˚, q. v.); A ii.209 (id.); M i.180; A ii.32 (+dhana); Th 1, 531; Pug 58; DhA i.173; VvA 99; PvA 29 (dhanaŋ vā dh ˚ŋ vā), 198 (sāsapa -- tela -- missitaŋ), 278 (sappi -- madhu -- tela -- dhaññādīhi vohăraŋ katvā). -- dhaññaŋ ākirati to besprinkle a person with grain (for good luck) Pv iii.54 (=mangalaŋ karoti PvA 198, see also mangala).
-- āgāra a store house for grain Vin i.240; -- piṭaka a basket full of grain DhA iii.370; -- rāsi a heap of g. A iv.163, 170; -- samavāpaka grain for sowing, not more & not less than necessary to produce grain M i.451.
Dhañña2 (adj.) [Sk. dhānya, adj. to dhana or dhānya. Semantically cp. āḷhiya] "rich in corn," rich (see dhana); happy, fortunate, lucky. Often in combn dhanadhañña. -- DhA i.171; iii.464 (dhaññādika one who is rich in grains etc., i. e. lucky); DhsA 116. -- dhaññapuñña -- lakkhaṇa a sign of future good fortune & merit PvA 161; as adj. endowed with the mark of . . . J vi.3. See also dhāniya.
Dhata [Sk. dhṛta, pp. of dharati; cp. dhara & dhāreti] 1. firm, prepared, ready, resolved A iii.114; Dāvs v.52. -- 2. kept in mind, understood, known by heart Vin ii.95; A i.36.
Dhana (nt.) [Ved. dhana; usually taken to dhā (see dadhāti) as "stake, prize at game, booty," cp. pradhāna & Gr. qe/ma; but more likely in orig. meaning "grain, posses sion of corn, crops etc.," cp. Lith. dūna bread, Sk. dhānā pl. grains & dhañña=dhana -- like, i. e. corn, grain] wealth, usually wealth of money, riches, treasures. 1. Lit. D i.73 (sa˚); M ii.180.; A iii.222; iv.4 sq.; Nd2 135 (+yasa, issariya etc.) Th 2, 464 (+issariya); J i.225 (paṭhavigataŋ karoti: hide in the ground), 262, 289; ii.112; iv.2; Sn 60, 185, 302; Pv ii.610; DhA i.238. Often in combn aḍḍha mahaddhana mahābhoga to indicate immense wealth (see aḍḍha) PvA 3, 214 etc. (see also below ˚dhañña). -- 2. fig. Used in the expression sattavidha -- ariya -- dhana "the 7 fold noble treasure" of the good qualities or virtues, viz. saddhā, cāga etc. (see enumd under cāga) D iii.163, 164, 251; VvA 113; ThA 240.
-- agga the best treasure (i. e. the ariya -- dhana) D iii.164; -- atthika wishing for or desiring wealth Sn 987; -- āsā craving for wealth; -- kkīta bought for money DhA ii.3, -- thaddha proud of wealth, snobbish Sn 104; -- dhañña, usually Dvandva -- cpd. "money & money's worth," but as adj. (always in phrase pahūta˚) it may be taken as Tatpuruṣa "rich in treasures," otherwise "possessing money & money's worth" cp. pahūtadhanadhaññavā J i.3. As n. Pv i.1111; iii.104; PvA 60; Miln 2, 280; as adj. freq. "pahūtadhana -- dhañña" Vv 6313=Pv ii.611: PvA 97. Thus in ster. formula of aḍḍha mahaddhana etc. D iii.163 sq.; S i.71; A ii.86; -- parājaya loss of money, as adj. appl. to kali: the dice marking loss in game Sn 659; -- lobha "greed of gold" J iv.1; -- lola= lobha J ii.212; -- viriya wealth & power Sn 422; -- hetu for the sake of wealth Sn 122.
Dhanatta (nt.) [Sk. *dhanatvaŋ] being bent on having money J v.449.
Dhanavant (adj.) [Sk. dhanavant] wealthy Nd2 462; J i.3.
Dhanāyati [Denom. to dhana] to desire (like money), to wish for, strive after M i.260 (perhaps better to be read vanāyati, see formula under allīyati, and note M i.552).
Dhanika [Sk. dhanika] a creditor, Th 2, 443, ThA, 271; PvA 276. Cp. dhaniya.
Dhanita [Sk. dhvanita, pp. of dhvan, cp. Ags. dyn noise= E. din; Ags. dynnan to sound loud] sounded; as nt. sonant (said of a letter) Miln 344.
Dhaniya=dhanika Vin i.76.
Dhanu (nt.) [Sk. dhanus, to Ohg. tanna fir -- tree, also oak, orig tree in general, cp. dāru] a bow M i.429; J i.50, 150; ii.88; iv.327; PvA 285.
-- kalāpa bow & quiver Vin ii.192; M i.86; ii.99; A iii.94; PvA 154; -- kāra a bow maker Miln 331; -- kārika N. of a tree J v.420; -- kārin=prec. J v.422 (= ˚pāṭali); -- ggaha an archer D i.51; A ii.48; iv.107; J i.58, 356; ii.87, 88; iii.220 (dhanuggaha) J iii.322; v.129 (where 4 kinds are enumd); Vism 150 (in simile); DA i.156; -- takkāri (f.) a plant J vi.535; -- pāṭali N. of a tree J v.422; -- lakkhaṇa prophesying from marks on a bow D i.9.
Dhanuka (nt.) [Sk. dhanuṣka] a (small) bow Vin ii.10; iii.180; D i.7; A iii.75; v.203; J vi.41; Miln 229; DA i.86.
Dhanta [Sk. dhvānta in meaning of either dhvanita fr. dhvan to sound, or dhamita fr. dhmā to blow, see dhameti] blown, sounded A i.253; J i.283, 284.
Dhama ( -- ˚) (adj.) [Sk. dhama, to dhamati] blowing, n. a blower, player (on a horn: sankha˚) D i.251; S iv.322.
Dhamaka ( -- ˚) (adj.) one who blows Miln 31; see vaŋsa˚, sankh˚, singa˚.
Dhamati [Ved. dhamati, dhmā, pp. dh amita & dhmāta, cp. Ohg. dampf "steam"] to blow, to sound (a drum); to kindle (by blowing), melt, smelt, singe A i.254; iv.169; J i.283, 284; vi.441; Nd1 478; Miln 262.<-> ppr. dhamāna S i.106; Miln 67. -- Caus. dhameti to blow (an instrument) J ii.110; Miln 31, and dhamāpeti to cause to blow or kindle DhA i.442. -- pp. dhanta & dhanita (the latter to dhvan, by which dhamati is influenced to a large extent in meaning. Cp. uddhana).
Dhamadhamāyati [cp. Sk. dadhmāti, Intens. to dhamati] to blow frequently, strongly or incessantly Miln 117.
Dhamani (f.) [Sk. dhamani, to dhamati, orig. a tube for blowing, a tubular vessel, pipe] a vein Th 1, 408. Usually in cpd.: -- santhata strewn with veins, with veins showing, i. e. emaciated (: nimmaŋsa -- lohitatāya sirājālehi vitthatagatta PvA 68) Vin iii.110; J iv.371; v.69; Dh 395=Th 1, 243=Pv ii.113; Pv iv.101; DhA i.299, 367; iv.157; ThA 80. So also in Jain Pk. "kisa dhamaṇisaŋtata": Weber, Bhagavatī p. 289; cp. Lal. Vist. 226. -- Also as ˚santhatagatta (adj.) having veins showing all over the body for lack of flesh Vin i.55; iii.146; M ii.121; J i.346, ii.283; ThA 80.
Dhamma1 (m. & rarely nt.) [Ved. dharma & dharman, the latter a formation like karman (see kamma for expln of subj. & obj. meanings); dhṛ (see dhāreti) to hold, support: that which forms a foundation and upholds= constitution. Cp. Gr. qro/nos, Lat. firmus & fretus; Lith. derme (treaty), cp. also Sk. dhariman form, constitution, perhaps=Lat. forma, E. form] constitution etc. A. Definitions by Commentators: Bdhgh gives a fourfold meaning of the word dhamma (at DA i.99= DhA i.22), viz. (1) guṇe (saddo), applied to good conduct; (2) desanāyaŋ, to preaching & moral instruction; (3) pariyattiyaŋ, to the 9 fold collection of the Buddh. Scriptures (see navanga); (4) nissatte ( -- nijjīvate), to cosmic (non -- animistic) law. -- No. 1 is referred to freq. in expls of the term, e. g. dhammiko ti ñāyena samena pavattatī ti DA i.249; dhamman ti kāraṇaŋ ñāyaŋ PvA 211; as paṭipatti -- dhamma at VvA 84; No. 3 e. g. also at PvA 2. Another and more adequate fourfold definition by Bdhgh is given in DhsA 38, viz. (1) pariyatti, or doctrine as formulated, (2) hetu, or condition, causal antecedent, (3) guṇa, or moral quality or action, (4) nissatta -- nijīvatā, or "the phenomenal" as opposed to "the substantial," "the noumenal," "animistic entity." Here (2) is illustrated by hetumhi ñāṇaṃ dhammapaṭisambhidā: "analytic knowledge in dhamma's means insight into condition, causal antecedent" Vibh 293, and see Niyama (dhamma˚). Since, in the former fourfold definition (2) and (3) really constitute but one main implication considered under the two aspects of Doctrine as taught and Doctrine as formulated, we may interpret Dhamma by the fourfold connotation: -- doctrine, right, or righteousness, condition, phenomenon. -- For other exegetic definitions see the Coms & the Niddesa, e. g. Nd1 94; for modern expls & analyses see e. g. Rhys Davids, Buddh. India pp. 292 -- 4; Mrs. Rh. Davids, Buddhism (1912) pp. 32 sq., 107 sq., 235 sq.; Dhs. trsl. xxxiii. sq.; and most recently the exhaustive monograph by M. & W. Geiger, Pāli Dhamma. Abhandlungen der Bayer. Akademie xxxi. 1; München 1920; which reached the editors too late to be made use of for the Dictionary.
B. Applications and Meaning. -- 1. Psychologically; "mentality" as the constitutive element of cognition & of its substratum, the world of phenomena. It is that which is presented as "object" to the imagination & as such has an effect of its own: -- a presentation (Vorstellung), or idea, idea, or purely mental phenomenon as distinguished from a psycho -- physical phenomenon, or sensation (re -- action of sense -- organ to sensestimulus). The mind deals with ideas as the eye deals with forms: it is the abstraction formed by mano, or mind proper, from the objects of sense presented by the sense -- organ when reacting to external objects. Thus cakkhu "faculty of sight" corresponds to rūpa "relation of form" & mano "faculty of thought" (citta & ceto its organ or instrument or localisation) corresponds to dhamma "mentalized" object or "idea" (Mrs. Rh. D. "mental object in general," also "state of mind") -- (a) subjective: mental attitude, thought, idea, philosophy, truth, & its recognition (anubodhi) by the Buddha, i. e. the Dhamma or worldwisdom= philosophy of the Buddha as contained & expounded in the Dialogues of the 5 Nikāyas (see below C.) -- Note. The idea of dhamma as the interpreted Order of the World is carried further in the poetical quasi -- personification of the Dh. with the phrase "dhammaja dh -- nimmita dh -- dāyāda" (born of the Norm, created by the Norm, heir of the Norm; see under cpds. and Dhammatā; also s. v. Niyama). That which the Buddha preached, the Dhamma kat) e)coxh/n, was the order of law of the universe, immanent, eternal, uncreated, not as interpreted by him only, much less invented or decreed by him, but intelligible to a mind of his range, and by him made so to mankind as bodhi: revelation, awakening. The Buddha (like every great philosopher & other Buddhas preceding Gotama: ye pi te ahesuŋ atītaŋ addhānaŋ Arahanto Sammāsambuddhā te pi dhammaŋ yeva sakkatvā S i.140) is a discoverer of this order of the Dhamma, this universal logic, philosophy or righteousness ("Norm"), in which the rational & the ethical elements are fused into one. Thus by recognition of the truth the knower becomes the incorporation of the knowable (or the sense of the universe= Dhamma) & therefore a perfect man, one who is "truly enlightened" (sammā -- sambuddha): so Bhagavā jānaŋ jānāti passaŋ passati cakkhu -- bhūto ñāṇa -- bhūto dhamma˚ brahma˚ & in this possession of the truth he is not like Brahmā, but Brahmā himself & the lord of the world as the "master of the Truth": vattā pavattā atthassa ninnetā Amatassa dātā dhammassāmī S iv.94; & similarly "yo kho Dhammaŋ passati so mam passati; yo mam passati so Dhammaŋ passati" =he who sees the Buddha sees the Truth S iii.120. Cp. with this also the dhamma -- cakka idea (see cpds.). On equation Dhamma=Brahman see esp. Geiger, Dhamma pp. 76 -- 80, where is also discussed the formula Bhagavato putto etc. (with dhammaja for the brahmanic brahmaja). -- In later (Abhidhamma) literature the (dogmatic) personification of Dhamma occurs. See e. g. Tikp A 366.
As 6th sense -- object "dhamma" is the counterpart of "mano": manasā dhammaŋ viññāya "apperceiving presentations with the mind" S iv.185 etc. (see formula under rūpa); mano -- viññeyyā dhammā S iv.73; cp. S iii.46; iv.3 sq.; v.74; D iii.226, 245, 269. Ranged in the same category under the anupassanā -- formula (q. v.) "dhammesu dhamm -- ânupassin" realising the mentality of mental objects or ideas, e. g. D ii.95, 100, 299; A i.39, 296; ii.256; iii.450; iv.301. Also as one of the 6 taṇhās "desire for ideas" D iii.244, 280. -- As spirituality opposed to materiality in contrast of dh. & āmisa: It 98 (˚dāna: a mat. & a spir. gift). -- (b) objective: substratum (of cognition), piece, constituent (= khandha), constitution; phenomenon, thing, "world," cosmic order (as the expression of cosmic sense, as under a & 2). Thus applied to the khandhas: vedanādayo tayo kh. DhA i.35 (see Khandha B 3); to rūpa vedanā saññā sankhārā viññāna S iii.39;=sankhārā D iii.58, 77, 141. Freq. in formula sabbe dhammā aniccā (+dukkhā anattā: see nicca) "the whole of the visible world, all phenomena are evanescent etc." S iii.132 sq. & passim. diṭṭhe [va] dhamme in the phenomenal world (opp. samparāyika dh. the world beyond): see under diṭṭha (S iv.175, 205 etc.). -- ye dhammā hetuppabhavā tesaŋ hetuŋ Tathāgato āha "of all phenomena sprung from a cause the Buddha the cause hath told" Vin i.40 (cp. Isā Upanishad 14). <-> lokadhammā things of this world (viz. gain, fame, happiness etc., see under lābha) D iii.260; Nd2 55. <-> uttari -- manussa -- dh˚ā transcendental, supernormal phenomena D i.211, cp. D iii.4; abbhuta -- dh˚ā wonderful signs, portents Miln 8 (tayo acchariyā a. dh. pāturahesuŋ); PvA 2: hassa -- khiḍḍhā -- rati -- dh. -- samāpanna endowed with the qualities or things of mirth, play & enjoyment D i.19; iii.31; gāma˚ things or doings of the village D i.4 (cp. DA i.72).
2. Ratio -- ethically -- (a) objective: "rationality," anything that is as it should be according to its reason & logicality (as expressed under No. 1 a), i. e. right property, sound condition, norm, propriety, constitution as conforming to No. 1 in universal application i. e. Natural or Cosmic Law: yattha nāmañ ca rūpaŋ ca asesam uparujjhati, taŋ te dhammaŋ idhâññāya acchiduŋ bhavabandhanaŋ (recognising this law) S i.35 cittacetasikā dh˚ ā a term for the four mental khandhas, and gradually superseding them Dhs 1022 (cf. Compendium of Philosophy, 1); dasadhamma -- vidū Vin i.38 (see dasa); with attha, nirutti and paṭibhāna: one of the 4 Paṭisambhidās (branches of analytic knowledge A ii.160; Pṭs i.84, 88 etc.; Vibh. 293 f., Points of Controversy, p. 380. In this sense freq. -- ˚ as adj.: being constituted, having the inherent quality (as based on Natural Law or the rational constitution of the Universe), destined to be . . ., of the (natural) property of . . ., like (cp. Gr. -- eidh/s or E. -- able, as in change -- able=liable to change, also E. -- hood, -- ly & P. -- gata, -- ṭhita), e. g. khaya -- dhamma liable to decay (+vaya˚, virāga˚, nirodha˚), with ref. to the Sankhāras S iv.216 sq.; in the Paṭiccasamuppāda S ii.60; akkhaya imperishable Pv iv.152 (dānaŋ a -- dh. atthu). cavana˚ destined to shift to another state of existence D i.18; iii.31; It 76; VvA 54. jāti -- jarā -- maraṇa˚ under the law of birth, age, & death D iii.57; A i.147; iii.54; PvA 41 (sabbe sattā . . .); bhedana˚ fragile (of kāya) D i.76; S i.71; PvA 41 (bhijjana˚ of sankhārā). vipariṇāma˚ changeable A i.258; iv.157; PvA 60 (+anicca). a˚ unchanging D iii.31 sq. samudaya˚ & nirodha˚, in formula yaŋ kiñci s -- dh˚ŋ sabban tan n -- dh˚ŋ "anything that is destined to come into existence must also cease to exist" D i.110, 180; S iv.47 & passim. Cp. further: anāvatti˚ avinipāta˚ D i.156; iii.107, 132; A i.232; ii.89, 238; iv.12; anuppāda˚ D iii.270. -- (b) subjective: "morality," right behaviour, righteousness, practice, duty; maxim (cp. ṭhāna), constitution of character as conforming to No. 1 in social application, i. e. Moral Law. -- Often in pl.: tenets, convictions, moral habits; & as adj. that which is proper, that which forms the right idea; good, righteous, true; opp. adhamma false, unjust etc.; evil practice -- (a) Righteousness etc.: S i.86 (eko dh. one principle of conduct; ii.280 (dh. isinaŋ dhajo: righteousness is the banner of the Wise); kusala dh. D i.224; dhamme ṭhita righteous Vv 168; ñāti˚ duty against relatives PvA 30; deyya˚= dāna PvA 9, 70; sad˚ faith (q. v.) -- opp. adhamma unrighteousness, sin A ii.19; v.73 sq.; D iii.70 (˚rāga+ visama -- lobha & micchā -- dhamma); Pv iii.96 (˚ŋ anuvattisaŋ I practised wrong conduct). -- In the same sense: dh. asuddho Vin i.5=S i.137 (pāturahosi Magadhesu pubbe dh. a.); pāpa˚ (adj.) of evil conduct Vin i.3; aṭṭhita˚ unrighteous D iii.133; lobha˚ greedy quality D i.224, 230; methuna dh. fornication D iii.133. -- (b) (pl.) Tenets, practices etc. -- (aa) good: kusalā dh. D ii.223, 228; iii.49, 56, 82, 102 etc.; S ii.206; sappurisa˚ A v.245, 279; PvA 114; samaṇa˚ Wanderer's practice or observances DhA ii.55. brāhmaṇakaraṇā D i.244; yesaŋ dh˚ānaŋ Gotamo vaṇṇavādin D i.206; cp. sīlaŋ samādhi paññā ca vimutti ca anuttarā: anubuddhā ime dhammā Gotamena yasassinā D ii.123. dhammānaŋ sukusalo perfect in all (these) qualities D i.180; samāhite citte dhammā pātubhavanti "with composed mind appear true views" S iv.78; dhammesu patiṭṭhito S i.185; ananussutesu dh˚esu cakkhuŋ udapādi "he visualized undiscovered ideas" S ii.9. <-> (bb) evil: āvaraṇīyā S iv.104; pāpakā Vin i.8; D i.70; A i.202; akusalā D iii.56, 57, 73, 91 etc.; lobha˚, dosa˚, moha˚ S i.70=It 45=Nd2 420; S i.43; M iii.40; dukkhavipākā vodanīyā saŋkilesikā ponobbhavikā D i.195; iii.57. -- (cc) various: gambhīrā duddasā etc. Vin i.4; D i.12; S i.136; -- Cp. S ii.15, 26; Nd2 320; It 22, 24; Ps i.5, 22, 28; Vbh 105, 228, 293 sq. etc. etc. -- (g) (adj.) good, pious, virtuous etc.: adhammo nirayaŋ neti dhammo pāpeti suggatiŋ "the sinners go to niraya, the good to heaven" Th 1, 304=DA i.99=DhsA 38= DhA i.22. kalyāṇa˚ virtuous A i.74, 108; ii.81, 91, 224 sq.; PvA 13. Opp. pāpa˚ Vin iii.90; cp. above a. -- (d) (phrases). Very freq. used as adv. is the instr. dhammena with justice, justly, rightly, fitly, properly Vin i.3; D i.122; S iv.331; Vv 3419 (=kāraṇena ñāyena vā VvA); Pv ii.930 (=yutten' eva kāraṇena PvA 125, as just punishment); iv.169 (=anurūpakāraṇena PvA 286). Esp. in phrase of the cakkavattin, who rules the world according to justice: adaṇḍena asatthena dhammena anusāsati (or ajjhāvasati) D i.89; ii.16; S i.236=Sn 1002; cp. Sn 554 (dhammena cakkaŋ vattemi, of the Buddha). Opp. adhammena unjustly, unfitly, against the rule Vin iv.37; S i.57; iv.331; DA i.236. -- dhamme (loc.) honourably J ii.159. <-> dhammaŋ carati to live righteously Pv ii.334; see also below C 3 & dh. -- cariyā.
C. The Dhamma, i. e. moral philosophy, wisdom, truth as propounded by Gotama Buddha in his discourses & conversations, collected by the compilers of the 5 Nikāyas (dhamma -- vinayaŋ sangāyantehi dhammasangāhakehi ekato katvā VvA 3; cp. mayaŋ dh.˚ŋ ca vinayañ ca sangāyāma Vin ii.285), resting on the deeper meaning of dhamma as expld under B 1 a, & being in short the "doctrinal" portions of the Buddhist Tipiṭaka in contradiction to the Vinaya, the portion expounding the rules of the Order (see piṭaka). Dhamma as doctrine is also opposed to Abhidhamma "what follows on the Dhamma." -- (1) Dhamma and Vinaya, "wisdom & discipline," as now found in the 2 great Piṭakas of the B. Scriptures, the Vinaya and SuttantaPiṭaka (but the expression "Piṭako" is later. See Piṭaka). Thus bhikkhū suttantikā vinaya -- dharā dhamma kathikā, i. e. "the bhikkhus who know the Suttantas, remember the Vinaya & preach the Word of the Buddha" Vin ii.75 (≈i.169), cp. iv.67. Dhamma & Vinaya combd: yo 'haŋ evaŋ svâkkhāte Dh -- vinaye pabbajito S i.119; bhikkhu na evarūpiŋ kathaŋ kattā hoti: na tvaŋ imaŋ Dh -- v˚ŋ ājānāsi, ahaŋ imaŋ Dh -- v˚ŋ ājānāmi etc. S iii.12; imaŋ Dh -- v˚ŋ na sakkomi vitthārena ācikkhituŋ S i.9; samaṇā . . . imasmiŋ Dh -- v˚e gādhanti S iii.59. -- Thus in var. cpds. (see below), as Dh -- dhara (+V -- dh.) one who knows both by heart; Dh -- vādin (+V -- v.) one who can recite both, etc. -- See e. g. the foll. passages: Vin ii.285 (dh. ca v. ca pariyatta), 304; iii.19, 90; D i.8, 176, 229; ii.124 (ayaŋ Dh. ayaŋ V. idaŋ Satthu -- sāsanaŋ); iii.9, 12, 28, 118 sq.; S i.9, 119, 157; ii.21, 50, (dh -- vinaye assāsa); A iii.297 (id.); S ii.120; iii.91; iv.43 sq., 260; A i.34, 121, 185, 266; ii.2, 26, 117, 168; iii.8, 168 sq.; iv.36, 200 sq.; v.144, 163, 192; It 112; Sn p. 102; Ud 50. <-> 2. Dhamma, Buddha, Sangha. On the principle expld in Note on B 1 a rests the separation of the personality of the teacher from that which he taught (the "Doctrine," the "Word," the Wisdom or Truth, cp. Dhamma -- kāyo Tathāgatassa adhivacanaŋ D iii.84). A person becoming a follower of the B. would conform to his teaching (Dh.) & to the community ("Church"; Sangha) by whom his teaching was handed down. The formula of Initiation or membership is therefore threefold, viz. Buddhaŋ saraṇaŋ upemi (gacchāmi), Dh ˚ŋ . . ., Sanghaŋ . . . i. e. I put myself into the shelter of the B., the Dh. & the S. (see further ref. under Sangha) S i.34 (Buddhe pasannā Dhamme ca Sanghe tibbagāravā: ete sagge pakāsenti yattha te upapajjare, i. e. those who adore the B. & his Church will shine in Heaven); D ii.152 sq., 202 sq., 352; S iv.270 sq. (˚saraṇagamana); DhA i.206; PvA 1 (vande taŋ uttamaŋ Dh ˚ŋ, B ˚ŋ, S ˚ŋ). Cp. Satthari, Dhamme, Sanghe kankhati, as 3 of the ceto -- khilā A iii.248≈. -- 3. Character of the Dhamma in var. attributes, general phraseology. -- The praise of the Dh. is expressed in many phrases, of which only a few of the more frequent can be mentioned here. Among the most famous is that of "dhammaŋ deseti ādi -- kalyāṇaŋ majjhe -- k˚, pariyosāna -- k˚, etc. "beautiful in the beginning, beautiful in the middle & beautiful in the end," e. g. D i.62; S i.105; iv.315; A ii.147, 208; iii.113 sq., 135, 262; D iii.96, 267; Nd2 316; It 79; VvA 87. It is welcome as a friend, beautifully told, & its blessings are immediate: sv' akkhāta, sandiṭṭhika, akālika, ehipassika etc. D ii.93; iii.5, 39, 45, 102; S i.9, 117; ii.199; iv.271; A iii.285 etc. It is mahā -- dh. S iv.128; ariya˚ S i.30; A v.241, 274; Sn 783; sammā˚ S i.129. It is likened to a splendid palace on a mountain -- top Vin i.5=It 33, or to a quiet lake with sīla as its banks S i.169=183; and it is above age & decay: satan ca dhammo na jaram upeti S i.71. Whoever worships the Dh. finds in this worship the highest gratification: diyo loke sako putto piyo loke sako pati, tato piyatarā . . . dhammassa magganā S i.210; ye keci ariyadhamme khantiyā upetā . . . devakāyaŋ paripūressanti S i.30. Dh ˚ŋ garukaroti D iii.84. Opp. Dhamme agārava A iii.247, 340; iv.84: the slanderers of the Dh. receive the worst punishment after death S i.30 (upenti Roruvaŋ ghoraŋ). -- Var. phrases: to find the truth (i. e. to realize intuitively the Dh.)=dh˚ŋ anubodhati D ii.113; S i.137, or vindati D i.110, 148. To expound the Dh., teach the truth, talk about problems of ethics & philosophy: dh˚ŋ deseti Vin iv.134; S i.210 etc.; katheti PvA 41; bhāsati Vin i.101; bhaṇati Vin i.169; pakāseti S ii.28; iv.121. To hear the Dh., to listen to such an exposition: dh˚ŋ suṇāti S i.114, 137, 196, 210; A i.36; iii.163; DhA iii.81, 113. To attain full knowledge of it: dh ˚ŋ pariyāpuṇāti A ii.103, 185; iii.86, cp. 177 & ˚pariyatti. To remember the Dh.: dhāreti A iii.176 (for details of the 5 stages of the Dh. -- accomplishment); to ponder over the Dh., to study it: dh ˚ŋ viciṇāti S i.34=55, 214; A iv.3 sq. To enter a relation of discipleship with the Dh.: dh ˚ŋ saraṇaŋ gacchati (see above 2) Pv iv.348; dhammaŋ saraṇatthaŋ upehi Vv 532 (cp. VvA 232). <-> See further Ps i.34, 78, 131; ii.159 sq.; Pug 58, 66; Vbh 293 sq., 329; Nett 11, 15, 31, 83, 112; & cp. cpds. -- 4. Dhamma and anudhamma. Childers interprets anudhamma with "lesser or inferior dhamma," but the general purport of the Nikāya passages seems to be something like "in conformity with, in logical sequence to the dhamma" i. e. lawfulness, righteousness, reasonableness, truth (see KS ii.202; Geiger, Pāli Dhamma pp. 115 -- 118). It occurs (always with Dh.) in the foll. contexts: dhammassa c' ânudh ˚ŋ vyākaroti "to explain according to the truth of the Dhamma" D i.161; iii.115; Ud 50; dhammassa hoti anudhammacārin "walking in perfect conformity to the Dh." A ii.8; dh. -- anudh ˚ŋ ācaranti id. D iii.154; dh. -- anudh˚ paṭipanna "one who has reached the complete righteousness of the Dh." D ii.224; iii.119; S iii.40 sq.; It 81; A iii.176 (where it forms the highest stage of the Dhammaknowledge, viz. (1) dh ˚ŋ suṇāti; (2) pariyāpuṇāti; (3) dhāreti; (4) atthaŋ upaparikkhati; (5) dh -- anudh ˚ŋ paṭipajjati). Further in series bahussuta, dhammadhara, dh -- anudh˚ -- paṭipanna D ii.104; S v.261; A ii.8; Ud 63; also in dhamma -- kathika, dh -- anudh˚ -- paṭi panna, diṭṭha -- dhamma -- nibbāna -- patta S ii.18=114= iii.163; & in atthaŋ aññāya, dhammaŋ aññāya, dhanudh˚ -- paṭipanna A i.36; ii.97.
-- akkhāna discussing or preaching of the Dhamma Nd1 91; -- atthadesanā interpretation of the Dh. Miln 21; -- âdhikaraṇa a point in the Dh. S iv.63= v.346; -- âdhipa Lord of righteousness (+anudhamma -- cārin) A i.150; cp. ˚ssāmi; nt. abstr. ˚âdhipateyya the dominating influence of the Dh. A i.147 sq.; D iii.220; Miln 94; Vism 14. -- ânudhamma see above C 4; -- anuvattin acting in conformity with the moral law Dh 86, cp. DhA ii.161; -- ânusārin of righteous living D iii.105, 254 (+saddhā˚); M i.226, 479; A i.74; iv.215; iv.23; S v.200; Pug 15; Nett 112, 189; -- anvaya main drift of the faith, general conclusions of the Dh., D ii.83= iii.100; M ii.120; -- abhisamaya understanding of the Truth, conversion to the Dhamma [cp. dharmâbhisamaya Divy 200] S ii.134 (+dh. -- cakkhu -- paṭilābha): Pug 41; Miln 20; DhA i.27; iv.64; PvA 31 etc.; -- âmata the nectar of righteousness or the Dh. Miln 22 (˚meghena lokaŋ abhitappayanto), 346; -- ādāsa the mirror of the Dhamma D ii.93 (name of an aphorism) S v.357 (id.); Th 1, 395; ThA 179; -- āyatana the field of objects of ideation S ii.72; Dhs 58, 66, 147, 397, 572, 594; Vbh 70, 72 sq.; -- ārammaṇa: dh. as an object of ideation Dhs 146, 157, 365; cp. Dhs. trsl. 2; -- ārāma "one who has the Dh. as his pleasure -- ground," one who rejoices in the Dh. A iii.431; It 82 (+dh -- rata); Sn 327; Dh 364, cp. DhA iv.95; -- ālapana using the proper address, a fit mode of addressing a person as followed by the right custom. See Dial. i.193 -- 196; J v.418; -- āsana "the Dh -- seat," i. e. flat piece of stone or a mat on which a priest sat while preaching J i.53; DhA ii.31; -- ûposatha the fast day prescribed by the Dh. A i.208; -- okkā the torch of Righteousness J i.34; -- oja the essence or sap of the Dh. S v.162; DhA iv.169; -- osadha the medicine of the Dh. Miln 110, 335. -- kathā ethical discussion, fit utterance, conversation about the Dh., advice D iii.151; J i.217; VvA 6; PvA 50, 66; -- kathika (adj.) one who converses about ethical problems, one who recites or preaches the Dh., one who speaks fitly or properly. Often in combn. with Vinaya -- dhara "one who masters (knows by heart) the Vinaya," & bahussuta "one who has a wide knowledge of tradition": Vin iv.10, 13, 141; A iii.78; DhA ii.30; also with suttantika "one who is versed in the Suttantas": Vin i.169; ii.75; iv.67. The ability to preach the Dh. is the first condition of one who wishes to become perfected in righteousness (see dhamm -- ânudhamma, above C 4): S ii.18, 114=iii.163; M iii.40. -- A i.25 sq.; ii.138; Pug 42; J i.217; iv.2 (˚thera). Cp. also AvŚ ii.81; -- kathikatta (nt.) speaking about the Dh.; preaching M iii.40; A i.38 (+vinayadhara -- katta); -- kamma a legally valid act, or procedure in accordance with the Rules of the Order Vin iv.37, 136, 232; A i.74 (+vinaya˚); a˚ an illegal act Vin iv.232; A i.74; -- karaka a proper or regulation (standard) water -- pot, i. e. a pot with a filter for straining water as it was used by ascetics Vin ii.118, 177, 301; J i.395; vi.331; DhA iii.290, 452; VvA 220 (not ˚karaṇena); PvA 185; Miln 68; -- kāma a lover of the Dh. D iii.267; A v.24, 27, 90, 201; Sn 92. -- kāya having a body according to the Norm (the dhammatā of bodies). See Bdhgh as translated in Dial. iii. ad loc.; having a normal body (sic Bdhgh, esp. of the B. D iii.84; -- ketu the standard of the Dh., or Dh. as standard A i.109=iii.149; -- khan- dha the (4) main portions or articles of the Dh. (sīla, samādhi, paññā, vimutti) D iii.229; cp. Sp. AvŚ ii.155; -- gaṇa a body of followers of the Dh. PvA 194; -- gaṇḍikā (better gaṇṭhikā, q v.) a block of justice, i. e. of execution J i.150, 151; ii.124; vi.176; v.303; -- garu worshipping the Dh. S iv.123; DhA i.17 (˚ka); -- gariya a kind of acrobatic tumbler, lit. excellent t. (+brahma˚) Miln 191; -- gu one who knows the Dh. (analogous to vedagu) J v.222; vi.261; -- gutta protecting the Dh. or protected by the Dh. (see gutta) S i.222; J v.222 (+dhpāla); -- ghosaka ( -- kamma) praise of the Dh. DhA iii.81; -- cakka the perfection or supreme harmony of righteousness (see details under cakka), always in phrase dhcakkaŋ pavatteti (of the Buddha) "to proclaim or inaugurate the perfect state or ideal of universal righteousness" Vin i.8=M i.171; Vin i.11; S i.191; iii.86; Sn 556, 693; Miln 20, 343; DhA i.4; VvA 165; PvA 2, 67 etc.; besides this also in simile at S i.33 of the car of righteousness; -- cakkhu "the eye of wisdom," perception of the law of change. Freq. in the standing formula at the end of a conversation with the Buddha which leads to the "opening of the eyes" or conversion of the interlocutor, viz. "virajaŋ vītamalaŋ dhcakkhuŋ udapādi" D i.86, 110; ii.288; S iv.47; A iv.186; Vin i.11, 16, 40 etc. Expl. at DA i.237: dhammesu vā cakkhuŋ dhammamayaŋ vā cakkhuŋ. Cp. S ii.134 (˚paṭiĺābha;+dhammâbhisamaya); Dial. i.184; ii.176; -- cariyā walking in righteousness, righteous living, observance of the Dh., piety (=dānādi -- puññapaṭipatti VvA 282) S i.101 (+samacariyā kusalakiriyā); A ii.5; iii.448; v.87, 302; Sn 263 (=kāyasucaritâdi˚ Sn A 309), 274 (+brahma˚). a˚ evil way of living A i.55 (+visama -- cariyā); -- cārin virtuous, dutiful M i.289; ii.188; Dh 168; Miln 19 (+samacārin); -- cetiya a memorial in honour of the Dh. M ii.124; -- chanda virtuous desire (opp. kāma˚) DhsA 370; Vbh 208; -- ja born of the Dh. (see above, Note on B 1 a), in formula "Bhagavato putto oraso dh -- jo, dh -- nimmito, dh.dāyādo" (the spiritual child of the Buddha) D iii.84=S ii.221; It 101; -- jāla "net of the Dh.," name of a discourse (cp. ˚ādāsa & pariyāya) D i.46; -- jīvin living righteously It 108; Dh 24 (=dhammenā samena DhA i.239); -- ññū one who knows the Dh. J vi.261; -- ṭṭha standing in the Law, just, righteous S i.33 (+sīlasampanna); Sn 749; J iii.334; iv.211; ThA 244, -- ṭṭhita=˚ṭṭha D i.190; -- ṭṭhiti˚ having a footing in the Dh. S ii.60, 124, cp. ˚ṭṭhitatā: establishing of causes and effects S ii.25; -- takka right reasoning Sn 1107 (=sammāsankappa Nd2 318); -- dāna gift of; -- dāyāda heir of the Dh.; spiritual heir (cp. above note on B 1 a) D iii.84; S ii.221; M i.12; iii.29; It 101; -- dīpa the firm ground or footing of the Dh. (usually combd with atta -- dīpa: having oneself as one's refuge, self -- dependent) D ii.100; iii.58, 77; S v.154; -- desanā moral instruction, exposition of the Dh. Vin i.16; D i.110 etc. (see desanā); -- dessin a hater of the Dh. Sn 92; -- dhaja the banner of the Dh. A i.109= iii.149; Nd2 503; Miln 21; -- dhara (adj.) one who knows the Dh. (by heart); see above C 4. Combd w. Vinayadhara Vin i.127, 337; ii.8; A i.117, & bahussuta (ibid). Sn 58 (cp. SnA 110). -- See also A iii.361 sq., iv.310; Nd2 319; -- dhātu the mental object considered as irreducible element Dhs 58, 67, 147 etc.; Vbh 87, 89 (see above B 1); an ultimate principle of the Dh., the cosmic law D ii.8; M i.396; S ii.143 sq.; Nett 64 sq.; Vism 486 sq. -- dhāraṇa knowledge of the Dh. M ii.175; -- nāṭaka a class of dancing girls having a certain duty J v.279; -- nimmita see ˚ja; -- niyāma belonging to the order of the Norm D i.190; DA on D ii.12: dhammatā; (˚ka); -- niyāmatā, certainty, or orderliness of causes and effects S ii.25; Points of Controversy, 387; -- netti= niyāma Miln 328; DA i.31; cp. Sk. dharmanetrī M Vastu ii.357; iii.234, 238; -- pajjota the lamp of the Dh. Miln 21; -- pada (nt.) a line or stanza of the Dhamma, a sentence containing an ethical aphorism; a portion or piece of the Dh. In the latter meaning given as 4 main subjects, viz. anabhijjhā, avyāpāda, sammā -- sati, sammā -- samādhi D iii.229; A ii.29 sq. (in detail); Nett 170. -- S i.22 (dānā ca kho dh -- padaŋ va seyyo). 202 (dh -- padesu chando); A ii.185; Sn 88 (dh -- pade sudesite=nibbāna -- dhammassa padattā SnA 164); J iii.472 (=nibbāna); DhA iii.190 (ekaŋ dh -- padaŋ). As Np. title of a canonical book, included in the Khuddaka Nikāya; -- pamāṇa measuring by the (teaching of) Dh. Pug 53; DhA iii.114 (˚ikāni jātisatāni); -- pariyatti attainment of or accomplishment in the Dh., the collection of the Dh. in general A iii.86 (w. ref. to the 9 angas, see navanga); -- pariyāya a short discourse, or a verse, or a poem, with a moral or a text; usually an exposition of a single point of doctrine D i.46; ii.93; iii.116; M i.445; Vin i.40 (a single verse); A i.65; iv.63 (a poem Sn 190 -- 218, where also it is called a dh˚pariyāyo); A v.288, 291. Such a dh˚pariyāya had very often a special name. Thus Brahmajāla, the Wondrous Net D i.46; Dhammādāso dh˚p˚, the Mirror of the Law D ii.93=S v.357; Sokasallaharaṇa, Sorrow's dart extractor A iii.62; Ādittap˚ dh˚p˚, the Red -- hot lancet S iv.168; Lomahaŋsana˚ M i.83; Dhammatā -- dhamma˚ Miln 193, etc. -- pāla guardian of the Law or the Dh. J v.222, freq. also as Np.; -- pīti ( -- rasa) the sweetness of drinking in the Dh. (pivaŋ) Sn 257; Dh 79 (=dhammapāyako dhammaŋ pivanto ti attho DhsA ii.126); -- bhaṇḍāgārika treasurer of the Dh., an Ep. of Ānanda Th 1, 1048; J i.382, 501; ii.25; DhA iii.250; PvA 2. -- bhūta having become the Dh.; righteousness incorporated, said of the Buddhas D iii.84. Usually in phrase (Bhagavā) cakkhu -- bhūta . . . dh -- bhūta brahmabhūta A v.226 sq. (cp. cakkhu); Th 1, 491; see also above, note B 1 a; -- bheri the drum of the Dh. Miln 21; -- magga the path of righteousness Sn 696; Miln 21; -- maya made (built) of the Dh. (pāsāda) S i.137; -- yanta the (sugar -- ) mill of the Dh. (fig.) Miln 166. -- yāna the vehicle of the Law (the eightfold Noble Path) S v.5; -- rakkhita rightly guarded Sn 288; -- rata fond of the Law Sn 327; Dh 364; DhA iv.95; cp. dh. -- [gatā]rati Th i.742; Dhp. 354; -- rasa taste of Dhp. 354; -- rājā king of righteousness, Ep. of the Buddha S i.33=55; D i.88 (of a cakkavatti); A i.109; iii.149; Sn 554; J i.262; interpreted by Bdhgh at DA i.249 as "dhammena rajjaŋ labhitvā rājā jāto ti"=a king who gained the throne legitimately; -- laddha one who has acquired the Dh., holy, pious S ii.21; J iii.472; justly acquired (bhogā) Sn p. 87; -- vara the best of truths or the most excellent Doctrine Sn 233, 234; -- vādin speaking properly, speaking the truth or according to the Doctrine Vin ii.285; iii.175 (+Vinaya -- vādin); D iii.135 (id.); D i.4, 95 (of Gotama; DA i.76: nava -- lokuttara -- dhamma sannissitaŋ katvā vadati); S iv.252; A i.75; ii.209; -- vicaya investigation of doctrine, religious research Dhs 16, 20, 90, 309, 333, 555; Vbh 106; Vism 132; -- vitakka righteous thought A i.254; -- vidū one who understands the Dh., an expert in the Dh. J v.222; vi.261; -- vinicchaya righteous decision, discrimination of the truth Sn 327; Dh 144; DhA iii.86; -- vihārin living according to the Dh. A iii.86 sq.; -- saŋvibhāga sharing out or distribution of the Dh., i. e. spiritual gifts It 98 (opp. āmisa˚ material gifts); -- sangāhaka a compiler of the sacred scriptures, a diaskeuasth/s VvA 3, 169; -- saññā righteous thought, faith, piety PvA 3; -- sabhā a hall for the discussion of the Dh., a chapel, meetinghouse J vi.333; DhA i.31; ii.51; iv.91; PvA 38, 196; -- samaya a meeting where the Dh. is preached S i.26; -- samādāna acquisition of the Dh., which is fourfold as discussed at M i.305; D iii.229; -- saraṇa relying on or putting one's faith in the Dh. (see above C 3) D iii.58, 77; S v.154; -- savana hearing the preaching of the Dh., "going to church" Vin i.101; M ii.175; A ii.248, 381; iv.361; Sn 265; DhA iii.190; -- sākaccha conversation about the Dh. Sn 266; -- ssāmi Lord of the Truth, Ep. of the Buddha (see above B 1 a note) S iv.94; -- sāra the essence of the Dh. S v.402; -- sārathi in purisa -- dh. -- s˚ at D i.62 misprint for purisa -- damma -- s˚; -- sārin a follower of the Dh. S i.170; -- sudhammatā excellency of the Dh. S ii.199; Th 1, 24, 220, 270, 286; -- senāpati "captain of the Dhamma," Ep. of Sāriputta Th 1, 1083; J i.408; Miln 343; DhA iii.305; VvA 64, 65, 158; -- soṇḍatā thirst after justice J v.482; -- sota the ear of the Dh. S ii.43.
Dhamma2 (adj.) [Sk. *dhārma, cp. dhammika] only in f. -- ī in combn with kathā: relating to the Dhamma, viz. conversation on questions of Ethics, speaking about the Dh., preaching, religious discourse, sermon. Either as dhammī kathā Vin ii.161; iv.56 & in instr. -- abl. dhammiyā kathāya (sandasseti samādapeti samuttejeti saŋpahaŋseti: ster. formula) S i.114, 155, 210, iv.122, PvA 30 etc.; or as cpd. dhammī -- kathā D ii.1; M i.161; Sn 325; & dhammi -- kathā S i.155; PvA 38.
Dhamma3 (adj.) [Sk. dhanvan] having a bow: see daḷha˚; also as dhammin in daḷha˚ S i.185 (see dhammin).
Dhammatā (f.) [Sk. dharmitā] conformity to the Dhamma- niyāma (see niyāma), fitness, propriety; a general rule, higher law, cosmic law, general practice, regular phenomenon, usual habit; often used in the sense of a finite verb: it is a rule, it is proper, one should expect S i.140 (Buddhānaŋ dh. the law of the B.'s i. e. as one is wont to expect of the B.s), 215 (su˚); iv.216 sq. (khaya˚ etc.); D ii.12; A ii.36 (kusala˚); v.46; Th 1, 712; J i.245; ii.128; Nett 21, 50, cp. Miln 179; PvA 19; VvA 7. See also AvŚ Index.
Dhammatta (nt.) [Sk. *dharmatvaŋ] liability to be judged Vin ii.55 (& a˚).
Dhammani only found in S i.103, where the Comy. takes it as a locative, and gives, as the equivalent, "in a forest on dry land" (araññe thale). Cp. Kindred Sayings i.129, n. 2.
Dhammika (adj.) [=Sk. dharmya, cp. dhammiya] lawful, according to the Dh. or the rule; proper, fit, right; permitted, legitimate, justified; righteous, honourable, of good character, just, esp. an attr. of a righteous King (rājā cakkavattī dhammiko dhammarājā) D i.86; ii.16; A i.109=iii.149; J i.262, 263; def. by Bdhgh as "dhammaŋ caratī ti dh." (DA i.237) & "dhammena caratī ti dh., ñāyena samena pavattalī ti" (ib. 249). <-> Vin iv.284; D i.103; S ii.280 (dhammikā kathā); iii.240 (āhāra); iv.203 (dhammikā devā, adh˚ asurā); A i.75; iii.277; Sn 404; DhA ii.86 (dohaḷa); iv.185 (˚lābha); PvA 25 (=suddha, manohara). Also as saha -- dh˚ (esp. in conn. w. pañha, a justified, reasonable, proper question: D i.94; S iv.299 in detail) Vin iv.141; D i.161; iii.115; A i.174. -- a˚ unjust, illegal etc. Vin iv.285; S iv.203; A iii.243.
Dhammin1 (adj.) [Sk. dharmin] only -- ˚: having the nature or quality of, liable to, consisting in, practising, acting like, etc. (as ˚dhamma B 2 a), viz. uppāda -- vaya˚ D ii.157; maraṇa˚ (=maraṇadhamma) A i.147; pāpa˚ Pv i.117 of evil nature.
Dhammin2 ( -- ˚) only in daḷha -- dh˚, which is customarily taken as a dern from dhanu, bow=having a strong bow (see dhamma3); although some passages admit interpretation as "of strong character or good practice," e. g. S i.185.
Dhammiya (adj.) [Sk. dharmya; cp. dhammika] in accord- ance with the Dhamma PvA 242 (also a˚); Vism 306 (˚lābha).
Dhammilla [Sk. dhammilla] the braided hair of women Dāvs iv.9.
Dhammī in ˚kathā see dhamma2.
*Dhayati to suck: see dhātī. Caus. dhāpayati, pp. dhāta (q. v.).
Dhara (usually -- ˚, except at Miln 420) (adj.) [Sk. dhara, to dhr see dharati] bearing, wearing, keeping; holding in mind, knowing by heart. Freq. in phrase dhammadhara (knowing the Dhamma, q. v.), vinaya˚, mātikā˚ e. g. D ii.125. dhamma˚ also Sn 58; Th 1, 187; Nd2 319; vinaya˚ Miln 344; jaṭājina˚ Sn 1010. See also dhāra.
Dharaṇa (adj.) bearing, holding, comprising VvA 104 (suvaṇṇassa pañcadasa˚ nikkha holding, i. e. worth or equal to 15 parts of gold). -- f. -- ī bearing, i. e. pregnant with Sn 26 (of cows: godharaṇiyo paveniyo=gabbhiniyo SnA 39). As n. the Earth J v.311; vi.526; Miln 34; dharaṇī -- ruha N. of a tree J vi.482, 497; Miln 376.
Dharati [Sk. dharati, dhṛ as in Gr. qro/nos; Lat. firmus & fretus. See also daḷha, dhata, dhamma, dhiti, dhuva] to hold, bear, carry, wear; to hold up, support; to bear in mind, know by heart; to hold out, endure, last, continue, live Sn 385 (take to heart, remember); DhA ii.68; -- ppr. dharamāṇa living, lasting J i.75 (dh˚e yeva suriye while the sun was still up); ii.6; Miln 240, 291 (Bhagavato dh˚ -- kāle); -- grd. dhareyya, in dh˚divasa the day when a young girl is to be carried (into the house of her husband) ThA, 25; cp. dhāreyya Th 2, 472=vivāha ThA 285. -- pp. dhata (q. v.) -- Caus. dhāreti (q. v.).
Dhava1 [Sk. dhava=madhuratvaca, Halāyudha] the shrub Grislea Tomentosa A i.202, 204; J iv.209; vi.528.
Dhava2 [Sk. dhava, a newly formed word after vidhava, widow, q. v.] a husband ThA 121 (dh. vuccati sāmiko tad abhāvā vidhavā matapatikā ti attho).
Dhavala (adj.) [Sk. dhavala, to dhavati, see dhāvati & dhovati] white, dazzling white VvA 252; Dāvs ii.123; v.26.
Dhavalatā (f.) whiteness VvA 197.
Dhāta [Sk. *dhāyita of dhayati to suck, nourish, pp. dhīta] fed, satiated; satisfied, appeased Vin i.222; J i.185; ii.247, 446; v.73; vi.555; Pv i.118 (so read for dāta)=PvA 59 (: suhita titta); Miln 238, 249. -- f. abstr. dhātatā satiation, fulness, satisfaction, in ati˚ J ii.293.
Dhātar [n. ag. fr. dhṛ] upholder J v.225.
Dhātī (f.) [Sk. dhātrī=Gr. tiqh/nh wet nurse, to dhayati suck, suckle; Idg. *dhēi as in Gr. qh_sqai to milk, qh_lus feeding, qhlh/ female breast; cp. Lat. felare, femina ("giving suck"), filius ("suckling"); Oir. dīnu lamb; Goth. daddjan; Ohg. tila breast. See also dadhi, dhītā, dhenu] wet nurse, fostermother D ii.19; M i.395; ii.97; J i.57; iii.391; PvA 16, 176. In cpds. dhāti˚, viz. -- cela swaddling cloth, baby's napkin S i.205= J iii.309.
Dhātu (f.) [Sk. dhātu to dadhāti, Idg. *dhē, cp. Gr. ti/qhmi, a)na/ -- qhma, Sk. dhāman, dhāṭr (=Lat. conditor); Goth. gadēds; Ohg. tāt, tuom (in meaning -- ˚=dhātu, cp. E. serf -- dom "condition of . . .") tuon=E. to do; & with k -- suffix Lat. facio, Gr. (e)/)qhk(a), Sk. dhāka; see also dhamma] element. Closely related to dhamma in meaning B 1b, only implying a closer relation to physical substance. As to its gen. connotation cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 198. -- 1. a primary element, of which the usual set comprises the four paṭhavī, āpo, tejo, vāyo (earth, water, fire, wind), otherwise termed cattāro mahābhūtā(ni): D i.215; ii.294; iii.228; S i.15; ii.169 sq., 224; iv.175, 195; A ii.165; iii.243; Vbh 14, 72; Nett 73. See discussed at Cpd. 254 sq. -- A defn of dhātu is to be found at Vism 485. -- Singly or in other combns paṭhavī˚ S ii.174; tejo˚ S i.144; D iii.227; the four plus ākāsa S iii.227, plus viññāna S ii.248; iii.231; see below 2 b. -- 2. (a) natural condition, property, disposition; factor, item, principle, form. In this meaning in var. combns & applications, esp. closely related to khandha. Thus mentioned with khandha & āyatana (sensory element & element of sense -- perception) as bodily or physical element, factor (see khandha B 1 d & cp. Nd2 under dhātu) Th 2, 472. As such (physical substratum) it constitutes one of the lokā or forms of being (khandha˚ dhātu˚ āyatana˚ Nd2 550). Freq. also in combn kāma -- dhātu, rūpa˚ arūpa˚ "the elements or properties of k. etc." as preceding & conditioning bhava in the respective category (Nd2 s. v.). See under d. -- As "set of conditions or state of being ( -- ˚)" in the foll.: loka˚ a world, of which 10 are usually mentioned (equalling 10,000: PvA 138) S i.26; v.424; Pv ii.961; Vbh 336; PvA 138; KS ii.101, n. 1; -- nibbāna˚ the state of N. S v.8; A ii.120; iv.202; J i.55; It 38 (dve: see under Nibbāna); Miln 312. Also in the foll. connections: amata˚ It 62; bhū˚ the verbal root bhū DA i.229; ṭhapitāya dhātuyā "while the bodily element, i. e. vitality lasts" Miln 125; vaṇṇa˚ form, beauty S i.131; Pv i.31. In these cases it is so far weakened in meaning, that it simply corresponds to E. abstr. suffix -- hood or -- ity (cp. ˚hood=origin. "form": see ketu), so perhaps in Nibbāna˚=Nibbāna -- dom. Cp. dhātuka. -- (b) elements in sense -- consciousness: referring to the 6 ajjhattikāni & 6 bāhirāni āyatanāni S ii.140 sq. Of these sep. sota˚ D i.79; iii.38; Vbh 334; dibbasota˚ S ii.121, 212; v.265, 304; A i.255; iii.17, 280; v.199; cakkhu˚ Vbh 71 sq.; mano˚ Vbh 175, 182, 301; mano -- viññāṇa˚ Vbh 87, 89, 175, 182 sq. <-> (c) various: aneka˚ A i.22; iii.325; v.33; akusala˚ Vbh 363; avijjā˚ S ii.132; ābhā˚ S ii.150; ārambha˚ S v.66, 104 sq.; A i.4; ii.338; ṭhiti˚ S ii.175; iii.231; A iii.338; dhamma˚ S ii.56; nekkhamma˚ S ii.151; A iii.447; nissāraṇiyā dhātuyo (5) D iii.239; A iii.245, 290. See further S i.134, 196; ii.153, 248 (aniccā); iii.231 (nirodha); iv.67; A i.176; ii.164; iv.385; Dhs 58, 67, 121; Nett 57, 64 sq.; ThA 20, 49, 285, -- (d) Different sets and enumerations: as 3 under kāma˚, rūpa˚, arūpa A i.223; iii.447; Ps i.137; Vbh 86, 363, 404 sq.; under rūpa˚, arūpa˚, nirodha˚ It 45. -- as 6 (pathavī etc.+ākāsa˚ & viññāṇa˚): D iii.247; A i.175 sq.; M iii.31, 62, 240; Ps i.136; Vbh 82 sq. -- as 7 (ābhā subha etc.): S ii.150. -- 18: Ps i.101, 137; ii.230, Dhs 1333; Vbh 87 sq., 401 sq.; Vism 484 sq. -- 3. a humour or affection of the body DA i.253 (dhātusamatā). -- 4. the remains of the body after cremation PvA 76; a relic VvA 165 (sarīra˚, bodily relic); Dāvs v.3 (dasana˚ the toothrelic). -- abl. dhātuso according to one's nature S ii.154 sq. (sattā sattehi saddhiŋ saŋsandanti etc.); It 70 (id.); S iii.65.
-- kathā N. of 3rd book of the Abhidhamma Vism 96. -- kucchi womb Miln 176; -- kusala skilled in the elements M iii.62; ˚kusalatā proficiency in the (18) elements D iii.212; Dhs 1333; -- ghara "house for a relic," a dagoba SnA 194. -- cetiya a shrine over a relic DhA iii.29; -- nānatta diversity of specific experience D iii.289; S ii.143; iv.113 sq., 284; -- vibhāga distribution of relics VvA 297; PvA 212.
Dhātuka (adj.) (only -- ˚) having the nature, by nature, affected with, -- like (cp. ˚dhamma B 2a); often simply= first part of cpd. (cp. E. friend -- like= friendly=friend) J i.438 (kiliṭṭha˚ miserable), ii.31 (sama˚), 63 (badhira˚ deaf), 102 (paṇḍuroga˚ having jaundice), 114 (dhuttika˚); iv.137 (vāmanaka˚ deformed), 391 (muddhā˚); v.197 (āvāṭa˚); DhA i.89 (anattamana˚).
Dhātura (adj. -- ˚) [=*dhātuya] in cha˚ consisting of six elements (purisa) M iii.239 (where āpodhātu omitted by mistake). See dhātu 2 c.
Dhāna (adj. -- n.) [Sk. dhāna, to dadhāti; cp. dhātu] (adj.) holding, containing ( -- ˚) M i.11 (ahi kaṇṭaka˚; cp. ādhāna & kaṇṭaka). -- (n.) nt. a receptacle Dh 58 (sankāra˚ dust -- heap=ṭhāna DhA i.445). f. dhānī a seat (= ṭhāna), in rāja˚ "the king's seat," a royal town. Often in comb with gāma & nigama (see gāma 3 a): Vin iii.89; J vi.397; Pv ii.1318.
Dhāniya (adj.) [Sk. dhānya, cp. dhañña2] wealthy, rich, abundant in ( -- ˚) J iii.367 (pahūtadhana˚; v. l. BB ˚dhāritaŋ); (nt.) riches, wealth J v.99, 100.
Dhāra (adj.) ( -- ˚) [Sk. dhāra to dhāreti; cp. dhara] bearing, holding, having D i.74 (udaka -- rahado sītavāri˚); M i.281 (ubhato˚) Sn 336 (ukkā˚); It 101 (antimadeha˚), 108 (ukkā˚). See also dhārin.
Dhāraka (adj. -- n.) 1. bearing, one who holds or possesses DhA iii.93 (sampattiŋ). -- 2. one who knows or remembers A ii.97 (˚jātika); iv.296 sq., 328 (id.).
Dhāraṇa (nt.) [cp. Sk. dhāraṇa, to dhāreti] 1. wearing, in mālā˚ (etc.) D i.5=A ii.210=Pug 58; KhA 37; cīvara˚ A ii.104=Pug 45. -- 2. maintaining, sustaining, keeping up Miln 320 (āyu˚ bhojana). -- 3. bearing in mind, remembrance Vin iv.305; M ii.175 (dhamma˚).
Dhāraṇaka [der. fr. dhāraṇa] 1. a debtor (see dhāreti 4) J ii.203; iv.45. -- 2. a mnemonician Miln 79.
Dhāraṇatā (f.) 1. wearing, being dressed with (=dhāraṇa 1) Miln 257. -- 2. mindfulness (=dhāraṇa 3) Nd2 628= Dhs 14.
Dhāraṇā (f.) [to dhāraṇa] 1. memory Miln 79. -- 2. the earth ("the upholder," cp. dharaṇī) J vi.180.
Dhārā1 (f.) [Sk. dhārā, from dhāvati 1] torrent, stream, flow, shower D i.74 (sammā˚ an even or seasonable shower; DA i.218=vuṭṭhi); ii.15 (udakassa, streams); J i.31; Ps i.125 (udaka˚); Pv ii.970 (sammā˚); VvA 4 (hingulika˚); PvA 139; DhA iv.15 (assu˚); Sdhp 595 (vassa˚).
Dhārā2 (f.) [Sk. dhārā, from dhāvati 2.] the edge of a weapon J i.455; vi.449; DhA 317; DA i.37. -- (adj.) ( -- ˚) having a (sharp) edge J i.414 (khura˚) Miln 105 (sukhuma˚); ekato˚ -- ubhato˚ single -- & double -- edged J i.73 (asi); iv.12 (sattha).
Dhārin (adj. -- ˚) [Sk. dhārin, see dhāreti & cp. ˚dhara, ˚dhāra] holding, wearing, keeping; often in phrase antimadeha˚ "wearing the last body" (of an Arahant) S i.14; Sn 471; It 32, 40. -- J i.47 (virūpa -- vesa˚); Dāvs v.15. -- f. ˚inī Pv i.108 (kāsikuttama˚).
Dhāretar [n. ag. to dhāreti 3] one who causes others to remember, an instructor, teacher (cp. dhāraṇaka) A iv.196 (sotā sāvetā uggahetā dh.).
Dhāreti [Caus. of dharati, q. v. for etym.] to hold, viz. 1. to carry, bear, wear, possess; to put on, to bring, give D i.166≈(chavadussāni etc.); Vin i.16= D i.110≈ (telapajjotaŋ); D ii.19 (chattaŋ to hold a sunshade over a person); PvA 47 (id.); dehaŋ dh. to "wear," i. e. to have a body It 50, 53 (antimaŋ d.); J iv.3 (padumaŋ); vi.136; Pv i.31 (vaṇṇaŋ dh.=vahasi PvA 14); tassa kahāpaṇaŋ daṇḍaŋ dh. "to inflict a fine of a k. on him" Miln 171. -- 2. to hold back, restrain Vin iv.261 (kathaŋ dhāretha how do you suppress or conceal pregnancy?); Dh 222 (kodhaŋ). -- 3. to bear in mind, know by heart, understand: dhammaŋ to know the Dhamma A iii.176; tipiṭakaŋ buddhavacanaŋ to know the 3 Piṭakas Miln 18. -- D ii.2; Pug 41 (suṇāti, bhaṇati, dh.=remember). Cp. upadhāreti. -- With double acc.: to receive as, to take=believe, to take for, consider as, call: upāsakaŋ maŋ dhāretu Bhagavā "call me your disciple" Vin i.16 & passim; atthajālan ti pi naŋ dhārehi (call it . . .) D i.46; yathā pañhaŋ Bhagavā vyākaroti tathā naŋ dhareyyāsi (believe it) D i.222; yathā no (atthaŋ) Gotamo vyākarissati tathā naŋ dhāressāma D i.236; evaŋ maŋ dhārehi adhimuttacittaŋ (consider as) Sn 1149 (=upalakkhehi Nd2 323). -- 4. to admit, allow, allow for, take up, support (a cause); to give, to owe D i.125 (may allow), 126; A ii.69 (na kassa kiñci dh. pays no tribute); Miln 47 (atthaŋ).
Dhāreyya (nt.) [orig. grd. of dhāreti] the ceremony of being carried away, i. e. the marriage ceremony, marriage (cp. dhareyya under dharati) Th 2, 472 (text has vāreyya, but ThA, 285 explains dhāreyya=vivāha).
Dhāva [Sk. dhāva] running, racing M i.446.
Dhāvati [Sk. dhāvati & dhāvate: 1. to flow, run etc.; cp. Gr. qe/w (both meanings); Ags. déaw=E. dew; Ohg. tou=Ger. tau; cp. also dhārā & dhunāti. -- 2. to clean (by running water) etc.=P. dhovati, q. v.] 1. to run, run away, run quickly Sn 939 (cp. Nd1 419); Dh 344; J i.308; vi.332; Nd1 405=Nd2 304iii.; Pv iv.161 =palāyati PvA 2841; DhA i.389 (opp. gacchati); PvA 4; Sdhp 378. -- 2. to clean etc.: see dhovati; cp. dhavala & dhārā2.
Dhāvana (nt.) [Sk. dhāvana] running, galloping J ii.431; Miln 351.
Dhāvin: see pa˚.
Dhi1 & Dhī (indecl.) [Sk. dhik] an excln of reproach & disgust: fie! shame! woe! (with acc. or gen.) S v.217 (read dhī taŋ for dhītaŋ); Dh 389 (dhī= garahāmi DhA iv.148); J i.507; DhA i.179 (haŋ dhī), 216 (v. l. BB but text has haŋdi). An inorganic r replaces the sandhi -- cons. in dhī -- r -- atthu jīvitaŋ Sn 440; cp. Th i.1150; dhi -- r -- atthu jātiyā J i.59.
Dhi2 (f.) [Sk. dhīḥ to didheti, cp. Av. dī to see, Goth. (filu -- ) deisei cunning. See also dhīra] wisdom, only in Com. expl. of paññā: "dhi vuccati paññā" (exegesis of dhīra) at Nd1 44=J ii.140=iii.38.
Dhikkita (adj.) [Sk. dhikkṛta, of dhi1+kata] reproached, reviled; used also medially: blaming, censuring, condemning J i.155 (=garahitā Com.); also in Com. expl. of dhīra (=dhikkita -- pāpa detesting evil) at Nd1 44=J ii.140=iii.38 (cp. dhi2).
Dhiti (f.) [Sk. dhṛti to dhṛ, see dharati] energy, courage, steadfastness, firm character, resolution. S i.122, 215 =Sn 188 (cp. SnA 237); J i.266, 280; iii.239; vi.373; Vbh 211; Dhs 13 (+thāma), 22, 289, 571; Miln 23, 329; Sdhp 574. Equivalent to "wisdom" (cp. juti & jutimant & Sk. dhīti) in expl. of dhīra as "dhitisampanna" Nd1 44≈(see dhi2); PvA 131.
Dhitimant (adj.) [Sk. dhṛtimant; cp. also dhīmant] coura- geous, firm, resolute A i.25; Sn 462, 542; Th i,6; J ii.140; vi.286 (wise, cp. dhiti).
Dhītar and Dhītā (f.) [Sk. dhītā, orig. pp. of dhayati to suck (cp. Lat. filia): see dhāta & dhātī, inflūenced in inflection by Sk. duhitṛ, although etymologically different] daughter Th 2, 336 (in faith); J i.152, 253; vi.366; Pv i.115; DhA iii.171, 176; PvA 16, 21, 61, 105. deva˚ a female deva (see deva) VvA 137 etc.; nattu˚ a granddaughter PvA 17; mātula˚ a niece PvA 55; rāja˚ a princess J i.207; PvA 74. In compn dhītu.
-- kkama one who is desirous of a daughter J vi.307 (=dhītu atthāya vicarati Com.; v. l. dhītu -- kāma); -- dhītā granddaughter PvA 16.
Dhītalikā (f.) [Dimin. of dhītā; cp. dhītikā & pottha- likā] a doll Vin iii.36, 126 (dāru˚); DhsA 321; PvA 16.
Dhītikā (f.) [cp. dhītalikā] a doll Th 2, 374 (=dhītalikā ThA 252).
Dhīna see adhīna.
Dhīyati [Sk. dhīyate, Pass. to dahati1] to be contained ThA 13 (so read for dhiyati); PvA 71.
Dhīra (adj.) [combining in meaning 1. Sk. dhīra "firm" fr. dhārayati (see dharati & dhiti); 2. Vedic. dhīra "wise" fr. dīdheti (see dhi2). The fluctuation of connotation is also scen in the expls of Coms which always give the foll. three conventional etymologies, viz. dhikkitapāpa, dhiti -- sampanna, dhiyā (=paññāya) samannāgata Nd144≈(see dhi2)] constant, firm, self -- relying, of character; wise, possessing the knowledge of the Dhamma, often=paṇḍita & Ep. of an Arahant D ii.128; S i.24 (lokapariyāyaŋ aññāya nibbutā dh.), 122, 221; Sn 45, 235 (nibbanti dhīrā), 913 (vippamutto diṭṭhigatehi dh.), 1052; It 68 (˚upasevanā, opp. bāla), 122 (dh. sabbaganthapamocano); Dh 23, 28, 177 (opp. bāla); Th 1, 4; 2, 7 (dhammā=tejussadehi ariyamaggadhammehi ThA 13); J iii.396; v.116; Pv ii.16; ii.945; Nd1 44, 55, 482; Nd2 324 (=jutimant); Miln 342; KhA 194, 224, 230; DhA iii.189 (=paṇḍita).
Dhuta (& Dhūta) [cp. Sk. dhuta & dhūta, pp. of dhunāti] 1. shaken, moved Dāvs v.49 (vāta˚). -- 2. lit. "shaken off," but always expld in the commentaries as "one who shakes off" either cvil dispositions (kilese), or obstacles to spiritual progress (vāra, nīvaraṇa). The word is rare. In one constantly repeated passage (Vin i.45=305=ii.2=iii.21=iv.213) it is an adj. opposed to kosajja lazy, remiss; and means either scrupulous or punctilious. At D i.5 it is used of a pain. At Sn 385 we are told of a dhutadhamma, meaning a scrupulous way of life, first for a bhikkhu, then for a layman. This poem omits all higher doctrine and confines itself to scrupulousness as regards minor, elementary matters. Cp. Vism 61 for a defn of dhuta.
-- anga a set of practices leading to the state of or appropriate to a dhuta, that is to a scrupulous person First occurs in a title suffixed to a passage in the Parivāra deprecating such practices. The passage occurs twice (Vin v.131, 193), but the title, probably later than the text, is added only to the 2nd of the two. The passage gives a list of 13 such practices, each of them an ascetic practice not enjoined in the Vinaya. The 13 are also discussed at Vism 59 sq. The Milinda devotes a whole book (chap. vi.) to the glorification of these 13 dhutangas, but there is no evidence that they were ever widely adopted. Some are deprecated at M i.282, & examples of one or other of them are given at Vin iii.15; Bu i.59; J iii.342; iv.8; Miln 133, 348, 351; Vism 59 (˚kathā), 65 (˚cora), 72 (id.), 80 (defn); SnA 494; DhA i.68; ii.32 (dhūtanga); iv.30. Nd1 188 says that 8 of them are desirable. -- dhara mindful of punctiliousness Miln 342 (āraññaka dh. jhāyin). -- vata the vow to perform the dhutangas DhA vi.165. -- vāda one who inculcates punctiliousness S ii.156; A i.23; Miln 380; Vism 80; ThA 69; DhA ii.30. -- vādin= ˚vāda J i.130.
Dhutatta (nt.) [Sk. *dhūtatvaŋ] the state of being punc- tilious Vin i.305 (of going naked).
Dhutta [Sk. dhūrta, from dhūrvati & dhvarati to injure, deceive, cp. Lat. fraus; Idg. *dhreu, an enlarged form of which is *dreugh in Sk. druhyati, drugdha=Ohg. triogan, troum etc.: see duhana] of abandoned life, wild, fast, cunning, crafty, fraudulent; wicked, bad. (m.) a rogue, cheat, evil -- minded person, scoundrel, rascal. There are three sorts of a wild life, viz. akkha˚ in gambling, itthi˚ with women, surā˚ in drink (Sn 106; J iv.255). -- Vin ii.277 (robber, highwayman); A iii.38 (a˚); iv.288 (itthi˚); J i.49 (surā˚), 290, 291; ii.416; iii.287; iv.223, 494 (surā˚); ThA 250 (itthi˚), 260 (˚purisa), 266 (˚kilesa); PvA 3, 5 (itthi˚, surā˚), 151. <-> f. dhutti (dhuttī) J ii.114 (˚brāhmaṇī).
Dhuttaka=dhutta S i.131; Th 2, 366 (=itthi -- dhutta ThA 250); DhA iii.207; Dpvs ix.19. -- f. dhuttikā always in combn w. chinnikā (meretrix, q. v.) Vin iii.128; J ii.114; Miln 122.
Dhunana (nt.) [Sk. dhūnana] shaking, in ˚ka (adj.) con- sisting in shaking off, doing away with, giving up (kilesa˚) SnA 373.
Dhunāti [Sk. dhunoti (dhūnoti), dhunāti & dhuvati, Caus. dhūnayati. Idg. *dhū to be in turbulent motion; cp. Gr. qu/w, qu/nw (to be impetuous), qu/ella (storm), qu/mos "thyme"; Lat. fūmus (smoke=fume), suffio; Lith. duja (dust); Goth. dauns (smoke & smell); Ohg. toum. Connected also w. dhāvate; see further dhūpa, dhūma, dhūsara, dhona & a secondary root Idg. *dheṷes in dhaŋsati] to shake, toss; to shake off, remove, destroy S i.156 (maccuno senaŋ); Th 1, 256= Miln 245; dhunāti pāpake dhamme dumapattaŋ va māluto Th i.2; J i.11 (v. 48); iii.44 (hatthe dhuniŋsu, wrung their hands); Vv 649 (=VvA 278 misprint dhumanti); aor. adhosi [=Sk. adhauṣīt] Sn 787 (micchādiṭṭhiŋ= pajahi SnA 523). pp. dhuta & dhūta (q. v.). Cp. nis˚, o˚.
Dhuma in ˚kaṭacchuka=druma˚ having a wooden spoon (see duma), cp. Mar. dhumārā? (Ed. in note) DhA ii.59. [Doubtful reading.]
Dhura (m. & nt.) [Sk. dhur f. & dhura m.] 1. a yoke, a pole, the shaft of a carriage J i.192 (purima -- sakaṭa˚), 196; Cp. ii.8, 4. -- 2. (fig.) a burden, load, charge, office, responsibility Sn 256 (vahanto porisaŋ dh ˚ŋ "carrying a human yoke"=purisânucchavikā bhārā SnA 299), 694 (asama˚ one who has to bear a heavy burden=asamaviriya SnA 489); DhA ii.97 (sama˚); dve dhurāni two burdens (viz. gantha˚ & vipassanā, study & contemplation) DhA i.7; iv.37; asamadhura J i.193; vi.330. Three dhurā are enumd at J iv.242 as saddhā˚, sīla˚, and paññā˚. -- Sdhp 355 (saddhā˚), 392 (+viriya), 413 (paññā˚) dh ˚ŋ nikkhipati to take off the yoke, to put down a burden, to give up a charge or renounce a responsibility (see ˚nikkhepa): nikkhittadhura A i.71; ii.148; iii.65, 108, 179 sq.; a˚ S v.197, 225; Nd2 131; SnA 236 (=dhuravant). -- 3. the forepart of anything, head, top, front; fig. chief, leader, leading part. nāvāya dh. the forecastle of a ship J iii.127=iv.142; dh -- vāta head wind J i.100; ekaŋ dh ˚ŋ nīharati to set aside a foremost part DA i.135. <-> 4. the far end, either as top or beginning J iii.216 (yāva dh -- sopānā); iv.265 (dh -- sopānaŋ katvā making the staircase end); v.458 (magga -- dhure ṭhatvā standing on the far end or other side of the road, i. e. opposite; gloss BB maggantare); VvA 44 (dh -- gehassa dvāre at the door of the top house of the village, i. e. the first or last house).
-- gāma a neighbouring village (lit. the first v. that one meets) J i.8, 237; iv.243; DhA iii.414; -- dhorayha a yoked ox S i.173=Sn 79 (viriyam me dh -- dh ˚ŋ); SnA 150. -- nikkhepa the putting down of the yoke, the giving up of one's office J iii.243; Vism 413. -- bhatta a meal where a monk is invited as leader of other monks who likewise take part in it J i.449. v. l. (for dhuva˚); iii.97 (v. l. dhuva˚); Vism 66. -- yotta yoke -- tie, i. e. the tie fastening the yoke to the neck of the ox J i.192; vi.253; -- vahana bearing a burden (cp. dhorayha) DhA iii.472; -- vihāra a neighbouring monastery (cp. ˚gāma) J i.23; iv.243; DhA i.126 (Np.); iii.224 (id.); -- sampaggāha "a solid grip of the burden" (Mrs. Rh.D.) Dhs 13, 22 etc. (opp. nikkhepa); -- ssaha enduring one's yoke Th 1, 659. Cp. dhuratā.
Dhuratā (f.) [abstr. fr. dhura] in cpd. anikkhitta -- dh. "a state of unflinching endurance" Nd2 394, 405=Dhs 13 etc.=Vbh 350, 370 (+dhura -- sampaggāha); opp. nikkhitta -- dh. weakness of character, lack of endurance (= pamāda) ibid.
Dhuravant (adj.) [cp. Sk. dhuradhara] one who has or bears his yoke, patient, enduring S i.214=Sn 187 (: cetasikaviriya -- vasena anikkhittadhura SnA 236).
Dhuva (adj.) [Sk. dhruva, cp. Lith. drúta firm; Goth. triggws=Ohg. triuwi (Ger. treue, trost); Ags. tréowe= E. true, of Idg. *dheru, enlarged form of *dher, see dharati] stable, constant, permanent; fixed, regular, certain, sure D i.18; S i.142; iv.370; A ii.33; J i.19; v.121 (˚sassataŋ maraṇaŋ); iii.325; Bu ii.82; Miln 114 (na tā nadiyo dh -- salilā). 334 (˚phala); Vism 77; DA i.112 (maraṇaŋ apassanto dh.), 150 (=thāvara); DhA iii.170 (adhuvaŋ jīvitaŋ dhuvaŋ maraṇaŋ); ThA 241; Sdhp 331. -- nt. permanence, stability M i.326; Dh 147. Also Ep. of Nibbāna (see ˚gāmin). -- nt. as adv. dhuvaŋ continuously, constantly, always J ii.24=Miln 172; PvA 207; certainly J i.18, v.103. -- adhuva (addhuva) changing, unstable, impermanent D i.19 (anicca a. appāyuka); M i.326; S iv.302; J i.393; iii.19 (addhuva -- sīla); VvA 77.
-- gāmin leading to permanence, i. e. Nibbāna S iv.370 (magga); -- colā (f.) constantly dressed, of a woman Vin iii.129; -- ṭṭhāniya lasting (of shoes) Vin i.190; -- dhamma one who has reached a stable condition DhA iii.289; -- paññatta (a) permanently appointed (seat) Vin iv.274; -- bhatta a constant supply of food Vin i.25, 243; ii.15 (˚ika); J i.449 (where the v. l. dhura˚ seems to be preferable instead of dhuva˚, see dhurabhatta); cp. niccabhatta; -- yāgu constant (distribution of) rice-gruel Vin i.292 sq.; -- lohitā (f.) a woman whose blood is stagnant Vin iii.129; -- ssava always discharging, constantly flowing J i.6, v.35.
Dhūta & Dhūtanga see dhuta.
Dhūpa [Sk. dhūpa of Idg. *dhūp, enlarged fr. *dhū in dhunāti (q. v.)] incense J i.51, 64, 290 (gandha˚, dvandva, cpd.); iii.144; vi.42; PvA 141 (gandhap̄uppha˚). dh˚ŋ dadāti to incense (a room) J i.399. Sometimes misspelt dhūma, e. g. VvA 173 (gandhapuppha˚).
Dhūpana (nt.) [Sk. dhūpana] incensing, fumigation; perfume, incense, spice J iii.144; iv.236; Pv iii.53 (sāsapa˚).
Dhūpāyati & Dhūpayati [Sk. dhūpayati; caus. fr. dhūpa] to fumigate, make fragrant, perfume Vin i.180; S i.40 (dhūpāyita)=Th 1, 448; A ii.214 sq.; J i.73; Miln 333 (sīlagandhena lokaŋ dh.); DhA i.370 (aor. dhūpāyi); iii.38 (ppr. dhūpayamāna). -- pp. dhūpita.
Dhūpita [pp. of dhūpāyati] fumigated, flavoured Vv 435 (tela˚ flavoured with oil). Cp. pa˚.
Dhūma [Vedic dhūma=Lat. fumus; Gr. qumo/s (mood, mind), qumia/w (fumigate); Ohg. toum etc. Idg. *dhu, cp. Gr. qu/w (burn incense), qu/os (incense). See also dhunāti] smoke, fumes Vin i.204 (aroma of drugs); M i.220 (dh ˚ŋ kattā); A v.352 (id.); A ii.53; iv.72 sq.; v.347 sq.; J iii.401, 422 (tumhākaŋ dh -- kāle at the time when you will end in smoke, i. e. at your cremation); DhA i.370 (eka˚ one mass of smoke); VvA 173 (for dhūpa, in gandhapuppha˚); PvA 230 (micchā -- vitakka˚ in expl. of vidhūma).
-- andha blind with smoke J i.216; -- kālika (cp. above dh. -- kāle) lasting till a person's cremation Vin ii.172, 288; -- ketu fire (lit. whose sign is smoke) J iv.26; v.63; -- jāla a mass of smoke J v.497; -- netta a smoke -- tube, i. e. a surgical instrument for sniffing up the smoke of medical drugs Vin i.204; ii.120; J iv.363; ThA 14; -- sikhā fire (Ep. of Agni; lit. smoke -- crested) Vv 352 (sikha)=VvA 161; Vism 416; also as sikhin J vi.206.
Dhūmāyati & Dhūmayati [Sk. dhūmayati, Denom. fr. dhūma] to smoke, to smoulder, choke; to be obscured, to cloud over M i.142 (v. l. dhūpāyati); Pv i.64 (pariḍayhati+dh. hadayaŋ); DhA i.425 (akkhīni me dh.= I see almost nothing). pp. dhūmāyita.
Dhūmāyanā (f.) smoking, smouldering M i.143; Nett 24 (as v. l. to dhūpāyanā).
Dhūmāyitatta (nt.) [abstr. to dhūmāyati] becoming like smoke, clouding over, obscuration S iii.124 (+timirāyitattaŋ).
Dhūsara (adj.) [Sk. dhūsara, Ags. dust=E. dust & dusk, Ger. dust; see dhvaŋsati & dhunoti & cp. Walde, Lat. Wtb. under furo] dust -- coloured VvA 335.
Dhenu (f.) [Sk. dhenu, to dhayati to give suck, see dhātī & dhītar] a milch cow, a female animal in general J i.152 (miga˚ hind); Vv 806; DhA i.170; 396; PvA 112. In simile at Vism 313.
Dhenupa [dhenu+pa from pibati] a suckling calf M i.79; Sn 26.
Dheyya ( -- ˚) [Sk. dheya, orig. grd. of dhā, see dahati1] 1. in the realm of, under the sway or power of: anañña˚ J iv.110; kamma˚ A iv.285; maccu˚ (q. v.) S i.22; Sn 358, 1104; Th 2, 10 (=maccu ettha dhīyati ThA 13); māra˚ A iv.228. -- 2. putting on, assigning, in nāma˚ Dhs 1307.
Dhota [Sk. dhāuta, pp. of dhavati2, see dhovati] washed, bleached, clean J i.62 (˚sankha a bleached shell); ii.275; PvA 73 (˚vattha), 116 (˚hattha with clean hands), 274 (id.); Vism 224 (id.).
Dhona (adj. -- n.) [either=dhota, Sk. dhauta, see dhovati or=dhuta, see dhuta & dhunana. Quite a diff. suggestion as regards etym. is given by Kern, Toev. 117, who considers it as a possible dern fr. (a)dho, after analogy of poṇa. Very doubtful] 1. purified M i.386; Sn 351, 786, 813, 834 (=dhutakilesa SnA 542); J iii.160 (˚sākha=patthaṭasākha Com.; v. l. BB vena˚); Nd1 77=176 (: dhonā vuccati paññā etc., dhuta & dhota used indiscriminately in exegesis following). -- 2. (pl.) the four requisites of a bhikkhu DhA iii.344 (: dhonā vuccati cattāro paccayā, in Com. on atidhonacārin Dh 240; gloss K. dhovanā, cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 100).
Dhopati [a variant of dhovati, taken as Caus. formation] to wash, cleanse D i.93 (dhopetha, imper.; v. l. B. dhovatḥa), 124 (dhopeyya; v. l. B. dhoveyya).
Dhopana (nt.) [a variant of dhovana, q. v.] 1. ceremonial washing of the bones of the dead D i. 6; aṭṭhi -- dhovana Bdhgh at DA i.84; A v.216 (see Commentary at 364). <-> 2. Surgical washing of a wound J ii.117. -- 3. In vaŋsadhopana, apparently a feat by acrobats J iv.390. It is possible that the passage at D i. 6 really belongs here. See the note at Dial. i.9.
Dhorayha [for *dhor -- vayha=Sk. *dhaurvahya, abstr. fr. dhurvaha; may also directly correspond to the latter] "carrying a yoke," a beast of burden S i.28; D iii.113 (purisa˚); A i.162.
-- vata (nt.) the practice of carrying a burden, the state of a beast of burden, drudgery S i.28; -- sīla accustomed to the yoke, enduring; patient Dh 208 (=dhuravahana -- sīlatāya dh. DhA iii.272); -- sīlin= ˚sīla J ii.97 (=dhura -- vahanaka -- ācārena sampanna Com.).
Dhoreyya ( -- ˚) [Sk. dhaureya, der. fr. dhura] "to be yoked," accustomed to the yoke, carrying a burden, in kamma˚ Miln 288.
Dhova (adj. -- n.) [Sk. dhāva, see dhovati] washing, cleansing Bu ii.15.
Dhovati [Sk. dhāvati, see dhāvati] to rinse, wash, cleanse, purify Vin ii.208, 210, 214; Sn p. 104 (bhājanāni); J i.8; v.297. -- dhovi J vi.366; DhA iii.207. ger. dhovitvā J i.266; iv.2; VvA 33 (pattaŋ), 77 (id.); PvA 75, 144. inf. dhovituŋ Vin ii.120; iv.261 pp. dhota (q. v.) & dhovita J i.266. -- See also dhopati (*dhopeti).
Dhovana (nt.) [Sk. dhāvana; see also dhopana] washing Vin iv.262; S iv.316 (bhaṇḍa˚); A i.132, 161, 277; It 111 (pādānaŋ); J ii.129; vi.365 (hattha˚); Miln 11; Vism 343; PvA 241 (hattha -- pāda˚); DhA ii.19 (pāda˚); fig. (ariyaŋ) A v.216.
Na1 [Sk. na (in cana) & nā (in nānā, vi -- nā) Idg. pron. base *no, cp. Gr. nh /, nai/; Lat. nē, nae surely, also encl. in ego -- ne & in question utruṁne, nam; fuller form *eno, as in Sk. anā (adv.) anena, anayā (instr. pron. 3rd); Gr. e)/nh "that day"; Lat. enim] expletive -- emphatic particle, often used in comparative -- indefinite sense: just so, like this, as if, as (see cana & canaŋ) J v.339 (Com. cttha na -- kāro upamāne). Also as naŋ (cp. cana> canaŋ) Vin ii.81, 186 (kathaŋ naŋ=kathaŋ nu); J ii.416; v.302; vi.213 (Com. p. 216: ettha eko na -- karo pucchanattho hoti); Th 1, 1204; Miln 177. Perhaps at Sn 148 (kattha -- ci naŋ, v. l. BB na; but Com. KhA 247= etaŋ). To this na belongs na3; see also nu & nanu.
Na2 [Ved. na=Idg. *ně; Lat. ne in n' unquam etc., Goth. ni; Sk. na ca=Lat. neque=Goth. nih. Also Sk. nā= Idg. *nē, cp. Lat. Goth. nē] negātive & adversative particle "not" (Nd2 326: paṭikkhepa; KhA 170: paṭisedhe) 1. often apostr. n': n' atthi, n' etaŋ etc.; or contracted: nāhaŋ, nāpi etc., or with cuphonic consonant y: nayidaŋ (It 29, J iv.3), nayidha (It 36, 37), nayimaŋ (It 15) etc. As double negation implying emphatic affirmation: na kiñci na all, everything J i.295. -- 2. In disjunctive clauses: na . . . na neither -- nor, so -- or not so. In question: karoti na karoti ("or not") J ii.133. Cp. mā in same use. <-> Often with added pi (api) in second part: na -- nāpi neither -- nor ("not -- but also not") S ii.65; M i.246; Pv i.119. -- 3. In syntactic context mostly emphasized by var. negative & adversative particles, viz. nāpi (see under 2); n' eva indeed not, not for all that J iii.55; or not KhA 219; n' eva -- na neither -- nor D i.33, 35; M i.486; A v.193; J i.207, 279; Vin ii.185; DhA i.328; ii.65; DA i.186, 188; n' eva -- na pana id. D i.24; na kho not indeed J ii.134; na ca but not (=this rather than that) J i.153; na tāva=na kho Vv 3713; na nu (in quest.= noune) is it not? PvA 74, 136; na no surely not Sn 224; na hi [cp. Gr. ou/xi/ not at all; nai/xi certainly] certainly not Dh 5, 184; Sn 666; Kh vii.6; na hi jātu id. Sn 152. -- See also nu, nū, no. -- 4, na is also used in the function of the negative prefix a -- (an -- ) in cases where the word -- negation was isolated out of a sentence negation or where a negated verb was substantified, e. g. (a) nacira (=acira) short, napparūpa abundant, napuŋsaka neuter, neka (=aneka) several; (b) natthi, natthika etc. (q. v.).
Na3 [identical with na1] base of demonstr. pron. 3rd pers. (=ta˚), only in foll. cases: acc. sg. naŋ (mostly enclitic), fuller form enaŋ him, her, that one etc. Sn 139, 201, 385, 418, 980, 1076; It 32; Dh 42, 230; J i.152, 172, 222; iii.281; KhA 220; DhA i.181; iii.173; PvA 3, 68, 73.
-- acc. pl. ne them It 110 (v. l. te); Sn 223 (=te manusse KhA 169); J ii.417; iii.204; v.458; DhA i.8, 13, 61, 101, 390; VvA 299. -- gen. dat. pl. nesaŋ D i.175, 191; It 63; J i.153; DhA iv.41; VvA 37, 136.; PvA 54, 201, 207. See also cna; cp. nava2.
Nakula [Ved. nakula, cp. nakra crocodile] a mungoose, Viverra Ichneumon A v.289 sq.; J ii.53; vi.538; Miln 118, 394.
Nakkhatta (nt.) [Ved. nakṣatra collect. formation from naktiḥ & naktā=Gr. nu/c, Lat. nox, Goth. nahts, E. night=the nightly sky, the heavenly bodies of the night, as opposed to the Sun: ādicco tapataŋ mukhaŋ Vin i.246] the stars or constellations, a conjunction of the moon with diff. constellations, a lunar mansion or the constellations of the lunar zodiac, figuring also as Names of months & determinant factors of horoscopic and other astrological observation; further a celebration of the beginning of a new month, hence any kind of festival or festivity. -- The recognised number of such lunar mansions is 27, the names of which as given in Sk. sources are the same in Pāli, with the exception of 2 variations (Assayuja for Aśvinī, Satabhisaja for Śatatāraka). Enumd at Abhp. 58 -- 60 as follows: Assayuja [Sk. Aśvinī] Bharaṇī, Kattikā, Rohiṇī, Magasiraŋ [Sk. Mṛgaśīrṣa] Addā [Sk. Ārdrā], Punabbasu, Phussa [Sk. Puṣya], Asilesā, Maghā, Pubba -- phaggunī [Sk. Pūrva -- phalgunī). Uttara˚, Hattha, Cittā [Sk. Chaitra], Sāti [Svātī], Visākhā, Anurādhā, Jeṭṭhā, Mūlaŋ, Pubb -- āsāḷha [˚āṣāḍha], Uttar˚, Savaṇa, Dhaniṭṭhā, Satabhisaja [Śatatāraka], Pubba -- bhaddapadā, Uttara˚, Revatī. -- It is to be pointed out that the Niddesa speaks of 28 N. instead of 27 (Nd1 382: aṭṭhavīsati nakkhattāni), a discrepancy which may be accounted by the fact that one N. (the Orion) bore 2 names, viz. Mṛgaśīrṣa & Agrahayanī (see Plunkett, Ancient Calendars etc. p. 227 sq.). -- Some of these Ns. are more familiar & important than others, & are mentioned more frequently, e. g. Āsāḷha (Āsālhi˚) J i.50 & Uttarāsāḷha J i.63, 82; Kattikā & Rohiṇī SnA 456. -- nakkhattaŋ ādisati to augur from the stars, to set the horoscope Nd1 382; oloketi to read the stars, to scan the constellations J i.108, 253; ghoseti to proclaim (shout out) the new month (cp. Lat. calandae fr. cālāre to call out, scil. mensem), and thereby announce the festivity to be celebrated J i.250; n. ghuṭṭhaŋ J i.50, 433; sanghuṭṭhaŋ PvA 73; ghositaŋ VvA 31; kīḷati to celebrate a (nakkhatta -- ) festival J i.50, 250; VvA 63; DhA i.393 (cp. ˚kīḷā below). n. ositaŋ the festival at an end J i.433. -- nakkhatta (sg.) a constellation Sn 927; collect. the stars Vv 811 (cando nparivārito). nakkhattāni (pl.) the stars: nakkhattānaŋ mukhaŋ chando (the moon is the most prominent of the lights of night) Th 2.143; Vin i.246=Sn 569 (but cp. expl. at SnA 456: candayogavasena "ajja kattikā, ajja Rohiṇī" ti paññāṇato ālokakāraṇato sommabhāvato ca nakkhattānaŋ mukhaŋ cando ti vutto); D i.10 (nakkhattānaŋ pathagamanaŋ & uppatha -- gamanaŋ a right or wrong course, i. e. a straight ascension or deviation of the stars or planets); ii.259; iii.85, 90; A iv.86; Th 2, 143 (nakkhattāni namassantā bālā).
-- kīḷana=kīḷā DhA iii.461; -- kīḷā the celebration of a festival, making merry, taking a holiday J i.50; ThA 137; VvA 109; -- ggāha the seizure of a star (by a demon: see gāha), the disappearance of a planet (transit?) D i.10 (expl. at DA i.95 as nakkhattasa angārakādi -- gahasamāyoga); -- patha "the course of the stars," i. e. the nocturnal sky Dh 208; -- pada a constellation Vin ii.217; -- pāṭhaka an astrologer, soothsayer, augur Nd1 382; -- pīḷana the failing or obscuration of a star (as a sign of death in horoscopy) DhA i.166; -- mālā a garland of stars VvA 167; -- yoga a conjunction of the planets, a constellation in its meaning for the horoscope J i.82 253; DhA i.174 (+tithi -- karaṇa); ˚ŋ oloketi to set the horoscope DhA i.166, ˚ŋ uggaṇhāti id. Pv iii.54. -- rājā the king of the nakkhattas (i. e. the moon) J iii.348.
Nakha [Ved. nakha, cp. Sk. anghri foot; Gr. o)/nuc (claw, nail), Lat. unguis= Oir. inga; Ohg. nagal=E. nail] a nail of finger or toe, a claw Vin ii.133; Sn 610 (na angulīhi nakhehi vā); J v.489 (pañcanakhā sattā five -- nailed or -- toed beings); Kh ii.=Miln 26, cp. taca (pañcatacakaŋ); KhA 43; VvA 7 (dasa -- nakhasamodhāna putting the 10 fingers together); PvA 152, 192; Sdhp 104.
Nakhaka (adj.) belonging to, consisting of or resembling a claw, in hatthi˚ like elephants' claws, Ep. of a castle (pāsāda) Vin ii.169 (Bdhgh on p. 323: hatthikumbhe patiṭṭhitaŋ, evaŋ evaŋkatassa kir' etaŋ nāmaŋ) (?).
Nakhin (adj.) having nails J vi.290 (tamba˚ with copper- coloured nails).
Naga [Sk. naga tree & mountain, referred by Fausböll & Uhlenbeck to na+gacchati, i. e. immovable (=sthāvara), more probably however with Lidén (see Walde under nāvis) to Ohg. nahho, Ags. naca "boat=tree"; semantically mountain= trees, i. e. forest] mountain S i.195= Nd2 136a (nagassa passe āsīna, of the Buddha); Sn 180 (=devapabbata royal mountain SnA 216; or should it mean "forest"?); Th 1, 41 (˚vivara), 525; Pv ii.961 (˚muddhani on top of the Mount, i. e. Mt. Sineru PvA 138; the Buddha was thought to reside there); Miln 327 (id.); Vv 166 (˚antare in between the (5) mountains, see VvA 82).
Nagara (nt.) [Ved. nagara, Non -- aryan? Connection with agāra is very problematic] a stronghold, citadel, fortress; a (fortified) town, city. As seat of the government & as important centre of trade contrasted with gāma & nigama (village & market -- place or township) Vin iii.47 (˚bandhana), 184; cp. gāma 3 b. deva˚ deva -- city Ji. 3, 168, 202; DhA i.280 etc.; cp. yakkha˚ J ii.127. -- Vin i.277, 342, 344; ii.155, 184; D ii.7; S ii.105 sq.; iv.194 (kāyassa adhivacanaŋ); v.160; A i.168, 178; iv.106 sq. (paccantima); v.194 (id.) Dh 150 (aṭṭhīnaŋ); Sn 414, 1013 (Bhoga˚); J i.3, 50 (Kapilavatthu˚); ii.5; iii.188; vi.368 etc.; Pug 56; DhA iv.2; PvA 3, 39, 73; Dpvs xiv.51 (+pura). Cp. nāgara.
-- ûpakārikā a town fortified with a wall covered with cement at its base D i.105, cp. DA i.274; -- ûpama like a citadel (of citta) Dh 40, cp. DhA i.317 & Nagaropama sūtra Divy 340; -- kathā town -- gossip D i.7; -- guttika superintendent of the city police J iii.30, 436; iv.279; Miln 345 (dhammanagare n -- g.), DhA iv.55. Cp. Kern, Toev. p. 167; -- vara the noble town (of Rājagaha) Vv 166, cp. VvA 82; -- vīthi a city street J ii.416; -- sobhinī the city belle, a town courtesan J ii.367 (˚anā); iii.435 (Sulasā), 475 (˚anī); DhA i.174; ii.201; PvA 4 (Sulasā); Miln 350.
Nagaraka (nt.) a small city D i.146=169, quoted J i.391.
Nagga (adj.) [Ved. nagna=Lat. nudus (fr. *nogṷedhos) Goth. naqaps=Ohg. naccot, Ags. nacod=naked; Oir. nocht; perhaps Gr. gumno/s] naked, nude Vin ii.121; J i.307; Pv i.61 (=niccola PvA 32); ii.15; 81; PvA 68, 106.
-- cariyā going naked Dh 141; DhA iii.78; cp. Sk nagnacaryā Divy 339; -- bhogga one whose goods are nakedness, an ascetic J iv.160; v.75; vi.225.
Naggatta (nt.) [Sk. nagnatva]=naggiya nakedness PvA 106.
Naggiya (nt.) [Sk. *nagnyaŋ] naked state, nudity Vin i.292, 305; S iv.300; Sn 249.
Naggiyā (adj. f.) [Sk. nagnikā]=naggā, naked Pv ii.312.
Nangala (nt.) [Ved. lāngala; nangala by dissimilation through subsequent nasal, cp. Milinda>Menandros. Etym. unknown, prob. dialectical (already in RV iv. 574), because unconnected with other Aryan words for plough. Cp. Balūčī nangār] a plough S i.115; iii.155; A iii.64; Sn 77 (yuga˚ yoke & plough); Sn p. 13; J i.57; Th 2, 441 (=sīra ThA 270); SnA 146; VvA 63, 65; PvA 133 (dun˚ hard to plough); DhA i.223 (aya˚); iii.67 (id.).
-- īsā the beam of a plough S i.104 (of an elephant's trunk); -- kaṭṭhakaraṇa ploughing S v.146=J ii.59; -- phāla [mod. Ind. phār] ploughshare (to be understood as Dvandva) DhA i.395.
Nangalin (adj. -- n.) having or using a plough, ploughman, in mukha˚ "using the mouth as plough" Th 1, 101 (maulvergnügt, Neumann) (Mrs. Rh. D. harsh of speech).
Nanguṭṭha (nt.) [dial. for *nangūlya>*nanguḷhya?]= nangula A ii.245; J i.194 (of a bull); ii.19 (of an elephant); iii.16 (sūci˚), 480 (panther); iv.256 (of a deer); DhA i.275 (of a fish); ii.64.
Nangula (nt.) [Sk. lāng&uhacekmacr;la to langa & lagati (q. v.). cp. Gr. lagga/ zw, Lat. langueo] a tail Th 1, 113=601 (go˚).
Nacira (adj.) [Sk. nacira=na+cira] not of long duration, short Sn 694; gen nacirass' eva after a short time, shortly Sn p. 16; J iv.2, 392; Miln 250.
Nacca (nt.) [Ved. nṛtya=Anglo -- Ind. nautch, etym. un- certain, cp. naccati & naṭati] (pantomimic) dancing; usually combd with singing (gīta, q. v.) & instrumental music (vādita). -- nacca: A i.261; D iii.183; J i.61, 207; DA i.77; PvA 231. -- nacca -- gīta: J i.61; Pv iv.72; DhA iii.129; VvA 131, 135. -- nacca -- gīta -- vādita (+visūkadassana): Vin i.83; D i.5, 6; KhA 36; cp. Vv 8110 (naccagīte suvādite).
Naccaka [Sk. *nṛtyaka, distinguished from but ultimately identical with naṭaka, q. v.] a dancer, (pantomimic) actor Miln 191, 331, 359 (naṭa˚). -- f. naccakī Vin ii.12.
Naccati [Ved. nṛtyati nṛt, cp. nacca & naṭati] to dance, play Vin ii.10; J i.292; Vv 501 (=naṭati VvA 210); 6421. <-> pp. naccento D i.135; fut. naccissati Vin ii.12; aor. nacci J iii.127; inf. naccituŋ J i.207. -- Caus. naccāpeti to make play Vism 305 (so read for nacch˚).
Naccana (nt.) [Ved. *nṛtyana, cp. naṭana] dance, dancing VvA 282, 315.
Najjuha [Sk. dātyūha] a kind of cock or hen J vi.528, 538.
Naṭa [Sk. naṭa dial. ṭ, cp. Prk. naḍa, of nṛt, see naccati] a dancer, player, mimic, actor Vin iv.285; S iv.306 sq.; DhA iv.60 (˚dhītā), 65 (˚karaka), 224 (˚kīḷā); Miln 359 (˚naccaka); Sdhp 380. -- Cp. naṭaka & nāṭaka.
Naṭaka [Sk. naṭaka]=naṭa Vin iv.285; Miln 331; PvA 3. -- f. naṭikā DA i.239.
Naṭati [Sk. naṭati, of nṛt, with dial. ṭ, cp. naccati] to dance, play VvA 210 (=naccati).
Naṭṭha [Sk. naṣṭha, pp. of nassati (naśyati), q. v.] perished, destroyed; lost A ii.249; J i.74; 267.
Naṭṭhana (nt.) [Der. fr. naṭṭha] destruction Miln 180, 237.
Naṭṭhāyika [cp. Sk. naṣṭhārtha, i. e. naṣṭha+artha] bank- rupt Miln 131, 201.
Nata [Sk. nata, pp. of namati, q. v.] bent (on) S i.186 (a˚); Sn 1143; Nd2 327.
Nati (f.) [Sk. nati of nam] bending, bent, inclination S ii.67; iv.59; M i.115.
Natta (nt.) [Sk. nakta, see nakkhatta] night, acc. nattaŋ by night, in nattam -- ahaŋ by day & by night Sn 1070 (v. l. BB and Nd2 rattamahaŋ).
Nattar [Sk. naptṛ, analogy -- formation after mātṛ etc. from Ved. napāt; cp. Lat. nepos; Ags. nefa=E. nephew; Ohg. nevo] grandson J i.60 (nattu, gen.), 88; Ud 91, 92; PvA 17 (nattu -- dhītā great -- grand -- daughter), 25 (nattā nom.).
Natthika (adj. -- n.) [Sk. nāstika] one who professes the motto of "natthi," a sceptic, nihilist S i.96; usually in cpds.
-- diṭṭhi scepticism, nihilistic view, heresy Sn 243 (=micchāditthi Com.); VvA 342; PvA 244; -- vāda one who professes a nihilistic doctrine S iii.73; M i.403; A ii.31; PvA 215 (+micchādiṭṭhika).
Natthitā (f.) [Sk. nāstitā, fr. n' atthi] nihilism S ii.17; J v.110.
Natthibhāva [n' atthi -- bhāva] non -- existence DhA iii.324.
Natthu [cp. Sk. nas f. & nasta, see etym. under nāsā] 1. the nose J v.166 (= nāsā Com.). -- 2.=˚kamma, medical treatment through the nose Vin iii.83 (deti).
-- kamma nose -- treatment, consisting in the application of hot oil (DA i.98: telaŋ yojetvā n -- karaṇaŋ) D i.12; Vin i.204; M i.511; DhA i.12; -- karaṇī a pockethandkerchief Vin i.204.
Nadati [Ved. nadati, nad of unknown etym.] to roar, cry, make a noise (nadaŋ nadati freq.) Sn 552 (sīha), 684 (id.), 1015; J i.50, 150; ii.110; aor. nadi J iii.55 & anādisuŋ J iv.349. Caus. nadāpeti to make roar J ii.244. See also nadī & nāda, & cp. onadati.
Nadana (nt.) [cp. Sk. nadanu] roaring J i.19 (sīhanāda˚ the sound of a lion's roar).
Nadita (nt.) [cp. Sk. nādita, pp. of caus. nadayati] roar, noise J ii.110.
Nadī (f.) [Ved. nadī, from nadati="the roaring," cp. also nandati] a river; often characterised as mahā˚ in opp. to kun˚ rivulet; pl. nadiyo also collect. "the waters." -- D i.244 (Aciravatī nadī); S ii.32, 118, 135; v.390; A i.33, 136, 243 (mahā˚); ii.55, 140 (mahā˚); iii.52; iv.101 (m˚), 137; Sn 425, 433, 568, 720; Dh 251; J i.296; ii.102; iii.51; iii.91 (Kebukā); v.269 (Vetaraṇī˚); vi.518 (Ketumatī); Pv iv.354; Vism 468 (sīghasotā); PvA 256 (m˚); Sdhp 21, 194, 574. -- gen. sg. nadiyā J i.278; It 113; instr. nadiyā J i.278; PvA 46; pl. nom. nadiyo Miln 114 (na tā n. dhuva -- salilā), najjo PvA 29 (mahā˚); & najjāyo J vi.278; gen nadīnaŋ Vin i.246=Sn 569 (n. sāgaro mukhaŋ). -- kunnadī a small river S i.109; ii.32, 118; v.47, 63; A ii.140; iv.100; V.114 sq. -- On n. in similes see J.P.T.S. 1906, 100.
-- kuñja a river glen DA i.209; -- kūla the bank of a river Cp. iii.71; -- tīra=˚kūla J i.278; -- dugga a difficult ford in a river S ii.198; -- vidugga= ˚dugga A i.35; iii.128.
Naddha [Sk. naddha pp. of nah, see nayhati] tied, bound, fastened, put on J i.175 (rathavarattaŋ); Bu i.31 (camma˚, of a drum); Mhvs vii.16 (˚pañcāyudha); Miln 117 (yuga˚); DhsA 131. Cp. onaddha, vi˚, san˚.
Nanandar (f.) [Sk. nanāndṛ & nanāndā, to nanā "mother"] husband's sister J v.269 (=sāmikassa bhaginī p. 275).
Nanikāma (adj.) [na+nikāma=anikāma] disagreeable, unpleasant Dh 309 (˚seyyā an uncomfortable bed).
Nanu (indecl.) [Ved. nanu] 1. part. of affirmation (cp. na1): surely, certainly Pv ii.67 (so to be read for nanda? v. l. BB nuna); Manor. Pūr. on A v.194 (Andersen P. R. 91). -- 2. part. of interrogation (=Lat. nonne) "is it not" (cp. na2): J i.151; iii.393; DhA i.33.
Nantaka (nt.) [a contamination of namataka (Kern, Toev. p. 169), maybe Sk. naktaka "cover for nakedness" (Trenckner, Notes 811), unless it be non -- Aryan] a shred, rag, worn -- out cloth, usually expld by jiṇṇapilotika (J iii.22) or khaṇḍabhūtā pilotikā (PvA 185) or pilotika only (VvA 311). -- S v.342; A iii.187; iv.376 (˚vāsin as v. l.; text has nantikavāsin); Vv 807 (anantaka); Pv iii.214; J iii.22 (˚vāsin clad in rags).
Nanda at Pv ii.67 used either as interj. (=nanu, q. v.) or as voc. in the sense of "dear"; the first expln to be preferred & n. probably to be read as nanu (v. l. nuna) or handa (in which case nanu would be gloss).
Nandaka (adj.) [Sk. nandikā] giving pleasure, pleasing, full of joy; f. nandikā J iv.396 (+khiḍḍā), either as adj. or f. abstr. pleasure, rejoicing (= abhindandanā Com.).
Nandati [Ved. nandati, nand=nad (cp. vind>vid etc.) orig. to utter sounds of joy] to be glad, to rejoice, find delight in, be proud of (c. instr.) S i.110; A iv.94 sq.; Sn 33; Dh 18. -- Caus. nandeti to please, to do a favour J iv.107 (nandaya=tosehi Com.); PvA 139 (=toseti). -- ppr. nandayanto J vi.588. -- Cp. ānandati.
Nandanā (f.) [Sk. nandanā] rejoicing, delight, pleasure S i.6=Sn 33.
Nandi1 & (freq.) Nandī (f.) [Sk. nandi, but cp. BSk. nandī Divy 37] 1. joy, enjoyment, pleasure, delight in (c. loc.) S i.16, 39, 54; ii.101 sq. (āhāre); iii.14 (=upādāna); iv.36 sq.; A ii.10 (kāma˚, bhava˚, diṭṭhi˚), iii.246; iv.423 sq. (dhamma˚); Sn 1055 (+nivesana); Nd2 330 (=taṇhā); Pug 57; Dhs 1059≈(in def. of taṇhā); Vbh 145, 356, 361; DhsA 363; ThA 65, 167. -- For nandī at Miln 289 read tandī. -- 2. a musical instrument: joy -- drum [Sk. nandī] Vin iii.108 (= vijayabheri). Cp. ā˚.
-- (y)āvatta "turning auspiciously" (i. e. turning to the right: see dakkhiṇāvatta), auspicious, good Nett 2, 4, 7, 113 (always attr. of naya); -- ûpasecana (rāgasalla) sprinkled over with joy, having joy as its sauce Nett 116, 117; cp. maŋsûpasecana (odana) J iii.144=vi.24; -- kkhaya the destruction of (finding) delight S iii.51; -- (ŋ)jaha giving up or abandoning joy Sn 1101 (+okañjaha & kappañjaha); Nd2 331; -- bhava existence of joy, being full of joy, in ˚parikkhīṇa one in whom joy is extinct (i. e. an Arahant), expld however by Com. as one who has rid himself of the craving for rebirth (tīsu bhavesu parikkhīnataṇha DhA iv.192=SnA 469) S i.2, 53; Sn 175, 637=Dh 413; -- mukhī (adj. -- f.) "joyfaced," showing a merry face, Ep. of the night (esp. the eve of the uposatha) Vin i.288 (ratti); ii.236 (id.); -- rāga pleasure & lust, passionate delight S ii.227; iii.51; iv.142, 174, 180; M i.145; Dhs 1059≈, 1136; esp. as attr. of taṇhā in phrase n -- r -- sahagata -- taṇhā (cp. M Vastu iii.332: nandīrāgasahagatā tr̥ṣṇā) Vin i.10; S iii.158; v.425 sq.; Ps ii.137; Nett 72; -- saŋyojana the fetter of finding delight in anything Sn 1109, 1115; Nd2 332; -- samudaya the rise or origin of delight M iii.267.
Nandi2=nandhi.
Nandin (adj.) [Sk. nandin] finding or giving delight, delighting in, pleasurable, gladdening S ii.53 (vedanā); A ii.59, 61; It 112.
Nandha see yuga˚.
Nandhati [for nayhati, der. fr. naddha after analogy of baddha>bandhati] meaning not so much "to bind" as "to cover": see apiḷandhati, upanandhati, onandhati, pariyonandhati.
Nandhi (f.) (usually spelt nandi) [Sk. naddhrī to naddha, pp. of nah to bind] a strap, thong J i.175 (rathassa cammañ ca nandiñ ca); Sn 622=Dh 398 (+varatta); SnA 400; DhA i.44, iv.160.
Napuŋsaka (adj.) [Ved. napuŋsaka=na+puŋs "not- male"] of no sex; lit. Vism 548, 553; ThA 260; Vbh 417; in gram. of the neuter gender Kacc. 50; PvA 266 (is reading correct?)
Nabha (nt.) & Nabhas (in oblique cases) [Sk. nabhas; Gr. ne/fos & nefe/lh, Lat. nebula, Oir. nēl, Ags. nifol (darkness), Ohg. nebul. See also abbha] mist, vapour, clouds, sky A i.242; ii.50 (nabhā), iii.240, Sn 687 (nabhasi -- gama, of the moon); Vv 323, 352 (=ākāsa VvA 161), 534 (id. 236), 6327 (id. 268); PvA 65; Mhvs vii.9 (nabhasā instr.).
Nabbho=nābhiyo, nom. pl. of nābhi (q. v.).
Namataka (nt.) [word & etym. doubtful; cp. nantaka & Bdhgh. Vin ii.317: matakan (sic) ti satthakavedhanakaŋ (=veṭhanakaŋ) pilotikakhaṇḍaŋ] a piece of cloth Vin ii.115 (satthaka), 123, 267 (˚ŋ dhāreti).
Namati [Ved. namati, Idg. *nem to bend; also to share out, cp. Gr. ne/mw, Goth. niman=Ger. nehmen. See cognates in Walde loc. cit. under nemus] to bend, bend down (trs. & instr.) direct, apply S i.137 (cittaŋ); Sn 806; J i.61 (aor. nami, cittaŋ). -- Caus. nameti (not nāmeti, Fsb. to Sn 1143 nāmenti, which is to be corrected to n' âpenti) to bend, to wield Dh 80=145 (namayati). As nāmeti at J vi.349. pp. namita (q. v.).
Namana (nt.) [a philosophical term constructed by Bdhgh. from nāma, cp. ruppana -- rūpa] naming, giving a name KhA 78; DhsA 52 (see nāma2); Vism 528.
Namanā (f.) [abstr. to namati, cp. Sk. namana nt.] bent, application, industry Vbh 352.
Namassati [Ved. namasyati, Denom. fr. namo] to pay honour to, to venerate, honour, do homage to (often with pañjalika & añjaliŋ katvā) Sn 236, 485, 598, 1058, 1063; Nd2 334; J iii.83; Pv ii.1220; KhA 196; pot. namasseyya It 110; Dh 392, 1st pl. namassemu Sn 995; ppr. namassaŋ Sn 334, 934; namassanto SnA 565, & (usually) namassamāna Sn 192, 1142; Nd1 400; J ii.73; VvA 7. -- aor. namassiŋsu Sn 287. -- ger. namassitvā J i.1. -- grd. (as adj.) namassaniya (venerable), Miln 278.
Namassana (nt.) (?) veneration J i.1.
Namassiyā (namassā) (f.) [Sk. namasyā] worship, venera- tion Miln 140.
Namita [pp. nameti] bent on, disposed to ( -- ˚), able or capable of J iii.392 (pabbajjāya -- namita -- citta); Miln 308 (phalabhāra˚).
Namo (nt.) & Nama (nt.) [Ved. namas, cp. Av. nəmo prayer; Gr. ne/mos, Lat. nemus (see namati)] nomage, veneration, esp. used as an exclamation of adoration at the beginning of a book (namo tassa Bhagavato Arahato Sammāsambuddhassa) Sn 540, 544; PvA 1, 67.
Namuci (Np.) a name of Māra.
Naya (adj. -- n.) [from nayati, to lead, see neti] "leading"; usually m: way (fig.), method, plan, manner; inference; sense, meaning (in grammar); behaviour, conduct A ii.193=Nd2 151 (˚hetu through inference); Nett 2 (method), 4 (id.), 7, 113; Miln 316 (nayena=nayahetu); KhA 74; VvA 112 (sense, context, sentence); PvA 1 (ways or conduct), 117 (meaning), 126 (id.), 136, 280. -- nayaŋ neti to draw a conclusion, apply an inference, judge, behave S ii.58=Vbh 329; J iv.241 (anayaŋ nayati dummedho: draws a wrong conclusion); PvA 227 (+anumināti). -- With ˚ādi˚ N. has the function of continuing or completing the context= "and similarly," e. g. ˚ādinaya -- pavatta dealing with this & the following VvA 2; . . . ti ādinā nayena thus & similarly, & so forth J i.81; PvA 30. -- Instr. nayena ( -- ˚) as adv. in the way of, as, according(ly): āgata˚ according to what has been shown or said in . . . J i.59; VvA 3; PvA 280; purima˚ as before J i.59; iv.140; vutta˚ as said (above) (cp. vutta -- niyāmena) PvA 13, 29, 36, 71, 92 etc. -- sunaya a sound judgment J iv.241; dunnaya a wrong principle, method or judgment, or as adj.: wrongly inferred, hard to be understood, unintelligible A iii.178=Nett 21; J iv.241.
Nayati see neti.
Nayana (nt.) [Sk. nayana, to nayati=the leader cp. also netra=P. netta] the eye Th 2, 381; Vv 353; Dhs 597; Vbh 71 sq.; Miln 365; ThA 255; VvA 161 (=cakkhu); PvA 40 (nettāni nayanāni), 152; Sdhp 448, 621.
Nayhati [Ved. nahyati, Idg. *nedh as in Lat. nodus & Ved. nahu] to tie, bind; only in comp. with prep. as upanayhati (cp. upāhanā sandal), pilandhati etc. -- pp. naddha (q. v.). See also nandhi, nāha; onayhati, unnahanā, piḷayhati.
Nayhana (nt.) [Sk. nahana] tying, binding; bond, fetter DhA iv.161.
Nara [Ved. nara, cp. nṛtu; Idg. *ner to be strong or valiant =Gr. a)nh/r, a)g -- h/nwr (valiant), drw/y (*nrw/y); Lat. neriosus (muscuḷar), Nero (Sabinian, cp. Oscan ner= Lat. vir); Oir. nert] man (in poetry esp. a brave, strong, heroic man), pl. either "men" or "people" (the latter e. g. at Sn 776, 1082; Pv i.1112). -- A i.130; ii.5; iii.53; Sn 39, 96, 116, 329, 591, 676, 865 etc.; Dh 47, 48, 262, 309, 341; J iii.295; Nd1 12=Nd2 335 (definition); VvA 42 (popular etymology: narati netī ti naro puriso, i. e. a "leading" man); PvA 116=Dh 125.
-- âdhama vilest of men Sn 246; -- âsabha "man bull," i. e. lord of men Sn 684, 996; -- inda "man lord," i. e. king Sn 836; J i.151; -- uttama best of men (Ep. of the Buddha) S i.23; D iii.147; Sn 1021; -- deva god -- man or man -- god (pl.) gods, also Ep. of the B. "king of men" S i.5; Pv iv.350; -- nārī (pl.) men & women, appl. to male & female angelic servants (of the Yakkhas) Vv 324, 337, 538; Pv ii.112; -- vīra a hero (?), a skilled man (?) Th 1, 736 (naravīrakata "by human skill & wit" Mrs. Rh. D.). -- sīha lion of men J i.89.
Naraka [Sk. naraka; etym. doubtful, problematic whether to Gr. ne/rteros (= inferus), Ags. nord=north as region of the underworld] 1. a pit D i.234; Th 1, 869; J iv.268 (˚āvāṭa PvA 225). -- 2. a name for Niraya, i. e. purgatory; a place of torment for the deceased (see niraya & cp. list of narakas at Divy 67) S i.209; Sn 706; PvA 52; Sdhp 492 (saŋsāraghora˚), 612.
-- angāra the ashes of purgatory Sdhp 32.
Narada (nt.) [Sk. nalada, Gr. na/rdos, of Semitic origin, cp. Hebr. nīrd] nard, ointment J vi.537.
Nala & Naḷa [Ved. naḍa & Sk. naḷa, with dial. ḍ (ḷ) for *narda, cp. Gr. na/ rdhc] a species of reed; reed in general Vin iv.35; A ii.73; Dh 337; Nd2 680ii; J i.223; iv.141, 396 (n. va chinno); Pv i.116 (id.); DhA iii.156; iv.43. See also nāḷa, nāḷī & nāḷikā.
-- âgāra a house built of reeds S i.156; iv.185 (+tiṇāgāra); A i.101 (+tiṇāgāra); Nd2 40d (id.), Miln 245; cp. AvŚ Index ii.228 (naḍāgāra); -- aggi a fire of reeds J vi.100 (˚vaṇṇaŋ pabbataŋ); -- kalāpī a bundle of r. S ii.114; -- kāra a worker in reeds, basket -- maker; D i.51 (+pesakāra & kumbhakāra); J v.291; ThA 28; PvA 175 (+vilīvakāra); DhA i.177; -- daṇḍaka a shaft of r. J i.170; -- maya made of r. Vin ii.115; -- vana a thicket of reeds J iv.140; Miln 342; -- sannibha reedcoloured J vi.537 (Com.: naḷa -- puppha -- vaṇṇa rukkhasunakha); -- setu a bridge of reeds Sn 4.
Naḷapin a water -- animal J vi.537.
Nalāṭa (nt.) [Ved. lalāṭa=rarāṭa; on n>l cp. nangala] the forehead S i.118; J iii.393; iv.417 (nalāṭena maccuŋ ādāya: by his forelock); Vism 185; DhA i.253.
-- anta the side of the forehead J vi.331; -- maṇḍala the round of the f. D i.106; Sn p. 108.
Nalāṭikā (f.) [Sk. lalāṭikā] "belonging to the forehead," a frown Vin ii.10 (nalāṭikaŋ deti to give a frown).
Nalinī (f.) [Sk. nalinī] a pond J iv.90; Vism 84, 17.
Nava1 (num.) [Ved. navan, Idg. *neṷn̊, cp. Lat. novem (*noven), Gr. e)nne/a, Goth. niun, Oir. nōin, E. nine. Connection with nava2 likely because in counting by tetrads (octo=8 is a dual!) a new series begins with No. 9] number nine. gen. -- dat. navannaŋ (Sn p. 87); instr. -- abl. navahi (VvA 76), loc. navasu.
Meaning and Application: The primitive -- Aryan importance of the "mystic" nine is not found in Buddhism and can only be traced in Pali in folkloristic undercurrents (as fairy tales) & stereotype traditions in which 9 appears as a number implying a higher trinity=32. 1. navabhūmaka pāsāda (a palace 9 stories high more freq. satta˚, 7) J i.58; nava -- hiraññakoṭīhi (w. 9 koṭis of gold) VvA 188; nava yojana DhA ii.65. -- 2. navangabuddhasāsana "the 9 fold teaching of Buddha," i. e. the 9 divisions of the Buddh. Scriptures according to their form or style, viz. suttaŋ geyyaŋ veyyākaraṇaŋ gāthā udānaŋ itivuttakaŋ jātakaŋ abbhutadhammaŋ vedallaŋ M i.133; A ii.103, 178; iii.86 sq., 177 sq.; Pug 43; Miln 344; Dpvs iv.15; PvA 2. Cp. chaḷanga. -- nava sattāvāsā "9 abodes of beings" Kh iv. (in exemplifying No. 9), viz. (see D iii.263=KhA 86, 87 cp. also A iv.39 sq.) (1) manussā, devā, vinipātikā; (2) Brahmakāyikā devā; (3) Ābhassarā; (4) Subhakiṇhā; (5) Asaññasattā; (6) Ākāsanañcâyatana -- upagā; (7) Viññāṇanañcâyatana˚; (8) Ākiñcaññāyatana˚; (9) Nevasaññâsaññâyatana˚. -- nava sotā (Sn 197) or nava dvārā (VvA 76; v. l. mukhā) 9 openings of the body, viz. (SnA 248) 2 eyes, ears, nostrils, mouth, anus & urethra (cp. S.B.E. 39, 180; 40, 259 sq.). -- nava vitakkā 9 thoughts Nd2 269 (q. v.). -- 3. a trace of the week of 9 days is to be found in the expression "navuti -- vassasatasahass -- āyukā" giving the age of a divinity as 9 million years (=a divine week) VvA 345. -- Cp. navuti.
Nava2 (adj.) [Ved. nava, Idg. *neṷn̊ (cp. nava1)=Lat. novus, Gr. ne/os (*ne/ vos), Lith. navas; Goth. niujis etc.=E. new; also Sk. navya=Gr. nei_os, Lat. Novius. May be related to na3] 1. new, fresh; unsoiled, clean; of late, lately acquired or practised (opp. pubba & purāṇa). Often syn. with taruṇa. Sn 28, 235 (opp. purāṇaŋ), 944 (id.), 913 (opp. pubba); Pv i.92 (of clothes=costly); J iv.201 (opp. purāṇa); Miln 132 (salila fresh water). -- 2. young, unexperienced, newly initiated; a novice Vin i.47 (navā bhikkhū the younger bhs., opp. therā); S i.9 (+acira -- pabbajita); ii.218; Sn p. 93 (Gotamo navo pabbajjāya "a novice in the Wanderer's life"); DhA i.92 (bhikkhu).
-- kamma building new, making repairs, "doing up," mending Vin ii.119, 159; iii.81; J i.92; iv.378; Nd2 385; -- kammika an expert in making repairs or in building, a builder (cp. vaḍḍhaki) Vin ii.15; iv.211; -- ghata fresh ghee J ii.433 (v. l. ˚sappi).
Navaka (adj. -- n.) [Sk. navaka] young; a young man, a newly ordained bhikkhu (opp. thera), novice (cp. Divy 404) J i.33 (sangha˚); PvA 76 (id.). -- Freq. in compar. navakatara a younger one, or the youngest (opp. theratara) D ii.154; J i.218; Miln 24.
Navanīta (nt.) & nonīta [cp. Ved. navanīta] fresh butter Vin i.244 (cp. gorasa); D i.201; M iii.141; Pv iii.55 (nonīta); Pug 69, 70; Miln 41, Dhs 646, 740; DhA i.417; PvA 199.
Navama (num. ord.) [Sk. navama=Oir. nōmad; cp. Lat. nonus; Gr. e)/natos, Goth. niunda with diff. superl. suffixes] the ninth Sn 109; f. ˚ī VvA 72.
Naviya (adj.) [Sk. navya, either grd. of navate to praise; or=nava, q. v.] praiseworthy Miln 389.
Navuti (num.) [Ved. navati] number ninety VvA 345 & in compn eka˚ 91 D ii.2 (i. e. 92 minus 1; in expr. ekanavuto kappo, v. l. ekanavuti kappe); dvā˚ 92 (see dvi A II. & B III.); PvA 19, 21; aṭṭhā˚ 98; Sn 311 (diseases sprung fr. orig. 3).
Navutiya (adj.) worth ninety J v.485. Cp. nāvutika.
Nassati (v. intr.) [Ved. naś; naśyati & naśati, cp. Gr. ne/kus, nekro/s (corpse), ne/ktar ("overcoming death" =nec+tr̥, cp. tarati); Lat. neco, noceo, noxius] to perish, to be lost or destroyed, to disappear, come to an end Sn 666 (na hi nassati kassaci kammaŋ); It 90; J i.81, 116, 150; pret. nassaŋ (prohib.) Sn 1120, pl. anassāma M i.177; aor. nassi A iii.54 (mā nassi prohib.); J iv.137 (cakkhūni ˚iŋsu: the eyes failed); fut. nassisati J i.5; cond. nassissa J ii.112. -- Caus. nāseti (q. v.). See also pa˚.
Nassana (nt.) [cp. Sk. naśana] disappearance, loss, destruction A iii.54 (˚dhamma adj. doomed to perish).
Nahāta [Sk. snāta, see nahāyati] one who has bathed Vin ii.221; J i.266; DhA iv.232 (˚kilesatā washed off moral stain).
Nahātaka [Ved. snātaka, cp. nahāta & nahāyati] "one who has bathed," a brahmin who has finished the studies M i.280; A iv.144; Dh 422 (expl. at DhA iv.232 with ref. to perfection in the Buddha's teaching: catusaccabuddhatāya buddha); cp. Sn 521 (one who has washed away all sin), 646.
Nahāna (nt.) [Sk. snāna] bathing, a bath Vin i.47, 51= ii.224; i.196 (dhuva˚ constant bathing), 197; S i.183; v.390 (fig.); J i.265; PvA 50; Vism 27.
-- kāla bathing time PvA 46; -- koṭṭhaka bath -- room DhA iii.88; -- garuka fond of bathing Vin i.196; -- cuṇṇa bath powder (cp. nahāniya˚) DhA i.398; -- tittha a shallow place for bathing DhA i.3; iii.79.
Nahāniya (adj.) belonging to a bath, bath -- ; in ˚cuṇṇa bath -- powder PvA 46.
Nahāpaka [Sk. snāpaka, fr. Caus, nahāpeti; cp. nahāpita] a barber, bath attendant D i.74; A iii.25; DA i.157 (=ye nahāpenti); PvA 127 (=kappaka).
Nahāpana (nt.) bathing, washing (trs.) D i.7, 12; A i.62, 132; ii.70; iv.54; It 111 (ucchādana+); VvA 305 (udakadāna+).
Nahāpita [Sk. only snāpaka (see nahāpaka); new formation fr. Caus. nahāpeti as n. ag. with a -- theme instead of ar -- , cp. sallakatta for sallakattar] a barber, who has also the business of preparing & giving baths (cp. Ger. "bader") a bath -- attendant (see kappaka). Barbers ranked as a low class socially, and rebirth in a barber's family was considered unfortunate. Vin i.249 (˚pubba who had formerly been a barber); D i.225; J i.137; ii.5; iii.451; iv.138 (eight kahāpaṇas as a barber's fee); DA i.157 (=kappaka); VvA 207 (˚sālā a barber's shop).
Nahāpeti [Sk. snāpayati, Caus. of nahāyati] to wash, to give a bath, bathe J i.166; PvA 49; VvA 68, 305.
Nahāmin (adj. -- n.) [=nahāpaka; Kern, Toev. asks: should it be nahāpin?] a barber, a low -- class individual Pv iii.114 (=kappaka -- jātika PvA 176).
Nahāyati (rarely nhāyati) [Ved. snāti & snāyati, snā=Gr. nh/xw (to swim), naro/ s, *nhreu/s (Nereid), nh_sos (island); Lat. nare (to swim); cp. also Sk. snauti, Gr. na/w, ne/w; Goth. sniwan] to bathe (trs. & intr.), to wash, to perform an ablution (esp. at the end of religious studentship or after the lapse of a lustrative period) Vin ii.280; J i.265; vi.336; PvA 93. ppr. nahāyanto (PvA 83) & nahāyamāna (Vin ii.105); inf. nahāyituŋ (Vin i.47; PvA 144); ger. nahāyitvā (J i.50; vi.367; PvA 42) & nahātvā (J i.265; iii.277; DhA iii.88; PvA 23, 62) (after mourning), 82; grd. nahāyitabba (Vin ii.220, 280).
Nahāru & Nhāru [Sk. snāyu, Idg. *snē to sew, cp. Gr. ne/w, nh/qw, nh_ma (thread); Ohg. nājan; also Gr. neu_ron (=Lat. nervus); Ags. sinu (=sinew); Ohg. senawa; Goth. nepla=Ags. nāēdl (=needle); Oir. snātha (thread); Ohg. snuor (cord)=Ags. snōd] sinew, tendon, muscle. In the anatomy of the body n. occupies the place between maŋsa (flesh, soft flesh) & aṭṭhi (bone), as is seen from ster. sequence chavi, camma, maŋsa, nahāru, aṭṭhi, aṭṭhi -- miñja (e. g. at Vin i.25; J iii.84). See also defn in detail at SnA 246 sq. & KhA 47. <-> Vin i.25 (nh˚); M i.429 (used for bow strings); A i.50; iii.324; iv.47 sq. (˚daddula), 129; Kh 111.; Sn 194 (aṭṭhi˚) Nd2 97 (nh˚); DhA iii.118; ThA 257 (nh˚); PvA 68 (aṭṭhi -- camma˚), 80 (camma -- maŋsa˚); Sdhp 46, 103.
Nahuta (nt.) [Sk. nayuta (m. pl.) of unknown etym. Is it the same as navuti? The corresponding v>y>h is frequent, as to meaning cp. nava 3] a vast number, a myriad Sn 677; J i.25, 83; Pv iv.17; DhA i.88; PvA 22, 265.
Nāga [Ved. nāga; etym. of 1. perhaps fr. *snagh=Ags. snaca (snake) & snaegl (snail); of 2 uncertain, perhaps a Non -- Aryan word distorted by popular analogy to nāga1] 1. a serpent or Nāga demon, playing a prominent part in Buddh. fairy -- tales, gifted with miraculous powers & great strength. They often act as fairies & are classed with other divinities (see devatā), with whom they are sometimes friendly, sometimes at enmity (as with the Garuḷas) D i.54; S iii.240 sq.; v.47, 63; Bu. i.30 (dīghāyukā mahiddhikā); Miln 23. Often with supaṇṇā (Garuḷas); J i.64; DhA ii.4; PvA 272. Descriptions e. g. at DhA iii.231, 242 sq.; see also cpds. -- 2. an elephant, esp. a strong, stately animal (thus in combn hatthi -- nāga characterising "a Nāga elephant") & freq. as symbol of strength & endurance ("heroic"). Thus Ep. of the Buddha & of Arahants. Popular etymologies of n. are based on the excellency of this animal (āguŋ na karoti=he is faultless, etc.): see Nd1 201=Nd2 337; Th 1, 693; PvA 57. -- (a) the animal D i.49; S i.16; ii.217, 222; iii.85; v.351; A ii.116; iii.156 sq.; Sn 543; Vv 55 (=hatthināga VvA 37); Pv i.113. mahā˚ A iv.107, 110. -- (b) fig.= hero or saint: S ii.277; iii.83; M i.151, 386; Dh 320; Sn 29, 53, 166, 421, 518. Of the Buddha: Sn 522, 845, 1058, 1101; Miln 346 (Buddha˚). -- 3. The Nāga -- tree (now called "iron -- wood tree," the P. meaning "fairy tree"), noted for its hard wood & great masses of red flowers (=Sk. nāgakesara, mesua ferrea Lin.): see cpds. ˚rukkha, ˚puppha, ˚latā.
-- âpalokita "elephant -- look" (turning the whole body), a mark of the Buddhas M i.337; cp. BSk. nāgâvalokita Divy 208; -- danta an ivory peg or pin, also used as a hook on a wall Vin ii.117 (˚ka Vin ii.114, 152); J vi.382; -- nāṭaka snakes as actors DhA iv.130; -- nāsūru (f.) (woman) having thighs like an elephant's trunk J v.297; -- puppha iron -- wood flower Miln 283; -- bala the strength of an elephant J i.265; ii.158; -- bhavana the world of snakes Nd1 448; J iii.275; DhA iv.14; -- māṇavaka a young serpent J iii.276; f. ˚ikā ib. 275; DhA iii.232; -- rājā king of the Nāgas, i. e. serpents J ii.111; iii.275; Sn 379 (Erāvaṇa, see detail SnA 368); DhA i.359; iii.231, 242 sq. (Ahicchatta); iv.129 sq. (Paṇṇaka); -- rukkha the iron -- wood tree J i.35 (cp. M Vastu ii.249); -- latā=rukkha J i.80 (the Buddha's toothpick made of its wood), 232; DhA ii.211 (˚dantakaṭṭha toothpick); -- vatta habits of serpents Nd1 92, also adj. ˚ika ibid. 89; -- vana elephant -- grove Dh 324; DhA iv.15; -- vanika cl. hunter M i.175; iii.132; -- hata one who strikes the el. (viz. the Buddha) Vin ii.195.
Nāgara [Sk. nāgara, see nagara] a citizen J i.150; iv.404; v.385; Dāvs ii.85; VvA 31; PvA 19; DhA i.41.
Nāgarika (adj.) [Sk. nāgarika] citizen -- like, urbane, polite DA i.282.
Nāṭaka [Sk. nāṭaka; see naccati] 1. (m.) a dancer, actor, player J i.206; v.373; DhA iii.88; iv.59, 130; nāṭakitthi a dancing -- girl, nautch -- girl DhA iii.166; VvA 131. -- 2. (nt.) a play, pantomime J i.59; v.279, also used coll.= dancing -- woman J i.59 (?) ii.395.
Nātha [Ved. nātha, nāth, to which Goth. nipan (to support), Ohg. gināda (grace)] protector, refuge, help A v.23, 89; Dh 160 (attā hi attano n.), 380; Sn 1131 (Nd2 has nāga); DhA iv.117; PvA 1. lokanātha Saviour of the world (Ep. of the Buddha) Sn 995; PvA 42. -- anātha helpless, unprotected, poor J i.6 (nāthânāthā rich & poor); PvA 3 (˚sālā poor house) 65. Cp. nādhati.
Nāda [Sk. nāda, see nadati] loud sound, roaring, roar J i.19 (sīha˚), 50 (koñca˚), 150 (mahā˚). Cp. pa˚.
Nādi (f.)=nāda, loud sound, thundering (fig.) Vv 6410.
Nādhati [Sk. nādhate=nāthate (see nātha), only in nadhamāna, cp. RV x.65, 5: nādhas] to have need of, to be in want of (c. gen.) J v.90 (Com. expls by upatappati milāyati; thinking perhaps of nalo va chinno).
Nānatta (nt. m.) [Sk. nānatva; abstr. fr. nānā] diversity, variety, manifoldness, multiformity, distraction; all sorts of (opp. ekatta, cp. M i.364: "the multiformity of sensuous impressions," M.A.). Enumn of diversity as nānattā, viz. dhātu˚ phassa˚ vedanā˚ saññā˚ sankappa˚ chanda˚ pariḷāha˚ pariyesanā˚ lābha˚ D iii.289; S ii.140 sq., cp. iv.113 sq., 284 sq.; Ps i.87. -- A iv.385; Ps i.63 sq., 88 sq.; S ii.115 (vedanā˚); Ps i.91 (samāpatti˚ & vihāra˚); J ii.265. In composition, substituted sometimes for nāna. Cp. Dialogues i.14, n. 2.
-- kathā desultory talk, gossip D i.8; (=niratthakakathā DA i.90); S v.420; -- kāya (adj.) having a variety of bodies or bodily states (combd with or opp. to ekatta˚, nānatta -- saññin, & ekatta -- saññin), appl. to manussā, devā, vinipātikā (cp. nava sattâvāsā) A iv.39 sq.=Nd2 5702; D iii.253, 263, 282; -- saññā consciousness of diversity (Rh. D.: "idea of multiformity," Dial. ii.119; Mrs. Rh. D. "consciousness of the manifold") M i.3; S iv.113 sq.; D iii.224, 262 sq., 282; A i.41, 267; ii.184; iii.306; Ps ii.172; Dhs 265 (cp. trsl. p. 72); Vbh 342, 369; -- saññin having a varying consciousness (cp. ˚kāya), D i.31 (cp. DA i.119) 183; iii.263.
Nānattatā (f.) [2nd abstr. to nānā]=nānatta, diversity (of states of mind). Seven sorts at Vbh 425: ārammaṇa˚ manasikāra˚ chanda˚ paṇidha˚ adhimokkha˚ abhinīhāra˚ paññā˚.
Nānā (adv.) [Ved. nānā, a redupl. nā (emphatic particle, see na1) "so and so," i. e. various, of all kinds] variously, differently. 1. (abs.) A i.138 (on different sides, viz. right 1 285), 884 sq. -- 2. more frequently in cpds., as first part of adj. or n. where it may be trsld as "different, divers, all kinds of" etc. Before a double cons. the final ā is shortened: nānagga (for nānā+agga), nānappakāra etc. see below.
-- agga ( -- rasa) all the choicest delicacies J i.266 (˚bhojana, of food); vi.366; PvA 155 (˚dibbabhojana); -- âdhimuttikatā diversity of dispositions DA i.44; Nett 98; -- āvudhā (pl.) various weapons J i.150; -- karaṇa difference, diversity Vin i.339 (sangha˚); M ii.128; cp. Divy 222; -- gotta of all kinds of descent Pv ii.916; -- citta of varying mind J i.295 (itthiyo); -- jana all kinds of folk Sn 1102; Nd1 308 (puthu˚); -- titthiya of var. sects D iii.16 sq.; -- pakkāra various, manifold J i.52 (sakuṇā), 127, 278 (phalāni); DAi. 148 (āvudhā); PvA 50, 123, 135; -- ratta multi -- coloured Sn 287; J vi.230; -- rasā (pl.) all kinds of dainties Pv ii.911; -- vāda difference of opinion D i.236; -- vidha divers, various, motley PvA 53, 96, 113, and passim; -- saŋvāsaka living in a different part, or living apart Vin i.134 sq. (opp. samāna˚), 321; ii.162.
Nābhi & Nābhī (f.) [Vedic nābhi, nābhī; Av. nabā; Gr. o)mfalo/s (navel); Lat. umbo & umbilicus; Oir. imbliu (navel); Ags. nafu; Ohg. naba (nave), Ger. nabel= E. nave & navel] 1. the navel A iii.240; J i.238; DA i.254 (where it is said that the Vessā (Vaiśyas) have sprung from the navel of Brahmā). -- 2. the nave of a wheel Vv 644 (pl. nabhyo & nabbho SS=nābhiyo VvA 276); J i.64; iv.277; Miln 115.
Nāma (nt.) [Vedic nāman, cp. Gr. o)/noma (a)n -- w/numos without name); Lat. nomen; Goth. namō; Ags. noma, Ohg. namo] name. -- 1. Literal. nom. nāmaŋ S i.39; Sn 808; J ii.131; Miln 27; acc. nāmaŋ PvA 145 (likhi: he wrote her name). -- nāmaŋ karoti to give a name Sn 344; Nd2 466 (n' etaŋ nāmaŋ mātarā kataŋ on "Bhagavā"); J i.203, 262 (w. double acc.). -- nāmaŋ gaṇhāti to call by name, to enumerate J iv.402; PvA 18 (v. l. BB nāmato g.). Definitions at Vin iv.6 (two kinds : hīna˚ & ukkatṭha˚) and at Vism 528 (=namanalakkhaṇa). -- 2. Specified. nāma as metaphysical term is opposed to rūpa, & comprises the 4 immaterial factors of an individual (arūpino khandhā, viz. vedanā saññā sankhāra viññāṇa; see khandha II. Ba). These as the noëtic principle combd with the material principle make up the individual as it is distinguished by "name & body" from other individuals. Thus nāmarūpa= individuality, individual being. These two are inseparable (aññamaññûpanissitā ete dhammā, ekato va uppajjanti Miln 49). S i.35 (yattha n. ca rūpañ ca asesaŋ uparujjhati taŋ te dhammaŋ idh' aññāya acchiduŋ bhavabandhanaŋ); Sn 1036, 1100; Nd1 435=Nd2 339 (nāma=cattāro arūpino khandhā); DhA iv.100 (on Dh 367): vedanādīnaŋ catunnaŋ rūpakkhandhassa cā ti pañcannaŋ khandhānaŋ vasena pavattaŋ nāmarūpaŋ DhsA 52: nāmarūpa -- duke nāmakaraṇaṭṭhena nāmaṭṭhena namanaṭṭhena ca nāmaŋ ruppanaṭṭhena rūpaŋ. Cp. D i.223; ii.32, 34, 56, 62; S i.12 (taṇhā nrūpe), 23 (n -- rūpasmiŋ asajjamāna); ii.3, 4, 66 (nrūpassa avakkanti), 101 sq. (id.); M i.53; A i.83, 176; iii.400; iv.385 (˚ārammaṇa); v.51, 56; Sn 355, 537, 756, 909; Dh 367; It 35; Ps i.193; ii.72, 112 sq.; Vbh 294; Nett 15 sq., 28, 69; Miln 46. Nāma+rūpa form an elementary pair D iii.212; Kh iv. Also in the Paṭicca -- samuppāda (q. v.), where it is said to be caused (conditioned) by viññāṇa & to cause saḷāyatana (the 6 senses), D ii.34; Vin i.1 sq.; S ii.6 sq.; Sn 872 (nāmañ ca rūpañca paṭicca phassā; see in detail expld at Nd1 276). Synonymous with nāmarūpa is nāmakāya: Sn 1074; Nd2 338; Ps i.183; Nett 27, 41, 69, 77. <-> In this connection to be mentioned are var. definitions of nāma as the principle or distinguishing mark ("label") of the individual, given by Coms, e. g. Nd1 109, 127; KhA 78; with which cp. Bdhgh's speculation concerning the connotation of nāma mentioned by Mrs. Rh. D. at Dhs. trsl. p. 341. -- 3. Use of Cases. Instr. nāmena by name PvA 1 (Petavatthū ti n.); Mhvs vii.32 (Sirīsavatthu n.). -- acc. nāma (the older form, cp. Sk. nāma) by name S i.33, 235 (Anoma˚); Sn 153, 177; J i.59 (ko nām' esa "who by name is this one"=what is his name), 149 (nāmena Nigrodhamigarājā n.), 203 (kiŋsaddo nāma esa); ii.4; iii.187; vi.364 (kā nāma tvaŋ). See also evaŋnāma, kinnāma; & cp. the foll. -- 4. nāma (acc.) as adv. is used as emphatic particle=just, indeed, for sure, certainly J i.222; ii.133, 160, 326; iii.90; PvA 6, 13, 63 etc. Therefore freq. in exclamation & exhortation ("please," certainly) J vi.367; DhA iii.171; PvA 29 (n. detha do give); in combn with interr. pron.=now, then J i.221 (kiŋ n.), 266 (kathaŋ n.); iii.55 (kiŋ); Kh iv. (ekaŋ n. kiŋ); with neg.=not at all, certainly not J i.222; ii.352; iii.126 etc. -- Often further emphasised or emphasising other part.; e. g. pi (=api) nāma really, just so Vin i.16 (seyyathā p. n.); Sn p. 15 (id.); VvA 22 (read nāma kāro); PvA 76; app' (=api) eva n. thus indeed, forsooth Vin i.16; It 89=M i.460; J i.168; Pv ii.26 (=api nāma PvA 80); eva nāma in truth PvA 2; nāma tāva certainly DhA i.392, etc.
-- kamma giving a name, naming, denomination Dhs 1306; Bdhd 83; -- karaṇa name -- giving, "christening" DhA ii.87; -- gahaṇa receiving a name, "being christened" J i.262 (˚divasa) -- gotta ancestry, lineage S i.43 (˚ŋ na jīrati); Sn 648, Nd2 385 (mātāpettikaŋ n.); -- dheyya assigning a name, name -- giving J iii.305; iv.449; v.496; Dhs 1306. -- pada see pada. -- matta a mere name Miln 25.
Nāmaka (adj.) [fr. nāma] 1. ( -- ˚) by name S ii.282 (Thera˚); PvA 67, 96 (kaṇha˚). -- 2. consisting of a mere name, i. e. mere talk, nonsense, ridiculous D i.240.
Nāmeti at Sn 1143 (Fsb.) is to be read as nâpenti. Otherwise see under namati.
Nāyaka [BSk. nāyaka (cp. anāyaka without guide AvŚ i.210); fr. neti; cp. naya] a leader, guide, lord, mostly as Ep. of the Buddha (loka˚ "Lord of the World") Sn 991 (loka˚); Mhvs vii.1 (id.); Sdhp 491 (tilokassa); bala -- nāyakā gang leaders J i.103.
Nārāca [Sk. nārāca; perhaps for *nāḍāca & conn. with nālīka, a kind of arrow, to nāḷa] an iron weapon, an arrow or javelin M i.429; J iii.322; Miln 105, 244, 418. -- valaya an iron ring or collar (?) Mhvs vii.20 (Com. "vaṭṭita -- assanārāca -- pasa"=a noose formed by bending the ends of the n. into a circle).
Nārī (f.) [Sk. nārī to nara man, orig. "the one belonging to the man"] woman, wife, female Sn 301, 836; Dh 284; J i.60; iii.395; iv.396 (˚gaṇa); Vv 61, 4416; Pv i.91 (=itthi PvA 44). pl. nariyo (Sn 299, 304, 703), & nāriyo (Sn 703 v. l. BB; Pv ii.952). Combd with nara as naranārī, male & female (angels), e. g. Vv 538; Pv ii.112 (see nara).
Nāla & Nāḷa (nt.) [Sk. nāla, see nala] a hollow stalk, esp. that of the water lily A iv.169; J i.392 (˚pana v. l. ˚vana); VvA 43. See also nāḷikā & nālī.
Nālaŋ (adv.) [=na alaŋ] not enough, insufficient It 37; J i.190; DA i.167.
Nāḷikā (f.) [Sk. nāḍikā & nālikā] a stalk, shaft; a tube, pipe or cylinder for holding anything; a small measure of capacity Vin ii.116 (sūci˚, cp. sūcighara, needle -- case); D i.7 (=bhesajja˚ DA i.89); A i.210; J i.123 (taṇḍula˚ a nāḷi full of rice); vi.366 (aḍḍha -- n -- matta); Nd2 229. Cp. pa˚.
-- odana a nāḷi measure of boiled rice S i.82; DhA iv.17; -- gabbha an (inner) room of tubular shape Vin ii.152.
Nāḷikera [Sk. nārikera, nārikela, nalikera, nālikela: dialect, of uncertain etym.] the coconut tree Vv 4413; J iv.159; v.384; DA i.83; VvA 162.
Nāḷikerika (adj.) belonging to the coconut tree J v.417.
Nāḷī (f.) & (in cpds.) nāḷi [Sk. nāḍī, see nala] a hollow stalk, tube, pipe; also a measure of capacity Vin i.249; A iii.49; J i.98 (suvaṇṇa˚), 124 (taṇḍula˚), 419; iii.220 (kaṇḍa˚ a quiver); iv.67; DhA ii.193 (tela˚), 257. Cp. pa˚.
-- paṭṭa a covering for the head, a cap J vi.370, 444 (text ˚vaṭṭa); -- matta as much as a tube holds A ii.199; PvA 283; DhA ii.70; J i.419 (of aja -- laṇḍikā).
Nāvā (f.) [Ved. nāuḥ & nāvā, Gr. nau_s, Lat. navis] a boat, ship Vin iii.49 (q. v. for definition & description); S i.106 (eka -- rukkhikā); iii.155=v.51=A iv.127 (sāmuddikā "a liner"); A ii.200; iii.368; Sn 321, 770, 771; Dh 369 (metaphor of the human body); J i.239; ii.112; iii.126; 188; iv.2, 21, 138; v.75 (with "500" passengers), 433; vi.160 (=nāvyā canal? or read nālaŋ?); Vv 61 (=pota VvA 42, with pop. etym. "satte netī ti nāvā ti vuccati"); Pv iii.35 (=doṇi PvA 189); Miln 261 (100 cubits long); Dāvs iv.42; PvA 47, 53; Sdhp 321. In simile Vism 690.
-- tittha a ferry J iii.230; -- sañcaraṇa (a place for) the traffic of boats, a port Miln 359.
Nāvāyika [Sk. nāvāja=Gr. nauhgo/s, cp. Lat. navigo] a mariner, sailor, skipper Miln 365.
Nāvika [Sk. nāvika] 1. a sailor, mariner J ii.103; iv.142; Miln 359; Dāvs iv.43 (captain). -- 2. a ferryman J ii.111; iii.230 (Avariya -- pitā.).
Nāvutika (adj.) [fr. navuti] 90 years old J iii.395 (˚ā itthi); SnA 172.
Nāsa [Sk. nāśa, see nassati] destruction, ruin, death J i.5, 256; Sdhp 58, 319. Usually vi˚, also adj. vināsaka. Cp. panassati.
Nāsana (nt.) [Sk. nāśana] destruction, abandoning, ex- pulsion, in ˚antika (adj.) a bhikkhu who is under the penalty of expulsion Vin i.255.
Nāsā (f.) [Vedic nāsā (du.); Lat. nāris, Ohg. nasa, Ags. nasu] 1. the nose, Sn 198, 608. -- 2. the trunk (of an elephant) J v.297 (nāga˚ -- uru); Sdhp 153.
-- puṭa "nose -- cup"; the outside of the nose, the nostril J vi.74; Vism 195 (nāsa˚), 264 (nāsa˚, but KhA 67 nāsā˚), 283 (nāsa˚). -- vāta wind, i. e. breath from the nostrils J iii.276.
Nāsika (adj.) [cp. Sk. nāsikya] belonging to the nose, nasal, in ˚sota the nostril or nose (orig. "sense of smell") D i.106; Sn p. 108.
Nāsitaka (adj.) [see nāsa & nāseti] one who is ejected Vin iv.140 (of a bhikkhu).
Nāseti [Sk. nāśayati, Caus. of nassati, q. v.] 1. to destroy, spoil, ruin; to kill J i.59; ii.105, 150; iii.279, 418. <-> 2. to atone for a fault (with abl.) Vin i.85, 86, 173 etc. <-> Cp. vi˚.
Nāha (nt.) [cp. nayhati, naddha] armour J i.358 (sabba˚- sannaddha). Cp. onāha.
Ni˚ [Sk. ni -- & nih -- , insep. prefixes: (a) ni down=Av. ni, cp. Gr. neio/s lowland, nei/atos the lowest, hindmost; Lat. nīdus (*ni -- zdos: place to sit down=nest); Ags. nēol, nider=E. nether; Goth. nidar=Ohg. nidar; also Sk. nīca, nīpa etc. -- (b) niḥ out, prob. fr. *seni & to Lat. sine without]. Nearly all (ultimately prob. all) words under this heading are cpds. with the pref. ni. <-> A. Forms. 1. Pāli ni˚ combines the two prefixes ni & nis (nir). They are outwardly to be distinguished inasmuch as ni is usually followed by a single consonant (except in forms where double cons. is usually restored in composition, like ni -- kkhipati=ni+kṣip; nissita= ni+sri. Sometimes the double cons. is merely graphic or due to analogy, esp. in words where ni -- is contrasted with ud -- ("up"), as nikkujja>ukkujja, niggilati> uggilati, ninnamati>unnamati). On the other hand a compn with nis is subject to the rules of assimilation, viz. either doubling of cons. (nibbhoga=nir -- bhoga) where vv is represented by bb (nibbiṇṇa fr. nir -- vindati), or lengthening of ni to nī (nīyādeti as well as niyy˚; nīharati=nir+har), or single cons. in the special cases of r & v (niroga besides nīroga for nirroga, cp. duratta >dūrakkha; niveṭheti=nibbeṭheti, nivāreti=*nivvāreti=nīvāreti). Before a vowel the sandhi -- cons. r is restored: nir -- aya, nir -- upadhi etc. -- 2. Both ni & nis are base -- prefixes only, & of stable, well -- defined character, i. e. never enter combns with other prefixes as first (modifying) components in verb -- function (like saŋ, vi etc.), although nis occurs in such combn in noun -- cpds. negating the whole term: nir -- upadhi, nis -- saŋsaya etc. <-> 3. ni is freq. emphasised by saŋ as saŋni˚ (tud, dhā, pat, sad); nis most freq. by abhi as abhinis˚ (nam, pad, vatt, har).
B. Meanings. 1. ni (with secondary derivations like nīca "low") is a verb -- pref. only, i. e. it characterises action with respect to its direction, which is that of (a) a downward motion (opp. abhi & ud); (b) often implying the aim (=down into, on to, cp. Lat. sub in subire, or pref. ad˚); or (c) the reverting of an upward motion=back (identical with b); e. g. (a) ni -- dhā (put down), ˚kkhip (throw d.), ˚guh (hide d.), ˚ci (heap up), ˚pad (fall d.), ˚sad (sit d.); (b) ni -- ratta (at -- tached to), ˚mant (speak to); ˚yuj (ap -- point), ˚ved (ad -- dress), ˚sev (be devoted to) etc.; (c) ni -- vatt (turn back). -- 2. nis (a) as verb -- pref. it denotes the directional "out" with further development to "away from, opposite, without," pointing out the finishing, completion or vanishing of an action & through the latter idea often assuming the meaning of the reverse, disappearance or contrary of an action="un" (Lat. dis -- ), e. g. nikkhamati (to go out from) opp. pavisati (to enter into), ˚ccharati (nis to car to go forth), ˚ddhamati (throw out), ˚pajjati (result from), ˚bbattati (vatt spring out from), nīharati (take out), nirodhati (break up, destroy). -- (b) as nounpref. it denotes "being without" or "not having"= E. -- less, e. g. niccola without clothes, ˚ttaṇha (without thirst), ˚ppurisa (without a man), ˚pphala (without fruit); niccala motion -- less, ˚kkaruṇa (heartless), ˚ddosa (fault˚), ˚maŋsa (flesh˚), ˚saŋsaya (doubt˚) nirattha (useless), ˚bbhaya (fear˚). -- Bdhgh evidently takes ni -- in meaning of nis only, when defining: ni -- saddo abhāvaŋ dīpeti Vism 495.
Nikacca see nikati.
Nikaṭṭha (adj.) [cp. Sk. nikṛṣṭa, ni+kasati] brought down, debased, low. As one kind of puggala (n -- kāya+ncitta) A ii.137. loc. nikaṭṭhe (adv.) near J iii.438= ThA 105 (v. 33) (=santike J iii.438).
Nikaṇṇika (adj.) under (4) ears, secret, cp. catukkaṇṇa J iii.124; nt. adv. secretly Vin iv.270, 271.
Nikata (adj.) [Sk. nikṛta, ni+karoti "done down"] deceived, cheated M i.511 (+vañcita paladdha); S iv.307 (+vañcita paluddha).
Nikati (f.) [Sk. nikṛti, see prec.] fraud, deceit, cheating D i.5 (=DA i.80 paṭirūpakena vañcanaŋ); iii.176; Sn 242 (=nirāsaŋ -- karaṇaŋ SnA 286); J i.223; Pv iii.95 (+vañcana); Pug 19, 23, 58; VvA 114; PvA 211 (paṭirūpadassanena paresaŋ vikāro). -- instr. nikatiyā (metri causa) J i.223, nikatyā J ii.183, nikacca S i.24. Cp. nekatika.
Nikanta (adj.) [Sk. nikṛtta & nikṛntita (cp. Divy 537, 539), ni+kantati2] cut, (ab -- )razed M i.364 (of a fleshless bone).
Nikantati [Sk. ni -- kṛṇtati, see kantati2] to cut down, to cut up, cut off PvA 210 (piṭṭhi -- maŋsāni the flesh of the back, v. l. SS for ukkant˚); Pgdp 29.
Nikanti (f.) [Sk. nikānti, ni+kamati] desire, craving, longing for, wish Th 1, 20; Ps ii.72, 101; Dhs 1059, 1136; Vism 239, 580; DhsA 369; DhA iv.63; DA i.110; Dāvs iii.40.
Nikara [Sk. nikara, ni+karoti] a multitude Dāvs v.25 (jātipuppha˚).
Nikaraṇā (f. or is it ˚aŋ?)=nikati (fraud) Pug 19, 23 (as syn. of māyā).
Nikaroti [Sk. nikaroti, ni+karoti] to bring down, humiliate, to deceive, cheat Sn 138 (nikubbetha Pot.=vañceyya KhA 247). pp. nikata (q. v.).
Nikasa [Sk. nikasa, ni+kasati] a whetstone Dāvs iii.87 (˚opala).
Nikasāva (adj.) [Sk. niṣkaṣāya nis+kasāva see kasāya 2d] free from impurity Vin i.3; opp. anikkasāva (q. v.) Dh 9≈.
Nikāma [Vedic nikāma, ni+kāma] desire, pleasure, longing: only in cpds.; see nanikāma.
-- kāra read by Kern (Toev. 174) at Th 1, 1271 for na kāmakāra but unjustified (see SnA on Sn 351); -- lābhin gaining pleasure S ii.278; M i.354; iii.110; A ii.23, 36; Pug 11, 12; Vbh 332.
Nikāmanā (f.)=nikanti, Dhs 1059.
Nikāmeti [Sk. ni -- kāmayati, ni+kāmeti] to crave, desire, strive after, ppr nikāmayaŋ S i.122, & nikāmayamāna Vin ii.108. Cp. nikanta & nikanti.
Nikāya [Sk. nikāya, ni+kāya] collection ("body") assem- blage, class, group; 1. generally (always -- ˚): eka˚ one class of beings DhsA 66; tiracchāna˚ the animal kingdom S iii.152; deva˚ the assembly of the gods, the gods D ii.261 (60); M i.102; S iv. 180; A iii.249; iv.461; PvA 136; satta˚ the world of beings, the animate creation, a class of living beings S ii.2, 42, 44; M i.49 (tesaŋ tesaŋ sattānaŋ tamhi tamhi s. -- nikāye of all beings in each class); Vbh 137; PvA 134. -- 2. especially the coll. of Buddhist Suttas, as the 5 sections of the Suttanta Piṭaka, viz. Dīgha˚, Majjhima˚, Saŋyutta˚, Anguttara˚ (referred to as D.M.S.A. in Dictionaryquotations), Khuddaka˚; enumd PvA 2; Anvs p. 35; DhA ii.95 (dhammāsanaŋ āruyha pañcahi nikāyehi atthañ ca kāraṇañ ca ākaḍḍhitvā). The five Nikāyas are enumd also at Vism 711; one is referred to at SnA 195 (pariyāpuṇāti master by heart). See further details under piṭaka. Cp. nekāyika.
Nikāra [Sk. nikāra in diff. meaning, ni+kāra] service, humility J iii.120 (nikāra -- pakāra, prob. to be read nipaccākāra, q. v.).
Nikāsa (n. -- adj.) [ni+kaś] appearance; adj. of appearance, like J v.87 ( -- ˚), corresp. to ˚avakāsa.
Nikāsin (adj.) [cp. Sk. nikāśin; fr. ni+kāsati] "shining," resembling, like J iii.320 (aggi -- nikāsinā suriyena).
Nikiṇṇa (adj.) [Sk. *nikīrṇa, pp. ni+kirati, cp. kiraṇa] "strewn down into," hidden away, sheltered J iii.529.
Nikiḷita (adj.) [Sk. *nikrīḍita, pp. of nikrīḍayati, ni+ kīḷati] engrossed in play J vi.313.
Nikīḷitāvin (adj.) [fr. ni -- kīḷati] playful, playing or dallying with (c. loc.), finding enjoyment in S i.9 (a˚ kāmesu); iv.110 (id.).
Nikujja see nikkujja, q. v. also for nikujjita which is more correctly spelt k than kk (cp. Trenckner, Preface to Majjhima Nikāya & see ni˚ A 1).
Nikujjati [ni+kujjati, see kujja & cp. nikkujja] to be bent down on, i. e. to attach importance to, to lay weight on D i.53 (as vv. ll. to be preferred to text reading nikkujj˚, cp. nikujja); DA i.160 (nikk˚).
Nikuñja [Sk. nikuñja, ni+kuñja] a hollow down, a glen, thicket Dāvs iv.32.
Nikūjati [ni+kūjati "to sing on"] 1. to chirp, warble, hum Th 1, 1270 (nikūjaŋ); ThA 211 (nikūji). -- 2. to twang, jingle, rustle J iii.323. -- pp. nikūjita. -- Cp. abhi˚.
Nikūjita [see nikūjati] sung forth, warbled out Th 2, 261.
Nikūṭa [ni+kūṭa to kūṭa2] a corner, top, climax J i.278 (arahatta˚, where usually arahattena kūṭaŋ etc.); DA i.307 (id.).
Niketa [Sk. niketa settlement, ni+cināti] 1. house, abode Dh 91 (=ālaya DhA ii.170). -- 2. (fig.) company, association. (In this sense it seems to be interpreted as belonging to ketu "sign, characteristic, mark," and niketa -- sārin would have to be taken as "following the banner or flag of . . .," i. e. belonging or attached to, i. e. a follower of, one who is devoted to.) a˚ not living in company, having no house Sn 207; Miln 244 (+nirālaya).
-- vāsin (a˚) not living in a house, not associating with anybody Miln 201; -- sayana=˚vāsin Miln 361; -- sārin (a˚) "wandering homeless" or "not living in company," i. e. not associating with, not a follower of . . . S iii.9 sq.=Nd1 198; Sn 844=S iii.9; SnA 255=S iii.10; Sn 970 (=Nd1 494 q. v.).
Niketavant (adj.) [to niketa] parting company with Miln 288 (kamma˚).
Niketin (adj.) having an abode, being housed, living in Sn 422 (kosalesu); J iii.432 (duma -- sākhā -- niketinī f.).
Nikkankha (adj.) [Sk. niḥśanka, nis+kankha, adj. of kankhā, cp. kankhin] not afraid, fearless, not doubting, confident, sure J i.58. Cp. nissaŋsaya.
Nikkankhā (f.) [Sk. niḥśankā, nis+kankhā] fearlessness, state of confidence, trust (cp. nibbicikicchā) S v.221.
Nikkaḍḍhati [Sk. niṣkarṣati, nis+kasati, cp. kaḍḍhati] to throw out Vin iv.274 (Caus. nikkaḍḍhāpeti ibid.); J i.116; ii.440; SnA 192. pp. nikkaḍḍhita.
Nikkaḍḍhanā (f.) throwing out, ejection J iii.22 (a˚); v.234. (=niddhamanā).
Nikkaḍḍhita (adj.) [Sk. *niṣkarṣita see nikkaḍḍhati] thrown out J ii.103 (gehā); PvA 179 (read ḍḍh for ḍḍ).
Nikkaṇṭaka (adj.) [Sk. niṣkaṇṭaka, nis+kaṇṭaka] free from thorns or enemies Miln 250; cp. akaṇṭaka.
Nikkaddama (adj.) [nis+kaddama] unstained, not dirty, free from impunity DA i.226.
Nikkama (n. -- adj.) [Sk. niṣkrama; nis+kama] exertion, strength, endurance. The orig. meaning of "going forth" is quite obliterated by the fig. meaning (cp. nikkhamati & nekkhamma) A i.4; iii.214; Vv 187 (=viriya VvA 96); Dhs 13, 22, 219, 571; Vism 132; Miln 244 (+ārambha). -- (adj.) strong in ( -- ˚), enduring, exerting oneself S i.194 (tibba˚); v.66, 104 sq.; Sn 68 (daḷha˚, cp. Nd2 under padhānavā), 542 (sacca˚).
Nikkamati [Sk. niṣkramati, nis+kamati, see also nikkha- mati & nekkhamma] to go out, to go forth; in fig. meaning: to leave behind lust, evil & the world, to get rid of "kāma" (craving), to show right exertion & strength Miln 245 (+arabhati)+S i.156 (kkh).
Nikkaya [cp. Sk. niṣkraya, nis+kaya cp. nikkiṇāti] "buying off," redemption J vi.577.
Nikkaruṇa (adj.) [nis+karuṇa, adj. of karuṇā] without compassion, heartless Sn 244 (=sattānaŋ anatthakāma); Sdhp 508.
Nikkarunatā (f.)=following Vism 314.
Nikkaruṇā (f.) [Sk. niṣkaruṇatā; nis+karuṇā] heartless- ness PvA 55.
Nikkasāva see nikasāva.
Nikkāma (adj.) [Sk. niṣkāma, nis+kāma] without craving or lust, desireless Sn 1131 (=akāmakāmin Nd2 340; pahīnakāma SnA 605 with v. l.: nikkāma). Cp. next.
Nikkāmin (adj.) [nis+kāmin]=nikkāma Sn 228 (=kata- nikkhamana KhA 184).
Nikkāraṇā (abl.=adv.) [Sk. niṣkāraṇā, nis+kāraṇaŋ] without reason, without cause or purpose Sn 75 (=akāraṇā ahetu Nd2 341).
Nikkāsa is Bdhgh's reading for ikkāsa (q. v.) Vin ii.151, with C. on p. 321.
Nikkiṇati [Sk. niṣkriṇāti, nis+kiṇāti] to buy back, to redeem J vi.576, 585; Miln 284.
Nikkiṇṇa (adj.) [Sk. niṣkīrṇa, nis+kiṇṇa, see kiraṇa] spread out, spread before, ready (for eating) J vi.182 (=ṭhapita Com.).
Nikkilesa [nis+kilesa] freedom fr. moral blemish Nd1 340=Nd2 under pucchā Nd2 185; as adj. pure, unstained DhA iv.192=SnA 469 (=anāvila).
Nikkujja (adj.) [ni+kubja, better spelling is nikujja see nikkujjati] bent down, i. e. head forward, lying on one's face; upset, thrown over A i.130; S v.48; Pv iv.77 (k); Pug 31. Opp. ukkujja.
Nikkujjati [for nikujjati (q. v.) through analogy with opp. ukkujjati. Etym. perhaps to kujja humpback, Sk. kubja, but better with Kern, Toev. 1. p. 175= Sk. nyubjati, influenced by kubja with regard to k.] to turn upside down, to upset Vin ii.113; A iv.344 (pattaŋ). <-> pp. nikkujjita.
Nikkujjita (adj.) [pp. of nikkujjati; often (rightly) spelt nikujjita, q. v.] lying face downward, overturned, upset, fallen over, stumbled Vin i.16; D i.85, 110; 147, M i.24 (k.); A i.173; iii.238; Th 2, 28, 30 (k.); J iii.277; SnA 155 (=adhomukha -- ṭhapita); DA i.228.
Nikkuha (adj.) [nis+kuha] without deceit, not false A ii.26=It 113; Sn 56; Nd2 342.
Nikkodha (adj.) [nis+kodha] without anger, free from anger J iv.22.
Nikkha (m. & nt.) [Vedic niṣka; cp. Oir. nasc (ring), Ohg. nusca (bracelet)] 1. a golden ornament for neck or breast, a ring J ii.444; vi.577. -- 2. (already Vedic) a golden coin or a weight of gold (cp. a "pound sterling"), equal to 15 suvaṇṇas (VvA 104=suvaṇṇassa pañcadasa -- dharaṇaŋ nikkhan ti vadanti) S ii.234 (suvaṇṇa˚ & singi˚); J i.84 (id.); A iv.120 (suvaṇṇa˚); Vv 208= 438 (v. l. SS nekkha) J vi.180; Miln 284. suvaṇṇanikkha -- sataŋ (100 gold pieces) J i.376; iv.97; v.58; ˚sahassaŋ (1000) J v.67; DhA i.393. -- See also nekkha.
Nikkhanta (adj.) [pp. of nis+kamati, see nikkhamati] gone out, departed from (c. abl.), gone away; also med. going out, giving up, fig. leaving behind, resigning, renouncing (fusing in meaning with kanta1 of kāmyati =desireless) S i.185 (agārasmā anagāriyaŋ); Sn 991 (Kapilavatthumhā n. lokanāyako); J i.149; ii.153; iv.364 (˚bhikkhā, in sense of nikkhāmita˚, v. l. nikkhitta˚, perhaps preferable, expld p. 366 nibaddha˚= designed for, given to); SnA 605 (fig.; as v. l. for nikkāma); DhA ii.39; PvA 61 (bahi); Nd2 under nissita; Nd2 107 (free, unobstructed).
Nikkhama (adj.) [cp. Sk. niṣkrama] going out from PvA 80 (nāsikāya n. -- mala). dun˚ at Th 1, 72 is to be read dunnikkhaya, as indicated by vv. ll. See the latter.
Nikkhamati [Sk. niṣkramati, nis+kamati] to go forth from, to come out of (c. abl.), to get out, issue forth, depart, fig. to leave the household life behind (agārā n.), to retire from the world (cp. abhinikkhamati etc.), or to give up evil desire. -- (a) lit. (often with bahi outside, out; opp. pavisati to enter into: A v.195). D ii.14 (mātu kucchismā); J i.52 (mātukucchito). Imper. nikkhama Pv. i.103; ppr. nikkhamanto J i.52; ii.153; iii.26 (mukhato); PvA 90; aor. nikkhami J ii.154; iii.188; fut. ˚issati J ii.154; ger. nikkhamma J i.51, 61 (fig.) & nikkhamitvā J i.16, 138 (fig.), 265; iii.26; iv.449 (n. pabbajissāmi); PvA 14, 19 (fig.) 67 (gāmato), 74 (id.); inf. nikkhamituŋ J i.61 (fig.); ii.104; Pv i.102 (bahi n.); grd. nikkhamitabba Vin i.47. <-> (b) fig. (see also nikkamati, & cp. nekkhamma & BSk. niṣkramati in same meaning, e. g. Divy 68 etc.) S i.156 (ārabbhati+)=Miln 245 (where nikkamati); J i.51 (agārā), 61 (mahābhinikkhamanaŋ "the great renunciation"), PvA 19 (id.). -- pp. nikkhanta; caus. nikkhameti (q. v.).
Nikkhamana [BSk. niṣkramaṇa, to nikkhamati] going out, departing J ii.153; VvA 71 (opp. pavesana); fig. renunciation KhA 184 (kata˚ as adj.=nikkāmin). See also abhi˚.
Nikkhameti & Nikkhāmeti [Caus. of nikkhamati] to make go out or away, to bring out or forth S ii.128; J i.264, ii.112. -- pp. nikkhāmita J iii.99 (+nicchuddha, thrown out, in expln of nibbāpita; v. l. BB. nikaḍhāpita).
Nikkhaya (adj.) [Sk. *niḥkṣaya, nis+khaya] liable to destruction, able to be destroyed, in dun˚ hard to destroy J iv.449 (=dun -- nikkaḍḍhiya Com.); also to be read (v. l.) at Th 1, 72 for dunnikkhama. Cp. nikhīṇa.
Nikkhitta (adj.) [Sk. nikṣipta, see nikkhipati] laid down, lying; put down into, set in, arranged; in cpds. (˚ -- ) having laid down=freed of, rid of D ii.14 (maṇi -- ratanaŋ vatthe n. set into); It 13 (sagge: put into heaven); J i.53, 266; Pv iii.68; Miln 343 (agga˚ put down as the highest, i. e. of the highest praise; cp. BSk. agranikṣipta Lal. V. 167); PvA 148 (dhana n.= collected, v. l. SS. nikkita). nikkhitta -- daṇḍa (adj.) not using a weapon (cp. daṇḍa) S i.141 etc.; nikkhitta -- dhura unyoked, freed of the yoke A i.71; iii.108; cp. DhsA 145; -- su˚ well set, well arranged A ii.147 sq. (˚assa pada -- vyañjanassa attho sunnayo hoti); opp. dun˚ A i.59; Nett 21.
Nikkhittaka (adj. -- n.) [fr. nikkhitta] one to whose charge something has been committed Dpvs iv.5 (agga˚ thera: original depositary of the Faith).
Nikkhipati [Sk. nikṣipati, ni+khipati] 1. to lay down (carefully), to put down, to lay (an egg) Vin ii.114; It 13, 14 (Pot. nikkhipeyya); Pug 34; J i.49 (aṇḍakaŋ). -- 2. to lay aside, to put away Vin i.46 (patta -- cīvaraŋ); A i.206 (daṇḍaŋ to discard the weapon; see daṇḍa); Mhvs 14, 10 (dhanu -- saraŋ). -- 3. to eliminate, get rid of, give up Pv ii.615 (dehaŋ to get rid of the body); DhsA 344 (vitthāra -- desanaŋ). -- 4. to give in charge, to deposit, entrust, save Pug 26; VvA 33 (sahassathavikaŋ). -- aor. nikkhipi D ii.161 (Bhagavato sarīraŋ) J ii.104, 111, 416; fut. ˚issati D ii.157 (samussayaŋ); ger. ˚itvā M iii.156 (cittaŋ); J ii.416; vi.366; grd. ˚itabba Vin i.46. -- pp. nikkhitta (q. v.). -- Caus. nikkhipāpeti to cause to be laid down, to order to be put down etc. PvA 215 (gosīsaṭṭhiŋ). Cp. abhi˚.
Nikkhepa [Sk. nikṣepa, see nikkhipati] putting down, laying down; casting off, discarding, elimination; giving up, renunciation; abstract or summary treatment DhsA 6, 344 (see under mātikā); in grammar: pada˚ the setting of the verse; i. e. rules of composition (Miln 381). Vin i.16 (pādukānaŋ=the putting down of the slippers, i.e. the slippers as they were, put down); J iii.243 (dhura˚ giving up one's office or charge), i.236 (sarīra ˚ŋ kāresi had the body laid out); Dpvs xvii.109 (id.). Vism 618 (=cuti); DhA ii.98 (sarīra˚); DA i.50 (sutta˚); DhsA 344; Miln 91.
Nikkhepana (nt.)=nikkhepa S iii.26 (bhāra˚ getting rid of the load, opp. bhārâdānaŋ); Miln 356 (=comparison); Vism 236 (deha˚).
Nikhanati & Nikhaṇati [Sk. nikhanati, ni+khanati] to dig into, to bury, to erect, to cover up Vin ii.116; iii.78 (akkhiŋ=cover the eye, as a sign); J v.434=DhA iv.197 (id.); D ii.127 (ṇ); J i.264; SnA 519 (ṇ, to bury). -- pp. nikhāta.
Nikhāta [pp. of nikhaṇati] 1. dug, dug out (of a hole), buried (of a body) SnA 519. -- 2. dug in, erected (of a post) Sn 28; DhA ii.181 (nagara -- dvāre n. indakhīla). See also a˚.
Nikhādana (nt.) [Sk. *nikhādana, ni+khādati, cp. khā- dana] "eating down," a sharp instrument, a spade or (acc. to Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 83) a chisel Vin iii.149; iv.211; J ii.405 (so read for khādana); iv.344; v.45.
Nikhila (adj.) [Sk. nikhila cp. khila] all, entire, whole Dāvs v.40 (˚loka v. l. sakala˚).
Nikhīṇa (adj.) [nis+khīṇa] having or being lost J vi.499 (˚patta without wings, deprived of its wings).
Niga in gavaya -- gokaṇṇa -- nig -- âdīnaŋ DhsA 331 is mis- print for miga.
Nigacchati [Sk. nigacchati, ni+gacchati] to go down to, to "undergo," incur, enter, come to; to suffer esp. with dukkhaŋ & similar expressions of affliction or punishment S iv.70 (dukkhaŋ); M i.337 sq. (id.); A i.251 (bandhanaŋ); Dh 69 (dukkhaŋ=vindati, paṭilabhati DhA ii.50), 137; Nd2 1994 (maraṇaŋ+maraṇamattam pi dukkhaŋ) Pv iv.77 (pret. nigacchiṭṭha=pāpuṇi PvA 266).
Nigaṇṭha [BSk. nirgrantha (Divy 143, 262 etc.) "freed from all ties," nis+gaṇṭhi. This is the customary (correct?) etym. Prk. niggantha, cp. Weber, Bhagavatī p. 165] a member of the Jain order (see M i.370 -- 375, 380 & cp. jaṭila) Vin i.233 (Nātaputta, the head of that Order, cp. D i.57; also Sīho senāpati n -- sāvako); S i.78, 82 (˚bhikkhā); A i.205 sq. (˚uposatha), cp. 220; ii.196 (˚sāvaka); iii.276, 383; v.150 (dasahi asaddhammehi samannāgata); Sn 381; Ud 65 (jaṭilā, n., acelā, ekasātā, paribbājakā); J ii.262 (object to eating flesh); DA i.162; DhA i.440; iii.489; VvA 29 (n. nāma samaṇajāti). -- f. nigaṇṭhī D i.54 (nigaṇṭhi -- gabbha).
Nigati (f.) [ni+gati, q. v.] destiny, condition, behaviour J vi.238. See also niyati & cp. niggatika.
Nigama [Sk. nigama, fr. nigacchati=a meeting -- place or market, cp. E. moot -- hall=market hall] a small town, market town (opp. janapada); often combd with gāma (see gāma 2) Vin i.110 (˚sīma), 188 (˚kathā), 197 (Setakaṇṇika˚); D i.7 (˚kathā), 101 (˚sāmanta), 193, 237; M i.429, 488; Pv ii.1318; J vi.330; PvA 111 (Asitañjana˚, v. l. BB nagara). Cp. negama.
Nigamana (nt.) [Sk. nigamana] quotation, explanation, illustration Vism 427 (˚vacana quotation); PvA 255 (perhaps we should read niyamana); conclusion, e. g. Paṭṭh.A 366; VbhA 523.
Nigaḷa [Sk. nigaḍa, ni+gaḷa, cp. gala3] an (iron) chain for the feet J i.394; ii.153; vi.64 (here as "bracelet").
Nigāḷhika (better v. l. nigāḷhita) [Sk. nigāḍhita; ni+ gāḍhita, see gāḷha2] sunk down into, immersed in Th 1, 568 (gūthakūpe).
Nigūḷha [Sk. nigūḍha, but BSk. nirgūḍha (Divy 256); ni+gūḷha] hidden (down), concealed; (n.) a secret J i.461; Dāvs iii.39.
Nigūhati [Sk. nigūhati, ni+gūhati] to cover up, conceal, hide J i.286; iii.392; iv.203; Pv.iii.43 (≈parigūhāmi, v. l. SS guyhāmi). pp. nigūḷha (q. v.).
Nigūhana (nt.) [Sk. nigūhana, see nigūhati] covering, concealing, hiding VvA 71.
Niggacchati [Sk. nirgacchati, nis+gacchati] to go out or away, disappear; to proceed from, only in pp. niggata (q. v.); at J vi.504 as ni˚.
Niggaṇṭhi (adj.) [Sk. nirgranthi, nis+gaṇṭhi, cp. also nigaṇṭha] free from knots (said of a sword) Miln 105. See also nighaṇḍu.
Niggaṇhāti [Sk. nigṛhṇāti, ni+gaṇhāti] 1. to hold back, restrain Dh 326; J iv.97; Miln 184; Vism 133. -- Opp. paggaṇhāti. -- 2. to rebuke, censure (c. instr.) A iii.187; J iii.222; Miln 9 (musāvādena); DhA i.29. <-> ger. niggayha, pp. niggahīta (q. v.). Cp. abhi˚.
Niggata (adj.) [Sk. nirgata, see niggacchati] 1. going out, proceeding from (abl.): dahato niggatā nadī (a river issuing from a lake) PvA 152. -- 2. (= nigata? or=nis+gata "of ill fate") destined, fateful; miserable, unfortunate PvA 223 (˚kamma=punishment in expln of niyassa kamma, v. l. SS. nigaha for niggata; see also niya & niyata); Sdhp 165 (of niraya=miserable), cp. niggatika & niggamana.
Niggatika [Sk. *nirgatika, nis+gati -- ka] having a bad "gati" or fate, ill -- fated, bad, unfortunate, miserable J iii.538 (v. l. BB as gloss, nikkāruṇika); iv.48 (v. l. BB nikatika).
Niggama (n.) in logic, deduction, conclusion. Pts. of Controversy p. 1.
Niggamana [Sk. *nirgamana, of niggacchati] 1. going away DA i.94. -- 2. result, fate, consequence, outcome Sdhp 172, 173 (dun˚). -- 3. (log.) conclusion Kvu 4.
Niggayha -- vādin (adj.) [see niggaṇhāti] one who speaks rebukingly, censuring, reproving, resenting Dh 76 (see expln in detail at DhA ii.107 & cp. M iii.118).
Niggayhati [Sk. nigṛhyate, ni+gayhati, Pass. of niggaṇ- hāti] to be seized by (?), to be blamed for DhA i.295 (cittaŋ dukkhena n., in expln of dunniggaha).
Niggaha [Sk. nigraha, ni+gaha2; see niggaṇhāti] 1. restraint, control, rebuke, censure, blame Vin ii.196; A i.98, 174; v.70; J v.116 (opp. paggaha); vi.371 (id.); Miln 28, 45, 224. -- dun˚ hard to control (citta) Dh 35 (cp. expl. at DhA i.295). -- 2. (log.) refutation Kvu 3.
Niggahaṇa (adj.) [Sk. *nirgahaṇa, cp. nirgṛha homeless; nis+gahaṇa] without acquisitions, i. e. poor J ii.367 (v. l. BB. as gloss nirāhāra).
Niggahaṇatā (f.) [abstr. fr. ni+gṛh, cp. next] restraint Vism 134 (cittassa). Opp. pagg˚.
Niggahīta (adj.) [Sk. nigṛhīta, but cp. Divy 401: nigṛhīta; ni+gahita] restrained, checked, rebuked, reproved S iii.12; A i.175 (aniggahīto dhammo); J vi.493.
Niggāhaka (adj. -- n.) [ni+gāhaka, see niggaṇhāti] one who rebukes, oppresses, oppressor Sn 118 (=bādhaka SnA 178, with v. l. ghātaka); J iv.362 (=balisādhaka Com.).
Niggilati (niggalati) [Sk. nigirati, ni+gilati] to swallow down (opp. uggilati to spit out, throw up) J iv.392 (sic as v. l.; text niggalati).
Nigguṇa (adj.) [Sk. nirguṇa, nis+guṇa] devoid of good qualities, bad Miln 180.
Nigguṇḍi (f.) [Sk. nirguṇḍī, of obscure etym.] a shrub (Vitex Negundo) Miln 223 (˚phala); Vism 257 (˚puppha).
Niggumba (adj.) [Sk. *nirgulma, nis+gumba] free from bushes, clear J i.187; Miln 3.
Nigghātana (nt.) [Sk. nirghātana, nis+ghātana, but cp. nighāta] destruction, killing, rooting out Sn 1085 (taṇhā˚; SnA 576=vināsana); Nd2 343 (v. l. nighātana).
Nigghosa [Sk. nirghoṣa, nis+ghosa] 1. "shouting out," sound; fame, renown; speech, utterance, proclamation; word of reproach, blame S i.190; A iv.88 (appa˚ noiseless, lit. of little or no noise); Sn 719, 818 (=nindāvacana SnA 537), 1061; J i.64; vi.83; Vv 55; Nd1 150; Nd2 344; Dhs 621; VvA 140 (madhura˚); 334 (in quotation appa -- sadda, appa˚); Sdhp 245. -- 2. (adj.) noiseless, quiet, still Sn 959 (=appasadda appanigghosa Nd1 467).
Nigrodha [Sk. nyagrodha; Non -- Aryan?] the banyan or Indian fig -- tree, Ficus Indica, usually as cpd. ˚rukkha Vin iv.35; D ii.4; Sn 272; J iii.188 (r.) DhA ii.14 (r.); PvA 5 (r.) 112, 244; Sdhp 270; -- pakka the fruit of the fig -- tree Vism 409. -- parimaṇḍala the round or circumference of the banyan D ii.18; iii.144, 162.
Nigha1 (nīgha) (adj. -- n.) is invented by Com. & scholiasts to explain the combn anigha (anīgha sporadic, e. g. S v.57). But this should be divided an -- īgha instead of a -- nīgha. -- (m.) rage, trembling, confusion, only in formula rāgo n. doso n. moho n. explaining the adj. anīgha. Thus at S iv.292=Nd2 45; S v.57. -- (adj.) anigha not trembling, undisturbed, calm [see etym. under īgha= Sk. ṛgh of ṛghāyati to tremble, rage, rave] S i.54; iv.291; J v.343. Otherwise always combd with nirāsa: S i.12=23, 141; Sn 1048, 1060, 1078. Expld correctly at SnA 590 by rāgādi -- īgha -- virahita. Spelling anīgha J iii.443 (Com. niddukkha); Pv iv.134 (+nirāsa; expld by niddukkha PvA 230). anīgha also at It 97 (+chinnasaŋsaya); Ud 76; Dh 295 (v. l. aniggha; expld by niddukkha DhA iii.454).
Nigha2 (nt.) [prob. ni+gha=Sk. ˚gha of hanati (see also P. ˚gha), to kill; unless abstracted from anigha as in prec. nigha1] killing, destruction Th 2, 491 (=maraṇasampāpana ThA 288).
Nighaŋsa [Sk. nigharṣa] rubbing, chafing DhsA 263, 308.
Nighaŋsati [Sk. nigharṣati, ni+ghaŋsati1] 1. to rub, rub against, graze, chafe Vin ii.133; Vism 120; DhA i.396. -- 2. to polish up, clean J ii.418; iii.75.
Nighaŋsana (nt.) [Sk. nigharṣana]=nighaŋsa Miln 215.
Nighaṇḍu [Sk. nighaṇṭu, dial. for nirgrantha from grath- nāti (see gaṇṭhi & ghaṭṭana), orig. disentanglement, unravelling, i. e. explanation; cp. niggaṇṭhi, which is a variant of the same word. -- BSk. nighaṇṭa (Divy 619; AvŚ ii.19), Prk. nighaṇṭu] an explained word or a word expln, vocabulary, gloss, usually in ster. formula marking the accomplishments of a learned Brahmin " sanighaṇḍu -- keṭubhānaŋ . . . padako" (see detail under keṭubha) D i.88; A i.163, 166; iii.223; Sn p. 105; Miln 10. Bdhgh's expln is quoted by Trenckner, Notes p. 65.
Nighāta [Sk. nighāta, ni+ghāta] striking down, suppressing, destroying, killing M i.430; Nett 189. Cp. nighāti.
Nighāti [ni+ghāti] "slaying or being slain," defeat, loss (opp. ugghāti) Sn 828. Cp. nighāta.
Nicaya [Sk. nicaya, ni+caya, cp. nicita] heaping up, accumulation; wealth, provisions S i.93, 97; Vin v.172 (˚sannidhi). See also necayika.
Nicita (adj.) [Sk. nicita, ni+cita, of nicināti] heaped up, full, thick, massed, dense Th 2, 480 (of hair); PvA 221 (ussanna uparûpari nicita, of Niraya).
Nicula [Sk. nicula] a plant (Barringtonia acutangula) VvA 134.
Nicca (adj.) [Vedic nitya, adj. -- formation fr. ni, meaning "downward"=onward, on and on; according to Grassmann (Wtb. z. Rig Veda) originally "inwardly, homely"] constant, continuous, permanent D iii.31; S i.142; ii.109, 198; iv.24 sq., 45, 63; A ii.33, 52; v.210; Ps ii.80; Vbh 335, 426. In chain of synonyms: nicca dhuva sassata avipariṇāmadhamma D i.21; S iii.144, 147; see below anicca, -- nt. adv. niccaŋ perpetually, constantly, always (syn. sadā) M i.326; iii.271; Sn 69, 220, 336; Dh 23, 109, 206, 293; J i.290; iii.26, 190; Nd2 345 (=dhuvakālaŋ); PvA 32, 55, 134. <-> Far more freq. as anicca (adj.; aniccaŋ nt. n.) unstable, impermanent, inconstant; (nt.) evanescence, inconstancy, impermanence. -- The emphatic assertion of impermanence (continuous change of condition) is a prominent axiom of the Dhamma, & the realization of the evanescent character of all things mental or material is one of the primary conditions of attaining right knowledge (: anicca -- saññaŋ manasikaroti to ponder over the idea of impermanence S ii.47; iii.155; v.132; Ps ii.48 sq., 100; PvA 62 etc. -- kāye anicc' ânupassin realizing the impermanence of the body (together with vayânupassin & nirodha˚) S iv.211; v.324, 345; Ps ii.37, 45 sq., 241 sq. See anupassanā). In this import anicca occurs in many combinations of similar terms, all characterising change, its consequences & its meaning, esp. in the famous triad "aniccaŋ dukkhaŋ anattā" (see dukkha ii.2), e. g. S iii.41, 67, 180; iv.28 (sabbaŋ), 85 sq., 106 sq.; 133 sq. Thus anicca addhuva appāyuka cavanadhamma D i.21. anicca+dukkha S ii.53 (yad aniccaŋ taŋ dukkhaŋ); iv.28, 31, v.345; A iv.52 (anicce dukkhasaññā); M i.500 (+roga etc.); Nd2 214 (id. cp. roga). anicca dukkha vipariṇāmadhamma (of kāmā) D i.36. aniccasaññī anattasaññī A iv.353; etc. <-> Opposed to this ever -- fluctuating impermanence is Nibbāna (q. v.), which is therefore marked with the attributes of constancy & stableness (cp. dhuva, sassata amata, vipariṇāma). -- See further for ref. S ii.244 sq. (saḷāyatanaŋ a.), 248 (dhātuyo); iii.102 (rūpa etc.); iv.131, 151; A ii.33, 52; v.187 sq., 343 sq.; Sn 805; Ps i.191; ii.28 sq., 80, 106; Vbh 12 (rūpa etc.), 70 (dvādasâyatanāni), 319 (viññāṇā), 324 (khandhā), 373; PvA 60 (= ittara).
-- kālaŋ (adv.) constantly Nd2 345; -- dāna a perpetual gift D i.144 (cp. DA i.302); -- bhatta a continuous food-supply (for the bhikkhus) J i.178; VvA 92; PvA 54; -- bhattika one who enjoys a continuous supply of food (as charity) Vin ii.78; iii.237 (=dhuva -- bhattika); iv.271; -- saññā (& adj. saññin) the consciousness or idea of permanence (adj. having etc.) A ii.52; iii.79, 334; iv.13, 145 sq.; Nett 27; -- sīla the uninterrupted observance of good conduct VvA 72; PvA 256.
Niccatā (f.) [abstr. to nicca] continuity, permanence, only as a˚ changeableness, impermanence S i.61, 204; iii.43; iv.142 sq., 216, 325.
Niccatta (nt.)=niccatā Vism 509.
Niccamma [Sk. niścarman, nis+camma] without skin, excoriated, in ˚ŋ karoti to flog skinless, to beat the skin off J iii.281. niccamma -- gāvī "a skinless cow," used in a well -- known simile at S ii.99, referred to at Vism 341 & 463.
Niccala (adj.) [Sk. niścala, nis+cala] motionless J iv.2; PvA 95.
Niccittaka (adj.) [Sk. niścitta, nis+citta (ka)] thoughtless J ii.298.
Niccola (adj.) [nis -- cola] without dress, naked PvA 32 (=nagga).
Nicchanda (adj.) [nis+chanda] without desire or ex- citement J i.7.
Nicchaya [Sk. niścaya, nis+caya of cināti] discrimination, conviction, certainty; resolution, determination J i.441 (˚mitta a firm friend); DhsA 133 (adhimokkha=its paccupaṭṭhāna); SnA 60 (daḷha˚ adj. of firm resolution). See vi˚.
Niccharaṇa (nt.) [fr. niccharati] emanation, sending out, expansion, efflux Vism 303.
Niccharati [Sk. niścarati, nis+carati] to go out or forth from, to rise, sound forth, come out It 75 (devasadda); Vv 382; J i.53, 176; DhA i.389; VvA 12, 37 (saddā). <-> Caus. nicchāreti to make come out from, to let go forth, get rid of, emit, utter, give out D i.53 (anattamanavācam a˚ not utter a word of discontent); J iii.127; v.416 (madhurassaraŋ); Pug 33; Miln 259 (garahaŋ); Dāvs i.28 (vācaŋ).
Nicchāta [Sk. *niḥpsāta, nis+chāta] having no hunger, being without cravings, stilled, satisfied. Ep. of an Arahant always in combn with nibbuta or parinibbuta: S iii.26 (tanhaŋ abbuyha); iv.204 (vedanānaŋ khayā); M i.341; 412, A iv.410; v.65 (sītibhūta); Sn 707 (aniccha), 735, 758; It 48 (esanānaŋ khayā); Th 2, 132 (abbūḷhasalla). -- Expld at Ps ii.243 by nekkhammena kāmacchandato n.; arahattamaggena sabbakilesehi n. muccati.
Nicchādeti see nicchodeti.
Nicchāreti Caus. of niccharati, q. v.
Nicchita (adj.) [Sk. niścita, nis+cita, see nicchināti] determined, convinced Mhvs 7, 19.
Nicchināti [Sk. niścinoti, nis+cināti] to discriminate, con- sider, investigate, ascertain; pot. niccheyya Sn 785 (expld by nicchinitvā vinicchinitvā etc. Nd1 76); Dh 256 (gloss K vinicchaye). -- pp. nicchita.
Nicchuddha (adj.) [Sk. niḥkṣubdha, nis+chuddha, see nicchubhati] thrown out J iii.99 (=nibbāpita, nikkhāmita); Miln 130.
Nicchubhati [Sk. *niḥkṣubhati, nis+khubhati or chu- bhati, cp. chuddha & khobha, also nicchodeti & upacchubhati and see Trenckner, Miln pp. 423, 424] to throw out J iii.512 (=nīharati Com.; v. l. nicchurāti); Miln 187. -- pp. nicchuddha q. v.
Nicchubhana (nt.) [see nicchubhati] throwing out, ejection, being an outcaste Miln 357.
Nicchodeti (& v. l. nicchādeti) [shows a confusion of two roots, which are both of Prk. origin, viz. chaḍḍ & choṭ, the former=P. chaḍḍeti, the latter=Sk. kṣodayati or BSk. chorayati, Apabhraŋśa chollai; with which cp. P. chuddha] to shake or throw about, only in phrase odhunāti nidhunāti nicchodeti at S iii.155 =M i.229= 374=A iii.365, where S has correct reading (v. l. ˚choṭeti); M has ˚chādeti (v. l. ˚chodeti); A has ˚chedeti (v. l. ˚choreti, ˚chāreti; gloss nippoṭeti). The C. on A iii.365 has: nicchedetī ti bāhāya vā rukkhe vā paharati. -- nicchedeti (chid) is pardonable because of Prk. chollai "to cut." Cp. also nicchubhati with v. l. BB nicchurāti. For sound change P. chkṣ cp. P. chamā Nija Nija (adj.) [Sk. nija, wth dial. j. for nitya=P. nicca] own Dāvs ii.68. Cp. niya.
Nijana (nt.) [fr. nij] washing, cleansing Vism 342 (v. l. nijj˚).
Nijigiŋsati [Sk. nijigīṣati, ni+jigiŋsati] to desire ardently, to covet DA i.92 (=maggeti pariyesati).
Nijigiŋsanatā (f.) [fr. last] covetousness Vism 23 sq. (defined), 29 (id.= magganā), referring to Vbh 353, where T has jigiŋsanatā, with v. l. nijigīsanatā.
Nijigiŋsitar (n. adj.) [n. ag. fr. prec.] one who desires ardently, covetous, rapacious D i.8 (lābhaŋ) A iii.111 (id.).
Nijjaṭa (adj.) [Sk. *nirjaṭa, nis+jaṭa, adj. to jaṭā] dis- entangled J i.187; Miln 3.
Nijjara (adj.) [Sk. nirjara in diff. meaning, P. nis functioning as emphatic pref.; nis+jara] causing to decay, destroying, annihilating; f. ˚ā decay, destruction, death S iv.339; A i.221; ii.198; v.215 sq. (dasa -- n -- vatthūni); Ps i.5 (id.).
Nijjareti [Sk. nir -- jarayati; nis+jarati1] to destroy, annihilate, cause to cease or exist M i.93; Th 2, 431 (nijjaressāmi=jīrāpessāmi vināsessāmi ThA 269).
Nijjāleti [nis+jāleti] to make an end to a blaze, to extinguish, to put out J vi.495 (aggiŋ).
Nijjiṇṇa (adj.) [Sk. nirjīrṇa, nis+jiṇṇa] destroyed, over- come, exhausted, finished, dead D i.96; M ii.217= A i.221 (vedanākkhayā sabbaŋ dukkhaŋ n. bhavissati); M i.93; A v.215 sq.; Nett 51.
Nijjita (adj.) [Sk. nirjita, nis+jita] unvanquished Miln 192 (˚kammasūrā), 332 (˚vijita -- sangāma); Sdhp 360.
Nijjīvata (adj.) [Sk. nirjīvita, nis+jīva1] lifeless, soulless DhsA 38; Miln 413.
Nijjhatta (adj.) [pp. of nijjhāpeti, *Sk. nidhyapta or nidhyāpita] satisfied, pacified, appeased J vi.414 (=khamāpita Com.); Vv 6319 (=nijjhāpita VvA 265); Miln 209. See also paṭi˚
Nijjhatti (f.) [abstr. to nijjhatta, cp. BSk. nidhyapti, formation like P. ñatti>Sk. jñapti] conviction, understanding, realization; favourable disposition, satisfaction M i.320; A iv.223; Ps ii.171, 176; Miln 210.
Nijjhāna1 (nt.) [*Sk. nidhyāna, ni+jhāna1] understanding, insight, perception, comprehension; favour, indulgence (=nijjhāpana), pleasure, delight J vi.207. Often as ˚ŋ khamati: to be pleased with, to find pleasure in: S iii.225, 228; M i.133, 480; Vv 8417. Thus also diṭṭhinijjhāna -- kkhanti delighting in speculation A i.189 sq.; ii.191. Cp. upa˚.
Nijjhāna2 (nt.) [nis+jhāna2] conflagration, in anto˚= nijjhāyana PvA 18 (cittasantāpa+in expln of soka).
Nijjhāpana (nt.) [Sk. *nidhyāpana, ni+jhāpana, Caus. to jhāpeti] favourable disposition, kindness, indulgence J iv.495 (˚ŋ karoti=khamāpeti Com.; text reads nijjhapana).
Nijjhāpaya (adj.) [Sk. *ni -- dhyāpya, to nijjhāpeti] to be discriminated or understood, in dun˚ hard to . . . Miln 141 (pañha).
Nijjhāpeti [Sk. nidhāyayati, ni+jhāpeti, Caus. to jhāyati1; cp. Sk. nididhyāsate] to make favourably disposed, to win somebody's affection, or favour, to gain over Vin ii.96; M i.321; J iv.108; 414, 495; vi.516; Miln 264; VvA 265 (nijjhāpita=nijjhatta).
Nijjhāma (adj. n.) [Sk. niḥkṣāma, cp. niḥkṣīṇa, nis+ jhāma of jhāyati2=Sk. kṣāyati] burning away, wasting away, consuming or consumed A i.295; Nett 77, 95 paṭipadā.
-- taṇha (adj.) of consuming thirst, very thirsty J i.44; -- taṇhika=˚taṇha denoting a class of Petas (q. v.) Miln 294, 303, 357.
Nijjhāyati1 [Sk. nidhyāyati, ni+jhāyati1] to meditate, reflect, think S iii.140 sq. (+passati, cp. jānāti), 157; M i.334 (jhāyati n. apajjhāyati); iii.14 (id.). Cp. upa˚.
Nijjhāyati2 [ni+jhāyati2] to be consumed (by sorrow), to fret Nd1 433.
Nijjhāyana (nt.) [Sk. *niḥkṣāyana, nis+jhāyana of jhā- yati2] burning away, consumption; fig. remorse, mortification in anto˚ J i.168 (cp. nijjhāna2).
Niṭṭha (adj.) [Sk. niṣṭha, ni+˚tha; cp. niṭṭhā1] dependent on, resting on, intent upon S iii.13 (accanta˚); Nd1 263 (rūpa˚).
Niṭṭhā1 (f.) [Sk. niṣṭhā; ni+ṭhā, abstr. of adj. -- suff. ˚ṭha] basis, foundation, familiarity with Sn 864 (expl. SnA 551 by samiddhi, but see Nd1 263).
Niṭṭhā2 (f.) [Vedic niṣṭhā (niḥṣṭhā), nis+ṭhā from ˚ṭha] end, conclusion; perfection, height, summit; object, aim Vin i.255; S ii.186; A i.279 (object); Ps i.161. niṭṭhaŋ gacchati to come to an end; fig. to reach perfection, be completed in the faith M i.176; J i.201; Miln 310; freq. in pp. niṭṭhaŋ gata (niṭṭhangata) one who has attained perfection (=pabbajitānaŋ arahattaŋ patta) DhA iv.70; S iii.99 (a˚); A ii.175; iii.450; v.119 sq.; Dh 351; Ps i.81, 161.
Niṭṭhāti [Sk. niṣṭiṣṭhati, nis+tiṭṭhati, the older *sthāti restored in compn] to be at an end, to be finished J i.220; iv.391; DhA i.393. -- pp. niṭṭhita, Caus. niṭṭhāpeti (q. v.).
Niṭṭhāna (nt.) [abstr. of niṭṭhāti] being finished, carrying out, execution, performance D i.141; ThA 19 (=avasāya). Cp. san˚.
Niṭṭhāpita (& niṭṭhapita) [pp. of niṭṭhāpeti] accomplished, performed, carried out J i.86, 172 (˚ṭha˚), 201.
Niṭṭhāpeti [Caus. to niṭṭhāti] to carry out, perform; prepare, make ready, accomplish J i.86, 290; vi.366; DhA iii.172. -- pp. niṭṭhāpita Cp. pari˚.
Niṭṭhita (adj.) [Sk. niṣṭhita (niḥṣṭhita), nis+ṭhita, cp. niṭṭhāti] brought or come to an end, finished, accomplished; (made) ready, prepared (i. e. the preparations being finished) Vin i.35; D i.109 (bhattaŋ: the meal is ready); ii.127 (id.); J i.255 (id.); J ii.48; iii.537 (finished); VvA 188; PvA 81; & often at conclusion of books & chapters. aniṭṭhita not completed DhA iii.172. -- su˚ well finished, nicely got up, accomplished Sn 48, 240. Cp. pari˚.
Niṭṭhubhati (& nuṭṭhubhati Vin i.271; J i.459; also niṭṭhu- haṭi) [Sk. niṣṭhubhati, but in meaning=Sk. niṣṭhīvati, nis+*thīv, stubh taking the function of ṣṭhīv, since stubh itself is represented by thavati & thometi] to spit out, to expectorate Vin i.271 (nuṭṭhuhitvā); iii.132 (id.); J ii.105, 117 (nuṭṭh˚); vi.367; DhA ii.36 (niṭṭhuhitvā). pp. nuṭṭhubhita Sdhp 121. -- Cp. oṭṭhubhati.
Niṭṭhubhana (nt.) [Sk. niṣṭhīvana, see niṭṭhubhati & cp. Prk. niṭṭhuhana] spitting out, spittle J i.47; PvA 80 (=kheḷa, v. l. SS niṭṭhuvana, BB niṭhūna).
Niṭṭhurin (adj.) [Sk. niṣṭhura or niṣṭhūra, ni+thūra= thūla; cp. Prk. niṭṭhura] rough, hard, cruel, merciless Sn 952 (a˚; this reading is mentioned as v. l. by Bdhgh at SnA 569, & the reading anuddharī given; vv. ll. SS anuṭṭhurī, BB anuṭṭharī, expld as anissukī. Nd1 440 however has aniṭṭhurī with expln of nitthuriya as under issā at Vbh 357).
Niṭṭhuriya (nt.) [cp. Sk. niṣṭhuratva] hardness, harshness, roughness Nd1 440; Nd2 484 (in exegesis of makkha)= Vbh 357.
Niḍḍāyati [Sk. nirdāti, nis+dāyati, cp. Sk. nirdātar weeder] to cut out, to weed D i.231 (niddāyit˚); It 56 (as v. l. niddāta for niṇhāta, q. v.); J i.215. Caus. niḍḍāpeti to cause to weed, to have weeds dug up Vin ii.180.
Niḍḍha (nt.) [Vedic nīḍa resting -- place ni+sad "sitting down"] nest, place, seat Dh 148 (v. l. niḷa).
Niṇhāta (adj.) [Sk. *niḥsnāta, nis+nahāta] cleansed, purified It 56 (˚pāpaka= sinless; with several vv. ll. amongst which niddāta of niḍḍāyati=cleansed of weeds) =Nd1 58 (ninhāta˚)=Nd2 514 (ninhāta, v.l. SS ninnahāta).
Nitamba [Sk. nitamba; etym. unknown] the ridge of a mountain or a glen, gully DA i.209.
Nitammati [Sk. nitāmyati, ni+tam as in tama] to become dark, to be exhausted, faint; to be in misery or anxiety J iv.284 (Com.: atikilamati).
Nitāḷeti [Sk. nitāḍayati, ni+tāḷeti] to knock down, to strike J iv.347.
Nittaṇha (adj.) [BSk. niṣṭṛṣṇa (Divy 210 etc.), nis+taṇhā] free from thirst or desire, desireless PvA 230 (=nirāsa). f. abstr. nitthaṇhatā Nett 38.
Nittaddana (better: nitthaddhana) (nt.) [Sk. *niṣṭambhana, abstr. fr. ni+thaddha=making rigid] paralysing D i.11 (jīvhā˚=mantena jivhāya thaddhakaraṇa DA i.96; v. l. (gloss) nibandhana).
Nittāreti see nittharati.
Nittiṇa (adj.) [Sk. niṣṭṛṇa, nis+tiṇa] free from grass J iii.23.
Nittiṇṇa (pp.) [Sk. nistīrṇa, nis+tiṇṇa] got out of, having crossed or overcome D ii.275 ( -- ogha; v. l. BB nitiṇṇa); Nd1 159 (as v. l.; text has nitiṇṇa); Nd2 278 (t.). Cp. nittharati.
Nittudana (nt.) [nis+tudana, abstr. fr. tudati; cp. Sk. nistodā] pricking, piercing A i.65 (text: nittuddana); iii.403 sq.
Nitteja (adj.) [cp. Sk. nistejas only in meaning 1; nis+ teja] 1. without energy Vism 596. -- 2. "put out," abashed, put to shame, in ˚ŋ karoti to make blush or put to shame J ii.94 (lajjāpeti+).
Nitthanati & Nitthunati [Sk. nisstanati "moan out," nis +thaneti & thunati1] to moan, groan: (a) ˚thanati: J i.463; ii.362; iv.446; v.296; DA i.291. -- (b) ˚thunati Vin ii.222; J v.295, 389; Vism 311; VvA 224. Cp. nitthuna.
Nitthanana (nt.) [nis+thanana, abstr. to thaneti] groaning, moaning DA i.291 (v. l. BB. ˚ṭhuna). As nitthu- nana Vism 504.
Nittharaṇa1 (nt.) [Sk. nistaraṇa, nis+taraṇa, cp. nittha- rati] getting across, ferrying over, traversing, overcoming S i.193 (oghassa); A ii.200 (id.); It 111 (id.); M i.134; J i.48 (loka˚); Dāvs ii.29 (id.); Vism 32; Sdhp 334 (bhava˚), 619 (tiloka˚).
Nittharaṇa2 (nt.) [Sk. nistaraṇa, ni+tharaṇa] "strewing or being strewn down," putting down, carrying, bearing S iv.177 (bhārassa, of a load, cp. nikkhepa); VvA 131 (so read for niddharaṇa, in kuṭumba -- bhārassa nsamatthā=able to carry the burden of a household).
Nittharati [Sk. nistarati, nis+tarati1] to cross over, get out of, leave behind, get over D i.73 (kantāraŋ). pp. nittiṇṇa q. v. Caus. nitthāreti to bring through, help over Nd2 630 (nittāreti).
Nitthāra [Sk. nistāra; nis+tāra of tarati1] passing over, rescue, payment, acquittance, in ˚ŋ vattati to be acquitted, to get off scot -- free M i.442 (v. l. netth˚, which is the usual form). See netthāra.
Nitthuna [Sk. *nis -- stanana & nistava to thunati] (a) (of thunati1) moan, groan DA i.291 (as v. l. BB for nitthanana) -- (b) (of thunati2) blame, censure, curse PvA 76 (˚ŋ karoti to revile or curse).
Nitthunati etc., see nitthanati etc.
Nidassana (nt.) [Sk. nidarśana, ni+dassana] "pointing at" evidence, example, comparison, apposition, attribute, characteristic; sign, term D i.223 (a˚ with no attribute); iii.217 (id.); S iv.370 (id.); A iv.305 sq. (nīla˚, pīta˚ etc.); Sn 137; Vbh 13, 64, 70 sq. (sa˚, a˚); VvA 12, 13; PvA 26, 121 (pucchanākāra˚) 226 (paccakkhabhūtaŋ n. "sign, token").
Nidassati v. l. BB at Sn 785 for nirassati (q. v.) Nd1 76 has nid˚ in text, nir˚ as v. l. SS; SnA 522 reads nirassati.
Nidassita (pp.) [see nidasseti] pointed out, defined as, termed Pv i.512; PvA 30.
Nidasseti [Sk. nidarśayati, ni+dasseti] to point out ("down"), explain, show, define VvA 12, 13 (˚etabbavacana the word to be compared or defined, correl. to nidassana -- vacana). -- pp. nidassita (q. v.).
Nidahati [Sk. nidadhāti, ni+dahati1] to lay down or aside, deposit; accumulate, hoard, bury (a treasure) Vin i.46 (cīvaraŋ); Miln 271; ger. nidahitvā PvA 97 (dhanadhaññaŋ) & nidhāya Dh 142, 405; Sn 35 (daṇḍaŋ), 394, 629; Nd2 348; pres. also nidheti KhA 217, 219; fut. nidhessati PvA 132. Pass. nidhīyati KhA 217. Caus. nidhāpeti PvA 130 (bhoge). See also nidāhaka, nidhāna & nidhi; also upanidhāya.
Nidāgha [Sk. nidāgha, fr. nidahati, ni+dahati2, see ḍahati] heat, summer -- heat, summer, drought J i.221 ( -- samaya dry season); ii.80; Vism 259 (˚samaya, where KhA 58 reads sarada -- samaya); PvA 174 ( -- kāla summer). fig. J iv.285; v.404; Dāvs ii.60.
Nidāna (nt.) [Sk. nidāna, ni+*dāna of dā, dyati to bind, cp. Gr. de/sma, dh_ma (fetter) & see dāma] (a) (n.) tying down to; ground (lit. or fig.), foundation, occasion; source, origin, cause; reason, reference, subject ("sujet") M i.261; A i.134 sq.; 263 sq., 338; ii.196; iv.128 sq.; Dhs 1059 (dukkha˚, source of pain), 1136; Nett 3, 32; Miln 272 (of disease: pathology, aetiology), 344 (˚paṭhanakusala, of lawyers); PvA 132, 253. <-> (b) (adj. -- ˚) founded on, caused by, originating in, relating to S v.213 sq. (a˚ & sa˚); A i.82 (id.); Sn 271 (ito˚), 866 (kuto˚), 1050 (upadhi˚=hetuka, paccayā, kāraṇā Nd2 346); 872 (icchā˚) etc.; VvA 117 (vimānāni Rājagaha˚ playing at or referring to R.). -- (c) nidānaŋ (acc. as adv.) by means of, in consequence of, through, usually with tato˚ through this, yato˚ through which D i.52, 73; M i.112; Pv iv.161 (through whom=yaŋ nimittaŋ PvA 242); PvA 281; ito˚ by this Nd2 2912.
Nidāhaka (adj.) [fr. nidahati] one who puts away, one who has the office of keeper or warder (of robes: cīvara˚) Vin i.284.
Nidda (nt.) [nis+dara, see darī] a cave Nd1 23 (Ep. of kāya).
Niddanta [so read for niddanna, v. l. niddhā=niddā; cp. supinanta]=niddā J vi.294.
Niddaya (adj.) [Sk. nirdaya, nis+dayā (adj.)] merciless, pitiless, cruel Sdhp 143, 159.
Niddara (adj.) [nis+dara] free from fear, pain or anguish Dh 205=Sn 257 (expld at DhA iii.269 by rāgadarathānaŋ abhāvena n.; at SnA 299 by kilesapariḷāhâbhāvena n.).
Niddasa see niddesa.
Niddā (f.) [Vedic nidrā, ni+drā in Sk. drāti, drāyate, Idg. *dorē; cp. Gr. (hom.) e)/draqon, Lat. dormio] sleep A ii.48, 50; iii.251; Sn 926 (opp. jāgariyā), 942 (see expln at Nd1 423); J i.61, 192; ii.128. -- niddaŋ okkamati to fall asleep Vin i.15 (niddā?); J iii.538; iv.1; DhA i.9; VvA 65; PvA 47; ˚ŋ upagacchati id. PvA 43, 105, 128.
-- ārāma fond of sleep, slothful, sluggish It 72 (+kammarāma, bhassarata); -- ārāmatā fondness of sleep, laziness, sluggishness A iii.116, 293 sq., 309 sq.; iv.25 (+kamm˚, bhass˚); v.164; -- sīlin of drowsy habits, slothful, sleepy Sn 96.
Niddāna (nt.) [Sk. *nirdāna, nis+dāna of dayati2, Sk. dāti, cp. dātta] cutting off, mowing, destroying Sn 78 (=chedana lunana uppāṭana SnA 148)=S i.172; K.S. i.319, cp. niḍḍāyati.
Niddāyati [Denom. fr. niddā] to sleep D i.231; J i.192, 266; ii.103; v.68, 382; DhA iii.175; SnA 169.
Niddāyitar [n. ag. fr. niddāyati] a sleepy person Dh 325.
Niddiṭṭha (pp.) [see niddisati] expressed, explained, desig- nated Miln 3; DhsA 57; Vism 528; VvA 13.
Niddisati (& niddissati) [Sk. nir -- diśati, nis+disati, cp. Lat. distinguo] to distinguish, point out, explain, designate, define, express, to mean It 122=Nd2 276f; Miln 123, 345; DhsA 57; DhA ii.59; PvA 87, 217 (˚itvā); aor. niddisi DhsA 57; SnA 61. -- grd. niddisitabba DhsA 56; Nett 96. Pass. niddissīyati PvA 163. -- pp. niddiṭṭha (q. v.).
Niddukkha (adj.) [nis+dukkha] without fault or evil J iii.443 (in expln of anīgha); PvA 230 (id.); (in expln of mārisa) K.S. (S.A.) 1, 2, n. 1.
Niddesa [Sk. nirdeśa, fr. niddisati, cp. desa, desaka etc.] 1. description, attribute, distinction PvA 7 (ukkaṭṭha˚); ˚vatthu object of distinction or praise D iii.253= A iv.15 (where reading is niddasa, which also as v. l. at D iii.253 & Ps i.5). -- 2. descriptive exposition, analytic explanation by way of question & answer, interpretation, exegesis Vin v.114 (sa˚); Nett 4, 8 38 sq.; Vism 26; DhsA 54; VvA 78; PvA 71, 147. <-> 3. N. of an old commentary (ascribed to Sāriputta) on parts of the Sutta Nipāta (Aṭṭhaka -- vagga, interpreted in the Mahā -- Niddesa; Pārāyana -- vagga and, as a sort of appendix, the Khaggavisāṇa -- sutta, interpreted in the Culla -- Niddesa); as one of the canonical texts included in the Khuddaka Nikāya; editions in P.T.S. Quoted often in the Visuddhimagga, e. g. p. 140, 208 sq. etc.
Niddosa1 (adj.) [Sk. nirdośa, nis+dosa1] faultless, pure, undefiled Sn 476; DhsA 2; PvA 189 (=viraja); DhA i.41.
Niddosa2 (adj.) [Sk. nirdveṣa, nis+dosa2] free from hatred J iv.10 (su˚; Com. "adussanavasena," foll. upon sunikkodha).
Niddhana (adj.) [nis+dhana] without property, poor J v.447.
Niddhanta (adj.) [pp. of niddhamati, nis+dhanta, q. v.] blown off, removed, cleaned, purified A i.254 (jātarūpa "loitered," cp. niddhota); Sn 56 (˚kasāva -- moha; Com. vijahati); Dh 236 (˚mala, malānaŋ nīhaṭatāya DhA iii.336); Nd2 347 (=vanta & pahīna); J vi.218 (of hair; Com. expls siniddharutā, v. l. BB siniddha -- anta, thus meant for Sk. snigdhānta).
Niddhamati [in form=Sk. nirdhmāti, nis+dhamati, but in meaning the verb, as well as its derivations, are influenced by both meanings of niddhāvati (dhāvati1 & 2): see niddhāpeti, niddhamana, & niddhovati] to blow away, blow off; to clean, cleanse, purify; to throw out, eject, remove Sn 281=Miln 414 (kāraṇḍavaŋ); Sn 282 (˚itvā pāpicche), 962 (malaŋ=pajahati (Nd1 478); Dh 239 (id.); Miln 43. -- pp. niddhanta).
Niddhamana (nt.) [of niddhamati or=*nirdhāvana= ˚dhovana to dhāvati2] drainage, drain, canal Vin ii.120 (udaka˚; dhovituŋ immediately preceding); J i.175, 409, 425; iii.415; iv.28; v.21 (udaka˚); DhA ii.37.
Niddhamanā (f.) [either to niddhamati or to niddhāpeti] throwing out, ejection, expulsion J v.233 (=nikkaḍḍhanā Com.).
Niddharaṇa (nt.) not with Hardy (Index VvA)=Sk. nirdhāraṇa (estimation), but to be read as nittharaṇa (see nittharaṇa2).
Niddhāpita (adj.) [pp. of niddhāpeti, q. v.] thrown out J iii.99 (v. l. for nibbāpita).
Niddhāpeti [Sk. nirdhāvayati, nis+dhāveti (dhāpeti), Caus. of dhāvati1; may also stand for niddhamāpeti, Caus. fr. niddhamati, cp. contamination niddhāmase at J iv.48, unless misread for niddhāpaye, as v. l. BB bears out] to throw out, chase away, expel J iv.41 (niddhāpayiŋsu), 48 (? for niddhāmase). pp. niddhāpita.
Niddhāmase at J iv.48 should probably be read niddhāpaye (as v. l. BB), q. v.
Niddhunāti [Sk. nirdhunoti, nis+dhunāti] to shake off S iii.155; A iii.365 (odhunāti+; spelt nidhunāti); M i.229; Th 1, 416; PvA 256 (=odhunāti).
Niddhuniya (?) (nt.) [=Sk. nihnuvana fr. nihnute with diff. derivation] hypocrisy Pug 18 (=makkha); cp. J.P.T.S. 1884, 83.
Niddhūpana (adj.) [nir+dhūpana] unscented J vi.21 (udaka).
Niddhota (adj.) [nis+dhota; pp. of niddhovati] washed, cleansed, purified Dāvs v.63 (˚rūpiya; cp. niddhanta).
Niddhovati [Sk. nirdhāvati, nis+dhovati, cp. niddhamati] to wash off, clean, purify A i.253 (jātarūpaŋ, immediately followed by niddhanta). pp. niddhota.
Nidhāna (nt.) [Vedic nidhāna, see nidahati] laying down, depositing, keeping; receptacle; accumulation, (hidden) treasure J iv.280 (nidhi˚); PvA 7 (udaka -- dāna -- nīharaṇa -- n˚), 97 (n -- gata dhana=hoarded, accumulated), 132 (˚ŋ nidhessāmi gather a treasure); DhsA 405 (˚kkhama).
Nidhānavant (adj.) forming or having a receptacle, worth treasuring or saving D i.4 (=hadaye nidhātabba -- yuttavāca DA i.76).
Nidhāpeti, Nidhāya & Nidhīyati, see nidahati.
Nidhi [Vedic nidhi, ni+dhā, see nidahati] 1. "setting down," receptacle; (hidden) treasure Sn 285 (brahma n.); Dh 76; Kh viii.2 (see KhA 217 sq.: nidhīyatī ti nidhi, def. of n.), 9 (acorâharaṇo nidhi cp. "treasures in heaven, where thieves do not steal" Matt. 6, 20); Sdhp 528, 588. -- 2. "putting on," a cloak J vi.79 (expld as vākacīra -- nivāsanaŋ=a bark dress). Cp. sannidhi.
-- kumbhī a treasure -- pot, a treasure hidden in a pot =a hidden treasure DhA ii.107; iv.208; -- nidhāna laying up treasures, burying a treasure J iv.280; -- mukha an excellent treasure A v.346.
Nidhura see nīdhura.
Nidheti see nidahati.
Nindati [Sk. nindati, nid as in Gr. o)/neidos (blame), Lith. naids (hatred), Goth. naitjan (to rail or blaspheme), Ohg. neizzan (to plague); cp. Goth. neip= Ohg. nīd (envy)] to blame, find fault with, censure A ii.3; v.171, 174; Sn 658; J vi.63; Dh 227; inf. nindituŋ Dh 230; grd. nindanīya SnA 477. pp. nindita (q. v.); cp. also nindiya.
Nindana (nt.) [abstr. fr. nindati] blaming, reviling, finding fault DhA iii.328.
Nindā (f.) [cp. Sk. nindā, to nindati] blame, reproach, fault -- finding, fault, disgrace S iii.73; A ii.188; iv.157 sq.; M i.362; Sn 213 (+pasaŋsā blame & praise); Dh 81 (id.); Sn 826, 895, 928; Dh 143, 309; Nd1 165, 306, 384; DhA ii.148. -- In compn nindi˚ see anindi˚.
Nindita (adj.) [pp. of nindati] blamed, reproved, reviled; faulty, blameworthy Dh 228; Pv ii.334 (a˚ blameless= agarahita pasaŋsa PvA 89); Sdhp 254, 361. -- anindita J iv.106 (˚angin).
Nindiya (adj.) [Sk. nindya, orig. grd. of nindati] blameable, faulty, blameworthy Sn 658 (=nindanīya SnA 477); Nett 132. pi nindiyā at PvA 23 is to be read as pīṇitindriyā.
Ninna (adj. -- n.) [Vedic nimna, der. fr. ni down, prob. combd with ˚na of nam to bend, thus meaning "bent down," cp. unna & panna] 1. (adj.) bent down (cp. ninnata), low -- lying, deep, low, sunken J ii.3 (magga); PvA 29 (bhūmibhāga), 132 (ṭhāṇa); esp. freq. as -- ˚: bent on, inclining to, leading to, aiming at, flowing into etc. Often combd with similar expressions in chain taccarita tabbahula taggaruka tanninna tappoṇa tappabbhāra tadâdhimutta (with variation nibbāna˚, viveka˚ etc. for tad˚): Nd2 under tad; J ii.15; Ps ii.197; -- Vin ii.237=A iv.198 (samuddo anupubba˚ etc.); A iv.224 (viveka˚); v.175 (id.); M i.493 (Nibbāna˚). Similarly: samudda˚ Gangā M i.493; nekkhamma˚ J i.45 (v.258); samādhi˚ Miln 38. -- 2. (acc. as adv.) downward: ninnaŋ pavattati to flow downward M i.117; Pv i.57; ninnagata running down Miln 259 (udaka); ninnaga Dāvs iv.28. -- 3. (nt.) low land, low ground, plain (opp. thala elevation, plateau): usually with ref. to a raincloud flooding the low country Sn 30 (mahamegho ˚ŋ pūrayaŋto); SnA 42 (=pallala); It 66 (megho ˚ŋ pūreti); Pv ii.945 (megho ˚ŋ paripūrayanto).
-- unnata low lying & elevated Miln 349 (desabhāga).
Ninnata (adj.) [ni+nata] bent down, bent upon, in nin- natattā (fem. abstr.) aim, purpose (?) DhsA 39 (is the reading correct?).
Ninnāda (& Nināda Miln, Dāvs) [Sk. nināda, ni+nāda] sounding forth, sound, tune, melody A ii.117 (˚sadda); J vi.43; VvA 161; Miln 148; Dāvs v.31.
Ninnādin (adj.) [fr. ninnāda] sounding (loud), resonant (of a beautiful voice) D ii.211 (cp. aṭṭhanga brahmassara & bindu).
Ninnāmin (adj.) [fr. ni+nam] bending downwards, descending A iv.237.
Ninnāmeti [Caus. of ni+namati] to bend down, put out (the tongue) D i.106 (jivhaŋ=nīharati DA i.276); J i.163, 164; cp. Divy 7, 71 (nirṇāmayati).
Ninnīta (adj.) [pp. of ninneti] lead down, lead away; drained, purified, free from (˚ -- ) A i.254 (ninnīta -- kasāva of gold: free fr. dross).
Ninnetar [n. ag. to ni -- nayati=Sk. *ninayitṛ, cp. netar] one who leads down to, one who disposes of (c. gen.), bringer of, giver, usually in phrase atthassa n. (bringer of good: "Heilbringer") of the Buddha S iv.94; M i.111; A v.226 sq., 256 sq.; Ps ii.194.
Ninneti [Sk. ninayati, ni+nayati] to lead down, lead away; drain, (udakaŋ), desiccate Vin ii.180. -- pp. ninnīta, q. v.
Ninhāta see niṇhāta.
Nipa at J v.6 read as nīpa.
Nipaka (adj.) [cp. BSk. nipaka chief, fr. Sk. nipa, chief, master] intelligent, clever, prudent, wise S i.13, 52, 187; M i.339; A i.165 (+jhāyin); iii.24, 138; Sn 45≈Dh 328≈DhA i.62; Sn 283, 962, 1038; Nd2 349 (=jātimā) =Nd1 478; Bu i.49; Vbh 426; Miln 34, 342, 411; Vism 3 (defn).
Nipakka at Vin i.200 read nippakka.
Nipacc -- ākāra [nipacca, ger. of nipatati+ākāra] obedience, humbleness, service S i.178; v.233; A v.66; J i.232; iv.133; VvA 22, 320; PvA 12.
Nipacca -- vādin (adj.) [nipacca, ger. of nipāteti+vādin] speaking hurtfully Sn 217 (=dāyakaŋ nipātetvā appiyavacanāni vattā SnA 272).
Nipajjati [Sk. nipadyate, ni+pajjati] to lie down (to sleep) D i.246; A iv.332; J i.150; DhA i.40; PvA 280; aor. nipajji J i.279; ii.154; iii.83; VvA 75, 76; PvA 74, 75, 93; ger. nipajja J i.7 (v.44: ˚ṭṭhānacankama). -- Caus. nipajjāpeti to lay down, deposit J i.50, 253, 267; iii.26, 188; DhA i.50; VvA 76 (˚etvā rakkhāpetha). Cp. abhi˚.
Nipatati [Sk. nipatati, ni+patati] 1. (intrs.) to fall down, fly down, descend, go out Vin ii.192 (Bhagavato pādesu sirasā n. bending his head at the feet of Bh.); PvA 60 (id.); J i.278; v.467 (nippatissāmi=nikkhamissāmi Com.) Pv ii.89 (v. l. BB parivisayitvā)=nikkhamitvā PvA 109 (cp. nippatati). -- 2. (trs.) to bring together, to convene, in nipatāmase (pres. subj.) "shall we convene? " J iv.361. See also nipadāmase. -- Cp. abhi˚, san˚.
Nipadāmase at J iii.120 is an old misreading & is to be corrected into nipatāmase (=let us gather, bring together=dedicate), unless it be read as nipphadāmase (=do, set forth, prepare, give), in spite of Com. expln p. 121: nikārapakārā (=nipaccakārā?) upasaggā (upasajja?) dāmase (dā) ti attho; endorsed by Müller, P.G. p. 97 & Kern, Toev. p. 175. It cannot be ni+pa+ dāmase, since ni is never used as secondary (modifying) verb -- component (see ni˚ A 2), & Bdhgh's expln is popular etym. Cp. nipatāmase at J iv.361 (see nipatati).
Nipanna (adj.) [pp. of nipajjati] lying down J i.151, 279; ii.103; iii.276 (˚kāle while he was asleep), iv.167; PvA 43, 75, 265 (spelt nippanna, opp. nikujja).
Nipannaka (adj.)=nipanna Ps ii.209; J i.151.
Nipalāvita (pp.) (Com. reading for vipalāvita text) [Sk. viplāvita, see plavati] made to swim, immersed, thrown into water J i.326.
Nipāka (adj.) [Sk. nipāka, ni+pāka (pacati)] full grown, fully developed, in full strength J vi.327 (of a tree).
Nipāta [Sk. nipāta, ni+pāta, of nipatati] 1. falling down Dh 121 (udabindu˚); VvA 279 (diṭṭhi˚, a glance); PvA 45 (asa˚). -- 2. descending M i.453. -- 3. a particle, the gram. term for adverbs, conjunctions & interjections J v.243 (assu); PvA 11 (mā), 26 (vo), 40 (taŋ), 50 (ca). -- 4. a section of a book (see next). Cp. vi˚, san˚.
Nipātaka (adj.) [to nipāta] divided into sections or chapters Dpvs iv.16.
Nipātana (nt.) [to nipatati] 1. falling upon DhA i.295. - 2. going to bed VvA 71 (pacchā˚ opp. pubbuṭṭhāna). Cp. nipātin.
Nipātin (adj.) [to nipatati] 1. falling or flying down, chancing upon Dh 35, 36 (yatthakāma˚ cittaŋ=yattha yattha icchati tattha tatth' eva nipatati DhA i.295). <-> 2. going to bed D i.60 (pacchā˚ going to bed late). <-> Cp. abhi˚.
Nipāteti [ni+Caus. of patati] to let fall, throw down into (c. loc.); bring to fall, injure; fig. cast upon, charge with D i.91; M i.453 (ayokaṭāhe); J iii.359; SnA 272; PvA 152 (bhūmiyaŋ). pp. nipātita corrupt, evil, wicked Vin ii.182 (caṇḍa+; text nippātita, v. l. nipphātita).
Nipuṇa (adj.) [Sk. nipuṇa, dial. for nipṛṇa, to pṛṇoti, pṛ] clever, skilful, accomplished; fine, subtle, abstruse D i.26≈(n. gambhīra dhamma), 162 (paṇḍita+); M i.487 (dhamma); S i.33; iv.369; A iii.78; Sn 1126 (=gambhīra duddasa etc. Nd2 350); Vbh 426; Miln 233, 276; DA i.117; VvA 73 (ariyasaccesu kusala+), 232; PvA 1, 16. Cp. abhinipuṇa.
Nippakāra (adj.) [nis+pakāra 2] of no flavour, tasteless, useless J i.340.
Nippakka (adj.) [nis+pakka] boiled, infused Vin i.200.
Nippajjati & Nipphajjati [Sk. niṣpadyate, nis+pajjati] to be produced, be accomplished, spring forth, ripen, result, happen DhA ii.4 (pph); PvA 19 (= upakappati), 71 (phalaŋ ijjhati n.), 120 (id.). pp. nipphanna. See also nipphādeti & nipphatti etc.; cp. also abhi˚.
Nippañña (adj.) [nis+pañña] unwise, foolish PvA 40, 41 (=dummati).
Nippatati & Nipphatati [nis+patati] to fall out; rush out, come forth, go out from (c. abl.) Vin ii.151 (nipphaṭati, v. l. nippaṭati); J v.467 (=nikkhamati Com.; or is it nipatati?). -- ger. nippacca (cp. BSk. nirpatya AvŚ i.209).
Nippatta (adj.) [nis+patta] 1. without wings, plucked (of a bird) Vin iv.259. -- 2. without leaves J iii.496 (=patita -- patta); SnA 117 (˚puppha). -- Note nippatta at Dhs 1035 is to be read as nibbatta.
Nippatti see nipphatti.
Nippadā (?) at S i.225 read nipphādā (q. v.).
Nippadesa [Sk. *niṣpradesa, nis+padesa] only in instr. & abl.=separately DhsA 2, 30, 37, 297.
Nippanna see nipanna & nipphanna.
Nippapañca (adj.) [nis+papañca] free from diffuseness S iv.370; Dh 254 (Tathāgata); ˚ārāma not fond of delay M i.65 (Neumann trsl. i.119: "dem keine Sonderheit behagt"); A iii.431; iv.229 sq.; Miln 262.
Nippabha (adj.) [nis+prabhā] without splendour J ii.415; Miln 102.
Nippariyāya [nis+pariyāya] 1. without distinction or difference, absence of explanation or demonstration DhsA 317 (˚ena not figuratively), 403 (˚desanā); VvA 320. -- 2. unchangeable, not to be turned Miln 113, 123, 212.
Nippalāpa (adj.) [nis+palāpa] free from prattle or talk, not talking A ii.183 (apalāpa+; v. l. ˚palāsa).
Nippalibodha (adj.) [nis+palibodha] without hindrances, unobstructed Miln 11.
Nippādeti see nipphādeti.
Nippāpa (adj.) [nis+pāpa] free from sin Sn 257=Dh 205.
Nippitika (adj.) [Sk. *niṣpaitṛka=fatherless or *niṣprī- tika?] a bastard J i.133 (v. l. nippītika q. v.).
Nippipāsa (adj.) [nis+pipāsā] without thirst or desire Sn 56; Nd2 351.
Nippītika (adj.) [nis+pīti+ka] 1. free from (feelings of) enjoyment (characteristic of 3rd jhāna, q. v.) D i.75; A i.81. -- 2. being unloved, a foster child etc. (?) see nippitika.
Nippīḷana (nt.) [nis+pīḷana] squeezing, pressing; a blow J iii.160. Cp. abhinippīḷanā.
Nippīḷeti [nis+pīḷeti] to squeeze, press, clench, urge J i.63, 223. Pass. nippīḷiyati, only in ppr. nippīḷiyamāna being urged Vin ii.303; VvA 138; PvA 31, 192. Cp. abhi˚.
Nippurisa (adj.) [nis+purisa] 1. without men PvA 177. - 2. without men, executed by females (female devas) only (of turiyā=a female orchestra) Vin i.15; D ii.21; J v.506. Cp. M Vastu iii.165 (niṣpuruṣena nāṭakena) & AvŚ i.321 (niṣpuruṣena tūryeṇa; see also note in Index p. 229), whereas Divy 3 (see Index) has niṣparuṣa (soft), with v. l. niṣpuruṣa.
Nippesika [cp. Sk. niṣpeṣa clashing against, bounce, shock, niṣ+piṣ] one who performs jugglery, a juggler D i.8 (=nippeso sīlaŋ etesan ti DA.i.91); A iii.111.
Nippesikatā (f.) [abstr. fr. prec.] jugglery, trickery (cp. Kern, Toev. p. 176) Vbh 353 (expld at Vism 29); Miln 383.
Nippothana (nt.) [nis+pothana of puth to crush] crushing, beating, destroying SnA 390.
Nipphajjati see nippajjati.
Nipphajjana (nt.) (or ˚nā f. ?) [n. abstr. fr. nipp(h)ajjati] resulting, procedure, achievement, plot J iv.83.
Nipphatti (f.) [cp. Sk. niṣpatti] result, accomplishment, effect, end, completion, perfection J i.56, 335 (of dreams), 343, 456; iv.137 (sippe); vi.36; VvA 138 (sippa˚); DhA ii.6 (import, meaning, of a vision); DhsA 354; PvA 122, 282 (sippe); Nett 54. Cp. abhi˚.
Nipphattika (adj.) [fr. nipphatti] having a result J iii.166 (evaŋ˚ of such consequence).
Nipphanna (adj.) [pp. of nippajjati] accomplished, per- fected, trained S i.215 (˚sobhin, spelt nippanna); J iv.39 (˚sippa master of the art, M.A.); DhA iii.285 (sasse); DhsA 316; in phil. determined, conditioned Kvu xi.7; xxiii.5; Vism 450; Pts. of Controversy, 395. Cp. abhi˚, pari˚. See also Cpd. 156, 157.
Nipphala (adj.) [nis+phala] without fruit, barren in a˚ not without fruit, i. e. amply rewarded (dāyaka, the giver of good gifts) Pv i.42; 55, PvA 194; Sdhp 504.
Nipphalita (adj.) [Sk. niṣphārita, pp. of nipphaleti, nis+ phaleti] broken out, split open J i.493 (lasī=nikkhantā Com.; v. l. nipphaḷita).
Nipphāṇitatta (nt.) [nis+phāṇita+tva] state of being free from sugar or molasses J iii.409.
Nipphādaka (adj.) [fr. nipphādeti] producing, accomplishing DhsA 47; PvA 147 (sukha -- ˚ŋ puññaŋ).
Nipphādana (nt.) [Sk. niṣpādana, to nipphādeti] accom- plishment Miln 356; DA i.195.
Nipphādar [n. ag.=Sk. niṣpādayitṛ cp. nipphāditar] one who produces or gains S i.225 (atthassa; read nipphādā, nom. for nippadā).
Nipphādita [pp. of nipphādeti] (having) produced, pro- ducing (perhaps= nipphāditar) VvA 113.
Nipphāditar [n. ag. to nipphādeti, cp. nipphādar] one who produces or accomplishes PvA 8 (read "so nipphāditā" for sā nipphādikā). Cp. nipphādita and nipphādaka.
Nipphādeti [Caus. of nippajjati] to bring forth, produce; accomplish, perform J i.185 (lābhasakkāraŋ); v.81; Miln 299; VvA 32, 72 (grd. nipphādetabba, n. of ablative case); Sdhp 319, 426. -- pp. nipphādita. Cp. abhinipphādeti.
Nipphoṭana (nt.) [nis+pothanā] beating S iv.300 (v. l. ṭh.). Cp. nippothana.